3 - S9North&S12 - Technical Specification

Contents Page
ACMV Schedule of Technical Data STD/ACMV/1-36
Particular Specification for Air-Conditioning and Mechanical Ventilation Works

Section 1 : Particular Specification PS/M/S1/1- 32
Section 7 : Water Pumps TS/M/S7/1 – 10
Section 11 : Ductwork TS/M/S11/1 – 22
Section 12 : Air Diffusing Equipment and Damper TS/M/S12/1 – 27
Section 13 : Air Handling Units (AHU) and Filters TS/M/S13/1A-14A
Section 14 : Chilled Water Fan Coil Units (FCUs) TS/M/S14/1 – 4
Section 15 : Air Filters TS/M/S15/1 – 12
Section 16 : Controls TS/M/S16/1 – 18
Section 17 : Programmable Logic Control System TS/M/S17/1 – 30
Section 18 : Automation and Monitoring System TS/M/S18/1 – 55
Section 19 : Instrumentation and Sensor System TS/M/S19/1 – 16
Section 20 : Variable Speed Drive (VSD) TS/M/S20/1 – 8
Section 21 : Electronic Control Slow Starter TS/M/S21/1 – 4
Section 24 : 100% Fresh Air Handling Units (AHU) and Filters with Heat TS/M/S24/1 – 14
Recovery Unit
Section 25 : DX Heat Recovery Unit ( HRU ) With Hot Water Generation TS/M/S25/1 – 5
System
Section 26 : Mechanical Ventilation Fans TS/M/S26/1 – 8
Section 27 : Chemical Exhaust Fan TS/M/S27/1 – 3
Section 28 : Vertical High Plume Mechanical Ventilation Fans TS/M/S28/1 – 10
Section 29 : Water Duct Heater TS/M/S29/1 – 2
Section 30 : Pipe and Fittings TS/M/S30/1 – 18
Section 31 : Chilled Water Expansion Tanks TS/M/S31/1 – 2
Section 32 : Water Treatment System TS/M/S32/1 – 14
Section 33 : Retractable Extractor Arm TS/M/S33/1 – 2
Section 42 : Air-Cooled Multi-Split VRV Units TS/M/S42/1 – 11

Section 43 : Air-Cooled Single-Split Units TS/M/S43/1 – 10
Section 47 : Stainless Steel Air Velocity for Supply and Exhaust System TS/M/S47/1 – 2
Section 49 : Vibration Isolation and Noise Control TS/M/S49/1 – 11
Section 50 : Water Flow meter and BTU meter TS/M/S50/1 – 7
Section 51 : Digital Power Meter TS/M/S51/1 – 11
Section 52 : Motion Sensors and Low Flammable Limit Analyzers TS/M/S52/1 – 3
1
Contents Page
Section 54 : Water Storage Tanks TS/M/S54/1 – 12

Section 57 : Laboratory Air-flow Control System TS/M/S57/1 – 15
Section 58 : Laboratory Air-Flow Control System Using Fast Respond TS/M/S58/1 – 14
Variable Air Volume Box
Section 66 Piezometer Ring Airflow Measuring System TS/M/S66/1 – 5
Section 67 Integrated Water Balancing and Flow Control Valve TS/M/S67/1 – 4
Section 68 : Electrical TS/M/S68/1 – 47
Section 70 : Automation and Monitoring System TS/M/S70/1 – 55
Section 71 : Interface for Building Automation System TS/M/S71/1 – 3
Section 72 : Painting TS/M/S72/1 – 6
Section 73 : Balancing, Testing & Commissioning of Air-Conditioning TS/M/S73/1 – 5
and Ventilation
Section 74 : Service and Maintenance Contract TS/M/S74/1 – 3
BAS and IBMS Point Schedule

ACMV 2 pages
Electrical 1 page
Medical Gas 1 page
Fire Alarm & Sprinkler System 1 page
Plumbing & Sanitary System 1 page
Schedule 1 – Mesh Network, EIB and IBMS Point Schedule for 1 page
Electrical
Metering Schedule
NUS Metering System Architectural 1 page
Metering System Point Schedule for Meter 1 page
2
SCHEDULE OF TECHNICAL DATA
SCHEDULE OF TECHNICAL DATA FOR AIR-CONDITIONING AND MECHANICAL

VENTILATION
Notes :
1. Tenderers shall complete the following schedule and submit any supplementary
information, which may be considered necessary to convey a complete description of
the equipment offered.
2. Tenderers are reminded that notwithstanding whatever is submitted in this Schedule,

all equipment and installation must comply with the requirements of the
Specification.
3. Unless written confirmation and approval is obtained from the S.O. to that effect, the
requirements of the Specification shall supersede all other qualifications herein.
4. Tenderers are requested not to repeat the details called for in any separate
specification of their own. The works "as specified" or "to suit" or "equal and to
approval" will not be accepted as a sufficient description of any item.
5. Failure to fill in completely the Schedule may render his Tender liable to
disqualification and consequent rejection.
STD/ACMV/1
1. Air Handling Units

(Attach additional sheets for various units where necessary)
Unit Label
Model Number
Type (horiz/vert; blow/draw thru)
Manufacturer & Country of Origin
Width x Depth x Height
(mm x mm x mm)
Operating Weight (kg)
Total Supply Air (CMH)
Dehumidified Air (CMH)
Fresh Air (CMH)
Grand Total Heat (KW)
Total Sensible Heat (KW)
Static Pressure (Pa)
Static efficiency (%)
Dynamic Pressure (Pa)
Total Static Pressure (Pa)
Fan Motor, KW/RPM
Total System efficiency (exclude drive)
Total System efficiency (include drive)
B. Cooling Coil Detail
Air On-Coil Temp, DB/WB (C) DB WB DB WB DB WB

Air Off-Coil Temp, DB/WB (C) DB WB DB WB DB WB
Chilled Water Temp, IN/OUT (C) IN OUT IN OUT IN OUT
Chilled Water Flow (l/sec)
Tube O.D. (mm)
Face Area (m2)
COOLING COIL
Face velocity (m/sec)
No. of fins (per 10 mm)
Air Filter Make
(Washable Type) Efficiency / Test Code
Air Resistance
Fan Motor and Starter Detail
Starter Manufacturer/Country
Motor/Type of Enclosure
Rated/Name Plate Power / Voltage / Current
Type of Motor Protection
Motor efficiency
Energy performance standard
STD/ACMV/2
2. Fan Coil Units (FCUs)

(Attached additional sheets for various units where necessary)
A. FCU Detail
Unit Label
Model Number
Type (wall / floor / ceiling mounted)
Manufacturer & Country of Origin
Width x Depth x Height (mm x mm x mm)
Total Supply Air (CMH)
Fresh Air (CMH)
Grand Total Heat (KW)
Total Sensible Heat (KW)
Fan Motor, KW/RPM KW rpm KW rpm KW rpm
Chilled Water Temp, IN/OUT ( C) IN OUT IN OUT IN OUT
Chilled Water Flow (l/sec)
COOLING COIL Tube O.D. (mm or in)
Face Area (m2)
Face Velocity (m/sec)
No. of fins (per 10 mm)
No. of rows
AIR FILTER Make

(Washable Type)
Efficiency/Test Code
3-Speed Controller (Yes or No)
Room Thermostat (Yes or No)
STD/ACMV/3
3. Mechanical Ventilation Fans (including fans for engineered smoke control system)
Unit Label
Model Number
Type (axial etc.)
Manufacturer
Country of Origin
Size (mm DIA or mm x mm)
Fan Casing
Material
Fan Blades
Fan Weight (kg)
Air Flow (CMH)
Fan Motor (KW)
Fan Speed (Rpm)
Fan Efficiency (%)
Type of Drive
No.
Attentuators Size
Rating
Fan Motor
Model Number
Type (TEFC etc.)
Manufacturer
Country of Origin
Class of Insulation
Type of Enclosure
Electrical (V/phase/Hz)
Motor Speed (rpm)
Running Current (A)
Starting Current (A)
Type of Starter
Operating weight (kg)
STD/ACMV/4
4. Air-Cooled Split Units

Unit Label
Manufacturer
Country of Manufacture
Type/Model
Cooling Capacity (kW)
Overall Dimension
(L x W x H) (m) - Outdoor Unit
Overall Dimension
(L x W x H) (m) - Indoor Unit
Overall Weight
(kg) - Outdoor Unit
Overall Weight
(kg) - Indoor Unit
Type of Anti-Vibration Mounting
- Outdoor Unit
Operation Noise (dBA)
- Outdoor Unit
- Indoor Unit
Maximum refrigerant piping
length (equi. length)(m)
Indoor Unit Controls
STD/ACMV/5
5. Variable Refrigerant Volume Units

Unit Label
Manufacturer
Country of Manufacture
Type/Model
Cooling Capacity (kW)
Overall Dimension
(L x W x H) (m) - Outdoor Unit
Overall Dimension
(L x W x H) (m) - Indoor Unit
Overall Weight
(kg) - Outdoor Unit
Overall Weight
(kg) - Indoor Unit
Type of Anti-Vibration Mounting
- Outdoor Unit
- Outdoor Unit
- Indoor Unit
Maximum refrigerant piping
length (equi. length)(m)
Indoor Unit Controls
STD/ACMV/6
6. Automatic Control System

(To be tallied with Building Automation System, if any)
a) Measuring Equipment
Description Brand/Model Material Accuracy

Duct Temperature Sensor
Room Temperature Sensor
Static Pressure Sensor
Humidistat
Differential Pressure Switch
Off Coil Averaging Temperature
Electro-Mech Valve Actuator

Electronic Receiver Controller (PID)
Room Thermostat (Electric /

Electronic)
Differential Pressure Sensor for
Water Control
Differential Pressure Sensor for Air

Control
Duct Mounted Smoke Detector
Duct Thermostats
Level Control System
Time Switches
STD/ACMV/7
b) AC Variable Speed Drive
Make ..............................................................
Type/Model ..............................................................
Country of Origin ..............................................................
Name of Local Agent ..............................................................
Power Requirement (kW) ..............................................................
Speed Control Range ..............................................................
Efficiency at 75% Load (%) ..............................................................
Control Principle ..............................................................
Rated Voltage (V) ..............................................................
Speed Input Signal ..............................................................
Speed Output Signal ..............................................................
Protective Circuits : Earth Fault (Yes/No)
: Short Circuit (Yes/No)
: Overcurrent Fault (Yes/No)
: Overvoltage Fault (Yes/No)
: Undervoltage Fault (Yes/No)
: Overtemperature Fault (Yes/No)
: Current Limiting (Yes/No)
STD/ACMV/8
c) Soft Starter Drive
Make ..............................................................
Type/Model ..............................................................
Country of Origin ..............................................................
Name of Local Agent ..............................................................
Power Requirement (kW) ..............................................................
Speed Control Range ..............................................................
Control Principle ..............................................................
Rated Voltage (V) ..............................................................
Speed Input Signal ..............................................................
Speed Output Signal ..............................................................
Protective Circuits : Earth Fault (Yes/No)
: Short Circuit (Yes/No)
: Overcurrent Fault (Yes/No)
: Overvoltage Fault (Yes/No)
: Undervoltage Fault (Yes/No)
: Overtemperature Fault (Yes/No)
: Current Limiting (Yes/No)
STD/ACMV/9
7. Pipework
Make Up Make Up Chilled Condenser Drain and Refrigerant

Water Water
Water <150 / Condensate
< 65mm > 75mm
<150 / >200 mm
>200 mm
Manufacturer
Country of
Manufacturer
Material
Gauge Thickness
Manufacturer of Pipe
Fittings
Pipe Joints
STD/ACMV/10
8. Valves, Gauges and Pipe Fitting (Chilled and Condenser Water Pipes)
Make and Country of Material of Working

Model Manufacture Body Pressure
(kPa)
Temperature Gauge
Water Flow Switches
Electromagnetic Flow
Meter
Automatic Constant Flow

Control Valve
Isolating Gate Valve
Control Globe Valve
Motorised Butterfly
Valve
Manual Butterfly Valve
Lubricated Plug Cocks
Check Valve
Strainers
Drain Cocks
Automatic Air Vents
Anti-Vibration Couplings
Ball Float Valve
Pressure Gauges
Thermometer
2 & 3-way Control Valve
Motorised Ball Valve
Differential Pressure
Valve
Balancing Valve
Flexible Joint
Suction Diffusers
STD/ACMV/11
9. Thermal Insulation
Material and Thermal Vapour Seal Country of

Thickness Conductivity Material and Manufacture
Watts/m2/mm No. of Coats
Thickness
Pre-Insulated Chilled
Water Pipe
Refrigerant Pipe
Condensate and Drain

Pipe
Refrigerant Machine
Pumps
Valves
10. Fire Damper (PSB Approved type)
Make ...........................................................
Country of Origin ...........................................................
Fire Rating ...........................................................
Testing Authority ...........................................................
Fusible Link Make ...........................................................
Fusing Temperature (C) ...........................................................
STD/ACMV/12
11. Air Distribution Equipment
Make and Model Material Country of

Manufacture
Supply Air Register ........................... ................. ...........................
Ceiling Diffuser (Square) ........................... ................. ...........................
Ceiling Diffuser (Circular) ........................... ................. ...........................
Return Grille ........................... ................. ...........................
Exhaust Grille ........................... ................. ...........................
Swirl Type Diffuser ........................... ................. ...........................
Linear Diffuser
i) Plenum ........................... ................. ...........................
ii) Diffuser ........................... ................. ...........................
VAV Box ........................... ................. ...........................
Induction VAV Box ........................... ................. ...........................
Venturi Valve ........................... ................. ...........................
Weather Proof Louvre ........................... ................. ...........................
Air Tight Damper ........................... ................. ...........................
Bubble Tight Damper ........................... ................. ...........................
Air Flow Station ........................... ................. ...........................
Volume Control Damper ........................... ................. ...........................
STD/ACMV/13
12. Ductwork c/w Insulation
Sheet metal : Type and Make ........................................
Country of Origin ........................................
Stainless Steel : Type and Make ........................................
External Insulation : Type and Make ........................................
Thermal Conductivity ........................................
Make of Vapour Barrier ........................................
Internal Insulation : Type and Make ........................................
Sound Absorption Coefficient .......................................
STD/ACMV/14
13. Fire Rated Duct (2-hours & 4-hours)
Ductwork c/w Insulation
Sheetmetal : Type and Make ........................................
External Insulation : Type and Make ........................................
Thermal Conductivity ........................................
Make of Vapour Barrier ........................................
Internal Insulation : Type and Make ........................................
Sound Absorption Coefficient ............................
Fire Rated Material : Type and Make ........................................
Country of Manufacture ........................................
Class (PSB Classification) .......................................
Testing Authorities : .................................................................
STD/ACMV/15
14. Local Control Boards (LCB)
Manufacturer .........................................
Material and Gauge of Panel .........................................
Overall Dimension .........................................
Operating Weight .........................................
Finishing of Switchboard .........................................
15. Vibration Isolation
Isolator Country
Equipment Type of Make Origin Local Agent Remark
Chillers ..............................................................................................
Pumps ..............................................................................................
Air Handling Units ..............................................................................................
Fan Coil Units ..............................................................................................
Cooling Towers ..............................................................................................
Fans ..............................................................................................
Pipework ..............................................................................................
Ductwork ..............................................................................................
Local Control Board ..............................................................................................
A/C Switchboard ..............................................................................................
STD/ACMV/16
16.
a) Electrical Components
Make Type Model Rated
V/Amp
Auto Transformers Starters .....................................................................................
Star/Delta Starters .....................................................................................
DOL Starters .....................................................................................
b) Air Circuit Breakers
Manufacturer .......................................................................
Country of Manufacture .......................................................................
Local Agent ........................................................................
Standard (to which manufactured) ........................................................................
Voltage Nominal ........................................................................
Symmetrical Breaking Capacity .................. KA rm.s. at ............. volt
Asymmetrical Breaking Capacity ................. KA r m.s. at ............ volt
Equivalent MVA at 400 volts ..................................................... MVA
Making Capacity (Peak) ..................................................... KA
Short Time Current ......................... KA ..................... SEC
Test Certificate .......................................................................
Testing Authority .......................................................................
Type of Method of Closing Mechanism ...........................................................
Type of Method of Tripping Mechanism ...........................................................
Dielectric Strength 60 sec. between Phases ......................................... kV

between Phases & Earth ......................................... kV
STD/ACMV/17
Opening Time .............................................................. secs
Total Breaking Time .............................................................. secs
Shunt Trip Coil Voltage .............................................. Volt (AC/DC)
Weight of Air Circuit Breaking .............................................. kg
Panel Dimension: Length .................................................
Width .................................................
Depth .................................................
Other Features .........................................................................
Type/Method of Interlock between A.C.B.
i) Mechanical .........................................................................
ii) Electrical .........................................................................
c) Moulded Case Circuit Breakers (MCCB)
Manufacturer ................................................
Country of Manufacture ................................................
Local Agent ................................................
Standard (to which manufactured) ................................................
Rated Voltage ................................................
Symmetrical Breaking Capacity .......... KA r m.s. at ........... volt
Asymmetrical Breaking Capacity ......... KA r m.s. at .......... volt
Test Certificate ................................................
Type/Model No ................................................
Type of Protection ................................................
STD/ACMV/18
d) Miniature Circuit Breakers (MCB)
Manufacturer ...............................................
Country of Manufacture ...............................................
Local Agent ................................................
Standard (to which manufactured) ................................................
Rated Voltage ..............................................
Symmetrical Breaking Capacity .......... KA r m.s. at ............ volt
Asymmetrical Breaking Capacity .......... KA r m.s. at ............ volt
Test Certificate ..............................................
Type/Model No ..............................................
Type of Protection ..............................................
e) Overload Relay
Manufacturer ................................................
Local Agent ................................................
Type/Model No ................................................
Current Setting Range ................................................
Time Delay Setting Range ................................................
STD/ACMV/19
f) Overcurrent Relay
Manufacturer ................................................
Local Agent ................................................
Type/Model No ................................................
g) Earth Fault Relay (IDMTL)
Manufacturer ................................................
Local Agent ................................................
Type/Model No ................................................
h) Current Transformers
1) For Protection
Manufacturer ................................................
Local Agent ...............................................
Type/Model No ...............................................
Standard (to which manufactured) ...............................................
Class ................................................
Burden (VA) ................................................
STD/ACMV/20
i) Electrical Components
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
DESCRIPTION MAKE TYPE MODEL NO. COUNTRY OF LOCAL ACCURACY

OF MANUFACTURE
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
H.R.C. Fuses
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Ammeters
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Voltmeters
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Selector Switches
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Current Transformers
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Indicator Lamps
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Power Factor Meter

--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Kilowatt Hour Meter

--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Kilowatt Meter
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Anti-Condensation Heaters
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Labels
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Service Contactors
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Time Delay Relays

--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Start/Stop Push Button

Switches
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Isolators
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Alarm Bells
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Sequence Controllers
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Float Switches
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Hour run-meter
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
STD/ACMV/21
17. Electrical Cables, Conduits, Trunking and Cable Trays
a) MICS Cables
Manufacturer .................................................................
Country of Manufacture .................................................................
Voltage Grade .................................................................
Standard/Class .................................................................
Test Certificate .................................................................
Testing Authority .................................................................
b) Fire Rated Cable
Manufacturer .................................................................
Voltage Grade .................................................................
Standard/Class .................................................................
c) PVC/SWA/PVC Cable
Manufacturer .................................................................
Voltage Grade .................................................................
Standard/Class .................................................................
STD/ACMV/22
d) PVC Cable
Manufacturer .................................................................
Voltage Grade .................................................................
Standard/Class .................................................................
e) PVC/PVC Cable
Manufacturer .................................................................
Voltage Grade .................................................................
Standard/Class .................................................................
f) Cable Tray
Manufacturer .................................................................
Material ................................................................
g) Trunking
Manufacturer .................................................................
Material ................................................................
STD/ACMV/23
h) Conduit
Manufacturer .................................................................
Material ................................................................
i) Flexible Conduct
Manufacturer .................................................................
Material ................................................................
j) MCCB
Manufacturer .................................................................
Type/Model No. ................................................................
k) RCCB
Manufacturer .................................................................
Type/Model No. ................................................................
STD/ACMV/24
18. Building Automation System
a) Main Central Equipment (BAS, Personal Computer)
Specified Offered
Manufacturer : - ....................
Country of Origin : - ....................
Local Agent : - ....................
Type : Microcomputer Server-based ....................
Model : - ....................
Processor : Intel Pentium IV ....................
Cache Memory : min. 16GB ....................
Clock Speed : 1.8GHz (minimum) ....................
RAM Capacity Installed : 16GB (minimum) ....................
RAM Capacity Expandable : 32 GB (minimum) ....................
Hard Disk Capacity : 320 GB (min) Interface ....................
Hard Disk Access Time : 7 ms (maximum) ....................
Universal Serial Bus Drive Type : 3 nos ....................
DVD-Rom Drive : 32 x (minimum) ....................
Program Language : - ....................
Split Screen Capacity : Yes ....................
System (Fire) Integration : Yes ....................
Operator Interface Mode : Graphic ....................
True Multi-tasking Functionality : Yes ....................
Voice Communication Capability : Yes ....................
Electronic Mail Message : Yes ....................
Maintenance/Inventory Report : Yes ....................
Dimension : - ....................
Voltage Requirement : 230 Vac/50 Hz ....................
Current Consumption : - ....................
Ambient Operating Temperature : 0 to 49C ....................
Ambient Operating R.H. : 20 to 90% (non-condensing) ....................
UL Listings : UL864, UL916, UL1076 ....................
2 Ethernet card : Yes …………….
STD/ACMV/25
b) Colour Graphic Monitor (BAS)
Specified Offered
Manufacturer : - ...............
Country of Origin : - ...............
Local Agent : - ...............
Type : LCD Colour Plus Monitor ...............
Model : - ...............
Screen Size : 32 inch Diagonal ...............
Resolution : ...............
Colours : 256 colours (minimum) ...............
Dimension : - ...............
Voltage Requirement : 230 Vac/50 Hz ...............
Current Consumption : - ...............
Ambient Operating Temperature : 0 to 49C ...............
Ambient Operating R.H. : 20 to 90% (non-condensing) ...............
UL Listings : UL864 ...............
c) Printer (BAS)
Type/Model ......................................................
Speed ................................................ cps
STD/ACMV/26
d) Supervisory Central Equipment (IMSS)
Specified Offered
Manufacturer : - ...............
Country of Origin : - ..............
Local Agent : - ...............
Type : Microcomputer Server-based ...............
Model : - ...............
Processor : Intel Pentium IV ...............
Cache Memory : min. 16 GB ...............
Clock Speed : 1.8GHz (minimum) ...............
RAM Capacity Installed : 16 GB (minimum) ...............
RAM Capacity Expandable : 32GB (minimum) ...............
Hard Disk Capacity : 3200 GB (min) ESDI Interface ...............
Hard Disk Access Time : 7 ms (maximum) ...............
Universal Serial Bus Drive Type : 3 Nos ...............
DVD-Rom Drive : 32x (minimum) ...............
Program Language : - ...............
Split Screen Capacity : Yes ...............
System (Fire) Integration : Yes ...............
Operator Interface Mode : Graphic ...............
True Multi-tasking Functionality : Yes ...............
Voice Communication Capability : Yes ...............
Electronic Mail Message : Yes ...............
Maintenance/Inventory Report : Yes ...............
Dimension : - ...............
UL Listings : UL864, UL916, UL1076 ...............
STD/ACMV/27
e) Colour Graphic Monitor (IMSS)
Specified Offered
Manufacturer : - ...............
Country of Origin : - ...............
Local Agent : - ...............
Type : LCD Colour Plus Monitor ...............
Model : - ...............
Screen Size : 42 inch Diagonal ...............
Resolution : ...............
Colours : 256 colours (minimum) ...............
Dimension : - ...............
UL Listings : UL864 ...............
f) Printer
Type/Model .............................................................
Speed ....................................................... cps
g) Direct Digital Control Main Station
Type/Mode l ..........................................................
Processor Type/No. of Bits ................................................... bits
Type of LAN supported .........................................................
Program Memory Size ............................................. Mbytes
STD/ACMV/28
h) Direct Digital Terminal Control Sub-Station
Type/Model .........................................................
Processor Type/No. of Bits .................................................. bits
Type of LAN supported .........................................................
i) KWH Transducer
Type/Model ........................................................
Range ........................................................
Accuracy ........................................................
KWH Per Pulse ........................................................
j) Actuator
Type/Model ........................................................
Power Supply ........................................................
Torque ........................................................
Torque Limit Protection Yes/No
k) Electric Current Controller
Type/Model ........................................................
Power Supply ........................................................
Power Rating ........................................................
l) Flow Transducer
Type/Model ........................................................
Range ........................................................
Accuracy ........................................................
STD/ACMV/29
m) Current Transducer
Manufacturer ........................................................
Country of Manufacture .......................................................
Model No. ........................................................
Number of Phase ........................................................
n) Voltage Transducer
Manufacturer ........................................................
Country of Manufacture ........................................................
Model No. ........................................................
Number of Phase ........................................................
o) KW Transducer
Manufacturer ........................................................
Country of Manufacture ........................................................
Model No. ........................................................
p) Temperature Sensor
Type/Model ........................................................
Range ........................................................
Accuracy ........................................................
q) Humidity Sensor
Type/Model ........................................................
Range ........................................................
Accuracy ........................................................
STD/ACMV/30
r) Pressure Sensor
Type/Model ........................................................
Range ........................................................
Accuracy ........................................................
s) Digital Power Meter
Type/Model ........................................................
Range ........................................................
Accuracy ........................................................
Communication Bus ........................................................
t) Control Valve
Type/Model ......................................................
Valve Body/Plug Material ......................................................
Valve Pressure Rating ......................................................
Rangeability ......................................................
Valve Characteristics *2-way/3-way
u) Screened Data Cables
Type/Model ......................................................
Country of Manufacture ......................................................
v) Temperature Sensor (BCA Greenmark Compliance)
Type/Model ........................................................
Range ........................................................
Accuracy ........................................................
STD/ACMV/31
19. Inductive Flow Meter
a) Flow Meter
Brand Name ......................................................
Manufacturer ......................................................
Country of Origin ......................................................
b) Temperature Sensor
Brand Name ......................................................
Manufacturer ......................................................
c) BTU Calculator / Meter
Brand Name ......................................................
Manufacturer ......................................................
STD/ACMV/32
20. High Plume Fan

Unit Label
Model Number
Type (mixed flow, centrifugal, etc.)
Manufacturer
Country of Origin
Size (mm DIA or mm x mm)
Fan Casing
Material
Fan Blades
Fan Weight (kg)
Air Flow (CMH)
Fan Motor (KW)
Fan Speed (Rpm)
Static Pressure (Pa)
Dynamic Pressure (Pa)
Total Pressure (Pa)

Induction nozzle Dynamic Pressure
(Pa)
Fan Efficiency (%)
Type of Drive
Total System efficiency (exclude
drive)
Total System efficiency (include
drive)
No.
Attenuators Size
Rating
STD/ACMV/33
21. DX Heat Recovery Unit

Unit Label
Manufacturer
Country of Manufacturer
Country of Origin
Local Agent
Type of HRU
(air-cooled or water cooled)
Cooling Capacity (KW)
Free heating Capacity (KW)
Unit Efficiency (kW/RT)
Type of Drive for compressor
Power Requirement
Framework
Material
Casing
Temperature / Humidity Sensors
Type of Control ( DDC/PLC)
Unit Dry Weight (kg)
Unit Compressor Noise Level
Overall Dimensions for HRU
Remote Condensing Unit (if any)
Condenser Fan Air Flow (CMH)
Condenser Fan Fan Motor (KW)
Condenser Fan Fan Speed (Rpm)
Condenser Fan Noise Level
Type of Drive for Condenser Fan

Overall Dimensions Remote
Condenser
No.
Attentuators
Size
STD/ACMV/34
Rating
STD/ACMV/35
22. Curtain Sizes and Drops
Overall Size Curtain Overall Curtain Max

No. of Rollers of Box Sizes Size Drop
112 150 x 150 2.7W x 2.0D 2.7W x 2.0D 2.4
Zone Control Panel
Dimension ......................................................
Finish ......................................................
STD/ACMV/36
PARTICULAR SPECIFICATION
MECHANICAL WORKS
SECTION 1 - GENERAL
1. Scope of Works
1.1 The Contract comprises the supply, installation, testing,

commissioning and maintenance of the following mechanical services
as shown on, described or inferred from the Drawings and
Specifications. The maintenance shall be for a period of twelve (12)
months from the Date of Substantial Completion the Contract.
1.2 The scope of works for mechanical services shall include but not
limited to the following:
a) Air-conditioning System
b) Mechanical Ventilation System
c) Laboratory Equipment
d) Engineered Smoke Control System
e) Building Automation System and Building Management System
f) Facility Booking system
1.3 The Sub-Contractor shall have to price for Option items as specified in
the Specifications and Drawings. The validity of the pricing for the
Option shall remain valid throughout the duration of the Contract
Period plus up to six (6) months of the Defects Liability Period. The
Employer reserves the right to exercise the Option in part or in whole,
and the Contractor shall not be entitled to claim for loss of profit, etc
should the Employer decide not to proceed with Option whether in part
or in whole.
1.4 The above works shall be executed by specialist contractors who has
a minimum of 5 years track record of BSL 2 laboratory installation
experience, and of registered with BCA in the appropriate workhead
and Financial Grade as follows:
Item of Work Workhead Financial Grade
Air-conditioning, Refrigeration ME01 L4 and above

&Ventilation Works
1.5 The Sub-Contractor shall engage firms registered with BCA ME02 L4
and above for BAS works; and with BCA ME01 L3 or ME06 L3 and
above for the Engineered Smoke Control System.
PS/M/S1/1
MECHANICAL WORKS
1.6 Air-conditioning System
The works involved are defined in this Particular Specification,

Technical Specification and indicated on the accompanying tender
drawings. It shall include but not limited to the following:
a) Supply, install, testing, commissioning and maintenance one lot

of AHUs and FCUs complete with variable speed drives,
dampers, mixing plenum, filters, heat recovery nits, stainless
steel drip tray, insulations, supports, plinths, paintings, controls
including electrical connection and all other accessories as
shown in the tender drawings and specifications to form a
complete system.
b) Supply, install, testing, commissioning and maintenance one lot

of heat recovery units complete with compressors, condensers,
pumps, heat exchanger, standby electric heaters, pre-insulated
pipe works, hot water tanks, pumps, heater coils, controls,
panels, wiring, variable speed drives, valves, fittings,
insulations, ductworks, supports, plinths, paintings, water
treatment and all other accessories as shown in the tender
drawings and specifications to form a complete system.
c) Supply, install, testing, commissioning and maintenance one lot

of pre-insulated hot-dipped galvanised chilled water pipe work
complete with valves, strainers, fitting, gauges, sensors,
insulations, supports, painting and all other accessories to form
a complete system.
d) Supply, install, testing, commissioning and maintenance one lot

of pre-insulated underground hot-dipped galvanised chilled
water pipe work complete with HDPE jacketing, valves and
accessories
e) Supply, install, testing, commissioning and maintenance one lot

of pre-insulated condensate drain pipe work complete with
valves, fitting, supports, painting and all other accessories to
form a complete system.
f) Supply, install, testing, commissioning and maintenance one lot

of variable refrigerant split units complete with filters, refrigerant
and condensate piping, insulations, supports, plinths, paintings
and all other accessories as shown in the tender drawings and
specifications to form a complete system.
g) Supply, install, testing, commissioning and maintenance one lot

of pre-insulated ductworks complete with fire dampers,
motorised dampers, manual dampers, low leakage dampers,,
air tight dampers, flexible ducts, fire-rated ducts or enclosure,
insulation, hangers and all other accessories to form a
complete system.
h) Supply, install, testing, commissioning and maintenance one lot

of air diffuser equipment complete with diffusers, grilles,
registers, volume control dampers, insulation, hangers and all
other accessories to form a complete system.
PS/M/S1/2
MECHANICAL WORKS
i) Supply, install, testing, commissioning and maintenance one lot

of air control equipment include VAV boxes, venturi valves
complete with damper actuators, plenum boxes, insulation,
power supply, supports and all other accessories to form a
complete system.
j) Supply, install, testing, commissioning and maintenance one lot

of DB, MCC, Local Control panels, DDC, VSD complete with
controls, wirings, conduits and all other accessories to form a
complete system.
k) Supply, install, testing, commissioning and maintenance one lot

of control and automation including field controllers, panels,
thermostats, field devices, sensors, smoke detectors, control
panels, wirings, conduits, programming and all other
accessories to form a complete system.
l) Supply, install, testing, commissioning one lot of indoor air

quality test after completion of building with third party's
accredited laboratory report.
1.7 Mechanical Ventilation System

a) Supply, install, testing, commissioning and maintenance one lot
of mechanical ventilation fans including but not limited to
pressurization fans and purge air fans, complete with wiring,
controls, variable speed drive, silencers, supports, plinths and
all other accessories to form a complete system.
b) Supply, install, testing, commissioning and maintenance one lot
of vertical high plume mechanical ventilation fans complete
with wiring, controls, variable speed drive, plinths, supports and
c) Supply, install, testing, commissioning and maintenance one lot
of ductwork complete with fire dampers, motorised dampers,
manual dampers, low leakage dampers, flexible ducts air
filters, insulation, fire-rated ducts or enclosure, hangers and all
other accessories to form a complete system.
d) Supply, install, testing, commissioning and maintenance one lot

of air diffuser equipment complete with diffusers, grilles,
registers, volume control dampers, hangers and all other
e) Supply, install, testing, commissioning and maintenance one lot
of DB, MCC, Local Control panels, DDC, VSD complete with
controls, wirings, conduits and all other accessories to form a
complete system.
PS/M/S1/3
MECHANICAL WORKS

of control and automation including field controllers, panels,
field devices, sensors, control panels, wirings, conduits,
programming and all other accessories to form a complete
system.
g) Supply, install, testing, commissioning and maintenance one lot
of remote control panels at FCC room for all fire and essential
fans including wirings, conduits, fire rated cables, supports and
h) Hook Up, Testing, Commission And Maintenance one lot of
ductwork connectors and all other accessories to user’s
equipment during DLP.
1.8 Engineered Smoke Control System

a) Design, supply, install, testing, commissioning and

maintenance one lot of engineered smoke control system
include but not limited to high temperature mechanical
ventilation fans, complete with wiring, controls, variable speed
drive, supports, smoke damper, plinths and all other
b) Design, supply, install, testing, commissioning and

maintenance one lot of fire rated ductwork complete with fire
rated motorised dampers, hangers and all other accessories to
c) Design, supply, install, testing, commissioning and

maintenance one lot of air diffuser equipment complete with
diffusers, grilles, registers, volume control dampers, hangers
and all other accessories to form a complete system.
d) Design, supply, install, testing, commissioning and

maintenance one lot of DB, MCC, Local Control panels, DDC,
VSD complete with controls, wirings, conduits and all other
e) Design, supply, install, testing, commissioning and

maintenance one lot of control and automation including field
controllers, panels, field devices, sensors, control panels,
wirings, conduits, programming and all other accessories to

of remote control panels at FCC room for all engineering
smoke control fans including wirings, conduits, fire rated
cables, supports and all other accessories to form a complete
system.
PS/M/S1/4
MECHANICAL WORKS
1.9 Laboratory Equipments

a) Design, supply, install, testing, commissioning and

maintenance one lot of cold room installations complete with
Variable Refrigerant Volume Units c/w fan coil units, condenser
units, wiring, controls, refrigerant pipes, conduit, trunking etc
and all other accessories to form a complete system.
1.10 Building Automation System (BAS) and Building Management System

(BMS)
The BAS and BMS shall be provided to integrate the control and
monitoring of the ACMV, electrical, lighting, lifts, plumbing, sanitary,
card access, security and all other building services together with the
IT infrastructure. It shall comprise of, but not limited to the following:
Design, supply, install, testing, commissioning and maintenance one

lot ofworkstations, servers, sensors, transmitters, controllers, cabling,
optical fibre cables for LAN, software, necessary testing and
commissioning, instrumentation, and etc for WSB.
1.11 Tenders are also required to price for the optional items as specified in
the tender drawings and specification. The S.O. reserves the right to
award the Sub-Contract with or without the optional item. Should the
S.O. decide not to carry out the optional item, the entire sum as
entered in the cost breakdown shall be omitted. If the optional item is
to be exercised, the Sub-Contractor shall execute the entire works
within the Sub-Contract period specified. No extension of time is
allowed.
The respective services shall be carried out by the respective Sub-

Contractors with minimum five (5) years experience in the trade and
registered with BCA unless otherwise specified elsewhere in this
Particular Specification.
Fan and Ductworks
All laboratory exhaust and return ductworks shall be made of SS316

stainless steel material. All stainless steel ductworks, HEPA filter
housing and portions of gas tight ductwork and filter system shall be
subjected to pressure test of up to 1000Pa. Acceptance shall be no
detected leaks in excess of 1 x 10-t cc/sec.
Ductwork of galvanized steel shall complete with lock seam and TDF
joints, constructed in accordance to practice recommended in latest
editions of guides by SMACNA and SS 553.
PS/M/S1/5
MECHANICAL WORKS
All ductworks serving offices and educational spaces shall be

subjected to pressure test of up to 500Pa. All ductworks serving
laboratory shall be subjected to pressure test of 1000 Pa.
Air risers serving multiple floors need to be constructed to meet at

least SMACNA 1500 Pa duct construction.
Wet exhaust air ductworks serving autoclaves and washers shall be

made of SS316 stainless steel material.
All HEPA filter housing shall be tested in accordance with ASME N509
and N510 standards. All HEPA filter housing shall be factory tested
and supplied with a certificate of conformance and test report each.
For G.I. ductwork, the degree of zinc coating shall be in accordance

with Clause D of B.S. 2989-1965. Galvanising shall be such that zinc
coating remains continuous when folded or seamed. Where G.I. sheet
is cut or trimmed, cold galvanizing treatment shall be given to the
edges stripped of the zinc coating to prevent bare metal from
corrosion. For greater degree of air tightness in G.I. ductwork
construction, duct sealant shall be applied at all seams and joints both
internally and externally.
Where ductwork penetrates a wall or partition into a space, the

penetration shall be provided with duct sleeve of gauge not less than
duct and penetration proper caulked and sealed to maintain air
tightness integrity. Penetration seals shall be flush and offer similar
smooth finishing as wall or partition.
Plenums need to be constructed of minimum 18 gauge stainless steel
SS 316. These panels need to be insulated.
General lab exhaust discharge shall be minimum 3m above the
roofline and any roof element within a horizontal distance of 4m.
Upward velocity shall be a minimum of 15m/s at the point of discharge.
Drainage at ductworks shall be provided to prevent rainwater ingress
into ductworks. .
All fans serving laboratory, chemical stores, fume hood exhaust shall
be chemical and corrosion resistant with temperature rated up to 250
degree Celsius. All stainless steel ductwork shall serving these area
shall be internally coated with chemical resistance telfon TEFE
(polytetrafluoroethylene) coating.
PS/M/S1/6
MECHANICAL WORKS
Air Handling Unit (AHU)

For single-pass laboratory, air-handling system shall be provided with
N + 1 reliability and maintain 100% capacity in the event of lead
component failure.
The back-up AHU shall be running in event of failure of duty AHU. The
control of temperature and humidity shall be by hot water reheat coil in
the AHU with back-up electric heater in the hot water storage tank.
The Sub-Contractor shall ensure sizing of the all tanks, pumps and
electric heater able to meet the room design requirements during
operation and failure mode.
All re-circulating AHUs shall come with CO2 sensor to regulate the
fresh air intake and smoke detector for supply air cut-off during fire
mode.
All laboratory AHUs shall be installed with min. primary filter (MERV 8)
and secondary filter (MERV 14). All AHUs serving office and
educational spaces shall have min. primary filter (MERV 8) and
secondary filter (MERV 14). The filter rating shall be based on the
most stringent of either above-mentioned or Technical Specification
and code requirements.
1.12 The Sub-Contractor shall get the manpower, equipments, material etc.
to ensure that the works are completed as scheduled. The Sub-
Contractor shall note that any shutdown to the existing services (ie
water supply, air-conditioning system, etc) can only be carried out after
office hours and over the weekends subjected to the S.O. approval. All
costs to meet the schedule shall be included in the tender price.
1.13 All works shall be carried out in minimum disturbances to the User.
Works may be carried out after normal working hours, holidays,
weekends etc. The Sub-Contractor must obtain written permission
from the S.O. prior to carrying out of the abovementioned works. All
costs incurred in respect of any of the above shall deem be included in
order to facilitate the completion of the works.
1.14 All new Systems / devices installed shall be of Year 2000 Compliance.
1.15 The Sub-Contractor shall provide the interfacing point in the DDC
through protocols for the BAS/IBMS Sub-Contractor to monitor and
control functions such as remote programmed start / stop, run status,
trip alarm, high / low level alarm, run-time totalisation, etc. for the
following item:
Run-time shall be tracked to provide maintenance staff with a

maintenance alarm, after a pre-determined run-time, to perform
preventive maintenance.
The Sub-Contractor shall provide interfacing for the BAS/IBMS Sub-

Contractor to monitor high and low level alarm in storage water tanks.
The BAS/IBMS Sub-Contractor shall be able to pick up the signals
from NO / NC contacts.
PS/M/S1/7
MECHANICAL WORKS
Where the level probes are linked to a DDC, interfacing with the DDC
by BAS/IBMS Sub-Contractor shall be done via the open protocols.
2. Design Conditions of Air Conditioning
2.1 With full sun load and maximum shade temperature of 33.8 oC DB
(93oF DB) and 31.1°C WB, (88oF WB) the plant shall be capable of
maintaining a temperature of 22 - 25oC (71.6 - 77oF) and a relative
humidity of (55% - 65%) within the occupied space and other
temperatures and relative humidity as shown in the Tender Drawings.
2.2 Air movement at sedentary occupant levels generally shall not exceed
0.25 m/s.
2.3 Laboratory Airflow Control System

The Sub-Contractor shall submit detailed proposal of laboratory air-
flow control system with control schematic for acceptance.
The controller shall able to monitor following temperature and CO2

sensors and use as control functions
a) Outside Air Temperature

b) Outside Air Relative Humidity
c) Return Air Temperature (for re-circulating AHU). Alarms shall
be provided for high and low return air temperature.
d) Relative Humidity. Alarm shall be provided for high supply and

return air humidity (more than 70%).The controller shall able to
control the humidity control system to control discharge air
temperature and relative humidity to achieve desired room
conditions.
e) Mixed air temperature (for re-circulating air system)
f) Reheat leaving air temperature
g) Cooling coil leaving air temperature
h) Discharge air temperature. Alarms shall be provided for high

and low discharge air temperature.
i) CO2 sensor (for all re-circulating AHU). The CO2 sensor shall
provide control to the outside air damper. The minimum
position for CO2 control shall be configured to meet minimum
ventilation to the space to control non-occupant related
sources in the space or to meet minimum ventilation to the
space to control non-occupant related sources in the space or
to meet minimum occupied and unoccupied ventilation
requirements for laboratory as specified in the specification,
ASHRAE and drawings. The maximum position shall be set
equal to design ventilation rate.
PS/M/S1/8
MECHANICAL WORKS
j) Temperature sensors on roof. The rain sensors shall provide

signal to the BAS and to the DDC for all AHU to raise the off-
coil temperature by 1 to 2oC during raining periods.
k) Smoke detector
Alarm shall be provided for smoke detector and interlock with
AHU supply air cut-off.
l) Chilled water supply and return temperature
m) Monitoring points as specified in BAS Schedule and others as

deemed necessary to complete the system as a whole
For single pass laboratory, the control shall maintain minimum 8 ACH
for occupied period and 4 ACH for unoccupied period. For re-
circulating system for laboratory, the control shall be able to maintain
min. 6 ACH for occupied with at least 2 Outdoor ACH and emergency
purging of min.10 to a max.15 ACH.
The unoccupied setting shall be through the Facility Booking and

interlock with lighting and motion detection system in the building. All
the costs for the interlocking and control shall be deemed inclusive in
the Contract.
2.4 Temperature and Humidity Control
a) When zone temperature rises above cooling setpoint, the room

controller shall disable the room heating. Cooling shall reset to
maximum while supply airflow stays at minimum ventilation
CMH/ fan speed setpoint. A by-pass switch shall also be
incorporated to disable minimum and enable maximum CMH if
required by user.
b) The room controller shall increase supply airflow setpoint from

min. to max. CMH. The room controller shall increase the
general exhaust air volume to maintain a constant offset. Room
controller shall adjust offset if room pressure differential
deviates from setpoint.
c)
d) For unoccupied mode:
a. The control shall be interlock with motion or lighting

system.
b. Allow + 3 °C drift from cooling setpoints.
2.5 Re-Heat Temperature Control
The controller shall control and modulate humidity control system (if
available in the system to sub-cool and reheat. Room heating will be
PS/M/S1/9
MECHANICAL WORKS
by hot water reheat coils to maintain room temperature and RH set

point. Sub-Contractor shall provide detailed pipe routing and control
schematic for approval. All pre-insulated pipeworks, balancing valve
and modulating valve to each room supply air hot water reheat coils
shall be deemed inclusive in the contract.
Cooling Coil Control
a) The controller shall monitor discharge air temperature sensor

and use as required for cooling coil control.
b) The chilled water valve shall modulate to maintain the setpoint.

c) The controller shall monitor cooling coil leaving temperature.
2.6 Zone Variable Air Volume (VAV/ Venturi Valve (VV) /Fast Respond
Variable Air Volume (FVAV) Air Terminal Unit Interface
All VAV/VV/FVAV terminal units shall be linked to room DDC controller

and AHU controller to perform following functions:
a) Zone occupancy: The VAV/VV/FVAV and AHU shall be

interlocked with motion sensor or lighting to switch from
unoccupied mode to occupied mode and User defined from
BAS to select Occupied or Unoccupied operating mode.
b) Duct static pressure reset
c) Discharge air temperature setpoint
d) Ventilation control. The controls shall monitor and satisfy the

minimum ACH of 8 for occupied and 4 (unoccupied) for all
single-pass laboratory spaces. Higher ACH shall be kept for
those intensive heat load driven rooms (I,e. Freezer ).
e) Emergency purging: Activation of emergency purging switch

will open the fresh air damper, close the return damper. The
controller shall control the supply and exhaust air to each room
according to setpoint. Push button shall install at door exit for
this activation
f) If actual duct static pressure exceeds the maximum duct static

pressure setpoint with fan at minimum speed, then disable
VAV/VV/FVAV terminal unit airflow minimums to 0 and
maintain at normal minimum occupied airflow.
PS/M/S1/10
MECHANICAL WORKS
2.7 Fan Control
a) The supply fan speed shall be modulated to maintain duct

static pressure setpoint which shall be automatically reset to
meet zone airflow demands. The outside air, return and
exhaust dampers must be integrated with supply air to ensure
proper pressure relationship and maintain minimum ventilation
airflow.
b) Fan speed control: The controller shall measure duct static

pressure and modulate supply fan VSD speed to maintain
optimized duct static pressure setpoint.
c) Each AHU controller shall be networked with all room DDC

controllers to obtain airflow requests, derived from damper
position and meeting airflow and space requirements.
d) An air-flow station shall continuously monitor total supply air fan
volume and main branch in CMH and send output to BMS.
e) Emergency purging: The purging fan shall be activated by

activation of manual switch and shall maintain min. 10 ACH
and max 15 ACH for recirculation lab.
2.8 AIRFLOW TRACKING CONTROL
Total system return air shall continuously track supply air CMH
according to following relationship. RA (CMH) = SA (CMH) – (EA
(CMH) + PA (CMH) + TA (CMH))
a. Supply airflow (SA) is measured continuously by airflow
measuring station.
b. Exhaust airflow (EA)
i) Occupied period: Sum of exhaust
ii) Unoccupied period: 0
c. Pressurisation Air/ Exfiltration (PA)
The controller shall maintain pressure zoning and

directional airflow as required.
d. Transfer air (TA)
e. Return airflow control: The Return Air fan (if available in

the system) shall be enabled in unison with supply fan
and its speed shall be controlled in sequence along with
mixing dampers to maintain lab supply/ return CMH
tracking offset to keep to area desired airflow/ pressure
relationship with respect to ambient and adjacent
spaces.
PS/M/S1/11
MECHANICAL WORKS
Airflow measuring station shall continuously monitor

total system return volume in CMH and send output to
BAS.
Unoccupied mode:
The unit shall normally be off and be enabled as

necessary to satisfy user definable minimum number of
cooling requests(based on motion or lighting interlock).
Fan speed control and pressure monitoring alarms:
High supply air static pressure: If the supply air static

pressure is 25% greater than maximum limit of DP
setpoint.
Low supply air static pressure: If supply air static

pressure is 25% less than effective setpoint.
All laboratory rooms shall have differential pressure

monitoring with respect to adjacent room.
2.9 FUME HOOD EXHAUST
a) All fume hoods shall be linked to room controller. When fume

hoods is operating (fume hood sash raised), the room
controller shall reduces/closes the general exhaust. If does not
return offset to its setpoint, room controller shall increase
supply air until balance. Room controller adjusts offset if room
pressure differential deviates from setpoint.
b) When fume hood sash lowered, the hood controls decrease

exhaust flow to maintain face velocity. The room controller
reduces supply to min. volume. If does not return to setpoint,
room controller increases the general exhaust air volume until
offset is achieved and lab balanced. Room controller to adjust
offset if room pressure differential deviates from setpoint.
c) For re-circulation labs with separate make-up air, the make-up

air for fume hood or BSC shall be through laminar flow diffuser
and interlock with the fume hood exhaust without affecting the
room ventilation.
d) All fume hood exhaust duct shall be internally coated with

chemical resistance telfon TEFE (polytetrafluoroethylene)
coating.
PS/M/S1/12
MECHANICAL WORKS
3. Rules and Regulations
3.1 The works and all plant, equipment and materials forming part of this
Contract shall comply in all respect with any relevant Statutory
Regulation, Bye-Laws and other Regulations currently in force. In
addition, current Rules and Requirements of the following bodies (the
latest edition) shall be complied with:
a) The Electricity Act ( Electricity Installations) Regulations.
b) National Environment Agency and PUB, Environmental

Protection and Management Act, The Water Pollution Control
and Drainage Act, Environment Public Health Act and
Regulations.
c) Building and Construction Authority.
d) The Ministry of Manpower, ie., The Workplace Safety & Health

Act
e) Fire Safety and Shelter Department
f) The installation shall comply to the following latest Code of

Practice:
i) SS 638 : Code of practice for electrical installations
ii) SS 645 : Code of practice for the installation and

servicing of electrical fire alarm systems
iii) SS 530 : Code of practice for energy efficiency standard

for building services and equipment
iv) SS 553 : Code of practice for air-conditioning and

mechanical ventilation in buildings
v) SS 554 : Code of practice for indoor air quality for air-

conditioned buildings
vi) SS 575 : Code of practice for fire hydrant, rising mains

and hose reel systems
vii) SS 636: Code of practice for water services
viii) SS 608 : Code of practice for manufactured gas pipe

installation
ix) SS CP 52 : Code of Practice for Automatic Fire

Sprinkler System
x) SS 551: Code of practice for earthing
xi) SS 641: Code of practice for fire safety for laboratories

using chemicals
g) All other Authorities having jurisdiction over the installation of

equipment and carrying out this contract works in the locality.
PS/M/S1/13
MECHANICAL WORKS
3.2 The Contractor shall obtain and complete all notices required by the
above Authorities as necessary and shall obtain all consents
necessary for the various works to be executed and shall pay all fees
in connection therewith.
3.3 The work shall also be carried out strictly in accordance with the
current editions of all applicable British Standards or other National
Standard acceptable to the S.O.. All electrical installations and
materials supplied shall comply with Singapore Standard SS 638,
Code of Practice for Wiring of Electrical Equipment of Building and to
be approved by the PUB.
3.4 All Codes, Acts, Standards and regulations shall be the latest
published edition.
3.5 Where discrepancy arises, the provisions in the Singapore Standards

shall take precedence on all matters relating to the works.
3.6 The equipments that offered and selected shall comply with SS 530 for
the energy efficiency. S.O. shall have the final approval on the
equipment that offer for base on the energy consumption and efficient.
4. Noise Level and Sound Control
4.1 All installed plants are to be reasonably quiet in operation. Preference

will be given to equipment operating at low noise level.
4.2 Vibration isolators shall be installed where necessary so as to

eliminate the transmission of vibration.
4.3 During initial testing operation of the installation, the Contractor is to

correct for any undue noise and to make any adjustment and
modifications necessary for this purpose.
4.4 The noise/sound level in the various areas due to operation of

equipment shall not exceed the recommended standard by local
Authority or ASHRAE whichever is the lowest.
4.5 Special care is to be exercised in the manufacture of equipment and

installation of ductwork and outlets to keep air borne noise down to a
practical minimum.
Spaces dBA NC RT60 at 500 Hz (s)

Research/ working laboratories 45 40 0.5-0.7
Teaching laboratories 35 30 0.8-1.0
Office areas/ College rooms 45 40 0.5 – 0.7
Meeting/ Conference Room 35 30 0.5 – 0.7
Multi-function room 35 30 0.8-1.0
Common areas 55 50 < 1.0
PS/M/S1/14
MECHANICAL WORKS
5. Permits and Fees
The Contractor shall procure all permits and pay all fees and charges incurred
in connection with this Contract.
6. The Specification
6.1 This Specification is intended to set out in general outline the minimum
requirements and standards of installation for the various units of
equipment and works it covers. Provision set out, or claim made in the
successful Tender which are in excess of, or improved upon the basic
requirements of the Specification shall unless otherwise determined by
the S.O. become part of the requirements of the Specification whether
or not they are subsequently incorporated in addenda to the
Specification.
6.2 The S.O. shall be the sole judge of what constitute an improvement
upon or exceeds the requirements of the Specification.
6.3 The Specification shall be read in conjunction with the Tender

Drawings (as per Schedule of Drawings) and are intended to be
mutually explanatory and complementary to one another. All works
and specification called for by one, i.e. Specification or Drawings even
if not by the other shall be fully executed and complied with in total.
7. Materials and Workmanship
7.1 Unless expressedly stated to the contrary, all materials, and equipment
supplied by the Contractor shall comply with the applicable Singapore
Standards (S.S.) or British Standards (B.S.) Specifications approved
by the S.O.
7.2 Where a standard is referred to, that standard shall be the latest
published edition thereof, unless otherwise stated.
7.3 All materials and equipment supplied shall be new and of the best type
for each particular purpose and of the first quality with regard to
design, manufacture and performance.
7.4 The equipment and materials shall be suitably designed and

constructed for safe, proper and continuous operation under all
conditions described or implied in this Specification without undue
heat, strain, vibration, corrosion or other operating difficulties.
7.5 Unless otherwise specified, the equipment and material within the
scope of this Specification shall be of a standard proven design.
Design incorporating components which may be considered prototype
in nature will not be accepted.
7.6 Equipment and equipment components shall be designed and

supported to permit free expansion and contraction without causing
excessive strains, distortion or leakage.
PS/M/S1/15
MECHANICAL WORKS
7.7 Parts subject to wear, corrosion or other deterioration, or requiring

adjustment, inspection or repair shall be accessible and capable of
reasonably convenient removal, replacement and repair. All such
parts shall be of suitable material for keeping maintenance to a
minimum.
7.8 The equipment shall be designed to permit replacement of parts and

ease of access during inspection, maintenance and repair.
7.9 Vibration, noise, mechanical and thermal stresses and susceptibility to

corrosion and erosion shall not be greater than with similar plant of first
class design and workmanship operating under similar conditions.
7.10 All works shall be carried out in accordance with the best engineering
practice by experience tradesmen of appropriate grades to the
approval of the S.O..
7.11 Where disagreement occur between the Drawings and the

Specification or within either document itself, the item or arrangement
of better quality, greater quantities, or higher cost shall be deemed to
be included in this Contract.
8. Site Climatic Conditions
All equipment and works installed shall be capable of operating effectively and
efficiently under the following site conditions:
Maximum Temperature : 35oC dry bulb

28oC wet bulb
Average Temperature : 32oC dry bulb

26.5oC wet bulb
Relative Humidity : 70% to 98%
9. Shop Drawings
9.1 The Contractor shall immediately upon the award of the Contract
prepare and submit to the S.O. for approval all plant and equipment
layout drawings showing full details within four weeks. Detailed
calculations shall be submitted where applicable. All equipment and
materials proposed shall be submitted for approval.
9.2 Shop drawings shall cover complete details for the following but not
limited to:
a) Operation loading of all items of plant, equipment and

accessories.
b) Dimensions of all plant, equipment and accessories which

include the details drawings of superstructure construction
necessary to finalise the structural requirements.
PS/M/S1/16
MECHANICAL WORKS
c) Equipment room layout, showing all clearances for operating

and servicing.
d) Control equipment and system, wiring and control diagrams

and power requirements.
e) Vibration Isolation Equipment
f) Hangers and supports
g) Foundations
h) Chases, drains, openings in walls, floors, roof slabs and

beams.
i) Piping, ducting and electrical cable runs.
j) Existing services layout.
k) All other items as is reasonably required by the S.O.
9.3 These layout drawings shall be based generally on the S.O.'s

drawings, modified only as required to suit the specified materials and
equipment to be provided, to fit in with the latest available information
on building construction details and the requirements of other services
and equipment and also to incorporate any improvements proposed by
the Contractor.
9.4 The drawings shall be drawn by fully qualified draftsman with

experience in relevant Installation Works. The drawings shall be done
in ink, and shall be neat and clearly legible.
9.5 The drawings shall be drawn in the same scale as the S.O.'s drawings.
Details shall be drawn in larger scales. Where applicable, symbols
the same as those in the S.O.'s drawings shall be used and all other
symbols shall conform with the acceptable local drafting practice.
9.6 Legend for all symbols shall be shown on every drawing.
9.7 Three (3) copies of each drawing shall be submitted for approval not
later than four weeks after award of the Contract. Drawings with
inadequate details and not conforming to the requirements as stated
above will not be considered.
9.8 Upon approval of the drawings, the Contractor shall deliver seven (7)
copies of each approved drawing to the S.O. for the purpose of
Contract administration.
9.9 The drawings shall be submitted in ample time for review and approval
by the S.O. and no work shall be carried out until such drawings are
approved. The Contractor shall allow a period of not less than three
(3) weeks for the S.O. to study the drawings for approval.
PS/M/S1/17
MECHANICAL WORKS
9.10 It is the onus of the Contractor to ensure that his drawings conform to
the requirements of the Specification and that they are approved by
the S.O. early.
9.11 Inspection of shop and working drawings is not to be considered as a

guarantee of measurements or building conditions. Where drawings
are inspected and approved by the S.O. such approval does not in any
way relieve the Contractor from his responsibility nor from the
necessity of furnishing material or performing work required by the
Drawings and Specification which shall in the event of a dispute, take
precedence over shop drawings.
9.12 Schedule of submission of shop drawings shall be submitted for

approval not later than 2 weeks after award of the Contract.
10. Tender Submission
The Sub-Contractor shall complete the following schedules (completed in full)

together with all additional technical submission etc.:
 Schedule of Rates
 Schedule of Technical Data (with full catalogues)
 Schedule of Asset Capitalisation
 Schedule of Deviation from Specifications
 Schedule of Proposed Comprehensive Maintenance
 Schedule of Spares
 Schedule of Tenderer’s Particulars
Failure to submit all the above items in full will render the tenderer to be liable
for disqualification and consequent void and rejection. All information is to be
filled in completely. All technical submission (catalogues and technical data)
are to be submitted (4 sets) before the award of tender
11. Programme
prepare and submit to the S.O. for approval the detailed time schedule
for the progress of the work within 2 weeks.
11.2 The schedule shall be submitted with ample time for review and
approval by the S.O. The Contractor shall allow a period of not less
than 2 weeks for the S.O. to study the schedule for approval.
11.3 The schedule shall also indicate the dates of:
a) submission of shop drawings
b) delivery of materials
PS/M/S1/18
MECHANICAL WORKS
c) installation programme and cleaning up, etc.
d) testing and commissioning and completion
12. As Installed Drawings and Manuals
12.1 Prior to the completion of the works, and not later than 3 weeks of the
date of Substantial Completion, the Contractor shall submit to the
satisfaction of the S.O. five (5) hard cover bound sets of
Comprehensive Operation and Maintenance Manuals and Data
Sheets published by the equipment manufacturers, five (5) hard cover
bound sets of "As-Installed" drawings and five (5) sets of "As-Installed"
drawings in AutoCad (latest release), Building information modeling,
"As-Installed" drawings in Pdf and Scanned copies of Comprehensive
Operation and Maintenance Manuals and Data Sheets published by
the equipment manufacturers (latest release) burn into USB Flash
Drive or DVD/CD-R disks subject to S.O.'s approval.
12.2 These instruction manuals shall be typed in good quality paper and
neatly bound into a manual having rigid covers. A draft shall be
approved before final submission.
12.3 The operation manual and As-Built drawings shall be bound with hard
covers.
12.4 All "As-Installed" electrical single line drawings and control diagram
shall be endorsed and signed by the Contractor's Professional
Engineer.
12.5 The manuals shall contain and be set out as follows:
a) Description of System
This section shall simply but clearly describe the operation of

the system and the equipment.
b) Summary of Equipment List
This section shall include all major equipment complete with

makes, models, serial number with technical catalogues (at
least one set to be original and others in legible print).
c) Spare Parts, Special Tools and Equipment List
Include manufacturer's list of all recommended spare parts for

replacement and special tools and equipment for maintenance
used.
PS/M/S1/19
MECHANICAL WORKS
d) Operational Procedure
This section shall fully described start and stop sequence of

operation; programme for alternate running of plant to even out
wear and testing procedures for all sections of the plant,
including emergency procedures and breakdown trouble-
shooting.
e) Manufacturer's Handbook
Include Manufacturer's technical literature on all components of

the installation, particularly as applying to operation and
maintenance. The technical literature shall include all major
equipment, control instruments and equipment used and other
related materials
f) Installation Instruction
g) Maintenance and Trouble Shooting Instruction
Include manufacturer's technical literature on all components of

maintenance.
h) Equipment Operation Instruction
i) Hang-up Instructions
j) Equipment Suppliers
This section shall comprise a full list of names, addresses and

telephone numbers (including after office hours numbers) of all
Contractors and Suppliers of equipment (local and overseas)
incorporated in the installation.
k) Maintenance & Breakdown Service
This section shall comprise a list of the names and telephone

numbers of the Company's Maintenance and Servicing Section
personnel for normal maintenance and breakdown request.
PS/M/S1/20
MECHANICAL WORKS
12.6 Operating Instruction
The Contractor shall mount in glazed frames permanently fixed in

suitable positions at all plants that require to be operated, the following
information:
a) Safety precautions to be observed before start-up
b) Star-up sequence of operation
c) Shut-down sequence of operation
d) Instruction on emergency shut-down
e) Safety precautions to be observed if any equipment is to be

shut-down for any extended periods.
f) Programme for alternating the operation of parallel or standby

equipment to even out wear.
g) Functional diagram or mimic display to explain graphically

operating instructions
h) Steps to be taken in case of plant failure
12.7 In the event of the Contractor failing to fulfill the aforesaid

requirements, the S.O. shall reserve the right to obtain all of the
required operating and maintenance manuals by other means and
shall deduct all cost incurred thereof from monies due to the
Contractor. In addition the S.O. shall forfeit the rights of the Contractor
in relation to further payment and the issue of the Certificate of
Substantial Completion will also be withheld until he has so complied
accordingly.
13. Fixing to Building
13.1 Suitable metal expansion devices shall be used where plugs are
necessary for securing equipment, pipes, conduits and other fittings.
Wooden plugs will not be allowed. Holes shall be drilled by electrical/
pneumatic rotary drills wherever possible. Electrical and/or pneumatic
percussion drills and tools are not permitted.
13.2 Any fixing device may on the roof struts shall not be acceptable unless
certified by the structural Professional Engineer and approved by the
S.O..
14. Metrification
All gauges and indicators shall be provided with scales marked in SI units as
well as in relevant Imperial units.
PS/M/S1/21
MECHANICAL WORKS
15. Tropicalised
All materials and equipment to be supplied and installed shall be tropicalised.
16. Samples
16.1 Samples to be submitted by the Contractor shall be for the following

but not limited to:
a) Ductwork
b) Duct insulation
c) Diffusers and grilles
d) Pipes and joints
e) Hangers
f) Sealants
g) Pipe insulation
h) VAV box
i) Venturi Valve
j) Fast respond variable air volume box
k) Duct heater
l) Bubble-tight damper (BTD)
m) Air-tight damper (ATD)
n) Low-leakage damper (LLD)
o) Filters
p) Hot water heater coil
16.2 In addition, the Contractor shall also submit any other samples as may
be required by the S.O..
17. Jointing of Pipes
17.1 The method of jointing for the various pipes shall be as described
hereafter in the appropriate sections of the Specification.
17.2 Where differential movement may occur between two sections of a

system or where excessive expansion and contraction may take place,
flexible connections shall be used, irrespective of whether they are
shown in the Drawings or not.
17.3 Flexible connections shall be of stainless steel bellow type to suit the
duty and temperature requirement of the fluid conveyed in the pipe.
They shall be complete with restraining tie-rods and shall be of
approved make.
PS/M/S1/22
MECHANICAL WORKS
17.4 Adequate number of flanged or unison connections shall be provided

especially in plant rooms, service ducts and adjacent to fixtures so as
to facilitate removal of the pipe and equipment for inspection or repair.
17.5 Where pipes cannot be jointed by standard fittings they shall be jointed
using mechanical coupling system.
18. Fixing of Pipes
18.1 All piping installed under this Contract shall be sufficiently supported
with hangers, supports, beams clamps, slips, inserts and mounting
devices suitable for the type of pipework. Provision for expansion of
piping shall be allowed when locating pipe hangers.
18.2 In general, hangers shall be of individual type with provision for vertical
adjustment.
18.3 Where structural members are pre-stressed, hangers shall be installed

in the structural members before the pouring of concrete.
18.4 If this is not practicable due to site condition, the hangers shall be
secured to the structure by means of anchor bolts or power driven
bolts at locations where the prestressed tensions are not affected.
18.5 All piping from pumping equipment shall be effectively isolated from
vibration. Spring isolator type of supports shall be installed within 5
metres from the pumping equipment and neoprene isolation pad insert
shall be provided between the fixing clamp or holder-bat and the type
for the remaining pipeline.
18.6 The type of vibration isolators to be used shall be submitted together

with the shop drawings of the pumping equipment to the S.O. for
approval.
18.7 Where pipes pass through walls or floors G.I. pipe sleeves shall be
provided. These shall be extended through the full finished thickness
of the wall or floor and be secured against movement.
18.8 Gaps between the pipe sleeve and the pipe shall be filled up with high
density fiberglass and caulked with fire-rated compound and finish
flush to the face of the pipe sleeve.
18.9 All fixings, hangers, holder-bats, brackets, etc. shall be hot dipped
galvanised to BS 729 or equivalent. In addition, for outdoor
applications, two coats of epoxy paints shall be applied.
18.10 The spacing of fixings or brackets shall be as specified in other

sections of this Specification.
18.11 All fixings shall be carefully aligned and spaced. In the case of
horizontal piping, the fixings shall be so constructed as to enable
proper adjustment in the height of the pipeline to be effected.
PS/M/S1/23
MECHANICAL WORKS
18.12 Typical details of piping supports required are as shown in the

drawings. These shall be complied with unless otherwise approved by
the S.O..
19. Mock-Ups
19.1 The Contractor shall be required to construct mock-ups of typical

installation of services and common items of equipment in conjunction
with other trades on site as and when directed by the S.O..
19.2 The Contractor shall be deemed to have allowed in his tender price for
these mock-ups.
19.3 Apart from the above provision of mock up units specified above the
Contractor shall where required submit samples where specified to
S.O. for review and approval before commencement of construction
and installation work.
19.4 Mock-ups shall be constructed to ensure proper installation and co-

ordination of all services on site. The Contractor shall replace and
modify such mock-up and sample at his own cost, if deemed
necessary by the S.O. whose decision shall be final and conclusive.
The approved mock-up and sample shall be used as the basis of
actual/permanent work.
19.5 Any approval granted by the S.O. shall not relieve the Contractor of his
responsibility in ensuring that all works executed conform to the
Contract terms and conditions. The Contractor shall bear all cost
arising out of errors/omissions in samples and mock-ups.
19.6 The Contractors shall remove at his own cost all mock-up and
samples when no longer required as directed by the S.O..
20. Identification and Labelling
20.1 Complete identification and labelling shall be provided for the various
sections of the work in accordance with Building Control Division and
other relevant Authority's requirements and to the approval of the S.O..
20.2 Additional requirements as requested by the Fire Safety Bureau to suit

local conditions shall also be complied with.
20.3 All equipment, valves, etc. shall be clearly and legibly labelled using
engraved aluminum plates of minimum dimensions of 75 x 50 x 2 mm
thick.
21. Co-ordination of Work
21.1 The Contractor shall check and ensure that all equipment provided are
suitable for the space allowed. The Contractor shall, if necessary,
locate these equipment before the erection of the walls and doors. All
abortive work arising from failure to comply with the above shall be
paid for by the Contractor.
PS/M/S1/24
MECHANICAL WORKS
21.2 The Contractor shall be responsible for the proper and accurate
setting out of his work. He shall furnish all necessary information on
the installation to the S.O. and the Contractor for work co-ordination
purposes. The Sub-Contractor shall also obtain information on routes
of other services from the Contractor before commencing any works to
any floor of the building. He shall co-operate with the Contractor and
all other contractors on the job and his work shall be suitably planned
to ensure proper co-ordination with other contractors.
21.3 The Contractor shall be held solely responsible for making necessary
arrangements and/or co-ordinating with all relevant authorities,
specialists, other Contractors, etc, to ensure satisfactory completion of
this Contract such as TFP, CSC, etc.
21.4 The Contractor shall inform the S.O. of any discrepancies in

construction details installed on site (eg pipe size, etc) as compared
with "approved" drawings owing to unforeseen site conditions. The
Contractor shall bear the full cost of rectification if the failure to comply
with the above clause leads to a malfunction of the system.
21.5 The Sub-Contractor shall check on all building works (such as holes,
openings, grooves, required on floors, walls, etc) that are required to
be done as early as possible in order that holes, openings, etc. may be
formed as the building work proceeds.
21.1 The Sub-Contractor shall allow for the co-ordination and interfacing of
his work in line with the works of other contractors. Such co-ordination
and interfacing shall include for permitting other contractors to
complete their work before proceeding to complete the balance of
works under this Sub-Contract. In the event of failure by the Sub-
Contractor to allow for such co-ordination and interphasing, no claim
whatsoever would be entertained for taking out and re-installing works
to accommodate the installation of equipment and works by other
contractors. The Sub-Contractor shall obtain the programmes and
work schedules of other contractors and include them in his
programme chart.
21.2 The Sub-Contractor shall allow for the services of a Professional

Engineer (PE) to provide consultation with the S.O. and relevant
authority throughout the duration of the Sub-Contract Works and shall
be authorised to act on behalf of the Sub-Contractor.
21.6 The Sub-Contractor shall inform the S.O. of any discrepancies in

construction details installed on site (e.g. pipe size, etc) as compared
with approved drawings owing to unforeseen site conditions. The Sub-
Contractor shall bear the full cost of rectification if the failure to comply
with the above clause leads to a malfunction of the system
21.7 Ceiling pattern as shown in Tender Drawing is given as a guide only,

exact position of ceiling suspended equipment has to be verified on
site and adjusted, if necessary, without additional cost to the Contract.
PS/M/S1/25
MECHANICAL WORKS
22. Other Requirements
22.1 The Contractor is to confirm the existing services to be dismantled and

terminated and to be incorporated in the shop drawings. The
Contractor is particularly requested to ensure that there is no damages
to existing and other services as any damages shall be rectified
immediately within the same day by the Contractor at their own cost.
22.2 Liaison with clients/building maintenance team for M&E services

isolation for the proposed retrofitting works shall deem to be included.
22.3 The Contractor shall be deemed to have inspected and examined the
site and its surroundings and acquaint himself as to the nature of the
existing works, buildings and the site, the extent and nature of the
works and materials, article or equipment required for the necessary
completion of the Contract Works, the means of communication and
access to the Site, and in general obtain for himself all necessary
information as to risks, contingencies and all other factors that will
influence or affect his tender. No claim whatsoever of any of the
aforesaid will be entertained. Existing services as shown on tender
drawings are indicative only.
22.4 The Contractor shall ensure that while carrying out works at the
renovations area, the M & E services serving the non-renovation area
shall be functional at all times. The Contractor shall deem to have
included all necessary temporary diversion & protection works to
ensure the continuous functioning of non-renovation areas.
22.5 Diversion and alteration works to the existing services shall be carried
out after office hour or weekends, if deem necessary, to facilitate the
continuous operation of the building.
22.6 All major existing equipment, materials, panels and fittings that are not
in use shall be dismantled in good condition and returned to
clients/building maintenance team.
22.7 The Contractor shall give minimum 2-week notice to the S.O. for any
shutdown of existing M&E Services.
23. Testing
23.1 The Contractor shall allow in his Tender price for the cost of all
acceptance tests required as hereinafter specified or as required by
the authorities having jurisdiction over the installation.
23.2 All water and electricity used during the testing and commissioning of
the systems in this Contract shall be borne by the Contractor including
the supply, installation and dismantling of necessary pipework meters
and associated works.
23.3 All pipework which are to be encased or concealed shall be tested and
approved before they are finally enclosed.
PS/M/S1/26
MECHANICAL WORKS
23.4 The Contractor shall give the S.O. seven (7) days notice of his
readiness to carry out acceptance test and shall submit for his
approval a complete and detailed schedule of his tests to be carried
out.
23.5 Before the commencement of acceptance tests, the Contractor shall

have brought the installation to a state of substantial completion and
shall have completed all of his preliminary testing and adjusted the
equipment to its proper running order.
23.6 During the testing period, no modifications, adjustment or other work

on the installation shall be carried out without the permission of the
S.O.. Should there be any contravention of this requirement, the
results of all tests completed may be rejected and a retest ordered.
23.7 No acceptance test shall be carried out except in the presence of the
S.O. or the representative appointed for the purpose.
23.8 Should the installation fail to perform in accordance with the

requirements of the Specification and/or authorities, the S.O. may
reject the whole or any part of it.
23.9 The testing period shall form part of the Contract period and no
extension of the time will be granted by reasons of any extension of
the testing period to permit rectification, modification, adjustment or
retesting of the installation except where testing has been delayed or
retesting has been necessitated by circumstances beyond the control
of the Contractor.
23.10 The Contractor shall make all arrangements and supply all labour,
equipment, instruments and tools for necessary tests to be carried out
as required by the BCD, the Fire Safety Bureau and other relevant
Authorities, in addition to all those tests as specifically called for in this
Specification.
23.11 The Contractor shall also be required to conduct all tests as and when
requested by the Authorities during the Maintenance and Guarantee
Period.
24. Certification by Contractor
24.1 On completion of all performance testing as required in the

Specification, the Contractor shall be required to submit all test reports
to the S.O. for approval prior to acceptance of the installation. The
Contractor shall also be required to certify in writing to the S.O. that the
installation is in full compliance with the requirements of the
Specification and the Codes to which they are designed by a
Professional Engineer/Licensed Electrical Worker.
PS/M/S1/27
MECHANICAL WORKS
24.2 The Contractor shall engage his own Professional Engineer to

endorse and submit four (4) sets of the original `Certificate of
Supervision' and drawings for the respective installation works one
month before system handing over date. All tests and inspections
required by the relevant authorities for his installation works for
obtaining of TFP/TOP/CSC of the building shall be carried out by the
Contractor. The Contractor's PE/LEW shall be present during the
TFP/TOP/CSC inspection.
24.3 The Contractor is to note that his Tender price shall deem to include
for all testing requirement.
24.4 The Certification of Substantial Completion will not be issued unless

the clauses as stated above are complied with to the satisfaction of the
S.O..
25. Operation and Maintenance
25.1 The Contractor shall train the Employer's operating personnel in the
operation and maintenance of the plants.
25.2 The period of instruction shall be not less than three (3) weeks and
with the plant in continuous normal operation suitable and competent
instruction representing the Contractor/Manufacturer shall be required
full time on site during the said period.
26. Maintenance and Guarantee
26.1 The whole of the work to be performed under the Contract shall be
completed and left in running order to the satisfaction of the S.O..
26.2 The performance of the whole installation shall be guaranteed to

conform with the requirements of this Specification. The Contractor
shall, without additional charge replace any works which prove faulty
from workmanship or materials and fully maintain the whole installation
for a period of twelve (12) months after the commencement of the
Defects Liability Period.
26.3 The Defects Liability Period shall commence from the date of issuing
of the Certificate of Substantial Completion.
26.4 During the Defects Liability Period the Contractor shall be responsible
for all costs involved in balancing, setting and adjustment of controls,
and supplying, during the period stipulated, all test equipment and
instruments deemed necessary by the S.O.. During the Defects
Liability Period, the Contractor shall also carry out the maintenance
work as shown in the Schedules.
26.5 All tests if required by the relevant Authorities shall be carried out by
the Contractor.
PS/M/S1/28
MECHANICAL WORKS
27. Star Rates
27.1 Where the Contractor contends that work is not of a similar character
or executed under similar conditions as priced in the Schedule of
Rates he shall give to the S.O. a written notice within seven days from
the time of receipt of the instruction from the S.O. with regard to such
work for the S.O. consideration. Unit rates for such items shall be
termed "Star Rates" and will be indicated thus, if so decided by the
S.O..
27.2 The Contractor shall declare that the prices quoted in the supporting
vouchers/invoices are nett of trade discounts when calculating
variation.
27.3 The S.O. may request for documentary evidence of the amount paid
by the Contractor to his suppliers and/or Contractors.
28. Quality Assurance
28.1 The Contractor shall establish, document and maintain a quality

system to demonstrate his commitment to quality in construction. As
far as possible, the quality system shall be formulated in accordance
with the requirements of SS 308 : Part 2 : 1988 - Specification for
Quality Assurance in Production and Installation.
28.2 Specifically, the Contractor shall plan, establish, implement and

maintain a project quality plan setting out, as a minimum, the following
:
a) the quality objectives to be attained;
b) the specific allocation of responsibilities and authority during

the different phases of the project;
c) the specific quality procedures, methods and work instructions

to be applied, including detailed procedures for each of the
major work activities;
d) suitable testing, inspection, examination and audit programmes

at the appropriate stages;
e) a method of changes and modifications in a quality plan as the

project proceeds; and
f) other measures necessary to meet the objectives.
28.3 The Contractor's project quality plan shall be documented in the form
of a project quality manual and project operating procedures which
shall be submitted to the S.O. within 30 days from the date of letter of
acceptance of tender. The quality control procedures shall be
submitted at least 14 days before the commencement of the activity.
PS/M/S1/29
MECHANICAL WORKS
28.4 Four copies of the project quality manual and project operating
procedures shall be submitted to the S.O.. A further copy shall be
retained on the site.
28.5 Any comment, advice or acceptance of the project quality plan by the
S.O. shall not, in any way, alter or diminish the Contractor's obligations
under the Contract for the quality of the Work.
28.6 The Contractor shall adequately price for the above provision in the
Preliminaries.
29. Instruction Manual for Essential Facility Provision in Building
Beside the training, operation and maintenance manual that need to be

submitted. The sub-contractor shall required to prepare the instruction
manual, respond instruction and recommended maintenance regimes on the
system which being installed in the building and submit to the SO and
Engineer for approval. This information shall be the extract and overall
summary with equipment detail for those fire related and critical provision
essential provision
The manual shall include the emergency respond action to be taken in which
when the building is in fire or other critical condition. The documentation shall
be a controlled copy with all the amended revision recorded.
The Sub-contractor shall coordinate and compile with the builder and other
M&E specialist Sub-contractor for the instruction manual
The instruction manual shall consist of the following:
a) Project Title, all the consultant firm, Qualified Person, Contractors, etc.
b) Content , Revision and controlled sheet on amendments
c) Description of the building, type of system that being installed in the

building, system compliance
d) Summary of the equipments and the its operation procedure during

emergency
e) Emergency respond, such as Locating, Identifying, Checking,

Respond and Recovery.
f) Flow chart on the procedure. ( One set to be paste at the Fire

command Centre and at the relevant equipment)
g) Recommend Maintenance Regime
PS/M/S1/30
MECHANICAL WORKS
The system shall include but not limited to the followings:
a) Architectural - Escape staircase location and the routing
b) PWD -Location, emergency respond and the recommended procedure

on evacuation
c) Two way EVC - Type of system, Fireman intercom, PWD intercom,

Emergency respond, 3-way conferencing ( Satellite FCC, Local FCC
and Local PWD handset)
d) Emergency Secondary Power Supply – Generator location, fuel tank

detail, Underground fuel detail.
e) Fire alarm system - Stage of Alarm, Location, emergency respond and

the recommended procedure on evacuation
f) Sprinkler – Classification of System, Stage of sprinkler, Location,

emergency respond and the recommended procedure on evacuation
g) Gas Suppression system- Type of system, Stage of Alarm, Location,

h) Medical Gas/ Laboratory Gas - Type of system, Type of Alarm,

Location, emergency respond and the recommended procedure on
evacuation
i) Petroleum and Flammable Materials - recommend good practice,

emergency respond and recommended procedure during emergency
j) Lab ACMV, Exhaust, equipment exhaust and Purging system - Type of

system, Type of Alarm, Location, emergency respond and the
recommended procedure on evacuation
k) Smoke Control system and car park ventilation system - Type of

l) Kitchen Exhaust - Fan and air cleaner location and equipment detail,
Hood detail, Gas suppression system
m) One way EVC - The setup, type of messages, emergency respond and
recommended procedure during emergency
n) Fire Command Centre and Fire fighting facility location - Type of

system, emergency respond and the recommended procedure on
evacuation
o) Lift - Type of system, Location, emergency respond and the

recommended procedure on evacuation, PWD evacuation.
PS/M/S1/31
MECHANICAL WORKS
p) Others – System that affect the building fire safety and its
recommended procedure on evacuation.
Sub-contractor shall liaise with the main-contractor for the final compiling and
combine of the instruction manual into a copy. 5 set of softcopy (including
editable copy) and hardcopy shall be submitted during the handing over of
building or after the training.
PS/M/S1/32
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION
MECHANICAL WORKS
SECTION 7 - WATER PUMPS
1. General
1.1 This section covers the supply, delivery, installation, painting, testing,
commissioning and twelve (12) months free maintenance and warranty of the
pumps and associated accessories.
1.2 All pumps offered shall be of high quality and in accordance with the
specifications and manufactured from original licensee in that particular
country. Any pump manufactured under license outside the country of origin
shall not be accepted.
1.3 All pumps offered shall be able to meet the space constraints.
1.4 All pumps selected shall be of the highest efficiency, super premium to meet
the green mark and power efficiency.
2. Pump Capacity
The water pumps shall be supplied and installed generally as shown on the Tender
Drawings. Each pump set shall be capable of circulating not less than the nominal
rate specified in the Schedule of Equipment of the Tender Drawings against the
system resistance.
3. Pump Selection
3.1 The pump set shall be selected for their particular applications in regard to
water temperatures, ambient air temperatures and conditions, suction head,
static head, lift and working pressure.
3.2 Nominal duties of the pump given may be used as an approximate guide
only.
3.3 The Sub-Contractor is required to carry out the necessary calculations

relating to the pressure drop of the equipment selected by them, and of the
system piping so that the pump set is capable of providing the necessary
output of the designated head. Detailed calculations of pump heads shall be
submitted to the S.O. for approval prior to the purchase of the pumps.
3.4 The chilled water pumps shall be carefully selected to operate on the flat-
point on the flow characteristics curve, thus giving a significant change in
volume for small changes in pressure. Whereas the condenser water pump
shall be carefully selected to operate on the `steep-point' on the flow
characteristic curve.
TS/M/S7/1
MECHANICAL WORKS
3.5 All chilled water pumps shall be selected with high efficiency motor.
3.6 Pump static efficiency, when operating at the specified duty, shall be within
5 per cent (5%) of the maximum available static efficiency for the particular
pump.
3.7 Pumps shall be of heavy duty, rugged and reliable design suitable for
continuous 24 hours operation when handling water in the range of 4 to 50°
C.
3.8 Pumps shall be designed to the highest engineering standard and

manufactured from the highest quality material and with strict quality
control. The pumps shall be manufactured in the country of origin of the
original manufacturer.
3.9 All pumps shall be of horizontal or vertical split casing centrifugal type,
direct coupled to the electric motor or diesel engine and mounted on a
common base frame.
3.10 The pump selection shall be such that the impeller diameter fitted for the
design duty is not greater than 90% of the maximum impeller diameter,
which can be fitted, and the duty point efficiency shall be within 5% of the
maximum efficiency. Pump operating efficiency at the duty flow rate and
head shall be at least 90%.
3.11 The pump Impeller is to suit the performance duty specified. The impeller shall
be selected with reduced diameter so that the impeller size may be upgraded
where necessary to accommodate any unforeseen or unexpected increase in
pump head and flow. The impeller selected shall allow at least 10% increase in
pump head at the specified flow rate with motor covering the full range of flow
rate. Pump efficiency shall be within 5% of the maximum efficiency. Pump
impeller operating efficiency at the duty flow rate and head shall be at least 85%.
4. Chilled Water and Condenser Water Pumps
4.1 All pumps shall be enclosed-impeller, non-overloading, single stage

horizontal or vertical split casing or end suction with back pullout
(whichever is stated in the Tender Drawings), centrifugal type. Nominal
duties of the pumps are given in the Drawings and may be used as an
approximate guide only. The Sub-Contractor is required to carry out the
necessary calculations relating to the pressure drop of the equipment selected
and the system piping so that the pump set is capable of providing the
necessary output. All pumps offered shall allow 10% excess required
capacity.
TS/M/S7/2
MECHANICAL WORKS
4.2 The pump speed shall not exceed 1500 rpm. In the event that the recourse
has to be made to pumping equipment operating on speed above 1500 rpm,
approval of the S.O. shall be sought before hand.
4.3 The pumps are to be factory tested to meet the requirements as specified. The
pumps sets are to be tested complete with the offered motor/ engine coupled
to the pump. Documentary evidence of this testing shall be submitted for
approval before the pump can be accepted. The motor couplings shall be of
the flexible pin and bush type and flexible spacer type for end suction
pumps. The pumps shall be mounted on inertia blocks complete with
approved type spring vibration isolators.
4.4 Motors offered shall be of high efficiency type and manufactured from
original manufacturer in that particular country. Any motor manufactured
under license shall not be accepted. All motors shall be of totally enclosed fan
cooled (TEFC), squirrel cage type with a synchronous speed of 1500 rpm and
suitable for connection to a 400V, 3-phase 50 Hz A.C. supply and shall
comply with BS 2613 or NEMA MG1 with class H insulation. The insulation
of the motor shall be of Class H with Class B temperature rise. The
torque/speed characteristic shall be selected to match the pump operation.
Service factor shall be 1.15.
4.5 The following shall also be taken cognizance of in relation to the water
pumps:
a) Construction
Horizontal Split casing pump shall be of single volute double suction
design. End Suction pump shall be of back pull-out for quick and easy
maintenance, allowing good access to all parts, without disturbing piping
or driver and designed in accordance with ISO 2858.
Pump Casing and bearing housings shall be of grey cast iron
(BS1452/T180) and shall be of adequate strength to withstand a
working pressure of 2.1 MPa and 1.6 MPa for Horizontal split casing
pump and end suction pump respectively. Pump shall be tested and
guaranteed to withstand 1.5 times of the working pressure. Renewable
wear ring of similar material shall be provided.
Impeller shall be of Zince Free Bronze (BS1400 Alloy T1) construction,
statically, dynamically and hydraulically balanced to ISO1940/1 and of
grade G6.3 to reduce thrust loads and prolong bearing life.
Shaft shall be stainless steel (ANSI431) complete with shaft sleeves.
Bearings shall be sized to give long life under the toughest conditions
of axial and radial loads. Water throwers and grease seals shall be
provided to protect bearings from moisture and dirt.
TS/M/S7/3
MECHANICAL WORKS
b) Mechanical Seal
Shaft Seal shall be of type QB balanced cartridge type with nitrile
elastomers, Carbon vs Silicon Carbide faces for horizontal split casing
pump and single spring seal for end suction pump.
c) Coupling
Each pump shall be direct connected through a flexible coupling to

an electric motor. All Back pull-out end suction pumps shall be
connected through a flexible spacer type coupling.
d) Motor
The motor shall operate at not more than 1500 rpm and shall have
ample capacity to prevent overloading with pump operating at any
point on its characteristic curve and shall have splash-proof
enclosure. Motor starters shall be reduced-voltage start-type with
weather-resistant enclosure. Protection rating shall be IP 55 with
Class H insulation. Service factor shall be 1.15. Motor shall comply to
IEC 60034-30, energy efficiency shall be class premium IE3 and
above with test standard comply to IEC 60034-2-1or IEEE 112.
Pump motor for chilled water and condenser pumps shall be started
by pump Variable Speed Drive as specified . The VSD specification
shall follow the VSD specification under this technical specification.
e) Pump Electronic Control Soft Starter
i) The electronic control soft starter shall be reduced voltage 3

phase motor type, providing ramp up, run and extended ramp
down features complete with pump control to reduce surges
caused by uncontrolled acceleration and deceleration of
centrifugal pumps. The starting time shall be adjustable from
2 to 30 seconds and stopping time shall be adjustable from 2
to 120 seconds.
ii) The soft starter shall be sized according to the full load
ampere of the motor and shall be suitable for 400 V (+10% / -
15%), 3 phase, 50 Hz (+5%) operation in an ambient
temperature of up to 45oC and relative humidity of up to
100%.
TS/M/S7/4
MECHANICAL WORKS
iii) The soft starter shall be capable of bypass duty. The bypass
contactor shall bypass the soft starter when the motor has
reached its full rated speed.
iv) The soft starter shall consists of the following major

components:
 Thyristor
6 silicon control rectifiers (SCR) connected in inverse
parallel to provide 3 phase full wave control
 Control module
must be encapsulated to prevent dust and moisture
contamination. This module must be field replaceable
 Metal oxide varistor

to protect the control against electrical transients and
electrical noise
 Circuit breaker
must come with shunt trip for the protection of the
motor when there is a shorted SCR and also operate
as an isolation between the starter and the incoming
power supplies
 Motor overload
to protect the control and motor from repetitive or
extended starting conditions as well as running
overload conditions
v) The control module must provide the following:
 over current trip indication.

 control power ON indication.
 Start/Stop indication and contact.
 end of ramp indication and contact.
 provision for tacho generator feedback.
 current monitor indication and contact to indicate
running current above the preset value.
 shunt trip indication and contact.
 motor current display to check ramp up and ramp
down current conditions.
 dip switches/controls to allow the set up of Start, Stop
and Run mode of operations.
TS/M/S7/5
MECHANICAL WORKS
vi) The required adjustments shall be as follows:
 Start up adjustment
ramp up time - this mode adjust the time it takes the
motor to reach full voltage adjustable from 3 to 60
seconds
ramp up initial starting torque - to turn slowly the

instant the start button is pressed
Starting Pulse time - used to provide breakaway

torque for high friction load, adjustable from 0 to 1.5
second at 400 % of full load current
Current Limit - max current setting to limit in rush

ampere during starting contact
 Stopping adjustment
ramp down time - provide deceleration time of 5 to
240 seconds while stopping the motor torque down
advance - in ramp down mode, when the stop button
is pressed, motor speed or voltage will immediately
drop to the set point of TD (0 to 100%). Control will
continue to ramp down to zero speed or voltage,
depending on the RD adjustment
 Run adjustments
current monitor set point (CM) - it must have range
of at least up to 400% of the motor FLA to monitor
the running current after the motor reaches the full
run condition. With CM enabled, if the running
current exceeds the CM set point, the current will
shut down and indicate the situation
power factor correction (PF) - Adjustable from 0 to
100% PF, is used to reduce voltage applied to the
motor under lightly loaded conditions to minimize
motor current with minimum motor load
vii) The following protection shall be incorporated with the

protection system of the soft starter and shall automatically
shut down when any fault occurs:
 over or under current monitor

 phase loss protection
 over current protection
 over temperature trip
 surge voltage trip
 shorted SCR trip
TS/M/S7/6
MECHANICAL WORKS
f) Pump Control
All chilled water pumps shall have pump control function to reduce
surges in the pumping system during the starting/stopping of
centrifugal pumps. It shall be able to control the speeds of the motor
during starting and stopping without feedback devices.
g) Mounting, Connection & Accessories
Each pump and motor shall be mounted on a common cast-iron base

having lipped edges and tapped drainage openings or mounted on a
structural steel base with drip lip or drain pan and tapped drainage
openings. Each pump shall be provided with shaft couplings guard.
Closed couple pumps shall be provided with drip pockets and tapped
drainage openings. Flexible couplings shall be installed at the suction
and discharge connections to the pump and shall be serviceable
without disturbing piping connections.
Pumps shall be installed on suitable vibration isolation pads on

foundation, properly levelled, grouted-in, and re-aligned before
operation, in accordance with the manufacturer's instructions.
Test plugs of reputable make shall be provided at pump discharge

connections as indicated. Drain pipes shall not be smaller than the
leakage drain tapping provided in the base plate or the drip pocket
but in no case shall the drain line be less than 1/2" (13 mm) diameter
pipe size. The drain line shall terminate at the nearest floor trap.
All water pumps shall be suitably insulated with sectional insulation

to prevent condensation. The insulation shall allow access to the
pump casing for servicing and repair.
The Sub-Contractor shall supply and install aluminium alloy motor

enclosure to IP 55 Standard to protect the motor from the weather if
motors are located outdoors.
TS/M/S7/7
MECHANICAL WORKS
4.6 For each pump installation, the following fittings are required as a minimum:
a) Gate valves at suction and at discharge
b) Check valve at discharge.
c) Flexible connections at suction and discharge
d) Eccentric tapered reducer at suction
e) Concentric tapered reducer at discharge
f) Strainer at suction
g) 100 mm diameter pressure gauges complete with stop cock, at

suction and discharge.
4.7 The pump starter/control panel shall be with the following minimum
features:
a) Incoming power supply isolator
b) Incoming supply 'AVAILABLE' indication
c) Main isolator 'ON' indication
d) Duty pump selector (each pump)
e) Auto-manual starting selector (each pump)
f) Pump manual "ON-OF" push buttons (each pump)
g) Pump "Stop" "Running" "Fault" indication (each pump)
h) Kilowatt meter: only one such meter is required per control panel
i) Ammeter: direct reading and approved type (each pump)
j) Voltmeter
k) Anti-condensation heaters
l) Provision for BAS monitoring of the pumps as per Drawings
m) Completely dust proof and protected from jet of water in all

directions (IP 65)
TS/M/S7/8
MECHANICAL WORKS
n) Soft starter complete with by-pass contactor
o) Audio alarm (in addition to item l) to alert that the standby pumps are
running
5. Concrete Inertia Block
5.1 Pump and pump motor shall be installed on common steel or cast iron base
then bolted on the floating inertia block which shall be constructed of the
following dimensions:
Height - Equal to 1/10 the longest span but not less than 150 mm
Length - Length of common base plus 150 mm
Width - Width of common base plus width for supports for eccentric
reducer and long radius elbow on suction side and concentric
increaser and long radius elbow on the discharge side.
5.2 Materials for the inertia block shall be of steel box of the above dimensions
with 2.3 mm thick plates for the four sides. The bottom shall be reinforced
with not less than 2.3 mm diameter steel bar in 300 mm pitch. Concrete shall
be poured into the steel box. The weight of the floating inertia block shall not
be less than 1.5 times of the total weight of pump, motor and the common
base.
6. Vibration Isolators
6.1 Each pump set on the inertial block shall be mounted on vibration isolators
with static spring ribbed neoprene vibration isolators with static deflection of
25 mm minimum. Vibration isolator efficiency shall not be less than 95%.
6.2 Brackets for vibration isolators shall be either welded or bolted to four sides
of the concrete inertia block.
6.3 Vibration isolators shall be equipped with levelling bolts and not less than 6
mm thick ribbed neoprene sound pad on the bottom. The ratio of spring
diameter to its height at the rated deflection shall not be less than 0.8.
7. Air Release and Drain Connection
Air release and drain off pipes to the nearest drainage shall be provided for each
pump. The drain off pipe shall be insulated as specified under `Pipes and Fittings' in
this Specification.
TS/M/S7/9
MECHANICAL WORKS
8. Alignment
At time of start-up, using dial indicator with accuracy of plus or minus 0.05 mm. It shall
be certified in writing that alignment work has been performed by a qualified
representative of the of the pump manufacturer and that pumps are operating in
accordance with design requirement.
9. Submission of Catalogues and Calculations
9.1 Pump performance curves with the predicted operating point shown shall be
submitted within one month from the award of the Sub-Contract. The Sub-
Contractor is also required to submit the necessary pump head calculation
relating to the pressure drop of the equipment selected by them, and of the
system piping.
9.2 Calculations for the inertia block and selection of vibration isolators shall
also be submitted when submitting the shop drawings.
TS/M/S7/10
MECHANICAL WORKS
SECTION 11 - DUCTWORK
1. General
1.1 This section covers the supply, delivery, installation, painting, testing and
commissioning, and twelve (12) months free maintenance and warranty of
all ductwork, diffusers, grilles, registers, insulation, controls and
balancing dampers, fire dampers and sheet metal work associated with the
air-conditioning and ventilating equipment.
1.2 Air quantity as shown in the drawings is only given as a guide. The Sub-
Contractor shall adjust it on site to suit the space, temperature and NC
level required.
1.3 The selection and location of the diffusers shall also achieve an Air
Diffusion Performance Index (ADPI) of not less than 80% according to
the definitions and parameters as found in the ASHRAE Fundamentals
Handbook.
1.4 Ductwork shall be pre-fabricated and assembly before delivery to site.
2. Ductwork
2.1 All ductwork and fittings shall be constructed strictly in accordance with
practical recommendation in the current editions of the Sheet Metal &
Air-conditioning Sub-Contractor National Association Incorporated
(SMACNA), in USA and DW 142, Specification for Sheet Metal
Ductwork , in UK, unless otherwise specified in this Specification.
2.2 The ductwork dimensions shown are clear internal sizes. The degree of
zinc coating on sheet steel shall be in accordance with Clause D of BS
EN 10346.
2.3 The Sub-Contractor shall ensure that no other services are allowed to be
suspended from the ductwork, unless otherwise approved by the S.O..
TS/M/11/1
MECHANICAL WORKS
2.4 Duct Construction
a) All ductwork shall be fabricated in the Sub-Contractor's own

workshop prior to delivering to site for assembly and installation.
All ductwork and its fittings and accessories shall be fabricated
and run in sizes shown and in positions as indicated on the
Drawings and shall be constructed of the following materials:
i. Galvanised sheet metal for all supply and return air ducts.
ii. Grade 316L stainless steel sheet metal for laboratory,

chemical store, fume Cupboards, biological safety
cabinets, radio isotope room exhaust, 100% laboratory
exhaust air ducts. The finish shall be 2B mill finish. The
thickness shall be in accordance with Uniform Mechanical
Code
b) All ducts shall conform accurately to the dimensions indicated in

the Drawings and shall be straight and smooth on the inside with
all joints neatly finished. Duct sizes indicated on the Drawings are
clear internal dimensions.
c) All ducts shall be free of waves of buckles and shall be machine

bent. Ductwork in which the galvanising of the inside surface has
been damaged will not be accepted.
d) All ducts shall be installed and anchored accurately to the building

in an approved manner as to be completely free from vibration
under all conditions of operation.
e) The Sub-Contractor is to take all precautions to ensure that the air

distribution system is silent in operation and does not create
draught.
f) No free or cut edges of ductwork shall appear within ducts, and

where seams or joints protrude into duct air stream, they shall be
arranged in the direction of the air flow.
g) No ductwork joints, bends or other fittings will be permitted

within the thickness of the wall, floor or ceiling structures and
below structural beams.
h) Sheet metal ducts shall be properly braced and reinforced. The

internal ends of all slip joints shall be installed in the direction of
the flow. All ducts shall be constructed with the minimum
possible number of seams.
TS/M/11/2
MECHANICAL WORKS
i) Curved elbows shall have a centre line radius equal to 1½ times

the radial width of the duct. Air turns shall be installed in abrupt
elbows. The air turns shall consist of curved metal blades or vanes
arranged so as to permit the air to make abrupt turns without
appreciable turbulence.
j) Double thickness aerofoil turning vanes shall be provided for all

right angle elbows extending over at least 50% of the whole
curvature of the elbow. The turning vanes shall have a flange
covering the whole base and shall be rivetted to the duct at not
more than 60 mm centres. The double thickness aerofoil vanes
shall be constructed of the same material of the duct enclosing
them and shall be of two gauges heavier than the duct material.
k) Ductwork longitudinal joints shall be of an approved air-tight self-

locking type.
l) All ductwork joint and cross joints shall be of an approved

flanged joints. Flanges shall be of rolled structural angles welded
at the corner and shall be rivetted to the duct. Spot welding is not
acceptable. The downstream end of the duct shall be bend round
the face of the flange. The upstream end of the duct shall be
inserted 50 mm into the down stream duct so that the overlap is in
the direction of the flow. Flanges shall be jig drilled or drilled to
template to minimum clearance over bolt diameter. A 5 mm
rubber insertion gasket shall be used.
m) Rivets shall be spaced at not more than 65 mm centres. All ducts

joints shall be airtight.
n) All ductwork shall be pressure tested to an internationally

acceptable standard. The method statements and standards shall
be submitted for approval.
o) Sleeves
Where ducts pass through walls or partitions, suitable galvanised

sheet steel sleeves of a gauge not less than the duct concerned
shall be supplied and located into place and shall not protrude
more than 13 mm over the finished wall surface. In the case of
insulated ductwork the sleeves shall be over-sized to allow the
insulation and vapour seal to be continuous through them.
TS/M/11/3
MECHANICAL WORKS
p) Fitting of Ductwork
The Sub-Contractor shall take note of the positioning of the

ductwork and associated fittings in areas where space is limited. If
necessary, additional costs should be included for prefabricating,
assembling, and insulating sections of the ductwork in lengths
suitable for installation as shown. No further allowances will be
made at any later date for negotiation of additional space than that
generally shown on the Drawings.
q) Longitudinal Seams
Where the perimeter of the duct does not exceed the width of the
sheet metal, ducts shall be constructed with one longitudinal seam
only. Flat double longitudinal seams shall be used in all ducts.
2.5 Hangers and Supports
a) The Sub-Contractor shall furnish and install hangers, hanger

brackets and miscellaneous support as are required for the
installation of all ductwork, pipework, equipment, etc. Supports,
hangers, brackets, etc. shall be attached to concrete and masonry
walls, ceilings and floors in an approved substantial manner by
means of inserts of expansion shields of adequate size and number
to support the loads to be imposed thereon. All hangers, brackets
and miscellaneous support shall be hot dipped galvanised steel.
b) All rectangular ductwork shall be hung with rod hangers. Where

angle stiffeners have been provided on the underside of the duct,
the hanger rods may pass through the ends of those angled
stiffeners for supporting the duct. If these angle stiffeners are not
located properly for the hangers, angle across the underside of the
duct shall be furnished and installed for fastening to rods. The size
of angles shall be the same as the stiffening angles. Spacing shall
not exceed 3 metres. All hanger rods shall be supported from the
floor above. Hanger rods for horizontal duct shall be spaced as
follows:-
Cross-sectional Perimeter Maximum Spacing

Between of duct (m) hangers (m)
Less than 1.5 2.4
1.6 to 2.5 1.8
Exceeding 2.5 1.2
Vertical Ducts shall be rigidly supported at not exceeding 1.8 m

spacing.
TS/M/11/4
MECHANICAL WORKS
c) Support Rod and Angle Size
The support rod sizes shall be as follows:
Duct Width (Longest Side)/Diameter Minimum Rod Size
Up to 300 mm 6 mm diameter
325 mm to 750 mm 6 mm diameter
Above 2125 mm 12 mm diameter
d) Support Angles
The support angles shall be as follows:
Duct Width (Longest Side)/Diameter Minimum Angle Size
Up to 300 mm 19 x 19 x 3 mm
325 mm - 750 mm 25 x 25 x 3 mm
775 - 1500 mm 38 x 38 x 5 mm
1525 - 2100 mm 51 x 51 x 6.5 mm
Above 2125 mm 51 x 51 x 6.5 mm
All angle supports shall be rolled steel sections.
e) Support for fire rated duct shall be protected by approved fire

rated material.
2.6 Duct Construction and Sheet Metal Gauges
a) Duct construction shall be in accordance with the

recommendations for duct construction as set forth in the Sheet
Metal and Air Conditioning Sub-Contractors' National
Association's (SMACNA) Guide and DW 142, Specification for
Sheet Metal Ductwork. The stringent standard will be applied.
b) The Drawings do not attempt to show all off-sets in the

ductworks. The Contractor shall make such off-sets as necessary
for the installation cost. Where off-sets are required, the angle of
the off-sets shall be as small as possible.
TS/M/11/5
MECHANICAL WORKS
c) Duct construction and sheet metal thickness shall be as shown in

the following table:
Maximum British Type of Transverse Type of Bracing

Size of SWG Sheet Joint Connection
Duct
Up to 300mm 24 25mm x 25mm x 25mm x 25mm x 3mm
(0.60mm) 3mm angle 1.7m from joints
angle iron joints
301mm to 24 25mm x 25mm x 25mm x 25mm x 3mm
460mm (0.60mm) 3mm angle 1.7m from joints
angle iron joints
angle iron joints
angle iron joints
1071mm to 20 (1.0mm) 38mm x 38mm x 38mm x 38mm x 4mm
1400mm 4mm angle 1.7m from joints
angle iron joints
1401mm to 20 (1.0mm) 38mm x 38mm x 38mm x 38mm x 4mm
2151mm 4mm angle 0.7m from joints
angle iron joints
Above 2151 mm 18 38mm x 38mm x 38mm x 38mm x 4mm
(1.20mm) 4mm angle 0.7m from joints
angle iron joints
For ductwork used for smoke control purposes, the thickness of the sheet
metal shall be minimum 1.2 mm (SWG 18).
2.7 Flexible Ducting
a) Flexible ducting shall be supplied and fitted where shown on the

Drawings.
b) Flexible ducting shall be of 50 mm thickness fibreglass of

density 32 kg/cu.m. A relatively smooth internal finish is
preferred.
TS/M/11/6
MECHANICAL WORKS
c) For connection to the linear diffusers, the length of the flexible

ducting shall be long enough to connect to either side of the light
fittings, but not less than a minimum of 1.5 meters of its natural
length so as to allow for relocation of the diffusers at a later date.
d) Flexible ducting shall be continuous between connections and

shall be capable of bending, twisting, stretching under installation
conditions, without denting or cracking.
e) Flexible ducting shall be constructed of a flame-retardant vinyl

coated, woven fibreglass fabric bonded to a vinyl coated spring
steel wire helix.
f) Flexible ducting shall comply with the requirements of all

statutory authorities approved by BCA and must be approved by
the S.O..
g) Flexible ducting shall be fixed to the sheet metal duct and

diffusers or linear diffusers by means of an approved self-locking
worm-drive stainless steel clips. Each point shall be taped with 50
mm self-adhesive, and fire resisting PVC tape to ensure complete
air-tight joint.
2.8 Rectangular High Velocity Duct
a) Rectangular high velocity ducts shall be constructed in accordance

with the SMACNA High Velocity Duct Construction Standards or
approved equivalent standards.
b) Longitudinal seams in ducts shall be Pittsburgh lock or approved

equivalent or grooved seams sealed with fire resisting sealant and
centre punched at no greater than 300 mm intervals.
c) Rectangular duct take-offs from rectangular ducts shall be

radiused branch fittings with a square back edge and front edge
with a radius of not less than the duct width. Approved gusseted
branch fittings may be used as an alternative to radiused branch
fittings. Take-offs from circular ducts shall be conned type with
an angle of 120 degrees.
d) Plenum to duct connections shall be fitted with a conned or

tapered section to reduce entry losses.
TS/M/11/7
MECHANICAL WORKS
2.9 Duct Insulation
a) All insulation materials used shall satisfy FSSD and local code
flame spread test or approved equivalent standards. Vapour
barrier used shall comply with the requirements of the Fire Safety
and Shelter Department.
b) All air conditioning ductwork shall be insulated with fibreglass or

mineral wool with field applied or factory applied vapour barrier.
The vapour barrier shall consist of double sided aluminium foil
with glass fibre reinforcements and kraft paper.
c) All ductwork exposed to weather shall be insulated with 50 mm

thick cork insulation which shall be protected by hybrid plaster or
other equivalent that having the same function and painted to
approval.
d) The insulating material shall have a K factor of not more than

0.0332 W/ok at 24o mean temperature. The insulation thickness
shall be 50 mm for supply and 25 mm for return ducts and shall be
of 32 kg/m3 (2 lb/cu ft) nominal density. For return duct located
below the roof and pass through non-air conditioned areas, the
insulation thickness shall be 50 mm.
e) All duct surfaces shall be cleaned and given one coat of flinkote
before the application of the insulation material. A further layer of
flinkote shall be applied on the insulation before they are wrapped
with the vapour barrier which shall have a minimum of 75 mm
overlap at all joints and securely sealed with cover strips and
adhesive duct tape to form a perfect vapour barrier. Anti-corrosion
treated steel tape shall be strapped around the insulated ductwork
at 1 m centres to prevent the insulation from sagging.
f) Where indicated in the Tender Drawings, the materials used for

internal insulation shall be mineral wool of 50 mm thick and
112 kg/cu m (7 lb/cu ft) density. The material shall be protected
by a layer of fibrous cloth to prevent the shedding of the mineral
wool or fibre glass particles into the air stream and wrapped in
perforated aluminium sheet which shall be securely fastened to the
ductwork.
g) The internal insulation shall be supplied around the inside of the

duct such that the insulation in continuous. The insulation and the
duct corners shall be either butt joint or mitred and the aluminium
lamination shall overlap but not less than 10 mm and glued
securely by an approved adhesive. The studs shall be brazed to the
ducts at spacing specified hereinafter, and shall have a length of
not more than 1½ times the thickness of the internal insulation
which it holds.
TS/M/11/8
MECHANICAL WORKS
h) The clips shall be galvanised and of the self-locking type of not

more than 25 x 25 mm in size. The centre to centre spacing of
studs shall be as follows:
Duct Wall Centre Spacing (mm)
Top Side 150 mm
Vertical Side 200 mm
Bottom Side 300 mm
i) Internally line ducts shall be inspected before installation. Duct

walls shall not be punctured when securing the internal insulation.
j) Where the internal insulation terminates, the insulation shall be

tapered in ratio of 1 in 3. The aluminium lamination shall extend,
over by 100 mm and taped securely to the duct. An overlap of 300
mm (12") shall be provided where the insulation changes from
internal to external
k) The supply ducts leaving air handling units and return duct to the
AHU shall be lined internally for a minimum distance of 5 m.
2.10 Exhaust Systems Extracting Cold Air
a) Where the Tender Drawings indicate that an exhaust system is

extracting a portion or full amount of cold air (27oC and below)
from an air-conditioning space, that part of the exhaust system,
i.e. from the point(s) of extraction to the exit of the exhaust fan
shall be externally insulated with fibreglass or mineral wool.
b) The thickness of insulation shall be 25 mm thick and 32 kg/cu m

density. Insulation details shall be similar to air conditioning duct.
c) Where the Tender Drawings indicate a ceiling plenum return of

the cold air, the fresh air supply system shall be insulated from the
fan entry to the supply grille. The thickness of insulation and
details shall be as above.
TS/M/11/9
MECHANICAL WORKS
2.11 Fresh Air Systems Passing Through Air-Conditioning Space
a) Where the Tender Drawings indicate that an fresh air system

passing through an air-conditioning space, that part of the fresh air
system, i.e. from the point(s) of intake to the supply of the fresh
air fan shall be externally insulated with fibreglass or mineral
wool.
b) The thickness of insulation shall be 25 mm thick and 32 kg/cu m

density. Insulation details shall be similar to air conditioning duct.
c) The fresh air supply system shall be insulated from the fan entry
to the supply grille. The thickness of insulation and details shall
be as above
2.12 Cleaning of Ductwork
a) During installation, properly fitted sheet metal covers shall be

provided at all times to prevent ingress of rubbish. Rags,
newspaper and like materials will not be accepted as a suitable
covering.
b) Should existence of rubbish be found in air ducts, the ductwork

shall be dismantled as necessary to ensure complete removal of
rubbish.
c) All ducts shall be cleaned of dust before starting of fans.
2.13 Laboratory Exhaust Air Duct
a) Laboratory exhaust air duct shall be of Stainless Steel ducting

(SS316L) and all relevant BS, SS and local fire code. Material
shall have excellent resistance to acids, alkalines and solvents.
Full technical detail shall be submitted to S.O. approval before
installation.
b) Where stainless exhaust duct serving chemistry fume cupboard

and chemical all chemical exhaust and chemical store, the internal
surface on the duct shall be treated with chemical resistance teflon
TEFE (polytetrafluoroethylene) coating. Coating shall not be
less than 280 microns.
c) The exhaust duct and hood indicated in Drawings shall be

constructed from stainless steel of minimum thickness 18 British
SWG (1.22 mm) and the joints shall be fully welded and air tight.
TS/M/11/10
MECHANICAL WORKS
d) Ductworks shall be installed pitched towards drain points at a

gradient of 1 in 200. Hangers shall be fabricated of hot-dipped
galvanised steel. Bolts, angle bar supports and nuts shall be of
304 stainless steel. Duct support shall be an interval of
approximately 1.5 m apart.
e) All stainless steel duct flange joint shall be made of stainless

angle bar of not less than 5mm thick with welding and assembly
using stainless steel bolt, washer and nut at 100mm interval. Joint
that made use of stainless steel sheet metal and bending together
with duct to form flange will not be acceptable. All gasket used
shall be chemical resistance.
2.14 Duct Test Openings
a) Openings shall be provided in ducts for testing purposes with a

velometer or Pitot Tube on the supply and discharge side of air
handling units major ducts and other necessary positions to be
indicated to the Sub-Contractor in accordance with B.S. 848.
b) The test openings are to be 150 mm centres across one side of the
duct. Each opening shall consist of a 25 mm trap screw brazed
into a 40 mm x 5 mm bar. The bar shall be rivetted to the duct
across its width and each trap screw is to be fitted with a plug.
c) Where test openings are fitted to internally insulated ducts, the

duct insulation is to be protected with perforated metal internally
for a distance of 600mm ahead of and 150mm past the test
opening position.
2.15 Flexible Connections
a) Flexible connection shall be provided at all ductwork connections

to the suction and discharge openings of fans, FCUs, AHUs and
where shown on the Drawings. These shall be made of approved
flame retarded fabric or shall consist of Sleeve joints with packing
of non-combustible material of not less than 100 mm long.
b) Flame retardant fabric connections shall be made of fibre glass

cloth impregnated with a lead loaded vinyl. The surface density
shall not be less than 5 kg/m2. They shall be to the approval of the
FSSD, BCA and the S.O..
TS/M/11/11
MECHANICAL WORKS
c) Flexible connections shall be so constructed to ensure that there is

no air leakage. Connections shall have 50 mm to 100 mm length
free of stress so as to permit renewal of fabric without disturbing
ductwork or other part of equipment.
d) Final connection duct connected to fume hood, safety cabinet,

flammable cabinet, bio-safety cabinet etc shall be of stainless steel
connection with chemical resistance .
2.16 Fire Rated Duct System
a) The fire rated duct system shall be a composite fire resistant

system cladded over the ventilation steel duct.
b) The cladding system shall comprise fire rated board fixed

to galvanised steel framing and the cavity between board and
steel duct filled with mineral wool of 100kg/m3 density.
c) The minimum thicknesses and dimensions of the materials

verified by laboratory tests:
Fire resistant Board Mineral wool

Channel size
rating thickness* thickness
2-hour 15mm 50x50x0.6mm 50mm
4-hour 25mm 100x50x0.6mm 100mm
*Board thickness shall be to the tested requirement for the fire

resistant rating
d) The board butt-joints shall be protected with approved cover

strip100mm wide x 9mm thick. The board unsupported area
between steel supports shall not exceed 1.5m2.
e) When the duct passes through compartment wall, approved collar

150mm wide by thickness of fire resistant boards shall be installed
at penetration junction of the wall/floor.
f) The steel rod supports if unprotected shall be installed not

exceeding 1220mm centres and suitably sized so that it does not
exceed the permissible tensile of 10N/mm2 2 hours fire resistance or
6N/mm2 for 4 hours fire resistance.
TS/M/11/12
MECHANICAL WORKS
g) The entire construction including steel support framings, hanging

bracket, hanger size and interval shall be suitably sized to the
correspondence duct shall adhere strictly to the fire test prototype
and allowable modifications of the manufacturer’s specifications
to achieve performance criteria of stability, integrity and
insulation for internal and external fire exposure in accordance
with BS 476: Part 24.
h) The system construction shall include an approved access hatch

construction of the same fire resistance to facilitate maintenance
and inspection.
i) Gaps and imperfections of fit, junction between the structure and

board shall be duly sealed with approved acrylic fire rated sealant.
j) Where required the board's joints may be concealed with joint

compound and joint finishing tapes to create the desire flush
seamless finish to receive architectural finishes. Otherwise joints
and screw heads may be left unfinished.
k) Alternative: The fire rated duct system shall be constructed of

fibre-cement core and faced with 0.5 mm thick perforated
galvanised steel sheet. This composite shall have minimum
thickness of 9.5 mm. Its integrity shall be 4 hours rated to BS
476 Pt 8, combustibility to BS 476 Pt 4 and insulation to 120
minutes. It shall not be weakened by moisture nor lose its
strength and fire integrity when saturated. It shall be able to
withstand hose stream action without loss of integrity and
disintegration.
l) Fire rated board
(1) The fire rated board shall be asbestos-free, fibre /

autoclaved calcium silicate boards and not affected by
moisture. Upon drying, the board shall regain all its
original properties and strength.
(2) The fire rated board shall be asbestos-free, fibre /

autoclaved calcium silicate boards and not affected by
moisture. Upon drying, the board shall regain all its
original properties and strength.
(3) The fire rated board shall be tested for strength and
robustness in accordance to BS 5234: Part 2 and
complying with BS 5588: Part 5 Appendix A and ISO
TR 1896 for bending strength and moisture
movement.
TS/M/11/13
MECHANICAL WORKS
(4) The technical properties of the boards shall be the

following as minimum:
Nominal Density 975kg/m3
Alkalinity pH 12
4995N/mm2 (longitudinal), 4389/mm2
Modulus of Elasticity (EN 310:1993)
(transverse)
10 N/mm2 (longitudinal), 6N/mm2

Flexural Strength F(EN 310: 1993)
(transverse)
7.16 N/mm2 (longitudinal), 4.94N/mm2

Tensile Strength T (EN 310: 1993)
(transverse)
Thermal Conductivity (40oC) 0.242 W/mok (ASTM C518:1991)
Coefficient of Expansion 6.4 x 10-6 m/Mk
Nominal moisture movement at EMC 6%
To Meet requirement for ISO TR 1896 for Bending Test (Clause 5.4,
5.4.1 & 5.4.2) and ISO TR 1896 for Moisture Movement Test
(Clause 5.9 & 6.8)
2.17 Ductwork for stairwell pressurisation, smoke stop lobby and others
a) Unless otherwise specific in the Drawings, ductwork for stairwell

pressurisation, smoke stop lobby and where shown in the
Drawings shall be fire-rated to give a minimum of 2 hours fire
rating inside and 2 hours fire rating outside.
b) The stairwell pressurisation and smoke stop lobby ductwork shall

be directly connected to the sheet metal ductwork with no flexible
connection.
2.18 Ductwork for Kitchen Hood Exhaust Duct
a) Kitchen hood exhaust duct shall be hot dip- galvanised mild steel
of thickness not less than 1.2 mm, or stainless steel of thickness
not less than 0.9mm thick.
b) The ductwork shall be constructed in accordance to SMACNA

standard.
TS/M/11/14
MECHANICAL WORKS
c) The horizontal run of the kitchen exhaust duct shall be installed

with a fall in the direction of the flow of not less than 0.5 per cent.
A 40mm drain shall be provided at the lowest point of each run of
ducting.
d) Duct access with openings large enough shall be provided at

suitable intervals and locations to enable cleaning of the entire
ductwork. Unless agreed otherwise by the Superintending Officer,
the intervals shall not exceed 3 meters and at each change in
direction.
e) Where the exhaust duct runs outside the kitchen it shall be

constructed to give at least the same fire rating as the kitchen
compartment or that of the room through which it traverses,
whichever is higher, subject to minimum of 2 hours. The rating
shall apply to fire exposure from both the internal and external
part of the duct.
f) Fire damper shall not be fitted in kitchen exhaust ducts.
2.19 Access Doors
a) The Sub-Contractor shall provide access doors on all ductwork

connections, either upstream or downstream of coils, upstream of
fans, fire dampers, filters etc. for inspection, cleaning and
maintenance purposes in accordance with SMACNA
recommendations.
b) Access doors shall be of double skin construction with

insulation of the same general character as adjacent sections of
ductwork. The door panel shall be of not less than 1.0 mm sheet
metal and shall have not less than 12 mm wide neoprene rubber
gasket around their entire perimeter. It shall have the same fire
ratings as the adjacent construction.
c) Access doors shall be hung on heavy brass plated flat hinges and
shall be secured in the closed position by means of wedge type
catches. All hinges shall be so placed to enable the doors to
remain open without additional support. All doors will be hinged
with two hinges and two catches will be required on doors over 40
mm x 400 mm. Where it is impractical to use hinged doors, the
access doors may be fixed in position with wedge type catches on
two opposite sides, with a minimum of 4 catches per door.
TS/M/11/15
MECHANICAL WORKS
3. Pre-fabricated Pre-Insulated Duct
a) The pre-fabricated pre-insulated duct shall be used only if it is indicated

in the drawing only.
b) The pre-fabricated pre-insulated duct shall be limited to use in ducted fan

coil unit, fresh air to air handing unit, branch duct to offices, branch duct
to seminar room, branch duct to lecture theatre that with low pressure. All
Laboratory ductwork and high pressure application are not to be used.
c) All pre-fabricated pre-insulated duct materials used shall comply and

satisfy with the requirements of the Fire Safety and Shelter Department
FSSD and local code flame spread test or approved equivalent standards.
The pre-fabricated pre-insulated duct fire rating must be Class 0
according B.S. 476 parts 6&7, and Class B-s1,D0 according to EN13501-
1. The product shall not generate opaque or toxic fumes and flaming
droplets.
d) The pre-fabricated pre-insulated duct shall comply to the composite

material as stipulated in the fire code with non-combustible core material.
e) The pre-fabricated pre-insulated duct shall be able to form in different

shapes and preferably a green product certified by Singapore Green
Building Product.
f) The stiffness of the pre-fabricated pre-insulated duct shall be greater than

90,000Nmm2and tested according to EN13403. Particles emission by the
duct material shall not exceed 0.006 μg/m3 for 0.5 μm particles and 0.003
μg/m3 for 5μm particles.
g) Pre-fabricated Pre-insulated duct shall be made of fibre glasswool rigid

panel or other form of non-combustible rigid panel, suitable for the
construction of ductwork for air conditioning, distribution, ventilation
systems. The system shall be able to withstand temperature from -10oC to
+90oC and pressure of not less than 750Pa. Duct shall be designed for
greater installation productivity with on or off site fabrication and
installation.
h) All air conditioning pre-fabricated pre-insulated ductwork shall be made

with rigid double facing fibreglass wool, mineral wool or other non
combustible material with good optimal thermal, acoustical properties,
high mechanical resistance material facing in the air stream. The material
shall be field applied or factory applied vapour barrier. The vapour barrier
shall consist of double sided aluminium foil with glass fibre
reinforcements and kraft paper.
i) Internal of the pre-fabricated pre-insulated duct shall have a layer of

aluminium foil or black tissue, subjected to engineer approval, shall not
tear off during operation. .
TS/M/11/16
MECHANICAL WORKS
j) Pre-fabricated Pre-insulated Duct shall have its air tightness tested and
comply in accordance to EN12237 Class D. All site testing shall meet to
DW143 duct leakage test standard.
k) All ductwork exposed to weather shall be insulated with 50 mm thick

cork insulation which shall be protected by hybrid plaster or other
equivalent that having the same function and painted to approval.
l) The insulating composite material shall have a K factor of not greater than
0.0332 W/ok at 10 oC mean temperature. The insulation thickness shall be
50 mm for supply and 25 mm for return ducts and shall be of not less than
70 kg/m3 (4.37 lb/cu ft) nominal density. For return duct located below
the roof and pass through non-air conditioned areas, the insulation
thickness shall be 50 mm.
m) The Pre-fabricated Pre insulation Duct shall be suitable for ducted ceiling
return environment. Sub-Contractor shall ensure no condensation at the
pre-insulation duct surfaces. If the thickness of the insulation were to be
below 50mm, calculation shall be submitted for engineer approval based
Thickness of insulation shall not be less than 40mm.
n) If fiberglass or mineral wool materials being used, a layer of flinkote shall

be applied on all the pre-fabricated pre-insulated duct before they are
wrapped with the fibre glasswool and vapour barrier which shall have a
minimum of 75 mm overlap at all joints and securely sealed with cover
strips and adhesive duct tape to form a perfect vapour barrier. Anti-
corrosion treated steel tape shall be strapped around the insulated
ductwork at 1 m centres to prevent from sagging.
o) Where indicated in the Tender Drawings, the materials used for internal
insulation shall be mineral wool of 50 mm thick and 112 kg/m3 (7
lb/cu ft) density. The material shall be protected by a layer of fibrous
cloth which to be of high mechanical resistance with good acoustical and
sound absorption properties prevent the shedding of the mineral wool or
fibre glasswool particles into the air stream and wrapped in perforated
aluminium sheet which shall be securely fastened to the ductwork. This
section of duct shall be of galvanised duct if pre-fabricated pre-insulated
duct is not able to take the pressure.
p) The internal insulation shall be supplied around the inside of the duct
such that the insulation in continuous. The insulation and the duct corners
shall be either butt joint or mitred and the aluminium lamination shall
overlap but not less than 10 mm and glued securely by an approved
adhesive. The studs shall be brazed to the ducts at spacing specified
hereinafter, and shall have a length of not more than 1½ times the
thickness of the internal insulation which it holds.
TS/M/11/17
MECHANICAL WORKS
q) The clips shall be galvanised and of the self-locking type of not more than
25 x 25 mm in size. The centre to centre spacing of studs shall be as
follows:
Duct Wall Centre Spacing (mm)
Top Side 150 mm
Vertical Side 200 mm
Bottom Side 300 mm
r) If shiplap joint method is being used, sample of joining shall be submitted

and approved by engineer.. The join shall not cause any dislodge of duct
that being joined. All the joint shall apply with sealant and with aluminiun
clip stapled or angles or to manufacturer recommendation. All joint shall
be taped with aluminium tape
s) Internally lined ducts shall be inspected before installation. Duct walls

shall not be punctured when securing the internal insulation.
t) Where the internal insulation terminates, the insulation shall be tapered in

ratio of 1 in 3. The aluminium lamination shall extend, over by 100 mm
and taped securely to the duct. An overlap of 300 mm (12") shall be
provided where the insulation changes from internal to external
u) The supply ducts leaving air handling units and return duct to the AHU
shall be lined internally for a minimum distance of 5 m.
v) Sleeves
Where ducts pass through walls or partitions, suitable galvanised sheet

steel sleeves of a gauge not less than the duct concerned shall be supplied
and located into place and shall not protrude more than 13 mm over the
finished wall surface. In the case of insulated ductwork the sleeves shall
be over-sized to allow the insulation and vapour seal to be continuous
through them.
TS/M/11/18
MECHANICAL WORKS
w) Fitting of Ductwork
The Sub-Contractor shall take note of the positioning of the ductwork and
associated fittings in areas where space is limited. If necessary, additional
costs should be included for prefabricating, assembling, and insulating
sections of the ductwork in lengths suitable for installation as shown. No
further allowances will be made at any later date for negotiation of
additional space than that generally shown on the Drawings. All the
fitting that form up by the pre-fabricated pre-insulated duct, losses shall
comply to relevant SMACNA duct construction method or better.
Where the pre-fabricated pre-insulated duct joined to dampers or

accessories, all the joining shall be of rigid sheet meet of 1.2mm thick and
insulated. Method of joining shall comply to the fire code. Access panel
framing that provided at the pre-fabricated pre-insulated duct shall be
insulated to prevent any condensation. Any rigid duct that that being used,
It shall comply to clause 2 of this section.
x) Longitudinal Seams
Where the perimeter of the duct does not exceed the width of the pre-
fabricated pre-insulated duct, ducts shall be constructed with one
longitudinal seam only. Flat longitudinal seams with enforcements and
high strength sealant shall be used in all ducts. All the longitudinal
construction shall be enforced with aluminium clip stapled, angle or to
manufacturer recommendation. All joint shall be taped with aluminium
tape
y) Hangers and Supports
a) The Sub-Contractor shall furnish and install hangers, hanger

brackets and miscellaneous support as are required for the
installation of all ductwork, pipework, equipment, etc. Supports,
hangers, brackets, etc. shall be attached to concrete and masonry
walls, ceilings and floors in an approved substantial manner by
means of inserts of expansion shields of adequate size and number
to support the loads to be imposed thereon. All hangers, brackets
and miscellaneous support shall be hot dipped galvanised steel.
TS/M/11/19
MECHANICAL WORKS
b) All rectangular ductwork shall be hung with rod hangers. Where

angle stiffeners have been provided on the underside of the duct, the
hanger rods may pass through the ends of those angled stiffeners for
supporting the duct. If these angle stiffeners are not located properly
for the hangers, angle across the underside of the duct shall be
furnished and installed for fastening to rods. The size of angles shall
be the same as the stiffening angles. Spacing shall not exceed 3
metres. All hanger rods shall be supported from the floor above.
Hanger rods for horizontal duct shall be spaced as follows:-
Cross-sectional Perimeter Maximum Spacing

Between of duct (m) hangers (m)
Less than 0.9 2.4
0.9 to 1.5 1.8
Exceeding 1.5 1.2
Vertical Ducts shall be rigidly supported at not exceeding 1.8 m

spacing. When a vertical wall supports the duct, the anchoring must
be coincide with the reinforcement. A sheet metal shall be used and
attached to the reinforcement.
11.1. Support Rod and Angle Size
The support rod sizes shall be as follows:
Duct Width (Longest Side) Diameter Minimum Rod Size
Up to 300 mm 6 mm diameter
Above 2125 mm 12 mm diameter
TS/M/11/20
MECHANICAL WORKS
11.2. Support Angles
a) The support angles shall be as follows:
Duct Width (Longest Side) Minimum angle channel

Size
Up to 300 mm 19 x 19 x 3 mm
325 mm - 750 mm 25 x 25 x 3 mm
775 - 1500 mm 38 x 38 x 5 mm
1525 - 2100 mm 51 x 51 x 6.5 mm
Above 2125 mm 51 x 51 x 6.5 mm
All angle channel supports shall be rolled steel sections without

slots.
b) Support for fire rated duct shall be protected by approved fire

rated material.
c) The Drawings do not attempt to show all off-sets in the

ductworks. The Contractor shall make such off-sets as necessary
for the installation cost. Where off-sets are required, the angle of
the off-sets shall be as small as possible.
TS/M/11/21
MECHANICAL WORKS
d) Duct construction and Joint shall be as shown in the following

table:
Maximum Size of Type of Transverse Type of Bracing

Duct Joint Connection
Up to 300mm 25mm x 25mm x 3mm 25mm x 25mm x 3mm
angle iron joints angle 1.7m from joints
301mm to 460mm 25mm x 25mm x 3mm 25mm x 25mm x 3mm
Above 2151 mm 38mm x 38mm x 4mm 38mm x 38mm x 4mm
e) Reinforcement on Pre-fabricated Pre-Insulation Duct construction

shall be as shown in the following table:
Maximum Size of Type of Reinforcement and Bracing

Duct
Up to 600mm Reinforcement every 600mm
601mm to 750mm Reinforcement every 600mm
1201mm to 1500mm 38mm x 38mm x 4mm angle iron joints
or to manufacturer recommendation
Above 1501 mm 38mm x 38mm x 4mm angle iron joints
or to manufacturer recommendation
TS/M/11/22
MECHANICAL WORKS
SECTION 12 - AIR DIFFUSING EQUIPEMNT AND DAMPER
1. General
1.1 This section covers the supply, delivery, installation, painting, testing
and commissioning, and twelve (12) months free maintenance and
warranty of all diffusers, grilles, registers, insulation, controls and
balancing dampers, fire dampers and sheet metal work associated with
the air-conditioning and ventilating equipment.
1.2 Air quantity as shown in the drawings is only given as a guide. The Sub-
Contractor shall adjust it on site to suit the space, temperature and NC
level required.
the definitions and parameters as found in the ASHRAE Fundamentals
Handbook.
2. Air Diffusing Equipment
2.1 General
a) All grilles, diffusers, louvres and registers used for the purposes
of supply and return of conditioned and/or unconditioned air and
associated accessories (hereby defined as air diffusing
equipment) required for the complete air conditioning and
mechanical ventilation systems shall be provided under this Sub-
Contract. All diffusers, registers, grilles and louvres shall be of
16 gauge extruded anodised aluminium.
b) All air diffusing equipment shall be selected for quiet operation

when handling the specified volume of air and shall be arranged
to provide uniform velocity across the face of the air diffusing
equipment. Supply air diffusing equipment shall be selected to
achieve the required air mixing but shall give air velocities of the
occupied level of not more than 0.25 metres per second. When
the finish of the air diffusing equipment is unspecified, the finish
shall be taken to be spray painted with quality enamel paint of
colour which shall be nominated by the Superintending Officer
on site. All internal surfaces of air diffusing equipment and any
parts of the ductwork thereof which is visible shall be painted
matt black.
c) All diffusing equipment shall be subjected for approval and

samples shall be submitted for inspection.
TS/M/12/1
MECHANICAL WORKS
d) Openings in ducts to receive air diffusing equipment shall be

reinforced around the perimeter. Reinforcement shall be in the
form of welded bar frames or double folded seams. Care shall be
taken and gaskets shall be used for all diffusers and grilles to
ensure that leaks do not occur at the necks or from around the air
diffusing equipment. Air diffusing equipment shall be fixed to
the ceiling, wall or any other building structure and no fixing
screws shall be visible.
e) Air quantity as shown in Drawings is only given as a guide, the

Sub-Contractor shall adjust it on site to suit the space temperature
and NC level requirement.
f) Where Acrylonitrile Butadiene Styrene (ABS) thermoplastic

materials being used, it shall comply to UL90 : The Standard for
Safety of Flammability of Plastic Materials for Parts in Devices
and Appliances, V-0 classification.
g) Supply diffuser for Library, compactor, Tissue culture and cell

culture lab shall have filter to provide cleaner air.
h) All air diffuser shall also be externally insulated with 50mm thick
32 kg/m³ fibre glass.
2.2 Construction
a) For the side discharge register, the front set of blades shall be
vertical and rear set of blades shall be horizontal. Concealed
sheet metal screw fixing shall be used through the register collar
into the duct spigot. Screw-fixing through the register face flange
shall be rejected. Maximum neck velocities shall not exceed 2.5
m/s.
b) Louvres shall be of the recessed, flanged or removable frame

type with one set of fixed horizontal blades. The method of fixing
shall be as specified for side discharge registers.
c) Side extract air grilles shall be supplied and installed as specified

for louvres. Ceiling extract/return air grilles shall have 13mm x
13mm x 25mm aluminium grids (egg crate type) and shall be of
recessed, flanged or removable type.
d) Outdoor air louvre shall be weatherproof type, extruded

aluminium complete with gasket seal, bronze birdwide mesh
screen, opposed blade damper and removable air filter with
frame. Screening shall not be larger than 10mm mesh.
TS/M/12/2
MECHANICAL WORKS
e) Correct performance of all air diffusing equipment shall be the

full responsibility of the air conditioning and mechanical
ventilation Sub-Contractor. All diffusers and grilles shall be of
reputable make and their performance shall be tested and
certified. Full performance data shall be supplied at the time of
Tender.
All performance data submitted shall be tested in accordance to

the following standards:
(i) International Standard Organization code ISO 5219.Air

distribution and air diffusion – laboratory aerodynamic
testing and rating of air terminal devices
(ii) International Standard Organization code ISO 5135

Acoustics - Determination of sound power levels of
noise from air terminal devices, high/low velocity,
pressure assemblies, dampers and valves by
measurement in a reverberation room.
2.3 Linear Diffusers
a) Linear diffusers shall be provided at locations and of capacities

as shown on the Tender Drawings. All ducted return and supply
air linear diffusers shall be complete with an insulated air plenum
box for connection to flexible duct.
b) Plenum box for linear diffuser shall be constructed of galvanised

steel of minimum 22 gauge. Each plenum box shall have an inlet
collar for connection to flexible duct. The plenum shall be
purposely designed with equalizer to provide uniform
distribution of airflow and minimized regenerated noise. The
internal surfaces of the plenum box shall be acoustically and
thermally insulated with minimum 25 mm thick, 32 kg/m3
density fibreglass or scrimed mineral wool. The fibreglass or
scrimed mineral wool shall also be covered with double sides
aluminium foil. The Internal surfaces shall be treated to prevent
corrosion. The exterior surfaces shall be suitably prime etched to
prevent rusting. The S.O. shall reserve the right to reject the
diffusers where rust is detected.
c) Volume control dampers shall be provided for all supply air

linear diffusers at the air inlet collar of the plenum box. In
addition, the supply air linear diffusers shall come with 2-way
directional louvres.
TS/M/12/3
MECHANICAL WORKS
d) Suitable diffuser with correct number of slots shall be selected to

ensure that the NC level comply to the specified requirement.
e) Diffusers shall be of minimum 3 slots linear diffuser, high

induction ratio type and shall operate from design air flow of
100% to 10% without air dumping. Performance of diffuser shall
be based on actual factory tests and published catalogue data.
The Sub-Contractor shall ensure all diffusers operate at low noise
level at all conditions. Diffusers shall be selected to supply 120%
of design flow rate at low noise as well.
f) Diffuser shall be of anodised aluminium, not less than 1.5 mm

with finishing colour as specified. Approximate length of each
diffuser shall be shown on the Tender Drawings. However final
length of the linear diffuser shall be co-ordinated with the ceiling
system. For the purpose of Tender, the Tenderer shall assume
that the length may vary by ± 100 mm from that indicated and all
incidental cost for such adjustment to the diffuser length shall be
included in the Sub-Contract price.
g) The Sub-Contractor shall obtain from the manufacturer a noise

level guarantee in writing before placing the order and submit it
to the S.O. for approval.
h) The Sub-Contractor shall submit air flow characteristic of the

diffusers showing clearly the diffusion air pattern for each type of
diffuser for 100%, 75%, 50% and 40% of the designed air
quantities.
i) The Sub-Contractor shall make available within four weeks from

the date of award of the Sub-Contract, the size, shape and
constructional details of the diffusers. All details shall be
provided to ensure an accurate co-ordination with the ceiling grid
system.
j) Exposed surfaces of slot(s) shall be finished to a colour approved

by the S.O..
TS/M/12/4
MECHANICAL WORKS
2.4 Ceiling Diffusers
a) Ceiling diffusers shall be of anodised aluminium construction

and of the louvre face type suitable for surface mounting. The
diffusers shall be rigidly constructed, and unless otherwise
specified shall have not less than four (4) louvre vanes per
150mm.
b) For top inlet ceiling diffusers,

(for office, library, Laboratory and general area application)
i) Ceiling diffuser shall be extruded aluminum construction

and of the louver face type suitable for surface mounting.
The diffuser shall be rigidly constructed, and unless
otherwise specified shall have not less than four (4)
louver vanes per 150mm
ii) 2 blade vertical type butterfly worm gear volume control

dampers shall be provided for all ceiling diffusers at the
air inlet collar of the engineered plenum box. Ceiling
diffuser shall be completed with thermal acoustic
engineered plenum box. The plenum box shall be design
to provide uniform distribution of airflow and minimized
regenerated noise. The plenum box shall be internally
lined with 12.5mm thick flame-retardant materials with
aluminum foil meeting Class Ó’ rating to British Standard
BS 476 part 6 and 7. The insulation shall be constructed
to achieve good noise absorption and low thermal
conductivity. Thermal conductivity shall not exceed 0.035
W/mK.
c) For side inlet ceiling diffuser;

(for laboratory area and other area)
i) Aluminum construction with baked white enamel finish.
ii) Diffuser shall be 4-way blow Louvre face type of

extruded aluminum construction.
iii) Diffuser shall be complete with thermal acoustic

engineered plenum box.
TS/M/12/5
MECHANICAL WORKS
iv) Thermal acoustic engineered plenum shall be provided to

each supply diffuser with inlet size for air velocity not
exceeding 4.0meter per second through the flexible duct.
The plenum shall be purposely design with internal
stabilizer to provide uniform distribution of airflow and
minimized regenerated noise. Tested performance data
for each diffuser terminal unit consisting of the diffuser
and the engineered plenum shall be submitted for
approval. Calculated data are not acceptable. Butterfly
damper to each terminal unit shall be provided upstream
so the damper generated noise may be subsequently
attenuated.
v) For better indoor air quality, the plenum shall be lined

with 25mm thick flame-retardant materials aluminum foil
meeting Class Ó’ rating to British Standard BS 476 Part 6
and 7. The insulation shall be constructed to achieve good
noise absorption and low thermal conductivity. Thermal
conductivity shall not exceed 0.035 W/mK.
vi) All performance data submitted shall be tested in

accordance to the following standards
 International Standard Organization code ISO

5219. Air distribution and air diffusion-laboratory
aerodynamic testing and rating of air terminal
devices.
 International Standard Organization code ISO

5135. Acoustic-Determination of sound power
levels of noise from air terminal devices, high and
low velocity, pressure, assemblies, dampers and
valves by measurement in a reverberation room.
d) Unless otherwise stated, ceiling diffusers mounted directly on the

underside of the ductwork shall be provided with a multi-blade
stream splitter damper. The stream splitter damper shall be
constructed as specified in this section.
e) Air velocities at neck of ceiling diffusers shall not be less than

2.5m/s unless otherwise shown.
TS/M/12/6
MECHANICAL WORKS
2.5 Laminar Flow Diffusers
The laminar flow diffuser shall be constructed of galvanized steel with

internal equalizers and face pull down to ensure uniform air flow across
the face of the diffuser. The plenum shall be constructed of 1.0mm thick
material and the faceplate of 0.7mm thick, 304 stainless steel perforated
plate of minimum 50% open area. The perforated face of the diffuser
shall have 4.76mm holes spaced at 6.35mm centre in triangular pattern.
Face shall be easily removed for cleaning. It shall be incorporated with
straightener to remove air turbulence from the discharge air. The laminar
flow diffuser perforated face shall be able to pull down at least 50mm for
side air flow.
The diffuser shall be designed such that its frame is not visible after
installation. Gasket seal of 14 X 5 mm thick neoprene shall be provided
around the frame to prevent any air leakages to ceiling space.
For better indoor air quality, the plenum shall be lined with 25mm thick
flame-retardant foam meeting Class ‘O’ rating to British Standard BS
476 Part 6 and 7. The insulation shall be constructed of fine cellular
structured open-cell foam to achieved good noise absorption and low
thermal conductivity. Thermal conductivity shall not exceed 0.035
W/mK.
The visible area of the diffuser after installation shall be powder coated
finish. To prevent damage or scratches to the diffuser, it shall be
properly packed in carton boxes before delivery.
Air velocity measured at 150 mm from the face of the diffuser shall not
exceed 1.0 m/s. Pressure loss through the laminar flow diffuser shall not
exceed 25 Pascal.
2.6 Damper and Splitters
a) All dampers shall be as specified below. All screw and

adjustment mechanism shall be of galvanised steel. All blades for
dampers shall be constructed at minimum gauge 18 extruded
aluminium in double streamlined sections.
b) The volume control dampers shall be of aluminium, opposed

blade type and consist of self-lubricating nylon bushings and
actuator parts assuring smooth operation of blades and capable of
being adjusted externally and fixed in position with screw.
TS/M/12/7
MECHANICAL WORKS
c) Splitters shall be used as shown on the Drawings or where

necessary for balancing of air distribution. Splitter damper shall
be fitted with a hand level and quadrant in accessible positions
capable of being locked in any position. The OPEN and SHUT
positions shall be stamped on the quadrant or marked on the duct
by means of engraved labels. When an adjustable quadrant is
fitted over the vapour seal, a 16 gauge galvanised steel plate of
sufficient size shall be provided to avoid breaking the vapour
seal.
d) Except where it is specifically stated on the Drawings, all duct

branches take offs and supply air collars or take offs of more than
1.0 metre in length shall be fitted with a fixed blade air stream
splitter dampers. The Sub-Contractor shall take special care to
ensure that all dampers are free from vibration and rattles under
all operating conditions.
e) All opposed blade dampers shall be of proprietary make or of

approved local make. Dampers shall be of steel frame
construction and with extruded aluminium opposed operating
blades.
f) The damper unit shall be complete with soft rubber sponge

gaskets of not less than 6 mm thickness for connection to
ductwork and grilles.
g) Damper adjustment mechanism shall be of approved type and

shall be or rigid construction with no slack when opening or
closing of the damper. The adjustment mechanism shall be
concealed.
h) The multi-blades splitter damper shall be of steel frame

construction with extruded aluminium, right angle curved blades,
suitably spaced.
i) Dampers shall be adjusted by an adjustment mechanism
TS/M/12/8
MECHANICAL WORKS
2.7 Low Leakage Volume Control Damper
a) All low leakage dampers shall be of the parallel blade louver

type. All parallel blade dampers shall be of high quality hot-
dipped pre-galvanised steel. They shall be suitable for a working
differential pressure of 1000 Pa across it without permanent
distortion or structural failure. Leakage through the damper
should not exceed 0.10m3/s/m2 of net damper face area at rated
velocity of 10.2 m/s and the static pressure drop across the
damper should not exceed 40 Pa. The maximum unsupported
blade length shall be 900mm.
b) The damper casing is constructed of high quality from 1.0 to 2.0

mm thick corrosion resistant galvanised steel. Frame is
constructed of cold-formed “C” channel 150 x 38 mm welded at
each corner.
c) Blades shall be constructed of 150mm width by 1.2mm thick,

rolled-formed, hot-dipped pre-galvanised steel with 3-grooves
profile.
d) Blades axles shall be constructed of 12.7 x 12.7 mm square shaft

externally mounted to linkage mechanism to prevent slipping.
Round axles are not acceptable. The blades axles shall pivot on
the two-part nylon bearings to prevent seizure over prolong
period of operation.
e) Blade linkage is externally mounted on the shaft, out of the air

stream.
f) Dampers must be completed with jamb seals and blade edge seals
to ensure leakage is meet.
g) Each damper shall be equipped with electric modulating or

on/off, 24Vac or 230Vac, single phase and 50Hz-power supply.
Control and feedback signal shall be of 0V to 10V or 4mA to
20mA.
h) All performance data submitted shall be tested in accordance to

Air Movement and Control Association – AMCA 500. Local
factory test shall be conducted and witness by engineer to verify
the leakage
TS/M/12/9
MECHANICAL WORKS
2.8 Return, Supply and Exhaust Air Grilles
a) All return air grilles material and shape shall be the same as the
supply air diffuser.
b) Exhaust and supply grilles shall be of anodised aluminium

construction and of the fixed front blade type.
All supply, exhaust grilles and registers shall be of fitted with an

opposed blade volume control dampers of approved construction
2.9 Pressure Release Damper
a) Pressure release damper shall be installed in the pressurisation

staircase as shown in the Drawings. The damper shall be able to
be set at the required specified static pressure. It shall be
normally closed, however, if the static pressure of the
pressurization staircase exceed the specified value, the damper
shall automatically open to release the air and to maintain the
specified static pressure in the staircase at all times. The damper
sample shall be submitted to S.O. for approval before purchasing
or fabrication. The Sub-Contractor shall check the dimension of
the damper to ensure that the performance meets the specified
requirement.
b) The frame shall be of galvanised steel and blades be of

aluminium.
2.10 Non-Return Dampers
All non-return dampers shall be of light gauge galvanised sheet steel and
of sturdy construction with spindles running freely in oil impregnated
bronze or other approved type of bearings. Damper blades shall be
tipped with 6.35mm felt to ensure silent operation.
2.11 Outside Air and Exhaust Air Louvres
a) Unless otherwise shown in the Drawings, all outside air and

exhaust air louvres for air intake and air exhaust shall be supplied
and fixed by the Sub-Contractor to the S.O.'s details.
b) Louvre blades shall be horizontal and constructed of or extruded

aluminium set in a rigid frame. Blades shall be set of
approximately 50 mm apart and of an angle of 30o to the
horizontal. The louvre shall be of weatherproof type.
TS/M/12/10
MECHANICAL WORKS
c) All fresh and exhaust louvres and openings shall be fixed with 12
mm mesh matt black painted galvanised insect screen, on the
inside in such manner so as to facilitate easy removal for periodic
cleaning.
d) All outside air louvres shall have insect screens, air filters and
adjustable volume control dampers. All exhaust air louvres shall
have insect screens.
2.12 Fire Dampers
a) Fire dampers shall be installed as specified on the Drawings and

at locations required by the Fire Safety and Shelter Department.
Fire Dampers shall be approved by third party accredited testing
laboratory in Singapore and comply to SS 333. The Sub-
Contractor shall be professionally responsible for any letter of
undertaking as required by FSSB/BCA that the fire dampers are
installed correctly and bear the certification by third party
accredited testing laboratory 's label sticker.
b) In general, where air conditioning ducts pass through floors or

fire walls other than party walls, fire dampers with fusible links
as specified hereinafter shall be installed. Such fire dampers shall
be so arranged that the disruption of the duct will not cause
failure to protect the duct opening. Access panels shall be
installed in such a location so that inspection and resetting of the
fire damper is possible. All fire dampers shall be installed so as
to meet the requirements of the Fire Safety and Shelter
Department.
c) Fire dampers shall be constructed and tested in accordance with

the requirement of authority, code of practice and shall be
suitable for a fire rating equipment to the surrounding
construction, but not less than two hours and shall be installed in
strict accordance with the manufacturer's recommendation.
d) Fire dampers shall be of the multi-blade type except for ducts

less than 350 mm (height) where single-blade type may be used.
e) The blade(s) shall have self aligning sintered bronze bearings

actuating or pivoting on stainless steel stubs shafts. Any
interconnecting linkages required for louvre type dampers shall
have brass self aligning linkage brackets and dampers shall be
held open by one or more fusible links which shall fuse at 70oC.
f) Access doors shall be provided to each fire damper for

replacement of fusible links, resetting of dampers and for
periodical inspection.
TS/M/12/11
MECHANICAL WORKS
g) Dampers shall be designed to eliminate any gap between the end

of each blade and its associated rebated frame in the closed
position.
2.13 Access Doors
a) The Sub-Contractor shall provide access doors on all ductwork

connections, either upstream or downstream of coils, upstream of
fans, fire dampers, filters etc. for inspection, cleaning and
maintenance purposes in accordance with SMACNA
recommendations.
b) Access doors shall be of double skin construction with insulation

of the same general character as adjacent sections of ductwork.
The door panel shall be of not less than 1.0 mm sheet metal and
shall have not less than 12 mm wide neoprene rubber gasket
around their entire perimeter. It shall have the same fire ratings as
the adjacent construction.
c) Access doors shall be hung on heavy brass plated flat hinges and
shall be secured in the closed position by means of wedge type
catches. All hinges shall be so placed to enable the doors to
remain open without additional support. All doors will be hinged
with two hinges and two catches will be required on doors over
40 mm x 400 mm. Where it is impractical to use hinged doors,
the access doors may be fixed in position with wedge type
catches on two opposite sides, with a minimum of 4 catches per
door.
3. Variable Air Volume Boxes
3.1 The Sub-Contractor shall supply and install single duct, variable air
volume (VAV) boxes of the sizes and capacities as shown in the
Drawings.
3.2 The VAV boxes shall be a proprietary line specialising in the field.
Boxes performance shall be rated in accordance with ASHRAE STD.
36B and ARI STD. 880.83 and ISO 5220, IAO 5135 & ISO 3741. The
minimum static pressure required at the inlet shall not exceed 15 mm
W.G. at wide open position. The VAV boxes selected shall be able to
cope with additional of 30% of spare air flow capacity for future
requirements.
TS/M/12/12
MECHANICAL WORKS
3.3 Casing shall be constructed of double skin construction with 25mm thick
fibreglass insulation material in between and having U.L. approved
meeting NBFU 90A and NFPA. The casing material shall be minimum
22 gauge galvanised steel.
3.4 Where indicated in the tender drawings, the VAV box shall be coupled
with an acoustic and internally insulated terminal box (multiple outlet
spigots). The terminal box shall be internally lined with 80 kg/cu.m
rockwool laminated with aluminium foil. The box shall have proper
opening, with collar to enable connection of flexible ducts. All single
outlet and multiple outlet shall be installed with VCDs (volume control
dampers) for air flow adjustment.
3.5 Damper blades shall have extruded rib which key into grooved shaft fix
of damper position and the damper blades shall be able to travel
continuously from range of 0 to 60 degree. Nylon bush shall be used for
all internal damper pivot points for quiet operation and no lubrication is
required. The blade shall be constructed of double skin galvanised steel
plates with felt all round. They shall be designed with pressure balancing
feature.
3.6 Only damper actuator shall be mounted externally on the VAV box for
ease of maintenance.
3.7 VAV equipment manufacturer shall submit a computerised programme

for the sizing of his equipment and the air distribution system. Terminal
units designated shall conform to CFM, static pressure and designated
noise criteria.
3.8 The noise level in the air conditioned areas shall not exceed that as
specified.
4. Airflow Sensors For VAV boxes
4.1 Airflow sensors if required shall be of the multiple-point, true averaging

type with signal amplification function for accurate flow measurement.
The sensor shall not be used for laboratory VAV air flow measurement
application.
4.2 Accuracy of the flow measurement shall be better than 2.5 % at a

velocity of 2.0 m/s or higher, even with irregular duct approach.
4.3 Airflow sensors shall be constructed of special aluminum profile capable

of amplifying the velocity signal by at least 2.5 times to improve reading
accuracy at low air velocity.
TS/M/12/13
MECHANICAL WORKS
4.4 The airflow sensors shall have a minimum of 24 test points and the
position of the test points shall be arranged to ensure a true average
measurement signal.
4.5 The airflow sensors shall have 100% repeatability on-site measurements.
4.6 There shall be only one (1) calibration point required for the full range of
airflow measurement and the accuracy shall be maintained throughout
the full airflow range.
4.7 Test reports/certificates shall be submitted to verify the air flow sensor
accuracy. Local factory test shall be conducted to verify the accuracy.
4.8 Air flow sensor shall be constructed so that it can be easily removed for
servicing and maintenance.
4.9 Laboratory fast respond VAV shall be of venturi type as per

specification Section under Laboratory Air-Flow Control System Using
Fast Respond Variable Air Volume Box.
5. Air Extractor
Air extractors are constructed of aluminium vanes assembled at 25mm centre to

provide smooth efficient turning of air flow from one duct to another; single and
multi-blade volume damper is not acceptable device for balancing. The extractor
vanes shall be gang-operated and synchronized to remain parallel with the
airflow irregardless of the extractor angle. The air extractor shall be furnished
with appropriate worm-gear operator for adjustment after installation. Installed
at the take-off on the downstream side, the air extractor extracts, equalizes and
provides volume control of air flow to the main branch duct &, reducing air
turning pressure loss and ensuring a quieter system operation
6. Air Tight Damper (For Laboratory) – Supply/Exhaust
Rectangular/ Square Type
6.1 All dampers shall be of the parallel blade louver type and constructed of
stainless steel type 316L or unless otherwise specified. The dampers
shall be suitable for a differential pressure of 2000 Pa across it without
permanent distortion or structural failure.
6.2 The damper frame shall be constructed of 2mm thick cold-formed “C”
channel of 200 mm depth with 38 mm flange all round. To prevent
external leakages, axle seal shall be provided at the damper frame which
shall be full welded at each corner.
TS/M/12/14
MECHANICAL WORKS
6.3 Blades shall be constructed of airfoil shape double-skinned of 1.2 mm

thick stainless steel with blade edge seal to prevent air leakage across the
damper when the blades are closed.
6.4 Blades axles shall be constructed of minimum 15 mm diameter shaft

externally mounted to linkage mechanism to prevent slipping. The
blades axles shall pivot on external bronze bearing.
6.5 Blade linkage is externally mounted on the shaft, out of the air stream.
6.6 Dampers must be completed with jamb seals and blade-edge seals to
ensure leakage is met
6.7 Internal leakage across the damper, when closed, shall not exceed 0.05
m3/s per square meter of damper face area at approach velocity of 10 m/s
and pressure differential of 1000 Pa. There shall be no external leakage
through the damper frame and bearing under all conditions. The static
pressure drop across the damper should not exceed 40 Pa. The maximum
unsupported blade length shall be 1500mm.
6.8 Each damper shall be equipped with electric modulating or on/off

actuator with spring return, auxiliary switch, 24Vac or 230Vac, single
phase and 50Hz-power supply. Control and feedback signal shall be of
0V to 10V or 4mA to 20mA.
6.9 Actuators shall be sufficient capacity to operate the damper under all
conditions, and to guarantee tight closure against system pressure
encountered and blade seals. Actuators shall provide at least minimum
torque of 15Nm per m2 damper area.
6.10 Damper actuators shall be designed for repeated actuation without

overheating or damage, with no minimum period between actuation and
to have an external manual gear release to allow manual positioning of
the damper when the actuator is not powered.
6.11 Damper actuators shall be mounted outside of the duct where appropriate
with support plates that are completely outside of the insulation or
covering.
6.12 All performance data submitted shall be tested in accordance to Air

Movement and Control Association – AMCA 500. Local factory test
shall be conducted and witness by engineer to verify the leakage
TS/M/12/15
MECHANICAL WORKS
6.13 Damper that serving chemistry fume cupboard, the internal surface on
the duct shall be treated with chemical resistance teflon TEFE
(polytetrafluoroethylene) coating. Coating shall not be less than 280
microns
Circular Type
The circular damper shall be of heavy-duty construction to [3, 4.5 6 or

7.5] kpa design pressure. Unless otherwise specified, damper parts shall
be constructed of type [304 or 316] stainless steel material.
6.14 Frame is constructed of heavy gage stainless steel with flanges fully
welded to both ends with minimum flange distance of 200mm. Holes are
pre-cut on the flanges with maximum distance of 100mm.
6.15 Blade is constructed of double skin heavy-gage stainless steel with

stiffeners as required for larger dampers and higher pressure.
6.16 Blade shaft is constructed of stainless steel continues through the damper
frame. Diameter of blade axle ranges from 12.5mm to 50mm depending
on size and design pressure. The blade shaft is fastened to the blade with
special-designed U bracket that prevent slippage between the two
components.
6.17 Blade seal is constructed of EPDM extrusion; other types of seal such as
neoprene or silicon may be available upon request.
6.18 Shaft seal is constructed of comparison type packing gland continuously

welded to damper frame; packing is of Teflon material and may be
replaced without removal of bearing.
6.19 Bearing is of the ball bearing type with flange for outboard mounting.
Bearing housing is constructed of die-cast iron with epoxy painted finish.
6.20 Internal leakage across the damper, when closed, shall not exceed 0.05
m3/s per square meter of damper face area at approach velocity of 10 m/s
and pressure differential of 1000 Pa. There shall be no external leakage
through the damper frame and bearing under all conditions. The static
pressure drop across the damper should not exceed 40 Pa.
6.21 Each damper shall be equipped with electric on/off actuator with spring
return, auxiliary switch, 230Vac, single phase and 50Hz-power supply.
6.22 Actuators shall be sufficient capacity to operate the damper under all
conditions, and to guarantee tight closure against system pressure
encountered and blade seals. Actuators shall provide at least minimum
torque of 15Nm per m2 damper area.
TS/M/12/16
MECHANICAL WORKS
6.23 Damper actuators shall be designed for repeated actuation without

overheating or damage, with no minimum period between actuation and
to have an external manual gear release to allow manual positioning of
the damper when the actuator is not powered.
6.24 Damper actuators shall be mounted outside of the duct where appropriate
with support plates that are completely outside of the insulation or
covering.
6.25 All performance data submitted shall be tested in accordance to Air

Movement and Control Association – AMCA 500. Local factory test
shall be conducted and witness by engineer to verify the leakage
7. Rectangular Air flow measuring stations
7.1. General - Applications
a. Rectangular air flow measuring stations shall be provided for

accurate measurement of airflow in air duct systems as shown on
the tender drawings.
b. The signal provided by the measuring stations shall be able to be

read manually through a differential pressure-gauge or can be
relayed to any building management systems to be used to
control and balance air volumes.
c. Sound performance data shall be determined in a reverberation

room rated in accordance with ISO 3741 and ISO 5135.
7.2. Airflow sensors
a. Airflow sensors used for the measuring station shall be of the

multiple-point, true averaging type with constant signal
amplification of at least 2.5 times for accurate flow measurement.
Airflow sensors shall have a minimum of 24 (2 x 12) test points.
b. Accuracy of the flow measurement shall be better than 2.5% at a

velocity of 2.0 m/s or higher, even with irregular duct approach.
c. The airflow sensors shall have 100% repeatability on-site

measurements and arrangement of the test points shall be in
accordance to the “Tchebycheff rule” to ensure a true average
measurement signal.
TS/M/12/17
MECHANICAL WORKS
d. There shall be only one(1) calibration point required for the full
range of airflow measurement and the accuracy shall be
maintained throughout the full airflow range.
7.3. Construction
a. Casing shall be air-tight construction made of galvanized steel

not less than 1.0mm thick and fitted with 30 mm wide flanges.
316 Stainless steel casing shall be constructed for the installation
at the 316 stainless steel exhaust duct.
b. The Flo-cross sensor shall be constructed of high precision
extruded aluminum profiles.
c. The measuring port shall be made of twin polyurethane flexible

tubes, internal Ø4.00 mm and external Ø6.00 mm, red color for
high pressure and yellow/blue color for low pressure.
d. The flo-cross section shall be easily removable for cleaning and

checking.
8. Induction VAV Guide specifications
8.1. General
a) Induction VAV boxes shall be provided for areas as indicated on

the tender drawings. The throttling range shall be from 100% -
15% without the requirement for special diffusers or assisting
fans.
b) During cooling mode, induction VAV boxes induce room air and
mix it with the conditioned primary air to maintain a near
constant air volume to the room. This provides sufficient air
movement necessary to maintain occupant comfort even at low
turn-down ratio.
c) Where indicated in the tender drawings, the induction VAV box

shall be coupled with an acoustic and internally insulated
terminal box (multiple outlet spigots). The terminal box shall be
internally lined with 80 kg/cu.m rockwool laminated with
aluminum foil. The box shall have proper opening, with collar to
enable connection of flexible ducts. All single outlet and multiple
outlets shall be installed with VCDs (volume control dampers)
for airflow adjustment.
TS/M/12/18
MECHANICAL WORKS
8.2. Induction VAV unit operation
a) Primary air (air from AHU) enters the unit at the inlet and the
unique design of the damper creates a negative pressure in the
entrance of the induction chamber. This causes air to be induced
through the induction ports into the induction chamber where it is
mixed with the primary air. The mixed airflow is equally
distributed by the multiple outlets to the diffusers.
b) During low thermal load condition, the specially designed air

damper would throttle to reduce the cold primary air to maintain
the room set point temperature. This action creates a “Venturi
Effect” which enables the Induction VAV to induce the warmer
room air and mixed with the conditioned primary air before
supplying to the room, thus providing sufficient air movement
necessary to maintain occupant comfort.
c) During high thermal load condition, the specially designed air

damper would open to increase the cold primary air to maintain
the room set point temperature. This action reduces the “Venturi
Effect” to the minimum and the Induction VAV boxes operate
similar to a conventional single duct VAV.
8.3. Induction performance curve
a) The induction VAV shall be suitable to operate with a minimum

inlet static pressure of 150 Pa.
b) The primary air curve for the induction VAV unit is a straight
line and it is the same as a conventional VAV. The rate of
induction is a function of induction is a function of the inlet static
pressure, the inlet velocity and the downstream pressure drop.
c) Under normal operating conditions, the minimum induction ratio

shall be between 1.15 at maximum flow and 1.7 at minimum
flow.
d) The use of induction VAV units makes it possible to turn down

the VAV to 15% without the loss of air movement.
TS/M/12/19
MECHANICAL WORKS
8.4. Construction
a) Induction VAV casing shall be air-tight construction made of

galvanized steel not less than 1.0mm thick with only two
longitudinal lock form seams, circular inlet, single oval induction
opening and rectangular outlet or with multiple outlet adaptor as
indicated on the drawings.
b) Units shall be internally insulated and insulation material shall be

tested to BS476 part 6/7 Class ‘0’ fire regulation and shall be
erosion proof up to 20 m/s air velocity.
c) Insulation material shall not be of the loose fibre type. Fibre glass
insulation must not be used in the internal lining of the induction
VAV due to IAQ requirements.
d) Induction VAV boxes shall be fitted with specially designed air

volume control damper to regulate the primary airflow and
induce the room air.
e) The damper shaft shall made of Ø12 mm aluminum and rotating

in self-lubricating, permanently impregnated nylon bearings.
f) Inlet and outlet spigots shall be suitable for duct sleeve

connection suitable for DIN 24 145 or DIN 24 146 respectively.
g) Induction VAV shall be suitable for use with analogue electronic

or DDC controllers.
8.5. Acoustic Performance
a) Induction VAV boxes sound performance data shall be

determined in a reverberation room at an independent sound
laboratory according to ISO 3741 and ISO 5135 standards.
b) Performance of units shall be rated to ARI Standard 880-98 and

Addendum for Variable Air Volume Terminal Units.
c) The unit design and selection shall give adequate considerations

to ensure that noise levels within the space do not exceed NC35
with an inlet pressure of 150 Pa.
TS/M/12/20
MECHANICAL WORKS
d) The maximum permissible sound power levels of the VAV boxes

shall be as follows, when operated at inlet static pressure of 150
Pa.
Sound Power Level 125 250 500 1k 2k 4k
Discharge 60 65 55 49 44 32
Radiated 63 58 54 43 39 31
8.6. Induction VAV with Pressure dependent Control
a) Induction VAV boxes designed for pressure dependent control

shall be provided as per the drawings and schedule or as
specified by S.O..
b) When the room temperature sensor sensed a change in space

temperature, it will transmit a reset signal to the controller and
regulate the volume damper to maintain the right amount of
primary air to the space to maintain room set point temperature.
c) Pressure dependent induction VAV shall come complete with a

DDC-VAV controller with built-in direct coupling actuation.
d) The DDC-VAV controller shall be open protocol, for easing

connection into the Building Aautomation and Monitoring
System (BAS) if required.
e) The integral damper actuator shall be minimum 6-Nm torque,

over the shaft mounting type. Stroke shall be fully adjustable
from 0-90 degree rotation with visible position indicator.
Actuator shall be equipped with manual position override. The
actuator stroke time shall be between 95 seconds to 3.6 minutes
for 90 degrees rotation at 50Hz operation.
8.7. Induction VAV Installation
a) Induction VAV boxes shall be adequately support by means of

anchor bolts, rods and angle-bars. The suspension system shall be
capable of withstanding the weight of the induction VAVs as
indicated on the drawings/specifications.
TS/M/12/21
MECHANICAL WORKS
b) For ducted return systems, an egg-crate/return air grille shall be

provided for connection into the induction port by means of
flexible ducts fixed with volume control damper.
8.8. All VAV equipment shall be randomly tested in factory and on site.
8.9. Control and flow measurement
a) The airflow measuring station shall come complete with

differential pressure flow transducer.
b) The transducer shall be capable of measuring a differential

pressure as small as 1 Pa and shall be of the self-calibrating type.
Flow transducer that requires periodic re-calibration will not be
acceptable.
c) The transducer shall be capable of transmitting an input signal to

a DDC controller which is compatible to the Building
Automation System (BAS).
d) All control components shall be factory tested, assembled and

programmed prior to delivery to site.
e) LCD display shall be provided for easy direct reading o f the

flow values.
9. Thermally Powered VAV Diffusers
9.1. Thermally powered variable air volume modules shall be manufactured

by a reputable manufacturer specialized in VAV Diffuser, with no less
10 years’ experiences in supplying the equipment with good track
record. Each module shall be a complete VAV terminal and thermostat
self-contained in a nominal 595mm x 595mm diffuser. They shall be
thermally powered with one room thermostat/ actuator for cooling only
and one changeover thermostat/ actuator for heating & cooling
application. The thermal powered VAV diffuser shall be able connected
to remote thermostat for adjustment, monitor and control by BAS. All
wiring shall be internal wired. Pneumatics shall not be accepted.
9.2. All performance data of the VAV diffuser shall be submitted. It shall be
tested in accordance with the latest edition of ANSI/AHRI 880 (I-P):
Performance Rating of Air Terminals. A copy of the valid AHRI
certified performance data shall be submitted as part of the requirement
for material approval.
TS/M/12/22
MECHANICAL WORKS
9.3. The VAV diffusers shall have four perimeter dampers to provide 1650
linear mm of variable discharge area at the perimeter of the diffuser for
maximum Coanda effect and to avoid dumping.
9.4. The VAV diffuser shall have a thumbwheel, micrometer type, and
temperature scale to adjust the cooling set point and another thumbwheel
and temperature scale for the heating set point. The adjustment shall be
right above the hinge down panel. Each set point shall be separately
adjustable between 21°C and 26°C. Initial set point shall be factory set at
23°C.
9.5. The VAV Diffuser shall be able to maintain room temperature within
±1°C of set point.
9.6. All VAV diffusers shall have a dial and scale to adjust the minimum
flow between 10 cmh and 50% of maximum flow without tools.
Minimum flow shall be factory set between 5% to 15% depend on the
VAV diffusers size to achieve temperature without affecting air
movement of not less than 0.25 m/s. A fixed maximum flow stop shall
be factory set for the fully open air flow of the specified inlet size.
9.7. All VAV diffusers shall have a lever which will open the damper for
balancing without tools. The balancing lever shall be accessible from the
outside of the diffuser without folding down the appearance panel or
removing any part of the diffuser.
9.8. The manufacturer shall warrant that the VAV diffuser shall be free from
defects in materials and workmanship for a period of five years from
date of installation.
9.9. The VAV diffusers shall have a solid (no holes or slots) appearance
panel which unlatches and hinges down to allow hands to be free for
adjusting temperature set point or minimum flow. The appearance panel
shall have dual latch clips for a safety backup. Instructions for the
diffuser shall be on the inside of the panel. The complete control
mechanism shall be visible when the panel is hinged down.
9.10. The VAV diffusers shall have positive induction of secondary room air
over the room thermostat at all flows from fully closed to fully open. The
damper shall slide up and down on ball bearings.
9.11. The VAV diffusers shall have a single spring disconnect which will open
the dampers for balancing without tools. VAV diffusers requiring tools,
adjustment of set points or adjustment of supply air temperature to open
for balancing shall not be allowed.
9.12. Supply air to the VAV diffuser shall be constant temperature. Supply air
shall be no lower than 10°C and no higher than 17°C for a cooling only
HVAC system.
TS/M/12/23
MECHANICAL WORKS
10. Electically Powered VAV Diffusers
10.1. Electrically powered variable air volume diffuser shall be manufactured

by a reputable manufacturer with ISO 9001 and specialized in VAV
Diffuser, with no less 10 years’ experiences in supplying the equipment
with good track record. The electrically powered variable air volume
diffuser shall comply to ANSI/AHRI 881: Certified Performance ratings
of air terminals. Sub-Contractor must provide manufacturer test reports
by independent test laboratory on electrically powered variable air
volume diffuser performance, in accordance with ASHRAE 70 and
Certification AHRI-880. The manufacture or their authorized distributor
shall have local support with trained staff, workshop and comprehensive
stock of spare parts.
10.2. Supply air to the VAV diffuser will be of variable temperature. Supply
air shall be no lower than 10°C and no higher than 17°C for a cooling
only HVAC system.
10.3. Construction for the housing shall be 0.8mm steel and stamped to form
the seamless housing, and primary inlet connection.
10.4. Factory assemble shall include not less than four hanger assembles to
accommodate either hanging rods, or wire.
10.5. Factory mounted controller shall comply and be installed into a Nema 2,
IP 61 enclosure.
10.6. All the VAV diffuser shall have DC oil free screw gear proportional
motors to operate the damper and actuate from fully open to fully close
and when under control mode auto modulate the damper step by step at
different flow positions. Motor and gear shall not be generate loud noise
and comply to the NC level as specified in Vibration Isolation and Noise
Control section. Damper settings from the diffusers manufacture
controller will have wall mounted control shall be adjustable from Auto-
operate / on- open and off-close
10.7. The VAV diffusers shall have a face cover that is smooth and functional
panel when opened has and unlatches hinges down and into a holding
position.
10.8. The diffuser casing shall be insulated with aluminium foil backed
insulation of 50 mm thickness fibreglass of density 32 kg/cu.m or any
other materials recommended by the manufacturer. Internal parts within
the air flow shall be factory internally insulated with acoustic 3mm
28kg/m3 foil covered insulation materials. Diffuser that do not insulated
shall not be accepted.
TS/M/12/24
MECHANICAL WORKS
10.9. The VAV diffusers shall have induce air through an induction-controlled
flow of secondary air from the zone with constant air movement from
fully closed to fully open.
10.10. The VAV diffusers shall have positive induction of secondary room
mixing the room at all flows from fully closed to fully open. The
pressure at the inlet of VAV diffusers is minimum 12Pa and maximum
70 Pa. The distance from obstruction in the path of air discharge is not
be less than 600mm.
10.11. When the VAV uses and is operating with a remote controller as
specified, each module shall be completed with VAV terminal and
sensor self-contained in a nominal, 595mm x 595mm diffuser. The
electrically powered variable air volume diffuser shall be controlled by
operating a remote controller with individual room set points, a sensor
for the thermostat with actuator for cooling only and when the heating
option is selected a single one changeover sensor with actuator for
heating & cooling application. The electrically powered variable air
volume diffuser thermostat shall be of Bacnet-MS/TP, BTL compliance
or Modbus communication to Bacnet and shall be connected to
BAS/IBMS and lighting management system / wireless mesh network
lighting control system for remote thermostat for adjustment, monitor
and control.
10.12. When the VAV uses and is operating with a wall thermostat, each
module shall be completed with VAV terminal and sensor self-contained
in a nominal, 595mm x 595mm diffuser. The electrically powered
variable air volume diffuser shall be controlled by individual room
thermostat witrh actuator for cooling only and one changeover
thermostat with actuator for heating & cooling application. The
electrically powered variable air volume diffuser thermostat shall be of
Bacnet-MS/TP, BTL compliance or Modbus communication to Bacnet
and shall be connected to BAS/IBMS and lighting management system /
wireless mesh network lighting control system for remote thermostat for
adjustment, monitor and control.
10.13. The VAV diffuser is selected for remote control it shall operate with a
hand held thermostat with diffuser mounted sensor and buttons for
digital numerical to adjust the cooling set point. Communication
between the diffuser controller and hand held controller shall be infrared
communication renewal is sent to diffuser each time a setting is changed.
Hand held controller shall be adjustable for room temperature set point,
damper Auto-operate / on- open and off-close, mode for Auto / cooling
and heating, temperature sensor calibration, reheat set point, seasonal
damper position, F to C setting.
TS/M/12/25
MECHANICAL WORKS
10.14. The VAV diffuser shall operate with a wall mounted thermostat with
room sensor and button for digital numerical to adjust the cooling set
point. Communication between the diffuser and room thermostat shall be
of communication wire control. Thermostat shall be adjustable for room
temperature set point, damper Auto-operate / on- open and off-close,
mode for Auto / cooling and heating, temperature sensor calibration,
reheat set point, seasonal damper position, F to C setting.
10.15. Wall mounted thermostat shall be of LCD display with room sensor and
operated with 12 VDC or VAC and link from the diffuser. Power supply
shall be from BAS DDC panel. Thermostat should have a function for
integration to voice command device for temperature adjustment, read
out on temperature, close/open damper.
10.16. The LCD display shall be back lit with clear numbers for accurate
reading. The LCD display shall be adjustable for temperature set point,
temperature readings display, damper state, auto, open and close,
ON/OFF cooling, heating and auto control, button for occupied and
unoccupied mode. Function failure shall read out at the room unit and
display an easy code. Modes shall include Cooling automatically/Off,
The thermostat shall also have time program schedule. Room
temperature and set point, The thermostat shall be proportion type and be
able to set damper position from 0% to 100%.
10.17. Each set point shall be separately adjustable between 16°C and 30°C
and be able to re-program to 21°C and 30°C or other minimum set point
as required . Initial set point shall be factory set at 24°C.
10.18. The VAV diffuser shall be able to maintain room temperature within
±1.0°C of set point.
10.19. All the VAV diffuser shall be adjustable to adjust the minimum damper
between 0 to 100% of maximum flow. Minimum flow shall be factory
set at 0%. Adjustment shall be done on site at the thermostat for
minimum flow required.
10.20. The Electrically powered variable air volume diffuser shall have the
option when ordered to be a master or slave unit. The master shall have
the capacity to control up to five diffusers once connected in a daisy
chain shielded wire connection between the masters and five slaves.
10.21. The Electrically powered variable air volume diffuser system including
thermostat shall be interface to the BAS and be able to accept third party
software interfacing such as mobile application, wireless mesh network
etc.
TS/M/12/26
MECHANICAL WORKS
10.22. The manufacturer shall warrant that the VAV diffuser shall be free from
defects in materials and workmanship for a period of two years from
date of installation. During the warranty period a complete unit or
assemble will changed.
TS/M/12/27
MECHANICAL WORKS
SECTION 13 – AIR HANDLING UNITS (AHU) AND FILTERS
1. General
1.1 This section covers the supply, delivery, installation, testing, commissioning
and twelve (12) months free maintenance and warranty of the air handling
units (AHU) and the associated accessories.
1.2 The Air Handling Unit (AHU) shall be factory fabricated, tested and of
efficient design and construction. The AHU shall be of single zone central
station type. The AHU shall be draw-through type and operate a low noise
level. The AHU shall be supplied and installed with reference to the tender
drawings and details as described in the Schedule of Equipment Data. Each
AHU shall consist of but not be limited to the following components:
a) casing made of frameless modular sandwiched panels or

prefabricated modular sandwiched panels with rigid extruded
aluminium frame (complete with insulation);
b) fan assembly consist of fan wheel, fan motor, tapered-lock pulleys

and adequate number of belts for transmissions;
c) coil section with cooling coil of copper tubes and aluminium fins;
d) filter section with filter housing and air filters;
e) insulated grade 304 stainless steel drain pans;
f) removable panels and access door for servicing;
g) mixing chamber for filtered fresh air and return air; and
h) vibration-isolating bases, vibration isolator and other accessories

necessary for operation.
i) Section for UV-C Emitter light
j) Section for Air purification ionization system
1.3 The AHUs and accessories shall be of compact design and construction and
so selected to meet the space and height constraints.
1.4 Each AHU cooling coil shall be provided with it individual modulating flow
control valve irregardless sharing the same header
1.5 Each AHUs in specified areas as indicated in the tender drawings, spare
motors shall be installed ready for operation in an emergency.
TS/M/S13/1A
MECHANICAL WORKS
1.6 Air Handling Units shall comply to BCA green mark requirement in kW/RT
and W/CMH. Piezometer ring shall be installed for the flow rate
measurement. Please refer to the section on technical specification for
piezometer ring airflow measurement system. Selection shall base on total
efficiency include starter drive.
2. AHU Casing
2.1 It shall be formed by standard set of sandwiched panels. All panels shall be
easily removed for the inspection, cleaning and servicing of internal
component such as fan assembly and cooling coil.
2.2 The sandwiched panel shall be double-sided skin type with insulating foam
being totally encased by high grade galvanised sheets of at least gauge 22 in
compliance with DIN standard or approved equal. No welding shall be
required during site assembly.
2.3 Besides the cooling coil and fan assembly, the air passage of the AHU shall
be free of support to ensure smooth air flow. All exposed sheet metal edges
shall be filed or concealed as much as possible.
2.4 The internal and external surfaces of the panels shall be smooth to reduce the
possibility of bacteria growth and dust accumulation. All joints and mating
surfaces shall be air tight and insulated throughout to prevent the forming of
cold bridge. The external surface of the panels shall be powder painting
to provide resistance to atmospheric ageing and ultra violet light
2.5 The panel shall provide high noise damping characteristic of 32 dB

reduction. The insulation of the panels shall be injected polyurethane with
thermal conductivity (k value) of no more than 0.037 W/(m/K). The minimal
thickness and density of the insulation shall be 25 mm and 60 kg/cu.m. The
minimum thickness and density of the insulation shall be 50mm and 60kg/m3
for outdoor (weatherproof) unit. The waterproof unit shall be completed with
a pitch roof.
3. Fan Assembly
3.1 General
The entire fan assembly shall be mounted on a steel structure with vibration
isolating base and housed within the casing of an AHU. The minimal
deflection for the spring of the vibration isolating base shall be 50 mm.
Mechanical power transmission from the motor to the fan shall by means of
tapered pulleys and V-belts of adequate size and number. The fan static
pressure shall allow for the use of HEPA filter when interchange with
secondary filters.
TS/M/S13/2A
MECHANICAL WORKS
Two access panel or doors complete with approved gaskets & Nylon handles,
shall be provided for easy maintenance and servicing of the fan assembly &
coil. Each access door shall have a minimum of 900 mm (height) x 600 mm
(width). Compression type of door handles that made of Nylon PA6 material;
the screw is being concealed completely in the door handle without exposing
it to the outside. The handle will be able to hold the door to the door panel
firmly to prevent air leakage
3.2 Fans Section
a) Centrifugal Fan
The fan shall be of forward or backward curved (aerofoil) types as

specified on the Schedule of Equipment Technical Data. Fan wheels
and shafts shall be statically balanced prior to assembly and
dynamically balanced as an assembly in the factory at design speed
prior to delivery. Fan shafts shall be selected to operate well below
the first critical speed. Fan wheels and shafts shall be designed for
continuous operation at the maximal rated speed and motor capacity.
All fans shall be selected to operate at air flow and pressure
efficiency of not less than 80%.
All fan housings, shafts and impellers (wheels) shall be from the
same fan manufacturer. Any mix matching of fan components or
modifications by party other than the fan manufacturer shall be
prohibited.
Fan rods shall be made of high grade solid steel supported by self
aligned bearings with an expected life expectancy of 200,000 hours
at designed operating conditions.
Backward curve fans shall be selected to operate stably within the

range of 30% to 110% of the specified air flow rate. The impeller
shall be constructed by mild steel , weld & paint with epoxy paint.
Fans shall be selected to provide high static efficiency but low sound
level and power consumption at specified air flow rate. Selection of
fan shall be subject to S.O.'s approval. The fan performance shall
comply to BS 848, BS EN ISO 5801or DIN standard while the
certification of quality assurance shall comply to BS EN ISO 9001.
TS/M/S13/3A
MECHANICAL WORKS
a) Plug Fan
Fans shall be high efficiency backward curve plug fans or centrifugal

fans. The plug fans shall be direct driven with external variable speed
drive. Motor speeds shall not exceed 1500 rpm or exceed 50Hz as
noted on the Tender Drawings. All fans shall be selected to operate at
air flow and pressure efficiency of not less than 80%.
Where dual plug fans are specified, each fan shall provided with
separate variable speed drive Each fan shall be sized to deliver 100%
of rated flow rate unless specified otherwise in the Equipment
Schedule. The fan section shall be compartmented to enable
maintenance on one fan without the need to shut down the AHU.
The operating limit of each fan type is designed to meet the

requirement of Class I, II and III limit as defined in AMCA standard
99-2408. Bearing shall have minimum life L10 of 40,000 hours at
maximum rpm and power certified in accordance to Anti-Friction
Bearing Manufacturer Association (AFBMA) standards. The fans
shall be placed in the unit with an even inflow and outflow is
achieved. Distance on the suction side with minimum 0.5 x impeller
diameter from component or walls in axial direction. Fan in radial
flow configurations shall have a minimum 1.5 x impeller diameter or
flow intake device. Fan distance from the pressure side shall be free
running impellers minimum 1 x impeller diameter and other fans
outflow angle minimum α = 45° from components.
b) Axial Fans
Axial fans shall be supplied and fitted, generally as shown on the

Tender Drawings. The fans shall be selected with direct driven
motors giving non-loading characteristics. Motor speeds shall not
exceed 1500 rpm or 50Hz as noted on the Tender Drawings. Fans
shall be balanced and free from vibration and the blades of adjustable
type.
Casings shall be of standard length designed to protect both the

motor and impeller, continuously welded throughout and hot-dipped
galvanised after manufacture. Inspection doors to enable direction of
rotation to be checked shall be provided. Terminal boxes welded to
the casing shall be provided for electrical connection to fan motor.
Lubrication of bearing shall be possible from outside the fan casing.
Impellers shall be of die cast aluminum coated with epoxy and low
frictional losses.
TS/M/S13/4A
MECHANICAL WORKS
Axial shall designed to meet the requirement of Class I, II and III

limit as defined in AMCA standard. Bearing shall have minimum life
L10 of 40,000 hours at designed operating conditions.
The fan performance shall comply to BS 848, BS EN ISO 5801. All

fans shall be selected to operate at air flow and pressure efficiency of
not less than 80%. Fans shall be selected to provide medium or high
static efficiency as specified but low sound level and power
consumption at specified air flow rate. Selection of fan shall be
subject to S.O.'s approval. The fan performance shall comply to BS
848, BS EN ISO 5801 or DIN standard while the certification of
quality assurance shall comply to BS EN ISO 9001.
c) Fan Array
For multiple fan assembly, AHU shall provide a redundant fan such
that should a single fan fails, the remaining fans will still deliver
100% of the specified airflow. The complete fan assembly together
with motor and drive shall have an overall efficiency of minimum
not less than 85%.
Each fan shall be driven by a separate external variable speed drives.

spacing of fans shall follow fan manufacturer’s instruction to ensure
achievement of highest performance. Low leakage back draft damper
shall be provided for every fan to prevent recirculation through a
non-operational fan.
3.3 Fan Motors
The fan motor shall be totally enclosed fan cooled (TEFC) type with IP55
protection and class F insulation for copper windings. The motor shall be of
4 pole and wound for standard 3 phase electrical supply of 400 V and 50 Hz.
Motor frame shall be made of durable aluminium alloy in compliance with
IEC 60034 and BS EN 13195 for squirrel cage motors. Fan motor control by
VSD shall be designed to operate between 10 HZ to 50 HZ. All fan motor
shall comply to IEC 60034-30, energy efficiency shall be class premium
IE3 and above with test standard comply to IEC 60034-2-1or IEEE 112. No
motor starter shall be inside the air stream.
TS/M/S13/5A
MECHANICAL WORKS
3.4 Cooling Coils
The cooling coil for the AHU shall be suitable for chilled water application.
The coil shall be constructed of copper tubes with mechanically bonded
corrugated aluminium fins to enhance heat transfer. The coil frame shall be
of 304 stainless steel formed to provide structural strength. Suitable
provision shall be made to facilitate adequate draining and cleaning through
removable plugs at both ends of each tubes. Each set of coil shall be fitted
with automatic air vent at the highest point. No drift eliminator is allowed.
The chilled water temperature between the entering and leaving shall not be
less than 6.5 °C.
The coil shall be fitted with supply and return headers (manifold), made of
copper pipes, to ensure even distribution of chilled water throughout the coil.
All copper to copper joints shall be brazed with copper brazing alloys or
silver solder. Soft solder is strictly prohibited.
Cooling coil for up to 30 % fresh air AHU shall be coated with approved
corrosion resistant material such as Hydrophilic coating.
The coil, designed with the following characteristics shall have a

performance rating no less than that of the AHRI standard.
No. Characteristics Specifications
1 Depth of coil min 6 rows,
2 Minimum working pressure 1400 kPa

3 Maximum air side face velocity 2.1 m/sec
without moisture carry over
4 Average air side face velocity 1.95 m/sec
5 Fin spacing 10 fins per 25mm
6 Maximum pressure drop of water 30 kPA
at rated flow
7 Maximum air resistance across coil 20mm w.g.
TS/M/S13/6A
MECHANICAL WORKS
4. Drain Pans & Drain Pipes
All drain pans shall be made of grade 304 stainless steel of gauge 18. The drain pans
shall be of double bottom type as per specifications with the primary drain pan being
installed right below the cooling coil while the secondary extends from coil to fan
section. The drain pans shall be of slope type. Drain pipes shall be of uPVC laid with
sufficient gradient, properly secured to the floor and terminated into the nearest floor
trap.
5. Mixing Chambers
The mixing chambers shall be of adequate sizes to ensure a thorough mixing of

filtered fresh air and return air. The construction, materials and finishing of mixing
chambers shall be identical to that of the AHU casing. The return air inlet shall be
fixed with volume control air dampers. The fresh air intake shall be controlled by
motorised dampers.
6. Installation
The installation of air handling units shall strictly adhere to the manufacturer's
recommendation. Each unit shall be installed on the "U" or "C" channel structure
with neoprene isolator on the loaded sides of the structure to reduce the transmission
of vibration. The AHU shall be installed to provide easy access to components such
as fan assembly, coils and air filters for servicing and maintenance.
7. Filters
7.1 All FCUs, DFCUs, AHUs and fresh air intakes and where indicated on the
tender drawings be provided with primary and secondary air filters of the
type as specified herein. HEPA filter shall be provided where indicated on
the tender drawings.
7.2 General
a) All AHUs and fresh air intakes and where indicated on the Drawings
shall be provided with air filters of the type as specified herein.
b) The Contractor shall provide (minimum) the following filter changes

including all pre-filters & secondary filters:
i) one complete set for initial start up for testing and

commissioning
TS/M/S13/7A
MECHANICAL WORKS
ii) one complete set after testing and commissioning and before
handover to Employer
iii) one complete set halfway during the Defects Liability Period
iv) one complete set at the end of Defects Liability Period
The Contractor shall nevertheless replace any filters discovered to be

worn out or clogged during the course of the free servicing and
maintenance period. The filters replaced are not considered as part of
the above mentioned sets.
c) Sample of filters complete with frame shall be submitted to S.O. for

approval.
d) Filters shall generally be installed in accordance with the

manufacturer's recommendation and to the satisfaction of the S.O.
Proper access for cleaning, media removal and inspection shall be
provided. Leakage for unfiltered air shall be prevented by air-tight
sealing of the filter holding frames or casings.
e) Air filters shall be of approved make and shall be manufactured to a

fully developed design currently in production and readily available.
f) Air filters shall comply with the requirements of ASHRAE 52-76 or

an approved equivalent standard. Reference shall be made to
ASHRAE 52-76 or to the relevant approved equivalent standard for
definition of terms employed.
g) Air filter tests shall be performed by an independent Testing

Laboratory. Test certificates shall be produced on request.
h) The filters shall be installed complete with all accessories and other
minor necessary for their satisfactory installation and performance
whether individually specified or not.
i) All joints shall be sealed with approved non hardening mastic or

neoprene gaskets sandwiches between flange faces.
j) Uniform air velocity through the media shall be achieved, if

necessary by means of air screens, baffles and other devices to
approval.
k) Pressure gauges or manometers of approved design and with suitable

scale ranges shall be provided and installed to indicate filter
resistance.
TS/M/S13/8A
MECHANICAL WORKS
7.3 Pleated Extended Surface Filter (Low Efficiency) - Primary Filter
a) All air filter shall be of disposable type. Washable filter media shall
be REJECTED. Nominal filter depth shall be 100 mm.
b) The filters, with non-woven synthetic fabric media, shall be listed by

the Underwriter Laboratory as Class 2.
c) Independent test report by approved laboratory to substantiate the

compliance with the following minimal requirements shall be
submitted to the Superintending Officer for approval prior to
installation. The following data serve as a General guide:
No. Specifications Values

1 Average atmospheric dust spot efficiency on 25% to 30%
ASHRAE 52-76
2 Weight Arrestance on ASHRAE 52-76 Above 90%
3 Initial media resistance at 2.5m/sec approach air <7.1mm w.g. (70 Pa)
velocity
4 Final media resistance at 2.5m/sec approach air <25mm w.g. (245 Pa)
velocity
d) The media, in pleated form, shall be held in shape by fine grid of

corrosion resistant wire to maximize dust collection capacity and to
avoid the possibility of media oscillation and media being pulled
away by air flow.
e) The pleated filter media shall be enclosed by a cartridge made of

heavy duty, rigid and high wet strength beverage board. The two
largest surfaces of the cartridge shall be die-cut into mating openings
with diagonal supports to achieve more than 90% of unobstructed
area for air now. The filter media shall be perfectly bonded to the
internal periphery of the cartridge to prevent air from bypassing the
media.
f) Filter media shall be pleated to produce an effective area of 7 m2

of media per 1 m2 of filter face area.
TS/M/S13/9A
MECHANICAL WORKS
7.4 Pleated Extended Surface Filter (High Efficiency) - Secondary Filter
be REJECTED. Nominal filter depth shall be no less than 300 mm.
b) The filters, with micro fine glass fibre laminated by synthetic fabric
media, shall be listed by the Underwriter Laboratory as Class 2.

installation. The following data serve as a general guide:

1 Average atmospheric dust spot efficiency on 90% - 95%
ASHRAE 52-76
3 Initial media resistance at 2.5m/sec approach air <10.2mm w.g.
velocity (100 Pa)
4 Final media resistance at 2.5m/sec approach air <25mm w.g.
velocity (245 Pa)

away by air flow.

heavy duty and corrosion resistant materials. The two largest surfaces
of the cartridge shall be die-cut into mating openings with diagonal
supports to achieve more than 90% of unobstructed area for air flow
The filter media shall be perfectly bonded to the internal periphery of
the cartridge to prevent air from bypassing the media.
f) Filter media shall be pleated to produce an effective area of 10m² of

media per 1m² of filter face area.
TS/M/S13/10A
MECHANICAL WORKS
8. Filter Construction
8.1 Media Support Grid
The media be welded wire mesh with 93% free area. The media shall be
supported by to maintain the designed space for each pleat to maximize dust
collection capacity and to avoid the possibility of media oscillation and
media being pulled away.
8.2 Enclosing Frame
The enclosing frame shall be made of heavy duty, rigid an high wet strength
beverage board. The frame, with two of its largest surfaces being die-cut into
mating openings with diagonal supports, shall be a square box of about 100
mm depth capable of totally encasing the filter media. The filter media shall
be perfectly bonded to the internal periphery of the frame to prevent air leak.
8.3 Filter Media
Filter media shall be non-woven synthetic fabric being pleated into no less
than 11 pleats per linear foot and an effective area of 7 sq.ft per 1 sq.ft of
filter face area.
8.4 Filter Housing
All filter housings shall be of rear access or side access. Filter housings shall
be factory fabricated and assembled by the air filter manufacturer. All filter
housing shall be externally insulated to prevent condensation.
8.5 Rear Access Filter Housings
The rear access filter housing shall be in modular form with each module
designed to accommodate a standard size pleated filter. Constructed with
minimal gauge 16 galvanissed steel, each module shall be equipped with
gaskets and spring fasteners to form perfect seal against air leak. All
infiltration gaps formed by modules are to be sealed perfectly with gasket.
8.6 Side Access Filter Housing
Side access filter housings shall be accessible through filter slots at both
sides of an AHU. The slots shall be sealed by gasketted, gauge 16 access
door with latches. Inside the slot, standard sized, 100 mm deep pleated filters
shall be held by extruded aluminium track free of rivets or self-tapping
screws which tend to obstruct the sliding of filters
TS/M/S13/11A
MECHANICAL WORKS
9. Air Duct Smoke Detectors (Probe Units)
9.1 All air handling units (AHUs) shall be fitted with smoke detectors (probe
units) of approved design and manufacture in the return-air stream
immediately adjacent to the air handling unit.
9.2 The smoke detectors (i.e. probe units) shall be provided for monitoring of the
return air ducts of the AHUs. In the event of alarm from the probe unit, the
related air conditioning equipment (AHU) shall 'shut down' automatically.
Provisions in the form of relays, terminal strips, etc. shall be provided for
each smoke detector to enable each detector to send a signal to the fire alarm
in the event of an emergency condition. The final connection to the external
interfacing device (supplied and installed by others) shall be by the
Contractor.
9.3 The unit shall allow the application of standard smoke detectors for
monitoring of air streams inside air-conditioning and ventilation ducts
between 1 m/s and 20 m/s.
9.4 The duct smoke detector shall have adjustable sensitivity setting and be
completed with integral power supply unit suitable for 230V, 50 Hz
operation and relay contacts for alarm and trouble condition monitoring and
control.
9.5 All duct smoke detectors shall be furnished with air sampling tubes
extending through the width of the air duct.
9.6 The unit shall deviate a small amount of air from regular to high velocity air
conditioning and/or ventilation ducts into a special chamber, which contains
a smoke detector.
9.7 The unit shall not have to be adjusted to air streams between 1 m/s and 20
m/s.
9.8 The unit shall accommodate a photo-electric light scattering detector,

matching with the built-in base.
9.9 The unit shall be suitable for electric detector testing on site.
9.10 The unit shall be accessible for inspection without opening the unit.
9.11 The unit shall be designed so that all service work can be carried out without
affecting the duct system.
9.12 The unit shall be equipped with a circuit monitoring the presence of the
smoke detector head.
9.13 The alarm indicator shall be clearly visible from outside.
TS/M/S13/12A
MECHANICAL WORKS
9.14 The housing shall be made of approved plastic material, shockproof,

vibration-proof and listed.
9.15 The housing of the unit shall contain 4 openings for compression cable
glands. If unused, these openings shall be covered with plugs.
9.16 The air duct detector assembly and its cover shall be joined via a rubber lip
to prevent unwanted passage of air and/or smoke.
9.17 The unit shall connect directly into any standard detector line from the
manufacturer's control unit using four wires for Class "A" wiring.
9.18 The unit shall be equipped with a terminal block with screw less terminals
accepting wires between 0.25 mm2 and 1.5 mm2 (SWG 23 and 15) and
equipped with built-in strain limits.
9.19 The unit shall allow to drive an additional alarm indicator lamp without
additional wiring from the control unit.
9.20 The unit shall be designed for complete sealing of the duct penetrations
necessary for the sampling tubes and for fastening the air duct detector
assembly.
9.21 The unit shall be supplied with a template for duct penetrations and complete
mounting, connection and maintenance guidelines.
9.22 The unit shall be designed so that there is a complete separation between
detection chamber and the compartment containing the affiliated electronics.
9.23 The unit shall be supplied with the appropriate sampling tubes.
9.24 The electronics compartment of the air duct detector assembly shall provide
ample room for additional circuitry.
9.25 Specifications :
a) Admissible flow speed : 1 to 20 m/s
b) Approval : UL/FF/EN54
c) Ambient temperature : -10 to +60C
d) Relative humidity : max. 93% RH continuous

without condensation
TS/M/S13/13A
MECHANICAL WORKS
10. Variable Speed Drive AHU
All AHU shall be provided with variable speed drive shall be provided with a VSD
bypass controller and starters. This is to allow the AHUs to be operated in a constant
speed mode should the VSD be faulty or under maintenance. The AHU motor shall
be able to drive at minimum 10Hz when using VSD.
11. Energy efficient
The selected AHU performance shall meet to the required w/CMH as specified in
the green mark requirement by BCA.
12. Air Heat Exchanger
12.1 The air heat exchanger shall be a sensible heat only plate heat exchanger with
a temperature only as transfer media. It shall reheat the supply air through the
heat exchanging from the outdoor fresh air
12.2 The air heat exchanger efficiency shall be tested in accordance with Eurovent
RS 8/C/001. Air to Air efficiency shall be selected to suit the required re-
heat conditions and to minimise pressure drop.
12.3 The air heat exchanger shall incorporate no moving parts, electrical motor or
serviceable components. It shall be energy efficient.
12.4 Plates shall be fabricated with corrugation pattern increasing turbulence and
heat transfer with creating stagnation points. Flat plate designs are
unacceptable.
12.5 Plate corners shall be sealed with MS Polymer silicone free sealant and rated
for air temperatures up to 60°C.
12.6 Maximum differential pressure to withstand without permanent deformation

shall be greater than 3000 Pa.
12.7 The air heat exchanger shall also be design to use for re-circulating air
handling units for improving the relativity humidity as specified in the tender
specification or drawing
12.8 The air heat exchanger shall be integrated into the air handling units and
form part of the system.
13. Damper for Air Purging System
All the damper used for exhaust air purging system shall be of modulating low
leakage damper
TS/M/S13/14A
MECHANICAL WORKS
SECTION 14 - CHILLED WATER FAN COIL UNITS (FCUs)
1. General
and twelve (12) months free maintenance and warranty for all fan coil units
and the associated accessories.
1.2 For FCUs in specified areas as indicated in the Drawings, spare motors shall
be provided/installed for each FCU.
1.3 Fan Coil Units shall comply to BCA green mark requirement in kW/RT and
W/CMH.
1.4 The fan coil units shall meet the energy efficiency standard requirements of
SS CP 530 : Code of practice for energy efficiency standard for building
services and equipment.
2. Construction
2.1 The Sub-Contractor shall supply and install where shown on the Tender
Drawings fan coil units of an approved type and each complete with fans,
three speed fan selector switch, motor, drive, cooling coil, drain pan, outside
air damper assembly, filters, vibration isolators, controls and accessories.
The units shall be suitable for continuous operation and shall be constructed
as below.
a) The fan shall be mounted on an 18 gauge galvanised steel fan deck

with the assembly easily removable from the basic unit. Fan shall be
of double width, double inlet, forwardly curved centrifugal type of
aluminium or approved materials. Motors shall be of split capacitor
type high efficiency premium (IE3 and above) motor or electronically
commutated brushless motor, whichever is of highest efficiency,
suitable for single phase power supply complete with sleeve bearings
with lubrication points, resilient mountings and capable of 3 speed
operation. Motors shall comply to IEC 60034-30, and energy test
standard comply to IEC 60034-2-1or IEEE 112.
b) The cabinet shall consist of a base casing fabricated with double

sided skin type with insulation being totally encased by high grade
galvanized sheets with removable panels for servicing. The drain pan
shall be insulated with an asphalt base filler compound. A drain pipe
with U-trap shall be connected from this pan to the nearest floor trap.
The drain pipe shall be insulated with minimum 25 mm thick closed
cell insulation. Secondary drain pan complete with insulation shall be
provided for Fan coils located above ceiling. The drain pipe to
individual Fan coil shall has internal diameter of minimum 20 mm.
TS/M/S14/1
MECHANICAL WORKS
c) The cooling coil shall be minimum 3 rows and maximum 5 fins per
centimetre and removable cartridge type. The cooling coil shall be
staggered tube finned coil of sizes suitable for various duties. Fin
shall be aluminium or copper continuous plate and shall be bounded
to the tubes by expansion to ensure maximum contact with the tube
for efficient heat transfer. Fins may also be of the type fastened to the
tubes by winding the fin material under tension onto the tubes. Fin
design shall be suitable for operation up to 2.5 m/s face velocity
without moisture carryover and fins shall have fin collars to cover the
entire tube surface and without sharp edges or breaks permitting
accumulation of foreign matter.
At a velocity of 2.8 m/s the bypass factor should not exceed 0.2.
Tubes shall be minimum 12.5 mm (1/2") O.D. seamless copper
spaced in a staggered pattern brazed into headers fabricated from
heavy wall copper tubing having generously sized inlet and outlet
standard male pipe thread connections.
All joints between coil, tubes and headers shall be brazed with silver
alloy solder. Coil shall be designed for up to 10.34 bar (150 psi)
water working pressure and completed coils shall be tested with
17.24 bar (250 psi) air pressure under water.
The velocity of air through the coil shall not exceed 2.1 m/s. The
water pressure drop through the coils shall not exceed 5 metres of
water.
2.2 The Sub-Contractor shall provide and install all the control and power wiring
and an on-off switch to a point adjacent to each unit. Each fan coil unit shall
be provided with a 2-way modulating valve, controlled by temperature
sensors and controller. The fan coil unit on/off and temperature control shall
be controlled by thermostat and the Building Automation System. All ducted
fan coil unit shall also be controlled by individual DDC.
2.3 If direct current brushless motor (DCBL) is being used, it shall comply to
the followings:
a) Fan coil units shall be equipped with fans driven by direct current
brush-less (DCBL) motor with variable air volume (VAV)
control, or unless specified otherwise elsewhere in the
Specifications and Drawings,
b) The DCBL motor shall be single phase suitable for 230VAC

supply complete with associates with converter and driver forming
the complete DCBL fan motor assembly.
c) The DCBL fan motor is controlled by Pulse Width Modulation

(PWM) for variable speed operation.
TS/M/S14/2
MECHANICAL WORKS
d) The motor commutation electronics shall incorporate EMC and

mains supply filters complying with EN 61000-6-2.
e) The motor shall consist with hermetic aluminum alloy casing, 8-

pole coil, permanent magnet rotor, CR-plating polishing shaft
(S45C medium carbon steel), and permanently lubricated ball
bearing.
f) The motor has grade E class insulation; in additions of built-in

thermal cut-out, current overload and status monitored by the
main control board.
g) Default air volume setting shall be step-less at ranges of 30% to

100% against nominal airflow.
h) The complete fan/motor assembly shall be dynamically

balanced to G6.3 or better
2.4 It shall be the Sub-Contractor's responsibility to ensure that the equipment

chosen shall not induce a noise level greater than NC 30 in the rooms. If
necessary, acoustic treatment shall be provided at no additional cost.
2.5 Control Box
The chilled water fan coil shall complete with a control box for the
controlling of fan speed of the motor and the cooling of the unit. The control
box shall be attached to the unit and where the maintenance space is
congested, the control box shall be able to detach and relocate at a distance
of 5m away from the unit.
2.6 Air Filters
The material for filters shall be provided as for the air handling units. Filters
shall be as specified in the relevant section. No washable filter is allowed.
2.7 Thermostat
a) The thermostat shall be provided for each fan coil unit and be wall
mounted, intelligent, liquid crystal display (LCD) thermostat shall
be provided for control of the fan coil unit. The thermostat shall be
of BACnet communication and BTL certified
b) BACnet thermostat shall be able to provide the function of power

ON/OFF, room temperature setting, COOLING/FAN operating
mode, AUTO/FAN SPEED SELECT mode, timer setting ON/OFF,
occupancy mode and sleep mode. It shall have multiple input for
the connection of external sensors. The thermostat LCD shall
display room temperature, set point temperature, status of fan mode
and speed, failure message for trouble-shooting and maintenance
purpose.
TS/M/S14/3
MECHANICAL WORKS
3. Purging Air System
Sub-Contractor shall provide exhaust air purging fan with make up air, ductwork,
volume control damper, diffuser and accessories at not less than 3 air change for the
Chilled water fan coil system.
TS/M/S14/4
MECHANICAL WORKS
SECTION 15– AIR FILTERS
1. General
1.1 This section covers the supply, delivery, installation, testing,

commissioning and fifteen (12) months free maintenance and warranty
of the air filters for all air handling units (AHU), Fan coil units (FCU,
DFCU), Fans and the associated accessories.
2. Filters
2.1 All FCUs, DFCUs, AHUs and fresh air intakes and where indicated on
the tender drawings be provided with primary and secondary air filters
of the type as specified herein. HEPA filter shall be provided where
indicated on the tender drawings.
2.2 General
a) All AHUs and fresh air intakes and where indicated on the
Drawings shall be provided with air filters of the type as
specified herein.
b) The Contractor shall provide (minimum) the following filter

changes including all pre-filters & secondary filters:
 one complete set for initial start up for testing and

commissioning
 one complete set after testing and commissioning and

before handover to Employer
 one complete set halfway during the Defects Liability

Period
 one complete set at the end of Defects Liability Period
The Contractor shall nevertheless replace any filters discovered

to be worn out or clogged during the course of the free
servicing and maintenance period. The filters replaced are not
considered as part of the above mentioned sets.
c) Sample of filters complete with frame shall be submitted to

S.O. for approval.
TS/M/S15/1
MECHANICAL WORKS

manufacturer's recommendation and to the satisfaction of the
S.O. Proper access for cleaning, media removal and inspection
shall be provided. Leakage for unfiltered air shall be prevented
by air-tight sealing of the filter holding frames or casings.
e) Air filters shall be of approved make and shall be manufactured

to a fully developed design currently in production and readily
available.
f) Air filters shall comply with the requirements of ASHRAE 52-

76 or an approved equivalent standard. Reference shall be made
to ASHRAE 52-76 or to the relevant approved equivalent
standard for definition of terms employed.

h) The filters shall be installed complete with all accessories and

other minor necessary for their satisfactory installation and
performance whether individually specified or not.
i) All joints shall be sealed with approved non hardening mastic

or neoprene gaskets sandwiches between flange faces.

approval.
k) Pressure gauges or manometers of approved design and with

suitable scale ranges shall be provided and installed to indicate
filter resistance.
a) All air filter shall be of disposable type. Washable filter media

shall be REJECTED. Nominal filter depth shall be 100 mm.
b) The filters, with non-woven synthetic fabric media, shall be

listed by the Underwriter Laboratory as Class 2.
TS/M/S15/2
MECHANICAL WORKS
c) Independent test report by approved laboratory to substantiate

the compliance with the following minimal requirements shall
be submitted to the Superintending Officer for approval prior to

ASHRAE 52-76
3 Initial media resistance at 2.5m/sec approach air <7.1mm w.g. (70

velocity Pa)

velocity (245 Pa)
d) The media, in pleated form, shall be held in shape by fine grid

of corrosion resistant wire to maximize dust collection capacity
and to avoid the possibility of media oscillation and media
being pulled away by air flow.
e) The pleated filter media shall be enclosed by a cartridge made

of heavy duty, rigid and high wet strength beverage board. The
two largest surfaces of the cartridge shall be die-cut into mating
openings with diagonal supports to achieve more than 90% of
unobstructed area for air now. The filter media shall be
perfectly bonded to the internal periphery of the cartridge to
prevent air from bypassing the media.
f) Filter media shall be pleated to produce an effective area of 7

m2 of media per 1 m2 of filter face area.
a) All air filter shall be of disposable type. Washable filter media

shall be REJECTED. Nominal filter depth shall be no less than
300 mm.
b) The filters, with micro fine glass fibre laminated by synthetic

fabric media, shall be listed by the Underwriter Laboratory as
Class 2.
TS/M/S15/3
MECHANICAL WORKS
c) Independent test report by approved laboratory to substantiate


ASHRAE 52-76
velocity (100 Pa)
velocity (245 Pa)
d) The media, in pleated form, shall be held in shape by fine grid

e) The pleated filter media shall be enclosed by a cartridge made

of heavy duty and corrosion resistant materials. The two largest
surfaces of the cartridge shall be die-cut into mating openings
with diagonal supports to achieve more Man 90% of
unobstructed area for air flow The filter media shall be
f) Filter media shall be pleated to produce an effective area of

10m² of media per 1m² of filter face area.
2.5 Pleated Extended Surface Carbon Filter
g) All air filter shall be of disposable type. Nominal filter depth

shall be 100 mm.
h) The filters, Polyester media with fine granular activated carbon,

shall be listed by the Underwriter Laboratory as Class 2.
TS/M/S15/4
MECHANICAL WORKS
i) Independent test report by approved laboratory to substantiate


ASHRAE 52.2
2 Weight Arrestance on ASHRAE 52.2 Above 95%
3 Initial media resistance at 2.5m/sec approach air <12mm

velocity w.g.(120Pa)

velocity (250 Pa)
j) The media, in pleated form, shall be held in shape by fine grid

k) The pleated filter media shall be enclosed by a cartridge made

of heavy duty, rigid and high wet strength beverage board. The
two largest surfaces of the cartridge shall be die-cut into mating
unobstructed area for air now. The filter media shall be
l) Filter media shall be pleated to produce an effective area of 7

m2 of media per 1 m2 of filter face area.
g) Filter shall be chemically impregnated carbons for better

control both acid and bases gases such as H2S, SO2, NOx,
HCI, HF, Methyl Mercaptan, active sulphur composites,
ammonia, formaldehyde and highly volatile radioactive organic
iodides in Air and CO2.
h) Carbon filters shall have a CTC activity of above 60% (CCI4)

measured by ASTM standard test method D3467-88
TS/M/S15/5
MECHANICAL WORKS
The media be welded wire mesh with 93% free area. The media shall
be supported by to maintain the designed space for each pleat to
maximize dust collection capacity and to avoid the possibility of media
oscillation and media being pulled away.
3.2 Enclosing Frame
The enclosing frame shall be made of heavy duty, rigid an high wet
strength beverage board. The frame, with two of its largest surfaces
being die-cut into mating openings with diagonal supports, shall be a
square box of about 100 mm depth capable of totally encasing the filter
media. The filter media shall be perfectly bonded to the internal
periphery of the frame to prevent air leak.
3.3 Filter Media
Filter media shall be non-woven synthetic fabric being pleated into no

less than 11 pleats per linear foot and an effective area of 7 sq.ft per 1
sq.ft of filter face area.
3.4 Filter Housing
All filter housings shall be of rear access or side access. Filter housings
shall be factory fabricated and assembled by the air filter manufacturer.
All filter housing shall be externally insulated to prevent condensation.
The rear access filter housing shall be in modular form with each
module designed to accommodate a standard size pleated filter.
Constructed with minimal gauge 16 galvanissed steel, each module
shall be equipped with gaskets and spring fasteners to form perfect seal
against air leak. All infiltration gaps formed by modules are to be
sealed perfectly with gasket.
Side access filter housings shall be accessible through filter slots at

both sides of an AHU. The slots shall be sealed by gasketted, gauge 16
access door with latches. Inside the slot, standard sized, 100 mm deep
pleated filters shall be held by extruded aluminium track free of rivets
or self-tapping screws which tend to obstruct the sliding of filters
TS/M/S15/6
MECHANICAL WORKS
4. HEPA Filters
4.1 Filters shall be of the high efficiency particulate air (HEPA) type. The
components shall include particle board cell sides, water-proofed fire-
retardant glass fibre media; aluminum separators for 100% RH,
neoprene rubber bond. The media shall have a minimum thickness of
0.381 mm ± 0.07 mm, and a minimum tensile strength of 0.54 kg per
cm. Each filter cell shall withstand a pressure drop of 250 mm WG.
4.2 Each filter shall be rated for a maximum pressure drop of 25.4 mm
WG clean resistance.
4.3 Each filter shall be individually scan tested and certified to have an
efficiency of not least than 99.999 percent when tested with 0.3 micron
dioctyl phthlate (DOP) particles. Filter style code and performance
shall be printed on each filter cell.
4.4 Extreme care must be exercised at all times in the delivery, handling
and installation of the HEPA filters. Any filter damaged during the
installation shall be replaced.
4.5 The HEPA filters fitted on the ductwork shall be provided with a
protective bag which allows for easy and safe removal after the filters
have been used up.
5. Filter Housing for HEPA Filters
5.1 When a bank of HEPA filters are used and side access is required,
proprietary make side access housing for HEPA filters shall be used.
Housing shall be of the same manufacture as the filters being used.
5.2 The side access filter housings shall be package units, factory sealed
against leakage. The housings with the HEPA filters in place shall be
guaranteed to meet the specified air cleaning efficiency as assembled
units. The housings shall be constructed of 16 gauge galvanised steel
with heavy duty corner posts, 100 mm wide inside flanges, and vertical
supports spaced not more than every 600 mm of filter width. The
flanges shall be turned in to provide a flush exterior and to facilitate
attachment to adjacent equipment and/or ductwork. All non-welded
seams shall be hand caulked with Silicone rubber adhesive. The
housings shall be fabricates structurally to withstand up to 250 mm
WG utilising perimeter gasketing of neoprene rubber, permitting
servicing of the filters without the need for additional access doors in
the ductwork. Housings shall be insulated internally with 25 mm thick,
48 Kg/cu cm density, neoprene coated fibreglass.
TS/M/S15/7
MECHANICAL WORKS
5.3 Provision shall be made in the housing design for each filter cell to be
sealed around its entire periphery, eliminating the need for gaskets
between the adjacent filters. Each filter shall have single box flanges or
battens at the top and bottom of the air entering face for installation in
the mounting track. No gaskets shall be required on the filters. The 19
mm x 14 mm filter sealing gaskets shall be made of resilient close-call
neoprene rubber extruded with a hollow core to minimum gasket 'set',
and retainer, which is an integral part of the housing.
5.4 Sealing pressure shall be applied through level arms which activate
toggle and cam locking mechanisms applying 37 Kg of sealing
pressure per linear metre of filter periphery. The door design is to be
such that it cannot be closed unless the level arms are properly
positioned. The locking mechanisms shall not be affected by vibration.
6. Activated Carbon Filters
a) The filters shall be installed downstream of the primary and secondary.
b) The filter housing shall be a side access filtration system especially

designed for easy maintenance access. The housing shall be made of
minimum 16 gauge galvanised steel, welded and designed to withstand
up to 1250 Pascal positive or negative static pressure.
c) The activated carbon shall be contained in individually removable,

refillable trays fabricated of epoxy coated steel. The trays shall be held
in V-arrangement by metal channel tracks and secured and sealed by a
easily removable grid assembly. Trays shall be furnished with gasket to
provide an internal air seal.
d) The activated carbon media shall conform to the following test

specification:
i) Moisture content 3.0% maximum by ASTM 2867
ii) Carbon Tetrachloride activity rating 50% minimum by MIL-C-17605B
iii) Density 0.5gm/cc minimum by ASTM d-2854-70
iv) Hardness 95 minimum by MIL-C-17605B
v) Ash 14.0% maximum by ASTM-D-2866-70
TS/M/S15/8
MECHANICAL WORKS
vi) Screen Analysis % by ASTM-D-2862-70 Tyler Standard Screen
0 - 14 on 6 Mesh
0 - 100 on 8 Mesh
0 - 10 on 10 Mesh
0 - 2 on 14 Mesh
0 - 1 on pan
7. Bag-in Bag-out HEPA (BIBO) Filter
a) BIBO Filter should be provided at the mechanical exhaust of the

scrubber system
b) It shall be a fully welded system, complete with a DIN 1946 part 4 seal
test groove to test the seating of the HEPA filter. The seal test groove
to be made from aluminium.
c) The housing shall be made of mild steel and epoxy finished. The
housing should be suitable for decontamination in accordance with BS
4247 “surface materials for use in radioactive areas and research
establishments" or other equivalent standards. The decontamination
ports shall be installed on each containment filter system upstream and
downstream of the filters. All internal parts that come into contact with
the process air shall be epoxy coated, stainless steel or have an
electrophoretic coating. The epoxy paint finish shall be resistant to
formaldehyde.
d) The corners of the cam bars that come into contact with the epoxy
paint finish shall have a rubber heat shrink on them to eliminate
chipping of the internal paint-work and give even sealing socket
compression.
e) All change-out operations shall be within the bag so there is a barrier

between the worker and filter at all time.
8. Filter Housing for BIBO Filter
f) The filter housing steel shall be complete with cam locking mechanism
that prevents access door(s) from being closed unless the filters are
sealed. Other safety features may be acceptable subject to S.O’s
approval. Drilling or site modification of the filter housing is not
allowed on site to prevent damages to the units.
b) All connecting flanges shall be pre-drilled ready for installation into

ductwork systems.
TS/M/S15/9
MECHANICAL WORKS
c) All units shall be pressure tested prior to dispatch. The housing shall be
tested for filter fit, operation of the filter clamping mechanism, seal
alignment and leak tightness before dispatch from factory. The
pressure test maximum allowable leakage shall not be exceeding 0.5”
wg in ten minutes.
d) The filter unit shall be complete with insulation to prevent

condensation on the external of the filter unit. The process air should
be assumed to be 23oC + 2oC.
9. Specification for the Removal of Grease and Odour from Kitchen Exhaust Air
9.1. UV-C Grease/Odour Removal system
The stainless steel kitchen exhaust hood shall be fitted with a 1st stage
stainless steel grease filters to trap coarse grease particles. The grease
filters shall be installed with overlap edges.
UV-C Filtration system shall be installed ideally immediately behind

the grease filters in the hood to provide secondary grease destruction
and odour removal. Grease and odour destruction is achieved by
passing the exhaust air through the UV-C lamp assembly located
behind the grease filter in the hood. UV-C light energy breaks down
and destroys residual grease and odours by a combination of oxidation
and photolysis.
If for other reasons, the UV-C filtration system is not feasible to be

installed in the hoods, the tenant shall propose alternative location
subject to the approval of the landlord.
The UV-C filtration shall be factory tested and assembled in as

stainless steel housing complete with controls such as system "ON",
lamp fault indicator, hour run counter, interlock with exhaust fan and a
UV-C Morn tor which shall be linked to the building management
system, etc.
A general guide of an assembly of 4 tubes of 39 wits (865 mm length)

and 4 tubes of 79 watts (1630 mm length) shall handle an approximate
l000 cmh and 2000 cmh of exhaust air respectively.
The manufacturer for the above shall have at least 5 years of

experience in the manufacturing and installation of UV-C filtration
system for commercial kitchen. The products shall be UL listed and
approved as component for commercial kitchen hood or by any
international recognized body or commercial kitchen installation
TS/M/S15/10
MECHANICAL WORKS
9.2. Activated Carbon filters
Activated carbon filter shall be installed to absorb any smoke odours

that remain and the ozone released during the photolysis & oxidation
process Activated carbon absorbs the ozone and turns it into oxygen
thus ensuring that the exhaust air is discharged to the atmosphere as
cleaned and odourless.
The activated carbon filers shall be high performance type with initial
toluene efficiency of 95% or greater under laboratory test conditions of
2.5 m/s air velocity, 50% relative humidity and 20-25°C air
temperature. Carbon filter shall have a minimum 40ft2 media in a 610
mm (H) x 610 mm (W) x 95 mm (D) filter. The filter frame shall be
galvanized steel. The filter shall be rated at 2.5 m/s air velocity with
pressure drop not exceeding 125 Pa.
Carbon filters shall complete with proprietary made steel frame

housing be installed in the exhaust duct. The housing shall be multiple
V-bank type with side access to provide extended surface area and
shall be properly sealed to ensure no air bypass or leakage.
9.3. UV-C Monitor
The 1 amps should be kept dean and free of dust at all times. If dust
accumulates on the lamp it will absorb the UV-C and convert it to heat,
therefore lowering the effectiveness of the UV-Clamp.
TS/M/S15/11
MECHANICAL WORKS
10 Fan Filter Unit for Cleanroom
Fan filter unit shall be UL listed and EN 61800-5-1; CE marked. Housing shall
be of walkable housing type, casing construction shall be of powder-coated
from1.2 mm thick steel sheet steel, 1.6mm thick aluminum or stainless with
vibration-isolated anchoring, plug fan with one-sided suction and optimized
for use without spiral housing. Fan filter unit shall completed with HEPA filter
and frame. Internal baffling plates and anodized aluminum diffuser panel shall
be provide to provide uniform air speed across the filter face, ensuring laminar
airflow.
Fan unit shall be low energy consumption, quiet operation and ease of
maintenance Motor shall be built-in of Class F insulation, IP44, with variable
speed controller to control the blower speed. Motor and controller shall be of
single phase AC power input 230 Volts at 50 Hz or 415 volts at 50Hz without
any external transforming devices for stepping down the voltages. A junction
box is provided on the top of unit for cable interface. The blower shall be of
radial impeller with backward curved blades made of aluminum mounted
directly to the rotor of the built-in motor, statically and dynamically balanced
as per DIN ISO 1940, class G2.5.The bearing life time shall not be less than
75,000hours. Fan Filter Unit shall have LED indication to show green in
operation and fault in orange indication for the motor controller. Contact shall
be provided for BAS monitoring and control.
Where Electronic Communicated Motor (EC-Motor) is used with controller, it

shall be Electronically commutated including power-factor controller for
sinus-shaped main input as per EN 61000-3-2 and Modbus RS485 or BACnet
interface. The same controller is capable of accepting single phase AC power
input ranging from 230 Volts at 50Hz or 415volts at 50 Hz without any
external transforming devices. Panel with control and power electronics
integrated in the fan filter unit housing. Interface distributor: Modbus RS485
or BACnet transceiver in fan filter unit, built-in design, with green
operation/fault indication for the motor controller, with yellow communication
bus operation indication for the fan filter unit. A junction box is provided on
the top of unit for the cable interface
Fan Filter Unit shall deliver and provides an average airflow velocity of 0.35
m/sec to 0.45 m/sec and airflow of 1088 m³/hr under filter load at 100%
medium setting for 1200 mm x 600 mm fan filter unit and airflow of 650
m³/hr for size of 600 mm x 600 mm fan filter unit. Total static pressure
delivered shall not be less than 280Pa. Noise level shall not exceed 45dBA
measure 1m away from the fan filter unit.
HEPA filter shall be of 125mm thick and is to be 99.99% efficient on removal

of particles 0.3 microns and larger by DOP (dioctyl phthalate) test. Filter
module must be removed from below the ceiling for HEPA filter replacement.
All HEPA filter shall be on site tested for any leakage.
TS/M/S15/12
MECHANICAL WORKS
SECTION 16 - CONTROLS
1. General
1.1 The Contractor shall include for all necessary electric / electronic
automatic controls for the efficient, safe and economical operation of
the complete air conditioning and mechanical ventilation systems. The
scope shall include all plants, system components and accessories. The
control equipment shall include the following:
a) Main air conditioning control panel, subsidiary control panels,

isolators, remote push buttons, selector switches, indicator
lights, alarm bells and buzzers, timers, relays, contactors, etc.
b) All necessary temperature controllers, control valves, sensors,

thermostats, relays, differential pressure switches, etc.
c) The isolators for all electrical items of equipment supplied and

installed by the Contractor.
d) All control wiring and conduits between the main A/C control
panel, subsidiary control panels, and all other items of
equipment supplied by the Contractor including all necessary
transformers, power regulators, etc.
e) All complete electrical/electronic control installation including

testing and calibration under operating conditions. Testing,
calibration and commissioning shall be performed by the
manufacturer's representative or authorised distributor of the
automatic controls.
f) All necessary transformers, power regulators, rectifiers,

distribution boards and resistors shall be provided by the
Contractor to suit the control system.
g) If single phase is tapped from 3 phase power supply, electrical

load shall be arranged to distribute equally for all phases.
1.2 The operation of all automatic control equipment and components shall
be so arranged that on power failure and/or partial or complete shut
down during routine maintenance or repair, all system and components
shall be "fail-safe". All automatic dampers and valves shall be so
arranged to return to their normal operating positions on the
resumption of power supply.
TS/M/S16/1
MECHANICAL WORKS
1.3 The Contractor shall be required to draw up the detailed control

diagrams to suit the particular control manufacturer's equipment which
conform to the Specifications, and submit copies of the shop drawings
for approval before commencing installation of controls. The drawings
shall show every item of control equipment offered, all conduit sizes,
etc.
1.4 The Contractor shall be responsible to ensure that design conditions as

mentioned in the Specifications be complied with.
1.5 The automatic controls shall include the following works:
a) Starting/Stopping and protection of the central air conditioning

plant.
b) Controls of refrigeration machines.
c) Interlocks and alarms.
d) Supervisory control panel.
e) Starting/stopping, protection and controls of air handling units

and fan coil units.
f) Starting/stopping and controls of ventilation fans and

pressurisation fans.
g) All others as specified elsewhere in this Specifications.
2. Sequence of Operation and Starting
2.1 During automatic start up, the selector switches of all equipment of the
system shall be in the "BAS" mode and automated in the following
starting sequence:
a) Air handling units and fan coil units;
b) all cooling tower fans (in sequence);
c) condenser water pump;
d) chilled water pump (corresponds to the condenser water pump);

followed by
e) refrigeration machine (corresponds to the respective condenser

and chilled water pumps).
TS/M/S16/2
MECHANICAL WORKS
2.2 Automated shut-down shall be of reversed order. The time difference

between the shutting down of refrigeration machine and chilled water
pump shall include shut down sequence of the refrigeration machine.
2.3 If the chiller is being cut in/out due to cooling load variation, the
respective chilled and condenser water pumps shall be cut in/out as
well.
2.4 Adequate time delays shall be incorporated between each starting

operation, and also between starting last item of one plant system and
the first item of the next plant system.
3. AHU and FCU General Controls
3.1 The operation of AHU and FCU for general areas shall be started by
the activation of time program from the BAS and or otherwise
specified.
3.2 An alarm shall be activated when the filter is dirty and transmits a print
out message through the BAS.
3.3 An BAS switch for overriding of the DDC controller shall be provided
for easy maintenance purpose.
3.4 When the control panel selector switch is at "AUTO", It shall be

controlled by the DDC itself.
3.5 All AHUs DDC controllers shall be capable of performing the

following fully standalone functions without external connection:-
a) PID control loop
b) Time programme
c) Trend logging
3.6 All controllers, temperature and static pressure indicators relays and
other interfacing equipment shall be housed in a 14 gauge baked
enamel wall mounted panel with a door and key-lock.
3.7 Two-way modulating control valve shall be installed as shown on

Tender Drawings for every air handling unit and fan coil unit water
circuit system to regulate the amount of flow through the coil by DDC
control. Two-way control valves for 40 mm size and below shall be
threaded connection and flanged connection for 50 mm size and above.
It shall be the Contractor's responsibility to select a suitable size of the
2-way modulating control valve. The Contractor shall be required to
replace any 2-way modulating control valve, without additional cost, if
it does not comply with the Specifications.
TS/M/S16/3
MECHANICAL WORKS
3.8 When the AHU is turned off (automatically or manually), the 2-way
modulating control valve shall be closed. However, in the event of
power failure, the valve shall remain in its last position.
4. CAV AHU Controls
4.1 The operation of AHU will commence by the activation of time

program from the BAS. A return duct temperature sensor shall monitor
the return air temperature and transmits its measured value to the DDC
controller. The measured value shall be compared against the set point.
The DDC PID control loop shall modulate the cooling coil control
valve to reach and maintain at the required temperature set point. In
additional, space sensor will be provided at every 10m interval to
monitor the room temperature and transmits its measured value to the
DDC controller. The measured value shall be compared against the
room set point. The DDC PID control loop shall modulate the VSD of
the AHU to reach and maintain at the required room temperature set
point. When the control panel selector switch is at "AUTO", It shall be
controlled by the DDC itself.
4.2 The outdoor air temperature shall be continuously sensed by a outdoor

air temperature sensor. The signal from the sensor shall reset the return
air temperature set point to a predetermined value through the DDC
controller with respect to the outdoor air temperature. A decrease in
outdoor air temperature shall cause a proportional increase in set point
and vice versa.
4.3 The filter condition shall be monitored by a differential pressure switch

and its feedback goes to the DDC controller for alarm monitoring.
TS/M/S16/4
MECHANICAL WORKS
5. VAV Controls (Multiple Thermal / Ventilation Zones)
5.1 The multiple thermal zone (MTZ) VAV system shall be of pressure
dependent type. Temperature of a specific space is measured by a
designated temperature sensor of a thermostat installed within space
and compared to a preset value. The corresponding controller shall
modulate the VAV box damper to reach and maintain the space
temperature at the preset value.
5.2 The operation of AHU will commence by the activation of time

program from the BAS. A off coil temperature sensor shall monitor the
air temperature leaving the cooling coil and transmits its measured
value to the DDC controller. The measured value shall be compared
against the set point. The DDC PID control loop shall modulate the
cooling coil control valve to reach and maintain at the required
temperature set point.
5.3 A pressure differential sensor, installed at approximately 75% down

stream along the main or sub-main duct shall constantly measure and
feedback the air pressure within the ducting system to the DDC
controller. The DDC controller shall regulate the AHU fan speed to
reach and maintain a preset duct pressure.
5.4 The outdoor air temperature shall be continuously sensed by a outdoor

air temperature sensor. The signal from the sensor shall reset the return
air temperature set point to a predetermined value through the DDC
controller with respect to the outdoor air temperature. A decrease in
outdoor air temperature shall cause a proportional increase in set point
and vice versa.
5.5 The multiple ventilation zone (MVZ) VAV system shall be of pressure
dependent type and operate exactly like but independent of the MTZ
VAV system. A space carbone dioxide (CO2) sensor shall provide
input for the modulation of a MVZ VAV box. A wall mounted space
sensor / controller that is capable of sensing both temperature and CO2
concentration is preferred.
5.6 The ventilation zone (MVZ) VAV system shall also be also to
interface to the lighting management to control the VAV box through
radiant heat map and motion sendor
TS/M/S16/5
MECHANICAL WORKS
6. FCU Controls
6.1 The Contractor shall provide and install all the control and power
wiring and an on-off switch to a point adjacent to each unit. Each fan
coil unit shall be provided with a 2-way modulating motorised valve
controlled by a DDC controller.
a) Single Speed Controls - Each FCU shall be provided with a

DDC controller to maintain a preset room dry bulb temperature.
A temperature sensor located at the wall of the room shall be
used to measure the room dry bulb temperature and send a
signal to the controller to modulate the FCU motorized valve.
b) Three Speed Controls - Each FCU shall be provided with an

automatic fan speed DDC controller to maintain a preset room
dry bulb temperature. A temperature sensor located at the wall
of the room and send a signal to the controller to modulate the
FCU air quantity. When the room temperature is 2oC higher
than the preset value, the DDC controller shall automatically
switch the fan speed to “High”. When the room temperature
falls to 1oC higher than the preset value the DDC controller
shall switch the fan speed to “Medium”. When the room
temperature meets the preset value, the DDC controller shall
switch the fan speed to “Low”. Modulation of motorised two
way valve to control chilled water flow shall commence should
room temperature reduce further.
6.2 Fan speed and valve modulation shall be of PID control. The operator
shall be able to change parameter such as set point, on/off control etc.,
from the BAS central or through local access.
7. Cooling Tower Controls
7.1 During full load operation, all cooling towers shall operate to provide
condenser water for the chiller. The cooling towers shall load and
unload by respectively increase and decrease each cooling tower fan
speed through VSD. The fan speed shall be modulated to maintain a
preset (by user) leaving condenser water temperature of each set of
cooling tower. Fan speed modulation shall be of PID control.
7.2 Fan speed of each cooling tower consists of more than one fan shall be
modulated with a single signal from the DDC controller. However,
each fan shall be linked to a dedicated VSD to facilitate speed variation.
TS/M/S16/6
MECHANICAL WORKS
8. Chiller System Controls
8.1 Chiller system shall comprise a chiller and its associated chilled water
and condenser water pumps with the chiller being the central
equipment.
8.2 The DDC controller shall be able to perform chiller duty cycling to
equalise the total run time of each chiller system.
8.3 When any operating chiller system fails to operate, the standby chiller
system shall take over its operation automatically with alarm issued.
8.4 Under BAS mode, chiller system shall be started according to BAS
programming.
8.5 When the chiller system at IMSS or console selector switch is at

"AUTO", It shall be controlled by the DDC itself according to start up
sequence. This sequence shall start the group cooling tower, condenser
pump, chilled water pump and chiller. This mode shall also perform
other control that is necessary for a proper operation of the chiller
system.
9. Water Pump Controls
9.1 The DDC controller shall allow the selection of chilled or condenser
water pumps to be selected to operate with chiller in a different chiller
system as and when the needs arise.
9.2 The DDC controller shall monitor the feedback of the pump through
water flow switch and when a duty pump failure is detected, an alarm
shall be initiated at the BAS central and the stand-by pump shall be
started to replace it.
10. Chilled Water Bypass System
10.1 When the power supply to the control panel is energised, the control
system shall start operation.
10.2 The control system shall provide constant chilled water differential
pressure control between the chilled water supply and return system.
10.3 The differential pressure between the supply and return chilled water
system shall be continuously sensed by a differential pressure
transmitter which shall transmit a standard 4 to 20mA linear current
signal output to DDC controller.
TS/M/S16/7
MECHANICAL WORKS
11. Interlocks and Alarms for Cooling Towers and AHUs, Compressors and
Pumps
11.1 If water level in the cooling tower basin falls below a pre-determined
low level or smoke detector of AHU is activated, an alarm system
consisting of buzzers and indicating lamps shall be automatically
energised.
11.2 Interlocks and alarms shall be provided to ensure that:
a) The chillers can only be operated when the respective

condenser cooling water pump and chilled water pump are in
operation.
b) Flow switches shall be incorporated in each condenser cooling

water and chilled water circuit so that the pumps will be
deenergised if the flow of water stops in the corresponding
circuit whilst the pump motors are operating. Indicating lamps
and manual resets shall be provided for the no-flow cut out.
c) If within a set time after any one of the plant systems sequence
starting operation has been energised either manually or with
time clock contact, and the respective refrigerant compressor
fails to start, an alarm system consisting of bell and indicating
lamp shall automatically be energised.
d) Alarm bells and buzzers shall be cancelled by means of push-

button switches whilst the warning indicating lamps shall only
cut-out after the fault has been corrected.
TS/M/S16/8
MECHANICAL WORKS
12. Chiller Group Automation
12.1 The following table serves as basic guidelines in formulating a

programme algorithm for automating a chiller group with the intent to
optimise the efficiency of the chiller plant. Refinement shall be made
to accommodate any special requirement or operating characteristics of
individual equipment of a chiller group.
Stage Action
i
If any chiller group is in IMSS mode, the programme will deactivate
automation. Operation remains status quo.
If any of the chiller group is in OFF mode automation is still active but
will ignore this group in operation.
Pre-start
mode check If any equipment is in LOCAL mode, the programme will deactivate
automation and operation remains status quo.
If any equipment is in OFF mode automation is still active but will

ignore the chiller group, which the equipment is (are) associated with,
in the operation.
ii
Main time programme will start ALL CT available and ensure that
minimum number of CT for Hi load is satisfied before moving on.
There will be 30-minute time-out in which the above condition will
Cooling prevail.
towers (CT)
Once time-out lapses, the programme will run the number of CT in
accordance with chiller running status. (Hi / Lo load configuration.)
Automation shall NOT be deactivated if any of the CT is in IMSS or
OFF or LOCAL mode.
TS/M/S16/9
MECHANICAL WORKS
Stage Action
iii
Pump shall deliver at least 70% rated flow to return “on” feedback or
chiller manufacturer recommendation
Each pump (condenser and chilled water pump alike) shall be fitted
with approved VSD and programmed to start and stop with minimum
hammering effect.
MCC selector switch:
Remote: Equipment will receive signal from BAS, AUTO and IMSS.
Condenser
and chilled Off: Equipment not operational. The programme will shut off upstream
water pump equipment and abandon this group. Non-critical alarm will be raised.
Normal operation resumes when “Remote” mode is reselected.
Local: Equipment to be turned on and off using push button on MCC.

Manual operation. BAS will deactivate automation and operation
remains status quo. Non-critical alarm will be raised. Normal operation
resumes when “Remote” mode is reselected.
iv
Condenser A preset condenser water flow of each chiller group will be maintained
water flow by varying the condenser water pump speed.
control
Individual approved magnetic flow meter installed on condenser line of
each chiller group shall provide flow data for such control.
(Where energy saving opportunity exists and on the condition that no damage shall be
done to the chiller, provision shall be made to progressively scale down the preset
flow rate in low load condition.)
v
A preset chilled water flow of each chiller group will be maintained by
varying the chilled water pump speed. Chilled water pump shall
Chilled varying according to the load (RT) vs flow (l/sec) or the delta in
water flow pressure (ΔP) to meet the furthest end load required.
control
Individual approved magnetic flow meter installed on chilled water line
of each chiller group shall provide flow data for such control.
In the event when chilled water system pressure raises beyond preset
value during unloading period, the by-pass valve located at the by-pass
line between chiller groups and the air handling units shall be regulated
to relieve the pressure built up.
(Where energy saving opportunity exists and on the condition that no damage shall be
done to the chiller, provision shall be made to progressively scale down the preset
flow rate in low load condition.)
TS/M/S16/10
MECHANICAL WORKS
Stage Action
vi
Chiller on / off feedback is tapped from compressor contact.
MCC selector switch:
Remote: Equipment will receive signal from BAS, AUTO and IMSS.
Off: Equipment not operational. The programme will shut off upstream
equipment and abandon this group. Non-critical alarm will be raised.
Normal operation resumes when “Remote” mode is reselected.
Local: Equipment to be turned on and off using push button on MCC.

Chiller Manual operation. BAS will deactivate automation and operation
resumes when “Remote” mode is reselected.
Number of start per day will be monitored. If the number exceeds 4

times, the programme shall alert the operator. This shall NOT be treated
as a fault.
When a chiller goes into cycle shutdown, there will be a 15-minute

time-out imposed. BAS will assume the chiller faulty if the cyclical
shutdown signal remains and the chiller is still called on to start upon
the expiration of time-out.
If chiller is in anti-recycle mode when signalled to start, the programme

will wait for the lapse of this mode.
vii
Loading: When cooling load exceeds upper limit of a configuration OR
average chilled water supply temperature (among operating chillers)
breaches the upper limit of a set range, a 10-minute count down will be
initiated. At the end of the countdown, both conditions will be verified.
If breach of condition persists, start the next chiller group or switch
over to a higher capacity chiller group.
Unloading: When cooling load falls below the lower limit of a

Chiller configuration AND average chilled water supply temperature (among
group operating chillers) lies within a set range OR when the chilled water
flow rate is delivered at the minimum allowable value, a 10-minute
count down will be initiated. At the end of the countdown, both
conditions will be verified. If both conditions persist, stop the first
chiller group or switch over to a lower capacity chiller group.
During a switchover operation, the pumps of a taking-over chiller group

will be started in sequence, followed by turning off the chiller of a
shutting-down chiller group. Chiller of the taking-over group will then
be turned on; after which the pumps of the shutting-down group will be
switch off as per normal.
TS/M/S16/11
MECHANICAL WORKS
Stage Action
Chiller group selector switch:
BAS: Automated operation.
Chiller Off: Group not operational. Automation is still active but will ignore
group this group in operation. For service and maintenance. Non-critical
alarm will be raised. Normal operation resumes when “BAS” mode is
reselected.
IMSS: Manual operation. Automation will be deactivated. Operation

resumes when “BAS” mode is reselected.
Run time rationalisation is NOT required.
When a group is signalled to start
AUTO : Automated operation. Group operation by DDC without going

through BAS station.
viii
Feature of operating mix-matched equipment of different chiller group
Assigning shall be made available on the graphic centre as well as at controller
equipment level.
to operate
with other The feature is semi-automated in that it requires the manual isolation of
chiller chilled water line.
group
This feature is incorporated in anticipation of simultaneous equipment
failure two chiller groups.
ix
When any chiller group is found to be in IMSS mode or equipment
found to be in LOCAL mode a critical alarm shall be raised.
Alarms
When any chiller group is found to be in AUTO mode or equipment
found to be in LOCAL mode a critical alarm shall be raised.
x
Automation When automation is deactivated, BAS will NOT:
deactivated Turn on standby chiller group when an operating chiller group fails.
Use heat load calculation to manage chiller operation.
TS/M/S16/12
MECHANICAL WORKS
12.2 The automation and control sequence is based on the base chiller
configuration of large and small chillers.
12.3 All set points in the programme shall be adjusted at level decided by
the S.O.. These set points shall include but not be limited to cooling
load, flow rate, temperature, pressure differential and time.
13. Control of Fans
13.1 All ducted ventilation fans for A/C plant room, staircases, smoke-stop
lobbies, toilets, and etc. shall be controlled by BAS complete with
manual override control.
13.2 Ventilation fans for lift motor rooms, generator rooms, electrical
service rooms (LT, HT) shall be automatically started / stopped by
timer (i.e. time switch) and thermostats.
13.3 Manual control of each fan shall be also provided.
13.4 All chemical storage fan shall have explosion proof differential
pressure switch for the low flow and no flow alarm. Beacon light and
buzzer shall install outside the room for warning. Flow switch used
shall be of explosion proof comply to IEC / NEC/ CEC Class I
Division , Zone 1 and 2.
14. Time switches
14.1 The time switches shall be of twenty-four (24) hours Quartz type
with power reserve of minimum 72 hours (after a charging time of
10 min.) in the event of power failure.
14.2 The supply voltage and the frequency range shall be 200...240 Volt a.c.
and 50 Hz respectively.
14.3 The permissible ambient temperature shall be -5oC to +55oC.
14.4 The minimum switching interval shall be 1 minute.
14.5 The time switch shall have a changeover contact of minimum 16 Amp
(changeover) at 240 Volt a.c. at p.f. = 1.
14.6 It shall be designed to clip on DIN-rail EN 50 022.
14.7 The accuracy shall be +/- 1 second per day.
14.8 It shall allow a minimum of 20 different time settings for the

different switching within a period of 24 hours.
TS/M/S16/13
MECHANICAL WORKS
14.9 The class and degree of protection shall be class II according to VDE
0633 and IP 30 as per DIN 40050 respectively.
14.10 Terminal cover shall be provided for each time switch.
14.11 If the time switch is not housed in D.B., approved dust and vermin
proof insulated housing shall be used.
14.12 The Time switches must he such that to cater and able to serve seven
(7) days of different operation programmable type.
15. Intelligent Mimic Cum Supervisory System (IMSS)
15.1 This section covers the design, supply and delivery, installation,
connection, testing and commissioning and twelve (12) months free
maintenance and warranty of the Intelligent Mimic Cum Supervisory
System and associated work and accessories for the air conditioning
plant room central.
15.2 The IMSS shall be of separate system from the BAS and intended
for:-
a) providing an overview of operation status of all air

conditioning equipment at the monitor of the supervisory
control panel in the air-conditioning plant room.
b) remote turning on/off of air-conditioning equipment through

the monitor of the supervisory control panel in case the BAS
being faulty or not in operation.
c) IMSS equipment provided shall be from the same manufacturer

of the BAS manufacturer of this specification.
15.3 The IMSS shall be complete with but not limited to the following
(Please refer to the attached tender drawings):-
a) a floor standing supervisory panel;
b) supervisory communication digital controller;
c) modules for all air-conditioning equipment;
d) two (2) wire low voltage network;
e) software for graphic mimic presentation, interfacing card, other

relevant accessories; etc..
TS/M/S16/14
MECHANICAL WORKS
16. Supervisory Panel
16.1 The floor standing supervisory panel shall consists of a 32" monitor
and a 20o slanting table top with all necessary
LOCAL/BAS/AUTO/OFF/REMOTE selector switches for each plant
room equipment. The keyboard and mouse shall also be installed on
the slanting table top. The supervisory panel shall be at least 1.8 m x
1.2 m and complete with front access panels/doors for future
maintenance.
16.2 The schematic of the entire air conditioning system shall be presented
in graphical mimic format on the monitor with the following
information:-
a) "ON", "OFF", "TRIP" status for the plant room equipment,

such as chillers, pumps, cooling towers.
b) "ON", "OFF", "TRIP" status for the AHUs.
c) "ON" and "OFF" status for the fan coil units (FCUs).
16.3 The " BAS/AUTO/OFF/REMOTE " selection for each plant room
equipment shall be interpreted as follows:-
a) at LOCAL mode, Chiller plant system shall start manually at

the console
b) at BAS mode, the BAS shall control the "ON/OFF" of the plant
room equipment through the optimisation program, time
program, etc.;
c) at REMOTE mode, each plant room equipment shall be

remotely "ON/OFF" through the monitor.
d) at AUTO mode, each chiller plant system shall be automated

"ON/OFF" through the selector switch.
e) "OFF" mode means turning off the equipment.
f) Mode selection and remote supervisory operation for each

AHU shall be executed using graphic software of IMSS. Only
status report is required for each FCU.
TS/M/S16/15
MECHANICAL WORKS
17. Dynamic Colour Graphic Display Terminal
17.1 A colour monitor is provided to display plant diagrams which shall

have the following features and capabilities:-
a) standard library of AHU, FCU, fans, pumps, etc., shall be

available in the CAD library or Visio library and shall be
generated by CAD software or Visio software for any
background drawings. The software shall be capable of
accepting imported CAD or Visio drawings done on other CAD
or Visio software. Access to the computer shall be through
Microsoft Windows interface.
b) all stored graphics shall be on the central disk system and freely
accessible via manual operation through the operator station
keyboard. It shall be possible to assign graphics to an address
structure.
c) the colour graphic of LCD shall be dynamic in that point data

or calculated values shall updated continuously while being
observed. The colour LCD shall have a flashing feature to
indicated abnormal condition such as trip alarm.
d) by means of a mouse which is provided, the cursor control

switching command shall be able to perform effectively and
easily within the normal addressing procedure.
18. Supervisory Communication Digital Controller (SCDC)
18.1 The SCDC shall be a real time microprocessor based self-contained

unit. The microprocessor shall be of 8 bit type and shall have
programs on EEPROM and RAM. The entire IMSS, including its
program shall be backed-up by battery for no less than 72 hours. The
SCDC shall monitor and control the digital input and digital output of
the electronic modules. A minimum of 25% spare capacity shall be
provided at each controller. The SCDC unit shall have the following
functions:-
a) start/stop command.
b) programmed start/stop time.
c) start, stop & trip status request.
d) points summary for all switches and relays of the electronic

modules.
TS/M/S16/16
MECHANICAL WORKS
e) alarm and change of status detection.
f) provides 2 lines diagnostics with short and open circuit

indication.
g) provides power supply to operate the electronic modules

through the 2 wire networks.
18.2 The SCDC shall link to the monitor through interfacing card and
terminal.
18.3 The SCDC shall have the capacity to map no less than 900 field points
that are networked from the respective electronic modules.
19. Electronic Modules
19.1 The electronic module shall have the digital input and digital output
function.
19.2 The electronic module shall consist of electronic switches and relays.
19.3 The switches and relays shall be operated from the SCDC.
19.4 The switches and relays shall be addressable and able to communicate
with the other components via a 2 wire network.
19.5 Each airconditioning equipment such as AHU, FCU, chiller, pump,

cooling tower, shall be installed with electronic modules.
20. Two (2) wire Low Voltage Network
20.1 The SCDC shall be connected to a series of electronic modules through

2 wire low voltage network.
20.2 The SCDC shall supply 24V DC to all the electronic modules through
the 2 wire network.
20.3 The SCDC shall able to control and communicate to all electronic
modules through these two (2) wire network.
20.4 The minimum transmission rate shall not be less than 9600 baud.
TS/M/S16/17
MECHANICAL WORKS
21. Programming
21.1 The application program for the SCDC and monitor terminal shall be
programmed using graphic software.
22. IMSS Point Schedule
22.1 The point schedule enclosed hereinafter shall be read in conjunction

with the tender drawings and specification.
22.2 The point schedule enclosed is for the purpose of guidance of

minimum requirements. The Contractor shall allow cost in his tender
for any further points to enable the system to operate in its intended
purpose of a complete optimum operating system.
22.3 In general, the following shall be provided for:-
a) Chillers, AHUs, Cooling Towers, Condenser & Chilled Water

Pumps
i) Start/stop control.
ii) On/off status.
iii) Trip alarm.
b) FCUs
i) On/off status.
ii) Trip alarm
TS/M/S16/18
MECHANICAL WORKS
SECTION 17 – PROGRAMMABLE LOGIC CONTROL SYSTEM
1. General
1.1. The specification shall be read in conjunction with the Drawings (as per
Schedule of Drawings), which are intended to be mutually explanatory
and complementary to one another. All works and specification called
for by one, i.e. Specification or drawings even if not by the other shall be
fully executed and complied with in total.
1.2. The Programmable Logic Controller (PLC) system shall use for providing
continuous monitoring and control of mechanical and electrical services
in the buildings and facilities. The control and monitoring functions
required are listed in the schedule points.
1.3. Unless otherwise specified, the equipment and material within the scope
of this Specification shall be of a standard proven design. Design
incorporating components which may be considered prototype in nature
will not be accepted.
1.4. Dynamic graphics shall be programmed, generated and applicated for all
points as per schedule point list to assist operations.
1.5. All PLCs, computers, servers and remote I/Os power supply shall be back
up by UPS in case of power failure. The design and provision of the UPS
shall be included.
1.6. The following provisions shall be made:
(a) Supply and installation of all monitoring temperature sensors

(inclusive of thermowells), RH sensors, velocity and static air
pressure transducers, water flow sensors and transducers, air flow
switches etc., for the Air-conditioning and Mechanical
Ventilation System and other Mechanical Systems in this Sub-
Contract, unless they are specifically designated in the Point
Schedule, Drawing, or specified in the other Section to be by
others.
(b) Supply and installation of interfacing panel that including

terminal blocks, cable tray/trunkings and etc. The terminal blocks
shall be allowed for at one end of the entire panel for top-entry
PLC System cabling and the other end for field equipment
cabling. A minimum of 20% spare terminal block shall be
allowed.
TS/M/S17/1
MECHANICAL WORKS
(c) Supply of all electrical transducers such as voltage, current

(including of CTs), power factor, frequency etc unless they are
specifically designated or specified in the other Sections to be by
others.
(d) Supply and installation of all interfacing junction boxes adjacent

to all starter panel, sensors, transducers, etc, unless specified
otherwise to be by others.
(e) Supply and installation of wiring from the starter panels, or

interfacing junction boxes (or interfacing panel) to the Controller
directly where control and monitoring of the equipment are
required.
(f) Supply and installation of wiring from all sensors and transducers
provided by the Sub-Contractor directly to the interfacing
junction boxes or Controllers as the case may be.
(g) Supply and installation of all interfacing wiring between ALL

control panel, Mimic panels, interfacing modules and Controllers.
(h) All Cables shall lay in the appropriate size of GI conduit or

trunking.
(i) For those devices that are installed by the other M&E service
Sub-Contractors, the PLC System Sub-Contractor shall
responsible for correct status or readings are achieved from the
interfacing panels all the way right up to the PLC System work
stations in the control room.
(j) For devices that are installed by the PLC System Sub-Contractor,
they shall responsible for the correct status or readings are
achieved from the devices all the way right up to the PLC System
work stations in the Control room.
1.7. Notwithstanding the training given, the service of 2 skilled operators for a
period of up to 12 weeks (of 8 hours per day) after substantial completion
to assist in the operation and maintenance of the system on site shall be
provided. The tendered price shall deem to have provided for this
requirement.
1.8. The PLC System shall be supplied, installed, commissioned and

maintained entirely by a local specialist Sub-Contractor who shall:
(a) be a BCA registered firm registered under Category ME02

(Building Automation, Industrial and Process Control System) of
a financial category as specified in the Tender Document.
TS/M/S17/2
MECHANICAL WORKS
(b) be staffed with factory trained engineers fully capable of PLC

designing and providing all such information, instructions,
emergency maintenance service on all system components to
enable the PLC System to operate at peak efficiency at all times
i.e. twenty-four (24) hours per day, twelve (12) months each year.
(c) Carry adequate spare parts to guarantee that the down time of the
building automation system shall not be caused by lack of standby
spare parts nor by waiting for spare parts to become available.
(d) have a proven track record in design and installation of a fully

computerised PLC System similar in performance to that
specified herein.
2. Compliance with Regulation / Standards
2.1 Definitions of Terms
The following terms shall have the meaning as defined herewith:

Programmable Logic Control (PLC) refers to the entire system of
hardware, software, interfaces using in isolation or combination to
achieve the control sequence and logic as required, having the necessary
redundancy and availability as required.
Distribution Intelligence Architecture refers to the particular

configuration of hardware whereby master controller (CPU) and a
secondary controller (FPU) is networked by a fieldbus. The secondary
controller located remotely in the field, close to the instrumentation and
actuators. Control algorithm being resited at the secondary controller
memory, and all control and monitoring actions are being performed by
the secondary controller, but dutifully fedback to the master controller via
a fieldbus.
Remote I/O Architecture refers to the particular configuration of

hardware whereby the I/O Modules for the controller (CPU) is located
remotely, close to the instrumentation and actuators, and state and status
are fedback to the controller via a fieldbus.
Local I/O Architecture refers to the particular configuration of hardware

whereby the I/O Modules for the controller (CPU) is co-located with the
CPU Module on the same backplane. This form of configuration can be
co-existed with the Distributed Intelligence or Remote I/O architectures.
Field bus refers to the standard industrial bus used for communication
between the controller (CPU) and the remote I/O modules or the
secondary controller (FPU).
TS/M/S17/3
MECHANICAL WORKS
Distributed Intelligence Drop Module refers to the secondary controller

used in a Distributed Intelligence Architecture.
Human Machine Interface refers to the micro-computer terminal or mimic
panel where the statuses and parameters of all the equipment are
indicated. Where micro-computer is used, it shall also act as the
Programmer.
Rack refers to the combination of modules (CPU module, Power Supply

Module, IO Module etc) mounted onto a common base plate.
Controller refers to the rack where the CPU Module is located. Primary
Controller refers to the rack that is assuming control and executing
command in a Hot Standby System.
Standby Controller refers to the other rack where the CPU is not
assuming control or executing command in the Hot Standby System.
2.2 Operation Conditions
All equipment, parts and works specified herein shall be capable of

operating reliably, effectively and efficiently under the following
continuous site conditions/ input power supply conditions:
Maximum Temperature 35C dry bulb

28C wet bulb
Average Temperature 32C dry bulb

26C wet bulb
Relative Humidity 20 - 95% RH (non-

condensing)
Environment High dust content
Power Supply 230V/400V 50Hz AC

Voltage dip tolerance 15%
Line conditioners or filters shall be provided for the proper uninterrupted

operation of the control system installation.
TS/M/S17/4
MECHANICAL WORKS
3. Submittals
3.1. The following products and software literature shall be submitted for
review and approval:
(a) All hardware, computers, peripherals and other components.
(b) All software, which includes Database, Utility, SCADA,

Graphical, Office Suite and Operating (OS) Software.
(c) Surge suppression, power conditioning equipment and

uninterruptable power (UPS) system components.
(d) Identify clearly, any and all exceptions taken to the requirements
of the specifications.
(e) Installation and Users Manuals (manuals will be turned over to

the Owners operating personnel for their use at substantial
completion).
(f) In addition to technical literature, the sub-contractor should

submit the following for review and approval during tender:
(g) Project Management Plan including, project organization chart,

resumes of all key personnel. The sub-contractor project
management team shall include key project and engineering
personnel that have experience in implementing large airport
projects.
(h) Track Record. The Sub-contractor shall submit a list major

projects successfully implemented in Singapore in the last 10
years for evaluation.
(i) Software Development Plan
(j) Safety Plan
(k) Test Plan. This should include the various type of test to be
carried out.
(l) Proposed project schedule with manpower loading.
(m) Quality Assurance Plan. As software is a significant part of the

entire scope, the Quality Assurance Plan shall include software
assurance. The sub-contractor must have experience in software
assurance from previous projects. All sub-contractors must
submit sample software assurance plans and procedures
implemented from previous project.
TS/M/S17/5
MECHANICAL WORKS
(n) Sample O&M manual
(o) Sample Interface Program Documentation
(p) Sample panel configuration drawing
3.2. Network architecture diagram indicating the network nodes, file servers,
gateways, routers, bridges and all other components included in the IBMS
LAN shall be submitted for comments and approval. The proposed
network physical specifications and performance shall be indicated.
3.3. Software flow diagrams for all custom application programs to be

developed to satisfy the specified requirements, shall be submitted for
approval before commencement.
3.4. Furniture plan layout for the control Room complete with layout of all the
servers shall be submitted for approval.
3.5. The followings shall be submitted for review and approval regarding the
proposed data base software.
(a) Facility Management reports.
(b) Utility and command software tools and features.
(1) Screen, windows and menu presentation.

(2) Data presentation.
(3) New and computer generated data editing features.
(4) Data formatting.
(5) Data and document management features.
(6) Tutorials and help features.
3.6. System Reliability
The reliability of the entire PLC System shall be computed and submitted
to the SO for record.
TS/M/S17/6
MECHANICAL WORKS
4. General Requirement for Programmable Logic Controller
4.1. The complete Programmable Logic Controller Control sub-system

provided shall include but not limited to – PLC, network interfaces,
conduit and wiring, software, power supplies, cabinetry, communication
devices, programming, testing, commissioning, training and warrant.
4.2. The PLC System shall be design with Hot Standby configuration. The
CPU shall have current system status for automatic switchover in the
event of a primary controller failure. All processors must not be affected
by any control system hardware failures. The changeover time shall not
be more than 300ms. Systems shall be designed to distribute
components over multiple PLCs so that a CPU/FPU failure will not cause
a system failure. It shall be possible to shut off any CPU and have the
system continue to run minus the equipment attached to the CPU/FPU
shut down. Latching relays and other fail-safe devices shall be utilizied
to insure maximum system up times.
4.3. The following functions (but not limited to) are provided as minimum
requirements for the PLC system;
(a) dynamic and animated graphics for information,

(b) control logic (arithmetic, PI, PID, etc)
(c) monitoring of status
(d) management of Data Base
(e) setting of equipment perimeters
(f) colour representation of status
(g) alarm class differentiation
(h) Scheduler
(i) Trend Point Storage
(j) Various format of Report Generator
(k) Time function
(l) Various format of Presenting the Trend Report
(m) Event Programs
(n) Global Energy Management
(o) full English interactive menu selection
(p) True multi-tasking functionality
(q) Third-party software compatibility etc.
4.4. All field devices including sensors, switches, actuators and transmitters
for the control and monitoring of systems and equipment shall be
provided.
4.5. All software development and code generated shall become the property
of the Employer, with license and copyrights being vetted with the
Employer.
TS/M/S17/7
MECHANICAL WORKS
4.6. Programmable Logic Controllers (PLC) will utilise remote Input/Output

(I/O) modules and should be configured in redundant I/O bus
configuration with hot standby redundant CPU, Communication Module
and Power Supply. The communication cables for the PLC system shall
be Cat6e.
4.7. The performance of the PLC program execution times and other stated
performance parameters shall not be degraded if any PLC is populated up
to 100 percent of capacity. If performance degradation is expected at this
point quantity, indicate the maximum point population for each PLC
while maintaining performance requirements.
4.8. Each PLC shall contain all the required software and hardware to fulfil
the requirements of this Specification.
4.9. The PLC shall be state of the art digital device using real time
programmable memory capable of performing logic sequencing, continuo
control and communications.
4.10. The PLC shall be capable of handling analogue and digital I /O signals as
required by the respective applications.
4.11. The PLC shall be capable of operating in an industrial environment w/o

special requirements cooling o electrical filtering. All components of the
PLC system except programming equipment such as notebook PC shall
be designed to operate in an environment with RH ranging from 0% to
95%(non-condensing) and ambient temperatures of 0 to 60*C
(operational) and –40 to 80*C (storage).
4.12. The PLC shall be modular with all components (except the power supply)
in a single rack assembly designed for plug-in modular assemblies and
shall allow for easy service and maintenance and expansion. All system
modules shall provide for free airflow convection cooling and no internal
fans or other means of cooling except heat sinks shall be required.
4.13. No PLC controller shall be initially populated to more than 75 percent of

the controllers’ maximum point capacity of any point type (analogue
inputs, analogue outputs, digital inputs, digital outputs). Each PLC
controller shall be a complete and self-contained unit capable of
independent operation without the need for control and computing
resources residing elsewhere
4.14. The PLC shall be designed and tested to operate in industrial

environment.
4.15. Shall be designed for easy backplane mounting in NEMA-class panels, or

rack mounting for 19” installations.
TS/M/S17/8
MECHANICAL WORKS
4.16. No DIP switch shall be used in the PLC system. All I/O addressing is
done in software.
4.17. Common I/O wiring connector for all I/O modules to eliminate
guesswork of which modules go with which connector.
4.18. Health information on every module during run-time for easier

maintenance.
4.19. Each and every PLC shall contain the following features, functions and
performance characteristics:
(a) CPU shall support Hot standby configuration with current system
status for automatic switchover in the event of a primary
controller failure. This means critical processes are not affected
by control system hardware failures. The change over time will
not be more than 300ms. The Master PLC at the central control
room shall equip with a 10.4” display with built-in MMI.
(b) PLC controllers shall be located in the mechanical or electrical

rooms housing the equipment to be monitored or controlled, Air
Handling Unit (AHU) rooms, electrical pipe shaft rooms, or in the
room where the Interface Strips are located. All PLC controller
locations are subject to the approval of the SO. Co-ordinate with
the SO prior to installing PLC at any location. The remote I/O
modules located in each AHU room shall equip with a 3.9”
display.
(c) Any or all points in a PLC shall be definable as global points

whose data is transmitted to other PLCs. Global points shall be
freely defined without restriction and at any time.
(d) Global point transmission to and reception by other PLCs on a

communication bus shall not require any other device intervention
for such transmission and reception to take place.
(e) Global point data shall not be used within any control loop.
Ensure all points for a control loop are contained in a single PLC.
(f) As a minimum, the PLC controller used for this project shall
conform to the following:
(1) 89/336/EMC
(2) 92/31/EEC
(3) 93/68/EEC
(4) 73/23/EEC
(5) EN50081-2
(6) EN61131-2
TS/M/S17/9
MECHANICAL WORKS
5. Implementation and Installation
5.1. The design and implementation of the PLC architecture shall be

responsibility of the Sub-Contractor, basing generally on the guidelines
given herein.
(a) Each PLC, and its corresponding hot standby PLC, shall not be
used to control more than six AHUs (whether VAV or CAU
type).
(b) VAV boxes will be allowed to be controlled by FPU, or

intelligence LON devices, network to the PLC through
LONTALK.
(c) All PLC shall be loaded up to 80%. The remaining is reserved for
future expansion.
5.2. It is the responsibility of the Sub-Contractor to design and install a

working system basing on the control and monitoring functions specified
in this specification.
5.3. Furniture for the all the workstations, equipment and printers shall be
provided.
5.4. Operator Interface Workstations shall be arranged in a semicircle

configuration around the operator. Work spaces shall be provided for
11x14 inch printed materials to be used without interference to provided
controls, keyboards, etc.
5.5. Operator Interface Workstation lighting shall be provided to supplement

normal office lighting overhead. Such lighting shall be compatible with
the type and color spectrum of lighting overhead to prevent eye strain.
All surfaces shall be washable.
5.6. Anti-static discharge pads or other methods shall be furnished to prevent

any disruption of service at the consoles by electrostatic discharges.
5.7. A console chair with armrests and seat height adjustment shall be
included for each station.
5.8. The installation of the PLC System shall adhere to industrial practices
and recommendation from the PLC System Supplier
6. Instrumentation and Actuator / System Control and Operation
Please refer to section S16A/S16 of the Specification
TS/M/S17/10
MECHANICAL WORKS
7. Testing and Commission
7.1. General
The PLC system shall be complete and thorough testing, adjusting and
commissioning of the sub-systems and equipment installed and to bring
the entire PLCS system into safe reliable and satisfactory operation.
Generally, the 3 copies of detailed and comprehensive test plans and

procedures of the factory tests, commissioning tests, performance tests
and other relevant tests shall be submitted to the S.O. for approval. These
test plans and procedures shall be submitted three (3) months before the
scheduled date of commencement of tests.
All test plans and procedures shall be designed to fully test the system to
demonstrate and verify the compliance of the system equipment and
system performance to the requirements of this specifications. The
Contractor shall be responsible for all arrangement and costs associated
with the testing of the system, including simulation of all loading
conditions of the system.
7.2. Failure of a Test
Should a defect be detected during one of the tests, the nature of the
defect shall be explained in detail. The S.O. shall decide if the defect
must be rectified before testing can continue. If the defect must be
rectified, the S.O. shall decide what portion of the tests shall be re-run.
The S.O. shall have all tests re-run if he deems so necessary.
There shall be no additional claim of any and all costs of re-run of tests,
and modification deemed necessary by the S.O. during the tests to meet
the specifications. All changes or modifications shall be approved before
implementation.
7.3. Test plans and procedures
Test plans and procedures to be submitted shall be comprehensive, and

shall include all details necessary to ensure that test procedures and test
results will demonstrate specification compliance. Test plans shall
include as a minimum, the following:
(a) Test description and objective of each test, including block

diagrams showing system configuration and procedures for
conducting each test, and the personnel and test facilities,
necessary to perform each test.
TS/M/S17/11
MECHANICAL WORKS
(b) Designation of all inputs and outputs required testing each

function. As far as practicable, test input/output shall be
expressed in measurable terms with acceptable tolerances for each
measurement.
(c) A complete time sequence of test events.
(d) A list and descriptions of software program to be used for each

test, including running time for each program.
(e) A detailed description of any required analysis of test results.
7.4. Test Report
All results of each test shall be recorded and submitted to the M&E
S.O./Employer in a comprehensive test report. The test report shall
contain as a minimum, the following information:
(a) Function that were tested.
(b) All test results and necessary analysis of test results.
(c) Evaluation of test results and analysis indicating explicitly

whether the test results meet the specified performance and
functional requirement.
(d) A record of all adjustments, engineering or program changes

found necessary during the test.
(e) Suggested corrective action to improve the test results, if any.
(f) Suggested test plans for re-running of the whole or part of the
test, if found necessary.
7.5. Test Facility
The Contractor shall be responsible for providing all test equipment,

tools, accessories, personnel, services and any other facilities required for
the execution of all tests. Whenever necessary, the PLC contractor shall
provide two or more sets of testing equipment tools, etc., to expedite
testing.
TS/M/S17/12
MECHANICAL WORKS
7.6. Commissioning Test
In view of the need for the earliest possible commissioning of the system
into operation, the Contractor shall execute all commissioning tests as
soon as it is possible. This test shall, in general, be performed by
experienced technicians who are involved in the actual installation works.
The BAS contractor shall schedule and control the test, and shall report
to the S.O./Employer on the progress of the tests.
The Contractor shall be responsible to coordinate all the necessary

interfacing with the connected systems to ensure the expeditious
execution of the performance test. The Contractor shall ensure adequate
precautions are taken to protect connected system due to system
malfunction, and to calibrate all analogue sensors.
After the interfacing connections at the Controllers are completed, the
Contractor shall conduct tests to ensure the system connections are
correct, and that the correct points identification are implemented.
Simultaneous with the hardware checks, the Contractor shall conduct the
necessary test on the CPUs, the controllers and the software.
7.7. Performance Test
The Contractor shall conduct the performance tests (or final acceptance
test) of the system after the commissioning test. The Contractor shall
give notice of and shall submit detailed test plans and procedures to the
S.O./Employer as specified herein. All performance tests shall be
witnessed by the S.O./Employer.
The performance test shall be conducted with minimum interference to

the operation of the connected system.
The performance test shall be designed and planned to put the system
through all aspects of the operations. In view of the large number of tests
that need to be carried out, the Contractor shall plan for the performance
tests to be conducted expeditiously, and in the minimum possible time.
The Contractor shall provide all necessary equipment and software

necessary for the simulation of all possible conditions of operation that
the system may have to perform under.
The Performance Test shall include:
(a) Control, Monitoring and Measuring
Each and every point of the system shall be checked, tested and
calibrated. Start/stop points shall be checked and tested under
AUTO and MANUAL conditions.
TS/M/S17/13
MECHANICAL WORKS
Measuring points shall be calibrated to the specified accuracy.

Trend logs, totalization, suppression and other functions
specified, shall be conducted concurrent with other tested.
Manual activation of summaries, actions and associated I/O

reports and displays as specified shall be tested.
(b) Time Program Control
Performance tests of the time program control function shall be

conducted simultaneously with other tests. The accuracy of the
timing and time delay between two or more connected equipment
start-ups shall be tested.
Week and special day initiation of all commands and actions

including associated reporting and display shall be tested.
(c) Event Initiated Command (EIC)
The Contractor shall arrange with the connected systems

contractor responsible for the connected systems to simulate the
conditions under which the EIC function performs.
The system shall be checked and tested for accuracy, timing and
time response. The system's ability to initiate commands and
actions, as specified, based on single and logical groups of event
shall also be tested.
(d) Power Demand and Energy Management
This function shall be checked and tested for accuracy of power

demand monitoring, accuracy and response to load shedding
required and load restoration.
The Contractor shall provide signal generators and simulator

equipment to simulate the various possible power demand
conditions for the purpose of the tests.
All features including synchronization, missing synchronization

pulse, load shedding calculations, minimum on time, minimum
off time, etc., shall be tested.
TS/M/S17/14
MECHANICAL WORKS
(e) Response Times
Response times of the system shall be recorded and checked

during each and every phase of all performance tests conducted.
The BAS contractor shall provide the necessary timing and
recording equipment to accurately and reliably record all respond
times.
Throughput and occurrence time resolution shall be tested under

fully loaded conditions.
(f) Input/Output
Concurrent with the other tests, the Contractor shall check the
accuracy, format and colour coding of all input/ output at the
man-machine interface peripherals.
The Contractor shall change the format or colour coding (if any)
of parts of the input/output of the system as deemed necessary by
the S.O./Employer.
All function keys and commands shall be checked and tested for
accuracy and performance.
Message routing, assignment of critical/ non-critical, summaries

shall be checked and tested.
(g) Complete System Re-load
A complete re-load of the system from the updated source tape or

disk shall be made.
(h) Unit Fault Conditions
All of the unit fault conditions shall be simulated and the

computer response checked. Wherever possible, a standard piece
of equipment shall be used to generate these fault conditions. If
this cannot be achieved, special test units shall be used.
The test of fault conditions shall also include the testing of the
computer routine which checks the DDCs and transmission
communications link.
Automatic change-over or by-pass program routines shall be

checked by simulating failure or fault conditions in the primary
equipment. Simulation of failure or fault condition shall include
possible modes of failure or faults.
TS/M/S17/15
MECHANICAL WORKS
(i) Power Fail & Re-Start
The power supply to the system shall be interrupted during the

normal system operation. The system shall be checked to
ensure automatic change-over to the UPS system without any
corruption in system operation.
The UPS systems shall then be interrupted for varying periods of

time. Power to the system shall be restored through the UPS or
through the main power supply. The system shall be checked to
ensure that the system operation has not been corrupted by the
power cycling and voltage fluctuation and surges.
Checks shall also be made on the updating of the system's data

required due to the changes in status of the connected system
during the system outage.
(j) Operator Command
At the start of the performance (acceptance) tests, a check list of

all operator commands, both operational and executive, and the
system's diagnostics shall be established. As the different operator
commands are used for testing of the system, each will be ticked
off after it has been successfully utilised. In this manner, the
majority of the operator commands, and the system diagnostic
programs for checking of invalid operator commands shall be
tested concurrently with the various phases of the performance
tests.
Specific operator commands not exercised during the tests shall

be checked individually during the operator command test.
(k) Computer and Standard Peripherals
The computer manufacturers' standard diagnostics will be used to

test the CPUs and the standard peripherals.
The Contractor shall instruct the S.O./Employer and/or his

representative on how to bring in and run all the standard
diagnostics. This instruction shall include how to determine the
completion of a successful pass, and how to interpret error
messages given in the diagnostic documentation.
TS/M/S17/16
MECHANICAL WORKS
(l) Communication Equipment Operational Limits
Utilizing test equipment, the limits of a sample number of central

equipment and PLCs shall be tested. These test shall include the
transmission levels, the minimum levels which can be received,
the transmission is still possible, and the limits of the frequencies
which can be received correctly. Dummy, Iumped constant lines
shall be used to test the transmission limits.
(m) Communication Error Rates
Communication error rates tests shall be conducted concurrently

with other tests, A single white noise generator shall be connected
to the lines during the various tests on the system functions.
Periodically, the transmission fault count for the line shall be
requested.
A successful test will be indicated if there has been less than one
error count per 106 SECONDS OF OPERATIONS.
(o) Documentation
The documentation for the system shall be completed and ready

before the commencement of the commissioning tests. This
documentation shall be made available to the S.O./Employer and
this representative throughout the commissioning and
performance testing phases.
8. Maintenance
8.1. General
This section of the Specification sets out the requirements on

documentation which shall be complied with and provided by the
Contractor.
All documentation shall be written in the English Language, and using

accepted terminology and diagrams. The documentation shall be written
in a clear and concise manner and shall be presented in a neat, well-
organised and logical format.
The Sub-Contractor shall submit to the S.O./Employer for approval a

record keeping system including procedures to ensure that all changes or
modifications are fully documented. Changes or modifications whether in
equipment hardware or software shall be documented immediately and
submitted to the S.O./Employer for approval.
TS/M/S17/17
MECHANICAL WORKS
A master record shall be set up and maintained by the Contractor for each
sub-system and component. The initial documentation shall be entered as
well as all changes/ modifications records shall be handed over to the
S.O./Employer prior to the commencement of the Defects Liability
Period.
The documentation shall be a detailed presentation with manuscript and

illustrations. For each component, it shall include, but not be limited to:
(a) description
(b) functional description
(c) functional block diagrams
(d) operating instructions and characteristic
(e) maintenance and repair procedures
(f) test procedures
(g) schematic drawings and circuit diagrams
(h) as-built drawings
(i) parts lists
(j) program listings
(k) other information as deemed necessary by the S.O./Employer for
the completeness and adequacy of the documents.
8.2. Documentation Presentation
All documentation shall be subject to approval of the S.O./Employer with

respect to completeness adequacy and presentation.
All documentation shall be prepared in a clear concise manner with

appropriate illustrations and tabulations supporting the text.
All documentation shall be bound in loose leaf thick cover volumes and
shall have the appropriate title printed on the front and along the binder
spine. Binding shall be subjected to approval by the S.O./Employer.
A comprehensive index shall be compiled for each system, sub-system

and equipment.
Dividers shall be provided between sections in each volume. All

documents shall be neatly organised to enable easy reading.
The numbering and indexing system employed for the documents shall be
sufficiently flexible to allow for progressive additions, amendments and
editorial changes without complete re-arrangement.
TS/M/S17/18
MECHANICAL WORKS
One copy of the final version of the installation documents, operator's

handbook, and maintenance manual shall be bound with each page
contained in a clear plastic sheath of the type capable of being easily
removed for amendments and additions. The protection against
smudging by water, oil and other liquids and damages through rough
usage.
Three copies of the final edition of Total System Documentation shall be

supplied within one month of the commencement of the Defects Liability
Period.
Re-issues shall be provided when changes or modification are made in

equipment hardware or software. The Contractor may re-issue individual
sheets or portions of the documentation that are affected by the changes
or modifications. Each re-issue or revision shall carry the same title as
the original while the issue code number shall be made serially.
However, any revisions of the final documentation material will require a
total re-issue of the entire volume concerned with change or modification.
8.3. System Design Document
This document shall define clearly and in detail the design philosophy,
objectives, principle and criteria of the system. This document shall be
prepared immediately after acceptance of Tender.
The document shall explicitly highlight the ways and means employed in
the design of the system to achieve the system functional and operational
requirements specified herein.
Detailed descriptions of the characteristics of sub-system, equipment and

components, with respect to the part they play in the entire system in
achieving the specified functional and operational requirements shall be
covered.
Three copies of the System Design Document and subsequent

amendments approved by the S.O./Employer shall be supplied within
three (3) months after the award of the contract. This document shall
form a part of the OPERATION, MAINTENANCE AND SERVICING
MANUAL of the total system documentation.
8.4. Installation Document
This document shall cover all the installation aspects of the System and
shall serve as a guide and a record of all the installation procedures on
site. All sub-systems, systems equipment and components shall be
covered in the document and all installation drawings shall be included.
TS/M/S17/19
MECHANICAL WORKS
The document shall include the following minimum information:
(a) Detail drawings and descriptions of size, weight, material, colour,

finishes, etc., of each piece of equipment.
(b) Detail drawings and descriptions of mounting methods,

installation procedures, cables connections, access provisions,
etc., of each piece of equipment.
(c) Location of all equipment at site to be shown on building plans.
(d) Layout of Control Room and control console arrangement.
(e) All signal transmission and power cable routes on the building
plans.
(f) Schematic and circuit diagrams of all necessary field wiring.
(g) Layout of mimic and display panels.
(h) The routine of operation, from necessary preparations for placing

the equipment into operation to securing the equipment after
operation, shall be fully described. Appropriate illustrations shall
be provided. The sequence illustrations shall be presented in
tabular form wherever possible.
A list of applicable test instruments, aids and tools required in the

performance of necessary measurements and techniques shall be
included. Set-up tests and calibration procedures shall be described.
Five copies of the document, including amendments issues shall be

submitted one month prior to commencement of site installation. The
updated edition of the document shall form part of the OPERATION,
MAINTENANCE AND SERVICING MANUAL of the total System
Documentation.
8.5. Software Document
Full software documentation necessary to operate, maintain, update and

modify the software of the System shall be provided.
All relevant information, such as system data records, data structure, data
flow charts, calling sequences, definition of abbreviation, macros,
memory maps, timing, file structures, programme listing, etc., shall be
included.
TS/M/S17/20
MECHANICAL WORKS
The document shall explain the overall software structure with flow
charts and descriptions, with particular attention to the points at which
future user programs can be interfaced. The complete operating structure
shall be explained such that it is clearly understood, especially by any
competent programmer who wishes to specify or interface a new program
into the System.
In the overall description, the allocation of storage and times to the

component jobs shall be given, with the limits of spare capacity. A
detailed description of each component job in operating system shall
follow, including the executive, handlers and user programs.
Each program shall have a functional description, with flow charts, etc.,
together with the actual listing with narrative. An instruction list for each
program step shall be provided.
Documentation shall be provided for all software programs, including

support software program, developed by the computer manufacturer and
by the Contractor himself to develop the operational software, and those
provided for system performance monitoring and fault diagnosis.
Three copies of the documentation issues, including re-issues shall be

provided when these become available.
The entire software documentation shall form the SOFTWARE

MANUAL of the Total System Documentation.
The implementation of the control logic, and codes are deemed to be the
property of the Employer, and to be appropriately documented and
handed over to.
8.6. Operator Manual
This manual shall comprise a concise set of procedures which the BAS
operator may require to operate the System. The minimum detailed
technical description of the internal operations of the various parts of the
System shall be provided. Cross reference to the appropriate manuals for
detailed technical description shall be provided.
The manual shall list and explain the specific procedures to be followed
for both hardware and software operations. Instructions shall be as basic
and detailed as necessary. Instructions shall be provided for operational
aspects of the system, including normal day-to-day operations, switching
on and off power, starting and shutting of the System, power failure
restart, loading of programs, checking of performance, etc.
TS/M/S17/21
MECHANICAL WORKS
Additionally, procedures shall be given for fault diagnosis. Typical

systems shall be listed, and instructions given to run the appropriate test
routines.
Five copies of the Operator's Manual shall be submitted to the

S.O./Employer three (3) months before the commencement of
commissioning tests.
8.7. Maintenance Document
The documentation of maintenance of the System shall include both

preventive maintenance and corrective maintenance.
Preventive Maintenance
The manufacturer's recommended procedures and checks, necessary for

proper preventive maintenance shall be indicated. These procedures and
checks shall be specified for pre-operation, daily, weekly, monthly,
quarterly, semi-annual and as required as necessary to ensure reliable
equipment operations. Specifications including defined tolerances for all
electrical, mechanical and other applicable measurements and
adjustments or both shall be listed.
Corrective Maintenance
This section shall provide the information necessary for isolation and
repair of failure and malfunctions. Accuracies, limits and tolerances for
all electrical, physical and other applicable measurements shall be
described. Instructions for re-assembly, overhaul and re-assembly,
including shop specification and performance requirement shall be
provided.
Fully detailed step by step instructions shall be given where failure to

follow special procedures would result in danger to operating or
maintenance personnel, damage to the equipment, improper operation,
excessive effort in man hours, etc. Instructions and specifications shall
be included for such maintenance as may be accomplished by specialised
technicians and engineers in a modern electromechanical workshop.
TS/M/S17/22
MECHANICAL WORKS
Instructions concerning special test set-up, component fabrication, use of

special tools, jigs, and test equipment shall be included. Maintenance
procedures shall cover the diagnosis of faults, testing and setting up
adjustments, replacements of units, routine mechanical servicing and
operation of test equipment. The use of test programs shall be explained,
with step by step instructions for running them, but the detailed listing of
the programs shall be provided separately. The operation of the data
transmission test programs in conjunction with the test sets shall be
covered, with procedures for line testing, and for checking the outstation
in conjunction with the BAS control room. Steps for the replacement of
plug in units of the computer system shall be given.
8.8. Parts List
A detailed list of all parts shall be provided. It shall contain the

information necessary to describe the characteristics of the individual
parts required for identification. All equipment within a group and all
assemblies, sub-assemblies and replacement parts of units shall be listed.
The tabular arrangement shall be in alphanumeric number. A table of
contents or other convenient method, e.g., appropriate grouping, shall be
provided for the purpose of identifying major components, assemblies,
where possible, etc.
Equivalent standard parts shall be defined when manufacturer's in-house

numbers are used as identification.
8.9. Standard Operation Instructions and Maintenance Manual
The above Documentation is in addition to the Standard Operation

Instructions and Maintenance Manual as specified. The S.O./Employer
shall have his final say in case of discrepancies.
9. Training
9.1. General
The Contractor shall arrange and conduct training by qualified and
experienced personnel as follows:
(a) Technical training

(b) Operations training
(c) Maintenance training
All the training course shall be documented and fully supported by a

generous quantity of relevant literature, materials and teaching aids. All
necessary training documents, literature and materials shall be given to all
the trainees undergoing the courses.
TS/M/S17/23
MECHANICAL WORKS
9.2. Technical training
The Contractor shall provide a comprehensive training course for the

whole BAS including the data processing sub-systems, data transmission,
all the peripherals, input and output devices, displays, and all other
equipment and modules used in the system, inclusive of equipment
manufactured by others but supplied under this Contract. The design
philosophy, design factors, principles and theory of operation,
programming checking, commissioning and maintenance procedures for
each sub-assembly and module as well as the total system shall be
thoroughly covered in the training.
The course structure and method of presentation shall be specifically

geared towards the types of equipment supplied under this contract and
their operations. All theoretical explanation shall be supplemented by
practical details on the installation, operation, checking and maintenance
of the system and equipment.
Use of all items of testing and commissioning equipment, and computer

programs for fault diagnosis and location shall be covered. The objective
of the training course shall be such that the trainees, after completing the
courses, shall be capable of fully understanding the design philosophy,
principles of operation of the system and equipment, commissioning,
operating, checking, trouble shooting and maintaining the system and
equipment.
The Contractor shall provide for employer staffs the Technical Training
Course to be conducted at the BAS contractor's premises, at a time as
decided by the employer. The training shall be conducted in 2 groups
each over 5 days.
9.3. Operation Training
The Contractor shall provide the training courses on the operating of the
system to the employer. The courses shall cover in detail, all the
operational aspects and procedures of the system including all necessary
application programming, such that the trainees shall be fully capable of
operating the system after attending the course. The training shall be
conducted in 2 groups each over 10 days.
TS/M/S17/24
MECHANICAL WORKS
9.4. Maintenance Training
The Contractor shall provide suitable comprehensive training courses for

employer's staff on the maintenance of the system.
All preventive and corrective maintenance procedures and techniques

shall be covered so that the trainees, after attending the course, shall be
capable of carrying out all the preventive and corrective maintenance of
the system, from trouble-shooting, fault location, changing of equipment/
modules, etc. Participation of the trainees in all preventive and corrective
maintenance during the Defects Liability Period shall be provided to
enable the trainees to gain first hand experience in maintaining the system
and equipment. The training shall be conducted in 2 groups each over 10
days.
9.5. Training Course Information
The Contractor shall submit the following information on the training for
review and approval at least three (3) months prior to the commencement
of each course:
(a) a detail description of the structure and contents of the course.
(b) a detail description of break-down time allocation for the course,
(c) a list of persons conducting the course, with details on their

qualification and training experience.
(d) a set of draft training documentation and materials such as

training manuals, notes, charts, catalogues, slides, transparencies
teaching aids, etc.,
(e) a detailed description of the objectives of the course, and

measures to ascertain that the course objectives are accomplished.
The timing of each course shall be properly phased into the overall
project schedule. Software programming training and local technical
training shall be completed three months before the scheduled
commissioning of the system. Operational training shall be completed
before handing over of the system. Maintenance training shall be
completed before the expiry of the Defects Liability Period.
The S.O./Employer reserves the right to accept, change, modify or reject

whole of part, any or all of the courses proposed if in his opinion, the
courses proposed are not up to expectation.
TS/M/S17/25
MECHANICAL WORKS
Courses shall be conducted during normal office hours but it shall be held
in evening if such training session interfere or interrupt the smooth
progress of the execution of the works.
The medium of instruction and all training materials and documentation

shall be in English Language.
10. Maintenance and Servicing
10.1. This section of specification sets out the Contractor responsibility for the
Comprehensive maintenance and servicing of the PLC System during the
term of the warranty and free 12 months maintenance period as well as
after the warranty period.
10.2. The 12 months warranty period shall commence after the successful
handover of the entire PLC System to User Department. It is the
responsibility of the contractor to maintain the PLC system in first-class
running condition.
10.3. During the warranty period, the Contractor shall carry our twelve free
servicing to the system at approximately monthly intervals in accordance
with the maintenance responsibilities outlined hereinafter. Allowance
shall be made in the tender for any cost incurred in complying with this
requirement.
10.4. The Contractor shall replace all faulty or damaged parts of the building
automation system with new ones, and replenish all consumable material
during the warranty period at no expense to the User Department. All
replaced parts shall have a new warrantee of one year start from the actual
date of installation at site. This clause shall override any standard
warranty condition of the Contractor or his supplier of equipment.
Allowance shall be made here for any cost incurred in complying with
this requirement.
10.5. The Contractor shall prepare a detailed inspection and service report form
showing the functions to be carried out and the intervals between each
function to enable records of servicing to be maintained. The functions
shall include all the maintenance responsibilities outlined hereinafter for
each specific system plus any other special maintenance requirements
recommended by the manufacturers of equipment.
10.6. Routine maintenance and servicing to the PLC System is to be carried out
during normal working hours unless it is otherwise specified elsewhere in
this specification.
TS/M/S17/26
MECHANICAL WORKS
10.7. During the warranty period, the Contractor shall attend to any complaint
calls promptly at no expense to the User Department.
10.8. As the BAS operates on 24-hour basis, the Contractor shall ensure that
24-hour service is provided for the attendance of any emergency calls
after normal work hours.
10.9. After the attendance of complaint calls and completion of repair work, a
copy of the fault report or service chit duly signed by the User
Department for information and record.
10.10. Final payment of retention monies to the Contractor will be certified only
after evidence of regular and satisfactory maintenance during the
warranty period has been shown.
10.11. The Contractor shall be responsible for all damages caused to the
installation of the User Department's property through the act of
negligence of their workmen except where it can be proven that it is not
fault of theirs.
10.12. The breakdown of equipment and installation shall deem to have occurred
when such equipment or installation will not perform the designed
function or performance.
10.13. No equipment, except standby equipment, shall be taken out for the
service for maintenance during peak load period, unless due to
breakdown or other emergency or scheduled annual overhaul.
10.14. The Contractor shall if so required remedy any defects or omissions

discovered or appearing therein even though previously certified to be in
good condition by the S.O./Employer during handover at Substantial
completion.
10.15. The S.O./Employer is thereby empowered to extend the time for this free
Maintenance & Servicing of the equipment for such period as in his
absolute discretion he may consider necessary for the thorough
examination of all work and completion of such as may be found
defective.
10.16. It is to be distinctly understood that the User Department shall have the
full, free and unrestricted use of the said works without any interference
whatsoever on the part of the Contractor during the currency of this
period and such use on the part of the User Department shall not held as
relieving the Contractor of any liabilities or obligations in respect of this
Contract.
TS/M/S17/27
MECHANICAL WORKS
10.17. Consumable Materials
The following consumables shall be provided free of charges in the

carrying out of the Maintenance and Servicing:
(a) all coolant, oil, grease and lubricant
(b) all fuses and indication lamps
(c) all carbon brushes in motors
(d) all electrical contact points
(e) all detergent and cleaning fluid for equipment
(f) all paints and anti-corrosion primer
(g) all cotton waste and rags
(h) all necessary paper for the printing of messages, alarms, reports,
etc. during the contract period. This shall include fanfold paper,
special inkjet papers, paper for colour laser printer and the sizes
shall be in both A4 & A3. During the Defects Liability Period,
the contractor shall supply at least 10 boxes of fanfold paper A3
for log inkjet paper & 5 reams of special paper for colour laser
printer.
10.18. Maintenance Program
The Contractor shall prepare and submit to the S.O./Employer at the time
of tender a preventive maintenance and servicing programme to be
carried out by him during the Defects Liability Period and after the
Defects Liability Period if a Maintenance Contract is entered into with
them. The programme shall contain all works necessary for the testing,
checking, cleaning, lubrication, adjustment, refurnishing, replacement of
field sensors/transducer monitoring other electromechanical and electro-
pneumatic devices, etc., and the frequency in which such works shall
executed. Upon approval of the preventive maintenance program, the
Contractor shall incorporate such works in the Maintenance Records and
Job Sheet as specified herein.
TS/M/S17/28
MECHANICAL WORKS
10.19. Maintenance Records and Job Sheets
The Contractor shall prepare and submit to the S.O./Employer two (2)
months before the expected commencement date of the Defects Liability
Period a draft format of all Maintenance Records and Job Sheets for
approval. Upon approval of the format the Contractor shall arrange for
the printing on quality paper of the year's supply of the Maintenance
Records and Job Sheets which shall be used by the Contractor during the
Defects Liability Period. Samples of Maintenance Record and Job Sheets
shall be incorporated in the Maintenance Manual.
The Contractor shall provide and use self-adhesive waterproof
Maintenance Record Tags which shall be attached to all equipment and
components indicating the nature of servicing. The format of such records
tags shall be subject to approval.
10.20. Reporting Faults
The Contractor shall provide the S.O./Employer with a single telephone

number for reporting all faults of the system. This telephone shall be
manned during the hours of 0800 hours - 1700 hours by English speaking
staff provided by the Contractor and the standards of maintenance shall
be based on the time when the fault condition is reported to them under
this clause.
Additionally, the Contractor shall provide a responsible and senior
member of his maintenance team with a radio pager for the purpose of
contacting him during 1700 hours - 0800 hours for emergency repairs.
10.21. Maintenance Log
The Contractor shall provide a sturdily bound logbook for purpose of

recording all fault reports and the action taken by the Contractor.
The System Operators will enter into the logbook the time of notification
of fault the Contractor, and the time of arrival of the relevant maintenance
personnel. The Contractor's maintenance personnel shall enter into the
log the nature of the fault, the action taken and the time at which the fault
was rectified and the system put back into normal operation.
The Contractor shall study the logbook regularly, and shall submit a
separate report on the nature and cause of recurrent and/or intermittent
faults which occur at a frequency high than accepted by the
S.O./Employer. This report shall include the action which the BAS
contractor intends to take to diagnose and rectify the faults, together with
a time schedule of the works.
TS/M/S17/29
MECHANICAL WORKS
10.22. Test Equipment and Tools
The Contractor shall supply all equipment and instruments necessary for
checking, testing, starting up and trouble-shooting of the system, and all
tools for adjustments and preventive maintenance.
The equipment, instruments and tools shall be new and shall be handed in
similar condition to the User Department at the commencement of the
Defects Liability Period, and during subsequent maintenance period (if a
subsequent Maintenance Contract is entered into).
All test equipment shall operate on their own battery or obtain power
from the module under test, or on 230V, 50Hz, single phase supply and
shall be capable of being operated at temperatures up to 40C and
relative humidity up to 95%.
The Tenderer shall provide a comprehensive list of all the equipment,

instruments and tools which will be provided, the purpose and use of each
item, and the unit price.
10.23. Spares
The Contractor shall be responsible for the supply of all spare sub-
assembly modules and components required for continuous operation of
the System during the Defects Liability Period. A list of recommended
spares (including unit price and quantities) for use during the Defects
Liability Period shall be submitted at the time of tender and included in
the tender price.
10.24. Response Time to Faults/Failure
Where faults had been identified by the SO/Employer, and duly report,
whether verbally or in writing, the faults shall be attended to within 4
hours. Where critical faults/failures are involved, the faults/failures shall
be attended to within 2 hours, irregardless whether the faults/failures
occur during off-office hour or not.
TS/M/S17/30
MECHANICAL WORKS
SECTION 18 - AUTOMATION & MONITORING SYSTEM
1. General
1.1. The purpose of the specifications is to provide the operational concepts

and minimum standalone automation and monitoring system (BAS) to be
installed for the air conditioning and ventilation system and other
services.
1.2. It is the intent of this Specification to secure a networked, computerized

automation and monitoring system which is user-friendly, has known
reliability, is extremely responsive, and which is to be designed, installed,
implemented, supported and serviced by a local office of the
manufacturer, by people skilled in providing functional and efficient
solutions to present and foresee future building system needs.
1.3. The Building Automation System (BAS) shall be a complete system

designed for use with the enterprise IT systems. This functionality shall
extend into the equipment rooms. Devices residing on the automation
network located in equipment rooms and similar shall be fully IT
compatible devices that mount and communicate directly on the IT
infrastructure in the facility. Contractor shall be responsible for
coordination with the owner’s IT staff to ensure that the BAS will
perform in the owner’s environment without disruption to any of the other
activities taking place on that LAN
1.4. The Building Automation system (BAS) shall comply to the following
standards:
a) Singapore Standard SS 638, Code of practice for electrical

Installations
b) Singapore Standard SS 553, Code of practice for air-

conditioning and mechanical ventilation in buildings
c) Singapore Standard SS 591, Code of practice for long term

measurement of central chilled water system energy efficiency
d) Singapore Building Control Authority: latest BCA Green Mark

Certification Standard
e) ANSI/ASHRAE 135 BACnet - A Data Communication

Protocol for Building Automation and Control Networks
f) ASHRAE Guide 22 Instrumentation for monitoring central

chilled-water plant efficiency
TS/M/S18/1
MECHANICAL WORKS
g) ASHRAE. Standard 135 : A Data Communication Protocol for

Building Automation and Control Networks (BACnet);
h) International Organization for Standardization ISO/IEC 9075-9:

Information Technology - Database Languages SQL – Part 9 :
Management of External Data (SQL/MED);
i) TIA/EIA 232-F Interface Between Data Terminal Equipment

and Data Circuit Terminating Equipment Employing Serial
Binary Data Exchange;
j) TIA/EIA 485-A : Electrical Characteristics of Generators and

Receivers for use in Balanced Digital Multipoint Systems;
k) TIA/EIA 568-C.1 : Commercial Building telecommunications

Cabling Standard;
l) Transmission Control Protocol/Internet Protocol of Defence

Advanced Research Project Agency (TCP/IP);
m) International Organization for Standardization ISO/IEC 8802-3

: Standard for Ethernet.
1.5. The Sub-Contractor shall submit monthly report on the energy

consumption of all the equipment over the twelve (12) months defects
liability period. The report formats shall be subjected to the S.O.'s
approval.
1.6. The BAS shall link to respective BMS/BAS system includes all necessary
programming as listed in clause 4.2. All the power meter, water meter,
BTU meter or airflow station that is used for utility billing shall be linked
and program at University of Campus infrastructure, Ventus building,
Campus Asset Management energy metering system.
1.7. Integration to Wireless Mesh Network Lighting Management system and

provision for third party software interfacing.
1.8. All electrical power meter, BTU meter and water meter shall link
separately to existing metering and Energy Data and Reporting Tool /
Energy Enterprise Management at Ventus . All information shall also
interface and program to BAS and IBMS
1.9. Chiller plant room BAS and IBMS system shall be ready and programmed
for the Building and Construction Authority to access remotely into their
system through internet secured access.
TS/M/S18/2
MECHANICAL WORKS
2. Materials
2.1 All materials shall be of new and good quality. All equipment and
materials previously installed or used shall be rejected. Materials and
equipment shall be stored in such a manner as to be in a new condition
when installed and to avoid damage from weather and site conditions.
Damaged, deformed and cracked equipment or materials shall be rejected.
Replacement shall be provided by the Sub-Contractor at no additional
cost to the University.
2.2 Materials and equipment to be incorporated into the works (as called for
in this Specification) are required to meet the quality/testing standards of
designed institutes, societies and standards associations. However,
equivalent materials and equipment items meeting other authoritative
standards which ensure equal or higher quality than the standards
mentioned may also be accepted and approved by the S.O..
2.3 Should the Sub-Contractor propose to furnish materials and equipment

other than those specified as permitted by the or approved equivalent
clause, he shall submit a written request for any such substitution. Such
requests shall be accompanied by complete descriptive (manufacturers,
brand name, catalog number, etc.) and technical data for all items,
samples of both the specified and the proposed substitute items.
2.4 The S.O. reserves the right to accept or reject any proposed substitutions.
2.5 The expenses incurred by any such exercise shall be borne in full by the
Sub-Contractor.
2.6 All sensors, control valves, actuators, D.D.C. controllers, shall be from
the BAS manufacturer.
3. Site Conditions
All equipment supplied shall be capable of operating effectively and efficiently

under the following site conditions:-
Maximum Temperature 35oC dry bulb

28oC wet bulb
Average Temperature 32oC dry bulb

26.5oC wet bulb

TS/M/S18/3
MECHANICAL WORKS
4. BAS Configuration
4.1. General
a) The building automation system shall be configured as a local

area network of fully intelligent and programmable
microprocessor-based controllers that will be monitoring and
controlling the various equipment. These controllers shall
operate independently without any loss of monitoring or control
functions in the event of a failure in the communication link
with other controllers. These controllers shall be on peer to peer
communication protocol. No hierarchical system configuration
shall be accepted.
b) Master/Slave type of controllers shall not be accepted.
4.2. BAS Central Control Station
The BAS Central Control Station is located at the Campus Asset

Management and are linked to each individual Zone BAS system control
network. The location of BAS system are as follow:
Zone 1: Block EA, TLab, E6 and others are linked to OFM

BAS/IBMS/NUS Virtual Machines through TCP/IP
Zone 2 : Uhall, Central library and others are linked to OFM

Zone 3: Block MD6 or MD3, S9, S16, S17 and others are linked to OFM
Zone 4: Block Com2, I4.0, I Cube, Bukit Timah Campus (BTC), AS2,
AS8 and others are linked to OFM BAS/IBMS/NUS Virtual
Machines through TCP/IP
All BAS shall link to NUS virtual machine at cloud, OFM BAS and
IBMS system through campus intranet. New building shall have
individual BAS station and link to CAM Central BAS and IBMS NUS
virtual machine and existing station through NUS campus IT network
The Sub-contractor shall include the necessary programming, accessories

and software for the IBMS to install at the NUS virtual machines at cloud.
No hyperlink to another virtual system/ system is allowed.
TS/M/S18/4
MECHANICAL WORKS
The BAS room at OFM shall be able to read all information in above list
Zone BAS System through Campus Intranet.
c) The communication network shall be designed to pass

information about environmental control and monitoring status
from one DDC Unit to another DDC Unit, PLC TO PLC,
POWER METER TO POWER METER, Level of
communication shall be kept to a minimum.
d) The communication network shall possess the following

features:-
- Flexibility - The network shall allow the future connection

of additional controllers without any changes to the
configuration of the network.
- Fully distributed intelligence - Each communication

controller on the network shall be managed by a
microprocessor which receives, transmit and checks all
the messages passing through it. No central network
manager shall be required.
- Integrity - Should the power be lost at any communication

controller or it detect an internal fault, a watchdog relay
shall automatically bridge the mode out of the network to
prevent disruption in the communication. The network
shall continuously check itself and report faults and
failures.
- Service functions - The communication controllers shall

allow all the DDC Units OR PLC Unit & etc to pass
information between each other to effect any control
function.
4.3. Data Communication
e) Communication between individual controllers within a BAS

shall be via the PEER TO PEER bus and must be open protocol
such as BACNET-MS/TP, METER BUS /MOD BUS for meters
and etc. It shall also support Ethernet connectivity at 100 mbps
as backbone. The Ethernet controller shall also support web
interface for configuration. Each PEER bus shall be a single
pair of twisted wires with a minimum transmission rate of no
less than 1 M baud. Each controller shall be coupled to the bus
to assure that single or multiple controller Units failures will not
cause loss of communications with other bus connected devices.
TS/M/S18/5
MECHANICAL WORKS
f) Full communications shall be sustained as long as there are at

least two operational devices on any segment of the bus.
g) Global data (all station messages) is to be available for use by

any device on the bus as inputs or outputs to its resident control
programs.
4.4. System Design Submission
The system configuration and a list of equipment employed by the BAS

system shall be submitted together with the Tender. Detail description of
equipment and components with respect to their performance in achieving
the specified system functional and operational requirements shall be also
attached. Every Direct Digital Control Unit /PLC Unit shall be equipped
with an alphanumeric LCD (liquid crystal display) display and shall have
a spare capacity of no less than twenty (25) per cent for future expansion.
4.5. Remote Access
All the remote access shall be using web access through internet web
browser using JAVA platform. The web view shall have all the function
of the main BAS station. These shall include :
a) Modification and delete of data base on user, user identification,

password and level of access
b) Modification to graphic and text
c) Creation of graphic and text
d) Printing of trend report, Alarm report, User login/logout report etc
e) Changing of Setpoint, value offset, etc
f) Command Start/Stop, time scheduling, etc
g) Login station user activity such as modification on the setpoint,

editing graphic and etc
h) Graphic page sizing to match the display screen, zoom in and

zoom out
i) Set up of trending for the required monitoring BAS point
j) Set up of Alarm point
Any software that required custom programming and modification will

not be acceptable.
TS/M/S18/6
MECHANICAL WORKS
5. System Description
5.1. General
a) The BAS shall be supplied, installed, supervised and

commissioned by a BCA registered specialist contractor with a
proven track record and suitable references of systems installed.
b) The BAS shall be manufactured by a reputable manufacturer.

System content and software should be not be less than ninety-
five percent of the manufacturers own production.
c) The BAS shall consist of an information sharing network of

standalone Direct Digital Control Unit /PLC Unit to monitor
and control equipment as per the control sequence and the
input/output summary.
d) "Information sharing" shall be defined as : the function of each

DDC Unit/PLC Unit to exchange data on the network trunk
with other DDC Unit/PLC Unit without the need for additional
devices such as network managers, gateways or central
computers.
e) "Standalone" shall be defined as : the functions of each DDC

Unit/PLC Unit to independently monitor, control and operate
connected equipment through its own microcomputer.
f) The new system to be provided shall consist of the following

main components:-
- Direct Digital Control Units;/PLC Unit
- the DDC Unit/PLC Unit shall link or interface to the

central computer.
g) The new system shall have gateway/bridges interfaces such as

OPC-Server for connective to other control LAN networks.
TS/M/S18/7
MECHANICAL WORKS
5.2. System Function and Operational Training
a) The BAS shall provide centralized surveillance of all plant such

as air conditioning and ventilation with control facilities as
indicated in the attached schedules and appendices.
b) The manufacturer shall provide without additional cost to the

University a qualified engineer for one week at the University's
premises to provide training for the University's staff in system
operation and maintenance. This training shall be additional to
any other training provided during commissioning, and a
programmed detailing period and content shall be provided by the
manufacturer in advance.
c) The Sub-Contractor shall furnish five (5) sets of comprehensive

O&M manual with pictures and explanation of all control
schematic and floor plan as they appear in the central computer.
d) Tenderers shall submit clause by clause compliance list of the

proposed BAS system for evaluation. Any deviation shall be
explained in full sentences with drawing or supporting document
to illustrate if necessary.
5.3. DDC Programming
The application programme for the DDC shall be programmed using

graphical software. This software shall provide the operator with wiring
terminations, schematic representations of plant, and hardware
configuration of PCB giving details on the numbers and types of points
used in the DDC. This information shall be given in a printed format.
5.4. DDC Controllers
a) All controllers furnished for the project shall be of fully

standalone intelligent type. In the event of loss of
communication with the central computer, the controllers shall be
fully operational. Master/Slave type of controllers shall not be
acceptable.
b) All controllers communication shall be of BACNET-MS/TP or

other open protocol which third party software is able to read the
DDC information. BACNET device shall be BTL listed and
certified.
c) All controllers shall monitor and control, digital input, digital

output, analog input and analog output points. A minimum of
25% spare capacity shall be provided at each controller. All DDC
panel shall have surge protection device installed.
TS/M/S18/8
MECHANICAL WORKS
d) All controllers shall be linked to each other via a Central Bus or

BACENET-MS/TP for peer communication (local area
networking). It shall be possible to command, read and adjust
parameters of all controllers linked on the same peer bus from any
controller without need of any tool, portable operator terminal or
PC. All DDC shall have LCD display screen attach on it.
e) The controller shall comply with radio interference standards

VDE 871/875 and protection standards of IP30 according to DIN
40 050 or IEC 144.
f) AHU and Plantroom Control
1) Each AHU shall be provided with a DDC controller. The

controller shall have a minimum 16-bit microprocessor
with flash memory for the operating system and the
application programme.
2) All DDC controllers shall be equipped with an

alphanumeric liquid crystal display (LCD) with large
display area (80 characters or more). A touch panel
keyboard shall be provided for retrieval of data and
adjustment of parameters. Mode of operation of the LCD
and keyboard shall be based on easy-to-understand
dialogue driven menu.
Features to be provided on the controllers must include:
- Direct Digital Control
- Full Energy Management Programs (EMS)
- Real Time Clock. The real time clock shall have a 100-
year calendar with automatic leap year adjustment to
provide time of day, day of week and date.
- Time Programs
- Holiday and Occupancy Schedules.
- Data Collection, Processing and Reporting.
TS/M/S18/9
MECHANICAL WORKS
- Battery Backed Up Data Logging. A hardware watchdog

shall observe the battery voltage under load to announce
the end of battery life prior to possible data losses. The
battery has to be able to save the total volatile memory for
at least 3 days after "battery down" alarm in order to give
opportunity to replace the battery.
- Local and Central Alarm Monitoring.
- Low Voltage Safety Power Supply.
- Auto-Dialing, Public Telephone Network Communication

(CCITTV.24/V.28/V.25bis AT-HAYES)- This auto
dialing feature shall be made available by the mere
addition of a modem, without any other hardware/software
costs.
- Access Levels - minimum 3 levels.
- Protection Against Unauthorized Access Through

Password
- Alarm Management with minimum 3 alarm categories.

All alarms shall be time-stamped. Alarm buffer shall be
provided for auto-dial applications.
3) PLC/DDC shall be provided for chiller plant room control

such as chillers, water pumps, cooling towers, VSDs, by-
pass valves, etc. Please refer to PLC technical
specification, drawing, specification
4) The PLC/DDC for the chiller control shall be equipped

with a high level interfacing module to interface with the
chillers or other equipment microprocessors.
- PLC shall be equipped with an alphanumeric LCD (liquid

crystal display) display. A touch panel keyboard shall be
provided for retrieval of data and adjustment of
parameters. Model of operation of the LCD display and
keyboard shall be based on easy-to- understand dialogue
driven menu.
TS/M/S18/10
MECHANICAL WORKS
g) PLC/DDC Controls (F.C.U.)
Each FCU shall be provided with a PLC/DDC controller. All

PLC/DDC controller shall come with full DDC functionality and
real time clock to perform real time functions.
The LCD display shall provide alphanumeric indication

of:
- Actual Room Temperature and Setpoint Levels
- Actual Time and Time Schedule
- Operation Mode
- All other adjustments
It shall have provisions to accept the following inputs:
- Room Temperature Sensor
- Occupancy Sensor
A built-in real time clock shall be provided for automatic
setpoint ranges for comfort, standby and night modes. A
7-day switching program with up to 4 switching points per
day shall be provided. An early adjusted overtime
function, with automatic reset at the time-out signal shall
provide users the flexibility of extending the day level as
required.
All PLC/DDC controllers provided shall be capable of
operating in full "stand alone" operation as part of a larger
control system. Individual data memory shall be fully
backup by battery for power interruption of at least 72
hours.
Thermostat shall have the capability for voice control and
third party application.
a) DDC Controls (VAV)
1) The VAV box controller shall be a standalone networked

DDC thermostat of 8-bit microprocessor based type with
real time clock and proportional plus integral control.
TS/M/S18/11
MECHANICAL WORKS
2) The VAV box controller shall have built-in operator

interface with keypad and alphanumeric liquid crystal
display (LCD). The LCD shall have alphanumeric
indication of:-
i) actual room temperature and set-point;
ii) actual time and time schedule;
iii) occupied / unoccupied operation mode;
iv) provide multi inputs for thermostat, and

all other adjustments.
v) thermostat shall have proportional output to

control the damper actuator at minimum (10%)
and maximum (100%) positioning without
mechanical jam to actuator
3) Each VAV controller, operating parameters, set points and

schedule shall be stored in non-volatile EEPROM memory
to prevent loss during loss of power to the controller.
4) The DDC shall have built-in operator interface with

keypad and alphanumeric liquid crystal display (LCD).
The LCD shall have alphanumeric indication of :-
- actual room temperature and set-point levels
- actual time and time schedule
- operation mode
- all other adjustments
5) It shall have provisions to accept inputs from temperature

and other sensors.
It shall have a 24-volt AC pulse output. The DDC shall

provide room temperature control accuracy of not greater
than ±0.5°C.
Thermostat shall have the capability for voice control and

third party application.
TS/M/S18/12
MECHANICAL WORKS
6) A built-in real time clock shall be provided for automatic

provide users with flexibility of extending the day level as
required.
7) All DDC controllers provided shall be capable of

operating in full “stand alone” operation as part of a larger
backup battery for power interruption of at least 72 hours.
Each DDC output can drive up to 2 motor actuator of the

VAV Boxes.
8) All DDC shall be installed below the false ceiling for ease
of maintenance.
b) DDC control for Laboratory Airflow Control
Please refer to the tender drawing & technical specification
Each lab control shall be installed with a 16-bit DDC, to

monitor and control the temperature & humidity with the
following field devices:
Venturi valves/Fast Respond Variable Air Volume valves
Differential Pressure Transmitter
Room Humidity Sensor
Hot Water Valve
d) Web-based Network Gateways
The Web-based Network Gateways shall be a fully user-

programmable, supervisory controller. The Web-based
Network Gateways shall monitor the network of distributed
application-specific controllers, provide global strategy and
direction, and communicate on a peer-to-peer basis with other
Web-based Network Gateways.
TS/M/S18/13
MECHANICAL WORKS
Automation network – The Web-based Network Gateways

shall reside on the automation network and shall support a
subnet of system controllers.
User Interface – Each Web-based Network Gateways shall have
the ability to deliver a web based User Interface (UI) as
previously described. All computers connected physically or
virtually to the automation network shall have access to the
web based UI.
1) The web based UI software shall be imbedded in the

Web-based Network Gateways. Systems that require a
local copy of the system database on the user’s personal
computer are not acceptable.
2) The Web-based Network Gateways shall support up a

minimum of four (4) concurrent users.
3) The web based user shall have the capability to access

all system data through one Web-based Network
Gateways.
4) Remote users connected to the network through an

Internet Service Provider (ISP) or telephone dial up
shall also have total system access through one Web-
based Network Gateways.
5) Systems that require the user to address more than one

Web-based Network Gateways to access all system
information are not acceptable.
6) The Web-based Network Gateways shall have the

capability of generating web based UI graphics. The
graphics capability shall be imbedded in the Web-
7) Systems that support UI Graphics from a central

database or require the graphics to reside on the user’s
personal computer are not acceptable.
TS/M/S18/14
MECHANICAL WORKS
8) The web based UI shall support the following

functions using a standard version of Microsoft
Internet Explorer:
i) Configuration
ii) Commissioning
iii) Data Archiving
iv) Monitoring
v) Commanding
vi) System Diagnostics
9) Systems that require workstation software or modified

web browsers are not acceptable.
10) The Web-based Network Gateways shall allow

temporary use of portable devices without interrupting
the normal operation of permanently connected
modems.
Processor – The Web-based Network Gateways shall be

microprocessor-based shall have minimum 300 MHz with a
minimum word size of 32 bits. The Web-based Network
Gateways shall be a multi-tasking, multi-user, and real-time
digital control processor. Standard operating systems shall be
employed. Web-based Network Gateways size and capability
shall be sufficient to fully meet the requirements of this
Specification.
Memory – Each Web-based Network Gateways shall have

sufficient memory of not less than 256 MB Flash card
EPROM to support its own operating system, databases,
control programs, and to provide supervisory control for all
control level devices. Also, the gateway shall have a memory
of 256MB Synchronous DRAM for the operating of dynamic
memory.
Hardware Real Time Clock – The Web-based Network

Gateways shall include an integrated, hardware-based, real-
time clock.
TS/M/S18/15
MECHANICAL WORKS
The Web-based Network Gateways shall include

troubleshooting LED indicators to identify the following
conditions:
1) Power - On/Off
2) Ethernet Traffic – Ethernet Traffic/No Ethernet

Traffic
3) Ethernet Connection Speed – 10 Mbps/100

Mbps/1000 Mbps
4) Field Controller Bus A – Normal

Communications/No Field Communications
5) Field Controller Bus B – Normal

Communications/No Field Communications
6) Peer Communication – Data Traffic between

Network Controllers Devices
7) Run – Web-based Network Gateways Running/ Web-

based Network Gateways in Startup/ Web-based
Network Gateways Shutting Down/Software Not
Running
8) Bat Fault – Battery Defective, Data Protection Battery

Not Installed
9) 24 VAC – 24 VAC Present/Loss Of 24VAC
10) Fault – General Fault
11) Modem RX – Web-based Network Gateways Modem

Receiving Data
12) Modem TX – Web-based Network Gateways Modem

Transmitting Data
13) Communications Ports – The Web-based Network

Gateways shall provide the following ports for
operation of operator Input/Output (I/O) devices, such
as industry-standard computers, modems, and
portable operator’s terminals.
14) Two (2) USB port
TS/M/S18/16
MECHANICAL WORKS
15) Two (2) URS-232 serial data communication port
16) Two (2) RS-485 port
17) One (1) Ethernet port
Diagnostics – The Web-based Network Gateways shall

continuously perform self-diagnostics, communication
diagnosis, and diagnosis of all panel components. The Web-
based Network Gateways shall provide both local and remote
annunciation of any detected component failures, low battery
conditions, or repeated failures to establish communication.
Power Failure – In the event of the loss of normal power,

The Web-based Network Gateways shall continue to operate
for a user adjustable period of up to 10 minutes after which
there shall be an orderly shutdown of all programs to prevent
the loss of database or operating system software.
1) During a loss of normal power, the control sequences

shall go to the normal system shutdown conditions. All
critical configuration data shall be saved into Flash
memory.
2) Upon restoration of normal power and after a minimum

off-time delay, the controller shall automatically resume
full operation without manual intervention through a
normal soft-start sequence.
Certification – The Web-based Network Gateways shall be

listed by Underwriters Laboratories (UL).
Controller network – The Web-based Network Gateways

shall support the following communication protocols on the
controller network:
1) The Web-based Network Gateways shall support

BACnet Standard MS/TP Bus Protocol ASHRAE
SSPC-135, Clause 9 on the controller network.
2) The Web-based Network Gateways shall be

BACnet Testing Labs (BTL) certified and carry the
BTL Label.
TS/M/S18/17
MECHANICAL WORKS
3) The Web-based Network Gateways shall be tested

and certified as a BACnet Building Controller (B-
BC).
4) A BACnet Protocol Implementation Conformance

Statement shall be provided for the Web-based
Network Gateways.
5) The Web-based Network Gateways shall support a

minimum of 100 control devices.
The Web-based Network Gateways shall support LonWorks

enabled devices using the Free Topology Transceiver FTT10.
1) All LonWorks controls devices shall be LonMark

certified.

minimum of 255 LonWorks enabled control
devices.
The Web-based Network Gateways shall support all Field

Bus.

2) The Bus shall conform to Electronic Industry

Alliance (EIA) Standard RS-485.
3) The Bus shall employ a master/slave protocol where

the Web-based Network Gateways is the master.
4) The Bus shall employ a four (4) level priority

system for polling frequency.
5) The Bus shall be optically isolated from the Web-

TS/M/S18/18
MECHANICAL WORKS
e) Web-based IP Network Controller
Where specified in the drawing, the Web-based IP Network

Controller shall be a fully user-programmable, supervisory
controller. The Web-based IP Network Controller shall monitor
the network of distributed application-specific controllers,
provide global strategy and direction, and communicate on a
peer-to-peer basis with other Web-based IP Network
Controller. This shall only limited to small scale and standalone
system. All Web-based IP Network Controller shall have
LCD/LED display screen.
Automation network – The Web-based IP Network Controller

shall reside on the automation network and shall support a
subnet of system controllers. Web base controller acting as
Web base Network Gateway will not be acceptable
User Interface – Each Web-based IP Network Controller shall

have the ability to deliver a web based User Interface (UI) as
previously described. All computers connected physically or
virtually to the automation network shall have access to the
web based UI.
1) The web based UI software shall be imbedded in the Web-

based IP Network Controller. Systems that require a
local copy of the system database on the user’s personal
2) The Web-based IP Network Controller shall support up a

minimum of four (4) concurrent users.
3) The web base user shall have the capability to access all
system data through one Web-based IP Network
Controller.
4) Remote users connected to the network through an

Internet Service Provider (ISP) or telephone dial up
shall also have total system access through one Web-
based Controller.
5) Systems that require the user to address more than one

Web-based IP Network Controller to access all system
information are not acceptable.
TS/M/S18/19
MECHANICAL WORKS
6) The Web-based IP Network Controller shall have the

capability of generating web based UI graphics. The
graphics capability shall be imbedded in the Web-based
IP Network Controller.
7) Systems that support UI Graphics from a central database

or require the graphics to reside on the user’s personal
8) The web based UI shall support the following functions

using a standard version of Microsoft Internet Explorer:
i) Configuration
ii) Commissioning
iii) Data Archiving
iv) Monitoring
v) Commanding
vi) System Diagnostics
11) Systems that require workstation software or modified

web browsers are not acceptable.
12) The Web-based IP Network Controller shall allow

temporary use of portable devices without interrupting
the normal operation of permanently connected
modems.
Processor – The Web-based IP Network Controller shall be

microprocessor-based shall have minimum 166 MHz with a
minimum word size of 32 bits. The Web-based IP Network
Controller shall be a multi-tasking, multi-user, and real-time
digital control processor. Standard operating systems shall be
employed. Web-based IP Network Controller size and
capability shall be sufficient to fully meet the requirements of
this Specification.
Memory – Each Web-based IP Network Controller shall have

sufficient memory of not less than 32 MB Flash card EPROM
to support its own operating system, databases, control
programs, and to provide supervisory control for all control
level devices. Also, the gateway shall have a memory of 32MB
Synchronous DRAM for the operating of dynamic memory.
TS/M/S18/20
MECHANICAL WORKS
Hardware Real Time Clock – The Web-based IP Network

Controller shall include an integrated, hardware-based, real-
time clock.
The Web-based IP Network Controller shall include

troubleshooting LED indicators to identify the following
conditions:
1) Power - On/Off
2) Ethernet Traffic – Ethernet Traffic/No Ethernet Traffic
3) Ethernet Connection Speed – 10 Mbps/100 Mbps/1000

Mbps
4) Field Controller Bus A – Normal Communications/No

Field Communications
5) Field Controller Bus B – Normal Communications/No

Field Communications
6) Peer Communication – Data Traffic between Network

Controllers Devices
7) Run – Web-based IP Network Controller Running/

Web-based IP Network Controller in Startup/ Web-
based IP Network Controller Shutting Down/Software
Not Running
8) Bat Fault – Battery Defective, Data Protection Battery

Not Installed
9) 24 VAC – 24 VAC Present/Loss Of 24VAC
10) Fault – General Fault
11) Modem RX – Web-based IP Network Controller

Modem Receiving Data
12) Modem TX – Web-based IP Network Controller

Modem Transmitting Data
13) Communications Ports – The Web-based IP Network

Controller shall provide the following ports for
operation of operator Input/Output (I/O) devices, such
as industry-standard computers, modems, and portable
operator’s terminals.
TS/M/S18/21
MECHANICAL WORKS
14) Minimum One (1) USB port
15) Minimum One (1) RS-232 serial data communication

port
16) Minimum One (1) RS-485 port
17) One (1) Ethernet port
18) Minimum of 24 integrated I/Os (AO/AI and DO/DI)

connections which can be expandable for control and
monitoring
Diagnostics – The Web-based IP Network Controller shall

continuously perform self-diagnostics, communication
diagnosis, and diagnosis of all panel components. The Web-
based IP Network Controller shall provide both local and
remote annunciation of any detected component failures, low
battery conditions, or repeated failures to establish
communication.
Power Failure – In the event of the loss of normal power, The

Web-based IP Network Controller shall continue to operate for
a user adjustable period of up to 10 minutes after which there
shall be an orderly shutdown of all programs to prevent the loss
of database or operating system software.
1) During a loss of normal power, the control sequences

shall go to the normal system shutdown conditions. All
critical configuration data shall be saved into Flash
memory.
2) Upon restoration of normal power and after a minimum

off-time delay, the controller shall automatically resume
full operation without manual intervention through a
normal soft-start sequence.
Certification – The Web-based IP Network Controller shall be

listed by Underwriters Laboratories (UL).
Controller network – The Web-based IP Network Controller

shall support the following communication protocols on the
controller network:
1) The Web-based IP Network Controller shall support

BACnet Standard MS/TP Bus Protocol ASHRAE
SSPC-135, Clause 9 on the controller network.
TS/M/S18/22
MECHANICAL WORKS
2) The Web-based IP Network Controller shall be BACnet

Testing Labs (BTL) certified and carry the BTL Label.
3) The Web-based IP Network Controller shall be tested

and certified as a BACnet Building Controller (B-BC).
4) A BACnet Protocol Implementation Conformance

Statement shall be provided for the Web-based
Network Gateways.
5) The Web-based IP Network Controller shall support a

The Web-based IP Network Controller shall support LonWorks

enabled devices using the Free Topology Transceiver FTT10.
1) All LonWorks controls devices shall be LonMark

certified.

minimum of 32 LonWorks enabled control devices.
The Web-based IP Network Controller shall support all Field

Bus.

2) The Bus shall conform to Electronic Industry Alliance

(EIA) Standard RS-485.
3) The Bus shall employ a master/slave protocol where the

Web-based IP Network Controller is the master.
4) The Bus shall employ a four (4) level priority system

for polling frequency.
5) The Bus shall be optically isolated from the Web-based

Network Gateways.
TS/M/S18/23
MECHANICAL WORKS
6. System Hardware
6.1. Central Hardware
a) The central computer system is controlled by a high-end

Pentium CPU of OPC server type with latest server OS for
command entry, information management, network, alarm
management, and database management functions. All real-
time control functions, including scheduling, history collection
and alarming, shall be resident in the BAS network automation
controller to facilitate greater fault tolerance and reliability with
personal computers printers. . It shall be backed by a trained
service force of locally based personnel.
b) The CPU shall be as following as a minimum:
i. Memory – 32GB
ii. CPU– One dual-core Intel® Core™ processor i3-2100.
iii. Hard Drive – 320 GB free hard drive space
iv. Hard drive backup system – CD/RW, DVD/RW CD
v. ROM Drive – 32X performance
vi. Ports – (2) Serial and (1) parallel, (2)
vii. USB ports Keyboard – 101 Keyboard and 2 Button

Mouse
viii. LAN communications – Ethernet communications board

(2)
c) The printer shall be a colour laser printer suitable to print all the
graphics and report.
TS/M/S18/24
MECHANICAL WORKS
6.2. Dynamic Colour Graphic Display Terminal
A colour 24” LCD monitor of 1280 x 1024 resolution minimum and

display card with multiple monitor support is to be provided to display
plant diagrams which shall have the following features and capabilities:-
d) Standard library of AHU, FCU, fans, pumps, sensors, etc. shall be

available in the CAD library or Visio software and shall be
generated by CAD or Visio software for any background
drawings. The software shall be capable of accepting imported
CAD or Visio drawings done on other CAD or Visio software.
Access to the computer shall be through Microsoft Windows
interface.
e) All stored graphics shall be on the central disk system and freely
structure.
f) The dynamic colour LCD shall be able to display alpha numeric

data and dynamic pictures simultaneously through a split screen
image. The system shall upon command display colour schematic
of building equipment or building areas being monitored and
simultaneously display the current measured variables associated
with the equipment or area.
g) The colour graphic of LCD shall be dynamic in that point data or

calculated values shall updated continuously while being
observed. The colour LCD shall have a flashing feature to indicate
abnormal condition.
h) By means of a mouse, which is provided, the cursor control

switching command should be able to perform effectively and
easily within the normal addressing procedure. Hence simplifying
the main machine dialogue.
i) The contractor shall supply metal console. The BAS/BMS

control center console shall be custom made galvanized metal
epoxy power coated of 2 tiers by 1 cubical for a total of 4
CPU and LCD monitors with 1 spare to suit the Client's
operations. The cubical size shall be 1500mm(L) x 1000mm
(W) x 2000mm (H). It shall be located at FCC and Chiller
room. The contractor shall submit the design for SO approval
TS/M/S18/25
MECHANICAL WORKS
7. Operator Station Software
7.1. General
a) Operator Station software shall include as a minimum Operating
System (OS), Data Base Manager, Communications Control,
Operator Interface (OI), Trend and History Files, Report
Generator, Support Utilities, Scheduler and Time and Event
Programs. Microsoft Internet Explorer for user interface
functions, Microsoft Office Professional for creation,
modification and maintenance of reports, sequences other
necessary building management functions
b) Real time operating system shall portray true multi-tasking

feature in providing concurrent execution of multiple real time
programs and custom program development.
c) Data Base Manager shall manage all data on an integrated and

non-redundant basis. It shall allow additions and deletions to the
data base without any detriment to the existing data. Cross
linkages will be provided such that no data required by a
software program can be deleted by the operator until that data
has been deleted from its respective program.
d) Communications control, scheduler, trend files, reports,

operator interface, and utilities shall be as specified hereinafter.
7.2. Operator Interface Software
a) Provide a hierarchical linked dynamic graphic operator interface

for accessing and displaying system data and commanding and
modifying equipment operation. The interface shall utilise the
mouse to provide "heads up operation: with pull-down menus,
dialogue boxes, zoom, coloration, animation and split screen to
facilitate operator understanding of the system.
b) A minimum of twenty (20) levels of graphic penetration

capability shall be provided with the hierarchy operator
assignable (for example : area, building, wing, floor air handler,
point group). Descriptions for graphics, points, alarms, etc. shall
be modified through the operators station under password
control.
TS/M/S18/26
MECHANICAL WORKS
c) Operator access to the system shall be under personal ID and

password control. Up to 12 alphanumeric characters for
personal ID and up to 12 alphanumeric characters for password
shall be assignable to each operator via the operator station. The
operator shall be able to access the system from any operator
station the system by entering the proper ID and password. The
operators shall be permitted to change their own password
without permitting access to any other password. Sign-off from
a station shall be a manual operation via pull-down menu or, if
no mouse or keyboard activity takes place within an assignable
time period, shall be automatic. Automatic sign-off period shall
be selectable from 10 minutes to 120 minutes for each operator
or may be disabled on a per operator basis. all sign-on/sign-off
activity shall be automatically archived on the operator station
for display or printout as desired.
d) Operator access to system points shall be controlled by

individual operator-assigned graphic hierarchy and by privileges
as hereinafter described. The hierarchy shall permit access to an
operator-assigned initial graphic and to all graphics linked to
and below the initial graphic. The operator shall not have access
to graphics in another hierarchical graphic "tree". For example,
an operator may have access to one building, but not to another
building, or to lighting points, but not fire alarm points. Each
operator shall have any combination of user assigned keyboard
privileges of alarm acknowledgment, point commanding, data
modification, DOS access, schedule changes and system
configuration changes.
e) Data to be displayed within a unique graphic shall be assignable

regardless of physical hardware address, communication
channel or point type (temperature, humidity, alarms, etc).
Graphics shall be on-line programmable and under ID and
password control. Points may be assignable to multiple graphics
(10 minimum) where necessary to facilitate operator
understanding of system operation.
f) Graphics shall also contain calculated or pseudo points. Each

physical point and each point assigned to a graphic shall be
assigned a text descriptor for use in reports.
g) Data segregation shall be provided for control of specific data

routed to an operator station; to an operator assigned station; or
to a given output device such as a printer. Point types shall be
randomly selectable such as all room temperature points, room
temperature points second floor, all duct temperature points,
HVAC points, command points, etc.
TS/M/S18/27
MECHANICAL WORKS
h) Penetration within a graphic hierarchy shall display each graphic

name as graphics are selected to facilitate operator
understanding. The "backtrace" shall permit the operator to
move upward in the hierarchy by mouse click on the backtrace.
The backtrace shall show at least the previous four penetration
levels. The operator shall be provided with the option of
showing each graphic full screen size with the backtrace as the
horizontal header or by showing a "stack" of Graphics, each
with a backtrace.
i) All operator accessed data shall be displayed on the colour

monitor. The operator shall select further penetration via mouse
click on an area, building, floor, fan, etc. The defined linked
graphic below shows that selection shall then be displayed.
Dynamic data shall be assignable to any and all graphics.
j) The operator shall be provided with a means to directly access

any graphic or any point without going through the penetration
path.
k) Direct access to graphics shall be menu selectable wherein the

operator may optionally enter the name of the graphic system
desired or select the desired graphic via cursor positioning on a
scroll bar listing of all graphics, or may be selected via keyboard
entry.
l) Operators may assign simple key names for points to allow

direct display or commanding of points. Key name assignments
shall be fully operator assignable and as simple as one, two or
three characters, or as lengthy as 20 characters, such that
frequently selected points may be accessed independent of
complex penetration schemes. For example, a fan serving the
south quadrant lobby of the headquarters building may be
assigned a key name as simple as "HF1". The key name
processor shall also allow the selection of graphics associated to
points by entering the key name and a graphic appendage, such
as "HF1 G", and shall allow the direct execution of a command
by entering the key name and a command appendage, such as
"HF1 ON".
m) Points (physical and pseudo) shall be displayed with dynamic

data provided by the system with appropriate text descriptors,
status or value and engineering unit. Colouration conventions
shall be variable for each class of points, as chosen by the
owner. In addition, animation shall be used to confirm latest
commands (e.g., fan rotation, damper position, fluid flow, etc.).
All points shall be dynamic with update rates adjustable on a per
point basis.
TS/M/S18/28
MECHANICAL WORKS
n) For operators with the appropriate privilege(s), points shall be

commanded directly from the colour monitor via mouse
selection. For a digital command point such as a valve position,
the valve would show its current state (e.g., CLOSED) and the
operator could select OPEN via mouse click. For most
operations, a keyboard equivalent shall be available for those
operators with that preference.
o) Upon selection of analog commandable points (such as

discharge air static pressure), a dialogue box shall appear
containing the following:
1) The value of the selected point as a decimal

value and as represented on a scaled bar chart
element.
2) A scaled setpoint arrow pointed to the current

position of the setpoint value on the bar chart.
3) The decimal value of the setpoint with adjacent

up-down arrows.
4) The operator shall be afforded three months of

analog commanding from which to choose as
follows:
- Click the cursor on the decimal setpoint

value, and enter a new setpoint value via
the keyboard decimal keypad.
- Drive the decimal value up or down by

moving the cursor to the desired position
and clicking.
5) The bar chart shall also have associated arrows

showing the current position (scaled value) of
the alarm limits.
p) An operator shall be permitted to split or realise the viewing

screen to show one graphic on the left half of the screen and
another graphic, spreadsheet, bar chart, word processing, curve
plot, etc., on the right half screen.
q) This will allow real time monitoring of one part of the system
while displaying other parts of the system or data from the
system to facilitate system operation.
TS/M/S18/29
MECHANICAL WORKS
r) An on-line context-sensitive help utility shall be provided to

facilitate operator training and understanding. The help feature
shall be a hypertext document with the ability too bridge to
further explanation of selected keywords. The document shall
contain text and graphics to clarify system operation. At a
minimum, help shall be available for every menu item and
dialogue box.
s) Electronic massaging facility shall be provided on the operator

station for any operator to enter a message to another operator
by selecting the MAIL menu item, selecting the receiving
operator's ID and entering the message (such as CHECK
CALIBRATION OF SENSOR IN CONFERENCE ROOM,
6TH FLOOR"). When an operator with a queued message signs
onto the operator station, the "Mail Message" area of the
dialogue box shall indicate that message is waiting. Upon
displaying a mail message, the display shall prompt the operator
with three message options to execute; delete, print and save.
Messages shall also include the time and data the message was
sent, the sender's personal ID and be 300 characters minimum
length, plus a brief title or subject description.
7.3. Site Specific Customising Software
Provide software which will allow the user to modify and tailor the BAS
to the specific and unique requirements of the equipment installed, the
programs implemented, and to staffing and operational practices. Online
modification of system configuration, program parameters, and data base
shall be provided via menu selection and keyboard entry of data into
preformatted self-prompting templates. As a minimum, the following
modification capability shall be provided.
a) Operator assignment capability shall include designation of

operator passwords, privilege(s), starting graphic and auto sign
off duration.
b) System text add/change capability shall include English

descriptors for graphic points, action messages for alarms and
run time, and trouble condition messages.
TS/M/S18/30
MECHANICAL WORKS
c) Time/Schedule change capability shall include time/date set,

time/occupancy schedules, holiday schedules and activity
defined schedules. Operators with the appropriate privilege shall
be capable of naming an activity (e.g., basketball game, board
meeting, etc.) which requires associated equipment (e.g. fans,
lights, door unlocking, etc.,) to support the activity. The named
activity shall be assigned such associations and, subsequently,
the activity can be scheduled by an operator with the underlying
associated equipment automatically provided an identical
schedule by the BAS. All time and calendar scheduling and
schedule modification shall be accomplished graphically via
colour bars and calendars in a hardware independent manner.
d) Points shall be uniquely definable as to colouration, animation,

audible rate and duration, point descriptors (60 characters
minimum), operator messages (480 characters minimum), alarm
and warning limits, and engineering units.
e) Point related change capability shall include system/point

enable/disable; run time enable/disable; assignment of points to
point classes, analog value offset, lockout, run time limits, and
setting a fixed input or output value.
f) Application program change capability shall include assignment

of comfort limits, global points, time and event initiators, time
and event schedules and enable/disable time and event
programs.
g) Graphic creation specified under Graphic Creation.
7.4. Alarm Handler
a) Alarm Handler software shall be provided to respond to alarm

conditions sensed and transmitted from the appropriate HVAC
Controller. First in, first out handling of alarms in accordance is
required with buffer storage for a minimum of 20 alarms in case
of simultaneous multiple alarms. All alarms issued shall reflect
genuine faults on systems and equipment. The alarm handler
shall be configured and programmed to recognize situations
(such as change of mode of operations, etc.) as normal
conditions to avoid issuance of nuisance alarms.
b) Alarm handler shall be active in both the Signed On and Signed

Off modes to assure that alarms will be processed even though
an operator is not currently signed on.
TS/M/S18/31
MECHANICAL WORKS
c) Alarms shall be displayed in a dialogue box on the colour

monitor. Display shall include as a minimum:
1) Indication of alarm condition; i.e. FAULT,

PRE-ALARM, ALARM, analog identification
such as HIGH ROOM TEMPERATURE
TECH CENTRE, SECOND FLOOR, ROOM
202.
2) A discrete per point alarm action taking

message.
d) Alarm silencing shall be through selecting the "silence" button

or by authorised operator's acknowledgement. In all cases, alarm
acknowledgement shall only be allowed by operators authorised
to acknowledge a point in alarm.
e) Each point shall be assigned to an alarm class, with no limit to

the quantity of alarm classes. Each alarm class be uniquely
assignable to any combination of the following alarm processing
attributes :
1) Audible beep duration (none, 10 seconds, 20

seconds, continuous)
2) Audible beep rate (slow-medium-fast)
3) Alarm historically archived (yes or no)
4) Alarm printed, with printer ID
5) Associated coloration with any of 256 colours,

with separate brightness control, assignable to
each alarm state (high alarm, high warning,
normal, low warning, low alarm). Digital points
shall similarly be distinguished with different
colours for each possible state.
f) Alarms shall be displayed and/or printed at each peripheral to

which its segregation allows, but only those operators having
proper privilege level will be allowed acknowledge alarms.
g) An unacknowledged alarm indicator shall be provided on the

colour monitor display to alert the operator that there are
unacknowledged alarms in the system.
TS/M/S18/32
MECHANICAL WORKS
h) Points in a graphic display that are in an unacknowledged alarm

state shall have a flashing red border, when in an acknowledged
state, the border shall be non-flashing red.
i) Run time limit message shall be presented and proceeded as an

alarm message except the action message shall be of a
maintenance directive nature.
7.5. Reports
a) Standard reports shall be provided which shall be operator

selectable to appear on the operator station, or printer or both.
All facility-wide standard reports shall be capable of being
scheduled to run at a specific time and/or interval via an
operator function supported by necessary data entry templates
and interactive prompts. A "terminate report" command shall be
available to allow the operator to stop any report in the process
of being printed.
b) Point summary reports may be requested at any penetration

level (facility, building, area, system) and shall include only
points at and below that level. Point summary reports shall
include the current value/status and condition, system and point
descriptions for all points. Points summary reports shall be
selectable for all points, except those points in alarm, fixed
points, disabled points and locked out points.
c) Historical trend reports shall allow the operator to randomly

select points to be recorded at selectable time intervals.
Information shall automatically diverted into a standard third
party software spreadsheet package for display, manipulation
and merging as necessary by the authorised operator. Minimum
sampling shall be at NO more than 1 minute for logging values
of 40 variables over a period of one month.
d) The trend report shall be stored to disk and shall be

subsequently capable of being displayed, printed or archived to
diskette by the operator.
e) Dynamic trends shall provide up to six points and show real

time activity of the associated points. This information shall be
printed and/or displayed in numeric, bar chart, curve plot, pie
chart, etc., as selected by the operator. Graphic plots shall allow
a unique colour for each point.
TS/M/S18/33
MECHANICAL WORKS
f) As new point values are sampled, they shall be processed,

scaled and dynamically appended to any plot being displayed.
Minimum sampling rate 5 seconds, maximum sampling rate 60
minutes. Number of samples to be displayed on the screen
should be selectable, minimum 10 samples.
g) A custom report capability shall be provided to allow the user to

format reports of any text, points with status/value and
descriptions, and points with status/value only. Custom reports
may be scheduled or requested manually. A spreadsheet
programme (MicroSoft Excel) shall be provided, fully
integrated with BAS data base, and available to the user.
h) In the event of failure of any printer, subsequent reports directed

to that printer shall be automatically redirected to an operator
pre-assigned backup printer located at the operator station.
7.6. Graphic Creation
a) A graphic development facility shall be provided to allow the

user to develop or modify graphic displays and assign and
position any array of points within each graphic.
b) All graphic displays shall be created via operator station

graphics package. It shall not require taking the operator station
off-line or interfere with point archiving and alarms. Graphics
shall be created via mouse and keyboard selection of graphic
library stored symbols and system profiles. In addition, the
system shall have the capability to create custom symbols,
system profiles, floor plans, buildings, etc., and store them in
the graphic library.
c) The number and type of graphics to be provided is as noted in
the Data Control and Graphics summary.
d) The system shall provide expansion of up to 1000 graphics.
TS/M/S18/34
MECHANICAL WORKS
7.7. Digital System Management
a) The Operation Station shall provide complete utilities necessary

for management of the network of digital controllers and
devices.
b) Provide a multi-page set of graphic architectural displays

showing each digital module including each remote panel, PC,
peripheral, and communication links. Clicking on any device
shall start an interactive dialogue allowing the user to observe
the device status and to select device management options. Each
device shall also be provided with a descriptor of up to 60
characters.
c) Any digital device with database storage in RAM only may be

up-line of down-line loaded to or from the Operator Station disk
for backup archival.
d) Provide software to execute and observe diagnostics of any

remote device connected to the bus and the ability to deactivate
and restart the device.
7.8. Operator Station Utilities
a) The Operator Station personal computer shall be provided with

the following system utilities or desktop application packages:
Clock Real Time Clock
Calculation Basis arithmetic calculation functions (add,

subtract, multiply, divide, percentage, square
root)
Clipboard Data transfer facility between dissimilar

programmes
Calendar Electronic appointment calendar
Card file Electronic Index Card file

Control Panel Basic PC operating characteristic control :
cursor blink rate, mouse sensitivity, screen
colour control, etc.
Write Word processing programme
TS/M/S18/35
MECHANICAL WORKS
7.9. Third Party Software
a) The system provided shall be capable of running standard off-

the-shelf MS DOS IBM PC compatible software packages (such
as Micrografx Designer, MX-Excel Spreadsheet etc)
concurrently with the real time system.
b) The base system software shall include a LCD "windowing"

feature to allow the operator to monitor the real time system and
use third party software simultaneously.
c) All third party software packages identified shall have access to

the system historical data base previously specified.
d) All third party software shall be licensed with the University

being the licensee. all original software packages, complete with
floppy on compact ABCs and instruction manuals shall be
handed over to the University as part of the hand over
documents.
e) BAS/BMS system shall be open and readiness for third party

software such as simple network management protocol, mobile
application interfacing..
7.10. Provided Graphics
In addition to Graphic of building systems with dynamic data points as

noted in the following Data and Control and Graphic summary, and
Graphics required under the Digital System Management sections, the
following additional graphics shall be quantified and included within the
proposal.
a) Campus layout (showing buildings, streets, etc.)
b) Individual building layouts of isometrics
c) Any other graphics necessary for logical penetration
d) Sequence or operation
e) Flowcharts for critical DDC loops
f) Supervisor graphics
g) System configuration
TS/M/S18/36
MECHANICAL WORKS
7.11. Trends, Messages
a) The Sub-Contractor shall enter all computer programs and data

files into the related computers including all control programs,
initial approved parameters and settings; descriptions, and
colour graphics as specified complete with dynamic dispersed
data. In addition, the following, to be user implemented, shall
have samples installed for training and validation:
1) Trend log
2) Alarm message (action taking message)
3) Trouble action message
4) Dynamic Trend Plot (6 points)
b) The BAS Central shall have extensive message capability.

Enforceable descriptive messages can be specified to address
customer concerns. The BAS Sub-Contractor shall demonstrate
this capability and install a minimum of two typical messages.
All remaining messages unless otherwise specified shall be
generated by the End User to meet individual needs.
7.12. Alarm Paging via Short Message Service (SMS) General
The alarm paging system shall be a Microsoft Windows based application to be

integrated with the Building Automation (BAS). On critical alarm occurrence in
the BAS, the paging system shall send SMS message to all configured mobile
phones in the system.
Functions
The Alarm Paging system shall be comply with the following functions :
a) User Interface
i) Shall be a menu based windows application capable of running on

latest Windows or Windows Server version and above system.
ii) Shall show the on-line status of the SMS device with a log
window detailing the system activities
iii) Shall provide user friendly easy to use graphical user interface
(GUI)
TS/M/S18/37
MECHANICAL WORKS
b) Paging
i) Shall provide an alarm paging system to send SMS text message

either manually or automatically to all authorized and assigned
duty personnel in the event of specific problems and/or alarms.
ii) Shall be suitable for notification to hand phone or mobile PDA.
iii) Shall be capable of identifying the personnel(s) on duty and SMS

the personnel until an acknowledgement is received. If the
notified personnel do not acknowledge the call within the pre-set
time, the system shall page for the person again for every time-out
interval until the person acknowledge the call. The acknowledge
wait (time-out) interval shall be adjustable in the system.
iv) Communication between the alarm notification system and the

BAS shall be through the communications LAN. The alarm
notification system receives the point data and systems messages
via LAN and transmits its text message via MS gateway.
v) The paging system shall be capable of identifying the personnel

on duty and page them. If the paged personnel do not
acknowledge the call within the pre-set time, the system shall
page for the same person for another pre-set number of times
before it page the next person on the list. The retry numbers shall
be configurable in the system.
vi) System shall be capable of handling multiple critical alarms at any

given point of time. The system shall be scalable and able to
support up to 32 SMS devices so that additional devices can be
added as and when the need arises.
c) User Grouping
i) Grouping of duty technicians based on their role shall be possible.

This grouping can be applied to the alarm condition and all users
in the group shall be paged.
ii) Users shall be paged in two modes – queued or simultaneous

calling. In queued calling, system shall escalate the notification to
the next user in the User Group only when the current user has not
dialed in and acknowledgement the notification even after a few
tries. However, some critical points may demand paging all the
users simultaneously without waiting for a response from anyone.
System shall support Inform All option to reduce time lag in
reaching several users quickly.
TS/M/S18/38
MECHANICAL WORKS
d) Security
i) System shall be secured with login/logoff mechanism. Users

should use their login name and password to access the system.
ii) System shall support read/write data access levels so that user can
only have read only or read/write data access permissions. Users
with read only access level shall not be allowed to update the data
in the system.
iii) All login/logoff activity shall be logged.
e) Reports
i) All paging activity shall be logged.
ii) Shall provide reports for essential master data.
iii) Activity log shall be viewed and printed from the system. System
shall provide option to select date range and user name to filter the
activity data.
The alarm paging system shall be a Microsoft Windows based application

to be integrated with the Building Automation System (BAS). On critical
alarm occurrence in the BAS, the paging system shall send SMS message
to all configured mobile phones in the system
Functions
The Alarm Paging system shall be comply with the following functions:
a) User Interface
i) Shall be a menu based windows application capable of

running on latest Window and above system.
window detailing the system activities.
iii) Shall provide user friendly easy to use graphical user

interface (GUI).
TS/M/S18/39
MECHANICAL WORKS
b) Short Message Service
i) Shall provide SMS system to send SMS text message

either manually or automatically to all authorized and
assigned duty personnel in the event of specific problems
and/or alarms.
ii) Shall be suitable for notification to hand phone, PDA or

smart phones.
Shall be capable of identifying the personnel(s) on duty

and SMS the personnel until an acknowledgement is
received. If the notified personnel do not acknowledge the
call within the pre-set time, the system shall SMS the
person again for every time-out interval until the person
acknowledged the call. The acknowledge wait (time-out)
interval shall be adjustable in the system.
iii) Communication between the alarm notification system

and the BAS shall be through the communications LAN.
The alarm notification system receives the point data and
systems messages via LAN and transmits its text message
via MS gateway.
iv) The paging system shall be capable of identifying the

personnel on duty and page them. If the paged personnel
do not acknowledge the call within the pre-set time, the
system shall page for the same person for another pre-set
number of times before it page the next person on the list.
The retry numbers shall be configurable in the system.
v) System shall be capable of handling multiple critical

alarms at any given point of time. The system shall be
scalable and able to support up to 32 SMS devices so that
additional devices can be added as and when the need
arises.
c) User Grouping
i) Grouping of duty technicians based on their role shall be

possible. This grouping can be applied to the alarm
condition and all users in the group shall be paged.
TS/M/S18/40
MECHANICAL WORKS
ii) Users shall be paged in two modes - queued or

simultaneous calling. In queued calling, system shall
escalate the notification to the next user in the User Group
only when the current user has not dialed in and
acknowledgement the notification even after a few tries.
However, some critical points may demand paging all the
users simultaneously without waiting for a response from
anyone. System shall support Inform All option to reduce
time lag in reaching several users quickly.
d) Security
i) System shall be secured with login/logoff mechanism.

Users should use their login name and password to access
the system.
ii) System shall support read/write data access levels so that

user can only have read only or read/write data access
permissions. Users with read only access level shall not be
allowed to update the data in the system.
e) Reports
iii) Activity log shall be viewed and printed from the system.
System shall provide option to select date range and user
name to filter the activity data.
TS/M/S18/41
MECHANICAL WORKS
8. Not in Use
9. BAS Point Schedule
9.1. The Point Schedule enclosed hereinafter shall be read in conjunction with
the Tender Drawings and Specification.
9.2. The point schedule enclosed is for the purpose of guidance of minimum
requirements. The Sub-Contractor shall allow cost in his Tender for any
further points/sensors/instruments to enable the system to operate in its
intended purpose of a complete optimum operating system.
9.3. In general, the following are to be provided for :
Water cooled Chillers

START/STOP Control
Programmed START/STOP Control
ON/OFF Status
TRIP ALARM
Mode Selection
Chilled water in analogue pressure/temperature indication
Run-Time Totalization
Flow indication
Variable Speed Control and feedback
3 PHASE current amps ,voltage, frequency indication
Kilo-watt, kilo-watt-hour indication
High level interfacing to chiller chilled water temperature,
Set point, Alarms, all fault, pressure, kwh, voltage ,ampere, power etc
Condenser/Chilled Water Pumps

START/STOP Control
ON/OFF Status
TRIP ALARM
Mode Selection
Condensing/Chilled water in analogue pressure indication
Pump Speed Indication
TS/M/S18/42
MECHANICAL WORKS
Cooling Tower
START/STOP Control
ON/OFF Status
TRIP ALARM
Mode Selection
Condenser water in analogue pressure/temperature indication
Flow indication
High/Low level indication
Motor speed indication
Outdoor wet bulb
Headers
Modulating Bypass valve control and status
Supply and Return pipe Pressure
Differential pressure
Branch pipe
BTU and flow
Chilled water supply and return Temperature
AHUs
Local/BAS/Remote Mode Selection
START/STOP Control
Programmed START/STOP Control (Energy saving modes)
ON/OFF Status
TRIP ALARM
Local/Remote Mode
VSD/BYPASS Mode
Run-time Totalization
Supply Air Temperature Indication
Return Air Temperature Indication and setpoint
Smoke Detector Alarm
Chilled Water Valve Control
Chilled Water Valve Analog Position Indication
Temperature Set Point Adjustment
TS/M/S18/43
MECHANICAL WORKS
Off Coil Temperature Indication

Fan Speed Indication
R.H. Indication
Flow indication
Motorized dampers control and feedback
Outdoor air temperature
Co2 Sensor
Co2 Sensor override
Control and Monitoring of Modulating Damper for fresh air
BTU and flow
Purging Fan START/STOP control
Purging Fan START/STOP status
Purging Fan TRIP ALARM
Purging fan Fresh Air /Return Air Dampers Position
Induction Box / VAV Boxes

Temperature
Occupancy/Non-occupancy drive
Control for Motorised Damper
Flow indication
Chilled Water Fan Coil Units

Temperature
START/STOP Control & Valve Control
ON/OFF Status
Local/Remote Mode
Variable Speed Control and feedback (fan coil with VSD)
Fan speed indication (fan coil with VSD)
TRIP ALARM
VRV and Spilt Units

Room Temperature
Room Temperature setpoint
START/STOP Control
ON/OFF Status
Local/Remote Mode
High Temperature Alarm
TS/M/S18/44
MECHANICAL WORKS
TRIP/FAULT ALARM
Fresh/Exhaust Air Fans

START/STOP Control
ON/OFF Status
TRIP ALARM
Variable Speed Control and feedback (fan with VSD)
Fan speed indication (fan with VSD)
Chilled Water Pumps (for Air Cooled Chilller)

START/STOP Control
ON/OFF Status
TRIP ALARM
Mode Selection
Chilled water in analogue pressure indication
Air cooled Chillers

START/STOP Control
ON/OFF Status
TRIP ALARM
Mode Selection
Flow indication
3 PHASE current amps ,voltage indication
TS/M/S18/45
MECHANICAL WORKS
Biological Safety Cabinet/ Fume Cupboard exhausts fans

START/STOP Control
ON/OFF Status
TRIP ALARM
Mode Selection
Temperature indication
Flow indication
Kilo-watt ,kilo-watt-hour indication
PH value
Exhaust fan for Lab Exhaust

START/STOP Control
ON/OFF Status
TRIP ALARM
Local/Remote Mode
Exhaust Air Temperature Indication
R.H. Indication
Flow indication
Damper control and feedback
TS/M/S18/46
MECHANICAL WORKS
Heat Recovery Unit

START/STOP Control
ON/OFF Status
TRIP ALARM
Mode Selection
Temperature indication before evaporator ,after evaporator
Temperature indication of water before entering and leaving
Flow indication
High level interfacing to hot water temperature,
Hot Water Pump

START/STOP Control
ON/OFF Status
TRIP ALARM
Mode Selection
Hot water in analogue pressure/temp. indication
Bypass Valve control and feedback
Laboratory
Temperature & temperature control
Occupancy/Non-occupancy mode
Control for motorised air venturi valves and Fast Respond Variable Air
Volume valves
Air flow control & indication for all supply air ,exhaust air & etc
Pressure control & indication for all laboratory
RH control & indication for all laboratory
Motion sensor
Air tight damper on/off control and status
Main supply / exhaust duct

Air flow indication for all main branch duct for supply air / exhaust air &
etc
Modulating and on/off control and status for bubble tight/air tight damper
TS/M/S18/47
MECHANICAL WORKS
Freezer / Cold room

ON/OFF Status
TRIP ALARM
10. Chiller Plant Permanent Measurement & Verification (M&V) System
10.1. The Contractor shall include all materials, equipment, accessories,

software, applications and all necessary labours for the carrying out and
completion of the works, whether or not expressly specified in the
Tender Documents.
10.2. The installed instrumentation shall have the capability to calculate

resultant system efficiency (i.e. kW/RT) within 5% of its true value.
Each measurement system shall include the sensor, any signal
conditioning, the data acquisition system and wiring connecting them.
10.3. The Contractor shall ensure that all the instruments and installation
procedure shall follow the specification and method stated under the
following standards:
a. SS 591: Long Term Measurement of Central Chilled Water

System Energy Efficiency
b. Latest BCA Green Mark for Existing Non-Residential

Buildings ENRB
c. Latest Non-Residential New Buildings
d. New Buildings (Non Residential) 2015
e. ASHRAE Guide 22 - Instrumentation for Monitoring Central

Chilled Water System Efficiency
f. SS 553-2009 Code Of Practice for Air-conditioning and

TS/M/S18/48
MECHANICAL WORKS
10.4. Requirements for Magnetic In-Line Flow Meter
a. The flow measuring principle of the flow meter shall be based

on Faraday’s law of electromagnetic induction where the sensor
converts the flow into an electric voltage proportional to the
velocity of the flow
b. The complete flow meter assembly shall have a maximum

measuring error of 0.5% of rate (including sensor)
c. Output transmission of 4 to 20mA and Modbus communication
d. Flow meter are to be provided for chilled water , condenser

water loop and common header
e. The flow meters shall be connected to the BAS using high-

speed interface and connected to data logger using 4 to 20 mA
f. A/D converter of the BTU meter should have a minimum

resolution of 16-bit. This applies to direct data acquisition from
the BTU meter
10.5. Requirements for Ultrasonic Flow Meter
a. The flow meter shall be of the highly accurate clamp-on non-

intrusive ultrasonic flow meter

c. Output transmission of 4 to 20mA and modbus communication



the BTU meter
TS/M/S18/49
MECHANICAL WORKS
10.6. Requirements for Temperature Sensor
a. The temperature sensor shall be of the Thermistor 10K type 4-

wired complete with an open end thread thermo well with an
accuracy of measurement calibrated against measurement
standard include uncertainly of not exceeding ± 0.01°C
b. The sensing probe shall be installed in such manner that there is

direct contact with the water
c. Two (2) nos. of thermo wells shall be installed before and after
the temperature sensor for verification purpose
d. Temperature sensors are to be provided for chilled water,

condenser water loop and common header
e. The temperature sensors shall have their own calibration

certificate following the calibration methods stated under SS
591.
f. The flow meters shall be connected to the BAS using high-

10.7. Requirements for Power Meter
a. The power measurement device shall be of the multi-function

meter type with an accuracy equivalent to Class 0.5 (0.5%),
output transmission of 4 to 20mA and modbus for
communication
b. The current transformer shall have an accuracy of Class 0.5

(0.5%)
c. The power meters shall be connected to the BAS using high-

d. Dedicated power meters (of IEC Class 0.5 or equivalent) and

associated current transformers (of class 0.5 or equivalent) are
to be provided for each groups of equipment: chillers, chilled
water pumps, condenser water pumps, cooling towers and air
distribution equipment.
TS/M/S18/50
MECHANICAL WORKS
10.8. Requirements for Data Acquisition System
a. The data acquisition system shall have an A/D minimum native

resolution of 22 bits
b. All data are able to be logged at 1 second and 1 minute

sampling time interval, and recorded to the 3rd decimal
c. The system shall have the capability to measure and convert 11

different input signals : temperature with thermocouples,
RTD’s and thermistors; dc/ac volts; 2- and 4-wire resistance;
frequency and period; DC /AC current
d. Data Acquisition System shall have spare slot for extension

module
e. Export of raw Data in CSV and excel format
f. Interface to the BAS system for Data display and Calculation
i. Heat balance for individual and total Chiller group,
ii. Individual Chiller efficiency,
iii. Plant efficiency,
iv. Individual and total Chilled Water and Condenser

Pumps kW/RT,
v. Individual and total Cooling Tower kW/RT
10.9. Outdoor Measuring Station
a) Minimally 1 set of Temperature and Humidity Sensor to be

installed along the cooling towers to measure dry-bulb / wet bulb
air temperature and relative humidity. Measuring station shall
have graphical display and keypad for user access operational
data, measurement, trend record. The station shall have modbus
communication for BAS / IBMS interfacing.
b) Sensors / transmitters shall be of remote stainless steel probe,

factory calibrated and shall not require compensation for cable
lengths up to 10m. All enclosure housing shall be of IP 65
corrosion resistance. Maintenance-free solar ultra-violet radiation
and precipitation shield shall be provided for the wet/dry bulb
temperature transmitter sensor probe.
TS/M/S18/51
MECHANICAL WORKS
c) Sensors / Transmitters shall be of EMC compliant with 4mA to

20mA analogue output signals. Signal to be separated for both
temperature and humidity sensing.
d) The temperature measurement shall have an uncertainty within

0.2oC.
e) The accuracy of relative humidity sensors / transmitters shall be

1% or better over the range of 0% to 90%. The accuracy over
the range of 90% to 100% shall be 2%. Hysteresis, linearity
and repeatability to be less than 1% RH
f) Measuring station shall have selectable parameters:
Dry bulb temperature : 0°C - 60°C
Wet bulb temperature : 0°C - 100°C
Relative Humidity : 0 % - 100%
Absolute Humidity : 0g/m3 - 600g/m3
Dew point Temperature : -20°C - 100°C
Mixing Ratio : 0g/kg - 500g/kg of dry air
The station shall have minimum 6-point NIST traceable calibration certificate.
Certificate shall be submitted to engineer
11. As-built
11.1. All the as-built drawing shall follow the particular specification
11.2. All the DDC panel and BAS station shall have the termination single lines
diagram. The diagram shall reflect all the AO, AI, DO, DI and all other
high level point that connected. Diagram shall clearly stated to which
sensors. devices, type of control, monitoring, etc
TS/M/S18/52
MECHANICAL WORKS
12. Training
12.1. The Sub-Contractor shall conduct a local training program for designated
personnel. These courses shall be carried out during normal office hours
and be not be less than 5 working days duration. The date of
commencement of training shall be a date mutually agreed upon and shall
be within one month of the hand-over of installation. Contractor shall also
conduct re-training after the end of DLP and review in those problems
arise during the defects period.
12.2. The training program shall cover all operating and maintenance aspects of
the system, inclusive of detail explanation and demonstration of each and
every software and hardware feature incorporated and an overview of the
system communication network.
12.3. The training program shall consist of both hands-on and class-room
training at the job site or at location agreed upon by the University.
12.4. All instruction manuals, tools, transportation, etc., associated with the
training program shall be provided by the Sub-Contractor. Such cost shall
be deemed to include in the Tender Sum.
12.5. All training shall be carried out by manufacturer's representative and shall
utilize specified manuals, as built documentation and on-line help utility.
TS/M/S18/53
MECHANICAL WORKS
Green Mark Energy Tabulation to be reflected in BAS, floor plan graphic shall be included
Lab Office Common Area Total Total

ACMV HRU Floor Floor
Floors
Lighting Equipment HPF Lighting Equipment ACMV Lighting Equipment ACMV Power Tonnage
(kW) (RT)
∑ RF BTU
∑ RF
RF meters (if
meters
any)
∑ L16 ∑ L16
16 meters BTU
meters
∑ L15 ∑ L15
15 meters BTU
meters
… … …
∑ L2 ∑ L2 BTU
2
meters meters
∑ L1 ∑ L1 BTU
1
meters meters
∑ ∑
Basement Basement
Basement
meters BTU
meters
Total A B C D E F G H I J K ∑A-K L
TS/M/S18/54
MECHANICAL WORKS
Total Building Lighting A+F+I

Total Building Equipment B + G +J
Total Building ACMV C+D+E+H+K
Lifts
Pumps
Others Main incoming meter - ∑ all
of the above
Chiller Plant L x Chiller plant efficiency
Total Building load Sum of the above (M)
(kW)
Total Building Area (m2) N
EUI (kWh/m2/yr) M x 8760 / N
Chiller Plant efficiency shall interface to the chiller plant that supply to the building. Sub-
contractor shall include all the necessary interfacing to the chiller plant BAS system.
TS/M/S18/55
MECHANICAL WORKS
SECTION 19 - INSTRUMENTATION & SENSOR SYSTEM
1. General
1.1. The purpose of the specifications is to provide the operational concepts

and minimum standalone automation and monitoring devices and
instrumentation to be installed for the air conditioning and ventilation
system and other services.
1.2. All sensors shall be of design and size according to the requirement
suitable for installation onto the connected sub-system and equipment.
Each and every sensor point shall be provided with an individual
complete sensor set. Sharing of any form of circuitry, or part of circuitry
shall not be accepted. Sensors shall be selected such that maximum
operating point is no more than 1.5 times the normal maximum operating
point.
1.3. All sensors shall be complete with the necessary electrical/ electronic
circuitry (transmitter) to convert sensor output signals into the signal
form acceptable to the DDC/PLC controllers and compatible with
industry standards such as 0V to 10V, 1V to 10V and 4-20mA.
1.4. The transmitters shall have built-in voltage stablisation circuits, and
zero/span adjustments. The transmitters shall have the necessary
accuracy such that the accuracy of the sensor plus transmitter shall be
within the accuracy specified for that particular type of sensor. Cables
losses shall take into consideration.
1.5. Unless otherwise specified, all sensors shall be constructed of materials

suitable for the operation in the intended environment without corrosion
or degradation. In particular, sensors installed in chilled water systems,
hot water system, humid environment, inside water tanks/pipes, and
where subjected to the weather shall be corrosion resistant.
1.6. The instrumentation and device shall comply to the following standards:
a) Singapore Standard CP 638, Code of practice for electrical

Installations
b) Singapore Standard SS 553, Code of practice for air-conditioning

and mechanical ventilation in buildings

TS/M/S19/1
MECHANICAL WORKS

e) ANSI/ASHRAE 135 BACnet - A Data Communication Protocol

for Building Automation and Control Networks


h) BS EN 61326-1 Electrical equipment for measurement, control

and laboratory use. Test certificate of conformance shall be
submitted.
i) International Organization for Standardization ISO/IEC 9075-9:

j) TIA/EIA 232-F Interface Between Data Terminal Equipment and

Data Circuit Terminating Equipment Employing Serial Binary
Data Exchange;
k) TIA/EIA 485-A : Electrical Characteristics of Generators and

l) TIA/EIA 568-C.1 : Commercial Building telecommunications

Cabling Standard;
m) Transmission Control Protocol/Internet Protocol of Defence

n) International Organization for Standardization ISO/IEC 8802-3 :

Standard for Ethernet.
1.7. The manufacturers shall be certified to ISO 9001 for the products offered
for minimum 10 years. Certificate of compliance/conformance to the
standards or other documents to prove origin of manufacture and
compliance specified shall be submitted.
1.8. The Sub-Contractor shall submit monthly report on calibration all the
equipment over the twelve (12) months defects liability period. The
report formats shall be subjected to the S.O.'s approval.
TS/M/S19/2
MECHANICAL WORKS
1.9. All the power meter, water meter, BTU meter or airflow station that is
used for utility billing shall be linked and program at University of
Campus infrastructure, Ventus building, Office of Facilities
Management energy metering system.
1.10. Integration to Wireless Mesh Network Lighting Management system and

provision for third party software interfacing
2. Materials
Damaged, deformed and cracked equipment or materials shall be
rejected. Replacement shall be provided by the Sub-Contractor at no
additional cost to the University.
2.3 Materials and equipment shall be the products of the approved

manufacturers’ own manufacturing facilities. Materials and equipment
manufactured by contract manufacturing, under licence and similar
arrangement are not acceptable.

2.5 The products shall be actively supported by manufacturer’s local

representative or authorised distributor with technical support team and
spare parts stock.
TS/M/S19/3
MECHANICAL WORKS
Sub-Contractor.
2.8 All sensors, control valves, actuators, shall be from the BAS
manufacturer or other compatible type to the BAS system
3. Site Conditions


28oC wet bulb

26.5oC wet bulb

4. Sensors, Transducers, Valves and Actuators
Temperature sensors, pressure sensors, kilowatt-hour transducers, 3-way valves,

2-way valves, valves actuators, flow meters, variable speed drives and etc, shall
be provided and installed to the condenser water piping system and chilled water
piping system for the air-conditioning equipment.
4.1. Temperature Sensors
a) Sensors shall be factory calibrated and shall not require

compensation for cable lengths etc. Repeatability of sensor
shall be 0.5° C or better.
b) Duct mounted temperature sensors shall be the rigid stem type

and pipe mounted temperature sensors shall be provided with a
separable copper or stainless steel well.
c) Immersion sensors shall be provided complete with immersion

pocket. Insertion length shall be 100mm. Sensing range.
d) All sensors for Chiller Plant Room equipments shall comply to

BCA green mark requirement of temperature sensors with
accuracy of  0.03°C- 0.05 °C @ 0°C.
TS/M/S19/4
MECHANICAL WORKS
4.2. Pressure Sensors /Pressure Transmitter
a) Pressure sensors for both air and water applications shall be of

the state-of-the-art piezo resistive type. The pressure sensing
diaphragm shall be of silicon material. All pressure sensors
supplied shall have no moving parts and shall not require any
maintenance or calibration.
b) Pressure sensors shall be selected for approximately 50% over

range and have standard output signals, e.g. 4-20mA. Signals
that are specific to a manufacturer's DDC controller's input
range will be acceptable provided the sensor is of the same
manufacturer as the DDC controller. All pressure sensors shall
have temperature compensation built-in. Repeatability and
hysteresis shall be ±0.25% or better. Shock and vibration
resistance capabilities shall comply to MIL-STD-202 or better.
4.3. Kilowatt-Hour Transducer
a) KWH transducer shall be single disc, class 1 (BS 5685:1979),

three phase, 50 Hz, 3 wire type suitable for unbalanced loads
and with impulse generator unit. All meters shall be fully
tropicalised and calibrated for use at 30 deg. C.
b) Transducer housing shall be of non-metallic, fully insulating,

non-hygroscopic, non-ignitable thermosetting plastic material
having low dirt absorption property and distortion free under
high temperature eg bakelite.
c) The wire terminal shall be protected by a separate cover, it

shall be of the same material as the housing.
d) The insulation of the meter circuits shall be with adequate

resistance and shall withstand the voltage test as specified in
BS 5685. The meter shall further withstand 1.2/50 micro
seconds standard full lightning impulse test of not less than
10kVp in accordance with the relevant requirement of BS 923 .
e) Transducer shall be fitted with electronically controlled

transmitting impulse generator unit capable of delivering
energy quantities of 1.0 kwh per impulse (maximum 5
impulse/sec). Pulse duration shall be between 10 to 120 msec.
f) KWH transducer shall be used for all electrical consumption

measurement. KWH transducer with KWH computer by BAS
shall not be acceptable.
TS/M/S19/5
MECHANICAL WORKS
4.4. Control Valve Actuators
a) All control valve actuators shall be of electric/electronic type

with self-contained motorized valve linkage. The linkage shall
have automatic self adjustment to compensate for any variation
in valve stroke to ensure reaching of full open or tight close-off
positions.
b) The valve actuator shall be provided with valve position

indication of stroke position for easy determination of valve
position during trouble shooting. The valve actuator shall be
provided with electronic current sensing circuitry to terminate
power to the prime mover for internal protection and to ensure
positive closing/opening force.
c) Valve actuators offered shall be of compact size and suitable

for multi-pose mounting to overcome mounting difficulties in
confined areas.
d) All actuators shall have a non-spring return. Manual overriding

shall be provided.
e) All actuators shall have a feed back information for valve

position
4.5. Control Valves
a) Control valves of 2" Ø and below shall be screwed type. Valves

of 2.5" Ø and above shall be flanged. Valves shall be available
with a body pressure rating of greater than 16 bar and
tangibility of better than 100:1.
b) Screw type valves shall be of gunmetal (bronze) and flanged

valves of cast iron or cast steel.
c) All valves whether two ports or three ports shall be closed

when the spindle is in the up position. Two port valves shall
have an equal percentage control characteristic. Three port
valves shall have an equal percentage characteristic on the
through port and a linear characteristic on the bypass port.
d) Valves shall be sized to have a full flow pressure drop equal or

greater than the pressure drop through the water coil being
controlled, but not more than 35KPa.
TS/M/S19/6
MECHANICAL WORKS
e) Two port valves shall have a close off capability equal to or

greater than the maximum possible system differential
pressure. (As determined by the pump head or the system
differential pressure bypass control setting).
f) Three port valves shall have a close off capability equal to or

greater than the combined full flow pressure drops of the coil
plus the valve itself.
g) Three port valves shall be piped for mixing service.
h) Two port control valves for differential pressure bypass control

applications shall be sized to handle at least the full flow one
chiller at the desired pressure setting. The valve shall be
capable of closing off against this pressure and of operating at
this pressure for long periods without internal wear, or noise.
For bypass valves the valve shall be either of double-seated or
rotary design, to provide a close off pressure equal to the
chilled water pump head.
i) The Sub-Contractor shall submit the sizing calculations for all

control valves.
j) All control valves shall be rated to withstand 1725 kPa (250 Pa)
or the expected pressure encountered, whichever is higher.
4.6. VAV Box Damper Actuator
a) A damper actuator shall be mounted directly on the damper

shaft and shall provide complete modulating control of the
damper. It shall be electronic type using magnetic coupling
technology to eliminate the need for limit switches or
mechanical stops.
b) The actuator shall be capable of driving in both clockwise and

counter-clockwise direction.
c) The damper actuator shall be a separator device from the DDC

controller.
d) Damper actuator position status shall be monitored from the

central or remote operator’s terminal and shall be displayed in
percent open notation. Systems which provide only end switch
feedback are not acceptable.
TS/M/S19/7
MECHANICAL WORKS
e) The actuator timing for the complete stroke shall be 90 seconds

or less. Stroke selection shall be adjustable continuously within
a range of 0 to 90 degrees.
f) The actuator running torque shall be minimum 35 lb-in with

stall torque of 45 lb-in.
4.7. BACnet thermostat Controls (VAV)
a) The VAV box controller shall be a standalone networked

BACnet thermostat of 8-bit microprocessor based type with
b) The BACnet thermostat controller shall have built-in operator

interface with keypad and alphanumeric liquid crystal display
(LCD). The LCD shall have alphanumeric indication of:-
iv) provide multi inputs for thermostat, and all other adjustments.
v) thermostat shall have proportional output to control the damper

actuator at minimum (10%) and maximum (100%) positioning
without mechanical jam to actuator
c) Each VAV controller, operating parameters, set points and

schedule shall be stored in non-volatile EEPROM memory to
prevent loss during loss of power to the controller.
d) The BACnet thermostat shall have built-in operator interface

with keypad and alphanumeric liquid crystal display (LCD).
- operation mode
TS/M/S19/8
MECHANICAL WORKS
e) It shall have provisions to accept inputs from temperature and

other sensors.
It shall have a 24-volt AC pulse output. The BACnet thermostat

shall provide room temperature control accuracy of not greater
than ±0.5°C.
f) A built-in real time clock shall be provided for automatic

setpoint ranges for comfort, standby and night modes. A 7-day
switching program with up to 4 switching points per day shall
be provided. An early adjusted overtime function, with
automatic reset at the time-out signal shall provide users with
flexibility of extending the day level as required.
g) All BACnet controllers provided shall be capable of operating

in full “stand alone” operation as part of a larger control
system. Individual data memory shall be fully backup battery
for power interruption of at least 72 hours.
Each BACnet controller output can drive up to 2 motor actuator

of the VAV Boxes.
h) All BACnet thermostat shall be installed below the false ceiling

for ease of maintenance.
4.8. Air Duct Smoke Detectors (Probe Units)
a) All smoke detector mounted at the AHU return ducts shall be

the duct mounted photoelectric type.
b) All new air handling units (AHUs) shall be fitted with

smoke detectors (probe units) of approved design and
manufacture in the return-air stream immediately adjacent to
the existing air handling unit.
c) The smoke detector (i.e. probe unit) shall be provided for

monitoring of the return air ducts of the existing AHUs. The
detector shall sample the air passing through the AHU to
provide early detection of a developing hazardous condition or
fire. In the event of alarm from the probe unit (ie. detector of
smoke at the return air duct), the related air conditioning
equipment (AHU) shall ‘shut down’ automatically.
TS/M/S19/9
MECHANICAL WORKS
d) The detector head shall be housed in an integrated housing with

filter system for reduced maintenance and service. The detector
head shall be accessible without removing the dust housing.
The air velocity limits shall be 300 to 4000 ft/min.
e) For reliability and safety considerations, the smoke detector

shall comply to UL, FM, CSFM or BSA standards.
f) The duct smoke detector shall have adjustable sensitivity

setting and be completed with integral power supply unit
suitable for 230V, 50 Hz operation and relay contacts for alarm
and trouble condition monitoring and control.
g) All duct smoke detectors shall be furnished with air sampling

tubes extending through the width of the air duct.
h) The unit shall deviate a small amount of air from regular to

high velocity air conditioning and/or ventilation ducts into a
special chamber which contains a smoke detector.
i) The unit shall not have to be adjusted to air streams between 1

m/s and 20 m/s.
j) The unit shall accommodate a photo-electric light scattering

detector, matching with the built-in base.
k) The unit shall be accessible for inspection without opening the

unit.
l) The unit shall be designed so that all service work can be

carried out without affecting the duct system.
m) The unit shall be equipped with a circuit monitoring the

presence of the smoke detector head.
n) The alarm indicator shall be clearly visible from outside.
o) The housing shall be made of approved plastic material, shock-

proof, vibration-proof and listed.
p) The housing of the unit shall contain 4 openings for

compression cable glands. If unused, these openings shall be
covered with plugs.
TS/M/S19/10
MECHANICAL WORKS
q) The air duct detector assembly and its cover shall be joined via
a rubber lip to prevent unwanted passage of air and/or smoke.
r) The unit shall connect directly into any standard detector line
from the manufacturer's control unit using four wires for Class
"A" wiring.
s) The unit shall be equipped with a terminal block with screwless

terminals accepting wires between 0.25 mm2 and 1.5 mm2
(SWG 23 and 15) and equipped with built-in strain limits.
t) The unit shall allow to drive an additional alarm indicator lamp

without additional wiring from the control unit.
u) The unit shall be designed for complete sealing of the duct

penetrations necessary for the sampling tubes and for fastening
the air duct detector assembly.
v) The unit shall be supplied with a template for duct penetrations

and complete mounting, connection and maintenance
guidelines.
w) The unit shall be designed so that there is a complete separation

between detection chamber and the compartment containing the
affiliated electronics.
x) The unit shall be supplied with the appropriate sampling tubes.
y) The electronics compartment of the air duct detector assembly

shall provide ample room for additional circuitry.
z) Specifications :
Admissible flow speed : 1 to 20 m/s
Approval : UL/FF/EN54
Ambient temperature : -10 to + 60C
Relative humidity : max. 93% RH continuous

TS/M/S19/11
MECHANICAL WORKS
4.9. Radiant Heat Temperature Sensor
a) Sensor shall have a measurement range of 5 C to 50 C and the

accuracy of ± 2C, and the response time is within 10 seconds.
b) Sensor shall have a rotation angle of 360 horizontally and 65

vertically.
c) Sensor shall have an output signal of 1 to 5 V DC.
4.10. Humidity Sensors
a) Humidity sensors shall be sensitive thin film capacitance type.
b) Sensors shall have a range of 25 to 90% R.H. and accuracy ± 3%.
c) Room sensors shall be combined humidity/temperature sensors

and shall have terminal connection to permit wiring to be done
through the KO box.
d) Duct sensors shall have an insertion length of 200 mm and shall

have a mounting flange.
4.11. Differential Pressure Transmitters
a) Pressure transmitters shall be constructed to withstand 100%

pressure over-range without damage, and to hold calibrated
accuracy when subject to a momentary 40% over-range input.
b) Pressure transmitters shall transmit a 0 to 5 VDC, 0 to 10 VDC,

or 4 to 20 mA output signal.
c) Differential pressure transmitters used for flow measurement

shall be sized to the flow sensing device
4.12. Carbon Dioxide Sensor
a) The carbon dioxide monitor where specified shall be duct

mounted type complete with sensing probes. The monitor shall
have different range setting suitable for comfort air-conditioning
application. The CO2 monitor shall monitor the CO2 level
continuously. Visual LED or other form of visual indication
shall be provided to indicate the current measured value.
TS/M/S19/12
MECHANICAL WORKS
b) CO2 monitor shall have automatic calibration facility for

calibrating the monitor once every hour. It shall also have built-
in diagnostic equipment for self testing during every sampling
cycle. Should a specific malfunction be detected, the display
shall flash a malfunction code number for identification. The
CO2 monitor shall be interlocked to the AHU. There shall be no
sampling or display but unit circuitry shall be on “standby” for
immediate operation when the AHU is shutdown.
c) The accuracy of the sensor shall be ± 100ppm and the sensing

range shall be from 0 to 2000 ppm. The response time shall not
exceed 20 seconds.
4.13. Motion Sensor Detection System
a) Motion detectors are to be provided for auto on/off of the

induction VAV units, VAV units and air-conditioning unit as
specified.
b) The areas for motion detection system shall deploy in areas that
include seminar rooms, lounge and dining, conference room.
c) All motion detectors shall operate on a standalone system in all

areas.
d) Motion detectors in areas shall be linked to DDC of the

thermostat to sense the mode of occupancy. During unoccupied
mode, the temperature will be offset to the energy saving
temperature and user defined mode when there it is occupied to
maintain its required temperature.
e) The contractor shall ensure the correct application of motion

detection system shall be used for different types of room.
f) The Dual Technology sensor shall be capable of detecting

presence in the control area by detecting doppler shifts in
transmitted ultrasound and passive infrared heat changes.
g) Sensor shall utilize Dual Sensing Verification Principle for

coordination between ultrasonic and PIR technologies. Detection
verification of both technologies must occur in order to activate
lighting systems. Upon verification, detection by either shall hold
lighting on.
TS/M/S19/13
MECHANICAL WORKS
h) Sensor shall have a retrigger feature in which detection by either

technology shall retrigger the system on within 5 seconds of
being switched off.
i) Ultrasonic sensing shall be volumetric in coverage with a

frequency of 40 KHz. It shall utilize Advanced Signal Processing,
which automatically adjusts the detection threshold dynamically
to compensate for constantly changing levels of activity and
airflow throughout controlled space.
j) Sensor shall be capable of corner mounting to a wall or ceiling in

order to eliminate detection through open doorways and outside
of controlled area. To provide superior small motion detection
and immediate activation upon entry, coverage of both
technologies must be complete and overlapping throughout the
controlled area.
k) To avoid false ON activations and to provide immunity to RFI

and EMI, Detection Signature Analysis shall be used to examine
the frequency, duration, and amplitude of a signal, to respond
only to those signals caused by human motion.
l) Sensor shall operate at 24 VDC/VAC and halfwave rectified and

utilize a Watt Stopper power pack.
m) The PIR technology shall utilize a temperature compensated,

dual element sensor and a multi-element Fresnel lens. The lens
shall be Poly IR4 material to offer superior performance in the
infrared wavelengths and filter short wavelength IR, such as
those emitted by the sun and other visible light sources. The lens
shall have grooves facing in to avoid dust and residue build up
which affects IR reception.
n) The lens shall cover up to 2000 sq ft for walking motion when

mounted at 10 ft and 1000 sq ft of desktop motion.
o) Sensors shall have an additional single-pole, double throw

isolated relay with normally open, normally closed and common
outputs. The isolated relay is for use with HVAC control, data
logging, and other control options.
p) Sensors shall utilize technology to optimize time delay and

sensitivity settings to fit occupant usage patterns and shall be
selectable with a DIP switch.
TS/M/S19/14
MECHANICAL WORKS
q) Sensors shall have a time delay that is adjusted automatically

(with the setting) or shall have a fixed time delay of 5 to 30
minutes, set by DIP switch.
r) Sensors shall feature a walk-through mode, where air-

conditioning turn off 3 minutes after the area is initially occupied
if no motion is detected after the first 30 seconds.
s) Sensor shall have an override ON function for use in the event of

a failure.
t) Sensor shall have a built-in light level sensor that works from 10
to 300 footcandles.
u) Sensor shall have 8 occupancy logic options for customized

control to meet application needs.
v) Sensor shall have a manual on function that is facilitated by

installing a momentary switch.
w) Each sensing technology shall have an LED indicator that

remains active at all times in order to verify detection within the
area to be controlled. The LED can be disabled.
x) To ensure quality and reliability, sensor shall be manufactured by

an ISO 9002 certified manufacturing facility and shall have a
defect rate of less than 1/3 of 1%.
y) Sensor shall have standard 5-year warranty and shall be UL and

CUL listed.
z) BAS (ACMV) contractor shall design the quantity and location

of the motion sensors.
aa) All rooms shall be installed with motion sensors to off VAV
Boxes of increase to set point of thermostat controllers.
bb) Motion sensors shall be able to control the lighting of the rooms.
TS/M/S19/15
MECHANICAL WORKS
4.14. Indoor Air Quality Sensor
a) The Indoor Air Quality sensor shall be of wall or duct mounted

type with BACnet or Modbus communication. The sensor should
be all in one measurement of CO2, Volatile organic compounds
(VOC), temperature, Relative Humidity. The sensor shall have
LCD screen to displays the real-time value of CO2 and VOC
concentration in ppm, temperature and relative humidity. VOC
sensor shall be able to sense gases such as Formaldehyde,
organic odours, solvent, methane, hydrogen.
b) The CO2 sensor shall be of Non-dispersive infrared and the

accuracy shall be ± 5%, the sensing range shall be from 0 to
5,000 ppm with resolution of 1ppm. The response time shall not
exceed 20 seconds.
c) VOC sensor shall be of photoionization detector sensing with

accuracy of ± 10%, the sensing range shall be from 0 to 50.00
ppm with resolution of 0.01ppm. The response time shall not
exceed 3 seconds.
d) Temperature sensing range shall be from 0C to 50C, accuracy

of ±1C and resolution of 1C. Relativity humidity shall range
from 0% to 100%, accuracy of ±5% and resolution of 1%
4.15. Hydrogen Detector ( H2)
a) Hydrogen detector shall be of UL-listed using catalytic

combustion sensing technology. Detector to be housed in
polycarbonate enclosure.
b) The detector shall be of wall mount with 2-line LCD display,

LED status indication on power, alarm/fault with built-in buzzer
for alarm
c) Hydrogen Detector to have 4-20mA Output and 2xDPDT Alarm

relay output for BAS monitoring
d) The detector shall have accuracy of: +/-3% in full scale and
measurement Range between 0% to 100% LEL
4.16. Not in Used
TS/M/S19/16
MECHANICAL WORKS
SECTION 20 – VARIABLE SPEED DRIVE (VSD)
1. General
1.1. This section covers the supply, delivery, installation, testing and
commissioning and twelve (12) months free maintenance and warranty of
Variable speed drive and their associated accessories.
1.2. Variable speed system shall be installed to control the speed of rotary
equipment such as for the cooling tower’s motors, AHU’s motors and
secondary chilled water pump’s motors as specified,
1.3. The system shall consist of but not be limited to AC VSDs, isolating
contactors, DDC controllers, feedback sensors and all other control devices
as required.
1.4. The VSDs shall be of the solid state, high efficiency (no less than 95% at
full load), AC adaptable frequency type. Direct current drives, eddy
current, belt drives, hydraulic drives and any other drives shall not be
acceptable.
1.5. The VSD shall be UL listed for a short circuit current rating of 100 kA and
labelled with the rating.
1.6. The VSD shall be tested to UL 508C. The appropriate UL label shall be
applied. VSD shall be manufactured in ISO 9000, 2000 certified facilities.
1.7. The VSD shall comply to BS EN 61800-3 Adjustable speed electrical power
drive systems. EMC requirements and specific test methods, IEC 60034-17
and 60034-25, Rotating electrical machines, AC electrical machines used in
power drive systems, IEC 61000-3-2 Electromagnetic compatibility (EMC)
- Part 3-2: Limits - Limits for harmonic current emissions (equipment input
current ≤ 16 A per phase), IEC 61000-3-12 Electromagnetic compatibility
(EMC) - Part 3-12: Limits - Limits for harmonic currents produced by
equipment connected to public low-voltage systems with input current >16
A and ≤ 75 A per phase and EN 55011 Industrial, scientific and medical
equipment. Radio-frequency disturbance characteristics. Limits and
methods of measurement
1.8. Documentation and test report as per IEC 61800-3 clause 4 shall submit to
engineer. Compliance of VSD cable installation distance to equipment shall
be included.
1.9. The Variable speed Drive is preferably certified by Singapore Green

Building Council (SGBC) or Singapore Environment Council (SEC).
1.10. The manufacture shall provide product warranty for 5 year.
TS/M/S20/1
MECHANICAL WORKS
2. Design
2.1 The VSDs shall be of a microprocessor controlled using either Voltage

Vector Control (VVC) principle or Pulse Width Modulation (PWM). The
VSDs shall process high efficiency at full/part load. The VSDs shall not
require derating of motor at rated voltage and no cause more than 1˚C rise in
motor winding temperature over a wide operating range. At full load, motor
shall run at Class B rating.
2.2 The current wave form of the motor shall resemble the normal electricity
supply waveform (sinusoidal) to ensure high motor efficiency and smooth
running at all speeds, and low input current harmonics.
2.3 The Man Machine Interface (MMI) can read 5 simultaneous meter displays
on MMI and gives the possibility to read an energy log (last 24 hours, last 5
weeks, last 7 days, hour of the day, day of the week, day of the month) via
serial communication of Modbus, BacNet and other open protocol bus.. It
also allow to display 5 variables at any one time of kW, Kw hr, frequency,
motor speed & current and not limited to connected feedback signals and its
set points, in their own engineering SI units (e.g. : bar / 0C etc.). The display
can be program 255 characters in English text array. The VSD shall be able
to function when the MMI is be removed.
2.4 The VSDs capacitor shall design for a life span of 10 years without the need
to be replaced every 3 to 5 years.
2.5 The product will be easy available locally. Customizing and alteration to the
VSD to suit the application or specification is not acceptable.
3. Basic Performance Requirement
3.1. Input Rated Voltage : 400 volts, 3 phase
3.2. Input Voltage Tolerance : +10% to -15% of rated voltage
3.3. Output Voltage : 0 to 100% of input voltage
3.4. Input Frequency : 50 Hz
3.5. Output Frequency : 0 to 60 Hz
3.6. Efficiency : at 100% speed shall have an overall

efficiency of no less than 95%
TS/M/S20/2
MECHANICAL WORKS
3.7. Frequency Stability : 175 parts per million / ˚C
3.8. Ambient Temperature Range : For Operating = 45˚C without derating

: For Storage = -20 to 70 ˚C
3.9. Relative Humidity : 95% RH non-condensing
3.10. Switching Frequency : for VSD up to 45kW rating frequency

control shall have self regulating
switching frequency range from 4.5
kHz to 14 kHz without derating at part
load condition. For VSD larger than
45kW, switching frequency shall be
manually selectable but no less than 2
kHz. The VSD shall have a manually
adjustable carrier frequency that can
be adjusted in 0.5khz increments to
allow the user to select the desired
operating characteristics. It shall also
able to perform automatically reduce
its carrier frequency to avoid tripping
due to thermal overload.
3.11. Status Indication : The drive shall be equipped with a

selector keyboard and Alpha-Numeric
LCD status indication to show power
on; zero speed; enabled; forward;
reverse; accelerate and decelerate; etc.
3.12. Input Power Factor : The drive input shall have a cos Ø
corresponds to unity and true power
factor better than 0.9.
TS/M/S20/3
MECHANICAL WORKS
3.13. Auto Restart Feature : The VSD shall be capable of

automatically restart (auto restart)
after its external trip causing faults
have been rectified. The auto restart
shall NOT exceed 5 times within a
time span of 20 minutes. However
the VSD shall not attempt to start
automatically if it is tripped by
internal faults such as thermal cut-out,
peak current cut out, earthing of
output phase, etc. In such event, the
fault alarm shall be manually reset
before the VSD can be operational.
3.14. Start / Stop Control : Electronically controlled by contact

closure
3.15. Acceleration / Deceleration : Continuously adjustable from 0.75 to

30 sec.
3.16. Motor Torque : The VSD shall provide full motor

torque at any selected frequency from
10 Hz to base speed while providing a
variable torque V/Hz output at reduced
speed. This is to allow driving dire ct
drive fans without high speed derating
or low speed excessive magnetization,
as would occur if a constant torque
V/Hz curve was used at reduced
speeds. Breakaway current of 160%
shall be available.
3.17. Stalling Prevention The drive shall be designed

deceleration : with acceleration and limit circuit to
avoid nuisance tripping when:
The starting current drawn is too high

or the acceleration time set is too fast.
The acceleration limit circuit shall
reduce the acceleration rate to avoid
over-current tripping.
TS/M/S20/4
MECHANICAL WORKS
The regenerative voltage is too high or

the deceleration time set is too fast.
The deceleration limit circuit shall
reduce the deceleration rate to avoid
over voltage tripping.
3.18. Harmonic Suppression : The VSD shall be fitted with a

harmonic filter (D.C. link or
equivalent) on both inductive and
capacitive elements to control the
main borne harmonics. The harmonic
filter shall comply with guidelines of
IEC/EN 6100-3-2 and IEC/EN 6100-
3-12 . The same standard shall also
be used as a basis of calculation for
the total harmonic distortion at point
of common coupling. The filter shall
be mounted within the same enclosure
of the VSD. Any externally fitted
harmonic filter or harmonic filter that
causes voltage drop shall be rejected.
3.19. Electrical Noise : The VSD shall be include a radio

frequency interference (RFI) filter as
part of its design to be in compliance
with standard EN55011 Class 1A
(150 metres) and Class 1B (50
metres). The RFI filter shall conform
to immunity standard of IEC 61000
parts 2-5 and BS EN 61800-3. Test
document and report shall be
submitted for on compliance of cable
length distance. Documentation
according to IEC 61800-3 clause 4
shall submit to engineer. The VSD
shall comply with the emission and
immunity requirements of IEC61800.3
2nd Edition 2004 for Category C1
(EN55011 Class B) products with 50m
motor cable and Category C2
(EN55011 Class A1) products with
150m motor cable.
TS/M/S20/5
MECHANICAL WORKS
3.20. Built-in Initial Setting : The VSD shall be provided with built-
in initial data setting to allow
immediate start up of drive.
3.21. Quality Assurance : The drive shall meet the international

standard of ISO9001.
3.22. Protection for the VSDs :
 Over temperature fault and shall be reset manually
 Built-in thermal motor protection, for efficient motor protection

even at low speed.
 Line transient protection. VDE0160 class W2 Protection by

measurement of 3 phases.
 Line to line and line to ground short circuit protection.
 Over current fault.
 Supply over-voltage and under-voltage fault.
 Insensitive to incoming power phase sequence.
 Current Limiting – 0-100% adjustable for maximum output current.
3.23. Analogue output signals for VSDs :
 Motor frequency : 0-20 mA for 0 to 100% rated motor

speed.
 Motor current : 0-20 mA for 0 to 100% rated motor

current.
 Relay output : A set of relay contacts shall be

provided to track any of the various
modes (such as “Run”, “Fault”, “Zero
speed”, etc.) selected for external
interlocking.
TS/M/S20/6
MECHANICAL WORKS
3.24. Input signals for the VSDs :
 Analogue Signal : 0 to 10 VDC and 0/4 to 20 mA
 Digital Signal : 4 inputs – reset, start, quick step
3.25. Galvanic Isolation : Isolation between power and control

components shall be incorporated to
ensure compliance with VDE 0160
P.E.L.V. to prevent damage to BMS
interface.
3.26. The VSD shall store in memory the last 10 alarms. A description of the
alarm, and the date and time of the alarm shall be recorded.
3.27. When used with a pumping system, the VSD shall be able to detect no-flow
situations, dry pump conditions, and operation off the end of the pump
curve. It shall be programmable to take appropriate protective action when
one of the above situations is detected.
3.28. Password protected keypad with alphanumeric, graphical, backlit display

can be remotely mounted. Two levels of password protection shall be
provided to guard against unauthorized parameter changes.
3.29. The VSD shall include a standard EIA-485 communications port and
capabilities to be connected to the following serial communication protocols
at no additional cost and without a need to install any additional hardware or
software in the VSD:
 Modbus RTU
 LonWorks Free Topology (FTP)
 BACnet MS/TP
 Profibus DP V1
4. Installation
4.1. All VSD installed outdoor shall be provided with suitable IP55
weatherproof housing complete with ventilation fan . All the ventilation fan
airflow rate shall be sized according to manufacturer recommendation in
enclosed space. Special attention shall be made not to install VSDs direct to
sunlight exposure.
4.2. All VSD installed indoor shall be provided with IP54 housing without
having to use a secondary enclosure.
TS/M/S20/7
MECHANICAL WORKS
4.3. All VSD installed inside the MCC and control panel shall be provided with
IP00 housing. The VSD vendor shall provided the details of heat removal
requirement (ventilation) for operating VSD in MCC and its control panel.
4.4. The Contractor shall be responsible for all electrical installation work
required for a fully functional system and shall comply with this
Specifications under the section on “Electrical Installation”.
4.5. All analogue communication cables shall be screened and installed in

separate conduit / trunking.
5. Testing and Commissioning
5.1. The testing and commissioning shall be done by a qualified person that
being trained for the installation and commissioning of VSD motor drive
system.
5.2. Contractor shall conduct system insulation test for all power cable
installation include drive to motor, earth continuity test and final
termination etc before start up
5.3. During commissioning, Contractor shall check the system input and out
voltage, currents, power factor, input parameter to drive, earth leakage
current, total harmonic distortion (THD), functional test, interval speed test
and BAS interfacing functional test.
5.4. Contractor shall submit a comprehensive testing and commissioning report

include power quality for each installed VSD to SO.
TS/M/S20/8
MECHANICAL WORKS
SECTION 21 - ELECTRONIC CONTROL SOFT STARTER
1. General
This section covers the supply, delivery, installation, testing and

electronic control soft starter and their associated accessories
2. Electronic Soft Starter
2.1. The electronic control soft starter shall be reduced voltage/current 3

phase motor type, providing ramp up, run and extended ramp
down features complete with pump control to reduce surges
caused by uncontrolled acceleration and deceleration of
centrifugal pumps. The starting time shall be adjustable from 2 to
30 seconds and stopping time shall be adjustable from 2 to 100
seconds.
2.2. The soft starter shall be sized according to the full load ampere of the
motor and shall be suitable for 400 V (+10% / -15%), 3 phase, 50 Hz
(±5%) operation in an ambient temperature of up to 50°C without
derating and relative humidity of up to 100%.
2.3. The soft starter shall comply with the following standards:
a) IEC 60068-2-6: Environmental testing, Vibration (sinusoidal)

resistance
b) IEC 60068-2-27: Environmental testing, shock resistance
c) IEC 61000-4-2: Electrostatic discharge immunity test;
d) IEC 61000-4-3: Radiated, radio-frequency, electromagnetic field

immunity test;
e) IEC 61000-4-4: Electrical fast transient/burst immunity test;
f) IEC 61000-4-5: Surge immunity test.
2.4. The soft starter shall be capable of bypass duty. The built-in
electronic bypass devices shall bypass the soft starter when the
motor has reached its full rated speed. External bypass contactor is
NOT accepted.
TS/M/S21/1
MECHANICAL WORKS
2.5. The soft starter shall consists of the following major components:
a) Thyristor
6 silicon control rectifiers (SCR) connected in inverse

parallel to provide 3-phase full wave control
b) Control module
Must be encapsulated to prevent dust and moisture

contamination. This module must be field replaceable
c) Metal oxide varistor
To protect the control against electrical transients and

electrical noise
d) Circuit breaker
Must come with shunt trip for the protection of the

motor when there is a shorted SCR and also operate as
an isolation between the starter and the incoming power
supplies
e) Motor overload
To protect the control and motor from repetitive or

extended starting conditions as well as running overload
conditions
2.6. The control module must provide the following:
a) Over current trip indication.
b) Control power ON indication.
c) Start/Stop indication and contact.
d) End of ramp indication and contact.
e) Provision for tacho generator feedback.
f) Current monitor indication and contact to indicate

running current above the preset value.
g) Shunt trip indication and contact.
h) Motor current display to check ramp up and ramp down

current conditions.
TS/M/S21/2
MECHANICAL WORKS
i) Dip switches/controls to allow the set up of Start, Stop

and Run mode of operations.
2.7. The required adjustments shall be as follows:
a) Start up adjustment
Ramp up time - this mode adjust the time it takes the

motor to reach full voltage/current adjustable from 3 to
30 seconds ramp up initial starting torque - to tun
slowly the instant the start button is pressed
Starting Pulse time - used to provide breakaway torque

for high friction load, adjustable from 0 to 1.5 second at
400 % of full load current.
Current Limit - max current setting to limit in rush
ampere during starting contact
b) Stopping adjustment
Ramp down time - provide deceleration time of 5 to

100 seconds while stopping the motor torque down
advance - in ramp down mode, when the stop button is
pressed, motor speed or voltage will immediately drop to
the set point of TD (0 to 100%). Control will continue
to ramp down to zero speed or voltage, depending on the
RD adjustment
c) Run adjustments
Current monitor set point (CM) - it must have range of at

least up to 550% of the motor FLA to monitor the
running current after the motor reaches the full run
condition. With CM enabled, if the running current
exceeds the CM set point, the current will shut down and
indicate the situation
TS/M/S21/3
MECHANICAL WORKS
2.8. The following protection shall be incorporated with the protection

system of the soft starter and shall automatically shut down when
any fault occurs:
a) Over or under current monitor
b) Phase loss protection
c) Over current protection
d) Over temperature trip
e) Surge voltage trip
f) Shorted SCR trip
TS/M/S21/4
MECHANICAL WORKS
SECTION24 - 100% FRESH AIR HANDLING UNITS (AHU) AND FILTERS

WITH HEAT RECOVERY UNIT
1. General

the air handling units (AHU) and the associated accessories.
1.2 The Air Handling Unit (AHU) shall be factory fabricated, tested and of
efficient design and construction. The AHU shall be of single zone central
station type. The AHU shall be draw-through type and operate with low
noise level. The AHU shall be supplied and installed with reference to the
tender drawings and details as described in the Schedule of Equipment
Data. Each AHU shall consist of but not limited to the following
components:
a) casing made of frameless modular sandwiched panels or

prefabricated modular sandwiched panels with rigid extruded
aluminium frame (complete with insulation);
b) fan assembly consist of fan wheel directly coupled to the motor .
c) coil section with cooling coil of copper tubes and aluminium fins;
d) filter section with filter housing and air filters;
e) HEPA filter section
f) insulated grade 304 stainless steel drain pans;
g) removable panels and access door for servicing;
h) mixing chamber (if shown in drawings) for filtered fresh air and
return air; and
i) vibration-isolating bases, vibration isolator and other accessories

necessary for operation.
j) Section for UV-C Emitter light
k) Section for Air purification ionization system
1.3 The AHUs and accessories shall be of compact design and construction and
so selected to meet the space and height constraints.
1.4 For AHUs in specified areas as indicated in the tender drawings, spare
motors shall be installed ready for operation in an emergency.
TS/M/S24/1
MECHANICAL WORKS
1.5 Air Handling Units shall preferably with highest energy efficiency and
comply to BCA green mark requirement in kW/RT and W/CMH.
Piezometer ring shall be installed for the flow rate measurement. Please
refer to the section on technical specification for piezometer ring airflow
measurement system. Selection shall base on total efficiency include starter
drive.
1.6 One factory acceptance test shall be provided. The test covers one typical
unit. The test content shall consist of but not limited to the followings:
a) Casing strength test
b) Casing air leakage test
c) Vibration test
2. AHU Casing
2.1 It shall be formed by standard set of sandwiched panels. All panels shall be
easily removed for the inspection and servicing of internal component such
as fan assembly and cooling coil.
2.2 The sandwiched panel shall be double-sided skin type with insulating foam
being totally encased by high grade galvanised sheets of at least 1.0 mm.
No welding shall be required during site assembly.
2.3 Besides the cooling coil and fan assembly, the air passage of the AHU shall
be free of support to ensure smooth airflow. All exposed sheet metal edges
shall be filed or concealed as much as possible.
2.4 The external surface of the panels shall be powder painting to provide
resistance to atmospheric ageing and ultra violet light. The internal surface
of the panels shall be epoxy painting to provide resistance to chemical.
Minimum thickness of paint should be 60µm. The internal and external
surfaces of the panels shall be smooth to reduce the possibility of bacteria
growth and dust accumulation. All joints and mating surfaces shall be air
tight and insulated throughout to prevent the forming of cold bridge.
2.5 The panel shall provide high noise damping characteristic of 32 dB

reductions. The insulation of the panels shall be injected polyurethane with
thermal conductivity (k value) of no more than 0.02 W/(m/K). The minimal
thickness and density of the insulation shall be 60 mm and 40 kg/cu.m for
both indoor and outdoor (weatherproof) unit. The waterproof unit shall be
completed with a pitch roof.
TS/M/S24/2
MECHANICAL WORKS
2.6 The overall casing shall comply with the following criteria in accordance
with EN1866 and EUROVENT certified test report should be submitted:
a) Casing strength – Class 2A, casing deflection less than 4mm/m at
1500 Pa and no permanent deflection at 2500 Pa
b) Casing air leakage under -400 Pa – Class B
c) Casing air leakage under +700 Pa – Class B
d) Filter frame bypass leakage – Class F9, i.e. less than 0.5% at 400 Pa
e) Overall thermal transmittance – Class T1
f) Thermal bridging factor – Class TB1
3. Fan Assembly
3.1 General
The entire fan assembly shall be mounted on a steel structure with vibration
isolating base and housed within the casing of an AHU. The minimal
deflection for the spring of the vibration isolating base shall be 50 mm.
Mechanical power transmission from the motor to the fan shall be direct
driven by VSD. Two access panel or doors complete with approved gaskets
& Nylon handles, shall be provided for easy maintenance and servicing of
the fan assembly & coil. Each access door shall have a minimum of 900
mm (height) x 570 mm (width). Compression type of door handles that
made of Nylon PA6 material; the screw is being concealed completely in
the door handle without exposing it to the outside. The handle will be able
to hold the door to the door panel firmly to prevent air leakage
TS/M/S24/3
MECHANICAL WORKS
3.2 Fans Section
a) Centrifugal Fan
The fan shall be of forward or backward curved (aerofoil) types as

specified on the Schedule of Equipment Technical Data. Fan wheels
and shafts shall be statically balanced prior to assembly and
dynamically balanced as an assembly in the factory at design speed
prior to delivery. Fan shafts shall be selected to operate well below
the first critical speed. Fan wheels and shafts shall be designed for
continuous operation at the maximal rated speed and motor
capacity. All fans shall be selected to operate at air flow and
pressure efficiency of not less than 80%.
All fan housings, shafts and impellers (wheels) shall be from the
same fan manufacturer. Any mix matching of fan components or
modifications by party other than the fan manufacturer shall be
prohibited.
Fan rods shall be made of high grade solid steel supported by self
aligned bearings with an expected life expectancy of 200,000 hours
at designed operating conditions.
Backward curve fans shall be selected to operate stably within the

range of 30% to 110% of the specified air flow rate.
Fans shall be selected to provide high static efficiency but low

sound level and power consumption at specified air flow rate.
Selection of fan shall be subject to S.O.'s approval. The fan
performance shall comply to BS 848, BS EN ISO 5801or DIN
standard while the certification of quality assurance shall comply to
BS EN ISO 9001. Impellers & shaft as an assembly shall comply to
DIN standard
b) Plug Fan
Fans shall be high efficiency backward curve plug fans or

centrifugal fans. The plug fans shall be direct driven with external
variable speed drive. . Motor speeds shall not exceed 1500 rpm or
exceed 50Hz as noted on the Tender Drawings. All fans shall be
selected to operate at air flow and pressure efficiency of not less
than 80%.
TS/M/S24/4
MECHANICAL WORKS
Where dual plug fans are specified, each fan shall provided with
separate variable speed drive Each fan shall be sized to deliver
100% of rated flow rate unless specified otherwise in the Equipment
Schedule. The fan section shall be compartmented to enable
maintenance on one fan without the need to shut down the AHU.
The operating limit of each fan type is designed to meet the

requirement of Class I, II and III limit as defined in AMCA standard
99-2408. Bearing shall have minimum life L10 of 40,000 hours at
maximum rpm and power certified in accordance to Anti-Friction
Bearing Manufacturer Association (AFBMA) standards. The fans
shall be placed in the unit with an even inflow and outflow is
achieved. Distance on the suction side with minimum 0.5 x impeller
diameter from component or walls in axial direction. Fan in radial
flow configurations shall have a minimum 1.5 x impeller diameter
or flow intake device. Fan distance from the pressure side shall be
free running impellers minimum 1 x impeller diameter and other
fans outflow angle minimum α = 45° from components.
c) Axial Fans
Axial fans shall be supplied and fitted, generally as shown on the

Tender Drawings. The fans shall be selected with direct driven
motors giving non-loading characteristics. Motor speeds shall not
exceed 1500 rpm or 50Hz as noted on the Tender Drawings. Fans
shall be balanced and free from vibration and the blades of
adjustable type.
Casings shall be of standard length designed to protect both the

motor and impeller, continuously welded throughout and hot-dipped
galvanised after manufacture. Inspection doors to enable direction
of rotation to be checked shall be provided. Terminal boxes welded
to the casing shall be provided for electrical connection to fan
motor. Lubrication of bearing shall be possible from outside the fan
casing. Impellers shall be of die cast aluminum coated with epoxy
and low frictional losses.
Axial shall designed to meet the requirement of Class I, II and III

limit as defined in AMCA standard. Bearing shall have minimum
life L10 of 40,000 hours at designed operating conditions.
The fan performance shall comply to BS 848, BS EN ISO 5801. All

fans shall be selected to operate at air flow and pressure efficiency
of not less than 80%. Fans shall be selected to provide medium or
high static efficiency as specified but low sound level and power
consumption at specified air flow rate. Selection of fan shall be
subject to S.O.'s approval. The fan performance shall comply to BS
848, BS EN ISO 5801 or DIN standard while the certification of
quality assurance shall comply to BS EN ISO 9001.
TS/M/S24/5
MECHANICAL WORKS
d) Fan Array
For multiple fan assembly, AHU shall provide a redundant fan such
that should a single fan fails, the remaining fans will still deliver
100% of the specified airflow. The complete fan assembly together
with motor and drive shall have an overall efficiency of minimum
not less than85%.
Each fan shall be driven by a separate external variable speed

drives. spacing of fans shall follow fan manufacturer’s instruction to
ensure achievement of highest performance. Low leakage back draft
damper shall be provided for every fan to prevent recirculation
through a non-operational fan.
3.3 Fan Motors
The fan motor shall be totally enclosed fan cooled (TEFC) type with IP65
protection and class F insulation for copper windings. The motor shall be of
4 pole and wound for standard 3 phase electrical supply of 400 V and 50
Hz. Motor frame shall be made of durable aluminum alloy in compliance
with IEC 60034 and BS EN 13195 for squirrel cage motors; for motor up to
30 HP. For Motor above 30 HP; frame shall be made of durable cast iron in
compliance with IEC 60034 and BS 5000 for squirrel cage motor . Fan
shall be directly coupled to the motor and direct driven & control by VSD.
Motor shall be designed to operate with VSD from 10 HZ to 50 HZ. All fan
motor shall comply to IEC 60034-30, energy efficiency shall be class
premium IE3 and above with test standard comply to IEC 60034-2-1or
IEEE 112. No motor starter shall be inside the air stream.
3.4 Cooling Coils
The cooling coil for the AHU shall be suitable for chilled water application.
The coil shall be constructed of copper tubes with mechanically bonded
corrugated aluminum fins to enhance heat transfer. The coil frame shall be
of stainless steel formed to provide structural strength. Suitable provision
shall be made to facilitate adequate draining and cleaning through
removable plugs at both ends of each tube. Each set of coil shall be fitted
with manual air vent at the highest point. No drift eliminator is allowed.
The chilled water temperature between the entering and leaving shall not be
less than 6.5 °C.
The coil shall be fitted with supply and return headers (manifold), made of
copper pipes, to ensure even distribution of chilled water throughout the
coil. All copper to copper joints shall be brazed with copper brazing alloys
or silver solder. Soft solder is strictly prohibited.
TS/M/S24/6
MECHANICAL WORKS
Cooling coil for the 100 % fresh air AHU shall be coated with approved
corrosion resistant material.

No Characteristics Specifications
.
1 Depth of coil min 6 rows
2 Minimum working pressure 1400 kPa
3 Maximum air side face velocity without 2.5 m/sec
moisture carry over
3 Average air side face velocity 1.95 m/sec
4 Fin spacing 10 fins per 25 mm
5 Maximum pressure drop of water at rated 40 kPa
flow
6 Maximum air resistance across coil 250 Pa
4. Drain Pans & Drain Pipes
All drain pans shall be made of grade 304 stainless steel of 1.0 mm. The drain pans
shall be of slope type as per specifications with the primary drain pan being
installed right below the cooling coil while the secondary extends from coil to fan
section. Drain pipes shall be of uPVC laid with sufficient gradient, properly
secured to the floor and terminated into the nearest floor trap.
5. Mixing Chambers
The mixing chambers shall be of adequate sizes to ensure a thorough mixing of

filtered fresh air and return air. The construction, materials and finishing of mixing
chambers shall be identical to that of the AHU casing. The fresh air intake shall be
controlled by motorised dampers.
6. Installation
The installation of air handling units shall strictly adhere to the manufacturer's
recommendation. Each unit shall be installed on the "U" or "C" channel structure
with neoprene isolator on the loaded sides of the structure to reduce the
transmission of vibration. The AHU shall be installed to provide easy access to
components such as fan assembly, coils and air filters for servicing and
maintenance.
TS/M/S24/7
MECHANICAL WORKS
7. Filters
7.1 All AHUs and fresh air intakes and where indicated on the tender drawings
shall be provided with primary and secondary air filters of the type as
specified herein. HEPA filter shall be provided where indicated on the
tender drawings.
7.2 General
a) All AHUs and fresh air intakes and where indicated on the
Drawings shall be provided with air filters of the type as specified
herein.
b) The Sub-Contractor shall provide (minimum) the following filter

changes including all pre-filters & secondary filters:
i) one complete set for initial start up for testing and

commissioning
ii) one complete set after testing and commissioning and before
handover to Employer
iii) one complete set halfway during the Defects Liability Period
iv) one complete set at the end of Defects Liability Period
The Sub-Contractor shall nevertheless replace any filters discovered

to be worn out or clogged during the course of the free servicing and
maintenance period. The filters replaced are not considered as part
of the above mentioned sets.
c) Sample of filters complete with frame shall be submitted to S.O. for

approval.

manufacturer's recommendation and to the satisfaction of the S.O.
Proper access for cleaning, media removal and inspection shall be
provided. Leakage for unfiltered air shall be prevented by air-tight
sealing of the filter holding frames or casings.
e) Air filters shall be of approved make and shall be manufactured to a

fully developed design currently in production and readily available.
f) Air filters shall comply with the requirements of ASHRAE 52-76 or

an approved equivalent standard. Reference shall be made to
ASHRAE 52-76 or to the relevant approved equivalent standard for
definition of terms employed.
TS/M/S24/8
MECHANICAL WORKS

h) The filters shall be installed complete with all accessories and other
minor necessary for their satisfactory installation and performance
whether individually specified or not.
i) All joints shall be sealed with approved non hardening mastic or

neoprene gaskets sandwiches between flange faces.

approval.
k) Pressure gauges or manometers of approved design and with

suitable scale ranges shall be provided and installed to indicate filter
resistance.
be REJECTED. Nominal filter depth shall be 100 mm.
b) The filters, with non-woven synthetic fabric media, shall be listed

by the Underwriter Laboratory as Class 2.


ASHRAE 52-76
3 Initial media resistance at 2.5m/sec approach air <7.1mm w.g. (70
velocity Pa)
4 Final media resistance at 2.5m/sec approach air <25mm w.g. (245
velocity Pa)

away by air flow.
TS/M/S24/9
MECHANICAL WORKS

heavy duty, rigid and high wet strength beverage board. The two
largest surfaces of the cartridge shall be die-cut into mating
unobstructed area for air now. The filter media shall be perfectly
bonded to the internal periphery of the cartridge to prevent air from
bypassing the media.
f) Filter media shall be pleated to produce an effective area of 7 m2 of

media per 1 m2 of filter face area.
be REJECTED. Nominal filter depth shall be no less than 300 mm.
b) The filters, with micro fine glass fibre laminated by synthetic fabric
media, shall be listed by the Underwriter Laboratory as Class 2.


ASHRAE 52-76
velocity (100 Pa)
velocity (245 Pa)

away by air flow.

heavy duty and corrosion resistant materials. The two largest
surfaces of the cartridge shall be die-cut into mating openings with
diagonal supports to achieve more Man 90% of unobstructed area
for airflow the filter media shall be perfectly bonded to the internal
periphery of the cartridge to prevent air from bypassing the media.
f) Filter media shall be pleated to produce an effective area of 10m² of

media per 1m² of filter face area.
TS/M/S24/10
MECHANICAL WORKS
The media be welded wire mesh with 93% free area. The media shall be
sandwiched by to maintain the designed space for each pleat to maximize
dust collection capacity and to avoid the possibility of media oscillation and
media being pulled away.
8.2 Enclosing Frame
The enclosing frame shall made of heavy duty, rigid an high wet strength
beverage board. The frame, with two of its largest surfaces being die-cut
into mating openings with diagonal supports, shall be a square box of about
100 mm depth capable of totally encasing the filter media. The filter media
shall be perfectly bonded to the internal periphery of the frame to prevent
air leak.
8.3 Filter Media
Filter media shall be non-woven synthetic fabric being pleated into no less
than 11 pleats per linear foot and an effective area of 7 sq.ft per 1 sq.ft of
filter face area.
8.4 Filter Housing
All filter housings shall be of rear access or side access. Filter housings
shall be factory fabricated and assembled by the air filter manufacturer. All
filter housing shall be externally insulated to prevent condensation.
The rear access filter housing shall be in modular form with each module
designed to accommodate a standard size pleated filter. Constructed with
minimal gauge 16 galvanised steel, each module shall be equipped with
gaskets and spring fasteners to form perfect seal against air leak. All
infiltration gaps formed by modules are to be sealed perfectly with gasket.
Side access filter housings shall be accessible through filter slots at both
sides of an AHU. The slots shall be sealed by gasketted, gauge 16 access
door with latches. Inside the slot, standard sized, 100 mm deep pleated
filters shall be held by extruded aluminium track free of rivets or self-
tapping screws, which tend to obstruct the sliding of filters.
TS/M/S24/11
MECHANICAL WORKS
9. Air Duct Smoke Detectors (Probe Units)
9.1 All air handling units (AHUs) shall be fitted with dual smoke detectors
(probe units) of approved design and manufacture in the return-air stream
immediately adjacent to the air handling unit.
9.2 The smoke detectors (i.e. probe units) shall be provided for monitoring of
the return air ducts of the AHUs. In the event of alarm from the probe unit,
the related air conditioning equipment (AHU) shall 'shut down'
automatically. Provisions in the form of relays, terminal strips, etc. shall be
provided for each smoke detector to enable each detector to send a signal to
the fire alarm in the event of an emergency condition. The final connection
to the external interfacing device (supplied and installed by others) shall be
by the Sub-Contractor.
9.3 The unit shall allow the application of standard smoke detectors for
monitoring of air streams inside air-conditioning and ventilation ducts
between 1 m/s and 20 m/s.
9.4 The duct smoke detector shall have adjustable sensitivity setting and be
completed with integral power supply unit suitable for 230V, 50 Hz
operation and relay contacts for alarm and trouble condition monitoring and
control.
9.5 All duct smoke detectors shall be furnished with air sampling tubes
extending through the width of the air duct.
9.6 The unit shall deviate a small amount of air from regular to high velocity
air conditioning and/or ventilation ducts into a special chamber, which
contains a smoke detector.
9.7 The unit shall not have to be adjusted to air streams between 1 m/s and 20
m/s.
9.8 The unit shall accommodate a photo-electric light scattering detector,

matching with the built-in base.
9.9 The unit shall be suitable for electric detector testing on site.
9.10 The unit shall be accessible for inspection without opening the unit.
9.11 The unit shall be designed so that all service work can be carried out
without affecting the duct system.
9.12 The unit shall be equipped with a circuit monitoring the presence of the
smoke detector head.
9.13 The alarm indicator shall be clearly visible from outside.
TS/M/S24/12
MECHANICAL WORKS
9.14 The housing shall be made of approved plastic material, shockproof,

vibration-proof and listed.
9.15 The housing of the unit shall contain 4 openings for compression cable
glands. If unused, these openings shall be covered with plugs.
9.16 The air duct detector assembly and its cover shall be joined via a rubber lip
to prevent unwanted passage of air and/or smoke.
9.17 The unit shall connect directly into any standard detector line from the
manufacturer's control unit using four wires for Class "A" wiring.
9.18 The unit shall be equipped with a terminal block with screw less terminals
accepting wires between 0.25 mm2 and 1.5 mm2 (SWG 23 and 15) and
equipped with built-in strain limits.
9.19 The unit shall allow to drive an additional alarm indicator lamp without
additional wiring from the control unit.
9.20 The unit shall be designed for complete sealing of the duct penetrations
necessary for the sampling tubes and for fastening the air duct detector
assembly.
9.21 The unit shall be supplied with a template for duct penetrations and
complete mounting, connection and maintenance guidelines.
9.22 The unit shall be designed so that there is a complete separation between
detection chamber and the compartment containing the affiliated
electronics.
9.23 The unit shall be supplied with the appropriate sampling tubes.
9.24 The electronics compartment of the air duct detector assembly shall provide
ample room for additional circuitry.
9.25 Specifications :
a) Admissible flow speed : 1 to 20 m/s
b) Approval : UL/FF/EN54
c) Ambient temperature : -10 to +60C
d) Relative humidity : max. 93% RH continuous

TS/M/S24/13
MECHANICAL WORKS
10. Variable Speed Drive AHU
All AHU provided with variable speed drive shall be provided with a VSD bypass
controller and starters. This is to allow the AHUs to be operated in a constant
speed mode should the VSD be faulty or under maintenance.
11. Heat Recovery Unit (HRU)
All Heat Recovery Units (HRU) shall be as specified in Section under DX Heat
Recovery Unit ( HRU ) With Hot Water Generating System .
12. Air Heat Exchanger
12.1 The air heat exchanger shall be a sensible heat only plate heat exchanger
with a temperature only as transfer media. It shall reheat the supply air
through the heat exchanging from the outdoor fresh air
12.2 The air heat exchanger efficiency shall be tested in accordance with
Eurovent RS 8/C/001. Air to Air efficiency shall be selected to suit the
required re-heat conditions and to minimise pressure drop.
12.3 The air heat exchanger shall incorporate no moving parts, electrical motor
or serviceable components. It shall be energy efficient.
12.4 Plates shall be fabricated with corrugation pattern increasing turbulence and
heat transfer with creating stagnation points. Flat plate designs are
unacceptable.
12.5 Plate corners shall be sealed with MS Polymer silicone free sealant and
rated for air temperatures up to 60°C.
12.6 Maximum differential pressure to withstand without permanent

deformation shall be greater than 3000 Pa.
12.7 The air heat exchanger shall also be design to use for re-circulating air
handling units for improving the relativity humidity as specified in the
tender specification or drawing
12.8 The air heat exchanger shall be integrated into the air handling units and
form part of the system.
TS/M/S24/14
MECHANICAL WORKS
SECTION 25- DX HEAT RECOVERY UNIT ( DX HRU ) SYSTEM WITH HOT

WATER GENERATION FOR PRECISION TEMPERATURE AND HUMIDITY
CONTROL
This section covers the design, supply, delivery, installation, painting, connection, testing
and commissioning and twelve (12) months free maintenance and warranty for DX
Heating Recovery Unit system with Hot water generation.
The DX HRU with its Programmable Logic Control ( PLC ) and Heat Directly Recovered
from DX Compressor will be able to provide precision control for temperature and
relative humidity the room conditions depending on the USERS requirements and site
conditions.
1.1 General
The 100% Up Air Handling Unit (AHU) air conditioning equipment shall be
equipped with DX HRU supplied manufacturers to provide precision temperature
and relative humidity control as specified in the equipment schedule and the
tender drawings. Each DX HRU shall have the capacity as indicated in the
Schedule of Equipment when operating at the design conditions.
The DX Evaporator Coil shall be located at the fresh air intake of the AHU,
before the Chilled water cooling coil. The DX Coil shall be integral to the AHU
equipment cabinet as shown in tender drawings.
A tube and shell heat exchanger will be used to generate hot water of at least 45
deg C to be pump into the building. The heat will come from the DX HRU
Compressor.
A screw/scroll compressor will compress R513a or R410a or R32a refrigerant

into the refrigeration system.
All fan motor and pumps motor shall comply to IEC 60034-30, energy efficiency
shall be class premium IE3 and above with test standard comply to IEC 60034-2-
1or IEEE 112.
The entire system shall be a tried and tested system and shall have at least 5
successful installations in Singapore. New Custom built systems will not be
acceptable.
1.2 Performance
DX HRU with PLC Controller will provide precision control of hot water
temperature of at least 45 deg C or other higher temperature settings by users and
provide cooling to the fresh air intake within the design conditions.
The DX HRU Compressor must run continuously at all times and only shut down
for maintenance and servicing.
TS/M/25/1
MECHANICAL WORKS
1.3 Construction:
a) DX Coils in the AHU
The DX HRU unit shall comprise DX Coils fabricated from seamless

copper tube and aluminium fins. They shall be suitable for operation up
to 3 m/s face velocity. The coils shall be suitable for a working pressure
of 7 Bar and a test pressure of 10 Bar.
b) Air Cooled HRU Condenser
The HRU Condenser shall be aluminium housing, copper tubes with blue
fin coated aluminium fins. Fans shall be propeller type and must be
industrial grade . Condenser motor shall be permanently lubricated sealed
in ball bearings with internal overload protection. The direct driven
aluminium fan blade and it steel hub assemble shall be protected by a
heavy gauge fan guard.
The evaporator coil for the HRU shall be suitable for refrigerant R513a or
R410a or R32 application. The coil shall be constructed of copper tubes
with mechanically bonded corrugated aluminum fins to enhance heat
transfer. The coil frame shall be of 304 stainless steel formed to provide
structural strength. Suitable provision shall be made to facilitate adequate
draining and cleaning through removable plugs at both ends of each tubes
shall be fitted. The coil shall be fitted with supply and return headers
(manifold), made of copper pipes, to ensure even distribution
of refrigerant throughout the coil. All copper to copper joints shall be
brazed with copper brazing alloys or silver solder. Soft solder is strictly
prohibited.
Evaporator coil shall be coated with approved corrosion resistant material

such as Acrylic Resin.

Characteristics Specifications
Depth of coil min 6 rows,

max 8 rows
Maximum air side face velocity 2.1 m/sec
without moisture carry over
Fin spacing 10 fins per 25mm
Maximum air resistance across coil 20mm w.g.
TS/M/25/2
MECHANICAL WORKS
c) Drain Pans & Drain Pipes
All drain pans shall be made of grade 304 stainless steel of gauge
18. The drain pans shall be of double bottom type as per
specifications with the primary drain pan being installed right
below the cooling coil while the secondary extends from coil to
fan section. Drain pipes shall be of uPVC laid with sufficient
gradient, properly secured to the floor and terminated into the
nearest floor trap.
d) HRC air cooled condenser coil shall be protected with

appropriated chemical treatment against corrosive fumes and
airborne salt.
e) Variable Speed Drive (VSD) shall be installed for each

compressor for capacity control. VSD shall comply to section
under variable speed drive.
f) Tube and Shell Heat Exchanger
Tube and Shell Exchanger must comply to design safety in

accordance to the EC Pressure Equipment Directive 97/23/EC.
Heat Exchanger tubes are made of Copper. Vessel built and
determined as per DIN 44899 with maximum allowable pressure
at refrigerant side at 30 bar and water side at 9 bar. The end cover
must be detachable and permits mechanical cleaning of the pipes.
Heat Exchanger must be factory installed together with the DX

Compressor and Air Cooled Condenser as a complete unit.
g) Semi Hermetic Compressors
Each Refrigerant system shall consist of Semi - Hermetic Screw / scroll

Compressor dynamically balanced, mounted on vibration isolators and
shall be fitted with high & low pressure switches, motor protection,
crankcase heaters and rotolock service valves. The Compressor shall be
fitted with suction gas cooled motors to provide maximum reliability. The
motor must be variable speed drive control.
Safety control shall include low refrigerant pressure cut off with auto reset
and alarm indication, high pressure cut off with manual reset and alarm
indication and motor overload protection
Each refrigerant circuit shall include also a liquid line filter dryer, sight
glass, solenoid valve and externally equalized thermostatic expansion
valve factory connected with refrigeration copper piping.
TS/M/25/3
MECHANICAL WORKS
1.4 Automatic Control
The DX HRU System and Hot Water Temperature monitoring and control
shall be through an integral microprocessor based control system. The
following minimum features shall be included on the display panel.
 Continuous digital display of the supply air temp, relative

humidity, dew point, compressor speed, Evaporator and
Condenser Refrigerant Pressure, Hot Water Supply and Return
Temperature, Suction and Discharge Temperature etc.
 Audio and Visual Alarm on system malfunction ( Low

temperature, high temperature, high RH, fault and simultaneously
display of problems.
 LED’s display for Control Power On, System On, Cooling On,
Common Alarm.
 On/Off Buttons.
 Indications showing No Air flow, High/ Low temperatures and

High/Low Humidity, High/ Low Water Temperatures, High/ Low
Refrigerant Pressures etc .
 Manually Change these SETPOINTS, from the Display Panel or

Control Plant Room through high level interface using modbus
protocol.
 The Algorithm must be Fuzzy Logic Control and have energy

savings feature with fast response time.
A Differential Pressure Flow Switch shall be provided across the fans to

detect/sense the pressure condition across the fan.
1.5 Installation.
This shall be provided for by the AHU manufacturer or other appointed

installer.
Pipe Work and Fitting shall be of copper to BS EN 12735 and the joining
of pipes shall be of capillary joint type for refrigerant piping and BS
12449 for hot water pipe or as approved by the engineer
All Suction Lines shall be insulated using vapour sealed 15 mm thick

closed cell type insulation or approved equivalent and all externally
exposed insulation shall have mechanical protections
TS/M/25/4
MECHANICAL WORKS
1.6 Hot Water Tank
The hot water tank shall be constructed with Fibre Glass Reinforced
(FRP) sandwiched panel with 50 mm thick Polyurethane insulation.
The hot water pumps construction shall be specified under Section 7. The
pump construction shall able to withstand the temperature up to 60 degree
C.
The piping materials shall be of copper piping with closed cell insulation
class “0” comply to fire code requirement.
The copper piping shall be insulated with minimum 25 mm thick closed

cell insulation and covered with aluminum jacketing of 26 gauge.
The closed cell insulation shall comply with the following requirements :
Thermal conductivity : at most 0.036 W/mK at

+20o C to BS 874 Pt 2 1986
Water vapour resistance factor : at least 2500 to ISO 9346
Fire performance : at least Class 0 to BS 476

Pt7 1987
Only manufacturer recommended and approved adhesive shall be used.
All pipes shall be cleaned before application of insulation which shall be

set in a suitable adhesive. The insulation shall be provided with field-
applied or factory-applied vapour-barrier sheet. The jacket shall consist of
lamination of aluminum foils and kraft paper. Field applied vapour-barrier
sheet shall consist of a layer of linkote, and the insulation wrapped with
double sided aluminum foil with minimum of 75 mm overlap and all
joints securely sealed with cover strips and adhesive duct tape to form a
perfect vapour barrier.
1.7 Water Treatment
The hot water and chilled water tank recirculation system shall install
with the necessary water treatment system as specified in the specification
under the Water Treatment.
TS/M/25/5
MECHANICAL WORKS
SECTION 26 - MECHANICAL VENTILATION FANS
1. General
1.1 This section covers the supply, delivery, installation, painting, testing and
commissioning, and twelve (12) months free maintenance and warranty of all
mechanical ventilation fans and associated controls and accessories.
1.2 All fans shall be carefully selected and be entirely suitable for their particular
service, position of fittings and chosen with respect of corrosion,
inflammability or other hazardous application. Low noise fans shall be
selected.
1.3 The fans shall be capable of handling the air quantity necessary for the
specified system performance against the resistance of the system. The
resistance shown on the Schedules are for tendering purposes only and the
Sub-Contractor shall be held responsible for checking the final system
resistance before ordering the equipment.
1.4 Fans shall be balanced and free from vibration. All fans shall have complete
impeller assemblies including drive components, and be statically and
dynamically balanced.
1.5 Performance test of up to 110% normal running speed shall be conducted.

The rotor and pulley shall be further balanced on site to the approval of the
S.O. The rotors shall be selected for quiet operation in accordance with the
relevant British Standard Code. Performance shall be rated in accordance
with the AMCA Standard.
1.6 All the mechanical fan shall meet to the relevant authority requirement
including but not limited to SS553: Code of practice for air-conditioning and
mechanical ventilation in buildings, SS 530 Code of practice for energy
efficiency standard for building services and equipment, ,BCA Green Mark
requirements for the category applicable to the building stipulated and Code
of practice for fire precautions in buildings, Singapore Civil Defence Force,
Fire Safety and Shelter Department.
1.7 Unless specified, fans shall be designed and constructed for continuous
operation.
1.8 All fans shall be fitted with engraved identification and directional labels
giving full details of speed, h.p., pulley and belt sizes and type of grease
required, and mechanically fixed where they can be easily seen and not
subject to potential damage.
TS/M/S26/1
MECHANICAL WORKS
1.9 After manufacture, the casing, impeller shaft and belt guards shall be
thoroughly cleaned and given two coats of anti-corrosive paint or other
approved treatment.
1.10 All fans including motors, electrical wiring, control panels, etc. within the
air-stream of Kitchen Exhaust, Laboratory Exhaust or Car Park Exhaust
System shall be flame-proof types to comply with the requirements of the
latest Local Authorities.
1.11 All fans including motors, electrical wiring, control panels, etc. within the
air-stream of Smoke Control/ Exhaust System shall be able to withstand up
to 250o C to comply with the requirements of the latest Local Authorities.
1.12 All fans including motors, electrical wiring, control panels, etc. serving the
electrical switch rooms, LT and generator rooms shall be flame proof and
explosion proof type to comply with the requirements of the Local latest
Authorities .
1.13 All Fans that serving the toilet shall be ducted and exhaust at low level.
1.14 All fans motor shall be of high efficiency class premium IE3 and above
comply to IEC 60034-30 with test standard comply to IEC 60034-2-1 or
IEEE 112.
2. Centrifugal Fans
2.1 Centrifugal fans shall be supplied and fitted, generally as shown on the
Tender Drawings. Unless otherwise specified or shown on the Drawings the
centrifugal fans shall be double width, double inlet type or single width,
single inlet type and fans handling more than 35,000 CMH shall be of airfoil
backward curved blade and flat blade backward curved may be used for fans
handling 35,000 CMH or less. Fan wheels and housing shall be of
galvanised steel or approved equivalent. All centrifugal fans shall be belt
driven unless otherwise noted on the Schedule.
2.2 All vee-belt drives and shafts shall be fitted with easily removable expanded
and flattened steel guard of 6 mm mesh size and mounted on 14 SWG angle
steel framework. All guards shall have access openings to the shaft ends to
enable tachometer reading to be taken.
2.3 All belt drives shall have approved lock pulleys on both the driver and
driven. Belt sets shall be matched. Belts which have taken a permanent set
through remaining idle shall be rejected.
2.4 Motor speed shall not exceed 1500 rpm or as noted on the Tender
Drawings.
TS/M/S26/2
MECHANICAL WORKS
2.5 The main vibration isolators shall be metal spring, fitted with ribbed
neoprene pads not less than 8 mm thick at the top and bottom of the spring.
The ratio of the spring height to spring width shall be approximately equal
when the spring is deflected under load. Mounting shall be located high
enough or spaced far enough apart to prevent the machine rocking
excessively.
2.6 Mounting shall be easily visible and accessible for inspection and
maintenance. When the mountings are carrying the static load, there shall be
a clearance of not less than 20 mm under the base.
2.7 In the loaded condition, the spring shall be able to maintain a further 50%
increase in load before the spring bottom, in this condition it shall not exceed
the elastic limit of the spring. All springs shall be constructed of best quality
steel properly heat treated.
2.8 Fans shall be selected to provide high static efficiency but low sound level
and power consumption at specified air flow rate. Selection of fan shall be
subject to S.O.'s approval. The fan performance shall comply to BS 848, BS
EN ISO 5801 or DIN standard while the certification of quality assurance
shall comply to BS EN ISO 9001.
2.9 All isolators shall be sized to have the following static deflection when
loaded unless otherwise stated in the Schedules and/or Drawings:
Operating Speed Deflection
1,000 rpm and above 25 mm

500 rpm - 1,000 rpm 40 mm
400 rpm - 500 rpm 40 mm
3. Axial Fans
3.1 Axial fans shall be supplied and fitted, generally as shown on the Tender
Drawings. The fans shall be selected with direct driven motors giving non-
loading characteristics. Motor speeds shall not exceed 1500 rpm or as
noted on the Tender Drawings.
3.2 Fans shall be balanced and free from vibration and the blades of adjustable
type.
3.3 Casings shall be of standard length designed to protect both the motor and
impeller, continuously welded throughout and hot-dipped galvanised after
manufacture. Inspection doors to enable direction of rotation to be checked
shall be provided.
TS/M/S26/3
MECHANICAL WORKS
3.4 Terminal boxes welded to the casing shall be provided for electrical
connection to fan motor.
3.5 Lubrication of bearing shall be possible from outside the fan casing.
3.6 Impellers shall be of die cast aluminum and low frictional losses.
3.7 The fan performance shall comply to BS 848, BS EN ISO 5801. The total fan
efficiency shall not be less than 75%.
3.8 Fans shall be selected to provide medium or high static efficiency as

specified but low sound level and power consumption at specified air flow
rate. Selection of fan shall be subject to S.O.'s approval. The fan performance
shall comply to BS 848, BS EN ISO 5801 or DIN standard while the
certification of quality assurance shall comply to BS EN ISO 9001.
3.9 Sound attenuation shall be selected to suit the required noise level.
3.10 Where fan is used for supply or exhaust cold air, impeller shall be of epoxy
coated to prevent oxidization.
4. Propeller Fans
4.1 Propeller-type ventilation fans manufactured from plastic or other similar

approved materials designed for commercial or domestic uses shall be
supplied and fitted, generally as shown on the Tender Drawings. Fans shall
be window-mounted or wall-mounted to suit the particular installation.
Wall-mounted fans shall be supplied with wall boxes and wall plates suitable
for removal for cleaning, or built-in walls where shown on the Tender
Drawings.
4.2 The fans shall be complete with weatherproof flush fitting exterior grilles,
draught-preventing iris or similar shutters linked to the fan switches and
flush fitting interior grilles.
5. Bifurcated Fans
5.1. Bifurcated fans shall be axial flow type with non-overloading characteristic.
Motor speeds shall not exceed 1500 rpm or as noted on the Tender
Drawings.
5.2. The bifurcated fans shall be suitable for air stream not less than 200⁰C.
5.3. The impeller shall be directly coupled to a motor.
TS/M/S26/4
MECHANICAL WORKS
5.4. The motor shall be enclosed in a protection tunnel to isolate it from the
airstream. The tunnel shall be ventilated by ambient air drawn in by an
auxiliary fan mounted on a shaft extension at the tail end of the motor.
5.5. Fans shall be provided with attachable feet, suitable for horizontal or vertical
mounting, fabricated from mild steel to BS EN 10111. The feet shall be hot
dipped galvanised.
5.6. Fan casing shall be hot dipped galvanised with integral flanges manufactured
from mild steel with factory drilled holes to facilitate connection to duct
work.
5.7. The fan impeller hub shall be machined cast aluminium alloy. The fan blades
shall be aerofoil section, die cast from aluminium alloy. All blades and
impeller hub shall be examined by X-ray before assembly.
5.8. The pitch angles of the fan blades shall be individually adjustable without the
need for special tools.
5.9. Evidence that the impeller has stress levels that are sufficiently low to ensure
a near infinite life when operated at maximum speed within the published fan
performance characteristic shall be submitted if required.
5.10. Fan motors shall be of the totally enclosed, squirrel cage induction,
continuous duty, variable torque type. Motor bearings shall have a L10 life
of at least 20,000 hours when calculated using ISO 281 for rated fan duty.
5.11. Motor insulation shall be at least Class "F", fully tropicalised. Motors shall
have IP 55 protection. All terminal boxes shall have the same level of
protection as the motor.
5.12. Motor performance and rating shall be to BS EN 60034-1.
5.13. Embedded temperature detectors in windings to isolate electrical supply on

excessive temperature rise within the motor. Motor shall be provided with
low-point condensation drain holes of the porous type.
5.14. Noise attenuators acoustic fill shall be provided with lining suitable for use
in grease-laden air.
5.15. Differential pressure sensor shall be fitted across the fan to provide audible
and visual warning of fan failure by means.
5.16. Fan casing shall be provided with removable air tight impeller inspection and
cleaning access door
TS/M/S26/5
MECHANICAL WORKS
6. Protective Coating to Fans
6.1 Where fans are required to handle toxic, corrosive, flammable, explosive
or high temperature gases, the materials and form of construction shall be
selected and suit the particular application.
6.2 Protectively coated fans shall meet with the appropriate requirements to
fans generally and to particular types of fans. The form of protection shall
be as stipulated or recommended by the fan manufacturer where none is
stipulated.
6.3 Where a protective coatings is required for use with corrosive gases, the
coating shall cover all parts of the complete fan, motor and casing
assembly which will be in contact with the corrosive gases. No fan shall
be installed if the protective coating has been damaged in any way.
Impellers shall be of coated steel, stainless steel, aluminium or fire-proof
plastic as indicated.
6.4 Where fans are installed in a potentially explosive atmosphere, the EU

ATEX 100a directive shall be complied.
7. Accessories
7.1. Flexible Connectors
a) Flexible connectors for high temperature fans shall be fabricated

from silicon coated glass fibre fabric. The materials shall
withstand temperatures up to 400°C for 2 hours and be flame
resistant, conforming to BS 476-7.
b) Flexible connectors shall be fitted using double stainless steel

worm drive clips at each end.
7.2. Vibration Isolators
a) The vibration isolators shall be metal spring, fitted with ribbed

neoprene pads not less than 8 mm thick at the top and bottom of
the spring. The ratio of the spring height to spring width shall be
approximately equal when the spring is deflected under load.
Mounting shall be located high enough or spaced far enough apart
to prevent the machine rocking excessively.
b) Mounting shall be easily visible and accessible for inspection and

maintenance. When the mountings are carrying the static load,
there shall be a clearance of not less than 20 mm under the base.
TS/M/S26/6
MECHANICAL WORKS
c) In the loaded condition, the spring shall be able to maintain a

further 50% increase in load before the springs bottom, in this
condition it shall not exceed the elastic limit of the spring. All
springs shall be constructed of best quality steel properly heat
treated.
d) All isolators shall be sized to have the following static deflection

when loaded unless otherwise stated in the Schedules and/or
Drawings:
Operating Speed Deflection
1,000 rpm and above 25 mm
500 rpm - 1,000 rpm 40 mm
400 rpm - 500 rpm 40 mm
8. Installation
8.1. Fans shall be installed in accordance with manufacturer’s

recommendation/instructions.
8.2. Fan guards shall be provided for:
a) All open unprotected intakes to centrifugal fans;
b) Unprotected intakes to and exhausts from axial flow fans;
c) Open unprotected and easily accessible intakes to and exhausts

from propeller fans;
d) V-belt drives;
e) Drive couplings;
f) Elsewhere as indicated and under the workplace safety

requirement.
8.3. Flexible connectors shall be provided for air duct connecting to the inlet
and outlet of fans.
8.4. Galvanised steel or superior materials shall be used for all supports and
fixing accessories and suitable paint shall also be applied.
TS/M/S26/7
MECHANICAL WORKS
8.5. Fans shall be isolated from ductwork and building structure using anti-
vibration isolators and flexible connectors as specified or recommended
by the fan manufacturer.
8.6. For floor mounted arrangement, the fan shall be mounted on hot-dipped
galvanised support with anti-vibration mountings and sit on concrete
plinth.
8.7. For ceiling mounted arrangement, the fan shall sit on anti-vibration
mountings fixed on steel mounting frame supplied and installed by the
Contractor. Threaded suspension rods with lock nuts shall be used for
level adjustment.
TS/M/S26/8
MECHANICAL WORKS
SECTION 27 : CHEMICAL EXHAUST FAN
1 General
chemical exhaust fan and its associated accessories
1.2. The Chemical exhaust fans supplied and installed is of “Centrifugal

Corrosion Resistant” type and shall be capable of delivering the designed
flow rate against all duct losses.
1.3. The fans shall be robust in construction and suitable for continuous duty
operation. It shall be mounted with ease of maintenance and shall be
installed with proper vibration isolators to minimize vibration transmission
ductwork and support structure.
1.4. Fans selected shall be silent and with minimum vibration when running and
suitable for outdoor use.
1.5. The fan speed shall not exceed 1440 rpm.
1.6. Aerodynamic performance of the fan shall be measured according to BS EN

ISO 5801 and fulfilled according to DIN 24166 or equivalent.
1.7. Acoustic level according to DIN 45635 or equivalent.
1.8. Splinter guard around the housing spiral as ( of material PP , PE or

equivalent ) protection shall be provided as standard (excluding sizes 75 mm
to 110 mm owing to their low kinetic energy ratio and housing offering
sufficient protection).
1.9. A standard hub seal shall be incorporated onto the impeller hub to prevent
corrosive “medium” from contacting the shaft.
1.10. Discharge air duct shall design to have plume effect with discharge nozzle
1.11. Air tight damper shall be installed at suction to prevent back flow and
condensation
TS/M/S27/1
MECHANICAL WORKS
2 Laboratory Exhaust Fan Impeller and casing
2.1. Sizes 75 mm to 110 mm
The housing shall be made of self supporting design, made of hardly

inflammable injected Polypropylene PP-FR/PPs (Fire Retardant according to
DIN 4102 B1) for fire safety and suitable for use against corrosive medium
and maximum allowable temperature of 70°C. The impeller shall be made
by means of the injection moulding process. The impeller shall be equipped
with vanes on the back of the impeller. The housing-shaft passage shall be
sealed with a felt-ring (to prevent leakage of corrosive medium) and be able
to be mounted outside or inside. For outside mounting, motor covering
hoods shall be made optionally available.
2.1. Sizes 125 mm to 500 mm
The housing shall be made of self supporting design, made of Polyethylene

for fire safety (PEs/PE-FR Fire retardant according to DIN 4102 B1 )or, on
request , also from other thermoplastic materials and suitable for use against
corrosive medium . Maximum allowable temperature of 60°C for PE
material. Fan housing shall be manufactured from the basic “blast pipe
vertically to the top” position, in steps of 45 degrees to 360 degrees. The
housing shall be fitted with a condensate drain at its deepest point. The
impeller shall be made available in PP, FRP, hybrid plastics, pure carbon
fiber, rubber impregnated steel or stainless steel depending on requirements.
The impeller shall be tested in an over speed test stand above its nominal
rate .Impeller has to be statistically and dynamically balanced according to
Q 6.3 (Q 2.5 as per request) in accordance to VDI 2056. Coated steel or 304
stainless steel stand shall be used to support the fan and the motor in view of
the corrosive environment. The impeller shall be removable without
dismantling the housing. For direct drive, impeller shall be secured on the
motor shaft by means of taper locked brush. For belt driven the impeller
shall be secured on the steel shaft supported in flanged double bearings and
ball bearings. Maximum efficiency shall be 81% at the optimum operating
point. The fan shall be designed in such a way that overloading the motor
over the entire range of the pressure volume flow characteristics is not
possible.
TS/M/S27/2
MECHANICAL WORKS
2.2. Size 560 mm to 1000 mm
The housing shall be made of strong welded design, made of polypropylene

for fire safety (PPs/PP-FR, ) and suitable for use against corrosive medium
and maximum allowable temperature of 70°C. On request fan housing shall
be made in polyethylene (PE), polyvinyl chloride (PVC) and in other
thermoplastic materials. Fan housing shall be manufactured from the basic
“blast pipe vertically to the top” position, in steps of 45 degrees to 360
degrees. Coated steel or 304 stainless steel stand shall be used to support the
fan and the motor in view of the corrosive environment. The impeller shall
be made available in PP, FRP, hybrid plastics, pure carbon fiber, rubber
impregnated steel or stainless steel depending on requirements. The impeller
shall be tested in an over speed test stand above its nominal rate .Impeller
has to be statistically and dynamically balanced according to Q 6.3 (Q 2.5 as
request) in accordance to VDI 2056. The shaft passage on the housing is
brought to a minimum gap by means of a felt ring. Coated steel or 304
stainless steel stand shall be used to support the fan and the motor in view of
the corrosive environment For direct drive, the impeller is floating mounted
on the motor shaft. For belt drive, the impeller’s shaft is secured by roller
bearing or block roller bearing. Maximum efficiency shall be 80% at the
optimum operating point. The fan shall be designed in such a way that
overloading the motor over the entire range of the pressure volume flow
characteristics is not possible.
2.3. Motors
The fan shall be driven by branded motors (in according to IEC-Standard),

generally 400V / 3Φ / 50 Hz induction motors, design B5, type of protection
IP55. All fans shall be Variable Speed Drive (VSD) ready. All fan motor
shall comply to IEC 60034-30, energy efficiency shall be class premium IE3
and above with test standard comply to IEC 60034-2-1or IEEE 112.
TS/M/S27/3
MECHANICAL WORKS
SECTION 28 – VERTICAL HIGH PLUME MECHANICAL VENTILATION

FANS
1. General
1.1 This section covers the supply, delivery, installation, painting, testing
and commissioning, and twelve (12) months free maintenance and
warranty of all vertical high plume mechanical ventilation fans and its
associated components, plenums, controls, supports and accessories.
1.2 Protect the complete fan unit properly during transportation and storage
unit ready for installation. During installation, protect motor, impeller,
nozzles, casing and plenum boxes and other accessories from damages.
1.3 All fans shall be carefully selected and be entirely suitable for their
particular service, position of fittings and chosen with respect of
corrosion, inflammability or other hazardous application.
1.4 The fans shall be capable of handling the air quantity necessary for the
specified system performance against the resistance of the system. The
fan resistances given in the equipment schedules / drawings have been
assumed resistance figures for equipment and are for tendering
purposes. The Sub-Contractor shall be responsible for checking the
final resistance before ordering the equipment. The Sub-Contractor
shall submit fan static pressure calculation for approval.
1.5 In design and purchase of equipment, ensure interchangeability of

equipment parts and sub-assemblies.
1.6 Fans shall be selected with minimum efficiency of 78% or at maximum

efficiency from the available range of fans of the accepted
manufacturer.
1.7 All fans shall be rated and certified by AMCA or approved

internationally recognized standard.
1.8 Flexible connectors used for duct connections to fan unit shall have
temperature rating same as that of the associated fan unit and ductwork
system.
1.9 All accessories such as plenum box, bypass control damper, disconnect
switch, nozzles, flanged, hanger bracket shall be provided by the same
manufacturer.
TS/M/S28/1
MECHANICAL WORKS
1.10 All fans motor shall be of high efficiency class premium IE3 and above
with test standard comply to IEC 60034-2-1or IEEE 112. Fan shall
achieve 100% of design flowrate and pressure at 85% of motor
capacity with 10% spare flowrate capacity up to 95% motor load
excluding service factor.
1.11 High Plume Fan Units shall comply to BCA green mark requirement in
kW/RT and W/CMH. Piezometer ring shall be installed for the flow
rate measurement. Please refer to the section on technical specification
for piezometer ring airflow measurement system. Selection shall base
on total efficiency include starter drive.
2.1 Qualifications of Manufacturer
Furnish fan which are the product of a manufacturer who has proven
experience of manufacturing fans of similar types and duties.
Manufacturer must have similar installations in Singapore.
2.2 Reference Codes and Standard
a) Fans shall have been tested under AMCA 210-85, “Laboratory

Methods of Testing Fans for Rating, or BS EN ISO 5801, "
Fans. Performance testing using standardized airways”, and
shall have been witnessed by an independent agency.
b) Documented aspiration tests shall have been performed in

conjunction with the fan performance test.
c) Sound testing shall be in accordance with AMCA 300.
d) Fans shall be UL and CUL listed per UL 705 safety standard.
e) Fans shall meet the criteria of NFPA-45.
2.3 Fan Quality Control:
a) Fans and all parts thereof shall be capable of satisfactorily

withstanding the effect of all stress and lads under starting,
operating and, where applicable, reversing conditions, for the
installations as shown on drawings. These capabilities shall be
verified by submission of design calculations and basis of
design for all components and the complete fan assembly to the
S.O. for clearance.
TS/M/S28/2
MECHANICAL WORKS
b) Type tests shall be carried out in AMCA-certified testing

facilities for each fan type and size. Tests shall verify fan
performance such as RPM, dilution factor, volume flow rate,
total air resistance, noise level, motor current and shall be
conducted at the design conditions stated on the Schedules
except that air temperature entering fan shall be corrected to 20
Deg C or the specified operating temperature. Manufacturer
shall certify and submit the test record to S.O. Additionally
tests shall conform to the requirements of the latest edition of
AMCA Standard 210 and 260 or equivalent compliance.
c) Sound ratings shall conform with AMCA 300 standard test
code for sound rating of air moving devices.
d) All tests shall be witnessed by S.O.’s representative. The Sub-
contractor shall conduct site test to verify the plume height. The
manufacturer shall submit all required test reports to the S.O.
for approval
e) All fans, plenums assembly and motorized dampers shall be
supplied, installed, tested and commissioned by the
manufacturer’s engineer. Such test shall verify the dilution
and fan performance of hi plume dilution fan as selected, and
shall be witness by consultant engineer and the owner.
3. Technical Submittals
Submit certified technical data and performance ratings including, but not
limited to, the following:
3.1 Complete catalogue and material specification.
3.2 Certified performance curves for each fan shall be plotted over the
entire range from shut-off to free delivery as static pressure in Pascal,
total efficiency in percentages, and operating KW against air flow cmh.
Curves shall rise continuously with decreasing air flow between free
delivery and 15 percent above maximum specified pressure in
accordance with fan schedules.
3.3 Plotted curves or tables of the Octave band sound power level at static
pressure corresponding to specified capacity with decibels (db re 10-12
watt) as ordinate versus octave-band center frequency from 63 Hz to
8000 Hz as abscissa.
3.4 Certificates confirming that the fans are rated and tested in accordance
with relevant standards from AMCA or approved internationally
recognized institution.
TS/M/S28/3
MECHANICAL WORKS
3.5 Factory test reports for fan vibration, dilution, discharge velocity, static
pressure and plume height.
3.6 Dilution effect computer generated calculation.
3.7 Submit manufacturer’s QA/QC program for the entire manufacturing

process, site installation, and testing / commissioning.
3.8 Manufacturing shop drawings and product data sheets including

plenum box, bypass damper control, wiring diagram, filter section and
support details.
3.9 Furnish a certificate of guarantee stating that the fan, mixing plenum,
outlet nozzle, stack extension if any, and all related accessories
specified herein have been pre-tested at the factory and that the curves
supplied as submitted have been de-rated for any and all system effects
created by the accessories.
3.10 Submit a complete list of all spares and accessories as recommended

by the equipment manufacturer for future maintenance. This list shall
be certified by the manufacturer.
3.11 Comprehensive method statement for hoisting and installation of the

fan units.
3.12 Submit copies of installation, operation and maintenance manuals.
4. Product
4.1 In general, the Sub-contractor shall furnish fully factory manufactured

fan units complete with fans, motors, nozzles, plenum boxes,
disconnect switch, isolation and bypass control dampers, actuators, and
accessories.
4.2 Vertical High Plume Mixed-flow Induced Dilution Fan
a) The fan shall be of VERTICAL HIGH PLUME MIXED-FLOW

INDUCED DILUTION TYPE. The impellers shall be mounted
directly to the motor shaft via pulley and tension belt. Motors
shall be isolated from the primary exhaust air stream and shall
be visible and accessible from the fan exterior for inspection
and service without dismantling of fan housing. All fan
discharge nozzle shall install with variable discharge area
capable of maintaining constant discharge velocity at variable
fan volumes for better energy efficient Fan Casing and impeller
shall be coasted with non-corrosive coating and with
temperature of 250oC.
TS/M/S28/4
MECHANICAL WORKS
b) Mixed flow impellers shall consist of combination

axial/backward curved blades and shall be of welded steel
construction. The impellers shall have non-stall and non-
overloading performance characteristics with stable operation at
any point on the fan curves.
c) Fan housing to be aerodynamically designed with high-

efficiency inlet, engineered to reduce incoming air turbulence.
d) Stationary discharge guide vane sections shall be provided to

increase fan efficiencies.
e) Fan dynamic balance not to exceed 0.5mil, peak to peak, at the

blade pass area when operating at fan frequency. Vibration
isolation shall be limited to rubber-in-shear pad type isolators.
f) Fan assemblies shall be designed for mounting on conventional

roof curb without the need for guy wire supports.
g) Discharges nozzles shall make of non combustible and non

corrosive material or any equivalent with passive third central
stacks that are capable of generating aspiration. The discharge
nozzle shall be chemically and UV resistant. A high velocity
discharge nozzle shall be supplied by the same fan
manufacturer designed to efficiently handle an outlet velocity of
up to 35.56 m/sec. Discharge stack caps or hinged covers,
impeding exhaust flow shall not be permitted
h) Steel entrainment windbands shall provide secondary induction

of outside air. Induction shall take place downstream of the fan
impeller and shall not influence BHP or static pressure
requirements. Windbands shall discharge up to 270% of the
design flow rates. The manufacturer shall publish discharge
volumes for all fans at specified primary exhaust flow.
i) A non-ferrous inlet bell shall be provided in order to reduce

sparking in the event of a motor bearing failure.
j) Fans shall be modular construction and capable of being

assembled on the roof.
k) PTFE gaskets shall be provided at all companion flanged joints.
l) Fasteners shall be 316 stainless steel.
m) A bolted access door shall be provided for impeller inspection

on each fan.
TS/M/S28/5
MECHANICAL WORKS
n) Fans and accessories shall have internal drain systems to

prevent rain water from entering building duct system.
o) Electric motors shall be TEFC Mill & Chemical duty IP65 with
a 1.25 service factor and an L-10 bearing life of 200,000 hours.
Motors shall have sealed bearings up through a 256T NEMA
frame. Motors on BS-1 and larger fans shall be C-Face and
foot mounted. Motors shall comply with efficiencies listed in
U.S. Energy Policy Act of 1992, Singapore Standard SS553
and SS530.
p) A NEMA 3R non-fused disconnect switch shall be provided,

mounted and wired to the motor.
q) Coatings-All steel and aluminum surfaces shall be prepared for

coating by blasting or chemical etching. Coating will be Epoxy
(8-10 mils DFT) for protection against weather, chemical
vapors and splashes.
r) Unless otherwise indicated in the equipment schedule, fans

motors shall operate at 400/3/50Hz with nominal speed of
1,440 rpm complete with variable speed drive. The fans shall
have a dilution ratio of at least 200%, and the exit discharge
velocity of at least 40 m/s according to ANSI Z9.5 and National
Fire Protection Association (NFPA) standard. The discharge
shall be at an effective height of not less than 30 meters at a
wind speed of 16KPH wind speed. Fan manufacturer must
submit performance data indicating dilution ratio, exit velocity,
effective stack height and noise vibration. Sub-contractor shall
submit detail calculation on the velocity head loss at plenum
box, air suction and air discharge, , static head loss for entire
system, plume induction head loss include velocity head loss.
Any information that relate to system performance and are not
disclosed will be rejected. Calculation shall base on hot
redundancy and single fan operation
s) Fans shall not weigh more than 2000 kg each. The fans shall be
installed on the roof under the direct on-site supervision of the
fan manufacturer. Fan manufacturer shall provide a qualified
engineer on be on-site to supervise the installation and testing
of the fans.
TS/M/S28/6
MECHANICAL WORKS
t) Accessories
i) Inlet mixing plenums shall be integral part of the fan

and shall be fabricated by the fan manufacturer. Each
plenum shall be sized to support the weight and
performance requirement of the number of fans listed on
the schedule. Multiple fan plenums shall be insulated
double wall construction with structural stiffeners.
Double wall plenums shall have an overall minimum
wall thickness of 1.5”, and the insulation shall have a
minimum R value of 4.34. Outer skin of double wall
plenums shall be coated 12Ga SS304 Stainless steel.
Inner skin shall be uncoated 18Ga SS316 stainless steel.
Single fan plenums shall be of continuously welded,
heavy gauge SS 316 stainless steel construction. For
single thickness plenums, coatings shall be the same as
specified for the fans. All plenums shall be capable of
supporting the fan(s) without guy wires or supports.
The plenums shall include hinged access doors and
safety screens over primary air inlets. The primary air
inlets shall be located on the bottom or side as noted on
construction drawings. Unless otherwise specified,
plenums shall be suitable for mounting on roof curbs.
All plenum shall be sized base on all high plume fan
running in hot redundancy, Losses in the plenum box
shall not be greater than 150 Pa including dynamic
pressure losses.
The plenums shall not weigh more than 2000kg each.

The plenums shall be installed on the roof under the
direct on-site supervision of the fan manufacturer. Fan
manufacturer shall provide a qualified engineer on be
on-site to supervise the installation and testing of the
plenums. Fan manufacturer must provide written
certificate that plenums are manufactured and supplied
by fan manufacturer and not by third party as part of
their submitted package. All plenum box shall be sized
according to all fan running condition.
ii) Stainless safety screens shall be supplied over bottom

primary air inlets.
TS/M/S28/7
MECHANICAL WORKS
iii) Bypass dampers shall be provided with all mixing

plenums for outside air with primary exhaust. Dampers
shall be of the opposed blade low leakage air foil
control dampers with extended shaft for connection to
an operator. The dampers shall be all coated steel
construction. Rain hoods shall be provided with each
damper. The dampers shall be controlled by a (hand
quadrant/20 psi pneumatic/24V electric) operators.
Barometric controlled dampers, adjustable up to 1000
Pa pressure. Rain hood shall be provided with each
damper.
iv) Low leakage isolation dampers shall be constructed of

steel air foil extrusions and epoxy coated to 10mils
DFT. Operators shall be 2 position, spring return and
shall be 20 PSI pneumatic/24V/110V electric unless
variable frequency drives are specified. The electric
operator shall be factory wired via a transformer to the
fan disconnect switch to open when the fan is energized
and close via a spring return when de-energized. When
the fan ships separate from the plenum, all wiring and
conduit shall be factory supplied for easy connection in
the field.
v) A galvanized steel roof curb shall be provided to

support the fans and plenums. The curb shall be
minimum 14 gauge and canted for rigidity in wind
loads. The curb shall include a rigid fiberglass liner and
a wood nailer.
vi) Variable area nozzle shall be capable of auto adjusted to

maintain the plume height and discharge velocity with
its control and monitoring system. Nozzle housing and
adjustable blade to be of stainless steel construction or
other approved non-corrosive heavy gauge materials.
Variable nozzle coating shall be of corrosion resistant
coating that is suitable for the Laboratory fume
concentrate exhaust. Moveable discharge blade to
include adjustable blade seals between the blade body
and nozzle housing. The adjustable discharge blade
pivot points shall utilize sealed bearings that are located
outside of the air stream. The nozzle assembly shall
complete with mounted modulating electrical actuator
to adjust nozzle discharge area. Actuator shall be
24VAC and to be enclosed within a weatherproof cover
TS/M/S28/8
MECHANICAL WORKS
5. Execution
5.1 Handle the fan units with special care to avoid scratching and damage
of the surface coating of the equipment.
5.2 For equipment and appurtenance to the space provided and make
readily serviceable.
5.3 Provide factory plenum boxes, bypass dampers, evases, support

brackets and other accessories for fan units as shown on the
Specification Drawings or otherwise required for a complete and
proper assembly.
5.4 Provide support beams, support legs, platforms, hangers, anchor bolts
and approved vibration isolators for the proper installation of
equipment, plenum box, filter modules and horizontal ducting.
5.5 The main vibration isolators shall be metal spring, fitted with ribbed
neoprene pads not less than 8 mm thick at the top and bottom of the
spring. The ratio of the spring height to spring width shall be
approximately equal when the spring is deflected under load.
Mounting shall be located high enough or spaced far enough apart to
prevent the machine rocking excessively.
5.6 Mounting shall be easily visible and accessible for inspection and
maintenance. When the mountings are carrying the static load, there
shall be a clearance of not less than 20 mm under the base.
5.7 In the loaded condition, the spring shall be able to maintain a further
50% increase in load before the spring bottom, in this condition it shall
not exceed the elastic limit of the spring. All springs shall be
constructed of best quality steel properly heat treated.
5.8 The fan equipment vibration isolation shall be of restrained type steel
springs in series with two layers of 8 mm thick 40 durometer neoprene
waffle pads with 1 mm thick shim of 64 mm minimum total static
deflection. Springs shall be located under a suitable baseframe to S.O’s
approval. There shall be no rigid ties to the structure, all connections
shall be looped or flexible.
5.9 All outdoor horizontal ducting shall have double deflection neoprene in
shear hangers or channel steel frames supports of minimum 6mm total
static deflection. All isolator metal springs and fittings located
outdoors are to be hot dipped galvanized. Galvanized springs are to be
rated with / after galvanizing.
5.10 Make proper ductwork installation as specified in Ductwork section of

the specification.
TS/M/S28/9
MECHANICAL WORKS
5.11 Provide filters as specified in the Filter section of this specification.
5.12 Provide control, power and monitoring interfacing to electrical and

building management systems, where specified.
5.13 Name plates shall be securely attached on each fan and show
manufacturer’s name, serial and model number, date of manufacturer
and country of manufacture and technical details of air flow rate, static
pressure, speed, motor kilowatt, drive and type of grease required.
6. Scrubber Unit for Fume Exhaust
6.1. The scrubber unit shall be made of corrosion- resistance material with
no metal in the air stream and comprises of water supply, recirculation
tank, inlet plenum, outlet plenum, drainage discharge line and
effective for the scrubbing of perchloric acid fume. The scrubber unit
shall be of low water consumption and maximum air pressure drop
should not exceed 450Pa. There shall be no moving part. Contractor
shall submit detail calculation on the system losses to engineer for
approval. There shall be no cost to the employer in case where the fan
external static need to be increased.
6.2. The water supply pipes will supply water into the scrubber chambers
and sump unit assembly. All piping shall be chemical resistance,
assembled, connected and pressure tested at the factory.
6.3. Scrubber inlet plenum will directs the extracted air from the fume hood
up into the scrubber unit for evenly distribute into the scrubbing
chambers. The wash-down system shall comprising mist eliminator,
spray nozzles, solenoid inlet valve and controls built into the inlet
plenum for a complete wash-down of all surfaces is achieved and to
prevent the risk of solids/contamination build-up within the inlet
plenum. The unit must be able to collect particles, gases or acid gases.
The scrubber outlet plenum shall be of removable section to provided
for exhaust of cleaned air into the ducting header system.
TS/M/S28/10
MECHANICAL WORKS
SECTION 29 – WATER DUCT HEATER
1. This section covers the supply, delivery, installation, testing,

commissioning and fifteen (15) months free maintenance and warranty
for all Water Duct Heaters and associated accessories.
1) Hot water coil reheat
a. It shall be capable of handling the heating capacity as

specified in the tender drawing/specifications.
b. The hot water coil shall have high heat exchange

efficiency and shall be available in 1, 2 or 4-row design.
c. The hot water coil air side pressure drop shall not be more
than 35 Pa at the design air flow.
d. The hot water coil shall be constructed of copper tubes

with aluminum fins and tested to a pressure of 30 bar with
no leakages.
e. The maximum operating pressure shall be 12.5 bar and

the maximum allowable water side pressure drop shall not
be more than 10 KPa at the design water flow rate.
f. All coils shall have performance rating no less than ARI

standard
g. The coil frame shall be 304 stainless steel formed to

provide structural strength.
2) Hot water coil connection
a. Hot water coil copper tube connections shall be of

diameter 12 mm, suitable for connection with a quick-
connect flexible hose.
b. The hot water coil shall be connected to the hot water

supply pipe by means of a flexible hoses with quick-
release, push-on type connectors.
c. Flexible hoses shall be minimum 300mm long to allow

for easy removal and insertion of the “slid-in” hot water
coil.
TS/M/S29/1
MECHANICAL WORKS
d. Flexible hose shall be constructed of EPDM core with

braided stainless steel jacket and must be oxygen-tight in
construction.
e. The connector-hose assembly shall be capable of

withstanding a static system operating pressure of not less
than 9 bar (130 psi).
f. 2 way modulating valve shall be provided at each hot

water coil connection to allow flow regulation.
g. The quick-connector shall contain a dual “O” ring a nd

“shark tooth” type seating arrangement that guarantees lea
k proof performance at the operating pressure.
h. A one-piece machined brass fitting with ball valve (or

header nipple) shall be provided at the hot water branch
pipe. The fitting shall be machined to conform to the
connection characteristics of the copper tube on the hot
water coil on one side, and the supply water pipe on the
other.
i. A balancing valve with direct flow measurement read-out

shall be provided at each hot water coil connection to
allow for flow balancing and regulating.
TS/M/S29/2
MECHANICAL WORKS
SECTION 30 - PIPE AND FITTINGS
1. Scope of Work
This section covers the supply, delivery, installation, painting, testing,
commissioning and twelve (12) months free maintenance and warranty for all types
of piping system, valves, strainers, expansion joints, flexible connections, insulation,
gauges, pipe hangers, supports and fittings, etc.
2. General
2.1 All pipes, valves, strainers and fittings to be installed shall be suitable for the
fluid medium, temperature and pressure ranges and other environmental
factors likely to be encountered.
2.2 The Drawings indicate the sizes of pipes and the manner in which the various
systems of piping are to be run. The piping shall be concealed in false
ceilings and ducts. However, where there are no false ceilings, the piping
shall be run at the highest possible level, bearing in mind the minimum space
required for future access and maintenance.
2.3 All work, whether shown on the Drawings or specified, shall be installed in
approved manner to meet structural and architectural conditions and to avoid
interference as far as possible with the work of other trades, all subject to the
approval of the S.O..
2.4 All pipework must be so constructed that the effects of contraction and
expansion will not damage any other work or the pipework itself.
2.5 Special care must be so constructed that the effects of contraction and
expansion will not damage any other work or the pipework itself.
2.6 All pipes and fittings shall be approved manufacture and shall be thoroughly
cleaned before erection and flushed out prior to start-up, removing all scale,
burrs, fins and obstructions. Rusted piping and fittings will be rejected.
2.7 The arrangement of valves and fittings shall be such that the number of joints
is a minimum.
2.8 No pressured horizontal runs of piping shall be graded down in the direction
of flow.
2.9 All chilled water pipework shall be executed in an approved manner,

avoiding as far as possible any interference with the work of other trades.
2.10 Approximate positions in which the pipes are to be run are indicated on the
plans, but the positions shall be revised if necessary when submitting the
shop drawings. The exact positions shall be determined on site. Pipe sizes
where given shall be checked by the Sub-Contractor having regard to the
system offered.
TS/M/S30/1
MECHANICAL WORKS
2.11 Before delivery to site all pipes shall be thoroughly cleaned, deburred and
free from scale, rust etc. Old and damaged pipes shall be rejected, only new
pipes shall be used. No delay of work shall be allowed for any rejected pipes.
On site, all pipes shall be again checked and thoroughly wire brushed, prime
coated and painted prior to installation.
2.12 All chilled water pipes which are run exposed to weather shall be complete
with hyrid plasters or other method by engineer and painted with weather
resistant paint.
3. Pipes
3.1 The type and quality of all pipework used shall comply with the following:
a) Refrigerant pipework shall be copper to BS 659.
b) All Chilled water pipeworks shall be Schedule 40 API 5L seamless

galvanised steel.
c) All Condenser water pipeworks shall be Schedule 40 API, 5L

seamless galvanised steel.
d) Drain pipes and condensate water pipe shall be UPVC.
e) Make-up water pipe shall be heavy duty copper (Table Y) or stainless

steel.
3.2 All chilled water pipes shall be adequately prepared, to the manufacturer's
recommendation before application of insulation.
3.3 All chilled pipe and condenser pipe joints shall be screwed, up to and
including 65 mm nominal bore; for larger sizes, they have to be welded.
Alternatively they can be joined using mechanical coupling joints. After
erection and testing, all chilled water pipework which are site insulated shall
be painted with one coat of black bitumastic primer paint in preparation for
application of insulation. Galvanised steel screwed pipe connection shall be
made using clean cut tapered threads and approved jointing compound and
all burrs shall be remove before screwing. For places where it is not possible
for welded, screwed or flange joints, mechanical coupling joints.
3.4 All stop valves and control valves as shown on the Drawings and otherwise
as necessary shall be provided. All stop and control valves on the water lines
shall be fully tested throughout. Gate valve up to 75 mm pipe size shall be
bronze and the larger size shall be of high quality cast iron. Supply and return
connections to all air handling units shall be fitted with full-way stop valves
and unions to facilitate isolation and/or disconnections. Balancing and
control valves shall be installed where necessary for proper control and
regulation of water distribution. All valves shall be of reputable manufacture.
All drain lines from air handling units and fan coil units shall be provided by
the Sub-Contractor and shall be suitably insulated as specified elsewhere.
TS/M/S30/2
MECHANICAL WORKS
3.5 All high points in the chilled and condenser water lines where air is liable to
be entrained shall be fitted with automatic air vent valves in addition to 6.5
mm brass pet cocks for air bleeding on starting up and servicing. All points
in the system from which drainage is required shall be fitted with brass pet
cocks and hose couplings.
3.6 Mechanical coupling joints shall be suitable for high pressure service when
subjected to the temperature expected to be conveyed within the pipework.
Mechanical couplings shall be of ductile iron conforming to ASTM A-536.
The coupling shall be complete with rubber gaskets, grooved joints and
galvanised bolts and nuts. Grooves on the piping to be joined shall be formed
by proper tools.
4. Pipe and Fitting Materials

4.1 Pipe fitting shall conform to the requirements of the specification as set out
in the following tables.
Service Pipe & Fittings Joining Method
Chilled Water <150mm Schedule 40 API 5L, Screwed for up to 65mm, welded
Grade B, seamless or mech coupling for above
galvanised steel 65mm
Chilled Water >150mm Schedule 40 API 5L, Welding, mech coupling

Grade B, seamless
galvanised steel
Condenser Water <150mm Schedule 40 API 5L, Screwed for up to 65mm, welded
Grade B, seamless or mech coupling for above
galvanised steel 65mm
Condenser Water >150mm Schedule 40 API 5L, Welding, mech coupling

Grade B, seamless
galvanised steel
Drain or Condensate Lines UPVC Chemical bonding; UPVC
Water Pipes Hard Copper Pipe Cast brass wrought copper or

(Table Y) wrought brass
4.2 Where pipes run in parallel, they shall be grouped in steel racks. Fastenings
shall be of approved type. Wooden plugs and ramset fasteners will not be
approved. Anchors shall be provided where necessary to provide reactions
for expansion devices. Anchors shall be to approval, either welded or
clamped securely to the bare pipe.
4.3 Pipes and their supports shall be arranged so that no stresses due to
expansion, contraction, the weight of pipes and their contents, pressure
reaction, or buckling are transmitted to pumps or other equipment. The above
factors shall not produce any likelihood of damages to building structure or
the pipes themselves.
TS/M/S30/3
MECHANICAL WORKS
5. Expansion
Wherever possible expansion and contraction stress and movements shall be reduced
by the inclusion of sufficient bends. Where this is not possible approved expansion
bends or other approved expansion device shall be fitted.
6. Sleeves
6.1 Where pipes pass through walls, floors or any other partitions, the openings
in the walls, floors or any partitions shall be fitted with pipe sleeves. Sleeves
for galvanised steel, black iron or UPVC pipe shall be galvanised pipe, and
sleeves for copper pipe shall be of brass or copper.
6.2 Pipe sleeves fitted in floor shall generally protrude 13 mm above the finished
floor level except in plant rooms and other areas where `wet floors' are
expected, the sleeves shall protrude 50 mm above the finished floor level.
6.3 Pipe sleeves fitted in walls or partitions shall generally protrude 13 mm

above from the finished surface level.
6.4 Sleeves for insulated pipes shall be over-sized to allow the insulation to be
continued through them.
6.5 Gaps between the pipe and pipe sleeves shall be packed with fire rated
material or caulk with fire rated compound.
6.6 Cut edges of the sleeves shall be painted with two (2) layers of zinc chromate
paint.
7. Vibration Movement and Settling
Provision shall be made for vibration, movement and settling by approved means.
Copper piping shall be annealed and/or coiled approved flexible connections, used to
suit application.
8. Drip Trays
Drip trays shall be provided under all cold exposed fittings on which condensation
may occur.
TS/M/S30/4
MECHANICAL WORKS
9. Pipe-Insulation Chilled water Pipe
9.1 All Chilled water pipes shall be Schedule 40 API 5L seamless galvanised
steel pipe.
9.2 Chilled water pipe insulation shall be of the pre-insulated type of

polyurethane foam.
9.3 Pre-insulated pipes shall have the following features:
a) All pre-insulated pipes shall be factory fabricated and factory

insulated. It shall consist of the following three (3) basic components:
A pressure tight jacket
A service pipe
Non-CFC rigid polyurethane foam
b) The service pipe shall be in the centre within the jacket and
polyurethane foam which is machine injected into the annular space
between the jacket and the service pipe.
c) Only joints between factory pre-insulated units, elbow joints, tee

joints and valve boxes are site insulated in situ using the same
materials as the factory produced items. The procedures for on-site
insulation which is recommended by the manufacturer shall be
strictly adhered to.
d) Insulation shall be Non-CFC rigid polyurethane foam machine

injected into annulus between service pipe and casing shall have the
following physical properties:
Density : 48 kg/m3
Thermal Conductivity
of Polyurethane : 0.022 Kcal/mhroc
Service Temperature : +5oC (ambient temperature

35oC)
Compressive Strength : 2.4 kgf/cm2 min
Water Vapour Permeability : 3.7 perm. cm.
Fire Rating : Encased in a non combustible

casing having a fire resistance
of 2 hours and to FSB/BCD's
approval
TS/M/S30/5
MECHANICAL WORKS
Closed Cell Content : 90% min.
Minimum Insulation
Thickness : 40 mm for pipe up to 40 mm diameter
50 mm for pipe up to 65 mm diameter
55 mm for pipe up to 150 mm

diameter.
66 mm for pipe up to 300 mm

diameter
76 mm for pipe above 350 mm

diameter
e) Casing shall be spirally formed internal locked seam galvanised steel

having the spiral folded joints at 135 mm centers and the following
thickness :
Casing size up to
210 mm diameter : 0.5 mm thick (26 gauge)
Casing size 225 mm

diameter and above : 0.6 mm thick (24 gauge)
10. Underground Pre-Insulated Chilled Water Pipe
The technical specification for the underground chilled water piping system shall
be the same as the above mentioned specifications except for the jacketing.
i) The jacketing of the underground chilled water pipe shall be seamless high
density polyethylene (HDPE) manufactured in accordance to M.S. 1058,
1986 based on DIN 8074 and DIN 8075 with following physical properties:
a) Density : 950 kg/m3
b) Thermal Conductivity : 0.4 W/mk
c) Tensile Strength : 18.5 Mpa
d) Corrosion Resistance : Excelent
TS/M/S30/6
MECHANICAL WORKS
ii) HDPE jacket thickness shall be minimum:-
a) Dia. 280 mm : 4.4 mm thick
b) Dia. 355 mm : 5.6 mm thick
c) Dia. 400 mm : 6.3 mm thick
d) Dia. 450 mm : 7.0 mm thick
e) Dia. 500 mm : 7.8 mm thick
f) Dia. 900 mm : 14.1 mm thick
11. Condensate Drain Lines Insulation
All condensate drain lines from the AHUs and FCUs shall be insulated with
minimum 25 mm thick closed cell insulation and covered with aluminum jacketing
of 26 gauge.
The closed cell insulation shall comply with the following requirements :
Thermal conductivity : at most 0.036 W/mK at +20o C to BS

874 Pt 2 1986
Water vapour resistance factor : at least 2500 to ISO 9346
Fire performance : at least Class 0 to BS 476 Pt 7 1987
Only manufacturer recommended and approved adhesive shall be used.
All pipes shall be cleaned before application of insulation which shall be set in a
suitable adhesive. The insulation shall be provided with field-applied or factory-
applied vapour-barrier sheet. The jacket shall consist of lamination of aluminum
foils and kraft paper. Field applied vapour-barrier sheet shall consist of a layer of
linkote, and the insulation wrapped with double sided aluminum foil with minimum
of 75 mm overlap and all joints securely sealed with cover strips and adhesive duct
tape to form a perfect vapour barrier.
TS/M/S30/7
MECHANICAL WORKS
12. Insulation for Flanges, Unions, Valves, Anchors and Fittings
Unless otherwise indicated, all flanges, unions, valves, anchors and fittings shall be
insulated with factory premoulded or prefabricated or field fabricated cements of
insulation of the same material and thickness as the adjoining pipe insulation.
13. Delivery
All pipe shall be factory inspected before delivered to site. Only new pipe shall be
used, old pipe will be rejected.
14. Storage
Piping shall be kept closed against moisture and foreign matter when stored on the
site. All pipe shall be covered and protected from damage. Pipe found to be damaged
will be rejected
15. Cleaning
Piping shall be thoroughly cleaned of all burrs, fins and seals before erection and
section shall be blown through and sealed until the next section is erected. All pipe
to be painted primer coat, base coat and first finishes coat before installation. Final
coat shall be done after all pressure test completed
16. Grading
Piping shall be arranged in a workmanlike manner, true to alignment and grade;

crooked or sagging pipes will not be accepted. Except where otherwise shown on the
Drawings, horizontal condensate shall be graded downwards in the direction of flow.
All fabricating and welding of the pipework shall be carried out at a location at the
site to be mutually agreed with the S.O..
17. Drainage
Where condensation can occur in piping or liquids are entrained in gas flowing in the
pipe, approved methods of drainage shall be used. Pipes shall be graded as specified
and drip pockets shall be provided at all necessary points to prevent carry over.
Liquids in refrigerant gas piping which are entrained in the gas flow shall be drained
through high pressure float valves for discharge piping and by bleed lines for suction
piping. Entrainment may be used unless otherwise specified elsewhere or unless
damage or reduced capacity may occur.
TS/M/S30/8
MECHANICAL WORKS
18. Air Vents
Gas collecting in liquid piping shall be automatically vented at all collecting points.
Cocks shall be provided in cold water and chilled water piping where required and
the discharge from these vents shall be piped via copper pipes of appropriate size to
the nearest waste drain pipe or trap.
19. Supports
19.1 Piping shall be supported by clips, rollers, or hangers which will prevent
buckling at intervals not exceeding:
Size of Pipe Intervals for Steel Intervals for

Heavy and Medium Light Gauge Copper
Gauge Copper
Nominal Vertical Horizontal Vertical Horizontal
(mm) Run (m) Runs (m) Runs (m) Runs (m)
13 2.5 2.0 2.0 1.5
19 3.0 2.5 2.5 2.0
25 3.0 2.5 2.5 2.5
32 3.0 2.5 3.0 2.5
38 3.5 3.0 3.0 2.5
50 3.5 3.0 3.5 3.0
64 4.5 3.0 3.5 3.0
76 4.5 3.5 3.5 3.0
101 4.5 4.0 3.5 3.0
Over 101 6.0 6.0 60 6.0
19.2 Pipe supports shall be in accordance with accepted commercial practice and
shall include approved vibration isolators (see the specification for vibration
isolators).
TS/M/S30/9
MECHANICAL WORKS
19.3 Horizontal pipes shall be hung with rod or bar hangers fixed to hot dipped
galvanised steel straps surrounding the pipe and where pipes run together
with groups, a special composite hanger may be used fabricated out of 50 x
50 x 6.5 mm hot dipped galvanised angle iron with hot dipped galvanised
steel straps around pipes bolted to the angle iron or special purpose made hot
dipped galvanised steel brackets for fixing the pipes to the longitudinal
beams of the building. Single hangers shall be as follows:
Pipe Size Rod Hanger Diameter Strap/Clip Dimensions
Up to 40 mm 8 mm (5/16") 25 mm x 1.6 mm (thick)
50 to 65 mm 10 mm (7/16") 32 mm x 3.0 mm (thick)
75 to 150 mm 13 mm (1/2") 40 mm x 5.0 mm (thick)
Over 150 mm to BS 3974 to BS 3974
19.4 All vertical pipes shall be supported by adjustable wrought iron or factory
made bronze clamps securely bolted to m.s. tails which are firmly cemented
into the concrete or masonry structure of the building.
19.5 For vertical pipes, supporting brackets shall be at intervals of not greater than
the building increments and the first support shall not be further than 600
mm from the supply mains.
19.6 Pipe hangers shall be placed not more than 600 mm from each change of
direction where possible.
19.7 The Sub-Contractor shall supply full details of the pipe runs and obtain prior
approval before carrying out the installation.
20. Permanent Pipe Joints
20.1 Where possible, joints in black steel pipe shall be welded. Where flanges
must be used, they may be tack welded on site but all other welding of the
flange to the pipe shall be carried out with the pipe joint dismantled.
20.2 For galvanised steel pipe up to 50 mm nominal, approved type screwed

fittings shall be used conforming with the requirements or the appropriate
BSS and screwed to the pipe in the manner specified. Pipes having nominal
diameters greater than 50 mm shall have screwed flanged joints. Pipes buried
underground shall also have approved type screwed fitting. Long screws or
barrel nipples shall not be used.
20.3 For places where it is not possible for welded, screwed or flange joints,
mechanical coupling joints.
TS/M/S30/10
MECHANICAL WORKS
21. Copper Pipe
Screwed - All duties
Brazed Joints - Ditto
Capillary Fitting - Ditto
Flare Fitting - i) Less than 19.0 mm nominal, all duties except

where vibration occur.
ii) Larger pipes only if permission in writing is

obtained. Permission will not be given for
refrigerant or where vibration occur.
Joints for condensate pipe shall be screwed tight. Long screws for barrel nipples
shall not be used.
The type of joints for refrigerant pipes shall be brazed joints or capillary fittings
except when it is the final connection :
21.1 The type of alloy and flux used shall be as recommended by the
manufacturer for the duty involved. 15% silver brazing alloy (phosphorous
deoxidized) shall be used for refrigerant piping. Where vibration occurs, soft
solder will not be acceptable in such case. A minimum of flux solder and
heat shall be employed to minimise contamination, distortion, etc.
21.2 Capillary fitting shall be close fitting type and tubing shall be to suitable
tolerance on external diameter to make the joint mechanical rigid without
solder, the solder being used as a seal only. Capillary fittings shall be solid
copper alloy.
21.3 Brazed joints shall only be carried out by skilled tradesmen. Particular
attention will be given to cleanliness for refrigerant, etc. A minimum of heat,
flux and brazing alloy shall be employed.
21.4 During any hot work, nitrogen gas shall be passed through the pipes which
are being worked on. This is to prevent oxidation on the inside of the pipes.
This process is called nitrogen replacement and shall be strictly adhered to.
When flare fittings is used, the pipe shall be fully annealed at the flare and shall seal
without being strained.
TS/M/S30/11
MECHANICAL WORKS
22. Bends
Where possible, bends shall be formed by means of straight pipes bent to shape. The
radius of bends shall be not less than those prescribed in the appropriate British
Standard for the use. The bending of pipes shall be carried out in an approved
manner, and care shall be taken to prevent mal-formation or damage to the structure
of the materials. However, bend fitting shall be used for refrigerant piping unless the
tube can be bent without contaminating the interior of the pipe with sand, metal, etc.
Except where space limitations prevent their use, long radius bends shall be provided
throughout. Approval for short radius bends or elbows shall be obtained in each case.
23. Valves, Locks, Strainers

23.1 Valve flanges shall be in accordance with the B.S. Tables as specified for
their respective service pipework. The nominal bore of any valve shall not
be less than the bore of the pipe to which it is fitted.
All valves, cocks, etc. shall be tested to 1.5 times the working pressure
whichever is larger. The working pressure of the system 225 psig (1550
KPa)
(a) Pressure rating : 16 bar or 1.5times working pressure

whichever is greater
(b) Butterfly valve : BS 5155 PN16
(c) Gate valve (Bronze) : BS 5154 PN16 (50mm dia. and below)
(d) Gate valve (cast iron) : BS 5150 PN16 (65mm dia. and above,
non-rising stem)
(e) Check valve (bronze) : BS 5154 PN16 (50mm dia, and below)
(f) Check valve (cast : BS 5153 PN16 (65mm dia. and above)
iron)
(g) Y-Strainer (bronze) : ANSI class 150 (50mm dia. And below)
(h) Y-Strainer (cast iron) : BS 4504 PN16 (65mm dia. and above)
23.2 Valve spindles shall be adequately lubricated with graphite, and all glands
shall be freshly packed before installation. All valves in main plant rooms
shall be of the external spindle type. All valves shall be fitted with hand-
wheels. Normally open valves shall have the handwheel painted green.
Normally shut valves shall have the handwheel painted red. Where valves are
located above 2 m above the floor level or in an inaccessible location they
shall be operated by chain mechanism. All valves above 300 diameter shall
be fitted with gear operated mechanism for opened/closed of valve.
23.3 Where possible all valves supplied and fitted shall be of the same approved
manufacture. Control valves shall be supplied only by the manufacturer of
control equipment.
TS/M/S30/12
MECHANICAL WORKS
23.4 All valves, cocks, etc. for water or other services shall comply to the
requirements of the Water Department.
23.5 Valves up to an including 65 mm diameter shall be of bronze with female

screwed connections where fitted to ferrous pipe. Valves in ferrous piping
over 65 mm diameter shall have cast iron bodies and shall have flange
connections. Valves for copper pipes shall be of brass and shall have
compression type connections for a size up to and including 40 mm. The
valves shall be of the full-way, split wedge disc pattern with non-rising
spindles of high tensile steel, fitted with detachable cast iron handwheel.
23.6 Drain cocks shall be provided as necessary to ensure that all sections of the
pipework and plant can be effectively drained. The sizes of drain cocks shall
be as follows:
a) Tanks, Plant and Pipes above 150 mm diameter not less than 25 mm
diameter.
b) Pipes 75 mm to 125 mm diameter ......6 mm
c) Pipes up to 65 mm diameter ...... 6 mm
23.7 Drain cocks of 13 mm diameter shall be complete with hose unions for
draining down.
23.8 Relief and safety valves where fitted to pipework shall be of the "Enclosed
Spring Loaded" gunmetal type with outlet pipes terminating 150 mm above
floor level.
23.9 Check valves shall be of the spring-loaded non-slamming type. These shall
be of gunmetal and female screwed connection for sizes up to and including
80 mm diameter. For sizes 100 mm and above they shall be of the flange cast
iron type with bronze discs.
23.10 Balancing valves where required shall be bronze or steel lubricated plug
valves with lever handle adjustable memory stops, drip tight. It shall be
screwed end for 50 mm and below and flange for above 50 mm. Balancing
valves shall have taps for flow measurements connection. The Sub-
Contractor shall allow and provide portable flow measuring apparatus
complete with carrying case, pressure gauge, 3 way valve, hoses and
connections. All balancing valves shall have their final setting position
marked on an approved plate affixed to the body of the valve. The indicator
plate shall be embossed with words such as "OPEN", "1/2" and "SHUT"
positions.
23.11 Butterfly valves shall be completed with handwheel and of the resilient
valve seat type. It shall be factory tested to at least 110% of its drop-tight
rating. It shall have standardized top plates and mounting.
TS/M/S30/13
MECHANICAL WORKS
23.12 Motorized valves where located outdoor shall be of weatherproof type to IP

66D Standard. Where located indoor, the valves shall be dustproof. The
valve's actuator shall consist of a permanent split capacitor, reversible type
electric motor which drives a compound epicyclic gear. The electrical
actuator shall have visual, mechanical indication, showing output shaft and
valve position. The actuator shall have a self-locking gear train which is
permanently lubricated at the factory. The motor shall be fitted with thermal
overload protection. The actuators shall have an integral self-locking manual
override that shall be permanently engaged.
23.13 All ball float valves shall be supplied and fitted complete with back-nuts,
ball float and arm. Ball floats may be of soldered copper or brass or polytene
P.V.C. They shall be of the low pressure type generally and comply with B.S.
1212 : 1957.
23.14 Strainers shall be the `Y' type complete with removable monel metal strainer
screen not greater than 56 mesh. Strainers up to and including 80 mm
diameter shall be of the screwed brass type. Sizes 100 mm diameter and
above shall be of the cast iron type and flange. All strainers shall be fitted
with integral ball valves for draining.
23.15 Where specified, suction diffusers of ductile or steel body and rated to 300
psi shall be installed. The basket strainer shall be stainless steel. Each suction
diffuser shall be provided with a start-up prefilter which shall be replaced
with the final filter/strainer after the commissioning of the air conditioning
system. Outlet ports shall be provided for pressures, temperature or drain
connections.
23.16 The Sub-Contractor is required to select these valves in relation to the

velocity of the water in the pipe. In all cases the valve is required to operate
silently on reversal of water flow.
24. Test Plugs
Test plugs shall be installed as shown on Tender Drawings as well as near to all BAS
sensors location. The test plug is to provide a self sealing access point to the pipes so
that pressure and temperature measurements may be made within the pipe. The Sub-
Contractor shall provide at no additional cost four (4) numbers of adaptors and ten
(10) numbers of test plugs to the University for spare and one set of test kit.
25. Pressure Gauges
Pressure gauges shall be of the steel cased type. They shall be designed for test plug
mounting and be calibrated in m bar and kPa. All pressure gauges shall be of the
Bourdon tube type and selected for normal operating point to be at mid-point of the
scale. All pressure gauges shall be provided with suitable gauge cocks and snubbers
to prevent vibration of the needles. The Sub-Contractor shall provide at no additional
cost two (2) numbers to pressure gauges suitable for test plug mounting to the
University.
TS/M/S30/14
MECHANICAL WORKS
26. Thermometer
Thermometers shall be of steel cased industrial heavy duty type. The thermometers
shall be designed for test plug mounting. Calibration shall be Centigrade. The range
shall be suitable for the temperature service and the smallest division shall be ½oC.
Thermometers used in conjunction with chilled water pipework shall be rejected if
condensation should occur at the glass face plate. The Sub-Contractor shall provide
at no additional cost two (2) numbers of thermometer suitable for test plug mounting
to the University.
27. Anti-Vibration Coupling
Piping connections to all pumps, refrigerant condensers, evaporators, air handling

apparatus and all equipment shall be by means of stainless steel flexible connector
unless otherwise shown on Drawings. The fittings shall be bolted onto the pipe lines
using flanges for 50 mm diameter and larger; for smaller than 50 mm diameter,
connections shall be by means of high pressure hose clips and sealed with rubber
plastic. Approved cables shall be provided for fittings of 50 mm diameter and larger
to limit expansion. Where shown on the Drawings, standard "Victaulic" couplings or
approved equivalent shall be used.
28. uPVC Pipe
28.1 Unplasticised PVC (uPVC) pipework shall be to S.S. 141 and installed
complete with standard moulded fittings. Tubing and fittings shall be
submitted to the S.O. for approval.
28.2 The uPVC pipe shall be odourless, shall not taint and shall be suitable for the
service and duty specified. The uPVC pipe shall be resistant to all external
and internal corrosion and shall not be subjected to attack by insects and
rodents. The pipe material shall be suitable for the thermal insulating
materials and vapour sealing compounds specified elsewhere in the
Specification.
28.3 Pipe runs shall be fabricated using cemented sockets, bushes, bends, elbows
and tees but flange or screwed joints shall be used at connection to plant
items and valves. Sufficient additional flange joints shall be provided to
facilitate maintenance and dismantling as required by the S.O..
28.4 Generally for pipe fixing, particular care and attention shall be paid to the
greater degree of expansion and contraction of uPVC pipe in comparison
with that of metal pipes. Hangers or support spacing shall comply with the
manufacturer's recommendations but in any case shall not exceed the
following:
Up to and including 40mm bore 1 m apart

50 mm bore to 80 mm bore 1.5 m apart
100 mm bore to 150 mm bore 2 m apart
TS/M/S30/15
MECHANICAL WORKS
28.5 Valves, cocks, etc. for uPVC pipe systems shall be as specified in earlier
clauses. uPVC pipes shall be flange connected to metal valves and metal
system; screwed connections will not be accepted but composite unions or
special adopters may be used subject to approval by the S.O..
29. Earthing of Riser Pipes
29.1 Earthing bosses shall be provided at the top and for bottom of each
condenser water pipe risers and earth to the respective pumpset electrical
earthing system.
29.2 Earthing bosses shall be of the same material as the pipe and shall be welded
to the pipes in an accessible and approved location. Final connection to the
earth bar provided by the Electrical Sub-Contractor shall be by the A/C &
M/V Sub-Contractor. Bosses shall be 50 mm diameter with 100 mm
diameter clear hole and 7 mm deep.
30. Testing
30.1 General
a) All piping and fittings used shall have been tested in accordance with
the relevant BS code or specification. In addition, the pipe pressure
testing shall be done during or after the erection of the piping system
and before pipes are lagged or covered over.
b) The S.O. shall be notified in writing at least 48 hours before the test
of the date at which the test will take place and test shall be carried
out in the presence of the S.O.. Except for refrigerant piping, the
method of test shall be to pump the system to the required test
pressure which shall be maintained with all valves shut - for a period
of 24 hours or for such time as is necessary to carefully inspect all
joints and valves, whichever is the longer. When a gas is used for
testing, all joints shall be inspected after application of soapy work.
In addition, piping shall be tested at working pressure during
operation of the system through several cycles of temperature
pressure and varying conditions of operation until the S.O. is
satisfied that the piping will remain tight, sound and true to line and
not damage itself or other structure.
30.2 Water Sample test
All the installed water pipe circuit shall be flushed and water sampling test
passed before put into operation. Water sample shall be sent to SAC-
SINGLAS accredited laboratory for analysis. Contractor shall extend the
report to SO for approval before the system is in operation
TS/M/S30/16
MECHANICAL WORKS
30.3 Refrigerant Piping
Piping shall be tested according to manufacturer's recommendations.
30.4 Water Piping
All water pipes shall be hydrostatically tested to 1.5 times the working
pressure or 150 psi whichever is greater. Pressure shall not show a drop of
more than 1% in 24 hours.
31. Identification of Underground Services
Upon completion of the underground pipe laying, there shall be a concrete slab
embossed with " Dia.xxx CHILLED WATER (S) PIPE " , " Dia.xxx CHILLED
WATER (R) PIPE " , Depth and Direction for Newater pipe immediate above the
laid pipes before final back filling and proper identification tag with engraved
words mounted on RC block of diameter 150mm for the particular underground
services that being installed. All the engraved tag, location shall submit for
Engineer approval prior to delivery. Marker shall install at every 20m interval straight
length, turning and Tee-off
CHWS PIPE CHWR PIPE

1200 mm Depth 1200 mm Depth
CHWS PIPE CHWR PIPE

Sample of the Identification Tag for Chilled Water Pipe
TS/M/S30/17
MECHANICAL WORKS
NEWATER
NEWATER PIPE PIPE
NEWATER PIPE
1200 mm Depth
Sample of the Identification Tag for Newater Pipe
TS/M/S30/18
MECHANICAL WORKS
SECTION 31 - CHILLED WATER EXPANSION TANKS
1. General

commissioning and twelve (12) months free maintenance and warranty
the chilled water expansion tanks.
1.2 The Water Service Installation shall be executed in accordance with the
Public Utilities Board (Water Supply) Regulations of the Public Utilities
Act as well as the latest Code of Practice for Water Services, SS CP 636
and PUB Stipulation of Standards & Requirements for Water Fittings for
Use in Potable Water Service Installations.
1.3 The Sub-Contractor shall supply and install the chilled water expansion
tanks on suitable supports where shown on the Tender Drawings. The
tanks shall be constructed of Glass fibre Reinforced Plastics (GRP)
conforming to latest SS245 : Specification for glass reinforced polyester
sectional water tanks. The brand must be approved by the PUB.
1.4 All the water fitting, water storage tank or any materials used shall be
supported by a valid, completed full test reports.
1.5 All the water fitting, water storage tank or any materials used shall
comply to the latest test authority requirement and Singapore standard.
Test report shall submitted to SO, Engineer and Employer for records.
1.6 The test report that issued by a testing laboratory shall be accredited by
Singapore Accreditation Council or its Mutual Recognition Arrangement
partners.. All the test reports must bear the SAC--SINGLAS logo or logo
of the International Laboratory Accreditation Cooperation Mutual
Recognition Arrangement,( ILAC-MRA), If the report does not bear the
SAC-SINGLAS and ILAC-MRA logo, the submitted materials will be
rejected
2. Tank Construction
The tank shall be constructed in such a way that it can be opened for checking.
2.1 The tanks shall be externally insulated with 50 mm thickness 32 kg/cu. m

density minimum fibre-glass and sheathed with 20 gauge aluminum sheet.
2.2 Each tank shall have a suitable ball float valve, overflow, drain and outlet
connections. The ball valves shall be fitted at approximately the two-
thirds tank level with the ball float adjusted to close the valve at half tank
level, and to reset at bottom of tank when empty. A water level gauge
complete with gauge cocks, blow-off cocks and glass shall be fitted to the
side of the tank.
TS/M/S31/1
MECHANICAL WORKS
2.3 The chilled water pipe connection to the tank shall be insulated as for
chilled water pipes.
2.4 The tanks supporting steel work shall be of hot dipped galvanised iron
angle construction, and painted with a minimum of two coats of corrosion
resistance primers to the S.O.'s approval.
2.5 The Sub-Contractor shall submit P.E. endorsed plans of the expansion
tank supporting steel work for the S.O.'s approval.
3. Make-up Water Line
The Sub-Contractor shall connect the water line from the locations as shown in
the Drawings.
TS/M/S31/2
MECHANICAL WORKS
SECTION 32 – WATER TREATMENT SYSTEM
1. Water Treatment for Cooling Towers, Condenser Water System, Chilled Water
System, Heat Recovery Hot Water & Chilled Water System
1.1 This section covers the design, supply, delivery, installation, painting,
connection, testing and commissioning and twelve (12) months free
maintenance and warranty for side stream filtration system, chemical
treatment system for cooling tower and condenser water system, chilled
water system.
1.2 All treatment system and maintenance regime of cooling tower and
condenser water system shall comply with the latest relevant NEA
guidelines.
1.3 The side stream filtration system shall be installed for each cooling
tower and consist of but not limited to the following:
Components Function Types of Equipment
Scale inhibition To prevent the formation of scale in Approved chemical

system the condenser and cooling tower
water system
Microbial To prevent microbial growth, Approved chemical

inhibition system including bacteria, legionella, algae,
etc.
Water filtration To remove suspended solids from the Centrifugal separator and jet nozzle and
system condenser and cooling tower water pump
basin
Water pumping To transfer condenser and cooling End suction centrifugal pump complete
system tower water from cooling tower with strainer and check valve
through basin the side stream system
and reintroduce to cooling tower
basin
Control system To control, co-ordinate and monitor The designated PLC controller of BAS
operation of various components
within the side stream system
Piping system Promote proper transfer suction, Corrosion resistant pipes and discharge
discharge and agitation of untreated nozzles
and treated condenser and cooling
tower water
Total Dissolved To monitor acceptable TDS level of Insertion conductivity sensor and
Solid (TDS) the condenser and cooling tower remote digital converter compatible to
control system system PLC
pH meter To monitor the pH level of condenser pH sensor compatible to PLC

& cooling tower water
Corrosion and To enable the insertion and removal --

Scale coupon racks of corrosion and scale coupons to
accurately access quality of water
TS/M/S32/1
MECHANICAL WORKS
1.4 All components shall have rotating ball valves and by-pass line (if
necessary) for service and maintenance purposed.
1.5 Should any of the components require operating at a specific pH value

different from the pH value of make-up water, automatic pH adjustment
system shall be installed to monitor the specific pH value of the
condenser and cooling tower water at no additional cost. However,
under no circumstances shall the pH value of the condenser and cooling
tower water be exceeding pH valve of 7 to 9.
1.6 The design of the system shall meet the minimum criteria or above to
meet the Green Mark requirement.
1.7 Scale Inhibition System
a) The system shall include equipment to generate a complex

modulated induction energy waveform for the treatment of the
condenser water and all associated works and accessories for the
complete efficient and effective functioning of the treatment
system.
b) The scale and corrosion inhibition system use in the treatment

shall employ the use of an electrostatic unit which consists of
two main electrostatic components; a signal generator and an
induction coil.
c) A signal generator produces a complex, frequency modulated,

induction energy waveform which causes turbulence in water
molecules and ion exchange in the mineral atoms. This action
changes the shape and size of the calcium carbonate crystals so
that they are unable to adhere to any surface and do not
precipitate out as hard scale.
d) The unit shall have proper frequency filtration to protection the

unit form interfering or being interfered by other equipment in
the building.
1.8 Microbial Inhibition System
The following components shall be considered for the inhibition of

microbial growth in the condenser and cooling tower water system.
TS/M/S32/2
MECHANICAL WORKS
2. This section comprises the design, supply and installation of all materials, plant
and labour for the satisfactory execution of the works listed below:-
2.1. Treatment for the prevention and control of legionella organisms in

cooling towers.
2.2. Automatic Bleed and Feed Control Equipment
The automatic bleed and feed control equipment to be installed in this

Sub-Contract shall comply to be following minimum specifications:-
a) Pressure gauge / flow switch interlock to ensure chemical bleed

and feed only when the system is in operation.
b) Monitors conductivity levels complete with conductivity display

to control feed pump.
c) Automatic corrosion and scale inhibitor feed through an

electronic chemical feed pump.
d) Automatic biocide feed through a separate electronic feed pump

complete with a 24 hour timer.
2.3. The Sub-Contractor shall submit catalogues, detailed drawings and

calculations showing the dosage rate of inhibitor in proportion to the
bleed-off and dosage rate of biocide in proportion to the total water
volume.
2.4. Treatment shall commence as soon as the equipment / system is

commissioned. In addition, the Sub-Contractor shall provide free water
treatment for the equipment / system for a period of twelve (12) months
after the handing-over of equipment / system to the University.
TS/M/S32/3
MECHANICAL WORKS
3. Water Treatment – General
3.1. All technical specifications of proposed chemicals to be used must be

submitted. Trade names will not be accepted.
3.2. All biocides to be used must be approved by an authoritative body.
3.3. The Sub-Contractor shall ensure compatibility of the chemicals used in

the system. The chemicals used shall have no detrimental effect on the
steel and copper piping and other non-metallic materials such as rubber,
etc used in the system.
3.4. The corrosion rate, scale formation, fouling, microbial growth and heat
transfer coefficient in the condenser shall be controlled by the chemical
treatment provided to the standards set out in this specification.
3.5. Test kits for monitoring pH, chloride, alkalinity, hardness, conductivity
(total dissolved solids), bacteria counts and treatment chemical residue
tests, shall be provided.
3.6. The Sub-Contractor shall provide for one (1) year supply of chemicals.
All calculations of dosages shall be provided and chemical supplies for
three (3) month usage shall be delivered and stored at the
air-conditioning plant room every quarterly.
3.7. The Sub-Contractor shall supply and apply adequate / necessary

chemical treatment to the condenser water circuits for proper
conditioning of the water.
3.8. The Sub-Contractor shall allow for the following services as part of the
water treatment:
a) A minimum of monthly service call shall be provided to ensure

that the water treatment is being carried out as planned and all
tests covered below:-
pH
P – M alkalinity
Total dissolved solids
Chloride
Total hardness
Scale and corrosion inhibitor residue test
Chilled water corrosion inhibitor residue test
Total count test
TS/M/S32/4
MECHANICAL WORKS
b) The Sub-Contractor shall in addition allow for the above tests to

be repeated in the Sub-Contractor’s laboratory and witnessed by
University’s representative whenever requested by the Authority.
The Sub-Contractor shall be responsible for collecting the
condenser / chilled water samples for such laboratory analysis.
A report including comments and recommendations shall be
submitted to University within seven (7) working days from the
date of such laboratory analysis.
c) A quarterly test for the corrosion rate of the condenser water

circuits. The Sub-Contractor shall arrange to perform such test
in the presence of the University’s representative.
4. Condenser Water Circuit
4.1. The chemical treatment programme shall cater for a minimum of 6

cycles of concentration. All technical details and tabulations of the
recommended cycles to run and control limits basing on that specific
cycle shall be submitted together with this Tender.
4.2. The scale and corrosion inhibitor used in the treatment shall be specially
formulated to reduce scaling, corrosion rate and fouling in cooling water
circuit. It shall be a special blend of an organic sequestrant, polymeric
dispersant and contain minimum to no heavy metal, non-phosphate,
non-silicate and no chromate. The formulation shall permit deposit free
operation under alkaline condition of pH 7.5 to 9.0 without the need for
adjustment with sulphuric acid.
4.3. The condenser water circuit after being treated with the scale and
corrosion inhibitor shall have a corrosion rate against steel of less than
3 mils per year and against copper of less than 0.5 mils per year, these
corrosion rates shall be established every quarterly. The condenser heat
transfer coefficient of the chiller shall also be maintained above 400
BUT/hr/sq ft/F by the treatment programme. Environmental data of
treated water in addition to the tests specified earlier shall be provided
and shall include pH (7.5 to (9.0), total heavy metal (<10), zinc (>5),
phosphate (0), chromium (0).
4.4. Algae and microbial growth shall be controlled by at least two types of
biocides, an oxidizing and a non-oxidizing type. The microbiocides
used shall eliminate algae formation and control bacteria growth to
below 10,000 counts. Total count test kits shall be provided for this
purpose. The Sub-Contractor shall supply information on the contact
time required and the half lives of the microbiocides used together with
the dosage calculation.
TS/M/S32/5
MECHANICAL WORKS
4.5. An organic anti-foulant shall be provided to control airborne particulate

and heavy soil loading in the condenser water circuit thereby eliminating
the need to drain the condenser water. The condenser water is expected
not to be drained for period of minimum three (3) months under normal
operating conditions.
4.6. The Sub-Contractor shall provide proof of the effective amount of

chemicals required for the treatment programme. This shall be verified
by means of chemical residue test and total count test conducted at the
site. Example of proof of effectiveness of the treatment chemicals could
be by means of extract from the US Patent Office.
5. Chemicals
5.1. Whenever chemical regime is implemented for bacterial, scale and

corrosion controls in lieu of other means, a proper write up for the
regime shall be submitted for approval. The write up shall include but
not be limited to:
a) Automated dosage system and method statement;

b) Regular site visits and interval;
c) Proposed biocide used and its alternate that prevent microbe
immunisation;
d) Minimum discharge quantity allowed into sewage system;
e) Performance index to prove effective treatment.
f) All chemical used shall be provided with MSDS and approved
by local authority.
6. Water Filtration System
The filters shall be of centrifugal filter. The centrifugal filter shall be complete
with automatic flushing and cleaning system complete with jet nozzles.
7. Water Pumping System
7.1. General
The system shall consist of a properly sized centrifugal pump and motor,
adequate grain size strainer and a check valve. The water pumps shall be
of single stage end suction, direct coupled centrifugal pump. The pump
shall be complete with drive motors, mating couplings, air release valves,
volute drain connections, base plates and drain pipe.
TS/M/S32/6
MECHANICAL WORKS
8. Casing, Impeller and Shaft
8.1. Pump casing shall be of volute form and cast iron or cast steel suitable
for the operating pressure and design to provide smooth flow with
gradual changes in velocity.
a) Impeller shall be of bronze and design to give non-overloading

characteristics over a large range of flow variations. Impeller
shall be statically and dynamically balanced.
b) The pump shaft shall be constructed of stainless steel. The

design speed of the pump shall not exceed 1500 rpm unless
otherwise approved by the S.O.
9. Mechanical Seal
9.1. Pump shall be fitted with mechanical seal. Mechanical seal shall be of
self aligning, anti-clogging and self cleaning type.
a) Pump Efficiency
Pump efficiency, when operating at the specified duty, shall be

within 5 percent of the maximum available efficiency of the
particular pump. Prior to installation, the Sub-Contractor is to
submit the pump curve for the proposed pump to the S.O. for
approval.
b) Electric Motor
1) Pump shall be directly driven by a weather proof, totally

enclosed fan cooled, IP55 motor. It shall be of class F
insulation, running at 1450 rpm. Motor shall be wound
for 415 V, 3 phase, 50 Hz supply. Technical data of the
proposed motor is to be submitted together with the
pump curve for approval prior to installation.
2) A hot-dipped galvanised sheet metal housing shall be

provided for motors exposed to weather. The housing
shall be fabricated from G-20 galvanised sheet metal
with ventilation opening covered by wire mesh. It shall
be painted with one coat of primer and two coats of
enamel paint of approved colour.
TS/M/S32/7
MECHANICAL WORKS
c) Baseplate, Concrete Plinth and Installation
a) Pump and motor assembly shall be mounted on the

baseplate, fabricated from "U" or "C" channel steel beam,
the pump sets are to be mounted firmly to the concrete
plinth with neoprene pads and mounting springs.
b) All parts exposed to weather shall be painted with one

coat of primer and two coats of enamel paint of approved
colour.
10. Total Dissolved Solids (TDS) Control System
10.1. The conductivity controller shall be installed in the treatment system to

maintain the conductivity of the recirculation water and control the total
dissolved solid content. When the conductivity of the water rises above
the adjustable set point, the controller will activate the on/off motorised
valve of the centrifugal filter to carry out bleed off.
10.2. Should sand filter be used as the water filtration system, bleed off shall
commence when back wash is required or TDS level has risen beyond
set point.
11. Piping System
11.1. The piping system shall include pipes which form the entire side stream
system to link all the components and extensive multiple suction and
discharge piping network for untreated and treated condenser and
cooling tower water in each cooling tower basin.
11.2. All discharge piping which reintroduces treated water to the condenser
and cooling tower system shall be equipped with nozzles to facilitate
proper agitation and promote well mixed suspended solids in the water
for proper suction.
11.3. The suction and discharge piping shall be designed to cover sections and
corners of cooling towers basin to avoid having stagnant water. All
design shall be subject to approval of the S.O.
11.4. PVC isolation valves shall be installed to enable the isolation of the
entire side stream system from the condenser and cooling tower system.
TS/M/S32/8
MECHANICAL WORKS
12. Control System
12.1 The Sub-Contractor shall include for all necessary electric/electronic

automatic controls for the efficient, safe and economical operation of the
complete water treatment.
12.2 The Sub-Contractor shall be required to draw up the detailed control

diagrams to suit the particular control manufacturer's equipment which
conform to the specifications, and submit copies of the shop drawings
for approval before commencing installation of controls. The drawings
shall show every item of control equipment offered all conduit sizes, etc.
12.3 The system shall be monitored and controlled by the Building

Automation System (BAS).
13. Control Panel and Control System
13.1. The equipment shall be provided with proprietary made control panel of
protection level IP55.
13.2. The control panel shall include but not be limited to the following:
a) ammeter complete with selector switch

b) voltmeter complete with selector switch
c) visual and audible fault/alarm indications
d) electrodes polarity indicator
e) ON/OFF switch
f) conductivity controller
g) contactor complete with overload relay for motor
h) fuses and control wiring
i) PLC compartment and terminal
14. Performance Assessment
14.1 The side stream system shall not in anyway deviate the pH of condenser
and cooling tower water relative to the pH of make-up water by ± pH 0.5
or exceeding the range of pH 7 - 9.
14.2 On a weekly basis, the following data shall be collected to facilitate the
calculation of Langlier and Ryzner Indices.
a) TDS
b) Condenser and cooling tower water temperature
c) Calcium hardness (ppm CaCO3)
d) Total alkalinity (ppm CaCO3)
e) pH
TS/M/S32/9
MECHANICAL WORKS
14.3 All data shall be obtained using easy to follow site test kits
a) On monthly basis unless otherwise stated, sample of condenser

water shall be collected and subject to approved laboratory tests
for the following parameters:
Parameters LIMITS
Total Hardness Less than 300 ppm CaCO3
P - Alkalinity Less than 25 ppm CaCO3
M - Alkalinity Less than 150 ppm CaCO3
Chloride Less than 125 ppm Cl
TDS Less than 1200 ppm

Corrosion (3 Less than 1 mpy for mild steel and less
monthly) than 0.5 mpy for copper
Total Bacteria Less than 10,000 cfu/ml or in
Count (TBC) accordance with the latest NEA
guidelines
Legionalla (3 Non detection or in accordance with the
monthly) latest NEA guidelines
Algae Non present or denatured
pH 7–9
b) In addition, the condenser heat transfer coefficient of the chiller

shall also be maintained above 400 BUT/hr/sq.ft/F by the
treatment programme. Environmental data of treated water in
addition to the tests specified earlier shall be provided and shall
include ph (7.5 to 9.0), total heavy metal (<10), zinc (<5),
phosphate (0), chromium (0).
TS/M/S32/10
MECHANICAL WORKS
15. Chemical Treatment for Chilled Water System
15.1 Chilled Water Circuit
a) The chilled water circuit shall be treated with a corrosion

inhibitor via a bypass feeder which shall be proposed and
installed by the Sub-Contractor. The corrosion inhibitor used
shall be an organic formulation containing no nitrate or chromate.
It shall also contain a polymeric dispersant to keep the chilled
water circuit clean.
b) Bacteria growth shall be monitored on monthly basis and shall

be treated at no extra cost if the monthly water analysis show its
presence.
c) The Sub-Contractor shall provide proof of the effective amount

of inhibitor required for the chilled water circuit, this shall be
verified by means of chemical residue test performed at site.
d) Corrosion coupons shall be installed in the chilled water system

to measure the rate of corrosion.
e) Monthly reports shall be submitted for assessment of treatment

programme. The following parameters shall be reflected in the
reports:
Parameter LIMITS
pH 7-9
Corrosion Less than 1 mpy for mild steel and less
than 0.5 mpy for copper
Bacteria Less than 1000 cfu/ml
Iron Less than 0.2 ppm Fe
Copper Less than 0.2 ppm Cu
TS/M/S32/11
MECHANICAL WORKS
16. Control of Legionella Organisms in Cooling Towers
16.1 The Sub-Contractor shall propose a standard, reliable and efficient

laboratory method for the detection of legionella in condensing water.
The safe limit of concentration should also be defined.
16.2 The water treatment specialist should be responsible for cleaning,

disinfecting, water testing and monitoring the efficiency of the treatment
programme.
16.3 A log book on the cleaning, operating and maintenance programme for
each cooling tower shall be maintained.
17. Servicing and Maintenance
17.1. Monthly reports on the general condition of the water and not limiting to
the pH, TDS, water hardness, Langlier and Ryzner index, ozone output,
algae formation, general cleanliness shall be provided along with
bi-annual reports of proof from independent recognised laboratories that
the water is maintained within satisfactory safe limits against growth of
microbiological bacteria and virus. The Sub-Contractor shall, at his
own cost, provide a tower clean before the expiry of the warranty period.
17.2. Test kits for monitoring pH, chloride, alkalinity, hardness, conductivity
(total dissolved solids), bacteria counts and treatment chemical residue
tests shall be provided as part of this Sub-Contract.
17.3. The Sub-Contractor shall allow for the following services as part of the
water treatment:
A minimum of monthly service call shall be provided to ensure that the

water treatment is being carried out as planned and all tests covered
below:
pH
P - M alkalinity
Total dissolved solids
Chloride
Total hardness
Total count test
TS/M/S32/12
MECHANICAL WORKS
18.1. The following shall be carried out as part of the maintenance and
servicing:
a) Daily
Monitoring (for up to 6 months) the ions level with appropriate

measuring instruments
b) Monthly
Check and clean the filters
Check anodes conditions and clean/ replace if necessary (if

andoe are 75% depleted, andoes shall be replaced).
Testing of water samples (to comply with the latest Code of

Practice for the Control of Legionella Bacteria in
Air-Conditioning Cooling Towers in Singapore )
Check and service control panel and accessories as per servicing

and maintenance schedule
Check and service auxiliary pumping system and accessories as

per servicing and maintenance schedule
c) Quarterly
Check state of anode depletion and replace if 75% depleted
d) Half-yearly
Check and clean system
When the anodes are to be cleaned, it shall follow the recommendations

of the manufacturer.
19. Competent Person
The Sub-Contractor shall use only competent persons trained in copper silver
ionisation water treatment of air-conditioning system for the completion of this
Sub-Contract including attending to the service calls.
TS/M/S32/13
MECHANICAL WORKS
20. Training
20.1. The Sub-Contractor shall provide competent person to conduct free

training to the University maintenance personnel on water analysis, the
use of system, equipment for coupon testing and other testing to
determine the effectiveness of water treatment such as pH value,
alkalinity, chloride, dissolved solids and other chemical reaction.
20.2. All training kits including apparatus, chemical reagents and instruments
shall be provided by the Sub-Contractor without any additional cost.
20.3. Training programme shall be submitted together with this Tender.
TS/M/S32/14
MECHANICAL WORKS
SECTION 33 – RETRACTABLE EXTRACTOR ARM & EXHAUST HOOD
1. General
The section sets out the requirements and covers the supply, delivery,
installation, testing and commissioning and twelve (12) months free
maintenance and warranty of the associated equipment for retractable extractor
arm and exhaust hood complete with all necessary accessories.
2.1 Flow rate of the arms shall be minimum 180 CMH, and the radius of
action of the arms shall be not less than 900mm.
2.2 Total pressure losses including dynamic pressure shall not be greater
than 150 Pa. The retractable extractor arm and exhaust hood shall be
selected to suit the requirement.
2.3 Materials of the arms shall be in polypropylene or aluminium with an

anodised surface and shall be in 3 sections, i.e. socket pipe (vertical
fixed arm), pipe A (middle section) and pipe B (pipe nearest to source
to be extracted) The exhaust arms shall be coupled by shattered proof
polypropylene (PP) articulated joints.
2.4 Each joint shall be easily dismantled by means of finger screws for
maintenance purposes. It shall be complete with an “O” ring which
does not require maintenance. Joint at pipe B shall be complete with an
adjustable PP damper for the purpose of regulating the amount of
pollutants to be extracted. It shall be suitable for connection to PP
hood. Joint at socket pipe shall be complete with an acid proof
threaded sleeves and stainless steel internal spring for easy
maneuvering of the arm.
2.5 Arms shall be connected to columns for ceiling mounting. Columns

shall be white powder coated. Column length to be suited for the site
conditions, length to vary between 250 to 1000mm with side 100mm
diameter opening or top coupling for exhaust connection.
2.6 Exhaust points to be equipped with manual flow damper.
2.7 For mounting of columns where the reinforced concrete height is

beyond three metres in height, appropriate mounting brackets to be
provided for installation.
TS/M/S33/1
MECHANICAL WORKS
2.8 Exhaust hoods shall be of stainless steel 316L. Supplied with Manual
Flow Damper, protective netting and aluminium grease filter (filters to
be easily removed and cleaned).
2.8 The retractable extract arms and exhaust hoods shall be connected to
the exhaust main duct (to be included in this contract) in the ceiling
space. The Sub-Contractor is responsible for the connection.
Retractable extract arms and stainless steel exhaust hoods shall be
approved by the S.O.
TS/M/S33/2
MECHANICAL WORKS
SECTION 42 - AIR-COOLED MULTI-SPLIT VRV UNITS
1. General

of air-cooled multi-split VRV units and associated accessories.
1.2 If the air-cooled multi-split VRV-Split units is designed as standby to

the normal air conditioning unit, then the Sub-contractor shall provide
the DBs, isolator, cabling and the entire interlock control such that the
split/package shall be automatically switched on if the normal air
conditioning unit high temperature or fails
1.3 All the Air-Cooled Multi-Split VRV units shall comply to the latest
Singapore Standard SS 530 with energy efficient and with minimum at
least 5 ticks equivalent.
1.4 The Sub-Contractor shall supply and install, where shown on the
Tender drawings, air-cooled multi-split VRV systems of an approved
type and each complete with indoor units, outdoor unit, with
refrigeration cycle, electrical components, fan speed and thermostatic
control. The units shall be suitable for continuous operation and shall
be constructed as below.
2. System
2.1 The air-conditioning units shall be air-cooled, VRV type, consisting of

one outdoor unit and plural fan coil units, each having capability to
cool the rooms independently.
2.2 The air-cooled multi-split VRV-Split shall comply to ISO 15042:

Multiple split-system air conditioners and air-to-air heat pumps --
Testing and rating for performance.
2.3 The condensing unit shall be equipped with inverter controller,

enabling it to reduce minimum load down to 8% of total, without the
aid of any hot gas bypass system, and without compromising system
efficiency.
2.4 The condensing unit shall be suitable for mix-match connection of

double and multiflow ceiling mounted cassette type, built-in ceiling
type, wall mounted type, ceiling mounted cassette corner type and
floor mounted type indoor units.
TS/M/S42/1
MECHANICAL WORKS
2.5 The refrigerant piping shall be extendable up to 100 m with 50 m level

difference without any oil traps. Refnet piping system with only two
piping runs connected to all the fan coil units, and utilizing Refnet
joints and Refnet headers complete with associated thermal insulation,
shall be installed.
2.6 Both indoor and outdoor units are to be factory assembled, tested and
charged with R32A/R410A refrigerant at the factory.
2.7 The air-cooled VRV system to be supplied and installed by the Sub-
Contractor shall consist of fan coil unit(s); air-cooled condensing unit,
refrigerant pipework with associated fittings, sight-glass and filter
drier, electrical panel and control gear and wiring, including cutting
and making good necessary openings through walls and floors for
pipework and electrical wiring, 100 mm thick concrete plinth or
painted steel mounting brackets approved by the Architect and all other
incidental works and materials necessary to bring the system to good
working order. The control panel shall be constructed of
electrogalvanized steel sheets, baked-painted. The gauge of metal,
panel dimensions and layout design and circuitry, shall be approved by
the Architect. The piping layout indicated in the drawings is indicative
only. The Sub-Contractor shall also be responsible for the optimal
design and layout of the refrigerant piping system, and shall also verify
the sufficiency of the sizes of all riser ducts, openings, etc.
3. Air-Cooled Condensing Unit
3.1 The air-cooled condensing unit shall be a factory assembled unit

housed in a sturdy weather-proof casing constructed from rust-proof
mild steel panels coated with baked enamel finish. The condensing unit
shall be designed to operate safely when connected to multiple fan coil
units which have a combined operating nominal capacity varying from
8% to 130% of nominal compressors capacity. The noise level
corresponding to 50 Hz operation shall not be more than 57 dB(A)
measured horizontally 1m away and 1.5m above ground. The
condensing unit shall have the flexibility to connect the piping circuit
from three places, front, side and bottom of the unit to provide for
greater freedom of layout. The condensing unit shall come equipped
with two numbers of hermetically sealed scroll compressors for units
exceeding 5 HP.
3.2 The condensing unit shall be modular in design and shall allow for side
by side and in a row installation, with minimum spacing of 20mm. It
shall be connectable to a maximum of 16 fan coil units for the 10 HP
series, 13 fan coil units for the 8 HP series and 8 fan coil units for the 5
HP series, subject to a maximum connectable ratio of 130%.
TS/M/S42/2
MECHANICAL WORKS
3.3 The condensing unit shall be automatically addressable through twin

cable multiplex transmission system for inter-unit wiring between
indoor and outdoor units.
3.4 The system shall be easily extendable by the addition of further indoor
units at a later date.
3.5 Condensing unit shall operate and control in accordance with the ir-
conditioning load. The system shall use the “New Linear VRV control
System” which combines inverter control with unloader control for the
smooth control of operation in accordance with load. The inverter
control system shall be able to control the compressor of the 5 HP
series to 13 steps (116 Hz to 30 Hz) and the 8 and 10 HP series to 21
steps (116 Hz to 30 Hz).
3.6 The condensing unit shall be able to operate in outdoor temperature as

high as 43°C DB.
3.7 Design condition of condensing unit shall be:
Indoor temperature : 27°C DB, 19.5°C WB
Outdoor temperature : 35°C DB
4. Compressor
The compressor shall be of highly efficient hermetically sealed scroll

compressors and equipped with inverter control capable of changing the speed
linearly in accordance to the room load requirement. It shall be able to vary the
load from the 8% to 130% of its normal capacity.
5. Condenser Assembly
The air cooled condenser shall be constructed with copper tubes mechanically
bonded to aluminum fins to form a cross fin coil. The condenser shall have
large face area to minimise noise and give a high EER for heat transfer.
Condenser should be of waffle louver fins and Hi-X tubes design for high
efficiency performance. The condensing unit shall be chemically coated with
anti-corrosion P.E. fins. The thickness of the coating must be between 2.0 to
3.0 microns.
TS/M/S42/3
MECHANICAL WORKS
6. Condenser fan and motor
The condenser fan shall be of multi-blade low speed noise level type made
from pressed out aluminum and dynamically and statically balance for
minimum noise and vibration. The condenser fan shall be directly coupled to a
induction motor. The axial of the fan shall be perpendicular to the face of the
condenser to ensure smooth air flow. The condenser fan and motor shall be of
high efficiency type with minimum power consumption. The fan motor shall
be equipped with pole-change control so that it can be stepped down to low
speed when the requirement is low.
7. Refrigerant Circuit
The refrigerant circuit shall include an accumulator, liquid and gas shut off
valves, solenoid and electronic expansion valve. All necessary safely devices
should be provided to ensure the safety operation of the system.
8. Accumulator
The cylindrical accumulator shall be constructed from mild steel plates

pressed into shape. The accumulator shall have sufficient capacity to prevent
any liquid refrigerant from flowing back into the compressor suction.
9. Safety devices
The following safety devices shall be part of the condensing unit. High
pressure switch, fuse, crankcase heater, fusible plug, over current relay for
compressor, thermal protectors for compressor and fan motors, recycling
guard timer.
10. Oil recovery system
Unit shall be equipped with an oil recovery system to ensure stable operation
with long refrigerant piping. Oil trap system is not acceptable.
11. Fan coil unit
11.1 Each fan coil unit shall be of the ceiling mounted type, or ceiling
ducted type, or ceiling suspended type, ceiling mounted cassette
corner, double-flow, multi-flow type, or wall mounted type or floor
mounted type.
TS/M/S42/4
MECHANICAL WORKS
11.2 Each fan coil unit shall have be equipped with a self diagnosis remote
controller and having the features of setting of room temperature (with
digital indicator of room temperature), timer, air discharge direction
(for cassette units), fan speed selections, self diagnosis circuit with
malfunction code display.
11.3 The ceiling mounted cassette type, double-flow or multi-flow shall

have an "autoswing mechanism" which automatically varies the
direction of the air flow thereby preventing sharp variations in the air
flow and the temperature. The built-in "radiant heat sensor" for all fan
coil units to control the room temperature in accordance with the way
it actually feels in the room of effective temperature.
11.4 The sound tolerance of the fan coil units must not be higher of the
following levels:
Cassette type Multi-flow : 44 dBA
Cassette type Double-flow : 48 dBA
Cassette type Corner-flow : 41 dBA
Ceiling mounted Built-in type : 44 dBA
Ceiling suspended type : 48 dBA
Wall mounted type : 42 dBA
Floor standing type : 40 dBA
Concealed floor standing type : 40 dBA
11.5 The performance specifications of the fan coil units are based on the
following temperature conditions:
Indoor temperature : 27°C dry bulb, 19.5°C wet bulb
Outdoor temperature : 35°C dry bulb
TS/M/S42/5
MECHANICAL WORKS
12. Cross fin evaporator
12.1 The cross fin evaporator coil shall be constructed from strong clean
copper tubes bonded to aluminium fins suitably spaced to ensure
maximum heat transfer. The inlet of the coil shall be factory brazed to
an electronic control valve. The face velocity shall be exceptionally
low to ensure quiet operation.
12.2 The cross fin coil shall be of waffle louver fins and hi-x tube design to
ensure highly efficient performance. Fin pitch shall not be less than
2.0mm.
13. Electronic control valve
An electronic expansion valve shall be factory brazed to the inlet of the coil. It
shall modulate the refrigerant volume continuously in respond to load
variations of the room. Thus, maintain a precise constant temperature of
±0.5°C.
14. Soft Start (Starters)
All condensing units shall be equipped with soft start to ensure low starting
current.
The inverter compressor shall be able to start at the minimum load and
gradually increase to the required frequency according to the actual load
requirement.
A recycling guard timer shall be provided to prevent the compressor from
restarting again immediately after it was stopped.
15. Fan Coil Unit Drainage Facilities
All fan coil units viz. ceiling mounted cassette (double and multi flow type),
ceiling mounted (corner type), ceiling suspended type and wall mounted type,
shall be provided with drain-up pumps, with a separate power supply from the
FCU.
16. Pressure testing
The complete refrigerant circuit should be subjected to a pressure test of 28.0

kg/cm² for at least 24 hours without any drop in pressure.
TS/M/S42/6
MECHANICAL WORKS
17. Pipe Material
The refrigerant pipework shall be of de-oxidized phosphorous seamless copper

pipe complying with BS 2871 and related internationally recognized standard.
18. Evaporator Fan
The evaporator fan shall be of the dual suction multi-blade type with its length
designed to match the coil width. The fan shall be statically and dynamically
balanced to ensure low noise and vibration free operation. It shall be directly
driven by a 2-speed induction motor. For ceiling ducted unit, the fan shall be
directly driven by a 2-speed induction motor. For ceiling ducted unit, the fan
shall be able to cater for the static pressure to the system as shown in the
drawing. The motor shall operate on 230 V single phase 50Hz supply.
19. Control
19.1 The control system shall be connected by using 2-wire multiplex

transmission system which links a single outdoor unit to multiple
indoor units with a 2-core cable. In addition, the control system must
come equipped with automatic address setting function. No manual
setting of addressing is permitted. An automatic checking function for
connection error in wiring and piping must come as a standard with the
system.
19.2 Computerized control shall be used to maintain a correct room

temperature with minimum power consumption. The fan coil unit shall
be equipped with its own 2-speed fan controller, timer ON/OFF switch,
thermostat and LED indicators.
19.3 The control system shall also be equipped with a self diagnosis circuit
for easy and quick maintenance and service. It shall be able to indicate
at least 52 malfunction code display.
TS/M/S42/7
MECHANICAL WORKS
20. Centralized Control System
A centralized control system shall consist of a central remote controller,

unified on/off controller and a schedule timer. They shall be provided to
control all the functions of the fan coil units either together as a central control
system or individually as the specifications call for. They must be able to
connect to Building Automation System (BAS) via an interface for BACnet
for control and monitoring.
The function of each unit should be as follows:
20.1 Central Remote Controller
It should be able to control 64 groups (each group comprising 16 fan

coil units) or 1,024 nos. of fan coil units, with the same function of the
LCD remote controller, which should have the following features:
a) Temperature setting for each fan coil unit or group.
b) Air flow setting for each fan coil unit or group.
c) Fault indication of each fan coil unit.
d) Ability to switch on/off each individual fan coil unit or group

of fan coil units.
e) Ability to switch on/off the entire system.
f) Maximum wiring length of 1km.
20.2 Unified On/Off Controller
The unified on/off controller shall be connectable to a maximum of 16

groups (each consisting of 16 fan coil units) or 256 nos. of fan coil
units and it shall have the following features:
a) Simultaneous or individual operation of the fan coil units.
b) Normal operating status such as normal operation, alarm.
c) Ability to have centralized control indication.
d) Maximum wiring length of 1km.
e) Shall be combinable with the centralized remote controller.
TS/M/S42/8
MECHANICAL WORKS
20.3 Schedule Timer
The schedule timer shall be connectable to a maximum of 64 groups

(each comprising 16 fan coil units) or 1,024 nos. of fan coil units and it
shall have the following features:
a) 8 types of weekly schedule.
b) Maximum of 48 hours of back-up power supply.
c) Maximum wiring length of 1km.
d) Shall be combinable with the central remote controller and the

unified on/off controller.
21. Fan Coil Unit- Condensing Unit Matching
21.1 Means shall be provided (via. by ratchet relay, programmable logic

controller, etc.) for alternating the duty of those condensing units
which are to be operational 24 hrs per day, every day of the year, as
well as those condensing units which are to be operational 24 hrs per
day, but only on certain days of the year, with condensing units which
are to be operational 8 to 12 hrs per day or only intermittently (ie.
operational only as and when required).
21.2 That is, those condensing units which are operational for 8 to 12 hrs
per day will function as the 'standby' condensing units for those 'duty'
condensing units which operate 24 hrs per day (either continuously or
intermittently), for the remaining 12 to 16 hrs of the day. The
following day, the latter condensing units will then operate for the full
24 hr per day duration while the former condensing units will rest for
the remaining l2 to 16 hrs of the day, and vice versa.
21.3 The cooling capacities of the fan coil units and condensing units as
indicated in the schedules contained within this technical specification
and the drawings, are the minimum cooling capacities required. In the
event that the capacity ratio of the fan coil system to the associated
condensing unit is greater than 100%, and when all the fan coil units
are in operation simultaneously, then the rated capacity of each
condensing unit will be somewhat reduced. The Sub-Contractor shall
take such fact into account in the selection and matching of the fan coil
and condensing units. Any consequential increase in cooling capacity
of fan coil unit(s) and/or condensing unit(s), in order to meet the
minimum cooling requirements set out in this technical specification or
drawings, shall be deemed to be included by the Sub-Contractor in his
tender.
TS/M/S42/9
MECHANICAL WORKS
22. Wire Centre Air-conditioning
22.1 Power supply to all wire centres should be e-source, i.e., with
generator backup. This includes power supply to the individual air-con
units inside the wire centre.
22.2 The power consumption by IT equipment shall be 3 kW (or 4 kVA,

assuming 0.8 power efficiency) per rack. Air-conditioning cooling load
shall be sized accordingly. In any one instance, the air-conditioning
unit shall not be sized lower than 24,000 BTU for room size of 3 x 3
meter internal. Main wire centre air-conditioning unit which shall not
be sized lower than 48,000 BTU in total each for room size of 3 x 3
meter. Ceiling mounted unit shall not be used. All the fan coil unit
shall be of wall mounted type
22.3 The 24x7 air-conditioning system shall be capable of achieving

operating temperature: 22 +/- 1 degree C. The room shall be designed
to be condensation free under all operating environment.
22.4 The air-conditioning system shall be designed in accordance with N+N

redundancy with each unit configured to operate in 12-hour shift mode
automatically. Protective measures shall be taken to ensure at any one
time only up to N units should be running. Main wire centre shall
design with 2N+2N redundancy with each set of units configured to
operate in 12-hour shift mode automatically, The air-conditioning for
wire centre shall complete with 24hr change over panel, high
temperature alarm, high temperature cut-in and BAS monitoring
22.5 Thermostats shall be provided for user to adjust the room temperature
manually. A controller shall be in place to reset the temperature back
to its design operating temperature and pre-sets time schedule after 2
hours of manual setting.
22.6 All wire centre air-conditioning unit shall be wall mounted type.
22.7 Where VRV system is used for multiple fan coil unit, the system shall
not served more than three fan coil units. Duty and standby shall not
share with the same condensing units. The system shall not mix with
others non wire centre usage.
22.8 Contractor shall eliminate the possibility of condensation, water

dripping and leakage inside the wire centre.
22.9 The air-conditioning system shall be linked to central building

management system to automatically notify operation personnel should
there be any fault with any air-conditioning unit or component, or
when the room temperature goes beyond pre-set threshold.
TS/M/S42/10
MECHANICAL WORKS
Sub-Contractor shall provide exhaust air purging fan with make up air,
ductwork, volume control damper, diffuser and accessories at not less than 3
air change for the Air-Cooled Multi-Split VRV units system. Wire Centre will
be excluded.
24 Testing and Commissioning
Testing and commissioning of the system shall be carried out by trained

personnel. Documents testifying to training and method statement on testing
and commissioning shall be submitted. All testing and commissioning report
shall submit to engineer.
TS/M/S42/11
MECHANICAL WORKS
SECTION 43 - AIR-COOLED SINGLE-SPLIT UNITS
1. General

of Air-Cooled Single-Split units and associated accessories.
1.2 If the Air-Cooled Single-Split units unit is designed as standby to the

normal air conditioning unit, then the Sub-contractor shall provide the
DBs, isolator, cabling and the entire interlock control such that the
split/package shall be automatically switched on if the normal air
conditioning unit high temperature or fails
1.3 All the Air-Cooled Single-Split units shall comply to the latest
Singapore Standard SS 530 with energy efficient and with minimum at
least 5 ticks.
1.4 The Sub-Contractor shall supply and install, where shown on the
Tender drawings, air-cooled single-split systems of an approved type
and each complete with indoor units, outdoor unit, with refrigeration
cycle, electrical components, fan speed and thermostatic control. The
units shall be suitable for continuous operation and shall be constructed
as below.
2. System
2.1 The air-conditioning units shall be air-cooled, single-split type,

consisting of one outdoor unit and one direct expansion indoor fan coil
units, each having capability to cool the rooms independently.
2.2 The system shall be selected based on outdoor temperature of 35oC DB

and indoor temperature of 24oC DB/19oC WB. Manufacturer’s
datasheet shall be submitted.
2.3 The system shall comply with the requirements on noise pollution
control and of BCA Green Mark category specified elsewhere in the
Contract document.
2.4 Power supply at 230V single-phase 50Hz will be provided at the

vicinity of the condenser unit terminating in an isolator. The
Contractor shall be responsible to provide power supply to the systems.
TS/M/S43/1
MECHANICAL WORKS
2.5 The manufacturer shall provide guarantee for the compressor for a
period of 5 years from the date of Substantial Completion.
2.6 The system shall comply with the requirements of BS EN 378 and
ANSI/ASHRAE Standard 15 and ANSI/ASHRAE Standard 34.
2.7 The equipment shall meet to BS EN 378 Parts 1-4 Refrigerating

systems and heat pumps. Safety and environmental requirements
2.8 The complete air conditioner shall be the product of a single

manufacturer certified to ISO 9001 for the manufacturer of air
conditioning equipment.
2.9 The manufacturer or its authorised distributor shall maintain an active

technical team and maintenance facilities in Singapore.
2.10 The materials for system parts supplied shall meet and comply with the
RoHS Directive (Restriction of Hazardous Substances) in electrical
and electronic equipment.
2.11 The sub-contractor shall submit the detailed equipment, piping layout
plans, manufacturer’s recommended pipe size including basis for size
selection and method statement to engineer. Maintenance access shall
be clearly shown to enable coordination with the building and other
services. Installation detail and mock up shall be installed for SO
approval.
2.12 The condensing unit shall be equipped with inverter controller,

enabling it to operate at 10% more than the rated cooling capacity for
at least 20 minutes and then returns to the normal load. It shall be
capable of changing the rotating speed to follow variations in cooling
load
2.13 The condensing unit shall be suitable for connection of mounted

cassette type, ceiling ducted and wall mounted type indoor units.
2.14 The refrigerant piping shall be extendable up to 30 m with 20 m level

difference without any oil traps.
2.15 Both indoor and outdoor units are to be factory assembled, tested and
charged with R32 refrigerant at the factory.
TS/M/S43/2
MECHANICAL WORKS
2.16 The air-cooled multi-split system to be supplied and installed by the

Sub- Contractor shall consist of fan coil unit(s); air-cooled condensing
unit, refrigerant pipework with associated fittings, sight-glass and filter
drier, electrical panel and control gear and wiring, including cutting
and making good necessary openings through walls and floors for
pipework and electrical wiring, 100 mm thick concrete plinth or
painted steel mounting brackets approved by the Architect and all other
incidental works and materials necessary to bring the system to good
working order. The control panel shall be constructed of electro-
galvanized steel sheets, baked-painted. The gauge of metal, panel
dimensions and layout design and circuitry, shall be approved by the
Architect. The piping layout indicated in the drawings is indicative
only. The Sub-Contractor shall also be responsible for the optimal
design and layout of the refrigerant piping system, and shall also verify
the sufficiency of the sizes of all riser ducts, openings, etc.
3. Air-Cooled Condensing Unit
3.1 The air-cooled condensing unit shall be a factory assembled unit

housed in a sturdy weather-proof casing constructed from rust-proof
mild steel panels coated with baked enamel finish. The condensing unit
shall be equipped with inverter controller which operating capacity
varies according on the speed of its compressor. It enables the current
frequency to meet the demand from 35 Hz to 100 Hz that is the
rotation speed of the compressor. The system shall be able to reduce its
minimum load without having to utilise any hot gas bypass system,
efficiency of the system cannot be compromised.. The noise level shall
not be more than 54 dBA measured horizontally 1 metre away and 1.5
metres above ground.
3.2 The system shall be able to reduce its minimum load without having to
utilise any hot gas bypass system, efficiency of the system cannot be
compromised
3.3 The system shall allow refrigerant piping up to 30 metres. The

maximum allowable height difference between the outdoor and indoor
units shall be 20 metres.
3.4 The condensing unit shall be designed to operate safely when

connected to the fan coil units.
3.5 Condensing units shall be of soft-start to ensure low starting current.
3.6 The condensing unit shall be able to operate in outdoor temperature as

high as 43°C DB.
TS/M/S43/3
MECHANICAL WORKS
3.7 Design condition of condensing unit shall be:
Indoor temperature : 27°C DB, 19.5°C WB
Outdoor temperature : 35°C DB
4. Compressor
The compressor shall be of highly efficient hermetically sealed scroll or swing

Compressors having high EER value and equipped with inverter control
capable of changing the speed linearly in accordance to the room load
requirement. It shall be able to vary the load from the 10% to 110% of its
normal capacity. The compressor shall be mounted on spring isolators within
the compressor casing to minimise vibration. In addition, the whole
compressor assembly shall also be mounted with soundproofing materials so
that complete vibration is not transferred outside. The compressor assembly
shall have low operation noise level and shall be equipped with safety devices
such as overload relay and over current relay to protect the compressor in case
of malfunction.
5. Condenser Assembly
The air cooled condenser shall be constructed with copper tubes mechanically
bonded to aluminum fins to form a cross fin coil. The condenser shall have
large face area to minimise noise and give a high EER for heat transfer.
Condenser should be of waffle louver fins and Hi-X tubes design for high
efficiency performance. The condensing unit shall be chemically coated with
anti-corrosion P.E. fins. The thickness of the coating must be between 2.0 to
3.0 microns. Manufacturer datasheet of the anti-corrosion treatment shall be
submitted
6. Condenser fan and motor
The condenser fan shall be of multi-blade low speed noise level type made
from pressed out aluminum and dynamically and statically balance for
minimum noise and vibration. The condenser fan shall be directly coupled to a
induction motor. The axial of the fan shall be perpendicular to the face of the
condenser to ensure smooth air flow. The condenser fan and motor shall be of
high efficiency type with minimum power consumption. The fan motor shall
be equipped with pole-change control so that it can be stepped down to low
speed when the requirement is low.
TS/M/S43/4
MECHANICAL WORKS
7. Refrigerant Circuit
The refrigerant circuit shall include an accumulator, liquid and gas shut off
valves, solenoid and electronic expansion valve. All necessary safely devices
should be provided to ensure the safety operation of the system.
8. Accumulator
The cylindrical accumulator shall be constructed from mild steel plates

pressed into shape. The accumulator shall have sufficient capacity to prevent
any liquid refrigerant from flowing back into the compressor suction.
9. Safety devices
The following safety devices shall be part of the condensing unit. High
pressure switch, fuse, crankcase heater, fusible plug, over current relay for
compressor, thermal protectors for compressor and fan motors, recycling
guard timer.
10. Oil recovery system
Unit shall be equipped with an oil recovery system to ensure stable operation
with long refrigerant piping. Oil trap system is not acceptable.
11. Fan coil unit
11.1 Each fan coil unit shall be of the ceiling mounted cassette multi-flow
type, or wall mounted type.
11.2 Each fan coil unit shall have be equipped with a self diagnosis remote
controller and having the features of setting of room temperature (with
digital indicator of room temperature), timer, air discharge direction
(for cassette units), fan speed selections, self diagnosis circuit with
malfunction code display.
11.3 The ceiling mounted cassette type, double-flow or multi-flow shall

have an "auto swing mechanism" which automatically varies the
direction of the air flow thereby preventing sharp variations in the air
flow and the temperature. The built-in "radiant heat sensor" for all fan
coil units to control the room temperature in accordance with the way
it actually feels in the room of effective temperature.
11.4 The fan speed shall be controlled automatically according to the room
load requirements.
TS/M/S43/5
MECHANICAL WORKS
11.5 Two layered air purifying filter consisting of an electrostatic filter to

catch smoke of 0.01 micron, and an activated charcoal filter to remove
unpleasant odours effectively purifies the air in the room.
11.6 The drain pan shall be made from strong preformed foam polystyrene,
shape to ensure positive drainage and thermal insulation. It shall have
an outlet for connection to drain hose
11.7 The sound tolerance of the fan coil units must not be higher of the
following levels:
Cassette type Multi-flow : 44 dBA
Wall mounted type : 42 dBA
11.8 The performance specifications of the fan coil units are based on the
following temperature conditions:
Indoor temperature : 27°C dry bulb, 19.5°C wet bulb
Outdoor temperature : 35°C dry bulb
12. Cross fin evaporator
12.1 The cross fin evaporator coil shall be constructed from strong clean
copper tubes bonded to aluminium fins suitably spaced to ensure
maximum heat transfer. The inlet of the coil shall be factory brazed to
an electronic control valve. The face velocity shall be exceptionally
low to ensure quiet operation.
12.2 The cross fin coil shall be of waffle louver fins and hi-x tube design to
ensure highly efficient performance. Fin pitch shall not be less than
2.0mm.
13. Electronic control valve
An electronic expansion valve shall be factory brazed to the inlet of the coil. It
shall modulate the refrigerant volume continuously in respond to load
variations of the room. Thus, maintain a precise constant temperature of
±0.5°C.
TS/M/S43/6
MECHANICAL WORKS
14. Soft Start (Starters)
All condensing units shall be equipped with soft start to ensure low starting
current.
The inverter compressor shall be able to start at the minimum load and
gradually increase to the required frequency according to the actual load
requirement.
A recycling guard timer shall be provided to prevent the compressor from
restarting again immediately after it was stopped.
15. Fan Coil Unit Drainage Facilities
All fan coil units viz. ceiling mounted cassette (double and multi flow type),
ceiling mounted (corner type), ceiling suspended type and wall mounted type,
shall be provided with drain-up pumps, with a separate power supply from the
FCU.
16. Pressure testing
The complete refrigerant circuit should be subjected to a pressure test of 28.0

kg/cm² for at least 24 hours without any drop in pressure.
17. Pipe Material
17.1. The refrigerant pipe shall be of de-oxidised phosphorous seamless

copper pipe conforming to BS EN 12735, JIS H300 - C1220T or
approved equivalent standards. Both suction gas and liquid lines shall
be sufficiently insulated to prevent formation of condensation in all
circumstances.
17.2. All shut off valves connections in the outdoor units shall be brazed to
avoid risks of refrigerant leakages (conventionally shut off valves are
flanged or flared).
17.3. Appropriate refrigeration installation tools shall be utilised to avoid the

use of elbows. Oxygen free dry Nitrogen (OFN) shall be in the system
during brazing. Cold brazing is not permitted.
17.4. All pipe work (suction and liquid) to be insulated with slip-on close
cell electrometric pipe insulation, fire rated to Class "O", with a wall
thickness of not less than 25mm. Insulation shall be protected when
exposed to atmosphere by special paint or covered by an enclosure.
17.5. Refrigerant pipes shall be sized accordance with manufacturer’s

recommendations.
TS/M/S43/7
MECHANICAL WORKS
17.6. Condensate drain pipes shall be the diameter of drain hole of the drain
pan subject to minimum 20mm bore diameter. Drain pipes shall be
dedicated to a single fan coil unit.
17.7. Condensate drain pipes shall be thermally insulated with approved

closed cell insulation material for the entire length to prevent
condensation. Calculations shall be submitted.
18. Evaporator Fan
The evaporator fan shall be of the dual suction multi-blade type with its length
designed to match the coil width. The fan shall be statically and dynamically
balanced to ensure low noise and vibration free operation. It shall be directly
driven by a variable speed induction motor. For ceiling ducted unit, the fan
shall be directly driven by a variable speed DC brushless type motor. For
ceiling ducted unit, the fan shall be able to cater for the static pressure to the
system as shown in the drawing. The motor shall operate on 230 V single
phase 50Hz supply.
19. Control
19.1 The control system shall be connected by using 2-wire multiplex

transmission system which links a single outdoor unit to indoor units
with a 2-core cable. In addition, the control system must come
equipped with automatic address setting function. No manual setting of
addressing is permitted. An automatic checking function for
connection error in wiring and piping must come as a standard with the
system.
19.2 The system shall come with an automatic restart function when a
power fail to the system occurs. The system shall operate satisfactory
for indoor load conditions as specified. Only system designed and
manufactured in the factory are acceptable.
19.3 Computerized controller and thermostat shall be used to maintain a

correct room temperature with minimum power consumption. The fan
coil unit shall be equipped with its own variable speed fan controller,
timer ON/OFF switch, thermostat and LED indicators.
19.4 The fan speed shall have at least 5 steps, and with an automatic fan
speed feature to automatically control the fan speed according to the
room load requirement.
TS/M/S43/8
MECHANICAL WORKS
20. Building Automation System interfacing
The Multi-split unit shall be able to interface into the building automation
system for the control and monitoring the system.
21. Wire Centre Air-conditioning
21.1 Power supply to all wire centres should be e-source, i.e., with
generator backup. This includes power supply to the individual air-con
units inside the wire centre.
21.2 The power consumption by IT equipment shall be 3 kW (or 4 kVA,

assuming 0.8 power efficiency) per rack. Air-conditioning cooling load
shall be sized accordingly. In any one instance, the air-conditioning
unit shall not be sized lower than 24,000 BTU for room size of 3 x 3
meter internal. Main wire centre air-conditioning unit which shall not
be sized lower than 48,000 BTU in total each for room size of 3 x 3
meter. Ceiling mounted unit shall not be used. All the fan coil unit
shall be of wall mounted type
21.3 The 24x7 air-conditioning system shall be capable of achieving

operating temperature: 22 +/- 1 degree C. The room shall be designed
to be condensation free under all operating environment.
21.4 The air-conditioning system shall be designed in accordance with N+N

redundancy with each unit configured to operate in 12-hour shift mode
automatically. Protective measures shall be taken to ensure at any one
time only up to N units should be running. Main wire centre shall
design with 2N+2N redundancy with each set of units configured to
operate in 12-hour shift mode automatically, The air-conditioning for
wire centre shall complete with 24hr change over panel, high
temperature alarm, high temperature cut-in and BAS monitoring
21.5 Thermostats shall be provided for user to adjust the room temperature
manually. A controller shall be in place to reset the temperature back
to its design operating temperature and pre-sets time schedule after 2
hours of manual setting.
21.6 All wire centre air-conditioning unit shall be wall mounted type.
21.7 Where VRV system is used for multiple fan coil unit, the system shall
not served more than three fan coil units. Duty and standby shall not
share with the same condensing units. The system shall not mix with
others non wire centre usage.
21.8 Contractor shall eliminate the possibility of condensation, water

dripping and leakage inside the wire centre.
TS/M/S43/9
MECHANICAL WORKS
21.9 The air-conditioning system shall be linked to central building

management system to automatically notify operation personnel should
there be any fault with any air-conditioning unit or component, or
when the room temperature goes beyond pre-set threshold.
Sub-Contractor shall provide exhaust air purging fan with make up air,
ductwork, volume control damper, diffuser and accessories at not less than 3
air change for the Air-Cooled Single-Split units system. Wire Centre will be
excluded.
Testing and commissioning of the system shall be carried out by trained

personnel. Documents testifying to training and method statement on testing
and commissioning shall be submitted. All testing and commissioning report
shall submit to engineer.
TS/M/S43/10
MECHANICAL WORKS
SECTION 47 : STAINLESS STEEL AIR VELOCITY TRANSMITTER

FOR SUPPLY / EXHAUST SYSTEM
1 General
This section covers the supply, delivery, installation, testing and

stainless steel air velocity transmitter and its associated accessories.
2. Velocity Transmitter
The air velocity transmitter install at exhaust air and supply duct shall be of
stainless steel material wetted part, it shall be withstand dust, moisture and
corrosion. The air velocity transmitter shall meet below specification:
a) Velocity Transmitter shall be of industrial 316 stainless steel

Armored RTD sensing element as the thermal air velocity
measurement component
b) Transmitter shall have two or three outputs of 4-20mA for air

velocity and temperature, and pressure as option. It shall have
Modbus communication options. The power supply shall be 24vdc
c) Transmitter shall have multi ranges from 0 to 1m/s to 0-20m/s,

temperature range of -10 to 50°C with optional -20 to 125°C.
d) Velocity Transmitter sensor and probe shall be of 316 SS, housing

SS304. Enclosure rating shall be of NEMA 4 (IP65)
e) Transmitter probe length shall be selectable from 152mm to 914mm

to meet various duct sizes and c/w removable flange mount kit.
f) Transmitter shall complete with local LCD display and keypad and
simultaneously display air velocity and temperature. Pressure
reading shall be an option. The mounting of the display unit shall
have optional of Remote mount or as an integral unit.
g) The transmitter accuracy shall be +/-1% full scale for all exhaust air
measurement, the optional +/-3% full scale for some non critical
supply air measurement
TS/M/S47/1
MECHANICAL WORKS
h) The transmitter shall have a dampening coefficient from 3 to 30

seconds.
i) The transmitter shall be able to withstand moisture, dust and 20%

concentration of H2SO4.
TS/M/S47/2
MECHANICAL WORKS
SECTION 49 - VIBRATION ISOLATION AND NOISE CONTROL
1. General
1.1 Unless otherwise specified, anti-vibration isolators shall be provided for all
equipment with rotating or reciprocating components to prevent the
transmission of vibration and structure borne transmission of sound to the
building structure. Vibration isolators shall be selected in accordance with
the weight distribution so as to produce reasonably uniform deflection.
1.2 Unless otherwise stated, all vibration isolators shall be selected for
minimum noise transmission. The selection of isolators shall be based on
the lowest shaft speed of any component equipment which may be mounted
(rigidly or otherwise) on the bases to which the vibration isolators shall be
attached to.
1.3 The Sub-Contractor shall unless otherwise specified elsewhere in this

Specification or Tender Drawings be responsible for the following:-
a) Support all rotating machines subject to unbalanced forces on

properly selected anti-vibration mountings. Machines should be
individually mounted rather than on a common base.
b) Provide where applicable, floating inertia bases weighted suitably

in accordance with the equipment weights.
c) Select fans with low noise, low top-speeds and outlet velocities as
is practically possible for the specific application. The selection
shall be such that the air quantity or outlet velocity is within the
range 0.95 - 1.5 times the air quantity or outlet velocity supplied by
the fan at its peak efficiency for the design static pressure.
d) Select motors with low bearing noise and of adequate lubrication

and motor contactors free of vibration and rattling.
e) Install smooth bends and airfoil turning vanes in all ventilation duct
work.
f) Provide, where applicable, sound attenuators in duct work to

achieve specified noise levels.
g) Select all air handling system accessories with low radiated and
discharged sound power levels.
h) Provide internal acoustic linings to all AHUs' duct work, minimum

5 metres on supply and return air ducts or as shown in the
Drawings.
TS/M/S49/1
MECHANICAL WORKS
1.4 The noise level in all air conditioned and mechanical ventilated areas shall
not exceed the recommended level. The readings shall be taken with all air
conditioning equipment operational at full capacity. It shall be the Sub-
Contractor's responsibility to carry out all noise measurements and ensure
that all air-handling units and other equipments are selected and installed to
meet the design level. Where necessary, noise attenuators special
equipment covers and vibration isolators shall be provided.
1.5 The Sub-Contractor is required to ensure that the above criteria shall be
fully complied. He would be required to install noise attenuation material
and devices to ensure that the criteria is fully met. The cost for the above
compliance shall be included in the Tender price and any deviation from
this Section shall be made known to the S.O..
1.6 The Sub-Contractor shall supply and install isolation and support for the
following :
a) Acoustic seals for duct work, pipe work penetrating through wall.
b) Facilities to allow expansion and contraction for vertical pipe run.
c) Flexible connection on all ducting and vibrating equipments
d) Neoprene hangers for all main supply and return ducts
2. Duct work Isolation
2.1 The requirement of spring isolator for duct work shall be applicable only to
the first three rod hangers from the fan/AHU equipment.
2.2 Duct work vibration hangers shall contain a steel spring located in a
neoprene cup manufactured with a grommet to prevent short circuiting of
the hanger rod. The cup shall contain a steel washer designed to properly
distribute the load on the neoprene and prevent its extrusion. Spring
diameters and hanger box lower hole sizes shall be large enough to permit
the hanger rod to swing through a 30 arc before contacting the hole and
short circuiting the spring. Springs shall have a minimum additional travel
to solid equal to 50% of the rated deflection. Spring deflection shall be a
minimum of 20 mm.
TS/M/S49/2
MECHANICAL WORKS
3. Penetration for Piping and Duct work
When a duct or pipe penetrate a building structure, the space in between shall be
completely sealed with one layer of 25 mm thick and 120 kg/m3 fibreglass in 22
SWG sheet metal sleeve and caulked from both sides with non-setting bitumen
compound.
4. Pipe work Isolation
4.1 Pipe spring in the main lines shall be pre-compressed to the rated deflection
so as to keep the piping at a fixed elevation during installation. The
hangers shall be designed with a release mechanism to force the spring after
the installation is completed and the hanger is subjected to its full load.
4.2 Pipe work connected to vibration generating equipment shall be supported

by vibration isolated hangers.
4.3 Inherently rigid plants connections, such as condenser piping between the
cooling tower and the chillers, shall be resiliently supported with the same
efficiency mechanical isolation as the major plant to which it is connected.
4.4 Chilled water piping within the plant room and the risers shall be provided
with vibration isolated supports.
4.5 For all other mechanical equipment, the first three hangers/supports from
the equipment shall be spring in series with neoprene types as specified.
4.6 All other supports/hangers beyond the first three pipe hangers specified in
the schedule shall incorporate an isolation medium of 8 mm thickness such
as waffle pattern neoprene, felt or high density fibreglass between pipe and
hanger/support or between hanger/support and wall. This shall apply to all
piping installed, whether in horizontal runs or vertical pipe risers, unless
otherwise allowed by the S.O..
5.1 Spring type isolators shall be free standing and laterally stable without any
housing and complete with 1/4" neoprene acoustical friction pads between
the baseplate and the support. All mountings shall have levelling bolts that
must be rigidly bolted to the equipment. Spring diameter shall be not less
than 0.8 of the compressed height of the spring at rated load. Springs shall
have a minimum additional travel to solid equal to 50% of the rated
deflection.
TS/M/S49/3
MECHANICAL WORKS
5.2 Cooling towers and the associated piping shall be isolated from the
building structure through the use of steel coil spring/neoprene assemblies.
Ribbed neoprene pads shall be incorporated under the base plate of the
springs and shall be at least 10 mm thick.
6. Spring Hangers
Vibration hangers shall contain a steel spring and 0.3" deflection neoprene element
in series and encased in a welded bracket. Spring diameter and hanger box lower
hole sizes shall be large enough to permit the hanger rod to swing through a 30 arc
before contacting the hole and short circuiting the spring. Springs shall have a
minimum additional travel to solid equal to 50% of the rated deflection.
7. Sound Attenuators
7.1 The Sub-Contractor shall install approved attenuators (silencers) where

shown in the Drawings, or as required if not shown, to achieve the
performance as specified.
7.2 Should the provisions be insufficient for the equipment selected by the
Sub-Contractor and that the noise levels exceed the specified levels, the
Sub-Contractor shall be required to rectify the defect and to replace the
sound attenuators if necessary at his own costs, to achieve the specified
requirements.
7.3 The Sub-Contractor is to note that all equipment offered shall comply with
the N.C. levels recommended by the Authorities or as stated in the
Specification whichever is lower. The Sub-Contractor shall be required to
rectify without any additional cost to the University all equipment that does
not comply with the N.C. levels recommended.
7.4 Certified test data on dynamic insertion loss and self-generated noise with
an airflow of at least 7.5 m/sec face velocity, pressure drop and a complete
set of noise attenuators selected and offered shall be furnished at the time of
Tender. Attenuators without any verifiable selection data shall not be
accepted.
TS/M/S49/4
MECHANICAL WORKS
7.5 Attenuators supplied shall be designed, manufactured and supplied by a

proprietary manufacturer who has advertised and certifiable performance
data provided to allow verification and audit checking of the selection of
proposed silencers by the S.O.. The catalogue data shall include not less
than the following:
a) Insertion loss for at least 125, 250, 500, 1000, 2000, 4000 and 8000
Hz
b) Pressure drop in Pa for various air flow values
c) Regenerated noise for various air flows or pressure drops
7.6 The attenuator cases shall be constructed with 1.2 mm minimum hot dipped
galvanised steel duct sections with air channels. Splitters shall be
streamlined shape with respect to air flow and shall comprise an absorbent
pad of heavy density mineral wool of fibre glass covered in fibre glass
scrim and faced with perforated zincanneal, having a free area appropriate
to the application. Where applicable, this lining shall also cover the
internal areas of the casing between the splitters. Casing shall have steel
angles and flanges and reinforcing to the standards set out for the duct
work. Steel angles, and any areas of the casings where the galvanising has
been damaged, shall be cleaned and finished with cold galvanising
compound before leaving the manufacturer's premises.
7.7 Acoustic attenuation casing shall be designed and built to limit radiated
noise so that space noise criteria are not exceeded.
7.8 Attenuators installed in high pressure duct work shall be pressure tested
with the rest of the duct system. All leaks shall be repaired.
7.9 All attenuators shall be etched, primed and clearly marked with the
manufacturer's name, type number, direction of air flow and identification.
TS/M/S49/5
MECHANICAL WORKS
8. Equipment Mounting
The equipment mounting for major components are listed below in Table 2.
Table 2 - Equipment Mounting for Major Components
Equipment Type of Isolation Type of Base

1. Chiller Set Vertically restrained Factory fabricated
spring isolator with noise structural steel base
stop pad
2. Air Handling Units Free standing, un-housed Galvanised steel base for
laterally stable steep intergral mounting of
spring with top and fan, motor and casing
bottom load plate and panel
levelling bolt
3. Centrifugal/Axial - ditto - - ditto -
fans
4. Centrifugal water - ditto - Inertia base constructed
pump of welded steel channel
to receive concrete pour
5. Cooling Towers Double ribbed neoprene -
pad
9. Steel Springs in Series with Neoprene Pads
9.1 Unless specified otherwise, spring type isolator shall be unhoused, free
standing, laterally stable with levelling bolts rigidly bolted to inertia
blocks/base frames. In general, diameter shall be comparable with
compressed height and shall not be less than 0.8 of compressed height at
rated load, and horizontal spring stiffness shall be approximately equal to
vertical stiffness.
9.2 Spring shall have a minimum additional travel to solid equal to 50% of
rated deflection, and in this condition, shall not exceed elastic limit of
spring.
9.3 All springs shall be mounted with adequate clearance from brackets and
shall be clearly in view of critical inspection.
TS/M/S49/6
MECHANICAL WORKS
9.4 Where restrained mounts are specified, a housing shall be used that
includes vertical limit stops. A minimum clearance of 10 mm shall be
maintained around the restraining bolts and between the housing and spring
so as not to interfere with spring action. Limit stops shall be out of contact
during normal operations.
9.5 All spring type (whether free or restrained type) mounts used outdoors or
exposed to weather or wet conditions shall be hot dipped galvanised and
epoxy coated.
9.6 All steel springs shall be installed in series with two layers of neoprene
ribbed or waffle pattern pads (min. 8 mm thickness) as described below.
9.7 The springs shall be selected to support the calculated loads with the
minimum spring deflections as specified without being compressed solid,
or bridged out, or exceeding the Manufacturer's maximum rated loads
under any operating condition. In the selection of the springs the Sub-
Contractor shall also take into account the weight distribution of the
equipment under normal operating conditions, weight of unsupported
pipes/ducts, and any large dynamic forces due to fluid movement, torque
reaction and starting/stopping. The Sub-Contractor shall show, on the shop
drawings submitted, the make and model number of the isolators selected
and their individual calculated loads.
10. Inertia Blocks
10.1 To be installed where specified. The mechanical equipment shall be bolted

directly on to the integral concrete inertia blocks. All concrete referred to
in this Specification should have a density of at least 140-150 lbs/cu. ft.
(2240-2400 kg/cu. m).
10.2 In general, the length and width of the inertia block should be at least 50%
greater than the length and width of the supported equipment, except where
otherwise specified.
10.3 The weight of the inertia block, generally determined by thickness, shall be
as specified.
10.4 The base shall consist of a concrete slab cast into a welded steel base frame
assembly. Frames shall be welded steel channels, of minimum (150 mm)
thickness or the same thickness as the inertia block and shall be reinforced
with welded-in (12 mm) steel reinforcing rods or angles at 6" (150 mm)
centres each way. Anchor bolts shall be fixed into position, and housed in
steel bolt sleeve to allow minor bolt location adjustments or alternatively,
pocket shall be cast into inertia block to permit the later insertion of anchor
bolts.
TS/M/S49/7
MECHANICAL WORKS
10.5 A suitable base formed of min. 10 mm plywood or equivalent shall be

included for forming the slab. Steel channel isolator bracket shall be
welded directly to channel frames, and suitably located to accommodate the
height of the deflected springs and inertia block clearance with plinth.
10.6 There shall be adequate clearance (min. 20 mm) all round the springs to
assure that there is no contact between any spring and any part of the
mounted assembly for any possible alignment or position of the installed
inertia block. The clearance between inertia block and floor/plinth shall be
at least 75 mm.
10.7 The Sub-Contractor shall supply and install all welded structural steel,
reinforcement and concrete required for the inertia blocks and shall co-
ordinate his installation with the Sub-Contractor. All installation work
concerning these items are included in this Contract.
11. Ribbed or Waffle Pattern Neoprene Pads
11.1 Minimum 40 mm thick neoprene pads shall be installed where specified.
11.2 For typical applications, neoprene pads should be loaded to a surface

weight of approximately 35,000 kg/m2 (50 lb/in2).
11.3 Where two or more layers of neoprene pads are used, individual layers shall
be separated by 20 SWG thick steel shims.
12. Resilient Hangers
12.1 Resilient hangers are to be used for resilient suspension of pumping mains
pipes.
12.2 For specified deflections in excess of 12 mm, use spring in series with
neoprene type, and for deflections less than 12 mm used neoprene in shear
type hangers.
12.3 During installation, inspection shall be made to ensure that no hangers are
compressed solid or bridged out, and that the stipulated minimum
deflection are achieved.
TS/M/S49/8
MECHANICAL WORKS
13. NR Curve Level
The Table below shows the noise level criteria for the various areas. These levels
shall be measured with the room equipped with equipment and be ready to be used.
The equipment in the room shall be in the non-operating mode.
For the auditorium, conference rooms, lecture theatres and other noise sensitive
rooms the volume control dampers for each diffuser shall be located along the run-
out ducts and not at the diffuser plenums.
Table on criteria for interior noise levels in air-conditioning or mechanical

ventilation area due to air conditioning or mechanical ventilation equipment
Areas Criteria for Noise Continuous Intrusion

NR Curve App. DB(A)
Auditorium 30 35
Car parks - 65
Class Rooms/Tutorial Rooms 40 45
Conference Rooms 35 40
Corridors and lobby spaces 45 50
Laboratories 45 50
Lecture Theatres 35 40
Offices and Office areas 40 45
13.1 All noise levels must be measured with a Type 1 sound level meter set at
slow response and placed at 1.5m from the finished floor/ground level. The
measured NC shall be read as NC+5 if the perceived background noise is
tonal, rumbling or groaning.
13.2 The measurements shall be conducted by the Contractor’s

Acoustic/Vibration Consultant and witnessed by the S.O..
14. Contractor’s Acoustic/Vibration Consultant
14.1 The Contractor is required to engage the services of a qualified registered

Acoustic/Vibration Consultant to assist him in the acoustic design and
noise and vibration control of his installations and final noise and vibration
measurements. The Contractor must submit the qualifications and
experience of the registered Acoustic/Vibration Consultant in his tender
submission. The proposed registered Acoustic/Vibration Consultant must
be registered with Singapore National Environment Agency (NEA) and
have considerable relevant experience in noise and micro-vibration design
environments, including Clean Room acoustic designs and requirements. A
list of such projects which the registered Acoustic/Vibration Consultant
has undertaken must be submitted.
TS/M/S49/9
MECHANICAL WORKS
14.2 The duty of the registered Acoustic/Vibration Consultant is to assist the

Contractor and to ensure all his M&E installation will not affect the
vibration-controlled floor as specified.
14.3 The S.O. reserves the right not to accept the proposed registered
Acoustic/Vibration Consultant should the submission shows the proposed
does not possess sufficient knowledge or work experience on vibration-
controlled and micro-vibration floor for clean room designs. In such a
situation, the Contractor shall re-propose a registered Acoustic/Vibration
Consultant as instructed.
14.4 The tender submission shall also include:
i. The registered Acoustic/Vibration Consultant’s qualification
ii. The registered Acoustic/Vibration Consultant’s experience in

mechanical and electrical noise and vibration control design
iii. The registered Acoustic/Vibration Consultant’s experience in

vibration-controlled and micro-vibration floor designs. A project
list on such a design must be furnished
iv. The instrumentation the registered Acoustic/Vibration Consultant

will use for the micro-vibration measurements
14.5 Upon the award and prior to all works, the registered Acoustic/Vibration
Consultant is required to assist the Contractor to prepare for submission his
work schedule on acoustic designs and vibration measurements, including:
-
i. Method statements on design and programs of noise and vibration
measurements
ii. Proposal of all measurement locations for approval
14.6 The Contractor is required to submit reports on the acoustic and vibration
work and measurements.
14.7 The reports shall compare the measurement results with the specified
criteria and shall propose any necessary rectification work to the
installation if compliance has not been achieved. Any further work
including rectification and additional testing required shall be conducted at
the Contractor’s own expense.
TS/M/S49/10
MECHANICAL WORKS
14.8 The reports should compare:
i. The measured noise levels in NC against criteria
ii. The measured vibrations in the Clean Room against criteria in

graphical format.
iii. Boundary noise as stipulated in National Environment Agency

noise pollution control.
TS/M/S49/11
MECHANICAL WORKS
SECTION 50 - WATER FLOW METER AND BTU METER
1. General
and twelve (12) months free maintenance and warranty of the flow meter and
BTU calculator units and the associated accessories.
1.2 All the meters shall be carefully selected and be entirely suitable for their
particular service and position of fittings.
1.3 All the flow meter accuracy shall comply to SS591: long term measurement
of central chilled water system energy efficiency, ASHRAE guideline 14.
ISO4185, ISO 8316, ISO/IEC 17025 and latest green mark version under
building and construction authority,
1.4 All flow meter shall install according to manufacturer recommended standard
on the piping distance requirement.
2. Electromagnetic Inductive Flow meter
The flow meter shall be used at the chilled water/condenser water pipe for accurate
flow measurement for computation of the system enthalpy by the BAS system.
2.1. Water flow meter shall be of electromagnetic inductive type and consists of
two parts: - primary measuring unit and the converter (transmitter).
2.2. The primary measuring unit shall have no moving parts or intrusion into its
flow path.
2.3. The tube shall be 304 stainless steel or better, with NBR hard rubber, or
better lining, suitable for flange connection. Hastelloy C276 integrated
grounding and measuring electrodes. The primary housing shall be of at least
IP65 protection.
2.4. No electronics part shall be incorporated into the primary housing. The coil
and its insulation shall withstand 80ºC.
2.5. The converter shall provide a D.C. pulse precisely controlled rectangular
wave output for the primary coil. The converter shall be complete with LCD
and keypad and mounted remotely from the primary housing.
2.6. The converter shall provide with a Modbus card.
TS/M/S50/1
MECHANICAL WORKS
2.7. It shall be insensitive to mains frequency interference voltage of all phase

relatively.
2.8. It shall be no zero point drift due to conductive into inhomogenities or

electrode contamination.
2.9. The converter shall have digital range setting by frequency division. Full
interchangeability of component board with retention of accuracy without
board matching is required.
2.10. The converter shall be fully protected against no-load running and to be
short-circuiting proof.
2.11. Flow measurement must always be taken at stabilized current condition with
a stationary magnetic field or as the average of several reading during a
measuring cycle giving automatic zero point correction and stability.
2.12. It must have an overall accuracy of better than + 0.5% of the measured flow
rate at operating conditions ie 5-14°C for chilled water and 25-40°C for
condenser water application. Repeatability shall be within 0.1% of actual
measured value.
2.13. A wet calibration certificate must be furnished with the flowmeter to prove
that it has been properly calibrated on an approved test rig certified to
international standards.
2.14. The housing and terminal box shall be sealed with insulating material to
prevent condensation. Usage of IP68 submersible kit is a must to be included.
2.15. It shall be effectively protected from Radio Frequency Interference (RFI) as

prescribed in EN50081-2 and EN50082-2.
2.16. Installation of the electromagnetic flow meter shall strictly adhere to the
recommendation from manufacturer or appointed local agent.
2.17. Sensor prom enables instant measurement from the start of power-up. User
settings automatically stored in the sensor prom. Transmitter replacement
requires no programming. Sensor prom automatically updates all settings
after initalization.
TS/M/S50/2
MECHANICAL WORKS
3. Ultrasonic Clamp-on Flowmeter
The flow meter shall be used at the chilled water/condenser water pipe of each
chiller for accurate flow measurement for computation of the system enthalpy by the
BAS System.
3.1. Water flow meter shall be of microprocessor based utilizing ultrasonic

clamp-on transit-time flow measurement technique type and consists of two
parts: - primary measuring unit (transducer pair) and a converter.
3.2. The primary measuring unit shall be non-invasive and have no moving parts
or intrusion into its flow path.
3.3. The primary measuring unit shall be submersible type suitable for burial
and/or insulation against condensation.
3.4. The flow meter shall have the ability for automatic zero drift correction.
3.5. The flow meter shall have Reynolds number flow profile compensation in
case where minimum straight run pipe of 10D upstream and 5D downstream
is not achievable.
3.6. The transducers shall use ultrasonic coupling compound suitable for long
term installation.
3.7. The primary housing shall be of at least IP65 protection.
3.8. The transducer shall be able to operate in the range from -40°C to +80°C.
3.9. The converter shall have at least 1MByte data logger for site and data storage
3.10. The output signal shall be isolated analog 4-20MA capable of driving 1000
ohms resistive loads and one adjustable 0 to 5 KHz digital pulses.
3.11. The flowmeter shall have the ability to indicate flow rate, flow velocity, total
flow, signal strength, liquid sonic velocity, Reynolds Number and liquid
aeration level.
TS/M/S50/3
MECHANICAL WORKS
3.12. The flowmeter shall provide self and application diagnostics to isolate any
fault conditions to either equipment failure or abnormal process conditions.
3.13. The flowmeter shall provide automatic transducer spacing utilizing a

Universal Mounting Frame or mounting track (ruler scales shall not be
acceptable).
3.14. Converter shall have full interchangeability of component board with

retention of accuracy without board matching is required.
3.15. It must have an overall accuracy of ± 0.5…2.0 % of the measured flow rate at
operating conditions i.e. 5-14°C for chilled water and 25-40°C for condenser
water application. However, overall accuracy of 0.5 to 1% is highly
recommended. Repeatability shall be within 0.15 % of actual measured value.
3.16. The meter shall be capable of measuring flow range of ± 12 m/s bi-
directional with flow sensitivity of 0.0003 m/s flowrate independent.
3.17. A flowmeter factory quality calibration certificate must be furnished with the
flowmeter to prove that it has been properly tested and conforms to
specifications accordingly. All testing and measuring equipments used for the
procedure shall be traceable to international standards.
3.18. The transducers shall be sealed with insulating material to prevent

condensation and water ingress.
3.19. It shall be effectively immune to Radio Frequency Field and Electro

Magnetic Field as prescribed in EMC Directives 89/336/EEC such as
EN61000-6-2, -4 and LVD Directives 72/23/EC such as IEC61010-1.
3.20. Installation of the ultrasonic clamp-on flow meter shall be strictly adhered to
the recommendation from manufacturer or appointed authorized local
competent agent.
3.21. The flow meter shall provide with a Modbus card.
TS/M/S50/4
MECHANICAL WORKS
4. Thermal Energy Metering Device/ Heat meter (BTU METER)
4.1. The heat meters shall be considered as a system and shall calculate the total
heat energy transferred through the heat exchanger, using supply & return
temperature and total flow measurements.
4.2. Temperature measurement shall be made by sensors mounted in both supply

and return flow lines. The sensors shall be dedicated to the heat meter and not
connected to any other instrument. A 2nd sensor or temperature transmitter
may be mounted in the same sensor assembly, with approval from the site
Supervisor.
4.3. The form and style of the temperature sensor shall be suitable for the heat
meter calculation, with low sensitivity to ambient noise and well-defined
temperature relations. Preferred styles are Platinum sensors 100 W and 500
W, 2 or 4 wire configuration. Jumpers at the heat meter will not be accepted
in 4-wire configuration.
4.4. The flow meter location shall be selectable on-site according to installation
possibilities, and the sense of flow (supply or return) shall be programmable
into the energy calculator after installation.
4.5. The flow meter signal shall be pulsed at a rate suitable for the flow rate and
the heat meter, not to exceed 400 Hz. The selection of pulse rate and width
shall be made on site according to the application. Flow meters with second
pulse or 4-20 mA outputs for transmission directly to the Building
Management System (BMS) will be preferred.
4.6. All Flow meter parameters shall be stored in non-volatile memory.
4.7. Factory calibration reports shall be supplied with each Flow meter.
4.8. The installation of the Flow meter shall strictly adhere to the
recommendations from the manufacturer.
TS/M/S50/5
MECHANICAL WORKS
4.9. The heat meter shall have the following basic characteristics:
a) Basic functions
i. Optical data reading in accordance with EN 1434
ii. Instantaneous values for energy/volume flow
iii. 24 months’ memory
iv. Error logging with date and time stamp
b) Additional functions
i. Battery back-up of real time clock in the event of power

failure
ii. Output of the last 3 months’ peak power/ flow
iii. Cut-off date output
Calculation of energy shall be approved in accordance with EN 1434 and

based on the following formula:
Energy = Volume x (THot - TCold ) x Kfactor (Ti )
where,
Volume: Volume [m³] of a given amount of water
THot : Measured temperature in the flow,
TCold : Measured temperature in the return,
K factor (Ti): Thermal coefficient of water based on the polynomial

associated with Dr. Stuck's tables of enthalpy and heat content,
Calculation temperature range T: 0 ... 170 °C,
Permissible differential temperature Dt: 3 ... 150 K,
Flow range Qn (or qp, minimum flows according to EN or OIML

standards) to 25000 m3 /h
TS/M/S50/6
MECHANICAL WORKS
c) Temperature input
i. Measuring range 0 ... 170 °C, differential temperature 3 ... 170 K
ii. Sensor type Pt 500 / Pt 100 (IEC 751), sensor connection 2 or 4

wire
iii. Measurement resolution 0.01 °C
d) Flow input
i. Pulse/frequency <400 Hz
ii. Pulse ON time >0.5 ms
iii. Pulse OFF time <1.5 ms
e) Network
All BTU meters shall be linked to each other via a MOD-BUS and
linked to the BAS system.
4.10. A/D converter of the BTU meter should have a minimum resolution of 16-bit.
This applies to direct data acquisition from the BTU meter
TS/M/S50/7
MECHANICAL WORKS
SECTION 51 - DIGITAL POWER METER
1. General

the power meter, current transformer and the associated accessories.
1.2 All the power meter shall be carefully selected and be entirely suitable for
their particular services.
1.3 All the power meter and current transformer accuracy and testing shall
comply to SS591 long term measurement of central chilled water system
energy efficiency, IEEE 519, IEC 61869 Part 2, IEC 61869 Part 3, IEC
61869 Part 5, IEC 62053 Part 22 and latest green mark version under
building and construction authority,
1.4 All power meter shall install according to manufacturer recommended

standard and commission by competent person for all CT ratio setting
requirement.
2. Digital Power Meter Unit
2.1. General Provisions
2.1.1 All setup parameters required by the Power Meter shall be stored
in nonvolatile memory and retained in the event of a control
power interruption.
2.1.2 The Power Meter may be applied in three-phase, three- or four-

wire systems.
2.1.3 The Power Meter shall be capable of being applied without

modification at nominal frequencies of 50Hz.
2.1.4 All Power meters shall be linked to each other via a MOD-BUS
and linked to the BAS system
TS/M/S51/1
MECHANICAL WORKS
2.2. Measured values
The Power Meter shall provide the following, true RMS metered
quantities:
2.2.1 Real-Time Readings
a) Current (per phase & neutral, 3 phase average )
b) Voltage (line-line, line-neutral, 3 phase average)
c) Real, Reactive & Apparent Power (Per-Phase, 3-Phase

Total)
d) Power Factor, True & Displacement (Per-Phase, 3-Phase

Total)
e) Frequency
f) THD (Current and Voltage)
2.2.2 Energy Readings
a) Accumulated Energy - Real kWh, Reactive kVarh,

Apparent KVAh (Signed/Absolute)
b) Reactive Energy by Quadrant
2.2.3 Demand Readings
a) Demand Current Calculations - peak, present, running

average, last completed interval (per-phase, 3-phase avg,
Neutral)
b) Demand Real, Reactive & Apparent Power Calculations -

peak, present, running average, last completed interval (3-
Phase Total)
c) Average Power Factor Calculations, Demand Coincident

(3-Phase Total)
TS/M/S51/2
MECHANICAL WORKS
2.2.4 Power Analysis Values
a) THD – Voltage, Current (3-Phase, Per-Phase, Neutral)
b) Displacement Power Factor (Per-Phase, 3-Phase)
c) Fundamental Voltage & Current, Magnitude and Angle

(Per-Phase)
d) Fundamental Real Power (Per-Phase, 3-Phase)
e) Fundamental Reactive Power (Per-Phase)
f) Harmonic Power (Per-Phase, 3-Phase)
g) Phase Rotation
h) Unbalance (Current and Voltage)
i) Each harmonic Magnitudes & Angles for Current and

Voltages (Per Phase) up to the 31st Harmonic.
2.3. Demand
All power demand calculations shall use any one of the following
calculation methods, selectable by the user:
2.3.1 Thermal demand using a sliding window updated every second

for the present demand and at the end of the interval for the last
interval. The window length shall be user selectable from 1-60
minutes in 1 minute increments.
2.3.2 Block interval, with optional sub-intervals. The window length

shall be user selectable from 1-60 minutes in 1 minute intervals.
The user shall be able to set the sub-interval length from 1-60
minutes in 1 minute intervals. The following Block methods
shall be available:
a) Sliding Block that calculates demand every second with

intervals less than 15 minutes and every 15 seconds with
an interval between 15 and 60 minutes.
b) Fixed Block that calculates demand at the end of the

interval
TS/M/S51/3
MECHANICAL WORKS
c) Rolling Block that a subinterval is configured. Demand is

calculated at the end of each subinterval and displays at
the end of the interval.
2.3.3 Demand can be calculated using a Synchronization signal:
a) Demand can be synchronized to an input pulse from an

external source. The demand period begins with every
pulse. A synchronized input can be configured to either a
block or rolling block calculation
b) Demand can be synchronized to a communication signal.

This can be configured to either a block or rolling block
calculation
c) Demand can be synchronized to the clock in the Power

Meter.
2.4. Sampling
2.4.1 The current and voltage signals shall be digitally sampled at a

rate high enough to provide true rms accuracy to the 63 rd
harmonic (fundamental of 50 Hz).
2.4.2 The Power Meter shall provide continuous sampling at a

minimum of up to 128 samples/cycle, simultaneously on all
voltage and current channels in the meter.
2.5. Minimum and Maximum Values
2.5.1 The Power Meter shall provide minimum and maximum values
for the following parameters:
a) Voltage line-line, line-neutral
b) Current per phase
c) Voltage Unbalance line-line, line-neutral
d) Power Factor, true & displacement
e) Real, Reactive & Apparent Power Total
TS/M/S51/4
MECHANICAL WORKS
f) THD Voltage & Current
g) Frequency
2.5.2 For each min/max value listed above, the Power Meter shall
record the following attributes:
a) Date/Time of the min/max value
b) Min/Max. Value
c) Phase of recorded Min/Max (for multi-phase quantities)
d) Minimum and maximum values shall be available via

communications and display.
2.6. Harmonic Resolution
2.6.1 Advanced harmonic information shall be available via the Power

Meter. This shall include the calculation of the harmonic
magnitudes and angles for each phase voltage and current
through the 31st harmonic.
2.6.2 Harmonic information shall be available for all three phases,

current and voltage, plus the residual current. To ensure
maximum accuracy for analysis, the current and voltage
information for all phases shall be obtained simultaneously from
the same cycle.
2.6.3 The harmonic magnitude shall be reported as a percentage of the

fundamental or as a percentage of the rms values, as selected by
the user.
2.7. Current Inputs
2.7.1 The Power Meter shall accept current inputs from standard
instrument current transformers with 5 amp secondary output and
shall have a metering range of 0-10 amps with the following
withstand currents: 15 amp continuous, 50 amp 10 sec per hour,
500 amp 1 sec per hour.
2.7.2 Current transformer primaries through 327 kA shall be

supported.
TS/M/S51/5
MECHANICAL WORKS
2.8. Voltage Inputs
2.8.1 The Power Meter shall allow connection to circuits up to 600

volts AC without the use of potential transformers. The Power
Meter shall also accept voltage inputs from standard instrument
potential transformers with 110 volt secondary output. The
Power Meter shall support PT primaries through 3.2 MV.
2.8.2 The nominal full scale input of the Power Meter shall be 347
Volts AC L-N, 600 Volts AC L-L. The meter shall accept a
metering over-range of 50%. The input impedance shall be
greater than 2 Ohm.
2.9. Accuracy
2.9.1 The Power Meter shall comply with ANSI C12.20 Class 0.5 and
IEC 60687 Class 0.5 for revenue meters.
2.9.2 The Power Meter shall be accurate to 0.25% of reading +0 .025%

of full scale for power and energy. Voltage and current shall be
accurate to 0.075% of reading plus 0.025% of full scale. Power
factor metering shall be accurate to 0.002 from 0.5 leading to
0.5 lagging. Frequency metering shall be accurate 0.01 Hz at
45-67 Hz.
2.9.3 These accuracies shall be maintained for both light and full
loads.
2.9.4 No annual calibration shall be required to maintain this accuracy.
2.10. Input / Output
2.10.1 The Power Meter shall supply 1 digital input and 1 digital solid
state output/KY pulse output as standard.
2.10.2 The Power Meter shall be capable of operating a solid state KY

output relay to provide output pulses for a user definable
increment of reported energy. Minimum relay life shall be in
excess of one billion operations. The standard KY output shall
operate up to 240 volt AC, 300 volt DC, 96mA max, and provide
3750 volt rms isolation.
TS/M/S51/6
MECHANICAL WORKS
2.10.3 The Power Meter shall support multiple input/output including

digital inputs, mechanical relay outputs. This I/O shall be in the
form of module that can be field installable.
2.10.4 The digital inputs shall have four operating modes:
a) Normal mode for simple on/off digital inputs
b) Demand Interval Synch Pulse to accept a demand synch

pulse from a utility demand meter
c) Conditional Energy Control input to control conditional

energy accumulation.
2.10.5 The optional relay output module shall provide a load voltage
range from 20 to 240 VAC or from 20 to 30 VDC. It shall
support a load current of 2A.
2.11. Logging
2.11.1 The Power Meter shall provide for onboard data logging. Each
Power Meter shall be able to log data, alarms and events, and
waveforms. The Meter shall have 80kb of on-board nonvolatile
memory. Logged information to be stored in each Power Meter
include the following:
a) Billing Log: The Power Meter shall store in non-volatile

memory a configurable billing log that is updated every 15
minutes. Data shall be recorded by month, day and 15
minute interval. The log shall contain 24 months of
monthly data, 32 days of daily data and between 2 to 52
days of 15 minute interval data depending on the number
of quantities selected.
b) Custom Data Logs: The Power Meter shall provide 1 data.

Each entry shall be date and time stamped to the second.
The log entry shall hold data of up to 96 parameters each.
In addition, it shall be possible for a user to define an
event. Data logs can be configured by users to be Fill &
Hold or Circular (FIFO).
TS/M/S51/7
MECHANICAL WORKS
c) Alarm Log. This log shall contain time, date, event

information, and coincident information for each user
defined alarm or event.
2.11.2 The Power Meter shall have default values for the data log
loaded at the factory and begin on device power up.
2.12. Alarming
2.121 Alarm events shall be user definable.
2.12.2 The user shall be able to define over 50 alarm conditions.
2.12.3 The following shall be available as alarm events:
a) Over/under current & voltage
b) Current & voltage imbalance
c) Phase loss, current & voltage
d) Over kW Demand
e) Phase reversal
f) Digital Input OFF/ON
g) End of incremental energy interval
h) End of demand interval
2.12.4 For each over/under metered value alarm, the user shall be able
to define a pick-up, drop-out, and delay.
2.12.5 There shall be four alarm severity levels in order make it easier
for the user to respond to the most important events first.
2.12.6 Indication of an alarm condition shall be given on the front

panel.
TS/M/S51/8
MECHANICAL WORKS
2.13. Feature Addition
It shall be possible to field upgrade the firmware in the Power Meter to

enhance functionality. These firmware upgrades shall be done through the
communication connection and shall allow upgrades of individual meters
or groups. No disassembly or changing of integrated circuit chips shall be
required and it will not be necessary to de-energize the circuit or the
equipment to perform the upgrade.
2.14. Control Power
The Power Meter shall operate properly over a wide range of control
power including 90-457 VAC or 100-300 VDC.
2.15. Communications
The Power Meter shall communicate via RS-485 Modbus protocol or

other protocol subject to the approval of the S.O..
2.16. Display
2.16.1 The Power Meter display shall also allow the user to select a
date/time format.
2.16.2 The Power Meter display shall be back lit LCD for easy viewing,
display shall also be anti-glare and scratch resistant
2.16.3 The Display shall be capable of allowing the user to view four
values on one screen at the same time. A summary screen shall
also be available to allow the user to view a snapshot of the
system.
2.16.4 The Power Meter display shall provide local access to the
following metered quantities:
a) Current, per phase rms, 3-phase average and neutral (if

applicable)
b) Voltage, phase-to-phase, phase-to-neutral, and 3-phase

average (phase-to-phase and phase-to-neutral)
TS/M/S51/9
MECHANICAL WORKS
c) Real power, per phase and 3-phase total
d) Reactive power, per phase and 3-phase total
e) Apparent power, per phase and 3-phase total
f) Power factor, 3-phase total and per phase
g) Frequency
h) Demand current, per phase and three phase average
i) Demand real power, three phase total
j) Demand apparent power, three phase total
k) Accumulated Energy, (MWh and MVARh)
l) THD, current and voltage, per phase
2.16.5 Reset of the following electrical parameters shall also be allowed

from the Power Meter display:
a) Peak demand current
b) Peak demand power (kW) and peak demand apparent

power (kVA)
c) Energy (MWh) and reactive energy (MVARh)
2.16.6 Setup for system requirements shall be allowed from the Power
Meter display. Setup provisions shall include:
a) CT rating
b) PT rating
c) System type [three-phase, 3-wire] [three-phase, 4-wire]
TS/M/S51/10
MECHANICAL WORKS
d) Watt-hours per pulse
2.16.7 The individual power meter for each equipment rack supply need
not be equipped with its own display.
3. Current Transformer (CT)
3.1 Current transformers necessary for the operation of instruments and

meters shall be of "straight through" type, with not less than 15VA burden
and accuracy of class 0.5 for Digital power meter/Energy meter/KWH
meter, Class 1 for ammeter and class 5P20 for protection to BS
3938:1973.
3.2 Current transformers shall be adequately rated in V.A. to carry the

summation of all V.A. burdens of connected loads, and shall be capable of
carrying currents of the corresponding circuit breakers and fuses. They
shall be capable of operation, without damage, with open circuited
secondary and full load current flowing in the primary. They shall comply
with the latest EMA’s requirements.
3.3 Current transformers shall be adequately supported and installed as to

permit easy access and shall be readily replaceable, if necessary, without
dismantling the adjacent equipment.
3.4 Current transformers shall comply with B.S. 3938 or IEC 185. They shall
be manufactured from high impact flame retardant moulded cases suitable
for mounting on 105o C bus bars and to IP40.
3.5 All current transformers shall have the following characteristics :-
a) Rated 660Vac max.

b) Dielectric strength --- 2.5 kV/min.
c) Temperature -20o C to +70o C ambient
d) Short circuit thermal current (Ith) --- 60 times rated primary
current for 1 sec.
e) Rated dynamic current --- 2.55 short circuit thermal current (Ith)
TS/M/S51/11
MECHANICAL WORKS
SECTION 52 – MOTION SENSORS AND LFL ANALYZERS
1. Motion Sensor Detection System
1.1 Motion detectors are to provide for auto start/stop the lighting and
air-conditioning units (i.e. VRV FCU).
1.2 The areas for motion detection system shall deploy in areas that
include office areas, conference room, toilets, individual office room,
laboratory areas.
1.3 All motion detectors shall operate on a standalone system in all areas
except laboratory areas.
1.4 Motion detectors in laboratory areas shall be linked to Programmable

Logic Controllers (PLCs) to sense motion in the laboratory and the
PLC shall regulate the AHU VSD speed to maintain its required air
flow.
1.5 The contractor shall ensure the correct application of motion

1.6 The Dual Technology sensor shall be capable of detecting presence

in the control area by detecting doppler shifts in transmitted
ultrasound and passive infrared heat changes.
1.7 Sensor shall utilize Dual Sensing Verification Principle for

lighting on.
1.8 Sensor shall have a retrigger feature in which detection by either

technology shall retrigger the lighting system on within 5 seconds of
being switched off.
1.9 Ultrasonic sensing shall be volumetric in coverage with a frequency

of 40 KHz. It shall utilize Advanced Signal Processing which
automatically adjusts the detection threshold dynamically to
compensate for constantly changing levels of activity and air flow
throughout controlled space.
1.10 Sensor shall be capable of corner mounting to a wall or ceiling in

order to eliminate detection through open doorways and outside of
controlled area. To provide superior small motion detection and
immediate activation upon entry, coverage of both technologies must
be complete and overlapping throughout the controlled area.
TS/M/S52/1
MECHANICAL WORKS
1.11 To avoid false ON activations and to provide immunity to RFI and

EMI, Detection Signature Analysis shall be used to examine the
frequency, duration, and amplitude of a signal, to respond only to
those signals caused by human motion.
1.12 Sensor shall operate at 24 VDC/VAC and halfwave rectified and

1.13 The PIR technology shall utilize a temperature compensated, dual

element sensor and a multi-element Fresnel lens. The lens shall be
Poly IR4 material to offer superior performance in the infrared
wavelengths and filter short wavelength IR, such as those emitted by
the sun and other visible light sources. The lens shall have grooves
facing in to avoid dust and residue build up which affects IR
reception.
1.14 The lens shall cover up to 2000 sq ft for walking motion when
1.15 Sensors shall have an additional single-pole, double throw isolated

relay with normally open, normally closed and common outputs. The
isolated relay is for use with HVAC control, data logging, and other
control options.
1.16 Sensors shall utilize SmartSet technology to optimize time delay and
sensitivity settings to fit occupant usage patterns. The use of
SmartSet shall be selectable with a DIP switch.
1.17 Sensors shall have a time delay that is adjusted automatically (with
the SmartSet setting) or shall have a fixed time delay of 5 to 30
1.18 Sensors shall feature a walk-through mode, where lights turn off 3
minutes after the area is initially occupied if no motion is detected
after the first 30 seconds.
1.19 Sensor shall have an override ON function for use in the event of a
failure.
1.20 Sensor shall have a built-in light level sensor that works from 10 to
300 footcandles.
1.21 Sensor shall have 8 occupancy logic options for customized control
to meet application needs.
1.22 Sensor shall have a manual on function that is facilitated by

TS/M/S52/2
MECHANICAL WORKS
1.23 Each sensing technology shall have an LED indicator that remains
active at all times in order to verify detection within the area to be
controlled. The LED can be disabled.
1.24 To ensure quality and reliability, sensor shall be manufactured by an

ISO 9002 certified manufacturing facility and shall have a defect rate
of less than 1/3 of 1%.
1.25 Sensor shall have standard 5 year warranty and shall be UL and CUL
listed.
2. LOW FLAMMABLE LIMIT (LFL/LEL) MONITORING
2.1 The Low flammable Limit monitoring sensors shall be provided to

monitor mixtures of flammable vapors and to control /stop the
AHU’s or equipments from operating.
2.2 The units shall equippied with indicators,relays,4-20mA output and

RS – 485 Serial Port for intergration into command and control
system.
2.3 The sensors shall be able to withstand corrosive compounds that may
be present in the atmosphere. And the sensor must not be subjected
to poisoning by organo – metallics, halogenated hydrocarbons,
silicones or plasticizers.
2.4 The analazers shall have built in purge port, high temperature
insulation, flame arrestor, flame cell window with fully heated
sensor assembly.
2.5 The analazer shall be able to intergrate with PLC, plant wide data
acquisition system or control process system.
2.6 The unit shall come with weatherproof housing for external
installation.
2.7 Sensor shall have standard 5 year warranty and shall be UL and CUL
listed.
TS/M/S52/3
MECHANICAL WORKS
SECTION 54 – WATER STORAGE TANKS
1. General
1.1. This section covers the supply, delivery, installation, testing,

the of water storage tanks.
1.2. The Water Service Installation shall be executed in accordance with the
1.3. All the water fitting, water storage tank or any materials used shall be
1.4. All the water fitting, water storage tank or any materials used shall
1.5. The test report that issued by a testing laboratory shall be accredited by
rejected
1.6. Water storage tanks shall be provided with electrode water level
controller pipe that shall indicate the actual volume of the storage
cisterns, and water gauge for visual inspection.
1.7. The contractor shall engage a professional engineer (PE) registered with
the Professional Engineer Board, Singapore to submit and endorse on the
structural design calculations for the water tank exceeding two tiers. In
addition, the PE shall also certify that the site installation for the water
tank has been properly constructed and installed upon completion of
work.
1.8. Hot-dipped galvanised RSJ shall be provided for all the tanks. The load
on the RSJ shall be based on the tank being filled completely with water,
and not based on the effective capacity.
TS/M/S54/1
MECHANICAL WORKS
2. GRP Tank for NEWater
2.1 Where specified, glass reinforced polyester (GRP) sectional tanks shall
be of proprietary manufacture complying with SS 245 : Specification for
glass reinforced polyester sectional water tanks. and approved by the
relevant authorities.
2.2 The sectional panels shall be manufactured by hot moulding process.
2.3 The sectional panels shall be resistant to ultra-violet (UV) radiation,

opaque and grey coloured (Munsell Value N7.0).
2.4 The tank shall be internally reinforced by tie-rods or struts manufactured

from stainless steel. All fasteners in contact with water shall be of
stainless steel material.
2.5 External reinforcement shall be hot-dipped galvanised structural steel.

All fasteners shall be of stainless steel or be hot-dipped galvanised.
2.6 The entire tank shall be uniformly supported on a steel sub-frame without
any torsion or distortion. The sub-frame shall be level and all welds grind
flat to the tank manufacturer's recommendations. The sub-frame shall be
blast cleaned to BS 4232 Second Quality and primed with zinc-rich anti-
corrosion primer. The top coat shall be approved epoxy paint. The sub-
frame shall be anchored to the concrete footing.
3. Accessories
Water storage tank shall be installed complete with valve inlets and outlets,
overflow pipe, warning pipe, drainage valve and pipe, access manhole hatch
with hinged cover and approved padlock, air vents with insect screen, water
level indicators, support stiffeners and internal bracing for panels. Water tanks of
2m depth or more shall be provided with internal and external stainless steel or
aluminium ladder.
3.1. Water Gauge (Water Level Indicator)
The water gauge shall have bronze fittings, glass tube protected by a rod
cage, and a safety shut-off valve to prevent the escape of water through
the bottom gauge body in the event of damage to glass tube.
TS/M/S54/2
MECHANICAL WORKS
3.2. Electrode Water Level Controller Pipe
This pipe shall be custom-made for the fixing of sensitive electrodes for
the control of water-supply pumps and alarms and shall be used as an
electrode-testing pipe without having to drain the associated water tank.
It shall be interconnected with the water gauge for this testing purpose.
The pipe and fittings shall be PVC to SS 141. The electrode's adaptor-
holder shall be of Teflon or natural rubber for water-tight sealing.
The Tank shall provide with local control panel complete with the
following for the interfacing with the makeup water pump:
a) High level indication and contact

b) Low level indication and contact
c) Pump start indication and contact
d) Pump off indication and contact
3.3. Air Vent
Air Vent shall be of the "mushroom type" with insect-proof net and of 50
mm diameter.
3.4. Access Manholes
Access manhole shall be complete with lid and handle and have a clear
opening of at least 600 mm x 600 mm, or 600 mm diameter. Each
compartment shall have one manhole.
3.5. Float Stilling Well
The stilling well shall be made of stainless steel, GRP or UPVC of

diameter 150 mm.
3.6. Pipes
Overflow pipe, supply pipe, discharge pipe and drain pipe shall be
provided. Flanged joints shall be used for connecting pipes to the tanks.
3.7. Ladders
Outside and inside ladders shall be made of stainless steel or aluminium

and fixed to the tank next to access manholes.
3.8. Supports for Panel
Interior supports shall be chemically resistant to the quality of water

stored. They shall be made of stainless steel, GRP or UPVC.
TS/M/S54/3
MECHANICAL WORKS
4. Internal Partitions
Water storage tanks shall be partitioned into two separate compartments as

indicated in the drawings. The inlet and outlet pipework shall be so arranged to
enable one compartment to function in the event the other compartment is not
available.
5. Stainless steel storage tank
5.1. Materials
General : Provide panel type water storage

tank, completed with base frame
resting on concrete plinth.
Panel : Grade 316 stainless steel of at least

gauge 10.
Panel lining : Glass reinforced plastic.
Bolts, nuts and washers : Grade 316 stainless steel, for both
internal and external. Bolts and
nuts to be rated at least of grade 8.8.
Tie rods : Grade 316 stainless steel.
Base frame : Galvanised structural steel sections.
Accessories : Grade 316 stainless steel, unless

5.2. Construction
Base frame: Constructed from galvanized steel sections, welded and

grind flat. Blast clean to BS 4232 Second Quality and primed with zinc-
rich antic-corrosion primer before applying 2 coats of epoxy paint.
Anchored the base frame to the concrete plinth.
Water tight penetration: Provide factory made penetrations on panels, by

opening a hole in the panel, and welding a nipple (a short length of pipe)
of the required size and same material to panels. Provide BS PN 10
flanges to the end of the nipples for pipe connections. Where necessary,
provide nipples and flanges on both sides of the opening for connections.
Locate penetrations not more than 2.0 m way from an access manhole.
TS/M/S54/4
MECHANICAL WORKS
5.3. Accessories
Internal and external cat ladder: Provide grade 316 stainless steel cat
ladder for water tanks higher than 2.0 m, securely bolted to the side of
the tank. Locate the cat ladder below the access manhole.
Manhole: Provide factory made, diameter 600 mm hinged and lockable

access manhole, providing full protection against ingress of rain water.
Provide Handles for lifting of the manholes. Provide at least one access
manhole per tank or partition. Provide additional manhole access such
that every point in the water tank is not more than 4.0 m, and any
penetration not more than 2.0 m measured horizontally, away from a
manhole.
Air vents: Provide minimum 2 units of diameter 50mm air vents per tank
or compartment, complete with rain cowl and insect screen.
Level indicators: Provide one unit of at least diameter 25 glass tube

protected by a rod cage level indicators installed outside each water tank
or compartment. Provide isolation valves immediately at the penetration
to the water tank panel.
Internal piping: Provide grade 316 stainless steel pipes for all internal
piping, of the appropriate diameter.
Warning pipes: Provide 1 uPVC warning pipe per tank or compartment,

terminated at a minimum horizontal distance of 100 mm from the water
tank or to an auspicious location. Provide insect screen at the discharge
end of the pipes.
Overflow pipes: Provide 1 uPVC overflow pipe per tank or compartment,

run the pipe vertically down from the overflow penetration to ground
level before terminating to the nearest internal drain. Overflow pipes
from the same tank but different compartment may be joined at ground
level before routing to the drain. Provide insect screen at the discharge
end of the pipes.
Warning alarm shall be provided to effectively indicate when the water

reaches a level not less than 50mm below the invert of the overflow pipe.
Insect screens: Provide maximum 2mm bronze or brass wire mesh

securely tighten to the openings using stainless steel clips.
TS/M/S54/5
MECHANICAL WORKS
6. Pipe Connections to Water Storage Tanks
All flanges of inlet and outlet pipes that are in contact with the water storage
tank shall be of stainless steel. Flanges of UPVC type overflow pipe, warning
pipe and drainage pipe shall be of UPVC. All bolts, nuts and washers used shall
be of stainless steel.
7. Pumps and Motors
7.1 The Contractor shall supply and install water pump sets of capacities and
types as shown in the drawings and in accordance with the following
specification.
7.2 For each pumping installation the system shall be complete and include
all necessary brackets, supports, flexible joints, valves, pipe fittings,
starter and controls, pressure gauges, float switches, level controls, etc.
for the proper functioning and control of the system.
7.3 All pumps shall be approved manufacture of the centrifugal, single stage
volute type and shall be manufactured in the country of origin of the
7.4 Each pump shall be capable of delivering not less than the quantity of
water indicated on drawings and against the design head.
7.5 All pumps shall be capable of handling water in the range of 3o to 50o
continuous operation.
7.6 The pumps shall be complete non-overloading for any point on its head
flow characteristic curve.
7.7 The pump selection shall be such that the impeller diameter fitted for the
design duty is not greater than 90% of the maximum impeller diameter
which can be fitted and the duty point efficiency shall be within 5% of
the maximum efficiency.
7.8 The System Head required shall be determined by the Contractor based
on the pipe sizes as shown in the drawing and the numbers of types of
fittings to be supplied and installed. It shall be the sole responsibility of
the Contractor to ensure the pump head selected is adequate for the
efficient function of the system. Detailed calculations of pump heads
shall be submitted to the Superintending Officer for approval prior to the
purchase of the pumps.
7.9 The pump speed shall not exceed 1500 rpm. In the event that the
recourse has to be made to pumping equipment operating on speed above
1500 rpm, approval of the Superintending Officer shall be sought before
hand.
TS/M/S54/6
MECHANICAL WORKS
7.10 The pump casing, back-plate, impeller and shaft shall be constructed of
stainless steel and fitted with approved type mechanical seals.
7.11 Casing construction shall be of horizontal split design; however, if of a

vertical split construction, pump's suction and back covers shall be
removable, allowing for complete removal of the rotating element
without disturbing the suction and delivering piping of the pump.
7.12 The pumps shall be coupled directly to an approved Class 'F' insulation,
drip proof (IP54), TEFC motor, suitable for 400 volt, 3- phase, 50 Hz
power supply.
7.13 Each pump shall be bolted to a steel base and 100mm thick reinforced
concrete inertia block. Spring and ribbed neoprene vibration isolation
mounting shall support the inertia block onto a concrete plinth. The
springs shall have a maximum deflection of 25 mm.
7.14 Pump flow-head characteristic curves shall be submitted for approval

before ordering.
7.15 For each pump installation, the following fittings are required as a
minimum:

h) 100 mm diameter flow meters complete with stop cock, at

discharge.
TS/M/S54/7
MECHANICAL WORKS
7.16 The pump starter/control panel shall be with the following minimum
features:
g) Pump "Stop" "Running" "Fault" indication light (each pump),

Light bulb shall be of 24V LED type easily replacable.
h) Power meter: only one such meter is required per control panel
and interface to BAS
i) Ammeter : direct reading and approved type (each pump)
j) Voltmeter
l) Provision for BAS monitoring of the pumps status and water tank
Hi-Lo level
m) Start / Stop Command overrided by BAS
o) All pumps shall be VSD controlled.
TS/M/S54/8
MECHANICAL WORKS
8. Pneumatic Booster System
8.1 General
a) The Contractor shall supply and install package booster unit for
the cold water supply, of capacity and requirements as shown in
the drawings.
b) The package booster unit shall be complete with a pressure gas

filled tank, pressure gauge, suction and discharge piping
assembly, complete with test pipes to nearest drain with necessary
valves pressure switches, check valves, isolating valves, flow
switch, strainers, pumps, control panel and mounting channels.
The booster unit shall be designed for parallel/alternate operation.
c) Any low water level in the water tank shall stop the pump
operation. The control wring shall be provided to indicate the
failure of the booster unit and activate the alarm at BAS Room.
d) Pressure Gauges where required shall have a range and

calibration suitable for the duty required with normal operating
pressure at the mid-point of the range of the gauge with
percentage error of not more than 1% of mid range. All tappings
for pressure gauges shall be provided with a gauge cock and
syphon tubes.
8.2 Pressure Tank
a) Pressure tank shall be constructed of heavy steel and pressure

tested to 150 p.s.i. The surfaces of the steel shall be coated with
approved material to ensure 100% corrosion resistance.
b) The tank shall be provided with heavy duty butyl diaphragm to

SS 375.
c) An air valve shall be provided for the introduction of compressed

air.
d) The tank shall provide an effective draw-of capacity within cut-in

and cut-off pressure as indicated in drawing.
8.3 Pressure Switch
a) Pressure switch shall be heavy duty with stepless adjustable cut-

in/out pressure adjustments. The pressure range shall be selected
to suit the system design (15 p.s.i. - 50 p.s.i.). It shall be corrosion
resistant and of weatherproof construction.
TS/M/S54/9
MECHANICAL WORKS
8.4 Compliance with PUB(Water Supply) Regulation
a) All materials provided and used by the Contractor shall comply

with PUB (Water Supply) regulations and requirements, and
approved by PSB. Certificate of approval by PSB for material
shall be submitted to the S.O. for approval.
8.5 Booster Pump Operation
a) The control circuit shall enable automatic and manual operations

of the group.
b) Automatic Operation
i) When the pressure of the system drop to pre-determined

specified value (P1), the duty pump shall be activated and
shall de-activate when the pressure reach another pre-
determined specified level.
ii) If the pressure of the system continue to drop to pressure

(P2), then when the duty pump is activated, the standby
pump shall be activated. Both duty and standby pumps
shall be de-activated when the require pressure is attained.
Start and stop indicating lights shall be provided for each
pump.
iii) Should the duty pump fail, the standby pump shall be
activated.
iv) Auto change-over relay shall be installed to alternate the

operation of the pumps.
v) The trip light shall be activated when the overload trip of

the pump is activated.
vi) Warning alarm bell and indicating red light shall be

activated when Overload trip of pump or Failure
operation of duty pump occurs. The bell shall be cancelled
when acknowledged, However, the indicating red light
shall continue until the fault is corrected.
c) Manual Operation
i) Either one or both pumps shall be capable of being started

and stopped by their respective push buttons.
ii) The control panel and circuit proposal shall be submitted

by the Contractor to the S.O. for approval before
construction.
TS/M/S54/10
MECHANICAL WORKS
9. Screening of Openings
Vent pipe ends, drain pipe ends and overflow pipe ends shall be provided with
suitable provision for preventing the entry of vermin and insects to the
requirements of the Environmental Public Health Division.
10. Water Flow Meters
10.1 Water flow meters where indicated in the drawings shall be of type
comprising "diamond-shape" sensor and "Eagle Eye" Flow meter.
10.2 The accuracy of the water flow meter shall be +/- 1% of actual value with
repeatability of +/- 0.1% of actual value. The water flow meter shall be
of approved standard.
10.3 All supplied water flow meter shall comply with the meter specification.
The supplied water shall be of digital type with meter bus
communication for the interfacing of the BAS system
11. Security Padlock
Contractor shall provide PUB approved security padlock and installation for the
water tank access panel. Keys shall handover to employer directly
12. Chilled Water Expansion Make-up Water Tank System
The Contractor shall ensure that the make-up water tank system has sufficient
water supply to the chilled water system with the water tank level provided.
13. Water tank construction.
13.1. The tank shall be constructed in such a way that it can be opened for
checking
13.2. The tanks shall be externally insulated with 50 mm thickness or non-CFC

rigid polyurethane form insulation and sheathed with 20 gauge aluminum
sheet.
13.3. Each tank shall have a suitable isolation gate valve, check valve, ball
float valve, overflow, drain and outlet connections. The ball valves shall
be fitted at approximately the two-thirds tank level with the ball float
adjusted to close the valve at half tank level, and to reset at bottom of
tank when empty. A water level gauge complete with gauge cocks,
blow-off cocks and glass shall be fitted to the side of the tank.
13.4. The chilled water pipe connection to the tank shall be

insulated as for chilled water pipes.
TS/M/S54/11
MECHANICAL WORKS
13.5. The tanks supporting steel work shall be of hot dipped galvanized iron
angle construction, and painted with a minimum of two coats of
corrosion resistance primers to the S.O.'s approval.
13.6. The Sub-Contractor shall submit P.E. endorsed plans of the expansion
tank supporting steel work for the S.O.'s approval.
13.7. High/Low level sensors shall be installed for alarm control
13.8. Water flow meter shall be installed at the incoming water supply and
interface to BAS system
13.9. Expansion water tank shall install at the highest point above the chilled
water pipe system for proper expansion.
TS/M/S54/12
MECHANICAL WORKS
SECTION 57 – LABORATORY AIR-FLOW CONTROL SYSTEM
1. General
1.1 This section sets out the requirements for the laboratory air-flow
control system and associated work.
1.2 Air quantity as shown in the Drawings is only given as a guide. The
Sub-Contractor’s specialist Sub-Contractor shall design and propose to
suit the space, temperature and NC level required.
ASHRAE Fundamentals Handbook.
1.4 System Description
A laboratory airflow control system shall control the airflow into and
out of laboratory rooms. The air flow balance of a laboratory shall be
precisely controlled to maintain the directional airflow requirement.
It shall display in the sash controller, DDC, BMS and IBMS station on
individual devices airflow measurement.
The system shall also include the summation of room total supply and
exhaust and display in DDC, BMS and IBMS station
1.5 Compliance Schedule
a) The Sub-Contractor shall submit a clause-by-clause statement

compliance schedule. Where there are deviations in the Sub-
Contractor’s proposal, the Sub-Contractor shall describe what
specific and alternative approach has been taken and the impact
this will have on the sizing of the air delivery systems, the
required cooling and heating capacities, energy costs, and
maintenance of building.
b) The Sub-Contractor shall be required to submit a letter of

compliance, signed by a corporate officer of the laboratory air-
flow control system manufacturer, certifying the compliance
and as stated above.
TS/M/S57/1
MECHANICAL WORKS
2. System Performance Requirements
2.1 Airflow Control System Description
a) Each individual laboratory room shall have a dedicated

laboratory airflow control system (Laboratory Local Control
Panel - Lab LCP).
b) The laboratory airflow control system shall employ

individual air flow controllers that directly measure the
area of the fume cupboard sash opening and the fume hood
air flow face velocity through the use of sash position
sensors and fume hood side wall flow velocity sensors. The
air flow sensor will continuously monitor bi-directional air
flow in the fume hood. The controllers shall provide
immediate response to face velocity changes caused by sash
position or other factors and proportionally control the fume
cupboard’s exhaust airflow to maintain a constant face velocity
over a minimum range of 20 to 100% of sash travel. The
corresponding minimum hood exhaust flow turndown ratio
shall be 5 to 1.
c) The fume cupboard exhaust airflow control device shall

respond to airflow changes and the fume cupboard sash
opening by achieving 90% of its commanded value within
ONE (1) second of the sash reaching 90% of its final position
(with no more than 5% overshoot/undershoot) of required
airflow. Rate of sash movement shall be between 1.0 to 1.5
feet per second.
d) The laboratory airflow control system shall maintain specific

airflow (± 5% of signal within ONE second of a change in duct
static pressure) regardless of the magnitude of the pressure
change (within 0.6" to 3.0" wc = water column), airflow change
or quantity of airflow control devices on the manifold.
e) The airflow control system shall use volumetric offset control

to maintain room pressurization. The system shall maintain
proper room pressurization polarity (negative or positive)
regardless of any change in room/system conditions, such as
rapid changes in duct static pressure. Systems using differential
pressure measurement or velocity measurement to control room
pressurization are unacceptable.
f) The airflow control system shall maintain specific airflow

(±5% of signal) with a minimum 16 to 1 turndown to insure
accurate pressurization at low airflow and guarantee the
maximum system diversity and energy efficiency.
TS/M/S57/2
MECHANICAL WORKS
2.2 Airflow Control Sound Specifications
a) Unless otherwise specified the airflow control device shall not

exceed the sound power levels in Table 1, Table 2 and Table 3.
b) If the airflow control device cannot meet the sound power level
specification, a properly sized silencer or sound attenuator shall
be provided. All silencers must be of a packless design
(constructed of at least 18 gauge 316L stainless steel when used
with fume cupboard exhaust) with a maximum pressure drop at
the device’s maximum rated flow rate not to exceed 0.20 inches
of water.
c) All proposed airflow control devices shall include discharge,

exhaust and radiated sound power level performance.
TS/M/S57/3
MECHANICAL WORKS
Table 1 - Exhaust Airflow Control Device Sound Power Level
Exhaust Sound Power Level in dB (re: 10-12 watts)

Octave Band 2 3 4 5 6 7
Number
Center Frequency 125 250 500 1000 Hz 2000 4000
in Hz H H H H H
z z z z z
1000-50 cfm Device
800 cfm @ 63 55 52 54 50 49
0.6" wc
200 cfm @ 46 42 38 37 32 25
0.6" wc
800 cfm @ 73 70 64 66 65 60
3.0" wc
200 cfm @ 51 52 51 50 52 51
3.0" wc
1500-100 cfm
Device
1200 cfm @ 65 58 53 56 52 52
0.6" wc
400 cfm @ 50 45 38 39 37 31
0.6" wc
1200 cfm @ 72 70 62 65 64 60
3.0" wc
400 cfm @ 55 57 55 53 56 55
3.0" wc
3000-200 cfm
Device
2400 cfm @ 63 56 55 58 54 55
0.6" wc
800 cfm @ 51 45 41 42 39 34
0.6" wc
2400 cfm @ 75 71 65 68 67 63
3.0" wc
800 cfm @ 58 58 56 56 59 58
3.0" wc
TS/M/S57/4
MECHANICAL WORKS
Table 2 - Supply Airflow Control Device Sound Power Level (Discharge)
Discharge Sound Power Level in

dB (re: 10-12 watts)
Number
in Hz Hz Hz Hz Hz Hz
1000-50 cfm Device
800 cfm @ 62 57 54 58 54 51
0.6" wc
200 cfm @ 45 46 42 44 40 34
0.6" wc
800 cfm @ 72 71 67 75 72 68
3.0" wc
200 cfm @ 53 56 54 58 56 54
3.0" wc
1500-100 cfm
Device
1200 cfm @ 63 59 55 60 54 53
0.6" wc
400 cfm @ 53 49 44 49 45 39
0.6" wc
1200 cfm @ 72 73 69 77 72 68
3.0" wc
400 cfm @ 58 63 61 63 60 57
3.0" wc
3000-200 cfm
Device
2400 cfm @ 64 60 58 63 56 56
0.6" wc
800 cfm @ 52 48 47 52 46 41
0.6" wc
2400 cfm @ 75 75 72 78 73 70
3.0" wc
800 cfm @ 59 62 62 66 62 60
3.0" wc
TS/M/S57/5
MECHANICAL WORKS
Table 3 - Supply Airflow Control Device Sound Power Level (Radiated)
Radiated Sound Power Level in dB

(re: 10-12 watts)
Number
in Hz Hz Hz Hz Hz Hz
1000-50 cfm Device
800 cfm @ 44 41 45 41 36 34
0.6" wc
200 cfm @ 33 28 31 29 26 20
0.6" wc
800 cfm @ 53 53 56 57 55 53
3.0" wc
200 cfm @ 41 38 41 39 39 37
3.0" wc
1500-100 cfm
Device
1200 cfm @ 47 53 40 42 38 36
0.6" wc
400 cfm @ 35 39 31 34 33 26
0.6" wc
1200 cfm @ 52 60 54 60 59 53
3.0" wc
400 cfm @ 42 44 43 46 46 42
3.0" wc
3000-200 cfm
Device
2400 cfm @ 58 56 45 47 43 42
0.6" wc
800 cfm @ 45 43 36 39 37 29
0.6" wc
2400 cfm @ 69 68 60 65 63 57
3.0" wc
800 cfm @ 54 53 48 51 50 48
3.0" wc
TS/M/S57/6
MECHANICAL WORKS
3. Materials
3.1 Airflow Control Device – General
a) The airflow control device shall be a venturi valve.
b) The airflow control device shall be pressure independent over

its specified differential static pressure operating range. An
integral pressure independent assembly shall respond and
maintain specific airflow within ONE (1) second of a change in
duct static pressure irrespective of the magnitude of pressure
and/or flow change or quantity of airflow controllers on a
manifolded system.
c) The airflow control device shall maintain accuracy within ± 5%

of signal over an airflow turndown range of no less than 16 to
1. No minimum entrance or exit duct diameters shall be
required to ensure accuracy and/or pressure independence.
d) The airflow control device shall be constructed of one of the

following three types:
i) Class A - The airflow control device for NON-

CORROSIVE airstreams such as supply and general
exhaust shall be constructed of 16 gauge aluminum.
The device's shaft and shaft support brackets shall be
made of 316 stainless steel. The pivot arm and internal
mounting link shall be made of aluminum. The
pressure independent springs shall be a spring grade
stainless steel. All shaft bearing surfaces shall be made
of a Teflon or Celenex composite. Sound attenuating
devices used in conjunction with general exhaust or
supply airflow control devices shall be constructed
using 24 gauge galvanized steel or other suitable
material used in standard duct construction. No sound
absorptive materials of any kind shall be used.
TS/M/S57/7
MECHANICAL WORKS
ii) Class B - The airflow control device for CORROSIVE

airstreams such as fume cupboards and biological
cabinets shall have a bakedon corrosion resistant
phenolic coating. The device's shaft shall be made of
316 stainless steel with a baked-on corrosion resistant
phenolic coating. The shaft support brackets shall be
made of 316 stainless steel. The pivot arm and internal
mounting link shall be made of 316 or 303 stainless
steel. The pressure independent springs shall be a
spring grade stainless steel. The internal nuts, bolts and
rivets shall be stainless steel. All shaft bearing surfaces
shall be made of a Teflon or Celenex composite.
iii) Class C - The airflow control device for HIGHLY

CORROSIVE airstreams shall be constructed as defined
in paragraph ii) above and in addition, shall have no
exposed aluminum or stainless steel components. Shaft
support brackets, pivot arm, internal mounting link, and
pressure independent springs shall have a baked-on
corrosion resistant phenolic coating in addition to the
materials defined in paragraph ii) above. The internal
nuts, bolts, and rivets shall be titanium or phenolic
coated stainless steel. Only devices clearly defined as
“High Corrosion Resistant” on project drawings will
require this construction.
e) For two-position or VAV operation, a electric actuator shall be

factory mounted to the valve. Loss of control power shall
cause normally open valves to fail to maximum position, and
normally closed valves to fail to minimum position. Electric
actuators that fail in last position are not acceptable. Constant
volume valves do not require actuators. The response time for
such actuators shall be less than one second.
TS/M/S57/8
MECHANICAL WORKS
f) Certification
i) Each airflow control device shall be factory calibrated

to the specified airflows detailed on the Drawings and
Specifications using NIST traceable air stations and
instrumentation having a combined accuracy of at least
± 1% of signal over the entire range of measurement.
Each airflow device shall be calibrated in the position
that it will be installed, either horizontal or vertical.
Electronic airflow control devices shall be further
calibrated and their accuracy verified to ± 5% of signal
at a minimum of eight different airflows across the full
operating range of the device.
ii) All airflow control devices shall be individually marked

with device specific, factory calibration data. As a
minimum, it should include: tag number, serial number,
model number, eight point characterization information
(for electronic devices), calibration position, either
horizontal or vertical, and quality control inspection
numbers. All information shall be stored by the
manufacturer for use with as-built documentation.
3.2 High Speed Electric Actuator for Venturi Valve
a) The electric actuator shall be a linear actuator complete with

lead-screw positioning. It shall be able to be powered by single
phase 240 V at 50 Hz. If required, transformer or adaptor shall
be provided.
b) The actuator shall be IP 56 rated. The actuator shall be

physically protected from rats and other pests that may damage
the actuator and its cabling.
c) The actuator shall have load limiting clutch and thermal motor
protection.
d) Quiet operation type of actuators are preferred. During

positioning, the noise generated shall not be more than RC 35
with suspended ceiling and not more than RC 55 without
suspended ceiling. While holding, there shall be no audible
noise from the actuator.
e) The control circuit shall be powered by single phase 240 V at

50 Hz. If required, transformer or adaptor shall be provided,
c/w low flow and jammed alarm.
TS/M/S57/9
MECHANICAL WORKS
f) The control shall include:
i) Electronic minimum / maximum clamps for main /

booster control
ii) Power loss detection with capacitive source to position

actuator
iii) Fail open, closed or to last position depending on

application
iv) Actuator inhibit while charging power loss capacitive

source
v) Actuator load feedback circuit
vi) Pressure differential sensor to indicate low flow signal
vii) Provide alarm when the actuator is jammed in

operational
3.3 Constant Volume Airflow Control Devices
The airflow control device shall maintain a constant airflow set point.
It shall be factory calibrated and set for the desired airflow. It shall be
provided with field adjustment for future changes in airflow.
3.4 Control Functions
The airflow control devices shall utilize peer-to-peer, distributed

control architecture to perform room-level control functions. Master-
slave control schemes are not acceptable. Control functions shall
include, at a minimum, pressurisation, temperature, humidity control,
as well as respond to occupancy and emergency control commands.
a) Pressurisation Control
The laboratory control system shall control supply and

auxiliary exhaust airflow devices in order to maintain a
volumetric offset (either positive or negative). Offset shall be
maintained regardless of any change in flow or static pressure.
This offset shall be field adjustable and represents the volume
of air, which will enter (or exit) the room from the corridor or
adjacent spaces.
TS/M/S57/10
MECHANICAL WORKS
The pressurization control algorithm shall sum the flow values

of all supply and exhaust airflow devices and command
appropriate controlled devices to new set points to maintain the
desired offset. The offset shall be adjustable
The pressurization control algorithm shall consider both

networked devices, as well as:
1. Up to 3 non-networked devices providing a linear

analog flow signal.
2. Any number of constant volume devices where the total
of supply devices and the total of exhaust devices may
be factored into the pressurization control algorithm.
Volumetric offset shall be the only acceptable means of
controlling room pressurization. Systems that rely on
differential pressure as a means of control shall provide
documentation to demonstrate that space pressurization
can be maintained if a door to the space is opened.
The pressurization control algorithm shall support the ability to

regulate the distribution of total supply flow across multiple
supply airflow control devices in order to optimize air
distribution in the space.
b) Temperature Control
The laboratory control system shall regulate the space
temperature through a combination of volumetric thermal
override and control of reheat coils and/or auxiliary
temperature control devices. The air flow control system shall
support up to 4 separate temperature zones for each
pressurization zone. Each zone shall have provisions for
monitoring up to 5 temperature inputs and calculating a
straight-line average to be used for control purposes. Separate
cooling and heating set points shall be writeable from the BMS,
with the option of a local offset adjustment.
Temperature control shall be implemented through the use of
independent primary cooling and heating control functions, as
well as an auxiliary temperature control function, which may be
used for either supplemental cooling or heating. Cooling shall
be provided as a function of thermal override of conditioned air
with both supply and exhaust airflow devices responding
simultaneously so as to maintain the desired offset. Heating
shall be provided through modulating control of a properly
sized reheat coil.
TS/M/S57/11
MECHANICAL WORKS
The laboratory control system shall also provide the built-in

capability for being configured for hot deck/cold deck
temperature control.
The auxiliary temperature control function shall offer the

option of either heating or cooling mode and to operate as
either a standalone temperature control loop, or staged to
supplement the corresponding primary temperature control
loop.
c) Humidity Control
The laboratory control system shall have an embedded

humidity control function, which allows the monitoring and
control of the relative humidity level in the pressurized zone.
Using peer-to-peer control, the airflow devices shall have the
ability to monitor the relative humidity level of the space and,
based on a BAS writeable set point, develop a control signal to
drive one or the other humidification or dehumidification
control circuits.
The humidity control loop(s) shall share a common set point,

with a configurable deadband adjustment to prevent the
humidification and dehumidification control functions to
operate at the same time.
d) Occupancy Control
The laboratory control system shall have the ability to change

the minimum ventilation and/or temperature control set points,
based on the occupied state, in order to reduce energy
consumption when the space is not occupied. The occupancy
state may be set by either the BAS as a scheduled event or
through the use of a local occupancy sensor or switch. The
laboratory control system shall support a local occupancy
override button that allows a user to override the occupancy
mode and set the space to occupied for a predetermined
interval. The local occupancy sensor/switch or bypass button
shall be given priority over a BAS command.
TS/M/S57/12
MECHANICAL WORKS
e) Local Alarm Control
The laboratory control system shall provide the means of

summing selective alarm activity at the room-level network and
generating a local alarm signal. The local alarm signal may be
directed to any available output, as well as to the BAS. The
alarm mask may be configured differently for each room-level
system.
f) Diversity Alarm
The laboratory control system shall have the ability of

monitoring the airflow values for the pressurized space and
generating an alarm signal in the event the total exhaust flow
exceeds a predetermined threshold. The diversity alarm is
intended to allow the user to take diversity in the design and
generate an alarm condition in the event the diversity threshold
is compromised. This function must be available in either an
integrated or standalone system.
g) Emergency Mode Control
The laboratory control system shall provide a means of

overriding temperature and pressurization control in response
to a command indicating an emergency condition exists and
airflow control devices are to be driven to a specific flow set
point. The system shall support up to 4 emergency control
modes. The emergency control modes may be initiated either
by a local contact input or BAS command. Once an emergency
mode is invoked, pressurisation and temperature control are
overridden for the period that the mode is active. Emergency
modes shall have a priority scheme allowing a more critical
mode to override a previously set condition.
4. Interface with BAS
4.1 The laboratory airflow control system network shall be provided with
digital interfacing with the BAS. The required software interface
drivers shall be developed and housed in a dedicated interface device
furnished by the laboratory airflow control system manufacture.
4.2 All room-level points shall be available to the BAS for monitoring or
trending. The gateway shall maintain a cache of all points to be
monitored by the BAS. The room-level airflow control devices shall
update this cache continually.
TS/M/S57/13
MECHANICAL WORKS
5. Execution
5.1 Installation
a) The laboratory airflow control system specialist Sub-Contractor

supervise the installation of the sash sensors, air flow sensors,
interface boxes, and fume cupboard monitor on the fume
cupboard. Reel-type sash sensors and their stainless steel cables
shall be hidden from view. Bar-type sash sensors shall be
affixed to the individual sash panels. Sash interface boxes with
interface cards shall be mounted in an accessible location.
b) The Laboratory LCP and wall mounted power supply (as

required) shall be installed in an accessible location in the
designated laboratory room.
c) All cable shall be furnished and installed by the Sub-

Contractor. The Sub-Contractor shall terminate and connect all
cables as required. In addition, integrated laboratory control
unit connectors shall be furnished.
d) The Sub-Contractor shall install all airflow control devices in

the ductwork and shall connect all airflow control valve
linkages.
e) The Sub-Contractor shall provide and install all reheat coils and
transitions.
f) The Sub-Contractor shall provide and install insulation as

required.
g) The Electrical NSC shall wire a dedicated, single phase 240 vac
power circuit to the Lab LCP.
TS/M/S57/14
MECHANICAL WORKS
5.2 System Start-up and Training
a) System startup procedures shall be provided by a manufacture

of the laboratory airflow control system authorised
representative. Startup shall include calibrating the fume
cupboard monitor and any combination sash sensing equipment
as required. Start-up shall also provide electronic verification
of airflow (fume cupboard exhaust, supply, makeup, general
exhaust, or return).
b) The Sub-Contractor shall be responsible for final verification

and reporting of all airflows.
c) The laboratory airflow control system specialist Sub-Contractor

shall provide training for Employer’s staff or by factory trained
and certified personnel. The training a minimum of eight hours
will provide an overview of the job specific airflow control
components, verification of initial fume cupboard monitor
calibration, general procedures for verifying airflows of air
valves, and general troubleshooting procedures.
d) Operation and maintenance manuals, including as-built wiring

diagrams and component lists shall be provided for each
training attendee.
TS/M/S57/15
MECHANICAL WORKS
SECTION 58 LABORATORY AIR-FLOW CONTROL SYSTEM USING

FAST RESPOND VARIABLE AIR VOLUME BOX
1. General
1.1. This section sets out the requirements and covers the supply, delivery,
installation, testing and commissioning and twelve (12) months free
maintenance and warranty of the associated work for the laboratory air-
flow control system.
1.2. Air quantity as shown in the drawings is only given as a guide. The Sub-
Contractor’s specialist Sub-Contractor shall design and proposed to suit
the space, temperature and NC level required.
1.3. The selection and location of the diffusers shall also achieve an Air
ASHRAE Fundamentals Handbook.
1.4. System Description
A laboratory airflow control system shall be furnish and installed to

control the airflow into and out of rooms in the laboratory. The total
supply and exhaust flow rates for each room shall be precisely controlled
to maintain either a positive or negative pressure depending on setting. The
air flow control system shall vary the amount of make-up/supply air into
the room to operate the laboratory rooms at the lowest possible airflow
rates necessary to meet the specific room requirement and maintain
temperature and humidity control, achieve minimum ventilation rates, and
maintain room pressurization in relation to adjacent spaces (positive or
negative). The airflow control system shall be capable of operating as a
standalone system or as system integrated with the Building Management
System (BMS). It shall display in the sash controller, DDC, BMS and
IBMS station on individual devices airflow measurement.The system shall
also include the summation of room total supply and exhaust and display
in DDC, BMS and IBMS station.
TS/M/S58/1
MECHANICAL WORKS
1.5. Compliance Schedule
a) The Sub-Contractor shall submit a clause-by-clause statement

compliance schedule. Where there are deviations in the Sub-
Contractor’s proposal, the Sub-Contractor shall describe what
specific and alternative approach has been taken and the impact
this will have on the sizing of the air delivery systems, the required
cooling and heating capacities, energy costs, and maintenance of
building.
b) The Sub-Contractor shall be required to submit a letter of

compliance, signed by a corporate officer of the laboratory air-flow
control system manufacturer, certifying the compliance and as
stated above.
2. System Performance Requirements
2.1. Airflow Control Systems Description
2.1.1. Each individual laboratory room shall have a dedicated

laboratory airflow control system completed with LCD display
screen (Laboratory Local Control Panel - Lab LCP) and be
controlled by a Direct Digital Controller from BMS.
2.1.2. For fume cupboard control, the individual fume hood monitor
shall directly control the airflow device by sending required
digital signal for on/off and analogue signal for variable flow
requirement. The laboratory airflow control system shall
employ individual air flow controllers that directly measure the
area of the fume cupboard sash opening and the fume hood air
flow face velocity through the use of sash position sensors and
fume hood side wall flow velocity sensors. The air flow sensor
will continuously monitor bi-directional air flow in the fume
hood. The controllers shall provide immediate response to face
velocity changes caused by sash position or other factors and
proportionally control the fume cupboard’s exhaust airflow to
maintain a constant face velocity over a minimum range of 20
to 100% of sash travel. The corresponding minimum hood
exhaust flow turndown ratio shall be 5 to 1.
2.1.3. The fume cupboard exhaust airflow control device shall

respond to airflow changes and the fume cupboard sash
opening by achieving 90% of its commanded value within
ONE (1) second of the sash reaching 90% of its final position
(with no more than 5% overshoot/undershoot) of required
airflow. Rate of sash movement shall be between 1.0 to 1.5
feet per second.
TS/M/S58/2
MECHANICAL WORKS
2.1.4. The laboratory airflow control system shall maintain specific

airflow (+- 5% of signal within ONE second of a change in
duct static pressure) regardless of the magnitude of the pressure
change (within 0.1” to 3” water gauge), airflow change or
quantity of airflow control devices on the manifold.
2.1.5. The airflow control system shall use volumetric offset control
to maintain room pressurization. The system shall maintain
proper room pressurization polarity (negative or positive)
regardless of any change in room/system conditions, such as
rapid changes in duct static pressure. Systems using differential
pressure measurement or velocity measurement to control room
pressurization are unacceptable.
2.1.6. The airflow control system shall maintain specific airflow (+/-
5% of signal) with a minimum 10 to 1 turndown to ensure
accurate pressurization at low airflow and guarantee the
maximum system diversity and energy efficient.
2.1.7. The airflow control system shall provide real time accurate
flow rate and alarm feedback and correction of flow rate.
2.1.8. The airflow control system shall completed with LCD display
screen for the control and monitoring each room.
2.2. Airflow Control Sound Specifications
a) Unless otherwise specified the airflow control device shall not

exceed the sound power levels in Table 1, Table 2 and Table 3.
b) If the airflow control device cannot meet the sound power level
specification, a properly sized silencer or sound attenuator shall
be provided. All silencers must be of a packless design
(constructed of at least 18 gauge 316L stainless steel when used
with fume cupboard exhaust) with a maximum pressure drop at
the device’s maximum rated flow rate not to exceed 0.20 inches
of water.
c) All proposed airflow control devices shall include discharge,

exhaust and radiated sound power level performance.
TS/M/S58/3
MECHANICAL WORKS
Table 1 - Exhaust Airflow Control Device Sound Power Level
-12
Exhaust Sound Power Level in dB (re: 10 watts)
Octave Band Number 2 3 4 5 6 7
Center Frequency in Hz 125 Hz 250 Hz 500 Hz 1000 Hz 2000 Hz 4000 Hz
1000-50 cfm Device

800 cfm @ 0.6" wc 63 55 52 54 50 49
200 cfm @ 0.6" wc 46 42 38 37 32 25
800 cfm @ 3.0" wc 73 70 64 66 65 60
200 cfm @ 3.0" wc 51 52 51 50 52 51
1500-100 cfm Device

1200 cfm @ 0.6" wc 65 58 53 56 52 52
400 cfm @ 0.6" wc 50 45 38 39 37 31
1200 cfm @ 3.0" wc 72 70 62 65 64 60
400 cfm @ 3.0" wc 55 57 55 53 56 55
3000-200 cfm Device
2400 cfm @ 0.6" wc 63 56 55 58 54 55
800 cfm @ 0.6" wc 51 45 41 42 39 34
2400 cfm @ 3.0" wc 75 71 65 68 67 63
800 cfm @ 3.0" wc 58 58 56 56 59 58
Table 2 - Supply Airflow Control Device Sound Power Level (Discharge)
Discharge Sound Power Level in dB (re:

-12
10 watts)

1000-50 cfm Device

800 cfm @ 0.6" wc 62 57 54 58 54 51
200 cfm @ 0.6" wc 45 46 42 44 40 34
800 cfm @ 3.0" wc 72 71 67 75 72 68
200 cfm @ 3.0" wc 53 56 54 58 56 54
1500-100 cfm Device
1200 cfm @ 0.6" wc 63 59 55 60 54 53
400 cfm @ 0.6" wc 53 49 44 49 45 39
1200 cfm @ 3.0" wc 72 73 69 77 72 68
400 cfm @ 3.0" wc 58 63 61 63 60 57
3000-200 cfm Device
2400 cfm @ 0.6" wc 64 60 58 63 56 56
800 cfm @ 0.6" wc 52 48 47 52 46 41
2400 cfm @ 3.0" wc 75 75 72 78 73 70
800 cfm @ 3.0" wc 59 62 62 66 62 60
TS/M/S58/4
MECHANICAL WORKS
Table 3 - Supply Airflow Control Device Sound Power Level (Radiated)
Radiated Sound Power Level in dB

-12
(re: 10 watts)

1000-50 cfm Device

800 cfm @ 0.6" wc 44 41 45 41 36 34
200 cfm @ 0.6" wc 33 28 31 29 26 20
800 cfm @ 3.0" wc 53 53 56 57 55 53
200 cfm @ 3.0" wc 41 38 41 39 39 37
1500-100 cfm Device
1200 cfm @ 0.6" wc 47 53 40 42 38 36
400 cfm @ 0.6" wc 35 39 31 34 33 26
1200 cfm @ 3.0" wc 52 60 54 60 59 53
400 cfm @ 3.0" wc 42 44 43 46 46 42
3000-200 cfm Device
2400 cfm @ 0.6" wc 58 56 45 47 43 42
800 cfm @ 0.6" wc 45 43 36 39 37 29
2400 cfm @ 3.0" wc 69 68 60 65 63 57
800 cfm @ 3.0" wc 54 53 48 51 50 48
TS/M/S58/5
MECHANICAL WORKS
3. Materials
3.1. Airflow Control Device – General
3.1.1. The airflow control device shall be a fast response valve with
actual instant flow feedback capabilities in the form of venturi
flow measurement method. The flow measurement should be in
the form of precision digital signal conditioning and provide
analogue and digital output.
3.1.2. The airflow control device shall be pressure independent

over its specified differential static pressure operating range.
An integral pressure independent assembly shall response and
maintain specific airflow with ONE (1) second of a change in
duct static pressure irrespective of the magnitude of pressure
and/or flow change or quantity of airflow controllers on a
manifold system.
3.1.3. The airflow control device shall maintain accuracy within ± 5%

of signal over an airflow turndown range of no less than 10 to 1.
No minimum entrance or exit straight duct run shall be required
to ensure accuracy and/or pressure independence.
3.1.4. The airflow device shall be constructed of one of the following

three types:
3.1.4.1. Class A – The airflow control device for NON-

CORROSIVE airstreams such as supply and
general exhaust shall be constructed of
minimum 0.9mm galvanized steel provided with
butterfly volume control dampers for air flow
adjustment with pressure drop not more than
0.4” water gauge at all time. Dampers blade
shall be constructed of galvanized steel plates
with felt all round for shut off purposes. The
blade shall be stitch welded or clamed to a
galvanized shaft. The blade shall be able to
travel continuously from range of 0 to 60 degree.
Nylon bust and bearing shall be used for all
internal dampers pivot points for quiet operation
and no lubrication is required.
3.1.4.2. Class B – The airflow control device for

CORROSIVE and low temperature (below 100
degree C) airstreams such as laboratory exhuats
with chemical fume, fume cupboards and
biological cabinets shall be constructed of
minimum 0.9mm stainless steel 316 provided
TS/M/S58/6
MECHANICAL WORKS
with butterfly volume control dampers for air

flow adjustment with pressure drop not more
than 0.4” water gauge at all time. Dampers blade
shall be constructed of stainless steel plates with
Viton rubber all round for shut off purposes. The
blade shall be stitch welded or clamped to a
stainless steel 316 shaft. The blade shall be able
to travel continuously from range of 0 to 60
degree. Nylon bust and bearing shall be used for
all internal dampers pivot points for quiet
operation and no lubrication is required.
3.1.4.3. Class C– The airflow control device for

HIGHLY CORROSIVE and high temperature
(above 100 degree C) airstreams such as fume
cupboards and biological cabinets shall be
constructed of minimum 0.9mm stainless steel
304 with flouropolymer internal coating
provided with butterfly volume control dampers
for air flow adjustment with pressure drop not
more than 0.4” water gauge at all time. Dampers
blade shall be constructed of flouropolymer
coated stainless steel 304 plates with viton
rubber all round for shut off purposes. The blade
shall be clamped to a flouropolymer coated
stainless steel 304 shaft. The blade shall be able
to travel continuously from range of 0 to 60
degree. Nylon bust and bearing shall be used for
all internal dampers pivot points for quiet
operation and no lubrication is required.
3.1.5. The airflow control device shall have leakage classification of a

Class II damper tested to not less than 1500 Pa in accordance to
ASME 509.
3.1.6. For two-position or Fast Respond Variable Air Volume

operation, a electric actuator shall be factory mounted to the
valve. Loss of control power shall cause normally open valves
to fail to maximum position, and normally closed valves to fail
to minimum position. Electric actuators that fail in last position
are not acceptable. Constant volume valves do not require
actuators. The response time for such actuators shall be less
than one second.
3.1.7. An electric actuator shall be factory mounted to all valve and

tested before delivery on site.
TS/M/S58/7
MECHANICAL WORKS
3.1.8. Certification
3.1.8.1. The airflow control device shall be certified

under ARI 880 Sound performance and AMCA
500D standards for air leakage rate.
3.1.8.2. Each airflow control device shall be factory

calibrated to the specific airflows detailed on the
Drawings and Specifications using traceable air
stations and instrumentation having a combined
accuracy of at least ±1% of signal over the entire
range of measurement. Each airflow device shall
be calibrated in the position that it will be
installed, either horizontal or vertical. Electronic
airflow control devices shall be further
calibrated and their accuracy verified to ± 5% of
signal at a minimum of eight different airflows
across the full operating range of the device.
3.1.8.3. All airflow control devices shall be individually

marked with device specific, factory calibration
data. As a minimum, it should include: tag
number, serial number, model number, eight
point characterization information, calibration
position, either horizontal or vertical, and quality
control inspection numbers. All information
shall be stored by the manufacturer for use with
as-built documentation.
3.2. High speed Electric Actuator
3.2.1. The high speed electric actuator shall achieve to 90% opening
from closed within 1 sec.
Electrical data
Nominal voltage AC 24V 50/60Hz,DC 24V
Nominal voltage range AC 19.2...28.8V / DC
21.6...28.8V
Power consumption 13W @ running / 1.5W @
holding
Wire sizing
Functional data
Torque (nominal torque) Min. 4Nm @ nominal voltage
Control signal DC 2(0)...10V, input impedance
100kΩ
Feedback signal DC 2...10V, max. 0.5mA
TS/M/S58/8
MECHANICAL WORKS
Position accuracy ±5%

Direction of rotation Reversible with switch 0/1
Manual override Gearing latch disengaged by
pushbutton, self-resetting
Angle of rotation Max. 95° adjustable mechanical
stops
Running time 2.5s for 90°
3.2.2. The control shall include:
i) Electronic minimum / maximum clamps for main /

booster control
ii) Power loss detection with capacitive source to position

actuator
iii) Fail open, closed or to last position depending on

application
iv) Actuator inhibit while charging power loss capacitive

source
v) Actuator load feedback circuit
vi) Pressure differential sensor to indicate low flow signal
vii) Provide alarm when the actuator is jammed in

operational
3.3. Constant Volume Airflow Control Devices
The airflow control device shall maintain a constant airflow set point with
real time monitoring of air flow. It shall be factory calibrated and set for
the desired airflow. It shall be provided with field adjustment for future
changes in airflow without having it dismantle and sent for factory
calibration.
3.4. Control Functions
3.4.1. Air flow measurement
The airflow control devices shall utilize peer-to-peer, distributed

control architecture to perform room-level control functions.
Master-slave control schemes are not acceptable. Control functions
shall include, at a minimum, pressurisation, temperature, humidity
control, as well as respond to occupancy and emergency control
commands. The airflow sensor proposed should be suitable for
volumetric flow measurement. The sensors perform precision
TS/M/S58/9
MECHANICAL WORKS
digital signal conditioning and provide analogue and digital out put
at the same time. The pressure sensor shall incorporate a high
sensitive ultra low pressure custom micro-machine element and
ASIC. This custom sensor shall be designed specifically for use in
low pressure airflow applications and has an outstanding accuracy
with exceptionally low drift.
3.4.2. Pressurisation Control
The laboratory control system shall control supply and

auxiliary exhaust airflow devices in order to maintain a
volumetric offset (either positive or negative). Offset shall be
maintained regardless of any change in flow or static pressure.
This offset shall be field adjustable and represents the volume
of air, which will enter (or exit) the room from the corridor or
adjacent spaces.
The pressurization control algorithm shall sum the flow values

of all supply and exhaust airflow devices and command
appropriate controlled devices to new set points to maintain the
desired offset. The offset shall be adjustable
The pressurization control algorithm shall consider both

networked devices, as well as:
1. Up to 3 non-networked devices providing a linear

analog flow signal.
2. Any number of constant volume devices where the total
of supply devices and the total of exhaust devices may
be factored into the pressurization control algorithm.
Volumetric offset shall be the only acceptable means of
controlling room pressurization. Systems that rely on
differential pressure as a means of control shall provide
documentation to demonstrate that space pressurization
can be maintained if a door to the space is opened.
The pressurization control algorithm shall support the ability to

regulate the distribution of total supply flow across multiple
supply airflow control devices in order to optimize air
distribution in the space.
TS/M/S58/10
MECHANICAL WORKS
3.4.3. Temperature Control

The laboratory control system shall regulate the space
temperature through a combination of volumetric thermal
override and control of reheat coils and/or auxiliary
temperature control devices. The air flow control system shall
support up to 4 separate temperature zones for each
pressurization zone. Each zone shall have provisions for
monitoring up to 5 temperature inputs and calculating a
straight-line average to be used for control purposes. Separate
cooling and heating set points shall be writeable from the BMS,
with the option of a local offset adjustment.
Temperature control shall be implemented through the use of
independent primary cooling and heating control functions, as
well as an auxiliary temperature control function, which may be
used for either supplemental cooling or heating. Cooling shall
be provided as a function of thermal override of conditioned air
with both supply and exhaust airflow devices responding
simultaneously so as to maintain the desired offset. Heating
shall be provided through modulating control of a properly
sized reheat coil.
The laboratory control system shall also provide the built-in

capability for being configured for hot deck/cold deck
temperature control.
The auxiliary temperature control function shall offer the

option of either heating or cooling mode and to operate as
either a standalone temperature control loop, or staged to
supplement the corresponding primary temperature control loop.
3.4.4. Humidity Control
The laboratory control system shall have an embedded

humidity control function, which allows the monitoring and
control of the relative humidity level in the pressurized zone.
Using peer-to-peer control, the airflow devices shall have the
ability to monitor the relative humidity level of the space and,
based on a BAS writeable set point, develop a control signal to
drive one or the other humidification or dehumidification
control circuits.
The humidity control loop(s) shall share a common set point,

with a configurable deadband adjustment to prevent the
humidification and dehumidification control functions to
operate at the same time.
TS/M/S58/11
MECHANICAL WORKS
3.4.5. Occupancy Control
The laboratory control system shall have the ability to change

the minimum ventilation and/or temperature control set points,
based on the occupied state, in order to reduce energy
consumption when the space is not occupied. The occupancy
state may be set by either the BAS as a scheduled event or
through the use of a local occupancy sensor or switch. The
laboratory control system shall support a local occupancy
override button that allows a user to override the occupancy
mode and set the space to occupied for a predetermined interval.
The local occupancy sensor/switch or bypass button shall be
given priority over a BAS command.
3.4.6. Local Alarm Control
The laboratory control system shall provide the means of

summing selective alarm activity at the room-level network and
generating a local alarm signal. The local alarm signal may be
directed to any available output, as well as to the BAS. The
alarm mask may be configured differently for each room-level
system.
3.4.7. Diversity Alarm
The laboratory control system shall have the ability of

monitoring the airflow values for the pressurized space and
generating an alarm signal in the event the total exhaust flow
exceeds a predetermined threshold. The diversity alarm is
intended to allow the user to take diversity in the design and
generate an alarm condition in the event the diversity threshold
is compromised. This function must be available in either an
integrated or standalone system.
3.4.8. Emergency Mode Control
The laboratory control system shall provide a means of

overriding temperature and pressurization control in response
to a command indicating an emergency condition exists and
airflow control devices are to be driven to a specific flow set
point. The system shall support up to 4 emergency control
modes. The emergency control modes may be initiated either
by a local contact input or BAS command. Once an emergency
mode is invoked, pressurisation and temperature control are
overridden for the period that the mode is active. Emergency
modes shall have a priority scheme allowing a more critical
mode to override a previously set condition.
TS/M/S58/12
MECHANICAL WORKS
4. Interface with BMS
4.1. The laboratory airflow control device shall be provided with digital and
analogue input/output port for control, monitoring or trending.
4.2. The laboratory airflow control system network shall be provided with
digital interfacing with the BAS. The required software interface drivers
shall be developed and housed in a dedicated interface device furnished by
the laboratory airflow control system manufacture.
4.3. All room-level points shall be available to the BAS for monitoring or
trending. The gateway shall maintain a cache of all points to be monitored
by the BAS. The room-level airflow control devices shall update this cache
continually.
5. Execution
5.1. Installation
5.1.1. The laboratory airflow control system specialist Sub-Contractor

supervise the installation of the sash sensors, air flow sensors,
interface boxes, and fume cupboard monitor on the fume
cupboard. Reel-type sash sensors and their stainless steel cables
shall be hidden from view. Bar-type sash sensors shall be
affixed to the individual sash panels. Sash interface boxes with
interface cards shall be mounted in an accessible location.
5.1.2. The Laboratory LCP and wall mounted power supply (as
required) shall be installed in an accessible location in the
designated laboratory room.
5.1.3. All cable shall be furnished and installed by the Sub-Contractor.

The Sub-Contractor shall terminate and connect all cables as
required. In addition, integrated laboratory control unit
connectors shall be furnished.
5.1.4. The airflow control devices shall allow flexibility in the

ductwork installation in any orientation and mounting plane..
5.1.5. The Sub-Contractor shall install all airflow control devices in

the ductwork and shall connect all airflow control valve
linkages.
5.1.6. The Sub-Contractor shall provide and install all reheat coils and
transitions.
TS/M/S58/13
MECHANICAL WORKS
5.1.7. The Sub-Contractor shall provide and install insulation as

required.
5.2. System Start-up and Training
5.2.1. System startup procedures shall be provided by a manufacture

of the laboratory airflow control system authorized
representative. Startup shall include calibrating the fume
cupboard monitor and any combination sash sensing equipment
as required. Startup shall also provide electronic verification of
airflow (fume cupboard exhaust, supply, makeup, general
exhaust, or return).
5.2.2. The Sub- Contractor shall be responsible for final verification

and reporting of all airflows.
5.2.3. The laboratory airflow control system specialist Sub-Contractor

shall provide training for Employer’s staff or by factory trained
and certified personnel. The training a minimum of eight hours
will provide an overview of the job specific airflow control
components, verification of initial fume cupboard monitor
calibration, general procedures for verifying airflows of air
valves, and general troubleshooting procedures.
5.2.4. Operation and maintenance manuals, including as-built wiring

diagrams and component lists shall be provided for each
training attendee.
TS/M/S58/14
MECHANICAL WORKS
SECTION 66 – PIEZOMETER RING AIRFLOW MEASUREMENT SYSTEM
1. General
Piezometer Ring airflow measuring system, pressure differential pressure
transducer/transmitter, controller, real time digital display unit and their
associated accessories.
1.2. Piezometer ring airflow measurement shall be installed to control the speed of
rotary equipment such as for the AHU’s blower, high Plume fan blower and
mechanical ventilation fan as specified.
1.3. The system shall be displayed and monitored by the LCD display unit and
control by BAS where applicable.
1.4. BAS shall interface to the LCD display unit and tabulate the w/cmh as required
by the greenmark.
1.5. Air flow measurement to should meet to the following standard:
a) ANSI/ASHARE standard 41.2 : Standard methods for air velocity and

airflow measurement
b) ANSI/ASHARE standard 111 :Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing of

Building HVAC Systems
2.1 The Piezometer Ring system shall consists of a piezometer ring mounted on the
face of inlet core venturi at the throat with a static pressure tap, pressure
differential transducer/transmitter, digital controller with airflow rate display
unit, dial type manometer and terminal ports for the interfacing to the BMS
system .
2.2 The inlet cone of the fan is used as the flow nozzle and shall consist of eight
sensing holes at the inlet cone, each at 45 degree interval Inlet cone of the fan
shall be easily removed for the ptezometer ring replacement.
2.3 Pressure taps shall be located at narrowest point on inlet cone venturi for
highest accuracy with piezometer ring for true average pressure reading. The
pressure drop shall be measured from the tap located on the face of the inlet
cone venturi to the piezometer ring in the throat.
TS/M/S66/1
MECHANICAL WORKS
2.4 The inlet tap is connected to the high-pressure side of the transducer/transmitter
and the piezometer ring is connected to the low-pressure side.
2.5 The air flowrate then calculated by measuring the static pressure drop through
the inlet cone venturi and a K-Factor specific to each fan size.
2.6 The transducer/transmitter shall be able to withstand moisture, dust and

chemical concentration.
3. Airflow Measurement Accuracy
3.1. The accuracy for the system shall be within +/-5%. Sub-contractor shall submit
all the K factor base on the range of different fan size.
3.2. The airflow rate display unit shall be calibrated during the testing and
commissioning time with a third party calibrated measuring instruments.
3.3. The piezometer ring measurement system shall be assembled by the Air
Handling Unit manufacturer, mechanical fan manufacturer or high plume fan
manufacturer, tested in factory before delivery to site
4. Operating Condition
4.1. Piezometer ring:
a) Velocity : 0.5 m/s to 100 m/s
b) Humidity : All elements 0-100% non-condensing
c) Corrosion resistance:: Good air and mild acid gas resistance,

excellent solvent and aromatic
hydrocarbon resistance
4.2. Material:
a) Static ports : Aluminum
b) Tubing : Polyurethane: diameter 6.35 mm , 0 ºC to

82ºC, for chemical exhaust
Copper diameter 6.35 mm, 0 ºC to 93ºC for

supply air
c) Tube fittings: Nitrile Rubber (NBR) O-ring
Stainless Steel Grab ring
Stainless steel Clip Support
TS/M/S66/2
MECHANICAL WORKS
d) Accessories and Polyurethane material for chemical

all type connector : exhaust
Copper material for supply air
5. Controller and Display unit
5.1. Digital LCD display unit
a) Power : 24VDC, 24VAC
b) 2.8 inch 320x240 TFT LCD display
c) Programmed for CFM and CMH reading
d) Flow Velocity reading
5.2. Input range
0 to 2500 Pa
5.3. Enclosure Protection
IP56 for indoor and IP65 outdoor
5.4. Transmitter
a) Accuracy +/- 0.5% of full scale
b) Pressure limit: 2500 Pa
c) Temperature limit: 0 to 60ºC
5.5. Analog output
a) 4mA to 20 mA DC or 2VDC to 10 VDC
b) Linear to the differential pressure
5.6. Communication Bus
a) Modbus
b) BaCnet
TS/M/S66/3
MECHANICAL WORKS
6. Overview Display
6.1. Graphic Display
A graphic showing the overall operating status of the Air side system, including
but not limited to the following information:
a) All sensors’ locations, in accordance to the list of instruments

specified in this Schedule, and their dynamic values;
b) Operating status of key components
c) Overall system efficiency (kW/RT, W/CMH of power, and CMH/ W

of cooling capacity) of the sir side system and the overall efficiency
(kW/RT, W/CMH of power and CMH/W of cooling capacity) of each
of its key components (i.e. AHUs, high plume fans, FCUs and
mechanical ventilation fans);
d) Power consumed by the air handling units, high plume fans, FCUs
and mechanical ventilation fans and total power consumed by the
each group of plant.
6.2. Trend Display
Trend displays showing the readings of the sensors supplied and values
computed under this contract. It should be possible to display the real time and
historical trend data available in the data acquisition system by scrolling or
expanding the time base. Multi-trend feature that allows display of
combination of variables on the same trend display shall also be possible; and
6.3. Tools
Tools to access and export any measured or computed value for analysis in MS
Excel format for any chosen arbitrary period of time.
The sampling, trending and storage intervals shall be 1 minute per sample and
the resolution of the graphics shall be at least 1280 x 1024 pixels.
7. Submission of Catalogues and Calculations
Catalogue of instrument and equipment shown the accuracy and uncertainty shall be
submitted within one month from the award of the Sub-Contract. The Sub-Contractor is
also required to submit the necessary calculation relating to the uncertainty of the
equipment selected by them
TS/M/S66/4
MECHANICAL WORKS
Sub-contactor shall trend all the data, identify any error, verify all the sensors and
meters are working within the required tolerance. Any sensors or meter found faulty
shall be replaced immediately and
All measurement and verification system sensors, flow meter and power meter shall
carry out monthly servicing and calibration to reference calibrated instrument. Proper
report shall be kept for reference. In additional, audit report shall be certified by
qualified personnel and submitted to client. For the calibration, all trending shall be in
2 second interval over 20 sec and compare to the calibrated reference instrument.
TS/M/S66/5
MECHANICAL WORKS
SECTION 67 – INTEGRATED WATER BALANCING AND FLOW

CONTROL VALVE SYSTEM
1. Scope of Work
This section covers the supply, delivery, installation, painting, testing,

commissioning and twelve (12) months free maintenance and warranty for
integrated smart control valves system included controls section, ultrasonic
flowmeter, temperature sensors, BTU calculator, gauges, pipe hangers,
supports and fittings, etc.
2. General
2.1 The control valves system shall consist of balancing, control section,
actuator, flow measurement, temperature sensor and energy
calculator.
2.2 The energy calculator shall be of ultrasonic flow measurement

capable of measuring fluids flow, supply temperature, return
temperature and cooling capacity data continuously.
2.3 It shall have different type of control modes choosing between

position, flow and cooling capacity. The control valve control shall
be able to adjustable from fast opening to equal percentage opening.
3. Standards and Regulations
3.1 EN558: Industrial valves - Face-to-face and centre-to-face

dimensions of metal valves for use in flanged pipe systems - PN and
Class designated valves
3.2 EN 1563: Founding - Spheroidal graphite cast irons
3.3 IEC 60751: Industrial platinum resistance thermometers and

platinum temperature sensors
3.4 Building and Construction Authority: Green mark requirement
3.5 SS 553: Code of practice for air-conditioning and mechanical

ventilation in buildings
3.6 SS: 591: Code of practice for long term measurement of central
chilled water system energy efficiency
TS/M/S67/1
MECHANICAL WORKS
4. Material and Pressure Ratings:
4.1 Threaded connections valves shall be made in a dezincification

resistant copper alloy and a body pressure rating of at least 25 bars at
150⁰C.
4.2 Flange connection valves with flange connections shall be made in

ductile iron complying to EN 1563 for a body pressure rating of 16
bar and 25 bars.
4.3 All valve shall be able to work in a temperature range of 0°C to

110°C.
5. Control Valve
5.1 The control valve shall be pressure independent and shall not affect
the controlled flow and cooling capacity.
5.2 It’s shall meet to the following:
a) Minimum rangeability of 125 for all valve size
b) Maximum leakage rate of 0.02% at maximum differential

pressure across the valve.
c) No noise issue during the operation of closing and opening of

valve
d) Differential pressure shall not exceed 600kPa during closing.
5.3 The detailed calculation shall submit for Engineer for approval. The
calculation shall but not limited to such as differential pressure
available for all the fluid circuits and branches, minimum and
maximum circuit pressure drops, index circuit location, pump head
requirement and setting of differential pressures at all location shall
be provided by the valve manufacturer based on equipment
selections with design and actual pressure drops and flow rates of
heat exchangers, terminal coils, control valves, pipe lengths and
sizes.
TS/M/S67/2
MECHANICAL WORKS
6. Electric Actuator
6.1 The manufacturer shall calculate and size all the control valve
actuator according to the pressure drops across the control. All the
calculation and selection shall submit for Engineer approval.
6.2 The valve actuator shall be of low force actuating using a pressure
balanced cone, Actuator shall operate at 24VAC and have electrical
and mechanical manual override.
6.3 The actuator shall operate at a temperature form 0oC to 100oC

relative humidity of 0% to 98% without condensing
6.4 The valve shall be equipped with control and feedback signal using
a) 0VDC to 10VDC or 2VDC to 10VDC
b) 0mA to 20mA or 4mA to 20mA.
6.5 The valve shall have LED indication indicating mode, status,
position, end position
7. Accuracy
7.1 The valves shall be designed to monitor flow within flow accuracy
requirements in water at temperatures from -10 to +110°C:
a) ±2% accuracy in a range of 100% to 5% of combine control

valves maximum flow
b) ±1% accuracy for ultrasonic flow meter in a range of 100%

to 5% of measurement instrument at maximum flow
7.1 Test reports showing the prove of performances as measured on

representative samples.
7.2 The valves shall be capable of measuring flow up to minimum 150%

of maximum at design or actual flow.
7.3 The valves shall be capable of measuring the temperature according

to SS/EN 60751 class AA.
TS/M/S67/3
MECHANICAL WORKS
7.4 The valve shall ensure a temperature difference accuracy:
a) ±0.1 K @ ΔT = 6 K (for cooling)
b) ±0.15 K @ ΔT = 20 K (for heating)
7.5 Immersion thermowells and necessary fittings for installation shall

be provided.
8. Interfacing
The valve shall have high level interface functionality for BAS using
a) RS 485 Modbus/RTU
b) BACnet MS/TP
c) Ethernet Modbus/TCP
d) BACnet IP
e) Micro-USB interface
f) Blue Low Energy (BLE)
9. Installation
9.1 The installation of then control valve shall reduce energy

consumption and space required. The flow measuring and the
balancing and control section should be contained in a unified casted
body to reduce the total body length. The valve length and location
installation shall follow the recommendation by the manufacturer for
an accurate measurement. Installation shall follow EN558.
9.2 The selected control valve shall be fully assembled in factory by the
control valve manufacturer, including a mounted actuator, two
temperature sensors, sensor housing and a pre mounted control
interface. The enclosure shall be of IP 54 for indoor and IP 65 for
outdoor. Sub-contractor shall ensure proper control as per
manufacturer’s recommendation.
9.3 The control valve shall be capable of communicating installation

error alerts such as wrong direction of flow.
TS/M/S67/4
MECHANICAL WORKS
SECTION 68 - ELECTRICAL
1. General
1.1. This section covers the electrical equipment and services necessary for
the efficient, safe and satisfactory operation of the various systems
detailed elsewhere in the Specification, including:
a) All motors, starters, isolating switches and fuse switches for this
Contract.
b) Local Control Boards (LCBs) complete with remote push buttons,

selector switches, indicator lights, relays, MCCBs etc.
c) All control equipment, control wiring and associated conduit

works.
d) Conduit, cable tray, cabling and control wiring between the

Control Panels and all equipment and control elements, unless
otherwise stated.
e) Cables between electrical isolators or electrical control boards and

equipment or control elements.
2.1. All electrical works, material and equipment shall comply with the
following:
a) Singapore Standard : SS 638 Wiring of Electrical Equipment of

Building
b) Singapore Standard : SS 551 Code of Practice on Earthing
c) All relevant Singapore Standards or British Standards

Specifications for Equipment
d) The Electricity Act (Cap. 89A), The Electricity (Electrical

Installations) Regulations 2002
e) The Electricity Act (Cap. 89A), (Electrical Worker) Regulations
f) Energy Market Authority of Singapore Act (Chapter 92B)
g) Any other Rules and Regulations in operation.
2.2. All electrical installation shall be certified by the Sub-Contractor's

Licensed Electrical Worker or Engineer (LEW/LEE) and the power
TS/M/S68/1
MECHANICAL WORKS
supply diagram shall be endorsed by the Sub-Contractor's LEW/LEE.
3. Power Supply
3.1. The power supply shall be 400 V/3 phase/50 Hz 4 wire system or 230 V/1
phase/50 Hz and shall be supplied with a suitable isolator by others
(unless specified otherwise) as shown on the Drawings. The Sub-
Contractor shall provide all subsequent power and control wiring as well
as the main control panel and sub-panels for each system. Layout
drawings shall be submitted for approval before fabrication.
3.2. Generally, cabling shall be PVC insulated cables run in galvanised steel
electrical conduits or trunking.
3.3. The wiring for all safety cut-out controls shall be incorporated with the
compressor starter as mentioned above. All automatic temperature
controls shall be energised via which relays operate when the respective
fan or other motor starts. The circuit indicator lights shall be taken from
the out going side of the respective starters.
3.4. The Sub-Contractor shall ensure that the power factor for all motors shall
not be less than 0.85 for under 20 hp and 0.9 for above 20 hp motors.
4. Drawings
4.1. The Sub-Contractor shall submit detailed construction drawings of all

switchboards and power supply layout for the approval of the S.O. before
construction commences.
4.2. Such drawings shall show construction details and shall incorporate a full
list of proposed materials, equipment, meters and accessories to be used,
and the method of supporting equipment and busbars.
TS/M/S68/2
MECHANICAL WORKS
5. Standards
5.1. The equipment and materials used and the method of construction as
applicable shall conform to the following British Standard (B.S.) or
International Electrotechnical Commission (I.E.C.) or National Electrical
Manufacturers Association (NEMA) standard.
a) Switchboard and Motor Control Centre - IEC 61439
b) Busbar connection, arrangements and markings, and grade of

copper - B.S. 158, 159, 1433 and 1977.
c) Heavy duty air circuit breakers for A.C. system - B.S. 4752 / IEC
60947
d) Moulded case circuit breakers - B.S. 3871 Part 2 / IEC 60947-2 or

NEMA Standard AB1.
e) Indicating Instruments - B.S. 89 1st Grade / IEC 60051
f) Integrating meters - B.S. 37 Parts 1 and 2.
g) Integrating meters with cyclometer registers - B.S. 37 Part 4.
h) Protection relays - B.S. 142 / IEC 60255
i) Fuses - B.S. 88 / IEC 60269
j) Contactors - B.S. 775 / IEC 60947 Part 4-1
5.2. All cable tray and ladder shall comply to following standards
a) SS 638: Code of practice for electrical installations
b) BS EN ISO 1461: Hot dip galvanized coatings on fabricated

iron and steel articles. Specifications and test methods
c) AISI 304 / 316 / 316L: Stainless Steel
d) BS EN 10143: Continuously hot-dip coated steel sheet and strip
e) BS EN 10152: Electrolytically zinc coated cold rolled steel flat

products. Technical delivery conditions
5.3. The trunking shall comply with following standards:
TS/M/S68/3
MECHANICAL WORKS
a) Latest Singapore Standard SS 249: Steel surface cable trunking
and accessories
b) Singapore Standard SS 638: Code of practice for electrical

installations
c) BS EN ISO 1461: Hot dip galvanized coatings on fabricated

d) AISI 304 / 316 / 316L: Stainless Steel
e) BS EN 10143: Continuously hot-dip coated steel sheet and strip
f) BS EN 10152: Electrolytically zinc coated cold rolled steel flat

5.4. All metal conduits and fitting shall be BS 4568, class 4 comply to
following standard:
b) IEC 60614-2-1: Specification for conduits for electrical

installations. Part 2: Particular specifications for conduits.
Section One: Metal conduits
c) IEC 61386-21: Conduit systems for cable management. Part

21: Particular requirements - Rigid conduit systems
d) BS 4568-1: Specification for steel conduit and fittings with

metric threads of ISO form for electrical installations. Steel
conduit, bends and couplers
e) BS 4568-2: Specification for steel conduit and fittings with

metric threads of ISO form for electrical installations. Fittings
and components
f) BS 4662: Boxes for flush mounting of electrical accessories.

Requirements, test methods and dimensions
g) BS EN 50086-2-1: Specification for conduit systems for cable

management. Particular requirements Rigid conduit systems
h) Electricity (Electrical Installations) Regulations
6. Local Authorities Requirements
All electrical works, installations and materials supplied shall comply strictly to
TS/M/S68/4
MECHANICAL WORKS
the requirements and standard of the following local Authorities:
(a) The Electricity Act, The Electricity (Electrical Installations) Regulation ,

Singapore.
(b) Code of Practice for Fire Precautions in Buildings, Singapore
(c) The Factory Inspectorate (Ministry of Manpower)
(d) The latest edition of SS 638 (Code of Practice for wiring of electrical
equipment of buildings
(e) The latest edition of SS551 - Code of Practice on earthing
7. Electrical Earthing
7.1. General
a) The metal parts of all switch gears, metal conductors and all metal
work liable to become alive in the event of failure of insulation
and the earth connection of all electrical fittings and appliances
shall be effectively earthed by means of earth continuity
conductor of adequate size. The entire earthing installation shall
fully comply with all relevant clauses of the latest edition of
Singapore Standard SS 638 and Singapore Standard SS 551.
b) The earth continuity conductor shall be of high -conductivity

copper continuous throughout its length and approval must be
make known to the S.O. prior to any jointing by mechanical
clamps.
7.2. Earth Connections
a) Earth continuity conductors from all exposed metal parts of

equipment required to be earthed including earth connections to
plug sockets shall be connected by one of the following
appropriate methods:
i) To earth connection at the distribution board supplying

the equipment of plug socket.
ii) To any point on the sub-main or main earth continuity

conductor supplying the relevant distribution board.
iii) To earth leakage circuit breaker installed in accordance

with EMA's requirement.
b) The Sub-Contractor shall ensure that there is earth continuity in

all trunkings, pipes, ducts, etc. Earth links of minimum size of 6
TS/M/S68/5
MECHANICAL WORKS
mm, in the form of flexible cables, shall be used to ensure
continuity.
c) The end of earthing lead shall be labelled with 4.75 mm lettering

"SAFETY ELECTRICAL EARTH DO NOT REMOVE" stamped
onto an aluminium plate.
7.3. Size and Type of Copper Earth Conductor
a) The size of copper earth conductor shall be conformed to latest

Singapore Standard SS 638. But, the minimum size of 6
mm green/yellow PVC insulated copper cable shall be used.
b) Each earth conductor shall be clearly labelled.
8. Local Control Boards
8.1. The Sub-Contractor shall supply, deliver, install, test and commission,
Local Control Boards (LCB) of a type specified hereafter complete with
suitable doors that allow easy access to all components installed therein.
8.2. All components shall be so arranged as to facilitate inspection and

maintenance.
8.3. Surface mounted circuit breaker shall be supplied to control all

components together with associated starter contactor etc. mounted on the
panel inside the cubicle. Associated components shall be grouped. Flush
mounted push button and neon pilot light shall be fitted on the front fascia
of the cubicle.
8.4. Appropriate relays shall be incorporated to protect all 3-phase motors

from overload, undervoltage, single-phasing and wrong sequence of
connection.
8.5. All single phase motors shall be protected by thermal overload of a type
with a tripping current adjustable in steps of 0.1 amperes.
8.6. All LCBs shall be provided with a separate interfacing compartment with
different door containing the terminal strips for connections to the
Building Automation System.
8.7. All LCBs shall be provided with voltage free contacts and all necessary
relays (including 4 spare contacts) for remote indication and control by
the BAS.
9. Local Control Board (LCB)/Starters Panels
TS/M/S68/6
MECHANICAL WORKS
9.1. The LCB shall be suitable for 400 volt, 3-phase 4 wire 50 Hz indoor
service in an ambient temperature of up to 40C with 100% R.H. at
maximum continuous rating without exceeding the maximum temperature
permitted by the relevant British Standard or Singapore Standard.
9.2. All cabinets of the control/starter panels shall be of metal clad front type
and manufactured from minimum 2.0 mm (14 SWG) gauge hot dipped
galvanised sheet steel using folded sections or angle iron bracing for
rigidity of construction. Floor mounted control panel shall be of metal
clad flush fronted, totally enclosed cubicle type of similar construction as
wall mounted type.
9.3. The LCB with main incoming circuit protectors rated below 100 Amp
Trip shall be of the wall mounting type, and shall employ power
distribution panel boards for branch circuits together with starters,
protective devices and indicating instruments.
9.4. The cabinet shall be adequately ventilated and be dust, drip and vermin
proof. Unless specified otherwise, the degree of protection of the
enclosure shall be IP 44 in accordance with IEC Publication 144.
9.5. The construction shall be such that it allows for ready access to the
interior of the cubicles for operation and maintenance purposes.
9.6. Where they are installed exposed to weather and at areas of high
humidity, they shall be of weatherproof construction to the approval of
the S.O..
9.7. All cubicles and panels shall wherever practicable be of standard pattern
and dimensions.
9.8. All steel work for the cubicles and panels shall be new and free from rust
and scale. The finish shall be baked enamel of colour to S.O. approval.
9.9. All fixings, screw, bolts and nuts, latches and locks shall be cadmium-
plated and chromed.
9.10. All cubicles and panels shall have hinged doors (concealed hinge type).
Rubber gaskets shall be provided between all doors, covers and cubicles.
9.11. Switches and isolators supplied shall be of the totally enclosed, heavy
duty, air break and quick action type with a short circuit capacity suitable
for the rating of the equipment to be connected. Positive indication of
switch position shall be given by a mechanical "on" or "off" device.
9.12. Interface barrier shall be provided for the fuse cartridges compartment to
safeguard flashover.
9.13. All fuses shall be HRC Cartridge type, having fusing factor of less than
TS/M/S68/7
MECHANICAL WORKS
1.5 and complying with BS 88 Class Q1 or IEC 60269.
9.14. Instruments, indicating lights, rotary switches, etc. shall be mounted

directly on a fixed fascia panel suitably stiffened to hold such items
firmly under all conditions or operation.
9.15. The LCB shall be provided with all wiring and accessories for the
indicating and controlling devices in the supervisory control and
equipment status panel.
9.16. The LCB centres shall comprise of but not limited to the following
components and accessories:
a) Main Incoming Circuit Breaker with protective, indicating and

metering devices.
b) Branch circuit protectors with safety devices indicating and

metering instruments.
c) Motor contactors (starters) of types and capacities as specified

complete with protective and safety devices, instrumentation and
control accessories.
d) A separate compartment to housed the DDC sub-station and all

interfacing cabling connectors.
e) All interlocking relays for fire protection control.
9.17. No-volt release shall be of the manual reset type such that on restoration
of the supply, the motor cannot restart automatically.
9.18. Overload relays shall be factory calibrated and sealed with integral
heaters. They shall be incorporated with stop switch/manual reset control.
The range for setting of overload shall be suitably selected for the
equipment to be connected. They shall be of approved type and
manufacture.
9.19. Indicating lights shall be provided for all starter and control panel to
indicate power incoming mains available, mains turned on, motor run and
stop status, motor overload trip, alarm, etc. Indicating lamps used shall be
of heavy duty type and shall be submitted for approval prior to order.
Lamp provided shall be of long life type with a minimum guaranteed life
of 10,000 hours continuous operation.
9.20. Push buttons shall be provided for manual starting and stopping on all
starter panels. All push buttons shall be designed for switching of control
circuits up to 500 V AC and shall be of heavy duty type and approved
manufacture.
TS/M/S68/8
MECHANICAL WORKS
9.21. Contactors shall be double break non-stick and chatter-free and of

approved manufacture. Thermal protection and no-volt release shall be
provided for each contactors. Contactors shall satisfactorily close at a
minimum of 80% nominal volts.
9.22. Small wirings shall comply with BS 6346 of 600/1000 V grade and PVC
insulated. They shall be neatly cleated and bunched accordingly to their
function that easy identification can be maintained.
9.23. The branch circuit protectors and the main circuit protectors shall be
moulded case circuit breakers of reputed manufacture, and shall have
adequate current carrying capacities.
9.24. Moulded Case Circuit Breakers shall comply with BS 871 : Part 2. The
current ratings, frame sizes and minimum interrupting capacities of the
MCCB shall be specified in the Drawings.
9.25. All moulded case current breakers shall have interrupting capacities in
excess of 43 KA (symmetrical) or where the short circuit rating of the
Motor Control is lower, the breaker interrupting capacity shall correspond
to the short circuit rating of the LCB.
9.26. All relays and timers supplied shall be of make and type to the S.O.'s
approval.
9.27. Ammeter shall be suitable for flush mounting and shall be square or
rectangular type with moulded plastic escutcheons. Range of Ammeter
shall be suitable for the service intended.
9.28. All terminal blocks shall be of adequate rating and shall be of approved
make. Sufficient terminals shall be made available for easy terminations
and in no case shall more than 2 cores be allowed to be terminated at any
terminal.
9.29. All wiring shall be properly labelled and identified with approved type
feruled numbers which shall correspond exactly to the numbering system
as shown in the wiring and connection drawings for the switchboards or
starter panels. All terminals blocks shall also be similarly labelled for
identification. All wire termination shall be done with approved type lugs.
9.30. Name-plates shall be provided for each circuit, equipment and instrument
for identification and designation in accordance with its function. Name-
plates shall be of black plastic material with engraved white lettering and
shall be fixed to the panel by brass screws.
9.31. All power cables shall be of copper conductors and phase conductors
shall follow the acceptable colour code. Cable shall not be less than 6mm2
TS/M/S68/9
MECHANICAL WORKS
to drive and motor connection
9.32. Earth Leakage Relay shall be provided in all control/starter panels and
earth leakage relay (with time delay) and overcurrent relay shall be
provided in panel/board. Earth fault protection of IDMTL type (earth
leakage) and DTL type (overcurrent) shall be provided for multiple
equipment panel/board.
9.33. Where earth fault protection is specified for motor branch circuits, earth
fault relays shall be incorporated into the motor starters. The fault level
setting of these earth fault relays shall be field adjustable.
9.34. The following indicating, measuring, controlling and alarming devices

shall be incorporated into the LCB :
a) One (1) ammeter 4" (113 mm) and one (1) voltmeter 4" (113
mm) dial with selector switches for the indication of current and
voltage between phases, and between each phase and neutral for
the mains incoming power supply, together with indicating pilot
lights.
b) One (1) rotary selector switch "BAS-AUTO-OFF-LOCAL"

operation of the motor or equipment.
c) One (1) Power Meter for measurement of line voltage, phase

current, kW, kWh, Power factor, Frequency etc. for each starter
panel.
d) One (1) set start/stop push buttons colour coded for each motor on
each starter panel.
e) One (1) set pilot lights for the indication of "RUN-STOP-TRIP"

condition of each motor on each starter panel.
f) One (1) 20 ampere spare MCCB circuit breaker.
g) All necessary MCBs complete with outgoing cabling for auxiliary

and associated equipment power supplies.
9.35. The "BAS-AUTO-OFF-LOCAL" operations at the LCB shall be

interpreted as follows:
a) "BAS/REMOTE" means the starting of motor or equipment can

be started at the BAS console or at the supervisory control panel.
b) "OFF" means the complete power cut-off of motors.
c) "LOCAL" means the starting of motor or equipment shall be

TS/M/S68/10
MECHANICAL WORKS
started at Local Control Board and it could not be started at the
BAS console or the supervisory control panel.
10. Cabling, Trunkings, Cable Trays and Conduits
Unless otherwise stated in the Drawings or Specification, all power cables

between starters and motors shall be in copper of 600/1000 V voltage grade,
PVC insulated pvc sheathed cables to BS 6004 or SS 358. They shall be
installed on galvanised cable tray, or in galvanised steel conduit. Where the
cables on trays are installed less than 1.2m above floor level they shall be
protected with galvanised steel cover. All cabling inside Chiller Plant Rooms
for pumps, fans and other equipments shall be PVC/PVC insulated cables
except for chillers, it shall be XLPE/PVC insulated cables. All cabling for
equipments with emergency power supply shall be Fire Resistant cables.
10.1. Where PVC/SWA/PVC cables are indicated in the drawings, they

shall be of copper and comply with BS 6346 (600/1000 V grade).
All underground cables shall be PVC/SWA/PVC cables and
terminated with BICC gland.
10.2. Where mineral insulated copper sheather (MICS) cables are

indicated in the drawings they shall comply with BS 6207: Part 1.
MICS cables shall be installed in accordance with the
manufacturer's instruction using proprietary fittings and
accessories.
10.3. All power cabling sizes shall unless other wise indicated in the
drawings be adequately sized to cater for the normal current rating
and starting current of the equipment without undue overheating
and stress.
10.4. Termination of power cable into motors or panel shall be through

approved type of cast metal boxes with pvc or brass glands and
proper cable sockets.
10.5. All power cables shall be fixed on cable tray with approved pvc or
brass saddles and clips at not more than 300 mm intervals.
10.6. All fire resistance type multi-core cables used shall conform to
IEC 60331 and BS 4066.
10.7. All underground cables shall be PVC/SWA/PVC cables and

10.8. All cabling for pumps, and other equipments shall be PVC/PVC
insulated cables. All cabling for equipments with emergency
power supply shall be MICS/PVC insulated cables.
TS/M/S68/11
MECHANICAL WORKS
10.9. All cables shall be properly labelled by means of cable markers
and cable ties shall be used to identify each set of cables.
10.10. All trunkings and cable trays shall be electro-galvanised and the
thickness of trunkings and cable trays shall be as follows:
Size of Trunking Thickness of Trunking
50 x 50 mm 1.219 mm (18 SWG)
50 x 75 mm 1.219 mm (18 SWG)
50 x 100 mm 1.219 mm (18 SWG)
50 x 125 mm 1.422 mm (17 SWG)
50 x 150 mm 1.422 mm (17 SWG)
50 x 200 mm and above 1.626 mm (16 SWG)
Size of Cable Tray Thickness of Cable Tray
50 mm 0.914 mm (20 SWG)
100 mm 0.914 mm (20 SWG)
150 mm 0.914 mm (20 SWG)
200 mm 1.219 mm (18 SWG)
250 mm 1.219 mm (18 SWG)
300 mm 1.219 mm (18 SWG)
375 mm and above 1.626 mm (16 SWG)
10.11. All metal parts, piping, etc, should be bonded to the earthing point
TS/M/S68/12
MECHANICAL WORKS
by means of minimum 6 mm PVC insulated earth cable.
10.12. All metal conduits shall be galvanised steel BS 4568, class 4

manufactured and tested in accordance with IEC 61386.
Minimum size of conduit shall be 20 mm diameter. Space factor
for cable in conduits shall not exceed 0.4 (40%). All metal
conduits shall be of heavy-gauge type. All conduits shall be run
neatly, concealed where possible, with runs truly horizontal or
vertical or parallel to walls where conduits run in floors. Conduits
shall be securely fixed with saddles and round head screws.
Powered type of fittings will not be permitted. From outlet to
outlet there shall be not more than four (4) normal bends or their
equivalent. Inspection type conduit accessories shall be used
throughout. Conduits shall be fixed in position before cables are
drawn into them. The entire length of all cables shall be enclosed
in conduit. Junction boxes shall be used at bends and "t"
junctions. Elbows and tees will not be accepted.
10.13. Flexible conduits which are exposed to weather or dampness shall

be of water-proof type with proper seals at connections to GI
conduit and motor terminal box. Ordinary flexible conduit
wrapped with PVC tape will not be accepted.
10.14. All circular junctions boxes, pull boxes, inspection elbows, solid
elbows shall be of malleable iron type and of standard pattern
with spout to BS 4568. All access covers for these accessories
shall be provided with gaskets and lids.
10.15. Connections to all equipment subject to movement shall be in

flexible conduit. Where they are exposed to water, oil or to the
weather, the flexible conduit shall be of extruded pvc sheathed.
Normal galvanised steel flexible conduit will not be acceptable.
10.16. Connections to the water tank's electrodes shall be of extruded

pvc sheathed type flexible conduit.
10.17. All conduit and trunking shall be provided with saddles and
bracket at not more than 1 m interval.
10.18. All conduit and trunking shall be finally painted to approval.
10.19. Whenever the steel trunking passing through a full height fire wall
or floor, approved fire stop putty or approved equal material shall
be used to seal the cavity inside of the trunking and approved fire
stop compound or approved equal material to seal the air-gaps
between wall or floor and trunking.
11. Outdoor Equipment

TS/M/S68/13
MECHANICAL WORKS
11.1. All outdoor equipment shall be provided with suitable weatherproof local
start/stop control panel which shall be mounted in close proximity to the
equipment for servicing purposes and marked accordingly. Exact location
of the local control panel shall be decided on site if not indicated.
11.2. All wiring to these equipment shall be PVC/PVC insulated and sheathed
cables run in conduit/trunking.
12. Motors and Starters
12.1. All motor and starters shall be suitably tropicalised and the starters shall
be incorporated with over current release in each phase and a device to
prevent single phasing as well as under voltage release.
12.2. All motors and starters shall comply with the current regulations of the
electricity act
12.3. All motors and starts shall be of approved make, and designed for
operation in 400 V/3 Phase/50 Hz supply. Chilled water / condenser water
pumps shall be run with variable speed drive.
12.4. All starters shall be of uniform make irrespective of method of starting

and shall be rated same as the motor KW.
12.5. Unless otherwise stated elsewhere in the specification and in the

drawings, all motors shall comply with the following:
a) They shall be selected suitably for 3-phase, 50 Hz operation with

speed not more than 1500 rpm unless otherwise approved.
b) They shall be of squirrel cage induction type with totally-enclosed

fan cooled enclosure.
c) They shall be continuously rated and designed to operate at the

highest standard possible power factor (min. 0.85) and efficiency
under all conditions of loading.
d) They shall be of Class F insulation with a Class B permissible

temperature rise.
e) They shall be equipped with cast iron made frames and brackets.
f) They shall be equipped with enclosed cast iron terminal to allow

drilling and tapping to accept cables.
g) They shall be fitted with roller or deep groove ball bearings at the
driving end and deep groove ball bearing at the non-driving end.
TS/M/S68/14
MECHANICAL WORKS
Motor driving equipment giving rise to end thrust shall be
equipped with bearings designed to counter unbalanced end
thrust.
Bearings shall be selected for the duty in accordance with ISO

recommendations and shall have a minimum life of 20,000 hours.
h) Motors shall be tested in accordance with the requirements of BS

2613 and BS 4999.
i) Where they are installed outdoor or exposed to the weather, they

shall be of minimum IP 55.
13. Terminal Strips and Wiring
13.1. All incoming and outgoing and control circuits shall be wired to an
approved centralized terminal strip, and the equipment at the inside of the
cubicle shall be run via wiring channels and wiring outside the channels
shall be run neatly and taped to the approval of the S.O.. All wires shall
be terminated with approved cable lugs, and separate cable lugs shall be
used for each individual wire.
13.2. All wires shall be colour coded and shall have numbered ferrules at both
ends. The ferrules shall be of white insulating materials having a glossy
finished with the characters indelibly marked in black. Additional red
ferrules marked "Trip" shall be fitted to the wires inter-connecting the
relay trip contacts and the shunt release coils.
13.3. All fuses and links shall be of the bakelite HRC type category 440/AC 4
class Q to B.S. 88 or IEC 60269
13.4. All wiring shall be arranged in a regular manner with bends set at 90C
and securely held in position with suitable clips and where convenient
shall be installed in the uprights and/or backstays, insulating bushes being
used where necessary. They shall be formed in a neat and systematic
manner.
13.5. Meter wiring of the switchboard shall be carried out in PVC insulated
flame-proof switchboard cables of size not less than 1.5 sq. mm and
enclosed in flexible plastic conduit. All meter wiring shall be of similar
colours to those of the respective busbars etc., to which connections are
made.
13.6. All terminals shall be fitted with brass washers and securely fixed with
lock nuts to an approved type of terminal block placed in an easily
accessible position for testing at site.
TS/M/S68/15
MECHANICAL WORKS
13.7. No connectors or soldered joints shall be permitted in the wiring.
13.8. Power cable and control cable shall be installed in separate

conduit/trunking.
14. Moulded Case Circuit Breakers (MCCB)
14.1. General
a) Moulded case circuit breakers shall conform to the latest British

Standard BS 3871 part 2, IEC 60947 or NEMA Standard AB1
and U/L listed.
b) All MCCB shall have minimum interrupting capacities of R.M.S.

symmetrical amperes at 400 Volts A.C. for 3 sec.
c) All MCCBs in switchboard or distribution panel board shall be of

the same make.
d) All MCCBs of 600 AF and above shall be provided with easy

operating handles.
e) All MCCBs feeding to feeder/plug in bus-ways shall be of the

current limiting type.
14.2. Operation
Moulded case circuit breakers shall be operated by a toggle type handle

and shall have a quick-make over-centre switching mechanism that is
mechanically trip free from the handle so that the contacts cannot be held-
closed against short circuits and abnormal currents. Tripping due to
overload or short circuit shall be clearly indicated by the handle
automatically assuming a position midway between the manual "ON" and
"OFF" positions. All latch surfaces shall be as constructed that they open,
closed and trip simultaneously.
14.3. Construction
a) Each of these breakers shall provide inverse time delay and

instantaneous circuit protection by means of thermal magnetic
element. Ambient compensation shall be accomplished by a
secondary bi-metal that will allow the breaker to carry rated
current between 25C and 50C with tripping characteristics that
are approximately the same throughout this temperature range.
b) Breakers shall be completely enclosed in a moulded case. Non-

interchangeable trip breaker shall have their cover sealed; whereas
interchangeable trip breaker shall have the trip unit sealed to
prevent tampering. Contacts for circuit breaker shall be of non-
welding silver or silver alloy.
c) Manual trip button and front-adjustable magnetic trip device shall

TS/M/S68/16
MECHANICAL WORKS
be incorporated in the moulded case circuit breaker.
d) Arcing shall be extinguished rapidly and effectively by Arc-

extinguishing device, in normal switching as well as protective
tripping, to minimise deterioration of contacts and adjacent
insulating materials.
e) Terminals shall be constructed to assure electrical efficiency and

reliability, with minimised possibility of localised heating.
f) Trip indication shall be by handle position mid-way between 'ON'

and 'OFF'. To reset the trip mechanism, the handle shall be moved
to extreme 'OFF' and 'ON' position.
g) For current limiting (CL) moulded case circuit breakers, the

current limiting breakers shall be fuseless type and shall have the
same operation as specified above. They shall meet the IEC
requirements and shall be UL listed. All three phases shall be
opened simultaneously under fault conditions. The breakers shall
have interrupting ratings as low as 10KA rms, sym. on systems
capable of delivering fault currents as high as 200KA, rms, sym.
The contact opening and are extinguishing shall be less than 
cycle to reduce and limit peak let-through current and let-through
energy.
15. Colour Codes and Labels
15.1 Corners and bases shall be coloured in accordance with the following
code:
Colour Function
White 5A fuse
Blue 15A fuse
Yellow 20 fuse
Red link
15.2 Descriptive labels shall be fitted, adjacent to all fuses and links.
TS/M/S68/17
MECHANICAL WORKS
15.3 The terminal strip shall be numbered and schedule so as to identify the
particular circuits without difficulty. The same numbers and reference
letters identifying circuits and/or components of the equipment shall be
shown on the wiring diagram which is to be supplied by the Sub-
Contractor.
15.4 The interior of each piece of equipment shall be clearly marked to show
the phases and to this end either coloured plastic discs screwed to fixed
components or identification by means of colour plastic sleeving shall be
employed. Plastic tape will not be permitted.
16. Labels
16.1. All equipment shall be clearly labelled in accordance with regulations,

and to indicate its functions by means of engraved traffolyte ivorine
labels (Block in white lettering for normal supply, Red in white lettering
for emergency supply).
16.2. Each circuit breaker, switch, switch-fuse, fuse, selector switch, indicating
light, push button, instrument, etc. shall be labelled indicating its rating,
function, designation. In addition warning signs marked "400 volts
Danger" manufactured to standard design and colour shall be suitably
mounted and fixed on the back of the incoming cubicles on the front of
each switchboard and on the door of the switchroom. The marking shall
be in accordance with BS 171 clause 79.
17. Current Transformers (C.T.)
17.1. Current transformers necessary for the operation of instruments and

meters shall be of "straight through" type, with accuracy not less than
class 'C' for measuring, class '0.5' or better for metering and class 'S' for
protection as per SS 638. All CT for chiller plant shall comply to latest
BCA green mark requirement.
17.2. Current transformers shall be adequately rated in V.A. to carry the

summation of all V.A. burdens of connected loads, and shall be capable
of carrying currents of the corresponding circuit breakers and fuses. They
secondary and full load current flowing in the primary. They shall
comply with the latest EMA requirements.
TS/M/S68/18
MECHANICAL WORKS
17.3. Current transformers shall be adequately supported and installed as to

permit easy access and to be readily replaceable, if necessary, without
dismantling of adjacent equipment.
18. Instruments and Meters
18.1. Instruments and meters for external panel mounting shall be flush
mounting, square or rectangular type with moulded plastic escutcheons
and shall conform to the requirements.
18.2. Reading scales in kilo-watt hour meters shall be in multiple of ten (10).
18.3. All instruments shall be to B.S. 89 1st grade, moving iron spring
controlled with 100 mm diameter dials (240 scale) with external zero
adjustment. Integrating meters shall be to B.S. 37 part 1 and 2 and part 4 :
with cyclometer registers and shall be calibrated for use with their
respective current transformers. They shall be fully tropicalised.
18.4. Voltmeters shall incorporate selector switches to enable phase to phase

and phase to neutral voltage to be read. Ammeters shall have selector
switches to read all the line currents. Selector switches shall be of
approved rotary type.
19. Over Current Relays
19.1. The over current relays shall be IDMTL adjustable current setting
between 50% to 200% of rated values and adjustable time lag settings of
0 to 3.0 seconds; instantaneous high set elements shall be provided for
each main circuit breaker.
19.2. The relays shall be of the surface mounted and housed in a totally
enclosed dust-proof switchboard module.
19.3. The operating coils and contacts shall be adequately rated to carry the
necessary load. Operation indicator and reset facilities shall be provided.
19.4. The relays shall be heavy pattern, unaffected by external vibration, fully
tropicalised and capable of operation in any position.
20. Earth Fault Relays
20.1. The earth fault relays shall incorporate adjustable current setting between
5% to 40% in steps of 5% and adjustable time lag 0 to 1 sec.
TS/M/S68/19
MECHANICAL WORKS
20.2. The relays shall be of the flush pattern and housed in removable dust-
proof sheet metal casings provided with viewing glass or clean plastic.
necessary load. Operation indicator and reset facilities shall be provided
to show a fault condition.
21. Indicating Lamps
Indicating lamps shall be the LED 24 volts type. The lamp shall be easily
removed or replaced from the front of the panel without using extractors and shall
be adequately ventilated.
22. Moulded Case Circuit Breakers (MCCB), Contactors, Isolators, etc.
Moulded case circuit breakers, contactors, isolators and other items where
applicable and necessary shall be provided to comply with the relevant clauses
specified elsewhere in the Specification.
23. Miniature Circuit Breakers (MCB)
23.1. General
Miniature circuit breakers shall comply with the latest British Standard
BS 3871 with latest amendments.
Unless otherwise stated, miniature circuit breakers and distribution boards

shall have minimum short-circuit capacities of R.M.S. symmetrical
amperes of 10 KA for power circuit distribution boards at 230/400 Volt
A.C.
All miniature circuit breakers (MCB) shall have tripping characteristic

type "3" curve.
Irrespective to the mounting positions, the miniature circuit breakers shall

be operated in accordance with the factory calibrated characteristic.
All miniature circuit breakers shall be of positive plug-on or bolted-on, no

error connection type.
TS/M/S68/20
MECHANICAL WORKS
Miniature circuit breaker must have positive contact position indicator.
TS/M/S68/21
MECHANICAL WORKS
23.2. Operation
Miniature circuit breakers shall be operated by a toggle-type handle and

shall have a quick-made, positive quick-break over centre switching
mechanism that is mechanically trip free from the handle so that the
contacts cannot be held close against short circuits and over current
conditions. When the circuit breaks and over current conditions. When
the circuit breakers automatically trip, the operating handle shall be
assured a position between "ON" and "OFF" positions. The contacts shall
also be of positive quick-make and quick-break on manual and automatic
operation.
Contact position indicator (coloured) linking physically to the contacts for

the positive indication of isolation shall be provided.
Two and three pole circuit breakers shall be commonly trip with
individual spring pressure on each contact.
23.3. Construction
Each pole of the circuit breakers shall have a factory calibrated thermal
bi-metal overcurrent element with inverse time delay characteristic and a
factory calibrated instantaneous magnetic tripping device for short circuit
condition. Ambient temperature compensation shall be accomplished by a
secondary bi-metal that shall allow the circuit breaker to carry rated
current between 25C to 50C with tripping characteristics that are the
same throughout this temperature range, and that shall not cause nuisance
tripping.
Circuit breakers shall be completely enclosed in a high dielectric strength

casing. The properties of the dielectric strength casing shall not
deteriorate with time.
Contacts of circuit breaker shall be non-welding silver-tungsten.
The high pressure plug-on busbar connector shall assure a solid positive
contacts without screw to tighten and no chance of error.
Load terminals shall be constructed to assure electrical efficiency and

reliability, with minimized possibility of localised heating, and for
straight in wiring.
Arcing shall be extinguished rapidly and effectively by arc chute barrier,

in normal switching as well as protective tripping, to minimize
deterioration of contacts and adjacent insulating materials.
Trip indication shall be by means of the handle position lying between

"ON" and "OFF". To reset the trip mechanism, the handle shall be moved
to extreme "OFF" position.
24. Motor Control Centres (MCCs)/ A/C Switchboard

TS/M/S68/22
MECHANICAL WORKS
24.1. The MCC shall be designed in accordance with Form 3 of IEC 61439
and suitable for 400 volt, 3-phase 4 wire 50 Hz indoor service in an
ambient temperature of up to 40C with 100% R.H. at maximum
continuous rating without exceeding the maximum temperature permitted
by the relevant British Standard or Singapore Standard. The Sub-
Contractor shall guarantee all boards are constructed in accordance the
type tested requirements of IEC 61439 Form 3.
24.2. The MCC shall be of the self-contained, floor mounting, extensible, metal
clad, flush-fronted, front and rear access cubicle type, built up from
completely enclosed units housing all the circuit breakers, meters,
selector switches, indicating lamps and protection relays, current
transformers, protection transformers, contactors, busbars, fuses, anti-
condensation heaters complete with indicating lamps and switches, and
etc.
24.3. Switches and isolators supplied shall be of the totally enclosed, heavy
duty, air break and quick action type with a short circuit capacity suitable
for the rating of the equipment to be connected. Positive indication of
switch position shall be given by a mechanical "on" or "off" device.
24.4. Interface barrier shall be provided for the fuse cartridges compartment to
safeguard flashover.
24.5. All fuses shall be HRC Cartridge type, having fusing factor of less than
1.5 and complying with BS 88 Class Q1 or IEC 60269
24.6. Instruments, indicating lights, rotary switches, etc. shall be mounted

24.7. The MCC shall be provided with all wiring and accessories for the
24.8. All the incoming power supply ACB/MCCB and outgoing power supply
ACB/MCCB for pumps and chillers, the ampere frame size (AF) shall be
one size higher than the ampere Trip (AT).
TS/M/S68/23
MECHANICAL WORKS
24.9. Motor control centres shall comprise of but not limited to the following

metering devices.
b) Main bus sections and vertical bus sections as applicable with full
neutral bus and ground bus sections.
c) Branch circuit protectors with safety devices, indicating and

d) Motor contactors (starters) of types and capacities as specified

complete with protective and safety devices, instrumentation and
control accessories.
24.10. The bus sections shall have adequate current carrying capacity and be of
all copper and electro-tinned. The bus sections shall be adequately
protected and supported and shall have a short circuit rating not less than
43 KA (symmetrical) at 400 volts for 3 seconds.
24.11. The branch circuit protectors and the main circuit protectors or all motor
control centres shall be moulded case circuit breakers (MCCB) of
reputable manufacture, and shall have adequate current carrying
capacities.
24.12. All moulded case current breakers shall have interrupting capacities in
Motor Control is lower, the breaker interrupting capacity shall correspond
to the short circuit rating of the motor control centre.
24.13. Earth Leakage Relay shall be provided in all MCC below 100 Amps and
earth leakage relay (with time delay) and overcurrent relay shall be
provided in MCC 100 Amps and above. Earth fault protection of IDMTL
type (earth leakage) and DTL type (overcurrent) shall be provided for
multiple equipment panel/board.
24.14. MCCs with main incoming circuit protectors rated below 100 Amp Trip
shall be of the wall mounting type, and shall employ power distribution
panel boards for branch circuits together with starters, protective devices
and indicating instruments.
TS/M/S68/24
MECHANICAL WORKS
24.15. Motor control centres with current or voltage operated earth leakage
circuit breakers for protection of branch circuits feeding motors or other
air conditioning and mechanical ventilation equipment will not be
accepted.
However, where earth fault protection is specified for motor branch

circuits earth fault relays shall be incorporated into the motor starters.
The fault level setting of these earth fault relays shall be field adjustable.
24.16. The following indicating, measuring controlling and alarming devices

shall be incorporated into the MCC:
a) One (1) ammeter 4½" (113 mm) dial and one (1)
voltmeter 4½" (113 mm) dial with selector switches for
the indication of current and voltage between phases, and
between each phase and neutral for the mains incoming
power supply, together with indicating pilot lights.
b) One (1) kilowatt meter 4½" (113 mm) dial for reading the
rate of electricity consumption at the main incoming
panel.
c) One (1) rotary selector switch "REMOTE-OFF-LOCAL"

d) One (1) ammeter only with selector switch for

measurement of line voltage and phase current of each
motor on each starter panel. The selector switch shall be
marked with "Line1-Line2-Line3" indicating the phases.
e) One (1) set start/stop push buttons colour coded for each
motor on each starter panel.
f) One (1) set 24V LED pilot lights for the indication of
"RUN-STOP-TRIP" condition of each motor on each
starter panel.
g) One (1) set or rotary selector switch for pumps operation,

on each of the condenser and chilled water pumps' starter
panel.
h) One (1) Power Meter for measurement of line voltage,

phase current, kW, kWh, Power factor, Frequency etc. for
each incoming feeder and starter panel. Current
Transformer include power meter shall have an accuracy
of CL 0.5 or better
i) spare MCCBs as specified.
j) One set additional Power meter for incoming feeder for

measurement of line voltage, phase current, kW, kWh,
TS/M/S68/25
MECHANICAL WORKS
Power factor, Frequency.c. for each incoming feeder.
Current Transformer include power meter shall have an
accuracy of CL 0.5 or better
24.17. The "BAS-AUTO-OFF-LOCAL" operations at the MCC shall be

a) "BAS/REMOTE" means the starting of motor or equipment can

be started at the BAS console or the supervisory control panel
through IMSS.

started at the Motor Control Centre and it could not be started at
the BAS console or the supervisory control panel of IMSS.
25. MCC Tests
25.1. Delivery Test
After the equipment has been erected on site, and before final connection
to supply, the Sub-Contractor shall at his own expense:
(a) to arrange with the EMA/Employer/Consultant to carry out the

necessary testing
(b) to carry out all necessary adjustments and/or tests necessary to

demonstrate that the equipment complies with the requirements of
this Specification with his own equipment, in the presence of and
to the satisfaction of the S.O.. Such tests shall include:
i) Demonstration that all equipment are installed and all

wiring connected, so that the board functions as required.
ii) Tests of accuracy of all measuring instruments.
iii) Insulation resistances between phases, between each

phase and neutral, and between each phase, neutral and
earth with circuit breakers closed.
iv) Insulation resistance across breaks in all circuit breakers,

with the breaker open and with all equipment installed.
v) Power - frequency voltage tests, in accordance with clause

63 of B.S. 116:
Copies of test sheets, showing the results of all test carried out in
accordance with this section of the Specification, shall be submitted in
Triplicate, to the S.O..
TS/M/S68/26
MECHANICAL WORKS
25.2. Routing Tests
The Sub-Contractor shall submit certified test sheets showing details of

all routing tests applied, during manufacture, to the switchboards and the
individual components thereof. Without in any way affecting the
generality of this Clause such test shall include the following clauses
relating to switchgear:
a) Operating test, consisting of fifty operations of the operating

mechanisms performed with the closing device.
b) Millivolt drop test, or resistance test at the rated current of the

equipment across all contacts individually, and as a complete unit
as a check against temperature rise type test if applicable. The
record taken on the type test shall be taken as datum if applicable.
c) Tests on each switching unit to determine the satisfactory

operation of trip coil or coils at the minimum and the normal
tripping voltage.
25.3. Type Tests
The switchboards, ie MCCs, shall be capable as a whole of withstanding

without damage the electrical, mechanical and thermal stresses produced
under short circuit conditions equivalent to the interrupting capacities of
RMS Symmetrical Amperes at 400 Volts A.C. of the incoming breakers
for 3 sec. and shall comply with all requirements of B.S. 162. In addition
to details of type tests for making and breaking capacity, as required
under this Clause of the Specification, the Sub-Contractor shall submit
certified details of type tests for mechanical endurance and temperature
rise from each type of switching equipment included in the Contract, such
test to be carried out in accordance with the requirements of their relevant
British Standard Specifications.
Switchboard manufacturer shall be required to submit two (2) sets of

detail switchboard construction drawings approved and endorsed by his
principal to ensure the switchboards are constructed and manufactured
according to the type test requirements and a letter of undertaking for
each type tested switchboard.
All parts of the MCC shall be subjected to type tests to verify compliance
with the relevant BS standard. The type test shall include verification of
temperature rise limit, dielectric properties, short circuit strength,
continuity of protective circuit, clearance and creepage distances,
mechanical operation and degree of protection.
The Sub-Contractor shall submit type test certificates issued by

independent testing authority which shall be a member of the Associated
of Short Circuit Testing Authority (ASTA).
25.4. Frame Construction

TS/M/S68/27
MECHANICAL WORKS
a) MCC/Main switchboard frame shall be fabricated from not less

than 12 B.G. (2.5 mm thick) steel sheet pressed or rolled to shape.
All joints shall be neatly welded and finished flush with the
adjacent surfaces by grinding and/or machining. No joints shall
be located on a corner and all base edges shall be lipped.
b) Structural members and bracing where necessary shall be welded

or bolted to the frame.
c) Each cubicle shall be of standard size, uniform in height, width

and depth.
d) Each cubicle shall be adequately ventilated and the interior of

each cubicle shall be dust, insect and vermin proof.
25.5. Doors and Panels
a) Doors and instrument panels shall be constructed with not less

than 12 SWG (2.5 mm thick) steel sheet pressed or rolled so that
edges are given a neat round finish and shall be reinforced with a
suitable frame welded to the inside folded edge of the door. An
approved stiffener shall be welded to the inside of each door
and/or panel.
b) The side, back and top panels as well as the front panel shall be
removable to provide access.
c) The doors and panels shall be seated on a neoprene gasket

cemented to the frame. Doors shall hang on substantially
concealed type hinges and fitted with nickel or chrome plated
automobile type door handles which shall be fitted with suitable
toggle to operate the rods so as to latch with suitable slots on both
the top and bottom of the switchboards. Minimum size of the
latching rods shall be 9.5 mm diameter or 19 mm x 4.8 mm flat
and they shall be adequately guided by brackets space not more
than 450 mm centres. The latching rods and associated brackets
shall be cadmium plated. The instrument panel compartments of
the switchboards shall have hinged doors and countersunk
cadmium plated fixing screws.
d) All front side and top panels shall be constructed in a manner

similar to that specified for doors mentioned above. They shall be
fitted from the inside of the switchboards by means of studs and
cadmium plated washers and nuts.
25.6. Base Plate and Insulation Panels
TS/M/S68/28
MECHANICAL WORKS
a) The MCC/switchboard shall be of the front access type.
b) All equipment shall be mounted on rigid base plates made of not

less than 12 B.G. (2.5 mm thick) sheet steel with folded edges and
welded stiffeners wherever necessary. Whenever insulating
panels are required to mount special equipment they shall be of
high quality black bakelite, polished on the front and sprayed with
four (4) coats of matt white on the back. All edges must be cut
straight and squared and shall be chamfered on the front edge
with 3.2 mm chamfer. Any defective or damaged panel shall be
rejected and the Sub-Contractor shall replace it at his own
expense.
25.7. Finishing and Metal Work
a) Panel work of the MCC/switchboards shall be finished smooth.

All metal work shall be rust inhibited and have baked enamel
finish of dark admiralty grey, externally and white internally.
b) The interior of the MCC/switchboard shall be illuminated by low

voltage lamps, which will be switched on when any portion of the
cubicle is opened to provide adequate lighting on all equipment to
which access has been gained.
c) After erection on site and after all inspection and tests have been
carried out, the Sub-Contractor shall thoroughly clean all parts,
apply an additional coat of anti-corrosive structural priming paint
to any part of the originally painted surfaces that have been
scratched or otherwise marked and also apply at least one
additional finishing coat as specified.
25.8. Busbar
a) The design of the air-insulated busbar shall comply with B.S. 159,
B.S. 1432 and/or B.S. 1433. They shall be of hard drawn high
conductivity copper of adequate rectangular cross-section as
determined in accordance with Singapore Standard SS 638 or IEE
regulations for the electrical equipment of buildings to carry
continuously the currents required or as detailed elsewhere in this
Specification or accompanying Drawings. In any case, a current
density of 155 amperes per sq. m (1,000 amperes per sq. in.) of
cross sectional area shall not be exceeded.
b) Busbars and links shall be covered with plastic sheathing, coded

to comply with the standard colour code.
c) All joints in busbars shall be bolted or clamped with contact

surfaces suitably prepared to prevent oxidation in service. Joints
in copper busbar shall have tinned surfaces. They shall be rigidly
supported to as to withstand any mechanical forces to which they
may be subjected both during transport, erection and normal
operation.
TS/M/S68/29
MECHANICAL WORKS
d) Busbar shall be supported on glass fibre reinforced polyester

blocks or epoxy-resin blocks or resin bounded paper or resin
bonded laminated-wood or other approved insulating materials.
The busbar supports shall be securely bolted to the structural
frame of the cubicle. A neutral busbar shall be of the same cross-
section as that for the phases. All bolts connections shall be
secured by lock nuts.
e) The minimum busbar clearances between phases and between

phases and earth shall not be less than 38 mm and 32 mm
respectively.
f) Busbars to MCCBs or other apparatus shall be made of circular

busbars covered with Nylex tubing or rectangular section busbars
covered with plastic sheathing in corresponding phase colour and
terminated in core grip cable sockets or other approved
termination.
g) All screws, bolts, washer and similar securing materials used for
the construction of the switchboard shall be cadmium plated.
h) All contact parts of the busbars and connections shall be sanded

and coated with thin coat of chemically inert petroleum jelly.
25.9. Insulation
a) The clearance and insulation shall be such as to withstand

the standard high voltage test on the switchgear.
b) All insulation used shall be of the best quality and

sufficiently strong to withstand all stresses which may be
imposed on it in the ordinary erection and operation of the
plant. Test results shall be submitted.
c) Where insulators are cemented or jointed to metal parts,

such jointing shall be of such a nature that no dangerous
stresses are set up on the insulators by the unequal
expansion or contraction of the insulation and the metal
through range of temperature up to 40C.
d) Attention is drawn to the possibility of bakelised paper

being damaged by arching if unprotected with consequent
cracking, and unless arc controls are fitted, such bakelised
paper shall be protected by a porcelain shroud or other
approved means. The Tenderer shall state the protective
means for protection.
e) Arrangements must be made to ensure that metal parts

attached to bushings are maintained at fixed potential
under all conditions of operation.
TS/M/S68/30
MECHANICAL WORKS
25.10. Phasing
a) Phase rotations shall be strictly maintained throughout the

project, and shall comply with the requirements of B.S.
158.
b) Phase distinguishing colours shall be RED, YELLOW and

BLUE.
25.11. Earthing
a) All metal parts of the switchboard and associated

equipment shall be bonded and connected to a main
earthing bar running throughout the entire length of the
switchboard.
b) All earthing conductors shall be permanently connected to

the main earthing bar.
c) All earthing provisions shall be made strictly in

accordance with the requirements of EMA and it shall be
the Sub-Contractor's responsibility to fully acquaint
himself of all such requirements.
25.12. Neutral Links
a) Neutral links of incoming breakers shall be easily

accessible and removable.
b) Neutral links of all outgoing moulded case circuit

breakers shall be removable and accessible from the front.
25.13. Cable Entries
a) The switchboards shall house all necessary boxes, glands,

etc. mounted vertically and arranged for front and rear
access and connections. Provision for busbar connection
to be done by Sub-Contractor.
b) Paper insulated lead-sheathed steel tape wire armoured or

PVC/SWA/PVC cables shall be bottom entries unless
otherwise stated, whereas PVC/PVC and MICC cables
shall be top entries.
TS/M/S68/31
MECHANICAL WORKS
c) Cable boxes for termination of paper insulated lead-
sheathed steel tape wire armoured cables shall be mounted
at base of the split type manufactured from good quality
cast iron free from blow-holes complete with filling
orifice, drain plugs, expansion dome, brass-cone shaped
wiping gland of appropriate size, armour clamp and of
such design as is suitable for attachment to the equipment
served and such as to permit cable conductors to be
formed into equipment terminals without undue bending.
d) Connections from switchboards gears to the busbar

trunking shall be top entries and switchboard stubs shall
be included in the switchboard design.
25.14. Terminal Strips and Wiring
a) All incoming and outgoing and control circuits shall be

wired to an approved centralized terminal strip, and the
equipment at the inside of the cubicle shall be run via
wiring channels and wiring outside the channels shall be
run neatly and taped to the approval of the S.O.. All wires
shall be terminated with approved cable lugs, and separate
cable lugs shall be used for each individual wire.
b) All wires shall be colour coded and shall have numbered

ferrules at both ends. The ferrules shall be of white
insulating materials having a glossy finished with the
characters indelibly marked in black. Additional red
ferrules marked "Trip" shall be fitted to the wires inter-
connecting the relay trip contacts and the shunt release
coils.
c) All fuses and links shall be of the bakelite HRC type

category 440/AC 4 class Q to B.S. 88 or IEC 60269
d) All wiring shall be arranged in a regular manner with

bends set at 90C and securely held in position with
suitable clips and where convenient shall be installed in
the uprights and/or backstays, insulating bushes being
used where necessary. They shall be formed in a neat and
systematic manner.
e) Meter wiring of the switchboard shall be carried out in

PVC insulated flame-proof switchboard cables of size not
less than 1.5 sq. mm and enclosed in flexible plastic
conduit. All meter wiring shall be of similar colours to
those of the respective busbars etc., to which connections
are made.
TS/M/S68/32
MECHANICAL WORKS
26.1. Unless otherwise stated in the Drawings or Specification, all power cables
between starters and motors shall be in copper of 600/1000 V voltage
grade, PVC insulated pvc sheathed cables to BS 6004 or SS 50. They
shall be installed on galvanised cable tray, or in galvanised steel conduit.
Where the cables on trays are installed less than 1.2m above floor level
they shall be protected with galvanised steel cover. All cabling inside
Chiller Plant Rooms for pumps, fans and other equipments shall be
PVC/PVC insulated cables except for chillers, it shall be XLPE/PVC
insulated cables. All cabling for equipments with emergency power
supply shall be Fire Resistant cables.
26.2. Where PVC/SWA/PVC cables are indicated in the drawings, they shall be
of copper and comply with BS 6346 (600/1000 V grade). All
underground cables shall be PVC/SWA/PVC cables and terminated with
BICC gland.
26.3. Where mineral insulated copper sheather (MICS) cables are indicated in
the drawings they shall comply with BS 6207: Part 1. MICS cables shall
be installed in accordance with the manufacturer's instruction using
proprietary fittings and accessories.
26.4. All power cabling sizes shall unless other wise indicated in the drawings
be adequately sized to cater for the normal current rating and starting
current of the equipment without undue overheating and stress.
26.5. Termination of power cable into motors or panel shall be through

approved type of cast metal boxes with pvc or brass glands and proper
cable sockets.
26.6. All power cables shall be fixed on cable tray with approved pvc or brass
saddles and clips at not more than 300 mm intervals.
26.7. All fire resistance type multi-core cables used shall conform to IEC
60331 and BS 4066.
26.8. All underground cables shall be PVC/SWA/PVC cables and terminated

with BICC gland.
26.9. All cabling for pumps, and other equipments shall be PVC/PVC insulated
cables. All cabling for equipments with emergency power supply shall be
MICS/PVC insulated cables.
26.10. All cables shall be properly labelled by means of cable markers and cable
ties shall be used to identify each set of cables.
26.11. All trunkings and cable trays shall be electro-galvanised and the thickness
of trunkings and cable trays shall be as follows:
TS/M/S68/33
MECHANICAL WORKS
50 x 50 mm 1.219 mm (18 SWG)
50 x 75 mm 1.219 mm (18 SWG)
50 x 100 mm 1.219 mm (18 SWG)
50 x 125 mm 1.422 mm (17 SWG)
50 x 150 mm 1.422 mm (17 SWG)
50 mm 0.914 mm (20 SWG)
100 mm 0.914 mm (20 SWG)
150 mm 0.914 mm (20 SWG)
200 mm 1.219 mm (18 SWG)
250 mm 1.219 mm (18 SWG)
300 mm 1.219 mm (18 SWG)
26.12. All metal parts, piping, etc, should be bonded to the earthing point by
means of minimum 6 mm² PVC insulated earth cable.
26.13. All metal conduits shall be galvanised steel BS 4568, class 4

manufactured and tested in accordance with IEC 61386. Minimum size
of conduit shall be 20 mm diameter. Space factor for cable in conduits
shall not exceed 0.4 (40%). All metal conduits shall be of heavy-gauge
type. All conduits shall be run neatly, concealed where possible, with
runs truly horizontal or vertical or parallel to walls where conduits run in
floors. Conduits shall be securely fixed with saddles and round head
screws. Powered type of fittings will not be permitted. From outlet to
outlet there shall be not more than four (4) normal bends or their
equivalent. Inspection type conduit accessories shall be used throughout.
Conduits shall be fixed in position before cables are drawn into them.
The entire length of all cables shall be enclosed in conduit. Junction
boxes shall be used at bends and "t" junctions. Elbows and tees will not
be accepted.
26.14. Flexible conduits which are exposed to weather or dampness shall be of

water-proof type with proper seals at connections to GI conduit and motor
terminal box. Ordinary flexible conduit wrapped with PVC tape will not
TS/M/S68/34
MECHANICAL WORKS
be accepted.
26.15. All circular junctions boxes, pull boxes, inspection elbows, solid elbows
shall be of malleable iron type and of standard pattern with spout to BS
4568. All access covers for these accessories shall be provided with
gaskets and lids.
26.16. Connections to all equipment subject to movement shall be in flexible

conduit. Where they are exposed to water, oil or to the weather, the
flexible conduit shall be of extruded pvc sheathed. Normal galvanised
steel flexible conduit will not be acceptable.
26.17. Connections to the water tank's electrodes shall be of extruded pvc

sheathed type flexible conduit.
26.18. All conduits, flexible conduits, cable tray and trunking shall be sealed
with rockwool with air tight when passing through any compartment,
between cold and warm area and from above ceiling to below ceiling
26.19. All conduit and trunking shall be provided with saddles and bracket at not
more than 1 m interval.
a) They shall be fitted with roller or deep groove ball bearings at the
driving end and deep groove ball bearing at the non-driving end.
Motor driving equipment giving rise to end thrust shall be

thrust.

recommendations and shall have a minimum life of 20,000 hours.
b) Motors shall be tested in accordance with the requirements of BS

2613 and BS 4999.
c) Where they are installed outdoor or exposed to the weather, they

shall be of minimum IP 55.
27.1. All incoming and outgoing and control circuits shall be wired to an
approved centralized terminal strip, and the equipment at the inside of the
cubicle shall be run via wiring channels and wiring outside the channels
shall be run neatly and taped to the approval of the S.O.. All wires shall
be terminated with approved cable lugs, and separate cable lugs shall be
used for each individual wire.
27.2. All wires shall be colour coded and shall have numbered ferrules at both
ends. The ferrules shall be of white insulating materials having a glossy
TS/M/S68/35
MECHANICAL WORKS
finished with the characters indelibly marked in black. Additional red
ferrules marked "Trip" shall be fitted to the wires inter-connecting the
relay trip contacts and the shunt release coils.
27.3. All fuses and links shall be of the bakelite HRC type category 440/AC 4
class Q to B.S. 88.
27.4. All wiring shall be arranged in a regular manner with bends set at 90C
shall be installed in the uprights and/or backstays, insulating bushes being
used where necessary. They shall be formed in a neat and systematic
manner.
27.5. Meter wiring of the switchboard shall be carried out in PVC insulated
made.
27.6. All terminals shall be fitted with brass washers and securely fixed with
27.7. No connectors or soldered joints shall be permitted in the wiring.
27.8. Power cable and control cable shall be installed in separate

conduit/trunking.
28.1. General

Standard BS 3871 part 2 or NEMA Standard AB1 and U/L listed.

c) All MCCBs in switchboard or distribution panel board shall be of

the same make.

operating handles.

28.2. Operation
TS/M/S68/36
MECHANICAL WORKS
mechanically trip free from the handle so that the contacts cannot be held-
closed against short circuits and abnormal currents. Tripping due to
overload or short circuit shall be clearly indicated by the handle
"OFF" positions. All latch surfaces shall be as constructed that they open,
closed and trip simultaneously.
28.3. Construction

current between 25C and 50C with tripping characteristics that
are approximately the same throughout this temperature range.

interchangeable trip breaker shall have their cover sealed; whereas
interchangeable trip breaker shall have the trip unit sealed to
prevent tampering. Contacts for circuit breaker shall be of non-
welding silver or silver alloy.
c) Manual trip button and front-adjustable magnetic trip device shall

be incorporated in the moulded case circuit breaker.

e) Terminals shall be constructed to assure electrical efficiency and

reliability, with minimised possibility of localised heating.
f) Trip indication shall be by handle position mid-way between 'ON'

and 'OFF'. To reset the trip mechanism, the handle shall be
moved to extreme 'OFF' and 'ON' position.

current limiting breakers shall be fuseless type and shall have the
same operation as specified above. They shall meet the IEC
opened simultaneously under fault conditions. The breakers shall
have interrupting ratings as low as 10KA rms, sym. on systems
capable of delivering fault currents as high as 200KA, rms, sym.
The contact opening and are extinguishing shall be less than ¼
cycle to reduce and limit peak let-through current and let-through
energy.
TS/M/S68/37
MECHANICAL WORKS
29. Low Voltage Air Circuit Breakers
29.1. General
Low voltage air-circuit breaker shall be of metal-clad, flush mounted

horizontal draw-out isolation type. They shall comply fully with IEC
60947, B.S. 4752 and applicable part of B.S. 116 and B.S. 936 and shall
have a rupturing capacity of not less than 65KA or calculated fault values
using transformer and cables impedance whichever is greater at volts
A.C. 50 HZ for 3 sec. in accordance with the above specifications
certified by ASTA or KEMA or other recognised testing authority.
Low voltage air-circuit breaker shall incorporate direct acting tripping

device which shall operate at 15% or 200% of the rated current.
29.2. Construction
Each air circuit breaker shall be self-contained with specifically designed

rollers, runner rails and interlocks and housed in a separate completely
zoned "Enclosed Ventilated" metal clad switchboard compartment.
The circuit shall comprise fixed and moving main arcing contacts of
adequate rating to ensure that no overheating, damage or deterioration
will arise when carrying continuously full rated current. The contacts
shall be individually spring loaded and hard silver plated, so arranged that
electro-magnetic forces arising from under fault conditions do not tend to
reduce contact pressure.
The main contacts shall be arranged to give a double break in each pole.
Auxiliary arcing contacts shall be provided with renewable arc resisting
alloy tips arranged to close before and open after the main contacts.
Each pole of the breaker shall be equipped with individual arc chutes with
specially designed baffles and splitter to provide effective and efficient
electro-magnetic arc control at all values of load current. Any arc caused
by the opening of the breaker under maximum fault conditions shall be
completely contained in the chute with no possibility of a "Flashover"
between phases or between any phase and neutral or between adjacent
earthed metal. The complete chute assembly shall be easily removed for
routine inspection and maintenance of the chute and contacts.
Safety screening shutters of insulation materials to prevent access to live

connections shall be actuated automatically with the circuit breaker
isolated and withdrawn. Provisions shall be made for padlocking the
safety screening shutters when the breaker is completely withdrawn.
Auxiliary switches, relay isolating plugs and sockets, and contactors as

necessary for the proper operation of the circuit breaker, trip coils,
electrical interlocks, and "operation status' indication shall be provided.
In addition to those required for the functions covered in this
specification, provision shall be made for extending the number of
TS/M/S68/38
MECHANICAL WORKS
auxiliary switches on each circuit breaker to cover possible future alarm
or signalling circuit requirements. Auxiliary switches shall be of robust
double breaker design, easily accessible for maintenance, having adequate
current ratings to carry the connected loads.
Earth terminals shall be provided at the rear of the withdrawable breaker

housing. This connect to a plug and socket contact to provide an earth
connection to the moving breaker portion. Contact shall be maintained in
the breaker isolated position.
Mechanical interlocking shall be provided to prevent:
a) opening of cubicle door until breaker is fully isolated
b) withdrawal of plugging of the circuit breaker in the closed position
c) plugging until the cubicle door has been closed and locked
d) closure unless either fully plugged or fully isolated
29.3. Operation
The circuit breaker of stored energy spring manually charged type with
manual release of the spring by means of the "Close" push button. It shall
incorporate an interlock which prevent a close operation until spring is
fully charged. Tripping shall be carried out means of a 'trip' button,
operation of overcurrent trip and shunt trip release. The speed of closing
and opening of the circuit breaker shall be independent of the operation.
Breaker 'ON' - 'OFF' and spring 'Charged' -'Discharged' indications shall
be provided.
The shunt trips coils for operating the release mechanism of the circuit
breakers shall be controlled by push-button and/or circuit closing relays.
They shall be designed for operation from a supply source. The
mechanism shall be stable and not capable of being opened by shocks or
jam. The design of the trip coil shall be such that the trip plunger shall be
operated immediately there being no delay due to the building up of the
coil field to maximum value. The use of fibre in the construction of the
trip coils will not be acceptable, being preferred that the trip coils be
wound on a high grade bakelite on mica former.
The operation mechanism and the carriage or hinged panel shall be so

interlocked that it is not possible to withdraw or replace the circuit
breaker while the breaker is in the closed position, so that it is not
possible to close the breaker while the carriage or hinged panel is in any
position between "fully isolated' and "full home" or vice versa. Provision
shall be made so that it is possible to operate the breaker mechanism, if
TS/M/S68/39
MECHANICAL WORKS
required for inspection and testing purposes, when the breaker is fully
isolated. Provision shall also be made to prevent the breaker being
accidentally pulled completely off the guide rails.
30.1. Corners and bases shall be coloured in accordance with the following
code:
Colour Function
White 5A fuse
Blue 15A fuse
Yellow 20 fuse
Red link
30.2. Descriptive labels shall be fitted, adjacent to all fuses and links.
30.3. The terminal strip shall be numbered and schedule so as to identify the
Contractor.
30.4. The interior of each piece of equipment shall be clearly marked to show
the phases and to this end either coloured plastic discs screwed to fixed
components or identification by means of colour plastic sleeving shall be
31. Labels
30.1. All equipment shall be clearly labelled in accordance with regulations,

30.2. Each circuit breaker, switch, switch-fuse, fuse, selector switch, indicating
light, push button, instrument, etc. shall be labelled indicating its rating,
function, designation. In addition warning signs marked "400 volts
Danger" manufactured to standard design and colour shall be suitably
mounted and fixed on the back of the incoming cubicles on the front of
each switchboard and on the door of the switchroom. The marking shall
be in accordance with BS 171 clause 79.
TS/M/S68/40
MECHANICAL WORKS
32.1. Current transformers necessary for the operation of instruments and
meters shall be of "straight through" type, with accuracy not less than 0.5
class 'C' for measuring, class '0.5' for metering and class 'S' for protection
as per SS 638.
32.2. Current transformers shall be adequately rated in V.A. to carry the

summation of all V.A. burdens of connected loads, and shall be capable
of carrying currents of the corresponding circuit breakers and fuses. They
secondary and full load current flowing in the primary. They shall
comply with the latest EMA requirements.
32.3. Current transformers shall be adequately supported and installed as to

33.1. Instruments and meters for external panel mounting shall be flush
33.2. Reading scales in kilo-watt hour meters shall be in multiple of ten (10).
33.3. All instruments shall be to B.S. 89 1st grade, moving iron spring
adjustment. Integrating meters shall be to B.S. 37 part 1 and 2 and part 4
with cyclometer registers and shall be calibrated for use with their
respective current transformers. They shall be fully tropicalised.
33.4. Voltmeters shall incorporate selector switches to enable phase to phase

34.1. The over current relays shall be IDMTL adjustable current setting
between 50% to 200% of rated values and adjustable time lag settings of
0 to 3.0 seconds; instantaneous high set elements shall be provided for
each main circuit breaker.
34.2. The relays shall be of the surface mounted and housed in a totally
TS/M/S68/41
MECHANICAL WORKS
The relays shall be heavy pattern, unaffected by external vibration, fully

35.1. The earth fault relays shall incorporate adjustable current setting between
5% to 40% in steps of 5% and adjustable time lag 0 to 1 sec.
35.2. The relays shall be of the flush pattern and housed in removable dust-
necessary load. Operation indicator and reset facilities shall be provided
to show a fault condition.
Indicating lamps shall be the LED 24 volts type. The lamp shall be easily
removed or replaced from the front of the panel without using extractors and shall
be adequately ventilated.
37. Moulded Case Circuit Breakers (MCCB), Contactors, Isolators, etc
38.1. General
Unless otherwise stated, miniature circuit breakers and distribution boards

shall have minimum short-circuit capacities of R.M.S. symmetrical
amperes of 10 KA for power circuit distribution boards at 230/400 Volt
A.C.

type "3" curve.
Irrespective to the mounting positions, the miniature circuit breakers shall

be operated in accordance with the factory calibrated characteristic.
All miniature circuit breakers shall be of positive plug-on or bolted-on, no

Miniature circuit breaker must have positive contact position indicator.

TS/M/S68/42
MECHANICAL WORKS
38.2. Operation
Miniature circuit breakers shall be operated by a toggle-type handle and

conditions. When the circuit breaks and over current conditions. When
the circuit breakers automatically trip, the operating handle shall be
assured a position between "ON" and "OFF" positions. The contacts shall
also be of positive quick-make and quick-break on manual and automatic
operation.
Contact position indicator (coloured) linking physically to the contacts for

the positive indication of isolation shall be provided.
38.3. Construction
bi-metal overcurrent element with inverse time delay characteristic and a
condition. Ambient temperature compensation shall be accomplished by
a secondary bi-metal that shall allow the circuit breaker to carry rated
current between 25C to 50C with tripping characteristics that are the
same throughout this temperature range, and that shall not cause nuisance
tripping.
Circuit breakers shall be completely enclosed in a high dielectric strength

casing. The properties of the dielectric strength casing shall not
deteriorate with time.
The high pressure plug-on busbar connector shall assure a solid positive
TS/M/S68/43
MECHANICAL WORKS

straight in wiring.
Arcing shall be extinguished rapidly and effectively by arc chute barrier,

in normal switching as well as protective tripping, to minimize

"ON" and "OFF". To reset the trip mechanism, the handle shall be moved
to extreme "OFF" position.
39. Testing
39.1. All electrical installation works shall be tested in accordance with the
requirements of SS 638 and the local authorities. All test results shall be
submitted to the S.O. for approval before turn-on of power.
39.2. The Sub-Contractor shall be responsible for all Electrical tests at the site
and shall be represented by a capable during the whole of the period
required for the tests.
39.3. All materials and equipment supplied or erected under this Contract
which fail the tests shall be replaced or rectified at once by the Sub-
Contractor without cost to the Government and the tests shall be repeated.
39.4. All tests shall be conducted in the presence of and to the satisfaction of
the S.O.. The Sub-Contractor shall supply all necessary instruments,
apparatus, connections, skilled and unskilled labour required for the tests
to the satisfaction of the S.O. and the cost of doing so shall be included in
the Contract price.
39.5. The Sub-Contractor shall make accurate records of all tests and shall
furnish test certificates and a schedule of the results in an approved form.
Four copies of such schedules and of each test certificate will be
required.
39.6. Any circuit or section of the installation failing to reach the required
standard for acceptance shall be made good by the Sub-Contractor
without cost to the Government.
39.7. The minimum of site tests to be carried out on each completed section of
the electrical installation shall be as follows:
a) Insulation resistance tests.
b) Continuity Tests.
TS/M/S68/44
MECHANICAL WORKS
c) Tests to prove correct operation of interlocks, tripping and closing
circuits, indications, etc.
d) Protective gear timing tests as may be necessary.
e) Test operation of alarm devices.
f) Rational tests on all motors.
g) Polarity tests to verify that single pole switches are installed in the
phased or live conductor of each circuit and not in the neutral
conductor.
h) A test to verify the continuity of all conductors in every ring

circuit, correct connections to terminals or all socket outlets and
effective bending to earth of each terminal and socket.
i) Insulation resistance tests to earth and between conductors before

and after fitting of lamps. The standard of acceptance for
electrical insulation tests shall be as recommended in the latest
Edition of the IEE Regulations for the Electrical Equipment of the
Building.
j) Insulation resistance tests on any electrical apparatus supplied

and/or erected under this contracts before and after connecting
such apparatus to the supply.
k) Earth continuity tests for each final sub-circuit and the completed
installation to ensure that the impedance of the earth fault loop is
such as to permit compliance with the requirements of Section D
and E of the latest Edition of the IEE Regulations for the
Electrical Equipment of Buildings.
40. Certification by Sub-Contractor
Before any turning-on of power can be made to the Installations, the Sub-
Contractor shall certify in writing to the S.O. that his electrical installation is in
full compliance with the Electricity Act Regulations and that it is safe for turn-on.
The certificate shall be signed by a EMA licensed electrical worker, employed
by the Sub-Contractor and qualified to sign for the capacity of the installation
involved. Test results shall accompany this certification.
41. Safety Notices
The Sub-Contractor shall provide and install the following notices and equipment
in the AHU Room.
A varnished and mounted on suitable hard backing and framed (in glass panel)
copy of the main single line diagram showing clearly the full details, dimensions,
layout of the switchboards as supplied and installed.
TS/M/S68/45
MECHANICAL WORKS
Solid rubber insulated mats of 1 meter wide and 9.5 mm thick complying with
B.S. 921 to the full length in front of every switchboard.
42. Changeover LCB and DB
The Sub-Contractor shall supply, deliver, install, test and commission,

Changeover Local Control Boards (LCB) and Distribution Board (DB) of a type
specified hereafter complete with suitable doors that allow easy access to all
components installed therein.
The DB shall design with spare ways for the distribution of the final circuit to the
condensing unit, FCUs and the change over panel. Indicating light (LED), ELR
and RCCB shall be designed for main and individual circuit protection.
The LCB shall design for the auto-change over c/w manual override to the air-
conditioning unit for 12hrs interval to areas that required 24hrs air-conditioning
operation with duty and standby air-conditioning units. Indicating lights and
room sensor shall be incorporated in the panel to indicate the “Incoming/Outing
Supply Available”, “Start”, “Stop”, “Trip” and “High Temperature” of the air-
conditioning units.
Where there is a “Trip” and “High Temperature” in the room, the standby units
shall cut-in automatically to back up the failed one. Strobe light and buzzer c/w
battery backup (minimum 24 hours in standby and 2 hours in operating modes,
respectively) shall be provided at outside of the room. Any faults such as power
tripping to the air-conditioning units and air-conditioning unit fails to operate,
etc. shall trigger the strobe light and buzzer. Acknowledge and reset switches
shall be provided at the LCB to silence the buzzer and reset the system after
validation check.
TS/M/S68/46
MECHANICAL WORKS
The following types shall be used (unless otherwise specified) :
Chilled
Rating V/P/Hz Chiller Pump Water & AHU FCU Cooling AHU (c/w Fan
Condense (CAV) Tower VAV)
r Water
Pumps
Below 230/1/50 - - - - - VSD c/w VSD c/w

D.O.L.
0.7 kW 400/3/50 D.O.L. D.O.L.
0.8 - 230/1/50 - VSD c/w VSD c/w VSD c/w VSD c/w VSD c/w VSD c/w VSD c/w
D.O.L.
2.25 kW 400/3/50 D.O.L. D.O.L. D.O.L. D.O.L. D.O.L. D.O.L.
2.26 – 400/3/50 - VSD c/w VSD c/w VSD c/w VSD c/w VSD c/w VSD c/w VSD c/w
5..5 kW solid solid state D.O.L. D.O.L.. D.O.L. D.O.L.. solid state
state soft soft starter soft starter
starter
5.6 - 400/3/50 - VSD c/w VSD c/w VSD c/w VSD c/w VSD c/w VSD c/w VSD c/w
29.9 kW solid solid state solid state solid state solid state solid state solid state
state soft soft starter soft soft starter. soft starter soft starter soft starter
starter starter.
30.0 kW
& 400/3/50 VSD / VSD c/w VSD c/w VSD c/w VSD c/w VSD c/w VSD c/w VSD c/w
Above solid solid solid state solid state solid state solid state solid state solid state
state state soft soft starter soft soft starter. soft starter soft starter soft starter
soft starter starter.
starter
a) All staircase pressurization fans to be of VSD operated with standby Solid State Soft Starter. Pressure sensor shall install to maintain the
pressure in the pressure staircase of not less than 50Pa. b) Single phase do not required VSD unless indicated in drawing.
TS/M/S68/47
MECHANICAL WORKS
SECTION 70- AUTOMATION & MONITORING SYSTEM
1. General
1.1 The purpose of the specifications is to provide the operational concepts

and minimum standalone automation and monitoring system to be
installed for the air conditioning and ventilation system and other
services.
1.2 It is the intent of this Specification to secure a networked, computerized

automation and monitoring system which is user-friendly, has known
reliability, is extremely responsive, and which is to be designed, installed,
implemented, supported and serviced by a local office of the
manufacturer, by people skilled in providing functional and efficient
solutions to present and foresee future building system needs.
1.3 The Sub-Contractor shall submit monthly report on the energy

approval.
1.4 The Building Automation system (BAS) shall comply to the following
standards:
a) Singapore Standard CP 638, Code of practice for electrical

Installations
b) Singapore Standard SS 553, Code of practice for air-

conditioning and mechanical ventilation in buildings


e) ANSI/ASHRAE 135 BACnet - A Data Communication

Protocol for Building Automation and Control Networks


TS/M/S70/1
MECHANICAL WORKS
h) International Organization for Standardization ISO/IEC 9075-9:

i) TIA/EIA 232-F Interface Between Data Terminal Equipment

and Data Circuit Terminating Equipment Employing Serial
Binary Data Exchange;
j) TIA/EIA 485-A : Electrical Characteristics of Generators and

k) TIA/EIA 568-C.1 : Commercial Building telecommunications

Cabling Standard;
l) Transmission Control Protocol/Internet Protocol of Defence

m) International Organization for Standardization ISO/IEC 8802-3

: Standard for Ethernet.
1.5 The Sub-Contractor shall submit monthly report on the energy

approval.
1.6 The BAS shall link to respective BMS/BAS system includes all necessary
programming as listed in clause 4.2. All the power meter, water meter,
BTU meter or airflow station that is used for utility billing shall be linked
and program at University of Campus infrastructure, Ventus building,
Campus Asset Management energy metering system.
1.7 Integration to Wireless Mesh Network Lighting Management system and

provision for third party software interfacing
1.8 All electrical power meter, BTU meter and water meter shall link
separately to existing metering and Energy Data and Reporting Tool /
Energy Enterprise Management at Ventus . All information shall also
interface and program to BAS and IBMS.
1.9 Chiller plant room BAS and IBMS system shall be ready and programmed
for the Building and Construction Authority to access remotely into their
system through internet secured access.
TS/M/S70/2
MECHANICAL WORKS
2. Materials
Damaged, deformed and cracked equipment or materials shall be rejected.
Replacement shall be provided by the Sub-Contractor at no additional
cost to the University.

Sub-Contractor.
2.6 All sensors, control valves, actuators, D.D.C. controllers, shall be from
the BAS manufacturer.
3. Site Conditions


28oC wet bulb

26.5oC wet bulb

TS/M/S70/3
MECHANICAL WORKS
4. BAS Configuration
4.1 General
a) The building automation system shall be configured as a local

area network of fully intelligent and programmable
microprocessor-based controllers that will be monitoring and
controlling the various equipment. These controllers shall
operate independently without any loss of monitoring or control
functions in the event of a failure in the communication link
with other controllers. These controllers shall be on peer to peer
communication protocol. No hierarchical system configuration
shall be accepted.
b) Master/Slave type of controllers shall not be accepted.
4.2 BAS Central Control Station
The BAS Central Control Station is located at the Campus Asset

Management and are linked to each individual Zone BAS system control
network . The location of Zone BAS system is as follow:
Zone 1: Block EA, TLab, DSI and others are linked to OFM
Zone 2 : Uhall, Central library and others are linked to OFM

Zone 3: Block MD6 or MD3, S9, S16, S17 and others are linked to OFM
Zone 4: Block Com2, Block SDE, I Cube, Bukit Timah Campus (BTC),
AS2, AS8 and others are linked to OFM BAS/IBMS/NUS
Virtual Machines through TCP/IP
All BAS shall link to NUS virtual machine at cloud, OFM BAS and
IBMS system through campus intranet. New building shall have
individual BAS station and link to OFM Central BAS and IBMS NUS
virtual machine and existing station through NUS campus IT network
The Sub-contractor shall include the necessary programming, accessories

and software for the IBMS to install at the NUS virtual machines at cloud.
No hyperlink to another virtual system/ system is allowed
TS/M/S70/4
MECHANICAL WORKS
The BAS room at OFM shall be able to read all information in above list
Zone BAS System through Campus Intranet.
a) The communication network shall be designed to pass

information about environmental control and monitoring status
from one DDC Unit to another DDC Unit, PLC TO PLC,
POWER METER TO POWER METER, Level of
communication shall be kept to a minimum.
b) The communication network shall possess the following

features:-
- Flexibility - The network shall allow the future connection

of additional controllers without any changes to the
configuration of the network.
- Fully distributed intelligence - Each communication

controller on the network shall be managed by a
microprocessor which receives, transmit and checks all
the messages passing through it. No central network
manager shall be required.
- Integrity - Should the power be lost at any communication

controller or it detect an internal fault, a watchdog relay
shall automatically bridge the mode out of the network to
prevent disruption in the communication. The network
shall continuously check itself and report faults and
failures.
- Service functions - The communication controllers shall

allow all the DDC Units OR PLC Unit & etc to pass
information between each other to effect any control
function.
TS/M/S70/5
MECHANICAL WORKS
4.3 Data Communication
a) Communication between individual controllers within a BAS

shall be via the PEER TO PEER bus and must be open protocol
such as BACNET-MS/TP, METER BUS MOD BUS and etc. It
shall also support Ethernet connectivity at 100 mbps as
backbone. The Ethernet controller shall also support web
interface for configuration. Each PEER bus shall be a single
pair of twisted wires with a minimum transmission rate of no
less than 1 M baud. Each controller shall be coupled to the bus
to assure that single or multiple controller Units failures will not
cause loss of communications with other bus connected devices.
b) Full communications shall be sustained as long as there are at

least two operational devices on any segment of the bus.
c) Global data (all station messages) is to be available for use by

any device on the bus as inputs or outputs to its resident control
programs.
4.4 System Design Submission
The system configuration and a list of equipment employed by the BAS

system shall be submitted together with the Tender. Detail description of
equipment and components with respect to their performance in achieving
the specified system functional and operational requirements shall be also
attached. Every Direct Digital Control Unit /PLC Unit shall be equipped
with an alphanumeric LCD (liquid crystal display) display and shall have
a spare capacity of no less than twenty (25) per cent for future expansion.
4.5 Remote Access
All the remote access shall be using web access through internet web
browser using JAVA platform. The web view shall have all the function
of the main BAS station. These shall include :
a) Modification and delete of data base on user, user identification,

password and level of access
b) Modification to graphic and text
c) Creation of graphic and text
d) Printing of trend report, Alarm report, User login/logout report etc
TS/M/S70/6
MECHANICAL WORKS
e) Changing of Setpoint, value offset, etc
f) Command Start/Stop, time scheduling, etc
g) Login station user activity such as modification on the setpoint,

editing graphic and etc
h) Graphic page sizing to match the display screen, zoom in and

zoom out
i) Set up of trending for the required monitoring BAS point
j) Set up of Alarm point
Any software that required custom programming and modification will

not be acceptable.
5.1 General
a) The BAS shall be supplied, installed, supervised and

commissioned by a BCA registered specialist contractor with a
proven track record and suitable references of systems installed.
b) The BAS shall be manufactured by a reputable manufacturer.

System content and software should be not be less than ninety-
five percent of the manufacturers own production.
c) The BAS shall consist of an information sharing network of

standalone Direct Digital Control Unit /PLC Unit to monitor
and control equipment as per the control sequence and the
input/output summary.
d) "Information sharing" shall be defined as : the function of each

DDC Unit/PLC Unit to exchange data on the network trunk
with other DDC Unit/PLC Unit without the need for additional
devices such as network managers, gateways or central
computers.
e) "Standalone" shall be defined as : the functions of each DDC

Unit/PLC Unit to independently monitor, control and operate
connected equipment through its own microcomputer.
TS/M/S70/7
MECHANICAL WORKS
f) The new system to be provided shall consist of the following

main components:-
- Direct Digital Control Units;/PLC Unit
- the DDC Unit/PLC Unit shall link or interface to the

central computer.
g) The new system shall have gateway/bridges interfaces such as

OPC-Server for connective to other control LAN networks.
5.2 System Function and Operational Training
a) The BAS shall provide centralized surveillance of all plant such

as air conditioning and ventilation with control facilities as
indicated in the attached schedules and appendices.
b) The manufacturer shall provide without additional cost to the

University a qualified engineer for one week at the University's
premises to provide training for the University's staff in system
operation and maintenance. This training shall be additional to
any other training provided during commissioning, and a
programme detailing period and content shall be provided by the
manufacturer in advance.
c) The Sub-Contractor shall furnish five (5) sets of comprehensive

O&M manual with pictures and explanation of all control
schematic and floor plan as they appear in the central computer.
d) Tenderers shall submit clause by clause compliance list of the

proposed BAS system for evaluation. Any deviation shall be
explained in full sentences with drawing or supporting
document to illustrate if necessary.
5.3 DDC Programming
The application programme for the DDC shall be programmed using

graphical software. This software shall provide the operator with wiring
terminations, schematic representations of plant, and hardware
configuration of PCB giving details on the numbers and types of points
used in the DDC. This information shall be given in a printed format.
TS/M/S70/8
MECHANICAL WORKS
5.4 DDC Controllers
a) All controllers furnished for the project shall be of fully

standalone intelligent type. In the event of loss of
communication with the central computer, the controllers shall
be fully operational. Master/Slave type of controllers shall not
be acceptable.
b) All controllers communication shall be of BACNET-MS/TP or

other open protocol which third party software is able to read
the DDC information. BACNET device shall be BTL listed and
certified.
c) All controllers shall monitor and control, digital input, digital

output, analog input and analog output points. A minimum of
25% spare capacity shall be provided at each controller. All
DDC panel shall have surge protection device installed
d) All controllers shall be linked to each other via a Central Bus

for peer communication (local area networking). It shall be
possible to command, read and adjust parameters of all
controllers linked on the same peer bus from any controller
without need of any tool, portable operator terminal or PC.
e) The controller shall comply with radio interference standards

VDE 871/875 and protection standards of IP30 according to
DIN 40 050 or IEC 144.
f) AHU and Plantroom Control
1) AHUs shall be provided with PLC /DDC controller.

Please refers to PLC specification
2) PLC /DDC shall be equipped with an alphanumeric LCD

(liquid crystal display) display. A touch panel keyboard
shall be provided for retrieval of data and adjustment of
parameters. Mode of operation of the LCD display and
keyboard shall be based on easy-to-understand dialogue
driven menu.
3) The LCD display shall be compact type with semi-graphic

screen of 3.9” (resolution 198 x 80). The LCD shall be 10
lines x 33 characters and LED green ultra-bright backlit.
TS/M/S70/9
MECHANICAL WORKS
Features to be provided on the controllers must include:
- Direct Digital Control
- Full Energy Management Programs (EMS)
- Real Time Clock. The real time clock shall have a 100-
year calendar with automatic leap year adjustment to
provide time of day, day of week and date.
- Time Programs
- Holiday and Occupancy Schedules.
- Data Collection, Processing and Reporting.
- Battery Backed Up Data Logging. A hardware watchdog

shall observe the battery voltage under load to announce
the end of battery life prior to possible data losses. The
battery has to be able to save the total volatile memory for
at least 3 days after "battery down" alarm in order to give
opportunity to replace the battery.
- Local and Central Alarm Monitoring.
- Low Voltage Safety Power Supply.
- Auto-Dialing, Public Telephone Network Communication

(CCITTV.24/V.28/V.25bis AT-HAYES)- This auto
dialing feature shall be made available by the mere
addition of a modem, without any other hardware/software
costs.
- Access Levels - minimum 3 levels.
- Protection Against Unauthorized Access Through

Password
- Alarm Management with minimum 3 alarm categories.

All alarms shall be time-stamped. Alarm buffer shall be
provided for auto-dial applications.
4) PLC /DDC shall be provided for chiller plant room control

such as chillers, water pumps, cooling towers, VSDs, by-
pass valves, etc...Please refer to PLC technical
specification, drawing, specification
TS/M/S70/10
MECHANICAL WORKS
5) The PLC/DDC for the chiller control shall be equipped

with a high level interfacing module to interface with the
chillers or other equipment microprocessors.
- PLC /DDC shall be equipped with an alphanumeric LCD

(liquid crystal display) display. A touch panel keyboard
shall be provided for retrieval of data and adjustment of
parameters. Model of operation of the LCD display and
keyboard shall be based on easy-to- understand dialogue
driven menu.
a) PLC/DDC Controls (F.C.U.)
PLC/DDC shall be provided for FCU control.

PLC/DDC shall be equipped with an alphanumeric LCD (liquid
crystal display) display. A touch panel keyboard shall be
provided for retrieval of data and adjustment of parameters.
Mode of operation of the LCD display and keyboard shall be
based on easy-to-understand dialogue driven menu.
The LCD display shall provide alphanumeric indication of:
- Actual Room Temperature and Setpoint Levels
- Actual Time and Time Schedule
- Operation Mode
- All other adjustments
It shall have provisions to accept the following inputs:
- Room Temperature Sensor
- Occupancy Sensor
A built-in real time clock shall be provided for automatic
provide users the flexibility of extending the day level as
required.
TS/M/S70/11
MECHANICAL WORKS
All DDC/PLC controllers provided shall be capable of

operating in full "stand alone" operation as part of a larger
backup by battery for power interruption of at least 72
hours.
b) DDC Controls (VAV)
1) The VAV box controller shall be a standalone networked

DDC thermostat of 8-bit microprocessor based type with
2) The VAV box controller shall have built-in operator

interface with keypad and alphanumeric liquid crystal
display (LCD). The LCD shall have alphanumeric
indication of:-
iv) provide multi inputs for thermostat, and all other

adjustments
v) thermostat shall have proportional output to

control the damper actuator at minimum (10%)
and maximum (100%) positioning without
mechanical jam to actuator
.
3) Each VAV controller, operating parameters, set points and
schedule shall be stored in non-volatile EEPROM memory
to prevent loss during loss of power to the controller.
4) The DDC shall have built-in operator interface with

keypad and alphanumeric liquid crystal display (LCD).
- operation mode
TS/M/S70/12
MECHANICAL WORKS
5) It shall have provisions to accept inputs from temperature

and other sensors.
It shall have a 24-volt AC pulse output. The DDC shall

provide room temperature control accuracy of not greater
than ±0.5°C.
6) A built-in real time clock shall be provided for automatic

provide users with flexibility of extending the day level as
required.
7) All DDC controllers provided shall be capable of

operating in full “stand alone” operation as part of a larger
backup battery for power interruption of at least 72 hours.
Each DDC output can drive up to 2 motor actuator of the

VAV Boxes.
8) All DDC shall be installed below the false ceiling for ease
of maintenance.
c) DDC control for Laboratory Airflow Control
Please refer to the tender drawing & technical specification
Each lab control shall be installed with a 16-bit DDC, to

monitor and control the temperature & humidity with the
following field devices:
Venturi valves/Fast Respond Variable Air Volume valves
Differential Pressure Transmitter
Room Humidity Sensor
Hot Water Valve
TS/M/S70/13
MECHANICAL WORKS
6. System Hardware
6.1 Central Hardware
a) The central computer system is controlled by a high-end

Pentium CPU of OPC server type with latest server OS for
command entry, information management, network, alarm
management, and database management functions. All real-
time control functions, including scheduling, history collection
and alarming, shall be resident in the BAS network automation
controller to facilitate greater fault tolerance and reliability with
personal computers printers. . It shall be backed by a trained
service force of locally based personnel.
b) The CPU shall be as following as a minimum:
i. Memory – 32GB
ii. CPU– One dual-core Intel® Core™ processor i3-2100.
iii. Hard Drive – 320 GB free hard drive space
iv. Hard drive backup system – CD/RW, DVD/RW CD
v. ROM Drive – 32X performance
vi. Ports – (2) Serial and (1) parallel, (2)
vii. USB ports Keyboard – 101 Keyboard and 2 Button

Mouse
viii. LAN communications – Ethernet communications board

(2)
c) The printer shall be a colour laser printer suitable to print all the
graphics and report.
TS/M/S70/14
MECHANICAL WORKS
6.2 Dynamic Colour Graphic Display Terminal
A colour 24’ LCD monitor is provided to display plant diagrams which

shall have the following features and capabilities:-
a) Standard library of AHU, FCU, fans, pumps, sensors, etc. shall be

available in the CAD library or Visio software and shall be
generated by CAD or Visio software for any background
drawings. The software shall be capable of accepting imported
CAD or Visio drawings done on other CAD or Visio software.
Access to the computer shall be through Microsoft Windows
interface.
b) All stored graphics shall be on the central disk system and freely
structure.
c) The dynamic colour LCD shall be able to display alpha numeric

data and dynamic pictures simultaneously through a split screen
image. The system shall upon command display colour schematic
of building equipment or building areas being monitored and
simultaneously display the current measured variables associated
with the equipment or area.
d) The colour graphic of LCD shall be dynamic in that point data or

calculated values shall updated continuously while being
observed. The colour LCD shall have a flashing feature to indicate
abnormal condition.
e) By means of a mouse, which is provided, the cursor control

switching command should be able to perform effectively and
easily within the normal addressing procedure. Hence simplifying
the main machine dialogue.
f) The contractor shall supply metal console. The BAS/BMS

control center console shall be custom made galvanized metal
epoxy power coated of 2 tiers by 1 cubical for a total of 4
CPU and LCD monitors with 1 spare to suit the Client's
operations. The cubical size shall be 1500mm(L) x 1000mm
(W) x 2000mm (H). It shall be located at FCC and Chiller
room. The contractor shall submit the design for SO approval
TS/M/S70/15
MECHANICAL WORKS
7. Operator Station Software
7.1 General
a) Operator Station software shall include as a minimum Operating
System (OS), Data Base Manager, Communications Control,
Operator Interface (OI), Trend and History Files, Report
Generator, Support Utilities, Scheduler and Time and Event
Programs.
b) Real time operating system shall portray true multi-tasking

feature in providing concurrent execution of multiple real time
programs and custom program development.
c) Data Base Manager shall manage all data on an integrated and

non-redundant basis. It shall allow additions and deletions to the
data base without any detriment to the existing data. Cross
linkages will be provided such that no data required by a
software program can be deleted by the operator until that data
has been deleted from its respective program.
d) Communications control, scheduler, trend files, reports,

operator interface, and utilities shall be as specified hereinafter.
7.2 Operator Interface Software
a) Provide a hierarchical linked dynamic graphic operator interface

for accessing and displaying system data and commanding and
modifying equipment operation. The interface shall utilise the
mouse to provide "heads up operation: with pull-down menus,
dialogue boxes, zoom, coloration, animation and split screen to
facilitate operator understanding of the system.
b) A minimum of twenty (20) levels of graphic penetration

capability shall be provided with the hierarchy operator
assignable (for example : area, building, wing, floor air handler,
point group). Descriptions for graphics, points, alarms, etc. shall
be modified through the operators station under password
control.
TS/M/S70/16
MECHANICAL WORKS
c) Operator access to the system shall be under personal ID and

password control. Up to 12 alphanumeric characters for
personal ID and up to 12 alphanumeric characters for password
shall be assignable to each operator via the operator station. The
operator shall be able to access the system from any operator
station the system by entering the proper ID and password. The
operators shall be permitted to change their own password
without permitting access to any other password. Sign-off from
a station shall be a manual operation via pull-down menu or, if
no mouse or keyboard activity takes place within an assignable
time period, shall be automatic. Automatic sign-off period shall
be selectable from 10 minutes to 120 minutes for each operator
or may be disabled on a per operator basis. all sign-on/sign-off
activity shall be automatically archived on the operator station
for display or printout as desired.
d) Operator access to system points shall be controlled by

individual operator-assigned graphic hierarchy and by privileges
as hereinafter described. The hierarchy shall permit access to an
operator-assigned initial graphic and to all graphics linked to
and below the initial graphic. The operator shall not have access
to graphics in another hierarchical graphic "tree". For example,
an operator may have access to one building, but not to another
building, or to lighting points, but not fire alarm points. Each
operator shall have any combination of user assigned keyboard
privileges of alarm acknowledgment, point commanding, data
modification, DOS access, schedule changes and system
configuration changes.
e) Data to be displayed within a unique graphic shall be assignable

regardless of physical hardware address, communication
channel or point type (temperature, humidity, alarms, etc).
Graphics shall be on-line programmable and under ID and
password control. Points may be assignable to multiple graphics
(10 minimum) where necessary to facilitate operator
understanding of system operation.
f) Graphics shall also contain calculated or pseudo points. Each

physical point and each point assigned to a graphic shall be
assigned a text descriptor for use in reports.
g) Data segregation shall be provided for control of specific data

routed to an operator station; to an operator assigned station; or
to a given output device such as a printer. Point types shall be
randomly selectable such as all room temperature points, room
temperature points second floor, all duct temperature points,
HVAC points, command points, etc.
TS/M/S70/17
MECHANICAL WORKS
h) Penetration within a graphic hierarchy shall display each graphic

name as graphics are selected to facilitate operator
understanding. The "backtrace" shall permit the operator to
move upward in the hierarchy by mouse click on the backtrace.
The backtrace shall show at least the previous four penetration
levels. The operator shall be provided with the option of
showing each graphic full screen size with the backtrace as the
horizontal header or by showing a "stack" of Graphics, each
with a backtrace.
i) All operator accessed data shall be displayed on the colour

monitor. The operator shall select further penetration via mouse
click on an area, building, floor, fan, etc. The defined linked
graphic below shows that selection shall then be displayed.
Dynamic data shall be assignable to any and all graphics.
j) The operator shall be provided with a means to directly access

any graphic or any point without going through the penetration
path.
k) Direct access to graphics shall be menu selectable wherein the

operator may optionally enter the name of the graphic system
desired or select the desired graphic via cursor positioning on a
scroll bar listing of all graphics, or may be selected via keyboard
entry.
l) Operators may assign simple key names for points to allow

direct display or commanding of points. Key name assignments
shall be fully operator assignable and as simple as one, two or
three characters, or as lengthy as 20 characters, such that
frequently selected points may be accessed independent of
complex penetration schemes. For example, a fan serving the
south quadrant lobby of the headquarters building may be
assigned a key name as simple as "HF1". The key name
processor shall also allow the selection of graphics associated to
points by entering the key name and a graphic appendage, such
as "HF1 G", and shall allow the direct execution of a command
by entering the key name and a command appendage, such as
"HF1 ON".
m) Points (physical and pseudo) shall be displayed with dynamic

data provided by the system with appropriate text descriptors,
status or value and engineering unit. Colouration conventions
shall be variable for each class of points, as chosen by the
owner. In addition, animation shall be used to confirm latest
commands (e.g., fan rotation, damper position, fluid flow, etc.).
All points shall be dynamic with update rates adjustable on a per
point basis.
TS/M/S70/18
MECHANICAL WORKS
n) For operators with the appropriate privilege(s), points shall be

commanded directly from the colour monitor via mouse
selection. For a digital command point such as a valve position,
the valve would show its current state (e.g., CLOSED) and the
operator could select OPEN via mouse click. For most
operations, a keyboard equivalent shall be available for those
operators with that preference.
o) Upon selection of analog commandable points (such as

discharge air static pressure), a dialogue box shall appear
containing the following:
1) The value of the selected point as a decimal value and as

represented on a scaled bar chart element.
2) A scaled setpoint arrow pointed to the current position of

the setpoint value on the bar chart.
3) The decimal value of the setpoint with adjacent up-down

arrows.
4) The operator shall be afforded three months of analog

commanding from which to choose as follows:
- Click the cursor on the decimal setpoint value, and

enter a new setpoint value via the keyboard
decimal keypad.
- Drive the decimal value up or down by moving the

cursor to the desired position and clicking.
5) The bar chart shall also have associated arrows showing

the current position (scaled value) of the alarm limits.
p) An operator shall be permitted to split or realise the viewing

screen to show one graphic on the left half of the screen and
another graphic, spreadsheet, bar chart, word processing, curve
plot, etc., on the right half screen.
q) This will allow real time monitoring of one part of the system
while displaying other parts of the system or data from the
system to facilitate system operation.
TS/M/S70/19
MECHANICAL WORKS
r) An on-line context-sensitive help utility shall be provided to

facilitate operator training and understanding. The help feature
shall be a hypertext document with the ability too bridge to
further explanation of selected keywords. The document shall
contain text and graphics to clarify system operation. At a
minimum, help shall be available for every menu item and
dialogue box.
s) Electronic massaging facility shall be provided on the operator

station for any operator to enter a message to another operator
by selecting the MAIL menu item, selecting the receiving
operator's ID and entering the message (such as CHECK
CALIBRATION OF SENSOR IN CONFERENCE ROOM,
6TH FLOOR"). When an operator with a queued message signs
onto the operator station, the "Mail Message" area of the
dialogue box shall indicate that message is waiting. Upon
displaying a mail message, the display shall prompt the operator
with three message options to execute; delete, print and save.
Messages shall also include the time and data the message was
sent, the sender's personal ID and be 300 characters minimum
length, plus a brief title or subject description.
7.3 Site Specific Customising Software
Provide software which will allow the user to modify and tailor the BAS
to the specific and unique requirements of the equipment installed, the
programs implemented, and to staffing and operational practices. Online
modification of system configuration, program parameters, and data base
shall be provided via menu selection and keyboard entry of data into
preformatted self-prompting templates. As a minimum, the following
modification capability shall be provided.
a) Operator assignment capability shall include designation of

operator passwords, privilege(s), starting graphic and auto sign
off duration.
b) System text add/change capability shall include English

descriptors for graphic points, action messages for alarms and
run time, and trouble condition messages.
TS/M/S70/20
MECHANICAL WORKS
c) Time/Schedule change capability shall include time/date set,

time/occupancy schedules, holiday schedules and activity
defined schedules. Operators with the appropriate privilege shall
be capable of naming an activity (e.g., basketball game, board
meeting, etc.) which requires associated equipment (e.g. fans,
lights, door unlocking, etc.,) to support the activity. The named
activity shall be assigned such associations and, subsequently,
the activity can be scheduled by an operator with the underlying
associated equipment automatically provided an identical
schedule by the BAS. All time and calendar scheduling and
schedule modification shall be accomplished graphically via
colour bars and calendars in a hardware independent manner.
d) Points shall be uniquely definable as to colouration, animation,

audible rate and duration, point descriptors (60 characters
minimum), operator messages (480 characters minimum), alarm
and warning limits, and engineering units.
e) Point related change capability shall include system/point

enable/disable; run time enable/disable; assignment of points to
point classes, analog value offset, lockout, run time limits, and
setting a fixed input or output value.
f) Application program change capability shall include assignment

of comfort limits, global points, time and event initiators, time
and event schedules and enable/disable time and event
programs.
g) Graphic creation specified under Graphic Creation.
7.4 Alarm Handler
a) Alarm Handler software shall be provided to respond to alarm

conditions sensed and transmitted from the appropriate HVAC
Controller. First in, first out handling of alarms in accordance is
required with buffer storage for a minimum of 20 alarms in case
of simultaneous multiple alarms. All alarms issued shall reflect
genuine faults on systems and equipment. The alarm handler
shall be configured and programmed to recognize situations
(such as change of mode of operations, etc.) as normal
conditions to avoid issuance of nuisance alarms.
b) Alarm handler shall be active in both the Signed On and Signed

Off modes to assure that alarms will be processed even though
an operator is not currently signed on.
TS/M/S70/21
MECHANICAL WORKS
c) Alarms shall be displayed in a dialogue box on the colour

monitor. Display shall include as a minimum:
1) Indication of alarm condition; i.e. FAULT, PRE-ALARM,

ALARM, analog identification such as HIGH ROOM
TEMPERATURE TECH CENTRE, SECOND FLOOR,
ROOM 202.
2) A discrete per point alarm action taking message.
d) Alarm silencing shall be through selecting the "silence" button

or by authorised operator's acknowledgement. In all cases, alarm
acknowledgement shall only be allowed by operators authorised
to acknowledge a point in alarm.
e) Each point shall be assigned to an alarm class, with no limit to

the quantity of alarm classes. Each alarm class be uniquely
assignable to any combination of the following alarm processing
attributes :
1) Audible beep duration (none, 10 seconds, 20 seconds,

continuous)
2) Audible beep rate (slow-medium-fast)
3) Alarm historically archived (yes or no)
4) Alarm printed, with printer ID
5) Associated coloration with any of 256 colours, with

separate brightness control, assignable to each alarm state
(high alarm, high warning, normal, low warning, low
alarm). Digital points shall similarly be distinguished with
different colours for each possible state.
f) Alarms shall be displayed and/or printed at each peripheral to

which its segregation allows, but only those operators having
proper privilege level will be allowed acknowledge alarms.
g) An unacknowledged alarm indicator shall be provided on the

colour monitor display to alert the operator that there are
unacknowledged alarms in the system.
h) Points in a graphic display that are in an unacknowledged alarm

state shall have a flashing red border, when in an acknowledged
state, the border shall be non-flashing red.
TS/M/S70/22
MECHANICAL WORKS
i) Run time limit message shall be presented and proceeded as an

alarm message except the action message shall be of a
maintenance directive nature.
7.5 Reports
a) Standard reports shall be provided which shall be operator

selectable to appear on the operator station, or printer or both.
All facility-wide standard reports shall be capable of being
scheduled to run at a specific time and/or interval via an
operator function supported by necessary data entry templates
and interactive prompts. A "terminate report" command shall be
available to allow the operator to stop any report in the process
of being printed.
b) Point summary reports may be requested at any penetration

level (facility, building, area, system) and shall include only
points at and below that level. Point summary reports shall
include the current value/status and condition, system and point
descriptions for all points. Points summary reports shall be
selectable for all points, except those points in alarm, fixed
points, disabled points and locked out points.
c) Historical trend reports shall allow the operator to randomly

select points to be recorded at selectable time intervals.
Information shall automatically diverted into a standard third
party software spreadsheet package for display, manipulation
and merging as necessary by the authorised operator. Minimum
sampling shall be at NO more than 1 minute for logging values
of 40 variables over a period of one month.
d) The trend report shall be stored to disk and shall be

subsequently capable of being displayed, printed or archived to
diskette by the operator.
e) Dynamic trends shall provide up to six points and show real

time activity of the associated points. This information shall be
printed and/or displayed in numeric, bar chart, curve plot, pie
chart, etc., as selected by the operator. Graphic plots shall allow
a unique colour for each point.
f) As new point values are sampled, they shall be processed,

scaled and dynamically appended to any plot being displayed.
Minimum sampling rate 5 seconds, maximum sampling rate 60
minutes. Number of samples to be displayed on the screen
should be selectable, minimum 10 samples.
TS/M/S70/23
MECHANICAL WORKS
g) A custom report capability shall be provided to allow the user to

format reports of any text, points with status/value and
descriptions, and points with status/value only. Custom reports
may be scheduled or requested manually. A spreadsheet
programme (MicroSoft Excel) shall be provided, fully
integrated with BAS data base, and available to the user.
h) In the event of failure of any printer, subsequent reports directed

to that printer shall be automatically redirected to an operator
pre-assigned backup printer located at the operator station.
7.6 Graphic Creation
a) A graphic development facility shall be provided to allow the

user to develop or modify graphic displays and assign and
position any array of points within each graphic.
b) All graphic displays shall be created via operator station

graphics package. It shall not require taking the operator station
off-line or interfere with point archiving and alarms. Graphics
shall be created via mouse and keyboard selection of graphic
library stored symbols and system profiles. In addition, the
system shall have the capability to create custom symbols,
system profiles, floor plans, buildings, etc., and store them in
the graphic library.
c) The number and type of graphics to be provided is as noted in
the Data Control and Graphics summary.
d) The system shall provide expansion of up to 1000 graphics.
7.7 Digital System Management
a) The Operation Station shall provide complete utilities necessary

for management of the network of digital controllers and
devices.
b) Provide a multi-page set of graphic architectural displays

showing each digital module including each remote panel, PC,
peripheral, and communication links. Clicking on any device
shall start an interactive dialogue allowing the user to observe
the device status and to select device management options. Each
device shall also be provided with a descriptor of up to 60
characters.
c) Any digital device with database storage in RAM only may be

up-line of down-line loaded to or from the Operator Station disk
for backup archival.
TS/M/S70/24
MECHANICAL WORKS
d) Provide software to execute and observe diagnostics of any

remote device connected to the bus and the ability to deactivate
and restart the device.
7.8 Operator Station Utilities
a) The Operator Station personal computer shall be provided with

the following system utilities or desktop application packages:
Clock Real Time Clock
Calculation Basis arithmetic calculation functions (add,

subtract, multiply, divide, percentage, square
root)
Clipboard Data transfer facility between dissimilar

programmes
Calendar Electronic appointment calendar
Card file Electronic Index Card file

Control Panel Basic PC operating characteristic control :
cursor blink rate, mouse sensitivity, screen
colour control, etc.
Write Word processing programme
7.9 Third Party Software
a) The system provided shall be capable of running standard off-

the-shelf MS DOS IBM PC compatible software packages (such
as Micrografx Designer, MX-Excel Spreadsheet etc)
concurrently with the real time system.
b) The base system software shall include a LCD "windowing"

feature to allow the operator to monitor the real time system and
use third party software simultaneously.
c) All third party software packages identified shall have access to

the system historical data base previously specified.
d) All third party software shall be licensed with the University

being the licensee. all original software packages, complete with
floppy on compact ABCs and instruction manuals shall be
handed over to the University as part of the hand over
documents.
TS/M/S70/25
MECHANICAL WORKS
e) BAS/BMS system shall be open and readiness for third party

software such as simple network management protocol, mobile
application interfacing
7.10 Provided Graphics
In addition to Graphic of building systems with dynamic data points as

noted in the following Data and Control and Graphic summary, and
Graphics required under the Digital System Management sections, the
following additional graphics shall be quantified and included within the
proposal.
a) Campus layout (showing buildings, streets, etc.)
b) Individual building layouts of isometrics
c) Any other graphics necessary for logical penetration
d) Sequence or operation
e) Flowcharts for critical DDC loops
f) Supervisor graphics
g) System configuration
7.11 Trends, Messages
a) The Sub-Contractor shall enter all computer programs and data

files into the related computers including all control programs,
initial approved parameters and settings; descriptions, and
colour graphics as specified complete with dynamic dispersed
data. In addition, the following, to be user implemented, shall
have samples installed for training and validation:
1) Trend log
2) Alarm message (action taking message)
3) Trouble action message
4) Dynamic Trend Plot (6 points)
b) The BAS Central shall have extensive message capability.

Enforceable descriptive messages can be specified to address
customer concerns. The BAS Sub-Contractor shall demonstrate
this capability and install a minimum of two typical messages.
TS/M/S70/26
MECHANICAL WORKS
All remaining messages unless otherwise specified shall be

generated by the End User to meet individual needs.
7.12 Alarm Paging via Short Message Service (SMS) General
The alarm paging system shall be a Microsoft Windows based application to be

integrated with the Building Automation (BAS). On critical alarm occurrence in
the BAS, the paging system shall send SMS message to all configured mobile
phones in the system.
Functions
The Alarm Paging system shall be comply with the following functions :
a) User Interface
i) Shall be a menu based windows application capable of running on

latest Windows or Windows Server version and above system.
window detailing the system activities
iii) Shall provide user friendly easy to use graphical user interface
(GUI)
b) Paging
i) Shall provide an alarm paging system to send SMS text message

either manually or automatically to all authorized and assigned
duty personnel in the event of specific problems and/or alarms.
ii) Shall be suitable for notification to hand phone or mobile PDA.
iii) Shall be capable of identifying the personnel(s) on duty and SMS

the personnel until an acknowledgement is received. If the
notified personnel do not acknowledge the call within the pre-set
time, the system shall page for the person again for every time-out
interval until the person acknowledge the call. The acknowledge
wait (time-out) interval shall be adjustable in the system.
iv) Communication between the alarm notification system and the

BAS shall be through the communications LAN. The alarm
notification system receives the point data and systems messages
via LAN and transmits its text message via MS gateway.
v) The paging system shall be capable of identifying the personnel

on duty and page them. If the paged personnel do not
TS/M/S70/27
MECHANICAL WORKS
acknowledge the call within the pre-set time, the system shall
page for the same person for another pre-set number of times
before it page the next person on the list. The retry numbers shall
be configurable in the system.
vi) System shall be capable of handling multiple critical alarms at any

given point of time. The system shall be scalable and able to
support up to 32 SMS devices so that additional devices can be
added as and when the need arises.
c) User Grouping
i) Grouping of duty technicians based on their role shall be possible.

This grouping can be applied to the alarm condition and all users
in the group shall be paged.
ii) Users shall be paged in two modes – queued or simultaneous

calling. In queued calling, system shall escalate the notification to
the next user in the User Group only when the current user has not
dialed in and acknowledgement the notification even after a few
tries. However, some critical points may demand paging all the
users simultaneously without waiting for a response from anyone.
System shall support Inform All option to reduce time lag in
reaching several users quickly.
d) Security
i) System shall be secured with login/logoff mechanism. Users

should use their login name and password to access the system.
ii) System shall support read/write data access levels so that user can
only have read only or read/write data access permissions. Users
with read only access level shall not be allowed to update the data
in the system.
e) Reports
iii) Activity log shall be viewed and printed from the system. System
shall provide option to select date range and user name to filter the
activity data.
TS/M/S70/28
MECHANICAL WORKS
The alarm paging system shall be a Microsoft Windows based application

to be integrated with the Building Automation System (BAS). On critical
alarm occurrence in the BAS, the paging system shall send SMS message
to all configured mobile phones in the system
Functions
The Alarm Paging system shall be comply with the following functions:
a) User Interface
i) Shall be a menu based windows application capable of

running on latest Window and above system.
window detailing the system activities.
iii) Shall provide user friendly easy to use graphical user

interface (GUI).
b) Short Message Service
i) Shall provide SMS system to send SMS text message

either manually or automatically to all authorized and
assigned duty personnel in the event of specific problems
and/or alarms.
ii) Shall be suitable for notification to hand phone, PDA or

smart phones.
Shall be capable of identifying the personnel(s) on duty

and SMS the personnel until an acknowledgement is
received. If the notified personnel do not acknowledge the
call within the pre-set time, the system shall SMS the
person again for every time-out interval until the person
acknowledged the call. The acknowledge wait (time-out)
interval shall be adjustable in the system.
iii) Communication between the alarm notification system

and the BAS shall be through the communications LAN.
The alarm notification system receives the point data and
systems messages via LAN and transmits its text message
via MS gateway.
iv) The paging system shall be capable of identifying the

personnel on duty and page them. If the paged personnel
do not acknowledge the call within the pre-set time, the
system shall page for the same person for another pre-set
number of times before it page the next person on the list.
The retry numbers shall be configurable in the system.
TS/M/S70/29
MECHANICAL WORKS
v) System shall be capable of handling multiple critical

alarms at any given point of time. The system shall be
scalable and able to support up to 32 SMS devices so that
additional devices can be added as and when the need
arises.
c) User Grouping
i) Grouping of duty technicians based on their role shall be

possible. This grouping can be applied to the alarm
condition and all users in the group shall be paged.
ii) Users shall be paged in two modes - queued or

simultaneous calling. In queued calling, system shall
escalate the notification to the next user in the User Group
only when the current user has not dialed in and
acknowledgement the notification even after a few tries.
However, some critical points may demand paging all the
users simultaneously without waiting for a response from
anyone. System shall support Inform All option to reduce
time lag in reaching several users quickly.
d) Security
i) System shall be secured with login/logoff mechanism.

Users should use their login name and password to access
the system.
ii) System shall support read/write data access levels so that

user can only have read only or read/write data access
permissions. Users with read only access level shall not be
allowed to update the data in the system.
e) Reports
TS/M/S70/30
MECHANICAL WORKS
iii) Activity log shall be viewed and printed from the system.
System shall provide option to select date range and user
name to filter the activity data.
8. Sensors, Transducers, Valves and Actuators
Temperature sensors, pressure sensors, kilowatt-hour transducers, 3-way valves,

2-way valves, valves actuators, flow meters, variable speed drives and etc, shall
be provided and installed to the condenser water piping system and chilled water
piping system for the air-conditioning equipment.
8.1 Temperature Sensors
a) Sensors shall be factory calibrated and shall not require

compensation for cable lengths etc. Repeatability of sensor shall
be 0.5° C or better.
b) Duct mounted temperature sensors shall be the rigid stem type

and pipe mounted temperature sensors shall be provided with a
separable copper or stainless steel well.
c) Immersion sensors shall be provided complete with immersion

pocket. Insertion length shall be 100mm. Sensing range.
d) All sensors for Chiller Plant Room equipments shall comply to

BCA green mark requirement of individual temperature sensors
with accuracy of  0.01°C and end to end accuracy of 0.05 °C
@ 0°C
8.2 Pressure Sensors /Pressure Transmitter
a) Pressure sensors for both air and water applications shall be of

the state-of-the-art piezo resistive type. The pressure sensing
diaphragm shall be of silicon material. All pressure sensors
supplied shall have no moving parts and shall not require any
maintenance or calibration.
b) Pressure sensors shall be selected for approximately 50% over

range and have standard output signals, e.g. 4-20mA. Signals
that are specific to a manufacturer's DDC controller's input
range will be acceptable provided the sensor is of the same
manufacturer as the DDC controller. All pressure sensors shall
have temperature compensation built-in. Repeatability and
hysteresis shall be ±0.25% or better. Shock and vibration
resistance capabilities shall comply to MIL-STD-202 or better.
TS/M/S70/31
MECHANICAL WORKS
8.3 Kilowatt-Hour Transducer
a) KWH transducer shall be single disc, class 1 (BS 5685), three

phase, 50 Hz, 3 wire type suitable for unbalanced loads and with
impulse generator unit. All meters shall be fully tropicalised and
calibrated for use at 30 deg. C.
b) Transducer housing shall be of non-metallic, fully insulating,

non-hygroscopic, non-ignitable thermosetting plastic material
having low dirt absorption property and distortion free under
high temperature eg bakelite.
c) The wire terminal shall be protected by a separate cover, it shall

be of the same material as the housing.
d) The insulation of the meter circuits shall be with adequate

resistance and shall withstand the voltage test as specified in BS
5685. The meter shall further withstand 1.2/50 micro seconds
standard full lightning impulse test of not less than 10kVp in
accordance with the relevant requirement of BS 923 : .
e) Transducer shall be fitted with electronically controlled

transmitting impulse generator unit capable of delivering energy
quantities of 1.0 kwh per impulse (maximum 5 impulse/sec).
Pulse duration shall be between 10 to 120 msec.
f) KWH transducer shall be used for all electrical consumption

measurement. KWH transducer with KWH computer by BAS
shall not be acceptable.
8.4 Control Valve Actuators
a) All control valve actuators shall be of electric/electronic type

with self-contained motorized valve linkage. The linkage shall
have automatic self adjustment to compensate for any variation
in valve stroke to ensure reaching of full open or tight close-off
positions.
b) The valve actuator shall be provided with valve position

indication of stroke position for easy determination of valve
position during trouble shooting. The valve actuator shall be
provided with electronic current sensing circuitry to terminate
power to the prime mover for internal protection and to ensure
positive closing/opening force.
c) Valve actuators offered shall be of compact size and suitable for

multi-pose mounting to overcome mounting difficulties in
confined areas.
TS/M/S70/32
MECHANICAL WORKS
d) All actuators shall have a non-spring return. Manual overriding

shall be provided.
e) All actuators shall have a feed back information for valve

position
8.5 Control Valves
a) Control valves of 2" Ø and below shall be screwed type. Valves

of 2.5" Ø and above shall be flanged. Valves shall be available
with a body pressure rating of greater than 16 bar and tangibility
of better than 100:1.
b) Screw type valves shall be of gunmetal (bronze) and flanged

valves of cast iron or cast steel.
c) All valves whether two ports or three ports shall be closed when
the spindle is in the up position. Two port valves shall have an
equal percentage control characteristic. Three port valves shall
have an equal percentage characteristic on the through port and
a linear characteristic on the bypass port.
d) Valves shall be sized to have a full flow pressure drop equal or

greater than the pressure drop through the water coil being
controlled, but not more than 35KPa.
e) Two port valves shall have a close off capability equal to or

greater than the maximum possible system differential pressure.
(As determined by the pump head or the system differential
pressure bypass control setting).
f) Three port valves shall have a close off capability equal to or

greater than the combined full flow pressure drops of the coil
plus the valve itself.
g) Three port valves shall be piped for mixing service.
h) Two port control valves for differential pressure bypass control

applications shall be sized to handle at least the full flow one
chiller at the desired pressure setting. The valve shall be capable
of closing off against this pressure and of operating at this
pressure for long periods without internal wear, or noise. For
bypass valves the valve shall be either of double-seated or rotary
design, to provide a close off pressure equal to the chilled water
pump head.
i) The Sub-Contractor shall submit the sizing calculations for all

control valves.
TS/M/S70/33
MECHANICAL WORKS
j) All control valves shall be rated to withstand 1725 kPa (250 Pa)
or the expected pressure encountered, whichever is higher.
8.6 VAV Box Damper Actuator
a) A damper actuator shall be mounted directly on the damper

shaft and shall provide complete modulating control of the
damper. It shall be electronic type using magnetic coupling
technology to eliminate the need for limit switches or
mechanical stops.
b) The actuator shall be capable of driving in both clockwise and

counter-clockwise direction.
c) The damper actuator shall be a separator device from the DDC

controller.
d) Damper actuator position status shall be monitored from the

central or remote operator’s terminal and shall be displayed in
percent open notation. Systems which provide only end switch
feedback are not acceptable.
e) The actuator timing for the complete stroke shall be 90 seconds

or less. Stroke selection shall be adjustable continuously within
a range of 0 to 90 degrees.
f) The actuator running torque shall be minimum 35 lb-in with

stall torque of 45 lb-in.
8.7 Air Duct Smoke Detectors (Probe Units)
a) All smoke detector mounted at the AHU return ducts shall be

the duct mounted photoelectric type.
b) All new air handling units (AHUs) shall be fitted with smoke
detectors (probe units) of approved design and manufacture in
the return-air stream immediately adjacent to the existing air
handling unit.
c) The smoke detector (i.e. probe unit) shall be provided for

monitoring of the return air ducts of the existing AHUs. The
detector shall sample the air passing through the AHU to
provide early detection of a developing hazardous condition or
fire. In the event of alarm from the probe unit (ie. detector of
smoke at the return air duct), the related air conditioning
TS/M/S70/34
MECHANICAL WORKS
equipment (AHU) shall ‘shut down’ automatically.
d) The detector head shall be housed in an integrated housing with

filter system for reduced maintenance and service. The detector
head shall be accessible without removing the dust housing. The
air velocity limits shall be 300 to 4000 ft/min.
e) For reliability and safety considerations, the smoke detector

shall comply to UL, FM, CSFM or BSA standards.
f) The duct smoke detector shall have adjustable sensitivity setting

and be completed with integral power supply unit suitable for
230V, 50 Hz operation and relay contacts for alarm and trouble
condition monitoring and control.
g) All duct smoke detectors shall be furnished with air sampling

tubes extending through the width of the air duct.
h) The unit shall deviate a small amount of air from regular to high
velocity air conditioning and/or ventilation ducts into a special
chamber which contains a smoke detector.
i) The unit shall not have to be adjusted to air streams between 1

m/s and 20 m/s.
j) The unit shall accommodate a photo-electric light scattering

detector, matching with the built-in base.
k) The unit shall be accessible for inspection without opening the

unit.
l) The unit shall be designed so that all service work can be carried
out without affecting the duct system.
m) The unit shall be equipped with a circuit monitoring the

presence of the smoke detector head.
n) The alarm indicator shall be clearly visible from outside.
o) The housing shall be made of approved plastic material, shock-

proof, vibration-proof and listed.
p) The housing of the unit shall contain 4 openings for

compression cable glands. If unused, these openings shall be
covered with plugs.
q) The air duct detector assembly and its cover shall be joined via a
rubber lip to prevent unwanted passage of air and/or smoke.
TS/M/S70/35
MECHANICAL WORKS
r) The unit shall connect directly into any standard detector line
from the manufacturer's control unit using four wires for Class
"A" wiring.
s) The unit shall be equipped with a terminal block with screwless

terminals accepting wires between 0.25 mm2 and 1.5 mm2
(SWG 23 and 15) and equipped with built-in strain limits.
t) The unit shall allow to drive an additional alarm indicator lamp

without additional wiring from the control unit.
u) The unit shall be designed for complete sealing of the duct

penetrations necessary for the sampling tubes and for fastening
the air duct detector assembly.
v) The unit shall be supplied with a template for duct penetrations

and complete mounting, connection and maintenance
guidelines.
w) The unit shall be designed so that there is a complete separation

between detection chamber and the compartment containing the
affiliated electronics.
x) The unit shall be supplied with the appropriate sampling tubes.
y) The electronics compartment of the air duct detector assembly

shall provide ample room for additional circuitry.
z) Specifications :
Admissible flow speed : 1 to 20 m/s
Approval : UL/FF/EN54
Ambient temperature : -10 to + 60C
Relative humidity : max. 93% RH

continuous without
condensation
8.8 Radiant Heat Temperature Sensor
a) Sensor shall have a measurement range of 5 C to 50 C and the

accuracy of ± 2C, and the response time is within 10 seconds.
TS/M/S70/36
MECHANICAL WORKS
b) Sensor shall have a rotation angle of 360 horizontally and 65

vertically.
c) Sensor shall have an output signal of 1 to 5 V DC.
8.9 Humidity Sensors
a) Humidity sensors shall be sensitive thin film capacitance type.
b) Sensors shall have a range of 25 to 90% R.H. and accuracy ± 3%.
c) Room sensors shall be combined humidity/temperature sensors

and shall have terminal connection to permit wiring to be done
through the KO box.
d) Duct sensors shall have an insertion length of 200 mm and shall

have a mounting flange.
8.10 Differential Pressure Transmitters
a) Pressure transmitters shall be constructed to withstand 100%

pressure over-range without damage, and to hold calibrated
accuracy when subject to a momentary 40% over-range input.
b) Pressure transmitters shall transmit a 0 to 5 VDC, 0 to 10 VDC, or

4 to 20 mA output signal.
c) Differential pressure transmitters used for flow measurement shall

be sized to the flow sensing device
8.11 Carbon Dioxide Sensor
a) The carbon dioxide monitor where specified shall be duct

mounted type complete with sensing probes. The monitor shall
have different range setting suitable for comfort air-conditioning
application. The CO2 monitor shall monitor the CO2 level
continuously. Visual LED or other form of visual indication shall
be provided to indicate the current measured value.
b) CO2 monitor shall have automatic calibration facility for

calibrating the monitor once every hour. It shall also have built-in
diagnostic equipment for self testing during every sampling cycle.
Should a specific malfunction be detected, the display shall flash
a malfunction code number for identification. The CO2 monitor
shall be interlocked to the AHU. There shall be no sampling or
display but unit circuitry shall be on “standby” for immediate
TS/M/S70/37
MECHANICAL WORKS
operation when the AHU is shutdown.
c) The accuracy of the sensor shall be ± 100ppm and the sensing

range shall be from 0 to 2000 ppm. The response time shall not
exceed 20 seconds.
8.12 Motion Sensor Detection System
a) Motion detectors are to be provided for auto on/off of the

induction VAV units, VAV units and air-conditioning unit as
specified.
b) The areas for motion detection system shall deploy in areas that
include seminar rooms, lounge and dining, conference room.
c) All motion detectors shall operate on a standalone system in all

areas.
d) Motion detectors in areas shall be linked to DDC of the thermostat

to sense the mode of occupancy. During unoccupied mode, the
temperature will be offset to the energy saving temperature and
user defined mode when there it is occupied to maintain its
required temperature.
e) The contractor shall ensure the correct application of motion

f) The Dual Technology sensor shall be capable of detecting

presence in the control area by detecting doppler shifts in
transmitted ultrasound and passive infrared heat changes.
g) Sensor shall utilize Dual Sensing Verification Principle for

lighting on.
h) Sensor shall have a retrigger feature in which detection by either

technology shall retrigger the system on within 5 seconds of being
switched off.
i) Ultrasonic sensing shall be volumetric in coverage with a

frequency of 40 KHz. It shall utilize Advanced Signal Processing,
which automatically adjusts the detection threshold dynamically
to compensate for constantly changing levels of activity and
airflow throughout controlled space.
TS/M/S70/38
MECHANICAL WORKS
j) Sensor shall be capable of corner mounting to a wall or ceiling in

immediate activation upon entry, coverage of both technologies
must be complete and overlapping throughout the controlled area.
k) To avoid false ON activations and to provide immunity to RFI

and EMI, Detection Signature Analysis shall be used to examine
the frequency, duration, and amplitude of a signal, to respond only
to those signals caused by human motion.
l) Sensor shall operate at 24 VDC/VAC and halfwave rectified and

m) The PIR technology shall utilize a temperature compensated, dual

wavelengths and filter short wavelength IR, such as those emitted
by the sun and other visible light sources. The lens shall have
grooves facing in to avoid dust and residue build up which affects
IR reception.
n) The lens shall cover up to 2000 sq ft for walking motion when

o) Sensors shall have an additional single-pole, double throw

isolated relay with normally open, normally closed and common
outputs. The isolated relay is for use with HVAC control, data
logging, and other control options.
p) Sensors shall utilize technology to optimize time delay and

sensitivity settings to fit occupant usage patterns and shall be
selectable with a DIP switch.
q) Sensors shall have a time delay that is adjusted automatically

(with the setting) or shall have a fixed time delay of 5 to 30
r) Sensors shall feature a walk-through mode, where air-

conditioning turn off 3 minutes after the area is initially occupied
if no motion is detected after the first 30 seconds.
s) Sensor shall have an override ON function for use in the event of

a failure.
t) Sensor shall have a built-in light level sensor that works from 10
to 300 foot candles.
TS/M/S70/39
MECHANICAL WORKS
u) Sensor shall have 8 occupancy logic options for customized

control to meet application needs.
v) Sensor shall have a manual on function that is facilitated by

w) Each sensing technology shall have an LED indicator that remains

x) To ensure quality and reliability, sensor shall be manufactured by

an ISO 9002 certified manufacturing facility and shall have a
defect rate of less than 1/3 of 1%.
y) Sensor shall have standard 5-year warranty and shall be UL and

CUL listed.
z) BAS (ACMV) contractor shall design the quantity and location of

the motion sensors.
aa) All rooms shall be installed with motion sensors to off VAV
Boxes of increase to set point of thermostat controllers.
bb) Motion sensors shall be able to control the lighting of the rooms.
8.13 Indoor Air Quality Sensor
a) The Indoor Air Quality sensor shall be of wall or duct mounted

type with BACnet or Modbus communication. The sensor should
be all in one measurement of CO2, Volatile organic compounds
(VOC), temperature, Relative Humidity. The sensor shall have
LCD screen to displays the real-time value of CO2 and VOC
concentration in ppm, temperature and relative humidity. VOC
sensor shall be able to sense gases such as Formaldehyde, organic
odours, solvent, methane, hydrogen.
b) The CO2 sensor shall be of Non-dispersive infrared and the

accuracy shall be ± 5%, the sensing range shall be from 0 to 5,000
ppm with resolution of 1ppm. The response time shall not exceed
20 seconds.
c) VOC sensor shall be of photoionization detector sensing with

accuracy of ± 10%, the sensing range shall be from 0 to 50.00
ppm with resolution of 0.01ppm. The response time shall not
exceed 3 seconds.
TS/M/S70/40
MECHANICAL WORKS
d) Temperature sensing range shall be from 0C to 50C, accuracy of

±1C and resolution of 1C. Relativity humidity shall range from
0% to 100%, accuracy of ±5% and resolution of 1%
8.14 Hydrogen Detector ( H2)
a) Hydrogen detector shall be of UL-listed using catalytic

combustion sensing technology. Detector to be housed in
polycarbonate enclosure.
b) The detector shall be of wall mount with 2-line LCD display, LED
status indication on power, alarm/fault with built-in buzzer for
alarm
c) Hydrogen Detector to have 4-20mA Output and 2xDPDT Alarm

relay output for BAS monitoring
d) The detector shall have accuracy of: +/-3% in full scale and
measurement Range between 0% to 100% LEL
8.15 Not in Used
TS/M/S70/41
MECHANICAL WORKS
9. BAS Point Schedule
9.1. The Point Schedule enclosed hereinafter shall be read in conjunction with
the Tender Drawings and Specification.
9.2. The point schedule enclosed is for the purpose of guidance of minimum
requirements. The Sub-Contractor shall allow cost in his Tender for any
9.3. In general, the following are to be provided for :
Water cooled Chillers

START/STOP Control
ON/OFF Status
TRIP ALARM
Mode Selection
Flow indication
Condenser/Chilled Water Pumps

START/STOP Control
ON/OFF Status
TRIP ALARM
Mode Selection
TS/M/S70/42
MECHANICAL WORKS
Cooling Tower
START/STOP Control
ON/OFF Status
TRIP ALARM
Mode Selection
Flow indication
High/Low level indication
Motor speed indication
Outdoor wet bulb
Headers
Branch pipe
BTU and flow
Chilled water supply and return Temperature
AHUs

START/STOP Control
Programmed START/STOP Control (Energy saving modes)
ON/OFF Status
TRIP ALARM
Local/Remote Mode
VSD/BYPASS Mode
Supply Air Temperature Indication
Return Air Temperature Indication and setpoint
Chilled Water Valve Control
Chilled Water Valve Analog Position Indication
Off Coil Temperature Indication
TS/M/S70/43
MECHANICAL WORKS

R.H. Indication
Flow indication
Motorized dampers control and feedback
Outdoor air temperature
Co2 Sensor
Co2 Sensor override
Control and Monitoring of Modulating Damper for fresh air
BTU and flow
Purging Fan START/STOP control
Purging Fan START/STOP status
Purging Fan TRIP ALARM
Purging fan Fresh Air /Return Air Dampers Position
Induction Box / VAV Boxes

Temperature
Occupancy/Non-occupancy drive
Control for Motorised Damper
Flow indication
Chilled Water Fan Coil Units

Temperature
START/STOP Control & Valve Control
ON/OFF Status
Local/Remote Mode
Variable Speed Control and feedback (fan coil with VSD)
Fan speed indication (fan coil with VSD)
TRIP ALARM
VRV and Spilt Units

Room Temperature
Room Temperature setpoint
START/STOP Control
ON/OFF Status
Local/Remote Mode
High Temperature Alarm
TRIP/FAULT ALARM
TS/M/S70/44
MECHANICAL WORKS
Fresh/Exhaust Air Fans

START/STOP Control
ON/OFF Status
TRIP ALARM
Variable Speed Control and feedback (fan with VSD)
Fan speed indication (fan with VSD)
Chilled Water Pumps (for Air Cooled Chilller)

START/STOP Control
ON/OFF Status
TRIP ALARM
Mode Selection
Air cooled Chillers

START/STOP Control
ON/OFF Status
TRIP ALARM
Mode Selection
Flow indication
TS/M/S70/45
MECHANICAL WORKS
Biological Safety Cabinet/ Fume Cupboard exhausts fans

START/STOP Control
ON/OFF Status
TRIP ALARM
Mode Selection
Flow indication
PH value
Flow indication
Exhaust fan for Lab Exhaust

START/STOP Control
ON/OFF Status
TRIP ALARM
Local/Remote Mode
Exhaust Air Temperature Indication
R.H. Indication
Flow indication
Damper control and feedback
TS/M/S70/46
MECHANICAL WORKS
Heat Recovery Unit

START/STOP Control
ON/OFF Status
TRIP ALARM
Mode Selection
Temperature indication before evaporator ,after evaporator
Temperature indication of water before entering and leaving
Flow indication
High level interfacing to hot water temperature,
Hot Water Pump

START/STOP Control
ON/OFF Status
TRIP ALARM
Mode Selection
Hot water in analogue pressure/temp. indication
Bypass Valve control and feedback
Laboratory
Temperature & temperature control
Occupancy/Non-occupancy mode
Control for motorised air venturi valves and Fast Respond Variable Air
Volume valves
Air flow control & indication for all supply air ,exhaust air & etc
Pressure control & indication for all laboratory
RH control & indication for all laboratory
Motion sensor
Air tight damper on/off control and status
TS/M/S70/47
MECHANICAL WORKS
Main supply / exhaust duct

Air flow indication for all main branch duct for supply air / exhaust air &
etc
Modulating and on/off control and status for bubble tight/air tight damper
Freezer / Cold room

ON/OFF Status
TRIP ALARM
10. Chiller Plant Permanent Measurement & Verification (M&V) System
10.1. The Contractor shall include all materials, equipment, accessories,

software, applications and all necessary labours for the carrying out and
completion of the works, whether or not expressly specified in the
Tender Documents.
10.2. The installed instrumentation shall have the capability to calculate

resultant system efficiency (i.e. kW/RT) within 5% of its true value.
Each measurement system shall include the sensor, any signal
conditioning, the data acquisition system and wiring connecting them.
10.3. The Contractor shall ensure that all the instruments and installation
procedure shall follow the specification and method stated under the
following standards:
a. SS 591: Long Term Measurement of Central Chilled Water

System Energy Efficiency
b. Latest BCA Green Mark for Existing Non-Residential

Buildings ENRB
c. Latest Non-Residential New Buildings
d. New Buildings (Non Residential) 2015
e. ASHRAE Guide 22 - Instrumentation for Monitoring Central

Chilled Water System Efficiency
f. SS 553-2009 Code Of Practice for Air-conditioning and

TS/M/S70/48
MECHANICAL WORKS
10.4. Requirements for Magnetic In-Line Flow Meter
a. The flow measuring principle of the flow meter shall be based

on Faraday’s law of electromagnetic induction where the sensor
converts the flow into an electric voltage proportional to the
velocity of the flow

c. Output transmission of 4 to 20mA and Modbus communication



the BTU meter
10.5. Requirements for Ultrasonic Flow Meter
a. The flow meter shall be of the highly accurate clamp-on non-

intrusive ultrasonic flow meter

c. Output transmission of 4 to 20mA and modbus communication



the BTU meter
TS/M/S70/49
MECHANICAL WORKS
10.6. Requirements for Temperature Sensor
a. The temperature sensor shall be of the Thermistor 10K type 4-

wired complete with an open end thread thermo well with an
accuracy of measurement calibrated against measurement
standard include uncertainly of not exceeding ± 0.01°C
b. The sensing probe shall be installed in such manner that there is

direct contact with the water
c. Two (2) nos. of thermo wells shall be installed before and after
the temperature sensor for verification purpose
d. Temperature sensors are to be provided for chilled water,

condenser water loop and common header
e. The temperature sensors shall have their own calibration

certificate following the calibration methods stated under SS
591.
f. The flow meters shall be connected to the BAS using high-

10.7. Requirements for Power Meter
a. The power measurement device shall be of the multi-function

meter type with an accuracy equivalent to Class 0.5 (0.5%),
output transmission of 4 to 20mA and modbus for
communication
b. The current transformer shall have an accuracy of Class 0.5

(0.5%)
c. The power meters shall be connected to the BAS using high-

d. Dedicated power meters (of IEC Class 0.5 or equivalent) and

associated current transformers (of class 0.5 or equivalent) are
to be provided for each groups of equipment: chillers, chilled
water pumps, condenser water pumps, cooling towers and air
distribution equipment.
TS/M/S70/50
MECHANICAL WORKS
10.8. Requirements for Data Acquisition System
a. The data acquisition system shall have an A/D minimum native

resolution of 22 bits
b. All data are able to be logged at 1 second and 1 minute

sampling time interval, and recorded to the 3rd decimal
c. The system shall have the capability to measure and convert 11

different input signals : temperature with thermocouples,
RTD’s and thermistors; dc/ac volts; 2- and 4-wire resistance;
frequency and period; DC /AC current
d. Data Acquisition System shall have spare slot for extension

module
e. Export of raw Data in CSV and excel format
f. Interface to the BAS system for Data display and Calculation
i. Heat balance for individual and total Chiller group,
ii. Individual Chiller efficiency,
iii. Plant efficiency,
iv. Individual and total Chilled Water and Condenser

Pumps kW/RT,
v. Individual and total Cooling Tower kW/RT
10.9. Outdoor Measuring Station
a) Minimally 1 set of Temperature and Humidity Sensor to be

installed along the cooling towers to measure dry-bulb / wet bulb
air temperature and relative humidity. Measuring station shall
have graphical display and keypad for user access operational
data, measurement, trend record. The station shall have modbus
communication for BAS / IBMS interfacing.
b) Sensors / transmitters shall be of remote stainless steel probe,

factory calibrated and shall not require compensation for cable
lengths up to 10m. All enclosure housing shall be of IP 65
corrosion resistance. Maintenance-free solar ultra-violet radiation
and precipitation shield shall be provided for the wet/dry bulb
temperature transmitter sensor probe.
TS/M/S70/51
MECHANICAL WORKS
c) Sensors / Transmitters shall be of EMC compliant with 4mA to

20mA analogue output signals. Signal to be separated for both
temperature and humidity sensing.
d) The temperature measurement shall have an uncertainty within

0.2oC.
e) The accuracy of relative humidity sensors / transmitters shall be

1% or better over the range of 0% to 90%. The accuracy over
the range of 90% to 100% shall be 2%. Hysteresis, linearity
and repeatability to be less than 1% RH
f) Measuring station shall have selectable parameters:
Dry bulb temperature : 0°C - 60°C
Wet bulb temperature : 0°C - 100°C
Relative Humidity : 0 % - 100%
Absolute Humidity : 0g/m3 - 600g/m3
Dew point Temperature : -20°C - 100°C
Mixing Ratio : 0g/kg - 500g/kg of dry air
The station shall have minimum 6-point NIST traceable calibration

certificate. Certificate shall be submitted to engineer
11. As-Built
11.1. All the as-built drawing shall follow the particular specification
11.2. All the DDC panel and BAS station shall have the termination single lines
diagram. The diagram shall reflect all the AO, AI, DO, DI and all other
high level point that connected. Diagram shall clearly stated to which
sensors. devices, type of control, monitoring, etc
TS/M/S70/52
MECHANICAL WORKS
12. Training
12.1. The Sub-Contractor shall conduct a local training program for designated
personnel. These courses shall be carried out during normal office hours
and be not be less than 5 working days duration. The date of
commencement of training shall be a date mutually agreed upon and shall
be within one month of the hand-over of installation. Contractor shall also
conduct re-training after the end of DLP and review in those problems
arise during the defects period.
12.2. The training program shall cover all operating and maintenance aspects of
the system, inclusive of detail explanation and demonstration of each and
every software and hardware feature incorporated and an overview of the
system communication network.
12.3. The training program shall consist of both hands-on and class-room
training at the job site or at location agreed upon by the University.
12.4. All instruction manuals, tools, transportation, etc., associated with the
training program shall be provided by the Sub-Contractor. Such cost shall
be deemed to include in the Tender Sum.
12.5. All training shall be carried out by manufacturer's representative and shall
utilize specified manuals, as built documentation and on-line help utility.
TS/M/S70/53
MECHANICAL WORKS
Green Mark Energy Tabulation to be reflected in BAS, floor plan graphic shall be included
Lab Office Common Area Total Total

ACMV HRU Floor Floor
Floors
Lighting Equipment HPF Lighting Equipment ACMV Lighting Equipment ACMV Power Tonnage
(kW) (RT)
∑ RF BTU
∑ RF
RF meters (if
meters
any)
∑ L16 ∑ L16
16 meters BTU
meters
∑ L15 ∑ L15
15 meters BTU
meters
… … …
∑ L2 ∑ L2 BTU
2
meters meters
∑ L1 ∑ L1 BTU
1
meters meters
∑ ∑
Basement Basement
Basement
meters BTU
meters
Total A B C D E F G H I J K ∑A-K L
TS/M/S70/54
MECHANICAL WORKS
Total Building Lighting A+F+I

Total Building Equipment B + G +J
Total Building ACMV C+D+E+H+K
Lifts
Pumps
Others Main incoming meter - ∑ all
of the above
Chiller Plant L x Chiller plant efficiency
Total Building load Sum of the above (M)
(kW)
Total Building Area (m2) N
EUI (kWh/m2/yr) M x 8760 / N
Chiller Plant efficiency shall interface to the chiller plant that supply to the building. Sub-
contractor shall include all the necessary interfacing to the chiller plant BAS system.
TS/M/S70/55
MECHANICAL WORKS
SECTION 71 – INTERFACE FOR BUILDING AUTOMATION SYSTEM
1. General
1.1 This section sets out the requirements for remote control and monitoring
of all mechanical systems by the Building Automation System (BAS).
1.2 The provisions specified herein to be made by the Sub-Contractor shall
be in addition to any provisions for localised control and monitoring
devices and systems specified elsewhere in the Specification. The
intention is to achieve comprehensive control and monitoring of all
mechanical and electrical systems by integrating all localised control and
monitoring systems with the BAS. Towards this end, the Sub-Contractor
shall cooperate and co-ordinate with the BAS contractor in such matters
as the installation of auxiliary devices, wiring identification and testing,
uniformity in control circuitry and the provision of all necessary data for
programming.
1.3 The Sub-Contractor shall be responsible for all works and materials
necessary for the provisions of auxiliary devices as specified herein,
including the provisions of terminal blocks at each starter panel, switch-
board section and elsewhere as specified, the installation of sensors, and
wiring from such auxiliary devices and sensors to the terminal blocks.
1.4 The Sub-Contractor shall provide a separate section or compartment in
each starter panel or switchboard to house the terminal blocks mentioned
in the above paragraph. The compartment should be front access and
located at the bottom of the panel. For floor-standing panels, the
compartment shall be no less than 300mm above the floor, with the
section below it reserved for keeping of spares and tools. A separate
vertical cable-way shall be allowed for at one end of the entire panel for
cabling. A minimum of 25% spare terminal block shall be allowed for
additional interfacing requirements. The Sub-Contractor shall also
connect the designated BAS monitoring and control points to the
terminal blocks using approved control cables. All terminations shall be
clearly labelled. The BAS connecting panel shall be located at the pump
room.
1.5 The Sub-Contractor shall ensure that all BAS control and monitoring
devices installed by them are correctly terminated in the terminal blocks.
1.6 The Sub-Contractor shall be responsible for and shall connect all
temporary connections across the terminal blocks mentioned above and
elsewhere if these connections are necessary for testing, commissioning
and temporary operation of any of the equipment installed by them. The
Sub-Contractor shall liaise with the BAS contractor to phase in the
functions of the BAS progressively.
TS/M/71/1
MECHANICAL WORKS
2. Auxiliary Devices
Auxiliary devices shall be provided by the Sub-Contractor in the control circuitry

or elsewhere for the purpose of remote control and monitoring of the equipment
by BAS. The auxiliary devices shall be of the following:
2.1 Digital Input (DI)
Digital input in the form of voltage free, normally open contacts and
switches shall be provided by the Sub-Contractor for monitoring of
equipment by BAS. Where the contact cannot return to its normal
position after the alarm state has been restored to normal, the Sub-
Contractor shall provide for a manual reset facility to manually reset the
contact to its normal position. Also, if transducers are required to drive
these contacts and switches, the Sub-Contractor shall be responsible for
the provision of these transducers. All DIs must be electrically isolated
from power circuits.
2.2 Start/Stop Circuit
The Sub-Contractor shall provide start/stop circuits in the control

circuitry of equipment for remote start/stop by BAS.
2.3 Analog Input (AI)
Analog Input (AI) in the form of transducers and sensors shall be

provided and installed by the Sub-Contractor. The Sub-Contractor shall
be responsible for all work and material involved in the installation of
these AI devices, including the installation of wells in pipes and wiring
up to the BAS interfacing panels.
2.4 Current Transformer and Potential Transformer
Current and potential transformer of rating 0-5A and 230V:1V

respectively shall be provided by the Sub-Contractor for monitoring the
analogue value of current, voltage and power consumption. The
transducers (including wiring and conduits) to convert output of current
and potential transformer to BAS compatible signals shall be provided
and be installed by the Sub-Contractor up to the BAS interfacing panels.
TS/M/71/2
MECHANICAL WORKS
3. Wiring
3.1 All wiring for BAS interfacing shall conform to the specification herein:
Digital Input (DI) : 0.6mm diameter, single twisted

pair, screen telephone cable.
Analogue Input (AI) : 0.9mm diameter, duo-twisted pair,

screen telephone cable.
Digital Output (DO) : 1mm sq PVC cables.
Electrical Input (EI) : 0.9mm diameter, single twisted

3.2 All cable screens for DI, AI & EI shall be left floating at the equipment
(auxiliary contacts, sensors etc) and shall be terminated in a common
screen terminal on the terminal block. The screens shall not be earthed.
3.3 All line valves shall come with limit switch, to connected to BAS.
4. BAS Points Schedule
4.1 The point schedule enclosed is for purpose of guidance of minimum

requirements. The Sub-Contractor shall allow cost in his Tender for
any further points/sensors/instruments to enable the system to operate
in its intended purpose of a complete optimum operating system.
4.2 The Point Schedule enclosed hereinafter shall be read in conjunction

with the Drawings and Specification.
4.3 The Sub-Contractor shall read the Specifications and Drawings

conjunction for the actual quantities.
TS/M/71/3
MECHANICAL WORKS
SECTION 72 - PAINTING
1. General
1.1 The work to be painted shall include all equipment, duct work, piping,
fittings, valves, hangers, conduits, frameworks, switchboard, electrical
trunking, machinery, water tank, etc. and all work exposed to view. All
paints, enamel, etc. shall be approved brand of best quality and shall be
delivered to the site in the maker's containers with seal, etc., unbroken and
are clearly marked with the maker's name or trademark and a description
of the contents and colour.
1.2 The paints used in the works must be suitable for use in tropical climates,
with an addition of anti-fungus nature. The paint shall be of low VOC.
1.3 All materials for multiple coat work e.g. primers, undercoatings and
finishing coats, shall be obtained from the same manufacturer and shall be
those recommended by the manufacturer as suitable for application
together and for the type and duty of surfaces concerned.
1.4 No painting on exterior work to be done during wet weather, or upon

surfaces that are not thoroughly clean and dry.
1.5 During the execution of Painter's work the Sub-Contractor is held

responsible for taking all precautions necessary for the health and safety
of his workmen.
1.6 The paint shall be kept stirred during use and when more than one coat is
specified, subsequent coats shall not be applied until preceding coats have
thoroughly hardened.
1.7 All painting shall be carried out within seven (7) days of delivery and
erection on site. This requirement shall be strictly complied with.
2. Metal Surface
Primer for metal surfaces shall be red lead or chromate metal primer or other
approved equivalent. If the primer has thoroughly dried, apply one undercoat of
appropriate shade, allow at least 24 hours drying time under normal weather
conditions before application of each subsequent finishing coat. All galvanised
steel surfaces shall be primed with zinc chromate before application of the
finishing coats (minimum two coats).
TS/M/S72/1
MECHANICAL WORKS
3. Protection of Finishes
All polished or chromium plated iron or steel work shall have at least one coat of
protective finish at the manufacturers works and the Sub-Contractor shall
maintain this preservation until the work is finally painted or put into use.
4. Painting and Protection
4.1 The following items shall be painted to colours approved by the S.O.:
a) Sleeves and sheet metal casings
b) All pipe work including pipe fittings
c) All duct work
d) All metal work, hangers, conduits
e) Screw heads and means of fixing
f) Suppliers items
g) Galvanised steel
h) All work exposed to view
4.2 Before any painting is carried out the Sub-Contractor shall ensure that the
surface to be painted is clean, free of grease and rust as recommended by
the paint manufacturer. If necessary, degreasing and de-rusting shall be
employed.
4.3 Each coat of paint shall be applied by brush and when thoroughly dry,
smoothed with suitable abrasive paper or cloth before the next coat is
applied.
4.4 No painting or drying should be carried out in direct sunlight and due care
shall be taken during dusty or wet conditions.
4.5 All items subjected to corrosive air or other hazardous conditions shall be
specially treated and painted with suitable anti-corrosive paint as
recommended by the manufacturers.
4.6 Should any corrosion, or signs of faulty painting techniques become

apparent during the maintenance period, the Sub-Contractor will be
required to remove the defective paint work or component part at his own
cost and retreat and/or repaint it as directed and to the satisfaction of the
Superintending Officer.
TS/M/S72/2
MECHANICAL WORKS
4.7 All floors, ceilings, walls, fittings etc shall be protected by proper
painters' sheet and all paint spots and splashes be removed.
4.8 The painting shall be carried out as follows:
a) All pipe work and associated hangers, brackets, supports, sleeves,

etc shall be painted as follows :
1 coat - degreasing coat

1 coat - primer coat
1 coat - undercoat
2 coats - top coat hard matt finish paint
The first finishing coat shall be of a lighter shade of the final

finishing coat.
The finishing coats for all metal surfaces exposed to weather shall
be epoxy paints.
b) The direction of flow shall be indicated by an arrow stenciled in

black/white paint on the pipe.
c) All screw heads, wing nuts and other means of fixing shall be
painted at the time of installation and re-finished after the final
testing and commissioning is completed.
d) All manufactured items that are delivered in a painted condition

whether under or finish coated shall be prepared as mentioned
above and then re-painted as before. Special care shall be taken
with the painting of the underside of pumps, bases, etc. A layer of
bituminous material or roofing felt shall be laid on the base before
the item is installed and then trimmed to size.
e) All cut ends of galvanised steel and sheet metal work shall be
prepared as mentioned above and painted two coats of zinc
chromate paint.
f) All items that are considered liable to oil or grease splashes shall
be finished painted using two coats of the appropriate oil proof
paint.
TS/M/S72/3
MECHANICAL WORKS
5. Identification of Pipelines
5.1 The direction of flow shall be indicated by an arrow pencilled in

black/white paint on the pipe. The length of the arrow shall be :
a) For pipes 50 mm internal diameter and under, the arrow shall be

75 mm.
b) For pipes exceeding over 50 mm internal diameter and over, the

arrow shall be 150 mm.
5.2 All pipelines shall be identified to BS 1710.
PIPE
other other
150mm 150mm 150mm
approved approved
decorative decorative
A B C
colour colour
Pipe A B C
1. Chilled water Green White emerald Green

green and white
2. Condenser water Green White Green
3. Drainage Black Black Black
4. Cold Water Light Blue White Light Blue
5. Soil, Waste Black White Black

and Vent
6. Refrigerant Yellow Sea Green Yellow
5.3 Permanent labels eg "CHS", "CHR", "CNS", "CWS" "BAS", "Elect",

“ACMV-ELECT”, "TAS", "CCTV", etc shall be provided for the
identification of all pipes, trunking, etc. The labels shall be painted at
every 5 metres interval.
TS/M/S72/4
MECHANICAL WORKS
6. Colour Scheme
6.1 All pipe work and equipment installed under this Sub-Contract shall be
painted in accordance with the following colour scheme:
Pipeline/Equipment Colour
Cold water service pipe Blue
Cold water rising main Blue
Hot water service pipe Insulation with Red and blue band
Gas pipe Yellow
Soil, waste & vent pipe Bituminous paint or as directed by

S.O..
Electrical Services Orange
Fire services and associated

equipment and pipe work Signal Red
Chilled water pipe Dark Green (Return line) and Light

Green (Supply line)
Condenser water pipe Dark Blue (Return line) and Light

Blue (supply line)
BAS services White
Control panels Light Grey
Duct work Beige
6.2 On completion, the Sub-Contractor shall make good all painting works
which have been damaged during the progress of works for the handing
over.
TS/M/S72/5
MECHANICAL WORKS
7. Directional Flow
When it is necessary to know the direction of flow of the fluid, this should be
indicated by an arrow as illustrated hereunder :
300mm 150mm
50mm
For pipes 150mm diameter For pipes under 150mm

& above including insulation diameter including
if used insulation if used
(a) Arrows shall be painted black.
(b) Arrows shall be readable from floor.
(c) Arrows shall be marked for every 5 m (15 feet).
8. Galvanising
8.1 All metals to be galvanised shall be of the full dimensions shown or

specified, and all punching, cutting, drilling, screw tapping and the
removal of burrs shall be completed before the galvanising process
commences.
8.2 All galvanising shall be done by the hot dip process with spelter not less
than 98 per cent of which shall be pure zinc. No alternative process may
be used without the approval of the S.O.. No components shall be
galvanised which are likely to come into subsequent contact with oil.
8.3 The galvanising shall be uniform, clean, smooth and as free from spangle
as possible. In the case of component parts the galvanizing shall not be
less than 85 microns in thickness.
8.4 All galvanised parts shall be protected from injury due to electrolytic
action, white rust and abrasion during the periods of transit, storage and
erection. Damaged area of the coating shall be touched up with an
approved zinc rich paint or other approved metallic compound.
8.5 Galvanising shall conform to BS 729.
TS/M/S72/6
MECHANICAL WORKS
SECTION 73 - BALANCING, TESTING & COMMISSIONING OF AIR-

CONDITIONING & VENTILATION
1. General Scope of Works
This section sets out the basic requirements for balancing, testing and
commissioning of the systems as specified within this Sub-Contract. All testing,
balancing, calibration, and setting of the equipment and controls associated with
this installation shall be performed with all the instruments and labour necessary to
this shall be supplied by the Sub-Contractor. The systems include:
a) Air Conditioning System

b) Mechanical Ventilation System
c) Laboratory Air-Flow Control System
d) Fume cupboard / Biological safety cabinet
e) Animal House Air-Flow Control System
f) Cold Rooms / Warm Room
g) Building Automation System
h) Chiller Plant Measurement and Verification System
2. The Sub-Contractor shall employ thoroughly competent and experienced personnel

to carry out all tests and shall comply with all rules, requirements of the Local
Authorities, Code of Practice and ASHARE Standard 111.
3. The Sub-Contractor shall be responsible for the complete and thorough testing,
commissioning, adjusting and balancing of the systems and equipment installed
and to bring into safe and reliable operation the entire Air Conditioning and
Mechanical Ventilation System and the other systems included in this Sub-
Contract.
4. The Sub-Contractor shall notify the S.O. in writing of his programme to test and
commission equipment and systems at least seven (7) days before actual execution.
5. The Sub-Contractor shall prepare and provide printed testing and commissioning
record forms of approved format.
6. The Sub-Contractor shall submit two (2) copies of a written report on the results of
tests etc within seven (7) days of completion of such test, irrespective of test
results.
7. All water pipes shall be hydrostatically tested at a pressure equal to 150 percent of
the maximum operating pressure or at 150 psi whichever is greater.
TS/M/S73/1
MECHANICAL WORKS
8. The test pressure should not be allowed to decrease by more than one (1) percent
over a 24-hour period. Leaks shall be repaired by re-welding, replacing of sections
or tightening of bolted flanges. Caulking of joints shall not be allowed.
9. The Sub-Contractor shall ensure that all pressure gauges, control valves, flow
switches, regulators joints and fittings which have operating pressure below the test
pressure are isolated.
10. All water for hydrostatic pressure testing of pipe work systems shall be chemically
treated with a suitable corrosion inhibitor. The chemically treated water shall
remain and totally filled each section of the system until all sections of the system
have been pressure tested and the complete system is ready for the pre-commission
cleaning operation.
11. After the pressure test all pipes shall be flushed clean in sections. The Sub-
Contractor shall ensure that flushing water do not pass through coils.
12. All strainers, tanks and valves shall be thoroughly cleaned.
13. All water circuits shall be balanced. The water circuit shall be so adjusted to
enable 120% rated flow through the furthest cooling coil from the pump when the
throttle valve is in fully open position.
14. All coils and control valves shall be tested for pressure drop and flow rates against
the ratings given by the Sub-Contractor. Final assessment shall be done by
checking the air volumes, and entering/leaving conditions of the air.
15. The chiller sets shall be commissioned by qualified personnel. Detailed and
comprehensive commissioning procedures recommended by the chiller
manufacturer shall be strictly adhered to.
16. Standard procedures shall be complied with in the testing and commissioning of
AHU's fans, motors, cooling towers, pumps, chillers and other accessories. In the
event of conflict of testing and commissioning requirements between
manufacturers' and standard procedures, the more stringent requirement shall be
adhered to.
17. All pumps shall be tested for proper alignment and flow rates at design heads. RPM
check shall also be made for excessive noise and leakage.
18. During the installation stage, all main duct work shall be pressure tested in
sections.
TS/M/S73/2
MECHANICAL WORKS
19. Prior to the start up of air moving equipment, the Sub-Contractor shall ensure that
all ducts plenums, sound attenuators, duct accessories and AHU rooms are clean.
20. The Sub-Contractor shall ensure that all dampers and fire dampers in particular are
in the correct positions.
21. Air Handling Units, and fans shall be checked to ensure that the filters are clean
and all in position and that no air is bypassed. All duct connections shall be
checked for air tightness before balancing commences.
22. The Sub-Contractor shall ensure that the entire duct work is commissioned to allow
the designed maximum flow into each and every branch of duct work under all
operating conditions. Air quantities shall be set to designed figures with ± 10%
tolerance as given on the Drawing.
23. All fans shall be tested and commissioned in strict accordance to the manufacturer's
recommendations. The fan system shall be tested and commissioned for air
performance in accordance to the guidelines as set out in AMCA Fan Application
Manuals and AMCA Standard 210.
24. All registers, grilles, diffusers and dampers shall be correctly adjusted to give
required design air quantities or within ± 10 percent tolerance as indicated in the
Drawings.
25. All fixed dampers shall be set and the final position shall be clearly and
permanently marked. Variable Air Volume System shall be balanced by turning
down all thermostat settings or raise supply air temperature so that the controlled
regulator will allow full air flow.
26. Air movement in the conditioned spaces shall be as uniform as practicable and
temperature differential in the occupancy level shall not exceed 1°C.
27. The Sub-Contractor shall deploy at least 3 skilled and competent workers in air
conditioning and mechanical ventilation work on a full time basis for minimum
two (2) months after the Practical Completion Date, to attend to complaints relating
to poor performance of air diffusion and to re-adjust air diffusion equipment to suit
the different requirements of the conditioned spaces' occupants.
28. All control systems shall be calibrated under operating conditions until smooth and
accurate operation conditions are attained. Control settings shall then be
permanently marked on the control equipment. All calibration procedures shall be
properly and fully recorded.
TS/M/S73/3
MECHANICAL WORKS
29. The Sub-Contractor shall check, test and adjust each and every sensor, controller,
actuator and other accessories for the smooth and fine operation.
30. All necessary costs for the adjustments and replacements shall be borne by the Sub-
Contractor.
31. The Sub-Contractor shall conduct vibration level measurement of all equipment
and noise level measurement in various space.
32. Test carried out for the staircase pressurisation system shall be to the satisfaction of
the S.O.. All test procedure and method of testing shall be submitted to the S.O.
for approval before work commences.
Test shall include measurement of the following :
32.1 Static pressure within the staircase when all staircase doors are close.
32.2 Average air-flow velocity through doors when the ground floor entrance
and two or more doors are open.
33. The Sub-Contractor shall be responsible for all electrical tests of all equipment
before turning on and shall be represented by a competent Electrical Engineer
during the whole of the period required for the tests. The Sub-Contractor shall
supply all necessary instruments, apparatus, labour for the tests to the satisfaction
of the S.O., the cost shall be borne by the Sub-Contractor.
34. The Sub-Contractor shall conduct Indoor Air Quality ( IAQ) test according to
SS554: Code of practice for indoor air quality for air-conditioned buildings before
occupied and after occupied.
35. The Sub-Contractor shall submit performance tests to ensure that the equipment
and systems perform to the requirements of the Specification.
36. The performance tests shall comprise of:
36.1 Chiller Sets
a) Full load current at maximum capacity at design water temperature

and specified fouling factors.
b) Minimum operating capacity without any surge or instability at

design condenser water temperature.
36.2 Cooling Towers
Leaving water temperature at design water flow rate and entering

temperature and at design ambient wet bulb condition.
TS/M/S73/4
MECHANICAL WORKS
36.3 Fans
Maximum air quantity delivery at maximum permissible fan settings, and at

rated motor duty.
36.4 Cooling Coils
Pressure drop and water carry over at maximum permissible face velocity.
36.5 Pumps
Maximum water quantity deliveries at design total dynamic head.
36.6 Treatment Devices
Water quality test report to equipment's standard.
37. Temperature and Humidity records shall be obtained for in selected areas served by
each AHU and charts labelled and presented to the S.O. before arrangement for
hand over. During the free maintenance period, such records on any other rooms
shall be obtained when required by the S.O..
38. For other works on the Fume Cupboard System, Cold Room System and Clean
Room System the testing and commissioning shall be as stated in their sections
within this Specification. In addition, all tests as recommended by their
manufacturers shall be carried out. All tests and commissioning shall be conducted
by skilled, competent and qualified personnel in specialised areas.
39. All Chiller plant measurement and verification system temperature sensors, flow
meter and power meter shall carry out monthly servicing and carried out yearly
third party re-certification with calibration report by accredited body.
TS/M/S73/5
MECHANICAL WORKS
SECTION 74 - SERVICE AND MAINTENANCE CONTRACT
1. The Sub-Contractor shall state clearly in his Tender, the maintenance and
servicing charge per annum after the warranty and free maintenance period. This
price shall stay firm for at least twelve (15) calendar months after the aforesaid
period and shall be based on the maintenance responsibilities specified for the
warranty period except the items that are otherwise stated. In addition, it shall
cover all trips by the Sub-Contractor to attend to any complaint calls in between
routine servicing.
2. The Employer does not bind itself to award the Maintenance and Servicing
Contract after the warranty period to the successful Tenderer.
3. After the warranty period and with the sufficient number of free maintenance
servicing provided by the Sub-Contractor, a maintenance agreement may be
signed between the Employer and the Sub-Contractor based on the accepted
servicing charge at the time of Tender.
4. Any work outside the scope of this maintenance agreement and materials and
spare parts supplied shall be additionally charged. The Sub-Contractor shall
submit a report together with an itemised quotation for the consideration and
approval of the Employer at the earliest instance.
5. Upon completion of routine servicing under the maintenance agreement and any
repair works as stated in the accepted quotations, the Sub-Contractor shall submit
an invoice for payment.
6. Either party of the Maintenance Agreement is required to give 30 days notice for
the termination of the same.
7. The Sub-Contractor shall keep adequate spare parts for the systems under his
maintenance to ensure that the machine down-time in the event of breakdowns
will be minimised.
8. The Sub-Contractor shall be responsible for all damages caused to the installation
or the Employer property through the act of negligence of their workmen except
where it can be proven that it is no fault of theirs.
TS/M/S74/1
MECHANICAL WORKS
After the expiry of the Maintenance and Warranty Period of the installation, we offer our
comprehensive service and maintenance for a period of three (3) years in accordance with
the section on "Service and Maintenance" in the Specification for the sum per annum as
stated below.
System Cost Cost Per Annum (S$)
1st Yr 2nd Yr 3rd Yr 4th Yr 5th Yr

1. A/C and M/V System
2. BAS/IMSS
3. Cold Rooms
4. Heat Recovery System
5. Odour Control Systems
6. Air Cooled Chillers
7 Other Systems
…………………………………
…………………………………
Total $
TS/M/S74/2
MECHANICAL WORKS
Details and qualifications of works not included in this Comprehensive Servicing and
Maintenance Contract offered (if any)
......................................................................................................................................
.......................................................................................................................................
......................................................................................................................................
.......................................................................................................................................
...................................................... ................................................
Name, Position & Signature Company Stamp & Date
of SUB-CONTRACTOR
...................................................... ................................................
Name, Position & Signature Date
of WITNESS
TS/M/S74/3
MECHANICAL WORKS
BAS POINT SCHEDULE

DIGITAL OUTPUT DIGITAL INPUT ANALOG OUTPUT ANALOG INPUT SOFTWARE PROGRAM REMARK
SWITCH MODE (BAS/IMSS/LOCAL/REMOTE)
DUCT STATIC DIFFERENTIAL PRESSURE

DDC CONTROL MODULATING DAMPER
CHILLED WATER/CONDENSER WATER

DDC CONTROL MOTORISED DAMPER
SYSTEM APPARATUS OR
SERVICE SWITCH (BYPASS MODE)
MODE SELECTION & AUTOMATION

PRESSURE(STANDBY CYLINDER)
ROOM DIFFERENTIAL PRESSURE
RETURN WATER TEMPERATURE
HI LEVEL METER BUS / MODBUS

SUPPLY WATER TEMPERATURE
GAS SUPPRESSION ACTIVATED
DIFFERENTIAL PRESSURE ( ΔP)

DDC FOR MOTORIZED DAMPER
MOTOR RUNNING FREQUENCY
INTERLOCK TO AHU/FCU/DFCU
OUTDOOR AIR TEMPERATURE
MAINTENANCE MANAGEMENT
PRESSURE (DUTY CYLINDER)
OPEN CLOSE STATUS -VALVE
FAN SPEED / MOTOR SPEED /

AREA POINT DESCRIPTION
RTON-HEAT LOAD (BTUmeter)

DDC CONTROL MODULATING
HIGH TEMPERATURE ALARM

RETURN AIR TEMPERATURE
RETURN WATER PRESSURE

LOW TEMPERATURE ALARM

SUPPLY AIR TEMPERATURE
SUPPLY WATER PRESSURE
HISTORICAL DATA RECORD

CONTROL BY CO2 SENSOR
DDC CONTROL FOR VALVE
SMOKE DETECTOR ALARM
HEAT LOAD CALCULATION

DDC CONTROL CURRENT
ROOM AIR CHANGE RATE

OFF-COIL TEMPERATURE
START/STOP OPERATION
RUN TIME TOTALISATION
DDC CONTROL FOR VSD
ON COIL TEMPEARTURE
START/STOP COMMAND
ENERGY TOTALISATION
WATER CONSUMPTION
WATER CONSUMPTION
SPACE TEMPERATURE
OPEN/CLOSE STATUS
ANALOG LIMIT ALARM

RELATIVE HUMIDITY
OCCUPANCY MODE
OCCUPANCY MODE
DDC CONTROL VSD
HIGH LEVEL ALARM
LOW LEVEL ALARM
WATER FLOWRATE
ON/OFF COMMAND
DAMPER POSITION
MANTRAP ALARM
HIGH TDS ALARM
CONTROL VALVE
TREND LOGGING
KILOWATT-HOUR
VALVE POSITION
POWER FACTOR
ON/OFF STATUS
TIME PROGRAM
TEMPERATURE
DUTY CYCLING
AIR FLOWRATE
DDC CONTROL
FILTER ALARM
FLOWSWITCH
LEAK ALARM
TRIP/FAULT
TDS VALUE
PRESSURE
GRAPHICS
KILOWATT
QUANTITY
PH VALUE
CURRENT
VOLTAGE
( ΔP)
CO2
CO
AIR-CONDITIONING SYSTEM
1 CHILLER SYSTEM x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x
2 CHILLERS x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x
3 CHILLER WATER IN/OUT x x x x x x x x x x x x
4 CONDENSER WATER IN/OUT x x x x x x x x x x
5 CHILLED WATER HEADER x x x x x x x x x x x x x
6 CONDENSER WATER HEADER x x x x x x x x x x
7 CHILLED WATER PUMPS x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x
8 CONDENSER WATER PUMPS x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x
9 CHILLED WATER BY-PASS x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x
10 EXPANSION TANKS x x x x
11 CONDENSER WATER SYSTEM x x x x x x x
12 COOLING TOWER SETS x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x
13 COOLING TOWER WATER INLET x x x x x x x x x x
14 COOLING TOWER WATER OUTLET x x x x x x x x x x
15 MAIN SUPPLY PIPE x x x x x x
16 MAIN RETURN PIPE x x x x x x
17 CHEMICAL TREATMENT AND FILTRATION SYETEM x x x x x x x x
A) PUMP x x x x x x x x x x
B) MOTORISED DRAIN VALVE x x x x x x x x x x
C) SCALE INHIBITOR SYSTEM x x x x x x x x x
D) MICROBIAL INHIBITOR SYSTEM x x x x x x x x
E) TDS x x x x x x x x
18 AHU WITH VAV BOX x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x
19 AHU WITHOUT VAV BOX x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x
20 PRE-COOL AHU x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x
21 AHU PURGING FAN x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x
22 PASSIVE DISPLACEMENT VENTILATION COIL x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x
23 FAN COIL UNIT (CHILLED WATER) x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x
24 FAN COIL UNIT/VRV SPLIT UNITS / SPLIT UNITS x x x x x x x x x x x x x
25 A/C MAIN BOARD INCOMING x x x x x x x x
26 SWITCHBOARDS (MCC) x x x x x x x x x x x x
27 ENERGY & HEAT RECOVERY SYSTEMS x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x
Please refer to Tender Drawings
28 HOT WATER WATER PUMPS x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x

29 HOT WATER BY-PASS x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x
30 HOT WATER COIL / HOT WATER REHEAT COIL x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x
31 ELECTRIC HEATING COIL x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x
32 HOT WATER TANK x x x x x x x x x x
33 VAV BOX C/W DDC AND TEMPERATURE CONTROLLER FOR ROOMS x x x x x x x x x x
34 VENTURI VALVE/FAST RESPOND VAV BOX x x x x x x x x x x x x
35 ECS / SMOKE PURGING FANS x x x x x x x x x x x x x x
36 LABORATORY CONTROL x x x x x x x x x x x x
37 LABORATORY EXHAUST x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x
38 CRAC UNITS x x x x x x x x x x
39 DIGITAL POWER METER / ANALYSER x x x x x x x x x
40 ENERGY /BTU METER CALCULATOR x x x x x x x x x
41 ACMV DBs x x x x x x x x x x x
MECHANICAL VENTILATION SYSTEM

41 SUPPLY FANS x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x
42 EXHAUST FANS x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x
43 CARPARK EXHAUST AIR FAN x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x
44 STAIRCASE FAN x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x
45 SMOKE STOP LOBBY FAN x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x
46 TOILET MV FAN x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x
47 TOILET ROOF FAN x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x
48 SMOKE VENTILATOR x x x x x
49 SUPPLY AND EXHAUST FAN IN CHILLER RM x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x
50 HIGH PLUME FAN AND BYPASS DAMPER x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x
REFRIGERANT LEAK DETECTION SYSTEM

51 GAS DETECTOR PANELS x x x
52 GAS LEAKAGE DETECTORS x x x x
Note: All START/STOP command and LOCAL/REMOTE selector switch command shall be 2 hardware points each. BAS/TS/M/27/4 P3678 YLL-MD1 (NSC ACMV)
56 FUME CUPBOARD
55 ROOM CONDITIONS
54 CONDENSING UNITS
COLD ROOM SYSTEM
LABORATORY EQUIPMENT
53 FAN EVAPORATOR COOLERS
54 BIOHAZARD SAFETY CABINET

55 EXTRACTOR ARM AND MAKE UP
SYSTEM APPARATUS OR
Please refer to Tender Drawings

QUANTITY
x
x
x
x
START/STOP COMMAND
ON/OFF COMMAND
DDC CONTROL FOR VSD
DDC FOR MOTORIZED DAMPER
DIGITAL OUTPUT
OCCUPANCY MODE
x
x
x
x
ON/OFF STATUS
OPEN/CLOSE STATUS
x
x
x
x
TRIP/FAULT
FILTER ALARM
x
FLOWSWITCH
x
MANTRAP ALARM
HIGH LEVEL ALARM
LOW LEVEL ALARM
x

DIGITAL INPUT

OPEN CLOSE STATUS -VALVE
HIGH TDS ALARM
Note: All START/STOP command and LOCAL/REMOTE selector switch command shall be 2 hardware points each.
LEAK ALARM
SERVICE SWITCH (BYPASS MODE)
x
x
SWITCH MODE (BAS/IMSS/LOCAL/REMOTE)

x
GAS SUPPRESSION ACTIVATED

DDC CONTROL
DDC CONTROL MODULATING

CONTROL VALVE
DDC CONTROL VSD
DDC CONTROL CURRENT
x
x
x
DDC CONTROL MOTORISED DAMPER

ANALOG OUTPUT
DDC CONTROL MODULATING DAMPER

CONTROL BY CO2 SENSOR
DAMPER POSITION
VALVE POSITION
TEMPERATURE
x
SPACE TEMPERATURE
x
RELATIVE HUMIDITY
x
x
PRESSURE
ROOM DIFFERENTIAL PRESSURE
x
x
BAS/TS/M/27/5
WATER FLOWRATE
x
x
x
AIR FLOWRATE
POWER FACTOR
BAS POINT SCHEDULE
x
x
CURRENT
VOLTAGE
KILOWATT
x
x
KILOWATT-HOUR
RTON-HEAT LOAD (BTUmeter)
TDS VALUE
SUPPLY WATER PRESSURE
RETURN WATER PRESSURE
ANALOG INPUT
SUPPLY WATER TEMPERATURE

RETURN WATER TEMPERATURE
ON COIL TEMPEARTURE
FAN SPEED / MOTOR SPEED /
MOTOR RUNNING FREQUENCY
PH VALUE
PRESSURE (DUTY CYLINDER)
PRESSURE(STANDBY CYLINDER)
CHILLED WATER/CONDENSER WATER

DIFFERENTIAL PRESSURE ( ΔP)

( ΔP)
CO2
CO
WATER CONSUMPTION
OCCUPANCY MODE
x
x
TREND LOGGING
x
x
x
x
ENERGY TOTALISATION
x
TIME PROGRAM
x
x
x
x
x

x
x
x
x
x
DUTY CYCLING
ANALOG LIMIT ALARM
x
x
x
x
x
x
x

SOFTWARE PROGRAM
x
x
x
x
x
GRAPHICS
WATER CONSUMPTION
P3678

x
x
x
ROOM AIR CHANGE RATE

YLL-MD1 (NSC ACMV)
MECHANICAL WORKS
REMARK
PROPOSED BAS INPUT/OUTPUT POINTS SCHEDULE FOR ELETRICAL SERVICES #
DO AO DI AI SOFTWARE
NORMAL/EMERGENCY SUPPLY INDICATION

CONTROL SOURCE FAILURE ALARM

LOW LIBRICATING OIL PRESSURE
MAIN PROTECTION TRIP ALARM
ENCLOSURE DOOR INTERLOCK
RUNNING HOUR TOTALIZATION

OPTIMIZATION START/STOP
BATTERY CHARGER ALARM

FUEL HI/LOW LEVEL ALARM
BACKUP PROTECTION TRIP
START/STOP COMMAND
ENERGY TOTALISATION
FUEL LEAKAGE ALARM
COOLING FAN STATUS
DIMMMABLE BALLAST
ANALOG LIMIT ALARM

E/F & O/C RELAY TRIP
LOCAL SLIDE SWITCH
ENERGY EFFICIENCY
BATTERY VOLTAGE
DAYLIGHT SENSOR
EARTHING SWITCH
HIGH TEMP ALARM
GRAPHIC DISPLAY
HI LEVEL MODBUS
ACMV INTERLOCK
LIGHTING ON/OFF
MOTION SENSOR
POWER LIMITING
POWER FACTOR
ON/OFF STATUS
TIME PROGRAM
FREQUENCY
ATS STATUS
QUANTITY
REMARKS
CURRENT
VOLTAGE
NORMAL
ALARM
TIMER
KVAR
KWH
LV SWITCHBOARD
a) MAIN INCOMING FEEDER X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X
b) BUS COUPLER X X X X
c) OUTGOING FEEDER X X X X X X X X
EMSB
a) MAIN INCOMING FEEDER X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X
b) ATS X X
c) OUTGOING FEEDER X X X X X X X
MAIN/SUB DB/Final DB
a) MAIN INCOMING FEEDER X X X X X X X X X X X X X
MOTOR CONTROL CENTRE
c) OUTGOING FEEDER X X X X X X X X X X X X
GENERATOR SYSTEM
a) GENERATOR CONTROL PANEL X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X
X X X
b) FUEL PUMP X X X X X
c) FUEL TANK X X X X X
d) UNDERGROUND FUEL TANK X X X X X
LIGHTNING WARNING SYSTEM

a) Lightning Warning system X X X X
LIGHTING CONTROL MODULE **

a) Lighting DIMMING (Seminar Rooms) X X X X X X X X X X X
b) Daylight ON/OFF (Daylit Common Areas) X X X X X X X X X X
c) Timer ON/OFF (Non-Daylit Common Areas) X X X X X X X X X X
d) Motion ON/OFF (ALL Toilets, Lounge Rooms,
X X X X X X X X X X
Meeting Room @ L2 & L3)
* ALL POWER METER / KILOWATTMETER SHALL BE VIA MOD BUS

** BAS CONTRACTOR TO PROVIDE INTERFACE WITH LIGHTING MANAGEMENT SYSTEM
# BAS CONTRACTOR SHALL BE REFER TO ELETRICAL TENDER DRAWING FOR ACTUAL QUANTITY
OFF - System OFF
MANUAL - System will be started by operator
AUTO- System will start by DDC last status
BAS- System will be start up by BAS command or System last command
16-BAS point sch for Electrical 1 OF 1

Sheet1
SUB_ALARM PANEL
MAIN ALARM PANEL
FIRE JOCKEY PUMPS
PRE-ACTION SYSTEM
FIRE TRANSFER PUMPS
FIRE SPRINKLER PUMPS
16-BAS Point Sch FPS

FIRE WATER TRANSFER TANKS
FIRE ALARM & SPRINKLER SYSTEM
PRE-ACTION SYSTEM COMPRESSOR

SPRINKLER WATER STORAGE TANKS
SYSTEM APPARATUS OR
QUANTITY
START/STOP COMMAND
D/O
ON/OFF COMMAND
DDC CONTROL
A/O
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
ON/OFF STATUS
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X TRIP/FAULT
X
X
ALARM/NORMAL
X
DETECTOR NORMAL/ALARM
X
DETECTOR FAULT
X
X
X
X
FLOW SWITCH
DIGITAL INPUT
X
X
HIGH LEVEL ALARM

X
X
LOW LEVEL ALARM

X
X
X
SWITCH MODE (LOCAL/REMOTE)
TEMPERATURE
RELATIVE HUMIDITY
X
PRESSURE
X
FLOW
POWER FACTOR
X
X
X
CURRENT
BAS POINT SCHEDULE
VOLTAGE
X
X
X
KILOWATT
ANALOG INDICATION
X
X
X
KILOWATT-HOUR
BTU-HEAT LOAD

X
X
X
X
TREND LOGGING
X
X
X
X
X
X
ENERGY TOTALISATION
TIME PROGRAM
X
X
X

X
X
X
DUTY CYCLING
ANALOG LIMIT ALARM
X
X
X
X
X
X
X

X
X
X
X
X
X
X
GRAPHICS
SOFTWARE PROGRAM
WATER CONSUMPTION
4
VALVE BOX
RECEIVER TANK
RECEIVER TANK
VACUUM PUMPS
AIR COMPRESSORS
GAS SOLENOID VALVES

VACUUM PUMP SYSTEM
GAS DETECTOR PANELS
GAS MONIOTRING PANEL

COMPRESSED AIR SYSTEM
GAS CYLINDER MANIFOLDS
GAS LEAKAGE DETECTORS

LABORATORY GAS SYSTEM
LABORATORY GAS SUPPLY & DETECTION SYSTEM

SYSTEM APPARATUS OR
To refer to tender drawings QUANTITY
NOTE: ALL "ON/OFF", "LOCAL/ REMOTE" ARE 2 HARDWARE POINTS

X
X
START/STOP COMMAND
X
X
ON/OFF COMMAND
FAN SPEED CONTROL

DIGITAL OUTPUT
OCCUPANCY MODE
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
ON/OFF STATUS
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
TRIP/FAULT
X
X
FILTER ALARM
X
SYSTEM COMMON ALARM
CHANGE FILTER CARTRIDGE
X FLOW
X
X
X
HIGH LEVEL ALARM

DIGITAL INPUT
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
LOW LEVEL ALARM

X
X
COMMON ALARM
X
X
LEAK ALARM
X
X

X
X
DDC CONTROL
PLC CONTROL FOR VSD
PLC CONTROL FOR MOTORISED DAMPER

ANALOG OUTPUT
TEMPERATURE
RELATIVE HUMIDITY
X
X
X
X
X
X
PRESSURE SUPPLY
BAS POINT SCHEDULE
LOW PRESSURE (DUTY BANK)

X
LOW PRESSURE (STANDBY BANK)

X
X
X
X
FLOW
X
X
POWER FACTOR
X
X
CURRENT
X
X
VOLTAGE
X
X
ANALOG INDICATION
KILOWATT
X
X
KILOWATT-HOUR
BTU-HEAT LOAD
INDICATION-STATUS
MIMIC
INDICATION-FAULT/TRIP
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
TREND LOGGING
X
X
X
X
ENERGY TOTALISATION
X
X
TIME PROGRAM
X
X
X

X
X
X
DUTY CYCLING
ANALOG LIMIT ALARM

X
X
SOFTWARE PROGRAM
X
X
X
X

X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
GRAPHICS
WATER CONSUMPTION
MECHANICAL WORKS
HOT WATER PUMPS
16-BAS Point Sch PS 2

WATER SUCTION TANKS
WATER STORAGE TANKS
WATER BOOSTER PUMPS
WATER TRANSFER PUMPS
WATER SUB-METER (CAFÉ)
HOT WATER STORAGE TANK

HOT WATER TRANSFER TANK
PLUMBING & SANITARY SYSTEM
WATER METER (MAIN AND SUB-METER)
WATER SUB-METER (EXPANSION TANK)

SYSTEM APPARATUS OR
1
1
1
1
1
2
2
QUANTITY
START/STOP COMMAND
D/O
ON/OFF COMMAND
DDC CONTROL
A/O
X
X
X
ON/OFF STATUS
X
X
X
TRIP/FAULT
X FILTER ALARM
X
X
FLOW
X
X
X
HIGH LEVEL ALARM

DIGITAL INPUT
X
X
X
LOW LEVEL ALARM

X
X
X
TEMPERATURE
RELATIVE HUMIDITY
PRESSURE
X
X
FLOW
POWER FACTOR
X
X
X
CURRENT
X
X
X
VOLTAGE
X
X
X
KILOWATT
X
X
X
KILOWATT-HOUR
ANALOG INDICATION
X
X
X
X
WATER CONSUMPTION
BTU-HEAT LOAD
X

BAS POINT SCHEDULE FOR PLUMBING & SANITARY SERVICES

X
X
X
X
X
X
TREND LOGGING
X
X
X
X
X
X
ENERGY TOTALISATION
TIME PROGRAM
X
X
X

X
X
X
DUTY CYCLING
ANALOG LIMIT ALARM
X
X
X
X
X
X

SOFTWARE PROGRAM
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
GRAPHICS
1 OF 1
PHASE CURRENT (DEMAND AND MAXIMUM DEMAND)

LOCAL AND REMOTE OPERATION MODE STATUS
POWER (kW) ( DEMAND AND MAXIMUM DEMAND)
POWER FACTOR (SYSTEM AND DISPLACEMENT)

DIMMMABLE BALLAST/DIMMMABLE DRIVER
KVAR ( DEMAND AND MAXIMUM DEMAND)

AC AND DC AUXILIARY SUPPLY FAILURE
THREE-PHASE CURRENT (AVERAGE)


PILOT CABLE PROTECTION TRIP
BREAKER ON/OFF/TRIP STATUS



GAS PRESSURE HIGH/LOW
BATTERY LOW VOLTAGE
START/STOP COMMAND
ENERGY TOTALISATION
FUEL LEAKAGE ALARM
COOLING FAN STATUS
ANALOG LIMIT ALARM

LOCAL SLIDE SWITCH
ENERGY EFFICIENCY
BATTERY VOLTAGE
DAYLIGHT SENSOR
EARTHING SWITCH
BATTERY ON LOAD
HIGH TEMP ALARM
GRAPHIC DISPLAY
ACMV INTERLOCK
LIGHTING ON/OFF
MOTION SENSOR
POWER LIMITING
ON/OFF STATUS
TIME PROGRAM
KWH (DEMAND)
FAULT ALARM
FREQUENCY
ATS STATUS
TRIP ALARM
LUX LEVEL
HEAT MAP
QUANTITY
REMARKS
VOLTAGE
NORMAL
ALARM
TIMER
HV SWITCHBOARD
a) 22 KV FEEDER CIRCUIT INCOMING PANE X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X
b) TRANSFORMER X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X
c) BUS-SECTION PANEL X X X X X
d) HV SWITCHGEAR COMMON ALARM X X X X
e) AC/DC SUPPLY UNIT X X X X
LV SWITCHBOARD
EMSB
a) MAIN INCOMING FEEDER X X X X X X X X X X X X X X
b) ATS X X
c) OUTGOING FEEDER X X X X X X
a) MAIN INCOMING FEEDER X X X X X X X X X X X X
c) OUTGOING FEEDER X X X X X X X X X X X
GENERATOR SYSTEM
a) GENERATOR CONTROL PANEL X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X
b) FUEL PUMP X X X X X X X
c) DAY FUEL TANK X X X X X

Lightning Warning system X X X X X
DEVICES
DEVICES CONTROLLER X X X X X
GATEWAY X X X X X
WEB BASE NERWORK CONTROLLER X X X X X

a) Daylight/Motion/Thermal ON/OFF/Lighting DIMMING
X X X X X X X X X X
(LT,Seminar Rooms,Office,Classroom) X X X
b) Daylight ON/OFF and Photo Sensor
X X X X X X
(Daylit Common Areas, Staircases) X X X X
c) Motion/Timer ON/OFF (Non-Daylit Common Areas,
staircases) X X X X X X X
X X X X
d)
Motion ON/OFF (ALL Toilets) X X X X X X
X X X X
e) Daylight/Motion/Thermal ON/OFF/DIM (ALL Lounge
X X X X X X X X X X X X X X
Rooms, Meeting Room, Laboratories )

OFF - System OFF
Schedule 1 -MANUAL
MESH- System will be started
NETWORK, EIBby operator
and IBMS point sch for ELE 1 OF 1
NUS METERING SYSTEM ARCHITECTURAL
Ventus Metering /Edart

System Server
NUSNET Data point

Network controller
(Number of controller to size according
to meters to be interfaced) 230V Single Phase
power supply
Power BTU Meter Water Meter

Meter 1 1 1
Power BTU Meter Water Meter

Meter N N N
N denote the maximum of meters can be connected in the communication bus

4
3
2
1
NOTE:
BTU METER
POWER METER
16-Metering System point sch for Meter

METER NETWORK CONTROLLER
METERING POINT DESCRIPTION
* PLEASE REFER TO TENDER DRAWING FOR ACTUAL QUANTITY

*
*
*
*
QUANTITY OF
EQUIPMENT/SYSTEM
ALL POINT TO BE MONITORED AT VENTUS METERING AND EDRAT SYSTEM

START/STOP COMMAND
ON/OFF COMMAND
FAN SPEED CONTROL

DIGTAL OUTPUT
OCCUPANCY MODE
OPEN/CLOSE STATUS
DAMPER
OPEN/CLOSE STATUS
VALVE
ON/OFF STATUS
X
(MONITORING)
X
TRIP/FAULT
FILTER ALARM
FLOW (FLOWSWITCH)
HIGH LEVEL ALARM
LOW LEVEL ALARM

DIGTAL INPUT
HIGH TDS
REFRIGERANT LEAK ALARM

(TRIP)
SERVICE SWITCH
(BY-PASS MODE)
MODE SELECTION
(BAS/IMSS/REMOTE/LOCAL/OFF)
DDC CONTROL
DDC CONTROL VALVE
DDC CONTROL VSD
DDC CONTROLMOTORISED DAMPER

ANALOG OUTPUT
DDC CONTROL
POINT LIST FOR METERING
MODULATING DAMPER CONTROL BY CO2 SENSOR

X
CHILLED WATER TEMPERATURE

SPACE TEMPERATURE
RELATIVE HUMIDITY
(STATE PRESSURE)
PRESSURE
X
CHILLED WATER FLOW RATE
AIR FLOW RATE

X
POWER FACTOR
X
CURRENT
X
VOLTAGE
X
KILOWATT
X
X
KILOWATT-HOUR / TONNAGE-HOUR
X
TONNAGE / KILOWATT- HEAT LOAD

X
WATER CONSUMPTION
FABRICATION NO
ANALOG INPUT

X
FANSPEED/MOTOR RUNNING FREQUENCY
FANSPEED/MOTOR SPEED
CHILLED WATER DIFFERENTIAL PRESSURE

( DP)
( DP)
CO2
CO
PH VALUE
X
X
ENERGY TOTALISATION
TIME PROGRAM
DUTY CYCLING

X
X
X
X
ANALOG LIMIT ALARM
SOFTWARE
X
X
X
X

X
X
X

X
X
X
X
GRAPHICS
MODE SELECTION &
AUTOMATION
REMARKS
1 of 1
Contents Page
Electrical Schedule of Technical Data STD/E/1 - 12
Technical Specification for Electrical Works

Section 1 : General Requirement TS/Elect/S1/1 – 46
Section 5 : Low Voltage Main and Sub-Switchboard TS/E/S5/1 – 19
Section 6 : Low Voltage Air Circuit Breakers TS/E/S6/1 – 3
Section 7 : Low Voltage Automatic Transfer Switches (ATS) TS/E/S7/1 – 3
Section 8 : Moulded Case Circuit Breakers (MCCB) TS/E/S8/1 – 3
Section 9 : Miniature Circuit Breakers (MCB) TS/E/S9/1 – 2
Section 10 : Residual Current Circuit Breakers (RCCB) TS/E/S10/1
Section 11 : Main Distribution Boards (MDB) TS/E/S11/1 – 4
Section 12 : Three Phase Distribution Boards TS/E/S12/1 – 5
Section 13 : Single Phase Combined Lighting and Power Distribution TS/E/S13/1 – 4
Boards
Section 14 : Alternating Current (A.C) Contactors for Lighting Circuits TS/E/S14/1 – 2
Section 15 : 15-Isolator (Non-Automatic Moulded Case Circuit Breaker TS/E/S15/1 – 2
Type)
Section 16 : Low Voltage Cables and Installation TS/E/S16/1 – 4
Section 17 : Luminaries TS/E/S17/1 – 41
Section 18 : Electrical Accessories TS/E/S18/1 – 12
Section 19 : Time switches TS/E/S19/1
Section 22 : Cable Trays and Ladder Installation TS/E/S22/1 – 5
Section 23 : Steel Cable Trunking Installation TS/E/S23/1 – 3
Section 24 : Conduit Installation (Concealed or Exposed) TS/E/S24/1 – 5
Section 25 Floor Trunking Installation TS/E/S25/1 – 6
Section 26 Earthing TS/E/S26/1 – 5
Section 28 : Surge Protective Devices (SPD) TS/E/S28/1 – 3
Section 29 : Smart Card Access with Computer and Software Security TS/E/S29/1 – 20
System
Section 30 Power Meter TS/E/S30/1 – 13
Section 31 : Telephone Cablings (Cat 5 UTP) System TS/E/S31/1 – 11
Section 32 : Lighting Management System TS/E/S32/1 – 22
Section 37 Power Quality Management TS/E/S37/1 – 2
Section 38 Emergency Voice Communication Public Address TS/E/S38/1 – 25
Section 41 Closed Circuit Television (CCTV) System TS/E/S41/1 – 143
Section 44 Multi-Cable Transit System TS/E/S44/1 – 3
1
Contents Page
Section 46 Motion Sensor Detection System TS/E/S46/1 – 5

Section 62 Fire Resistant System TS/E/S62/1 – 6
Section 65 Computer cable(Cat 6A UTP) TS/E/S65/1 – 15
Section 66 Computer cable (Cat 6A FFTP) TS/E/S66/1 – 17
Section 67 Lighting and Room Management System TS/E/S67/1 – 34
Section 69 Wireless Mesh Network Lighting Management System TS/E/S69/1 – 27
Section 70 Wireless Mesh Network Lighting Management System with TS/E/S70/1 – 37
Room Management
Section 74 Painting TS/E/S74/1 – 6
Section 75 Documents TS/E/S75/1 – 2
Section 76 Maintenance during DLP TS/E/S76/1 – 6
Schedule 1 MESH Network, EIB and IBMS Point Schedule 1

Schedule 2 BAS Point Schedule for Electrical Services 1
Lighting Fitting Schedule 8 pages
2
SCHEDULE OF TECHNICAL DATA FOR ELECTRICAL
1. Tenderers shall complete the following Schedule and submit any

supplementary information which may be considered necessary to convey
a complete description of the equipment offered.
2. Tenderers are reminded that notwithstanding whatever is submitted in this

Schedule, all equipment and installation must comply with the
requirements of the Specifications.
3. Unless written confirmation and approval is obtained from the

Superintending Officer to that effect, the requirements of the Specifications
shall supersede all other qualifications herein.
4. Tenderers are requested not to repeat the details called for in any
separate specification of their own. The works "as specified" or "to suit" or
"equal and to approval" will not be accepted as a sufficient description of
any item.
5. Failure to complete filling in the Schedule may render the Tenderer liable
to disqualification and consequent rejection.
__________________________________________________________________________
STD/E/1
The sub-contractor must fill in the following information and submit all relevant detailed
technical catalogues with the tender submission for the purpose of tender evaluation. The
tenderer can also submit any other relevant information at his own discretion.
Failure to submit the information stated shall render the tender invalid.
S/n Description Brand & Model Country of Origin
1 LT SWITCHBOARD AND
DISTRIBUTION BOARD
Sub-Switchboard ________________ ________________
Final Distribution Board ________________ ________________
Air Circuit Breaker ________________ ________________
Moulded Case Circuit Breaker ________________ ________________
Automatic Transfer Switch ________________ ________________
Manual Transfer Switch ________________ ________________
Indication Lights ________________ ________________
HRC Fuse ________________ ________________
Ammeter ________________ ________________
Voltmeter ________________ ________________
Current Transformer ________________ ________________
Selector Switch ________________ ________________
IDMTL Overcurrent Relay ________________ ________________
Earth Fault Relay ________________ ________________
kWh meter ________________ ________________
Miniature Circuit Breaker ________________ ________________
__________________________________________________________________________
STD/E/2
1 LT SWITCHBOARD AND DISTRIBUTION BOARD
________________ ________________
Hour Run Meter ________________ ________________
Digital Power Meter ________________ ________________
Isolator ________________ ________________
Contactor ________________ ________________
Push button ________________ ________________
Time Switch ________________ ________________
Tap-Off-Unit ________________ ________________
Residual Current Circuit Breaker ________________ ________________
Push button ________________ ________________
Time Switch ________________ ________________
________________ ________________
________________ ________________
__________________________________________________________________________
STD/E/3
2 MAINS & SUB-MAINS DISTRIBUTION
a Busduct ________________ ________________
b PVC/ Cables ________________ ________________
c XLPE/PVC Cables ________________ ________________
d PVC/SWA/PVC Cables ________________ ________________
e Fire Resistant Cable ________________ ________________
3 CABLES SUPPORTING SYSTEM
a Metal Conduit (BS 4568 class 4) ________________ ________________
b Flexible Metal Conduit ________________ ________________
c Cable Tray ________________ ________________
d Cable Ladder ________________ ________________
e Trunking ________________ ________________
f Trunking ( Stainless Steel Grade

316) ________________ ________________
g Underfloor Trunking ________________ ________________
h Raised Floor Trunking ________________ ________________
i Flush Floor Trunking ________________ ________________
j Underground HD uPVC Pipes ________________ ________________
__________________________________________________________________________
STD/E/4
4 ELECTRICAL FIXTURES
a Wide Rocker Switches & 13A/15A

SSO, Moulded Type ________________ ________________
b Switches & 13A/15A SSO,

Moulded Type ________________ ________________
c Switches & 13A/15A,

Metalclad Type ________________ ________________
d Industrial Plug ________________ ________________
e Isolator, Metalclad Type ________________ ________________
f Isolator, Weatherproof Type ________________ ________________
g TV/FM Socket ________________ ________________
h Telephone Socket ________________ ________________
i Data and Voice Socket ________________ ________________
j Service Outlet Boxes ________________ ________________
k Oscillating Fan ________________ ________________
5 EARLY STEAMER SYSTEM &

ACCESSORIES
a. E F lightning Terminal ________________ ________________
b. Mast ________________ ________________
c. Carrier ________________ ________________
__________________________________________________________________________
STD/E/5
6 EARTHING SYSTEM & ACCESSORIES
a Copper Tapes ________________ ________________
b Copper Electrodes ________________ ________________
c Test Link Box ________________ ________________
d Saddles, Test Clamps, Other

Accessories, etc ________________ ________________
e Thermoweld ________________ ________________
f Inspection Pit ________________ ________________
7 CABLE READY MATV SYSTEM &

ACCESSORIES
a Antenna System ________________ ________________
b Splitters, Tap Offs, Combiner ________________ ________________
c Amplifier ________________ ________________
d Power Unit ________________ ________________
e Modulator ________________ ________________
f Splitters, Tap-Off, Summator ________________ ________________
g SCV Socket ________________ ________________
h Coaxial Cables ________________ ________________
__________________________________________________________________________
STD/E/6
8 PA SYSTEM
a Universal pre-amplifier _______________ _______________
b Dual Auto-reverse cassette deck _______________ _______________
c CD/DVD Player _______________ _______________
d FM/AM Tuner _______________ _______________
e 19” equipment rack _______________ _______________
f Pager Unit _______________ _______________
g Power amplifier _______________ _______________
h Ceiling /box speaker _______________ _______________
i Horn Loudspeaker _______________ _______________
J Volume control _______________ _______________
k Cables _______________ _______________
9 EMERGENCY CALL SYSTEM _______________ _______________
Electric Siren _______________ _______________
Motion Sensor with dual technology _______________ _______________
Microwave motion sensor _______________ _______________
Contractor _______________ _______________
10 STRUCTURED CABLING SYSTEM _______________ _______________
Data Cable _______________ _______________
Fibre optic Cable _______________ _______________
Patch Panel _______________ _______________
Rack _______________ _______________
__________________________________________________________________________
STD/E/7
11 STRUCTURED CABLING SYSTEM _______________ _______________
Data Cable _______________ _______________
Fibre optic Cable _______________ _______________
Patch Panel _______________ _______________
Rack _______________ _______________
12 AUDIO AND VISUAL SYSTEM _______________ _______________
Projector _______________ _______________
Motorized Projector Screen _______________ _______________
Manual Projector Screen _______________ _______________
CD/DVD Player _______________ _______________
Amplifier _______________ _______________
RG cable _______________ _______________
13 LUMINAIRES
1x8W Wall Mounted Fluorescent Fitting c/w

Diffuser and 2 Hrs Duration Battery Pack. NM _______________ _______________
1x1W Recessed Light Emitting Diode (LED)

Emergency Light Fitting of 2 Hours Duration _______________ _______________
2x1W Wall Mounted Light Emitting Diode

(LED) Emergency Light Fitting of 2 Hours
Duration _______________ _______________
EXIT Light c/w 2 Hours Battery Pack (Single

sided/Double sided directional arrow facing
either left or right) _______________ _______________
__________________________________________________________________________
STD/E/8
13 LUMINAIRES
2 X 28W T5 Explosion Proof Surface

Mounted Fluorescent Luminaire (IP65) c/w
S/S toggles, Polycarbonate Body, Diffuser &
H/F Electronic Ballas. EX _______________ _______________
2 X 28W T5 Explosion Proof Wall Mounted

Fluorescent Luminaire (IP65) c/w S/S toggles,
Polycarbonate Body, Diffuser & H/F Electronic
Ballast. EX _______________ _______________
2x28W Surface Mounted Weatherproof

Fluorescent Fitting c/w Diffuser (IP66) and one
Tube one ballast. WP1 _______________ _______________
2x28W Suspended Weatherproof Fluorescent

Fitting c/w Diffuser (IP66) and one Tube one
ballast. WP1 _______________ _______________
2x28W Wall Mounted Weatherproof Fluorescent

Fitting c/w Diffuser (IP66) and one Tube one ballast.
WP1 _______________ _______________
1x28W Surface Mounted Weatherproof

Fluorescent Fitting c/w Diffuser (IP66) and One
Tube One Ballast. WP3 _______________ _______________
1x28W Wall Mounted Weatherproof

Fluorescent Fitting c/w Diffuser (IP66) and One
Tube One Ballast. WP3 _______________ _______________
2x28W Surface Mounted Batten Fluorescent

Fitting _______________ _______________
2x28W Suspended Mounted Batten

Fluorescent Fitting _______________ _______________
1x28W Surface Mounted Batten Fluorescent

Fitting _______________ _______________
1x28W Wall Mounted Batten Fluorescent

Fitting _______________ _______________
__________________________________________________________________________
STD/E/9
13 LUMINAIRES
1x26W PLC Recessed Compact Fluorescent

Downlight c/w Mirror Reflector, Dimmable High
Frequency ballast & Addressable Digital
Module. (1 Ballast to 1 Tube). 1A _______________ _______________
1x26W PLC Recessed Compact Fluorescent

Downlight c/w Mirror Reflector, Dimmable High
Frequency ballast. (1 Ballast to 1 Tube). D2 _______________ _______________
6W LED Recessed Mounted Step Light c/w

Anti Glare Louvre (IP66). A2 _______________ _______________
6W LED Recessed Mounted Step Light c/w

Diffuser Glass Transparent. A1 _______________ _______________
3X14 T5 Recessed Fluorescent Lighting c/w

Mirror Louvred Reflector and High Frequency
Electronic Ballast (1 Ballast to 1 Tube) F3 _______________ _______________
3X14 T5 Recessed Fluorescent Lighting c/w

Mirror Louvred Reflector, High Frequency
Electronic Ballast & Addressable Digital
Module (1 Ballast to 1 Tube) F3A _______________ _______________
2x22W LED Tube Continuous Recessed

Lighting c/w Semi-Specular Louvre (Dimmable
Type) F1A _______________ _______________
2x22W LED Tube Continuous Recessed

Lighting c/w Semi-Specular Louvre F1 _______________ _______________
2 x 22W LED Tube Continuous Suspended

Lighting c/w Semi-Specular Louvre
(Addressable Dimmable) F2A _______________ _______________
2x 22W LED Tube Continuous Suspended

Lighting c/w Semi-Specular Louvre F2 _______________ _______________
19W Recessed LED Downlight T1 _______________ _______________
20W LED Recessed Downlight D1 _______________ _______________
20W LED Recessed Downlight (Dimmable) 3A
__________________________________________________________________________
STD/E/10
13 LUMINAIRES
22W LED Tube Continuous Suspended

Lighting c/w Semi-Specular Louvre (Dimmable)
F6A _______________ _______________
2x54W Recessed Mounted Fluorescent Fitting

c/w High Frequency Electronic Ballast. F7 _______________ _______________
5W LED Aircraft/Obstruction Warning Light

(IP65) AWL _______________ _______________
2x28W Surface Mounted Fluorescent Fitting

c/w Diffuser and One Tube One Ballast W20 _______________ _______________
Weatherproof Wall Mounted HID Fitting cw Up

and Down Throws and High Frequency Ballast
W4 _______________ _______________
1 x26W Bollard (IP 55) BL _______________ _______________
12x1W LED Inground Uplighter W6 _______________ _______________
Surface mounted Single LEDs L4A _______________ _______________
27W Track Light TL _______________ _______________
Slim-profile high-power linear LED fixture L3A _______________ _______________
52W Recessed Ceiling Mounted LED Lighting

F8A/F8 _______________ _______________
LED Tube _______________ _______________
T5 Tube _______________ _______________
T8 Tube _______________ _______________
PLC tube _______________ _______________
LED Driver _______________ _______________
High Frequency Electronic Ballast _______________ _______________
__________________________________________________________________________
STD/E/11
14 POWER MONITORING SYSTEM _______________ _______________
15 LIGHTNING MANAGEMENT SYSTEM _______________ _______________
16 UNINTERRUPTIBLE POWER SUPPLY (UPS) _______________ _______________
17 MULTI CABLE TRANSIT SYSTEM (MCT) _______________ _______________
18 Others (please specify) _______________ _______________
NOTES:
Original catalogues of the above equipment shall be submitted for assessment with the
tender.
__________________________________________________________________________
STD/E/12
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS
SECTION 1 - GENERAL
1. General
1.1 The contents herein shall be read in conjunction with other sections of
the Specifications, Preliminaries and the accompanied drawing.
1.2 The tenderer's attention is drawn to the distinction that must be

observed between the drawings and the Specifications and that they
are well advised to seek clarification from the S.O. if in doubt of any
matters regarding interpretation of any sections of the Specifications
and drawings or discrepancies between the Specifications and
drawings before submission of the Tender Offer.
1.3 The work to be performed under this Sub-Contract consists of the

Design, Supply, Delivery, Installation, Painting, Testing,
Commissioning and fifteen (12) months free Comprehensive
Maintenance and Warranty from the latest date of the certified
Substantial Completion Certificate. The Sub-Contract Works
comprising the following systems and equipment which are further
described in other sections of the Specifications. The following Sub-
Contract Works shall also perform in accordance with the Conditions
of this Sub-Contract, schedules, and drawings.
a) High Tension 22 kV Systems
b) Low Tension 400 V Systems
c) Emergency Generators and Underground Fuel Storage

Systems
d) Earthing Systems
e) Computer Cablings and supporting system
f) Telephone Cablings and supporting system
g) Emergency Voice Communication System
h) Security Card Access System
i) Security Closed Circuit Television (CCTV) System
j) Master Antenna & Cable TV System
k) Lighting Management System
l) Power Monitoring System
m) Emergency Call System for handicapped toilets
n) Stage Lighting System
o) Hearing Enhancement system

TS/Elect/S1/1
1.4 Tenderer must submit main offer fully complied with all Conditions of
Sub-Contract, the Specifications, Preliminaries, Schedules and
drawings, Appendices failing which may result in disqualification of the
tender on ground of not compliance to the Specifications and
Conditions of this Sub-Contract.
2. Scope of Sub-Contract Works
The Sub-Contract Works are to be carried out and completed to the absolute
approval and satisfaction of the S.O. The Sub-Contract Works involved are
briefly described as follows:
2.1. High Tension 22 kV Systems
a) Supply, install, terminate, test and commission the complete

22 kV metalclad indoor switchgears, control panels and other
accessories needed for the complete installation.
b) Sealing and making goods of all cable entry/exit pipes and

openings with approved 4 hours fire rated fillings/waterproofing
compound.
c) Supply, install, test and commission of 22kV/433 V power

transformers including terminations at the transformer room.
Ratings refer to drawing.
d) Supply, install, terminate, test and commission the 22 kV High

Tension power cables including the control cables, cable
supporting system from item 2.1(a) to item 2.1(c) and other
e) Supply, install, test and commission the earthing system for the
transformer units.
f) Supply labour and material to install the first aid chart, rubber
mat (1000mm (width) x 10mm (thick)), fire extinguisher, tool
cabinets, key box complete with locks and keys (18 sets),
framed single line drawing in the High Tension switchroom.
The length of the mat shall be throughout the entire length of
the switchgear units.
g) Supply labour and material to terminate, test and commission

the cable joint and termination. The works shall be carried out
by approved registered Cable Jointers. All the testing and
commissioning shall be carried out by approved and registered
Testing Engineer. All works necessary for to commission the
entire system shall be the responsibility of the Sub-Contractor.
The cost for the above works shall be included in the Sub-
Contract.
TS/Elect/S1/2
h) Supply, install, laid new drawpits and underground heavy duty

150mm UPVC pipes encased in concrete for abovementioned
22KV cables, supervisory cables and pilot cables complete with
MCTs and required structural works/opening/penetration to
cable trenches as shown in the drawings and referred to herein
this specification. Installation of weather resistance road
markers for all drawpits location are required.
2.2. Low Tension 400 V Systems
a) Supply, install, terminate, test and commission the busbar

trunking and main cabling system including the cable
supporting system from the transformer units to the Main
switchboards.
b) Supply, install, test and commission the 400 volts fully type-
tested Main switchboards (Normal and Emergency).
c) Supply, install, terminate, test and commission the sub-main

cabling/busbar trunking system from item 2.2(b) to ACMV Main
switchboards in the Mechanical Plant rooms including the
cable supporting system and other accessories needed for the
complete installation. The Sub-Contractor shall liaise and co-
ordinate with other Specialists on the termination of the
cablings into the switchboards.
d) Supply, install, terminate, test and commission the sub-main

cabling and busbar trunking system from item 2.2(b) to all the
electrical sub-switchboards and distribution boards including
cable supporting system and other accessories needed for the
complete installation.
e) Supply, install, terminate, test and commission the final sub-

circuit cablings to provide power supplies to the power points,
lighting fixtures and to all other electrical and communication
appliances and equipment including cable supporting system
and other accessories needed for the complete installation.
f) Supply, install, terminate, test and commission the sub-main

and final sub-circuit cablings to provide power supplies to the
mechanical systems such as ACMV, domestic water pump
system, fire protection system etc. including cable supporting
system and other accessories needed for the complete
installation.
a) Supply, install, terminate, test and commission the sub-main

cablings and sensing cablings to provide power supplies to the
lift systems including cable supporting system and other
TS/Elect/S1/3
b) Supply labour and material to liaise, co-ordinate and

termination of the cablings/busbar trunking system into
electrical switchboards/equipments provided by others.
c) Supply, install, test and commission all the electrical

distribution boards (Normal and Emergency) including the
Digital Power Meter (DPM), EMA approved type Digital Power
Meter (DPM) for Solar Photovoltaic System breaker surge
arrestors, moulded case circuit breakers (MCCBs), protection
relays and other accessories needed for the complete
installation.
d) Supply, install, test and commission the raised floor and

underfloor trunking system including the junction boxes, metal
trunking, vertical access riser trunking, services outlet boxes
e) Supply labour and material to install the first aid chart, rubber
mat (1000mm (width) x10mm (thick)), fire extinguisher, tool
cabinets, key box complete with locks and keys (min 30 sets),
framed single line drawing in the Low Tension switchroom. The
length of the mat shall be throughout the entire length of the
switchboards.
f) Supply, install, test and commission all the internal and

external light fixtures including emergency lightings, cablings
supporting system and other accessories needed for the
complete installation. All the emergency lighting fixtures
including battery packs, EXIT lighting fixtures shall be type
tested and pasted with approved certification label by
Singapore Accreditation Council accredited testing laboratory.
For internal light fixtures, each fixture shall be provided with an
approved male and female connector suitable for terminating
or looping 2 numbers of 2.5sq.mm PVC cables per terminal.
For external light fixtures, each fixture shall be provided with
approved ABS terminal block house in weatherproof box
suitable for terminating or looping 2 numbers of minimum
6sq.mm PVC cables per terminal.
g) Supply, install, test and commission all the switches, switch

socket outlets, dimming switches, isolators and other
h) Supply, install, test and commission the lighting management

system, lighting dimming control system including actuators,
master control scene panel, programmable panel, wireless
remote dimmer unit and other accessories needed for the
TS/Elect/S1/4
i) Supply, install, connect, test and commission of all the lightning

protection system including earth pits, test link box and testing
of all the associate lightning protection system as shown in the
Tender Drawings and mentioned in the Specification.
Concealed Double-sealed type earth pits shall be used if earth
pits are located on the basement weatherproof floor slab.
j) Supply labour and material to install the approved light fittings,

switch socket outlets, lighting switches, computer and
telephone outlets and other accessories needed for the
complete installation for the mock-up to the rooms stipulated
including the remove and dispose off site.
k) Supply labour and material to install mock-up for specialist

lighting fixtures (internal and external) including the cables,
ballast, tubes and other accessories needed for the complete
installation. The lighting fixtures shall be capable to be power-
up for review. The Sub-Contractor shall allow each type of the
lighting fixtures for review mock-up and selection in this Sub-
Contract. The Sub-Contractor shall include the cost of the
labour and material to install the lighting fixtures and including
the components within the fixtures for the review and selection
on site in the Sub-Contract.
2.3. Emergency Generators and Underground Fuel Storage Systems
a) Supply, install, terminate, test and commission the 5000 litres

underground fuel storage tank complete with leakage sensors,
fuel piping system, pumps and pump control panel system,
cables and accessories needed for the complete installation.
All the tanks shall be completely filled with fuel before the
handing over to the Employer.
b) Supply labour and material to install, test and commission the

fuel transfer supply and overflow system (HDPPE pipes) from
item 2.3(a) to all the day tanks in the generator room. The
piping work shall be enclosed in fire resistant
material/compound of minimum 4 hours.
c) Supply, install, test and commission 2 sets of diesel generator

units complete with remote radiator units, silencers,
attenuators, automatic main failure panel, 1000 litres day-tank,
batteries and other accessories needed for the complete
installation. Ratings refer to the drawings.
d) Supply, install, test and commission the main synchronizing

main switchboard for item 2.3(c) complete with other
TS/Elect/S1/5
e) Supply, install, terminate, test and commission the sub-main

cablings from item 2.3(c) to item 2.3(d) including the cable
f) Supply, install, terminate, test and commission the sub-main

cablings including the sensing cablings from item 2.3(d) to the
electrical switchboards (emergency) including cable supporting
system and other accessories needed for the complete
installation.
g) Supply labour and material to install the first aid chart, rubber
mat ((1000mm (width) x10mm (thick)), fire extinguisher, tool
cabinets, key box complete with locks and keys (min 30 sets),
framed single line drawing in the switchroom. The length of the
mat shall be throughout the entire length of the switchboards.
h) Supply labour and material to engage Specialists and

Professionals to prepare and submit drawings, documents,
Emergency Response Plan, endorsed test report and
certification reports to relevant Authority for approval,
commencement of work, installation, testing and
commissioning including licensing of the underground storage
fuel tank till end of the DLP period. The cost for the above
works shall be included in the Sub-Contract.
2.4. Earthing Systems
a) Supply, install, test and commission the main earthing system

for the following systems:
i) High Tension System

ii) Low Tension System
iii) Generator System
iv) Telecommunication (MDF) System
v) Audio Visual System
vi) Computer Cablings System (Main Wire Centre and
Wire Centres)
b) Supply, install, terminate, test and commission the earthing

system including earth bar, connection outlets and other
accessories needed for the complete installation in all toilet
areas.
2.5. Computer Cablings and supporting system
a) Supply, install, terminate, test and commission the computer

Cat. 6 UTP cablings from the patch panels in the Wire Centre
to the outlet including the cable supporting system, computer
outlets and other accessories needed for the complete
installation.
TS/Elect/S1/6
b) Supply, install, test and commission 2 sets (minimum 3 m in

length) of the computer patch cord cables terminated with jacks
at both ends for each computer point outlet.
c) Supply, install, test and commission 46U, 19” racks including

Cat 6 patch panels for the termination of the computer cables,
fibre optic cables, power bars, protection relays, surge
arrestors, 2 nos of UPSs of 5KVA with 45min battery backup
for each rack and other accessories needed for the complete
installation in the Wire Centres and 2 nos of UPSs of 10KVA
with 45min battery backup for each rack and other accessories
needed for the complete installation in Main Wire Centre.
(Refer to Tender Schematic Drawings for number of Racks
required.)
d) Supply and install the cable supporting system include heavy

duty uPVC pipes, manholes and MCTs. All horizontal trunking
shall be of minimum size of 200mm x 50mm.
e) Supply, install, test and commission the fibre optic patch cord
cables (3 m in length) terminated with connectors at both ends.
f) Supply, install, terminate, test and commission the computer

point for the wireless access unit above the ceiling complete
with patch cables (2 sets, minimum 3m in length, terminated
with jacks at both ends), outlet, patch panels in the racks and
other accessories needed for the complete installation. The
exact location of the points would be determined on site after
the measurement of the unit frequency and zone coverage.
The cables used shall be shielded type.
g) Supply, install, test and commission the Uninterruptible Power

Supply (UPS) as shown in the drawings and referred to herein
this Specification. The UPS must be able to
link/communicate/interface with NUS master UPS
communication system if necessary.
h) Supply and install UTP Data point for card access system Input
and output server, fire alarm main alarm panel and sub-alarm
panel, Building Automation System, Intelligent Building
Management System, Lift system and lift motor room, AHU
room for metering system, Fire Command Centre, carpark
gantry etc.
i) Supply labour and material to liaise with the Employer on the

testing, labeling and activation of the computer outlet points.
TS/Elect/S1/7
2.6. Telephone Cablings and supporting system
a) Supply, install, terminate, test, and commission the telephone

cabling from the IDF panel to the outlet including the cable
b) Supply, install, test and commission 2 sets (minimum 3 m in

length) of the telephone patch cord cables terminated with
jacks at both ends for each telephone point outlet.
c) Supply, install, test and commission the two sets of IDF frame
including terminal blocks (six numbers) per telephone riser and
other accessories needed for the complete installation. Each
terminal block can terminate 100 telephone points.
d) Supply, install, terminate, test and commission all the sub-main

communication cablings from the telephone risers to the MDF
room including the cable supporting system and other
e) Supply, install, test and commission the MDF frame, terminal

blocks and other accessories needed for the complete
installation in the MDF Room.
f) Supply, install, terminate, test and commission telephone

cablings from the IDF terminal blocks to all the patch panel in
the LAN room (Per floor distribution) including cable supporting
system, patch panel in the rack and other accessories needed
for the complete installation.
g) Supply and install the cable supporting system include heavy

duty uPVC pipes, manholes and MCTs.
h) Supply labour and material to liaise with the Employer/Authority

on the testing, labeling and activation of the telephone
lines/outlet including the application to the Authority for the new
line.
2.7. Emergency Voice Communication System
a) Supply, install, test and commission the central console system

including the monitoring and control station in the FCC room,
power amplifiers, call station, amplifier and speaker supervisory
units interconnection cables, cable supporting system and
other accessories needed for the complete installation.
b) Supply, install, terminate, test and commission the speaker

points including the cabling, volume control complete with
overriding relays, cable supporting system, speakers and other
TS/Elect/S1/8
c) Supply labour and material to terminate the Fire Alarm signal

cablings (24V dc) into the system and other accessories
needed for the complete installation. The Sub-Contractor shall
co-ordinate, test and commission of the system together with
the Fire Alarm System.
2.8. Security Card Access System
a) Supply, install, test and commission the central control and

monitoring station in the Security Office including processors,
sub-controller units, monitor and other accessories needed for
the complete installation.
b) Supply, install, terminate, test and commission the Card

Access unit including cablings, cable supporting system and
other accessories needed for the complete installation.
c) Supply, install, terminate, test and commission the EM-Lock,

EXIT push button, breakglass, door contacts including
cablings, cable supporting system and other accessories
needed for the complete installation.
d) Supply labour and material to terminate the Fire Alarm signal

cablings (24V dc) into the system and other accessories
needed for the complete installation. The Sub-Contractor shall
co-ordinate, test and commission of the system together with
the Fire Alarm System.
2.9. Security Closed Circuit Television (CCTV) System
a) Supply, install, test and commissioning the security CCTV

system include central control and monitoring station with web-
based capability to view and monitor on the internet thru the
web browser c/w Internet Protocol (IP) type cameras, LCD
monitors, three sets of 16 channel digital video recorder which
support up to 48 cameras, cabling, control cabling including
trunking, concealed G.I conduits and other necessary
accessories needed for the complete installation. The security
CCTV system shall be housed in 1st storey FCC/security room.
b) External CCTV cameras shall be a separate digital system

similar and able to link back to existing system adopted by
NUS. These external CCTV cameras shall be linked back to
the existing hub in S16 /COM2/ E3A office and Office of
Campus Security as shown in the Tender Drawings and scope
of works as mentioned in this Particular Specification.
c) Supply, install, terminate, test and commission the camera

units including cablings, cable and bracket supporting system
TS/Elect/S1/9
d) Supply, install, test and commissioning a set of 36-core single-

mode fibre optic cables from fiber patch panels in FCC/
Security room to existing hub at S16 /COM2/ E3A building
office and Office of Campus Security inclusive of new fiber
patch panels at S16, 16 channel video matrix switcher with
communication interface module, FO video transmitter, 4-
channel multiplex, colour video monitors, 16-channel digital
video recorder, equipment consoles, all cable termination pot at
both end, metal trunking, underground piping works include
manholes and MCTs, penetration works, opening, as shown in
the drawings and mentioned in this Specification.
e) Supply, install, test and commissioning a set of 12 core single-

mode fibre optic with fibre panel link from MD6 exising CCTV to
MD1 new CCTV system with all the necessary software for
viewing.
2.10. Master Antenna & Cable TV System
a) Supply, install, test and commissioning of cable ready MATV

system including antennae mask, antennas, amplifiers units,
splitters, tap-units, cables, cable and bracket supporting
system and other needed accessories for the complete
installation.
b) Supply, install, terminate, test and commission the TV point

including cables, cable supporting system, approved TV outlet
c) The cable ready MATV/SCV system shall comply with the

Code of Practice for Info-Communications Facilities in Building
(COPIF). All necessary accessories like boosters etc to make
the system comply with COPIF and SCV standard are deemed
to be included in this Sub-Contract.
d) Supply labour and material to liaise with the Employer/Authority

on the testing, labeling and activation of the lines/outlet
including the application and testing to the Authority.
2.11. Power Monitoring System
a) Supply, install, test and commissioning of power monitoring system

including monitoring station, digital power meters, cable and
bracket supporting system and other needed accessories for the
b) The status of the power monitoring meters in the existing and new
building shall be linked back and monitored by OFM master power
monitoring system in OFM office as shown in the drawings and
referred herein this Specification.
TS/Elect/S1/10
2.12. Emergency Call System
a) Supply, install, test and commissioning of emergency call system

for handicapped toilets including cable, cable support system and
other needed accessories for the complete installation.
2.13. Lighting Management System
a) Supply, install, test and commissioning of lighting management

system including cable, cable support system and other needed
accessories for the complete installation.(refer to specification and
drawing)
2.14. Stage Lighting System
a) Supply, install, test and commissioning of stage lighting system

including cable, cable support system, support bracket/truss and
other needed accessories for the complete installation.
2.15. Hearing Enhancement system
Supply, install, test and commissioning of hearing enhancement

system including equipment, cable, cable support system, support
bracket/truss and other needed accessories for the complete
installation.
2.16. Other related works
a) Before the commencement of grubbing up foundation or

excavations, Contractor shall confirm with cable detectors that
no live cables or other underground lines/services are present.
Actual extent of detection will be decided at site. The
Contractor shall peg the lines of services which are in use after
detecting by cable detector.
b) The Sub-Contractor shall engage NUS’s Licensed Electrical

Worker of Engineer grade for switching of existing switchboard
inclusive of all testing and calibration of the setting of all the
protection instruments. The cost to engage NUS’s LEW must
be deemed to be priced and included in the tender offer.
c) The Sub-contractor shall liaise and co-ordinate with other

appointed contractor for the cablings termination for the lift
control system including the sensing system, remote lift
monitoring system at OFM at Ventus, activation of the electrical
power to the lift system.
TS/Elect/S1/11
d) Sealing and making goods of all cable entry/exit pipes and

openings, cable penetrations/openings and cable ducts with
approved fire proof/stop materials of minimum 4 hrs for all
ducts/risers/rooms.
e) The Sub-Contractor shall provide labour and material to ensure

that the Sub-Contract Works are completed as scheduled. The
Sub-Contractor shall note that any shutdown or modification to
the existing system/equipment can only be carried out after
office hours and over the weekends subjected to the S.O.
approval. All costs to meet the schedule shall be included in
the Sub-Contract.
f) All works shall be carried out in minimum disturbances to the

Employer. Sub-Contract Works may be carried out after normal
working hours, holidays, weekends etc. The Sub-Contractor
must obtain written permission from the S.O. prior to carrying
out of the works. All costs incurred in respects to any of the
above shall be deemed to be included in the Sub-Contract in
order to facilitate the completion of the Sub-Contract Works.
g) The Sub-Contractor shall co-ordinate the sizes and positions of

all opening required for the services. The Sub-Contractor shall
ensure provision of openings through structure elements for
installations and box-up of exposed cable services along
passage.
h) The Sub-Contractor shall engaged a qualified Professional

Engineer/Licensed Electrical Worker of the appropriate
category to perform testing and commissioning, certification
and endorsement, licensing and switching of the complete
electrical installation from the date of turn-on till expiry of the
Defects Liability Period. The Cost for the above works shall be
included in the Sub-Contract.
i) The Sub-Contractor shall supply labour and material to liaise

and co-ordinate with Authority on the termination of the High
Tension power control cables into their Switchgear units
including termination kits, testing and commissioning the
j) The Consultant/Employer reserve the rights to decide which

brands to be used for any equipment/materials should the
tenderer submit more than one approved brands for the
equipment/materials in the Schedules.
k) Any other works not specifically mentioned in the Specifications

or noted on the drawings but which are required and must to
make a complete installation shall be deemed to be included in
the Sub-Contract.
TS/Elect/S1/12
l) Any other Sub-Contract Works that are required to be done to

comply with the Specifications but not shown on the drawings
and vice versa.
m) All the cable routing is indicative only. Any change in the

routing due to site condition or existing services shall be
adjusted accordingly without any additional cost to the
Employer.
n) Provide a comprehensive and effective training programme

complete with training materials for technical staffs of the
Employer. The Sub-Contractor shall design the training
programme with the objective of facilitating smooth installation
and implementation and subject to S.O.'s approval.
o) The intent of the Specifications are to provide guidance to the

Sub-Contractor to design, supply, install, test, commission and
bring into operation a system that is of high quality and high
reliability. Compliance with the operational and technical
requirements on individual components or subsystems of the
system specified herein does not necessarily constitute
compliance with the requirement for overall system reliability or
capability.
p) All cabling to the allocated outlet shall be as directed by the

S.O.. It shall be also understood that any outlet may be re-
located ten (10) metres from the proposed location without
additional cost as shown on the drawings if so directed by the
S.O..
q) All permanent labels for the identification of emergency

circuits/points/accessories and the electrical panels should be
of white lettering in red background.
r) The Sub-contractor shall engage a Licensed Cable Detector to

detect the entire area around the cable route and development
site for any underground M&E services. The Sub-contractor
shall perform trial holes and submit plans indicating the trial
holes locations and the detected services routing to the S.O.
for approval and comment before commencement of any
underground works. The plans to be submitted shall be
endorsed by the licensed cable detection worker authorized by
PowerGrid and Infocomm Development Authority of Singapore
(IDA).
TS/Elect/S1/13
s) To make good all openings of roads/walkways in cases where

crossing of pipes are required. To make good of turf areas
where affected, including planting back affected plants and/or
replacing affected dead plants. Sub-contractor shall liaise and
coordinate with NUS with regards to any excavation and cable
laying and all costs incurred shall be at the expense of the Sub-
contractor. All affected works shall be carried out by proper
tradesman with the proper skills to the satisfaction of the S.O.
All precautions must be taken so as not to endanger any road
users or cause any safety hazards to road users. Sub-
contractor shall liaise with all appropriate authorities where
road openings are required.
t) The Sub-contractor shall take all due care any necessary

precaution to ensure that no damage occurs to any existing
services. Any damage arising out of the Contractor's works will
be rectified at Contractor's cost.
u) In addition, to design/supply/install the support for all electrical

apparatus/fixtures duly calculated, checked and certified by the
Sub-contractor’s structural P.E. when required by the S.O.
v) The Sub-contractor shall provide 13A switch-socket outlets

inside false ceiling for each DDC controller installed by the
ACMV sub-contractor.
w) Location of isolators for all mechanical equipment and plant are

indicative only. The exact positioning shall be determined on
site to S.O's approval. No additional cost shall be incurred to
the owner if the equipment or plant mentioned above is to shift
in location, so decided by the S.O.
x) The Sub-Contractor shall provide interface communication link

between IBMS and the following Specialist Systems. (Refer to
Appendix O, Schedule of IBMS Points)
 Security Card Access System,
 Intrusion Detection System
 IP Camera System
 Emergency Voice Communication & Public Address
System
 Lighting Management System
 Power Monitoring System
 Emergency Call System
Each Specialist System has to be able to integrate with the

IBMS Enterprise Network to form a homogeneous environment
through seamless integration. The systems shall be connected
/ integrated to the Industry standard Fast Ethernet (IEEE 802.3)
TCP/IP Local Area Network via one of the following methods
and able to access by third party software.
 Network API over Fast Ethernet TCP/IP
TS/Elect/S1/14
 DE
 OLE or OPC (OLE for Process Control)
 Dedicated protocol (one or two way communication)
 RS232 serial interface (one or two -way communication)
Direct Connections to DDC Controllers
The Sub-contractor shall coordinate with the appointed IBMS

sub-contractor for the interfacing of their sub-systems into the
IBMS.
y) The Sub-Contractor shall provide 20A DP isolators to all fire

rated roller/fire shutters.
z) Administrative charges of S$300,000, S$5,000 and S$500 for

causing any trip to power distribution network, power supply to
wire centre and office/general area respectively will be
deducted from the contract.
aa) The Sub-Contractor shall liaise and co-ordinate with other

appointed contractor for all Electro-Magnetic unit (EMU) related
rooms to ensure free of EMF interference. Shielding shall be
provided for enclosed cable runs in metallic trunking. The
arrangement of cables shall be in trefoil configuration for
cables in open cable trays for flux cancellation to minimize
stray magnetic fields.
bb) The Sub-Contractor shall ensure the electrical conductors to be

routed outside of the EMU rooms. The entry of electrical
conductors into the shielded room should be minimized. Where
required for power points and lighting points, single-phase
conductors should be of “twisted pairs” and 3-phase and
neutral conductors should be closely bundled and arranged in
a trefoil configuration for maximum flux cancellation. These
power points can emerge from walls and the floor for power
and from the roof for lighting.
cc) Electrical conductors running behind the walls, floor and ceiling
on the outside of the EMU rooms should also be enclosed in
metallic conduit or trunking system to provide some shielding.
Such shielding shall be extended to the power socket outlets
and lighting points within the room. Cablings should be routed
to avoid within the EMU rooms.
TS/Elect/S1/15
2.17. Standard List of Electrical Requirements for NUS projects
a) 13A switch socket outlet with neon indicating lamp for LAB
only.
b) Emergency DBs (Power) – all outgoing circuit must be

protected by individual RCCB.
c) Normal DBs (Power) – all outgoing circuit must be protected by

individual RCCB.
d) Exit Light – shall be of approved certification label by third party

accredited test laboratory c/w white LED light.
e) Emergency light – To use separate non-maintained type (eg.

LED light and solely for emergency used).
f) All fluorescent tube to be of LED type of cool white.
g) To provide one ballast to each tube of fluorescent light fitting

and PL light fitting.
h) All area except M&E plant room, switchroom and risers to

provide ‘electronic’ ballast for all fluorescent light fitting.
i) To use extra low loss ballast for all non-dimmable PL lamp

downlight & small surface mounted light.
j) To use extra low loss driver for all non-dimmable LED lamp
downlight & small surface mounted light.
k) Separate MDB/DB shall be provided for lighting, power and

mechanical service, eg. Aircon, pumps. standards.
2.18. Remove of existing Services
a) Remove all the existing trunkings, trays, supports systems,

cables, fibre optic cables etc that are no longer in used from
end to end.
b) Make goods all the openings to the required fire rated of the
walls or floors. Painting to match the existing finishes.
TS/Elect/S1/16
3. Statutory Regulations, By-Laws, Singapore Accreditation Council Accredited

Testing Laboratory Approvals
Sub-Contract shall comply in all respect with any relevant Statutory
addition, current Rules and Requirements of the following bodies shall
be complied with:
a) The Energy Market Authority Regulation.
b) The National Environment Agency (NEA).
c) The Building Construction Authority (BCA).
d) The Ministry of Manpower (MOM).
e) Code of Practices: SS 638 ,CP39 and latest edition,
f) Singapore Standards: SS531, SS535, SS540, SS546, SS551,

SS538, SS563, SS555, SS576, SS638, SS641 and latest
edition.
g) Fire Safety and Shelter Department (FSSD).
h) Infocomm Development Authority of Singapore (IDA) e.g. Code

of Practice for Telecommunication Facilities in Buildings
(COPIF).
i) SP PowerGrid Limited (SPPG) on Service Cable Sample and

Product Specification.
j) All other Authority having jurisdiction over the installation of

equipment and carrying out this Sub-Contract Works in the
locally.
3.2 The Sub-Contractor shall obtain and complete all notices required by
the above Authority as necessary and shall obtain all consents
3.3 The Sub-Contract Works shall also be carried out strictly in

accordance with the current editions of all applicable British Standards
or other National Standard acceptable to the S.O. All electrical
installations and materials supplied shall comply with SS 638 and to be
approved by the Authority.
published edition unless otherwise stated.
TS/Elect/S1/17

4.1 The Sub-Contractor shall comply with the Noise Specifications in the
Specifications.
4.2 All installed plants are to be reasonably quiet in operation. Preference

will be given to equipment operating at lowest noise level not higher
than 50 dBA.

installation of outlets to keep air borne noise down to a practical
minimum.

4.5 During initial testing operation of the installation, the Sub-Contractor is

to correct for any undue noise and to make any adjustment and
4.6 The noise/sound level in the various areas due to operation of the
system's equipment shall not exceed the recommended standard by
local Authority or ASHRAE whichever is the lowest.
5. Permits and Fees
The Sub-Contractor shall procure all permits and pay all fees and charges
incurred in connection with this Sub-Contract.
6. The Specifications
6.1 The Specifications is intended to set out in general outline the

minimum requirements and standards of installation for the various
units of equipment and works it covers. Provision set out, or claim
made in the successful Tender Offer which are in excess of, or
improved upon the basic requirements of the Specifications shall
unless otherwise determined by the S.O. become part of the
requirements of the Specifications whether or not they are
subsequently incorporated in addenda to the Specifications.
upon or exceeds the requirements of the Specifications.
TS/Elect/S1/18
6.3 The Specifications shall be read in conjunction with the Drawings and
are intended to be mutually explanatory and complementary to one
another. All Sub-Contract Works and the Specifications called for by
one, i.e. Specifications or Drawings even if not by the other shall be
fully executed and complied with in total.
supplied by the Sub-Contractor and its construction/installation
methods shall comply with the applicable Singapore Standards or
British Standards Specifications approved by the S.O.

conditions described or implied in the Specifications without undue
scope of the Specifications shall be of a standard proven design.
Design incorporating components, which may be considered prototype
in nature, will not be accepted.


reasonably convenient removal, replacement and repair. All such parts
shall be of suitable material for keeping maintenance to a minimum.


corrosion and erosion shall not be greater than with similar plant of first
class design and workmanship operating under similar conditions.
7.10 All Sub-Contract Works shall be carried out in accordance with the
best engineering practice by experience tradesmen of appropriate
grades to the approval of the S.O.
TS/Elect/S1/19

Specifications or within either document itself, the item or arrangement
be included in this Sub-Contract.
7.12 All system, equipment and materials proposed shall be submitted to

the S.O. for verification of compliance with the Specifications. As part
of the submission requirements, at least two sets of catalogues
including manufacturers installation, operation, and maintenance
manuals submitted shall be the originals.
7.13 It is the onus of the Sub-Contractor to ensure that the system,

equipment and materials conform to the requirements of the
Specifications and that they are approved by the S.O. early.
7.14 Inspection of system, equipment and materials is not to be considered

as a guarantee of suitability or compliance with the Specifications.
Where system, equipment and materials are inspected and approved
by the S.O., such approval does not in any way relieve the Sub-
Contractor’s responsibilities nor from the necessity of furnishing
material or performing work required by the Drawings and the
Specifications which shall in the event of dispute, take precedence.
8. Electricity Supply
8.1 The electricity supply will be 400/230 volts±6% and 50 Hz ±1 %.
8.2 All works and equipment shall be suitable for connection to the above
electricity supply and approved by the S.O..
9. Clearance Of Electric Conduits From Other Services
All electric conduit and equipment shall be installed at least 150 mm clear of
any other metalwork, and in particular of any water, gas or chemical pipes and
300 mm clear from telephone and computer cables unless otherwise
specified.
10. Existing Services
10.1 The Sub-Contractor shall take all due care any necessary precaution
to ensure that no damage occurs to any existing services. Any
damage arising out of the Sub-Contractor's works will be rectified at
Sub-Contractor's cost.
10.2 Any services shall be rectified immediately within the same day by the
Sub-Contractor. The cost of the entire rectification including engaging
Employer representatives for the works shall be borne by the Sub-
Contractor.
TS/Elect/S1/20
10.3 The Sub-Contractor shall liaise and co-ordinate with the

Authority/Employer/Employer’s representatives on the isolation of the
affected M&E services.
10.4 The Sub-Contractor shall be deemed to have inspected and examined

the site and its surroundings and acquaint himself as to the nature of
the existing works, buildings and the site, the extent and nature of the
completion of the Sub-Contract Works, the means of communication
and access to the site, and in general obtain for himself all necessary
information as to the risks, contingencies and all other factors that will
foresaid will be entertained. Existing services as shown on the tender
10.5 The Sub-Contractor shall ensure that the existing M&E services shall
be functional and operational at all times while works are carried. The
Sub-Contractor shall deem to have included all necessary temporary
diversion & protection works to ensure the continuous functioning of
the services.
continuous operation of the building/ system.
in use shall be dismantled in good condition and returned to the
Employer.
10.8 The Sub-Contractor shall give minimum 2-weeks notice in advance for
any relocation/shutdown of existing M&E services.
11. Site Climate Conditions
All equipment and works installed shall be capable of operating effectively and
efficiently under the following site conditions:
Maximum Temperature 40°C dry bulb

28°C wet bulb
Average Temperature 32°C dry bulb

26.5°C wet bulb
Relative Humidity 70% to 98%
TS/Elect/S1/21
12. Shop Drawings
12.1 The Sub-Contractor shall immediately upon the award of the Sub-
Contract prepare and submit to the S.O. for approval all plant and
equipment layout drawings showing full details within four weeks.
Detailed calculations shall be submitted where applicable. All
equipment and materials proposed shall be submitted for approval.
limited to:

accessories.
b) Dimensions of all plant, equipment and accessories, which

include the detailed drawings for installation construction which
necessary to finalise the structure requirements.

and servicing and in sufficient details to ensure that the
provision made shall be adequate and satisfactory.
d) Control equipment and system, wiring and control diagrams,

lighting and power requirements.
e) Vibration Isolation Equipment.
f) Hangers and supports.
g) Foundations.

beams.
i) Piping, trunking, conduit, tray and electrical cable run.
j) Underground piping routing and its layout, manholes

construction details.

drawings, modified as required to suit the specified materials and
and equipment and also to incorporate any improvements proposed by
the Sub-Contractor.
TS/Elect/S1/22
Details shall be drawn in larger scales. Where applicable, symbols the
same as those in the S.O.'s drawings shall be used and all other
symbols shall conform to the acceptable local drafting practice.
12.6 Five (5) copies of each drawing including the softcopies in USB Flash
Drive or DVD/CD shall be submitted for approval not later than four
weeks after award of this Sub-Contract. Drawings with inadequate
details and not conforming to the requirements as stated above will not
be considered.
12.7 Shop drawings shall be minimum of A1 size and it shall have the same
project number as the contract drawings.
12.8 Shop drawings shall be submitted to the S.O. for approval. The Sub-
Contractor shall allow a period of two (02) weeks for the S.O. to check
and approve the drawings.
12.9 Upon approval of the drawings, the Sub-Contractor shall deliver six (6)
copies of each approved drawing to the S.O. for the purpose of Sub-
Contract administration. Softcopy (In USB Flash Drive or DVD/CD
format) of the approved drawings and subsequent updates arising
from the variations ordered shall be submitted to the S.O during the
course of the Sub-Contract period.
12.10 Shop drawings shall be checked by Contractor and submitted through

the Contractor to the S.O. for approval. Sub-Contractor shall allow a
period of one (1) week for the Contractor to check the drawings and
minimum two (2) weeks for the S.O. to check and approve the
drawings.
approved.
12.12 It is the onus of the Sub-Contractor to ensure that his drawings

conform to the requirements of the Specifications and that they are
approved by the S.O. early.

way relieve the Sub-Contractor from his responsibility nor from the
Drawings and the Specifications which shall in the event of a dispute,
take precedence over shop drawings.
TS/Elect/S1/23
12.14 During the installation, the Sub-Contractor shall keep exact "As-Built"
drawings of installed position of all system, supporting system and
cable route, etc. in particular the exact position of any concealed or
buried works.
13. As-Installed drawings and Manuals
13.1 During construction, the Sub-Contractor shall maintain accurate

records of the actual construction. This information shall be supplied to
the S.O. and shall form the basis of an " As-Installed/As-Built' record of
the final constructed Sub-Contract Works.
13.2 Eight weeks before the Substantial Completion of the works, the Sub-
Contractor shall submit to the satisfaction of the S.O. five (5) sets of
paper prints of all "As-Installed / As-Built" drawings for vertification and
comments. Upon vertification and approval obtained, the Sub-
Contractor shall submit to the S.O. five (5) sets of comprehensive
operation and Maintenance Manuals and Data Sheets published by
the material/equipment manufacturers, bound into sets together with
the same number of bound sets of all the "As-Installed / As- built"
paper print drawings and five (5) sets of all the "As-Installed/ As-Built"
drawings in softcopy (using AUTOCAD latest version, Building
information modeling and portable document format) in USB Flash
Drive or DVD/CD-Rom disks, warranty card, test reports.
All drawings submitted shall be drawn using the software.
13.4 All the operation and maintenance manuals and As-Built drawings
shall be bound with hard covers.
13.5 All “As-Installed / As-Built " electrical single line drawings, control
diagram, calculations and 5 sets of original letter of supervision shall
be endorsed and signed by the Sub-Contractor's Professional
Engineer/Licensed Electrical Worker who is registered under the
correct category.
TS/Elect/S1/24


least one set to be original and others in legible print) to be
included. The equipment or plant used shall be clearly
highlighted in the catalogues. When an item or plant includes
ancillary equipment, similar information shall be provided for
these equipment as well.

used.

operation; safety precautions and features to be observed;
programme for alternate running of plant to even out wear and
testing procedures for all sections of the plant, including
emergency procedures.
Include Manufacturer's technical literature and equipment

details on all components of the installation, particularly as
applying to operation and maintenance. The technical literature
shall include all major equipment, control instruments and
equipment used and other related materials. The equipment or
plant used shall be clearly highlighted in the literature.

maintenance. The maintenance requirements shall be
arranged in sections of recommended daily, weekly, monthly
and annual.
The schedule of maintenance and servicing during the free

servicing period shall be included.
TS/Elect/S1/25
This section shall include the following:
- Safety precautions to be observed before start-up

- Start-up sequence of operation
- Shut-down sequence of operation
- Instruction on emergency shut-down
- Safety precautions to be observed if any equipment is
to be shut-down for any extended periods.
- Programme for alternating the operation of paralle or
standby equipment to even out wear.
- Functional diagram or mimic display to explain
graphically operating instructions.
- Steps to be taken in case of plant failure.
i) Control Circuit Diagram
In addition to the control circuit diagrams, a drawing list for

these diagrams shall be provided.
j) Test Results & Certification
This section shall include the test results and certifications of

the various equipment and systems, whether factory-test
results or on-site test results. The actual measured quantities
of the plant/system performance shall be stated and included.
The test results and records shall be endorsed by the
appropriate category of engaged Professional specialist and
the company stamp.
This section shall also include a compilation of all test reports

and sign-off inspection forms and defect lists.
k) System Data Information/Type Test Information
l) Guarantee & Warranty
This section shall include a listing showing all the guarantees

and warranties for the system and equipment. Copies of these
guarantees and warrantees shall be included in this Section.
The original copies of the guarantees and warranties shall be

submitted separately to the Employer.
m) “As-Installed” Drawings List
This section shall include the complete drawing list for the “As-
Installed” drawings to be submitted.
TS/Elect/S1/26
n) Hang-up Instruction
This section shall have copies of the hang-up instructions for

the project.
o) Equipment Suppliers

Sub-Contractors and suppliers of equipment (local and
overseas) incorporated in the installation.
p) Maintenance & Breakdown Service

13.7 In the event of the Sub-Contractor failing to fulfill the aforesaid

shall deduct all cost incurred thereof from monies due to the Sub-
Contractor. In addition the S.O. shall forfeit the rights of the Sub-
Contractor in relation to further payment until he has so complied
accordingly.
Wooden plugs will not be allowed. Hole shall be drilled by using
electrical/pneumatic rotary drills wherever possible. Electrical and/or
pneumatic percussion drills and tools are not permitted.
14.2 Any fixing device on the roof struts shall not be acceptable unless
certified by the structural Professional Engineer engaged by the Sub-
Contractor and approved by the S.O..
15. Metrification
16. Tropicalised
TS/Elect/S1/27
17. Samples
17.1 Samples to be submitted by the Sub-Contractor shall be for the

following system where applicable or instructed by the S.O.:
a) Cable supporting system such as conduits, trunkings, trays.

b) Cables and accessories such as cables, socket outlet, wall
plate, equipment, cables etc.
c) Lighting fixtures
18.1 In addition, the Sub-Contractor shall also submit any other samples as
may be required by the S.O..
18. Fixing of Services
18.1 All pipes, tray, trunking, cable ladder under this Sub-Contract shall be
sufficiently supported with hangers, supports beams clamps, slips,
inserts and mounting devices suitable for the works. Provision for
expansion shall be allowed when locating the services hangars. All
supports including brackets, bolts and nuts, wall plugs for all the M&E
services shall be designed and endorsed by a Professional Engineer
of the appropriate category. All conduits shall be concealed in wall,
slab, partition and column.
18.2 In general, hangers shall be of individual type with provision for vertical
adjustment.

bolts at locations where the pre-stressed tension are not affected.
18.5 All the services and equipment such as pumps, generators shall be
effectively isolated from vibration. Spring isolator type of supports shall
be installed and neoprene isolation pad shall be provided between the
fixing clamp or holder-bat and the type for the pipeline run.
18.6 When pipe pass through walls or floors, GS pipe sleeves shall be
18.7 Opening, Holes, Gaps between the pipe sleeve and the pipe shall be
filled up with high density fiberglass and caulked with fire-rated
compound (min 2 hours) and finish flush to the face of the pipe sleeve.
18.8 All fixings, hangers, holder-bats, brackets etc. shall be hot-dipped

galvanized to BS 729 or equivalent. In addition, for outdoor
TS/Elect/S1/28
19. Mock-Ups
19.1 The Sub-Contractor shall be required to construct full mock-ups of

typical installation of services and common items of equipment in
conjunction with other trades including the lighting fixtures, switches,
outlet points etc. on site as and when directed by the S.O.. Refer to the
Appendices for other areas required for mock-up.
19.2 The Sub-Contractor shall be deemed to have allowed in his Sub-

Contract Sum for these mock-ups.
19.3 Apart from the above provision of mock-up areas, the Sub-Contractor
shall where required submit the samples where specified to the S.O.
for review and approval before commencement of fabrication,
construction and installation work.

ordination of all services on site. The Sub-Contractor shall replace and
modify such mock-up and sample at his own cost, if deemed
The approved mock-up and samples shall be used as the basis of
19.5 Any approval granted by the S.O shall not relieve the Sub-Contractor
of his responsibility in ensuring that all works executed conform to the
Sub-Contract terms and conditions. The Sub-Contractor shall bear all
cost arising out of the errors/omissions in samples and mock-ups.
19.6 The Sub-Contractor shall remove at his own cost all mock-ups and
samples when no longer required as directed by the S.O.
20. Identification and Labeling
20.1 Complete identification and labeling shall be provided for the various
sections of the work.
20.2 Additional requirements as requested by the FSSD to suit local

condition shall also be complied with.
20.3 All equipment, valves, etc. shall be clearly and legibly labeled using
thick.
20.4 Permanent labels eg. "ELECT", "TELEHONE", "SCV", "COMPUTER",

“CARD ACCESS”, “CCTV”, “EVC”, shall be provided for the
identification of pipes, trunking, tray etc. Thermal label to be imprint on
faceplate of switch socket outlet or lighting switch
TS/Elect/S1/29
20.5 The following colour scheme for the trunking/tray/ conduits shall be
adopted:
Services Colour BS4800 Code

Electrical Orange 06E51
TELEPHONE White 00E55
COMPUTER White
SCV White
Computer White
Security Card Access Green
Security CCTV Green
PA System Blue
20.6 Complete identification and labeling shall be provided for other

equipments, DBs e.g. main and sub switchboards, distribution boards,
transformers and others as requested by the S.O. shall be submitted
for approval.
21. Provision of Works by Other Trades
21.1 It shall be the Sub-Contractor’s responsibility to advise, check and

confirm that the works listed above are provided to the requirements
during the course of building construction. Failure on the part of the
Sub-Contractor to ensure that any or all of these services are provided
will result in the Sub-Contractor to carry out the respective works at his
own expense.
21.2 The Sub-Contractor shall liaise closely with all the other trades for
such provisions and communicate all the requirements well in advance
and conform to the construction programme.
22. Co-ordination of work
22.1 The Sub-Contractor shall check and ensure that all equipment
provided are suitable for the space allowed. The Sub-Contractor shall,
if necessary, locate this equipment before the erection of the walls and
doors. Any abortive work arising from failing to comply with the above
shall be paid for by the Sub-Contractor.
22.2 The Sub-Contractor shall be responsible for the proper and accurate
the installation to the S.O. and the Contractor for work co-ordination
purposes. The Sub-Contractor shall also obtain information on routes
of other services from the Contractor before commencing any works to
any floor of the building. He shall co-operate with the Contractor and
all other contractors on the job and his work shall be suitably pre-
planned to ensure proper co-ordination with other Contractors.
TS/Elect/S1/30
22.3 The Sub-Contractor shall inform and check with the Contractor on all
building works (such as holes, openings, grooves required on floors,
walls, etc) that are required to be done as early as possible in order
that holes, openings etc, may be formed as the building work
proceeds. Should the Sub-Contractor neglect to give the Contractor
reasonable notice and full particulars of any building works required to
be done, and thereby cause delay or additional expense to be incurred
by the Contractor, the Sub-contractor shall be required to indemnify
the Contractor against all charges or additional expense incurred in
respect thereof.
22.4 The Sub-Contractor shall be held solely responsible for making

necessary arrangement and/or coordinating with all relevant Authority,
this Sub-Contract such as Temporary Fire Permit Certificate (TFP),
Fire Safety Certificate (FSC), TOP, CSC, etc.
22.5 The Sub-Contractor shall allow for the co-ordination and interfacing of
his work in line with the works of other contractors. Such coordination
and interfacing shall include for permitting other contractors to
complete his work before proceeding to complete the balance of works
under this Sub-Contract Works. In the event of failure by the Sub-
Contractor to allow for such co-ordination and interphasing, no claim
whatsoever would be entertained by the Employer for taking out and
re-installing works to accommodate the installation of equipment and
works by other contractors. The Sub-Contractor shall obtain the
programmes and work schedules of such other contractors and
include them into his programme chart.

construction details installed on site as compared with “Approved”
drawings owing to unforeseen site conditions. The Sub-Contractor
shall bear the full cost of rectification if the failure to comply with the
above clause leads to a malfunction of the system.
22.7 Ceiling pattern as shown in the Tender drawing is given as a guide

only, exact position of ceiling equipment has to be verified on site and
adjusted, if necessary, without additional cost to the owner.
22.8 The runs of cable trays, ladders, and trunkings as shown in the
drawings shall be used as a guide only. Prior to the installation,
coordinated layout drawings of all M&E services shall be produced so
that no M&E installation will clash. The coordinated layout drawings
shall be submitted to the S.O. for approval prior installation. All
necessary dimensions of cable trays, ladders, trunkings and conduits
shall be clearly indicated in the proposed M&E coordinated drawings.
All cable trays, ladders, conduits and trunkings shall not run along the
way of air-con diffuser.
22.9 Any cable trays, ladders, trunkings and conduits which are found un-
coordinated and not easily accessible after all other services are
installed, shall be relocated at the expense of the Sub-Contractor.
TS/Elect/S1/31
23. Testing
23.1 The Sub-Contractor shall allow in his Sub-Contract Sum for the cost of
all acceptance tests required as hereinafter specified or as required by
the Authority having jurisdiction over the installation.
23.2 All test results on the electrical system shall be properly bound and
endorsed by EMA Registered Testing Engineer and LEW respectively
engaged by the Sub-Contractor. Four (4) sets of test results shall be
submitted to the S.O.. The cost shall be deemed to be included in this
Sub-Contract.
the systems in this Sub-Contract shall be borne by the Contractor
including the supply, installation and dismantling of necessary meters
23.4 All pipeworks which are to be encased or concealed shall be tested

and approved before they are finally enclosed.
23.5 The Sub-Contractor shall give the S.O. seven (7) days notice of his
out and the method statement.
23.6 Before the commencement of acceptance tests, the Sub-Contractor

shall have brought the installation to a state of substantial completion
and shall have completed all of his preliminary testing and adjusted the

S.O. Should there be any contravention of this requirement, the results
of all tests completed may be rejected and a retest ordered.

requirements of the Specifications and/or Authority, the S.O. may
23.10 The testing period shall form part of the Sub-Contract period and no
of the Sub-Contractor.
TS/Elect/S1/32
23.11 The Sub-Contractor shall make all arrangements and supply all labour,
as required by the BCA, the FSSD and other relevant Authority, in
addition to all those tests as specifically called for in the Specifications.
The Sub- Contractor’s Professional Engineer shall be present during
the BCA, TOP and FSSD/CSC inspection. The cost of all these above
and other tests shall be included in the Sub-Contract.
23.12 The Sub-Contractor shall also be required to conduct all tests as and
when requested by the Authority during the DLP, Maintenance and
Servicing Period.
24. Tools and Equipment
24.1 A complete set of tools and equipment for maintenance shall be

supplied to the approval of the S.O if required.
24.2 The tools and equipment shall be contained in a standing lockable

metal cabinet. Two sets of keys shall be provided. The design of the
cabinet shall be to the approval of the S.O.
25 Quality Assurance
25.1 The Sub-Contractor shall establish, document and maintain a quality

system to demonstrate his commitment to qualify in construction. As
with the requirements
25.2 Specifically the Sub-Contractor shall plan, establish, implement and

maintain a project quality plan setting out, as a minimum, the following:
a) Quality objectives to be attained;
b) Specific allocation of responsibilities and authority during the

different phases of the project;
c) Specific quality procedures, methods and work instructions to

be applied, including detailed procedures for each of the major
work activities;
d) Suitable testing, inspection, examination and audit

programmes at the appropriate stages;
e) Method for changes and modification in a quality plan as the

f) Other measures necessary to meet the objectives.
TS/Elect/S1/33
25.3 The Sub-Contractor's project quality plan shall be documented in the

form of a project quality manual and project operating procedures
which shall be submitted to the S.O. within 30 days from the date of
letter of acceptance of tender. The quality control procedures for each
work activity shall be submitted to the S.O. at least 14 days before the
commencement of the activity.
S.O. shall not, in any way, alter or diminish the Sub-Contractor's
obligation under this Sub-Contract for the quality of the Works.
25.6 The Sub-Contractor shall adequately price for the above provision in
the preliminaries.
26. Training
26.1 The Sub-Contractor shall train the Employer’s operating personnel in

the operation and maintenance of the plants.
26.2 The period of training shall be minimum four (4) weeks and with the
plant in continuous normal operation. Suitable and competent
instructor representing the Sub-Contractor/Manufacturer shall be
required full time on site during the said period.
26.3 During the system commissioning, the Sub-Contractor shall provide

training and give instructions to the Employer’s designated personnel
on the operation of all equipment describe its intended use with
respect to the programmed functions specified. Operator orientation of
the entire installation system shall include, but not limited to, the
overall operational programme, equipment functions (both individually
and as part of the total integrated system) commands, advisories, and
appropriate operator intervention required in response to the system’s
operation, all test results, and site measurement for the lighting levels
achieved. An Employer’s manual prepared for this project by the Sub-
Contractor shall be used in addition to the instruction. Minimum ten
(10) original copies of the manual shall be provided for the Employer
and minimum ten sets of photocopy manuals be distributed to the
trainees during the training.
TS/Elect/S1/34
27. Comprehensive Maintenance during Defects Liability Period (DLP)
27.1 The Sub-Contractor shall be responsible for all costs involved in

setting and adjustment of controls, checking and tabulating of building
conditions, and supplying, during the period stipulated, all test
equipment and instruments deemed necessary by the S.O.. The Sub-
Contractor shall also carry out the maintenance works as refer in the
other sections “Maintenance During Defects Liability Period” and
“Maintenance Standard and Schedule”.
27.2 The Sub-Contractor shall implement approved preventive

maintenance, carry out repairs, replace defective equipment, blown
lamps, plants, materials, parts, etc and provide all lubricants, paper,
ink and other consumable items at no additional cost to the Employer.
27.3 The Sub-Contractor shall correct any defects, faults and / or omissions
and also replace and/or repair all defective parts or items free of
charge if such repairs or replacement has been necessitated by
reason of defects in the equipment supplied, or as a result of fair wear
and tear; repairs or replacement necessitated by reason of misuse of
the equipment by the users alone being excepted.
27.4 Replacement parts shall be delivered or repairs shall be made promptly

upon receipt of notice of failure despite normal and proper use and
maintenance. All costs of replacement and repair shall be borne by the
Sub-Contractor. For equipment rectified or replaced during this
guarantee period, the Sub-Contractor shall extend his liability in relation
to this equipment for a further period of twelve (12) months from the date
of replacement or repair.
27.5 The Sub-Contractor shall carry out the free comprehensive

maintenance of the complete installation and systems during the
Defects Liability Period inclusive of emergency service during
breakdowns..
27.6 A log book shall be provided by the Sub-Contractor to record the date,
time and details of each maintenance service. A full detail of the
service and maintenance shall be furnished.
27.7 Before the last month of the Defects Liability Period, a full report with
the test and check list of the complete installation detailing the
condition of each of the equipment shall be submitted to the S.O. All
labour, materials, tools and parts necessary to rectify the defects shall
be supplied at no extra cost.
27.8 A competent person shall be made available immediately at times

other than those of the inspection and servicing herein before
described, for the purpose of adjusting on rectifying any fault. No extra
payment shall be made for the additional visits or servicing required
under this Sub-Contract.
TS/Elect/S1/35
27.9 The Sub-Contractor shall be responsible for all costs involved in

setting and adjustment of controls, checking and tabulating of the
equipment and supplying, during the period stipulated, all test
equipment and instruments deemed necessary by the S.O.
28. Handing Over of M&E system
28.1 Upon satisfactory completion of the inspection and testing, the Sub-
Contractor shall conduct joint inspection cum training briefing of the
M&E systems with Employer and his representatives.
28.2 All test results, certifications, inspection comments/reports are to be

properly documented and handed over to users 3 days before the joint
inspection.
28.3 Should Employer/Employer’s representative rejects the system during

the inspection, the subsequent inspection should be affected within
two weeks.
28.4 Employer/Employer’s representatives shall accept handing over of

M&E systems upon satisfactory completion of the joint inspection and
provided the outstanding defects do not affect the functioning of the
building/system.
28.5 Maintenance schedule, relevant keys to the system, list of sub-

contractors/equipment agents on call breakdown/maintenance service
should be submitted within one week after the successful handover
inspection.
29. Energy Efficiency
29.1 All equipment submitted/proposed by the Sub-Contractor shall comply

to the SS530 in terms of equipment efficiency and performance.
31. Asset Management
31.1 The Sub-Contractor shall submit Asset/Inventory List in the format

approved by the S.O. at least one month before the Sub-Contract
completion date.
TS/Elect/S1/36
32. Others
32.1 Service Rooms/ Plant rooms
a) Provide emergency supply to all lighting and power circuits in HV

Switchroom, LV Switchroom, Gen Set room, MDF room, and CDR
room. The cables to all emergency points should be wired with fire-
rated cables in surface galvanized conduits.
b) Hasp and staple (size: 140mm x 65mm x 6mm) shall be installed

for the doors to Switchrooms, Gen Set room
c) To provide metering kiosks, if required by University.
d) All service rooms and risers should have permanent signage for
identification of room locations; signage should comply with the
UCI’s guideline.
e) To provide hot-dipped galvanized mild steel/stainless steel railing

for stair and loading/unloading platform.
f) No beams shall be allowed in the trenches and the trenches must

be fully covered with removable hot-dipped galvanized mild steel
gratings which can be able to support at least 100kg.
g) Internal walls and columns to have 20mm cement plastering finish

and to be painted with 2 color scheme; emulsion paint on the
upper walls and vinyl paint on the lower walls (1.2m from floor
level).
h) Cable Entry Ducts – uPVC pipes in concrete jacket, sealed with

removable water-tight plugs at both ends of pipes and to have
piling if necessary.
i) No water pipes, sewage pipes, etc., should pass through electrical

service rooms/risers.
j) There should be no wet rooms, such as AHU room, washroom,

above HV Sub-station, Transformer room, LV Switchroom, Gen
Set room and other Service rooms.
k) To provide emergency escaped doors for Sub-station, Transformer

room and Main Switch room.
l) Incoming Power Supply circuit to the Battery Charger Panel must

be connected before RCCB, i.e. bypass the RCCB.
m) Lighting of at least 300 lux or higher should be designed for all

Service room.
TS/Elect/S1/37
n) Service rooms should have Electric Shock Treatment Chart, Fire

Protections against all Openings on floor, walls, etc. for passage of
cables, Electrical Single-line Drawings, Earthing Drawing and
Control Circuit Diagrams, Warning and Danger signs, Fire
Extinguisher, Rubber Mat, No Smoking sign, Log Book, Key
Cabinets with Padlocks available for safe working, Operating Tools
with bracket provided for safe keeping for Switchgear and breakers
Operation.
o) Sub-stations, Transformer room, Main Switch room, Gen Set room

should be mechanically ventilated and provision to have sufficient
free or filtered air available for ventilation. No air-conditioning is
required.
p) Individual/separate earthing system for High Voltage Power Supply

Installation (22kV), Low Voltage (3 phase, 400V) Power Supply
Installation, Generator Set Installation, MDF room’s Infocomm and
Telecom Equipment, and other critical services.
q) All earth bars should be mounted above cable trench and at

400mm above finished floor level. The bars should have
permanent labels for main earthing conductor and protective
conductors, the overall value of the earth resistance (earthing), nos
of earth electrode points, test date and a caution/warning
information of ‘Safety Electrical Connection – Do not remove’.
r) Bonding of all exposed conductive part (such as metallic enclosure

of MSB, ESB, MDB, etc) and extraneous conductive part (such as
the metallic exhaust pipe/fuel tank for Gen Set, ventilation ducting,
etc.) in the Server room should be connected respectively to the
Earthing Terminal (in MSB, DB, ESB, etc) and Main Earth Terminal
Bar (in Sub-station/LV Switch room).
s) Display a framed-up drawing of the supply’s earth installation

system in the service rooms with the information of the earth
system wiring connections, nos of earth electrode points with the
individual earth readings at each point and the overall earth system
reading, and a summary table of the individual earth resistance
correspond to each points’ nos and the overall earth system
reading, test date and endorsed by Electrical Sub-Contractor’s
LEW (PE).
32.2 LV Main Switchboard, Sub-board, Emergency Switch board
a) The whole Main Switchboard and Emergency Switchboard shall be

constructed of Form 3B design and type tested requirements.
b) Sub-board shall be constructed of form 3B design.
c) A 4-pole bus-section breaker shall be provided when there is more

than one incoming service and be mechanically and electrically
interlocked against parallel operation of the incoming services.
TS/Elect/S1/38
d) Minimum 600mm all round clearance for the Main Switch Board.
e) Metering with remote monitoring system should be installed on main

switch board, and air-con board serving AC chiller plant, cooling
towers etc.
f) 2 nos of Surge protection Devices (SPD) with pre-warning indicator

should be installed in the Switch Boards; one for the Switch board and
the other for the Digital Power Meter (to protect to a let-through voltage
at 800V and below). The communication port (for remote monitoring
system) at the meter terminals should be protected by SDP (metal
oxide varistor or any better device) to a clamping voltage at 200V or
below.
g) Sub-metering (Digital KWH meter) should be installed at Sub-board(s)

for other tenants such as Canteen, Non-Faculty Departments, etc.
h) The meter’s remote monitoring device shall be wired up and

connected to the new power monitoring system’s communication
controller near the meters’ site and also to the data server and the MMI
unit (or the Master Station) in Monitoring Control Room, Office of
Estate & Development. MMI unit shall have power back-up from UPS.
The monitoring system must generate energy consumptions report,
billing invoices, and event and alarm reports on daily, weekly, monthly,
different intervals of the year and yearly period.
i) IDMTL protection relay for ACB must be of 3 nos of over-current and

one earth fault (Electromechanical type)
j) Main Incoming Breaker and breaker (MCCB) of 800A rating and above
shall be of ACB with motorized spring charged type.
k) Extended rotary lever handles with padlocking facilities and position

indicators shall be provided for all MCCB in all the switchboards.
l) Appropriate instant trip settings, earth leakage protection for all

outgoing MCCBs.
m) Protection systems are to be properly discriminated with correct

selection of MCCBs.
n) Separate Transformers’ power supply to Air-con circuits and

power/lighting circuit.
o) Separate busbar trunking riser/rising main serving AHU loads and the
power supply to this riser should be from transformer purely for Air-
con’s load.
p) Sub-boards or MDBs under normal power supply should have over-

current(OC) and earth fault(EF)/leakage protection.
TS/Elect/S1/39
q) All Sub-boards or MDBs must be easily accessible for maintenance

needs especially after office hours.
r) Emergency Switch Board (EMSB) shall be of 3-feeds; 2-feeds from

normal switch board consisting of normal power supply feed(to ATS,
Auto Transfer Switch, in ESB) and maintenance by-pass circuit feed
(to MTS, Manual Transfer Switch, in EMSB) and the last feed from
Gen Set Control Panel.
s) ESB should not have main earth fault protection at the incoming main
breaker but should have earth fault/leakage protections to all sub-
circuits.
t) Over-Current and Earth Fault Protections must be discriminated well to

prevent breakers (MCCBs) from tripping.
u) Emergency MDB or Sub-board should not have any earth

fault/leakage protections in incoming and outgoing breakers/circuits
(RCCBs shall be installed at their DB ends).
v) All permanent labels for the identification of emergency

circuits/points/accessories and the ESB should be of white lettering in
red background.
w) Normal switch board shall have permanent labels of white lettering

black background.
x) Stabilizer is required for sensitive equipment.
y) Submission of computation and circuit discrimination graph for fault

analysis.
z) Main Switch Board and Emergency Switch Board should have 30%
spare outgoing circuits’ capacities of 200A, 400A etc.
aa) MDBs, Sub-boards, DBs should have 20% spare circuit capacities.
bb) Electrical Sub-Contractor shall provide individual RCCB in the DBs to

all final circuits for power points, all emergency final circuits, computer
circuits, air-con unit power points and AHU isolators. Individual RCCB
per phase should be provided for three phase lighting DBs. A main
RCCB should be provided for a single phase lighting DBs.
cc) MCB should be of type B for lighting and type C for power points.
dd) All DBs must display single line diagram of the final circuits in a plastic
folder with an insert-able top pasted and, if the DBs are housed in
riser, a warning and danger sign should be mounted on the riser door.
ee) Installation of DBs shall allow for maintenance access to carry out
repair work easily and must be easily accessible after office hour
period.
TS/Elect/S1/40
32.3 Generator Set
a) Main earth fault protection shall be provided in the Gen Set’s Control
Panel to protect in a zone from the generator to the cub-circuit
protection circuits in the Emergency Switch Board.
b) Battery Bank of Plante cells; to be correctly sized to the generator’s

starting requirement and install with wooden battery rack in an
arrangement to allow topping up of electrolyte.
c) External battery charger panel of current limiting, temperature

compensating, constant voltage, floor standing type; built-in charger is
not accepted.
d) Incoming Power Supply circuit to the battery charger Panel must be

connected before RCCB, i.e. by-pass the RCCB.
e) Submission of the reports:
i) for sizing of the Plante battery cells with the information on Get
Set engine’s breakaway and cranking current and the voltages
of the battery during periods of locked rotor currents and
cranking current,
ii) for the sizing of charger with information on the rating of the
charger (in Amp) and the nos of charging hour it will take to
recover full charged state upon depleting its power in a fully
discharged state,
iii) for performance data such as acoustic information, noise level,

fuel consumption, nos of hours the fuel transfer system (from
the daily service tank) can support full load emergency back-up
and,
iv) symmetrical fault level of the generator.
The reports should be made available in the O&M Manual.
f) Install with fire rated (FR) cables on tray/trunking for all power cables
g) Suitable spring type anti-vibration mounting for the generator.
h) Design of exhaust pipe’s discharged end shall face away from the
nearest building, especially AHU rooms, etc to prevent it from
absorbing to the air conditioning services.
i) Lighting of at least 300 lux or higher should be designed for the Gen
Set Room.
j) Fuel storage tank of sufficient capacity (at least 1000 litres) and
underground fuel tank (5000 litres) complete with fuel pumping system
and fuel level gauge. The tank should be mounted high and housed in
a contained space for fire safety protection.
TS/Elect/S1/41
k) Provide sound silencer, good ventilation for generator exhaust pipe.
l) Provide independent earth for generator.
32.4 Lighting
a) All lamp holders used in luminaires shall be of fire retardant type and
of IP65 as specified.
b) All low voltage transformers for tungsten halogen luminaires shall be

supplied from the original luminaires manufacturer and shall be of one
transformer for each luminaire.
c) Different groups of centralized timer for all staircase and the corridor
lighting.
d) Emergency supply to emergency lights/luminaires shall be provided

and wired up with fire rated cables.
e) All self-contained emergency luminaires shall be of non-maintained

type and solely for emergency use. The luminaires shall be of 10W
LED on flush disk housing for false ceiling installation.
f) All self-contained emergency luminaires shall have self-contained

emergency kit. This kit shall be duo rate charging, has 2 hours
duration of lighting, a red indicator, test button and a label. The sealed
nickel cadmium batteries shall be sized to give minimum lumen output
of 200 lumens.
g) Exit light shall be of LED type with batteries sized to give minimum
lumens output 180 or above.
h) Recessed luminaires are to be securely hanged by 4 nos of fastslide

spring clips and adjustable steel wire hangers.
32.5 22kV HV Switchgear
a) Use VCB breakers. PT shall be protected by fuses.
b) IDMTL relay (electromechanical OC and EF relay) for protection.
c) Incoming Power Supply circuit to the Battery Charger Panel must be

connected before RCCB, i.e. bypass the RCCB.
d) Earth fault protection for Transformer Feeder Panel shall be protected

by a high impedance voltage differential relay and has setting of 25-
170V/25-270V in 5V steps. CT shall be class X type.
e) Pilot wire protection to all feeder circuits.
TS/Elect/S1/42
f) All switchgear and cable connections shall be grounded and

connected to the Main Earth Terminal. Labels shall be permanently
fixed to all cables and the front and back part of switchgear panels.
g) Should there be any discrepencies in tender drawing, all pilot and

supervisory cabling supplied by contractors to match existing pairs of
cables.
32.7 Transformer
a) Transformer HV cable box shall be of bottom entry and be secured

with good support. Termination to LV cable box shall be by feeder
busbar trunking, if specified for, and shall be of top entry with earthing
connection.
b) If cable is used at LV cable box, it must be properly supported with

bracket and supervised by the transformer manufacturer/agent.
c) To provide High Temperature, Over Pressure and Low Oil Level

protection for the transformer and be wired back to HV switchgear
panel for tripping/alarm operation and indication. The protection
devices should be wired to a terminal box mounted on the transformer.
d) Transformer protection relays; OCR c/w high set and EF relay of high
impedance voltage differential operation with wide voltage range
setting in 5V steps.
e) 2 x 120mm2 cable for Transformer neutral earthing and body earthing.
f) Full conductor size (similar to phase conductors) for transformer

neutral termination.
g) All cables terminated in cable boxes shall be ground to the

transformers and be connected to the Main Earth Terminal. Labels
shall be permanently fixed to all cables.
h) To provide permanent labels for identification of Transformer in white

lettering in black background and spray paint the identification label on
the transformer body.
32.8 Underground Services
a) All services underneath the road must be laid with uPVC pipes and
encased in class ‘C’ concrete with a thickness of 150mm all round.
b) Cable marker of approved type shall be provided for identification at

good interval range for straight runs and cornering runs.
TS/Elect/S1/43

essential provision


emergency


TS/Elect/S1/44

on evacuation






evacuation



TS/Elect/S1/45

evacuation

combine of the instruction manual into a copy. 5 set of softcopy (including editable
copy) and hardcopy shall be submitted during the handing over of building or after
the training.
TS/Elect/S1/46
SECTION 5 - LOW VOLTAGE MAIN AND SUB-SWITCHBOARD
1. General Requirements
1.1 The low voltage switchboard shall be suitable for use on a 400/230 Volt phase
4 wire 50 Hz supply system.
1.2 The switchboard shall be of the self-contained, total insulated, floor mounting,
extensible modular construction, metal clad, flush-fronted, front and rear
access cubicle type, built up from completely enclosed units housing all the
circuit breakers, meters, selector switches, indicating lamps and protection
relays, current transformers, protection transformers, contactors, busbars,
fuses, anti-condensation heaters complete with indicating lamps and switches
and etc. all as indicated in the drawings. Dry contacts on breaker status such
as ON/OFF and TRIP/FAULT for BAS/IBMS/Lighting management systems
monitoring shall be provided with linking to digital power meter.
1.3 The Sub-Contractor shall state the rating and size of all necessary equipment
having due regards to the arrangement and loading of the particular
equipment and the Sub-Contract price shall be deemed to include the cost for
suitably rated equipment, and for the completion of the switchboards in every
respect ready for continuous operations whether such requirement are directly
mentioned in the Specifications or not. No extra cost will be considered for
additional equipment necessary to complete the switchboards.
1.4 The whole switchboard shall be designed in accordance with FORM 3B OF

IEC 61439 and suitable for 400 volt, 3-phase 4 wire, 50 Hz indoor service in
an ambient temperature of up to 40oC with 100% R.H. at maximum
continuous rating without exceeding the maximum temperature permitted by
Singapore Standard. It shall withstand without damage, stresses under short
circuit condition up to the minimum interrupting capacity Icu (kA) at 415 volts
50 Hz A.C. as stated on the drawings for 3 seconds.
1.5 The manufacturer shall guarantee all L.V. switchboards are constructed in
accordance with the type-tested requirements of IEC 61439 FORM 3B.
1.6 The manufacturer of the switchboards shall ensure that his products are so
designed and tested that they are satisfactory for the purpose.
1.7 All air circuit breakers (ACB), moulded case circuit breakers (MCCB) and
equipment shall be housed in a separated, totally insulated module.
1.8 The switchboard is preferably certified by Singapore Green Building Council

(SGBC) or Singapore Environment Council (SEC).
TS/E/S5/1
2. Drawings
2.1 The Sub-Contractor shall submit detailed construction drawings of all

switchboards for the approval of the S.O. before fabrication and installation.
Such drawings shall show constructional details and shall incorporate a full list
of proposed materials, equipment, meters and accessories to be used, and
the method of supporting equipment and busbars.
2.2 On completion of the installation, the Sub-Contractor shall provide and mount
on frames single line diagrams for every switchroom, load centre and
electrical closet showing full details of connected circuits, current transformers
rating, bus-bar, size, time setting or protective devices, sizes and types of
cable installed etc. suitably framed in glass panels. The diagrams shall be
approximately 1000 mm x 750 mm for L.V. switchroom.
3. Standards
3.1 The equipment and materials used and the method of construction as
applicable shall conform to Singapore Electricity Act and the following British
Standard (BS) or International Electrotechnical Commission (IEC). These
standards shall be the minimum requirement of the equipment.
a) Switchboard - BS EN 61495 and IEC 60439
b) Busbars and busbar connection on

switchboard - BS 159
c) Busbar connections, arrangements

and markings, and grade of copper - BS 159/ BS 1433 / BS 1977
d) Heavy duty air circuit breakers

and switchgears for A.C. system
up to 1000 V - BS 4752: Part /IEC 60947
e) Moulded case circuit breakers - BS 3871 Part 2 / IEC 60947-2
f) Indicating instruments - BS 89 1st. grade / IEC 60051
g) Integrating meters - BS 37 Part 1 and 2
h) Integrating meters with

cyclometer registers - BS 37 Part 4
i) Protection relays - BS 142 / IEC 60255
j) Cartridge fuses for voltage up

to 1000 V.a.c. - BS 88 /IEC 60269
k) Contactors - BS 775 / IEC 60947-4
l) Indicator lights - BS 4099: 1986
TS/E/S5/2
m) Air-break switches, air-break

fuse switches and air-breakers - BS 5419 / IEC 60947
switch-fuse
n) Control Switches - BS 4794 / IEC60947-3 /

IEC60947 -5
o) Terminal marking for switchgear

and control gear - BS 5581 / EN 50013
p) Contactor relays - BS 5583 / EN 50011
q) Electrical accessories,
circuit breakers for overcurrent - BS EN 60898 -2
protection and circuit breaker for
A.C and D.C operation
4. Authority Requirements
4.1 The Sub-Contractor shall include all the other necessary items of equipment
that is not shown in the drawings and mentioned in this specification but which
is necessary to comply with Authorities requirements.
5. Air Circuit Breaker(ACB) and Moulded Case Circuit Breaker (MCCB)
5.1 ACB and MCCB shall refer to the relevant sections of the Specifications.
5.2 Extended rotary lever handles shall be provided for all MCCB in the
switchboards.
5.3 All MCCBs feeding to feeder or plug in busways shall be current limiting type
unless otherwise stated or directed by the S.O.
5.4 Non-metallic, non-flammable insulating barriers shall be fitted between

adjacent terminals of the incoming and outgoing sides of the MCCB.
5.5 All moulded case circuit breakers (MCCB) shall have tripping characteristic
type "3" curve.
5.6 All main incoming breakers shall be installed with lightning transient surge
protector to provide full protection against transient overvoltages for all
possible transient mode :
a) Phase to neutral
b) Phase to earth
c) Neutral to earth
The transient overvoltage shall reduce to less than 700 V for 230 V supply.
5.7 The device shall conform to BS 2914:1972, BS 6651: 1999 and UL 1449.
TS/E/S5/3
6. Frame Construction
6.1 The sections and subsections of the switchboard cubicle shall be modular in
design in accordance to BS 5486: 1989 and shall stand rigidly on top of the
floor opening. The cubicle shall be installed on a framework of channel steel
50mm x 50mm x 2.5mm with flushed cover and panels made of 2mm thick
mild steel plate flanged for added strength and shall be constructed without
any sag, deformation or warping and be able to withstand the load likely to be
experienced during normal operation, maintenance or under a fault condition
of not less than the specified kA for 3 seconds. All steel sheets and channel
shall preferably be zinc alloy coated.
6.2 Structural members and bracing where necessary shall be welded or bolted to
the frame.
6.3 Each cubicle shall be standard size, uniform in height, width and depth.
6.4 Each module of section and subsection of the switchboard cubicle shall be
type tested to withstand a fault level of specified kA for 3 seconds. The
cubicle shall have pressure relieving roof and rear panels.
6.5 Full access shall be provided to the control equipment inside the cubicles by
means of suitable door, secured in closed position by means of recessed key
operated catches, which shall be mechanically interlocked with the controlling
switch, to prevent the door from being opened with the switch in the 'ON'
position. The doors shall be fitted with strengthening strips to give the
necessary rigidity. Rear panel door for every module shall be full height,
hinged and fitted with recessed key operated catches.
6.6 The cubicles shall be constructed with degree of protection IP 4X and shall
also meet the special requirement for use in tropical climates.
6.7 All the doors shall be fitted with neoprene gasket cemented to the frame. All
edges for the openings at the front panel shall be fitted with gasket.
6.8 The interior of each cubicle shall be dust, insect and vermin proof and wire
nets shall be permanently welded to the panels.
TS/E/S5/4
7. Base Plate and Insulating Panels
7.1 The switchboard shall be of the front and rear access type.
7.2 All equipment shall be mounted on rigid base plates made of not less than 14
B.G. (2 mm thick) steel sheet with folded edges and welded stiffeners
wherever necessary. Whenever insulating panels are required to mount
special equipment they shall be of high quality rigid, non-hygroscopic
fiberboard. All edges must be cut straight and squared and shall be
chamfered on the front edge with 3.2 mm chamfer. Any defective or damaged
panel shall be rejected and the Sub-Contractor shall replace it at his own
expense.
8. Lighting Contactor Cubicles
8.1 In the case of lighting contactor cubicles electrically/mechanically interlocks

shall be provided with the circuit breakers to prevent door being opened with
the circuit breakers in the 'ON' position.
9. Finishing and Metal Work
9.1 All painted parts of the steel work are to be phosphated and finished with a
rust proof stove-dried polyester or epoxy-resin electrostatically power coating.
Non painted steel parts are to be electrostatically zinc alloy coated.
9.2 All metal parts exposed by cutting and any part of the painted surfaces that
has been scratched or marked shall be prepared and finished to match the
original paint finish.
9.3 Colour of the switchboard shall be finished in royal blue to BS.
10. Insulation
10.1 The whole switchboard shall be of a total insulation type as IEC 61439 Form
3B requirements.
10.2 The clearances and insulation shall be such as to withstand the standard high
voltage test on the switchgear.
10.3 All insulation used shall be of the best quality and sufficiently strong to
withstand all stresses that may be imposed on it in the ordinary erection and
operation of the plant.
10.4 Glass-reinforced thermoset polyester or epoxy resin busbar support insulators

shall be employed. Insulating materials that liberate smoke, injurious gases or
corrosive substances under insulation failure or arcing faults must not be
used.
TS/E/S5/5
10.5 Arrangements must be made to ensure that metal parts attached to bushings
are maintained at fixed potential under all conditions of operation.
10.6 All live parts shall be completely covered with insulation according to clause
SS 293 Form 3B requirements.
10.7 Insulation plates shall be provided for segregation of compartments and

cubicles.
11. Interlocking of Main Circuit Breakers and Bus-Tie Breaker
11.1 The main circuit breakers for the incoming supply and the bus-tie breaker
shall be so interlocked, electrically and mechanically, that only two of the three
breakers can be closed at any one time. The mechanical interlock shall be
achieved by the use of "Castell" keys. The system shall be so arranged that
the withdrawal of one circuit breaker in no way affects the operation of the
other two.
12. Safety Measure
12.1 The Switchboards shall incorporate suitable protective measure such as

partitioning between sections, subsections, shutters and interlock etc. for
protection against internal arching, contact with live parts etc.
12.2 Where insulation is cemented or jointed to metal parts such jointing shall be of
such a nature that no dangerous stresses are set up in the insulation by the
unequal expansion or contraction of the insulation and the metal through a
range of temperature from 25oC to 90oC.
12.3 Phase distinguishing colours shall be BLUE, BROWN and BLACK and the
phase rotation shall be strictly maintained throughout the complete L.V.
installation.
TS/E/S5/6
13. Busbars and Jumpers
Busbars shall comprise four (4) air-insulated, hard drawn high conductivity tinned
copper of adequate rectangular cross sections as determined in accordance to CP5,
to carry continuously the currents required or as specified in the drawings. Current
rating of copper busbar shall refer to the table A below. If laminated busbars are used,
appropriate de-rating factor according to IEC standard for the current capacity must
be applied. The busbar shall be rigidly supported by means of heavy duty busbar
holders of fiberglass reinforced polyester which are securely bolted to the framework
so as to enable the busbars to withstand the mechanical and thermal stresses to
which they would be subjected under maximum fault conditions.
Current rating of copper busbar shall refer to the table A below:-
Width X Thickness Single busbar Double busbars

(mm) (Amp) (Amp)
20 x 5 153 306
30 x 5 230 460
40 x 5 308 616
50 x 5 385 770
20 x 10 308 616
30 x 10 463 926
40 x 10 618 1236
50 x 10 773 1510
60 x 10 928 1720
80 x 10 1238 2110
100 x 10 1490 2480
120 x 10 1740 2866
160 x 10 2200 3590
200 x 10 2690 4310
TABLE A -- Continuous current for copper busbars for an ambient temperature of 35 oC

and maximum permissible temperature of the busbars 65 oC
TS/E/S5/7
13.1 If laminated busbars are used, appropriate de-rating factor according to IEC
standard for the current capacity must be applied. In any case, current density
shall not more than 1.55 ampere per sq. mm. The busbar shall be rigidly
supported by means of heavy duty busbar holders of fiberglass reinforced
polyester which are securely bolted to the framework so as to enable the
busbars to withstand the mechanical and thermal stresses to which they
would be subjected under maximum fault conditions.
13.2 Busbar shall be tinned throughout and shall be painted to indicate phases with
two (2) coat of non- glossy nitrocellulose lacquers for the entire length. The
ends of the busbar shall be drilled and be ready for future extension. The
main busbars and earthing shall be to the full length of the switchboard.
Access to the busbars shall be through fixed doors and covers; suitable
warning labels shall be fixed to the front of the busbar covers.
13.3 The main horizontal circuit busbars must be located on the top most section of
the switchboard, whereas the main earthing busbar must be located at the
bottom of the switchboard.
13.4 The busbar shall be provided with facilities for connection to incoming and
outgoing switchgear. All joints in the busbar shall be securely bolted or
clamped, with contact surface suitably prepared to prevent oxidation in service
and shall not cause any deformation or distortion of the busbar or connection
rod.
13.5 Joints in copper busbar shall have tinned surfaces. Approved washer,
screwed and locknut shall be used. Screw, locknut shall be of cadmium
plated high tensile steel with ISO metric thread in accordance to BS 3643.
13.6 All jumpers from MCCB or fuse switches above 100 ampereframe (AF) to
main busbars shall be tinned copper busbars.
13.7 For cable to busbar termination, heat resistant cables with cable lug shall be
used.
13.8 The cross sectional areas of the jumper busbars shall be sized according to
the Ampere Frame of the MCCB or fuse switches.
13.9 Under no circumstances shall step busbar be allowed in the switchboards.
13.10 All busbars shall be constructed in such manner as to allow for future
extension without dismantling and modifying of the busbars and busbar
mounting.
13.11 All busbars shall be constructed in such manner as to allow for thermal
expansion.
TS/E/S5/8
13.12 Self adhesive reversible temperature indicators of approved design shall

be placed at all the joints along main busbar vertically or horizontally run and
at the fixed contacts of all the air circuit breaker. The range of the
temperature indicator shall be from 40 oC - 70oC and shall be clearly legible
when viewed from the rear panel. The insulation board between the rear
panels and the busbars where the temperature indicators are placed shall be
transparent.
13.13 All clamps, screws, bolts, washers, and similar securing materials used for the
construction of the switchboard shall be made of gunmetal, brass, bronze or
approved copper alloy. Spring washers shall be made of high grade of
stainless steel or other approved material. Screws and bolts shall be tightened
by torque wrench to the following standards:-
a) M6 - 8 Nm
b) M8 - 20 Nm
c) M10 - 40 Nm
d) M12 - 70 Nm
e) M14 - 110 Nm
f) M16 - 170 Nm
14. Clearance For Air-Insulated Busbars
14.1 The minimum busbar clearances between phases and between phase to
earth in air shall not be less than 26 mm and 19 mm respectively. If the above
mentioned minimum clearance cannot be met, busbars shall be insulated by
approved colour coded heat shrinkable tubings.
15. Earthing
15.1 All metal parts of the switchboard and associated equipment shall be bonded
and connected to an appropriate size of hard drawn high conductivity copper
main earthing bar running at the bottom and throughout the entire length of
the switchboard.
15.2 The minimum cross sectional area of switchboard main earth bar shall be as
follows:-
a) 240 mm2 for 22 kA

b) 360 mm2 for 36 kA
c) 420 mm2 for 43 kA
d) 500 mm2 for 50 kA
TS/E/S5/9
15.3 Minimum two nos. of earthing cables /conductors of the same cross sectional
area of the switchboard main earthing bar shall be provided for the connection
of the switchboard main earthing bar to the low voltage system main earthing
bar. These cables /conductors shall be connected to the both ends of the
switchboard main earthing bar.
15.4 All earthing conductors shall be permanently connected to the main earthing
bar.
15.5 All earthing provisions shall be made strictly in accordance with the
requirements of Singapore Standards and it shall be the Sub-Contractor's
responsibility to comply fully with all such requirements.
15.6 All hinged doors shall be connected to the cubicle body by appropriate size of
earth braids.
16. Neutral Links
16.1 Neutral links of incoming breakers shall be easily accessible and removable.
16.2 Neutral links of all outgoing moulded case circuit breakers shall be removed
and accessible from the front.
17. Ventilation
All switchboard shall be properly naturally ventilated. All vents shall be covered with a
fine mesh net welded on the inside.
18. Cable Entries
18.1 The switchboards shall house all necessary cable boxes, glands, etc.
mounted vertically or horizontally and arranged for front and rear access and
connections.
18.2 Except for busducts and unless otherwise stated, all incoming cables shall be
at bottom entries and outgoing cables shall be of top entries.
18.3 Cable boxes for termination of incoming cables shall be mounted at the base.
It shall be of the split type manufactured from good quality cast iron, free from
blowholes complete with filling orifice, drain plugs, expansion dome, brass-
core shaped wiping gland of appropriate size, armour clamp. Such design as
is suitable for attachment to the equipment served and such as to permit
cable conductors to be formed into equipment terminals without undue
bending.
TS/E/S5/10
18.4 Connections from switchboards gears to the busbar trunkings shall be top
entries and switchboard stubs shall be included in the switchboard design.
18.5 Outgoing cables shall be secured to the switchboard by approved suitable

cable glands mounted on non-ferrous plate. The arrangement of the outgoing
cables shall ensure no blocking of future outgoing cables terminations.
18.6 All cable terminations within the cubicle shall be in a satisfactory manner in a
purpose made terminal and shall be neatly fastened to the purpose made
metal channels. For all underground armoured cables, arrangement shall be
made to have the sheath bonded and earthed through a special earthing
system.
19.1 All incoming and outgoing and control circuits shall be wired to an approved
centralized terminal strip, and the equipment at the inside of the cubicle shall
be run through wiring channels and wiring outside the channels shall be run
neatly and taped to approval. All wires shall be terminated with approved
cable lugs, and separate cable lugs shall be used for each individual wire.
19.2 All wires shall be colour coded and shall have numbered ferrules at both
ends. The ferrules shall be of white insulating material having a glossy
finished with the characters indelibly marked in black. Additional red ferrules
marked "Trip" shall be fitted to the wires interconnecting the relay trip and the
shunt release coils.
19.3 All fuses and links shall be of the bakelite HRC type category 400/AC 13 class
Q to BS 88:2007.
19.4 All wiring shall be arranged in a regular manner with bends set at 90 o and
securely held in position with suitable clips and where convenient shall be
installed in the uprights and/or secured, insulating bushes being used where
necessary. They shall be formed in a neat and systematic manner.
19.5 Meter wiring of the switchboard shall be carried out in PVC insulated name-
proof switchboard cables of size not less than 1.5 sq. mm and enclosed in
flexible plastic conduit. All meter wiring shall be of similar colours to those of
the respective busbars etc. to which connections are made.
19.6 All terminals shall be fitted with brass washers and securely fixed with lock
nuts to an approved type of terminal block placed in an easily accessible
position for testing at site.
19.7 No connectors or soldered joints shall be permitted in the wiring.
19.8 All terminals shall be completely insulated and potential circuits shall be
suitably fused.
19.9 Approved means shall be provided on the relay panels for the testing of
protective relays and associated circuits.
TS/E/S5/11
20.1 Corners and bases shall be coloured according to the following code:
Colour Function
White 5A fuse
Blue 15A fuse
Yellow 20A fuse
Red link
20.2 Descriptive labels shall be fitted, near all fuses and links.
20.3 The terminal strips shall be numbered and scheduled to identify the particular
circuits without difficulty. The same numbers and reference letters identifying
circuits and/or components of the equipment shall be shown on the wiring
diagram that is to be supplied by the Sub-Contractor.
20.4 The interior of each piece of equipment shall be clearly marked to show the
phases and to this end either coloured plastic discs screwed to fixed
components or identification by means of colour plastic sleeve shall be
21. Tools Compartment
Each main switchboard shall incorporate a compartment for tools.
22. Labels
22.1 All equipment shall be clearly labelled in accordance with regulations, and to
indicate its functions, designation, ampere, etc. by means of engraved
traffolyte ivorine labels (Black in white lettering for normal supply, Red in white
lettering for emergency supply).
22.2 Each circuit breaker, switch, switch-fuse, fuse, selector switch, indicating light,
push button, instrument, etc. shall be labelled indicating its rating, function,
designation. In addition warnings signs marked "400 volts Danger"
manufactured to standard design and colour shall be suitably nominated and
fixed on the back of each cubicles on the insulation plates and on the front of
each switchboard and on the door of each switchroom. The markings shall be
according to BS 171 Clause 79.
23. Current Transformer (CT)
23.1 Current transformers necessary for the operation of instruments and meters
shall be of "straight through" type, with not less than 15VA burden and
accuracy of class 0.5 for Digital power meter/Energy meter/KWH meter, Class
1 for ammeter and class 5P20 for protection to BS 3938:1973.
TS/E/S5/12
23.2 Current transformers shall be adequately rated in V.A. to carry the summation
of all V.A. burdens of connected loads, and shall be capable of carrying
currents of the corresponding circuit breakers and fuses. They shall be
capable of operation, without damage, with open circuited secondary and full
load current flowing in the primary. They shall comply with the latest EMA’s
requirements.
23.3 Current transformers shall be adequately supported and installed as to permit

easy access and shall be readily replaceable, if necessary, without
dismantling the adjacent equipment.
23.4 Current transformers shall comply with B.S. 3938:1982 or IEC 60185. They
shall be manufactured from high impact flame retardant moulded cases
suitable for mounting on 105o C busbars and to IP40.
23.5 All current transformers shall have the following characteristics :-
a) Rated 660Vac max.

b) Dielectric strength --- 2.5 kV/min.
c) Temperature -20o C to +70o C ambient
d) Short circuit thermal current (Ith) --- 60 times rated primary current for
1 sec.
e) Rated dynamic current --- 2.55 short circuit thermal current (Ith)
24.1 Instruments and meters for external panel mounting shall be flush mounting,
square or rectangular type with appropriate cover plates finished black and
shall conform to the requirements shown on the drawings.
24.2 Reading scales in kilowatt hour meters shall be preferably in multiple of ten
(10).
24.3 All instruments shall be to BS 89 1st grade, moving iron spring controlled with
100 mm x 100 mm dials (90o scale) with external zero adjustment, integrating
meters shall be to BS 37 Part 1 and 2: 1952 and part 4: 1954 with cyclometer
registers and shall be calibrated for use with their respective current
transformers.
24.4 Voltmeters shall incorporate selector switches to enable phase to phase and
phase to neutral voltage to be read. Ammeter shall have selector switches to
read all the line current. Selector switches shall be of approved rotary type.
Generally ammeters shall be 20% overscaled however, ammeters associated
with motor circuits shall be 500% overscaled.
24.5 Ampere meters shall have maximum demand pointers (5 minutes type).
24.6 All live terminals shall be insulated.
TS/E/S5/13
24.7 Instruments, meters and relays located on the front of the switchboard shall
be segregated from the interior of the cubicle and so positioned that as far as
possible, each instrument meter and relay is flush with the hinged dust proof
access doors and is adjacent to the unit with which it is associated. Other
relays more suitable for mounting inside the cubicle such as those required for
back indication and tripping etc. shall be grouped conveniently in dust proof
cases with removable covers to provide easy access for cleaning and
adjustment without dismantling.
24.8 Meter panels shall be hinged to provide ready access to connections and
small wiring shall be enclosed in flexible plastic conduit.
24.9 All meters and relays shall be fully tropicallised.
24.10 The back of these instruments, meters and relays for external panel mounting
shall be encased in a removable high heat resistant, high insulation, dust
proof cover to prevent any accidental contact with any of the line terminals or
connections. These removable covers shall be designed in such that it
provides easy access for cleaning and adjustment/maintenance with proper
labelling/identification 'LIVE TERMINAL' on the cover
25. Over Current and Earth Fault Relays
25.1 The over current relays shall be IDMTL (electromechanical) type with
adjustable current setting between 50% to 200% of rated values and
adjustable time lag settings of 0 to 1.3 seconds at 10 times current setting;
instantaneous high set elements adjustable between 1 to 10 times shall be
provided for each main incoming circuit breaker. They shall be of 3/10
characteristic.
25.2 The earth fault relays shall be IDMTL (electromechanical) type with adjustable
current setting between 1% to 10% of rated values and adjustable time lag
settings of 0 to 1.3 seconds at 10 times current setting; instantaneous high set
elements adjustable between 1 to 10 times shall be provided for each main
incoming circuit breaker. They shall be of 1.3/10 characteristic.
25.3 The relays shall be surface mounted and housed in a totally enclosed dust-
proof switchboard module, tested and sealed by EMA registered testing
engineer (LEW).
25.4 The operating coils and contacts shall be adequately rated to carry the
25.5 The relays shall be heavy pattern, unaffected by external vibration, fully
tropicallised and capable of operation in any position.
25.6 The control voltage for the relays shall be 240 V.a.c. 50 Hz.
TS/E/S5/14
26. Anti-Condensation Heaters
26.1 Each vertical cubicle section of the switchboard shall be fitted with a 25 watts
approved strip heating devices suitable for operation at 230 volt A.C. single
phase of sufficient capacity to raise the internal ambient temperature by 5 oC if
requested by S.O.
26.2 Protection device shall be incorporated so that the maximum permitted rise in
temperature is not exceeded if the heaters are energized with the apparatus in
operation.
26.3 Heater 'ON' indicating lamps shall be provided.
27.1 Indicating lamps shall be the type with built-in transformers and made of brass
with chromium plated bezel and locking ring. The lamps shall be easily
removed or replaced from the front of the panel without using extractors and
shall be adequately ventilated.
28. Moulded Case Circuit Breakers (MCCB), Contactors, Isolators, etc.,
Moulded case circuit breakers, contactors, isolators and other items where applicable
and necessary shall be provided to comply with the relevant clauses specified
elsewhere in the Specifications.
29. Auto Transfer Switch (ATS)
Auto Transfer Switch (ATS) shall be provided to comply with the relevant clauses
specified elsewhere in the Specifications.
30. Safety Notices Equipment
30.1 The Sub-Contractor shall provide and install the following notices and
equipment in the consumer switchrooms/load centres.
a) Copies of all statutory safety notices, regulations and instructions for

resuscitation and treatment after electrical shock; all surface treated
with clear varnish, in suitable wall mounted frames.
b) Four languages danger signs in the switchrooms and elsewhere, all to

Authority’s requirements.
c) A varnished and mounted on suitable hard backing and framed (in

glass panel) copy of the main single line diagram showing clearly the
full details, dimensions, layout of the L.V. switchboards as supplied
and installed.
TS/E/S5/15
d) Solid rubber insulated mats of 1 metre wide and 10 mm thick

complying with BS 921 to the full length in front of every switchboard.
e) A wall mounted key press housing all keys in the switchroom/load

centre with a B4 size hard cover log book for record purposes.
f) A wall mounted or floor standing tool cabinet to house all the tools
within the switchrooms.
g) A hanging signage " DANGER DO NOT TURN ON WORK IN

PROGRESS" shall be provided. The signage shall be white lettering
with red background, size 150mm (L) x 105mm (H) and Font size of
15mm (H) x 10mm (W).
31. Switchboard Tests
31.1 Delivery Tests
After the equipment has been erected on site, and before final connection to
supply, the Sub-Contractor shall at his own expense:
a) Arrange with the Authorties/PowerGrid and Registered Testing

Engineer to carry out the necessary testings.
b) Carry out all necessary adjustments and/or tests necessary to

demonstrate that the equipment complies with the requirements of this
specification and with his own equipment, in the presence of, and to
the satisfaction of the S.O.. Such tests shall include:
1) Demonstrating that all equipment is installed and all wiring

connected, so that the board functions as required.
2) Tests of accuracy of all measuring instruments.
3) Insulation resistances between phases, between each phase

and neutral, and between each phase, neutral and earth with
circuit breakers closed.
4) Insulation resistance across breaks in all circuit breakers, with

the breaker open and with all equipment installed.
5) Power - frequency voltage tests, in accordance with Clause 63

of BS 116: 1952.
c) Copies of test sheets /reports, showing the results of all test carried
out in accordance with this section of the specification, shall be
submitted in Triplicate, to the S.O..
TS/E/S5/16
31.2 Routine Tests
The Sub-Contractor shall submit certified test sheets /reports showing details
of all routine test applied, during manufacture, to the switchboards and the
individual components thereof. Without in any way affecting the generality of
this Clause such test shall include the following clauses relating to switchgear:
a) Operating test, consisting of fifty operations of the operating

mechanisms performed with the closing device.
b) Millivolt drop test, or resistance test at the rated current of the

equipment across all contacts individually, and as a complete unit as a
check against temperature rise type test if applicable.
c) The record taken on the type test shall be taken as datum if

applicable.
d) Timing test, conducted on one of the air circuit breaker to be supplied,

to obtain the times of closing and opening of the circuit breaker in
relation to the results obtained under type test if applicable.
e) Tests on each switching unit to determine the satisfactory operation of

trip coil or coil at the minimum and the normal tripping voltage.
f) inspection of the switchboards including inspection of wiring and

electrical operation test
g) dielectric test
h) checking of protective measures and of the electrical continuity of the

protective circuit
31.3 Switchboard Verification Tests
a) The switchboards as a whole shall be capable of withstanding, without

damage to the electrical, mechanical and thermal stresses produced
under short circuit conditions equivalent to the interrupting capacities
of RMS Symmetrical Amperes at 400 Volts A.C. of the incoming
breakers for 3 sec. and shall comply with all requirements of BS 162
and IEC 61439.
b) In addition to details of type tests for making and breaking capacity, as

required under this Clause of the Technical Specifications, the Sub-
Contractor shall submit certified details of type tests for mechanical
endurance and temperature rise from each type of switching
equipment included in the Sub-Contract, such tests to be carried out in
accordance with the requirements of their relevant British Standard
Specifications.
TS/E/S5/17
c) All parts of the switchboard shall be subjected to type tests to verify

compliance with the requirements laid down in the relevant British
Standard Specification. The type tests shall include the following :
1) Verification of temperature rise limit

2) Verification of dielectric properties
3) Verification of short circuit strength
4) Verification of the continuity of the protective circuit
5) Verification of clearances and creepage distances
6) Verification of mechanical operation
7) Verification of the degree of protection
d) The Sub-Contractor shall submit copies of test sheets /reports in

duplicate showing the result of all test carried out in accordance with
this section of the Technical Specifications to the S.O.
e) The Sub-Contractor shall also require to submit a copy of full type test
certificate (all tests for one switchboard) issued by independent testing
authority that shall be a member of the Association of Short Circuit
Testing Authority (ASTA) during the submission of the Tender Offer
stage. The type test certificate shall be accompanied by a detail and
complete type test report that shall including among others'
information on arrangement and details of switchboard construction,
calibration oscillograms of short circuit test, temperature rise
measurements to the S.O.
f) The manufacturer must submit a certificate of declaration

endorsed by Professional Engineer/LEW to the S.O. to declare
the switchboard(s) are manufactured and constructed according
to the same type tested switchboard sent for full ASTA test and
obtained full ASTA tested certificate at the same time.
TS/E/S5/18
DANGER
DO NOT TURN ON
WORK IN PROGRESS
Hanging Safety Signage
TS/E/S5/19
SECTION 6 - LOW VOLTAGE AIR CIRCUIT BREAKERS
1. General
1.1 Low voltage air-circuit breakers shall be of four (4) or three (3) poles metal-
clad, flush mounted, horizontal draw-out isolation type as shown in the
drawing. They shall comply fully with IEC 60947-1 and IEC 60947-2 with a
rupturing capacity (Icw) of not less than the interrupting capacity of the
associated switchboard at 415 V, 50 Hz for 3 seconds.
1.2 The continuous current rating of the air circuit breaker shall be of enclosed
rating.
1.3 Low voltage air-circuit breaker shall incorporate a direct acting tripping
device that shall operate at 200% to 400% of the rated current.
1.4 All 4-pole air-circuit breakers shall have full size neutral.
1.5 The low voltage air-circuit breakers shall be under category 'B'
classification system.
2. Construction
2.1 Each air circuit breaker shall be self-contained with specially designed
rollers, runner rails and interlocks and housed in a separate completely
zoned "Enclosed Ventilated" metal clad switchboard compartment.
2.2 The circuit breaker shall comprise fixed and moving arching contacts of
adequate rating to ensure that no overheating damage or deterioration will
arise when carrying continuously full rated current. The contacts shall be
individually spring loaded and hard silver plated, so arranged that electro-
magnetic forces arising under fault conditions do not tend to reduce
contact pressure.
2.3 The main contacts shall be arranged to give a double break in each pole.
Auxiliary arcing contacts shall be provided with renewable arc resisting
alloy tips arranged to close before and open after the main contacts.
2.4 Each pole of the breaker shall be equipped with individual arch chutes with
specially designed baffles and spitter plates to provide effective and
efficient electro-magnetic arch control at all values of load current. Any arch
caused by the opening of the breaker under maximum fault conditions shall
be completely contained in the chute with no possibility of a "flashover"
between phases or between any phase and neutral or between adjacent
earthed metal. The complete chute assembly shall be easily removed for
routine inspection and maintenance of the chute and contacts.
TS/E/S6/1
2.5 Safety screening shutters of insulation material to prevent access to live

connections shall be actuated automatically with the circuit breaker isolated
and withdrawn. Provision shall be made for padlocking the safety
screening shutters when the breaker is completely withdrawn.
2.6 Provision shall also be made for padlocking the ACB operating mechanism
when the breaker is at the "OFF" position.
2.7 Auxiliary switches, relay isolating plugs and sockets, and contactors, as are
necessary for the proper operation of the circuit breaker, trip coils
electrically interlock, and "operation status" indication shall be provided. In
addition to those required for the functions covered in this specification,
provision shall be made for extending the number of auxiliary switches on
each circuit breaker to cover possible future alarm or signaling circuit
requirements. Auxiliary switches shall be of robust, double breaker design,
easily accessible for maintenance, having adequate current ratings to carry
the connected loads.
2.8 Earth terminal shall be provided at the rear of the breaker housing. This
shall be connected to a plug and socket contact to provide an earth
connection to the moving breaker portion.
2.9 Mechanical interlocking shall be provided to prevent:
a) opening of cubicle door until breaker is fully isolated
b) withdrawal or plugging of the circuit breaker in the closed position
c) plugging until the cubicle door has been closed and locked
d) closure unless either fully plugged or fully isolated.
3. Operation
3.1 The circuit breaker shall be of 230 volt 50 Hz a.c. motorized spring
charged type with manual release of the spring by means of the "Close"
push button. It shall incorporate an interlock which prevent a close
operation until the spring is fully charged. Tripping shall be carried out by
means of a "trip" button, operation of overcurrent trip and shunt trip
release. The speed of closing and opening of the circuit breaker shall be
independent of the operation. Breaker 'ON' - 'OFF' and 'Charged' -
'Discharged' indications shall be provided. In addition, terminal block shall
be provided for the electrical BAS/Power Monitoring System/SCADA
system to monitor the status of the breakers.
TS/E/S6/2
3.2 The shunt trip coils for operating the release mechanisms of the circuit
breakers shall be controlled by push-button and/or circuit closing relays.
The mechanism shall be stable and not capable of being opened by shock
or jam. The design of the trip coil shall be such that the trip plunger shall be
operated immediately there being no delay due to building up of the coil
field to maximum value. The use of fibre in the construction of the trip coils
will not be acceptable; the trip coils shall be wound on high grade bakelite
on mica former.
3.3 The operating mechanism and the carriage or hinged panel shall be so
interlocked that it is not possible to withdraw or replace the circuit breaker
while the breaker is in the closed position, so that it is not possible to close
the breaker while the carriage or hinged panel is in any position between
"fully isolated" and "full home" or vice versa. Provision shall be made so
that it is possible to operate the breaker mechanism, if required for
inspection and testing purposes, when the breaker is fully isolated.
Provision shall also be made to prevent the breaker being accidentally
pulled completely off the guide rails.
TS/E/S6/3
SECTION 7 - LOW VOLTAGE AUTOMATIC TRANSFER SWITCHES (ATS)
1. General
1.1 Low voltage automatic transfer switches shall be of four (4) poles, flush
mounted, front access type. They shall comply fully with B.S. or IEC or U.L.
and shall have the same interrupting capacity Icu at 415 volts A.C., 50 Hz as
the interrupting capacity (kA) of the associated switchboard for 3 seconds in
accordance with the above specifications certified by ASTA or KEMA or
recognized testing authority.
1.2 The automatic transfer switches (ATS) shall be of four (4) non-automatic
moulded case circuit breakers (moulded case circuit breakers without trip
units) type for below 800 amperes or air circuit breaker type for 800 amperes
and above.
1.3 They shall be fully rated as suitable for all classes of load (resistive and
inductive loads) without derating and with enclosure.
1.4 Automatic transfer switch shall have withstand, closing and interrupting rating
sufficient for the voltage employed and the available short circuit current at the
point of application.
1.5 All accessories and equipment shall be front accessible for ease of
maintenance or removal.
1.6 All pilot devices/ relays shall be of the industrial standard/ type rated 10
amperes with self cleaning contacts.
1.7 Components of operating mechanism shall be insulated or electrically dead.
1.8 Components of linkages and handles in operating mechanisms shall be

ruggedly constructed and not subject to deterioration. Medium and light plastic
components will be not accepted.
1.9 All electrical equipment or apparatus of any one system must be the product
of one manufacturer, or approved equivalent products of a number of
manufacturers which are suitable for use in a unified system.
2. Construction
2.1 Each automatic transfer switch shall be housed is a self-contained, separate

completely zoned metal clad switchboard compartment.
2.2 The automatic transfer switches shall be electrically and mechanically

interlocked.
2.3 Construction of non-automatic moulded case circuit breaker and air circuit
breaker shall refer to the relevant sections (section for moulded case circuit
breaker and air circuit breaker) of this specification.
2.4 All relays and printed circuit boards shall be plugged in type for ease of
maintenance or removal.
TS/E/S7/1
2.5 Mechanical & electrical interlocking shall be provided to prevent:
a) neutral position shall not be possible when under electrical operation
b) load circuits shall not be connected to normal and emergency sources

simultaneously, regardless of whether switch is electrically or manually
operated.
c) switch shall have a manual neutral position.
d) manual operation shall be able to be accomplished by one person.
2.6 The transfer mechanism shall be electrically operated by a single A.C. gear-
motor with all parts in positive contact at all times. It shall also be capable of
being operated manually and shall have suitable provisions for easy and
readily disengaging the gear-motor when necessary.
3. Operation
3.1 The automatic transfer switch shall be provided with close differential voltage
sensing relays to monitor each phase of the normal supply. A drop in voltage
in any phase below the pre-determined drop-out value of the relay shall initiate
load transfer. The relay(s) shall initiate retransfer of the load to the normal as
soon as the voltage of normal PUB supply source is restored in all phases
beyond the pre-determined pick-up value of the relay. Voltage sensing relays
shall be of the completely solid state type and shall have tamper proof field
adjustable pick-up and drop-out values from 52% to 115% of nominal line
voltage.
3.2 The automatic transfer switch shall obtain its operating current from the
source to which the load is being transferred. All accessories and equipment
shall be front accessible for ease of maintenance and removal.
3.3 The automatic transfer switch shall automatically initiate the engine start
circuit in the event of normal power failure, and transfer shall be made to this
source when available. Upon restoration of normal PUB supply source, the
switch shall automatically transfer to the normal supply source after a preset
time delay period. The engine shall be signalled to shut down when the
switch transfer back to normal supply.
TS/E/S7/2
3.4 The standard automatic transfer switch shall include but not limited to the
following:
a) complete protection, voltage sensing relays (one each phase)
b) time delay emergency to normal, solid state relay, adjustable from 0-

120 seconds.
c) engine start contact and termination block(s)
d) breaker auxiliary contact, normal source
e) breaker auxiliary contact, emergency source
f) two number of 4 poles circuit breakers
g) gear-motor
h) test push button
3.5 In addition the automatic transfer switch shall also include the following
functions:
a) Delay the transfer to normal from emergency to permit stabilization of

the normal power source before retransfer shall be made, adjustable
10 seconds to 5 minutes.
b) Provide test operation of the transfer switch by simulating a loss of

normal power. This unit shall be mounted on cover of the switch
panel.
c) Provide four modes of switch operation, TEST-AUTO-OFF-ENGINE

START. The 'OFF' position shall be energized the control relays and
opens the engine start circuit. The switch shall not operate nor shall
the engine start on power failure. The "TEST" position shall simulate
power failure. Engine starting shall be initiated and the switch shall
transfer when emergency voltage appears on "AUTO" position. The
transfer switch shall return to normal operation on "ENGINE START"
position. The transfer switch shall return to normal and initiate the
engine start circuit. The switch shall not transfer unless the normal
source fails. The selector switch shall be mounted on front panel.
d) Provide a by-pass on the time delay emergency to normal delay,

which shall permit the switch to be transferred without time delay.
e) Transfer mechanism shall be energized only momentarily during

transfer.
TS/E/S7/3
SECTION 8 - MOULDED CASE CIRCUIT BREAKERS (MCCB) FOR MAIN

SWITCHBOARD, SUB-SWITCHBOARDS AND MAIN DISTRIBUTION
BOARDS
1. General
1.1 Moulded case circuit breakers shall conform to the latest British Standard
BS EN 60947-2.
1.2 All moulded case circuit breakers shall have minimum interrupting
capacities of R.M.S. symmetrical amperes at 415 Volts A.C. as the
associated switchboard or as stated on the drawing.
1.3 MCCB shall be calibrated at ambient temperature of 40 oC and carried its

rated current continuously when operated in free air at this temperature.
1.4 All MCCB in switchboard or distribution board(s) shall be of the same

manufacturer.
1.5 Extended rotary lever handles shall be provided for all MCCB in the
switchboards.
1.6 All MCCB feeding to feeder or plug in busways shall be current limiting
type unless otherwise stated or directed by the Superintending Officer.
1.7 Nonmetallic, non-flammable insulating barriers shall be fitted between

adjacent terminals of the incoming and outgoing sides of the MCCB.
1.8 Moulded case circuit breakers (MCCB) below 400 ampere frame shall
have inverse time tripping characteristic. Moulded case circuit breakers
(MCCB) above 400 ampere frame shall have the following tripping
characteristics:-
a) Adjustable ampere setting (0.6 times to 1 time)
b) Adjustable long time (minimum 3 settings)
c) Adjustable short time trip point (minimum 6 fixed points)
d) Adjustable short time delay time (minimum 3 settings)
e) Adjustable instantaneous tripping (minimum 2 times to 10 times)
1.9 Adjustable ampere trip settings type of MCCB is used, the ampere trip
must be calibrated and set in the factory and the adjustable trip unit must
be permanently sealed by approved methods.
1.10 Positive position indication for the moulded case circuit breakers (MCCB)
to determine the status of the breaker to be provided.
TS/E/S8/1
2. Operation
2.1 Moulded case circuit breakers shall be operated by a toggle-type handle

mechanically trip free from the handle so that the contacts cannot be held
close against short circuits and abnormal currents tripping due to
overload or short circuit and they shall be clearly indicated by the handle
"OFF" position. All latch surfaces shall be so constructed that they open,
close and trip simultaneously.
2.2 MCCB shall be trip free and capable of manual operation in addition to
other normal means, such as electrical or pneumatic operation.
3. Construction
3.1 Each pole of these breakers shall provide inverse time delay and
instantaneous circuit protection by means of thermal magnetic elements.
Ambient compensation shall be accomplished by a secondary bi-metal
that will allow the breaker to carry rated current at 40 oC+2oC with tripping
characteristics that are the same throughout this temperature range.
3.2 Breakers shall be completely enclosed in a moulded case. Non-

interchangeable trip breakers (below 150 amp. frame) shall have their
cover sealed; whereas interchangeable trip breakers (150 amp. frame
and above) shall have the trip unit sealed to prevent tampering. Contacts
of circuit breaker shall be of non-welding silver alloy.
3.3 The contacts shall be maintained minimum 5 mm apart when it is at OFF

position.
3.4 Manual trip button and front-adjusting magnetic trip device shall be
incorporated in the moulded case circuit breaker.
3.5 Arcing shall be extinguished rapidly and effectively by Arc-extinguishing

device, in normal switching as well as protective tripping, to minimize
3.6 Terminals shall be constructed to assure electrical efficiency and

reliability, with minimized possibility of localized heating.
3.7 Trip indication shall be by means of the handle position being midway
between 'ON' and 'OFF'. To reset the trip mechanism, the handle shall
be moved to extreme 'OFF' and 'ON' position.
TS/E/S8/2
3.8 For current limiting (CL) moulded case circuit breakers, the current
limiting breakers shall be fuseless type for 400A and below and shall
have the same operation as Clause (2) and same construction as Clause
(3). They shall meet the IEC requirements. All three phases shall be
opened simultaneously under fault conditions. The contact opening and
arc extinguishing shall be less than 1/4 cycle to reduce and limit peak let-
through current and let-through energy. These breakers shall limit the
interrupting ratings as shown below:
Up Stream (kA) Up Stream Breaker Limited Value/SC

Rating (Amp) (kA)
36 30 8
36 60 10
36 100 15
36 150 17
36 250 22
36 400 28
TS/E/S8/3
SECTION 9 - MINIATURE CIRCUIT BREAKERS (MCB) FOR DISTRIBUTION

BOARDS
1. General
1.1 Miniature circuit breakers shall comply with the latest British Standard BS
EN60898 with latest amendments test duty sequence 240V for single pole
and 230/400V for multi-poles.
1.2 Unless otherwise stated, miniature circuit breakers and distribution boards
shall have minimum short-circuit capacities of R.M.S. symmetrical amperes
of 10 kA for lighting circuit distribution boards and 15 kA for power or
mixture of lighting and power circuit distribution boards at 230V or 230/400
Volt A.C.
1.3 All miniature circuit breakers (MCB) shall be calibrated at ambient

temperature of 40o C and carried their rated current continuously when
operated in free air at this temperature.
1.4 All miniature circuit breakers (MCB) shall have tripping characteristic type
"C" curve before KWHr or power meters and tripping characteristic type
"B" curve after KWHr meters or power meter for unit. All minature circuit
breakers provided shall have tripping characteristic type "C" curve unless
otherwise stated.
1.5 Miniature circuit breakers and the distribution board enclosure shall be
from the same manufacturer.
1.6 Irrespective to the mounting positions, the miniature circuit breakers shall
be operated according to the factory calibrated characteristic.

position.
1.8 All miniature circuit breakers shall be of positive plug-on or bolted-on, no

1.9 Miniature circuit breaker must have positive contact position.
1.10 Miniature circuit breaker shall comply to the following standard :
a) IEC 60898-1: Electrical accessories - Circuit-breakers for

overcurrent protection for household and similar installations.
Circuit-breakers for a.c and d.c. operation and
b) IEC 60947-2: Low-voltage switchgear and controlgear. Circuit-

breakers
TS/E/S9/1
2. Operation
2.1 Miniature circuit breakers shall be operated by a toggle-type handle and

conditions. When the circuit breaks and over current conditions. When the
circuit breakers automatically trip, the operating handle shall be assured a
position between "ON" and "OFF" positions. The contacts shall also be of
positive quick-make and quick-break on manual and automatic operation.
2.2 Contact position indicator (coloured) linking physically to the contacts for
the positive indication of isolation must be provided.
2.3 Two and three pole circuit breakers shall be commonly tripped with
2.4 The magnetic operation (Instantaneous Trip) of these MCB shall be tripped
between 3 to 5 millisecond.
3. Construction
3.1 Each pole of the circuit breakers shall have a factory calibrated thermal bi-
metal overcurrent element with inverse time delay characteristic and a
condition. Ambient temperature compensation shall be accomplished by a
secondary bi-metal that shall allow the circuit breaker to carry rated current
between 25oC to 40oC with tripping characteristics that are the same
throughout this temperature range, and that shall not cause nuisance
tripping.
3.2 Circuit breakers shall be completely enclosed in a high dielectric strength

casing. The properties of the dielectric strength casing shall not deteriorate
with time.
3.3 Contacts of circuit breaker shall be silver-tungsten or silver-graphite for

ensuring a reliable contact of low resistance and highly resistant to welding.
3.4 The high pressure plug-on busbar connector shall assure a solid positive
3.5 Load terminals shall be constructed to assure electrical efficiency and

reliability, with minimized possibility of localized heating, and for straight in
wiring.
3.6 Arcing shall be extinguished rapidly and effectively by arc chute barrier, in
normal switching as well as protective tripping, to minimize deterioration of
contacts and adjacent insulating materials.
3.7 Trip indication shall be by means of the handle position lying between "ON"
and "OFF". To reset the trip mechanism, the handle shall be moved to
extreme "OFF" position.
TS/E/S9/2
SECTION 10 - RESIDUAL CURRENT CIRCUIT BREAKERS (RCCB)
1. General
1.1 Residual current circuit breaker (RCCB) shall be current operated type with
milliampere tripping current and continuous load current as shown on the
accompanied drawing.
1.2 Residual current circuit breaker (RCCB) and method of installation shall
comply with latest Singapore Standards SS 97 and BS EN 61008-1
including the amendments.
1.3 All residual current circuit breakers (RCCB) shall bear with local authority
trade mark.
1.4 For single phase supply, the residual current circuit breaker (RCCB) shall
be rated 230 Volt 50 Hz A.C. 2 poles. For three phase supply, the residual
current circuit breaker (RCCB) shall be rated 400 Volt 50 Hz A.C. 4 poles.
All RCCB shall be surge proof design to prevent nuisance tripping due to
transient over-voltage. A local trip indication in the form of window on the
front face of the RCCB shall be provided to differentiate between OFF and
TRIPPED position. A test button shall be incorporated to enable periodic
check on the tripping mechanism of the RCCB.
1.5 The RCCB of 30 mA sensitivity and the operating time less than 0.1 second is a
Controlled Good as defined by the Singapore Consumer Protection (Safety
Requirements) Registration Scheme (CPS). it must be registered with SPRING
Singapore and bear the SAFETY Mark. All other RCCB which is greater than
30mA shall also be tested by spring and operating times less than 0.1 second.
1.6 All incoming and outgoing cables, and copper links connected to residual
current circuit breakers (RCCB) shall be insulated.
1.7 The Sub-Contractor shall test all the residual current circuit breakers
(RCCB) installations by an approved residual current circuit breaker
(RCCB) tester. Testing shall be carried out in the presence of the S.O. or
his/her representative. The actual value and one step below the actual
tripping current shall be tested. Four (4) sets of test results endorsed by
Licensed Electrical Workers (LEW) shall be submitted to the S.O.
TS/E/S10/1
SECTION 11 - MAIN DISTRIBUTION BOARDS (MDB)
1. General
1.1 Main Distribution Boards shall be of the dead-front construction equipped with
thermal magnetic incoming main and branch circuit breakers of the frame
sizes, and trip ratings indicated on the drawings or on the distribution board
schedule.
1.2 All main distribution boards shall be rated at 400 Volt A.C. for three phase 4
wire supply. They shall comply with BS 5486 Part 1. The whole main
distribution board including circuit breakers shall maintain the minimum
interrupting capacity (symmetrical) stated in the drawings or distribution board
schedules.
1.3 Main distribution boards (MDB) shall have general purpose enclosures and
shall be surface mounted except where otherwise indicated.
1.4 The main distribution boards and the moulded case circuit breakers (MCCB)
for the main distribution board shall be from the same manufacturer, or the
manufacturer of the main distribution boards shall be capable of
manufacturing type-tested main switch board.
1.5 Door of circuit breaker main distribution panel board shall be equipped with
one or more master-keyed safety cylinder locks to prevent unauthorized
personnel to switch "ON" or "OFF" the main and branch breakers. The no. of
safety cylinder locks depends on the length of the door.
1.6 The specification of moulded case circuit breaker (MCCB) shall refer to the
technical specification of moulded case circuit breakers (MCCB) for
switchboard or main distribution boards. All MCCBs shall be provided with
extended lever handles.
1.7 The interior assembly for the connection and mounting of MCCB must be of
good quality, type tested and approved type.
1.8 Original blanking plates shall be used for space(s) (i.e. outgoing branches
without miniature circuit breaker(s)).
1.9 Dry contacts on breaker status such as ON/OFF and TRIP/FAULT for
BAS/IBMS/Lighting management systems monitoring shall be provided with
linking to digital power meter.
1.10 Degree of protection for circuit breaker main distribution panel boards shall be
of min. IP31 to BS 5420 or IEC 60144. The main distribution boards shall be
properly naturally ventilated. All the louvre vent openings shall be cover with
very fine wire mesh net permanently welded on the inside of the panel board.
TS/E/S11/1
1.11 The main distribution board shall comply to following standard:
a) IEC 61439: Low-voltage switchgear and controlgear assemblies
b) BS EN / IEC 60947-2: Specification for low-voltage switchgear and

controlgear. Circuit-breakers.
2. Construction
2.1 The main distribution boards shall conform to the following construction to
form a single or group of boards as indicated on the drawings.
a) Bussing Assembly and Temperature Rise
Main distribution board bus structure shall have the same current
rating as that of the incoming breakers as shown on the main
distribution board drawings. In any case, a current density of min. 155
Amperes per sq.cm. (1,000 Amperes per sq.in.) of cross-sectional
area shall be maintained. Such ratings shall be established by heat
riser tests with maximum hot spot temperature on any connector or
busbar not exceeding 50oC rise above ambient (based on an ambient
temperature having value not exceeding 40 oC and an average value
not exceeding 35oC measured over a 24-hour period). Adequate
conductor dimension will not be accepted as an excuse for foregoing
actual heat tests. Busbars shall be made of tinned hard drawn copper.
Full size pre-drilled copper neutral bar and appropriate size of pre-
drilled copper earth bar of screwed-on type connectors shall be
provided. Phase bussing shall be full height without reduction. The
number of connector holes in the neutral and earth bars shall be equal
to the number of branch circuit breakers plus incoming cable hole plus
3 numbers of spare connector holes for each bar.. Busbar taps for
distribution boards with single pole branches shall be arranged for
sequence phase connection of the branch circuit devices that allows
complete flexibility of circuit arrangement (1, 2 or 3 poles circuit
breakers). Phase busbars shall be fully protected with an integral, high
impact, thermoplastic shroud.
b) Circuit Breakers
Circuit Breakers shall be equipped with individually insulated, braced

and protected connectors. The front face of all circuit breakers shall
be flushed with each other. Large permanent individual circuit
numbers shall be affixed to each breaker in an uniform position.
Space provisions for additional breakers shall be so designed that no
additional connectors/connection links, machining drilling or tapping
will be required, when breakers are added.
TS/E/S11/2
c) Integrated Equipment Rating
Each distribution board, as a complete unit, shall have a rating equal

to or greater than the integrated equipment rating shown on the
distribution board schedule or drawing on the plans.
d) Cabinet
Distribution board assembly shall be enclosed in a steel cabinet. The

rigidity and gauge of steel shall be as specified in British Standards
(BS). Doors of all distribution boards shall be lockable by means of a
barrel-type lock with detachable master-keys. Doors over 1.2 m long
shall be equipped with two safety cylinder locks. The hinged door shall
conceal the retaining screws of the front cover to prevent unauthorized
personnel to remove the front cover. Top and bottom walls shall be
removable. The steel enclosure shall be anti-rust treated and finished
with an electrostatically deposited light grey powder coating.
e) Safety Barriers
The distribution board interior assembly shall be dead front

construction with the distribution board front removed (i.e. covered
with approved thickness of insulation board). Also, it shall be possible
to change branch circuit load connections without any personal
exposure to any line side bussing on line terminals. Main breaker
shall have barriers on live sides. The end of the bus structure opposite
the mains shall have barriers. Ampere clearance shall be provided
between 'live' parts and the sheet-steel protection to allow cables to be
brought to their respective terminals in a neat and workmanlike
manner.
2.2 Three phase and neutral or single phase and neutral distribution boards shall
be designed in such a way that the minimum short-circuit capacity mentioned
in the specifications or indicated on the distribution board drawings shall be
maintained.
2.3 All distribution board shall also be designed for bottom incoming and top
outgoing circuitry unless otherwise stated.
3. Labelling
3.1 Engraved traffolyte invorine labels (BLACK in white lettering for normal
supply, RED in white lettering for emergency supply) for large permanent
individual number shall be affixed permanently to each branch circuit breaker
and incoming main circuit breaker in an uniform position.
TS/E/S11/3
3.2 Each individual cable shall be numbered with thermal marking on PVC or
heat shrinkable tubes system according to the 'As Built' distribution board
drawings and the Sub-Contractor shall in addition hang a good quality plastic
bag beside the distribution board with a copy of floor plan or a portion of the
floor plan which is served by the associated distribution board, and a
typewritten table showing the circuit numbers and room numbers/designations
in approved arrangement according to the 'As Built' circuit breakers layout of
each distribution board.
3.3 All neutral and earth continuity conductors shall be installed in sequence and
numbered with thermal marking on PVC or heat shrinkable tubes system
to label according to the circuit numbers of the "As-Built" distribution boards
drawings.
3.4 All neutral and earth bar connectors shall be clearly and permanently
numbered with thermal marking on marker label or foil tape system for
easy identification. The sequence of numbers shall be as follows:
1L1, 1L2, 1L3, 2L1, 2L2, 2L3, 3L1, 3L2, 3L3, 4L1, 4L2, 4L3, 5L1, 5L2, 5L3,
6L1, 6L2, 6L3, etc.
3.5 All distribution boards shall be clearly, permanently labelled according to the
'As-Built' distribution boards drawings and also indicate its tap off from
designation, ampere etc by engraved traffolyte ivorine labels (BLACK in white
lettering for normal supply, RED in white lettering for emergency supply).
a) Copies of all statutory safety notices, regulations and instructions for

resuscitation and treatment after electrical shock; all surface treated
with clear varnish, in suitable wall mounted frames.
b) Four languages danger signs in the switchrooms/risers and

elsewhere, all to authority requirements.
c) A varnished and mounted on suitable hard backing and framed (in

glass panel) copy of the main single line diagram showing clearly the
full details, dimensions, layout of the switchboards as supplied and
installed.
d) Solid rubber insulated mats of 10 mm thick complying with BS 921:

1976 to the full length in front of every switchboard.
e) A wall mounted key press housing all keys in the switchroom/load

centre with a B4 size hard cover log book for record purposes.
f) Standard lock set as approved by the authority for the meter/MDB.
TS/E/S11/4
SECTION 12 - THREE PHASE DISTRIBUTION BOARDS FOR LIGHTING AND

POWER CIRCUITS
1. General
1.1 Three phase circuit breaker distribution boards shall be of the dead-front
safety type equipped with thermal magnetic miniature circuit breakers of
the frame sizes, types and ampere trip ratings specified on the
accompanied distribution board drawings.
1.2 All distribution boards shall be rated at 400 Volt A.C. 50 Hz for three phase
4 wire supply and shall comply with the latest British Standard BS 5486
part 12 for distribution boards.
1.3 Distribution boards shall have general purpose enclosures and shall be
surface mounted except where otherwise indicated (FM) for flush
mounting.
1.4 All miniature circuit breakers (MCBs), single phase and three phase circuit
breaker distribution boards shall be from the same manufacturer.
1.5 All circuit breaker distribution boards shall be of the approved type.
1.6 All doors of circuit breakers distribution boards shall be equipped with
master-keyed safety cylinder locks to prevent unauthorized personnel to
switch on or off the main and branch breakers. The no. of locks depends
on the length of the door.
1.7 Miniature circuit breakers (MCBs) shall refer to the technical specification
of miniature circuit breakers.
1.8 The minimum short-circuit capacities of R.M.S. symmetrical amperes of

circuit breaker distribution boards and incoming circuit breakers, if
applicable, shall be of the same kA rating of the specified short-circuit
capacities of the incoming circuit breaker.
1.9 The interior assembly for the connection and mounting of MCB must be of
1.10 Original blanking plates shall be used for space(s) (i.e. outgoing way(s)
without miniature circuit breaker(s)) as indicated in the drawings.
1.11 The distribution board shall comply to IEC 61439-3: Low-voltage

switchgear and control gear assemblies. Distribution boards intended to be
operated by ordinary persons (DBO)
TS/E/S12/1
2. Construction
2.1 The distribution boards shall conform to the following construction to form a
single or group of boards as indicated on the accompanied distribution
boards drawings.
Distribution board bus structure shall have the same current rating
(ampere frame) of the incoming breakers as shown on the
accompanied distribution boards drawings. In any case, a current
density of max. 155 Amperes per sq. cm (1,000 amperes per sq.
in.) of cross-sectional area shall be maintained. However, the
ratings shall also be established by heat riser tests with maximum
hot spot temperature on any connector or busbar not exceeding
50oC rise above ambient temperature. Adequate conductor
dimension will not be accepted as an excuse for foregoing actual
heat tests. All the busbars shall be of tinned hard drawn copper
rated at 200 A. Pre-drilled copper neutral bar of full current rating
and pre-drilled copper earth bar of size equal to incoming feeder
earth cable shall be provided and neatly arranged. Neutral and
earth bars shall be of solderless mechanical type connectors. The
neutral bars shall be mounted to the distribution boards by non-
hygroscopic insulators. The insulation of resistance for neutral bars
to the metal enclosure shall be infinity and for earth bars to the
metal enclosure shall be zero. The number of neutral bar terminals
to be provided shall be the same as the total number of branch
circuit breakers ways plus one for incoming feeder neutral cable.
The number of earth bar terminals to be provided shall be the same
as the total number of branch circuit breakers ways plus one for
incoming feeder earth cable and plus two for the separate earthing
points for the equipments/accessories. Phase bussing shall be full
length without reduction. Busbar taps for distribution boards with
single pole branches shall be arranged for sequence phase
connection of the branch circuit devices that allows complete
flexibility of circuit arrangement (1, 2 or 3 - pole circuit breakers).
Phase busbars shall be fully protected with an integral, high impact,
thermoplastic shroud.
TS/E/S12/2
b) Miniature Circuit Breakers (MCB)
Miniature circuit breakers shall be equipped with individually

insulated, braced and protected connectors. The front face of all
miniature circuit breakers shall be flush with each other. Miniature
circuit breakers shall refer to technical specification miniature circuit
breakers (MCBs) for distribution board. Space provisions for
additional circuit breakers shall be so designed that additional
breakers shall be plugged-on to the bus-tap by pressure without
using additional connectors, cable or copper bar links, modification
or alteration to the distribution board.
Each distribution board, as a complete unit, shall have a rating

equal to or greater than the integrated equipment rating shown on
the drawings. Such rating shall be established by test with the
circuit breakers mounted on the distribution boards. The short-
circuit tests on the circuit breaker and on the distribution structure
shall be made simultaneously by connecting the fault to each
distribution board circuit breaker with the distribution board
connected to its rated voltage source. The method of testing shall
be according to proposed British Standard (B.S.) pertaining to
listing of miniature circuit breakers for high-short circuit capacity
ratings. The source shall be capable of supplying the specified
distribution board short-circuit current or greater. Test data
showing the completion of such test upon the entire range of
distribution boards to be furnished shall be submitted to the
Superintending Officer, if requested by him/her, with or before
the submission of drawings for approval. Testing of distribution
board circuit breakers for short-circuit rating only with the circuit
breaker individually mounted and testing of the bus structure by
applying a fixed fault to the bus structure alone is not acceptable.
TS/E/S12/3
d) Cabinet
Distribution board assembly shall be enclosed in a zinc plated sheet

steel cabinet unless otherwise stated. The rigidity and gauge of
steel shall be as specified in British Standards. Doors of all
distribution boards shall be lockable by means of a barrel-type lock
with detachable master-keys. Hinged sheet steel door over 1.2 m
long shall be equipped with two (2) safety cylinder locks. Top and
bottom walls shall be removable for the ease of cutting rectangular
holes for the connection of metal trunkings. The steel enclosure
shall be anti-rust treated and finished with an electrostatically
deposited light grey powder coating. The hinged door shall conceal
the retaining screws of the front cover to prevent unauthorized
personnel removing the front cover. Flush mounting distribution
board shall have removable, adjustable depth interiors to allow for
varying thickness of wall finishes. All the ventilation louvre shall
complete with very fine wire mesh net welded permanently on the
inside of the panel.
e) Safety Barriers
The distribution board interior assembly shall be dead front with

distribution board front removed (i.e. cover with approved thickness
of insulation board). Also, it shall be possible to change branch
circuit load connections without personal exposure to any live side
bussing on live terminals. Spaces for future installation of circuit
breakers shall be covered by clip-on type of non-metallic plates.
Main lugs or main circuit breaker shall have barriers on live sides.
The barrier in front of the main lugs shall be hinged to a fixed part of
the interior. The end of the bus structure opposite the mains shall
have barriers. Ampere clearance shall be provided between 'live'
parts and the sheet-steel protection to allow cables to be brought to
their respective terminals in a neat and workmanlike manner.
2.2 Three phase and neutral distribution boards shall be designed in such a
way that three (3) single-pole breakers shall be replaced by one (1)
three-pole breaker of the same frame size to give 3-phase 400 Volt
A.C. supply or vice versa without altering the bus or adding jumper
cables or copper links, no comb bus bar shall be used. The neutral bar
shall not locate near to panel edges. The minimum short-circuit capacity
mentioned in the Technical Specifications or indicated on the distribution
board drawings shall be maintained.
2.3 All distribution board shall also be designed for bottom incoming and top
outgoing circuitry unless otherwise stated.
TS/E/S12/4
3. Labelling
3.1 Thermal marking on approved marker label or foil tape system for
large permanent individual number shall be affixed permanently to each
branch circuit breaker and incoming main circuit breaker in an uniform
position.
heat shrinkable tubes system according to the 'As Built' distribution
board drawings and the Contractor shall in addition hang a good quality
plastic bag beside the distribution board with a copy of floor plan or a
portion of the floor plan which is served by the associated distribution
board, and a typewritten table showing the circuit numbers and room
numbers/designations in approved arrangement according to the 'As Built'
circuit breakers layout of each distribution board.
3.3 All neutral and earth continuity conductors shall be installed in sequence
and numbered with thermal marking on PVC or heat shrinkable tubes
system to label according to the circuit numbers of the "As-Built"
distribution boards drawings.
easy identification. The sequence of numbers shall be as follows:
1L1, 1L2, 1L3, 2L1, 2L2, 2L3, 3L1, 3L2, 3L3, 4L1, 4L2, 4L3, 5L1, 5L2, 5L3,
6L1, 6L2, 6L3, etc.
3.5 All distribution boards shall be clearly, permanently labelled according to

the 'As-Built' distribution boards drawings and also indicate its tap off from
designation, ampere etc by engraved traffolyte ivorine labels (BLACK in
white lettering for normal supply, RED in white lettering for emergency
supply).
TS/E/S12/5
SECTION 13 - SINGLE PHASE COMBINED LIGHTING AND POWER DISTRIBUTION

BOARDS
1. General
1.1 Single phase circuit breaker distribution boards shall be of the dead-front
safety type equipped with thermal magnetic miniature circuit breakers of
the frame sizes, types and ampere trip ratings specified on the
accompanied distribution board drawings.
1.2 All distribution boards shall be rated at 230 Volt A.C. 50 Hz 2 wire supply
and shall comply with the latest British Standard BS 5486-13 for consumer
units.
1.3 Distribution boards shall have general purpose enclosures and shall be
surface mounted except where otherwise indicated (FM) for flush
mounting.
1.4 All miniature circuit breakers (MCBs), single phase, three phase circuit
breaker distribution boards shall be from the same manufacturer.
1.5 All circuit breaker distribution boards shall be of the approved type.
1.6 All doors of circuit breakers distribution boards shall be equipped with
master-keyed safety cylinder locks to prevent unauthorized personnel to
switch on or off the main and branch breakers.
1.7 Miniature circuit breakers (MCBs) shall refer to the technical specification
of miniature circuit breakers.
1.8 The minimum short-circuit capacities of R.M.S. symmetrical amperes of

circuit breaker distribution boards and incoming circuit breakers, if
applicable, shall be of the same kA rating of the specified short-circuit
capacities of the miniature circuit breaker.
1.9 The interior assembly for the connection and mounting of MCB must be of
1.10 Original blanking plates shall be used for space(s) (i.e. outgoing way(s)
without miniature circuit breaker(s)).
1.11 The distribution board shall comply to IEC 61439-3: Low-voltage

switchgear and control gear assemblies. Distribution boards intended to be
operated by ordinary persons (DBO)
TS/E/S13/1
2. Construction
2.1 The distribution boards shall conform to the following construction to form a
single board as indicated on the accompanied distribution boards
drawings.
Distribution board bus structure shall have the same current rating
(ampere frame) of the incoming breakers as shown on the
accompanied distribution boards drawings. In any case, a current
density of max. 155 Amperes per sq. cm of cross-sectional area
shall be maintained. However, the ratings shall also be established
by heat riser tests with maximum hot spot temperature on any
connector or busbar not exceeding 40 oC rise above ambient
temperature. Adequate conductor dimension will not be accepted
as an excuse for foregoing actual heat tests. Busbars shall be of
tinned hard drawn copper rated at 100 A. Pre-drilled copper neutral
bar of full current rating and pre-drilled copper earth bar of size
equal to incoming feeder earth cable shall be provided and neatly
arranged. Neutral and earth bars shall be of solderless mechanical
type connectors. The neutral bars shall be mounted to the
distribution boards by non-hygroscopic insulators. The insulation of
resistance for neutral bars to the metal enclosure shall be infinity
and for earth bars to the metal enclosure shall be zero. The
number of neutral bar terminals to be provided shall be the same as
the total number of branch circuit breakers ways plus one for
incoming feeder. The number of earth bar terminals to be provided
shall be the same as the total number of branch circuit breakers
ways plus one for incoming feeder plus two for the separate
earthing points for the equipments/accessories.
b) Miniature Circuit Breakers (MCB)
Miniature circuit breakers shall be equipped with individually

insulated, braced and protected connectors. The front face of all
miniature circuit breakers shall be flush with each other. Miniature
circuit breakers shall refer to technical specification of miniature
circuit breakers (MCBs) for distribution board.
TS/E/S13/2
Each distribution board, as a complete unit, shall have a rating

equal to or greater than the integrated equipment rating shown on
the drawings. Such rating shall be established by test with the
circuit breakers mounted on the distribution boards. The short-
circuit tests on the circuit breaker and on the distribution structure
shall be made simultaneously by connecting the fault to each
distribution board circuit breaker with the distribution board
connected to its rated voltage source. The method of testing shall
be according to proposed British Standard (B.S.) pertaining to
listing of miniature circuit breakers for high-short circuit capacity
ratings. The source shall be capable of supplying the specified
distribution board short-circuit current or greater.
Test data showing the completion of such test upon the entire
range of distribution boards to be furnished shall be submitted
to the Superintending Officer, if requested by him/her, with or
before the submission of drawings for approval. Testing of
distribution board circuit breakers for short-circuit rating only with
the circuit breaker individually mounted and testing of the bus
structure by applying a fixed fault to the bus structure alone is not
acceptable.
d) Cabinet
Distribution board assembly shall been closed in a zinc plated sheet

steel cabinet unless otherwise stated. The rigidity and gauge of
steel shall be as specified in British Standards. Doors of all
distribution boards shall be lockable by means of a barrel-type lock
with detachable master-keys. The steel enclosure shall be anti-rust
treated and finished with an electrostatically deposited light grey
powder coating. The hinged door shall conceal the retaining
screws of the front cover to prevent unauthorized personnel
removing the front cover. Flush mounting distribution board shall
have removable, adjustable depth interiors to allow for varying
thickness of wall finishes.
e) Safety Barriers
The distribution board interior assembly shall be dead front with

distribution board front removed (i.e. cover with approved thickness
of insulation board). Also, it shall be possible to change branch
circuit load connections without personal exposure to any live side
bussing on live terminals. Spaces for future installation of circuit
breakers shall be covered by clip-on type of non-metallic plates.
Main lugs or main circuit breaker shall have barriers on live sides.
The barrier in front of the main lugs shall be hinged to a fixed part of
the interior. The end of the bus structure opposite the mains shall
have barriers. Ampere clearance shall be provided between 'live'
parts and the sheet-steel protection to allow cables to be brought to
their respective terminals in a neat and workmanlike manner.
TS/E/S13/3
3. Labelling
3.1 Thermal marking on approved marker label or foil tape system for
large permanent individual number shall be affixed permanently to each
branch circuit breaker and incoming main circuit breaker in an uniform
position.
heat shrinkable tubes system according to the 'As Built' distribution
board drawings and the Contractor shall in addition hang a good quality
plastic bag beside the distribution board with a copy of floor plan or a
portion of the floor plan which is served by the associated distribution
board, and a typewritten table showing the circuit numbers and room
numbers/designations in approved arrangement according to the 'As Built'
circuit breakers layout of each distribution board.
3.3 All neutral and earth continuity conductors shall be installed in sequence
and numbered with thermal marking on PVC or heat shrinkable tubes
system to label according to the circuit numbers of the "As-Built"
distribution boards drawings.
easy identification.
3.5 All distribution boards shall be clearly, permanently labelled according to

the 'As-Built' distribution boards drawings and also indicate its tap off from
designation, ampere etc by thermal marking on PVC or heat shrinkable
tubes system and thermal marking on marker label or foil tape system.
TS/E/S13/4
SECTION 14 - ALTERNATING CURRENT (A.C.) CONTACTORS FOR LIGHTING

CIRCUITS
1. General
1.1 The alternating current (A.C.) contactor shall be designed for 230 V. A.C.
50 Hz supply and 400V A.C. 50Hz supply and for controlling the line side
of the lighting or power distribution board(s).
1.2 Although the number of operations is low, the contactor, in most case, will
close and open under full load at p.f. = 0.5.
1.3 The contactor shall be enclosed in an enclosure that is in turn mounted in

a totally enclosed room. Therefore, the internal temperature must be taken
into account.
1.4 Contactor coil shall be protected by an appropriate BS 88 / BS HD /IEC

60269 cartridge fuse.
1.5 Contactor shall comply to following standard:
a) IEC 60947-4-1: Low-voltage switchgear and control gear - Part 4-1:

Contactors and motor- starters - Electromechanical contactors and
motor-starters.
b) IEC 60947-5-1: Low-voltage switchgear and control gear - Part 5-1:

Control circuit devices and switching elements - Electromechanical
control circuit devices
2. Construction
2.1 The contactors shall be silent in operation.
2.2 High quality silicon steel lamination shall be used for the magnetic cores
construction to reduce eddy current.
2.3 Shading rings or approved type windings shall be incorporated in the

magnetic cores to prevent the contactor from chattering.
2.4 Fixed and moving parts shall be accurately grinded to ensure silent
operation.
2.5 The coil shall be designed to operate from - 15% to +10% of the nominal
240 V 50 Hz, and to withstand mechanical shocks caused by the closing
and opening of the contactors as well as electromagnetic shocks due to
current flow in its turns. It shall be highly resistant to excess voltages,
physical shock and corrosive atmospheres. The coil shall be made of
reinforced enamelled copper wire and vacuum impregnated.
TS/E/S14/1
2.6 Poles shall be designed to quick-make and quick-break the current in the
power circuit and to allow the flow of the rated current of the contactor in
continuous service without overheating. They shall be fitted with silver
cadmium oxide contacts providing high mechanical strength and
resistance to welding. An effective blowout coil to extinguish the arc which
is created between the fixed part and the moving part when the contactor
opens under load condition shall be provided for each pole.
2.7 One instantaneous normally closed and one instantaneous normally open
auxiliary contacts shall be provided for each contactor.
2.8 The coil and cores shall be mounted on shock absorbers.
2.9 The contacts shall be design to be able to carry a minimum load current
same as the incoming breaker/connector isolator to or otherwise stipulated
elsewhere.
2.10 The contactors shall be design to provide a minimum operation of 100,000

times.
2.11 There shall be a bypass MCB installed for the bypass of the contactor
during testing.
TS/E/S14/2
SECTION 15 - ISOLATOR (NON-AUTOMATIC MOULDED CASE CIRCUIT BREAKER

TYPE)
1. General
1.1 Isolator shall of non-automatic moulded case circuit breaker (MCCB without
trip unit) type housed in an approved metal housing.
1.2 All isolators shall comply with latest BS 3185 and mounted at 1200 mm above
finished floor level unless otherwise stated or directed by Superintending
Officer.
1.3 Isolators shall be heave-duty pattern non-automatic MCCB in an approved

galvanized metal cabinet treated with chemical compound to prevent paint for
peeling off from the iron surface, a coat of Chromate Primer and two coats of
polyurethane finish (grey) or approved equivalent. Front access doors shall be
fitted with dust-excluding gaskets.
1.4 Isolators shall be 500 V rating and shall be clearly marked with their current
rating.
1.5 Non-Auto moulded case circuit breakers shall conform to the latest British
Standard BS 3871 part 2 or IEC 60947-2.
1.6 Isolator shall comply to the following standard:
a) SS CP5: Code of practice for electrical installations
b) BS 3185: Heavy Duty Composite Units Of Air Break Switches And

Fuses For Voltages Not Exceeding 660 V
c) BS 3871-1: Specification for miniature and moulded case circuit-

breakers. Miniature air-break circuit-breakers for a.c. circuits
d) BS EN 60669-2-4: Switches for household and similar fixed

electrical installations. Particular requirements
e) BS EN 60898-1: Electrical accessories. Circuit-breakers for

overcurrent protection for household and similar installations.
Circuit-breakers for a.c and d.c. operation
f) BS EN / IEC 60947-2: Specification for low-voltage switchgear and

controlgear. Circuit-breakers
1.7 Isolator shall of on load switching type.
1.8 The metal housing shall make of not less than 14 B.G. (2 mm) thick steel
sheet.
TS/E/S15/1
1.9 Extended rotary lever handle shall be interlocked with the housing door so
that they cannot be opened when the non-automatic MCCB is at the `on'
position. This operating handles shall be lockable in the "off" positions and
shall have visible on-off indication.
1.10 Nonmetallic, non-flammable insulating barriers shall be fitted between

adjacent terminals of the incoming and outgoing sides of the MCCB, if the
terminals of non-auto MCCB are busbar type.
1.11 The rating shall be permanently shown on the MCCB as well as on the
housing.
1.12 All steel doors shall be earthed to the enclosures by appropriate size of tinned
copper earth braids.
1.13 Isolators shall be approved by Superintending Officer.
2. Operation
Non-auto moulded case circuit breakers shall be operated by a toggle-type handle

and shall have a quick-make over-centre switching mechanism. All latch surfaces
shall be so constructed that they open and close simultaneously.
3. Construction
3.1 Breakers shall be completely enclosed in a moulded case. Contacts of circuit

breaker shall be of non-welding silver alloy.

position.
3.3 Arcing shall be extinguished rapidly and effectively by Arc-extinguishing

device, in normal switching to minimize deterioration of contacts and adjacent
3.4 Terminals shall be constructed to assure electrical efficiency and reliability,

with minimized possibility of localized heating.
TS/E/S15/2
SECTION 16 - LOW VOLTAGE CABLES AND INSTALLATION
1. General
1.1 Unless otherwise specified, all wires and cables shall be rated as per
specification, and conductors shall be of high conductivity stranded copper.
1.2 The following code is used throughout the specification and drawings.
a) PVC - Polyvinyl chloride insulated
b) PVC/PVC - Polyvinyl chloride insulated and

sheathed
c) PVC/DSTA/PVC - Polyvinyl chloride insulated, double

steel tape armored and polyvinyl
chloride oversheath.
d) PVC/SWA/PVC - Polyvinyl chloride insulated, steel tape

armoured and polyvinyl chloride
oversheath
e) XLPE/PVC - Cross-linked polyethylene insulated,

polyvinyl chloride oversheath
f) FR - Fire resistant layer with polyethylene

insulated, fire retardant low-smoke
and halogen free polyethylene
oversheathed.
1.3 Cables shall be delivered to site in the manufacturer's standard packing

with seals and labels intact, except that cables larger than 4 mm 2 may be
delivered in required lengths.
1.4 Colour code shall be according to Singapore Standard SS 638.
1.5 When necessary, cable ends shall be temporary sealed and tested before
connection.
1.6 All cable ducts and pipes shall be sealed by the Sub-Contractor.
1.7 No joint will be allowed without the consent of the Superintending Officer.
1.8 Cable drums for MICS/PVC cables, PVC/DSTA/PVC and etc. shall be
treated by wood preservative and insecticide.
1.9 The cables shall comply to the following standards:
a) SS CP5: Code of practice for electrical installations
b) SS 299 - 1: Fire resistant cables - Performance requirements for

cables required to maintain circuit integrity under fire conditions
c) SS 358: Specification for polyvinyl chloride insulated cables of rated

voltages up to and including 450/750 V
d) BS 6004: Electric cables. PVC insulated and PVC sheathed cables

for voltages up to and including 300/500 V, for electric power and
lighting
TS/E/S16/1
e) BS 6724:Electric cables. Thermosetting insulated, armoured cables

for voltages of 600/1000 V and 1900/3300 V, having low emission
of smoke and corrosive gases when affected by fire
f) BS EN 60228: Conductors of insulated cables
2. Polyvinyl Chloride (PVC) or PVC/PVC Cables
2.1 Cable PVC-insulated only, and PVC-insulated PVC-sheathed cable shall

be manufactured according to British Standard BS 6004:2000.
2.2 The cable shall be delivered to site on reels, with seals and labels intact
and shall be of one manufacturer throughout the installation.
2.3 The cable shall be installed direct from the reels and any cable which has
become kinked, twisted or damaged in any way shall be rejected. The
installation shall be wired on the loop-in system ie. wiring shall terminate at
definite points (switch positions, lighting points, etc) and no intermediate
connections or joints will be permitted. Cables shall not pass through or
terminate in lighting fittings.
2.4 Where it is necessary to make direct connection between the hard wiring
and flexible cord, this shall be done means of porcelain-shielded
connectors with twin screws.
2.5 The termination shall be suitable for the type of terminal provided and shall
be either sweated lugs of appropriate size, or eyelet or crimped type cable
termination, all of reputable manufacture. Shakeproof washers shall be
used where electric motors are connected.
2.6 Where cable cores are larger than terminal holes, the cables shall be fitted
with thimbles. For all single connections, they shall be doubled or twisted
back on themselves and pinching screws shall not be permitted to cut the
conductor. Cables shall be firmly twisted together before the connection is
made.
2.7 In no circumstances shall cables be trapped under plain washers as a

termination.
2.8 Cables shall be coloured in accordance with CP5 standard.
2.9 Only two cables shall generally be bunched together at one terminal.
2.10 In exceptional cases three cables may be bunched together at one terminal
with the authority of the S.O. given on site.
2.11 PVC cable shall be used in conduit or trunking.
2.12 PVC/PVC cable shall be used on cable tray.
2.13 All cables shall be strapped or tied to the cable support system using
stainless steel cable ties or approved strappings.
TS/E/S16/2
2.14 The stainless steel cable ties and strap shall be tested and approved for
used in fire resistant wiring systems with minimum grade of 304.
2.15 The spacing of the straps/ties shall conform to the manufacturer

recommendation but shall in all cases not exceed 1 metre interval
3. PVC/SWA/PVC Cable
3.1 PVC-insulated single-wire armoured PVC sheath cables shall be

600/1000 volt grade and shall comply with BS 6346:1997.
3.2 The cable shall comprise round or shaped conductors, of equal cross-
sectional area, composed of high-conductivity plain annealed copper wire
insulated with PVC, coloured for identification. The cores to be laid up
circular and sheathed with PVC. The cable shall be served with one layer
of steel-wire armour and sheathed overall with PVC.
3.3 The cable shall be manufactured and supplied in one length on a suitable
drum. No through joints will be allowed. All cables shall be of one
manufacture.
3.4 Where individual cables are run on the surface suitable supports shall be
fitted to give minimum clearance of 15 mm between cables and face of
structure. Where cables are installed vertically, the cable shall be gripped
firmly by clamps of an approved pattern.
3.5 Where cables are grouped and run on the surface they shall be carried on
wrought-iron brackets or purpose-made clips of approved design, fixed at
not more than 600 mm centres.
3.6 All PVC/SWA/PVC cables run on the surface shall be adequately protected
to a height of 2 m from the ground.
4. Fire Resistant (FR) Cables
4.1 Cable shall be manufactured in accordance with Singapore Standard

SS299.
4.2 Cable shall be tested in accordance to Category C, W & Z of SS299 Part 1

for fire resistant, water and mechanical shock respectively.
4.3 All fire resistant cable shall be Halogen free and conform to IEC 754 Part 1.
4.4 Armoured FR cables shall be tested in accordance to BS6724:1997.
4.5 The fire resistant cable shall suitable for surface wiring and wiring in
conduit or duct. The cable shall be both fire resistant and flame retardant
to IEC 331 and IEC 332 respectively. It shall be approved by the local
authority for use as fire resistant cables in emergency circuits applications.
Test Certificates for the compliance to IEC standards shall be
submitted with the tender.
TS/E/S16/3
4.6 The conductor shall be made of stranded, soft anneal copper wires to BS
6360. The outer jacket shall be made of fire retardant low chlorine PVC.
Core identification of the cable shall be by colour of the insulation
according to SS 638 with amendments. The maximum resistance of the
conductors at 20oC shall not exceed that specified in BS 6360:1991.
4.7 The cable and accessories shall be designed for operation up to a

conductor temperature of 105oC.
4.8 The cable shall be suitable for installation by conventional methods without
requiring expensive special tools, seals or terminations. They shall be non-
hygroscopic, maintenance free and insensitive to vibrations.
4.9 Cables shall be strapped or tied to the cable support system using
stainless steel cable ties or strappings.
4.10 The stainless steel cable ties and strap shall be tested and approved for
used in fire resistant wiring systems with minimum grade of 304.
4.11 The spacing of the straps/ties shall conform to the manufacturer

recommendation but shall in all cases not exceed 1 metre interval.
4.12 As far as possible, joints shall be avoided. Where this is not possible due
to extra long run, prior written approval shall be obtained from the S.O. This
shall include the joint method and material use which shall not undermine
the fire, mechanical and electrical integrity of the cable under all
circumstances.
5. Multipair Control Cables
5.1 The control cable shall conform to BS 3573:1990, BS 6346:1997 suitable

for operation on 110V DC control cables shall be filled version PVC
insulated with copper tape shielding, steel wire armoured and PVC
outersheath.
5.2 The conductors shall be high conductivity tinned annealed copper wire of
1.5 mm2 complied with BS 6360:1991 and tested as to BS 2011:Part 2.
The conductors shall be individually insulated with colour coded PVC to BS
6246 and BS 6346 twisted into pairs, right hand laid to form a compact,
symmetrical multipair cable.
TS/E/S16/4
SECTION 17 - LUMINARIES
1. GENERAL
1.1. All light fittings shown and listed on the drawings and schedules shall be
provided and installed. The supplied luminaries and ballast shall comply to
safety requirements and energy efficient. The light fittings shall be supplied
and manufactured by a reputable manufacturer.
1.2. Fittings with non-standard suspension lengths shall be ordered to the correct
lengths to suit mounting height as indicated on the drawings and schedules.
The installation of light fittings shall include all necessary assembling, wiring
and erection.
1.3. Surface mounted LED / fluorescent fittings shall be mounted either directly or
on suspensions from two BS conduit boxes installed at the spacing required
to suit the fitting.
1.4. All ballast / LED driver shall be type tested/approved Singapore Accreditation
Council accredited testing laboratory in accordance with the latest IEC 60598-
1, IEC 60598-2. and IEC 61347
1.5. Luminaries and associated electrical components and wiring shall comply with
latest Safety Standard B.S. 4533 or equivalent.
1.6. All locally manufactured luminaries, driver and control gear shall carry the
approved certification label by Singapore Accreditation Council accredited
testing laboratory or Safety Mark.
1.7. All recessed LED / fluorescent fixtures shall be hanged by four number of
approved fast slide spring steel clips and adjustable steel wire hangers of
minimum static load of 30kg.
1.8. All LED / fluorescent tubes shall be of colour temperature 3000oK / 40000K /
6000 oK with colour rendering index 80 or approved manufacture filled with
standard bi-pin caps, unless otherwise stated or directed by Superintending
Officer.
1.9. All LED / fluorescent tubes for Hospital/Laboratory/Medical Clinic/Office

Project or others shall be selectable of range colour temperature from
3000oK / 40000K / 6000 oK with colour rendering index 80 or approved
manufacture filled with standard bi-pin caps, unless otherwise stated or
directed by Superintending Officer. All the tube colour temperature shall be
selected by SO before any installation
1.10. All LED module, Surface Mount Technology LED, PL, PLC or SL lamps shall
of colour temperature 3000oK / 40000K / 6000 oK with colour rendering index
80 or approved equal.
1.11. All LED / tubular fluorescent lamp shall comply with latest EN IEC 60081.
TS/E/S17/1
1.12. Unless otherwise stated, all recessed LED / fluorescent lighting fitting
diffusers shall be of K15 clear acrylic diffusers of thickness 5 mm (0.20
inches)
1.13. The lenses, louvers or other light diffusing elements that contained in there
movable frames must be ensure that they are positively held within the frames
so that the hinging or other motion of the frame will not cause the diffusing
element to drop out and with ease of maintenance/replacement.
1.14. Unless otherwise stated, louvers of mirror reflector lighting fittings and down
lighters shall be made from high quality, resistant to finger marks, HSC-
polished high gloss anodized 99.99% pure aluminum.
1.15. All Escape lighting, Emergency lighting and Exit lighting shall comply with
latest Singapore Standard SS 563 Part 1, Part 2 and the latest fire code from
FSSD. Exit light shall be of LED type.
1.16. Unless otherwise stated, all the lighting fixtures installed in outdoor area shall
be IP65.
1.17. Tungsten Lamps shall be supplied and filled to all points and fittings shown
and listed on the drawings and schedules. Tungsten filament lamps of 40 to
100 watt (inclusive) shall be of the coiled type. Lamps shall be pearl-finished
when filled in open shades or in globes which are unobscured and shall be of
the clear type when filled in closed units of opalescent glassware or any other
type of fitting selected where the filament is not under direct vision.
1.18. Unless otherwise stated, tungsten Lamp holders shall be of the bayonet-cap
type for tungsten lamps up to and including 150 watts, and of the Edison
screw type for larger lamps. Where they are integral with lighting fittings, they
shall be brass with porcelain interiors. For use with flexible pendants, they
shall be of white plastic with compression glands. Where batten lamp holders
are installed the lamp holders shall be of white plastic. In damp situations,
lamp holder shall be approved by S.O.
1.19. All lamp holders shall be lubricated with molybdenum disulphide to ensure
easy removal of threaded rings and lamps.
1.20. All LED driver, ballasts and low voltage transformers shall be enclosed in
approved, vented metal cabinets (IP42).
1.21. All low voltage transformers for tungsten halogen fixtures shall be supplied
from the original lighting fixture manufacturer and shall be one transformer for
each lighting fixture.
1.22. Information to prove that the self-contained emergency luminaries comply

fully with the specification and latest Singapore Standard SS 563 Part 1 and
Part 2 shall be furnished at the request of Superintending Officer.
1.23. Approved tough PVC covered flexible metal conduits with approved type of
connection glands and bushes shall be used for the connection between
lighting fittings to the ceiling outlet box.
TS/E/S17/2
1.24. For all luminaries with more than one lamp within the fixture, one ballast /LED
driver shall only be used for one lamp.
1.25. Luminaires that incorporate with smart sensors, it shall use unique connectors
to eliminate the unnecessary wrong connections for the luminaires during
cables looping of multiple LED luminaires. Connectors shall comply to SS 638
1.26. All lamp holders used for all light fixtures shall be of fire retardant type.
1.27. Sub-Contractor to submit the lux level calculation and power budget.
1.28. All light fixtures shall come with air return feature to ensure return airflow
circulations.
1.29. Where jet proof lighting fixtures are used, housing shall be made of fibre-glass
reinforced polyester and cover should be impact resistance polycarbonate
(PC) IK 08(2J). There should be at least 4 securing clips at each side of the
fixtures to act as a hinge for ease of maintenance.
1.30. For Auditorium, lights must be able to switch off in rows horizontally and
parallel to projection screen. Front rows of lights can be switched off for
projection.
1.31. To provide centralized control switch for lighting and all AV facilities.
1.32. Luminaires, except Interior Design light shall be type tested by approved third
party Accredited Test Labs or other recognized international testing body to
ensure compliance with the safety, reliability and performance standards as
specified. All necessary test reports of the luminaire and manufacturer’s in
house test procedures, warranty and relevant data shall be submitted to SO
for approval.
2. STANDARD AND CODE
All the luminaries, control gear, ballasts, drivers, lamp holder and related accessories
shall meet to the standard and regulation as follows:
(a) SS 638: Code of practice of electrical installations.
(b) SS 531: Code of practice for lighting of work places
(c) SS 563-1: Design, installation and maintenance of emergency lighting and

power supply systems in buildings - Part 1: Emergency lighting
(d) SS 563-2: Design, installation and maintenance of emergency lighting and

power supply systems in buildings - Part 2: Installation requirements and
maintenance procedures
(e) IEC 61347-1: Lamp control gear - General and safety requirements
TS/E/S17/3
(f) IEC 61347-2: Lamp control gear - Particular requirements for ballasts for
lighting
(g) BS 4533-102.1 / BS EN / IEC 60598-2-1: Luminaires. Particular requirements.

Specification for fixed general purpose luminaires
(h) BS EN 55015: Limits and methods of measurement of radio disturbance

characteristics of electrical lighting and similar equipment
(i) BS EN 55022: Information technology equipment. Radio disturbance

characteristics. Limits and methods of measurement
(j) BS EN 60081: Double Capped fluorescent lamps – Performance

Specifications
(k) BS EN / IEC 60155: Glow-starters for fluorescent lamps
(l) BS EN / IEC 60598-1: Luminaires General requirements and tests
(m) BS EN / IEC 60598-2: Luminaires. Particular requirements
(n) IEC /EN 60929 / VDE 0712-23: AC and/or DC-supplied electronic control gear
for tubular fluorescent lamps - Performance requirements
(o) BS EN 61000-3-2: Electromagnetic compatibility (EMC). Limits. Limits for

harmonic current emissions (equipment input current ≤16 A per phase)
(p) BS EN / IEC 61347-2-3: Lamp control gear. Particular requirements for a.c.
supplied electronic ballasts for fluorescent lamps
(q) BS EN / IEC 61347-2-8: Lamp control gear. Particular requirements for

ballasts for fluorescent lamps
(r) BS EN / IEC 61347-2-13: Lamp controlgear. Particular requirements for d.c.

or a.c. supplied electronic control gear for LED modules
(s) BS EN / IEC 61558: Safety of transformers, reactors, power supply units and
combinations thereof
(t) CISPR 15: Emissions from Luminaries and Ancillary Devices
(u) EN 50172 / VDE 0108-100: Emergency escape lighting systems
(v) EN 60555-2: Disturbances in supply systems caused by household

appliances and similar electrical equipment. Specification of harmonics
(w) EN 60928 / IEC 61347-1: Lamp controlgear. General and safety requirements
(x) EN 61547 / VDE 0875-15-2: Equipment for general lighting purposes - EMC
immunity requirements
TS/E/S17/4
(y) IEC 60400: Lamp holders and start holders for tubular fluorescent lamps
(z) IEC 60598-1: Luminaires. General requirements and tests (British Standard)
(aa) IEC 60598-2: Luminaires. Particular Requirements
(bb) IEC 60825: Safety of laser products
(cc) IEC 60838 - Part 1 and 2: Miscellaneous lamp holders
(dd) IEC 60947-7-1 Low-voltage switchgear and control gear - Part 7: Ancillary
equipment - Terminal blocks for copper conductors
(ee) IEC 61347-2-3: Lamp control gear. Particular requirements for a.c. supplied
electronic ballasts for fluorescent lamps.
(ff) IEC 62031: LED modules for general lighting – Safety specifications
(gg) IEC 62384: DC or AC supplied electronic control gear for LED modules -
Performance requirements
(hh) IEC 62471: Photobiological safety of lamps and lamp systems
(ii) IEC 62493: Assessment of lighting equipment related to human exposure to

electromagnetic fields
(jj) IEC 62722-Part 1 and Part 2: Luminaire performance
(kk) Ballast and any other luminaires and lighting components regulated as
Controlled Good defined by the Singapore Consumer Protection (Safety
Requirements) Registration Scheme (CPS) must be registered with the
authority in Singapore and bear the SAFETY Mark.
TS/E/S17/5
3. SAMPLE LUMINARIES
3.1 The Sub-Contractor will be required to submit full catalogue and samples of
each luminary to be used in this Sub-Contract for the approval of the
Superintending Officer. The manufacture’s catalogue sheets shall indicate
input and load electrical characteristics, ambient temperature rating, fitting
photometric, noise level rating and mounting methods.
3.2 The Sub-Contractor shall submit one sample of each type of

“Approved” luminaries as indicated in the drawings to the site office for
reference purpose. These samples shall be retained at the site office till
the end of the project.
4. PERFORMANCE GUARANTEE
The Sub-Contractor shall ensure all luminaries including all constructional materials,
electrical components and wiring, supplied to this Electrical Sub-Contract are of the
highest quality complying to the Specifications and specified standards. The
Superintending Officer reserves his/her right to select fittings, components, and
wirings at random for local testing in Singapore Accreditation Council accredited
testing laboratory. The cost of such tests and/or analyses affected elsewhere other
than at the works of the Electrical Sub-Contractor shall be borne by the Employer
should such tests prove satisfactory, but the Electrical Sub-Contractor shall be called
upon to pay all expenses incurred by the Employer in respect of any work or material
found to be defective on of inferior quality, adulterated or otherwise unacceptable.
5. METAL WORK
5.1. Unless otherwise stated the body of the luminaries shall be pressed or rolled
from quality electro-galvanized zinc coated steel sheet to form a rigid, robust,
top quality body as a basis for the complete unit. The gauge of metalwork and
material to be used shall be stated in the tender. However, it shall not be less
than 20 B.G. electro-galvanized zinc coated sheet steel. Any metalwork,
which in the opinion of the Superintending Officer is flimsy, inadequate and
not of good quality shall be rejected and replaced with the appropriate gauge
as requested by the Superintending Officer regardless of the gauge stated in
the tender. The body of the fluorescent lighting luminaire shall be finished as
specified in this section. The end caps shall be fabricated of gauge 20
electro-galvanised steel sheets in powder coat finish and permanently fixed at
the two ends. Contractor shall submit a sample of the actual light fitting to the
Superintending Officer (S.O.) for approval prior to bulk ordering.
5.2. Mounting screws, etc., shall be spot welded to the body.
5.3. The luminary fixture shall be constructed with the minimum number of joints.
All the unexposed joints shall be made by approved methods such as
welding, brazing. Soldered joints shall not be approved. Self-tapping methods
or rivets for fastening parts which shall be remove to gain access to electrical
components required service or replacement or fastening any electrical
components or their support shall not be used.
TS/E/S17/6
5.4. Unless otherwise stated, completely concealed hardware shall be applied to

the fixture luminary. All the exposed metal at joints shall be welded, fill with
weld materials, grind smooth and make free from light leaks by the inherent
design of the fixture body and frame. Weld ballast support studs, socket sable
studs and reflector support studs to fixture body.
5.5. The lamellae supplied shall be of 99.9% purity aluminium and the
performance of the entire construction produced light dispersion shall be of
uniformity and comply with the glare control standard in accordance to UK
norm CIBSE Lighting Guide 3(LG3). It shall not produce uneven diffusion of
light or dark spots when lit.
5.6. The luminaire must be able to accept a variety of diffusers (louver or fully
covered diffuser such as prismatic, polycarbonate etc) such that the diffuser
shall click on to the housing without the need of clips, springs or other foreign
attachment. This option of using diffusers shall be decided by Superintending
Officer (S.O.). Contractor shall include such cost in the tender sum. The
reflector shall be of gauge 20 electro-galvanized steel sheet in polyester
powder coat finish. The sectional profile shall be of waveform curvature with
2 heat resistant plastic head screws. The gap between the luminaire’s
housing and the reflector shall not be seen from normal view. The reflector
shall be of one-piece construction with an easy to secure one twist locking
mechanism for convenient removal for cleaning. A white end reflector of the
same material shall be included to increase the lighting efficiency of the fitting
and simultaneously provide protection to the interior of the fitting. The
electronic ballast shall be mounted on removable gear tray with expansion
slot and this tray can be removed easily with hinges. The removable gear
tray must be able to cater any types and brands of ballasts to be mounted on
the gear tray.
5.7. The luminaries shall comply with international Protection IPXX or better for
the specified fitting. Knock-out cable entry to be provided at side of the metal
end caps. The size of the cable opening to be approximately 20mm x 40mm
or of 20mm diameter hole with rubber bush to facilitate cable entry as per
existing luminaries position at site. There should be no cable opening from
the back of the luminaries as the wires are surface run in trunking or conduit.
The two tightening screws for the white reflector should be made of high
temperature ABS plastic located behind the tube to ensure better light
efficiency and provide better looking to the overall design of the luminaries.
For safety reason, the lamp holder’s brackets are to be secured permanently
to the fixture. The wiring terminal block in the luminaire shall be provided
type. Plastic terminal lock should not be used.
5.8. For all laboratory and office lighting, the luminaries body shall be able to
withstand a change of environment humidity from 30% to 100 % without
condensation, corrosion and rusty. Humidity test to ISO 6270 with duration of
1000 hours shall be carried out.
TS/E/S17/7
6. PAINTING
6.1. All metalwork associated with the luminaries excluding auxiliaries shall be de-
greased, cleaned, phosphate coated, and shall be finished with best quality
100% “white” polyester powder coating complying with PR12 outdoor
durable polyester powder coating whereby the paint shall not discolour. The
finished painting work shall have an average thickness of 50 to 60 microns
and shall provide a very high resistance to Ultra Violet light. Care shall be
taken to treat all edges of sheet metal.
6.2. Any fitting on which the painting work is in the opinion of the Superintending
Officer defective shall be rejected.
6.3. All the exposed metal surfaces (brass, bronze, aluminium and others) and
finished casting except chromium-plated or stainless steel parts shall be
treated with an even coating of high grade methacrylate lacquer, or
transparent epoxy. Anodize exposed aluminium surfaces for corrosion
resistance.
6.4. The fixtures shall be provided with a final synthetic, high temperature bakes
enamel coating of colour and finish and also all the white baked enamel
reflective surfaces shall have a minimum reflectance of 94% unless otherwise
stated.
7. CONVENTIONAL BALLASTS
7.1 Ballasts shall be designed for 240 volts (plus 4% minus 6%) to 50 Hz supply
and shall be filled in a totally enclosed standard mild steel casing and it shall
be of high power factor, super low temperature rise of the energy-saving type,
rapid start, extra low noise level, good heat dissipation, minimum radio and
frequency interferences and to provide highly excellent good resistant barrier.
7.2 Each unit shall be filled with a 16 amp rated spring-grip quick-connect
terminals for speedy installation.
7.3 Ballasts shall be mounted not less than 100 mm (4”) 7 apart.
7.4 For luminarie with one or two lamps, one ballast shall only be used for one
lamp.
7.5 The ballast shall be rigidly mounted, unless specifically indicated to the
contrary, to the inside of the top fixture housing, with the ballast surfaces and
housing in complete contact for efficient conduction of ballast heat. Provide
only fixtures whose design, fabrication, and assembly prevent overheating or
cycling of lamps and ballasts under any condition of use.
7.6 Ballasts shall comply with latest S.S. 24 and bearing the local authority trade
mark respectively. They shall be of high reliability, silent in operation, and
shall be designed suitable for the electrical characteristics of the electrical
circuits to which they are connected, and which shall be suitable for operating
the fluorescent tubes supplied to this Electrical Sub-Contract to give full lumen
output and to ensure long lamp life.
TS/E/S17/8
7.7 The ballast provided shall have the lowest sound-rating “Class A” available for
the lamps/tubes specified and clearly shown their respective sound ratings.
Replace ballasts found by S.O. to be duly noisy, without additional cost, prior
to acceptance of the work.
7.8 The ballast shall have a two (2) year warranty and guarantee for its
performance from the date of acceptance of the completed installation.
7.9 Fluorescent ballasts shall be extra low loss type with maximum losses and
thermal data as stated below:
Ballast Cold Hot loss Thermal Data Thermal Data tw

Wattage loss (W) (W) tw 130 normal 130 abnormal
(delta t) (delta t)
7, 9, 11 3 3.5 20 35
10 4.5 5 30 40
18/20 5 5.5 30 40
2 x 18 4.5 5 25 50
36/40 4.5 5 30 60
58/65 7 7.5 35 70
8. HF ELECTRONIC BALLASTS FOR T8 TUBE
8.1. The high frequency (HF) electronic ballast shall designed to operate
Triphosphor fluorescent tubes at full initial lumen output stated by fluorescent
tube manufacturer with the system power as stated below
Fluorescent Tube (watt) Max. System Power (watt)

1 x TLD 18W 19
2 x TLD 18W 37
1 x TLD 36W 36
2 x TLD 36W 72
1 x TLD 58W 56
2 x TLD 58W 112
Fluorescent Tube (watt) Max. System Power (watt)

1 x PLS 9W 10
1 x PLS 11W 14.5
1 x PLS 10W 10.5
1 x PLC 13W 15
1 x PLC 18W 19.5
1 x PLL 18W 19
1 x PLL 24W 25
2 x PLL 24W 49
1 x PLL 36W 36
2 x PLL 36W 72
TS/E/S17/9
8.2. The electronic ballast shall full comply with the following standards and tested
by Singapore Accreditation Council accredited testing laboratory and bear
label of approval:
a) Radio Interference
CISPR15 BS EN 55015
VDE 0875 part2
b) Harmonics
IEC 61000-3-2 BS EN 61000-3-2

VDE 0712 part23 BS EN 61000-3-2
c) Safety Requirements
IEC 61347 (FL) IEC 61347 (Tr.)

BS EN 61347 VDE 0712 part 22, 24
d) Performance Requirements
IEC 60929 (FL) IEC 61047 (Tr.)

BS EN 60929/61047 VDE 0712 part 23, 25
8.3. Each ballast shall consists of the following high quality components:
a) low-pass filter coil to limit harmonic distortions and radio interference.

It also protects the electronic components against high mains voltage
peaks. Harmonic distortions should not exceed 28.8% for 3rd
harmonic, 7% for 5th harmonic, 4% for 7th harmonic and 3% for 9th
harmonic as per BS EN / IEC 61000-3-2 standard and VDE 0712 part
23, 25. Radio interference suppression shall be within limits as defined
in the CJSPR 15 regulations and BS EN 55015 standard and FCC
part 1 8C and VDE 0875 part 2. It shall meet with the requirements of
VDE 0107 section 7 regarding magnetic field radiation. Conventional
electromagnetic filter shall only be used.
b) Rectifier
c) HF power oscillator to transform the DC voltage to an HIF voltage of

over 25 KHz.
d) Lamp stabilization section.
8.4. The electronic ballast shall automatically switch off when a lamp fails to ignite.
It shall also be automatically operational when a new lamp is in place. No
damage to the electronic ballast when any lamp has been removed and
replaced with the electrical supply to the particular light fitting has not been
isolated.
TS/E/S17/10
8.5. It shall be equipped with a built-in fuse to protect the power supply against
any possible short-circuit in the ballast and/or excessive heating of the ballast.
8.6. It shall be incorporated an overvoltage detection circuit to switch off the

lamp(s) when the mains voltage rises above 280 VAC. The ballast shall
withstand mains voltages up to 230 - 240 VAC 50 Hz without negative
influences.
8.7. The open-circuit voltage of the ballast shall be less than 60% of the starting
voltage for 1 to 2 second during the initial pre-heating period of the lamp
electrodes to prevent a cold-start of the lamp, which can cause blackening of
the electrodes and hence shortens the life span of lamp. The electronic
ballast shall increase the rated lamp-life of the fluorescent tubes by up to 50%
and maintain a high 85% of light output even at the end of its lamp-life.
8.8. The Mean time Between Failures (MTBF) of the electronic ballast should be
at least 100,000 hours. Hence, manufacturer and local sole distributor/agent
must give guaranteed period of 10 years, replacing malfunctioned ballasts
without any cost to the Owner.
8.9. The ballast loss shall not be greater than 4W per lamp way with power factor
greater than 96% when operating under a main supply of 235 Volt 50 Hz.
8.10. The ballast is optimized for standard commercial T8 krypton lamp.
8.11. They are silent in operation, low weight, low profile (for single-lamp ballast)
and resistant to over voltage.
8.12. The p.f. of the electronic ballast shall not be less than 0.9 lagging.
8.13. The manufacturer and local sole agent of HF electronic ballast shall ensure
that their products are able to interface 100% and work satisfactory with the
self-contained emergency (battery powered) kit to achieve optimum result.
8.14. The ballast manufacturer & local sole agent shall supply instruments to
approve that their ballast loss, voltage and p.f. are fully complied to the
specification.
8.15. The ballast manufacturer & local sole agent shall produce all documents to
prove that their ballast is tested and fully complied with the above-mentioned
standards.
8.16. The ballast manufacturer & local sole agent shall also furnish pictures or
drawings to prove that their ballast consists of low-pass filter coil, rectifier
section, HF power oscillator section, lamp stabilization section, automatic
switch off when lamp fails to ignite section and over voltage detection section,
etc. as specified above. The Superintending Officer reserve his/her right to
select not more than five (5) pieces of these ballasts at random from the
fluorescent fixtures on site to open up for through checking/investigation on
the ballast components. The cost of replacement of these ballasts shall be
included in the Electrical Sub-Contract. If any one of these ballasts does not
comply with specification, the Electrical Sub-Contractor has to replace all the
ballasts to another acceptable brand/make at his/her own cost.
TS/E/S17/11
8.17. Dimmable H.F. Ballast Requirement
a) There shall be no electrode flicker, no stroboscopic effect and no

system humming from the ballast.
b) Conventional tube shall be used for dimming. No special tube required

for the dimming of the tube to 5%. The dimming capability shall be
tested by Singapore Accreditation Council accredited testing
laboratory.
c) When connected to dimming system, there shall be no requirement to

set the output to maximum before switching on. The fluorescent tube
shall be able to light up and achieve the selling on the control when
the circuit is switch on. The tube shall not extinguish when the control
is dimmed to minimum.
8.18. The ballast shall have a five (5) year warranty and guarantee for its
8.19. The following information shall be legibly and durable marked:
a) Make of Origin
b) Manufacturer’s name of trademark
c) Nominal wattage
d) Operating voltage and frequency
e) Power factor and current
f) Model Number
g) Wiring diagram indicating the position of terminals
h) Type of lamp for which the ballast is designed
i) Maximum operating temperature of the winding
9. HF ELECTRONIC BALLASTS FOR T5 TUBE
9.1. The high frequency electronic control gear shall be designed to reliably start
and operate standard commercially available T5 16mm diameter tubular
fluorescent lamp in the ambient conditions and within the limit specified by the
lamp manufacturer.
9.2. The electronic ballast must be single piece fully electronic, low weight, hum-
free and low profile with 30mm x 29mm (width x height) for both single and
double-lamps ranges.
9.3. The electronic ballast shall be designed to operate at 50Hz nominal frequency
and at nominal voltages indicated on the label, 230-240 volt single phase a.c.
± 10%.
9.4. The electronic ballast shall be designed with high quality components
consisting low pass filter to limit harmonic distortions and radio interference,
rectifier, HF generator in the range of 25 kHz to 60 kHz and an output lamp
stabilization section.
TS/E/S17/12
9.5. The electronic ballast shall be designed to comply with the following
standards and requirements:
CISPR15 BS EN 55015
VDE 0875 part2
b) Harmonics
IEC 61000-3-2/929 BS EN 61000-3-2
IEC 61347 (FL) IEC 61347 (Tr.)

BS EN 61347 VDE 0712 part 22, 24
IEC 60929 (FL) IEC 61047 (Tr.)

BS EN 60929/61047 VDE 0712 part 23, 25
e) Immunity
BS EN 61547
9.6. All electronic ballasts shall have in-line fuse protection.
9.7. All electronic control gear within each light fitting must come from the same
manufacturer as the lamp.
9.8. The electronic ballast shall be designed with integrated safety shutdown upon
lamp failure, component failure and/or no load operation. The circuit must
completely shutdown the ballast within 3 seconds.
9.9. For luminaries with one or two lamps, one ballast shall only be used for one
lamp.
9.10. The electronic control gear shall comply with IEC 929 for line voltage transient
protection.
9.11. The electronic control gear shall incorporate an over-voltage detection circuit
to operate lamps during short duration of over-voltage up to 280V without
negative effect.
9.12. The open-circuit voltage of the ballast shall be less than 60% of the starting
voltage for 1 to 2 second during the initial pre-heating period of the lamp
electrodes to prevent a cold-start of the lamp, which can cause blackening of
the electrodes and hence shortens the life-span of lamp.
TS/E/S17/13
9.13. The electronic ballast shall preheat start the lamp within two seconds.
9.14. The electronic ballast must be able to operate over the temperature range of-
150C to +500 C.
9.15. The electronic ballast loss shall not be greater than 4W per lamp with power
factor greater than 0.96 when operating under a main supply of 235 Volt 50
Hz..
9.16. The manufacturer and the local sole agent of the ballast shall ensure that their
products are able to interface 100% and work satisfactory with the self-
contained emergency (battery powered) kit and the addressable module kit
(lighting management system) to achieve optimum result.
9.17. The ballast manufacturer & local sole agent shall supply instruments to prove
and test their ballast loss, voltage and p.f. are fully complied to the
specification.
9.18. The design life of the electronic ballast shall be 50,000 hrs at measuring point
temperature (Tc) of 700C on the ballast with failure rate of less than 0.1% per
5000 hours of operation.
9.19. The ballast manufacturer & local sole agent shall supply all documents
instruments to prove that their ballast is tested and fully complied to the above
mentioned standard.
9.20. For Dimming requirement, the electronic ballast must be able to dim from
100% to 3% luminous flux via DC control voltage from 1V to 10V incorporated
within the ballast.
9.22. The S.O reserves the right to select not more than five (5) pieces of these
ballasts at random from the fluorescent fixtures on site to open up for
thorough checking/investigation on the ballast components. The cost of
replacement of these ballasts shall be included in the Sub-Contract. If any of
these ballast does not comply with the Specification, the Sub-Contractor has
to replace all the ballasts to another acceptable brand/make at his own cost.
a) Make of Origin
c) Nominal wattage
f) Model Number
TS/E/S17/14
10. Electronic Ballasts for Multiwatt T5 Fluorescent Lamp
Contractor shall comply to the specifications as mentioned below for the T5 approved
multiwatt fluorescent lamps.
10.1. All electronic ballasts shall comply with type tested by Singapore
Accreditation Council accredited testing laboratory to IEC 60929 fully and
other relevant Singapore Standards and any latest requirement as required by
the authority. The ballasts supplied shall have to pass test and bear label of
approval.
a) Make of Origin
c) Nominal wattage
f) Model Number
performance from the date of acceptance of the completed installation against
manufacturer defects for the ballast supplied. The Contractor shall keep
sufficient stocks of the electronic ballast during the DLP warranty period. The
Contractor shall arrange to remove the defective ballast from site within 24
hour notice during the warranty period. The cost of transportation and labour
are to be borned by the Contractor. No claim of compensation from the
Superintending Officer (S.O.) will be entertained.
10.4. The high frequency multi-watt electronic control gear shall be designed to
reliably start and operate standard commercially available T5 tubular
fluorescent lamp in the ambient conditions and within the limit specified by the
lamp manufacturer.
10.5. The multi-watt electronic ballast must be single piece fully electronic, low
weight, low profile and hum-free for both single and double lamp ranges.
Ferro-magnetic filters are not allowed. Separate (non-integral with ballast
housing) filters are not allowed.
10.6. The multi-watt electronic ballast shall be designed to operate at 50Hz nominal
frequency and at nominal voltages indicated on the label, 230 – 240 volt
single phase a.c. +10%.
10.7. The multi-watt electronic ballast shall be designed with high quality
components consisting low pass filter to limit harmonic distortions and radio
interference, rectifier. HF generator in the range of 25khz to 60 hkz and an
output lamp stabilization section.
TS/E/S17/15
10.8. The electronic ballasts shall be designed and tested to comply with the
following standards and requirements:
CISPR15 BS EN 55015
VDE 0875 part2
b) Harmonics
IEC 61000-3-2 BS EN 61000-3-2

VDE 0712 part23 BS EN 61000-3-2
IEC 61347 (FL) IEC 61347 (Tr.)

BS EN 61347 VDE 0712 part 22, 24
IEC 60929 (FL) IEC 61047 (Tr.)

BS EN 60929/61047 VDE 0712 part 23, 25
e) Immunity BS EN 61547
The test shall be conducted by recognized international testing body.
10.9. All multi-watt electronic ballasts shall have in-line fuse protection and ballast
must be able to operate over the temperature range of -15oC to +50oC.
10.10. The multi-watt electronic ballast shall be designed with integrated safety shut
down upon lamp failure, component failure and/or no load operation. The
circuit must completely shut down the ballasts within 3 seconds.
10.11. Two lamp fittings shall be furnished with a single multi-watt electronic ballast
suitable for two lamps operation. If either one lamp fails, the remaining lamp
must be able to maintain full output. It shall atomically switch on after
replacement with supply connected.
10.12. The multi-watt electronic control gear shall incorporate an over-voltage

detection circuit to operate lamps during short duration of over-voltage up to
280V without negative effect.
10.13. The multi-watt electronic ballast loss shall not be greater than 3W per lamp
with power factor greater than 0.96 without additional external correction
devices such as line frequency ferro-magnetic coils.
10.14. The design life of the multi-watt electronic ballast shall be 50,000 hours at
measuring point temperature (Tc) of 70oC on the ballast with failure rate of
less than 0.2% per 1000 hours of operation.
TS/E/S17/16
10.15. The multi-watt electronic control gear shall preheat start the lamp within two
seconds.
10.16. The multi-watt electronic control gear shall meet energy efficiency index at
least Class A2.
10.17. The Contractor may submit single wattage of T5 electronic ballasts of,
however the technical requirements and specification shall comply fully with
the multi-watt electronic ballast specified herein.
10.18. The Contractor should submit the third party test reports by Singapore
Accreditation Council accredited testing laboratory, ballast factory test reports
with the tender submission for tender evaluation. Contractor may submit
better quality with latest technology ballast during tender.
11. COMPONENTS AND SUSPENSION ACCESSORIES
11.1. Fluorescent lamp holders shall be bi-pin, spring contacts engaging effectively
with the pins of the lamp and shall be constructed in such a way that the lamp
is easily removable either for cleaning or replacement purposes. The holders
shall be non-inflammable and non-conductive. No Live parts of the lamp
holders shall be exposed to touch. Holder shall comply with Latest IEC 60400.
11.2. All fluorescent luminaries shall be completed with fuse terminal block with
cartridge fuse of 3 Amp. or approval equal.
11.3. For bare batten fluorescent, at least two (2) approved lamp retaining clips per
fluorescent lamp shall be provided for safety.
11.4. Power-factor correction parallel capacitors shall be of self-healing dry film

construction. They shall correct the power factor of each luminaries to not less
than 0.94 lagging two hours after the luminaries has operated continuously on
site and shall be designed for 250V r.m.s., 50Hz a.c. and rated temperature of
-40ºC to +85ºC or better.
11.5. For those fluorescent luminaires not installed with H.F. ballast, then the
capacitors installed in these fluorescent luminaires shall comply with latest
IEC 61048 and shall be mounted not less than 100mm from any ballast.
11.6. For those fluorescent luminaires not installed with H.F. ballast, they shall be
completed with fuse terminal block with cartridge fuse of 5 Amp. or approval
equal.
11.7. For those fluorescent luminaires not installed with H.F. ballast, then the
fluorescent lamp glow-starters installed in these fluorescent luminaires shall
be unsurpassed for high quality and excellent reliability. The glow switch
together with a radio-interference suppression capacitor shall be safely
housed in a high quality polycarbonate canister. It shall comply with the
performance requirements of IEC 60155 / 60155A.
TS/E/S17/17
11.8. The lamp holding sockets shall be rigidly and securely attached to the fixture
enclosure or husk.
11.9. Where pull-chains are included, and insulating joint shall be provided.
11.10. For all the connection between the ceiling outlet box and the light fitting
fixture, liquid tight PVC covered/sheathed flexible metal conduit with approved
type of brass adaptor and lock nut shall be used and the ceiling outlet box or
approved type of plug-in ceiling rose with 2.5mm2 3-core flexible PVC/PVC
cable and vertim tight/proof gland shall be used for the connection.
11.11. The lamp holders for theT5 fluorescent lighting luminaires shall be of high
quality type able to suit different wattage T5 fluorescent tube. They shall
comply with but not limited to following specifications:
a) Rated at specified IP rating.
b) Polycarbonate body front plate made of heat resistant PBT GF

material.
c) Temperature marking: T110
d) Maximum permissible temperature to the rear side of lamp holder TM

110oC.
e) Both lamp holders must provide with support for reliable contact
12. INTER-COMPONENT WIRING
12.1. Inter-component wiring shall be of mi 1050C 250 volt 50 Hz rating PVC 24/0.2
mm and shall be neatly secured within the luminaries to prevent under
looseness and contact with ballasts.
12.2. Cables with the maker’s identification, voltage grade and temperature clearly
printed on the cable sheath shall only be used.
12.3. The only joints made shall be at the fuse terminal block provided on the
luminaries.
12.4. Where wiring passes through or passes the edge of any metal section of the
fitting, it shall be protected by an approved rubber grommet or be doubly
insulated in an approved manner. All connections of wires to terminals shall
be of approved types. All wiring shall be concealed from view with the fitting
installed.
TS/E/S17/18
13. SELF-CONTAINED EMERGENCY LUMINARIES AND COMPONENTS (SINGLE-

POINT SYSTEM)
13.1. All self-contained emergency luminaries shall be of LED type. It shall comply
with Singapore Standard SS 563, IEC-60598-2-22, SS 263 Part 2 and
approved by approved certification label by Singapore Accreditation Council
accredited testing laboratory. All self-contained emergency luminaries shall
comply to the specification as below.
13.2. For LED / fluorescent luminaries shall be incorporated with self-contained

emergency kit, the self-contained emergency kit shall be dual rate
charging/converter kits for LED / fluorescent luminaries for 3 hours duration.
The unit shall be wired for external switching if necessary when the mains
supply is healthy. It shall operate on all circuits, on energy saving (26 mm)
tubes.
13.3. The input supply of self-contained emergency kit shall be 240 V, 50 Hz, single
phase. All self-contained emergency luminaries shall have a duration of
Three (3) hours unless otherwise stated.
13.4. A green LED indicator that shows the batteries being charged and a test
button for the system test shall be provided on the external and visible side of
the luminaries.
13.5. The sealed nickel cadmium batteries for self-contained emergency luminaries
shall be suitable for continuous high temperature ambient in float applications
and yet display minimal capacity reduction if cycled. The operating
temperature range for charging and discharging shall be ±50C to +700C and -
200C to +700C respectively. The safety vents for the batteries shall be
automatically resealed. The batteries shall be sized to provide max. lumens
output.
13.6. All self-contained emergency luminaries shall be designed to ensure that the
temperature inside the luminaries will not exceed +400C.
13.7. If the self-contained emergency kits are housed outside the luminaries, the
enclosures shall be approved by the Superintending Officer.
13.8. Unless otherwise stated, all self-contained emergency luminaries shall be of

maintained mode with external switching from normal mains supply.
13.9. The solid-state battery charger shall be designed for nickel cadmium
batteries. Dual rate constant current charger, which will charge the discharge
battery to full capacity within the specified period of SS 563 at a high rate and
then change over to a low rate of charge (trickle charge) to maintain a fully
charge condition by compensation for the self-discharge losses of the
batteries will be preferred. The charger unit shall be of high efficiency type
with input voltage of 240 volt, 50 Hz. single phase. The battery cut-off device
shall be provided to meet Clause 5.2.3 of SS 563
TS/E/S17/19
13.10. All battery packs shall be sized to give minimum lumen output as follows:
Light Source (Watts) Battery Min. Lumens output

18-20 W Fluorescent 6 cell 7.2 Volts 750
PL/DULUX 5, 7, 9, 11 W ----- Full Lumens output
Fluorescent
10 Watt LED 3 cell 3.6 Volts 200
10 Watt EXIT Light, LED 3 cell 3.6 Volts 180
12.11 The manufacturer and local sole agent of self-contained emergency (battery
powered) kit shall ensure that their products are able to interface 100% and
work satisfactory with the HF electronic ballasts to achieve optimum result.
14. TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS FOR T8 FLUORESCENT TUBE
14.1. All tubular fluorescent lamps shall comply with IEC 60968: Self-ballasted
fluorescent lamps for general lighting service.
14.2. The fluorescent lamp shall be of the Bi-Pin lamp cap with G13 base and the
following information shall be distinctly and durably marked on the lamp :
i) Trademark or mark of origin;
ii) Nominal Wattage/Voltage;
iii) Colour Definition; and
iv) Colour Rendering Index.
14.3. The operational life span of the fluorescent lamps shall be of minimum 8000
hours at a mortality rate of 50% or better. The guaranteed life span shall be
at least 5000 hours.
14.4. The fluorescent lamp shall have the following characteristics :
Lamp Wattage Length Diameter Output Colour Rendering

(W) (mm) (mm) (Lumen) Index
18 600 26 1300 or better 80 or better
36 1200 26 3300 or better 80 or better
TS/E/S17/20
The output value quoted shall be the minimum value after 100 burning hours.
The output after 2000 burning hours shall not fall below 10% of the value at
100 burning hours.
13.5 The correlated colour temperature of the fluorescent lamp shall be 4000ΩK
unless indicated otherwise in the Drawings.
13.6 The metallic part of the Bi-Pin lamp cap shall be either non-corroding or
suitably protected against corrosion.
15. TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS FOR T5 FLUORESCENT TUBE
Contractor shall comply with the Specifications as mentioned below for T5

fluorescent lamps:
15.1. All fluorescent tubes shall be high brightness warm white / cool white or
daylight tube and shall comply with EN600081 – tubular fluorescent lamps for
general lighting services, and subsequent latest amendment issued for this
specification. All fluorescent tube supply should be type tested by Singapore
Accreditation Council accredited testing laboratory. The Superintending
Officer (S.O.) reserves the right to use various colour temperature of the tube
to be supplied. The tube supplied shall have to pass test and bear label of
approval.
15.2. The following information of the fluorescent tube shall be distinctly and
durably marked on the lamp:
a) Mark of origin of Trademark
b) Nominal Wattage/Voltages
c) Colour Designation – the preferred colour temperature is minimum

3000oK – Warm white and minimum 6000oK Daylight and 4000oK –
Cool white
d) Colour Rendering Index – 80 or better
15.3. The operational life span of the fluorescent tubes shall be of minimum 16,000
hours for the 549mm and 1149mm fluorescent tubes used in conjunction with
the electronic contract gear with pre-heat ignition complying with the relevant
Singapore and EN standards. The mortality rate of the fluorescent tubes shall
be 50% or better and the guaranteed life span shall be least 10,000 hours.
15.4. The minimum luminous flux shall be:
Length of Diameter of Wattage Output Luminaire

Tube (mm) Tube (mm) (Lumen) (CD/m2)
549 (+5mm) 16 (max) 14 1350 (min) 1.7
1149 (+5mm) 16 (max) 28 2750 (min) 1.7
TS/E/S17/21
15.5. All energy saving fluorescent tubes must have good colour appearance and
conform to the recommendation of International Commission of Illumination.
15.6. Parts of metal used for the Lamp Caps shall be of non-corroding or suitably
protected against corrosion.
15.7. The tenderer shall fill in the Technical Specification of the tubes to be supplied
in the following Schedule of Particulars:
a) Manufacturer/Trade Name: ______________________
b) Country of Origin: ______________________
c) Overall Length of Tube: 14W ______________mm

28W ______________mm
d) Minimum Normal Operating ) 14W ______________mm

Life Span ) 28W ______________mm
e) Output luminous flux after ) 14W ______________mm

100 and 2000 burning hours) 28W ______________mm
f) Colour Designation/Temperature _______________________
g) Colour Rendering Index _______________________
h) Tested and passed according to _______________________

(Name of Testing Authority)
__________________________ on __________________
And Standard used) Date
Failure to complete the Schedule of Particulars will automatically result

in the rejection of the Tender.
The Contractor shall submit catalogue and mortality curve of the lighting tube
to be supplied for tender evaluation.
TS/E/S17/22
16. TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS FOR COMPACT FLUORESCENT LAMPS
All compact fluorescent lamps shall comply with IEC 60901 : Single-capped
fluorescent lamps - Performance Specifications.
16.1 The compact PL-S or PL-C fluorescent lamp shall be single ended and shall
have a 2 pin base complete with a built-in starter and a radio frequency
interference suppression capacitor.
The following information shall be distinctly and durably marked on the lamp :
i) Trademark or mark of origin;
ii) Nominal Wattage/Voltage;
iii) Colour Definition; and
iv) Colour Rendering Index.
16.2 The operational life span of the compact fluorescent lamps shall be of
minimum 8000 hours at a mortality rate of 50% or better. The guaranteed life
span shall be at least 5000 hours.
16.3 The compact fluorescent lamp shall have the following characteristics :
Wattage/Type Overall Base Output Colour

(W) Length (Lumen) Rendering
(mm) Index
9W PL-S 167 G23 600 80 or better
11W PL-S 237 G23 900 80 or better

13W PL-C 140 G24d-1 900 80 or better
18W PL-C 154 G24d-2 1200 80 or better
26W PL-C 173 G24d-3 1800 80 or better
The output quoted shall be the minimum value after 100 burning hours. The
output after 2000 burning hours shall not fall below 10% of the value at 100
burning hours.
16.4 The correlated colour temperature of the compact fluorescent lamp shall be
3000ΩK unless indicated otherwise in the Drawings.
TS/E/S17/23
17. TYPE TESTING OF FLUORESCENT LIGHTING LUMINAIRES
17.1 All lighting luminaries shall be type tested and bearing pass test sticker or
valid test report. The testing shall meet but not limited to the following
requirement.
S/N Description Requirement

1 Material
(a) Body in electro-galvanised steel sheet with seal
metal end cap and cable opening entry on one
side.
(b) Waveform curvature reflector in electro-

galvanised steel sheet.
(c) 1.0mm or gauge 20 and to be submitted to

Singapore Accreditation Council accredited
testing laboratory for dry film thickness
measurement.
(d) Wing out secured ballast gear tray suitable for

multi wattage lamp electronic ballast.
2 Powder Coated All body and reflector shall be coated with equivalent
to PR12 outdoor durable polyester power coated
white colour and submitted to Singapore
Accreditation Council accredited testing laboratory
for the following type test or sample test
(a) Impact resistance to ISO 6272-2

(b) Cross hatch adhesion to ISO 2409
(c) Bend test to ISO 1519
(d) Pencil test to ASTM D 3363
(e) Salt Spray test to 7253 with duration of 500
hours
(f) Humidity test to ISO 6270 with duration of
1000 hours
(g) Hot resistance at 150oC for 24 hours
(h) Simulated light exposure test to ISO 11341
with duration 1000 hours
3 Internal Wiring 150oC one square mm internal cable wiring.
TS/E/S17/24
4 Lamp Holder Nominal Voltage: 2 Amp / 500V with VDE, ENEC

tested and marking. Both side of the lamp holder
should come with spring provided to prevent lamp
cathode pin expose.
5 Incoming 3 way single tier cable coupler 16A, 250Vac, 25”C

Connector with Live, Neutral, Earth Marking complied to IEC
60998-1& 60998-2-1 and Singapore Accreditation
Council accredited testing laboratory tested suitable
for 2.5 sq mm incoming cable.
6 Incoming Cable 2.5 square mm PVC insulated and PVC sheathed

cable with international colour for Live, Neutral &
Earth. The cable should be Singapore Accreditation
Council accredited testing laboratory tested and
listed to SS358-3.
7 Lamp Approved lamp model with rated lamp life of 24,000

hours, services lamp life of 18,000 hours and
Singapore Accreditation Council accredited testing
laboratory type tested.
17.2 IP 65 luminaries, Clean Room and Indicated Laboratory
1 Material (a) Body is constructed from best quality, “hole-

free” white enamelled sheet steel with
lapped and welded seams. The relamping
shall be from the top access with hinged to
hold the luminaire body
(b) Waveform curvature reflector in electro-

galvanised steel sheet. Composite 4mm
thick toughened glass with Clear Prismatic
panel
(c) Heavy gauge Zintec steel 2-part sandwich

construction and to be submitted to
measurement. Walk on capability to
BS6399
(d) Wing out secured ballast gear tray suitable

for multi wattage lamp electronic ballast.
TS/E/S17/25
white colour with antistatic coating, resistant to
disinfectants and submitted to Singapore
Accreditation Council accredited testing laboratory for
the following type test or sample test

hours
(f) Humidity test to ISO 6270 with duration of

1000 hours
(h) Test of resistance to UV rays to DIN EN

ISO 11997-2
(i) Antimicrobial protection test to ASTM

standard

cathode pin expose.


Earth. The cable should be tested by Singapore
tested and listed to SS358-3.
TS/E/S17/26

hours, services lamp life of 18,000 hours
8 Environmental Comply to IP 65 rating

Protection
Air tightness test comply to ISO 14644-11:ISO
Cleanliness 3 to 9, ENEC or equivalent
17.3 Explosion proof luminaries,
1 Material (a) Body is constructed from best quality, “hole-

free” white enamelled sheet steel with
lapped and welded seams. The relamping
shall be from the top access with hinged to
hold the luminaire body
(b) Composite 4mm thick toughened glass with

Clear Prismatic panel
(c) Heavy gauge Zintec steel 2-part sandwich

construction and to be submitted to
measurement.
(d) Wing out secured ballast gear tray suitable

for multi wattage lamp electronic ballast.
white colour and submitted to Singapore
for the following type test or sample test

hours
TS/E/S17/27
2 Powder Coated (f) Humidity test to ISO 6270 with duration of

1000 hours
(h) Simulated light exposure test to ISO 11341

with duration 1000 hours
(i) Test of resistance to UV rays to DIN EN ISO

11997-2
(j) Antimicrobial protection test to ASTM

standard

cathode pin expose.


Earth. The cable should be Singapore Accreditation
Council accredited testing laboratory tested and
listed to SS358-3.

hours, services lamp life of 18,000 hours and
Singapore Accreditation Council accredited testing
laboratory type tested.
8 Environmental Comply to IP 66 rating.

Protection Air leakage test comply to ISO 14644-1
TS/E/S17/28
18. TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS FOR LED LUMINAIRE
18.1 The LED luminaires used for offices, seminar room, laboratory, corridor and
common areas or other area as specified in the tender drawing shall comply
to clause 5 of this section. All the luminaire are to type tested by Singapore
Accreditation Council accredited testing laboratory or other recognized
international testing body to ensure compliance with the safety, reliability and
performance standards specified above. All necessary test reports of the
LED luminaire and manufacturer’s in house test procedures, warranty and
relevant data shall be submitted to SO for approval. Product inclusive LED
tube, and gear/driver to be covered with 5 Years Warranty on one-to-one
exchange terms due to failure
18.2 The Light Emitting Diode (LED) luminaire comprising of LED tube or LED
modules, electronic control gear and accessories, where shown in drawings,
shall be supplied, installed and commissioned for reliable operation to light
up offices, seminar room, laboratory, corridor and common areas or other
area as specified in the tender drawing. The LED luminaire shall be able to
fully withstand the current and voltage surges from lighting strikes and the
frequent switching operation of the power supplies. The LED luminaire shall
be properly selected to ensure that the functional characteristics, failure rate,
operating life span and other requirements as mentioned in this specification
clause are fully met. All LED tube / LED module used shall of cool white or
warm white high intensity.
18.3 Each LED luminaire shall also be provided with its own electronic control
gear. The electrical control gear shall be integrated within LED tube that is
removable or a separate unit with its own housing in the luminaire. The
electronic control gear shall be connected to the LED component via a plug
and socket connector complies with IEC 60998-1 & IEC 60998-2-1.
18.4 The LED chips and all components used shall be of illuminated grade LEDs
shall be from the established manufacturers without infringing the Intellectual
Property Patent of LED manufacturers. The Contractor and LED luminaire
manufactures shall indemnify Employer from any legal responsibilities from
any infringement of the patent right. Documentations on licensing rights to
the use of the LED technology shall also be produced to Superintending
Officer (S.O.).
18.5 The LEDs luminaire shall have an operating temperature between

temperature of between -20oC to +45oC and relative humidity of between 0%
to 95% non-condensing.
18.6 The installation shall be such that no cabling shall be visible in front, behind,
or around installed luminaires when viewed from floor level.
18.7 The LED tube / LED module shall consist of a high flux LED strip and with it
trademark or Mark of Origin, Nominal Wattage, Correlated Colour T
Temperature and Colour Rendering Index distinctly and durable marked. The
LED tube / LED module and luminaire shall comply with test standards and
performance requirements as follows:
TS/E/S17/29
(a) The LED tube / LED module shall have nominal day light, natural white
light, Cool white or warm white output that corresponds to the
correlated colour temperature (CCT) in the range of between 2800K
and 6500K. The colour rendering index, the target CCT and the
tolerance shall base on latest ANSI_NEMA_ANSLG C78.377A, as
listed below:
Target CCT and Colour Rendering

Nominal CCT (K)
tolerance (K) Index
3000K 3045 +/- 175 Minimum 70
4000K 3985 +/- 275 Minimum 70
5000K 5028+/- 283 Minimum 65
6500K 6530 +/- 510 Minimum 65
The CCT for the Luminaire should comply with tolerance quadrangle
as stated in the ANSI Chromaticity Standard C78.377A.
(b) All LED tube and LED module including electronic gear/driver shall
provide with 5 year warranty. Any failure on shall be on one to one
exchange.
(c) For luminaries with one or two lamps, one electronic gear/driver shall
only be used for one lamp.
(d) The LED tube shall come with aluminum housing, ABS plastic end cap
and plastic optic. For LED module shall provided with minimum IP
rating of 54
(e) For recess down light, the LED module shall be provided with
minimum IP rating of 20
(f) The radiation angle of the LED shall be at least +/- 45 degree (half
angle/half maximum) and beam angle of 120 degree.
(g) The LED tube / LED module shall be suitable for use of AC supplies
220 - 240V at 50Hz and the power factor shall be 0.9 or better.
(h) The luminaire shall comply with:
(i) IEC 62471 “Photo biological safety of lamps and lamp systems”
and IEC 62471-2 “Photo biological safety of lamps and lamp
systems – Part 2: Guidance on manufacturing requirements
relating to non-laser optical radiation safety”.
(ii) The LED tube / LED module shall comply with IEC 62031 “LED
modules or general lighting – Safety specifications”.
TS/E/S17/30
(i) Test results shall be provided to indicate adequate thermal

performance for long-term operation of LED’s at minimum luminaire’s
operating temperature of 45°C in accordance to test condition with
Part 1 of SS 263 (or IEC 60598-1). The LED junction temperature
shall be maintained at or below manufacturer’s recommendation.
The LED luminaire shall be of following type:
Type of luminaire Max System Luminous Lux Colour Rendering

Power (W) (Lumen) Index
a) 600mm LED tube 12W Min. 650 (for CCT Min. 65

or module @4000K/ 5000K/
6500K)
b) 1200mm LED 24W Min. 1100 (for CCT Min. 65

tube or module @4000K/5000K/ 6500K)
c) 600mm strip 54W Min 4100 ( for CCT @ Min 80

module 4000K /5000K
The LED luminaire shall be pre-wired and complete with illumination-

grade LEDs, heat sinks, electronic control gear and housing. LED
module to come with external driver/transformer shall be replaceable;
not built-in type. LED tube shall come with external driver or
integrated driver within tube. The correlated colour temperature of
the LED shall be 4000K unless otherwise indicated in drawings. The
LED luminaire shall be resistant to shock and vibration. External Light
fixture shall consist of anti-glare frosted front cover for uniformity light
distribution.
The LED luminaire housing shall have the following features:
(i) Metal housing with high heat dissipation properties.
(ii) Corrosion resistant.
(iii) Heat sinks with high thermal dissipation properties.
(iv) External light luminaries diffuser shall be UV resistant and

deflector shall be of mirror finish for offices and laboratory.
(v) Operate in relative humidity of greater than 90%.
(vi) Light shall be free of lines / spots / flicker.
TS/E/S17/31
(j) The surface mounted LED luminaire shall comply with SS263 Part 3
(and IEC 60598-2-1) “Particular requirements for fixed general purpose
luminaires”, used together with SS 263 Part 1 (and IEC 60598-1).
(k) The LED tube shall be provided with minimum IP rating of 54.
(l) The thermal path and mechanical support of the LED Chip shall be in
Ceramic material
(m) The failure rate of the completely assembled LED luminaires (inclusive
of the LEDs, heat sinks, diffuser, electronic control gear and housing)
shall not be more than 5% per 10,000 hours of operation. A failure is
deemed to have occurred if the luminaires malfunctions or does not
meet any requirements in the specifications.
(n) The luminaire that being supplied and proposed for use shall be of
non-proprietary.
(o) The material and body of the luminaire shall comply with test
standards and performance as follows:
(i) Electro-galvanized coating of min. 1 micro on steel metal of

thickness gauge 20 or 0.9mm +/- 0.05mm.
(ii) PR 12 or equivalent outdoor durable polyester powder in white

colour. Thickness shall be at least 60 microns on average, and
not less than 50 microns at any point
(iii) Material – Powder Coating
1 ISO 6272-2 Impact Resistance
2 ISO 2409 Cross-cut adhesion
3 ISO 1519 Bend Test
4 ASTM D3363 Pencil Hardness Test
5 ISO 9227 Salt Spray Test duration 500 hrs
6 ISO 6270 Humidity test, 1000 hrs

Simulated light exposure test duration
7 ISO 11341
1000 hrs
8 ISO 2808 Dry firm thickness of powder coating
18.8 The electronic control gears shall power the LED such that the LED is flicker-
free including during dimming operation tested in accordance to IEEE Std
1789.
TS/E/S17/32
18.9 The LED luminaire shall not cause flicker to the CCTV camera images when
associated with pulse width modulation (PWM) dimming through their entire
dimming range by the use of a constant current driver
18.10 The electronic control gear shall comply with test standards and
performance requirements as follow:
(a) IEC 62384: DC or AC supplied electronic control gear for LED

modules.
(b) IEC 61347 Part 2-13; Particular requirements for DC or AC supplied

electronic control gear for LED modules.
(c) IEC 61547 – EMC Immunity Requirements.
(d) IEC 61000-3-2 “Electromagnetic Compatibility (EMC) – Part 3:

Limits for Harmonic Current Emissions (Equipment Input Current
Less Than 16A per Phase)”
(e) IEC 61000-3-3 “Limitation of voltage changes, voltage fluctuations

and flicker in public low-voltage supply systems, for equipment with
rated current less than or equal 16A per phase and not subject to
conditional connection”.
(f) CISPR 15 “Limits and methods of measurement of radio

disturbance characteristics of electrical lighting and similar
equipment”.
18.11 The electronic control gears shall be suitable for use of AC supplies 220 -
240V at 50Hz. It shall be designed for SELV voltage and constant current for
LED operation. The electronic control gear shall be provided with protection
against short circuits, overload, over voltage, thermal overload and transient
overvoltage. It shall be of CE, ROHS compliance.
The electronic control gears shall satisfy the following requirements:
Life Span : 5 years against defects
Operating Temperature Range : 20°C to 45°C
Storage Temperature Range : 20°C to 85°C

Rated constant current at
350mA (+/- 5%) for 12W
Output current :
Rated constant current at700mA
(+/- 5%) for 24W
Power Factor : 0.9 or better
THD : < 15 %
TS/E/S17/33
AC 220V to 240V (+/-10%) 50

Rated input voltage :
Hz continuous Operation
Efficiency : At least 75%
18.12 All recessed LED luminaire shall be installed to minimise visible light spillage
in ceiling or wall spaces.
18.13 All luminaire shall be easily installed and removable for maintenance from
either below the ceiling surface, recessed in walls, or from the front without
the use of special tools.
19. Luminaires Components
19.1 All internal components used in luminaires shall be freely available for
replacement. It must be clearly indicated in the data sheet or catalogue for
the type of light sources, capacitors, chokes, electronic ballasts/drivers used.
19.2 All luminaire internal wiring shall be assembly and completed at the factory
and shall be delivered ready for final connection to external final circuits. All
internal wiring shall terminate on an approved terminal block with a
connection fuse.
19.3 The correct wattage and generic light source shall be used with the
appropriate control gear, reflector and luminaire to avoid damage to
luminaire or mounting surface.
19.4 Capacitors shall be 230 volts rated and shall be leak-proof metallised dry film
or polypropylene film varieties. Capacitors encapsulated in ballast housings
will not be acceptable.
20. Luminaire with Motion Sensor
For LED luminaire used with motion sensor, it shall have dual level lighting. It shall be
provided with driver with a motion detector to dim the light level to 50% (+/- 5%) of its
rated lumen output. The motion sensor shall be integrated into the luminaire or
remote adjacent to the luminaire. If remote, the sensor shall be placed in its own
housing and the supply cable to the sensor shall be connected via socket connector.
The LED luminaire shall remain lighted in the event of failure of the motion sensor.
The Motion Detector shall have the following characteristic/specifications:
(a) Operate in SELV DC .
(b) Current Consumption shall be below 50 mA.
(c) Operation within temperature ranges of 17°C to 50°C.
(d) Operate in humidity greater than 90%.
(e) Have a detection zone of 360°.
TS/E/S17/34
(f) Have a detection range of 8m from ceiling mount height of 2.5m to 3m.
(g) Have built-in features to reduce false alarms due to rapid. Temperatures
changes, vibration, noises, RFI, static or lightning, insects, etc..
(h) Be easily disabled.
(i) Provide normally closed cover tamper.
(j) The reset shall be automatic and adjustable from 5 to 99 seconds.
(k) Be rated IP21.
21. Technical Specification for 52W LED module
The 52W LED module shall comply the following specification:
a) LED module to come with external driver/transformer shall be replaceable; not

built-in type
b) LED chips must not be visually seen when lighted up; Secondary
optics/diffuser shall not produce uneven diffusion of light or dark spots when
lit.
c) Optic/Diffuser’s produced light dispersion shall be of uniformity with minimal

glare and without dark spots.
d) Product including gear/driver to be covered with 5 Years Warranty on one-to-

one exchange terms due to failure.
e) Warranty on Lumen maintenance at 70% for not less than 40,000hrs. (Lumen
do not drop below 70%)
f) Lumens output shall be at least 4100lm.
g) Total LED power consumption shall not be higher than 52W.
h) Input : Constant Current input (max. 24V DC)
i) Driver/transformer shall be of constant current type (Output).
j) The colour rendering index (CRI) shall be at least 80.
k) Mid Lifespan of min.50,000hrs.
l) Flicker-free operation.
m) Colour temperature of 4000K-4500K.
n) Beam angle of at least 120 degrees
TS/E/S17/35
o) Free of toxic material such as mercury, lead, phosphor, etc Aluminium heat
sink.
p) Operating temperature shall be between -20°C ~ +55°C.
q) The product shall be compliance to ROHS.
r) The LED has to comply to following standard:
i) EN 60825-1:1994+A1: 2002+A2:2001, Safety of laser products part 1 :

Equipment classification, requirements and user’s guide,
ii) EN 55015: 2006+A1: 2007 (Emissions),
iii) EN 55015: 2006+A1: 2007, Conducted Emission,
iv) EN 55015: 2006+A1: 2007, Radiated Electromagnetic Disturbance,
v) EN 55015: 2006+A1: 2007, CISPR 22: 2005, Radiated Emissions,
vi) EN 61000-3-3: 1995+A1: 2001+A2: 2005, Voltage Fluctuation,
vii) EN 61547: 1995+A1: 2000 (Immunity),
viii) IEC 61000-4-2, Edition 1.2 (2001), Electrostatic Discharge,
ix) IEC 61000-4-3, Edition 3.0 (2006), RF Immunity,
x) IEC 61000-4-4, Edition 2.0 (2004), EFT/Bursts Immunity.
xi) IEC 61000-4-5, Edition 2.0 (2005), Surge Immunity,
xii) IEC 61000-4-6, Edition 2.2 (2006), Conducted Immunity,
xiii) IEC 61000-4-8, Edition 1.1 (2001), Power Magnetic Field,
xiv) IEC 61000-4-11, Edition 2.0 (2004), Voltage Dips & Short Interruption,
xv) EN 61347-1: 2008, Lamp control gear - Safety-Part 1: General requirements
TS/E/S17/36
22. TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS FOR LED LUMINAIRE (OUTDOOR)
22.1. Outdoor LED luminaires are those installed typically at the outdoor open
garden areas and surface carpark.
22.2. The intent of this specification is to define the performance characteristics

required of a replacement of the existing conventional luminaires with LED
street light, LED post top, LED bollards, LED flood light and LED spot- lights
with the appropriate adaptor onto existing pole/arms on a one-to- one
replacement (for posts which are not replaced) to achieve comparative
photometric performance.
22.3. The Contractor shall use illumination grade LEDs supported with IES LM-80
accredited test report for measuring lumen maintenance of LED sources.
22.4. The usage of illumination grade LED shall not infringe any Intellectual
Property Patent of LED manufacturers. The Contractor and LED luminaire
manufacturers shall indemnify the Employer from any legal responsibilities
from any infringement of the patent right.
22.5. All LED modules shall comply with IEC 62031.
22.6. The thermal path and mechanical support of the LED Chip shall be in
Ceramic material.
22.7. The LED luminaire shall be pre-wired and complete with all necessary
components to provide a working unit.
22.8. The luminaire shall incorporate the following features:
(a) The luminaire shall be capable of operation at 220-240 volts AC +/-

10%, 50 Hertz
(b) The luminaire power factor ≥ 0.90.
(c) Be resistance to shock and vibration, appropriate to the

environment it will be installed in.
(d) All housings shall be capable of being easily opened and closed
without the use of a specialised tool.
(e) Be designed for ease of individual component replacement

including LED engines/modules, drivers, etc.
(f) The design shall accommodate ease of end-of-life dis-assembly.
(g) The luminaire wiring input terminals shall be capable of accepting a

looped 4mm2 stranded wire (as a minimum size).
(h) The light produced shall be free of flicker, lines/spots (not applicable to
Street light).
TS/E/S17/37
(i) Constructed so that individual LED light bars can be replaced in-situ.
(j) The luminaire shall be capable of operating in minimum ambient

temperature of 45 C and RH ≥ 90%.
(k) The luminaire shall be type tested to Part 1 and respective Part 2 of
IEC 60598.
(l) The IP rating of luminaires shall be defined by IEC 60529. The

minimum IP rating shall be IP65.
(m) The luminaire shall have an impact rating better than IK07 as
defined by IEC 62262 and there shall be no damage to the
luminaire enclosure.
(n) Luminaires shall have the following information distinctly and durably
marked:
(i) Trademark or mark of origin.
(ii) Nominal wattage.
(iii) Correlated colour temperature
(iv) Colour rendering index
(v) Marking requirements in accordance to relevant test standards.
(o) The luminaire shall meet the EMC requirements of;
(i) IEC 61000-3-2 “Electromagnetic Compatibility (EMC) – Part

3: Limits for Harmonic Current Emissions (Equipment Input
Current Less Than 16A per Phase)”
(ii) IEC 61547 – EMC Immunity Requirements.
(iii) IEC 61000-3-3 “Limitation of voltage changes, voltage

fluctuations and flicker in public low-voltage supply systems,
for equipment with rated current less than or equal 16A per
phase and not subject to conditional connection”.
(iv) CISPR 15 “Limits and methods of measurement of radio

disturbance characteristics of electrical lighting and similar
equipment”.
(p) The luminaire shall meet the electromagnetic field requirements of

IEC 62493.
(q) The luminaire shall withstand 500Vdc insulation resistance test.
TS/E/S17/38
(r) Type of LED luminaire
Type of System Lumen CRI Remarks

Luminaire Power (W) Efficiency (as
(Outdoor) (as per IES per IES LM-79)
LM-79)
Street ≤ 120W ≥ 85 lumens/W ≥ 70 To replace existing
Light (for CCT @ street light Refer to.
3000K/3500K) Cut-sheet for details
Post Top ≤ 40W ≥ 85 lumens/W ≥ 70 To replace all
(for CCT @ existing landscape
3000K/3500K) and footpath post
top. Refer to Cut-
sheet for details.
Bollard ≤ 10W ≥ 85 lumens/W ≥ 70 Refer to Cut-sheet
(for CCT @ for details.
3000K/3500K)
(s) The initial and maintained chromaticity coordinates shall be within 5-

steps and 6 steps MacAdam ellipse (defined by IEC 62722-2-1)
respectively.
(t) All luminaires shall meet the Category “ Risk Group 1 “as defined by
IEC 62471 & IEC 62471-2
(u) All luminaires shall meet the RoHS (Restrictions of Hazardous

Substances) Directive 2002/95/EC. The following materials shall not
be incorporated into the construction of the luminaire or the internal
elements:
(i) Lead
(ii) Cadmium
(iii) Mercury
(iv) PCB (polychlorinated biphenyl)
(v) Luminaires shall be manufactured from high quality pressure die cast
aluminium incorporating a copper content of less than 0.1%.
22.9. The luminaire shall also have the following additional requirements:
(a) Lumen maintenance of LED luminaire shall consider the humidity

conditions specified.
(b) High power single chip on board LED will not be accepted for post top
luminaire.
(c) LED luminaire shall have luminance uniformity ratio of 1:3 tested in
accordance to SS 508 Part 4. (not applicable to Street Light)
(d) Designed with Built in Protective air vent to balance the pressure and
prevent condensation inside the LED module compartment.
TS/E/S17/39
(e) Both LED module and electrical compartment are to in separate

compartments and either independently IP65 protected if they are in
separate housing or in a single IP65 protected housing.
(f) Luminaires shall generally have photometric distribution following the

IESNA Type I, Type II, Type III, Type IV and Type V patterns (or an
approved equivalent similar distribution). Different photometric
distribution, applicable to particular area functionality requirements,
shall be not precluded to these options.
(g) Diffusers and optical lens shall be made of UV resistance material and
be stabilised against deformation, deterioration on discoloration due to
the lamp and/or solar radiation (UV) affecting light transmission losses
and colour shift.
22.10. The electronic control gear is defined as the driver and all other associated
control and dimming elements incorporated within the luminaire. LED control
gear shall be within +/-10% of the rated current to comply with IEC 62384.
The electronic control gear shall be designed for isolated output and constant
current operation. The electronic control gear shall be designed to suit the
LED operation and be provided with protection against short circuits,
overloads, overvoltage, thermal overload and transient overvoltage.
22.11. The electronic control gear shall satisfy the following requirements:
(a) The electronic components shall provide flicker-free LED operation

including during dimming operation tested in accordance to IEEE Std
1789-2015.
(b) Safety requirements of IEC 61347-2-13 and performance

requirements of IEC 62384-1. Control gear to withstand over-voltage
up to 280Vac without negative effect during endurance test.
(c) Power factor ≥ 0.90
(d) EMC type tested to CISPR15, IEC 61000-3-2, IEC 61000-3-3 and IEC
61547 and type tested to IP67, if control gear is located outside of
luminaire
(e) Minimum operating temperature of 55º C
(f) Storage Temperature range of 20º C to 85º C
(g) 350mA/700mA/900mA/1050mA (+/-10%) rated constant output

current
(h) Total harmonics current distortion (ATHD) ≤ 15%
(i) Supply voltage of 220-240Vac (+/-10%), 50Hz
(j) The electronic control gear shall be rated at least 50,000 hours
operation.
TS/E/S17/40
22.12. All LED luminaires shall come complete with the following provisions for the
replacement of the drivers.
(a) DC Connector (to be installed between LED module and Electronic

Control Gear).
(b) Ease of securing/removing the driver.
(c) Polarised plug and socket connector.
(d) The leads shall be colour coded.
(e) LED luminaire shall allow replacement of electronic control gear

without replacement of the LED module (Refer to Figure A below).
Figure A
TS/E/S17/41
SECTION 18 - ELECTRICAL ACCESSORIES
1. General
1.1 Electrical accessories shall be of the highest quality consistent with the
required safety and shall comply with all the relevant standards. Type test
certification by recognized testing authority is essential.
1.2 The colour of switches and switched socket outlets shall be selected by the
1.3 All electrical accessories shall comply to following standard
b) SS 23: Ceiling roses
c) SS 144 / IEC 61058-1: Switches for appliances - General

requirements
d) SS 145-1: Specification for 13 A plugs and socket-outlets - Part 1 :

Rewirable and non-rewirable 13 A fused plugs
e) SS 145-2: Specification for 13 A plugs and socket-outlets - Part 2:

13 A switched and unswitched socket-outlets
f) SS 472: 15A plugs and switched socket-outlets for domestic and

similar purposes
g) BS 546: Specification. Two-pole and earthing-pin plugs, socket-

outlets and socket-outlet adaptors
h) BS 1363: 13 A plugs, socket-outlets, adaptors and connection units
i) BS 4573: Specification for 2-pin reversible plugs and shaver socket

outlets
j) BS EN 60947: Low-voltage switchgear and controlgear. Switches,

disconnectors, switch-disconnectors and fuse-combination units
k) BS EN 60669: Specification for switches for domestic and similar

purposes. General requirements (for fixed or portable mounting)
l) BS 4177: Specification for cooker control units
m) BS 4662: Boxes for flush mounting of electrical accessories.

n) BS 5490: Specification for classification of degrees of protection

provided by enclosures
TS/E/S18/1
o) BS 5733: General requirements for electrical accessories.

Specification
p) BS 7288: Specification for residual current devices with or without

overcurrent protection for socket-outlets for household and similar
uses.
q) BS EN 60529: Specification for degrees of protection provided by

enclosures (IP code)
r) BS EN 60669-1: Switches for household and similar fixed-electrical

installations. General requirements
s) BS EN 60669-2-4: Switches for household and similar fixed

electrical installations. Particular requirements. Isolating switches
t) BS EN 60947-3: Low-voltage switchgear and controlgear. Switches,

disconnectors, switch-disconnectors and fuse-combination units
u) BS EN 61558-2-5: Safety of transformers, reactors, power supply

units and combinations thereof. Particular requirements and tests
for transformer for shavers, power supply units for shavers and
shaver supply units
v) Where switches and socket outlets are classified as Controlled

Good as defined by the Singapore Consumer Protection (Safety
Requirements) Registration Scheme (CPS), it must be registered
and bear the SAFETY Mark.
1.4 All steel boxes shall comply with latest Singapore Standard SS 145 and
with brass earth terminals fitted in base.
1.5 For outdoors or wet locations, everything shall be corrosion-resistant

including bolts, strips, etc. and the switches, isolator mounted and installed
in the outdoor or wet location shall be of IP65.
1.6 Ferrous material shall be protected both inside and out by two coatings of
approved corrosion-resistant material (e.g., zinc, cadmium, or enamel).
Enamel shall not be used outdoors or in wet locations. For outdoors or wet
locations, approved material and coating shall be used.
1.7 Unless otherwise stated, switches and switched socket outlets for outdoors
or wet locations shall be mounted at 1200 mm above finished floor level.
1.8 Other than shaver outlets, no switches and switched socket outlets shall be
allowed to install inside bath rooms or toilets.
TS/E/S18/2
1.9 Unless otherwise stated, all switched socket outlets on the laboratory
benches shall be surface-mounted on an approved purpose made cast
alloy pedestal boxes with 38 mm diameter knockouts in both sides for
conduit connection and earth terminal for connection of earth wire. Corners
shall be rounded. Socket outlet fixings shall be in accordance with BS
4662.
1.10 All switch and socket outlet boxes, isolators, etc. shall be properly labelled
according to the circuit number of the "As-built" drawings with approved
label.
1.11 All the switches, switch socket-outlets installed above ceiling, riser, plant
rooms, maintenance room, mechanical plant room shall be of metal clad
type unless otherwise specified
2. Switches
2.1 Indication
Switches having contacts that are not visible shall be marked or provided
with a device indicating clearly either the switch is at 'ON' or 'OFF'
positions. Tumbler operated switches shall be so mounted that the tumbler
knob is in the raised position when the switch is 'OFF' and in the depressed
position when 'ON'. All tumbler operated switches shall be of the silent type
and shall comply with BS 3676 / BS EN 60669-1. Switches controlling
normal/emergency supplies shall have 'red' colour tumbler knobs. They
shall be rated minimum 10 Amp at reactive loads unless otherwise stated.
2.2 Sequence of Operation
No multi-pole switch or circuit breaker that includes a switch in a neutral

conductor shall connect any live conductor before the neutral conductor is
connected, or open the neutral conductor before all live conductors have
been opened.
3. Lighting Switches
3.1 All flush mounted lighting switches shall be wide rocker-operated switch
with impact resistance plastic flush plate switch type mounted on malleable
iron or pressed steel boxes complete with brass earth terminals to latest
Singapore Standard SS 145. Lighting switches shall comply with latest
Singapore Standard SS 227 and Singapore Standard SS 144 / IEC 61058-
1. Whenever the number of switches at one location exceeds one, multi-
gang switches shall be used. Where more than one phase of a supply are
brought into a multi-gang switch box, the switches and accessories and
wiring connected to one phase shall be adequately separated from those
connected to other phases by means of rigidly fixed screens or barriers.
3.2 All lighting switches shall be capable of being used up to their full rating on
fluorescent loads.
TS/E/S18/3
3.3 Where switches are connected to normal as well as emergency supplies

of electricity "RED" coloured rocker switches shall be used.
3.4 Surface switches shall be heavy-gauge steel with conduit entries and shall
have rocker-operated mechanisms. They shall have steel front plates of
the single-switch or grid-switch type.
3.5 Switches outdoors or otherwise exposed to damp conditions shall be of

industrial pattern watertight type with galvanized steel or UV stabilized PVC
boxes and waterproof gaskets.
4. Base Blocks
Every lighting fitting and accessory shall be mounted on a suitable base block or
other device providing adequate wiring space except in the following cases:
4.1 A lighting fitting or accessory mounted on a switchboard panel or a metal

conduit box.
4.2 An accessory completely enclosed in a metallic casing.
4.3 A lighting fitting or accessory providing in its own base adequate space for
wiring or one that incorporates a suitable fixing base.
4.4 A tumbler switch mounted on a flat architrave that is not overlapped by the
base of the switch.
4.5 A flush plug-socket or flush switch.
4.6 A lighting fitting or accessory that is securely attached to rigid conduit or

piping or flexible cord.
4.7 All base blocks or similar devices shall be securely fixed by at least two
screws provided that a small base block accommodating only one
accessory such a tumbler switch, ceiling rose etc. may be fixed by one
screw only provided rotation of the base is effectively prevented by the
manner or fixing.
5. Ceiling Roses
5.1 Ceiling roses shall be white of reputable manufacture according to the

latest Singapore Standard SS 23. They shall be of porcelain, or of plastic
with porcelain interiors and shall be fitted with plastic backplates or plastic
mounting blocks semi-recessed where necessary to comply with the
Singapore Standard SS 638.
5.2 Where they are of the three-plate type the live terminal shall be shrouded
so as to prevent accidental contact when the cover is removed.
TS/E/S18/4
5.3 No ceiling rose shall be used for voltage in excess of 250 V between
terminals or for connection of more than two flexible cords unless the
ceiling rose is specifically designed for multiple attachment. Brass earth
terminals shall be provided for each continuity conductor.
6. Lamp holders
6.1 Lamp holders shall be of the bayonet-cap type for tungsten lamps up to
and including 150 watt, and of the Edison screw type for larger lamps.
6.2 Where they are integral with lighting fittings, they shall be brass with
porcelain interiors. For use with flexible pendants, they shall be of white
plastic with compression glands. Where batten lamp holders are installed
the lamp holders shall be of white plastic. In damp situation, holders shall
be approved by S.O.
6.3 Lamp holders for fluorescent tubes shall be of the heavy pattern bi-pin type
of white plastic construction.
6.4 All lampholders shall be lubricated with molybdenum disulphide to ensure

easy removal of threaded rings and lamps.
7. Lighting Contactor
Lighting contactors shall be electrically held and shall be furnished in a general

purpose, surface mounted enclosure, unless otherwise indicated. The contactors
shall employ gravity dropout and shall employ double break silver allow contacts,
with full tungsten lamp rating, without the use of auxiliary arcing contacts. All
contacts must be removable without disturbing line or load wiring. All coils shall be
moulded construction, replaceable without removing the contactor from its
enclosure. Coil must be suitable for continuous energisation and for silent
operation. Refer to further details in the Technical Specifications on AC Contactor.
8. Plugs and Socket Outlets
8.1 All socket outlets and plugs shall comply with latest Singapore Standard
SS 145 and generally, switched socket outlets shall be of 13 amp, flush
mounting type consisting of impact resistance plastic plate, 13 Amp S.P.
rocker-operated micro break switch mechanisms mounted in a steel wall
box with a suitable brass earth terminals and matted chromed plate.
8.2 Power outlets in offices and general areas shall be mounted on skirting
boards or as directed by the S.O.. Socket outlets shall be so mounted that
the plug is withdrawn in a horizontal plane. Socket outlets shall also be
fixed on floor where so directed by the S.O. and they shall be so arranged
that no dust or water can accumulate therein.
8.3 Surface socket outlets shall be metal clad type with steel front plate for
plant rooms, risers and carpark areas.
TS/E/S18/5
8.4 Skirting socket outlet is not allowed to be mounted lower than 150 mm
above finished floor level.
8.5 Outlets in plant and machine rooms shall be metal clad protected type.
These outlets shall be flush type where practicable, otherwise surface
mounted. Outlets exposed to weather and in Basement shall be
weatherproof type. Weatherproof type socket outlet shall comply with IEC
60309-2 and be provided with a push-on cap and cap retaining ring or a
screw-on cap with rubber gasket. The socket outlet shall have ingress
protection of at least IPX4 to BS EN 60529.
8.6 Switched socket outlets of 15 Amp 3 Pin and 13 Amp 3 Pin shall be flush
or surface type as indicated and shall be provided with chrome plated
brass plate. Where socket outlets are connected to normal as well as
emergency supplies of electricity. Socket outlets with "red" rocker switch
shall be used. Whereas socket outlets connected to stabilized
voltage/uninterruptible power supply shall be with "red" indication lights.
8.7 Special socket outlets incorporating sparkless mercury switch or explosion

proof switches and socket outlets shall be used for explosion hazard areas.
The outlets shall be tested and approved by the relevant testing authority.
8.8 3 Phase 415 V 50 Hz switched socket outlets shall be 5 pole 5 wire 415 V
AC complete with equipment grounding and locking devices. The
receptacles shall be heavy duty moulded of rugged arc resistant
polyamide, positive locking and cannot be pulled apart accidentally. It shall
be self closing and ensures protection from electrical hazards by closing off
live connection when cap is removed. The plug shall be of the same make.
The socket outlet and plug shall be mineral oils, greases and corrosion
resistant and shall be splashproof.
8.9 Cooker outlets where used in kitchen shall be 30 A double-pole flush type
with 13 Amp switch socket contained in mild steel box and with impact
resistance flush mounted plastic plate.
8.10 Shaver socket outlets shall be 230 V/110 V dual voltage operation,
complete with isolation transformer and thermal overload device. The unit
shall be enclosed in mild steel box for flush mounting and fitted with
moulded ivory cover plate. A flush mounting double-pole switch similar to
the lighting switches shall be installed outside the bathroom/toilet to control
each shaver outlet.
8.11 Water heaters socket outlet shall be controlled by 20 Amp double-pole,

flush mounted water heater switches with pilot light and labelled with the
word "water-heater". These switches shall be installed outside
bathroom/toilet and sockets installed near to the heater.
TS/E/S18/6
9. Isolators
9.1 All isolators shall comply with latest BS 3185 / BS EN 60669-2-4and

mounted at 1250 mm above finished floor level unless otherwise stated or
directed by S.O..
9.2 Isolators shall be heavy-duty pattern with steel enclosures having cast-iron
frame members, rust-protected and finished grey stoved enamel. Front
access doors shall be fitted with dust-excluding gaskets and shall be
interlocked so that they cannot be opened when the switch is ‘on’.
Operating handles shall be lockable in both the on and off positions and
shall have visible on-off indication.
9.3 Isolators shall be 500 V rating and shall be clearly marked with their current
rating.
9.4 The moving contract assemblies are to be removable for inspection and
maintenance.
9.5 All steel doors shall be earthed to the enclosures by appropriate size of
tinned copper earth braids.
9.6 Isolators shall be approved by Superintending Officer.
9.7 Isolators with lettering (FM) shall be flush mounted.
9.8 Isolator above 100 Amp, refer to the other details of the Specification.
10. Switch fuses
10.1 Switch fuses shall be industrial pattern dust-proof type with HRC fuse links.
They shall have enclosures fabricated from sheet steel finished grey
stoved enamel with removable top and bottom endplates and shall have
doors fitted with dust-proof gaskets. They shall have front-operated
handles with visible on-off indication.
10.2 The interiors shall have vitreous porcelain bases fitted with plated non-
ferrous conducting components. Switches shall be of the quick make-and-
break type and have removable shields over the fixed contacts and
removable moving contact bars.
10.3 Each switch fuse shall be supplied complete with the correct HRC fuse
links.
10.4 Switch fuses shall be 500 V rating and shall be clearly marked with their
current rating.
TS/E/S18/7
11. Industrial plug and socket (Cee form)
11.1. The industrial plug and socket shall comply with BS 4343, NEMA, IEC
60309-1, IEC 60309-2 and IEC 60309-4.
11.2. The industrial plug shall be of heavy duty switched interlocked socket
outlet type with on/off switch and auto shutter cover the outlet.
11.3. The body of the plug and connector shall be of heavy duty Polybutylene
terephthalate (PBT) plastic and degree of protection shall be IP44, splash
proof type for indoor. For outdoor and humid environment, the degree of
protection shall be of IP67. All the connector outlet shall complete with
auto shutter to cover the pins.
11.4. All panel mounted plug socket shall be of flush type mounting flush to DB
or OG box. Flush mounted shall water tight and shall not cause any water
ingress into panel
11.5. Chemical storage and gas storage, the body of the plug and connector
shall be of heavy duty aluminum enclosure and explosion proof.
11.6. The industrial plug and socket shall have the colour code as following :
a) Single phase, 230VAC, 50Hz, shall be of blue colour with 4 pin

include earth.
b) Three phase, 380-415VAC, 50Hz, shall be of red colour 5 pins

include earth.
c) Extra low voltage shall be of violet for AC, grey colour for DC
12. Position of Wiring and Outlets
The location of outlets shown on the drawing is approximate only and the Sub-
Contractor shall before installing outlet boxes study all pertinent drawings and
obtain precise information from the S.O.. It shall be understood that any outlet
may be re-located 5 metres from the position shown on the drawings if so directed
by the S.O.. The Sub-Contractor shall be required to make any necessary
adjustment of his work to fit conditions for recessed fixtures and for outlets
occurring in glazed tile, wood panelling or other special finish and for centering
such outlets properly.
TS/E/S18/8
13. Mounting Height
13.1 Unless otherwise stated, switches and switched socket outlets for outdoors or wet
locations shall be mounted at 1200 mm above finished floor level
13.2 The mounting height of all switch socket outlets shall be above false ceiling
level for auto sensor flush valve, mechanical fan, card phone.
13.3 Other than shaver outlets, no switches and switched socket outlets shall be
allowed to install inside bath rooms or toilets.
13.4 Unless otherwise stated, all switched socket outlets on the laboratory
benches shall be surface-mounted on an approved purpose made cast
alloy pedestal boxes with 38 mm diameter knockouts in both sides for
conduit connection and earth terminal for connection of earth wire. Corners
shall be rounded,
13.5 The mounting height of all wiring devices, outlets shall be as indicated
below with the provision that they shall be subject to alteration as per
instruction by the S.O.
a) All switches 1200 mm above finished floor level

1000 mm above finished floor level
for all handicap requirements
b) Socket outlets in 1200 mm above

switchroom, mechanical finished floor
plant room and work level
areas with wiring conduits
c) Socket outlets in 300mm above table top

laboratories and or to be directed by the
workshop Superintending Officer
d) Socket outlets in 450 mm above

Offices and general finished floor level
office
e) Switches and socket To be directed

outlets on the office by the Superintending Officer
workstations
f) Wall mounted light to be directed by the Superintending

Officer
g) Skirting socket outlet not to be mounted lower than 150mm

from finished floor level
TS/E/S18/9
14. Extension Stud
Necessary extension stud shall be used for switches and switched socket outlet
boxes that are concealed in the wall or column.
15. Standards
15.1 All electrical accessories shall comply with the following standards :-
a) Switches --- IEC 60669-1, IEC 61058-1 and SS 144

b) Steel boxes--- SS 145
c) Ceiling roses --- SS 23.
d) 13 Amp. switched socket outlets and plugs --- BS 1363 / SS145
e) Fused connection units --- BS 5733.
f) 15 amp. switched socket outlets and plugs --- BS 546 / SS472
g) 6 amp. plate switches, 6 amp. ceiling switches, and 20 amp./32
amp. DP switches --- BS 3676.
h) Cooker units --- BS 4177 and BS 1363.
i) Shaver units --- BS 3052.
j) Lamp holders and batten lamp holders --- BS 5042 Pt.1 T2 rating.
k) Weatherproof switches --- BS 3676 & BS 5490, IP56.
l) Weatherproof 13 amp. switched socket outlets --- BS 5490, IP56.
m) Industrial plug and socket - IEC 60309, BS 4343
16. Pressed Flip Open Flush Table Power dock Socket
The pressed flush table flip open power dock socket shall be of modularity and
versatility mounted virtually flush on a desk-surface.
The unit is to be easily mounted using a rectangular cut-out in the desk surface
and secured in position with two sturdy ratchet clips. It shall be constructed in
aluminium with different colour selection, providing excellent strength and allowing
a number of finish options to suit any work-surface.
The flush table power dock must be able to house RJ45 data outlets, also be able
to incorporate with 2 way smart USB charger outlets, HDMI outlets, VGA
extension, Data interface with peripherals.
The operating voltage of the power dock shall be of 220V to 250V at 50Hz and
maximum power of 3000W. The USB smart charger output power shall be of
5VDC, 3.1A maximum with input power of 240VAC 100mA.
The power dock shall comply to UL,CE, BS 5733, BS 6396 or relevant Singapore
Standard. The length of the power dock shall be of variable to suit the furniture
and the width shall be of 135mm.
TS/E/S18/10
17. Power Socket Distribution Unit
The power socket distribution unit shall be of modularity and versatility type
provided for all the system furniture and of slim and compact type of width and
depth of the unit shall not be less than 40mm and more than 60mm, CE marking
certification of type approved by accreditation bodies. The power socket
distribution unit shall have the certificate of conformity by the accredited laboratory
It shall comply to the Mandatory Requirements of the Singapore Consumer
Protection (Safety Requirements) Registration Scheme
Power socket distribution unit is to be of black in colour or any other colour

subjected to SO approval. The power outlet shall be of good electrical insulation
material with class ‘0’ surface flame spread and self-extinguishing complying with
local fire code.
Power main plug shall be of 13A fused and detachable cable to power distribution
socket unit with pin connector. Pin connector shall have built-in clip to secure the
male and female connection together. The power outlet shall be suitable for type
“G” three pin plug operated at 230V, 50Hz. Power socket distribution unit shall be
protected with fuse. The on/off switch shall be of illuminate rocker upon switch on.
The power socket distribution unit shall have power socket outlets with others
accessories as in this section with extension power pin to allow another plug in
connection. Extension pin shall complete with end cap. The power distribution unit
shall have the flexibility to incorporate with 2 way smart USB charger outlets into
the unit as and when required.
The power socket distribution units for all meeting room, conference room,
seminar room, lecturer theatre, auditorium etc teaching facilities with projection
units shall have 2 units of 6 nos. single 13A power socket outlet with 2 way smart
USB charger outlets, HDMI outlets, VGA extension, data interface with peripherals
into the power socket distribution units or as indicated in the drawing. Offices shall
have minimum of 6 nos. 13A power socket outlet unit with 2 way smart USB
charger outlets and data outlet
The USB smart charger shall be of Type A and Type C , output power of 5VDC,
3.1A maximum with input power of 240VAC 100mA. The system shall be
integrated as a whole and warranty by the manufacturer.
The power socket distribution unit shall have maximum power rating of 3000W
and 16A operated at 230V, 50HZ. External earth cable shall be provided for earth
bonding at the furniture, if required.
For table mounted type of power socket distribution unit that required to secure
onto the system furniture, the power socket distribution unit shall have brackets
that are recommended by the manufacturer together with bolted and nuts and
secured into the system furniture subjected to SO approval.. The brackets shall be
from the manufacturer and no cable tight is allowed to secure the power socket
unit.
Where as specified, the power socket distribution unit outlet shall have the
function of remote power supply on/off, monitoring of the energy consumption,
current and overload.
TS/E/S18/11
18. Power Socket Distribution Unit With Power Monitoring
The power socket distribution unit shall be of rack mounted with standards 2 units
of 18 way IEC C14, 4 ways C19 combo and complete with power monitoring for
each rack. It shall be of slim and compact in line type, UL compliant or CE marking
certification of type approved by accreditation bodies. The power socket
distribution unit shall have the certificate of conformity by the accredited laboratory
It shall comply to the Mandatory Requirements of the Singapore Consumer
Protection (Safety Requirements) Registration Scheme
The power socket distribution unit shall be protected by the built in surge
protection arrestor device meet to DIN VDE 0100-534 and IEC 60364-4-44. It
shall be able to monitor the residual current leakage accordance to EN50600 and
send alarm when the leakage current at neutral conductor above the set limit . The
residual current monitoring sensor to be of type B conformed to EN 62020. The
power socket distribution unit shall be capable of monitoring power, temperature
and environment humidity.
The power socket distribution unit shall be suitable for all kind of single phase
power or three phase power IT rack or other purpose as specified. The power
meter shall monitor the energy consumption (kWh), active power (kW) that being
consumed, voltage (V), current (A) and power factor and send data to the
monitoring system. The power socket distribution unit shall have 2 RJ45 sensor
port for external sensors, 2 Modbus connection port, Universal Serial Bus,
Ethernet connection port, status indication on connection, thin-film transistor (TFT)
LCD display and 1 Ethernet port for remotely monitoring.
The power meter measurement accuracy shall be of ±1% for the energy
monitoring, Input power plug using UK BS1363 plug ‘G’ or IEC 60309 P+N+E Cee
form. The power socket distribution unit shall be suitable for IT rack from 3.6kW to
22kW of power supply. The monitoring meter shall able to operate at 0oC to 45 oC
and non condensing at humidity between 20% to 80%.
Power main plug shall be of UK BS1363 plug ‘G’ or IEC 60309 2P+E Cee form
rated 16A or 32A and detachable from the power meter. The power outlet shall be
suitable for connection to type “G” three pin plug socket outlet or Cee-form or other
form of connection that to be approved by engineer or user
The unit shall be able to send data communication for monitoring and control
through IBMS with SNMP, SNMP trap, Ethernet 10/100 Mbps, DHCP, NTP,
Modbus, TCP, IPv4, IPv6 protocols, mobile application, Wireless Mesh Network or
any third party software and application or protocols.
TS/E/S18/12
SECTION 19 – TIME SWITCHES
1. General
1.1 The timeswitches shall be of one programmable type with RS232

interfacing and with additional auxiliary twenty-four (24) hours Quartz type
with power reserve of minimum 48 hours (after a charging time of 10min.)
in the even of power failure.
1.2 The supply voltage and the frequency range shall be 200...240 Volt a.c.
and 50 Hz respectively.
1.3 The permissible ambient temperature shall be -5o to +55oC.
1.4 The time switch shall comply to following standard
a) DIN 40050-9: Road vehicles; degrees of protection (IP-code);

protection against foreign objects,
b) DIN EN 60715: Dimensions Of Low-voltage Switchgear And

Controlgear - Standardized Mounting On Rails For Mechanical
Support Of Electrical Devices In Switchgear And Controlgear
Installations
c) IEC 60730-2-7: Automatic electrical controls for household and

similar use - Part 2-7: Particular requirements for timers and time
switches
1.5 The minimum switching interval shall be 1 minute.
1.6 The time switch shall have a changeover contact of 16 Amp (changeover)
at 240 Volt a.c. at p.f. = 1.
1.7 It shall be designed to clip on DIN-rail EN 50 022.
1.8 The accuracy shall be + 1 second per day.
1.9 The class and degree of protection shall be class II according to VDE 0633
and IP 20 as per DIN 40050 respectively.
1.10 Terminal cover shall be provided for each timeswitch.
1.11 If the time switch is not housed in D.B., approved dust and vermin proof
insulated housing shall be used.
1.12 The time switches must be of 7 days 24 hours programmable type

(minimum 6 different time settings per day).
TS/E/S19/1
SECTION 22 - CABLE TRAYS AND LADDER INSTALLATION
1. General
1.1 Cable trays shall be of approved perforated type and constructed of

minimum 1.60 mm thickness (16 S.W.G.) good quality galvanized mild
steel and Polyester powder coated. Both inside and out of cable tray shall
be protected by two coatings of approved corrosion-resistant material (e.g.,
zinc, cadmium, or enamel). Enamel shall not be used outdoors or in wet
locations. For outdoors or wet locations, approved material and coating
shall be used.
1.2 All cable tray and ladder shall comply to following standards
b) BS EN ISO 1461: Hot dip galvanized coatings on fabricated iron

and steel articles. Specifications and test methods

1.3 The manufacturer shall be certified to ISO 9001 Quality Management

System in the design, manufacture and supply of the cable trays and
ladder.
1.4 Cable ladders shall be of approved heavy duty type and constructed of
minimum 2.0 mm thickness good quality galvanised mild steel and
polyester powder coated. Cable ladder shall be protected by two coatings
of approved corrosion-resistant material (e.g., zinc, cadmium, or enamel).
1.5 Sub-Contractor shall select the trays according to the following

requirements:-
a) all cables in one layer
b) allow spacing between supports and cable ties/clips (filling

coefficient : 1.4 for power cables; 1.2 for cable size less 50 mm 2)
c) 20% spare for future usage
d) deflection of not more than 1/100th of the span at temperature +40 o

C to +50o C when full weight (including future 20% capacity) applied
to the trays
TS/E/S22/1
1.6 Cable trays shall be approved for the purpose and shall comply with the
following:
a) Shall have suitable strength and rigidity to provide adequate

support for all contained wiring.
b) Shall not present sharp edges, burrs or projections injurious to the

insulation or jackets of the wiring.
c) Shall be adequately protected against corrosion.
d) Shall include fittings or other suitable means of changes in direction

and elevation of runs.
e) Shall have side edges of minimum 15 mm for the width of 100 mm

and below; and minimum 50 mm for the width of 150 and above.
f) Shall be able to withstand the total load (including weight of cables,

cable accessories, associated equipment, cable tray, and additional
20% future load) applied to the cable tray with a deflection of not
more than 1/100th of the span at temperature +40 o C to +50o C.
1.7 If the conditions are not able to achieve, cable ladder shall be used.
1.8 Colours of cable tray for different services shall be selected by the S.O..
Permanent labels shall be provided on the bottle of trays at 1200 mm
interval or at the location when the trays change direction/penetrate wall
and floor.
1.9 Trays for extra low voltage cable shall be zintec coated with approved
permanent label "TELEPHONE", “COMPUTER”, “MATV”, “LIFT” etc.
onto the trays to indicate the different services. Permanent label "ELECT"
shall be used for electrical services. Colours of cable tray for different
services shall be "ORANGE" for electrical, "WHITE" for Extra Low Voltage
(ELV) System, Computer (Data) System, Master Antenna Television
(MATV) System, Telecommunications System “BLUE” for Public Address
(PA) System, and “ GREY” for Lift System. All exposed ceiling tray shall be
of white colour or paint as to Architect requirement. Where there is
perforated or semi-exposed ceiling, all tray shall be painted to Architect
requirement.
TS/E/S22/2
2. Cable Ladder
2.1 Cable ladder shall comply with the following :
a) Shall include fittings or other suitable means of change in direction

and elevation of runs.
b) Shall be adequately protected against corrosion.
c) Shall withstand the total load (including weight of cables, cable

accessories, associated equipment, ladder and additional 20%
future load ) applied to the cable ladder.
d) The height of the cable ladder shall be minimum 100 mm.
2.2 The cable ladder channels shall be strengthened by reinforcing inserts to

increase the torsional rigidity.
2.3 The cable ladder shall be completed with rung slots of 50 mm width and of
minimum thickness of 2 mm spaced at maximum 300 mm at the straight
runs.
2.4 Protective enclosure shall be provided for the cable ladder when the ladder
has been used for High Voltage cable installation except in the High
Voltage cable chamber. The protective enclosure shall have permanent
label "H.V." for identification.
2.5 Trays and ladder shall not run along the path of air-con diffuser
TS/E/S22/3
3. Tray/ladder Installation
3.1 Cables tray/ladder shall be installed as a complete system with all

necessary long radius bends, coupling accessories, elbows, tees, crosses,
branch and reducer sections, cable dropout accessories, and fixing
brackets fabricated from galvanized mild steel flat. Field bends of
modifications shall be so made that the electrical continuity of the cable
tray system and support for the cables shall be maintained.
3.2 Mild steel hangers fixed to wall or structural slab (with metal threaded studs
No. C14/250/60 complete with washer No. 20, two locknuts using cartridge
hammer in an approved manner shall be provided not more than 1200 mm
intervals to prevent stress on cables. Additional supports shall be provided
at junctions of cable tray/cable tray system or cable tray/steel cable
trunking system. The hangers shall be painted with a primer and two coats
of semi-glossy grey or other-approved colour.
3.3 Cable tray/ladder shall be permitted to extend transversely through

partitions and wall or vertically through floors.
3.4 Each run of cable tray shall be completed before the installation of cables.
3.5 Where tee, cross and reducer are required, factory fabricated tee, cross
and reducer section of cable tray/ladder shall be used.
3.6 Cables shall be fastened securely to transverse members of the cable

tray/ladder. Where single conductor cables comprising each phase of
neutral of a.c., circuit are installed, the conductors consisting of phase
neutral and earth of the same circuit shall be installed in group. Single
conductors shall be securely bound in circuit group to prevent excessive
movement due to fault current magnetic force.
3.7 An appropriate size of copper links, brass bolts and nuts shall be installed
at each joint trunking to provide earth continuity.
3.8 The end of the cable tray/ladder shall be connected to the earth bar of the
associated distribution board by 70 mm2 PVC (GREEN/YELLOW) cable.
3.9 Sufficient space shall be provided and maintained above cable tray/ladder
to permit adequate access for installing and maintaining the cables.
3.10 Whenever the steel cable tray/ladder passing through a full height fire wall
or floor, approved fire stop putty and approved equal material shall be used
to seal the cavity of the cables and the air-gaps between wall or floor and
steel cable tray.
3.11 Fixings for the cable tray shall be disposed at regular intervals not
exceeding 1200 mm and at 50 mm from bends and intersections. Fixings
shall be fabricated from mild steel flat bar complying with BS 4360 and
shall be painted with two coats of primer and two coats of semi-glossy grey.
TS/E/S22/4
3.12 Where the cable tray is suspended, the installation shall not be subject to
any vertical and horizontal distortion. Suspension parts are to be purpose
made of suitable length when facilities incorporated for allowing
adjustments to be made to the height of the suspended tray. The Sub-
Contractor shall design the suspension system such that there is no
distortion to the cable tray after all the services are laid on it. The cost for
these works shall be deemed to be included in this Sub-Contract. Any
distortion found on site shall be replaced at the Sub-Contractor's expense.
3.13 All cable trays shall be mechanically and electrically continuous throughout.
3.14 Cable trays shall only cut along a line of plain metal not through the
preforations. All edges of galvanised cable tray shall be painted with two
layer of primer and two coats of approved zinc rich paint. Any scratched or
exposed parts of cable trays shall be painted with the zinc rich paint.
3.15 When welding had been employed in the fabrication of the tray and/or
accessories the area around the joint shall be mechanically prepared and
thereafter treated with zinc chromate primer or zinc rich paint according to
the original finish of the metal.
3.16 Holes cut in the cable tray for the passage of cable shall be provided with
grommets complying with BS 1767: 1999. Alternatively they shall be
bushed or lined.
3.17 The cable ladder shall be supported not more than 1200 mm interval by
approved hangers or brackets.
3.18 All couplers, bends, riser, interconnection clamps and supporters and other
fittings shall be of manufacturer's standard products and shall be supported
such that it will carry the designated load.
3.19 Load test for the cable ladder shall be carried out on the complete system
in accordance to the manufacturer's recommendation.
TS/E/S22/5
SECTION 23 - STEEL CABLE TRUNKING INSTALLATION
1. General
1.1 Cable trunking shall be supplied and installed complete with fittings and
accessories and shall be of an approved manufacture. It shall be
manufactured from best quality zinc- or lead-coated sheet steel finished
stove enamelled orange or other colours or galvanized and shall be of
minimum 1.20 mm thickness (18 SWG) for sizes up to and including 75
mm x 75 mm section and 1.60 mm thickness (16 SWG) for sizes above.
The trunking shall comply with latest
a) Singapore Standard SS 249: Steel surface cable trunking and

accessories

installations
c) BS EN ISO 1461: Hot dip galvanized coatings on fabricated iron

and steel articles. Specifications and test methods

1.2 Space factor for cables in trunking shall comply strictly with Singapore
Standard CP 638.
1.3 Trunkings shall be protected both inside and out by two coatings of
approved corrosion-resistant material (e.g., zinc, cadmium, or enamel).
1.4 The manufacturer shall be certified to ISO 9001 Quality Management

System in the design, manufacture and supply of the cable trunking
system. The product should be listed in Product Listing Scheme and tested
to SS 249 or certified by internationally recognized test laboratories.
1.5 Unless otherwise stated, trunkings for lighting and power cables shall be
painted with primer and finished with two coats of "ORANGE" stove
enamel paint. Permanent labels shall be printed on the trunking.
TS/E/S23/1
1.6 Trunkings for electrical fire alarm system cables shall be painted with a
primer and finished with two coats of "Red" stove enamel paint. Colours
of trunking for different services shall be 'ORANGE' for Electrical (ELECT),
'IVORY' for Solar Photovoltaics (SPV), 'WHITE' for Extra Low Voltage
(ELV) System, Computer (Data) System, Master Antenna Television
(MATV) System, Telecommunications System, “BLUE” for Public Address
(PA) System, and “ GREY” for Lift System. All exposed trunkings shall be
of white colour or paint as to Architect requirement. Where there is
perforated or semi-exposed ceiling, all trunkings shall be painted to
Architect requirement.
1.7 Covers shall be held securely in position with self-tapping screws fixing or
approved fastening at suitable intervals to facilitate the drawing in or
removal of cables at any time.
1.8 Cable retainers shall be readily removable.
1.9 Steel trunking used in basement, outdoor, or other damp environment shall
be of weatherproof and galvanized construction with cold phosphate
pretreatment, chromate primer, and two coats of polyurethane finish.
1.10 Pin supports or insulating cleats at an interval of 5 metres shall be used for
non-sheathed cables in vertical trunking run.
1.11 Approved non-flammable heat barriers shall be installed not more than 3
metres apart in trunking, channel, or duct.
2. Accessories
2.1 Right angle bends, 45 degree angle bends, intersections, Tee joints,
Gusset bends, Gusset joints, Gusset Tees, Gusset intersections, end caps,
reducers, vertical offsets, horizontal offsets, end flanges and flanges
adapters, etc. shall be fabricated in factory and shall made of the same
materials and finished off with the colour as the colour as the adjoining
steel trunking.
2.2 All bends, tees, reducers, couplings, etc. shall be of standard pattern:
where it is necessary for a special fitting to be used, it is to be fabricated by
the manufacturers.
3. Installation
3.1 The whole steel trunking system shall be installed to comply fully with of the
3.2 The trunking shall run parallel to each other and at right angle to building
lines with bends, tees, intersections, and flanges, end caps, reducers,
offsets, and flange adapters etc.
TS/E/S23/2
3.3 Approved threaded steel rod hangers and angle iron brackets painted with
two coats of approved anti-rust paint and finished with semi-glossy paint
shall be provided at an interval of not more than two (2) metres. Mounting
brackets to support trunking shall be secured with metal threaded studs
No. C14/250/60 complete with washer No. 20, two locks nuts using
"TORNADS" cartridge hammer or approved equivalent. The maximum
deflection of the suspended trunking must not exceed 12.5 mm when fully
loaded between suspension points five (5) metres apart. Where
necessary, vertical trunkings shall be provided with suspension units and
thrust blocks.
3.4 An appropriate size copper link, brass bolts and nuts shall be provided at
each joint trunking to provide earth continuity.
3.5 Conduit entry to trunking shall be coupling and male bush.
3.6 The inner radius of any bend shall not be less than twice the minor
dimension of rectangular section trunking.
3.7 Each run of trunking shall be completed before the installation of cable.
3.8 Sufficient space shall be provided and maintained to permit adequate

access for installing and maintaining the cables.
3.9 Where it is necessary to provide additional trunking over fixings, these shall
be supplied by the manufacturer and shall be applied with the
manufacturer's tools.
3.10 Where holes or apertures are formed in the trunking for cable entry, they
shall be bushed with brass smoothbore entry bushes, or PVC grommet
strips. Cable supports are to be inserted in vertical runs of trunking and
cables are to be laced thereto in their respective groups.
3.11 Whenever the steel trunking passing through a full height fire wall or floor,
approved fire stop putty or approved equal material shall be used to seal
the cavity inside of the trunking and approved fire stop compound or
approved equal material to seal the air-gaps between wall or floor and
trunking.
3.12 Where more than one service is involved multi-compartment trunking shall
be employed to separate the services.
3.13 Trunking shall not run along the path of air-con diffuser.
TS/E/S23/3
SECTION 24 - CONDUIT INSTALLATION (CONCEALED OR EXPOSED)
1. General
1.1 All metal conduits shall be of heavy-gauge galvanized screwed steel and
have minimum Class 4 protection against corrosion.
1.2 All fittings shall be of the screwed pattern, and no solid or inspection
elbows, tees or bends shall be installed. Generally, all conduit fittings shall
be galvanized by the hot process both inside and out and coated with
stove-enamelled orange or other approved finish inside and out. All conduit
fittings shall have Class 4 protection against corrosion.
1.3 All metal conduits and fitting shall comply to following standard:
b) IEC 60614-2-1: Specification for conduits for electrical installations.

Part 2: Particular specifications for conduits. Section One: Metal
conduits
c) IEC 61386-21: Conduit systems for cable management. Part 21:

Particular requirements - Rigid conduit systems
d) BS 4568-1: Specification for steel conduit and fittings with metric

threads of ISO form for electrical installations. Steel conduit, bends
and couplers
e) BS 4568-2: Specification for steel conduit and fittings with metric

threads of ISO form for electrical installations. Fittings and
components


1.4 Conduits shall be free from internal burrs, fins and the like that may cause
damage to cables.
1.5 All conduits shall be concealed inside slab, wall, partition and column
where there is no false ceiling and running below ceiling.
1.6 All rough edges shall be removed when the conduit is cut. When threaded
in the field, a tapered cutting die 18 mm per 300 mm taper) shall be used.
TS/E/S24/1
1.7 Minimum size conduit shall be 25 mm diameter. Other sizes shall be as

indicated on the plans, or as required by Singapore Standard SS 638 for
number and size of conductors installed.
1.8 Pull wires shall be provided in telephone, AV and other low voltage
equipment conduits/points.
1.9 Space factor for cable in conduits must strictly conform to Singapore
Standard SS 638.
1.10 All PVC insulated cables, other than flexible, shall be protected throughout
their length with heavy-gauge screwed welded conduit (enamelled or
galvanized as required) with the necessary approved loop-in, draw-in,
angle and outlet boxes. No type of `elbow' or `tee' will be allowed on works
under this Specification.
1.11 Where adaptable boxes are used they shall be of cast iron or heavy-gauge
sheet steel of not less than 12 gauge.
1.12 Conduits for extra low voltage cable shall be galvanized with words "TEL"
for TELEPHONE, permanently printed onto the conduits to indicate the
different services. All conduits shall be painted as per colour scheme
stated in General Specification.
2. Accessories
2.1 All circular junction boxes, pull boxes, solid elbows and inspection elbows
are to be malleable iron type and of standard pattern with spout to British
Standard BS 4568: 1970.
2.2 Circular junction boxes, pull boxes and inspection elbows shall be provided
with gaskets and lids.
2.3 Bushing shall be used at the point where the conduit goes into a box,
fitting, or other enclosure.
2.4 All switch and socket outlet boxes shall be surface mounted galvanized
steel type complying with British Standard BS 4662:1970 with heavy
protection both inside and outside. They shall have earth terminals.
2.5 All lids for draw-in boxes, etc., whether of the BS or adaptable type shall be
of heavy cast-iron or 12 gauge sheet steel, and shall be fixed (overlapping
for flush work) by means of two or four 2BA round-headed brass screws.
TS/E/S24/2
3. Installation
3.1 The whole conduit system shall be installed to comply fully with clauses in
3.2 The conduit shall be laid as far as possible in straight lines with easy sets
or bends. Bends or offset shall be made with standard conduit benders,
field bends made with an approved bender or hickey, hub-type conduit
fittings.
3.3 Prior permission shall be obtained from the S.O. for hacking and chasing
on reinforced concrete structures. Any unauthorized hacking and chasing
shall render the Sub-Contractor liable for penalty to be determined by S.O.
3.4 All conduit joints shall be cut square, threaded, reamed smoothly and
drawn uptight. Conduit shall be clean, tune and free from all obstructions
and painted with aluminum paint before being screwed into sockets and
boxes.
3.5 Conduit shall run parallel to each other and at right angles to building lines
and painted with semi-glossy paint to match the colour of the walls and
ceiling. Where the conduit is above the false ceiling, orange colour conduit
shall be used for L.V. installation.
3.6 Conduits shall be continuous from outlet to outlet and from outlets to
cabinets for switch gears, pull or function boxes, and shall be secured to all
boxes with locknuts and bushing in such a manner that each system shall
be electrically continuous throughout. Conduits' ends shall be capped to
prevent entrance of foreign materials during construction.
3.7 All conduit system shall be installed complete before conductor/cables are
pulled in. Conduits shall be supported at least every 3000 mm by
approved spacer bar type of saddles or flat hangers and firmly fasten within
150 mm of each outlet, junction boxes, cabinet, or fittings, etc.
3.8 Conduits below false ceiling shall run vertically to each switch or socket
outlet box. No horizontal conduit work shall be allowed.
3.9 The allowable bending radius for conduit is 12 times the diameter of
conduit.
3.10 All conduits and fittings are to be painted on ground before installation to
walls and partitions.
3.11 No conduit installation work shall be allowed to run under the cement
screed except for areas using underfloor/flush floor trunking system.
3.12 A circular pull box shall be used to limit any pull to maximum 8000 mm. A
sum of conduit between circular pull boxes must not have more than two
90o bends.
TS/E/S24/3
3.13 No conduit shall be installed with more than two right-angle bends without
draw-in boxes and draw-in boxes shall not be more than 8000 mm apart.
3.14 All conduits, except where otherwise specified, shall drop not rise to the
respective points. In no circumstances shall the conduit be erected in such
a manner as to form a U without outlet, or in any other way that would
provide a trap for condensed moisture.
3.15 Provision shall be made for draining all conduits or fixtures by a method
3.16 Ceiling point boxes are to be of medium pattern malleable iron, with fixing
holes at 50 mm centres and conforming to SS Specification.
3.17 All conduit systems shall be installed complete before

conductors/cables are pulled in.
3.18 Galvanized spaced bar saddles shall be used for securing conduits on
surfaces other than in structural steel members for which an approved type
of clamp shall be devised. Spacing of saddles shall not exceed 1200mm
(ft.) for conduit sizes up to and including 25 mm and 1.8 m for sizes 32 mm
and above and within 1000 mm of each outlet box, junction box, cabinet or
fitting, etc. Full saddle shall be used for all vertical run of conduit.
3.19 In addition, conduit fixing shall be located not less than 150 mm from each
surface box or switch and shall be one per conduit to each such box or
switch.
3.20 Connections between conduits and trunking and conduit and steel boxes,
or between conduit and steel cases of distribution gear or equipment, shall
be made by means of a flanged coupling and brass smooth-bore entry
bush. The lead washer shall be fitted on the inside of the trunking or box,
etc.
3.21 Conduits set through walls will not be permitted. When change of direction
is required after passing through a wall an appropriate back outlet box is to
be fitted.
3.22 All joints between lengths of conduit, or between conduit and fittings, etc.
are to be threaded home and butted.
3.23 Sets and bends are to be made without indentation, and the bore must be
full and free throughout. All screw-cutting oil must be carefully wiped off
before joining up.
3.24 Conduit runs, as far as possible, are to be symmetrical and equally spaced.
3.25 The Sub-Contractor shall take all precautions in situations likely to be

damp to see that all conduits and boxes in the vicinity are rendered
watertight.
TS/E/S24/4
3.26 During the progress of the work all exposed ends of conduits shall be fitted
with suitable plastic or metal plugs. Plugs of wood, paper and the like will
not be acceptable as sufficient protection.
3.27 All conduit fittings not carrying lighting or other fittings shall be supplied
with suitable cast-iron covers with round-head brass screws. Where flush
boxes are installed the covers shall be of the overlapping rustproof pattern.
3.28 All conduit boxes, including boxes on and in which fittings, switches and
socket outlets are mounted, shall be securely fixed to the walls and ceilings
by means of not less than two countersunk screws, correctly spaced, and
the fixing holes shall be countersunk, so that the screw heads do not
project into the box.
3.29 Lighting, power and any other types of circuit shall be run in separate
conduits and no circuit of any one system shall be installed in any conduit
or box of any other system.
3.30 Under no circumstances shall conduits from different distribution boards be

connected to any one junction box and likewise cables from different
distribution boards shall not be housed in the same conduit. The phase,
neutral and earth conductors of the same circuit or circuits shall in all cases
be drawn into the same conduit.
3.31 Where conduits are required to run across expansion joints, they shall be
provided with a short-length of approved liquid-tight, nonmetallic, and
sunlight-resistant PVC covered flexible metal conduit sufficient to allow for
a total movement of +50 mm.
3.32 Where conduits are run in wet or damp location, conduits, clips, saddles,
bolts and screws, etc., shall be corrosion resistant materials or protected
against corrosion by corrosion resistant materials as required by Singapore
Standard SS 638 and approved for that purpose by the S.O.
3.33 Flexible conduits shall be terminated with couplings and connectors

specially made for the purpose.
3.34 Short lengths of appropriate size of approved liquid-tight, nonmetallic, and

sunlight-resistant PVC covered flexible conduits shall be used for final
connections to motors, lighting fixtures, and other equipment subject to
movement or vibration (maximum of 300 mm for motors or other equipment
and 1500 mm for lighting fixtures). Earth continuity of all flexible conduits
shall be maintained by 4mm2 minimum copper conductors in addition to the
number of cores of the cables.
3.35 Whenever conduit passing through a full height fire wall or floor, approved
fire stop compound shall be used to seal the air-gaps between wall or floor
and conduit.
TS/E/S24/5
SECTION 25 - FLOOR TRUNKING INSTALLATION FOR POWER, TELEPHONE

AND DATA COMMUNICATION SYSTEMS
1. Underfloor Trunking System
1.1 Power
a) All underfloor trunking shall be made from high impact uPVC and
shall comply with latest Singapore Standard SS 638 and BS 476
Part 5.
b) All underfloor conduits shall be made from super high impact

uPVC and shall comply with BS 6099.
c) Underfloor trunking and conduits shall be free from sharp edges

and objects which cause damage to cables.
d) Minimum size conduits shall be 25 mm diameter other sizes shall

be as indicated on the drawings, Singapore Standard SS 638 with
amendments for the number and size of conductors installed.
e) Space factor for cables in trunking and conduits must comply

strictly with Singapore Standard SS 638.
1.2 Accessories
a) All junction, outlet and vertical access boxes shall be rust free
and water-tight construction.
b) The junction box shall be fabricated from a set of uPVC moulded

sections on a steel base plate. They shall be retained in position
by plastic clips on the steel pillars which are threaded for devoting
screws. Earth terminals shall be pressed into the box base plate.
The uPVC module shall provide location for duct entry and also
for the tunnel separators. The various tray and frame assemblies
shall be retained on the box devoting screws with steel clips. The
uPVC duct entry sockets shall be of low tolerance fit to prevent
the egress of screed material into the duct box. The box shall
have internal height adjustment to allow up to 25 mm adjustment
to suit screed depth.
c) All concealed outlet boxes on the floor shall be fabricated from

sheet steel with spot welded corner angle pieces and segregation
plates. Steel pillars, threaded for earth terminals, shall be
pressed into the base pan.
d) The uPVC duct entry sockets shall be of low tolerance fit to

prevent the ingress of screed material into the duct or box. The
top unit shall be fitted with a reversible moulded cable protector,
lids with hinges and an adjustable segregator trim for carpet or
other floor finish. The lids shall be firmly locked with a ball and
spring clip. If the concealed outlet boxes are for power cable
clamp, cable protector clamp and BS switch-socket outlet shall be
used.
TS/E/S25/1
e) All pedestal outlets boxes shall be manufactured from die-cast

aluminum with integral lugs screw threaded M 3.5 for location of
all BS switch-socket outlets to BS 4568 : Part 2 1970. Cadmium
plated earthing terminals shall be pressed into the body casting.
f) Accessories such as vertical access boxes, blanking piece, direct

outlets, jointing sleeves, duct adapters, fixing clips, socket
reducers and tunnel separators, necessary for the completion of
the underfloor duct system shall be included in this Sub-Contract.
1.3 Installation
a) All underfloor trunking and conduits shall be accurately aligned,

anchored on floor slabs at 1.5 metre intervals by approved type of
fixing clips prior to any screed being poured.
b) To prevent subsequent cracking, chicken wire mesh shall be

used along these runs as a reinforcing agent.
c) Vertical bends, conduit connecting sleeves, horizontal bends

jointing sleeves, direct outlets, vertical access boxes and end
flanges shall be provided if required due to site conditions.
d) All floors boxes shall be provided with a timber "throw away" lid to
prevent ingress of screed and dust during installation.
e) All floor boxes shall be levelled so that surface covers will be flush
with the finished floor covering.
f) All floor duct systems shall be installed complete before

conductors/cables are pulled in.
g) For telephone underfloor trunkings system, two draw-wires shall

be installed in all trunking and conduits for future requirements.
h) Type of covers (trays) for junction boxes shall be provided

according to the type of floor finishes specified by the S.O.
1.4 Load Test
a) A load test shall be carried out on the underfloor box and

trunking.
b) The box shall be able to withstand a 3.35 kN load (18 cm X 7.9

cm indentor) with only 2 mm deflection.
c) The trunking shall be able to withstand minimum 150 kN load

(screed with wire mesh).
TS/E/S25/2
2. Flushfloor Trunking System
2.1 General
a) The flushfloor trunking shall comprise accessible single, double

or triple compartment rectangular steel trunkings, multi-way
junction boxes complete with flyover, vertical access boxes,
pedestal outlet boxes, couplers, levelling brackets, end cap, fixing
brackets and all other accessories for the telephone and data
communication system.
b) The trunking, junction boxes, vertical access boxes etc. shall be

constructed from pre-galvanised sheet steel to BS EN
10142:1991, BS 2989:1991 and BS 4678 Class 3. The thickness
of the trunking body, compartment separators, flanges, junction
boxes, vertical access boxes etc. shall not be less than 1.6 mm
while all covers shall be not less than 2.5 mm thick.
c) The trunking covers shall be of modular design in equal sections

to facilitate installation and subsequent removal and
interchangeatility of covers. The entire length of the trunking and
junction boxes shall accessible for maintenance.
d) Each modular cover shall be provided with four number of rust

resistant quick release fastener clamps made from zinc alloy die
cast material. The clamps shall be tightened by stainless steel
screws. Spring pressure clamps shall not be allowed.
2.2 Accessories
a) The system shall be designed for routing of power, telephone and

data communication cables in three separate compartment with
suitable flyover.
b) Separator shall be provided at junction box to ensure proper

segregation of different types of cables when crossing at different
directions.
c) Tap-off for any three services shall be made possible at any point
along the trunking by drilling into the cover and installation of a
pedestal outlet box.
d) Suitable extruded PVC gaskets shall be provided for the entire

lengths of the trunkings, junction boxes and vertical access
boxes.
e) Pedestal outlet boxes shall be manufactured from high pressure

zinc alloy die-cast material fitted when an earth stud. It shall be
protected by a layer of high temperature oven baked epoxy
powder coating.
TS/E/S25/3
f) Floor outlet box shall be used for housing the switched socket
outlet, data and communication outlet as shown in the tender
drawings. The outlet box shall be supplied with a textured, easy to
clean frame and the lid shall be available in grey colour. The frame
with lid shall be suitable for used in carpet or vinyl tile (7 mm
thickness) environment and to be self adjustable to the floor
finishes. All outlet boxes shall have adjustable mounting bracket for
mounting below or above the floor panel. Coloured trim shall be
provided to match the floor finishes.
2.3 Installation
a) The structural floor slab on which the flushfloor are to be laid shall
be clean and level by the Sub-Contractor. Humps and unlevel
structural floor shall be hacked to ensure accurate levelling of the
system.
b) A layer of wet screed shall be laid on the structural floor slab by

the Contractor.
c) The straight feeder trunking with the junction shall be laid first and
following by the distribution trunking. All fixing brackets are to be
fastened on the exterior of the trunking and the covers shall not
be removed until later stage.
d) After the trunking and junction box have been set in position and
levelled, they shall be securely fastened to the structural floor by
the means of using the floor fixing brackets. The fixing method
shall be submitted to S.O. for approval before proceed works.
e) All joints shall be sealed with metal-to-metal sealant to prevent

screed seepage into the system. All trunking and junction boxes
shall be protected by an adhesive based PVC film or other type of
approved material to prevent the trunking and boxes being
stained by the wet cement before screeding.
f) The entire flushfloor trunking network at every floor shall be

electrically continuous. Suitable earthing arrangement shall be
made at all parts for the installation of earthing cables/earthing
link. Standard coupling device shall be used.
g) Immediately after the screed is thoroughly cured, an inspection

and cleaning shall be carried out to ensure the system is cleaned
and dry. All covers shall be opening up for inspection. Cold
galvanised touch-up paint shall be used if rusting occurs.
h) Before laying cables, locations of the service outlets boxes shall

be marked to ensure extra lead of cables provided for termination
used. All covers shall be precisely aligned and tightened to
prevent transmission of noise and ingress of dirt.
TS/E/S25/4
2.4 Load test
a) A load test shall be carried out on the flushfloor junction box and
trunking.
b) The box and trunking shall be able to withstand a 9 kN load (18

cm X 7.9 cm indentor) with only 2 mm deflection.
3. Raisefloor Trunking System
3.1 General
a) The raisefloor trunking shall comprise accessible single, double

or triple compartment rectangular steel trunkings, multi-way
junction boxes complete with flyover, vertical access boxes, floor
outlet boxes, couplers, levelling brackets, end cap, fixing brackets
and all other accessories for the telephone and data
communication system. All floor trunking shall be raised by
minimum 25 mm using elevated trunking coupler.
b) The trunking, junction boxes, vertical access boxes etc. shall be

constructed from pre-galvanised sheet steel to BS EN
10142:1991, BS 2989:1991 and BS 4678 Class 3. The thickness
of the trunking body, compartment separators, flanges, junction
boxes, vertical access boxes etc. shall not be less than 1.6 mm
while all covers shall be not less than 2.5 mm thick.
c) The trunking covers shall be of modular design in equal sections

to facilitate installation and subsequent removal and
interchangeatility of covers. The entire length of the trunking and
junction boxes shall accessible for maintenance.
d) Each modular cover shall be provided with four number of rust

resistant quick release fastener clamps made from zinc alloy die
cast material. The clamps shall be tightened by stainless steel
screws. Spring pressure clamps shall not be allowed.
3.2 Accessories
a) The system shall be designed for routing of power, telephone and

data communication cables in three separate compartment with
suitable flyover.
b) Separator shall be provided at junction box to ensure proper

segregation of different types of cables when crossing at different
directions.
c) Tap-off for any three services shall be made possible at any point
along the trunking by drilling into the cover or using purposed
made tap-off unit for installation of floor outlet box.
TS/E/S25/5
d) Floor outlet box shall be used for housing the switched socket
outlet, data and communication outlet as shown in the tender
drawings. The outlet box shall be supplied with a textured, easy to
clean frame and the lid shall be available in grey colour. The
frame with lid shall be suitable for used in carpet or vinyl tile (7
mm thickness) environment and to be self adjustable to the floor
finishes. All outlet boxes shall have adjustable mounting bracket
for mounting below or above the floor panel. Coloured trim shall
be provided to match the floor finishes.
3.3 Installation
a) The Sub-Contractor shall co-ordinate with the S.O. for the

positioning of junction boxes on the raisefloor. The final position
shall be submitted to S.O. for approval.
b) The entire raisefloor trunking network at every floor shall be

electrically continuous. Suitable earthing arrangement shall be
made at all parts for the installation of earthing cables/earthing
link. Standard coupling device shall be used.
c) Before laying cables, locations of the service outlets boxes shall

be marked to ensure extra lead of cables provided for termination
used.
d) A load test shall be carried out on the raised floor junction box and
trunking. The box and trunking shall be able to withstand a 9 kN
load (18 cm X 7.9 cm indentor) with only 2 mm deflection
e) The cutting of raisefloor to suit the junction box shall be carried

out under this Sub-Contract.
f) Whenever the steel trunking passing through a full height fire wall
or floor, approved fire stop putty or approved equal material shall
be used to seal the cavity inside of the trunking and approved fire
stop compound or approved equal material to seal the air-gaps
between wall or floor and trunking
TS/E/S25/6
SECTION 26 - EARTHING
1. General
1.1 The Sub-Contractor shall supply, install, test and commission the following:
a) Earth bar and cabling connected to earth mass together with

earthing electrodes.
b) Earthing for the entire electrical System.
c) Separate sets of main earthing systems complete with earthing

electrodes, earthing cables, main earthing bar and other
accessories for the complete earthing installation for the following
system:
1) High Tension System
2) Low Tension System
3) Generator System
4) Audio and Visual system
5) Telecommunication systems
6) Computer Systems
7) Data Centre
8) Server Room
9) Clean Room
10) Equipments.
d) Other main earthing system as shown in the drawings.
e) All earthing bars provided in this Sub-Contract shall have an

additional of 2 nos. of spare termination points in excess to all the
other terminations provided for.
1.2 The entire earthing installation shall fully comply with all relevant clauses of
the latest edition of Singapore Standard SS 638: code of practice for
electrical installations and Singapore Standard SS551: code of practice for
earthing.
1.3 The earth continuity conductor shall be of high - conductivity copper

continuous throughout its length and without joints except by approved
mechanical clamps.
1.4 The metal parts of all switch gears, switches, metal boxes, switch-socket
outlets, isolators, metal trunking, lighting luminaries, metal conductors and
TS/E/S26/1
all metal work liable to become alive in the event of failure of insulation and
the earth connection of all electrical fittings and appliances shall be
effectively earthed by means of earth continuity conductor of adequate
size.
1.5 The earth continuity conductor shall be of high - conductivity copper

continuous throughout its length and without joints except by approved
mechanical clamps or approved PVC (GREEN/YELLOW) insulated copper
cables.
1.6 If earth plate is employed, the Sub-Contractor shall arrange with the EMA.
to inspect the installation before covering with earth.
1.7 All earth conductors shall be protected by concrete slabs of 200 mm (W) x
600 mm (L) x 50 mm (T).
2. Earth Connections
2.1 The earth continuity conductor from all exposed metal parts of equipment
required to be earthed including earth connections to plug sockets shall be
connected by one of the following appropriate methods unless otherwise
stated :-
a) To earth connection at the distribution board supplying the

equipment or plug socket.
b) To any point on the sub-main or main earth continuity conductor

supply the relevant distribution board.
c) To residual current circuit breaker installed in accordance with

EMA's requirement.
3. Main Earth Continuity Conductor
The main earth continuity conductor from switchboard to earth electrode shall be
installed as directly as possible without looping into any accessory or equipment.
4. Earthing Electrodes
4.1 Earthing electrodes shall comprise one or more hard-drawn copper rod of
minimum diameter of 16 mm. The length of the electrodes/rods shall be
made up from standard 1200 mm or 1800 mm lengths with internal screw
and socket joints. The electrodes/rods shall be driven into the ground to a
depth of at least 3650 mm regardless of the size and numbers used. In
any circumstance, it shall be sized that it can be driven into the soil without
of deforming the rod/electrode.
4.2 Earth electrodes shall be driven into the ground at a distance of at least
1000 mm away from the building line and by means of mechanical
hammers employing driving heads.
TS/E/S26/2
4.3 The distance between any two driven electrodes shall be at least twice that
driven length. If the earthing resistance due to one electrode is insufficient
for the required purpose additional electrodes shall be driven into the
ground and connected to the original electrode until a sufficiently low value
of earth resistance to meet specified requirements is achieved.
4.4 Each earth electrode shall be located as instructed by the S.O. and be
provided with a concrete pit with substantial removal lib to enable access to
the connection between earthing electrode and earth continuity conductor
to be obtained. The earth continuity conductor shall be clamped to the
earth electrode by an approved method that shall enable the connection to
be broken and to be remade as often as may be necessary.
5. Main Earth Resistance
The resistance of the main earth electrode/s to the general mass of the earth,
except where earth leakage circuit breakers are installed in the circuits, shall be
low enough to permit the conducting current to earth of the value not less than
those specified in the latest edition of Singapore Standard SS551 standards or
latest.
6. Earth Electrodes
Each earth electrode shall be located as instructed by the Superintending Officer

and be provided with a concrete pit with substantial removal lid to enable access to
the connection between earthing electrode and earth continuity conductor to be
obtained. The earth continuity conductor shall be clamped to the earth electrode
by an approved method that shall enable the connection to be broken and to be
remade as often as may be necessary. The clamping method shall function so that
the earth continuity is maintained when any one of the electrodes is disconnected
for testings.
7. Earth Plate -- Solid Type
Solid earth plate shall be made of high continuity copper of dimension 900 mm x
900 mm x 3 mm.
8. Earth Plate -- Lattice type
Lattice type of earth plate shall be made of ten (10) no. hard drawn high
conductivity tinned, rectangular copper bars of 900 mm x 25 mm x 3 mm bolted
together by 5 mm diameter bolts and nuts to form a dimension of minimum size of
900 mm x 900 mm. The distance between bars shall not be more than 100 mm.
9. Earth Continuity Conductor Resistance
The electrical resistance of earth continuity conductor and earthing lead measured
from the connection with the main electrode to any other position in the complete
installation in the building shall not exceed 1 ohm.
TS/E/S26/3
10. Inspection Pit
10.1 A precast concrete inspection pit shall be provided for each earth
electrode. The precast concrete cover shall be fixed flush to ground level
over a concrete inspection hole 200 mm x 200 x 250 mm deep. The cost of
which shall be included in the Tender Sum.
10.2 For inspection pit on the car park or road, suitable approved cast iron
inspection pit and cover shall be used.
10.3 All the inspection pit shall be filled with approved fine grade of sand at the
end of the testing and commissioning of the system.
10.4 All inspection pit shall properly label with type of earth pit, date of test, ohm
of the point, pit number and the total ohm achieved by the system. Label
shall installed at the internal of the pit for car park, road and concrete area
11. Label
The end of each earthing lead inside the concrete inspection hole shall be labelled
with 4.75 mm lettering "SAFETY ELECTRICAL EARTH DO NOT REMOVE"
stamped into an aluminum plate.
12. Size and Type of Copper Earth Conductor
12.1 The size of copper earth conductor shall conform to Table 1 of Singapore
Standard SS551: 2009. But, the minimum size of 25 mm x 3 mm copper
tape or 70 mm2 green PVC insulated copper cable shall be used.
12.2 Earthing cables from main earth bar to earth electrodes; H.V. switchgear
frames; L.V. switchgear frames, transformers frames and transformer
neutrals etc. shall be individually connected from individual equipment to
main earth bar.
12.3 Each earth conductor shall be clearly labelled.
12.4 Green/Yellow PVC insulated cables shall be used for substation earth
electrodes and transformer neutral.
12.5 Earth tape used for EMI cage shall be of green PVC insulated copper tape.
12.6 Earth cable used for EMI earth bonding shall be of green PVC insulated
copper cable encased in GI conduit.
13. Main Earth Bar
13.1 Main earth bar shall be made of high conductivity hard-drawn copper bar of
minimum cross-section area 300 mm2 (6 mm thick x 50 mm width) unless
otherwise stated.
TS/E/S26/4
13.2 The actual location of main earth bar shall be decided by the
Superintending Officer on site.
13.3 The minimum length of the main earth bar shall 500 mm. The main earth
bar shall be bolted onto the wall by means of minimum four nos. of
approved 2700V epoxy insulators. Additional nos. of insulators shall be
used for additional length of 200 mm.
13.4 Two numbers of earth cables/tapes shall only be allowed to terminate to

each terminal.
14. Installation of Earth Plate or Electrode
14.1 A layer of 150 mm depth coke shall be filled in the pit before and after the
installation of earth plate.
14.2 Earth corner of every earth plate shall have one no. of copper earth tape of
minimum size of 25 mm x 3 mm bolted with minimum two (2) braze bolts
and nuts onto the plate. The other end of the tape shall be clamped to the
exposed end of solid copper earth rods of 3650 mm x 16 mm diameter
which shall be placed at four corners of the earth plates.
14.3 Each exposed end of the earth rods shall be housed in a pre-cast concrete
inspection pit complete with cover.
14.4 If the inspection pit is located on the car park or road, suitable approved
cast iron inspection pit and cover shall be used.
14.5 Approved type of connector clamps for connecting copper tape to earth rod
and connecting cable sockets for PVC insulated copper cable to earth rod
shall be used. Only one number of earth cable or copper tape shall be
allowed in each conductor clamp made to the earth electrode rod.
14.6 Non-water soluble, non-toxic, non-petrol based polymer grease or oxide

inhibiting compound or approved equal compound that seals electrical
connections from oxidation shall be applied to all joints and connections.
14.7 All cable connection shall have tinned copper socket to prevent corrosion
and oxidation.
14.8 All the end of copper tape shall be tinned.
TS/E/S26/5
SECTION 28 - SURGE PROTECTIVE DEVICES (SPD)
1. General
1.1 This section of the specification covers the supply, installation and the testing
for the surge protective devices and is to read in conjunction with the
drawings.
1.2 The system shall be installed according to the following standards. Where the
Publications are referenced throughout this specification and shall apply when
relevant.
a) UL 1449 Transient Voltage Surge Suppressors.
b) ANS/IEEE C62.41 Recommended Practice on Surge Voltages in Low-

Voltage AC Power Circuits.
c) ANS/IEEE C62.33 Standard Test Specifications for Varistor Surge

Protective Devices.
d) ANS/IEEE C62.45 IEE Guide on Surge testing for Equipment

connected to Low-Voltage AC Power Circuits.
e) IEC 61000-4-5 Surge Immunity Requirements.
f) Singapore standard SS553 Code of Practice for Protection against

lightning part 4 Electrical and electronic systems within structures
g) IEC 60364-4-44 Low-voltage electrical installations: Protection for

safety – Protection against voltage disturbances and electromagnetic
disturbances
h) IEC 61643-11 Surge protective devices connected to low-voltage

power systems – Requirements and test methods
i) IEC 61643-12 Surge protective devices connected to low-voltage

power distribution systems – Selection and application principles
j) IEC 62305-4 Protection against lightning: Electrical and electronic

systems within structures
1.3 All components shall be from the same manufacturer to ensure that system
performance is fully coordinated.
1.4 Surge Protective devices (SPD’s) shall be installed at each main switchboard
and at distribution switchboard supplying critical equipment (computers, PLC’s
etc) and original devices as indicated in the drawings.
TS/E/S28/1
2. Main Switchboard Surge Protective Devices
The minimum acceptable requirements for a main switchboard SPD are as follows:-
2.1 The maximum continuous operating voltage (MCOV) of the SPD must be 25%
above nominal system voltage. For example, for use on a 240V AC (phase-
neutral) system, the SPD’s rated MCOV must exceed 300V AC.
2.2 The maximum single withstand surge current, per phase of the SPD, is to be
a minimum of 140kA (8µs rise time and 20 µs delay time to half peak
amplitude), including all fusing and overcurrent protection. The failure of any
fusing mechanism under this high current condition is not permissible.
2.3 The complete SPD must be UL listed to UL 1449 or equivalent for 230/400V
AC (phase-neutral) systems, the rated suppression voltage for the complete
SPD is to be 800V or less.
2.4 The SPD must be modular in design. Surge protection circuitry, fusing
mechanisms and diagnostics are to be housed in a replaceable module.
Discrete modules are to be employed for each phase. Each surge protection
component within a module is to be individually protected by thermal and short
circuit fusing mechanisms that disconnect should a fault occur.
2.5 The SPD must include full diagnostics, electrical (LEDs) and mechanical (a
flag visible through a window) status indicators must be presented at the
module level. Remote status indication is to be available through dry (or
voltage free) contacts which can be connected to a PLC/Building Automatic
System.
2.6 All surge carrying connections within the SPD are to be heavy duty bolted
connections. Wires less than 8/AWG (10mm²) or friction contacts for
replaceable modules are not to be used.
3. Distribution Switchboard Surge Protective Devices
3.1 The SPD’s shall be : listed to UL1449 or equivalent, having a maximum

continuous operating voltage greater than 15% or 25% above nominal system
voltage, have a maximum single withstand surge current of 25kA, or higher,
per phase and have a UL suppression voltage of 800V or less for 240V AC
systems. Status indication shall be provided on the unit to shoe operational
readiness.
3.2 Performance of these surge protective devices shall be coordinated with the
main switchboard SPD such that 95% of incoming surge current is diverted by
the main switchboard.
TS/E/S28/2
4. Surge Protective Devices For Data-Communication Lines
SPD’s for data lines shall : have a maximum surge capacity of 10kA per line, less
than 3dB signal attenuation at 5 times the maximum data bit (or baud)rate, have a let-
through voltage appropriate for the susceptibility of the interface and a maximum
continuous operating voltage 25% above the peak signal voltage.
5. Protection Mode for SPD
The SPD shall be installed to protect the line-ground (L-G), line-netural (L-N) and
Netural-ground (N-G).
Warning indication shall be provided for high neutral to ground voltage to be able for
identification any potential wiring faults conditions which exist within the facility.
6. Test
6.1 All test result from relevant testing authorities shall be submitted for approval.
6.2 All tests shall be carried out according the approved standard and to the
satisfaction of the superintending officer.
7. Label
All labels shall be clearly shown at the side of the devices.
TS/E/S28/3
SECTION 29 – SMART CARD ACCESS WITH COMPUTER AND SOFTWARE

SECURITY SYSTEM
Section A : Card Access system
1. System Overview
1.1 The system shall be a fully integrated Computer-Based Security

Monitoring and Access Control System. It shall be a multi-tier
distributed intelligent system with the latest state of the art
microprocessor technology incorporated at every level.
1.2 The computers/microprocessors shall be capable of functioning in

stand alone mode or communicating with computers in the hierarchy
above and below. The lower level controllers shall take the control
when higher level computer is down or not reachable and shall serve
the system in degraded mode.
1.3 The users interface with the computer system shall be via the user
level. The users shall interact with the computer via the keyboard or
mouse. Field information gathered by the computer system shall be
transformed into human readable form and shall be presented via
intuitive summery windows and graphic floor plans dynamically in real
time, for ease of monitoring and control. Printers and disk drives shall
serve as a logging device, where data can be retrieved and processed
in a later time.
1.4 The scope of work to be covered in this section shall include the
supply, delivery, install, test and commission and the final handover of
the Security Card Access system.
1.5 The works covered in this section is considered as specialist work; the
Tenderer shall seek competent specialist in this field to prepare
submission of the works as part of the overall tender submission.
1.6 The system shall provide facilities to configure, edit, review and
implement security SOPs, such as time-based schedule, event-based
schedule and situation based program triggering schemes.
1.7 The system shall reserve flexible interfaces to integrate with 3rd party
systems whenever required, and shall cater expansion capability
without having to change entire system structure.
2. Equipment Description
2.1 Supervisory Centre
a) The Supervisory Centre (SC) shall operate on a high speed

data network with maximum data throughput of 1Gbps. The
SC network shall use industry standard Ethernet,
communication network. Windowing software package shall
be implemented in the supervisory centre to ensure
instantaneous response to operator's input especially for the
display of dynamic graphics. Also, this shall allow for the
simultaneous viewing of text messages and associated
graphics.
TS/E/S29/1
b) The SC software shall be developed using latest .Net

technology, shall adopt WCF (Windows Communication
Foundation) as the means of communication among all nodes
and WPF (Windows Presentation Foundation) as the key
component of Windows UI design.
c) The Sub-Contractor shall design the software system based on
Window application and shall release/work together with other
Sub-Contractors for the integration of the Security System with
other Computer System.
d) The supervisory centre shall be located at the card Reader

Controller Room. The proposed security card access system
shall support the overall NUS security card access system.
The supervisory centre shall be able to retrieve and send all
kind of information from/to the NUS, Computer Centre.
e) The proposed smart card reader must be able to read the

existing or new proximity card system issued by the NUS
computer centre, at same time, the reader must be able to
read the CAN of CEPAS 2.0 compatible cards including EZ-
Link, NETS Combi Cashcard, NETS FlashPay card and LTA
Concession Card.
f) The Supervisory Centre shall be a desktop computer with the

following configuration:
1) Processor: Intel® Core™ i5-1135G7

Processor ( 4.20GHz 1333MHz
8MB )
2) Operating System: Latest Windows Operating

System 32 bit
3) System Graphics: Intel Graphics Media Accelerator

HD
4) Total Memory: 8 GB DDR4 SDRAM 1333MHz
5) Hard Drive Device: 500GB
6) Form Factor: Small Form Factor
7) Point Device: USB pointing device optical
8) Slots: PCI-e x 16 slot, PCI-e x 1 slot,

PCI slot
9) Network Device: Intel® 82579, 10M/100M/1000M

Gigabit, Ethernet
10) DVD/CD Drive: DVD-ROM, DVD Recordable
TS/E/S29/2
2.2 Card Reader Controller (CRC)
a) The CRC shall be a 32-bit ARM microprocessor and Linux

based device with sufficient memory to be standalone and
carry out decisions making and logging of transactions relating
to access control of 2 Card Access Units (CAU). The following
devices shall be connected directly to the CRC :
1) Door contacts x 4 nos
2) Door strikes x 4 nos
3) Door Strikes Auxiliary Output x 4
4) Card Access Units x 4 nos or 8 nos with exit door
5) Push button, Contactless microwave sensor or Passive

Infra Red Detector for Free Egress Control x 4 nos
b) The CRC shall be able to support a wide range of readers

inclusive of Wiegand-based, magnetic stripe, proximity,
pincode keypad, smart card and proximity smart card. Each
CRC shall comprise of 3 cards housed in a card cage namely
the CPU card, Input/Output Adaptor and CAU Interface. The
system shall be easily upgraded to support the different type of
CAU just by changing the CAU interface. The CAU shall be
able to buffer up to 100,000 transactions, even if the S.C. is
not communicating with the CRC.
c) Each CRC shall have the capacity to locally store at least
200,000 whitelist users, and 100,000 blacklist users. With total
number of users increased, searching speed shall not be
compromised.
d) The CRC shall have direct TCP/IP network interface that
supports 100Mbps Ethernet communication with backend
system.
e) The CRC firmware shall be remotely upgradable for fast
deployment of new firmware via network, without having to
physically access controller on site. Through CRC, reader
firmware also must be remotely upgradable for quick
deployment of business logic change, reading technology
change etc.
f) The CRC shall be able to generate the following type of

messages:
1) Legal access by xxxx
2) Legal access by xxxx, open Fail
3) Legal access by xxxx, close Fail
4) Door Fail
TS/E/S29/3
5) Door lock command, door open alarm
6) Recover from alarm
7) Break in
8) Duress Alarm
9) Legal exit (Free egress)
10) Legal exit, close Fail (Free egress)
11) Legal exit, open Fail (Free egress)
12) Antipass back alarm
3. Basic Design and Operational Requirements
3.1 Presentation of Information
In fulfilling the basic functions of monitoring, controlling and

supervising, the System shall provide fast, relevant, accurate and
unambiguous reports on alarm conditions, changes-of-states, status
and exceeding of set limit of all connected systems.
System shall provide a live message window to display incoming

event messages in tabulate form. The message window shall cater
different filters to allow operator filter out messages that operator does
not want to see, and cater custom query functions for operator to
search specific historical records according to different criteria.
System should provide a powerful report generation module for the

operators to generate reports base on pre-defined reports templates
or customized user defined templates, and reports can be easily
exported to PDF, MS-Word and Excel format for further processing.
3.2 Operator Interaction
a) The System shall allow simple and short operator input for
quick and error free man-machine communication.
b) Commonly used instructions shall be made available in the

form of function keys and shortcuts reduce to input time and
input errors.
c) Shortcut buttons can be placed onto floor plan to quick launch
of a series of command actions.
d) An intuitive graphic viewer shall be provided. Graphic viewer or
floor plan viewer shall allow operator to open up multiple floor
plan drawings at same time, and shall be smoothly zoomable.
Each floor plan shall be able to support minimum 100 points
displaying animation icons.
TS/E/S29/4
3.3 Response Time
a) The probability of the occurrence of a critical or non-critical

alarm or signal effects the system response time. The System
shall be designed to meet the following maximum response
times with a confidence interval of 95 percent:-
1) critical points - Binary : 2.00 + 0.15 seconds
2) non-critical points - Binary : 3.00 + 0.15 seconds
b) Calculation of the estimated total response times within the

constraints of the system hardware and software shall be
submitted with the tender for various combinations of critical
and non-critical, binary and analog points being processed by
the main computer.
c) Extensive statistical data at the testing and commissioning

stage shall be precisely measured and recorded to verify the
calculations and confidence interval required.
d) The Tenderer shall submit with the tender submission a

proposed sampling plan to verify the above requirement.
Statistical results shall serve as a basis for meeting
performance requirement and project completion.
e) Response time shall be defined as the longest time interval of

the following:
1) time interval between the occurrence of an event

(change-of-status or limit exceeded) in the connected
systems and the commencement of an uninterrupted
report of the event on a man-machine interface device;
or
2) time interval between the EXECUTE command by the

operator and the commencement of execution of the
command, or
3) time interval between the occurrence of an event and

the commencement of pre programmed sequence of
actions such as Event Response program, special
reports, trend activation etc.
f) The System shall allow operators to reassign any connected

point to be either critical or non-critical. There shall be no limit
to the number of critical alarm points.
TS/E/S29/5
SECTION B - SYSTEM FUNCTIONS FOR SECURITY CARD ACCESS SYSTEM
1. Supervisory Centre
1.1 Man Machine Interface
a) The Supervisory Centre shall be designed and configured for

simple, easy and unambiguous communication between the
operators and the System at the man-machine interfaces. The
input/output program shall be structured in a simple, logical
manner which will allow the operators to input instructions,
recognise and comprehend outputs, and displays without
difficulty and ambiguity having to refer to the operation
manuals.
b) Operation and programming work shall be performed in an on-

line conversational mode, with interrogative and informative
advisory messages. The System shall accept the shortest
possible input from the operator, and shall report in full for
easy and unambiguous interpretation by the operator.
c) The System input/output and other program shall be

designed to be modular, and shall enable quick changes in
peripherals assignment without any major or involved
reprogramming by the operator.
d) Input/Output format shall be simple and unambiguous to allow

quick communication between the operator and the System.
Output shall be organised in a logical, orderly and neat
manner.
e) All messages generated for output on the general purpose

printer shall include the following minimum information:
1) Descriptor to identify whether message is critical alarm

or normal.
2) Descriptor to identify the origin and the type of

message (e.g. system, field, operator, event program,
time program, etc).
3) Time tag in Hours: Minutes: Seconds format.
4) Date
f) Specific information, depending on the type of messages, shall

also be included in the output.
TS/E/S29/6
g) Field messages (Change-of status, alarm, limit violation)
- Custom defined name of the device point
- Text description of the device point
- Type of device point (e.g. LSDI-Line Supervised Digital

Input, DOR - Digital Output Relay, FDPP - Full
Definition Pseudo Point, CAU- Card Access Unit etc.)
- Status (e.g. ON, OFF, Unlock, locked etc)
h) Program initiated messages
- Origin (e.g. Name and state if single point is event

initiated ERP)
- Result (action number initiated)
i) The last twenty messages received and/or generated by the

System shall always be updated and display on the System
Controller Message Page. By right-clicking on a reader icon,
system shall provide a menu item to show last 5 transactions
as who and when access the reader and their respective state.
Colour coding of messages shall be provided. Generally, all
unacknowledged alarm messages shall be in red, messages
acknowledged shall be in purple and normal change of status
messages in black.
j) Once a message has been acknowledged, the location where
the message is acknowledged and the name of operator who
committed acknowledges shall appear at the same line of the
message.
k) If the origin device of the message is associated with a CCTV
device such as a camera, a camera icon shall be appeared at
the same line of message for the operator to check recorded
historical video clip and live view.
l) If the message is related to card holder, by double-click on the
message the card holer's photo and detail particulars shall be
pop up.
m) Function keys, to generate used instructions in place of keying

in alpha numerics, shall be provided on the System Controller
keyboard. The function keys shall be grouped in a logical and
convenient manner to allow easy recognition and usage.
Separate function keys shall comprise, but do not

necessary limited to the following operational functions.
F1 Dialogue help key.
F2 Enables a window for choice list
TS/E/S29/7
F3 Key help at the level 0 and level 1 dialogue
F4 Off speaker in the Message Page dialogue

Acknowledge panel test in Acknowledgement Message
Page with exception of in the Command Sequence
dialogue where F3 is used to delete an action record
and F4 is used to insert an action.
F5 Acknowledge all messages in alarm message page
F10 Save and exit
ESC Escapes to previous menu without saving
SHIFT-F10 Shut down
1.2 System Access
a) Although the prime feature of the Supervisory Centre is the

ease of usage, system access security shall not be
compromised. The system shall be protected from
unauthorised access or illegal operation by a password access
control. Operations shall be required to enter a unique
operator name and password to enter the Supervisory Centre
Dialogue Page. The operator can alter his own password at
any time but the access priority or authorisation level shall be
controlled by the system manager.
b) Authorisation levels shall be assigned to various operators to

determine the authorisation to access and execute different
types of system utilities or the authorisation to access to
different equipment. These two categories of authorisation
shall allow the flexibility to assign different passwords to
various departments of the organisation and further
segregating the various grades of staffs. As such, this will
restrict operator from switching equipment not within their
purview.
c) An additional security feature shall be the automatic logout

function. An auto-logout time interval (5 minutes) can be
defined during the system installation. If there is no response
from a logon user, system shall be automatically logged out to
prevent unauthorised personnel from meddling with the
system. Upon log-out, either manual or auto, the alarm and
status messages shall continue to be displayed on the system
controller.
TS/E/S29/8
1.3 Definition
a) The Supervisory Centre shall provide the utilities for definition

of device point such as door contacts or motion detectors,
definition of card users, command sequence, time program
and other control programs.
b) The definition of device point shall be on-line and the

Supervisory Centre shall check for the validity of the definition
based on the actual hardware installed in the card reader
unit/controller.
c) The definition/configuration of device points user-friendly and
intuitive, mostly by drag & drop, tick & untick. To define a
similar device point, system shall provide copy & paste
function so that operators do not have to repeatedly type the
settings again.
1.4 Device Name
a) The Supervisory Centre shall have a clear, logical and concise

system of addressing to associate and identify device name
(name of connected device point) with physical address
(technical address) of digital, analog, control, calculated or
pseudo points.
b) Each device point shall be identified by a 12-character
(alphanumeric) device name. Point identification or memonic
address system will not be accepted. The addressing system
shall enable easy recall of device points by the operator
without frequently having to refer to operation manuals.
c) When defining a device point, internal addressing number
(also known as technical address) shall be automatically
generated, and shall not require operator to remember or key
in.
d) The System shall allow authorised operators to modify user

addresses and their attributes, and add or delete user
addresses by simple keyboard operations. Attributes
assignable to each user address shall include, but not limited,
to the following:
1) At least 32 characters used as standard text to provide

clear description of device point.
2) Device properties that are native to the type
3) The type of device point (eg digital input, single digital

output with or without feedback, card access unit etc.).
TS/E/S29/9
4) Access code to restrict unauthorised operators from

changing of limits or switching of equipment (ie read
access only) according to the respective discipline and
seniority of operators.
5) Device group which the device belongs to.
e) The System shall also allow operators to define digital points to

be status or alarm points. This definition shall determine the
status test to be displayed. Normal status points shall be
reported as ON/OFF, while alarm points shall be reported as
CRITICAL/ALARM/NORMAL.
1.5 Manual Interrogation
a) Although device status must be displayed on floor plan in

almost real time, the System shall also allow operators to view
status, values, conditions and information relating to the device
point in the manual interrogation mode.
b) Upon right-click on the device icon from floor plan, system tree
view or device tree view, operators shall be allowed to :
1) Get current status of the device point

2) Get properties of the device point.
3) Change display settings for the particular point, such as
colour code, background etc.
4) Get last 10 transactions.
5) Stop beep of that device
6) Priority setting: By ERP, By TRP, By TP, Manual etc.
7) Latch commands
8) Choose 1 out of 31 commands to send.
1.6 Commands
a) The System shall execute single switching commands as well

as pre programmed group of switch commands and actions
initiated both by operators and by card reader unit/controller
functions such as Event Response and Time Program Control.
TS/E/S29/10
b) Commands and actions shall include the following:
1) Commands to control
- latched digital output with and without

feedbacks
- unlatched digital output without feedbacks
2) Command to suppress (also release) reporting of

messages
3) Command to suppress (also release) alarm of
messages.
4) Command to free, secure or access security door
5) Command to lock and unlock the device point(s)
c) Feedback of control instructions shall be of positive indication

ie any change of state shall give rise to a change of polarity
and not merely the closing of normally open contacts. The
System shall report an alarm when no feedback signal is
received after a command instruction. Time delays shall be
assignable to connected equipment to suppress oscillating
signal during equipment startup.
d) The System shall also report command instructions which are

not executed due to whatever reason.
1.7 Alarm/Change-of-State
a) The System shall display and print change-of-state, alarm, limit

violation, operator action (switching, programming change or
activations of actions) and system initiated action reports on
the System Controller, Graphic Viewer, logged buffer, printer
as specified. Assignment of reports to the peripherals shall be
programmable by simple keyboard action, and shall be
restricted to operators having a sufficient high access privilege.
b) Alarms shall be accompanied by an audio and visual signal at

the SC station. The audio signal shall continue to sound until
the report is acknowledged by an operator. Special function
key shall be provided for acknowledgement of alarm messages
to silence the audio signal, such as "No beep" command.
c) When the current alarm report is not acknowledged and a new

alarm report is received, the alarm shall remain there waiting
for operator to acknowledge.
TS/E/S29/11
d) Alarm and change-of-status reports shall be complemented

with the initiation of one or more colour graphic diagrams at the
graphic viewer in automatic mode.
1.8 Global Command Control
The Supervisory Centre shall serve as the window of real time

monitored data. All connected points shall be monitored for change of
state or alarm condition. On receipt of the alarm or change-of-state
messages, the Supervisory Centre shall in turn initiate the appropriate
actions such as :
a) generate status messages
b) generate alarm messages with / without acknowledgement
c) Pop up floor plan display if alarm occurs
d) update alarm panel display
e) trigger global actions according to pre-defined EPR such as

switch the camera nearest to the alarm location onto the spot
monitor or arm the motion detector etc.
1.9 Report Generation
The Supervisory Centre shall provide the facilities for the following
report/enquiry not be limited to :
a) Roll Call Report that shall list out on the report printer all
personnel that are in a specified location during the specified
time and date. The operator shall be prompted to enter the CA
name, start and stop data, start and stop time.
b) Personal locator report/enquiry that shall display on the

computer screen the last known location of a person in the
building with the option to list out on the report printer the
access transactions associated with that person during the
specified time frame. The operator shall be prompted to enter
the person's name, start and stop date, start and stop time.
Utilities shall be provided to assist the entry of name such that
the operator may enter partially following by the 'help' key, the
System Controller shall provide available names that matches
the partial entry and the operator shall enter the name by
menu-bar selection.
c) Access Summary Report that shall generate report based on

the CAU specified, the type of access (break in, legal access,
legal exit, etc) during a specified time frame.
TS/E/S29/12
d) Access Enquiry that shall display on the screen the access

profile associated with the name of the person.
e) Staff Attendance Enquiry that shall display locations of the staff

by departments/groups. The operator shall select to view any
of the 10 departments, each defined with 10 names.
The Supervisory Centre shall check for the last transaction for
each of the names and if not available or matches the CAUs
defined to be outreaders shall indicate that the person is out. If
the person is in, the Supervisory Centre shall display the last
location. Utility shall be provided the definition of names in
each department as well as the CAUs that are readers
associated with exit door.
f) Historical Log
1) A 5,000 message-buffer shall be provided to

automatically log change-of-status, limit violation,
alarms, single and group commands activated by
operator and by program, etc.
2) Messages and reports to be routed by this buffer for

historical logging shall be programmable by the system
operator.
3) The System shall allow operators to generate summary

log output from these messages stored. Typical
summaries to be generated shall include alarm
messages, event logging message and login message.
Date message shall be displayed together with
summary log output.
4) Multi-level selection criterion up to three levels

(location, level, equipment) shall be assignable by the
operator to generate summaries. Where multi-level
coding systems are structured as a field (eg user
address) selection criterion within the field shall be
provided.
5) The System shall allow operators to assign time and

date window on selected messages for the summary
log output, or for backing up onto other media.
g) Definition Reports that shall generate report of attributes

defined for each of device point and the associated control
programs.
1.10 Graphic Display

TS/E/S29/13
a) In addition to text display, the Supervisory Centre shall allow

for the creation, display, modification and deletion of dynamic
colour graphic display.
b) Each graphic shall accommodate minimum 100 input/output

points displayed as ICONS on the screen.
c) The operator shall invoke the graphic display by using the

'mouse' to 'zoom' or 'pan' to the relevant display. The operator
shall start with an overview picture and will be prompted to
select the equipment type or floor level. On selection, the
graphic shall change to prompt the user with further options.
In this way, the operator shall be able to manoeuver into or out
of a particular equipment or location.
d) Running in the background is the alarm monitoring task that

will associate the point in alarm to the graphics that can be
brought automatically on to the screen. On detection of alarm,
the bell icon will change to red and blinked accompanied with
an audio signal. The operator may continue with his current
Window/Task or invoke the display of alarm panel will indicate
the 10 priority levels, highlighting those that are activated
together with the number of alarm counts. The operator will
select to view the 'alarm' pictures or opt to hide the alarm panel
or to silence the audio signal. The operator will acknowledge
the point in alarm at the equipment. From this picture, the
operator may choose to acknowledge the point or to call the
panel again to view the next 'alarm' picture. Only when all
alarms are cleared and acknowledged, will the panel and the
bell icon return to normal.
e) In addition, the operator will be able to invoke the 'graphic

builder' mode that allows the operator to create graphics.
Using the 'mouse', the operator will select the 'palette' and the
various options to draw lines of different geometric shapes.
Simply by selecting and clicking on the 'palette' with the
'mouse', graphics depicting M&E plant room or architectural
floor plan can be created with ease. Editing of graphic will
performed when Supervisory Centre is on line.
1.11 Advisory Messages
a) The Supervisory Centre shall provide advisory to aid the user

when alarm occurs at a particular input point. The advisory
shall be in two forms: Detailed text (4 lines of 60 characters
each) to assist maintenance technician to act on incoming
alarms. Typical advisory text will provide information relating
to the make, type model of the equipment where the alarm
originated, the particulars of the company or personnel to
rectify the equipment fault. The system shall allow virtually
unlimited advisory texts to be defined.
b) In addition to the above, primary instruction panels for night

security guards shall be provided on the message page. Each
TS/E/S29/14
of this panel shall provide simple instruction such as

'INTRUSION DETECTION IN AOC PAGE MR TAN PAGER
NO. 2355666' or 'CARD READER FAULT, CALL MR LIM TEL
63456785' prominently displayed on the screen when an alarm
occurs. With this feature, security guards or any personnel
that are not trained on the system shall simply be instructed to
look out for prominent alarms that 'pop up' on the screen
(accompanied by buzzer) and act accordingly.
1.12 User Page
The Supervisory Centre shall provide the utility to enable the operator
to determine the type of information and the layout that he would like
to see on one screen (defined as a page). The operator shall be able
to define the mix of different device points (digital input, line
supervised digital input, digital output or card access unit) to be
displayed on one page. As such, the operator shall be able to define
one page that will indicate the status of the card access units. Each
page shall be able to display a minimum of 20 device points.
1.13 Event and Alarm Logging
a) The Supervisory Centre shall has an EVENT LOGGING

FACILITY whereby the user may select to log all the status
changes of any device point on the system. Conversely, the
user may remove device point from the event logging system.
b) When a change of state occurs on an device point that has

been EVENT LOGGED by the user, the system shall
automatically record the date and time of change and the
current state of the point on the hard disk. This means that all
logged input point that changes state from "OFF" to "ON" and
vice versa shall be logged on the hard disk. Similarly change
of states of digital output, analog input/output, CAU shall be
logged as defined.
c) The alarm logging system shall be provided as part of the

standard system facilities. The alarm logging system shall
automatically log all alarms on the hard disk. This alarm is
generated when an device point changes to the state which
was programmed as the alarm state.
d) This alarm logging system shall aid the user in keeping a

record of all alarms that occurred in the system. In other
words, apart from indicating an alarm on the VDU and on the
colour graphics terminal and logging on the printer, the alarm
shall also be saved on hard disk for future analysis if
necessary. The date, time and name of the point shall be
stored on the hard disk.
e) The alarm logging system shall also log the acknowledgement

and reset of all alarmed points.
TS/E/S29/15
1.14 Database Management
a) The latest MS-SQ database server shall be used as

centralized database engine. At real-time data gateway level
(DG or RTS level), MS-SQL Express shall be used as local
data storage.
b) Flexible data partition shall be adopted to support multi-tier

administration of system assets including: people (operators
and card holders), software operation, equipment, monitor and
control privileges, system outputs (message & alarms) and
reports.
c) Every effort shall be made to build maximum flexibility into the

basic software package. This shall be accomplished through
the use of an extensive user controlled database. This
database shall be made up of many different types of files
stored in the hard disk of the Supervisory Centre. Therefore in
the event of power failure, the database shall still be intact.
d) The files that make up this database shall include but not
limited to:
1) Input/Output point attribute file
2) Operator Resource Group Files.

3) Data Partition files
4) Time program File
5) Card Access Unit Access Group File
6) Card Access User File
7) Card Access Week Code File
8) Response Program File
9) Local Command Sequence File
10) Trend log File
11) Global Command Sequence File
12) Password File
13) Graphic State/Link File
e) During system initialisation, the files or database tables shall

be downloaded to the CRCs. With these definitions, the CRC
shall be able to operate independently.
TS/E/S29/16
f) With the standalone feature of CRC, the Supervisory Centre's

main function shall be the handling of man machine interface
and the logging of events.
g) The Supervisory Centre shall maintain a 7 day CAU

transaction buffers, each with at least 2000 messages so that
the operator can generate report based on access records
logged during the last seven day period. The Supervisory
Centre shall maintain a separate buffer to accommodate at
least 5000 events and alarm logging message.
2. Card Reader Controller
2.1 General
a) The card access security service shall provide the user with
the means of controlling entry to secured areas equipped with
Card Access units (CAU) based on access codes and time
criteria. Each authorised user shall be assigned an access
code which relates to an assigned time zones for each CAU.
b) Hence, the card access security system shall provide tight

security by preventing unauthorised persons from entering
certain areas. It shall also ensure that proper measures
should be taken by generating alarms and displaying the
reaction text to be taken by the operator.
2.2 Features of CRC
The CRC shall be equipped with the following features but not limited
to:
a) Standalone to grant access without referring the Supervisory

Centre.
b) CRC shall be connected via RTS to backend system for

database initialisation.
c) after 3 consecutive unsuccessful attempts, the CRC will send a

'multiple attempts' alarm to the S.C.
d) storage of up to 100,000 transactions when the CRC is in a

standalone mode (Off-Line Mode). These stored transactions
shall report back to the Supervisory Centre once the
communication link is returned between CRC and the
Supervisory Centre.
e) CRC shall be supplied in a locking enclosure with tamper

switch alarm.
TS/E/S29/17
f) The CRC shall has provision for 64 time zones. Each time
zone shall consist of 4 start-stop intervals per day (Monday -
Sunday) plus another 2 intervals for holiday.
A user can only enter an area if he presents his card within

and inclusive of the start-stop times specified for the day's time
zone associated with that CAU.
However, if that day is a holiday, the start-stop times will be of

the holiday's time zone.
g) support minimum four Card Access Units (CAUs)
h) There shall be 1000 access codes. These access codes shall

relate to an assigned time zones for each of the CAU.
Each user shall be assigned an access code. With Each user

shall be assigned an access code. With this code, the user is
either restricted/allowed entry from/into an area depending on
the time zone associated with the CAU he/she wishes to by-
pass.
i) CRC shall be able to detect break-in situation when the door is

opened without a valid and or when the free egree switch is
not activated.
j) CRC shall support free egree configuration with the use of

either a push button, contactless microwave sensor or motion
detector.
k) CRC shall support 'clocking' mode, that is the user shall

present the access card to inform the Supervisory Centre for
time management purposes and not for access control.
l) CRC shall support UNLOCK mode, that is , the door can be

kept in temporary open during certain period when the card is
not required for access control.
m) CRC shall detect the following alarm conditions : door open too
long, door close failure and door command failure.
n) CRC shall be equipped with built-in fire alarm panel input point
as hardware interlocking. Even the CRC firmware is not
running/hang, the hardware interlocking mechanism shall still
function, meaning a valid fire alarm signal shall unlock the
doors without CPU involvement.
2.3 Operation of CRC
TS/E/S29/18
a) The CAU shall be mounted outside the security area, beside

the security door. The CRC panel shall be located in the
secure area, together with the power supply units.
b) In the normal use, the CRC shall work as a standalone

controller without dependence on the SC. After the CRC has
been initialised, the CAU operate the system, the user shall
hold the card momentarily in the proximity of the card access
unit at a distance of 3cm-6cm. The CAU which contains a
microprocessor shall decode the signal and reformats it into
the proper data format for transmission back to CRC. If there is
a match and the time zone permits entry for that user, the door
release contract shall be energised for a period of time. At the
same time, the access grant event shall be put in event queue.
However, if no match is found, an illegal attempt event shall be
pt into the event queue. Any abnormal situation such as illegal
access or break-in, duress situation, invalid card, card valid but
door not open, etc shall be reported to S.C. The event queue
shall be transmitted to S.C. in the next polling cycle.
c) The remote control push-button shall allow the user to leave or

enter the security area without the use of the user card. This is
normally operated remotely by the security guard or from
within the security area.
2.4 Card Access Unit (CAU)
The card access unit shall be suitable for proximity card type with
keypad as additional requirement for legal access.
2.5 Proximity Smart Card
The card shall be compatible with Mifare S50/S70 smart card, or

Mifare Plus.
- 1K bytes EEPROM
- Embedded antenna
- Mifare 13.56MHz ISO14443A
- Range of Operation: about 3cm to 8cm
- Dimension: CR80 standard credit card size
- Material: PVC
TS/E/S29/19
2.6 Electric Strike

The Contractor shall provide the correct type of electric strike
according to door type. The unit shall have the following:
a) fire rated as per door requirement

b) Temper resistant
c) With strike and latch monitoring
d) Stainless steel with minimum 3 hardened locking pins
e) Maximum power consumption : 2.2 Watts
2.7 Electromagnetic Lock (EM Lock)

The Contractor shall provide the correct type of electromagnetic locks
according to the door type. The lock shall have excellent holding force
and remarkable features. It's specification:
a) Voltage Input : 12 VDC
b) Current Draw : 12V / 480mA
c) Holding Force : Up to 600 lbs (272 kg)
d) Anti-Rust Surface Treatment : Blue Zinc Plating
e) Operating Temperature : 0~55° C ( 32~131° F)
f) Operating Humidity : 0~95% ( non condensing)
g) Weight ( Magnet) : 1.08 kg (±1%)
h) Dimensions : Magnet - (L)250x(W)42x(T)25 mm
i) Armature - (L)180x(W)38x(T)11 mm
3. Auto Alarm Notification System
Error/alarm message can be linked to auto notification system, which consists

of two parts: Email and SMS.
Upon a define time delay and system error/alarm message, the system shall
automatically deliver the same message to the pre-defined group of recipient
via Email and/or SMS.
The alarm source, the alarm type, alarm priority, device group, device name
from which the users supposed to receive alarm shall be configurable. The
time duration for a recipient to receive alarm must be also configurable.
Each recipient shall have an escalate officer to whom the recipient is

associated with. Whenever a recipient is not reachable or not taking
necessary action after a configured time, the notification module will in turn
trigger his escalated officer.
TS/E/S29/20
SECTION 30- POWER METER
1. General
1.1. All setup parameters required by the Power Meter shall be stored in
nonvolatile memory and retained in the event of a control power interruption.
1.2. The Power Meter may be applied in three-phase, three- or four-wire systems.
1.3. The Power Meter shall be capable of being applied without modification at
nominal frequencies of 50Hz.
1.4. The power meter shall comply to EN 50470, BS EN / IEC 62053: Electricity
metering equipment (a.c.). Particular Requirements
2. Measured values
2.1. The Power Meter shall provide the following, true RMS metered quantities:
Real-Time Readings
a) Current (per phase & neutral, 3 phase average )
b) Voltage (line-line, line-neutral, 3 phase average)
c) Real, Reactive & Apparent Power (Per-Phase, 3-Phase Total)
d) Power Factor, True & Displacement (Per-Phase, 3-Phase Total)
e) Frequency
f) THD (Current and Voltage)
2.2. Energy Readings
a) Accumulated Energy - Real kWh, Reactive kVarh, Apparent KVAh

(Signed/Absolute)
b) Reactive Energy by Quadrant
2.3. Demand Readings
a) Demand Current Calculations - peak, present, running average, last

completed interval (per-phase, 3-phase avg, Neutral)
b) Demand Real, Reactive & Apparent Power Calculations - peak, present,

running average, last completed interval (3-Phase Total)
c) Average Power Factor Calculations, Demand Coincident (3-Phase Total)
TS/E/S30/1
2.4. Power Analysis Values
a) THD – Voltage, Current (3-Phase, Per-Phase, Neutral)
b) Displacement Power Factor (Per-Phase, 3-Phase)
c) Fundamental Voltage & Current, Magnitude and Angle (Per-Phase)
d) Fundamental Real Power (Per-Phase, 3-Phase)
e) Fundamental Reactive Power (Per-Phase)
f) Harmonic Power (Per-Phase, 3-Phase)
g) Phase Rotation
h) Unbalance (Current and Voltage)
i) Each harmonic Magnitudes & Angles for Current and Voltages (Per
Phase) up to the 31st Harmonic.
3. Demand
All power demand calculations shall use any one of the following calculation
methods, selectable by the user:
a) Thermal demand using a sliding window updated every second for the
present demand and at the end of the interval for the last interval. The
window length shall be user selectable from 1-60 minutes in 1 minute
increments.
b) Block interval, with optional sub-intervals. The window length shall be user
selectable from 1-60 minutes in 1 minute intervals. The user shall be able to
set the sub-interval length from 1-60 minutes in 1 minute intervals. The
following Block methods shall be available:
a) Sliding Block that calculates demand every second with intervals less
than 15 minutes and every 15 seconds with an interval between 15
and 60 minutes.
b) Fixed Block that calculates demand at the end of the interval
c) Rolling Block that a subinterval is configured. Demand is calculated at

the end of each subinterval and displays at the end of the interval.
TS/E/S30/2
c) Demand can be calculated using a Synchronization signal:
a) Demand can be synchronized to an input pulse from an external

source. The demand period begins with every pulse. A synchronized
input can be configured to either a block or rolling block calculation
b) Demand can be synchronized to a communication signal. This can be

configured to either a block or rolling block calculation
c) Demand can be synchronized to the clock in the Power Meter.
4. Sampling
The current and voltage signals shall be digitally sampled at a rate high enough to
provide true rms accuracy to the 63rd harmonic (fundamental of 50 Hz).
The Power Meter shall provide continuous sampling at a minimum of up to 128

samples/cycle, simultaneously on all voltage and current channels in the meter.
5. Minimum and Maximum Values
5.1. The Power Meter shall provide minimum and maximum values for the
following parameters:
a) Voltage line-line, line-neutral
b) Current per phase
c) Voltage Unbalance line-line, line-neutral
d) Power Factor, true & displacement
e) Real, Reactive & Apparent Power Total
f) THD Voltage & Current
g) Frequency
5.2. For each min/max value listed above, the Power Meter shall record the
following attributes:
a) Date/Time of the min/max value
b) Min/Max. Value
c) Phase of recorded Min/Max (for multi-phase quantities)
d) Minimum and maximum values shall be available via communications

and display.
TS/E/S30/3
6. Harmonic Resolution
6.1. Advanced harmonic information shall be available via the Power Meter. This
shall include the calculation of the harmonic magnitudes and angles for each
phase voltage and current through the 31st harmonic.
6.2. Harmonic information shall be available for all three phases, current and
voltage, plus the residual current. To ensure maximum accuracy for analysis,
the current and voltage information for all phases shall be obtained
simultaneously from the same cycle.
6.3. The harmonic magnitude shall be reported as a percentage of the

fundamental or as a percentage of the rms values, as selected by the user.
7. Current Inputs
7.1. The Power Meter shall accept current inputs from standard instrument current
transformers with 5 amp secondary output and shall have a metering range of
0-10 amps with the following withstand currents: 15 amp continuous, 50 amp
10 sec per hour, 500 amp 1 sec per hour.
7.2. Current transformer primaries through 327 kA shall be supported.
8. Voltage Inputs
11.1. The Power Meter shall allow connection to circuits up to 600 volts AC without
the use of potential transformers. The Power Meter shall also accept voltage
inputs from standard instrument potential transformers with 110 volt
secondary output. The Power Meter shall support PT primaries through 3.2
MV.
11.2. The nominal full scale input of the Power Meter shall be 347 Volts AC L-N,
600 Volts AC L-L. The meter shall accept a metering over-range of 50%.
The input impedance shall be greater then 2 Ohm.
9. Accuracy
9.1. The Power Meter shall comply with ANSI C12.20 Class 0.5 and IEC 60687
Class 0.5 for revenue meters.
9.2. The Power Meter shall be accurate to 0.25% of reading +0 .025% of full scale
for power and energy. Voltage and current shall be accurate to 0.075% of
reading plus 0.025% of full scale. Power factor metering shall be accurate to
0.002 from 0.5 leading to 0.5 lagging. Frequency metering shall be
accurate 0.01 Hz at 45-67 Hz.
9.3. These accuracies shall be maintained for both light and full loads.
9.4. No annual calibration shall be required to maintain this accuracy.
TS/E/S30/4
10. Input/Output
10.1. The Power Meter shall supply 1 digital input and 1 digital solid state output/KY
pulse output as standard.
10.2. The Power Meter shall be capable of operating a solid state KY output relay
to provide output pulses for a user definable increment of reported energy.
Minimum relay life shall be in excess of one billion operations. The standard
KY output shall operate up to 240 volt AC, 300 volt DC, 96mA max, and
provide 3750 volt rms isolation.
10.3. The Power Meter shall support multiple input/output options including digital
inputs, mechanical relay outputs.This optional I/O shall be in the form of an
option module that can be field installable.
10.4. The digital inputs shall have four operating modes:
a) Normal mode for simple on/off digital inputs
b) Demand Interval Synch Pulse to accept a demand synch pulse from a

utility demand meter
c) Conditional Energy Control input to control conditional energy

accumulation.
10.5. The optional relay output module shall provide a load voltage range from 20
to 240 VAC or from 20 to 30 VDC. It shall support a load current of 2A.
11. Logging
11.1. The Power Meter shall provide for onboard data logging. Each Power Meter
shall be able to log data, alarms and events, and waveforms. The Meter shall
have 80kb of on-board nonvolatile memory. Logged information to be stored
in each Power Meter include the following:
a) Billing Log: The Power Meter shall store in non-volatile memory a

configurable billing log that is updated every 15 minutes. Data shall be
recorded by month, day and 15 minute interval. The log shall contain
24 months of monthly data, 32 days of daily data and between 2 to 52
days of 15 minute interval data depending on the number of quantities
selected.
b) Custom Data Logs: The Power Meter shall provide 1 data. Each entry
shall be date and time stamped to the second. The log entry shall hold
data of up to 96 parameters each. In addition, it shall be possible for a
user to define an event. Data logs can be configured by users to be
Fill & Hold or Circular (FIFO).
c) Alarm Log. This log shall contain time, date, event information, and
coincident information for each user defined alarm or event.
TS/E/S30/5
11.2. The Power Meter shall have default values for the data log loaded at the
factory and begin on device power up.
12. Alarming
12.1. Alarm events shall be user definable.
12.2. The user shall be able to define over 50 alarm conditions.
12.3. The following shall be available as alarm events:
a) Over/under current & voltage
b) Current & voltage imbalance
c) Phase loss, current & voltage
d) Over kW Demand
e) Phase reversal
f) Digital Input OFF/ON
g) End of incremental energy interval
h) End of demand interval
12.4. For each over/under metered value alarm, the user shall be able to define a
pick-up, drop-out, and delay.
12.5. There shall be four alarm severity levels in order make it easier for the user to
respond to the most important events first.
12.6. Indication of an alarm condition shall be given on the front panel.
13. Feature Addition
It shall be possible to field upgrade the firmware in the Power Meter to enhance
functionality. These firmware upgrades shall be done through the communication
connection and shall allow upgrades of individual meters or groups. No disassembly
or changing of integrated circuit chips shall be required and it will not be necessary to
de-energize the circuit or the equipment to perform the upgrade.
14. Control Power
The Power Meter shall operate properly over a wide range of control power including
90-457 VAC or 100-300 VDC.
TS/E/S30/6
15. Communications
The Power Meter shall communicate via RS-485 Modbus protocol.
16. Display
16.1 The Power Meter display shall also allow the user to select a date/time
format.
16.2 The Power Meter display shall be back lit LCD for easy viewing, display shall
also be anti-glare and scratch resistant
16.3 The Display shall be capable of allowing the user to view four values on one
screen at the same time. A summary screen shall also be available to allow
the user to view a snapshot of the system.
16.4 The Power Meter display shall provide local access to the following metered
quantities:
a) Current, per phase rms, 3-phase average and neutral (if applicable)
b) Voltage, phase-to-phase, phase-to-neutral, and 3-phase average

(phase-to-phase and phase-to-neutral)
c) Real power, per phase and 3-phase total
d) Reactive power, per phase and 3-phase total
e) Apparent power, per phase and 3-phase total
f) Power factor, 3-phase total and per phase
g) Frequency
h) Demand current, per phase and three phase average
i) Demand real power, three phase total
j) Demand apparent power, three phase total
k) Accumulated Energy, (MWh and MVARh)
l) THD, current and voltage, per phase
TS/E/S30/7
16.5 Reset of the following electrical parameters shall also be allowed from the
Power Meter display:
a) Peak demand current
b) Peak demand power (kW) and peak demand apparent power (kVA)
c) Energy (MWh) and reactive energy (MVARh)
16.6 Setup for system requirements shall be allowed from the Power Meter
display. Setup provisions shall include:
a) CT rating
b) PT rating
c) System type [three-phase, 3-wire] [three-phase, 4-wire]
d) Watt-hours per pulse
17. Single Phase Power Meter for Power Distribution unit
17.1. The power meter shall be of slim and compact in line type, UL compliant, CE
marking certification of type approved by relevant authority or accreditation
bodies.
17.2. Power meter shall be going between the source and the power distribution
unit or power socket distribution unit. It shall be suitable for all kind of single
phase power usage eg, rack, laboratories, offices etc. The power meter shall
monitor the energy consumption (kWh), active power (kW) that being
consumed, overload, voltage (V), current (A) and power factor and send data
to the monitoring system. The power meter shall have 1 RJ 45 sensor port
and relay for remotely switch devices on and off. It shall have built in bi-Stable
latched relay, which retains the state regardless of any power or not. The
power meter shall have status indicating light showing the power status and
the relay status.
17.3. The power meter shall be of class 0.5 for the energy monitoring, Input power
plug using UK BS1363 plug ‘G’ or IEC 60309 P+N+E Cee form. The built in
latch relay contact shall be of 40A. The meter shall able to operate at 0 oC to
45 oC and non condensing at humidity between 20% to 80%.
17.4. Power main plug shall be of UK BS1363 plug ‘G’ or IEC 60309 2P+E Cee
form rated 16A or 32A and detachable from the power meter. The power
outlet shall be suitable for connection to type “G” three pin plug socket outlet
or Cee-form.
TS/E/S30/8
17.5. The power meter shall be able to send data for monitoring and control through
BAS, SNMP, mobile application, Wireless Mesh Network or any third party
software and application
18. Digital Power Meter for Solar Photovoltaic System
18.1. The power meters shall be digital type with MID (Measuring Instruments
Directive) type approve according to Annex B and verified according to Annex
D. It shall be billing grade kWh meter that suitable for billing application and
complying to Singapore EMA Metering Code according to EN 50470-1/-2/-3,
IEC 62052-11, IEC 62053-21 with each meter verified by SAC-SINGLAS
Accredited/recognize test laboratory to 0.5% accuracy (Class 0.5). All test
report shall submit to authority, clients and consultants.
18.2. The power meter shall also comply to clause 1 to clause 16 in this
specification chapter.
18.3. All power meter should provide a LED pulse indicator at the front panel with
1000 imp/kWh for in line verification of meter performance. It should also
provide a pulse output for remote monitoring by PLC or external counter, the
pulse rate shall be programmable between 1 - 999999imp/kWh and pulse
length between 10 and 990ms.
18.4. Power Factor Correction Capacitors
a) Meters should be M-bus or Modbus (RS485) ready for BMS and NUS
Metering system communication or integration. In addition, the meters
shall also have an IR communication interface for backup/dual
redundancy server connection.
b) No re-calibration to be required within the life span of the meter. The

meter's kWh reading shall not be resettable at any time even with a
correct password. The manufacturer shall keep the verification report
for 10 years after delivery.
c) The meter shall communicate via built-in Modbus or M-Bus

communication
18.5. Safety Certificate & Testing:
a) Meters shall be manufactured under an IS09001 registered program.
b) Meters shall conform to MID Measuring Instruments Directive, Annex B

& Annex D.
c) Each meter shall have a unique serial number or barcode that link to its
calibration/verification report. Manufacture shall deliver the meter with
the calibration/verification report as and when it is required. The
manufacturer shall keep the calibration/verification report for more than
10 years as required for future MID meter verification.
TS/E/S30/9
d) Meters shall conform to MID mechanical environment Class M2 and

electromagnetic environment Class E2.
e) The meter shall be resistant to heat and fire up to 960'C at the terminal
in accordance to IEC 60695-2-10 to 11.
f) The meter shall offer protection against dust and water at IP20 on
terminals and IP51 when mounted in protective enclosure.
18.6. The meter shall be able to measure, display and perform the following
instrumentation function & features at Main Switchboard and Sub-
Switchboard for the Solar Photovolatic:
a) Total Harmonic Distortion, THD
b) Harmonic voltage & Current for L1, L2. L3
c) Active power for L1, L2, L3 & Total
d) Reactive Power for L1, L2, L3 & Total
e) Apparent power for L1, L2, L3 & Total
f) Voltage L1 -L2, L2-L3, L1-L3, L1-N, L2-N & L3-N
g) Current for L1, L2, L3 & N
h) Frequency
i) Power Factor for L1, L2, L3 and total
j) Phase angle Power for L1, L2, L3 & Total
k) Phase angle Voltage for L1, L2, L3
l) Phase angle Current for L1, L2, L3
m) Current quadrant for L1, L2, L3 & Total
n) Alarm for Voltage , Current, Active & Reactive Power
o) Up to 4 Tariffs
p) Direct connection up to 80A or CT connection
q) 2 input and 2 output for external control functions
r) Import and export energy
s) Pulse output
TS/E/S30/10
t) Power consumption: single phase - less than 1VA. three-phase- less

than 1VA per phase.
u) Instrumentation functions are subjected to the range/type of meter

used
18.7. Signal Converter
a) Supporting Protocol
i) Protocol Modbus /TCP, Modbus RTU.
ii) Up to 2 Modbus /TCP Masters.
b) Link connection
i) Ethernet Link able to support up to 80m with CATS 6A cable

without Hub or Switch
ii) RS485 link able to support up to 1.2km.
iii) Multipoint connections for RS485 up to 32
c) Operation Mode
i) Active Operating mode or Passive operating mode can be set

using external micro switch.
ii) The Current Loop's Transmission and Reception can be

independently in active or passive mode
d) Electrical isolation
i) Support electrical isolated for RS232/RS485/Ethernet
ii) Support electrical isolation between power supply and

input/output
e) Low Power consumption not more than 2 Watts
f) Connections coding screw removable
TS/E/S30/11
19. kWh Energy Meter
19.1. The kWh shall only be used where indicated in the drawing.kwh meters that
are connected to a load current not more than 80A should be direct
connection meter without CT. The power dissipation of the meter should not
be more than 1VA for single phase meter and less than 1 VA per phase for 3-
phase meter. Accuracy shall be class 0.5. The kWh meter shall be suitable to
connected and monitor by both BAS and NUS metering system
19.2. The kWh meter shall have 80A Maximum current lmax, 5A Base current lb
and Reference current lref. It shall have less than 20mA Starting current Ist
and 0.25A Minimum current Imin. The Transitional current ltr shall be 0.5A
19.3. All kWh meter shall be of modbus communication. Communication modbus

cable shall loop to each kWh meter, power meter or other different meters
without using gateway or external devices.
19.4. All kWh meter should provide a LCD display showing the reading and LED
pulse indicator at the front panel with 1000 imp/kWh for in line verification of
meter performance. It should also provide a pulse output for remote
monitoring by PLC or external counter, the pulse rate shall be programmable
between 1 - 999999imp/kWh and pulse length between 10 and 990ms.
19.5. The kWh Meter shall provide the following, true RMS metered quantities and
reading display:
a) Real-Time Readings
i) Current (per phase & neutral, 3 phase average )
ii) Voltage (line-line, line-neutral, 3 phase average)
iii) Real, Reactive & Apparent Power (Per-Phase, 3-Phase Total)
iv) Power Factor, True & Displacement (Per-Phase, 3-Phase

Total)
v) Frequency
vi) THD (Current and Voltage)
b) Energy Readings
i) Accumulated Energy - Real kWh, Reactive kVarh, Apparent

KVAh (Signed/Absolute)
ii) Reactive Energy by Quadrant
TS/E/S30/12
c) Demand Readings
i) Demand Current Calculations - peak, present, running

average, last completed interval (per-phase, 3-phase avg,
Neutral)
ii) Demand Real, Reactive & Apparent Power Calculations -

peak, present, running average, last completed interval (3-
Phase Total)
iii) Average Power Factor Calculations, Demand Coincident (3-

Phase Total)
d) Power Analysis Values
i) THD – Voltage, Current (3-Phase, Per-Phase, Neutral)
ii) Displacement Power Factor (Per-Phase, 3-Phase)
iii) Fundamental Voltage & Current, Magnitude and Angle (Per-

Phase)
iv) Fundamental Real Power (Per-Phase, 3-Phase)
v) Fundamental Reactive Power (Per-Phase)
vi) Harmonic Power (Per-Phase, 3-Phase)
vii) Phase Rotation
viii) Unbalance (Current and Voltage)
ix) Each harmonic Magnitudes & Angles for Current and Voltages
(Per Phase) up to the 31st Harmonic.
TS/E/S30/13
SECTION 31 – TELEPHONE CABLINGS (CAT 6 UTP AND FIBRE OPTIC CABLE)

SYSTEM
1. General
1.1 This section is for the supply, installation and commissioning of the
telephone system using CAT 6 unshielded twisted pair (UTP) copper
cabling system, optical fibre cabling system and associated works..
1.2 All equipment supplied shall be the latest in current manufacture and have
spare parts readily available.
1.3 The cabling system shall support implementing a single structured

wiring infrastructure and complete integrated multi-media
communication networking system, which includes text, graphics,
images, voice and video.
1.4 The system shall:
a) Support voice, data, image and video application.
b) Cover its capacity and functionality with minimum components.
c) Facilitate expansion from the initial proposed system by addition

of modules.
d) Be flexible and capable of including new facilities.
e) Facilitate easy maintenance, change management and future

growth.
1.5 The Sub-Contractor shall submit details shop drawing and obtain approval
from the S.O. before commencement of work.
1.6 All the telephone cabling shall comply to following standards:
a) ANSI X3T9.5: Fibre Distributed Data Interface
b) BS EN 50173: Information technology. Generic cabling systems
c) BS EN 50174: Information technology. Cabling installation
d) EIA/TIA 568C.0: Generic Telecommunications Cabling for

Customer Premises
TS/E/S31/1
e) EIA/TIA 568C.1: Commercial Building Telecommunications Cabling

Standard
f) EIA/TIA 569-A: The Design and Installation Requirements
g) EIA/TIA 606: Administration Standard for Telecommunications

Infrastructure in commercial Buildings
h) EIA/TIA 607: Grounding and Bonding Requirements for

Telecommunications in Commercial Buildings
i) EIA/TIA TSB-36: Telecommunications System Bulletin - Additional

Specifications for Unshielded Twisted Pair Cables
j) EIA/TIA TSB-40: Telecommunications System Bulletin - Additional

Specifications for UTP Connecting Hardware
k) IEEE 802.3: IEEE Standard for Ethernet
l) IEEE 802.5: IEEE Standard for Local Area Networks: Token Ring
Access Method and Physical Layer Specifications
m) ISO/IEC 11801: 2nd Edition, Amendment 2 International

Standards. Information technology – Generic cabling for customer
premises
n) Code of Practice for Info-communication Facilities in Buildings

(COPIF) latest edition
1.7 In addition, all telephone cabling using fibre optic cable for emergency
communication purposes, it shall comply to following standards:
a) Fire Resistance:
i) IEC 60331-25 (120) - Tests For Electric Cables Under Fire

Conditions - Circuit Integrity - Part 25: Procedures And
Requirements - Optical Fibre Cables
ii) EN 50200 PH 120, EN 50200 ANNEX E PH 30 - Method of

test for resistance to fire of unprotected small cables for use
in emergency circuits
TS/E/S31/2
iii) BS 8434-2 - Methods of test for assessment of the fire

integrity of electric cables. Test for unprotected small cables
for use in emergency circuits. BS EN 50200 with a 930°
flame and with water spray
b) Flame Retardant:
i) IEC 60332-1-2 - Tests on electric and optical fibre cables

under fire conditions - Part 1-2: Test for vertical flame
propagation for a single insulated wire or cable - Procedure
for 1 kW pre-mixed flame
ii) IEC 60332-3-24- Tests on electric and optical fibre cables

under fire conditions - Part 3-24: Test for vertical flame
spread of vertically-mounted bunched wires or cables -
Category C
c) Halogen Emissions:
i) IEC 60754-1- Test on gases evolved during combustion of

materials from cables - Part 1: Determination of the halogen
acid gas content
ii) IEC 60754-2- Test on gases evolved during combustion of

materials from cables - Part 2: Determination of acidity (by
pH measurement) and conductivity
d) Smoke Emissions:
i) IEC 61034-2- Measurement of smoke density of cables

burning under defined conditions - Part 2: Test procedure
and requirements
TS/E/S31/3
2. Telephone Cabling Installation
2.1 Each telephone riser shall be provided with 2 nos of IDF with six terminal
block.
2.2 Each terminal block – 100 points
2.3 Provision of Main Distribution Frame (MDF) in Main Distribution Frame

(MDF) / Telecom Equipment Room (TER).
2.4 Provision of RJ45 patch panel in utility room or closet for residential
units.
2.5 Optical fibre cables with associated fibre interface points and fibre
termination points.
2.6 All necessary wiring from the telephone point including outlet to the terminal
block inside the Telephone riser including termination of the four pairs of
wires at both end. All cables used shall be Category-6 UTP computer grade
cable. All the patching cables at the telephone outlet end and the riser
terminal block ends complete with RJ45 jacks. The patching cables shall be
of minimum length of 3 meters.
2.7 Cable supporting system, conduit and other accessories.
2.8 Coordinate with PTL Service Providers and users on for the activation of
lines.
3. Category 6 UTP Cable
3.1 All UTP cables used shall be of Category 6, 4-pair 100 ohm high
performance unshielded twisted pair (UTP). The UTP cable shall be of 24
AWG (0.51 mm) bare solid copper conductors insulated with high density
polyethylene, jacketed with the non-halogen compound. The insulated
conductors are twisted into pairs. The cable shall be IEC tested for low
smoke and non-halogen emission.
a) All UTP terminations shall be consistent with ANSI/EIA/TIA TSB-

40.
b) All UTP cables shall meet the transmission characteristics of

Category 6 as specified in ANSI/EIA/TIA 568, TSB-36.
c) All UTP connectors shall meet the transmission characteristics of

Category 6 as defined in TSB-40 and meets the pin/pair
assignments of 1-2, 7-8 for ANSI X3T9.5 TP-PMD (FDDI).
TS/E/S31/4
d) Apart from above requirements, all Category 6 UTP cable shall

also meet the following near end cross talk (NEXT) and attenuation
requirements :
Frequency (MHz) Next*(min) (dB) Attenuation (max)

f (dB)
0.064 - 0.8
0.150 74 -
0.256 - 1.1
0.512 - 1.5
0.772 64 1.8
1.0 62 2.1
4.0 53 4.3
8.0 48 5.9
10.0 47 6.6
16.0 44 8.2
20.0 42 9.2
25.0 41 10.5
31.25 39 11.8
62.5 35 17.1
100.0 32 22.0
Next*: Next (f) > Next (0.772) - 15 log(f/0.772)
e) All UTP cables shall meet the requirement specified for current and
emerging standard such as ANSI X3T9.5, TPPMD, 100Mbits
Ethernet, ATM 155Mbps, CDDI at 100Mbps, ISDN, Data over
RS232, Ethernet over 10 BaseT, Ethernet over 100 BaseT, token
ring and possibility of 622 Mbps transmission and application in
future.
f) Each run of cable between the patch panels and the computer
outlet shall be continuous without any joints or splices.
g) The length of each individual run of cable from the patch panels in
from the IDF or termination block to the computer outlet shall not
exceed 90 meter for error-free transmission at 155 Mbps.
h) If the length exceed 90 meter, necessary line driving/boosting

devices shall be provided at the Tenderer's cost to ensure data
transmission at 155 Mbps to the respective work areas are still
error-free.
TS/E/S31/5
i) The 4-pair UTP cable shall be Under-writer's Laboratories (UL)

listed.
j) The 4 pair UTP cable shall also meet or exceed the following
standards:
 ICEA S80-S76, 9/88
 Mutual Capacitance 14pf/ft. Low unbalance
 DC resistance (ohms/1000 feet) : 28.6 Low unbalance
 Characteristic Impedence (ohms @1 to 100Mhz) : 100 + 15%
 Maximum attenuation 67 dB/1000ft and worst pair-pair NEXT

32 dB at 100 Mhz
 IEC 60754 part 2, Test on gases evolved during combustion of

materials from cables - Part 2: Determination of acidity (by pH
measurement) and conductivity.Measurements
 IEC 61034 part 2, Measurement of smoke density of cables

burning under defined conditions - Part 2: Test procedure and
requirements.
 IEC 60332 part 3, : Tests on electric and optical fibre cables

under fire conditions.
 NES 713, Overview of Smoke Toxicity Testing and

Regulations.
k) The 4-pair UTP cable shall comply with the EEC (European
Economic Community) 1992 EMC (electromagnetic compatibility)
Directive requirement and the following required standards:
 Emissions:
EN 55 022 radiated emissions
EN 55 022 AC mains conducted emissions
EN 60 555-2 AC mains harmonics emissions
EN 60 555-3 AC mains voltage fluctuations
 Immunity:
IEC 60801-2 electrostatic discharge immunity
IEC 60801-3 radiated immunity
IEC 60801-4 fast transient immunity
l) The 4-pair UTP cable shall support high speed data, voice, image
and single channel video application.
TS/E/S31/6
m) The color code shall conform to the following scheme:
pair 1 - White Blue & Blue

pair 2 - White orange & orange
pair 3 - White green & green
pair 4 - White brown & brown
3.2 RJ45 Patch Panel
a) The RJ45 patch panel provided in the utility room or closet shall
have sufficient capacity to cater for the total quantity of the RJ45
points in the zones served.
b) The wiring block shall be fire-retardant, moulded plastic blocks.

It should consist of colour index or label strips to be used to
identify the data points and high teeth to separate the tip and
ring.
c) The patch panels must be able to support 100Mbps and ATM

155 applications, Cat 6 compliance.
d) The wiring block shall be able to accommodate 22-26 AWG

(0.40 mm - 0.64 mm) cable conductors. The patch panel shall
be quiet front without any contact element exposed.
e) The patch panels shall cater to data, image and video

applications.
f) The cross-connect wire shall be colour-coded and available in 1,

2, 3 and 4 pairs versions
3.3 Optical fibre cables with associated fibre interface points and fibre
termination points
a) A minimum of 1 no. 2-core optical fibre cable complying with ITU-T

G.652.D specifications designated for a non-coaxial cable system
shall be provided. The cable shall terminate into a fibre termination
point with 2 sets of SC/APC connectors at one end (which may be
located in the utility room or closet) and into a fibre interface point
with 2 sets of SC/APC connectors located in the telecommunication
riser or gate pillar (or meter compartment) to each residential unit at
the other end.
b) The 2-core optical fibre cable shall be terminated with an

additional 2m length as “slack”.
c) The fibre interface point and fibre termination point shall each be
a set of 2 SC/APC connectors.
TS/E/S31/7
d) When fibre cables are installed in conduits, the optical fibre

cable used shall:
1) Comply with the G.657 Category A specifications in the

ITU-T Recommendations;
2) Comprise an outer sheath of fire retardant polyethylene or

Low Smoke Free of Halogen (LSFH) material;
3) Have a central strength member that is made of Aramid

Yarn (Kevlar Yarn) or its equivalent; and
4) Be able to withstand a maximum tensile load of at least

500N.
e) When the fibre cables are installed underground, the optical

fibre cable used shall:
1) Comply with the specifications in sub-category G.652.D

in the ITU-T Recommendations;
2) Have a loose tube with filled jelly compound and

polyethylene sheath;
3) Have a central strength member that is made of Aramid

Yarn (Kevlar Yarn) or its equivalent; and
4) Use water blocking tape to enhance prevention of water

armouring
f) Fibre interface point shall be securely mounted at the side of the

telecommunication riser facing the door. Where there is no
telecommunication riser, the fibre interface point shall be
securely mounted inside the gate pillar (or meter compartment)
at a height which is at least 1m.
g) The fibre termination point shall be securely mounted adjacent

to the RJ45 patch panel (which may be located in the utility
room or closet) and have a clear space of 50mm from the
SC/APC connectors to allow the connection of patch cords.
Each fibre termination point shall be provided with a 13A switch
socket outlet.
TS/E/S31/8
3.4 Intermediate Distribution Frame (IDF)
Each IDF shall be sized for 100 pair telephone cables termination, unless
3.5 Terminal Block (TB)
The capacity of the terminal block shall be for termination of 100

telephone points.
3.6 All cables, both fiber and copper shall be terminated during the initial
installation build-out.
4. Installation
4.1 The scope of work in this section refers to the telephone point and cable
installation. Location of points refer to the associated tender drawings.
4.2 Cable trunking or cable tray installed along the corridor shall be similar to
the cable trunking or tray installed for the electrical cable except the colour
of the trunking shall be "green" for telephone and "white" for computer
installation.
4.3 The cable trunking shall be marked at every 1 metre interval or at least 2
markings at equal interval for every length of trunking either by permanent
machine press lettering 'TELEPHONE' for respective services or by spray-
painting the wording before installation of cable trunking.
4.4 Similar treatment to the cable tray if used shall also be applied.
4.5 Relevant sections of cable trunking and cable tray for electrical installation
in this tender specification are also applicable in this section.
4.6 All the downdrops from the cable trunking and cable tray shall be
concealed within brickwall, partition, and other wall paneling by using
uPVC conduits.
4.7 Relevant section of concealed conduit wiring for electrical installation shall
be applicable in this section.
4.8 All telephone installation shall comply to the Telecommunication

Authority’s requirement. Any discrepancies between this specification and
Telecommunication Authority shall refer to the S.O. for his final decision.
4.9 Fire rated box up shall be provided for all trunking and conduits that carry
emergency and essential services fire resistance fibre optical cable.
TS/E/S31/9
5. Accessories
5.1 Cable trunkings and cable trays shall be provided with factory made
elbows, tees, crosses, branch and reducers, joints and other accessories
such as earthing connector to ensure continuity, coupler piece, and all
cadmium-plated bolts and nuts.
5.2 Fixing brackets fabricated from galvanised mild steel angle iron and
threaded rods shall be supplied and installed. The sizes of all suspended
rods shall be calculated depending on the loading for S.O.'s approval.
5.3 Rawl plugs suitable for the installation of threaded rods shall e provided for
the suspension of cable trunkings and cable trays.
5.4 Accessories for the installation of G.I. conduit/cable trays/cable trunking as

per relevant section in this Technical Specifications shall be provided.
6. IDF Frame/DP Panels
6.1 All risers shall be provided with IDF frames complete with six terminal
blocks.
6.2 Sub-contractor shall provide the termination diagram indicating the

individual cable with respect to the extension lines number/location.
6.3 Sub-contractor shall coordinate with Service provider for the termination
and testing of individual telephone/fax lines.
6.4 The Sub-Contractor shall also provide Main Distribution Frame in the MDF
room complete with terminal blocks and other accessories required for the
complete installation for the buildings.
7. Installation
7.1 Cable trunking or cable tray installed for telephone and for computer shall
be separated horizontally and vertically by 100 mm minimum if they are
running along the same route.
7.2 The cable trunking shall allow another 25 mm on the height for the
coupling of conduit to the side of the trunking.
7.3 When allowing for access to the conduit proper metal hole cutter with
diameter of conduit shall be provided for cutting the side of trunking.
TS/E/S31/10
8.1 Site Acceptance Tests
a) Optical Fibre Cable
1) Continuity testing using a powerful visible red laser.
2) Scanning at the fibre interface/termination point with an

Optical Time Domain Reflectometer (OTDR) to measure
the fibre lengths, losses, connector losses, splice losses
and fibre defects. The optical fibre cable will be treated
as being in good working condition if the losses
measured between the fibre interface point and the fibre
termination point are less than 0.6dB.
b) CAT 6 UTP Cable
All cables shall be tested and conformed to the Specifications and

Standards.
8.2 Certification
The sub-contractor shall involve engaging an operator licensed to provide

passive optical fibre connectivity service to certify fibre readiness. The
certification shall be submitted for authority clearance.
TS/E/S31/11
SECTION 32 – LIGHTING MANAGEMENT SYSTEM
1. General
1.1 The Sub-contractor shall engage a Specialist for this part of the works i.e.
to design, supply, install, test and commission the complete Lighting
Control System, Power monitoring and status monitoring of switchboards,
distribution board, generator and Handicap call bell as per but not limited to
this Technical Specifications, Design Parameters and Tender Drawings.
1.2 This Section of the Sub-contract includes complete Specialist Design,

Supply, Delivery, Termination, Testing and Commissioning of the Lighting
Control System’s devices and Control Schedules necessary for the proper
installation and functioning of the Lighting Control System in this part of the
sub-contract.
1.3 The Sub-contractor shall engage a Specialist for this part of the works and
submit the name of the Specialist in the tender for S.O.’s approval.
1.4 The required and accepted Lighting Control System shall be strictly
configured as per but not limited to this Technical Specifications, Design
Parameters and Tender Drawings. Any alternative proposed and offered is
not acceptable unless otherwise approved by the S.O.
1.5 The Building shall be equipped with a lighting management system

providing flexible and efficient control and management of the whole
lighting installation from a centralized location.
1.6 All devices connected to the system, such as switches, sensors, actuators,
displays, control units, dimmers etc. can exchange information via this
system. All devices shall be able to select freely and are interactive
between one another. These devices shall be able to be programmed to
perform its present specific tasks as required by the project and with the
flexibilities in changing its desired tasks to meet the End Users’
requirement at any time in the future.
1.7 All devices shall be able to being programmed to any specific tasks or
different loads and also provide flexibility in changing its tasks or loads at
any time.
1.8 It should be a non-proprietary open protocol system with distributed

intelligent or multi processor system with micro-processor on each control
device. If a device should fail, only the functions associated with that device
may be lost while other devices on the system are not affected.
TS/E/S32/1
1.9 The system shall allow any brand of Internet of Things and Artificial
Intelligent to be interfaced without the need to expand any of the system or
add -in controller.
1.10 The lighting and power circuits should be wired in a topology that meets the
wiring regulation for a conventional ON/OFF switching control and also to
be automation ready using a non-proprietary protocol system.
1.11 The system shall be expandable and not limited or having constraint to
specific lighting fixtures or type of lamps. Switching actuator shall be
suitable and rated for inductive lamp load switching. Design of by-pass
and/or isolation switching shall be stipulated in the proposal
1.12 The system shall use advanced graphical programming software

compatible with Microsoft Windows OS to enable the lighting operations to
be centrally programmed and adapted, with local controls available from
local wall switches. The entire system shall be centrally controlled and
monitored in real time. Lighting layouts shall detail the active status of each
relay.
1.13 The system shall be of IP web base access that can be easily interfaced
with third party and shall have gateway/bridges interfaces (BACNET, OPC)
for connectivity to other control LAN networks such as Integrated Building
Management/Automation System, Facility Booking System, Internet or
Intranet System.
1.14 The system shall compiled to SELV (Safety Extra Low Voltage) and should
consist of a dedicated 2-wire twisted pair 24VDC control cable (KNX/EIB
bus line), shielded from interference, with rated insulation voltage required
to meet the wiring regulation. Approved system should be KNX/EIB or
equivalent, which should be an open and non-proprietary system having
structure able to connect and operate compatible bus devices.
1.15 It should be a decentralized multi-master system with distributed

intelligence in all bus devices. The system shall not require a PC or any
other special control unit after testing and commissioning.
1.16 The backbone protocol of the system should be based on the KNX/EIB
system.
1.17 The system shall able improve for measuring, controlling, monitoring and
signaling all building services functions locally and remotely.
1.18 The control network system shall be able to tailor in order to suit the
modern electrical wiring system.
1.19 The system integrators should have support by the supplier and receive
training from certified training centre.
TS/E/S32/2
1.20 In the event of network failure, the sensor shall continue to works on the
last setting. The light shall be 100% turned up during any power failure to
controller or sensor
1.21 Sub-Contractor to have pre-installation mock up and demonstration the on

the system installation. It shall also demonstrate every level of work
involved include integration, connection, controller coding, decoding,
scanning, proper wiring connection method, self-connectivity check with
instrument and visual observation
2. Data Transmission and Communication
2.1 The data transmission rate should be least 9.6 Kbps and testing and
commissioning shall be through USB interface.
2.2 The system data rate shall be maximized up to 10/100 BaseT networks
compliant to IEEE802.3 using line or area couplers.
2.3 The transmission should be through a decentralized bus access CSMA/CA,

where in an event of collision detection or resolution there would be no loss
of telegrams.
2.4 The data communication should be based on the OSI (Open System
Interconnection) reference model.
3. Bus Cable
3.1 The insulation voltage of the bus cable with the system shall have
adequate protection to meet overvoltage requirement of the wiring
requirement.
3.2 The size of the bus cable should be 2X2X0.8 mm diameter with screen, J-
Y(st)Y 2x2x0.8. each able to withstand 2.5KV and 4KV insulation
respectively of the type of Bus Cable used.
3.3 Bus Cable shall be run in dedicated conduit or as specified. Sharing of

conduit with LV electrical circuits is not allowed.
3.4 The twisted pair bus cable should link all input devices such as switches,
touch panels, motion sensors, light sensor etc. and be connected to output
devices such as switch actuators, dimmer, brightness controllers, etc.
3.5 The bus cable should be able to handle information, data exchange and
supply 24 VDC power to all devices on the bus.
TS/E/S32/3
3.6 The topology should be linear, multi-point star or ring in structure.
3.7 The basic installations shall include the following items:
(a) Control Panels
(b) System components and accessories. E.g. Data rails, Data

connector, IP Router, Power Supply, Data rail cover and Bus
connecting blocks.
(c) Switch Actuators and dimmer actuator for all kinds of lighting such
LED lighting, fluorescent lighting, incandescent lighting and halogen
lighting.
(d) Programmable switches with positive on and off status indicators by

LED lights. The configuration of switches varies from 1-gang, 2-
gang, 4-gang and 8-gang. A maximum of 5 switches can be
mounted into a single frame.
(e) Control cable (2x2x0.8 mm, with adequate insulation) for signal
transmission.
(f) Scene/Mood Control programmable switch, shall be also configure
4. System Applications
4.1 Parameter lights along the glass façade shall be equipped with
daylight/presence sensor. These sensors should be able to achieve dual
functions of presence sensing and constant light level control. The sensor
can be used to measure the brightness level in rooms to achieve constant
lux level controls. They shall be switched off or dimmed if sufficient natural
light is enough to maintain the lux level or when no presence is detected.
4.2 Every light fixture shall be grouped with the sensor and generate a zoning
and address.
4.3 Microwave Presence sensors & motion sensors for control of Lights at all
Toilets as specified.
4.4 Daylight sensors for dimming control of Lights at Building’s Common

Corridors, Staircases, areas close to windows and as specified.
4.5 Office shall be equipped with presence sensors with dimming controls. The
switches in the office shall be able to activate/ deactivate the presence
sensor. The switches shall be able to activate scenes or on/off/dim the
lights.
TS/E/S32/4
4.6 Open Laboratories shall be equipped with presence/daylight sensors with

dimming controls. The switches in the laboratories shall be able to activate/
deactivate the presence/daylight sensor. The switches shall be able to
activate scenes or on/off/dim the lights. When the brightness detected by
the sensors exceeds the predetermined Upper Threshold level, “Off” or
“Dim Down” Control Command shall be sent to the Switch Actuators or
Switch/-Dim Actuators respectively to manage the Lights in these areas
accordingly. Contrary, when the brightness detected falls below the Lower
Threshold, Lights are “On” or “Dim Up” accordingly. During off-peak hours,
the Presence Sensors start functioning, Lights shall be “On” throughout so
long it continuously sense movements and only switches “Off” upon
continuously sensing no movement for 30min.
4.7 For Multi Purpose Rooms, the system shall be able to use the same control
switch to control individual partition of the room or all at once depending on
the partition condition as close or open between rooms. Dimming Controls
shall be provided for the Multi Purpose Room.
4.8 Lecture Theatres, Auditorium, Tutorial Rooms, Meeting Rooms,

Video/Presentation Conferencing Rooms and College/Seminar Rooms
shall be provided with dimming controls. The switches shall be able to
activate scenes or on/off/dim the lights. Wireless touch panels shall be
integrated with the lighting controls with the all the necessary controller to
interface to AV systems, Motorised Curtain/Blind systems, Motorized
Projector Screens, Security functions, Temperature sensors and many
more and not limited to only Lighting Control, thus providing End Users with
further flexibilities and possibilities of adding this requirement and functions
into the existing Control System at any time in the future.
4.9 Timer Control and motion microwave control for control of lights at External
Areas (eg. Landscape areas, pole light and bollard), building common
areas, loading/unloading Bay, meeting rooms, Lecture Theaters, Seminar
rooms, Tutorial Rooms, College Rooms, Landscapes and as specified.
4.10 There shall be a main centralized control system capable of displaying,

monitoring and control.
4.11 The system should be able to incorporate energy saving features through
the use of timers, motion detectors, light sensors etc so that unnecessary
turning on of loads can be minimized.
4.12 The system devices should be able to communicate or control/monitor via

the existing Local Area Network (LAN), no need to install an additional
dedicated LAN.
4.13 The system should have rated actuators to facilitate the use of energy
saving bulbs or florescent tubes.
TS/E/S32/5
4.14 Time Schedules by the Lighting Management Station shall be set for Lights
at Building’s Common Areas, Landscapes and other areas as determined
by S.O. and End Users that requires “Time Control” to be “On” and “Off”
respectively as needed.
4.15 Programmable Switches with Scenes-Effecting type shall be provided at

each Seminar room/ LT and other locations as determined by the S.O. and
End Users to control On/Off/Dim the Lights in these areas and alternatively,
Light Scenes or Preset.
4.16 Dimming can be programmed as needed for easier and convenient control
of lights.
4.17 Microwave sensors shall be provided for all Toilets and to be only
effectively sensing for moments after peak hours of the building operation
whereby, the Lighting Management Station shall sends a Time Schedule
Control Command to enable and disable these presence sensors from
functioning.
4.18 During peak hours, Lights in the Toilets shall always be “On” and when the
microwave Sensors start functioning, Lights shall be “On” throughout so
4.19 Building’s Common Corridors with ample natural lights and other areas as
determined by the S.O. and End Users shall be provided with Daylight
Sensor control. When the brightness detected by the sensors exceeds the
predetermined Upper Threshold level, “Off” or “Dim Down” Control
Command shall be sent to the Switch Actuators or Switch/-Dim Actuators
respectively to manage the Lights in these areas accordingly. Contrary,
when the brightness detected falls below the Lower Threshold, Lights are
“On” or “Dim Up” accordingly.
4.20 Smart Plug Load monitoring and control. Base on wireless Mesh network
to enable the communication between a Mobile application or Laptop with
the Plug Load for the control, setting, collect of data with built in calendar,
power meter and with cut out function to the power supply.
4.21 Microwave sensor for car park lighting and monitoring.
4.22 Technology applications for Human or equipment tracking, Location Way

finding, public transport location, Car position tracing where applicable.
4.23 The system shall be capable to integrate with other new application in the
future.
TS/E/S32/6
5. Modular Bus Devices
5.1 All bus devices should be made according to DIN EN 50022 and suitable
for mounting on 35-mm DIN-rail mounting rail.
5.2 Each bus device should have a built-in micro-controller with programmable
Physical Address. The Physical Address should have the capability to be
re-programmable.
5.3 The bus lines should be able to incorporate up to 64 bus devices

connected and these lines should be able to be grouped up to 12 lines
together via line couplers to form an area.
5.4 The switch actuator for lighting control should have a rating of 16AX and
16A AC3 or AC5a utilization category with individual mechanical bypass
switch built into the actuator for each channel.
5.5 Switch actuator shall at each channel be able to feedback the status of the
contact and load.
5.6 The Switch Actuators shall have up to 400,000 times of switching operation
for each channel/output at rated current and up to 1,000,000 times without
load. Verification Report and Certification from manufacturer shall be
provided upon request by the S.O. prior to approval.
5.7 No special digital addressable electronic ballast is needed for all the light
fittings. The switch actuator should be able to control the conventional
electro magnetic ballast or electronic ballast.
5.8 Device for switching and dimming of eight independent groups of

luminaries with LED driver, electronic ballasts, dimmers or transformers
with 1 – 10 V control input. The dimming control per outputs carried out
with two control wires. Maximum control load per channel is 100 mA. The
Switch/Dim Actuator needs only EIB / KNX bus voltage for normal function.
With eight potential free relays the supply voltage of the ballasts and
consequently the luminaries can be switched on and off over or manually
without any auxiliary supply. Contact position is displayed.
The following functions can be set separately for each channel:
- switching and dimming of lighting
- feedback of switching state and brightness value
- different adjustable dimming speeds for dimming and setting brightness
- adjustable upper and lower dimming limits
TS/E/S32/7
- recall and set of up to 18 light scenes (8-bit commands) per channel
- 4 presets (1-bit commands) per channel
- integration in constant lighting control (“slave mode”)
- forced operation with higher priority
- staircase lighting function with adjustable staircase lighting time and

warning before switching off
- disable function to prevent unauthorised operation
- characteristic curve adjustment to adapt ballast brightness characteristic
5.9 When combined with the light sensor, the device shall be able to perform
constant light control for the parameter lighting
5.10 Light sensor shall be able to perform constant light level control with
dimmer (ON/OFF switching of lighting circuit and step function control are
not allow). Sensor shall be able to send brightness value to all dimmer in
the system for share sensor function.
5.11 The presence sensor shall control lighting as a function of the brightness
and/or movement. It is designed for ceiling installation and can be both
flush mounted and surface mounted. It should have high sensitivity
sensors/ lens system and depending on the application chosen, different
functions which can be varied via the software. There shall be 4 sensors
with lens in each presence sensor.
5.12 The cable used for connecting the actuator to load should be of a single
core PVC insulated cable.
5.13 No additional power supply is needed for individual bus devices; they
should be powered by the power supply transmitting through the bus line.
TS/E/S32/8
6. Programmable lighting controls
6.1 All the lighting circuitries shall be able to being addressable or

programmable at any time. Any areas with more than 2 lighting circuits
shall have a switch to be able to program with a spare rocker for central
control such as ON/OFF or dimming etc.
6.2 The system shall able to incorporate group controls and scenes without
any additional control items and all shall be able to achieve by means of
programming on the actuators and switches.
6.3 Dimming Actuators
(a) For dimming lighting shall be very flexible in planning for changing
the dimming actuator to different loads such as : LED lighting,
Fluorescent lighting with 1-10V control signal, LV Halogen
(Electronic / Conventional transformer), 230VAC Halogen and
230VAC Incandescent.
(b) If higher wattage is required like >1KW… 5KW, additional dimming

amplifier can be extended from the existing dimming actuator,
without any modification at the above ceiling, only affected at the
control panel.
(c) The dimming function shall able provide 1% - 100% dimming

control. While switching function shall be like ON/OFF (Full
brightness/Total darkness) control.
(d) The system shall also able to dim and control numerous/groups of
lighting without much changes to the initial configuration such as
without physical hacking of wall for re-wiring. The changes will be
very minimum only require some software programming.
(e) The system shall allow dimming control points and switching points
to be combined into scene function, and it can be easily
retrieve/recall and store at any programmable switches, touch panel
and any PC at FCC room or other terminal.
(f) These Switch/-Dim Actuators shall have built-in manual overriding

switch for each channel/output for manual switching of the Lighting
State in the event of device or channel/output failure.
TS/E/S32/9
6.4 Switching Actuators
(a) The switching actuators can be changed according to different

loads such as different ampere rating e.g. 6A, 10A etc.
(b) The switching actuator receives telegrams from sensors or other

controls via the KNX / EIB and switches electrical consumers by
means of its relay contacts which are independent of one another.
Each switching output has a separate bistable switching relay so
that the states of the switching contacts are safely maintained even
in case of bus voltage failure. The switching contacts are especially
designed for capacitive loads and therefore suited for relatively high
inrush currents.
(c) The actuators shall have the slide switches on the device front
panel, the relays can be switched on and off by hand parallel to the
KNX / EIB even without bus voltage or in a non-programmed state.
This shall be able to permit fast checking of connected consumers
for proper functioning.
(d) There shall be incorporated with logic function individual for each
output, disabling function, timing functions (ON-delay, OFF-delay,
staircase lighting timer, also with early-warning function) , timing
functions (ON-delay, OFF-delay, staircase lighting timer, also with
early-warning function) and light-scenes: up to 8 internal scenes
parameterize as per output.
(e) The actuators shall be able to provide measurement for the

operating hours counter can be activated independently for each
output.
(f) The current measurement for each output can be monitor and
transmission of measured current intensity to the bus via
independent communication objects (transmission in the event of
value changes or additionally in fixed cycles). A load monitoring
function (overload / under load) with predefined load limits (teach-in
or parameter setting) can be optionally activated with separately
parameterize message telegrams. Input monitoring for cyclical
updates with safety circuit.
(g) The specified Switch/-Dim Actuators for dimming a circuit shall

strictly be de-rated by 40% for each channel/output and then
configures accordingly to suite each respective load and
(h) The Switch circuit and not basing on the full capacity of the dimmer
rating, i.e. at all time each channel/output of a Switch/-Dim Actuator
shall strictly have 40% tolerance.
TS/E/S32/10
(i) The Switch Actuators for On/Off Lighting Control shall strictly be AX
rated type as shown in the Tender Drawings that supports full load
without having to de-rate when connected with light fixtures with
high peak in-rush switching current such as Fluorescent and
PLC/Compact Fluorescent lamps and according to EN 60669.
(j) Actuators shall strictly be capable of monitoring the state of the

circuitry and report the state of failures with Alarm Alerts. It shall
have built-in Active Current Sensors for every channel/output to
feedback the Load/Current Situation. Load Current threshold can be
set for detecting the MCB and/or RCCB/ELCB trip, no load, partially
lost of load or any fault on the circuitry.
Following functions shall strictly be available with any proposed

Switch Actuators.
i. Load Current Recognition, Load Current Value Send and

Reaction to Current Threshold Values;
ii. Time functions and Delay On/Off;
iii. Forced Control and Safety functions (Overriding Control

during Critical Situations);
iv. Reaction to Upper and Lower Threshold Values;
v. Preferred State for Lights on Bus Voltage Failure and

Recovery.
The Dimming Actuators for other lamps such as 230VAC Halogen

LED Lamps, Low-Voltage Halogen LED Lamps and etc. shall be
universal and Modular Din-Rail Component (MDRC) type that works
on all kinds of transformers or directly without transformer. It shall
supports minimum load of 500W/VA in a single circuit connections
and expandable by End Users by only having to add Capacity
Boosters gradually to the existing dimmers and up to a maximum
load of 3000W/VA for the same dimming circuit.
(k) The specified Universal Dimmer for a dimming circuit shall strictly
be de-rated by 40% for each channel/output and then configures
accordingly to suite each respective load and circuit and not basing
on the full capacity of the dimmer, i.e. at all time each
channel/output of a Universal Dimmer shall strictly have 40%
tolerance.
TS/E/S32/11
6.5 DALI Interface Gateway
(a) The DALI Gateway shall be able to interface between a KNX/EIB

installation and a digital DALI (Digital Addressable Lighting
Interface) lighting system. The DALI Gateway allows the switching
and dimming of a maximum of 64 lamps including DALI device (e.g.
LED driver, electronic ballast). Each DALI lamp can be assigned up
to 32 different lighting groups that are controlled via the KNX/EIB.
This permits the integration of a room-specific light control of, for
example, offices, multi-purpose rooms, tutorial rooms and
Laboratories and lecture theatres etc into the higher-level KNX/EIB
building management. In addition, the lighting groups can be
integrated into up to 16 scenes that make it possible to recall pre-
programmed light moods or to save new light scene.
(b) The DALI Gateway shall be able to separate feedback of individual

switching and brightness states of the DALI groups to the KNX/EIB.
In addition, the general DALI operating status can be reported to
the KNX/EIB (error status, short-circuit, status of supply voltage).
(c) The controls at each programmable switches or touch panel / PC

shall permit to manually dim or switch the DALI light groups on and
off in parallel with the KNX / EIB even without bus voltage or in an
non-programmed state (broadcast of all connected DALI lamps).
This feature shall able to quickly test the operability of connected
consumers.
(d) The DALI Gateway is able to check the devices integrated into the
DALI system for integrity. The replacement of a defect electronic
ballast device by a new one, for example, can be detected if the
“Automatic device replacement” has been activated. The decoding
of the parameterized data into the new electronic ballast device is
carried out fully automatic by the Gateway without any special
commissioning. That makes the corrective maintenance of a DALI
system much easier.
(e) The device shall be able can be integrated into scene functions with
different brightness values and centralized switching of all groups is
also possible.
(f) The DALI gateway shall be able to permits the error status
feedback of the connected DALI devices. In case of failure, the
DALI components will send “lamp error” or “Error in device (e.g.
electronic ballast error)”status information to the DALI Gateway
where it will be stored. Furthermore, feedback for DALI short-circuit
shall be also possible to be detected by the DALI gateway.
TS/E/S32/12
(g) DALI gateway shall be able to perform central function, defining

brightness value, time delays and scene functions can be
incorporated.
(h) The EIB-DALI Gateway for managing any brand of DALI Ballasts
and Transformers shall have a ready-built Diagnosis Program that
can be installed immediately without any customization into the
Visualization Station for checking various statuses on Lamp/s
Failure, Ballast/s and Transformer/s Failure, 230VAC failure to
Ballast/s and Transformer/s as well as communication failure
between the EIB-DALI Gateway and the DALI Ballast/s and
Transformer/s.
7. IP Router for networking
7.1 The IP router shall be able to interconnect KNX / EIB lines via data
networks using the Internet Protocol (IP). The IP router implements the
EIBnet/IP standard so that it cannot only be used for routing KNX / EIB
telegrams between lines via an IP network, it shall also for accessing to the
bus from a PC or from other DP devices (visualization displays and
applications). The IP router can thus also be used as an IP data interface
for the programming software. By using a LAN modem, the installation can
be remotely accessed even if there is no direct local data network.
7.2 The use of the existing data network for communication between bus lines
in the IP router shall be able to provide: fast communication between KNX /
EIB lines, extending a KNX / EIB system by means of LAN and WAN
beyond a building, direct routing of KNX / EIB data to each network user
(not in bus monitor mode) and KNX / EIB remote configuration from each
network access point.
7.3 In the design capacity as an area/line coupler, the IP router shall be able to
interconnect two KNX / EIB lines to form a logical functional area ensuring
at the same time the electrical separation between these lines. Each bus
line of a KNX / EIB installation is thus electrically independent of other bus
lines.
TS/E/S32/13
8. Presence & Motion Sensors
8.1 The Presence Sensors and Motion Sensors proposed shall be KNX/EIB
enabled and integrated type and able to communicate within devices on its
parameter settings that requires no additional cables for power supply and
with the same pair of Bus Cable it shall besides receiving the 24VDC SELV
Bus Voltage also transmit all control functions.
8.2 The Motion Sensors shall be either wall mounted next to the lighting
switches and of the same approved range of switches and sharing the
same frame for the switches and with built-in manual overriding switch or
ceiling mounted with adjustable angle and direction of detections.
8.3 The Wall-Mount Motion Sensors shall have detection of frontier 8m and
side wings (left and right) each 6m and 180 deg. horizontal and downwards
angle of 45 deg. and frontier 16m and side wings (left and right) each 10m
and 220 deg. horizontal and downwards angle of 90 deg. for the long
range, ceiling-mount and weatherproof type.
8.4 The Presence Sensors shall be ceiling-mount type and have possibilities of
controlling lights via sensing of brightness and/or movements. It shall have
high-sensitivity sensors and multi-lens that detect 360 deg. and up to 5m
diameter range at a 2.2m to 3m mounting height.
8.5 The Presence Sensors and Motion Sensors shall besides being able to set
the Lux Intensity and Off Timer via the ETS Program also possible of
setting by the built-in knobs on the devices. It shall also allow for the
adjustment of detection range to the desires of the End Users.
8.6 The Presence Sensors and Motion Sensors shall besides being able to
perform as Lighting Management to achieve energy saving also possible to
act as Security Monitoring to meet the cost saving in materials and
installation as well as maintenance and replacement in the future.
8.7 The Presence Sensors and Motion Sensors shall continues to detect and
send commands to the Visualization Station or BMS/IBMS during its idle
period when lights are not required but security monitoring and protection is
still in need.
8.8 The sensor provided can be used in conjunction with venturi valve /
variable air volume box /Fan Coil unit control via Bus interface to
BMS/IBMS.
8.9 The motion sensor and presence sensor shall be able to be enabled and
disable from the work station.
TS/E/S32/14
9. Daylight Sensor
9.1 The desired Brightness Sensor shall be capable of switching Lights and
Other Loads controlled and monitored by the Lighting Control System
depending on the Daylight light intensity. This device shall have the
flexibilities to be programmed as a Twilight Switch detecting 1 to 10 Lux or
a Light Level Switch detecting 100 to 20,000 Lux.
9.2 Upon detecting the brightness exceeds or falls below a specific Threshold,
the Daylight Sensor shall send Control Commands to the Switch Actuators
respectively to control the Lights and Other Loads that are controlled and
monitored by the Lighting Control System.
9.3 The desired Daylight Sensor shall be capable of detecting up to 3 different

Threshold values by a single device.
9.4 The sensor can be used in conjunction with venturi valve / variable air
volume box /Fan Coil unit control via Bus interface to BMS/IBMS.
9.5 Dependent of brightness and motion dependent or motion only dependent

are also possible in terms of software settings.
9.6 Measurement of brightness value can be integrated on the detector device

and enable to feedback to the KNX/EIB bus lines.
9.7 The Daylight sensor level setrpoint shall be able to be adjusted by the user
at the workstation through graphic.
10. Ammonia Gas Sensor
Ammonia gas sensor shall be of electrochemical type with IP65 enclosure,

operating at 12VDC or 24VDC, to detect the Ammonia Gas for urinal cleanliness
for toilet. It shall sense the level of ammonia gas from 0ppm to 100ppm at
operation temperature between 0oC to +40oC and humidity from 5% to 90% RH
non-condensing. The sensor shall transmit to the controller and server. The data
shall be collected and analyzed for preventive and maintenance alert.
11. Methane Gas Sensor
The sensor shall use the Infra red LEL technology with IP65 enclosure, operating
at 12VDC or 24VDC, to detect the Methane Gas level for Kitchen/Laboratory. It
shall sense the level of methane gas from 0% to 100% LEL at operation
temperature between 0oC to +40oC and humidity from 5% to 90% RH non-
condensing. The sensor shall transmit the environment condition to controller and
server The data shall be collected and analyzed for health and safety alert.
TS/E/S32/15
12. Carbon Monoxide Sensor
Carbon Monoxide sensor shall be of electrochemical sensing with IP65 enclosure,

operating at 12VDC or 24VDC, for the for the detection of Carbon Monoxide for
enclosed vehicle parking, generator room, gas heater, steam plant room system. .
It shall sense the level of methane gas from 0ppm to 2000ppm at operation
condensing. The data shall be collected and analyzed for health and safety alert
13. Switches
13.1 The programmable switches shall have its parameters programmed, each
switches transmits telegrams to the KNX / EIB. These can be, for instance,
for switching or momentary-contact control, for dimming or for motorized
blind control. It is also possible to program value transmitter functions such
as dimming value transmitters, light-scene extensions, temperature value
transmitters or brightness value transmitters.
13.2 There shall have some programmable switches can come with a LCD
display to visualize its room temperature value acting with thermo stating
functions.
13.3 The programmable switches shall have long-life LED indicators able to be
programmed to illuminate Red LED indicating lights ‘On’ and Green LED
indicating lights ‘Off’ or vice versa for each switch. The 2 colours LEDs
shall also serve as (Night Light) indicating the Switches locations when
required to facilitate convenient identification in constantly dark
environment.
13.4 Each programmable switch shall be able to be programmed to control

On/Off or On/Off/Dim functions on the switch and each dedicated switch
shall be able to perform multi-functions i.e. On/Off control with Short Push
on either sides of the switch respectively and Dimming control with Long
Push. Performing of On/Off and On/Off/Dim with 1 button or 1 side of a
switch is not acceptable.
13.5 The sensor shall at least come with two status LEDs per control surface.
These status LEDs can be program either be permanently on or off, or
otherwise act as an actuation or status indicator for a key or a rocker. As
an alternative, the LED can also be controlled via separate communication
objects. The status LEDS can then also signal the operating states of room
temperature controllers or indicate the results of logic value comparisons.
Another operation LED can also serve as an orientation light (steady or
also flashing) or be controlled via an independent communication object.
TS/E/S32/16
13.6 The programmable switches shall be able inscribed with wordings for easy
identification of its functional purposes.
13.7 The programmable switches shall be of latest state-of-art design and with
Stain-Less coating and tamper and thief proof. The Sub-contractor shall
submit the samples for S.O.’s approval.
14. Multi function Sensor
14.1 The multi function sensor shall be of smart integrated type comprises of
occupancy sensor, photo sensor and thermal sensor. Sensor is to be of
compact size, all in one.
14.2 The applications of the sensors shall include but not limited to lighting
control, HVAC control, Space Analysis, location-based and Security
services.
14.3 Occupancy detection should be of passive infra-red motion sensor. Photo

sensor for Daylight or Ambient light detection and temperature detection
using thermal sensor. Multi function sensor shall be able to interface via
wireless. Sensor shall be of low power consumption.
14.4 Multi function sensor shall be of input voltage of 230VAC and low power
consumption, operation temperature between -35oC to +70oC and humidity
from 20% to 95% RH non-condensing.
14.5 The multi function Sensors shall be ceiling mounted next to the light fixture
with adjustable angle and direction of detections and with manual
overriding switch.
14.6 The multi function sensor height of installation shall able to cater to height
range of 2.5m to 12.5m and the sensor sensing distance shall cover at
least 1m to 8m range.
14.7 The deployment of multi function sensor to the light fixture shall be flexible
in its configuration such that a single sensor can either connect to a group
or a single fixture. The coverage range of sensors shall be arranged in
overlapping manner to avoid functional lapse.
14.8 The multi function sensors shall be able to trigger the artificial light dimming
and mixing of daylight automatically to meet the pre-set lux level in the
space
14.9 The light fixture shall be addressable to the Data Server via the connection
of device controller to each light fixture.
TS/E/S32/17
14.10 The multi function sensors shall be able to be paired into different fixture
zones, thereby allowing for zonal control and for multiple fixtures to share
occupancy sensing data and respond simultaneously to occupant motion
patterns in the zones.
14.11 The multi function sensor can be used in conjunction with venturi valve /
BMS/IBMS.
15. Interface with BMS/IBMS
The Interface gateway with BMS/IBMS shall be located at FCC room’s control
panel. Each gateway can serve up to 15 lines per 1 Area. The transfer of the data
points is in 2-way communications via data exchange of EIS data RS232 format or
BACNET, the group addresses at each point are swiftly appeared at BMS system
panels and it allowed BMS/IBMS to control and monitoring freely at the Lighting
Control system data points. The system shall be able to interface to NUS virtual
machine at cloud.
16. Monitoring & Control at FCC room
16.1 The central control station at FCC room shall have a Lighting Management
software in which embedded used for controlling and monitoring all lighting.
16.2 The Server minimum configuration shall be at least minimum in latest

Microsoft Server OS, in Intel’s Pentium 4 processor running at minimum
3.2GHz, 8GB RAM, 1TB Hard disk, complete with accessories like USB
Optical mouse, keyboard, CDRW drive, 2 nos. RS232 Serial Port, 3 nos
Ethernet card, 4 nos. of USB, 24’’ LCD flat screen monitor in super VGA
graphics card and with adaptor for Ethernet networking with TCP/IP
network protocols. The system shall have 1hour UPS back up
16.3 The Lighting Management System Software shall be a Windows Based

program with interactive and flexible in programming capabilities.
16.4 The system software shall also install at NUS virtual machine at cloud for
the control and monitoring, The Sub-contractor shall include the necessary
programming, accessories and software for the LMS to install at the NUS
virtual machines at cloud. No hyperlink to another virtual system/ system is
allowed.
TS/E/S32/18
16.5 The Lighting Management System software shall provide the main
functions :
(a) Password Access – Multi-Level passwords access to enable

various degrees of control to be implemented and the password
level shall dictate the Display Menu options.
(b) Active Status & Control – Visualization of status feedback on all

active status of lighting in the form of graphical layout floor plan and
possible for switching On/Off and performing dimming on dedicated
icons / symbols;
(c) Remote Web Access – Allows up to 20 users with different user ID

and password to access the graphical software concurrently via the
LAN or Campus intranet Infrastructure with specific settings created
by the Network Administrator. The Remote Computer will connect
and interact with the System by Microsoft Windows Internet
Explorer environment without the needs to download any program
or database; Remote desktop type of access will not be accepted;
(d) Scene management and master controls are provided at the

graphical screen; - a digitalized layout displayed symbolically and
also in icon format with corresponding numerals/words, code, the
percentage of the lighting dimming value, the power consumption
(in Wattage), ambient brightness level, occupancy status and
temperature around the sensor. A customized Dashboard shall be
designed with user friendliness. With the built-in useful artificial
intelligent (AI) perimeter, the user shall be able to set different
profiles for the sensors including minimum light level, maximum
light level, ramp-up time, active motion window, motion sensitivity,
and ambient light sensitivity, trigger points for the HVAC. The
profiles can be set for different times of the day, for weekdays,
weekends and holidays.
(e) Time Schedules – The graphical software shall be able to set time
schedules for all zones of lights with daily and yearly time
schedules as well as holidays and special events;
(f) Logical functions for IF/Then functions for complex programming;
(g) Generating Reports – The Management Software shall be capable

of generating 5 types of customized reports. The contents of these
reports shall reflect all Monitored lamps failure status, Total hours
run per zone of lights, Types of faults detected and etc. or as per
the End Users requirement.
TS/E/S32/19
(h) Essential Lighting – Each zone of lights may be programmed via

the graphical software to operate as essential lights whenever
needed to.
(i) Hours-Run Monitoring & Re-Lamping Schedules – The

accumulative of run time of each Light Zone shall be recorded and
logged thus enabling the re-lamping schedules to be displayed and
printed for planning and carrying out the replacement works. The
System shall graphically highlight the Light Zones that have
exceeded the User-Defined percentage of usage.
(j) Graphics showing the line status of EIB and Power meter loops
(k) Monitoring of all power meter functions and history- The energy
savings, usage pattern, artificial information of the entire Smart
system down to each individual fixture/sensor level shall be made
available to the user. The savings in KWh, and cost shall be
available in terms of daily, weekly, monthly and yearly savings, and
all data shall be exportable in portable document format (PDF) and
CSV format for excel spreadsheet.
(l) All switchboards and Generators status as indicated.
(m) Energy Management – Energy saving include artificial light tuning,

day light harvesting, HVAC saving, Occupancy saving. The artificial
light management come with mobile Apps and/or wireless room
control handset to activate scenes of the lights
(n) Space Analysis – Space management include generate Heat map,
Motion path and Space utilization pattern
(o) Facility Booking System – Booking through third party interfacing

with mobile Application for booking of facilities, conference room,
meeting room, break out room etc. with auto notifying of booking to
user after 10 minutes from booked time.
(p) Complementing HVAC System – Real time HVAC data (room

temperature with humidity) can be collected and transmit into the
BMS System to fine-tune the building for optimizing of air
conditioning.
(q) Car Park Management – Basement / indoor car park lighting energy
saving and monitoring system base on microwave sensor with
integrated Smart driver for control and data collection.
16.6 The System Software shall be capable of dynamically generate various

types of reports with data visualization tool as required but not limited to
these reports usage by profile, fixture outage and inventory.
TS/E/S32/20
16.7 The data storage within the Centralized Data Platform must be scalable,
down time resilience with redundancy and secured to cater to the growth of
storing of overall data for up to 10 years.
16.8 The Centralized Data Platform shall have the capabilities of performing
data analytics aims to immediately extract knowledgeable information using
data mining techniques that help in making predictions, identifying recent
trends, finding hidden information, and making decisions.
16.9 The Centralized Data Platform shall have data integration capabilities that
can help address issues on storage, processing, data analytics, and
visualization tools. It can also assist in improving collaboration and
communication among various objects in a smart building environment.
16.10 The Centralized System shall enable information sharing across platforms
in a convenient manner. It must provide data redundancy by having at least
3 time replications for its raw data storage and able to scale for further
storage space without powering down the system.
17. Testing & Commissioning
17.1 The complete Lighting Control System shall be fully tested and
commissioned by a Specialist to ensure that the desired performance is
met and that the configuration is as per this Technical Specifications,
Design Parameters and Tender.
17.2 The Sub-contractor shall be further required to liaise with the End Users
on the Lighting Control System controls and to assist and advise them on
the programming on the various required settings as well as train them to
use The System. This cost shall deem to be allowed for in the contract.
18. Documentation and As-built Submission
18.1 Sub-contractor shall submit the as built drawing include the following for
system.
(a) All the devices, controller, gateway, lighting fixture physical address
(MAC), IP address and device address for the entire system in
relationship.
(b) Floor plan showing the devices, controller, gateway, location with all
the necessary address indicated.
(c) Floor plan showing all the lighting fixture with sensor installed with
their physical address
TS/E/S32/21
18.2 Sub-Contractor shall compile all the in excel spreadsheet on all the
devices, controller, gateway, lighting fixture physical address (MAC), IP
address and device address that being installed.
18.3 Sub-Contractor shall submit all the system programming, and other
necessary software document for the installed system
18.4 Sub-Contractor shall submit all the final as-built program (3 set) after all the
adjustment during Defect Liability Period.
TS/E/S32/22
SECTION 37 - POWER QUALITY MANAGEMENT
1. General
This section intended to define the scope of work for power quality management
for Electromagnetic Force and harmonic generated equipment.
2. Power System Modelling and Simulation
The contractor is required to provide pre-installation power system modelling,

simulation and analysis. It consists of load flow, short circuit, voltage drop and
harmonic analysis. Based on the results of the modelling and analysis, the
contractor shall make recommendations for improvement to the power
distribution system for compliance to EN Directive 2004/108/EC. The electrical
distribution system shall be designed to avoid the EMF/EMI effect on sensitive
critical load i.e. medical & imaging equipment; within the area of their prospective
use.
The recommendations shall include the appropriate power quality mitigation to

arrest the following Power Quality issue benchmarking against its respective
standards at all the incomer of the Main Switchboards, Generators Switchboards
and Data Centre Switchboards:
a) Transient Surge Voltage (IEC 1024/ IEC 62305)
b) Harmonics (IEEE 519 1992)
c) Voltage Flicker (ER P28 UK)
d) Voltage DIP / SAG (IEC 61000-4-11 and IEC 61000-4-34)
e) Total Power Factor (at least 0.9 lag; without over compensation)
As part of the modelling and simulation work, the contractor shall liaise with user
to gather data of research equipments such as NMI machines, CT Scanner
machines, MRI machines, X-Ray machines, Data Centres, etc.
3. Post-Commissioning Site Measurements
After practical completion, upon user moving in can commission the equipment,
the contractor shall conduct post-commissioning site measurements of the Power
Quality (disturbance, harmonic voltage & current distortion, voltage flicker and
voltage & current unbalance) and consumption (apparent, reactive & working
power and total power factor). It shall be measured (with measurement duration
of 72-hour for each location) and verify at all the incomer of the Main
Switchboards, Generators Switchboards and Data Centre Switchboards.
The Power meter / logger used shall be true class A type according to IEC
61000-4-30.
The recorded PQ parameters shall benchmark against IEEE 519 1992 and
Engineering Recommendation (ER) P28 UK.
TS/E/S37/1
Chillers, AHUs, High Plume Fan and other critical load ( Critical research facilities
Equipment connected to Variable Frequency Drive and other medical diagnostic
equipment especially the imaging device) shall be subjected to on-site voltage
SAG immunity test benchmarking against IEC 61000-4-11 and IEC 61000-4-34.
The Electro-Magnetic Field measurement shall be in accordance with AS/NZ

4252.1 1994.
4. Routing and Installation of HT and LV Cables
The contractor shall analyse the routing of HT and LV cables and recommend
the necessary measures to be taken, including cable laying configuration, to
reduce the level of magnetic field (EMF/EMI) of heavy current circuits to minimise
risk of potential EMI interference to nearby sensitive equipment and system.
TS/E/S37/2
SECTION 38 - EMERGENCY VOICE COMMUNICATION / PUBLIC ADDRESS /

BACKGROUND MUSIC SYSTEM (EVC/PA)
1. General
1.0 The scope of work to be covered in this section shall include the supply,
delivery, installation, testing and commissioning and the final handing over of
a flexible Emergency Voice Communication (EVC) /Public Address
(PA)/Background Music (BGM) System as indicated in the tender drawings
and described herein this Specification.
1.1 The works covered in this section is considered as specialist works; the Sub-
Contractor shall seek competent specialist in this field to prepare submission
for the works as part of the tender submission.
1.2 The Emergency Voice Communication system shall comply with
a) SS 546: "Code of Practice for Emergency Voice Communication

System in Buildings"
b) SS 645: Code of Practice for the Installation and Servicing of

Electrical Fire Alarm Systems
c) Latest Fire Code by FSSD.
d) SS CP 638: Code of practice for electrical installations
e) BS EN / IEC 60065: Audio, video and similar electronic apparatus.

Safety requirements
f) BS EN / IEC 60529: Degrees of protection provided by enclosures

(IP Code)
2. System Requirement
2.0 The system shall function primarily as Emergency Voice Communication

System for evacuation purpose to comply with Singapore Fire Code and
provide background music and paging as secondary usage. It shall be able
to conduct general paging and background Music broadcast at different
priority level.
2.1 The system shall be fully tested with proper simulations by stages of alarms
and emergency voice responses according to the fire codes and SS546.
TS/E/S38/1
2.2 The system shall be a digital matrix system integrated with a Personal
Computer for TCP/IP based functions ensuring a more efficient and cost-
effective network solution. The system communication network shall be of
non-proprietary open protocol. The system shall be up-gradable in future to
support visual paging capabilities for integration with IP Cameras for
monitoring of key zones during an announcement broadcast. It shall have a
central monitoring PC on the status of the system including the functional
and operational such as the controller operational status, the health status of
each power amplifier including the standby amplifiers, the health status of the
speaker circuits etc..
2.3 The system equipment shall be of one single brand, except for the music
source equipment.
2.4 The system shall fulfill the following requirements :
a) clean, undistorted announcements to selected areas during public

addressing.
b) clean, undistorted paging to selected areas. This shall include over-

riding of the volume controls, allowing emergency announcements to
be heard at full volume. Volume control complete with over-riding
relays shall be provided to all seminar rooms, auditorium, teaching
rooms, meeting rooms, conference rooms, discussion rooms,
classrooms, debrief/briefing rooms, Board room and tutorial rooms.
c) Background music to selected areas when other functions are not

selected.
2.5 The system shall be modular in design and comprise an intelligent System
which can be expanded by adding modular cards, power amplifiers and
others to meet the complete system requirement.
2.6 The central amplifiers and equipments shall be centralized and located in the
Fire Command Centre as shown on the drawings and the monitoring of the
control systems, the speaker line and the amplifiers shall all be connected
back to the Fire Command Centre for central monitoring and reporting.
2.7 Switching of zones shall be carried out at input side, with each zone having
its own amplifier, for all zones requiring background music so different zones
can have their own selection of music, which shall be time-programmable
and also having the capacity to match the number of speakers in the zone.
2.8 A chime shall first be heard for those areas selected for public addressing,
then followed by the announcement.
2.9 It shall be possible to program different charms/alarms for different user

keys.
TS/E/S38/2
2.10 Hard lighted button with cover shall be incorporated for the override of PA
testing message, Fire standby message, Evacuation message and False
alarm message.
2.11 Cables for the local microphone paging stations shall be connected to the
central system. These cables shall be supervised by the system for the
disconnection/fault of microphone paging system. Dedicated cables shall be
run as required for the connection of these microphone call station to the
central rack at the Fire Command Centre.
2.12 The audio transportation in the system shall be in digital form except for the
100V speaker lines output from the power amplifiers. The system shall
provide simultaneously broadcasting of different calls to different locations,
so as there is no conflict in the zones selected. The system shall be able to
store at least the last 200 messages in the memory of the network controller.
It shall be possible to log any changes in status of the system in an external
PC connected to the Ethernet port of the network controller.
2.13 The system shall be designed to handle different call stations and different
commands in operation simultaneously, provided there is no conflict in the
zones being called by the call station and also it shall have a system of
priority to cope with conflict situation.
2.14 It shall be able to be programmed for different priorities on different user keys
of the call stations under conflict situation. Changes on priorities shall be
possible by re-programming through the keyboard of the central processor.
2.15 The call station shall have a goose neck microphone complete with individual
zones, floors, departments (user group) and entire building selection buttons
which shall be provided as indicated in the drawings. An alpha-numeric
display panel shall also be provided attached to the microphone to display
the name of zones, floors, user groups and whole building selection status.
The system shall also have a monitoring system to continuously monitor from
the call station onwards. Any fault shall be displayed on the panel as well as
on the PC monitors, LED flashing and buzzer activated. Means of muting the
buzzer shall be available.
2.16 The system shall have the flexibility of allocating or changing zones to each
user key by re-programming using the keyboard without the need for re-
wiring the system. It shall be possible to select and programme different
music inputs to the different group of building zones at different time. The
background music shall be cut off to the selected zones during an
announcement.
2.17 The entire system shall be electrically supervised, and reported, by means of
the fault monitoring PC at the Fire Command Center to monitor all outgoing
announcements and to indicate malfunctions including short and open
circuits and grounds, in components and in each speaker circuit.
Supervision shall include all speaker lines, and amplifiers and microphone
call station.
TS/E/S38/3
2.18 The system shall be capable of delivering a minimum sound pressure level of
10 dB above the ambient noise in any areas of the building at the listening
level of 1.5m above floor level.
2.19 An articulation loss of consonants of less than 15 % shall be maintained.
2.20 The reinforced sound shall be distributed evenly throughout the listening
area. Total variation in each area shall not exceed +/- 4 dB.
2.21 Zones for paging announcement shall be compensated by providing tone

control facility, if necessary.
2.22 It shall be possible to select and programme different music inputs either
from CD players, to different zones including pre-programmable time settings
for each music source for each zone with background music via the
keyboard.
2.23 Localised volume control shall comply to the latest safety requirements and
shall be over-ridden when the emergency announcement is activated and
submit to S.O. for approval.
2.24 Background music and localised public address systems shall be over-ridden
during an emergency announcement.
2.25 All input equipment such as microphone line amplifier, preamplifiers, chime
units etc, shall be of modular type such that in the event of any failure of
these units, they shall easily be replaced by unplugging the faulty unit and
plugging in a new unit.
2.26 The history of events including the self-diagnosis reports shall be stored in a
database format and be retrieved within the PA system network via a PC.
2.27 Under normal operation, the PA system shall be able to broadcast different
Background Music (BGM) to different designated zones simultaneously. This
system shall provide at least 20 different BGM signals broadcast to different
speakers zones simultaneously.
2.28 The Sub-Contractor shall liaise and co-ordinate with the Fire Alarm System
Contractor on the interfacing works including testing and commissioning. The
activation of any particular zones, floors or buildings shall be followed
closely. The Sub-Contractor shall also co-ordinate with other specialist on the
interfacing to their Audio systems including testing and commissioning.
2.29 An Auto Changeover Monitoring Panel (ACMP) shall be provided to

constantly monitor the functioning of power amplifiers and shall automatically
switch in a spare power amplifier in case of failure of any of the amplifiers.
TS/E/S38/4
2.30 Standby batteries (UPS system) shall be provided to provide electrical power
supply to operate the Central Emergency Voice Communication System in
case of failure of the normal power supply. The batteries shall be kept fully
charged by a permanently connected automatic boost/trigger battery charger.
The capacity of the batteries shall be sufficient to operate the whole system
for not less than 2 hours. The status of every local UPS should be monitored
centrally at the FCC room. The rack shall have 650mm space all round for
heat dissipation and maintenance purpose .
2.31 Digital message module shall be provided and located in the system
controller for pre-recording of emergency messages to be broadcast in case
of emergency. More than one message shall be able to played
simultaneously. The status of these messages shall be monitored. These
messages shall be able to be recalled for playback, either automatically or
manually.
2.32 For evacuation and emergency procedures, signals shall be programmed to

precede an announcement from the call station, or they shall be capable of
being broadcast independently by selection of a defined user-key.
2.33 The system shall be able to broadcast pre-recorded emergency messages

during fire alarm activation. It shall be able to broadcast another pre-
recorded message automatically after fire alarm activation.
2.34 A switch shall be provided to silence all the fire alarm sounding device in the
building when the speakers are in use during the fire alarm activation, but
only after the fire alarm sounding devices have operated and initially for not
less than 15 seconds.
2.35 The system shall satisfy the emergency specification IEC 60849 and shall be
tested and certified to be compliant to IEC 60489, and local Code of Practice.
2.36 The system shall include user-friendly call station. The user can view if the
selected outputs are occupied by higher-or-lower priority calls. The operator
shall also have the option of listening to the chime/pre-recorded
announcements via the loudspeaker in the call station.
2.37 The system shall be able to make emergency calls (all calls) even if the
controller failed.
2.38 The system in its complete configuration shall provide at least the following
functions:
a) Routing of audio from any input to any output.

b) Routing of multiple background music sources to different zones or
audio outputs.
c) Monitor the correct operational status of the power amplifiers and
shall change over to the designated spare power amplifier in case of
a fault.
TS/E/S38/5
d) All audio inputs and outputs shall be provided with digital parametric
equalizers.
e) Capability to enable and disable any of the inputs and outputs.
2.39 All paging calls made whether in the system from the FCC room should be
monitored by the P.C. located in the FCC room. The call monitoring system
shall be able to provide the following details:
a) Date of call made.

b) Time for start of call.
c) Time for end of call.
d) The paging microphone station identification.
e) The zones called.
3. Equipments
3.1 All equipment such as power amplifiers, and its ancillary equipment shall be
mounted onto a proper equipment rack. All input units shall be of an
interchangeable modular type such that the individual modules can be
mounted in mixer frames, or in mixer power amplifiers. All system and
peripheral units shall be properly matched with the equipment rack and
provide compact and neat installation. The rack shall have 650mm space all
round for heat dissipation and maintenance purpose. Amplifier to amplifier
shall have an air gap of not less than 90mm.
3.2 Ambient Noise Analyzer

Dual channel ambient noise analyzer shall be included in the system and
shall be installed at 24hrs Operation zones at the input stage of the particular
amplifier. The proposed unit shall be equipped with a remote microphone
sensor to pick up and analyze the surround noise level. Location of
microphone shall be determined at site to achieve the best possible sensing
position. In the event where the surrounding ambient noise is greater than
the set threshold, the reaction time shall not be longer than 25 sec to adjust
to the required levels.
a) Number of channels 2 Channel

b) Signal to Noise 60 dB
c) Frequency Response 50 Hz - 18 KHz
d) Balance Input 0 dB
e) Analyzed Bandwidth Noise 160-200 Hz

f) Analyzing Frequencies 187 MHz - 375 MHz - 750 MHz
- 1500 MHz
g) Mic Input Metering LED
h) By-pass Switch Yes
i) On-Off Switch Yes
TS/E/S38/6
3.3 The power amplifiers channels shall each be provided with built-in digital
delay unit for the audio outputs. This delay shall be configurable in the
configuration software.
3.4 The technical performance of the equipments for the systems shall comply
with the followings:
a) Controller, power amplifiers and audio expander shall have at least

2x16 LCD display to show their own settings.
b) Perform monitoring of all equipment and cabling. Any faults in the
system shall be reported to the controller.
c) Logging of calls made with date, time, initiating unit, key details
and destination.
d) Capability to set the volume level for the individual zones
e) Provision to allocate multiple pre-recorded messages to a
selection key, together with the outputs and press-to-talk functions.
3.5 Faults in the system shall be acknowledged by muting a sounder connected

to the audible alarm relay. The fault status shall be reset automatically after
the fault had been reset.
4. Main Control/Monitoring System
4.1 The system shall include but not limited to the following :
a) 19 inch rack
b) Display and keyboard card
c) Input card
d) Central processing card
e) Signal generator card
f) Matrix card
g) Tone control card
h) Digital message card
i) Power supply
j) Interconnection board
k) Desktop Computer with 32” LCD monitor, CPU shall have a minimum
Memory of 1 GB (512 MB Minimum), Pentium 4 processor, 2.8 GHz
Clock Speed (2.0 GHz minimum), Hard Drive of 80 GB free hard
drive space (40GB minimum), CD/RW, DVD/RW CD ROM Drive of
32X performance, USB ports Keyboard, Mouse, LAN
communications and Ethernet communications board. The software
to monitoring and control of the public address and emergency
communication system provided shall be OPC and suitable to link to
BAS/IBMS.
l) Dot-matrix printer (min 132 col)
m) Control Relay Card and others
TS/E/S38/7
Sufficient quantity of the above items shall be provided to meet the functional
and operational requirements of the complete system installation.
4.2 Central processor card shall be expandable to control a maximum of 16 call

stations, 160 user keys, 1024 matrix points, 128 relays and 8 signal
generators.
4.3 The card shall be able to perform the following functions :
a) Detection of call station user keys.

b) Routing of microphone and attenuation signal tones actuated by the
user keys to loudspeakers located in geographical or functional
zones.
c) User key priority level setting.
d) Coupling of the attenuation signal tone with the user key so that
when the key is pressed, the tone shall broadcast before, or instead
of an announcement.
e) Switching of speaker volume control override circuits via the control
relay card, during an emergency.
f) Checking of the system hardware - continuously scanning the system
hardware to check for errors, malfunction or disconnection. Error
message shall be displayed on the display and keyboard card.
g) Real time clock to display the time, in date and hours and minutes.
Central processor card shall control the operation of the system for example :
detection of the user keys being pressed, routing of the microphone and
attention signal tones, setting of the priority levels and switching of the
loudspeaker volume control override circuits. It shall act as the 'watchdog'
continuously checking the system hardware.
Signal processing card shall be provided for the call system input. The unit
shall comprise one fitter combination audio channel and one
compressor/limiter audio channels.
The compressor/limiter channel shall supply uniform microphone output

levels, compensating for variations in voice volume, irrespective of different
voice strengths and speaking distances. It shall reduce the input peak above
the pre-set threshold and restricting the maximum output level to protect the
amplification equipment from peak overloads.
4.4 Display and keyboard card shall be mounted on the front panel of the rack
frame of the central processor and shall be used for the user programming
and changing of functions of the system.
Display and keyboard card shall have a 24 keys keyboard and a 2 x 40 LCD
character display which show the sequence of the programming.
TS/E/S38/8
The keyboard shall be used for selection of call station numbers, user key
number, priority level, attention signal tone and programming. After the
programming, the card shall return to the normal mode without any influence
on the processor, unless the correct password is entered.
4.5 Input card shall provide the interface between the call station and the central
system. Each card shall have audio I/O and shall provide each call station
with phantom powering for the microphone and amplifying the audio signals
and user key detection.
Screwdriver type potentiometer shall be mounted on the card for the

adjustment of each amplifier gain.
4.6 Signal generator card shall be controlled by the central processor and pre-
programmed with 30 different signals, chimes, alarms and test tones.
Any signals may be programmed to precede an announcement from a call

station or be used alone as an alarm or warning tone.
4.7 Matrix card or other electronic devices shall be provided to enable the input
of the system to be routed to the output speaker circuits. Through solid state
crosspoint switches, the isolation between different channels shall be better
than 90 dB. All switching of zones shall be done at the input of amplifiers.
It shall have the mean to prevent switching of more than one input to the
same output simultaneously.
4.8 Tone control card shall be inserted after the music input to allow for
compensation of irregularities in the music source. A separate input/channel
shall be allocated by each music input.
Either an universal pre-amplifier or a tone control card shall also be inserted

before the power amplifier to compensate for the different room acoustic in
each zone.
Each unit shall have independent circuit each having separate bass and
treble amplification and attenuation to a maximum of 10 dB.
Each tone control card shall be provided with 4 inputs.
Splitter input shall be provided to allow inputs to be fed by a single source.
Screwdriver type potentiometer shall be provided to adjust the gain from -10
to +10 dB. The unit shall be able to accept a balanced or unbalanced source
without any loss of sensitivity.
TS/E/S38/9
4.9 The system shall include the digital message units, for playback for pre-
recorded emergency messages. Any one (1) or a combination of several
messages, or the same message, to be repeated up to 5 times, can be
selected for playback from any of the user keys on the microphone paging
console. The same should also be played back when triggered by any of the
inputs from the fire alarm system.
Recording time provided shall be a minimum of 600 seconds, which shall

allow up to a minimum 12 different messages to be pre-recorded.
The digital message units shall also be modular card format, similar to the
cards of the control system. The healthiness of these cards shall also be
continuously supervised and reported on the central fault status reporting PC
at FCC room.
4.10 Digital message card shall allow digital recording of up to 7 individual

messages. The maximum recording time per card shall be 120 seconds.
Messages of varying duration shall be able to be recorded. Up to 5
messages shall be able to be played back simultaneously to the various part
of the buildings. These messages shall be selectable via the user keys on
the any of the zone/call stations. Total messages duration shall be 325
seconds.
The messages shall be remain intact in the memory for up to 30 days when
power is switched off.
Automatic gain and output volume control shall be provided. A limiter shall
ensure the message is recorded at a fairly constant level.
The message shall be easily changed by re-recording simply by plugging in a
microphone.
The message card shall be modular in design and shall allow for easy
expansion by adding of cards.
The card shall be able to be taken out for remote recording. The message
shall be played back either individually preceded by any pre-selected a chime
and a possibility of with/without switching on of the respective microphone for
manual/adhoc announcements.
4.11 Control relay card shall be provided to override the speaker volume control.
4.12 The system shall be able to configured and monitored through the PC. The
software shall allow configuration and monitoring of the system. shall be
equipped with at least 3-level password protection. 10 user-definable
passwords shall be available in each level.
TS/E/S38/10
4.13 The fault monitoring P.C. at the FCC room shall be able to perform at least
the following function:
4.13.1 logging of all PA calls, for all local and the central system including
PA call made by fire alarms.
4.13.2 fault status reporting of each control system including each local
message card which shall indicate the malfunctioning / error of each
input and output connection.
4.13.3 fault status reporting of the operational and standby amplifiers in

each system.
4.13.4 fault status reporting of all loudspeaker circuits/zone
4.13.5 fault status reporting of each UPS.
The reporting shall detail the location/description of the device.
5. Microphone Paging Panel System/Call Station
5.1 The station shall be provided with a built-in compressor preamplifier to

eliminate overload distortion. It shall have user programmable functions of
cascade priority and the number of individual paging controls shall be
expandable. Each station shall have both "busy" and "in-used" LED
Indication. A VU meter for monitoring the output level and a "busy" lamp to
indicate when other microphone having higher priority are in use.
5.2 The station provided shall have 1 all call button, 1 button for each of the
zones and 1 button for user groups served by the system.
The station top paging console shall be located at the Fire Command Centre.
It shall be equipped with a compressed 0dB output and have a built in 1 watt
amplifier and speaker with volume control. It shall come with a
programmable digital chime. The front panel shall have LED monitoring with
0 volt contact switching for zone selection. It shall have button to perform
activation, emergency pre-recorded messages.
5.3 The zone switch for individual zone are latchable type whereas all call and
press to talk switch are non-latchable type.
The microphone system has comprise of two series of four notes electronic
chime when activated.
5.4 The combination of geographic zones linked to the user keys selected, type
of chime signal, priority call etc shall be programmed by the central system.
Reprogrammed of these functions shall be possible at any time, through
system keyboard.
TS/E/S38/11
5.5 The technical performance of the microphone shall meet with the following:
5.5.1 Type: condenser (Noise Cancelling Dynamic type)

5.5.2 Polar pattern: Cardioid (Unidirectional)
5.5.3 Output impedance: 200 ohms
5.5.4 Output level at 1 kHz: -- 76dB + 3dB
5.5.5 Frequency range: 100 Hz -- 16 kHz (Frequency response uniform)
5.5.6 Sensitivity : 2.0 mV/Pa + 3 dB
5.5.7 Pre-amplifier Output Level : 0 dB/600 ohms
5.5.8 Amplifier Input Level : 0 dB/600 ohms Transformers Balance
5.5.9 LED Switching : Voltage Free
5.5.10 Distortion: <1%
5.5.11 Signal-to-noise ratio: >55 dB
5.5.12 Chime : Digital Programmable Chime
5.5.13 Material : Metal
6. Amplifier and Supervisory Unit
6.1 The amplifiers used shall be completely solid state. They shall be of such a
design to permit operation in open output circuit without damage to the final
stage. A transistorized protective circuit shall be provided, which shall
enable the amplifier to restore itself to full operation within one millisecond
after a short or overload condition has been removed.
6.2 The Power amplifiers shall be multi-channel type. The power supply of the
power amplifiers shall be of different unit, in order to reduce the electronic
noise and interference.
6.3 An amplifier fail safe monitoring and switch-over system shall be provided for
continuous, monitoring of all the amplifiers. When any of the amplifiers fail,
the system shall instantly route the input and output signals of a faulty
amplifier into the signal lines of the stand-by amplifier automatically within 1
second without human intervention. At the same time, the automatic amplifier
changeover unit shall sound a buzzer to alert the maintenance personnel to
attend to the situation.
A standby amplifier of the same capacity shall be provided for every group of
3 operational amplifiers.
6.4 The standby amplifier shall also be continuously monitored. The amplifiers
must also be provided with facilities for setting of priority levels such that, if
more than one (1) amplifier with a group fail, the standby amplifier will
automatically replace the one with a higher priority.
6.5 In order to prevent overloading on the standby amplifier, due to failure of a

second amplifier, the amplifier supervisory unit shall be equipped with
interlocking protection circuit.
TS/E/S38/12
6.6 A transistorized protective circuit shall be provided enabling the amplifier to

restore itself to full operation within one millisecond after a short or overload
condition has been removed.
6.7 A defective amplifier shall be indicated by a visual signal at the control

console.
6.8 The amplifier shall have at least LCD display to be used for status enquiries
and monitoring functions. The display show the VU meter reading when the
audio monitoring mode is selected. The audio output can be monitored by
connecting a headphone to the headphone socket.
6.9 Status changes to the amplifier shall be monitored continuously and reported
to the controller for status/fault reporting.
6.10 Power amplifier shall be designed for rebundant network wiring.
6.11 Faulty amplifiers shall be indicated by visual signals and on audio alarm on
the respective equipment rack, as well as visually display on the central fault
status monitoring PC. The communication between the amplifiers shall have
fail safe monitoring and switch over system should be via RS485. The
monitoring PC at FCC room shall provide also the following details for the
amplifier fault reporting
a) Identification of amplifier
b) Identification of system (the location/system)
6.12 Power Amplifier
The amplifier shall employ solid state devices, fully transistorized type, forced
air cooled, multi-channel and complete with integrated output transformer
designed for distributed speaker system operate on 230V 50 Hz. It shall
come equipped with protection circuitry, built-in VU meter and master volume
control. There shall be automatic self-resetting thermal cut-off protection
circuit if unusual heat built-up is detected in the unit.
The technical performance of the amplifier shall be as follows:
a) Power output: 250W, 480 W

b) Frequency response: 50 -- 20 kHz + 3dB at rated output.
c) THD distortion: Less than 0.5% at 1 kHz at rated output.
d) S+N/N ratio: Better than 90 dB
e) Input sensitivity: 1 volt (2.5mV / 47k ohms, 0.25 mV/220 ohms)
f) Temperature range : 0 degree C to 70 degree C
g) Transformer output : 100V
h) Input Impedance: 100k ohm (Balanced)
i) Output Impedance: 100V; 27.8 ohm
TS/E/S38/13
7. Zone Supervisory Unit
7.1 The zone supervisory unit shall employ solid state devices throughout and
operate on 24VDC. It shall be able to indicate open or short circuit
conditions as well as any significant load impedance changes due to partial
shorts or leakages in any one of the zone.
7.2 In the event of the zone speaker line failure, an audio fault signal shall sound
on the ZSV and on LED shall identify the trouble zone. A silence switch shall
be provided to stop the audio fault signal from sounding and reset to indicate
subsequent failure. The LED shall stay on for the duration of the
malfunction. When the failure is rectified, the LED light shall switch off
automatically. It shall be provided with approved means to disconnect the
circuit automatically from the amplifier in the event of a short circuit.
8. Integrated Supervisory Unit
8.1 The unit shall employ solid state devices throughout and shall have individual
LEDs to indicate the open, short circuit and short circuit to ground condition.
8.2 The unit shall include the speaker line surveillance, amplifier fault detection
as well as automatic amplifier changeover functions.
The line monitoring units are employed to monitor all the lines simultaneously
including the branches of speaker line.
8.2.1 The line monitoring unit shall be incorporated in the power amplifier
unit itself to avoid non-monitored parts of the cable.
8.2.2 Speaker line monitoring shall be provided without any additional
wiring
8.2.3 Tone generator for speaker monitoring shall be incorporated in the
amplifier so that a single failure of the tone generator will not affect
the monitoring of other amplifier channels.
8.2.4 Speaker line monitoring can be switched ON/OFF from the
configuration software
8.2.5 Power for the end-of-line monitoring shall be supplied from the power
amplifier.
This method shall eliminate the usage of capacitor on every speaker and
end-of-line (EOL) resistor. The unit shall able to isolate the speaker lines
from amplifier once detected the faulty (Open, Short Circuit and Ground
Leak).
The unit shall include a failsafe system for these power amplifiers to perform
continuous fault monitoring on each power amplifier unit.
TS/E/S38/14
8.3 In the event of any zone speaker line failure, an audio fault signal shall sound
on the unit and a LED shall indicate the trouble zone. A silence/acknowledge
switch shall be provided to stop the audio fault signal from sounding and
reset to indicate the subsequent failure. The LED shall stay on for the
duration of the malfunction. It shall be provided with approved mean to
disconnect the circuit automatically from the amplifiers in the event of short
circuit.
9. Speakers
9.1 The speakers shall be grouped in zone so that they can be controlled by
area, floor and escape staircases, specific purposes, both selectively and
collectively from the control console at the Fire Command Centre. The
zoning shall be further grouped according to function/user group so that it
shall be possible to make announcement to a functional zone by selection of
one push button at the call station.
9.2 The speech intelligibility shall have a Speech Transmission Index (STI) of
greater than 0.5.
9.3 The allocation of zones to the zone selection button/user key shall be able to
be changed by re-programming without the need for physical rewiring.
9.4 Audio attenuators shall be place strategically in the building. The audio
attenuators chosen shall be equipped with built-in relay emergency
overriding feature. The audio attenuators shall be controlled by a 6 levels
continuous rotary switch, with attenuation in steps of –6dB. It shall be able to
be both flush and surface mounted to the wall (with back box) without any
visible mounting screws.
9.5 The output of any speaker shall not exceed a sound pressure level of 90 dB
at 1 metre from the centre of the speaker and the minimum sound level in the
area covered shall not be less than +10 dB above the ambient noise level
and compliance to the Code requirement. The sound pressure level shall be
at least 85 dB ± 4 dB at the public area/lab/office area and at least 95 dB ± 4
dB at the M&E areas or whichever is better. The SPL variation shall not be
more than 3dB difference.
9.6 Speaker circuits shall be provided with means to disconnect the circuit
automatically from the amplifier in the event of a short circuit and cause a
visual signal at the control console to indicate the defective circuit.
9.7 The amplifiers serving each speaker circuit/zone shall have at least 20%
spare capacity; the specialist shall submit calculations when required to
justify the amplifiers’ selection and quantity.
There shall not be more than 20 speakers per speaker circuit and not more
than 4 speaker circuits per zone.
TS/E/S38/15
9.8 Ceiling Speaker
9.8.1 All ceiling speakers shall come complete with matching transformer,
terminal block, mounting ring, baffles, independent support and
necessary mounting brackets. All metal parts shall be protected
against rust and corrosion. All speakers shall be encased in metal
fire dome to prevent fire entering the casing via the speaker. The
front panel shall flush with ceiling. No screws shall be exposed at the
external part of the speaker.
9.8.2 The finishing colour of the ceiling speaker shall be able to match with
the ceiling boards and shall be approved by the S.O.
a) Technical specification of the ceiling speaker (Ceiling up to

4000mm AFFL) as follows:
i) Speaker diameter: 178 mm round type.

ii) Sound pressure level: 98dB max/91 dB at 1 kHz/1W/1m.
iii) Frequency range: 70 Hz - 20 kHz.
iv) Power output at max: 9 watts/100 V (6-3-1.5W).
v) Speaker output impedance: 1.7K, 3.3k and 6.7k.
vi) Opening angle : 180 degrees ( 4 kHz ).
vii) Complete with line matching transformer with multiple tapping
of 6W, 3W and 1.5W.
viii) Safety: Acc. To EN 60065.
9.9 Wall Mounting Box Speaker
a) All wall mounting box speakers shall come complete with matching
transformer, connector and necessary mounting brackets. All metal
parts shall be protected against rust and corrosion.
b) The finishing colour of the box speaker shall be able to match with
the wall and shall be approved by the S.O.
c) Technical performance of the box speaker as follows:
i) Speaker size: 160 mm round type with cabinet.

ii) Sound pressure level: Input 1W, 1m/1kHz : 90dB/101dB.
iii) Coverage angle: 120 degrees.
iv) Frequency response: 130 -- 10 kHz.
v) Power output at max: 6watts/100V (6-3-1.5W).
vi) Safety: Acc. To EN60065.
TS/E/S38/16
9.10 Horn Speaker
a) The speakers shall be bi-directional and come complete with

matching transformer, connector and mounting brackets. All metal
parts shall be protected against rust and corrosion. The speaker for
outdoor application type.
b) Technical performance of the speaker as follows:
i) Power output at max: 20W, 30W.

ii) Power Selection: 5W, 10W, 20W (20W type)
7.5W, 15W, 30W (30W type).
iii) Impedance: 0.5k ohms (20W type)
333k ohms (30w type).
iv) Frequency response: 50 Hz – 5 kHz.
v) Output sound pressure level: 110dB minimum/1w/1 metre.
vi) Operating temperature: 10 to 55 degrees C.
vii) IP65 rated.
viii) Safety: Acc. To EN60065. IEC529
ix) Material: Aluminium
10. CD Player
10.1 The player shall employ solid state devices throughout and operate on 230 V
50 Hz. It shall be of heavy duty type, designed for continuous day long
operation.
10.2 It shall be capable of providing 8 hours of continuous playing time with digital
sound quality. It shall be able to accept standard discs.
10.3 Technical performance of the player shall be as follows:-
a) System normal compact disc, 8 cm or 12 cm.

b) Frequency Response: 70 to 11 kHz + 3 dB.
c) Total Harmonic Distortion: less than 1% at 1 KHZ.
d) S+N/N Ratio: better than 70 dB.
e) WOW and Flutter: Unmeasurable limit.
f) Dynamic Range: 100 dB or more.
g) Quantization: 20-bit linear 4 channels.
h) Conversion Rate: 8 time over sampling.
i) Power Supply: 230V 50 Hz.
j) Features: Power ON/OFF, Stop/Play, Pause, skip keys, random play,
track selection.
TS/E/S38/17
11. Pre-Amplifier/Line Amplifier
11.1 The universal line/pre-amplifier shall be able to accept and amplify various
audio signals such as microphone, CD player, etc.. The amplifier shall
employ solid state devices throughout and operate on 24V DC.
11.2 It shall contain minimum 5 individual input and output channels and 1 mix
output channel.
11.3 Built-in speech filter shall be provided for base reduction on microphone
input channel.
11.4 Technical performance of the unit shall be as follows:-
a) No. of channel : 5 input, 5 output and 1 mix output.

b) Control provided : per channel, master volume, base, treble and
master output volume.
c) Frequency : 20 to 28 kHz.
d) Power consumption : 20VA.
e) Output signal : 1 volt.
f) Input Sensitivity : -20 dBv.
g) THD distortion : less than 0.3% at 1 kHz.
h) Noise level : -102 dBv.
12. Zone Relay Unit
The unit shall be used as a program selector by allocating one of the input signals to
up to minimum 5 outputs with fire control relays. Both green and red LEDs shall be
provided to enable rapid monitoring of zone selector in use. The unit shall have
remove control capability as well as interdiction function to accept emergency
paging.
13. Monitor Panel
A monitor panel shall be provided to indicate audio and visual monitoring of outputs
for up to 10 power amplifiers. It shall have a 5-inch monitor speaker, volume control,
a watt meter and a 11-position selector switch.
The panel shall also be provided with a line voltage selector for monitoring 25V, 50V,
70V and 100V volts line outputs. The panel shall be designed for rack mounting.
TS/E/S38/18
14. Microphone Paging Console
The console provided shall have 1 all call button, 1 button for each of the zones and
1 button for user groups served by the system.
The desk top paging console shall be located at the Fire Command Centre. It shall
be equipped with a compressed 0dB output and have a built in 1 watt amplifier and
speaker with volume control. It shall come with a programmable digital chime. The
front panel shall have LED monitoring with 0 volt contact switching for zone
selection.
The console shall have button to perform activation, emergency pre-recorded

messages.
A goose neck microphone shall be provided with a standard foam windscreen.
a) Pre-amplifier Output Level: 0 dB/600 ohms.

b) Microphone Type: Condenser / unidirectional.
c) Amplifier Input Level: 0 dB/600 ohms Transformers Balance.
d) LED Switching: Voltage Free.
e) Button Power Capacity: 100 mA.
f) Distortion: <1%.
g) Frequency Response: 200Hz – 16 kHz.
h) Signal-to-noise ratio: >55 dB.
i) Chime: Digital Programmable Chime.
j) Material: Metal.
15. Override Relay System
All emergency override relay system shall provided. The relay system shall be
placed after each amplifier. Relay contacts switches both sides of line. Contact type
cross-bar, gold, platinum or silver redundant contacts are only acceptable. They are
wired in parallel for increased reliability. Diodes are installed across the relay, coil
with revised polarity to prevent ant contact bounce.
TS/E/S38/19
16. Volume Control
16.1 Selected areas shall be equipped with volume attenuator. Each unit shall
have a high quality-transformer and a relay for maximum line level restoration
when the attenuator is in "OFF" position. It shall have 6 levels of attenuation
in steps of 6 dB. The unit shall have an OFF position that can be overridden
during emergency paging. A built-in emergency-overriding relay shall be
incorporated into the unit to switch the output level to the maximum during
emergency paging. It shall be able to be both flush and surface mounted to
the wall (with optional back box) without any visible mounting screws. The
Sub-Contractor shall ensure that the capacity of the volume attenuator and
total wattage of the speaker in the specified area are matched.
a) Impedance: >330 ohms and >165 ohms

b) Relay Consumption: 30 mA
c) Attenuator type: Transformer
d) Level restoration: Yes
e) Attenuation steps: 0dB/-6dB /-12dB/-18dB/-24dB/OFF
f) Relay voltage: 24V/DC
g) Maximum insertion loss: -0.5dB
17. Spot Announcing Machine
The automatic spot announcing machine shall be designed to accept any normal
cassette tape, which allows any message to be recorded and played back and to be
located as shown in the drawings.
Unrecorded sound sections necessary for automatic playback shall be easily put
onto the tape. The machine shall have a built-in timer for distributing messages at
intervals of 2.5, 10, 15 or 20 minutes. The message tape shall be played at specific
time intervals by using an external timer. The machine shall include input lacks for a
low impedance microphone or optional remote microphone. the microphone shall be
usable for both recording and instant live announcements. The recording and
announcing sound level shall be kept constant with a built-in AGC circuits.
18. Installation
18.1 All equipment shall be housed in standard 19 inch rack; all interconnections
shall be by means of standard cables and connectors for ease of
serviceability.
18.2 The equipment rack shall be floored mounted type, 19” width and at least
800 mm depth type. The rack cabinet shall be of stamped stainless metal
plate or other approved material of thickness at least 3mm with epoxy
coating.
TS/E/S38/20
18.3 Forced ventilation using exhaust fan running on 230Vac shall be

incorporated. The Sub-contractor shall be responsible to calculate the
amount of heat generated by all equipments and sized the capacity of the
exhaust fan accordingly.
The perforated panels and blank panels of the equipments rack shall be
same colour as the equipments.
18.4 It shall be of adequate size to house all the necessary equipments. The rack
shall be so arranged that all equipment installed is withdraw able from the
front for servicing and maintenance of all installed equipment. The
arrangement of all the audio equipment in the rack shall be proposed by the
Sub-contractor. The Sub-contractor shall only install the equipments after
consultant approve the proposed equipments rack layout. Interior shall be
dust proof, insect proof and anti-vermin. The whole equipment rack shall be
provided with lockable glass door.
The design of the rack shall be submitted to the Employer’s Representative

for approval prior to fabrication. If the rack is standard prefabricated type,
catalogue shall be submitted together with the tender document.
The Sub-Contactor shall responsible to propose the support bracket (L-

Bracket) for those heavy equipments, such as Power Amplifier, Digital Matrix,
Pre-Amplifier and etc.
The power supply unit which feeds the entire system shall operate from 230V
AC 50 Hz single phase mains with regulation +/- 10V of nominal voltage.
All incoming and outgoing signal sources from equipment racks to Remote
Paging Microphone and Speakers shall be interconnected with approved
type of plugs and sockets.
18.5 All cabling shall be installer-friendly. Cabling between a call station and
central system shall merely comprise a two-core microphone screened cable,
while standard speaker cables shall be used between the power amplifiers
and the speakers.
18.6 Cabling within the central system shall be via termination boards located at
the back of each card cage; and shall be by means of neat ribbon cables and
connectors.
18.7 All cables shall be identified at both end by approved mean of identification.
The power and audio cabling/wiring between the various items of PA

equipments covered by this specification shall be supplied and installed. All
cables and fibre optic cables shall be of Fire Resistant type.
TS/E/S38/21
18.8 Each individual run of cable/wire shall be identified by tags securely fastened
at both ends. The identification number shall be similar to that shown in the
cable schedule which shall be provided by the Sub-contractor. The cable
schedule shall contain the following information concerning the cables: -
a) Function (whether AC power, DC control, line level, microphone or

100V speaker distribution).
b) Origin and destination
19. Power Supply
19.1 A 24 volt/DC power supply shall be included in the system. The unit shall
come with s toroidai transformer for isolation. The unit shall have a regulated
24 volt constant supply. It shall have standard 19 inch rack mount features.
19.1.1 Transformer Type Toroidai

19.1.2 Consumption 5 Amp
19.1.3 Output Voltage 24 Volt/DC
19.1.4 Power Requirement 230 V/AC
19.2 The standby battery supply shall provide sufficient power and enable the fully
loaded system, announcement at the maximum level, to continue operating
without interruption for a minimum duration of 4 hour should mains power fail.
19.3 All equipment shall be mounted into a 19” EIA Standard equipment rack
except microphone console, volume controls and speakers. All equipment,
switchers, etc. shall be clearly labeled for easy identification. All equipment
supplied shall be maintenance free, high quality, up-to-date and elegant in
design. The design concept and layout shall be such that the operation be
failsafe and easy to operate.
19.4 The batteries shall be mounted on a rubber floor mat and completely enclosed
in a metal cabinet. The charging equipment shall be mounted above the
standby batteries and readily accessible.
19.5 The Charger shall be able to provide booster and trickle charging. It shall be
complete with Voltmeter, Ammeter, DC fuse and relays. The Charger shall be
capable of charging the fully discharged batteries within 12 hours, by its
normal charging method to a fully charged condition.
TS/E/S38/22
Functional test on the entire EVC/PA system shall be performed following the
completion of the installation. The system functional tests shall include the BGM test,
Paging Test and Evacuation Test. The priority test shall also carry out by the Sub-
contractor and witness by the SO. The Sub-contractor shall provide all equalization
facilities/ test measurement equipments. Records, chart, table and graph of the T&C
shall properly kept and documented as part of the installation documentation.
The electrical Sub-contractor shall provide all the necessary tests equipments as
following:
a) Audio Generator
b) Impedance Meter
c) Multimeter
d) Sound Pressure Level (SPL) Meter
e) Phase Checker
The above mentioned equipments shall be professional equipments. Homebuilt and

DIY type are not acceptable.
The Sub-contractor shall conduct the following measurements and check and all the
tested result shall record in table form as attached sample:
(I) Impedance of each zone before connecting to the Audio Power Amplifier.
This shall equal or greater than the rated impedance. Following is the sample
for the impedance test result record table, and Sub-contractor shall submit
the table as following:
Theoretical T&C
Zone Total Impedance Cable Total Acceptable Measured Diff. Pass Remark
Power (Ohms) Impedance Impedance Tolerance Impedance (%) / Fail
(W) (Ohms) (Ohms) (%) (Ohms)
1 198 50.5 3 53.5 5 55.5 3.9 Pass ok
(II) Speaker cable continuity test. The Sub-contractor shall tests the continuity
from control room to riser, and then follows by tests from riser to first speaker
point. The Sub-contractor shall record all the results and submit the table as
following:
Circuit From To Cable Continuity, Reading Short to Remarks

Ref. Type Pass / Fail (Ohms) earth
Z1-1 P.Amp2 Riser Speaker PASS 3.2 No Ok
(Level Cable
B1)
Z1-2 Riser 1st Speaker PASS 4.0 No Ok
Speaker Cable
in Level
B1
TS/E/S38/23
(III) The Sub-contractor shall carry out the Sound Pressure Level (SPL) tests for
each speaker zone and it shall random pick 10 points for each zone. The
Sub-contractor shall propose the 10 points to SO for the approval. All the
SPL results shall record and submit in a table as similar following table:
Noise Cal SPL Test during T&C (dB) Pass

Zone Average
Level SPL P1 P2 P3 P4 P5 P6 P7 P8 P9 P10 / Faill
70
Z1 80dB 78 81 85 78 80 80 81 79 79 82 80.3 Pass
dB
(IV) The Sub-contractor shall carry out the phasing check on every individual
speaker for each speaker zone. The results shall record and submit as
similar to the following table:
Zone – Phase Check Pass / Fail Remark

Speaker
Z1 – Spkr 1 Ok Pass Ok
Z1 – Spkr 2 Fail Fail Need to Rectify
(V) Any other tests deemed necessary by the SO.
The T&C shall be conducted by the Sub-contractor in accordance with the

approved test procedures and witness by the SO. All results of the T&C shall
be properly recorded and submitted to the SO.
The Sub-contractor shall be responsible for incorporating and testing any

modification to the design found necessary as a result of tests. However,
after the start of T&C, no design changes or modification can be made
without the approval of SO. If any changes are found to be necessary, the
SO reserves the right to require any completed tests to be re-tested to verify
that no adverse or degraded performance/ effects results from the change.
All results of measurements and checks shall be complied accordingly and

submitted to the SO.
All emergency override relay system shall provided. The relay system shall
be placed after each amplifier. Relay contacts switches both sides of line.
Contact type cross-bar, gold, platinum or silver redundant contacts are only
acceptable. They are wired in parallel for increased reliability. Diodes are
installed across the relay, coil with revised polarity to prevent ant contact
bounce.
The Sub-Contractor shall submit four (04) sets of the floor plan indicating in
the drawings the measured values of the sound level in all areas and rooms
based on the testing of the EVC system. All the drawings and records of the
test results shall be bound together and endorsed by the system engineer
and the Sub-Contractor company management. Sub-contractor shall also
submit all the programming softcopy that being done for the system
TS/E/S38/24
21. Interface with SMATV System
Sub-Contractor shall liaise and coordinate with the SMATV system for the provision
of two video channels to the SMATV system. Sub-Contractor shall provide all wiring
from the music inputs up to and including the interfacing box to be located at sub-
central system location.
22. Future Provision
Sufficient spares in the hardware and software shall be provided for future
expansion. Both hardware and software shall therefore, be modular in design.
Expansion of the system shall be carried out by inserting of software cards,
additional wiring for speakers and re-zoning shall be easily done by re-programming
via the keyboard. The performance of the system shall not be degraded by such
expansion. This shall include but not limited to the speed of the central processor
and output sound pressure level.
23. NUS 2 Stage Alarm with Auto Trigger Function
Refer to Appendix A and Appendix B for the requirement and detail.
TS/E/S38/25
SECTION 41 - CLOSED CIRCUIT TELEVISION SYSTEM (CCTV)
1. GENERAL
1.1 The CCTV control equipment and devices per sub-system, which
are forming part of the entire integrated system, shall preferably be
produced by the same manufacturer and shall have web-based
capability to view and monitor on the internet through the web
browser.
1.2 The CCTV system proposed shall be an IP based system.
1.3 The PTZ and Fixed cameras shall be of IP type.
1.4 The CCTV control equipment and devices per sub-system, which
are forming part of the entire integrated system, shall preferably be
produced by the same manufacturer and shall have web-based
capability.
1.5 The sub-contractor shall include all the necessary programming to

the managed network switches, cameras and all other devices.
Programming shall be carried out by an authorised person that
being appointed by the system supplier.
1.6 All systems and components shall have been thoroughly tested
and proven in actual use. The systems and camera installed shall
have local support for the replacement or rectification of parts.
1.7 All systems and components shall be provided with the twelve
months warranty. Any faulty camera during the Defect Liabilities
period shall be replaced within three hours,
1.8 The sub-contractor shall state any additional requirements such as

software licenses, commissioning tools etc. required to hand over
the CCTV system.
1.9 The system shall have open hardware protocol.
1.10 The system shall have ability to plug and play both basic and
analytic software’s.
1.11 All the IP camera, Network Digital Video recorder and system shall
not have any security vulnerability that posed cyber security issue.
TS/E/S41/1
1.12 The system shall be protected against all electrical interference.
1.13 The system shall provide maximum operational simplicity to enable

quick and effective use in case of emergency.
1.14 The system shall be modular to facilitate any future expansion.
1.15 The system shall allow for a centralized viewing station to view,
playback and manage all the different NDVR/DVR should there be
more than one.
1.16 The system shall be capable for Integration with NUS Campus
Security Enterprise Command Center System at Prince George
Park HQ.
1.17 The system shall be integrated with the intrusion detection and
door locking system as indicated in the drawings. The cameras
covering the door with magnetic contacts shall enable the guard on
receiving an intrusion alarm to make an immediate verification and
assessment on the intrusion from the video monitor.
1.18 The entire CCTV management system shall be interfaced to the

security management system in which from the security system the
following status/alarm shall be displayed for the CCTV system:
a) Status of any alarm inputs or combination of inputs

b) Status of any control outputs or combination of outputs
c) Video inputs or outputs currently selected
d) Camera failed or loss of video signal
1.19 Codes and standards :
a) The proposed equipment shall be designed in accordance

with all applicable standards and specifications, including at
least one of the following :
1. UL Underwriters Laboratories
2. DIN Deutsche Industrie Norm
3. B.S. British Standard
4. C.S.A. Canadian Standard Association
5. ULC Underwriter Laboratories Canada
TS/E/S41/2
b) The video signal produced for the cameras shall be

accordance with EIA standard.
1.20 The power source provided for the entire System is 230 V + 5%, 50
Hz.
1.21 The system designed shall be such that all the camera shall be
externally synchronous.
1.22 The system shall be integrated with the intrusion detection and
door locking system as indicated in the drawings. The cameras
covering the door with magnetic contacts shall enable the guard on
receiving an intrusion alarm to make an immediate verification and
assessment on the intrusion from the video monitor. These
cameras, if they are not switched on shall be activated by the
breaking of the door contacts.
1.23 The camera shall also be able to be triggered by a card activated

signal, such as an invalid access card being used for more than a
certain number of times shall be programmable.
1.24 Equipment associated with the Surveillance Closed Circuit

Television shall be sufficient to meet the requirements as specified
herein.
1.25 The proposed CCTV shall be designed from the latest state-of-the-
art equipment. The control system for the CCTV equipment shall
have flexibility for future expansion.
1.26 All Outdoor IP camera shall be IP66 rated.
1.27 The Sub-Contractor shall repair or replace without charge,

manufactured products proven defective in material or
workmanship for the stated warranty period from the date of
handover.
TS/E/S41/3
2. SYSTEM OVERVIEW
2.1 The system is a digital video surveillance system which provides

video recording, remote viewing, video playback, high availability
and redundant video storage, and virtual network video switching
functions.
2.2 The system shall be based on a uniquely developed platform that

provides IP based digital surveillance system with hybrid
configuration of analog and IP cameras, distributed architecture
and centralized video management system.
2.3 The system shall be highly scalable to handle up to hundreds of

video recorders or thousands of cameras.
2.4 The system shall be highly flexible to simultaneously integrate both

analog and IP cameras in one system simultaneously.
2.5 The network video management system shall be adaptive to use

dual streaming H.264 camera. JPEG, MJPEG, MPEG4, M-JPEG,
Wavelet and other compression codec technology that used high
bandwidth will not be acceptable.
2.6 The system shall provide a user friendly GUI (graphical user
interface) and be simple to operate.
2.7 The system shall maintain all video recordings for a minimum of 30
days storage with RAID 5. All video recordings shall be stored on
hard drives to allow immediate access to playback.
2.8 The system shall record for a minimum of 12.5 fps at 1920x1080
resolutions for 30 days of 24 hours period with RAID 5.
2.9 The system shall allow operators to view live and recorded video
from any camera over the network.
2.10 The system shall be block based designed and provide intelligent
and quick search for both live and recorded video to facilitate
investigation and speed up search time.
2.11 The system shall consist of separate components to comprise a

distributed system which are as follows:
a) Network Video Management System (NVMS)/ Network

Video Recorder (NVR)
The unit to record video images from IP cameras over the
network, and distribute them on demand over LAN/WAN.
TS/E/S41/4
b) Command Centre
The security operation station with the capability to output up
to three monitors to provide flexible layout to watch, manage
and control analog and IP cameras through NDVR.
c) Master Core Server /Authentication server

The master core server shall allow user to dynamically
create connections between Encoders and Decoders and
view live or recorded video on the digital monitors (audio,
Video, serial ports and digital I/Os).
d) Review Station /Remote Viewing Station

The review station shall allow the user view live display of
cameras, cameras sequence, control, instant replay,
playback, saving and export of the image, etc. It shall
provide an easy-to-use tool to manage event cases, video
bookmarks and image snapshots. This shall provide
investigators to easily set bookmarks on video time-stamps
and archive video clips in a batch to facilitate case files.
2.12 Security System
The Security System for the surveillance closed circuit television

shall be integrated with the security card access system's security
center.
2.13 System Documentation (in addition to Section 1)
a) Tender stage
1) The tenderer shall adequately and accurately

describe the proposed system(s) and concept(s) at
the time of tendering.
2) The tenderer shall supply a full set of drawings,

specifications and catalogue sheets describing the
various components belonging to the offered system
TS/E/S41/5
b) Contract stage
1) The Sub-Contractor shall provide a full set of

documents related to concept, design, installation,
commissioning and maintenance of the entire system
and its components.
2) The following sets of documents are required as a

minimum:
(i) System description and operating principle

(ii) Installation instructions
(iii) Connection diagrams
(iv) Commissioning instruction
(v) Operating instruction
(vi) Maintenance instructions, maintenance schedule
and trouble shooting guide
(vii) Plans showing locations
3) The following drawings are required as a minimum:
(i) System block diagrams

(ii) Cabling and wiring diagrams
(iii) Connection diagrams schedules
(iv) General arrangement plans, layout and outline
drawings of system components.
(v) Position plans and sectional installation details
4) The Sub-Contractor shall submit four (4) copies of his

standardized and comprehensive system operating
and service manuals.
5) The revised and final version of the system

documentation "as built" shall be submitted by the
Sub-Contractor within 2 months after completion,
erection and system trial operation.
TS/E/S41/6
3. NETWORK DIGTAL VIDEO RECORDER
3.1. The system described in this section consist of the Network Video
Management System network (IP) based Digital Video Recorder
(NDVR) System.
3.2. The proposed solution shall not require proprietary computer,

server, networks or storage hardware. The system shall house in
the security office at local building Fire Command centre to
monitors all the indoor and external surveillance cameras. All the
new cameras shall be also able interface to existing Network Video
Management software, NUS campus wide graphic user interface
system and remote control from NUS Main Security Command
Centre at S16 Building, COM2 Building, E3A Building, E5 Building
and Office of Campus security at Prince George Park house 17&18
via fiber optic communication.
3.3. The NDVR shall be based on high quality Dual stream H.264 IP
cameras.
3.4. The proposed system shall be of a manufacturer with as minimum

of five (5) years of experience and offerings in the IP network video
software market, the Sub Contractor shall submit the manufacturer
job experience for SO approval.
3.5. The Software shall provide free upgrade and no yearly

maintenance fee is needed to keep software up to date. Software
update shall be zero charge to owner.
3.6. The NVMS database and video storage shall be based on MySQL
or better
a) The Failover directory should be a basic feature of the
NDVR all the related licenses should be included in offer.
b) Redundant recording shall be a basic feature of the NDVR
and should be provided if required.
c) Fail over recording capabilities shall be a basic feature of the
NDVR and should be provided if required.
3.7. The NDVR system shall be based on the latest in software

programming technology Microsoft NET framework.
TS/E/S41/7
3.8. The NDVR shall conform, as a minimum, to the following

requirements:
System Features :Network Video Recording (Microsoft

Server)
Image Compression :H.264 compression (wavelet is not

Type acceptable)
Record Resolution :1280x720

:1920x1080
Image Record Rate :Individual camera input shall have minimum

recording frame rate of 12.5 fps
Recording Modes : Continuous, alarm initiated. Time

scheduled, per operator command, post
alarm recording, video motion recording
IP Video Inputs :16 or 32 (Maximum)
Network Interface :Ethernet via TCP/IP
Serial Comms In/Out : 1 (minimum)
Picture Quality :Individual selectable for each camera (any

picture quality at any frame rate)
Video Image export :AVI
Schedulable Events :Start/stop recording, set up parameters

(quality, frame, motion)
Play Back Functions :Play forward/reverse, frame

forward/reverse, jump forward/back
Dimension (w d x h) :19”rack mountable
3.9. The NDVR shall be able to support all cameras at the up to 25

frames per second from CIF up to 2 Mega Pixel resolutions.
TS/E/S41/8
3.10. The NDVR should support below video analytics feature.
a) The NDVR shall provide the ability for real time video Color
identification, type of objects identification in with vector
solving kept in metadata in the recording servers for easy
retrieval of data.
b) The NDVR shall provide the ability for Face Recognition

system. The Metadata shall have the ability to classify the
three differences of VIP, wanted and Staff. The Alarm shall
be report via the Client software and not required a
standalone solution
c) The NDVR shall provide the ability for LPR (License Plate
Recognition) integration. The LPR Reader system shall be a
hardware based in a small form capable of installing at the
camera end or at the backup. The LPR Reader shall be in
one or dual channel. The Metadata shall be processed at the
backend and able to classify difference category of wanted,
VIP and Staff.
3.11. Each Camera shall provide dual video streaming technology

providing Independent settings per stream.
a) A viewing stream of up to 25 fps and 1080P25 video

resolution using multicast streaming to send video to multiple
NDVR for recording
b) The NDVR shall allow the user to view live video at High-
resolution 1080P25 on unlimited number of viewing station
using multicast streaming.
c) The NDVR shall have the intelligent to select 2nd stream D1
video when display in multi-screen mode to reduce load of
workstation.
d) The system shall be flexible and allow bandwidth selection
between 64kb to 5Mb per steam.
e) Total bandwidth for dual stream H.264 based Encoders and
cameras both stream shall not exceed 10MBps.
3.12. NDVR shall have a capacity to switch and control all the current
cameras. It should be expandable to unlimited cameras in future.
3.13. The system shall allow the recording, live monitoring, playback of
archived video audio, and data simultaneously.
TS/E/S41/9
3.14. The NDVR shall provide file export tool for export the native video
format with all video protections. (e.g. watermark, encryption) and
the ability to play this video on a standard computer with .avi files.
3.15. The native file format video player shall show the status of the
video authentication as available with the original file format.
3.16. The IP Based NDVR shall provide file export tool for export of
single frames of video in J-PEG and PNG file formats and for
export of motion video files in AVI file format for transport and
playback on computers utilizing a Windows environment.
3.17. The Sub-contractor shall provide the required computers for the
NVMS client and servers, these computers shall be of the most
current state of the art technology available at the time of
installation and as minimum shall be better than the minimum
requirements specified by NVMS system manufacturer as well as
tender specifications. Server and PC decoder shall be locally
available. Long lead time imported server and PC decoder will not
be accepted. All the equipments and technical support shall be
locally available without the need of oversea support.
3.18. REMOTE MONITORING
a) The NDVR shall provide at least 96 video streams for

remote monitoring via TCP/IP network with multiple clients.
Licence free Network Viewing Software for Windows shall
be included.
b) The above video streams include both live video streams
and video playback streams.
c) The above benchmark is calculated by video streams in
1280x720 @30fps (NTSC) or 1280x720@25fps (PAL) with
2Mbit/s bit-rate. It’s not limited to 1280x720 resolutions, but
the benchmark will be different when the video stream
comes from Megapixel IP cameras.
d) The network viewer page shall be fully re-sizeable, including
full screen viewing. The digital multiplex recorder shall have
an option to set a password to prevent unauthorised users
viewing live, recorded images, moving telemetry cameras
and viewing hidden cameras over the network.
TS/E/S41/10
3.19. ALARM AND SEARCH
a) The system shall be capable of generating an alarm and

alarm recording on the following conditions.
1) Motion detection
2) Video loss
3) Digital input
4) SDK API alarm
c) On alarm activation, NDVR can be configured to notify the

user via email.
d) The NDVR shall also store a complete alarm history for up to
365 days.
e) The NDVR shall provide simple alarm searching by alarm,
camera name, date and time information from any connected
Command Center.
3.20. Fail-Over module
a) The NVR shall provide Fail-Over capability to increase the

redundancy and reliability of the whole system and to sustain
the system with minimum downtime.
b) The fail-over server is also a NVR which will monitor the

status of the other NDVR and backup the lates configurations
of the NVR.
c) The fail-over server shall take over for the failed NVR by
resuming the capability to provide live viewing, video
recording and video playback from the IP cameras which are
configured on the failed NVR. The video streams of IP
cameras shall be redirected automatically from the failed NVR
to the fail-over Server.
d) The fail-over server shall support N+N server-take over

configuration.
TS/E/S41/11
3.21. Maintenance and recovery
a) The NVR shall provide export and import functions to backup

and restore configuration data.
b) In case of NVR hardware failure, users can quickly restore the
entire configuration into the spare or replaced unit.
c) The NVR shall provide the following system maintenance
tasks:
1) Report NVR software running status
2) Start/Stop/Restart NVR Software
3) Start/Stop NVR hardware watchdog
4) Upgrade, migrate and restore NVR
5) Backup an restore system configuration data
6) Automatically and periodically create system restore
point for recovery
7) Add and remove references to time synchronization
servers (NTP)
8) Start/Stop/Restart NTP Client and NTP Server
9) Report system statistics and health status, including
from storage, database and hardware video
compression cards
10) Set up system configuration, including network
settings, file sharing settings, date/time and time zone
settings.
3.22. INTEGRATION WITH OTHER SYSTEMS
a) The NVR shall provide the open platform (TCP/IP) application

interface API and Windows SDK to facilitate the integration
with the following systems (but not limited to):
1) Access Control System (ACS)
2) Building Automation System
3) Burglar Alarm System
4) Fire Alarm System
5) Point of Sales System
6) Asset Tracking System
7) Lighting Management System
TS/E/S41/12
b) The Windows SDK shall be the ActiveX control with the

following methods:
1) User account authentication and authorization.

2) Get and display live video streams and video
playback streams from any NDVR as source. And
supports video playback control such as seek from
time, pause, stop, fast forward, fast backward, slow
forward, slow backward, step … etc.
3) Control PTZ cameras such as pan/tilte/zoom
operations, focus/iris adjustment, AUX control, dome
menu control … etc.
4) Download video streams and store in video clip files.
3.23. PHYSICAL
a) The NVR shall be capable of being rack mounted in an EIA-

standard 19-inch rack.
b) The NVR shall be equipped with at least Intel P4, 2.8 GHz
processor and RAM of 2GB.
c) The NVR shall keep operating in temperatures between 32°F
to 104°F (0° to 40°C) and humidity up to 80%.
d) The NVR shall provide 12 easy-to-access hard disk drive
cartridges in the front panel, and support 2TB HDD giving the
total storage up to 24TB. The hard disk shall be high duty
cycle for CCTV.
e) The NVR shall support durable system-on-chip technology.
f) The NVR MUST support internal RAID-5 compliant storages.
g) The hard disks shall be hot-swappable, i.e: they can be
replaced whilst the system is running.
h) The NVR shall support dual-power supply.
3.24. Motion detection
a) All camera shall have the motion detector.

b) The detection zone shall be indicated on the display.
c) The system shall have a minimum of one reference zone for
environmental compensation.
TS/E/S41/13
d) The system shall constantly compare detection and

reference zones and only if the detection zone varies
compared to the reference zone, an alarm shall be
generated.
e) It shall be possible to adjust the sensitivity for both the
detection and reference zones simultaneously and/or
individually.
f) It shall be possible to define a minimum of 6 alarm zones per
channel.
g) The time, date and camera reference number shall be
indicated simultaneously with every alarm display.
h) Each motion detection point shall have at least two
programmable detection levels.
i) The motion detector shall equip with state-of-the-art
processing to simultaneously analyze all channels, providing
real-time motion analysis and immediate alarm response
4. MASTER CORE SERVER
4.1. The Master Core Server software shall consist of the My-SQL
based Main and Cluster Directory Database Server, Recording
Server for video, Digital Virtual Matrix, Incident Reports, Alarm
Management, and Watchdog modules. All the related software
licenses should be the part of the installed system.
4.2. The proposed Master Core Server shall allow the interfacing to
existing Campus Wide IP CCTV System included any high level
interface and license
4.3. The Master Core Server shall maintain a catalog of settings for all
the client, servers, encoders, decoders and IP cameras in the
system.
a) It shall enable the client to dynamically create connections

between Encoders and Decoders and view live or recorded
video on the digital monitors (audio, Video, serial ports and
digital Inputs/Outputs)
b) The Master Core Server shall provide the client seamless
operation of all Encoders and Decoders available in the
system regardless of the actual connection to different
recording servers.
c) The NVMS Recording Server shall offer the capability to
alert the systems administrator.
TS/E/S41/14
4.4. Master server shall support Cluster technologies such that up to 32

master servers can be connected in the network to support multiple
servers fail over redundancy. Using virtual server, mirror, 3 rd party
failover software is not allow as this compromise the scalability and
support.
4.5. The NVMS Recording Server shall offer the capability to be

installed multiple servers software on multiple Computer Servers to
enable distributed recording architecture on the LAN or WAN
4.6. The NVMS Recording Server shall support ZERO frame lost
failover and no time lost due to recorder switch over is allowed. No
gaps in the recording file are permitted. Shortlisted companies must
demo this features to be accepted by owner in first interview.
4.7. The NVMS Recording Server shall support SD card recording at

the edge with auto-recovery back to recording server upon network
recovery. The SD card recorder in the Edge device shall be fully
managed by the NVMS with time synchronize, network fail
recording or continuous recording. The SD card recording shall be
100% the same files format as the NVMS and no conversion from
one format to another is accepted. The format shall only be H.264
and must be same file naming as the NVMS recorder Server video
files.
4.8. The NVMS Recording Server shall support 128 camera

connections, through video Encoders or IP cameras on each
Recording server in 4CIF, and 32 Full HD IP cameras in 1080P25
4.9. The NVMS Recording Server, for video and audio, shall support
and manage (32) camera connections from IP cameras and video
Encoders each at 25FPS at 1080P resolution (1920x1080) and
(64) cameras at 25FPS at 720P resolution (1280x720), (128)
cameras at 4CIF resolution (704x576 PAL)
4.10. The Master Core Server shall allow user to manage the camera
recording to which NVMS recorder down to the channel level.
4.11. The Master Core Server shall be able to set each camera frame
rate, bit rate and resolution independently from other cameras in
the system, and altering these settings shall not affect the
recording and display settings of other cameras. The NVMS shall
utilize multicast network communication for video monitoring.
Unicast based equipment will not be accepted.
TS/E/S41/15
4.12. The Master Core Server shall be a software-based solution. The

NVMS shall require no proprietary hardware for video and audio
recording servers. Hardware shall come from locally available from
supported computer companies
.
4.13. The Master Core Server shall have a built-in-Digital virtual Video
Matrix Switcher functionality without the need of any additional
software license.
a) The Virtual Matrix Switch shall provide a full matrix operation

of IP Video to digital (computer) screens or HDMI supported
CCTV monitors using hardware Decoders.
b) The Virtual Matrix Switch shall have the capability of creating
camera sequences with the following functionalities.
c) The Virtual Matrix Switch shall have the capacity to interface
with legacy video walls via a CCTV keyboard connected to
Encoder, Decoder or the client PC
4.14. The Master Core Server shall support application clients

connecting to the NVMS system via the Internet. The NVMS shall
support a built-in Watchdog module.
a) The Watchdog shall monitor operation of all services and

automatically restart them if they are malfunctioning.
b) The Watchdog shall be responsible for restarting the
application or in a last resort restart the server in case of
malfunction of software components.
4.15. The Master Core Server shall be based on a true open architecture
that allow for use of non-proprietary PC and storage hardware that
shall not limit the storage capacity and shall allow for gradual
upgrades of recording capacity. The NVMS Server shall be of the
most recent computer technology and shall cover the NVMS
requirements.
4.16. Sub-contractor shall provide an advanced and reliable system, the

operating system shall be latest Windows Server level and other
Window Embedded operating system will not be acceptable.
4.17. The Master Core Server shall support management and control
over unlimited satellite sites.
4.18. The system master core server shall provide alarm management
module without the need of any additional license.
TS/E/S41/16
a) The alarm management shall be able to set any monitor or

groups of monitors to automatically display cameras in
response to alarm inputs.
b) The alarm management shall be able to reset automatically

or manually alarmed video.
c) The alarm management shall allow for multiple modes of

alarm handling capability, these modes to be programmed
within the same system.
5. REVIEW CLIENT SYSTEM
5.1. The review client shall consist of Control Centre application, a

Review application, a CMS player application.
5.2. The review client shall perform the following applications

simultaneously without interfering with any of the Recording Server
operations (Recording, Alarms, etc.):
a) Live display of cameras

b) Live display of camera sequences
c) Live display of analytics cameras
d) Control of PTZ cameras
e) Playback of Recorded video and audio
f) Playback of analytics video
g) Export of recorded video and audio
h) Instant Replay of live video and support preset timing
i) Use of graphical controls (maps shall show live video over
the camera ICON)
j) Configuration of system settings
k) Execution of system macros
l) Automap function from the camera
5.3. The review client applications shall support any form of IP network
connectivity, including :LAN, WAN,VPN, Internet, and Wireless
5.4. The review client applications shall support IP Multicast (UDP) and
Unicast (UDP) video and audio streaming.
5.5. The review client application shall automatically adapt to the

network topology and use the best available method to receive
streaming video.
TS/E/S41/17
5.6. Client Review Application.
a) The Client Review application shall allow for live monitoring

of video and audio.
1) The Review shall enable view of 1 to 36 video tiles

simultaneously on a single Full HD (1920x1080)
monitor at 25fps per camera in 4 CIF.
2) The Review shall support touch screen and user can
perform PTZ control over the touch screen.
3) The IP Based NVMS shall provide as minimum on
each of the Full HD monitors independently the
following tile views.
Full screen, quad, 3x3, 4x4, 5x5, 6x6, 1+9 (one large and 9
small view), 1+11 (one large and 11 small view), 1+12 (one
large center tile and 12 small view), 1+15 (one large and 15
small view), and any possible combination.
b) The client GUI table display shall be fully programmable so

that users can freely decide or choice on site the camera
tree, monitor tree and function. Users can also change the
color template locally to allow the GUI to go along with the
sites.
c) The NVMS Review application shall allow operators to view

an instant replay of any camera.
1) The operator shall be able to define the amount of

time he wishes to go back from a predefine list or
through a custom set up period.
2) The operator shall be able to control the playback

with play, pause, forward, and speed buttons.
d) The Review Client application shall allow operators to add

bookmarks to recorded clips of video.
TS/E/S41/18
e) The operator shall be able to choose and trigger an action

from a list of available actions included but are not limited to:
1) View camera in a video tile

2) View camera on a Decoder (HDMI or/and analog
monitor)
3) View Map or procedure in a video tile
4) Starting /Stopping PTZ pattern
5) Go to PTZ Preset
f) The Review Client application shall display all cameras

attached to the system regardless of their physical location
on the network.
g) The Review Client shall support Automap function, which the

camera will process and stitch a series of pictures to make
one overall Scenery map. Using Scenery map, you can
quickly switch one place to another. By drawing a bow on
the map, PTZ will move to the center of the box as well as
adjust zoom ratio to match the box.
h) The Review Client application shall display all camera

sequences created in the system.
i) The Review Client application shall allow for unlimited

cameras sequences, which can be run independently of
each other on either digital monitor tiles or CCTV monitors.
j) The Review Client application shall allow operators to

control (Pause/Play, skip forwards, skip backwards) Camera
Sequences, without affecting other operators’ ability to view
and control the same sequence
.
k) The Review Client application shall display all cameras,
sequences and CCTV monitors in a logical tree.
l) The Review Client application operators shall be able to

drag and drop a camera from a tree of available cameras
into any video tile or a CCTV monitor icon for live viewing
m) The Review Client application operator shall be able to drag

and drop a camera sequence from a tree of cameras into
any video tile or a CCTV monitor icon for live viewing.
TS/E/S41/19
n) The Review Client application shall support Graphical Site

Representation (Maps) functionality, where digital maps are
used to represent the physical location of cameras and other
devices throughout facility.
1) The Review Client Maps shall have the ability to
contain hyperlinks to create a hierarchy of interlinked
maps and goggle map
2) The NVMS Maps shall be able to import maps from
any graphical software supporting BMP, JPEG and /or
GIF image formats or goggle map
o) The Review Client application operator shall be able to drag

and drop a camera from a map into a video tile for live
viewing.
p) The application shall support the procedure functionality,

where procedures can be triggered to appear during a
certain event and can be used to provide detail written or
verbal instructions to the operator as to the actions to be
taken.
q) The Review Client application shall support digital zoom on

a fixed camera’s live and recorded video streams.
r) The Review Client application shall support digital zoom on

a PTZ camera’s live and recorded video streams.
5.7. The Review client shall provide the following video analytics alarm
options:
a) Trigger alarms or events to draw the user attention

b) Provide a meaningful text description of the event.
c) Provide OSD graphics to depict the analytics event,
including the participating objects, event location, motion
directions and more
d) Provide the above OSD graphics on live video, archived
video and JPEG images
e) Support automatic tagging/book-marking of analytics events.
f) Support search of analytics events history.
5.8. System shall allow the security in charge to monitor and record the
actual activities (Replica of operator screens) happening on the
operator monitors through his workstation and monitor.
TS/E/S41/20
5.9. The Review Client application shall provide management and

control over the system using a standard PC mouse, keyboard and
IP CCTV keyboard. Standard scroll should be able to move the
camera by merely clicking on the extremes of the picture in all
directions and zoom function by scroll button to avoid the use of
joystick keyboard but maintain the easiness of the control provision
of the PTZ menu on GUI will not be considered as equivalent or
substitute. The Sub-contractor should also provide IP dual joystick
keyboard as an integrated part of the client workstation if they do
not support this feature.
a) The Review client shall be able to use multiple CCTV

keyboards to operate the entire set of cameras throughout
the system, including cameras of various manufacturers’
brands, including their PTZ functionalities (i.e. one keyboard
manufacturer controls other manufacturer’s dome or vice-
versa.)
b) The Review Client shall allow for a CCTV keyboard to be
attachable directly to the network this allow control of the
decoder CCTV monitor, and PC decoder.
c) The CCTV keyboard interface shall provide full PTZ control,
and video playback function.
1) The operator shall be able to control pan-tilt-zoom,

iris, focus, dome relays and dome patterns.
2) The operator will be able to enter the desire time/date,
monitor and camera for video playback from the
NVMS recorder.
3) This shall prioritize which operator has control over a
camera vs. another operator trying to control the
same camera at the same time.
d) The CCTV keyboard interface shall provide full video matrix

operations, it shall have the following features:
1) Keyboard shall have full matrix LCD display

2) Keyboard shall have bright 8 segment LED display for
operation in the all day and night
3) Keyboard shall have IP interface to the system
4) Keyboard shall have dual joystick and joystick is
interchangeable to support left and right hander
5) Keyboard shall be metal chassis and available in
desktop or 19” rack mount
TS/E/S41/21
5.10. IP Keyboard Controller
a) The IP keyboard shall come with 6 layer of security protection

with Smartcard login Control.
b) Independent Self Definition Programming
c) Control PTZ camera, NVR & alarm with a single device
d) Control up to 10000 PTZ cameras、100 (NVR) & decoder
e) Durable joystick with 4 axis control and the left and right
joystick control can be interchangeable via programming
f) Dual screen display LCD showing control command,
messages. Main display shows up to 4 lines of 120
characters. Auxiliary display shows up to 8 characters
g) On-line display of Front end equipment
h) On-line display of System function
i) On-Line display of Preset position
j) On-line display of Alarms
k) All aluminium chassis ensure durable usage Back Lit LCD
display ensure clear display of commands
5.11. ALARM MANAGEMENT
a) The IP based NVMS shall provide alarm management and

reporting module
b) The IP based NVMS shall notify a user on any alarm set in the
system.
c) The IP based NVMS shall monitor all the devices and send
alarm to user instantly.
d) The IP based NVMS shall maintain a list of alarm on the list till
the user acknowledge the alarms. The alarms list shall display
the time, device and time of recovery clearly
e) The NVMS user shall be able to support multiple alarms.
f) The NVMS system administrator shall be able to set for each
user the maximum alarms to be viewed at one time.
g) The NVMS alarm management shall keep audit trail of all
alarm and operators related operations in a separated
database.
TS/E/S41/22
h) The NVMS alarm database shall provide multi time schedule

support and shall be able to save the alarm database for
different period of time as the recorded video schedule.
6. NOT IN USED
7. COMMAND CENTRE
7.1. GENERAL
a) The contractor shall supply metal console. The CCTV control

center console shall be custom made galvanized metal
epoxy power coated of 2 tiers by 7 cubical for a total of
12 CPU and LCD monitors with 2 spare to suit the
Client's operations. The cubical size shall be 1500mm(L)
x 1000mm (W) x 2000mm (H). It shall be located at FCC
room. The contractor shall submit the design for SO
approval
b) The Command Centre shall be a PC-based system with (42”
LCD screen) multiple monitors to perform multiple tasks on
each monitor.
c) The Command Center shall use latest Windows as the
operating system.
d) The Command Center shall have the capability to operate
with multiple monitors for the following operations.
1) Monitor shall provide system navigation via camera

tree, site map, alarm list and other management
functions.
2) Monitor shall enable live display and playback of
video recordings.
3) Monitor shall enable live display on multiple display
layout windows (1x1, 2x2, 3x3, and 4x4).
e) All monitors of the Command Center shall be controlled by a

single mouse and keyboard.
f) The Command Center shall provide user authentication and
security protection with multilevel access for operating
functions. Each user account can specify the access rights
for individual operations such as live viewing, video
playback, archive video, PTZ control, D/O control … etc.
TS/E/S41/23
g) The Command Center shall provide a camera tree for easy

camera selection. Users can optionally customize the
grouping of camera nodes in the tree.
h) The Command Center shall provide graphical maps which
contain a floor or site map with camera icons on it. Users
can select to view the live video from the camera icons
easily.
i) The CPU shall be backed by the emergency power supply
and UPS. Upon power failure, the data stored in the central
processor unit shall be protected for at least 2 hours with an
internal battery.
j) The UPS shall utilize software to auto shutdown the
workstations and storage devices when there is a main
power outage.
7.2. LIVE VIDEO/RECORDED VIDEO DISPLAY
a) The Command Center shall support up to 20 video display

windows with a combination of live and recorded video
display simultaneously.
b) The Command Center shall be capable of viewing any video
at full screen resolution (1280 x 1024).
c) Upon alarm activation, the related video shall be
automatically displayed in full screen.
d) The Command Center shall support frame-by-frame
playback of video recordings in both forward and backward
directions.
e) The Command Center shall support the playback of video
recordings up to 8 times faster than normal viewing speed in
both forward and backward directions.
f) The Command Center shall instantly playback the video
recordings in the live video display window and allow
switching back to the live video display instantly.
g) The Command Center shall display the following information
of recorded video within a search time range in a graphical
form.
1) Display of total video recordings

2) Display of alarm triggered video recordings
3) Display of manual triggered video recordings
TS/E/S41/24
h) The operator shall be able to select a section from the

graphical display and:
1) Expand the time range for greater granularity

2) Playback the video recordings of the selected time
range
3) Zoom out the video search time period
i) Live video display shall indicate video loss from any specific
camera.
j) The Command Center shall display video snapshots evenly
distributed among a user specified time range for user to
quickly browse the video activities during the time range. It
can speed-up the video investigation process.
7.3. ALARM OPERATIONS
a) Upon alarm activation, the alarm list shall automatically

display a new entry of alarm instance.
b) An alarm instance will go through 3 states before it is
archived in alarm history.
1) New (when an alarm is activated)

2) In Process (when an authorized operator selects the
alarm instance to view the alarm detail)
3) Acknowledged (when an authorized operator
acknowledge the alarm and send it to alarm history)
c) An operator shall be able to select and view the alarm

recording from alarm detail window.
d) Upon the alarm activation, users have options to configure
whether for auto alarm video pop-up, and auto camera map
pop. Inside the camera map, the camera icon shall indicate
the alarm status with different icon image other than the
normal status.
TS/E/S41/25
7.4. OTHER OPERATIONS
a) The Command Center shall provide intuitive GUI (Graphic

User Interface) for easy control and management.
b) The Command Center shall support search for the specific
video by alarm, camera, date and time.
c) The Command Center shall support remote adjustments to
control the brightness, contrast, and color for all cameras
connected to the NDVR.
d) The Command Center shall be capable of exporting
snapshots of video in JPEG format.
e) The Command Center shall provide functions to archive and
export video recordings from any NDVR connected to the
system.
f) The Command Center shall be capable to control digital
Input/output devices connected to NDVR.
g) The Command Center shall provide on-screen overlay icons
and pop-up menu for all the frequently used commands such
as video playback buttons, PTZ OSD control, advanced PTZ
commands menu, archive video menu … etc.
7.5. USER-DEFINED FUNCTIONS
a) The Command Center shall allow users to customize the

camera tree. Each camera node in the tree shall change the
node icon display based on the following camera status:
1) Active or none-active
2) In recording
3) In alarm
4) In video Loss
b) The defined camera tree will help users to drag and drop
cameras to display screen for instant viewing.
c) The Command Center shall allow users to build camera
patterns and camera tours for live viewing.
d) The Command Center shall provide a map module for users
to create maps with camera icons.
e) The user can view live video of a specific camera by drag
and drop the camera icon from the map to the display
TS/E/S41/26
window.
7.6. PHYSICAL
a) The Command Center shall be equipped with at least Intel

Quad-core 3.2 GHz processors, VGA card 1GB ram and
dual channel DDR3 RAM of 1GBx4.
b) The Command Center shall keep operating in temperatures
between 32°F to 104°F (0° to 40°C) and humidity up to 80%.
8. NOT IN USED
9. Cameras
9.1. Indoor/outdoor cameras shall be of IP based and Power Over

Ethernet.
9.2. The cameras shall be Internet Protocol (IP) type. Performance

must be guaranteed.
9.3. Unless otherwise stated, all cameras shall be installed with pan/tilt
and zoom capability.
9.4. The wall mounted camera bracket shall be made of non-corrosive

material.
9.5. All indoor pan & tilt camera shall be housed in a 130mm
diameter dome whereas all indoor fixed camera shall be housed in
a dome of less than 100mm diameter.
9.6. Outdoor camera shall be housed in an environment housing and

be mounted on mounted on a 3m hot-dip galvanized tall pole with
pole to be lightning earth bonded to be provided. In the case of
camera mounted on the lamp post, lightning earth bonding need
to be installed. Copper tape shall be of 2 x 25mm with its earth
pit.
9.7. Video transmission shall be by means of data cables to fibre optic

cable.
9.8. Suitable type of cable shall be use for clear video transmission. For
long distance transmission, single mode fibre optic is to be used.
9.9. Control signal transmission from the control centre to the cameras
TS/E/S41/27
shall be by means of fibre optic cable, not combined with video.
9.10. Power to the camera shall be supplied from the central control
system.
9.11. The cameras shall be supplied at 230 VAC + 20%, 50 Hz.
10. OUTDOOR/INDOOR NETWORK FIXED WDR DOME DAY/NIGHT

CAMERA
10.1. The cameras shall be Internet Protocol (IP) type. Performance

must be guaranteed.
10.2. The IP Fixed Dome camera shall use the state of art video
compression engine, real time Full HD video streams of 1080p with
auto focus lens
10.3. The camera shall use triple H/W codec which enables to transmit
max 3 independent steams with different setting for different
requirements. The camera shall combine seamless remote video
monitoring using H.264 with simultaneous transmission of high
quality H.264 to Network video recorder.
10.4. The camera shall support local SD Card backup. Some important
sequence of still images can be stored in SDHC memory card.
This action shall be able to configure to work with pre-post-alarm
event.
10.5. The camera mechanical actuator shall be able to shift infrared (IR)
cut filter to disengage from image path automatically in the low light
environment.
10.6. The camera shall build-in Power over Ethernet (IEEE 802.3af)
compliant or 24VAC or 12VDC.
10.7. The camera shall provide two-way audio support.
10.8. The camera shall support 3 axis mechanism and provide

sophisticated bubble dome design which support wider tilting angle
up to 90 degree.
10.9. All housing shall be withstand rugged environments. The

aluminum die-casting enclosure and Poly Carbonate clear dome
shall enable stable 24 hours security tasks.
10.10. The camera shall support build-in auto-focus features.
TS/E/S41/28
10.11. The shall image device shall be 1/2.8“ 2.0M CMOS sensor with
total pixels of 2000(H)X1241(V)
10.12. The aspect ratio shall be HD: 16:9 and SD: 4:3
10.13. The focal length shall be Auto Focus 2.8 -12mm, (103 degree ~ 82
degree)
10.14. Minimum Illuminance Color: 0.01 Lux @ F1.2, 30IRE B/W: 0.001
Lux @ F1.2, 30IRE and 0.0 Lux (IR LED ON) 4pcs IR LED
(Distance : 20m).
10.15. Shutter speed of 1/30sec ~ 1/60000sec and 1/25sec ~ 1/60000sec.
10.16. The camera to provide WDR Wide dynamic range features.
10.17. The camera shall support up to 60fps in 1080P resolution.
10.18. The camera shall support Triple Codec of H.264, MPEG4 and
MJPEG
10.19. Video streaming shall support controllable frame rate and

controllable bandwidth (CBR/VBR)
10.20. All codec shall support 1080p, 720p, D1, CIF and QCIF (MJPEE
mode only)
10.21. The camera shall support max 25fps for 1080p/720p/D1/CIF/QCIF

recording frame rate.
10.22. The audio compression shall comply to two way, G.711 PCM, u-
low 64kbps 8kHz.
10.23. The camera shall support motion detection with FTP, email, alarm
out, JPEG record on local SD notification
10.24. The camera shall support IPv4 protocol: ONVIF, TCP/IP, UDP/IP,
RTP(UDP), RTSP, NTP, HTTP,HTTPS, SSL, DNS, DDNS, DHCP,
FTP, SMTP, ICMP, SNMPv1/v2c/v3(MIB-2)
10.25. The camera shall support IPv6: TCP/IP, HTTP, HTTPS, DHCP
10.26. The camera shall comply to FCC, CE, IP66, ROHS
10.27. The camera shall comply to ONVIF Support (Profile S)
TS/E/S41/29
10.28. Operating temperature shall be -10°C ~ 50°C (14°F ~ 122°F)
10.29. These camera shall meet the following minimum specifications:
Imaging Device : 1/2.8” 2.0M CMOS sensor
Resolution : 1920x11080
Lens : Vari-focal- 2.8mm-12mm, F1.2 (wide)

: Removable IR-cut filter for day & night
function
Min. Illumination :Color : 0.01Lux@F1.2 (30IRE)
:B/W : 0.001Lux@F1.2 (30IRE)
Viewing angle : 30X: 59.5° (wide) ~ 2.1° (tele)

(horizontal)
Motion Detection :Off/On (up 4 programmable zones)
Image Setting :Automatic, manual, or scheduled

day/night mode
:BLC (Backlight Compensation)
Shutter time : 1/30sec ~ 1/60000sec

: 1/25sec ~ 1/60000sec
Wide Dynamic Range :On/Off
On board storage :SD/SDHC card slot for video recording

:support max 64GB
IR Illuminators :Built-in IR illuminators, effective up to

15 meters
Security :Multi-level user access with password

protection
:IP address filtering
:HTTPS encrypted data transmission
Application :SDK available for application

development and system integration
Networking :10/100 Mbps Ethernet, RJ-45

:ONVIF support
:Protocols: IPv4, ONVIF, TCP/IP,
UDP/IP, RTP(UDP), RTSP, NTP,
HTTP,HTTPS, SSL, DNS, DDNS,
TS/E/S41/30
DHCP, FTP, SMTP, ICMP,

SNMPv1/v2c/v3(MIB-2)
IPv6, TCP/IP, HTTP, HTTPS, DHCP
11. INDOOR/OUTDOOR IP PTZ SPEED DOME CAMERA
11.1 The indoor/outdoor network dome positioning camera shall be a

discreet camera dome system consisting of a dome drive with a
variable speed/high speed pan/tilt drive unit with continuous 360°
rotation up to 400°/sec.
11.2 The indoor/outdoor network dome positioning camera offer multiple

simultaneous video streams with 2.1 megapixel (MPx) 1920 x 1080
resolution, auto iris with 20X or 30X optical, and 12X digital zoom.
11.3 The indoor/outdoor network dome positioning camera shall support

standard IT protocols.
11.4 The indoor/outdoor network dome positioning camera shall be

conformant to the ONVIF Profile S and Profile G and support open
architecture best practices with a published API available to third-
party network video recording and management systems.
11.5 The indoor/outdoor camera dome system shall provide a 100Base-

TX network interface.
11.6 The indoor/outdoor camera Certifications and Ratings shall meet

to:
a) CE Class A, FCC Class A

b) UL/cUL Listed, C-Tick, KC
c) ONVIF Profile S, ONVIF Profile G
d) Cisco® Medianet Media Service Proxy 2.0 compatible
e) Environmental Models Meet NEMA Type 4X and IP66
standards
f) For Environmental models:
IEC 60068-2-1, IEC 60068-2-2, IEC 60068-2-6, IEC 60068-
2-14,IEC 60068-2-27, IEC 60068-2-30, IEC 60068-2-78
g) Environmental Pendant Models:
IEC 60068-2-6, IEC 60068-2-27
11.7 The indoor/outdoor network dome positioning camera shall use a

standard Web browser interface for remote administration and
configuration of camera parameters. The browser interface shall
provide PTZ control including preset and pattern and on-screen
display (OSD) for access to camera programming.
TS/E/S41/31

32 window blanks to conceal user-defined privacy areas that
cannot be viewed by an operator.

256 user-programmable presets.

16 user-programmable tours.

proportional pan/tilt functions dependant on the depth of view of the
zoom lens.
11.12 The indoor/outdoor network dome positioning camera shall provide

the ability backup and restore camera settings through an
embedded Web browser.

Wide Dynamic Range (WDR) up to 130dB with selections for on/off
available through the embedded Web browser.

Back Light Compensation with selections for on/off available
through the embedded Web browser.

dynamic White Balance adjustments through the embedded Web
browser for the following modes:
a) Normal mode: Auto white balance with color temperature

range from 7,500k to 2,500k. Properly white balances
scenes illuminated by daylight to warm white sources.
b) Extended mode: Auto white balance with color temperature
range from 7,500k to 2,000k. Properly white balances
scenes illuminated by daylight to warm white sources.
c) Auto Tracking White (ATW) mode: Color temperature range
from 10,000k to 2,000k.
d) Warm White mode: Fixed white balance used for fixed
lighting scenes with warmer (more yellow sources such as
incandescent, tungsten-halogen, warm white compact fl or
LED.
TS/E/S41/32
e) Cool White mode (outdoor): Fixed white balance used for

fixed lighting scenes with cooler (more blue) sources such
as true daylight, daylight fluorescent, white light LED’s or
metal halide sources.
f) Manual mode: Fixed white balance used to manually set red
and blue values for color adjustment.

a freeze frame feature that freezes a camera image as a
preprogrammed preset is called, providing a live view once
positioned. Selections for on/off shall be available through the

dynamic focus settings to provide on/off options for Auto Focus and
Focus Trace based on the distance to the ground level targets in a
scene. Focus settings include:
a) Auto Focus: Automatically focuses during runtime operation.

b) Sure Focus: Camera auto focuses when pan, tilt, and zoom
operations are complete or if the IR cut filter changes state.
When auto focus lock is achieved, auto focus is turned off
and the focal position will remain until the next PTZ
operation. If 30 seconds pass without an auto focus lock,
the camera will retain its focal position until the next PTZ
action.
c) Focus Trace: Enables camera to use a focus trace curve
when zooming based on the distance to ground-level targets
in the scene.
11.18 Install Height: Determines the distance between the camera and
ground-level targets for focus trace operations.

Pan and Tilt limit stops with settings available through the

802.1x port security to establish point-to-point access through a
wired or wireless port using Extensible Authentication Protocol
(EAP). Supported EAP methods shall include EAP-MD5, EAP-
TLS, EAP-TTLS, EAP-PEAP and EAP-FAST.

SNMP v2c and v3.
TS/E/S41/33

IPv6 configurations in conjunction with IPv4.

user-selectable configurations for day/night auto mode.

I-Frame interval configuration to increase or decrease the number
of I-Frames per second.

Electronic Image Stabilization (EIS).
11.26 The indoor/outdoor network dome positioning camera shall include

an optional DEFOG feature to make a subject appear clearer when
the surrounding area of the subject is foggy and low contrast.

two simultaneous video streams with up to 8.00 Mbps. The second
stream is variable based on the setup of the primary stream.

Quality of Service (QoS) for different Services Code Point (DSCP):
A mechanism for prioritizing network traffic.

Rate Control:
a) Constant Bit Rate (CBR) streams video at a fixed number of

bits per second.
b) Variable Bit Rate (VBR) reduces or increases bit rates in
response to motion while maintaining high quality video.
c) Constrained Variable Bit Rate (CVBR) provides high quality
video and long recording time of variable bit rate while limiting
variations in recording capacity consumption.

line in/line out audio in accordance with G711 - Alaw / mlaw
encoding.
11.31 The indoor/outdoor network dome positioning network camera shall

provide the ability to run embedded Video analytics.
11.32 Analytic Applications shall be configured and enabled using a

standard Web browser.
TS/E/S41/34
11.33 Analytics Applications shall include :
a) Abandoned Object: Detects objects placed in a defined

zone and triggers an alarm if the object remains in the zone
longer than the user-defined time allows. An airport terminal
is a typical installation for this behavior. This behavior can
also detect objects left behind at an ATM, signaling possible
card skimming.
b) Adaptive Motion: Detects and tracks objects that enter a
scene and then triggers an alarm when the objects enter a
user-defined zone. This behavior is primarily used in outdoor
environments with light traffic to reduce the number of false
alarms caused by environmental changes.
c) Auto Tracker: Detects and tracks movement in the
camera’s field of view. When the Auto Tracker behavior is
configured, the system automatically pans and tilts to follow
the moving object until the object stops or disappears from
the monitored area.
d) Camera Sabotage: Detects contrast changes in the field of
view. An alarm is triggered if the lens is obstructed with
spray paint, a cloth, or a lens cap. Any unauthorized
repositioning of the camera also triggers an alarm.
e) Directional Motion: Generates an alarm in a high traffic area
when a person or object moves in a specified direction.
Typical installations for this behavior include an airport gate
or tunnel where cameras can detect objects moving in the
opposite direction of the normal flow of traffic or an
individual entering through an exit door.
f) Loitering Detection: Identifies when people or vehicles
remain in a defined zone longer than the user-defined time
allows. This behavior is effective in real-time notification of
suspicious behavior around ATMs, stairwells, and school
grounds.
g) Object Counting: Counts the number of objects that enter a
defined zone or cross a tripwire. This behavior might be
used to count the number of people at a store entrance/exit
or inside a store where the traffic is light. This behavior is
based on tracking and does not count people in a crowded
setting.
h) Object Removal: Triggers an alarm if an object is removed
from a defined zone. This behavior is ideal for customers
who want to detect the removal of high value objects, such
as a painting from a wall or a statue from a pedestal.
TS/E/S41/35
i) Stopped Vehicle: Detects vehicles stopped near a sensitive

area longer than the user-defined time allows. This behavior
is ideal for airport curbside drop-offs, parking enforcement,
suspicious parking, traffic lane breakdowns, and vehicles
waiting at gates.
11.34 Analytic Applications shall be preloaded or configuration and alarm

notification when used with an existing system or a third-party
system that supports Analytics API or (ONVIF G).
11.35 Multiple user-configurable behaviors can be scheduled to work

during a certain time or condition.
11.36 The environmental network dome camera shall provide a 1.5-inch

NPT conduit attachment for pendant mounted applications.
11.37 The environmental network dome camera shall provide a 3/4-inch

NPT conduit attachment in the back box for in-ceiling applications.
11.38 The environmental network dome camera shall be NEMA TYPE

4X, IP66 rated.
11.39 The indoor/outdoor fixed dome system shall meet or exceed the
following design and performance specifications.
11.40 Camera Specifications
a) Sensor Type 1/2.8-inch Type Exmor CMOS

sensor
b) Optical Zoom 20X or 30X
c) Digital Zoom 12X
d) Maximum Resolution 1920 x 1080
e) Frame Rate 60 frames per second (fps)
maximum
f) Lens 30X: f/1.6 ~ f/4.7, (4.3 mm (wide)
~ 129.0 mm tele)
g) Horizontal Angle of View 30X: 59.5° (wide) ~ 2.1° (tele)
h) Aspect Ratio 16:9
TS/E/S41/36
i) Light Sensitivity Sensitivity in lux for 90%

reflectance, f/1.6 (wide angle),
43 dB gain at 30 IRE (30%
of signal level) with Sensitivity
Boost OFF; 4X improvement to
sensitivity with Sensitivity
Boost ON
Color (33 ms) 0.20 lux
Color Low Light (33 ms) 0.03 lux
Color (250 ms) 0.025 lux
Color Low Light (250 ms) 0.008 lux
Mono (33 ms) 0.06 lux
Mono Low Light (33 ms) 0.004 lux
Mono (250 ms) 0.008 lux
Mono Low Light (250 ms) 0.001 lux
j) Day/Night Capabilities Yes
k) IR Cut Filter Yes
l) Wide Dynamic Range 130 dB
m) Iris Control Auto iris with manual override
n) Backlight Compensation Yes
o) Automatic Gain Control Yes
p) Active Noise Filtering Yes
q) Electronic Image
Stabilization (EIS) Yes
11.41 Video Specifications
a) Video Encoding H.264 in High, Main, or Base

profiles and MJPEG
b) Video Streams Up to 2 simultaneous streams,
the second stream is variable
based on the setup of the
primary stream
c) H.264 Smart Lowers bandwidth and storage
Compression Technology requirements by up
to 70%, while reducing storage
requirements.
TS/E/S41/37
d) Frame Rate Up to 60, 50, 30, 25, 15, 12.5,

10, 8.333, 7.5, 6, 5, 3, 2.5, 2, 1
(depending upon coding,
resolution, and stream
configuration)
e) Available Resolutions
16:9 Aspect Ratio 2.07 MPx (1920 x 1080); 60 ips
max
2.07 MPx (1920 x 1080); 30 ips
max
0.92 MPx (1280 x 720); 30 ips
max
0.36 MPx (800 x 448); 30 ips
max
0.23 MPx (640 x 352); 30 ips
max
f) Supported Protocols TCP/IP, UDP/IP (Unicast,
Multicast IGMP), UPnP, DNS,
DHCP, RTP, RTSP, NTP, IPv4,
IPv6, SNMP v2c/v3, QoS, HTTP,
HTTPS,SSH, SSL, SMTP, FTP,
and 802.1x (EAP)
g) Users Up to 20 simultaneous users
Unicast depending on resolution settings
(2 guaranteed streams)
Multicast Unlimited H.264
h) Security Access Password protected
i) Software Interface Web browser view and setup
j) System Integration Existing Endura 2.0 (or later);
Existing Digital Sentry 7.3 (or
later), IP Video Management
System, Digital Video
Management System
k) Open API Camera API, ONVIF Profile G
and Profile S
l) Mobile Application Integrated to Camera Mobile App
m) Local Storage Up to 32 GB SD Card
TS/E/S41/38
n) Alarm recording: Capture 1-5-10 second video

clips on camera sabotage,
motion detection, or alarm input;
Outage recording: record video
continuously in the case of
network outage
o) Continuous recording: initiated by user Access video
through FTP protocol or via
ONVIF Profile G request
p) Minimum PC Requirements
1) Processor Intel® Core™ i7 Processor, 2.8 GHz

2) Latest Operating System Windows® (32-bit and 64-
bit) with DirectX® 11, or Mac® OS X 10.6 (or later).
Microsoft Windows Server
3) Web User Interface Requires QuickTime® 7.7.9 (or
later)
4) Memory 16 GB RAM
5) 2 no Network Interface Card 100/1000 Mbps (or
greater)
6) Monitor Minimum of 1024 x 768 resolution, 16- or 32-
bit pixel color resolution
7) Web Browser Internet Explorer® 11, Microsoft® Edge,
(or later) or Firefox 3.5 (or later); Internet Explorer 11.
(or later) is for configuring analytics
8) Media Player or QuickTime® 7.7.9 for Windows
operating system; or QuickTime 7.7.9 for Mac OS X
10.6 (or later)
11.42 Electrical Specifications
a) Port RJ-45 connector for 100Base-TX

Auto MDI/MDI-X
Autonegotiate/manual setting
b) Cabling Type Cat5e cable or better for 100Base-TX
c) Input Voltage 18 to 32 VAC; 24 VAC nominal;
22 to 27 VDC; 24 VDC nominal
TS/E/S41/39
d) Input Power
1) 24 VAC nominal 24 VA nominal (without heater
and blower); 81 VA nominal
(with heater and blower)
2) 24 VDC nominal 1 A nominal (without heater and
blower); 3 A nominal (with heater
and blower
3) PoE+ 18 W, Environmental models
(with heater on); 15 W, Non-
Environmental (with heater off)
4) HPoE 60 W, Environmental models
(with heater on); 15 W, Non-
Environmental (with heater off)
e) Alarm
1) Unsupervised Detects open or closed alarm

state
2) Supervised Detects open and short alarm
state with external 1-kohm
resistor
3) Input 3.5 VDC maximum, 3.5mA maximum
4) Relay Output ±32 VDC maximum, 150mA maximum
f) Audio
1) Input / Output Line level/external microphone

input; 600-ohm differential, 1 Vp-
p maximum signal level
11.43 Dome Drive Specifications
a) Pan Movement 360º continuous pan rotation

b) Pan Speed Variable between 280º per
second continuous pan to 0.1º
per second
c) Maximum Pan Speed 430º per second
d) Vertical Tilt Unobstructed tilt of +1º to –90º
TS/E/S41/40
e) Manual Control Speed Pan speed of 0.1º to 80º per

second; tilt operation shall range
from 0.1º to 45º per second
f) Automatic Preset Speed Pan speed of 280º and a tilt
speed of 160º per second
g) Presets 256 positions
h) Tours 16 tours
i) Preset Accuracy ± 0.1º
j) Proportional Pan Speed decreases in
/Tilt Speed proportion to the increasing
depth of zoom
k) Motor Continuous duty and variable
speed, operating at 18 to 32
VAC, 24 VAC nominal
l) Window Blanking 32 blanked windows
m) Auto Flip Rotates dome 180º at bottom of
tilt travel
n) Dome Drive All dome drives are compatible
Compatibility with all back box configurations
o) Power Nominal 24 VA (without heater
Consumption and blower running
Nominal 81 VA (with heater and
blower running)
11.44 Back box and Lower dome
The black box shall be made of aluminium, Dome Drive made of

aluminum , thermo plastic and Lower Dome of Acrylic. Back box
and lower dome shall meet to follow specifications:
a) Pendant, Environmental
1) Connection Quick, positive mechanical and

to Dome Drive electrical disconnect
2) Installation Quick-mount wall, corner, pole,
parapet, or ceiling adapter
3) Cable Entry Through 1.5-inch NPT fitting
TS/E/S41/41
4) Environmental Factory-installed heaters,

Features blowers, and sun shroud
5) Operating 24VAC: Maximum temperature
Temperatures range of –51°C to 60°C
(–60°F to 140°F) for two
hours and a continuous
operating range of –45°C
to 50°C (–50°F to 122°F)
HPoE: Maximum operating
temperature of 60°C
(140°F) for two hours and
a continuous operating
range of –45°C to 50°C (–
50°F to 122°F)
PoE+: Maximum operating
4°F to 122°F)
6) Construction Aluminum
7) Trim Ring 2 screws
Connection
b) Pendant, Standard

4) Environmental Factory-installed blowers
Features
5) Operating Maximum temperature range of
Temperatures 45°C (113°F) for two hours and a
continuous operating range of –
5C° to 35°C (23°F to 95°F)
Connection
TS/E/S41/42
c) In-Ceiling, Environmental

2) Installation Hard Ceiling applications
3) Cable Entry 0.75-inch conduit fitting
4) Environmental Factory-installed heaters and
Features blowers
Temperatures range of –51°Cto 60°C (–
60°F to 140°F) for two
hours and a continuous
operating range of –45°C
to 50°C (–50°F to 122°F)

50°F to 122°F)
4°F to 122°F)
Connection
d) In-Ceiling, Interior

2) Installation Hard ceiling applications
3) Cable Entry 0.75-inch conduit fitting
4) Operating Maximum temperature range of
Temperatures 0° to 50°Cx(32°F to 122°F)
TS/E/S41/43

Connection
e) Stainless Steel, Environmental

4) Environmental Factory-installed heaters,
Features blowers, and sun shroud
Temperatures range of – 51°C (–60°F to
140°F) for two hours and
50°F to 122°F)
50°F to 122°F)
range of –20°C to 50°C
(–4°F to 122°F)
6) Construction Stainless Steel
Connection
TS/E/S41/44
12. Explosion Proof Pan / Tilt and Zoom IP Camera
12.1 The explosion proof camera shall be installed in the high

hazardous are such as chemical store, solvent store, cylinder store
with flammable and explosive area. All outdoor camera shall have
enclosure. Camera installed shall comply to the specification as
specified
12.2 The proposed camera to meet to the following certification:

a) FCC Part 15, CE, UL/cUL Listed, ICES-003, RCM, KC
b) IP66, IP67, and IP68, and Type 4X and Type 6
c) S Mark for Argentina
d) Tamb –60°C to 60°C
e) UL/cUL Hazardous Locations Listed per Zone requirements
f) INMETRO BR-Ex d IIC T6, EAC Ex, CCOE
g) CLASS I, ZONE 1, AEx db op pr IIC T6, AEx db op is op pr
IIC T6, AEx tb op pr IIIC T85°C, AEx tb op is op pr IIIC
T85°C
h) IECEx UL 17.0011X
i) Ex db op pr IIC T6 Gb X, Ex tb op pr IIIC T85°C Db X, Ex db
op is op pr IIC T6 Gb X, Ex tb op is op pr IIIC T85°C Db X
j) DEMKO 17 ATEX 1834X
k) 0539 II 2 G Ex db op pr IIC T6 Gb, II 2 D Ex tb op
pr IIIC T85°C Db, 0539 II 2 G Ex db op is op pr IIC T6
Gb, II 2 D Ex tb op is op pr IIIC T85°C Db, DN
12.3 The system shall offer a 1920 x 1080 maximum resolution

Integrated Camera/Optics Packages, 30X optical zoom, 12X digital
zoom with an infrared cut filter, day/night, and built-in motion
detection.
12.4 The explosion proof pan, tilt and zoom system shall be designed
for hazardous, harsh, and marine environments, and shall be
certified as such.
12.5 The explosion proof pan, tilt and zoom camera system shall
provide up to a 1000Base-T network interface for live streaming to
a standard Web browser or a VMS. The camera shall support
FSFP/SFP modules that are Multi-Source Agreement (MSA)
Compliant, adapting to multiple transmission methods; fiber,
Ethernet-over-Coax, UTP.
TS/E/S41/45
12.6 The explosion proof pan, tilt and zoom IP camera system shall
provide auto focus and auto iris with manual override. The camera
system shall be designed to mount upright or inverted. The camera
will automatically re-orient itself for horizontal viewing
12.7 The explosion proof pan motion has continuous 360° operation and
tilt operation has a tilt range from +90° to –90°.
12.8 The explosion proof pan, tilt and zoom IP camera system shall use
a standard Web browser interface for remote administration and
configuration of camera parameters.
12.9 The explosion proof pan, tilt and zoom IP camera system shall be
conformant to ONVIF S, G, and Q and support open architecture
connectivity for third-party software recording solutions allowing
integration into virtually any IP-based system. It shall be compatible
with existing Endura 2.0, Digital Sentry® 7.3, and VideoXpert 1.9 (or
later) video management systems. The IP camera should able to
record, manage, configure, and view multiple live streams.
12.10 The explosion proof pan, tilt and zoom IP camera system shall
include a programmable window wiper and washer/wipe sequence
under a single command.
12.11 The explosion proof pan, tilt and zoom IP camera system shall use
a beltless, gearless, motion control system driven directly from the
shaft of the motor, ensuring accurate and reliable motion. The
camera shall support a direct drive motor control system, which
automatically accommodates for high vibration or windy conditions
and ensures smooth, accurate positioning.
12.12 The camera shall pan and tilt at up to 200º per second.
12.13 The explosion proof IP camera shall support proportional pan/tilt

/zoom functions dependent on the depth of view of the zoom lens.
12.14 The explosion proof IP camera system shall operate in winds up to

112 knots and shall survive winds of up to 130 knots. The IP
camera shall operate between -60ºC and 60°C. and maintain a T6
(<85°C) surface temperature in all operating conditions. It shall
cold-start from >-40ºC
12.15 The explosion proof camera IP system shall support an optional

vari-zoom, infrared illuminator with a range of up to 200 meters,
supporting video in all lighting conditions.
TS/E/S41/46
12.16 The explosion proof IP camera system’s optional IR illuminator

shall operate in conjunction with the camera zoom to consistently
light the camera’s field of view.
12.17 The explosion proof IP camera shall support dual cable entry ports
allowing the installer to separate power and data cables or to install
cables flexibly. It shall include a safety attach point.
12.18 The explosion proof IP camera shall include an integrated wiper to

keep the viewing window clean. The camera shall include a sun
shroud, heater, and window defroster, ensuring that the camera
functions and captures video in extreme weather.
12.19 The explosion proof IP camera shall include a heating system to

keep the window free from condensation and fog.
12.20 The explosion proof IP camera shall include an internal micro SD

slot, allowing the camera to record locally.
12.21 The explosion proof IP camera shall be programmable to perform

actions based upon up to four physical alarm triggers.
12.22 The explosion proof IP camera shall have local (on-camera),

hardware (two wires for button in safe room), and software (at
VMS) reset options.
12.23 The explosion proof IP camera shall support 32 window blanks to

conceal user-defined privacy areas that cannot be viewed by an
operator.
12.24 The explosion proof IP camera shall be conformant to the ONVIF

Profile S, G, and Q support open architecture best practices with a
published API available to third-party network video recording and
management systems.
12.25 The explosion proof IP camera shall provide the ability to backup
and restore camera settings through an embedded Web browser.
12.26 The explosion proof IP camera shall provide Wide Dynamic Range
(WDR) up to 130dB with selections for on/off available through the
embedded Web browser. The IP camera shall provide dynamic
White Balance adjustments through the embedded Web browser.
12.27 The explosion proof IP camera shall provide dynamic focus

settings to provide on/off options for Auto Focus and Focus Trace
based on the distance to the ground level targets in a scene.
TS/E/S41/47
12.28 The explosion proof IP camera shall provide Pan and Tilt limit
stops with settings available through the embedded Web browser.
12.29 The explosion proof camera shall provide 802.1x port security to
establish point-to-point access through a wired or wireless port
using Extensible Authentication Protocol (EAP). Supported EAP
methods shall include EAP-MD5, EAP-TLS, EAP-TTLS, EAP-
PEAP and EAP-FAST.ds
12.30 The explosion proof IP camera shall support SNMP v2c and v3,
IPv6 configurations in conjunction with IPv4.
12.31 The explosion proof IP camera shall provide user-selectable

configurations for day/night auto mode.
12.32 The explosion proof IP camera shall provide I-Frame interval

configuration to increase or decrease the number of I-Frames per
second.
12.33 The explosion proof IP camera shall provide Smart Compression

capability for enhanced storage optimization.
12.34 The explosion proof IP camera shall provide Electronic Image

Stabilization (EIS).
12.35 The explosion proof IP camera shall include an DEFOG feature to

make a subject appear clearer when the surrounding area of the
subject is foggy and low contrast.
12.36 The explosion proof IP camera shall provide two simultaneous

video streams with up to 8.00 Mbps. The second stream is variable
based on the setup of the primary stream.
12.37 The explosion proof IP camera shall provide Quality of Service

(QoS) for Differentiated Services Code Point (DSCP): A
mechanism for prioritizing network traffic.
12.38 The explosion proof IP camera shall provide the ability to run
embedded Video analytics. Analytic application shall be configured
and enabled using a standard Web browser. Analytics for
explosion proof IP camera includes:
a) Abandoned Object – Detects objects placed in a defined
longer than the user-defined time allows.
TS/E/S41/48
b) Adaptive Motion – Detects and tracks objects that enter a

c) Auto Tracker – Detects and tracks movement in the
camera’s field of view. When the Auto Tracker behavior is
configured, the system automatically pans and tilts to follow
the moving object until the object stops or disappears from
the monitored area.
d) Camera Sabotage – Detects contrast changes in the field of
e) Directional Motion – Generates an alarm in a high traffic
area when a person or object moves in a specified direction.
Typical installations for this behavior include a tunnel where
cameras can detect objects moving in the opposite direction
of the normal flow of traffic or an individual entering through
an exit door.
f) Loitering Detection – Identifies when people or vehicles
allows.
g) Object Counting – Counts the number of objects that enter a
used to count the number of people at an entrance/exit
where the traffic is light. This behavior is based on tracking
and does not count people in a crowded setting.
h) Object Removal – Triggers an alarm if an object is removed
from a defined zone.
i) Stopped Vehicle – Detects vehicles stopped near a sensitive
is ideal for suspicious parking, traffic lane breakdowns, and
vehicles waiting at gates.
12.39 IP EXPLOSION PROOF PTZ CAMERA SPECIFICATIONS

sensor
b) Optical Zoom 30X
c) Digital Zoom 12X
TS/E/S41/49
d) Maximum Resolution 1920 x 1080

maximum
f) Lens 30X f/1.6 ~ f/4.7, (4.3 mm (wide)
~ 129.0 mm tele)
h) Aspect Ratio 16:9 and 4:3

reflectance, f/1.6 (wide angle), 43
dB gain at 30 IRE (30% of signal
level) with Sensitivity Boost OFF;
4X improvement to sensitivity
with Sensitivity Boost ON
j) Color (33 ms) 0.20 lux
k) Color Low Light (33 ms) 0.03 lux
l) Color (250 ms) 0.025 lux
m) Color Low Light (250 ms) 0.008 lux
n) Mono (33 ms) 0.06 lux
o) Mono Low Light (33 ms) 0.004 lux
p) Mono (250 ms) 0.008 lux
q) Mono Low Light (250 ms) 0.001 lux
r) Day/Night Capabilities Yes
s) IR Cut Filter Yes
t) Wide Dynamic Range 130 dB
u) Iris Control Auto iris with manual override
v) Backlight Compensation Yes
w) Automatic Gain Control Yes
x) Active Noise Filtering Yes
y) Electronic Image Stabilization (EIS) Yes
TS/E/S41/50
12.40 VIDEO SPECIFICATIONS
The explosion proof IP camera shall support independently

configurable primary and secondary streams plus service stream.
The Compression type shall be of H.264 High, Main, or Baseline
profiles; and MJPEG with Smart Compression options.
The Service Stream to be JPEG stream; the JPEGs will be the
same resolution as the primary stream.
Available resolutions (16:9 and 4:3 Aspect Ratio):
MPX Width X Height

1080P 1920 x 1080
720P 1280 x 720
0.36 800 x 448
0.23 640 x 352
Constant bit rate (CBR) and constrained variable bit rate (CVBR).
Frame rate: Up to 60, 50, 30, 25, 20, 15, 12, 10, 8, 7, 6, 5, 4, 3, 2,
1 (depending on the coding, resolution, and stream configuration).
Video streams shall support ONVIF profile S.
a) Storage and Recording
1) The explosion proof IP camera control shall have

onboard micro SD card storage.
2) Card type – micro SD
3) Capacity – addressable to 2TB
4) The local micro SD storage shall have the ability to
be backed up to alternate media without removal of
the micro SD card from the camera.
5) Local recording on the micro SD card shall
commence upon loss of network connectivity, based
on a pre-programmed schedule.
6) The camera shall record video continuously in the
case of network outage.
7) Alarm recording: The explosion proof camera shall
capture selectable 1, 5, or 10 second video clips on
camera sabotage, motion detection, or alarm input.
8) Video recording and storage shall support ONVIF
profile G.
TS/E/S41/51
b) Analytics
1) Analytics shall be configured and enabled using a

2) The explosion proof camera shall have the ability to
detect motion within user defined areas of the video
image.
3) The camera can run two analytic behaviors
simultaneously.
4) Configurable behaviors are:
i) Abandoned Object – Detection of objects

placed in a defined zone and triggers an alarm
if the object remains in the zone longer than
the user-defined time allows.
ii) Adaptive Motion – Detection and tracking of
objects that enter a scene and triggering of an
alarm when the objects enter a user-defined
zone.
iii) Auto Tracker – Detects and tracks objects that
enter a scene and then triggers an alarm when
the objects enter a user-defined zone.
iv) Camera Sabotage – Detection of contrast
changes in the field of view, suitable to detect
lens obstruction or unauthorized repositioning
of the camera.
v) Directional Motion – Detection of person or
object moving in a specified direction.
vi) Loitering Detection – Identification of people or
vehicles remaining in a defined zone longer
than a user-defined time.
vii) Object Counting – Counting the number of
objects that enter a defined zone or cross a
tripwire.
viii) Object Removal – Detection of object is
removed from a defined zone.
ix) Stopped Vehicle – Detection of vehicles
stopped near a sensitive area longer than a
user-defined time.
TS/E/S41/52
12.41 ADDITIONAL FEATURES
a) Alarm – The explosion proof camera shall have four

alarm/sensor inputs and one relay output for alarm or control,
and one relay output for external washer.
b) The alarm input shall be able to detect an open or closed
alarm state function in supervised modes.
c) Relay Output –30 VDC maximum, 500 mA maximum
12.42 NETWORK
a) Connectivity
1) Up to 1000 BASE-TX Ethernet with RJ-45 connector.

2) Fiber and Ethernet-over-Coax via SFP MSA
Complaint Transceivers
b) Protocols to be supported
1) Transmission Control Protocol (TCP), Internet

Protocol (IP) v4 and v6, User Datagram Protocol
(UDP)
2) Configuration – Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol
(DHCP)
3) Web services – Hypertext Transfer Protocol (HTTP),
Secure HTTP (HTTPS)
4) Network services – Domain Name System (DNS),
Network Time Protocol (NTP), Internet Control
Message Protocol (ICMP), Simple Network
Management Protocol (SNMP) v2c/v3, Universal Plug
and Play (UPnP)
5) Media – Real-Time Transport Protocol (RTP), Real-
Time Streaming Protocol (RTSP).
6) Multicast – Internet Group Management Protocol
(IGMP)
7) Notifications – File Transfer Protocol (FTP), Simple
Mail Transfer Protocol (SMTP)
8) Remote Access – Secure Shell (SSH)
TS/E/S41/53
9) Security – Secure Sockets Layer (SSL), IEEE 802.1x

(EAP-MD5, EAP-TLS, EAP-TTLS, EAP-PEAP and
EAP-FAST)
10) Quality of Service – IEEE 802.1p Layer 3
Differentiated Services Code Point (DSCP)
11) DDNS – The explosion proof camera shall support
DDNS services offered by the Manufacturer and
other publicly available service offerings
c) Security
1) The explosion proof camera shall support IP address

filtering whereby users can enter a list of allowed or
blocked IP addresses for viewing video and
configuring camera settings.
2) The network camera system shall provide three
levels of user access with password protection.
12.43 IP EXPLOSION PROOF CAMERA SOFTWARE
a) General
The explosion proof camera shall have a built-in web server

which supports browser-based configuration. The camera’s
web server shall allow access to camera information and all
primary software functions.
The Manufacturer shall offer video viewer and configuration

to implement the following actions:
1) Camera discovery
2) Live Video
3) Video stream selection
4) Video stream configuration
5) Use preset video setting configurations
6) Configure custom video setting configurations
7) Compression type
8) Resolution
9) Image rate
10) I-frame interval
TS/E/S41/54
11) H.264 profile

12) Quality of Service (QoS)
13) Bit rate control
14) Multicast
15) Unicast
16) JPEG frame rate
17) Maximize view area of video to full size of browser
18) Revert to normal view
19) Open stream in new window
20) Capture and save image as .jpg file
21) Resize viewing area
b) Image Settings
1) Image quality
2) Exposure
3) Focus
4) White balance
5) Window blanking
6) Digital zoom
7) Lighting mode
8) Video noise reduction
9) Digital processing (color and detail adjustment)
10) Image enhancement
11) Quick setup preset modes
12) Sharpness
13) Saturation
14) Contrast
15) Brightness
16) Exposure modes
TS/E/S41/55
c) Recording
1) Initiate instant record and playback

2) Manage micro SD card storage
d) Events
1) configure event sources:

2) External alarm events
e) Analytic events
1) E-mail setup
2) Define web addresses for notifications
f) Camera network settings
1) Firmware upgrade
2) Reset to factory default (local, hardware remote, and
software remote)
3) Set date, time, and NTP server synchronization
4) User access control
5) View and export camera settings
6) View system logs
g) Minimum System Requirements
1) Processor – Intel® Core™ i7 Processor, 2.8 GHz

2) Acceptable Operating Systems:
3) Latest Microsoft® Windows® (32-bit and 64-bit), or
DirectX® 11, Latest Microsoft® Windows Server
4) 2 Network Card
5) Mac OS X 10.6 (or later)
6) Memory – 16 GB RAM
7) Network Interface Card – 1000 megabits (or greater)
TS/E/S41/56
8) Monitor – Minimum 1024 x 768 resolution, 16- or 32-

bit pixel color
9) Acceptable Web Browsers:
10) Microsoft® Internet Explorer® 11 (or later), Microsoft®
Edge for analytics configuring
11) Mozilla® Firefox® 3.5 (or later)
12) Google Chrome™ (51 or later)
13) Acceptable Media Players:
14) Media Player
15) QuickTime 7.7.9 for Windows,
16) QuickTime 7.7.9 for Mac OS X 10.6 (or later)
17) The Manufacturer shall offer an open API.
h) The IP camera software shall support integrations as follows
1) Existing Video Management: VideoXpert™; Endura®

2.0 (or later); Digital Sentry® 7.3 (or later); Third-party
system through API/SDK, ONVIF Profile S, ONVIF
Profile G, and Profile Q
2) Mobile Application – Camera Mobile
i) Required Systems for Analytics
1) Interface – Advanced System Management Software

or Video management platform system
2) Open API – The API can transmit behavior alarm
data to third party applications
TS/E/S41/57
12.44 ELECTRICAL
a) Voltage Input 48 VDC, 2A or 100-240 VAC, 2A

@ 50/60 Hz
b) Voltage Input Range ±10%
c) Power Consumption Maximum 166 VA/166 W
EXP1230-4N
Maximum 183 VA/174 W
EXP1230-7N
Maximum 220 VA/211 W
EXP1230-7M
d) Heater and Defroster Hardware controlled
e) Alarm
1) Unsupervised Detects open or closed alarm
state
2) Supervised Detects open and short alarm
state with external 1-kohm
resistor to detect alarm
tampering
f) Input 3.5 VDC maximum, 3.5 mA
maximum
g) Relay Output 30 VDC, 500 mA maximum
12.45 MECHANICAL AND ENVIRONMENTAL
a) General Construction 316L stainless steel

b) Finish Electropolish
c) Viewing Window High transmissivity, glass
d) Operating Temperature –76º to 140ºF (–60º to
60ºC)
e) Cable Entry Dual, 0.75-inch (1.91 cm)
NPT threaded opening
f) Pan Movement 360º continuous pan
rotation
TS/E/S41/58
g) Vertical Tilt +90° to -90° from

Horizontal (with automatic re-
alignment when installed
inverted
h) Pan/Tilt Speed 0.05°/sec to 200°/sec with
proportional Preset Accuracy
motion ±0.05°
i) Wind Speeds
1. Full Motion 64 knots (74mph/119kmh)
Control
2. Limited Speed 96 knots (110mph/177kmh)
Control
3. Hold Position 112 knots (129mph/208kmh)
4. Survives 130 knots (150mph/241kmh)
j) Integral Windshield Wiper Programmable with a
washer/wipe sequence
under a single command
12.46 Contractor personnel shall comply with all applicable state and
local licensing requirements
12.47 The network design and configuration shall be verified for

compatibility and performance with the camera(s).
12.48 Network configuration shall be tested and qualified by the

Contractor prior to camera installation
TS/E/S41/59
13. EXPLOSION PROOF FIXED IP CAMERA
13.1. The explosion proof fixed IP camera shall be installed in the high
hazardous are such as chemical store, solvent store, cylinder store
with flammable and explosive area. All outdoor camera shall have
enclosure. IP Camera installed shall comply to the specification as
specified
13.2. The proposed camera to meet to the following certification:
a) FCC Part 15, CE, UL/cUL Listed, ICES-003, RCM, KC

b) IP66 and Type IP66, IP67, and IP68, and Type 4X, Type 6,
and Type 6P
c) S Mark for Argentina
d) Vibration: IEC 60068-2-6 Test Fc
e) Tamb –60°C to 60°C
f) UL/cUL Hazardous Locations Listed per NEC Division and
Zone requirement
g) Class I, Groups A, B, C, and D, Class II, Groups E, F, G, T6,
Class I, Zone 1, AEx d IIC, AEx tD 21 T85°C IP66
h) IECEx
i) Ex d IIC T6 Gb, Ex tb IIIC T85°C Db IP66, ATEX Ex tb IIIC
T85°C Db IP66, INMETRO BR-Ex d IIC T6 IP66
j) EAC Ex, CCOE, NTRL, DNV
13.3. The explosion proof fixed IP camera system shall offer a 1920 x
1080 maximum resolution Integrated Camera/Optics Packages,
30X optical zoom, 12X digital zoom with an infrared cut filter,
day/night, and built-in motion detection.
13.4. The explosion proof fixed IP camera system shall be designed for
hazardous, harsh, and marine environments, and shall be certified
as such.
13.5. The explosion proof fixed IP camera system shall provide up to a

1000Base-T network interface for live streaming to a standard Web
browser or a VMS. The camera shall support FSFP/SFP modules
that are Multi-Source Agreement (MSA) Compliant, adapting to
multiple transmission methods; fiber, Ethernet over coax, UTP.
TS/E/S41/60
13.6. The explosion proof IP fixed camera system shall provide auto
focus and auto iris with manual override.
13.7. The explosion proof IP camera system shall be designed to mount

upright.
13.8. The explosion proof fixed IP camera system shall use a standard
Web browser interface for remote administration and configuration
of camera parameters.
13.9. The explosion proof fixed IP camera system shall be conformant to

ONVIF S, G, and Q and support open architecture connectivity for
third-party software recording solutions allowing integration into
virtually any IP-based system. It shall compatible with existing IP
Video management system in command centre such as Endura
2.0, Digital Sentry® 7.3, and VideoXpert 1.9 (or later), The IP
camera should able to record, manage, configure, and view
multiple live streams.
13.10. The explosion proof IP fixed camera system shall include a

programmable window wiper and washer/wipe sequence under a
single command.
13.11. The explosion proof camera shall operate between -60C and 60C.
The camera shall maintain a T6 (<85C) surface temperature in all
operating conditions and camera shall be able to cold-start from >-
30º C
13.12. The explosion proof IP camera shall support dual cable entry ports
allowing the installer to separate power and data cables or to install
cables flexibly. The camera shall include a safety attach point.
13.13. The explosion proof IP camera shall include an integrated wiper to

keep the viewing window clean.
13.14. The explosion proof IP camera shall include a sun shroud and
support a heater and window defroster, ensuring that the camera
functions and captures video in extreme weather.
13.15. The explosion proof IP camera shall a heating system to keep the
window ice free from condensation and fog.
13.16. The explosion proof IP camera shall include an internal micro SD

slot, allowing the camera to record locally.
13.17. The explosion proof IP camera shall be programmable to perform

actions based upon up to 4 physical alarm triggers.
TS/E/S41/61
13.18. The explosion proof IP camera shall have a local (on-camera),

hardware (two wires for button in safe room), and software (at
VMS) reset options.
13.19. The explosion proof IP camera shall support 32 window blanks to

conceal user-defined privacy areas that cannot be viewed by an
operator.
13.20. The explosion proof IP camera shall be conformant to the ONVIF

Profile S, G, and Q support open architecture best practices with a
published API available to third-party network video recording and
management systems. Ir shall provide the ability backup and
restore camera settings through an embedded Web browser.
13.21. The explosion proof IP camera shall provide Wide Dynamic Range
(WDR) up to 130dB with selections for on/off available through the
embedded Web browser. The camera shall provide dynamic White
Balance adjustments through the embedded Web browser
13.22. The explosion proof IP camera shall provide dynamic focus

settings to provide on/off options for Auto Focus and Focus Trace
based on the distance to the ground level targets in a scene.
13.23. The explosion proof IP camera shall provide 802.1x port security to
establish point-to-point access through a wired or wireless port
using Extensible Authentication Protocol (EAP). Supported EAP
methods shall include EAP-MD5, EAP-TLS, EAP-TTLS, EAP-
PEAP and EAP-FAST.
13.24. The explosion proof IP camera shall support SNMP v2c and v3.
and shall also support IPv6 configurations in conjunction with IPv4.
13.25. The explosion proof IP camera shall provide user-selectable

configurations for day/night auto mode.
13.26. The explosion proof IP camera shall provide I-Frame interval

configuration to increase or decrease the number of I-Frames per
second.
13.27. The explosion proof IP camera shall provide smart compression

capability for enhanced storage optimization. The explosion proof
camera shall provide Electronic Image Stabilization (EIS).
13.28. The explosion proof IP camera shall include an DEFOG feature to

make a subject appear clearer when the surrounding area of the
subject is foggy and low contrast.
TS/E/S41/62
13.29. The explosion proof IP camera shall provide two simultaneous

video streams with up to 8.00 Mbps. The second stream is variable
based on the setup of the primary stream.
13.30. The explosion proof IP camera shall provide Quality of Service

(QoS) for different Services Code Point (DSCP): A mechanism for
prioritizing network traffic.
13.31. The explosion proof IP camera shall provide the ability to run
embedded Video analytics. Analytic application shall be configured
and enabled using a standard Web browser. Analytics for
explosion proof IP camera includes:
a) Analytic Applications shall be configured and enabled using

a standard Web browser.
b) Analytics for Enhanced including:
c) Abandoned Object: Detects objects placed in a defined
longer than the user-defined time allows.
d) Adaptive Motion: Detects and tracks objects that enter a
e) Camera Sabotage: Detects contrast changes in the field of
f) Directional Motion: Generates an alarm in a high traffic area
when a person or object moves in a specified direction.
Typical installations for this behavior include an airport gate
or tunnel where cameras can detect objects moving in the
opposite direction of the normal flow of traffic or an
individual entering through an exit door.
g) Loitering Detection: Identifies when people or vehicles
allows.
h) Object Counting: Counts the number of objects that enter a
used to count the number of people at an entrance/exit
where the traffic is light. This behavior is based on tracking
and does not count people in a crowded setting.
TS/E/S41/63
i) Object Removal: Triggers an alarm if an object is removed

from a defined zone.
j) Stopped Vehicle: Detects vehicles stopped near a sensitive
is ideal for suspicious parking, traffic lane breakdowns, and
vehicles waiting at gates.
13.32. IP EXPLOSION PROOF CAMERA SPECIFICATIONS

sensor
b) Optical Zoom 30X
c) Digital Zoom 12X
d) Maximum Resolution 1920 x 1080.
maximum
f) Lens 30X: f/1.6 ~ f/4.7, (4.3 mm (wide)
~ 129.0 mm tele)
h) Aspect Ratio 16:9
reflectance, f/1.6 (wide angle), 43
dB gain at 30 IRE (30% of signal
level) with Sensitivity Boost OFF;
4X improvement to sensitivity
with Sensitivity Boost ON
j) Color (33 ms) 0.20 lux
k) Color Low Light (33 ms) 0.03 lux
l) Color (250 ms) 0.025 lux
m) Color Low Light (250 ms) 0.008 lux
n) Mono (33 ms) 0.06 lux
o) Mono Low Light (33 ms) 0.004 lux
p) Mono (250 ms) 0.008 lux
q) Mono Low Light (250 ms) 0.001 lux
r) Day/Night Capabilities Yes
s) IR Cut Filter Yes
TS/E/S41/64
t) Wide Dynamic Range 130 dB

u) Iris Control Auto iris with manual
override
v) Backlight Compensation Yes
w) Automatic Gain Control Yes
x) Active Noise Filtering Yes
y) Electronic Image Stabilization (EIS) Yes
13.33. VIDEO SPECIFICATIONS
The explosion proof IP camera shall support independently

configurable primary and secondary streams plus service stream.
The Compression type shall be of H.264 High, Main, or Baseline
profiles; and MJPEG with Smart Compression options
The Service Stream to be of JPEG stream; the JPEGs will be the
same resolution as the primary stream
Available resolutions (16:9 and 4:3 Aspect Ratio):
MPX Width X Height

1080P 1920 x 1080
720P 1280 x 720
0.36 800 x 448
0.23 640 x 352
Constant bit rate (CBR) and constrained variable bit rate (CVBR).
Frame rate: Up to 60, 50, 30, 25, 20, 15, 12, 10, 8, 7, 6, 5, 4, 3, 2,
1 (depending on the coding, resolution, and stream configuration)
Video streams shall support ONVIF profile S.
a) Storage and Recording
1) The explosion proof camera control shall have

onboard micro SD card storage.
a. Card type: micro SD
b. Capacity: addressable to 2 TB
2) The local micro SD storage shall have the ability to
be backed up to alternate media without removal of
the micro SD card from the camera.
TS/E/S41/65
3) Local recording on the micro SD card shall

commence upon loss of network connectivity, based
on a pre-programmed schedule.
4) The camera shall record video continuously in the
case of network outage.
5) Alarm recording: The explosion proof camera shall
capture selectable 1, 5, or 10 second video clips on
camera sabotage, motion detection, or alarm input.
6) Video recording and storage shall support ONVIF
profile G.
b) Analytics
1) Analytics shall be configured and enabled using a

2) The explosion proof camera shall have the ability to
detect motion within user defined areas of the video
image.
3) Number of simultaneous running analytic behaviors:
2
4) Configurable behaviors:
a. Abandoned Object - Detection of objects
placed in a defined zone and triggers an alarm
if the object remains in the zone longer than
the user-defined time allows.
b. Adaptive Motion - Detection and tracking of
objects that enter a scene and triggering of an
alarm when the objects enter a user-defined
zone.
c. Camera Sabotage - Detection of contrast
changes in the field of view, suitable to detect
lens obstruction or unauthorized repositioning
of the camera.
d. Directional Motion - Detection of person or
object moving in a specified direction.
e. Loitering Detection – Identification of people or
vehicles remaining in a defined zone longer
than a user-defined time.
TS/E/S41/66
f. Object Counting - Counting the number of

objects that enter a defined zone or cross a
tripwire.
g. Object Removal – Detection of object is
removed from a defined zone.
h. Stopped Vehicle – Detection of vehicles
stopped near a sensitive area longer than a
user-defined time.
13.34. ADDITIONAL FEATURES
a) Alarm – The explosion proof camera shall have four

alarm/sensor inputs and one relay output for alarm or control
and one relay output for external washer.
b) The alarm input shall be able to detect an open or closed
alarm state function in supervised modes.
c) Relay Output: 30 VDC maximum, 500 mA maximum
13.35. NETWORK
a) Connectivity:
1) Up to 1000 BASE-TX Ethernet with RJ-45 connector

2) Fiber and Ethernet-over-Coax via SFP MSA
Compliant Transceivers
b) Protocols supported

Protocol (IP) v4 and v6, User Datagram Protocol
(UDP)
2) Configuration: Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol
(DHCP)
3) Web services: Hypertext Transfer Protocol (HTTP),
Secure HTTP (HTTPS)
4) Network services: Domain Name System (DNS),
Message Protocol (ICMP), Simple Network
Management Protocol (SNMP) v2c/v3, Universal Plug
and Play (UPnP)
TS/E/S41/67
5) Media: Real-Time Transport Protocol (RTP), Real-

Time Streaming Protocol (RTSP)
6) Multicast: Internet Group Management Protocol
(IGMP)
7) Notifications: File Transfer Protocol (FTP), Simple
Mail Transfer Protocol (SMTP)
8) Remote Access: Secure Shell (SSH)
9) Security: Secure Sockets Layer (SSL), IEEE 802.1x
(EAP-MD5, EAP-TLS, EAP-TTLS, EAP-PEAP and
EAP-FAST)
10) Quality of Service: IEEE 802.1p Layer 3
Differentiated Services Code Point (DSCP)
11) DDNS – The explosion proof camera shall support
DDNS services offered by the Manufacturer and
other publicly available service offerings.
c) Security
1) The explosion proof camera shall support IP address

filtering whereby users can enter a list of allowed or
blocked IP addresses for viewing video and
configuring camera settings
2) The network camera system shall provide three
levels of user access with password protection.
13.36. IP EXPLOSION PROOF CAMERA SOFTWARE
a) General
1) The explosion proof IP camera shall have a built-in

web server which supports browser-based
configuration.
2) The camera’s web server shall allow access to
camera information and all primary software functions.
3) The Manufacturer shall offer video viewer and
configuration to implement the following actions:
a. Camera discovery
b. Line Video
c. Video stream selection
TS/E/S41/68
d. Video stream configuration

i. Use preset video setting configurations
ii. Configure custom video setting
configurations:
(1) Compression type
(2) Resolution
(3) Image rate
(4) frame interval
(5) H.264 profile
(6) Quality of Service (QoS)
(7) Bit rate control
iii. Multicast
iv. Unicast
v. JPEG frame rate
vi. Maximize view area of video to full size
of browser
vii. Revert to normal view
viii. Open stream in new window
ix. Capture and save image as .jpg file
x. Resize viewing area
b) Image Settings
1) Image quality
2) Exposure
3) Focus
4) White balance
5) Window blanking
6) Digital zoom
7) Lighting mode
8) Video noise reduction
TS/E/S41/69
9) Digital processing (color and detail adjustment)

i) Image enhancement
ii) Quick setup preset modes
iii) Sharpness
iv) Saturation
v) Contrast
vi) Brightness
10) Exposure modes
c) Recording
1) Initiate instant record and playback

2) Manage micro SD card storage
d) Events
1) Configure event sources:

i) External alarm events
ii) Analytic events
2) E-mail setup
3) Define web addresses for notifications
e) Camera network settings
1) Firmware upgrade
2) Reset to factory default (local, hardware remote, and
software remote)
3) Set date, time, and NTP server synchronization
4) User access control
5) View and export camera settings
6) View system logs
TS/E/S41/70
f) Minimum System Requirements
1) Processor: Intel® Core™ i7 Processor, 2.8 GHz

2) Acceptable Operating Systems:
a. Latest Microsoft® Windows Server
b. Latest Microsoft® Windows® (32-bit and 64-
bit), or DirectX® 11
c. Mac OS X 10.6 (or later)
3) Memory: 16 GB RAM
4) Network Interface Card: 1000 megabits (or greater)
5) Monitor: Minimum 1024 x 768 resolution, 16- or 32-bit
pixel color
g) Web Browsers:
1) Microsoft® Internet Explorer® 11, Microsoft® Edge (or

later) for configuring analytics
2) Mozilla® Firefox® 3.5 (or later)
3) Google Chrome™ (51 or later)
4) Acceptable Media Players:
5) Media Player
6) QuickTime 7.7.9 for Windows operating system
7) QuickTime 7.7.9 for Mac OS X 10.6 (or later)
h) The Manufacturer shall offer an open API.
i) The camera software shall support integrations as follows:
1) Existing Video Management: VideoXpert™; Endura®

2.0 (or later); Digital Sentry® 7.3 (or later); Third-party
system through API/SDK, ONVIF Profile S, ONVIF
Profile G, and Profile Q
2) Mobile Application Camera Mobile
TS/E/S41/71
j) Required Systems for Analytics
1) Interface: Advanced System Management Software

or Video management platform system
2) Open API: The API can transmit behavior alarm
data to third party
13.37. ELECTRICAL
a) General
1) Voltage Input 48 VDC, 2A, or 100-240

VAC, 2A @ 50/60 Hz
2) Voltage Input Range ±10%
3) Power Consumption Maximum 74VA / 74W
EXF1230-4N
Maximum 85VA / 77W
EXF1230-7N
4) Heater and Defroster Hardware controlled
b) Alarm
1) Unsupervised Detects open or closed

alarm state
2) Supervised Detects open and short
alarm state with external
1-kohm resistor to detect
alarm tampering
3) Input 3.5 VDC maximum, 3.5
mA maximum
4) Relay Output 30 VDC, 500 mA
maximum
TS/E/S41/72
13.38. MECHANICAL AND ENVIRONMENTAL
a) General Construction 316L stainless steel

b) Finish Electro-polish
c) Viewing Window High transmissivity glass
d) Operating Temperature –76º to 140ºF (–60º to
60ºC)
e) Cable Entry Dual, 0.75-inch (1.91 cm)
NPT threaded opening
f) Effective Projected Area (EPA) 191 square inches (1,232
square cm)
g) Integral Windshield Wiper Programmable with a
washer/wipe sequence
under a single command
14. Explosion Enclosure
All outdoor box IP camera where used to monitor explosive and

hazardous areas shall be of enclosed with Explosion proof aluminum
enclosures. Enclosure shall meets NEMA Type 4X and IP66 Standards
and be designed to meet the rigorous requirements of explosion proof and
dust-ignition proof suitable in hazardous locations. These enclosures are
to be waterproof and dust tight.
The Construction of enclosures shall be able to accommodate camera

and lens with different diameter combinations. Camera mounting sled and
track assembly shall allows fast, easy positioning of the camera and lens
and be securely locked in place. The enclosure shall completed with
explosion proof sealable fittings. Front window of the housing shall be fully
tempered plate glass
The enclosure shall meet the following certification

a) CE
b) UL/cUL
c) Classified by Underwriters Laboratories Inc. as to explosion and
fire hazard
d) Type 4X enclosure for use in hazardous locations
e) Class I, Groups C and D – Class II, Groups E, F, and G
f) Class I, Zone 1, AEx d IIB, Ex d IIB
g) 03 ATEX 0318166U
TS/E/S41/73
h) 0539 EX II 2 G EEx d IIB

i) EXII 2 D, IP 66
15. EDICATED CCTV NETWORK
15.1 The proposed network equipment shall include all centre and
edge switches. The system shall support Simple Network
Management Protocol (SNMP) for monitoring of devices status,
configuration.
15.2 The system shall include structure cabling system complete with all
required fibre optics and UTP LAN cables.
15.3 Network Switch
a) The Network Switch shall be high performance industrial

managed gigabit switch with PoE ports and 4 Shared SFP
ports
b) The network switch shall design for large scale IP
surveillance application and networks.
c) Each PoE ports shall satisfied the high power consumption
requirement of a PoE IP camera with selected PoE budget
d) All the network switch shall be secure in the junction box for
outdoor installation.
e) The network switch shall support rich network functionalities
such as port mirroring, VLAN, trunking, FastRing, rate
limiting, port security, SNMP etc.
f) The network switch shall include, but not limited to, the
following:
1) Selected PoE budget
2) 4k VLANS and 8k MAC addresses
3) Configurable through web-based or SNMP or CLI
4) Virtual LAN support (Port based VLAN and IEEE
802.1Q)
5) VLAN Q-in-Q support (For VLAN Stacking)
6) Rapid Spanning Tree Protocol (IEEE 802.1W) for
avoidance of network ring and redundancy (recovery
time <2s)
TS/E/S41/74
7) Port trunking (Link aggregation) for high-speed

backbone and redundancy (recovery time <10ms)
8) LACP support (Dynamic port trunking or aggregate)
9) QoS (Quality of Service) support (802.1p, DiffServ,
TOS, Port-based, MAC-based)
10) Rate Limiting (Broadcast storm control)
11) Port Mirroring
12) IGMP Snooping and Query functionality
13) Port security
14) Symmetric pause and backpressure flow control
15) Operating temperature of -30°C to 70°C
16) Operating Humidity of 0 to 95% non-condensing
17) MTBF >100,000 Hours
18) 10/100/1000 Electrical RJ45, DCE interface
19) SFP Fiber interface
20) Fast Forwarding Rate @ 64Bytes Throughput
21) 8k Mac address buffer
22) High share date buffer
23) Not less than 9.6kbytes Jumbo frame size
24) Store-and-forward Architecture
25) High Gpps non-blocking fabric
15.4 Centre switch
a) The switch shall come with Power over Ethernet (PoE)

features.
b) The switch shall support QOS with minimum 4 priority
queues. This allows High priority packet stream experiences
less delay inside the switch, which support lower latency for
certain delay-sensitive traffic.
c) The switch shall support port mirroring.
d) The switch shall support IGMP snooping v2/3
e) The switch shall support Broadcast/Multicast/unknown-
Unicast storm control
f) The switch shall support minimum 8 dual media ports for
flexible fiber connection.
TS/E/S41/75
g) The switch shall support multicast VLAN Registration (MVR)

to server content provider using multicast for video
streaming application in the network
h) The switch shall have minimum switching capacity as
following;
1) 8 port dual media GbE and 16 port GbE SFP with
non-blocking wise speed performance
2) 8 K MAC addresses
3) High Gbps Switch Capacity
4) Supports Jumbo frame support, up to 9.6K
i) The switch shall support VLAN, Port trunking with 12
trunking group.
j) The switch shall be rack-mounted with minimum MTBF of
10,000 hours.
k) The switch shall support network security as follow;
1) 802.1x access control for port based and MAC based
authentication
2) Management Access Policy Control
3) Access Control List
4) IP-MAC-Port binding
5) SSL/SSH for management
15.5 Edge switch
a) The edge switch shall be scalable and shall provide some

form of redundancy
b) The switch shall be rack-mounted with minimum MTBF of
10,000 hours.
c) The edge switch shall support, but not limit to the following
Layer 2 and Layer 3 Access Control Parameters or
combination for security classification of incoming packets.
d) The edge switch shall provide fastest forwarding rate of
Mbps for 24 port model with a highest forwarding bandwidth
of at Gbps.
e) The edge switch shall support multicast VLAN configuration
f) The edge switch shall support QoS
TS/E/S41/76
g) The edge switch shall support Multicast/Broadcast/U-known

Unicast Storm suppression.
h) The edge switch shall support port-mirroring.
i) The edge switch shall support network security as follow;
1) 802.1x access control for port based and MAC based
authentication
2) Management Access Policy Control
3) Access Control List
4) Static MAC
5) IP-MAC-Port binding
j) The edge switch shall support SNMP v1, V2c,V3c Network
management.
k) The edge switch shall support bandwidth control.
l) The edge switch shall support IGMP snooping
15.6 10 Port POE Network Switches Layer 2
a) The network switches shall have 8 10/100/1000 base T

copper ports
b) The network switches shall have 2 1000 base T SFP slots.
c) The network switches shall have 8 POE ports of IEEE 802.3

AT and IEEE 802.3 AF.
d) The network switches shall be managed and support GUI

and CLI command.
e) The network switches shall have a factory reset button.
f) The network switches shall have auto voltage input power

from 100~240 Vac 50/60Hz
g) The network switches shall have POE LED indicators to

show if the device uses POE.
h) The network switches shall have POE management build in

to check on POE consumption, limited the POE and On/Off
the POE port.
TS/E/S41/77
i) The network switches shall supports the telecom-level

Ethernet-ring protection protocol with a protection shift time
of less than 50ms, STP/RSTP, backup of active and standby
uplinks, and LACP link aggregation to cater to the
requirements of high reliability of carriers
j) The network switches shall have powerful ACL functions to

access and control L2-L7 data based on physical port,
providing carriers flexible and various policy control
methods.
k) The network switches shall supports various L2 multicast

functions such as IGMP-snooping, user fast-leave
mechanism and trans-vlan multicast copy to fully meet the
operation requirements of carrier’s IPTV
l) The network switches shall have a RJ45 console port
m) The network switches shall have build in surge protection up

to 2KV.
n) The network switches shall meet or exceed the following

design and performance specifications.
1) Fixed Port 8*10/100/1000Base-

TPoE ports(Data/Power)
2*100/1000Base-X uplink
SFP slot ports (Data)
1 * RS232 console port
(115200,N,8,1)
2) Ethernet Port 10/100/1000Base-

T(X),Auto-sensing,
Full/half duplex
MDI/MDI-X self-adaption
3) Twisted Pair Transmission 10BASE-T: Cat3,4,5,6

UTP(≤90 meter)
100BASE-TX:Cat6 or later
UTP(≤90 meter)
1000BASE-T:Cat6 or later
UTP(≤90 meter)
TS/E/S41/78
4) SFP Slot Port Gigabit SFP optical fiber

interface, default
matching optical modules
(optional order single-
mode / multi-mode, single
fiber / dual fiber optical
module. LC)
5) Optical Cable Multi mode: 850nm

0~550M,
Single mode:
1310nm 0 ~ 40KM,
1550nm 0 ~ 120KM.
6) Network Management Type L2+
7) Network Protocol IEEE802.3 10BASE-T;

IEEE802.3i 10Base-T;
IEEE802.3u 100Base-
TX/FX;
IEEE802.3ab 1000Base-
TX
IEEE802.3z 1000Base-X
IEEE802.3x
8) Forwarding Mode Store and Forward(Full

Wire Speed)
9) Switching Capacity 192Gbps
10) Forwarding Rate @64byte 14Mpps
11) MAC 8K
12) Buffer Memory 6M
13) Jumbo Frame 9.6K
TS/E/S41/79
14) PoE Management Total power limit of PoE

power supply
PoE output power
allocation, off& af& at
PoE output priority
configuration
PoE working status
Delay start of power
supply
Scheduling of PoE
operation and time
15) Max Power Per Port 30W; IEEE802.3af/at
16) Total PWR / Input Voltage 130W (AC 100-240V)
17) Power Supply Built-in power supply, AC

100~240V 50-60Hz 5.0A
18) Operation TEMP / Humidity -20~+55°C;5%~90%.RH

Non condensing
19) Dimension (L*W*H) 270*181*44.5mm
20) Lightning protection/ Lightning protection: 4KV

protection level 8/20us;
Protection level: IP30
21) Interface IEEE802.3X (Full-duplex)

Broadcast storm control
base on port speed
The speed limit of the
message flow in the
access port. The
minimum particle size is
64Kbps.
Port temperature
protection setting
Port green Ethernet
Energy-saving setting
TS/E/S41/80
22) VLAN 4K VLAN based on port,

IEEE802.1q
VLAN based on the
protocol
VLAN based on MAC
Voice VLAN, QinQ
configuration
Port configuration of
Access, Trunk, Hybrid
23) Port Aggregation LACP, Static aggregation

Max 13 aggregation
groups and 8 ports per
group.
24) Spanning Tree STP (IEEE802.1d),RSTP

(IEEE802.1w),MSTP
(IEEE802.1s)
25) Industrial Ring G.8032 ERPS),Recovery

time
Network Protocol less
than 20ms
255 Ring at most, Max
1024 devices per ring.
26) Multicast IGMP Snooping v1/v2,

Max 1024 multicast
groups, Fast log out
MLD Snooping
v1/v2,Multicast VLAN
27) Port Mirroring Bidirectional data

mirroring based on port
28) QoS Diff-Serv QoS,Priority

Mark/Remark
8*Output queues of each
port
802.1p/DSCP priority
mapping
Queue Scheduling
Algorithm (SP, WRR,
SP+WRR)
Flow-based Packet
Filtering
Flow-based Redirection
Flow-based Rate Limiting
TS/E/S41/81
29) ACL L2 to L4 packet filtering,

matching first 80 bytes
message. Provide ACL
based on MAC,
Destination MAC
address, IP Source,
Destination IP, IP
Protocol Type, TCP/UDP
Port, TCP/UDP Port
Range, and VLAN, etc.
Port-based Issuing ACL.
ACL based on port and
VLAN
30) Security User hierarchical

management
and password protection
SSH 2.0,SSL,Port
isolation, ARP message
speed limit
Broadcast storm
control, Backup
for host datum
IEEE802.1X & MAC
address authentication
Mac black holes, IP
source protection
AAA & RADIUS, MAC
learning limit
ARP inspection,
Anti-DoS attack
IP-MAC-VLAN-Port
binding
31) DHCP DHCP Client, DHCP

Snooping, DHCP Server,
DHCP Relay
TS/E/S41/82
32) Management Console/AUX

Modem/Telnet/SSH2.0
CLI
Web Management
(HTTPS)
Download &
Management on
FTP, TFTP, Xmodem,
SFTP,SNMP V1/V2C/V3
One-key recovery
NTP, System work
log, Ping Test
Cable Diagnose, LLDP
CPU instant utilization
status view
ONV NMS - Smart
Network Management
System Platform
(LLDP+SNMP)
15.7 28 Port POE Network Switches Layer 2

copper ports
b) The network switches shall have 2 combo port 10/100/1000

base T copper ports and SFP slots.
c) The network switches shall have 2 1000 base T SFP slots.
d) The network switches shall have 24 POE ports of IEEE

802.3 AT and IEEE 802.3 AF.
e) The network switches shall be managed and support GUI

and CLI command.
f) The network switches shall have a factory reset button.
g) The network switches shall have auto voltage input power

from 100~240 Vac 50/60Hz
h) The network switches shall have POE LED indicators to

TS/E/S41/83
i) The network switches shall have POE management build in

the POE port.
j) The network switches shall supports the telecom-level

k) The network switches shall have powerful ACL functions to

methods.
l) The network switches shall supports various L2 multicast

m) The network switches shall have a RJ45 console port
n) The network switches shall have build in surge protection up

to 2KV.
o) The network switches shall meet or exceed the following

1) Fixed Port 24*10/100/1000Base-

TPoE ports (Data/Power)
SFP slot ports (2* set
combo ports) (Data)
(115200,N,8,1)

T(X),Auto-sensing,
Full/half duplex
TS/E/S41/84
3) Twisted Pair Transmission 10BASE-T:Cat3,4,5,6

UTP(≤90 meter)
100BASE-TX: Cat6 or
later UTP(≤90 meter)
1000BASE-T: Cat6 or

interface, default matching
optical modules (optional
order single-mode / multi-
mode, single fiber / dual
fiber optical module. LC)
5) Optical Cable Multi mode: 850nm 0 ~

550M,
Single mode:
1310nm 0 ~ 40KM,
1550nm 0 ~120KM.

IEEE802.3u 100Base-
TX/FX;
TX
IEEE802.3x

Wire Speed)
10) Forwarding Rate@64byte 38Mpps
11) MAC 8K
TS/E/S41/85

power supply
PoE output power
allocation, off& af &at
PoE output priority
configuration
PoE working status
supply
Scheduling of PoE
operation and time

100~240V 50-60Hz 5.0A
18) Operation TEMP / Humidity -20~+55°C;5%~90% RH

Non condensing
19) Dimension (L*W*H) 440*290*44.5mm
20) Lightning protection / Lightning; protection:4KV

protection level 8/20us

based on port speed
message flow in the
access port. The
64Kbps.
Port temperature
protection setting
Port green Ethernet
TS/E/S41/86

IEEE802.1q
VLAN based on the
protocol
VLAN based on MAC
Voice VLAN, QinQ
configuration

Max 13 aggregation
group.

(IEEE802.1w),MSTP
(IEEE802.1s)
25) Industrial Ring G.8032(ERPS),Recovery

Network Protocol time less than 20ms

Max 1024 multicast
MLD Snooping

28) QoS Diff-Serv QoS, Priority

Mark/Remark
port
mapping
Queue Scheduling
Algorithm (SP, WRR,
SP+WRR)
Flow-based Packet
Filtering
TS/E/S41/87

based on MAC,
Destination MAC address,
IP Source, Destination IP,
IP Protocol Type,
TCP/UDP Port, TCP/UDP
Port Range, and VLAN,
etc. Port-based Issuing
ACL.
VLAN

management
SSH 2.0,SSL,Port
isolation, ARP
message speed limit
Broadcast storm
control, Backup
for host datum
IEEE802.1X & MAC
Mac black holes, IP
source protection
AAA & RADIUS,MAC
learning limit
ARP inspection,
Anti-DoS attack
IP-MAC-VLAN-Port
binding

DHCP Relay
TS/E/S41/88

Modem/Telnet/SSH2.0
CLI
Web Management
(HTTPS)
Download &
Management on
FTP, TFTP, Xmodem,
SFTP,SNMP V1/V2C/V3
One-key recovery
NTP, System work
log, Ping Test
status view
ONV NMS - Smart
Network Management
System Platform
(LLDP+SNMP)
15.8 36 Port POE Network 10G Switches Layer 2

copper ports
b) The network switches shall have 8 10/100/1000 base T SFP

slots.
c) The network switches shall have 4 1/10G SFP+ slots.
d) The network switches shall have 24 POE ports of IEEE

802.3 AT and IEEE 802.3 AF.
e) The network switches shall be managed and support GUI

and CLI command.
f) The network switches shall have a factory reset button.
g) The network switches shall have auto voltage input power

from 100~240 Vac 50/60Hz
h) The network switches shall have POE LED indicators to

TS/E/S41/89
i) The network switches shall have POE management build in

the POE port.
j) The network switches shall supports the telecom-level

k) The network switches shall have powerful ACL functions to

methods.
l) The network switches shall supports various L2 multicast

m) The network switches shall have a RJ45 console port
n) The network switches shall have build in surge protection up

to 2KV.
o) The network switches shall meet or exceed the following

1) Fixed Port 24*10/100/1000Base-

TPoE ports (Data/Power)
SFP slot ports (Data)
4*1/10G uplink SFP+
fiber slot ports (Data)
(115200,N,8,1)

T(X), Auto-sensing,
Full/half duplex
TS/E/S41/90

UTP(≤90 meter)
100BASE-TX: Cat6 or
1000BASE-T: Cat6 or

interface, default
matching
order single-mode/multi-

550M,
Single mode:
1310nm 0 ~ 40KM,
1550nm 0 ~ 120KM.

IEEE802.3u 100Base-
TX/FX;
TX
IEEE802.3ae 10GBase-
SR/LR;
IEEE802.3x

Wire Speed)
11) MAC 32K
TS/E/S41/91

power supply
PoE output power
allocation, off& af &at
PoE output priority
configuration
PoE working status
supply
Scheduling of PoE
operation and time

100~240V 50-60Hz 5.0A

Non condensing
19) s. Dimension (L*W*H) 440*290*44.5mm
20) Lightning protection / Lightning protection: 4KV


based on port speed
message flow in the
access port. The
64Kbps.
Port temperature
protection setting
Port green Ethernet
TS/E/S41/92

IEEE802.1q
VLAN based on the
protocol
VLAN based on MAC
Voice VLAN, QinQ
configuration

Max 13 aggregation
group.

(IEEE802.1w),MSTP
(IEEE802.1s)


Max 1024 multicast
MLD Snooping


Mark/Remark
port
mapping
Queue Scheduling
Algorithm (SP, WRR,
SP+WRR)
Flow-based Packet
Filtering
TS/E/S41/93

based on MAC,
IP Protocol Type,
ACL.
VLAN

management
SSH 2.0,SSL,Port
isolation, ARP
message speed limit
Broadcast storm
control, Backup
for host datum
IEEE802.1X & MAC
Mac black holes, IP
source protection
AAA & RADIUS,MAC
learning limit
ARP inspection,
Anti-DoS attack
IP-MAC-VLAN-Port
binding

DHCP Relay
TS/E/S41/94

Modem/Telnet/SSH2.0
CLI
Web Management
(HTTPS)
Download &
Management on
FTP, TFTP, Xmodem,
SFTP,SNMP V1/V2C/V3
One-key recovery
NTP, System work
log, Ping Test
status view
ONV NMS - Smart
Network Management
System Platform
(LLDP+SNMP)
15.9 40 Port Network 10G Switches Layer 3

copper ports
b) The network switches shall have 8 1/10G SFP+ slots.
c) The network switches shall be managed and support GUI

and CLI command.
d) The network switches shall have redundancy auto voltage

input power from 100~240 Vac 50/60Hz
e) The network switches shall have L3 routing function.
f) The network switches shall have Multicast routing of PIM-

Dense Mode and PIM-Sparse Mode
g) The network switches shall supports Ping, Traceroute,

Telnet, SSH, ACL based on IPv6 .
h) The Network switches shall supports MLD, MLD Snooping,

IPv6 static routing, RIPng, OSPFv3 and BGP4+, etc.
TS/E/S41/95
i) The network switches shall have powerful ACL functions to

methods.
j) The network switches shall supports various L2 multicast

k) The network switches shall have a RJ45 console port
l) The network switches shall have build in surge protection up

to 2KV.
m) The network switches shall meet or exceed the following

1) Fixed Port 32*10/100/1000Base-

TPoE ports (Data)
8*1/10G uplink SFP+
fiber slot ports (Data)
1 * Mini USB Port

T(X),Auto-sensing,
Full/half duplex

UTP(≤90 meter)
100BASE-TX: Cat6 or
1000BASE-T: Cat6 or

TS/E/S41/96

550M,single mode:
1310nm 0 ~ 40KM,
1550nm 0 ~ 120KM.
6) Network Management Type L3

IEEE802.3u 100Base-
TX/FX;
TX
IEEE802.3ae 10GBase-
SR/LR;
IEEE802.3x

Wire Speed)
11) MAC 512
14) Routing Table IPv4 32K
15) ARP Table IPv4 10K

100~240V 50-60Hz 1.0A
18) Operation TEMP / Humidity 0~+50°C;10%~90% RH

Non condensing
19) Dimension (L*W*H) 576x448x94 mm
TS/E/S41/97


based on port speed
message flow in the
access port. The
64Kbps.
Port temperature
protection setting
Port green Ethernet
22) VLAN 4K Active VLAN, QinQ &

Selective QinQ, GVRP,
Private VLAN
23) Reliability Static/LACP link

aggregation, Interface
backup BVSS virtual-
stacking
EAPS and ERPS
URPF, LLDPISSU
VRRP
1+1 power backup x.
Spanning Tree

25) Multicast PIM-SM, PIM-DM, IGMP

v1/v2/v3, IGMP
Snooping,
IGMP Fast Leave, MVR,
IGMP filter

mirroring
based on port
TS/E/S41/98
27) QoS CAR, HQoS,

MAC/IP/TCP/UDP/
VLAN/COS/
DSCP/TOS based QoS,
802.1P/DSCP priority re-
labeling, SP, WRR, and
“SP+WRR”, Tail-Drop,
WRED, flow monitoring
and traffic shaping
28) IPv4 Static routing, RIP v1/v2,

OSPF, BGP, PBR,
ECMP BFD for OSPF,
BGP
29) Security Port isolation, Port

security, and
“IP+MAC+port” binding,
MAC sticky DHCP
Snooping and option 82,
DAI & IP source
guard, PPPoE+,
IEEE 802.1x, Radius and
BDTacacs+
L2/L3/L4 ACL flow
identification and filtration
Anti-attack from
DDoS, TCP’s SYN Flood,
UDP Flood, etc.
Broadcast/multicast/
unknown unicast
storm-control MD5,
SHA-256,RSA-1024,
AES256,etc.

DHCP Relay
TS/E/S41/99

Modem/Telnet/SSH2.0
CLI
Web Management
(HTTPS)
Download &
Management on
FTP, TFTP, Xmodem,
SFTP,SNMP V1/V2C/V3
One-key recovery
NTP, System work log,
Ping Test
status view
System Platform
(LLDP+SNMP)
15.10 32 Port Network Switches Layer 2 (4 Copper and 28 SFP ports)

copper ports
b) The network switches shall have 28 10/100/1000 base T

SFP slots.
c) The network switches shall be managed and support GUI

and CLI command.
d) The network switches shall have a factory reset button.
e) The network switches shall have auto voltage input power

from 100~240 Vac 50/60Hz
f) The network switches shall supports the telecom-level

g) The network switches shall have powerful ACL functions to

methods.
TS/E/S41/100
h) The network switches shall supports various L2 multicast

i) The network switches shall have a RJ45 console port
j) The network switches shall have build in surge protection up

to 2KV.
k) The network switches shall meet or exceed the following

1) Fixed Port 4*10/100/1000Base-T

ports (Data)
28*100/1000Base-X
uplink SFP slot ports
(Data)
1 * RS232 console
port(115200,N,8,1)

T(X),Auto-sensing,
Full/half duplex
3) Twisted Pair Transmission 10BASE-T: Cat3,4,5, 6

UTP(≤90 meter)
100BASE-TX: Cat6 or
1000BASE-T: Cat6 or

TS/E/S41/101

550M,
Single mode:
1310nm 0 ~ 40KM,
550nm 0 ~ 120KM.

IEEE802.3u 100Base-
TX/FX;
TX
IEEE802.3x

Wire Speed)
11) MAC 8K
14) Total PWR / Input Voltage <60W (AC 100-240V)

100~240V 50-60Hz

Non condensing
17) Dimension (L*W*H) 440*225*44mm

TS/E/S41/102

based on port speed
message flow in the
access port. The
64Kbps.
Port temperature
protection setting
Port green Ethernet

IEEE802.1q
VLAN based on the
protocol
VLAN based on MAC
Voice VLAN, QinQ
configuration

Max 13 aggregation
group.

(IEEE802.1w),MSTP
(IEEE802.1s)
23) Industrial Ring G.8032(ERPS),Recovery


Max 1024 multicast
MLD Snooping

TS/E/S41/103

Mark/Remark
port
mapping
Queue Scheduling
Algorithm (SP, WRR,
SP+WRR)
Flow-based Packet
Filtering

based on MAC,
IP Protocol Type,
ACL.
VLAN

management and
password protection
SSH 2.0,SSL,Port
isolation ,ARP message
speed limit
Broadcast storm
control, Backup for host
datum
IEEE802.1X & MAC
Mac black holes, IP
source protection
AAA & RADIUS,MAC
learning limit
ARP inspection,
Anti-DoS attack
IP-MAC-VLAN-Port
binding
TS/E/S41/104

Snooping, DHCP
Server, DHCP Relay

Modem/Telnet/SSH2.0
CLI
Web Management
(HTTPS)
Download &
Management on FTP,
TFTP, Xmodem,
SFTP,SNMP V1/V2C/V3
One-key recovery
NTP, System work
log, Ping Test
status view
ONV NMS - Smart
Network Management
System Platform
(LLDP+SNMP)
15.11 32 Port Network Switches Layer 2 (4 Copper and 24 SFP ports)

copper ports
b) The network switches shall have 24 100/1000 base T SFP

slots.
c) The network switches shall have 4 10G SFP+ slots.
d) The network switches shall be managed and support GUI

and CLI command.
e) The network switches shall have a factory reset button.
f) The network switches shall have auto voltage input power

from 100~240 Vac 50/60Hz
TS/E/S41/105
g) The network switches shall supports the telecom-level

h) The network switches shall have powerful ACL functions to

methods.
i) The network switches shall supports various L2 multicast

j) The network switches shall have a RJ45 console port
k) The network switches shall have build in surge protection up

to 2KV.
l) The network switches shall meet or exceed the following

1) Fixed Port 4*10/100/1000Base-T

ports (Data)
24*100/1000Base-X
uplink SFP slot
ports (Data)
4* 10G uplink SFP+ slot
ports (Data)
1*RS232 console port
(115200,N,8,1)

T(X),Auto-sensing,
Full/half duplex
3) Twisted Pair Transmission 10BASE-T: Cat3,4,5, 6

UTP(≤90 meter)
100BASE-TX: Cat6 or
1000BASE-T: Cat6 or
TS/E/S41/106

optical modules
(optional order single-
mode / multi-mode, single
fiber / dual fiber optical
module. LC)

550M,
Single mode:
1310nm 0 ~ 40KM,
1550nm 0 ~ 120KM.

IEEE802.3u 100Base-
TX/FX;
TX
IEEE802.3x

Wire Speed)
11) MAC 8K
14) Total PWR / Input Voltage <60W (AC 100-240V)

100~240V 50-60Hz
TS/E/S41/107

Non condensing
17) Dimension (L*W*H) 440*225*44mm


based on port speed
message flow in the
access port. The
64Kbps.
Port temperature
protection setting
Port green Ethernet

IEEE802.1q
VLAN based on the
protocol
VLAN based on MAC
Voice VLAN, QinQ
configuration

Max 13 aggregation
group.

(IEEE802.1w),MSTP
(IEEE802.1s)
TS/E/S41/108
23) Industrial Ring G.8032

Network Protocol (ERPS),Recovery time
less than 20ms

Max 1024 multicast
MLD Snooping v1/v2,
Multicast VLAN


Mark/Remark
port
mapping
Queue Scheduling
Algorithm (SP, WRR,
SP+WRR)
Flow-based Packet
Filtering

based on MAC,
IP Protocol Type,
ACL.
VLAN
TS/E/S41/109

management and
password protection
SSH 2.0,SSL,Port
isolation, ARP message
speed limit
Broadcast storm
control, Backup for host
datum
IEEE802.1X & MAC
Mac black holes, IP
source protection
AAA & RADIUS,MAC
learning limit
ARP inspection,
Anti-DoS attack
IP-MAC-VLAN-Port
binding

Snooping, DHCP
Server, DHCP Relay

Modem/Telnet/SSH2.0
CLI
Web Management
(HTTPS)
Download &
Management on FTP,
TFTP, Xmodem,
SFTP,SNMP V1/V2C/V3
One-key recovery
NTP, System work
log, Ping Test
status view
ONV NMS - Smart
Network Management
System Platform
(LLDP+SNMP)
TS/E/S41/110
15.12 Thrulink VPN
The ThruLink VPN device shall allows secure communications to

be established over any standard, public or private TCP/IP
network. ThruLink shall performs behind firewalls, NAT devices and
through nearly any other type of network configuration and offers
encrypted communication for all TCP/IP protocols regardless of the
type of traffic. When deployed, ThruLink shall provides a secure
and encrypted tunnel for network communications that will not
affect TTL, UPnP, VLAN information, broadcast, multicast, or any
other traffic.
The Thrulink VPN shall include, but not limited to, the following:
a) Provides secure and encrypted communication via tunnelling
b) Optimized for video
c) “At a Glance” status check display
d) Rack mount style server
e) Easy to use GUI interface
f) Eliminates the need to make network changes
g) Failover functionality
h) Diagnostic tools: network traffic monitoring, basic traceroute
and ping function
i) Can be used for mobile 3G,4G,5G /LTE applications
j) DDNS, DHCP, SNMPv3
k) 250 Mbps unencrypted Bandwidth
l) 200 Mbps encrypted Bandwidth
m) 100 Max No. of Client Connections
n) AES up to 256 bit Encryption
o) Blowfish up to 128 bit Encryption
p) Camellia up to 256 bit Encryption
q) SNMPv3 Management
r) Mean Time Between Failure (MTBF) >100,000 Hours
s) It shall be in hardware form and able to work in environment
up to 60 deg C
t) It shall be able to select in bridge or router mode
u) It shall be firmware upgradable via TCP connection
v) Host can view the detail of the client connected
TS/E/S41/111
w) Host can perform batch firmware update and security code

to the client
x) The processor shall be at least Intel Pentium process with
dual core clock speed of 3Ghz
y) The VPN shall have at least 16GB of RAM
16. Mounting and Installation
16.1. General
a) The system shall be installed as specified.
b) The Sub-Contractor shall provide all necessary technical

installation documents, such as situation plans and
diagrams and shall be available for advice.
c) The installation of the system shall be in accordance with

generally accepted standards, such as;
1) NEC USA
2) VDE West Germany
3) DIN West Germany
d) The Sub-Contractor shall be responsible for the correct

location of all equipment. If there are any discrepancies
between the details in the proposal and the real dimension
of equipment, rooms, buildings etc. they must be reported
immediately upon discovery to the S.O.
e) All elements of the system shall be connected by the Sub-
Contractor or an authorized Sub-Contractor in order to
assure application of all the manufacturers application
guidelines and the high standard of workmanship necessary
in this type of system. The Sub-Contractor shall supervise
and check the performance of such an authorized Sub-
Contractor.
f) The electrical installation shall comply with SS 638 .
g) All circuit works below false ceiling shall be of concealed
conduit.
h) Data transmission cables for the system shall be of a type
recommended by the manufacturer.
TS/E/S41/112
i) The Sub-Contractor shall specify type and performance of

any special cables necessary to guarantee proper function
of his equipment. No substitute for these cables shall be
used without written approval by the manufacturer.
17. Commissioning
17.1. General
a) The Sub-Contractor shall be responsible for the

commissioning of the complete system(s).
b) Prior to commissioning, the Sub-Contractor shall submit a
time schedule for this work.
c) The system commissioning sequence shall include a trial
operation of all main equipment, including respective
software with all necessary adjustment by the Sub-
Contractor to ensure that the system is properly
commissioned.
17.2. Commissioning and start-up
a) A sufficient number of qualified commissioning engineers

shall be provided to ensure timely commissioning and
starting of the system.
b) The Sub-Contractor shall provide commissioning spares in
sufficient quantities. Spare parts marked for maintenance
shall not be used during this period.
c) After satisfactory completion of installation, commissioning
and start-up, the Sub-Contractor shall demonstrate that the
system successfully performs the tasks set forth in the
specification.
d) Tests, commissioning and system trial operations shall be
carried out jointly between the S.O. and the site engineer of
the Sub-Contractor.
e) After successful demonstration, the system shall be handed
over to the Owner's representatives.
TS/E/S41/113
18. 360o 12 MEGAPIXEL INDOOR VIDEO CAMERA
18.1. The 360o 12 MP indoor video camera (“360 degree camera”) shall
have no moving parts and be capable of providing 360 degree
surveillance with no blind spots.
18.2. Contractor shall ensure that the installed cameras contain the
latest firmware
18.3. Contractor personnel shall comply with all applicable state and
local licensing requirements.
18.4. Before permanent installation of the system, the Contractor shall

test the system in conditions simulating the final installed
environment , A report indicating successful test results shall be
produced
18.5. The network design and configuration shall be verified for

compatibility and performance with the camera(s).
18.6. Network configuration shall be tested and qualified by the

Contractor prior to camera installation.
18.7. Sub Contractor shall follow all Manufacturer installation instructions

and guidelines.
18.8. The 360 degree camera shall possess the following primary
characteristics:
a) employ a single image sensor capable of providing 4072H x
3046V resolution
b) provide dewarping software to convert the spherical video
image into a continuous flat view
c) H.264 and MJPEG compression
d) 12 fps for maximum resolution, 30 fps for 2MP resolutions and
below
e) unicast support up to 20 simultaneous users depending on the
resolution settings
f) multicast supported for the H.264 main camera stream
g) 0.1 lux minimum illumination, providing clarity in low light
h) local 3D dewarping providing 4x VCams at max 1MP each
i) 10x zoom with 3D client-side dewarping software
j) 10 configurable privacy regions
TS/E/S41/114
k) 8 polygonal Video Motion Detection regions

l) local alarm digital input and output
m) audio microphone input
n) built-in SD Card slot. Supports cards up to 128 GB capacity.
Speed class 10 or higher required
o) image snapshot transferred by email
p) operate on an embedded Linux platform
q) include a built-in web server
r) PoE (IEEE standard 802.af) or 12VDC powered
18.9. VIDEO
Imager
a) Sensor: 12.4 MP (approximately) 1/2.3" EXMOR
R CMOS Sensor
b) Minimum illumination: 0.10 lux (50 IRE, F/2.0)
c) Scanning: Progressive
18.10. Image Control Settings
a) Automatic white balance (AWB): 2,500K to 8,000K

(approximately)
b) Privacy zone definition: 10 configurable zones
c) Wide Dynamic Range (WDR): Electronic WDR 60 dB
d) Brightness
e) Sharpness
f) Contrast
g) Saturation
h) Exposure compensation
i) Compression – image quality Multi-levels of
compression and frame rate
adjustment
TS/E/S41/115
18.11. Lens: 185o fixed, F/2.0
Angle of view: 180o horizontal, 180o vertical (hemispherical)
18.12. Video Streams
a) The 360 degree camera shall support the transmission of seven

configurable video streams, whose properties are detailed in
Video Stream properties.
b) Available compression types:
i) H.264, available in 6 streams
ii) MJPEG, available in 1 stream
iii) Available resolutions:
1) H.264 compression
a) 3200 x 3000 (9.6 MP)
b) 2528 x 2376 (6 MP)
c) 2080 x 1960 (4 MP)
d) 1472 x 1384 (2 MP)
e) 1056 x 992 (1 MP)
f) 544 x 512 (1/4 MP)
2) MJPEG compression
a) 2080 x 1960 (4 MP)
b) 1472 x 1384 (2 MP)
c) 1056 x 992 (1 MP)
d) 544 x 512 (1/4 MP)
c) Bit rate
i) Range: 0.8 Mbps – 10 Mbps (Constant Bit Rate)

ii) H.264:
1) Constant Bit Rate
2) Fixed Quality
3) GOP length
4) Maximum frames per second
TS/E/S41/116
iii) MJPEG :
1) maximum frames per second
2) quality
d) Frame rate: 0-30 fps
e) Presentation: Video views shall be available in both fisheye and

dewarped (flat) views as follows:
i) Fisheye views: 3 streams, one of which shall be

MJPEG
ii) Dewarped views: 4 streams of independent
VCams
f) Video streams shall support ONVIF profile S.
18.13. Video Viewing
Video and snapshots shall be capable of being accessed through

the following means:
a) JPEG images accessible through a web browser

b) Video streaming through an available media player
c) ONVIF driver
d) PSIA driver
18.14. Storage and Recording
The 360 degree camera shall have the facility for onboard SD card
storage.
18.15. Video Motion
a) Video motion analytics shall be pre-loaded in the 360

degree camera.
b) The 360 degree camera shall have the ability to detect
motion within up to 8 user defined areas of the video image.
18.16. Pan Tilt Zoom (PTZ) Functionality - The 360 degree camera shall
support 10x digital zoom with 3D client side dewarping software.
TS/E/S41/117
18.17. ADDITIONAL FEATURES
a) Alarm – The 360 degree camera shall have a contact input and
contact output for alarm or control.
18.18. Event management – The 360 degree camera shall perform

selected response actions when triggered by selected inputs as
follows:
a) Response actions:
1) contact output
2) e-mail via SMTP
3) local recording
b) Trigger inputs:
1) motion in a pre-defined area
2) contact input
3) HTTP event
4) network connection lost
18.19. Audio – The 360 degree camera shall have audio capability.
a) Input options:
1) Line level/external microphone input (3.5 mm jack); 600-

ohm differential, 1 V p-p maximum
2) via RTSP using G.711 codec
3) via ONVIF Profile S
18.20. Integrations – The 360 degree camera shall have available an API
and an SDK to support integrations with third party system,
including VMS and network storage providers.
TS/E/S41/118
18.21. NETWORK
a) Connectivity: 1000BASE-TX Ethernet with RJ-45 connector

b) Protocols supported
Protocol (IP) v4, User Datagram Protocol (UDP)
2) Configuration: Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol
(DHCP)
3) Web services: Hypertext Transfer Protocol (HTTP)
4) Network services: Domain Name System (DNS),
Message Protocol (ICMP), Universal Plug and Play
(UPnP)
5) Media: Real-Time Transport Protocol (RTP), Real-
Time Streaming Protocol (RTSP)
6) Multicast: Internet Group Management Protocol
(IGMP)
7) Simple Mail Transfer Protocol (SMTP)
c) Unicast - The 360 degree camera shall support 20

simultaneous users of independent streams.
d) Multicast - The 360 degree camera shall support multicast
for an H.264 main camera stream.
e) Security
The 360 degree camera shall have a user configurable
password feature.
18.22. CAMERA SOFTWARE
The 360 degree camera shall have a built in web server which
supports browser-based configuration of the camera.
The camera’s web server shall allow access to camera information

and all primary software functions to include:
a) Image settings
b) Network settings
TS/E/S41/119
c) Alarm settings, triggers, and actions

1) Triggers:
a. motion
b. network connection lost
c. contact input
2) Actions:
a. Email (SMTP)
b. Record to SD card
d) Camera settings
1) Frames per second
2) Quality
3) Bit rate control
4) Compression settings
e) Clock settings
f) Video stream settings
1) Resolution
2) Compression
g) SD card recording settings
h) Factory reset
i) Image regions
i) Privacy zones
ii) Motion detection zones
The camera’s web server shall support up to 20 clients

simultaneously over the network.
TS/E/S41/120
18.23. Setup and Maintenance
The contractor shall offer a setup and maintenance software tool to

implement the following actions:
a) Scan local network to discover compatible cameras

b) Remotely change and configure camera settings, including
network settings
c) Remotely import or export network settings
d) Upgrade camera firmware
e) Remotely send commands to camera
18.24. Diagnostics
a) The 360 degree camera shall have a self-monitoring function

which automatically resets the camera in the event of
malfunction.
b) The 360 degree camera shall have a diagnostics tool to test
hardware functionality, accumulate statistics, and diagnose
hardware faults.
c) The 360 degree camera’s SD card shall allow the creation and
storage of a boot-up function for diagnostics and fault finding.
18.25. ELECTRICAL
a) Power
i) Source Options
1) 12 VDC
2) PoE (IEEE standard 802.3af) – 48 VDC nominal
ii) Power Consumption (maximum):
1) 12 VDC: 7.32 W
2) POE: 8.4 W
b) Connectors
i) Ethernet: RJ-45 connector
ii) External power (12 VDC): 2.1 mm input jack
iii) External input/output: 6-pin 1.5 mm Phoenix
style connector
TS/E/S41/121
iv) Analog video: BNC test port for

production, not
available for normal
operation
18.26. MECHANICAL AND ENVIRONMENTAL

a) Housing Material: Polymer
b) Anti-tamper: Torx security locking screw
c) Dimensions: (179 mm(L) x 160 mm(W) x 70
mm)(H)
d) Temperature : 0° C to 40° C
(operating and storage)
e) Relative Humidity: 0 – 98% non-condensing
18.27. Video Stream Properties
The camera shall have the following video stream properties:
Video Stream 1 Codec : H.264 in 9.6 MP, 6 MP, 4 MP, 2 MP
Video Stream 1 Multi-levels of compression and frame rate

:
Compression Level adjustment
Fisheyes at: 2 MP (1472 x 1384),4 MP (2080 x
Video Stream 1 Pixel
: 1960), 6 MP (2528 x 2376), 9.6 MP (3200 x
Resolution
3000)
Video Stream 2 Codec : H.264 in 4 MP, 2 MP, 1 MP and ¼ MP

:
Video Stream 2 Pixel Fisheyes at: ¼ MP (544 x 512), 1 MP (1056 x
:
Resolution 992), 2 MP (1472 x 1384), 4 MP (2080 x 1960)
TS/E/S41/122
Video Stream 3 Codec : MJPEG in 4 MP, 2 MP, 1 MP and 1/4 MP

:
Fisheyes at: ¼ MP (544 x 512), 1 MP (1056 x
Video Stream 3 Pixel
: 992) , 2 MP (1472 x 1384), 4 MP (2080 x
Resolution
1960)
Vcam Stream 4, 5, 6, 7
: H.264
Codec
Vcam Stream 4, 5, 6, 7 Multi-levels of compression and frame rate
:
Vcam Stream 4, 5, 6, 7 4x independent onboard dewarped VCams at
:
Pixel Resolution ¼ MP (640 x 480) and 1 MP(1280 x 720)
Maximum Frame Rate : 30 fps
Settings include brightness / contrast /
saturation / exposure compensation,
Image Control :
compression quality and wall / ceiling / table
mount
Image Enhancement : Electronic WDR 60 dB

10x zoom with 3D client-side dewarping
PTZ Functionality :
software
Able to support existing NUS OCS and other
VMS / NVR Supported :
VMS / NDVR/ NVR platform
Internet Explorer 9 and above , Edge 25,

Web Browser Compatibility : Firefox 23 and Chrome 29 or above.
Plug-in required for full functionality
Up to 20 simultaneous users depending on the
Unicast :
resolutions settings
Multicast : Supported for H.264 main camera stream
Include Constant Bit Rate Control and
Bit Rate Control :
Constant Quality Control
TS/E/S41/123
19. INDOOR / OUTDOOR IP PANORAMIC NETWORK CAMERAS
o) Equipment and materials used shall be standard components that

are manufactured and available for purchase as standard
replacement parts as long as the product is commercially available
from the manufacturer
p) All manufactured products shall be thoroughly tested and proven in

actual use
q) The IP Panoramic indoor/outdoor multi-sensor camera system shall

transparently integrate video across all sensor’s in the camera
presenting a seamless fully stitched and blended total resolution of
12 megapixel (MPx), 2048 x 1536 x 4.
r) The IP Panoramic indoor/outdoor multi-sensor camera system

technology shall include options for 180º, 270º and 360º camera
functionality as well as provide pan and tilt adjustment of the
camera module for 180º degree models and pan for 270º and 360º
modules.
s) In conjunction with a Video Management System “VMS” that shall

integrates the Panoramic software and any toolkit, the camera shall
be able to support seamless panoramic views and simultaneous
Immersive Views that allow for the pan, tilt and zoom in, across the
entire field of view.
t) The IP Panoramic indoor/outdoor multi-sensor camera system

housing technology shall meet the IK10 impact specification as well
as standard mounting hardware capabilities that would include but
not be limited to Pendant, Surface, and Ceiling mount hardware.
u) The IP Panoramic indoor/outdoor multi-sensor camera system shall

provide advance technology that seamlessly delivers extended
True Wide Dynamic Range (WDR), low-light performance, and anti-
bloom technology, operating in a simultaneous mode of operation.
these shall include 3D noise filtering, smooth response to
illumination changes, and improved tone mapping to retain color
accuracy and overall image contrast. The technology shall delivers
the best possible image when a single scene contains bright areas,
shaded areas, and intense light, better than the human eye.
TS/E/S41/124
v) The IP Panoramic indoor/outdoor multi-sensor camera system shall

provide a slot for a removable, local storage medium (Micro SD) to
capture video clips of varying lengths in accordance with the
ONVIF G Profile. Any Video Management System “VMS” that is
conformant to this standard can initiate storage and retrieval of
video, for instance to safeguard against network failure.
w) The IP Panoramic indoor/outdoor multi-sensor camera system shall

provide a service video stream in addition to and independent of
the video streams.
x) The IP Panoramic indoor/outdoor multi-sensor camera system shall

provide advanced low-light capabilities for day/night models with
sensitivity down to 0.03 lux for the 180º and 0.05 lux in the 270º
and 360º models respectively while in night mode.
y) The IP Panoramic indoor/outdoor multi-sensor camera system shall

support industry standard Power over Ethernet Plus (PoE+) IEEE
802.3at, Class4 to supply power to the camera over the network.
z) The IP Panoramic indoor/outdoor multi-sensor camera system shall

provide options for clear and smoked lower domes.
aa) The IP Panoramic indoor/outdoor multi-sensor camera system shall

provide Wide Dynamic Range (WDR) up to 120 dB with dynamic
adjustments through the User Interface across the cameras field of
view.
bb) The IP Panoramic indoor/outdoor multi-sensor camera system shall

have a mechanical IR cut filter mechanism for increased sensitivity
in low-light installations. Set points for the IR cut filter feature shall
be configurable through an embedded Web browser.
cc) The IP Panoramic indoor/outdoor multi-sensor camera system shall

support H.264 High, Main or Base profiles, using constrained
variable bit rate (CVBR) as the default, variable bit rate (VBR), or
constant bit rate (CBR) with target range.
dd) The system shall deploy smart Compression Technology lowers

bandwidth and storage requirements by up to 70%. It shall allows
the user to make intelligent decisions regarding storage savings
and image quality.
ee) The IP Panoramic indoor/outdoor multi-sensor camera system shall

provide 802.1x port security to establish point-to-point access
through a wired or wireless port using Extensible Authentication
Protocol (EAP).
TS/E/S41/125
ff) The IP Panoramic indoor/outdoor multi-sensor camera system shall

conform to the ONVIF Profile S and Profile G, and support open
architecture best practices with a published API available to third-
party network video recording and management systems. A
Panoramic SDK that would enable Video Management Systems to
d-warp the streams from this camera into panoramic and
Immersive Views shall be made available.
gg) The IP Panoramic indoor/outdoor multi-sensor camera system shall

support SNMP v2c and v3.
hh) The IP Panoramic indoor/outdoor multi-sensor camera system shall

support IPv6 configurations in conjunction with IPv4.
ii) The IP Panoramic indoor/outdoor multi-sensor camera system shall

provide Auto or Manual exposure settings for adjusting the amount
of light detected by the camera sensor.
jj) The IP Panoramic indoor/outdoor multi-sensor camera system shall

provide user-selectable configurations for day/night auto mode.
Transitional levels shall be used to set the desired light level for
transitioning to night mode. Transition detect time shall control the
length of time that the camera is exposed to a light level before
changing to color or monochrome mode.
kk) The IP Panoramic indoor/outdoor multi-sensor camera system shall

be factory focused, requiring no manual adjustment of focus in the
field.
ll) The IP Panoramic indoor/outdoor multi-sensor camera system shall

provide User and Group settings to assign permissions and access
levels to the camera.
mm) The IP Panoramic indoor/outdoor multi-sensor camera system shall

be based on a 1/3.2-inch high resolution CMOS sensor and
includes four of them in the cameras standard configuration.
nn) The IP Panoramic indoor / outdoor network camera system shall

include a camera module, back box, and lower dome.
oo) The IP Panoramic indoor/outdoor multi-sensor camera system shall

support standard IT protocols.
pp) The IP Panoramic indoor/outdoor multi-sensor camera dome

system shall provide a 1000Base-T network interface.
TS/E/S41/126
qq) The IP Panoramic indoor/outdoor multi-sensor camera system shall

be plenum-rated
rr) The IP Panoramic indoor/outdoor multi-sensor camera system shall

be vandal and tamper resistant with an impact resistance of IK10
(20 Joules).
ss) The IP Panoramic indoor/outdoor multi-sensor camera system shall

be NEMA-4X, IP66 rated.
tt) The IP Panoramic indoor/outdoor multi-sensor camera system shall

provide for a standards based HTML interface.
uu) The IP Panoramic indoor/outdoor multi-sensor camera system shall

provide Window Blanking Technology for user defined privacy
areas.
vv) The IP Panoramic indoor/outdoor multi-sensor camera system shall

feature open architecture connectivity for third-party software
recording solutions allowing integration into virtually any IP-based
system. It shall compatible with existing NUS, Office of Security
video management systems. Contractor shall include all the
necessary software for the installation
ww) The IP Panoramic indoor/outdoor multi-sensor camera system shall

provide integrated video analytics with the ability to provide
hardware and software alarms based on the analytic behaviors
presented.
xx) Analytics software for the IP Panoramic indoor/outdoor multi-sensor

camera system shall include:
a. Abandoned Object: Detects objects placed in a defined zone

and triggers an alarm if the object remains in the zone longer
than the user-defined time allows. An airport terminal is a
typical installation for this behavior. This behavior can also
detect objects left behind at an ATM, signaling possible card
skimming.
b. Adaptive Motion: Detects and tracks objects that enter a scene
and then triggers an alarm when the objects enter a user-
defined zone. This behavior is primarily used in outdoor
TS/E/S41/127
c. Camera Sabotage: Detects contrast changes in the field of

view. An alarm is triggered if the lens is obstructed with spray
paint, a cloth, or a lens cap. Any unauthorized repositioning of
the camera also triggers an alarm.
d. Directional Motion: Generates an alarm in a high traffic area
when a person or object moves in a specified direction. Typical
installations for this behavior include an airport gate or tunnel
where cameras can detect objects moving in the opposite
direction of the normal flow of traffic or an individual entering
through an exit door.
e. Loitering Detection: Identifies when people or vehicles remain
in a defined zone longer than the user-defined time allows. This
behavior is effective in real-time notification of suspicious
behavior around ATMs, stairwells, and school grounds.
f. Object Counting: Counts the number of objects that enter a
defined zone or cross a tripwire. This behavior might be used to
count the number of people at a store entrance/exit or inside a
store where the traffic is light. This behavior is based on
tracking and does not count people in a crowded setting.
g. Object Removal: Triggers an alarm if an object is removed
from a defined zone. This behavior is ideal for customers who
want to detect the removal of high value objects, such as a
painting from a wall or a statue from a pedestal.
h. Stopped Vehicle: Detects vehicles stopped near a sensitive
area longer than the user-defined time allows. This behavior is
ideal for airport curbside drop-offs, parking enforcement,
suspicious parking, traffic lane breakdowns, and vehicles
waiting at gates.
yy) The IP Panoramic indoor/outdoor multi-sensor camera system shall

meet or exceed the following design and performance
specifications.
1. Camera Specifications
a. Imaging Device 1/3.2-inch
b. Imager Type CMOS
c. Imager Readout Progressive scan
d. Highest Resolution 12 MP, 2048 x 1536 x 4
e. Signal-to-Noise Ratio >50 db
TS/E/S41/128
f. Sensitivity
1. 180º Type f/2.0, 0.3 lux color (33 ms),
0.14 lux mono (33 ms)
2. 270º, 360º Types f/2.5, 0.5 lux color (33 ms),
0.2 lux mono (33 ms)
g. Day/Night Capabilities Yes
h. Mechanical IR Cut Filter Yes, (ON/OFF/AUTO selectable)
with different set points
i. Wide Dynamic Range 120 dB
2. Lens Specifications
a. Length
1. 180º Type f/2.0 ~ 4.8 mm

2. 270º, 360º Type f/2.5 ~ 2.7 mm
b. Field of View
1. 180º Type 180º horizontal, 41º vertical

2. 270º Type 270º horizontal, 73º vertical
3. 360º Type 360º horizontal, 73º vertica
3. Video Specifications
a. Video Streams Set of streams to deliver full

resolution views; secondary
stream that comprises a lower
resolution mosaic of above
streams
b. Frame Rate(s) User selectable up to 12.5
frames per second (fps)
c. Video Encoding H.264 High, Main, or Base
profiles; MJPEG (mosaic stream
only); Smart Compression
Technology
TS/E/S41/129
d. Bit Rate Control Default maximum for

Constrained Variable Rate
(CVBR) at maximum resolution
and frame rate 28 Mbps
e. Network
1. Supported Protocols TCP/IP, UDP/IP (Unicast,

Multicast IGMP), UPnP, DNS,
DHCP, RTP, RTSP, NTP, IPv4,
IPv6, SNMP v2c/v3, QoS, HTTP,
HTTPS, SSH, SSL, SMTP, FTP,
ARP, ICMP, and+ 802.1x(EAP)
2. Users
i. Unicast Up to 20 simultaneous
depending on the resolution
settings, and frame rate
ii. Multicast Unlimited H.264
f. Security Access Password protected
g. Software Interface Web browser view and setup
h. System Integration Existing VideoXpert, Digital
Sentry
i. Open API Integration API, Panoramic SDK,
ONVIF Profile S and G
j. Minimum System Requirements
1. Processor Intel® Core™ i3 processor, 2.4
GHz
2. Operating System Microsoft Windows® 10,
Windows® 7 (32- and 64-bit),
linux OS or Mac® OS X
10.9 (or later), Microsoft
Windows Server
3. Memory 16 GB RAM
4. Network Interface 100 Megabyte (or greater)
TS/E/S41/130
5. Monitor LCD Minimum of 1024 x 768

resolution, 16- or 32-bit
pixel color resolution
6. Web Browser Internet Explorer® 11.0 (or
latest); Mozilla® Firefox® 35 (or
later); Google® Chrome 40 (or
later)
k. Analytics software
1. Open API The API can transmit behavior
alarm data to third-party
applications
4. Electrical Specifications
a. Network Port RJ-45 connector for 1000Base-T

1 Gigabit/sec Auto MDI/MDI-X
PoE+; Class 4
b. Cabling Type Category 6 or better
c. Input Power PoE+ (IEEE 802.3at, Class 4)
d. Power Consumption
1. Without Heater 17 watts
2. With Heater 23 watts
e. Local Storage Micro SD, SDHC
f. Alarm
1. Unsupervised Detects open or closed alarm
state
2. Supervised Detects open and short alarm
state with external1-kohm
resistor to detect alarm
tampering
3. Input 3.5 VDC maximum, 3.5 mA
maximum
g. Relay Output ±32 VDC maximum, 150 mA
maximum
TS/E/S41/131
h. Audio
1. Streaming Bidirectional: full or half duplex
2. Input/Output 600 ohm differential, 1Vp-p max.
signal level
3. Compression G.711 PCM 8 bit, 8 kHz mono at
64 kbit/s
5. Back box and lower dome specifications
a. Indoor Vandal, In-Ceiling
1. Installation Single back box for suspended

or hard ceiling applications
2. Back Box Plenum rated
3. Cable Entry 25 mm conduit attachments on
side and top of back box
4. Operating Temperatures –10º to 50ºC
5. Operating Humidity 15 to 85%, RH non-condensing
6. Impact Resistance IK10
7. Shock and Vibration EN50155 Category 1, Class B;
IEC 60068:2-6 and 2-27, ISTA-
2A, Sequence 5, MIL810G
8. Construction Alodine aluminum
b. Indoor Vandal, Surface Mount
1. Installation Attaches to standard 4-inch

square outlet box and 2-gang
electrical box; or 25 mm conduit
attachments on side back box;
wire entry through grommet
on top of back box
TS/E/S41/132

IEC 60068:2-6 and 2-27, ISTA-
c. Indoor Vandal, Pendant
1. Installation 32mm conduit/pipe attachment

IEC 60068:2-6 and 2-27, ISTA-
a. Environmental Vandal, In-Ceiling
1. Installation Single back box for

suspended or hard ceiling
applications
2. Back Box Plenum rated
3. Cable Entry 25 mm conduit
attachments on
side and top of back box
5. Operating Humidity 10 to 95%, RH non-
condensing
7. Shock and Vibration EN50155 Category 1,
Class B; IEC 60068:2-6
and 2-27, ISTA-2A,
Sequence 5, MIL810G
9. Ingress protection IP66
TS/E/S41/133
b. Environmental Vandal, Surface Mount
1. Installation Attaches to standard 150mm

square outlet box and 2-gang
electrical box
2. Cable Entry 25 mm conduit attachments on
side and top of back box. Wire
entry through grommet on top of
back box
4. Operating Humidity 10 to 95%, RH condensing
IEC 60068:2-6 and 2-27, ISTA-
c. Environmental Vandal, Pendant
1. Installation 40mm thread for use with wall

mounts
3. Operating Humidity 10 to 95%, RH condensing
IEC 60068:2-6 and 2-27, ISTA-
TS/E/S41/134
2. Dome System Specifications
a. Indoor Vandal, In-Ceiling 5.90cm above ceiling,

lower dome 9.85cm below
ceiling, 16.15cm diameter
b. Indoor Vandal, Surface Mount 14.65cm overall length
(including dome) by
15.93cm diameter
c. Indoor Vandal, Pendant 17.80cm overall length
(including dome) by 15.75
cm diameter
d. Environmental Vandal, In-Ceiling 5.90cm above ceiling,
lower dome 9.85cm below
ceiling, 16.15 cm diameter
e. Environmental Vandal, Surface 14.65cm overall length
cm diameter
f. Environmental Vandal, Pendant 17.80cm overall length
cm diameter
3. Mechanical Specifications
a. Dome Attenuation
1. Clear f/0.0 light loss
2. Smoked f/1.0 light loss
b. Pan Adjustable (All Models) 370º
c. Tilt Adjustable (180 Model) 0º - 180º
TS/E/S41/135
zz) Certifications/Ratings
a. CE, Class A
b. FCC, Class A
c. UL/cUL Listed
d. ICES, Class A
e. KCC
f. C-Tick
g. CB Scheme ITE
h. NEMA Type 4X, and IP66 rating (Environmental Vandal)
i. RoHS, Lead Free, REACH
j. MTBF ≥ 200,000 POH (Reporting standard is RELEX Modeling)
20. Training
20.1. The Sub-Contractor shall provide a description of the scope of

recommended system training necessary for the Owner's
representatives.
20.2. The scope of training should include training sequences available

at the Sub-Contractor's and manufacturer's premises and training
sequences on-site as well.
20.3. The number of persons attending the system training courses shall
be determined by the Owner.
20.4. The on-site training provided for the Owner personnel shall
precede the hand-over of the system.
20.5. The Sub-Contractor shall provide technical training and system

operation instructions to the Owner's personnel during the
commissioning phase and performance tests.
20.6. System operating instructions shall be given by an experienced

and competent engineer familiar with the installed system.
TS/E/S41/136
21. Maintenance
21.1. General
a) The Sub-Contractor shall provide detailed information

concerning his maintenance organization and after sales
service, the qualifications and size of the staff employed on
these duties.
b) The Sub-Contractor shall submit a proposal for a

comprehensive and non-comprehensive maintenance
contract.
c) The maintenance contract shall include all material and

labour to keep the system in perfect working condition and
to perform the maintenance and test procedures as required
by national and local codes and as recommended in the
Sub-Contractors standard documentation.
d) The quality of the equipment shall be such as to require low

maintenance efforts.
e) The maintenance schedule for the different system parts

offered shall be clearly stated at time of tendering.
21.2. Spare parts
a) The Sub-Contractor shall specify the necessary system

spare parts most likely to be needed for a period of two
years. This list shall show an itemized set of spare parts
and be supplied with the tendering proposal.
b) All spare parts shall be on site when the commissioning

work is completed and shall be handed over to the Owner
with the system.
c) The list of spare parts shall also be included in the proposed

maintenance contract.
21.3. Test equipment
a) The Sub-Contractor shall specify the necessary test

equipment most likely to be needed for correct maintenance
work.
TS/E/S41/137
b) The Sub-Contractor shall submit a list of test equipment and

special tools that are necessary to enable the Owner's
personnel to carry out maintenance.
c) The list of test equipment shall also be included in the

proposed maintenance contract.
22.1 General
a) Upon request, the Sub-Contractor/ the manufacturer shall

provide legally valid copies of certificates necessary to
demonstrate the certification of his equipment.
b) The factory quality assurance concept (programme) shall be

defined in a Quality Manual of similar document in which the
organizational plan, means and procedures are fully
described. These documents should be made available
upon Owner's request.
c) Outdoor equipment must be rated for the following

environmental conditions:
Max. temperature 60oC

Min. temperature 10oC
Max. relative humidity 98%
d) Locations where the Sub-Contractor requires air-

conditioning to be available before he can start his work on
site, should be clearly stated at the time of tender.
e) A provisional system test shall be established showing that

the system is capable of meeting the original Tender
Specifications in terms of:
1) Quantity
2) Functions
3) Design
4) Quality
TS/E/S41/138
22.2 Factory tests
a) All system equipment shall be thoroughly inspected and

functionally tested at the manufacturer's factory and facilities
prior to shipment to the site.
b) All system equipment delivered to site shall bear the

manufacturer's identification and any other data that may be
required to identify the materials and equipment.
22.3 Hardware and Software availability
a) The Sub-Contractor/ manufacturer shall guarantee hardware

availability including mechanical components over a period
of 10 years.
b) The Sub-Contractor/ manufacturer shall clearly state the

delivery time for replacement of system components listed
as recommended spare parts.
c) The Sub-Contractor/ manufacturer shall clearly state the

delivery times for replacement of system components which
are not listed as recommended spare parts.
d) The Sub-Contractor/ manufacturer shall clearly state the

delivery times for replacement of recommended system test
equipment.
e) The Sub-Contractor/ manufacturer shall guarantee software

(programme packages) availability including updated
versions(compatible) over a period of 10 years. The Sub-
Contractor is required to work with other NSC for the
integration of the system with other computer system, ie. the
Sub-Contractor shall release their software protocol.
22.4 Guarantee
a) The Sub-Contractor/ manufacturer shall guarantee that the

entire system complies with the major applicable codes and
standards, as well as with the specified and implied
qualities, and that the operation of the system will be proper
and faultless.
b) The Sub-Contractor shall submit with the tender details of

the local representation of his organization.
TS/E/S41/139
c) The Sub-Contractor shall provide with the tender details of

the service, maintenance and training facilities available in
Singapore.
d) The Sub-Contractor shall provide full guarantee for all

system components in hard-and software for a period of at
least 15 months.
e) During the stated period of guarantee, the supplier shall

replace free of charge all components failing or
malfunctioning. However, system components damaged or
lost during transport or on site prior or after installation by
negligence of others shall be exempt from guarantee.
23. Signage
The following notice shall be prominently displayed at a suitable internal

location to Architect's and employer acceptance.
Size: 300mm width x 200mm height x 6mm thick
Materials & Design: 6mm thick acrylic with rear-printed silkscreen

graphics with white background
Font: Frutiger 55 Roman and Frutiger 65 Bold
TS/E/S41/140
The following notice shall also be prominently displayed at a suitable

external location to Architect's and employer acceptance.
Size: 450mm wide x 600mm high x 3mm thk
Materials & Design: 3mm thick aluminium sign panel with all artwork in
3M diamond grade reflective vinyl sticker; compliant
with LTA Specifications for traffic instructional signs
Font: Frutiger 55 Roman and Frutiger 65 Bold
Fixing Method: As per LTA Drawings LTA/SDRE14/10/SUP 4 to 7

to correspond with size of sign
TS/E/S41/141
Upon completion of the underground pipe and cables laying, proper

identification tag with engraved words mounted on RC block of 150mm by
150mm for the particular underground services that being installed. All the
engraved tag, location shall submit for Engineer approval prior to delivery
Marker shall install at every 20m interval straight length, turning, joint pit, draw
pit, angle pit and tee pit
OCS FO OCS FO
CABLES CABLES
1200mm Depth
JOINT PIT
1200mm Depth
OCS FO OCS FO
CABLES CABLES
FO CABLE
1200mm Depth 1200mm Depth
OCS FO
CABLES
DRAW PIT
Sample of the Identification Tag for CCTV Fibre Optic
TS/E/S41/142
25. Dismantling of Existing Closed Circuit Television Camera
Contractor shall take due precaution and without damage the existing
closed circuit television camera when dismantling for either relocation or
return to end user. The closed circuit television camera cables shall
dismantle from closed circuit television camera cable terminate to the
switch or to network digital video recorder. Cutting of cables at the
devices or equipment, such as closed circuit television camera, switch or
network digital video recorder, is not acceptable and allowed. Cables
shall retrieve from end to end of devices or equipment. Any damaging to
the equipment or devices, contractor shall bear the costs to replace it.
TS/E/S41/143
SECTION 44 - MULTI-CABLES TRANSIT SYSTEM (MCT)
1. General
1.1 The scope of work to be covered in this section shall include the supply,
delivery, installation, testing and commissioning and the final handing over of
the Multi-Cables Transit System as indicated in the tender drawings and
described herein this Specification.
1.2 The works covered in this section is considered as specialist works; the
Tenderer shall seek competent specialist in this field to prepare submission
for the works as part of the overall communication tender submission.
2. Technical Requirements
2.1 General
This describes the general requirements for the supply of Multi-cable Transit
Frames and modules.
The transit system shall meet at least the following characteristics:
a) Fire and smoke resistant of at least 3 hours
b) Withstand Water and Gas pressure ingress of at least 6bar and 4bar
respectively.
c) Insert modules rubber material with material hardness not more than
75 IRHD to ensure water/gas tightness as well as conform to shape of
irregular cable due to possible twisting.
d) Frames and Modules shall be also designed as a mechanical sealing

system from hazards induced by dust as well as rodent protection.
2.2 Multi-cable Transit Frame, Module Blocks & Accessories
2.2.1 Transit Frame
The main contractor shall be required to design, manufacturer, supply

and install multi-cable transit system to prevent ingress of
underground water based on UPVC sleeve pipe layouts.
Frame type must be at least of hot-dipped Galvanized material.
Frame shall be form built suitable for casting type into reinforced
concrete wall.
TS/E/S44/1
Frame type shall be delivered to complete with insert modules and

accessories and comprised the following sizes (LxH):
a) 400mm x 490mm
b) 475mm x 610mm
c) 660mm x 490mm
d) 660mm x 610mm
e) 680mm x 610mm
f) 885mm x 730mm
g) 885mm x 1090mm
h) 920mm x 850mm
i) 1090mm x 370mm
j) 1295mm x 1090mm
k) 1500mm x 1570mm
2.2.2 Cable Insert Module Block
The Contractor is to complete the MCT system delivery including

frame, cable insert module and accessories.
Module blocks shall be of multi-diameter EPDM, halogen free

material. Each cable insert module block shall be able to cater to a
wide range of different cable diameter, simply by peeling layers from
the module block.
Module blocks type proposed by the Contractor shall be able to adapt

to cable tolerance.
Module shall be fitted with removable solid center core to allow for
adding new cables without the need for replacing solid block with
insert module. This is to facilitate future instant sealing of cable from
all services without the need to revert to MCT system supplier for
exchange of insert module with blank block.
Module block material shall be of non-toxic and non-flammable
TS/E/S44/2
2.2.3 Accessories
Compression system shall be of wedge type in singular component

and shall be made from EPDM rubber with hot dip galvanized fittings.
The compression system shall offer full flexibility to be installed in

either top, center or bottom position to facilitate cable entry position.
Compression system shall be simple and easy to install and remove

using standard industrial hand-tool without the need for trade specific
tools.
Tenderer shall need to propose compression system displaying the

above capabilities for tender evaluation purpose.
Stay plates shall be hot-dip galvanized mild steel materials.
2.3 All installation method shall be approved by Engineer before any actual work
or casting.
2.4 Certification
Successful tenderer shall submit test certificates/reports by recognized organization,

as well as drawing and installation method statement to show that proposed multi-
cable transit system complied with standards outlined in this section for Engineer
approval prior to delivery.
TS/E/S44/3
SECTION 46 - MOTION SENSOR DETECTION SYSTEM
1 GENERAL
1.1 The work shall include supply, installation, testing and commissioning
of a complete standalone motion sensor system with a fifteen (15)
months warranty against manufacturer’s defect as specified. The
system shall be installed at each individual location as specified in the
tender drawings.
1.2 The electrical contractor shall design the quantity and location of the
motion sensors for the effective performance. No cost shall be claim
from the SO for the additional of the sensor
1.3 All items of accessories, fitting, apparatus or labour whether specified

in detail or not but which is necessary for the satisfactory installation
and functioning of the system shall form part of the scope of work.
1.4 The entire system shall be fully tropicalised and capable of

withstanding exposure to local climatic conditions and in wet and
humid environment such as toilets. The system shall be operating
normally at the ambient temperature range of 0°C to 45°C and relative
humidity of 10% to 100%.
1.5 All wiring shall be of 2.5 mm2 single core PVC cable as specified and
shall be run in concealed hot-dipped galvanised conduits comply to
BS 4568, Class 4, connecting the components such as lighting, control
panel, power supply unit and remote monitoring station.
1.6 A dedicated 13A Switched socket outlet shall be provided for each of
the system to power up the power supply unit. Where the toilet abuts
service duct, the socket outlet shall be metal clad type installed within
the service duct and next to the power supply unit. In cases where the
service duct does not abut the toilet, the socket outlet shall be of
weatherproof type to minimum IP55 and mounted at high level and
next to the power supply unit.
1.7 The standalone motion sensor system shall provide remote monitoring
at the FCC room through LCD panel. The system must also provide
interfacing with the IBMS showing the zone, area and location that the
sensor is activated. Interfacing areas will be at the FCC room.
1.8 The standalone motion sensor system shall provide contacts for the
interfacing of other trade, such as mechanical fans, sensor tap, heater,
AV system etc.
1.9 For EIB system, the motion sensor/presence sensor will be as

specified in that particular section.
TS/E/S46/1
2 EQUIPMENT LIST AND FUNCTIONAL REQUIREMENTS
Motion detectors are to be provided for auto on/off of the lighting and other
equipments as specified.
2.1 The areas for motion detection system shall deploy in areas that
include seminar rooms, lounge and dining, meeting/conference room,
toilets, staircases, common area and other area as indicated.
2.2 All motion detectors shall operate on a standalone system in all areas.
2.3 Motion detectors in areas shall be linked to the control panel to sense
the mode of occupancy and giving output to trigger the field
equipments. During unoccupied mode, the light will be off for the
energy saving when there it is occupied to on the light to its required
time setting.
2.4 The contractor shall ensure the correct application of motion detection
system shall be used for different types of room.
2.5 The Dual Technology sensor shall be capable of detecting presence

in the control area by detecting doppler shifts in transmitted
ultrasound and passive infrared heat changes.
2.6 Sensor shall utilize Dual Sensing Verification Principle for coordination
between ultrasonic and PIR technologies. Detection verification of
both technologies must occur in order to activate lighting systems.
Upon verification, detection by either shall hold lighting on.
2.7 Sensor shall have a retrigger feature in which detection by either

technology shall retrigger the system on within 5 seconds of being
switched off.
2.8 Ultrasonic sensing shall be volumetric in coverage with a frequency of

40 KHz. It shall utilize Advanced Signal Processing, which
automatically adjusts the detection threshold dynamically to
compensate for constantly changing levels of activity and airflow
throughout controlled space.
2.9 Sensor shall be capable of corner mounting to a wall or ceiling in

immediate activation upon entry, coverage of both technologies must
be complete and overlapping throughout the controlled area.
2.10 To avoid false ON activations and to provide immunity to RFI and

EMI, Detection Signature Analysis shall be used to examine the
frequency, duration, and amplitude of a signal, to respond only to
those signals caused by human motion.
TS/E/S46/2
2.11 Sensor shall operate at 24 VDC/VAC and halfwave rectified and

2.12 The PIR technology shall utilize a temperature compensated, dual

wavelengths and filter short wavelength IR, such as those emitted by
the sun and other visible light sources. The lens shall have grooves
facing in to avoid dust and residue build up which affects IR reception.
2.13 The lens shall cover up to 2000 sq ft for walking motion when
2.14 Sensors shall have an additional single-pole, double throw isolated

relay with normally open, normally closed and common outputs. The
isolated relay is for use with HVAC control, data logging, and other
control options. Sensor shall have 8 occupancy logic options for
customized control to meet application needs.
2.15 Sensors shall utilize technology to optimize time delay and sensitivity
settings to fit occupant usage patterns and shall be selectable with a
DIP switch. Sensors shall have a time delay that is adjusted
automatically (with the setting) or shall have a fixed time delay of 5 to
30 minutes, set by DIP switch.
2.16 Sensors shall feature a walk-through mode, where the field system
turn off 3 minutes after the area is initially occupied if no motion is
detected after the first 30 seconds. An override ON function shall be
provided for use in the event of a failure. The sensor shall have
manual on function that is facilitated by installing a momentary switch.
2.17 Sensor shall have a built-in light level sensor that works from 10 to
300 footcandles
2.18 Each sensing technology shall have an LED indicator that remains
2.19 To ensure quality and reliability, sensor shall be manufactured by an

ISO 9002 certified manufacturing facility and shall have a defect rate
of less than 1/3 of 1%.
2.20 Sensor shall have standard 5-year warranty and shall be UL and CUL
listed.
TS/E/S46/3
3 MULTI FUNCTION MOTION SENSOR
3.1. The multi function sensor shall be of wireless network with Artificial
Intelligent and Internet of Things (IoT) technology. The sensor shall
be of smart integrated type comprises of occupancy sensor, photo
sensor and thermal sensor. Sensor is to be of compact size, all in
one.
3.2. The applications of the sensors shall include but not limited to lighting
services. Sensor will install in the air-conditioning area and common
public area as indicate in the drawing.
3.3. Occupancy detection should be of passive infra-red motion sensor.

Photo sensor for Daylight or Ambient light detection and temperature
detection using thermal sensor. Multi function sensor shall be able to
interface via wireless. Sensor shall be of low power consumption.
3.4. Multi function sensor shall be of input voltage of 230VAC and low
power consumption, operation temperature between -35oC to +70oC
and humidity from 20% to 95% RH non-condensing.
3.5. The multi function Sensors shall be ceiling mounted next to the light
fixture with adjustable angle and direction of detections and with
manual overriding switch.
3.6. The multi function sensor height of installation shall able to cater to
height range of 2.5m to 12.5m and the sensor sensing distance shall
cover at least 1m to 8m range.
3.7. The deployment of multi function sensor to the light fixture shall be
flexible in its configuration such that a single sensor can either
connect to a group or a single fixture. The coverage range of sensors
shall be arranged in overlapping manner to avoid functional lapse.
3.8. The multi function sensors shall be able to trigger the artificial light
dimming and mixing of daylight automatically to meet the pre-set lux
level in the space
3.9. The light fixture shall be addressable to the Data Server via the
connection of device controller to each light fixture.
3.10. The multi function sensors shall be able to be paired into different
fixture zones, thereby allowing for zonal control and for multiple
fixtures to share occupancy sensing data and respond simultaneously
to occupant motion patterns in the zones.
3.11. The multi function sensor can be used in conjunction with venturi
valve / variable air volume box /Fan Coil unit / Ventilation Fan control
via Bus interface to BMS/IBMS or standalone control
TS/E/S46/4
4 SUBMISSION REQUIREMENTS
The following documents shall be submitted before construction and upon

completion of testing and commissioning:
3.1 Shop drawing submission for layout plans indicating the location
control panel and power supply unit location for all the motion sensor
system in A1 or A0 plans.
3.2 Shop drawing submission for schematic diagram showing typical

system configuration.
3.3 Catalogue submission for complete system and component, product

literature, code compliance and project reference.
3.4 Five complete sets of instruction manuals for the system and
components.
3.5 Five sets of as-built layout plans and system schematic diagram in
both paper format and soft copy in CDROM.
3.6 A statement, duly signed by the Contractor, for the system guarantee
of 15 month or until end of DLP, whichever longer is applicable, from
the date of acceptance by the user and the S.O.
TS/E/S46/5
SECTION 62 - FIRE RESISTANT SYSTEM
1. General
1.1. This section cover the supply, delivery, installation, testing,

commissioning and twelve (12) months free maintenance and
warranty for fire resistant system
1.2. The system of standard and modified constructions shall be tested

and modifications assessed and listed under the Product Listing
Scheme (PLS).
1.3. The board should preferably be Green Label certified by the

Singapore Environment Council.
1.4. The fire resistance cladding system shall comply to the following
standard:
a) BS 476: Part 20 Fire tests on building materials and

structures. Method for determination of the fire resistance of
elements of construction.
b) BS 476: Part 24 Fire tests on building materials and

ventilation ducts
c) BS 5234: Part 2 Partitions (including matching linings).

Specification for performance requirements for strength and
robustness including methods of test
d) BS 5588: Part 5 Fire precautions in the design, construction

and use of buildings. Access and facilities for fire-fighting, BS
9999: Code of practice for fire safety in the design,
management and use of buildings
e) BS 9999: Code of practice for fire safety in the design,

f) EN 13501-1 EN 13501-1+A1 Fire classification of construction

products and building elements - Part 1: Classification using
test data from reaction to fire tests
g) BS EN 1366-3 : Fire Resistance Tests for Services Installation

- Penetration Seal.
h) BS EN 1336-4 : Fire Resistance Tests for Services

Installation- Linear Joint Seals
i) ISO 834: Fire resistance tests - Elements of Building

Construction.
TS/E/S62/1
j) ISO 6944: Fire resistance tests -- Ventilation ducts
k) ISO TR 1896 Products in fibre-reinforced cement -- Non-

combustible fibre-reinforced boards of calcium silicate or
cement for insulation and fire protection.
l) ASTM D5116-90: Standard Guide for Small-Scale

Environmental Chamber Determinations of Organic Emissions
from Indoor Materials/Products.
m) ASTM E119 : Standard Test Methods for Fire Tests of

Building Construction and Materials. The Standard will not be
acceptable for load-bearing elements.
n) ASTM E814 : Standard Test Methods for Fire Tests of

Penetration Fire stop Systems
o) Latest Fire Code : Fire Safety and Shelter Department.
1.5. The manufacturers shall be certified to ISO 9001 for the products
offered.
1.6. The original material supplier shall submit proof of relationship with
the manufacturing entity, and the manufacturer’s internationally
recognized Production Quality and Environmental Control
Certifications. Where the material is produced under a contract
manufacturer, documentation on the original material supplier’s
quality control shall be submitted for verification. Where required, an
on-site factory audit shall be arranged.
1.7. Sub-Contractor shall submit all the necessary documents, valid

system Certificate of Conformity (CoC) accordance to BS 476: Part
24, sample prototype verifiable to laboratory test setup, shop drawing
with installation details, and mock up.
2. Materials
2.1. System
a) The fire rated duct shall be a composite system cladded over

the steel duct. The system shall comprise fire rated board
fixed to galvanised steel framing consisting of collar
galvanised steel channel and continuous corner angles
minimum L-50x50x0.6mm, transverse board joints shall be
coincided with steel channel collar, all secured in place
encompassing the steel duct with M4 self-tapping screws
at 200mm centres and the cavity between board and steel
duct filled with mineral wool of 100kg/m3 density.
TS/E/S62/2
b) Minimum material thicknesses:
Fire resistant Board Channel size Mineral wool

2-hour 15mm U-50x50x0.6mm 50mm
c) The board butt-joints shall be treated by either sealing

with approved acrylic fire rated sealant or protected with
approved cover strip 100mm wide x 9mm thick. The board
unsupported area between steel supports shall not exceed
1.5m2.
d) When the duct passes through compartment wall, approved

collar150mm wide by thickness of fire resistant boards shall be
installed at penetration junction of the wall/floor.
e) The steel rod supports if unprotected shall be installed

not exceeding 1220mm centres and suitably sized so that it
does not exceed the permissible tensile of 10N/mm2 2 hours
fire resistance or 6N/mm2 for 4 hours fire resistance.
f) The entire construction including steel support framings,

hanging bracket, hanger size and interval shall be suitably
sized to the correspondence duct shall adhere strictly to the
fire test prototype and allowable modifications of the
manufacturer’s specifications to achieve performance criteria
of stability, integrity and insulation for internal and external fire
exposure in accordance with BS 476: Part 24.
g) The system construction shall include an approved access

hatch construction of the same fire resistance to facilitate
maintenance and inspection.
h) Gaps and imperfections of fit, junction between the structure

and board shall be duly sealed with approved acrylic fire rated
sealant.
i) Where required the boards’ joints may be concealed with joint

compound and joint finishing tapes to create the desire flush
seamless finish to receive architectural finishes. Otherwise
joints and screw heads may be left unfinished.
TS/E/S62/3
2.2. Fire rated board
a) The fire rated board shall be asbestos-free, fibre / autoclaved

calcium silicate boards and not affected by moisture. Upon
drying, the board shall regain all its original properties and
strength.
b) The fire rated board shall be tested for strength and

robustness in accordance to BS 5234: Part 2 and complying
with BS 5588: Part 5 Appendix A and ISO TR 1896 for
bending strength and moisture movement, all in order to
comply with the dry construction requirements for substituting
masonry construction as stipulated in the Fire Code.
c) The technical properties of the boards shall be the following as

minimum:
Alkalinity pH 12
Modulus of Elasticity 4995N/mm2 (longitudinal),

(EN310:1993) 4389/mm2 (transverse)
Flexural Strength F(EN 10 N/mm2 (longitudinal),
310: 1993) 6N/mm2 (transverse)
Tensile Strength T (EN 7.16 N/mm2 (longitudinal),
310: 1993) 4.94N/mm2 (transverse)
Thermal Conductivity 0.242 W/mok (ASTM
(40oC) C518:1991)
Nominal moisture
6%
movement at EMC
Meet requirement for ISO TR 1896 for Bending Test
(Clause 5.4, 5.4.1 & 5.4.2)
Meet requirement for ISO TR 1896 for Moisture

Movement Test (Clause 5.9 & 6.8)
TS/E/S62/4
2.3. Fire Stop Materials
a) All electrical, telecoms and services duct openings, including

cable/pipe penetrations in floors and walls shall be sealed with
approved type firestop sealing compounds / systems, applied
in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.
b) Openings for pipes that are greater than 150 mm diameter

shall be sealed with intumescent fire prevention mastic,
applied in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. The
opening shall be prepared to accept a layer of compressed
"Rockwool" inserted inwards leaving a depth of 50mm by at
least 25mm width (thickness) for fire sealant to be properly
applied over the mineral wool, trowelled smooth at the top to
flush with the finished floor level, thus achieving a minimum
fire resistance of 2 hours.
c) Unless otherwise stated, the materials must be capable of

providing at least 2 hours fire resistance unless otherwise
stated, tested and certified to BS 476 Part 20 and approved by
the Local Authorities.
d) The material shall be capable of adhering onto the concrete

structure, forming an effective and tight seal against both fire
and smoke/fume.
e) A suitably qualified, experienced and competent applicator

shall be engaged to carry out the installation. The applicator
must be conversant with both the material used and the
application to be carried out. The Sub-Contractor shall use
only skilled and experienced workmen for installation of fire
stop materials.
TS/E/S62/5
3. Installation
3.1. All services penetration through the fire rated enclosure shall be
sealed with approved fire stopping systems, including and not limited
to the following:
a) General non-combustible buildings services – approved PLS

listed fire stopping systems
b) Combustible pipes – approved PLS listed collars
3.2. Installation work shall be carried out by manufacturer’s trained

installers. Proof of training shall be provided.
3.3. During construction, on-site installation audit shall be conducted by

manufacturer’s authorised auditors.
3.4. Manufacturer shall check the fire resistant cladding system and issue
certificate of proper installation.
3.5. The completed installations shall be issued with Declaration of

Compliance (DoC) document certifying that the construction has been
installed according to the system prototype and allowable
modifications. The document shall be endorsed by a Professional
Engineer in the mechanical discipline in addition to the manufacturer’s
endorsement.
3.6. All the labelling and identification per SCDF requirements
3.7. Sub-contractor shall submit as-built drawings with the fire rated duct
system highlighted clouded
TS/E/S62/6
SECTION 65 - COMPUTER CABLINGS (CAT 6A / CLASS EA – UTP) COPPER

AND OM3/OS2 FIBRE SYSTEM
1. GENERAL
1.1. This section sets out the requirements for supply, install, testing and
commissioning and defects liability for CAT 6A / CLASS EA Unshielded
Twisted Pair (UTP) computer structured cabling system and associated
works.
1.2. The cabling system shall support implementing a single structured wiring
infrastructure and complete integrated multi-media communication
networking system, which includes text, graphics, images, voice and video.
1.3. The system shall:
c) Facilitate expansion from the initial proposed system by only the

addition of modules.

growth.
1.4. The cabling system shall be expected to have a life span of at least 25
years and it shall have provision to support future growth requirements and
increasing needs for higher bandwidth.
1.5. The cables and installation shall meets to the standards and regulations :
d) BS EN 50174-1: Information technology. Cabling installation.

Installation specification and quality assurance
e) BS EN 50174-2: Installation technology. Cabling installation.

Installation planning and practices inside buildings
TS/E/S65/1
f) BS EN 50174-3: Installation technology. Cabling installation.

Installation planning and practices outside buildings
g) EIA/TIA-492-AAAB: Detail Specification for 50-µm Core

Diameter/125-µm Cladding Diameter Class Ia Graded-Index
Multimode Optical Fibers
h) ANSI/TIA 568-C.0: Generic Telecommunications Cabling for

Customer Premises
i) ANSI/TIA 568-C.1: Commercial Building Telecommunications

Cabling Standard
j) ANSI/TIA-568-C.2: Balanced Twisted-Pair Telecommunication

Cabling and Components Standard
k) ANSI/TIA-568-C.3: Optical Fiber Cabling Components Standard
l) ANSI/TIA 569: Telecommunications Pathways and Spaces
m) ANSI/TIA-606: Administration Standard for Telecommunications

Infrastructure
n) EIA/TIA 607: Grounding and Bonding Requirements for

o) IEC 60793-2-10:Optical fibres - Part 2-10: Product specifications -

Sectional specification for category A1 multimode fibres
p) IEEE 802.3: IEEE Standard for Ethernet
q) IEEE 802.5: IEEE Standard for Local Area Networks: Token Ring
nd
r) ISO/IEC 11801: 2 Edition, Amendment 2 International Standards.
Information technology – Generic cabling for customer premises
1.6. The manufacturer shall be certified to ISO 9001 Quality Management

System in the design, manufacture and assembly of the structured cabling
system.
TS/E/S65/2
2. SUBMISSIONS
2.1 Sub-Contractor shall submit all the necessary documents and sample for
approval by engineer before carry out the installation
a) Detailed products specification. Conformity and test reports.
b) Certificate of Approved/Certified Installer granted by the manufacturer.
c) Samples of cables, patch cords, connectors, patch panels, power

bars, cable management.
d) Statement of Method of Work. Schedule of execution with the

expected start and end dates.
e) Detailed layout plans, schematic diagrams, LAN Room layout,

rack/cabinet mounting details, details of rack system complete with
patch panels, cable management, power bars, earth bars, etc.
2.2 Sub-Contractor shall submit all the necessary documents, drawing and
operation manual after the work completion
a) Installation details.
b) Testing and commissioning procedures.
c) Proposed numbering and labelling scheme.
d) Certification file.
e) As-built plans and test reports.
2.3 Warranty
a) A 25 year passive product warranty for the Structured Cabling

System backed by the Manufacturer and a 25-year application
assurance on the application described in this Technical
Specification, from the date of Certified Practical Completion of the
Contract.
b) The following copper and fibre sub-system warranties apply to both

standard and intelligent products.
(1) Copper and fibre patch cords are considered as replaceable

items and are specifically excluded from the 25 year product
guarantee due to the normal wear and tear that can occur.
TS/E/S65/3
(2) Copper sub-system
a. The manufacturer must guarantee that the products

referenced within the specific Warranty Modules (Class
EA System) when correctly installed in accordance
with installation guidelines:
i) Will be free from product defects in materials and

workmanship
ii) Are guaranteed to exceed:

 Class EA Channel and Permanent Link as
specified in ISO/IEC 11801:2002/A1:2008 and
 A2:2010
 Augmented Cat 6A Link and Channel
requirements as specified in ANSI/TIA/EIA-
568-C.2:2009

iii) Supports the following application (not limited):
 10baseT Ethernet
 100baseTX Fast Ethernet
 1000baseTX Gigabit Ethernet
 10G base-T Ethernet IEEE 802.3an
 155Mbit ATM
 1.2Gbit ATM

iv) For a duration of 25 years
b. All components including the Cat6A patch cords have

to be produced by the same cabling system
manufacturer to ensure warranted performances and
applications against the standards.
TS/E/S65/4
3. MATERIALS AND SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
3.1. Cable Distribution Subsystem
(1) The cable distribution subsystem described herein includes

the computer outlets (RJ45 jacks) in the work area as well as
the cables and transition connectors installed between
outlets and RJ45 patch panels in the LAN Room. In addition,
the cabling system shall be made up of various modular
patch panels, patch cords used to configure horizontal cable
connections in the LAN Room.
(2) The cable distribution subsystem shall consist at a minimum

of the following:
i) RJ45 Cat 6A jacks and outlets.
ii) 4-pair Cat 6A UTP non-plenum cables.
iii) Cable labelling and identification consistent with

ANSI/EIA/TIA 606.
iv) RJ45 patch panels.
v) Fibre Patch Panel.
vi) 3 metre length Cat 6A UTP patch cords complete with

RJ45 jack at both ends which shall be factory
terminated and tested.
3.2. Copper Sub-system
a) This specification covers the design, supply, installation, testing and

commissioning of a Category 6A cabling system.
b) The Category 6A universal cabling system shall function for voice,

data and LAN communications, for video applications etc.
c) The cabling system is also open to new applications which require

a Class EA / Cat 6A cabling system as defined in the latest editions
of the standards: ISO/IEC11801:2002/A1: 2008 and A2:2010 and
EIA/TIA 568-C2.
d) The terminology and references in this document as well as the

Link/Channel Performance figures for Class EA are based on
ISO/IEC 11801:2002/A1:2008 and EIA/TIA 568-C2.
e) All proposed components including the patch cords have to be

produced by the same manufacturer.
TS/E/S65/5
3.3. System Performance
a) Horizontal Cabling
(1) Horizontal distribution cable
a. The horizontal 4 pair cable shall be Category 6A UTP

to meet the quality and performance criteria necessary
to ensure correct operation of the installation for
frequencies up to 500 MHz and to ensure the
compliance with the warranty.
b. The installation design and routing of all cables shall

take account of the manufacturer limits for the
continued performance of the cables and the
c. The cable shall be a 4 twisted pair cable with AWG 23

conductors. Having an external sheathing in a material
that does not give off toxic fumes (Zero Halogen) in
case of fire and offer flame propagation retardant
properties. The cable shall be compliant to the IEC
60332-1 standard.
d. Traceability numbers should accompany the cable

supplied from the manufacturers packaging to assist in
quality validation of the installed cable.
e. Independent certification shall be provided by the

manufacturer to show compliance to ISO/IEC
11801:2002/ A1 2008 and A2/2010 or EIA/TIA 568-C2
Channel headroom requirements for both Alien NEXT
(A-NEXT) and Alien FEXT (A-FEXT) parameters.
f. All pairs must have a fitted impedance of 100 Ohms,

with a tolerance of +/- 5 Ohms.
g. Conductor pairs shall be identified by insulation

utilising standardised colour code (Blue/White,
Orange/White, Green/White, Brown/White).
(2) Modular RJ45 Jack
a. The connector shall be fully compliant to the IEC

60603-7-41 standard that defines the Cat.6A connector
to be used to form a Class EA channel as specified in
the ISO/IEC 11801 standard.
b. Independent certification shall be provided by the

manufacturer to demonstrate full compliance to the
IEC 60603-7-41 standard.
TS/E/S65/6
c. The connector shall support PoE (IEEE 802.3af) and

PoE Plus (IEEE 802.3at – 15 Watts per pair)
applications and shall pass all the tests for PoE Plus
requirements according to IEC 60512-99-001 Ed.1).
d. Each connector shall provide both T568A and T568B

colour code identification for the IDC contacts at the
rear of the connector. Termination is to be in
accordance with the T568B colour code.
Reassignment of pairs is forbidden.
e. All conductors from the 4 pair cable are to be

terminated on the respective contacts.
f. To avoid installation errors, pair assignment in the wire

organiser of the Snap-In jack must be identified using
colours which match the cable pairs.
g. The Snap-In format of the connector shall make it

compatible with the whole range of modular structural
hardware including patch panels, outlets and
Consolidation Point boxes.
h. In the case of a 3 or 4 connector Channel with

Consolidation Point (CP), a specific version of
connector having IDC contacts suitable for the
termination of stranded cable shall be used at the
Telecom Outlet / Computer Outlet and/or at the
presentation panel.
(3) Telecom Outlet and Computer Outlet
a. UK format 86x86mm cover plate shall be proposed.

Angled (45x45) faceplate outlet modules are fitted with
removable shutters, which can be replaced by colour-
coded shutters (red, green, blue, yellow) available from
the manufacturer standard product range.
b. The presentation of the outlet shall provide for labelling

and identification. A transparent window shall protect
the labelling tag.
c. The choice between single and dual RJ45 outlet

modules shall be provided.
(4) 24 port modular copper Patch Panels
a. Patch panels must have 19" equipment practice

dimensions to permit mounting in standard cabinets,
racks or bays.
b. Unloaded angled 24 port Snap-in format (Modular)

patch panels in white colour fitted with white shutters to
protect the RJ45 ports shall be used.
TS/E/S65/7
c. Optional coloured shutters need to be available to

easily indicate different services when required.
d. The panels features a screen printed numbering

systems for labelling.
e. Each patch panel shall provide a means to locate and

clamp the incoming cables without causing damage to
the cable or affecting the performance of the Link.
f. The installer must avoid any risk of cable compression

during the installation or termination of the cables.
g. The dimensions of the patch panel shall be 19" 1 U

high.
(5) Patch cords
a. The cable used for the patch cords shall be Category

6A LSZH UTP patch cable. To achieve a Class EA
Channel performance all data patch cords shall be
Category 6A rated.
b. The patch cord cable shall be made from LSZH

material with a print legend indicating type of cable,
brand name, production code and metre mark.
c. All patch cords shall be compliant to the IEC 60332-1

standard to offer flame propagation retardant
properties.
d. The standard colours offered for the LSZH flame

retardant jacket shall be orange and dark grey.
e. Red, Blue, Green and Yellow colours shall also be

available on demand.
f. The default lengths available from stock shall be 1, 2,

3, 5, 10 and 20m. Other lengths shall be made
g. The patch cords feature a slim over-moulded boot

which is kept inside the RJ45 boundaries to enable
High Density Patching with 48 cords in 1 height unit.
h. They should also come with a ‘replaceable’ black Latch

Protector, which can be used for colour coding of
different services.
i. The coloured retrofit latch protectors shall be available

as accessory in 8 colours for colour coding of different
services.
TS/E/S65/8
j. The cords shall be fitted with Category 6A RJ45 plugs,

with a Self-latching, high reliable RJ45 connector. All
pairs must have an impedance of 100 Ohms. The
characteristic impedance of the pairs must be identical
to that of the horizontal cables. The patch cords shall
have a guaranteed performance level of greater than
750 insertions without degradation to the performance
level of the solution.
k. Traceability numbers should accompany the cables

supplied from the manufacturers packaging to assist in
quality validation of the installed cable.
(6) Link and Channel performance
a. Manufacturer shall demonstrate guaranteed minimum

worst-case (4-connector Link) performance to be
compliant with class EA link and channel performance
according to the ISO/IEC 11801:2002/A1:2008 and
A2/2010 and EIA/TIA 568-C2.
b. Components used must be compliant with the

Category 6A standards mentioned above.
c. The system supplier must be able to demonstrate in

house design and manufacturing expertise for all
components used (e.g. cables, outlets, panels and
cords) in order to ensure compatibility of system
elements.
d. The performance of both the components and the link

and channel should show stable performance up to
500MHz in order to allow for possible future
applications requiring crosstalk cancellation up to
500MHz.
b) Building Backbone Cabling
(1) Data Backbone
This backbone will link the Switches located in the Floor

Distributors (FD) to the Data Centre switches through the
Building Distributor (BD).
TS/E/S65/9
4. EXECUTION
4.1. Installation
a) Apart from complying to the standards as specified, the installation

of the computer cabling system shall also comply to the installation
guidelines as recommended by the cable manufacturer.
b) The installation of the cabling system shall comply with the

following requirements:
(1) All cable pairs shall be tested end to end to ensure continuity
and absence of tip/ring reversals, as well as cable pair fault
clearance prior to installation. These test results shall be
provided in traceable format and submitted as certifications
of tests performed on the systems.
(2) No cable joints are allowed
(3) All cables shall be installed such that they are not bent
through radii, less than a minimum bending radii specified by
the manufacturer.
c) All the components have to be installed according to the

procedures prescribed by the cabling systems manufacturer.
d) The installer has to closely follow the local regulations concerning

fire protection. The integrity of the fire barrier has to be maintained
or restored.
e) For the earthing of all the proposed products, the installer has to
closely follow the related recommendations of the supplier, in
accordance with local regulations. The earthing procedure that has
to be followed shall be put at the disposal by the supplier under an
official document.
f) The grounding system shall conform to ANSI/TIA/EIA-607, local

and other latest relevant requirements.
g) The grounding system for the entire telecommunication system

shall be continuous throughout. All grounding cables from each
19" (480 mm) rack cabinets shall be terminated in the main copper
earthing bar in each LAN Room.
TS/E/S65/10
4.2. Cabinet and Cable Management in LAN Rooms
a) The metal cabinets shall have a footprint of 600x800 mm unless

otherwise specified. In the frames 19” components can be
mounted by means of the standard cage nuts. The front door
consists of a metal framework with hinges and a central security
glass. Front and rear doors shall be equipped with a lock system.
The side panels have to be equipped with a hinge on the left or the
right side in order to facilitate the access to the equipment. A 42 U
cabinet shall be provided unless otherwise specified, providing
enough space for active equipment.
b) The front and rear 19” frames shall not be painted as the frames
will be used to earth the network. Both frames can be installed in
three different positions to increase the free space between the
doors and the equipment front plates when necessary.
c) For an orderly cord storage and easy to manage installation, the

following accessories have to be used:
(1) Closed 1 or 2 U patch guides between the patch panels;
(2) Lateral cable rings installed at both sides of the frames. The
patch rings can be removed very easily by rotation and have
to be located on the front rails of the 19" frames in the
cabinets.
d) The cabinets shall be able to host all standard types of edge

switches and passive equipment and provide facilities for
extension to form a suite of cabinets with no modification to the
structure.
e) The rack shall have a fan tray on the top with at least four AC
powered blowout fans.
f) Cable management is a mandatory requirement in keeping the

patching facility tidy and manageable. Horizontal management
panels should be installed for every 2RU of patch panel, with each
panel having sufficient capacity for at least 50 patch leads.
g) Together with the vertical management side rings they provide an

environment for ongoing maintenance of all future patching and
enable moves and changes to be handled easily.
h) Care should be taken to taken to ensure that undue strain is not

applied to the cables to tie wrap tension.
i) The racks shall meet the following general requirements:
(1) Each rack shall have a swing frame to accommodate 19"

width equipment and patch panels. It shall be designed with
the structure to take the entire weight of equipment/server
units mounted onto it. (Minimum weight: 1000 kg).
TS/E/S65/11
(2) The degree of swing to open position shall be such that

works can be carried out for connection and checking.
(3) The racks shall be used for all data cabling and equipment.
(4) Each rack shall have two (2) rows of 16-way UK 13A 3-pin
power bar for drawing power from the UPS.
(5) Each rack shall be capable of joining together as one single

cabinet.
(6) The Top Cover shall be raised to provide an opening for heat
dissipation.
(7) The Top Cover shall be provided with opening for cable
entry.
(8) Adjustable feet shall provide for height adjustment and for
levelling on uneven floors.
(9) The entire rack shall be powder coated to white colour.
(10) The design of the rack shall conform to IEC 297-2, DIN
41494-7 and BS 5954-2.
(11) There shall be individual ELCBs for every power socket on

the rack for easy fault isolation of power trip.
(12) The racks shall have sturdy brackets for physical cable
management to allow easy access to each modular
connectors and punch-down block connectors.
(13) The cabinets shall have lockable swinging with minimum

80% perforation metal door (Front and back). The door
thickness shall be minimum 2mm thick.
(14) The racks shall have metallic bar strap for grounding
purpose.
(15) The cabinet shall be supplied fully assembled.
(16) The racks shall have heavy duty castor wheels.
j) Trunk cross-connect and distribution cross-connect including the

termination to the intelligent hub in the LAN Room shall be
provided.
k) All cross-connect blocks for fibre optic cable termination and all the
necessary fibre optic patch cords shall be provided. All cables shall
be factory terminated and tested with LC connectors.
l) The metallic grounding bar strap provided in the racks shall be

connected to the earthing bar for building grounding.
TS/E/S65/12
4.3 Labelling and Identification
Labelling shall be done for the rack mounted panels, both fibre and Cat
6A UTP, to the approved convention.
5. TESTING AND COMMISIONING
5.1. Site Acceptance Test
a) The manufacturer of the cabling system shall provide copper (Data)

and optical fibre testing procedures that clearly describes the tools
and settings to be used to ensure correct measurements of the
system.
b) All cables shall be tested and conformed to the requirements as

specified in the Specification.
c) All the connections, Cat 6A UTP cables, fibre optic cables shall be
individually tested after installation. Accurate records of all tests
shall be made, test certificates and a schedule of the test results in
an approved form shall be furnished. One copy of such record and
of each test certificate shall be submitted for review.
d) All materials, devices and equipment supplied or erected which

failed the tests shall be replaced or rectified at once without
additional cost to the Employer and the tests shall be repeated.
(1) Data Copper Testing
a. 100 % of the installed horizontal links have to be

tested. The installation has to comply with the ISO/IEC
11801 or EIA/TIA 568-C2, and be in accordance with
the field testing procedure of the manufacturer.
b. Link testing is required in accordance with the updated

EN 50174 cabling standard.
c. Channel testing is only permitted if the actual cords

used to create the channel are used and installed in
the as-built configuration.
d. The cabling system shall to be tested against ISO

Class EA link limits.
e. The measurements shall be done using Level IV

testing equipment.
f. The testing equipment must be yearly calibrated by the

manufacturer and the copy of the calibration certificate
must be included in the warranty request.
TS/E/S65/13
g. The following parameters have to be tested:
(A) Wire-map
(B) Continuity
(C) Signal conductors
(D) Short circuits
(E) Open circuits
(F) Length
(G) Internal transmission return loss
(H) Insertion loss
(I) Pair-to-pair NEXT
(J) PSNEXT
(K) Pair-to-pair ACR-N
(L) PSACR-N
(M) Pair-to-pair SCR-F
(N) PSACR-F
(O) Direct current (d.c) loop resistance
(P) Propagation delay
(Q) Delay skew
h. The complete test results of all the installed channels

have to be collected in a certification file and in
electronic format to facilitate the certification
procedure.
i. Apart from all the test results mentioned above, a few

more documents have to be added to the file: a list of
material used for the project, a design of the network, a
cable schedule per distributor and finally all the
necessary contact details of the persons responsible
for the project.
6. DOCUMENTATION
The sub contractor shall engage the manufacturer/supplier and submit all the
certificate of the installation on the installed system, testing and commissioning report
on the optic fibre.
TS/E/S65/14
7. TRAINING
7.1. The sub contractor shall provide sufficient sessions of comprehensive

training and training materials in the proper and effective use, operation
and maintenance of the Computer Cabling System.
7.2. The syllabus of each training session shall include, but not limited to the
following topics:
a) Overview of computer cabling systems
b) Computer cabling design adopted for this development
c) Description of products used in the computer cabling system
d) Layout of LAN Room, 19" (480 mm) rack cabinet, etc.
e) Labelling plan and colour coding scheme
f) Fault management
TS/E/S65/15
SECTION 66 - COMPUTER CABLINGS (CAT 6A / CLASS EA – F/FTP) COPPER
1. GENERAL
1.1. This section sets out the requirements for supply, install, testing and
commissioning and defects liability for CAT 6A / CLASS EA Foil Shielded
Twisted Pair (F/FTP) computer structured cabling system and associated
works.
1.2. The cabling system shall support implementing a single structured wiring
infrastructure and complete integrated multi-media communication networking
system, which includes text, graphics, images, voice and video.
1.3. The system shall:
c) Facilitate expansion from the initial proposed system by only the

addition of modules.

growth.
1.4. The cabling system shall be expected to have a life span of at least 25 years
and it shall have provision to support future growth requirements and
increasing needs for higher bandwidth.
1.5. The cables and installation shall meets to the standards and regulations :
d) BS EN 50174-1: Information technology. Cabling installation.

Installation specification and quality assurance
e) BS EN 50174-3: Installation technology. Cabling installation.

Installation planning and practices outside buildings
f) EIA/TIA-492-AAAB: Detail Specification for 50-µm Core

Diameter/125-µm Cladding Diameter Class Ia Graded-Index
Multimode Optical Fibers
TS/E/S66/1
g) EIA/TIA 568C.0: Generic Telecommunications Cabling for

Customer Premises
h) EIA/TIA 568C.1: Commercial Building Telecommunications Cabling

Standard
i) EIA/TIA 569-A: The Design and Installation Requirements
j) EIA/TIA 606: Administration Standard for Telecommunications

Infrastructure in commercial Buildings
k) EIA/TIA 607: Grounding and Bonding Requirements for

l) IEC 60793-2-10:Optical fibres - Part 2-10: Product specifications -

Sectional specification for category A1 multimode fibres
m) IEEE 802.3: IEEE Standard for Ethernet
n) IEEE 802.5: IEEE Standard for Local Area Networks: Token Ring
nd
o) ISO/IEC 11801: 2 Edition, Amendment 2 International Standards.
Information technology – Generic cabling for customer premises
1.6. The manufacturer shall be certified to ISO 9001 Quality Management System
in the design, manufacture and assembly of the structured cabling system.
2. SUBMISSIONS
2.1 Sub-Contractor shall submit all the necessary documents and sample for
approval by engineer before carry out the installation
a) Detailed products specification. Conformity and test reports.
b) Certificate of Approved/Certified Installer granted by the manufacturer.
c) Samples of cables, patch cords, connectors, patch panels, power

bars, cable management.
d) Statement of Method of Work. Schedule of execution with the

expected start and end dates.
e) Detailed layout plans, schematic diagrams, LAN Room layout,

rack/cabinet mounting details, details of rack system complete with
patch panels, cable management, power bars, earth bars, etc.
2.2 Sub-Contractor shall submit all the necessary documents, drawing and
operation manual after the work completion
TS/E/S66/2
a) Installation details.
b) Testing and commissioning procedures.
c) Proposed numbering and labelling scheme.
d) Certification file.
e) As-built plans and test reports.
2.3 Warranty
a) A 25 year passive product warranty for the Structured Cabling

System backed by the Manufacturer and a 25-year application
assurance on the application described in this Technical
Specification, from the date of Certified Practical Completion of the
Contract.
b) The following copper and fibre sub-system warranties apply to

both standard and intelligent products.
(1) Copper and fibre patch cords are considered as replaceable

items and are specifically excluded from the 25 year product
guarantee due to the normal wear and tear that can occur.
(2) Copper sub-system
a. The manufacturer must guarantee that the products

referenced within the specific Warranty Modules (Class
EA System) when correctly installed in accordance
with installation guidelines:
i) Will be free from product defects in materials and

workmanship.
ii) Are guaranteed to exceed
 Class EA Channel and Permanent Link as
specified in ISO/IEC 11801:2002/A1:2008 and
 A2:2010
 Augmented Cat 6 Link and Channel
requirements as specified in ANSI/TIA/EIA-
 568-C.2:2009
iii) Supports the following application (not limited):
 10baseT Ethernet
 100baseTX Fast Ethernet
 1000baseTX Gigabit Ethernet
 10G base-T Ethernet IEEE 802.3an
 155Mbit ATM
 1.2Gbit ATM
TS/E/S66/3
iv) For a duration of 25 years.
v) Provide a guaranteed headroom

 of at least 10 dB on A-NEXT
 of at least 15 dB on A-ELFEXT

b. All components including the Cat6A patch cords have
to be produced by the same cabling system
manufacturer to ensure warranted performances and
applications against the standards.
3. MATERIALS AND SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
3.1. Cable Distribution Subsystem
a) The cable distribution subsystem described herein includes the

computer outlets (RJ45 jacks) in the work area as well as the
cables and transition connectors installed between outlets and
RJ45 patch panels in the LAN Room. In addition, the cabling
system shall be made up of various modular patch panels, patch
cords used to configure horizontal cable connections in the LAN
Room.
b) The cable distribution subsystem shall consist at a minimum of the

following:
i) RJ45 Cat 6A jacks and outlets unless otherwise specified
ii) 4-pair Cat 6A F/FTP non-plenum cables unless otherwise

specified
iii) 12 core multi-mode non-plenum fibre optic cables
iv) Cable labelling and identification consistent with

ANSI/EIA/TIA 606
v) RJ45 patch panels
vi) Fibre Patch Panel
vii) 3 metre length Cat 6A U/FTP patch cords complete with

RJ45 jack at both ends which shall be factory terminated
and tested
TS/E/S66/4
3.2. Copper Sub-system
a) This specification covers the design, supply, installation, testing and

commissioning of a Category 6A cabling system.
b) The Category 6A universal cabling system shall function for voice,

data and LAN communications, for video applications etc.
c) The cabling system is also open to new applications which require

a Class EA / Cat 6A cabling system as defined in the latest editions
of the standards: ISO/IEC11801:2002/A1: 2008 and A2:2010 and
EIA/TIA 568-C2.
d) The terminology and references in this document as well as the

Link/Channel Performance figures for Class EA are based on
ISO/IEC 11801:2002/A1:2008 and EIA/TIA 568-C2.
e) All proposed components including the patch cords have to be

produced by the same manufacturer.
3.3. System Performance
a) Horizontal Cabling
(1) Horizontal distribution cable
a. The horizontal 4 pair cable shall be Category 6A F/FTP

to meet the quality and performance criteria necessary
to ensure correct operation of the installation for
frequencies up to 500 MHz and to ensure the
b. The installation design and routing of all cables shall

take account of the manufacturer limits for the
continued performance of the cables and the
c. The cable shall be a 4 twisted pair cable with AWG 23

conductors. Having an external sheathing in a material
that does not give off toxic fumes (Zero Halogen) in
case of fire and offer flame propagation retardant
properties. The cable shall be compliant to the IEC
60332-1 standard.
d. Traceability numbers should accompany the cable

supplied from the manufacturers packaging to
assist in quality validation of the installed cable.
TS/E/S66/5
e. In order to provide alien cross-talk (AXT) immunity

for 10 GBASE-T Ethernet transmission, the use of
screened cable is mandatory.
f. Independent certification shall be provided by the

manufacturer to show compliance to ISO/IEC
11801:2002/ A1 2008 and A2/2010 or EIA/TIA
568-C2 Channel headroom requirements for both
Alien NEXT (A-NEXT) and Alien FEXT (A-FEXT)
parameters.
g. This high performance cable shall have an

individual and a common screen construction to
ensure immunity from Alien Crosstalk and other
external interference up to 500 MHz.
h. All four pairs shall be individually screened with an

aluminium foil.
i. The overall cable shall be screened with a

complementary aluminium foil.
j. All pairs must have a fitted impedance of 100

Ohms, with a tolerance of +/- 5 Ohms.
k. Conductor pairs shall be identified by insulation

utilising standardised colour code (Blue/White,
Orange/White, Green/White, Brown/White).
l. The Cat.6A cable shall comply to the following

electrical performances.
m. Maximum and Minimum values shall be warranted

by the manufacturer.
Electrical Performance Cat.6A F/FTP cable

Att PS ACR-F PS ANEXT PS AACR-F
Frequency n NEXT (dB) PSNEXT (dB) ACR-F (dB) (dB) (dB) (dB) RL (dB)
MHz Max Typ Min. Typ. Min. Typ. Min. Typ. Min. Typ. Min. Typ. Min. Typ. Min. Typ.
1 2.1 2.1 74.3 104.3 72.3 102.3 67.8 92.8 64.8 >60 67.0 90.0 67.0 87.9 20.0 26.0
4 3.8 3.8 65.3 95.3 63.3 93.3 55.8 80.8 52.8 57.2 67.0 90.0 66.2 75.9 23.0 29.0
10 5.9 5.9 59.3 89.3 57.3 87.3 47.8 72.8 44.8 49.3 67.0 87.0 58.2 67.9 25.0 31.0
16 7.5 7.5 56.2 86.2 54.2 84.2 43.7 68.7 40.7 45.2 67.0 85.0 54.1 63.8 25.0 31.0
20 8.4 8.4 54.8 84.8 52.8 82.8 41.8 66.8 38.8 43.2 67.0 84.0 52.2 61.9 25.0 31.0
31.25 10.5 10.5 51.9 81.9 49.9 79.9 37.9 62.9 34.9 39.4 67.0 82.1 48.3 58.0 23.6 29.6
62.5 15.0 15.0 47.4 77.4 45.4 75.4 31.9 56.9 28.9 33.3 65.6 79.0 42.3 52.0 21.5 27.5
100 19.1 19.1 44.3 74.3 42.3 72.3 27.8 52.8 24.8 29.3 62.5 77.0 38.2 47.9 20.1 26.1
155 24.1 24.1 41.4 71.4 39.4 69.4 24.0 49.0 21.0 25.5 59.6 74.1 34.4 44.1 18.8 24.8
200 27.6 27.6 39.8 69.8 37.8 67.8 21.8 46.8 18.8 23.2 58.0 72.5 32.2 41.9 18.0 24.0
250 31.1 31.1 38.3 68.3 36.3 66.3 19.8 44.8 16.8 21.3 56.5 71.0 30.2 39.9 17.3 23.3
300 34.3 34.3 37.1 67.1 35.1 65.1 18.3 43.3 15.3 19.7 55.3 69.8 28.7 38.4 16.8 22.8
500 45.3 45.3 33.8 63.8 31.8 61.8 13.8 38.8 10.8 15.3 52.0 66.5 24.2 33.9 15.2 21.2
TS/E/S66/6
(2) Modular RJ45 Jack
a. The RJ45 snap-in connector shall be fully screened to

ensure protection against EMI and for Alien cross-talk
compliance. Connectors shall also provide termination
facilities for the drain wire of some screened cable.
b. The connector shall be fully compliant to the IEC

60603-7-51 standard that defines the Cat.6A connector
to be used to form a Class EA channel as specified in
the ISO/IEC 11801:2002/A2:2010 standard.
c. Independent certification shall be provided by the

manufacturer to demonstrate full compliance to the
IEC 60603-7-51 standard.
d. Each connector shall provide both T568A and T568B

colour code identification for the IDC contacts at the
rear of the connector. Termination is to be in
accordance with the T568B colour code.
Reassignment of pairs is forbidden.
e. All conductors from the 4 pair cable are to be

terminated on the respective contacts.
f. To avoid installation errors, pair assignment in the wire

organiser of the Snap-In jack must be identified using
colours which match the cable pairs.
g. The Snap-In format of the connector shall make it

compatible with the whole range of modular structural
hardware including patch panels, outlets and CP
boxes.
h. All RJ45 connectors shall be reusable. When the RJ45

connectors are to be reused, this shall be done in a
safe and reliable way. For this reason, a tool specially
developed by the manufacturer shall be used.
i. In the case of a 3 or 4 connector Channel with

Consolidation Point (CP), a specific version of
connector having IDC contacts suitable for the
termination of stranded cable shall be used at the TO
and/or at the presentation panel.
TS/E/S66/7
(3) Telecom Outlet and Computer Outlet
a. UK format 86x86mm cover plate shall be proposed.

Angled (45x45) faceplate outlet modules are fitted with
removable shutters, which can be replaced by colour-
coded shutters (red, green, blue, yellow) available from
the manufacturer standard product range.
b. The presentation of the outlet shall provide for labelling

and identification. A transparent window shall protect
the labelling tag.
c. The choice between single and dual RJ45 outlet

modules shall be provided.
(4) 24 port modular copper Patch Panels
a. Patch panels must have 19" equipment practice

dimensions to permit mounting in standard cabinets,
racks or bays.
b. Angled patch panels have been selected to eliminate

the need for additional cable management and support
high density patching.
c. Unloaded angled 24 port Snap-in format (Modular)

patch panels in white colour fitted with white shutters to
protect the RJ45 ports shall be used.
d. Optional coloured shutters need to be available to

easily indicate different services when required.
e. The panels features a screen printed numbering

systems for labelling.
f. Each patch panel shall provide a means to locate and

clamp the incoming cables without causing damage to
the cable or affecting the performance of the Link. The
snap-in mechanism shall also ensure the automatic
earthing of the screened connectors.
g. The installer must avoid any risk of cable compression

during the installation or termination of the cables.
h. The dimensions of the patch panel shall be 19" 1 U

high, depth 75mm.
TS/E/S66/8
(5) Patch cords
a. To achieve a Class EA Channel performance all data

patch cords shall be Category 6A rated.
b. The patch cord cable shall be made from LSZH

material with a print legend indicating type of cable,
brand name, production code and metre mark.
c. All patch cords shall be compliant to the IEC 60332-1

standard to offer flame propagation retardant
properties.
d. All data patch cords shall be fully screened.
e. The standard colours offered for the LSZH flame

retardant jacket shall be orange and dark grey.
f. Red, Blue, Green and Yellow colours shall also be

g. The default lengths available from stock shall be 1, 2,

3, 5, 10 and 20m. in order to ensure quick delivery of
the cords on site. Other lengths shall be available on
demand.
h. The patch cords feature a slim over-moulded boot

which is kept inside the RJ45 boundaries to enable
High Density Patching with 48 cords in 1 height unit.
i. They also come with a ‘Replaceable’ black Latch

Protector, which can be used for colour coding of
different services.
j. The coloured retrofit latch protectors shall be available

as accessory in 8 colours for colour coding of different
services.
k. The cords shall be fitted with Category 6A RJ45

screened plugs, with a Self-latching, high reliable RJ45
(ISO 8877) connector. All pairs must have an
impedance of 100 Ohms. The characteristic
impedance of the pairs must be identical to that of the
horizontal cables. The patch cords shall have a
guaranteed performance level of greater than 750
insertions without degradation to the performance level
of the solution.
TS/E/S66/9
l. The cable used for the patch cords shall be Category

6A LSZH U/FTP patch cable. The cable shall be a 4
twisted pair cable with individually screened stranded
conductors. Traceability numbers should accompany
the cables supplied from the manufacturers packaging
to assist in quality validation of the installed cable.
m. When used with the LANmark-6 system, Cat 6/Class E

channel performance complies with the channel limits
of TIA/EIA-568-C2 and ISO/IEC 11801:2002/A2:21010
and it exceeds the requirements of the ISO/IEC 4-
connector model.
(6) Link and Channel performance
a. Manufacturer shall demonstrate guaranteed minimum

worst-case (4-connector Link) performance to be
compliant with class EA link and channel performance
according to the ISO/IEC 11801:2002/A1:2008 and
A2/2010 and EIA/TIA 568-C2.
b. Components used must be compliant with the

Category 6A standards mentioned above and the
manufacturer has to demonstrate independent Delta
verification.
c. The system supplier must be able to demonstrate in

house design and manufacturing expertise for all
components used (e.g. cables, outlets, panels and
cords) in order to ensure compatibility of system
elements.
d. Regarding short links, the standard channel

performance shall be warranted for a 10 meters / 3
connectors link with 5 meters of cable length for both
patch panel to Consolidation Point and Consolidation
Point to Terminal Outlet segments.
e. When using the best grade of Cat.6A patch cords

available from the cabling system manufacturer, the
latter must guarantee an additional minimum channel
margin of +2dB NEXT (4 connector channel
configuration).
f. The Cat.6A channel shall comply to the following

electrical performances.
TS/E/S66/10
g. Maximum and Minimum values shall be warranted by

the manufacturer.
Electrical Performance Cat.6A - 4 Connector Channel - Part 1

Frequency Attn NEXT (dB) PSNEXT (dB) ACR-F (dB)
MHz Max Typ Std Min Typ Std Min Typ Std Typ
1 <4 4.0 65.0 67.0 85.0 62.0 64.0 74.8 63.3 69.9
4 4.1 4.1 63.0 65.0 72.9 60.5 62.5 65.0 51.2 57.9
10 6.4 6.3 56.6 58.6 65.0 54.0 56.0 58.5 43.3 49.9
16 8.1 8.0 53.2 55.2 60.9 50.6 52.6 55.1 39.2 45.9
20 9.1 9.0 51.6 53.6 59.0 49.0 51.0 53.5 37.2 43.9
31.25 11.4 11.2 48.4 50.4 55.1 45.7 47.7 50.2 33.4 40.0
62.5 16.3 15.9 43.4 45.4 49.1 40.6 42.6 45.1 27.3 34.0
100 20.8 20.2 39.9 41.9 45.0 37.1 39.1 41.6 23.3 29.9
155 26.2 25.4 36.7 38.7 41.2 33.8 35.8 38.3 19.5 26.1
200 30.0 28.9 34.8 36.8 39.0 31.9 33.9 36.4 17.2 23.9
250 33.8 32.5 33.1 35.1 37.0 30.2 32.2 34.7 15.3 22.0
300 37.3 35.7 31.7 33.7 35.4 28.8 30.8 33.3 13.7 20.4
500 49.3 46.7 27.9 29.9 31.0 24.8 26.8 24.9 9.3 16.0
h. All values are based on Worst Case 4 Connector

Channel configurations according to ISO11801:2002/
A1:2008.
i. Standard values are based on ISO11801:2002/A1:

2008 Class EA.
j. Minimal and maximum values represent guaranteed

channel performance.
Electrical Performance Cat.6A - 4 Connector Channel - Part 2

Frequency PS ACR-F (DB) PS ANEXT (dB) PS AACR-F (dB) RL (dB)
MHz Std Typ Std Min Typ Std Min Typ Std Min Typ
1 60.3 66.9 80.0 90.0 92.0 77.0 92.0 94.0 19.0 21.0 21.0
4 48.2 54.9 74.0 89.0 91.0 65.0 80.0 82.0 19.0 21.0 32.0
10 40.3 46.9 70.0 85.0 87.0 57.0 72.0 74.0 19.0 21.0 28.0
16 36.2 42.9 68.0 83.0 85.0 52.9 67.9 69.9 18.0 20.0 26.0
20 34.2 40.9 67.0 82.0 84.0 51.0 66.0 68.0 17.5 19.5 25.0
31.25 30.4 37.0 65.1 80.1 82.1 47.1 62.1 64.1 16.5 18.5 23.1
62.5 24.3 31.0 62.0 77.0 79.0 41.1 56.1 58.1 14.0 16.0 20.0
100 20.3 26.9 60.0 75.0 77.0 37.0 52.0 54.0 12.0 14.0 18.0
155 16.5 23.1 57.1 72.1 74.1 33.2 48.2 50.2 10.1 12.1 16.1
200 14.2 20.9 55.5 70.5 72.5 31.0 46.0 48.0 9.0 11.0 15.0
250 12.3 19.0 54.0 69.0 71.0 29.0 44.0 46.0 8.0 10.0 14.0
300 10.7 17.4 52.8 67.8 69.8 27.5 42.5 44.5 8.0 10.0 13.2
500 6.3 13.0 49.5 64.5 66.5 23.0 38.0 40.0 8.0 10.0 11.0
TS/E/S66/11
4. EXECUTION
4.1. Installation
a) Apart from complying to the standards as specified, the installation

of the computer cabling system shall also comply to the installation
guidelines as recommended by the cable manufacturer.
b) The installation of the cabling system shall comply with the

following requirements:
(1) All cable pairs shall be tested end to end to ensure continuity
and absence of tip/ring reversals, as well as cable pair fault
clearance prior to installation. These test results shall be
provided in traceable format and submitted as certifications
of tests performed on the systems.
(2) No cable joints are allowed
(3) All cables shall be installed such that they are not bent
through radii, less than a minimum bending radii specified by
the manufacturer.
c) All the components have to be installed according to the

procedures prescribed by the cabling systems manufacturer.
d) The installer has to closely follow the local regulations concerning

fire protection. The integrity of the fire barrier has to be maintained
or restored.
e) For the earthing of all the proposed products, the installer has to
closely follow the related recommendations of the supplier, in
accordance with local regulations. The earthing procedure that has
to be followed shall be put at the disposal by the supplier under an
official document.
f) The grounding system shall conform to NEC, ANSI/TIA/EIA-607,

local and other latest relevant requirements.
g) The grounding system for the entire telecommunication system

shall be continuous throughout. All grounding cables from each
19" (480 mm) rack cabinets shall be terminated in the main copper
earthing bar in each LAN Room.
4.2. Cabinet and Cable Management in LAN Rooms
a) The metal cabinets shall have a footprint of 800x800 mm. In the

frames 19” components can be mounted by means of the standard
cage nuts. The front door consists of a metal framework with
hinges and a central security glass. Front and rear doors shall be
equipped with a lock system. The side panels have to be equipped
with a hinge on the left or the right side in order to facilitate the
access to the equipment. A 42 U cabinet is requested providing
enough space for active equipment.
TS/E/S66/12
b) The front and rear 19” frames shall not be painted as the frames
will be used to earth the network. Both frames can be installed in
three different positions to increase the free space between the
doors and the equipment front plates when necessary.
c) For an orderly cord storage and easy to manage installation, the

following accessories have to be used:
(1) Closed 1 or 2 U patch guides between the patch panels;
(2) Lateral cable rings installed at both sides of the frames. The
patch rings can be removed very easily by rotation and have
to be located on the front rails of the 19" frames in the
cabinets.
d) The cabinets shall be able to host all standard types of edge

switches and passive equipment and provide facilities for
extension to form a suite of cabinets with no modification to the
structure.
e) Optionally, the cabinets can be supplied with up to 8 fans (240VAC)

for expelling air, approximately 220W each.
f) Cable management is a mandatory requirement in keeping the

patching facility tidy and manageable. Horizontal management
panels should be installed for every 2RU of patch panel, with each
panel having sufficient capacity for at least 50 patch leads.
g) Together with the vertical management side rings they provide an

environment for ongoing maintenance of all future patching and
enable moves and changes to be handled easily.
h) All cables shall be supported at minimum intervals of 300 mm, on

cable trays mounted vertically in the riser space. Care should be
taken to taken to ensure that undue strain is not applied to the
cables to tie wrap tension.
i) The racks shall meet the following general requirements:
(1) Each rack shall have a swing frame to accommodate 19"

width equipment and patch panels. It shall be designed with
the structure to take the entire weight of equipment/server
units mounted onto it. (Minimum weight: 1000 kg).
(2) The degree of swing to open position shall be such that

works can be carried out for connection and checking.
(3) The racks shall be used for all data cabling and equipment.
(4) Each rack shall be provided with 2 nos. 32-Amp DP isolators

complete with cabling.
TS/E/S66/13
(5) Each rack shall have two (2) rows of 16-way UK 13A 3-pin
power bar for drawing power from the UPS.
(6) Each rack shall be capable of joining together as one single

cabinet.
(7) The Top Cover shall be raised to provide an opening for heat
dissipation.
(8) The Top Cover shall be provided with opening for cable
entry.
(9) Adjustable feet shall provide for height adjustment and for
levelling on uneven floors.
(10) The entire rack shall be powder coated to white colour.
(11) The design of the rack shall conform to IEC 297-2, DIN
41494-7 and BS 5954-2.
(12) There shall be individual ELCBs for every power socket on

the rack for easy fault isolation of power trip.
(13) The racks shall have sturdy brackets for physical cable
management to allow easy access to each modular
connectors and punch-down block connectors.
(14) The cabinets shall have lockable swinging with minimum

80% perforation metal door (Front and back). The door
thickness shall be minimum 2mm thick.
(15) The racks shall have metallic bar strap for grounding
purpose.
(16) The cabinet shall be supplied fully assembled.
(17) The racks shall have heavy duty castor wheels.
j) Trunk cross-connect and distribution cross-connect including the

termination to the intelligent hub in the LAN Room shall be
provided.
k) All cross-connect blocks for fibre optic cable termination and all the
necessary fibre optic patch cords shall be provided. All cables shall
be factory terminated and tested with ST connectors.
l) The metallic grounding bar strap provided in the racks shall be

connected to the earthing bar for building grounding.
TS/E/S66/14
4.3. Labelling and Identification
Labelling shall be done for the rack mounted panels, both fibre and Cat
6A F/FTP, to the approved convention.
5. TESTING AND COMMISIONING
5.1. Site Acceptance Test
a) The manufacturer of the cabling system shall provide copper (Data)

and optical fibre testing procedures that clearly describes the tools
and settings to be used to ensure correct measurements of the
system.
b) All cables shall be tested and conformed to the requirements as

specified in the Specification.
c) All the connections, Cat 6A F/FTP cables, fibre optic cables shall
be individually tested after installation. Accurate records of all tests
shall be made, test certificates and a schedule of the test results in
an approved form shall be furnished. One copy of such record and
of each test certificate shall be submitted for review.
d) All materials, devices and equipment supplied or erected which

failed the tests shall be replaced or rectified at once without
additional cost to the Employer and the tests shall be repeated.
(1) Data Copper Testing
a. 100 % of the installed horizontal links have to be

tested. The installation has to comply with the ISO/IEC
11801:2002/A1:2008 and A2:2010 or EIA/TIA 568-C2,
and be in accordance with the field testing procedure
of the manufacturer.
b. Link testing is required in accordance with the updated

EN 50174:2010 cabling standard.
c. Channel testing is only permitted if the actual cords

used to create the channel are used and installed in
the as-built configuration.
d. The cabling system shall to be tested against ISO

Class EA link limits.
e. The measurements shall be done using Level IV

testing equipment.
f. The testing equipment must be yearly calibrated by the

manufacturer and the copy of the calibration certificate
must be included in the warranty request.
TS/E/S66/15
g. The following parameters have to be tested:
A) Wire-map
B) Continuity
C) Signal conductors
D) Screen conductors (if present)
E) Short circuits
F) Open circuits
G) Length
H) Internal transmission return loss
I) Insertion loss
J) Pair-to-pair NEXT
K) PSNEXT
L) Pair-to-pair ACR-N
M) PSACR-N
N) Pair-to-pair SCR-F
O) PSACR-F
P) Direct current (d.c) loop resistance
Q) Propagation delay
R) Delay skew
h. The PSANEXT, PSANEXTavg, PSAACR-F, and

PSAACR-Favg (A-NEXT and A-ELFEXT) may not
require to be tested for screened cabling systems. The
conformance to those Alien crosstalk parameters is
met by design for screened systems in accordance
with ISO11801:2002:A2/2010.
i. The complete test results of all the installed channels

have to be collected in a certification file and in
electronic format to facilitate the certification
procedure.
j. Apart from all the test results mentioned above, a few

more documents have to be added to the file: a list of
material used for the project, a design of the network, a
cable schedule per distributor and finally all the
necessary contact details of the persons responsible
for the project.
TS/E/S66/16
6. DOCUMENTATION
The sub contractor shall engage the manufacturer/supplier and submit all the
certificate of the installation on the installed system, testing and commissioning report
on the optic fibre.
7. TRAINING
7.1. The sub contractor shall provide sufficient sessions of comprehensive

training and training materials in the proper and effective use, operation
and maintenance of the Computer Cabling System.
7.2. The syllabus of each training session shall include, but not limited to the
following topics:
a) Overview of computer cabling systems
b) Computer cabling design adopted for this development
c) Description of products used in the computer cabling system
d) Layout of LAN Room, 19" (480 mm) rack cabinet, etc.
e) Labelling plan and colour coding scheme
f) Fault management
TS/E/S66/17
SECTION 67 – LIGHTING AND ROOM MANAGEMENT SYSTEM
1. General
1.1 The Sub-contractor shall engage a Specialist for this part of the works i.e.
to design, supply, install, test and commission the complete Lighting
Control System, Voice Control System, Power monitoring and status
monitoring of switchboards, distribution board, generator and Handicap call
bell as per but not limited to this Technical Specifications, Design
Parameters and Tender Drawings.

installation and functioning of the Lighting Control System in this part of the
sub-contract.
1.3 The Sub-contractor shall engage a Specialist for this part of the works and
1.4 The required and accepted Lighting Control System shall be strictly
configured as per but not limited to this Technical Specifications, Design
Parameters and Tender Drawings. Any alternative proposed and offered is
not acceptable unless otherwise approved by the S.O.
1.5 The Building shall be equipped with a lighting management system and
room management system providing flexible and efficient control and
management of the whole lighting and HVAC installation from a centralized
location.
1.6 The system shall separated into two (2) system, lighting management
system and room management system with different server, monitor,
control, mobile phone application and software.
1.7 All devices connected to the system, such as switches, sensors, actuators,
displays, control units, dimmers etc. can exchange information via this
system. All devices shall be able to select freely and are interactive
between one another. These devices shall be able to be programmed to
perform its present specific tasks as required by the project and with the
flexibilities in changing its desired tasks to meet the End Users’
requirement at any time in the future.
any time.
TS/E/S67/1
1.9 The entire system shall be able to control and monitoring through a third
party mobile phone application.

device. If a device should fail, only the functions associated with that device
may be lost while other devices on the system are not affected.
1.11 The system shall allow any brand of Internet of Things and Artificial
Intelligent to be interfaced without the need to expand any of the system or
add -in controller.
1.12 The lighting and power circuits should be wired in a topology that meets the
wiring regulation for a conventional ON/OFF switching control and also to
be automation ready using a non-proprietary protocol system.

monitored in real time. Lighting layouts shall detail the active status of each
relay.
with third party and shall have gateway/bridges interfaces (BACNET, OPC)
for connectivity to other control LAN networks such as Integrated Building
Management/Automation System, Facility Booking System, Internet or
Intranet System.
1.16 The system shall not be based on a single centralized room-control unit.
Each device shall be able to perform the required functions directly in order
to prevent the global shutdown of the room in case of damage of single
unit.
1.17 The system shall compiled to SELV (Safety Extra Low Voltage) and should
consist of a dedicated 2-wire twisted pair 24VDC control cable (KNX/EIB
bus line), shielded from interference, with rated insulation voltage required
to meet the wiring regulation. Approved system should be KNX/EIB or
structure able to connect and operate compatible bus devices.
TS/E/S67/2

intelligence in all bus devices. The system shall not require a PC or any
other special control unit after testing and commissioning.
1.19 The system shall be based on flush mounting and modular devices
aesthetically coordinate with wiring devices. These devices shall be
equipped with integrated bus interface for easy and fast installation, free
inputs and relay outputs in order to reduce the need for additional
terminals.
1.20 The backbone protocol of the system should be based on the KNX/EIB
system. The system shall be able to detect and control via wireless mobile
application
training from certified training centre.

1.26 The system shall be based on S-Mode KNX technology (international

standard for Home and Building Automation systems) in order to have:
(a) Interoperability with different brands
(b) Integration with other systems (for example HVAC systems)
(c) Easy modification of the system functions and products (from

different contractors with different brands) and easy extension of
installations
(d) maintenance over the years
(e) different kinds of cabling topologies (tree/star/mixed)
TS/E/S67/3
2.1 The data transmission rate should be least 9.6 Kbps and testing and
compliant to IEEE802.3 using line or area couplers.
2.3 The transmission should be through a decentralized bus access CSMA/CA,

where in an event of collision detection or resolution there would be no loss
of telegrams.
3. Bus Cable
3.1 The insulation voltage of the bus cable with the system shall have
adequate protection to meet overvoltage requirement of the wiring
requirement.
3.2 The size of the bus cable should be 2X2X0.8 mm diameter with screen, J-
Y(st)Y 2x2x0.8. each able to withstand 2.5KV and 4KV insulation
respectively of the type of Bus Cable used.
3.3 Bus Cable shall be run in dedicated conduit or as specified. Sharing of

conduit with LV electrical circuits is not allowed.
3.4 The twisted pair bus cable should link all input devices such as switches,
push button, touch panels, motion sensors, light sensor, dimmers, shutter
switches, transponder card readers, brightness and temperature sensors,
movement detectors etc. and be connected to output devices such as
actuators (relays, lighting control devices, shutter motors etc ) switch
actuators, dimmer, brightness controllers, etc.
3.5 The bus cable should be able to handle information, data exchange and
supply 24 VDC power to all devices on the bus.
TS/E/S67/4
(a) Room Touch Screen Control Panels
(b) Supervisory Touch Screen Control Panels
(c) System components and accessories. E.g. Data rails, Data

connector, IP Router, Power Supply, Data rail cover and Bus
connecting blocks.
(d) Switch Actuators and dimmer actuator for all kinds of lighting such
LED lighting, fluorescent lighting, incandescent lighting and halogen
lighting.
(e) Programmable touch screen panel switches with positive on and off
status indicators by LED lights. The configuration of switches varies
from 1-gang, 2-gang, 4-gang and 8-gang. A maximum of 5 switches
can be mounted into a single frame. These switch can be program
for the switching of other equipments such as HVAC, motorised
curtain etc.
(f) Control cable (2x2x0.8 mm, with adequate insulation) for signal
transmission.
(g) Scene/Mood Control programmable switch, shall be also configure
4.1 Parameter lights along the glass façade shall be equipped with
daylight/presence sensor. These sensors should be able to achieve dual
functions of presence sensing and constant light level control. The sensor
can be used to measure the brightness level in rooms to achieve constant
lux level controls. They shall be switched off or dimmed if sufficient natural
light is enough to maintain the lux level or when no presence is detected.
4.2 Every light fixture shall be grouped with the sensor and generate a zoning
and address.
4.4 Daylight sensors for dimming control of Lights at Building’s Common

Corridors, Staircases, areas close to windows and as specified.
TS/E/S67/5
4.5 Office shall be equipped with presence sensors with dimming controls. The
switches in the office shall be able to activate/ deactivate the presence
sensor. The switches shall be able to activate scenes or on/off/dim the
lights.
4.6 Open Laboratories shall be equipped with presence/daylight sensors with

dimming controls. The switches in the laboratories shall be able to activate/
deactivate the presence/daylight sensor. The switches shall be able to
activate scenes or on/off/dim the lights. When the brightness detected by
the sensors exceeds the predetermined Upper Threshold level, “Off” or
“Dim Down” Control Command shall be sent to the Switch Actuators or
Switch/-Dim Actuators respectively to manage the Lights in these areas
accordingly. Contrary, when the brightness detected falls below the Lower
Threshold, Lights are “On” or “Dim Up” accordingly. During off-peak hours,
the Presence Sensors start functioning, Lights shall be “On” throughout so
4.7 For Multi Purpose Rooms, the system shall be able to use the same control
switch to control individual partition of the room or all at once depending on
the partition condition as close or open between rooms. Dimming Controls
shall be provided for the Multi Purpose Room.

shall be provided with dimming controls. The switches shall be able to
activate scenes or on/off/dim the lights. Wireless touch panels shall be
integrated with the lighting controls with the all the necessary controller to
interface to AV systems, Motorised Curtain/Blind systems, Motorized
Projector Screens, Security functions, Temperature sensors and many
more and not limited to only Lighting Control, thus providing End Users with
further flexibilities and possibilities of adding this requirement and functions
into the existing Control System at any time in the future.
4.9 Timer Control and motion microwave control for control of lights at External
Areas (eg. Landscape areas, pole light, bollard light), building common
areas, loading/unloading Bay, meeting rooms, Lecture Theaters, Seminar
rooms, Tutorial Rooms, College Rooms, Landscapes and as specified.
4.10 Room control of lights, switches, fan coil units, thermostat controller,
power, television, water heater presence / motion sensor, scenario, roller
shutter, curtain, and other power saving equipments.
TS/E/S67/6


the existing Local Area Network (LAN), no need to install an additional
dedicated LAN.
4.14 The system should have rated actuators to facilitate the use of energy
saving bulbs or florescent tubes.
4.15 Time Schedules by the Lighting Management Station shall be set for Lights
at Building’s Common Areas, Landscapes and other areas as determined
by S.O. and End Users that requires “Time Control” to be “On” and “Off”
respectively as needed.

each Seminar room/ LT and other locations as determined by the S.O. and
End Users to control On/Off/Dim the Lights in these areas and alternatively,
Light Scenes or Preset.
of lights.
4.18 Microwave sensors shall be provided for all Toilets and to be only
effectively sensing for moments after peak hours of the building operation
whereby, the Lighting Management Station shall sends a Time Schedule
Control Command to enable and disable these presence sensors from
functioning.
4.19 During peak hours, Lights in the Toilets shall always be “On” and when the
microwave Sensors start functioning, Lights shall be “On” throughout so
determined by the S.O. and End Users shall be provided with Daylight
Sensor control. When the brightness detected by the sensors exceeds the
predetermined Upper Threshold level, “Off” or “Dim Down” Control
Command shall be sent to the Switch Actuators or Switch/-Dim Actuators
respectively to manage the Lights in these areas accordingly. Contrary,
when the brightness detected falls below the Lower Threshold, Lights are
“On” or “Dim Up” accordingly.
TS/E/S67/7

future.
5. Modular Bus Devices
5.1 All bus devices should be made according to DIN EN 50022 and suitable
for mounting on 35-mm DIN-rail mounting rail.
5.2 Each bus device should have a built-in micro-controller with programmable
Physical Address. The Physical Address should have the capability to be
re-programmable.
5.3 The bus lines should be able to incorporate up to 64 bus devices

connected and these lines should be able to be grouped up to 12 lines
together via line couplers to form an area.
switch built into the actuator for each channel.
contact and load.
5.6 The Switch Actuators shall have up to 400,000 times of switching operation
for each channel/output at rated current and up to 1,000,000 times without
load. Verification Report and Certification from manufacturer shall be
provided upon request by the S.O. prior to approval.
5.7 No special digital addressable electronic ballast is needed for all the light
fittings. The switch actuator should be able to control the conventional
electro magnetic ballast or electronic ballast.
TS/E/S67/8

luminaries with LED driver, electronic ballasts, dimmers or transformers
with 1 – 10 V control input. The dimming control per outputs carried out
with two control wires. Maximum control load per channel is 100 mA. The
Switch/Dim Actuator needs only EIB / KNX bus voltage for normal function.
With eight potential free relays the supply voltage of the ballasts and
consequently the luminaries can be switched on and off over or manually
without any auxiliary supply. Contact position is displayed.
- recall and set of up to 18 light scenes (8-bit commands) per channel

- characteristic curve adjustment to adapt ballast brightness characteristic
5.9 When combined with the light sensor, the device shall be able to perform
constant light control for the parameter lighting
5.10 Light sensor shall be able to perform constant light level control with
dimmer (ON/OFF switching of lighting circuit and step function control are
not allow). Sensor shall be able to send brightness value to all dimmer in
the system for share sensor function.
TS/E/S67/9
5.11 The presence sensor shall control lighting as a function of the brightness
and/or movement. It is designed for ceiling installation and can be both
flush mounted and surface mounted. It should have high sensitivity
sensors/ lens system and depending on the application chosen, different
functions which can be varied via the software. There shall be 4 sensors
with lens in each presence sensor.
5.13 No additional power supply is needed for individual bus devices; they
should be powered by the power supply transmitting through the bus line.

programmable at any time. Any areas with more than 2 lighting circuits
shall have a switch to be able to program with a spare rocker for central
control such as ON/OFF or dimming etc.
6.3 Dimming Actuators
the dimming actuator to different loads such as : LED lighting,
Fluorescent lighting with 1-10V control signal, LV Halogen
(Electronic / Conventional transformer), 230VAC Halogen and
230VAC Incandescent.

amplifier can be extended from the existing dimming actuator,
without any modification at the above ceiling, only affected at the
control panel.

TS/E/S67/10
retrieve/recall and store at any programmable switches, touch panel
and any PC at FCC room or other terminal.
(f) These Switch/-Dim Actuators shall have built-in manual overriding

switch for each channel/output for manual switching of the Lighting
State in the event of device or channel/output failure.

loads such as different ampere rating e.g. 6A, 10A etc.

controls via the KNX / EIB and switches electrical consumers by
in case of bus voltage failure. The switching contacts are especially
designed for capacitive loads and therefore suited for relatively high
inrush currents.
KNX / EIB even without bus voltage or in a non-programmed state.
This shall be able to permit fast checking of connected consumers
for proper functioning.

output.
function (overload / under load) with predefined load limits (teach-in
or parameter setting) can be optionally activated with separately
TS/E/S67/11
(g) The specified Switch/-Dim Actuators for dimming a circuit shall

configures accordingly to suite each respective load and
rating, i.e. at all time each channel/output of a Switch/-Dim Actuator
shall strictly have 40% tolerance.
(i) The Switch Actuators for On/Off Lighting Control shall strictly be AX
rated type as shown in the Tender Drawings that supports full load
without having to de-rate when connected with light fixtures with
high peak in-rush switching current such as Fluorescent and
PLC/Compact Fluorescent lamps and according to EN 60669.

feedback the Load/Current Situation. Load Current threshold can be
set for detecting the MCB and/or RCCB/ELCB trip, no load, partially
lost of load or any fault on the circuitry.

Switch Actuators.
(i) Load Current Recognition, Load Current Value Send and

(ii) Time functions and Delay On/Off;
(iii) Forced Control and Safety functions (Overriding Control

(iv) Reaction to Upper and Lower Threshold Values;
(v) Preferred State for Lights on Bus Voltage Failure and

Recovery.
The Dimming Actuators for other lamps such as 230VAC Halogen

LED Lamps, Low-Voltage Halogen LED Lamps and etc. shall be
universal and Modular Din-Rail Component (MDRC) type that works
on all kinds of transformers or directly without transformer. It shall
supports minimum load of 500W/VA in a single circuit connections
and expandable by End Users by only having to add Capacity
Boosters gradually to the existing dimmers and up to a maximum
load of 3000W/VA for the same dimming circuit.
TS/E/S67/12
tolerance.
6.5 DALI Interface Gateway
(a) The DALI Gateway shall be able to interface between a KNX/EIB

installation and a digital DALI (Digital Addressable Lighting
Interface) lighting system. The DALI Gateway allows the switching
and dimming of a maximum of 64 lamps including DALI device (e.g.
LED driver, electronic ballast). Each DALI lamp can be assigned up
to 32 different lighting groups that are controlled via the KNX/EIB.
Laboratories and lecture theatres etc into the higher-level KNX/EIB
building management. In addition, the lighting groups can be
integrated into up to 16 scenes that make it possible to recall pre-
programmed light moods or to save new light scene.
(b) The DALI Gateway shall be able to separate feedback of individual

switching and brightness states of the DALI groups to the KNX/EIB.
In addition, the general DALI operating status can be reported to
the KNX/EIB (error status, short-circuit, status of supply voltage).
(c) The controls at each programmable switches or touch panel / PC

off in parallel with the KNX / EIB even without bus voltage or in an
consumers.
(d) The DALI Gateway is able to check the devices integrated into the
DALI system for integrity. The replacement of a defect electronic
ballast device by a new one, for example, can be detected if the
“Automatic device replacement” has been activated. The decoding
of the parameterized data into the new electronic ballast device is
carried out fully automatic by the Gateway without any special
commissioning. That makes the corrective maintenance of a DALI
system much easier.
(e) The device shall be able can be integrated into scene functions with
different brightness values and centralized switching of all groups is
also possible.
TS/E/S67/13
(f) The DALI gateway shall be able to permits the error status
feedback of the connected DALI devices. In case of failure, the
DALI components will send “lamp error” or “Error in device (e.g.
electronic ballast error)”status information to the DALI Gateway
where it will be stored. Furthermore, feedback for DALI short-circuit
shall be also possible to be detected by the DALI gateway.
(g) DALI gateway shall be able to perform central function, defining

incorporated.
(h) The EIB-DALI Gateway for managing any brand of DALI Ballasts
and Transformers shall have a ready-built Diagnosis Program that
can be installed immediately without any customization into the
Visualization Station for checking various statuses on Lamp/s
Failure, Ballast/s and Transformer/s Failure, 230VAC failure to
Ballast/s and Transformer/s as well as communication failure
between the EIB-DALI Gateway and the DALI Ballast/s and
Transformer/s.
7.1 The IP router shall be able to interconnect KNX / EIB lines via data
EIBnet/IP standard so that it cannot only be used for routing KNX / EIB
telegrams between lines via an IP network, it shall also for accessing to the
bus from a PC or from other DP devices (visualization displays and
for the programming software. By using a LAN modem, the installation can
be remotely accessed even if there is no direct local data network.
7.2 The use of the existing data network for communication between bus lines
in the IP router shall be able to provide: fast communication between KNX /
EIB lines, extending a KNX / EIB system by means of LAN and WAN
beyond a building, direct routing of KNX / EIB data to each network user
(not in bus monitor mode) and KNX / EIB remote configuration from each
network access point.
7.3 In the design capacity as an area/line coupler, the IP router shall be able to
interconnect two KNX / EIB lines to form a logical functional area ensuring
at the same time the electrical separation between these lines. Each bus
line of a KNX / EIB installation is thus electrically independent of other bus
lines.
TS/E/S67/14
8.1 The Presence Sensors and Motion Sensors proposed shall be KNX/EIB
enabled and integrated type and able to communicate within devices on its
parameter settings that requires no additional cables for power supply and
with the same pair of Bus Cable it shall besides receiving the 24VDC SELV
Bus Voltage also transmit all control functions.
side wings (left and right) each 6m and 180 deg. horizontal and downwards
angle of 45 deg. and frontier 16m and side wings (left and right) each 10m
and 220 deg. horizontal and downwards angle of 90 deg. for the long
range, ceiling-mount and weatherproof type.
8.4 The Presence Sensors shall be ceiling-mount type and have possibilities of
controlling lights via sensing of brightness and/or movements. It shall have
high-sensitivity sensors and multi-lens that detect 360 deg. and up to 5m
diameter range at a 2.2m to 3m mounting height.
8.5 The Presence Sensors and Motion Sensors shall besides being able to set
the Lux Intensity and Off Timer via the ETS Program also possible of
setting by the built-in knobs on the devices. It shall also allow for the
adjustment of detection range to the desires of the End Users.
perform as Lighting Management to achieve energy saving also possible to
act as Security Monitoring to meet the cost saving in materials and
send commands to the Visualization Station or BMS/IBMS during its idle
period when lights are not required but security monitoring and protection is
still in need.
BMS/IBMS.
disable from the work station.
TS/E/S67/15
9. Daylight Sensor

9.4 The sensor can be used in conjunction with venturi valve / variable air
volume box /Fan Coil unit control via Bus interface to BMS/IBMS.


and enable to feedback to the KNX/EIB bus lines.
9.7 The Daylight sensor level setrpoint shall be able to be adjusted by the user
at the workstation through graphic.

TS/E/S67/16
Carbon Monoxide sensor shall be of electrochemical sensing with IP65 enclosure,

operating at 12VDC or 24VDC, for the for the detection of Carbon Monoxide for
enclosed vehicle parking, generator room, gas heater, steam plant room system. .
It shall sense the level of methane gas from 0ppm to 2000ppm at operation
condensing. The data shall be collected and analyzed for health and safety alert
13. Electronic Switches
13.1 The programmable switches shall have its parameters programmed, each
switches transmits telegrams to the KNX / EIB. These can be, for instance,
for switching or momentary-contact control, for dimming or for motorized
blind control. It is also possible to program value transmitter functions such
as dimming value transmitters, light-scene extensions, temperature value
transmitters or brightness value transmitters.
functions.
environment.

objects. The status LEDS can then also signal the operating states of room
temperature controllers or indicate the results of logic value comparisons.
Another operation LED can also serve as an orientation light (steady or
also flashing) or be controlled via an independent communication object.
TS/E/S67/17
Stain-Less coating and tamper and thief proof. The Sub-contractor shall
14.1 The multi function sensor shall be of smart integrated type comprises of
occupancy sensor, photo sensor and thermal sensor. Sensor is to be of
compact size, all in one.
services.

consumption, operation temperature between -35oC to +70oC and humidity
from 20% to 95% RH non-condensing.
overriding switch.
14.8 The multi function sensors shall be able to trigger the artificial light dimming
and mixing of daylight automatically to meet the pre-set lux level in the
space
14.9 The light fixture shall be addressable to the Data Server via the connection
of device controller to each light fixture.
TS/E/S67/18
BMS/IBMS.
15. Access Control & Card Programming
All device shall have an integrated KNX interface composed by a removable bus
connection terminal for an easy, fast and secure installation.
15.1 The system shall interface with the card access control system based on
single KNX devices.
(a) The system shall allow to access the room and display the
status of the room via the indication of LEDs;
(b) Pocket reader (card holder) to activate the associated loads or

specific scenarios
(c) card programming with USB connection to configure access

permissions through the interfacing of KNX system software
15.2 Access control system shall allow the functions of card recognition and
thereby using the interfacing for electro-mechanical lock opening, service
activation and scenario control. Card readers shall have freely
programmable inputs and outputs in order to make the system really
flexible: these inputs/outputs can be used to control sockets (courtesy
lights, etc.), room service calls, alarms, etc. and energy savings such as
turning off the air-conditioning, television after detecting an open window,
after the leaving of the room, etc.
15.3 Access control devices shall be modular and flush mounting; the devices
shall be aesthetically coordinated with wiring devices: same colours,
shapes, finishings, materials and decorating plates
TS/E/S67/19
15.4 Card access reader/ Face recognition reader
Card access or Face recognition reader, enables controlling entry to the

rooms where it is installed externally either through mobile phone
application. The reader shall have two onboard relays in order for the
interfacing to the KNX system to control the door lock, a courtesy light, or
for other uses; the device shall be equipped with two inputs for connecting
electrical equipment of the ON/OFF type (for instance to control the door
open or closed switch, a magnetic contact for signalling an open or closed
window, bathroom ceiling pull-cord alarm, etc.). On the front of the touch
screen panel there shall be LEDs each of which associated with an icon for
signalling the following states:
(a) Access control (entry allowed or entry denied);
(b) Room status (room occupied or do not disturb)
(c) Call status (emergency request with bathroom pull-cord, room

service call, etc.)
(d) Services status
15.5 Card holder
The card holder shall enable checking for the presence in the room of the
visitor or the staff by unambiguously identifying the transponder card
inserted. The pocket reader shall be equipped with two or more relays that
can be configured for managing door locking, controlling a courtesy light,
optimizing energy consumption or for even more uses; the device shall be
equipped with two inputs for connecting electrical equipment of the ON/OFF
type (for instance to control the door open or closed switch, a magnetic
contact for signalling an open or closed window, bathroom emergency pull-
cord alarm, Television and other equipment that have potential of energy
saving without affecting operation etc.).
TS/E/S67/20
15.6 Mobile Phone Global Positioning System (GPS) Tracker
The GPS tracker upon sensing the visitor mobile phone location and unique
number using the wireless shall enable checking for the presence in the
room of the visitor or the staff by unambiguously identifying the unique
number that being transmitted. The device controller shall be equipped with
two or more relays that can be configured for managing door locking,
controlling a courtesy light, optimizing energy consumption or for even more
uses; the device shall be equipped with two inputs for connecting electrical
equipment of the ON/OFF type (for instance to control the door open or
closed switch, a magnetic contact for signalling an open or closed window,
bathroom emergency pull-cord alarm, Television and other equipment that
have potential of energy saving without affecting operation etc.).
15.7 Card programmer
(a) Transponder card reader/programmer shall be with vertical pocket in

table mounting box. The device shall enable programming and
coding the transponder cards to use with the external readers and
the card holder
(b) The reader/programmer must be connected to a personal computer

on which the BMS/LMS software must be installed for creating and
managing the necessary data for the configuration of the cards
according to the different requirements.
(c) The device shall be equipped with a cable for connecting the
USB port of the PC and a backlit pocket for signalling card
reading/writing. It shall be installable in table mounting box and it
shall not need any driver.
16. Room Control
16.1 Lighting Control
The ON, OFF or Dimming of lights shall be activated and controlled by:
(a) Supervisor panels
(b) Electronic switches
(c) Scenarios (manually activated with pushbutton or automatically

activated by card insertion into the card-holder)
(d) Supervision software
The Lighting control strategy shall be submitted to Engineer for approval

TS/E/S67/21
16.2 Electronic Switches
(a) The electronic switches shall be equipped with independent

buttons, depending on the circuit and scenarios, that can be
used for switching on/ off of general loads, controlling roller
shutters or curtains, adjusting lights (on-off or dimming),
launching scenarios or typical room functions (“do not disturb”)
(b) Electronic switches shall be flush mounted, they shall be

integrated with wiring devices for a perfect aesthetical
coordination with same matching finishes plates and surface
finishing of wiring devices.
(c) The switches shall be completed with button caps that enable
identifying the function of single programmed push button. The
button caps shall be customizable with silk-screened or
engraved text descriptors or custom silk-screened icons that
visually describe the function assigned to the single button.
Each single switch shall work as 2, 4 or 6 independents buttons
by simply replacing related single/double caps and
programming via Engineering Tool Software functions. The
switches shall have 2, 4 or 6 independent LEDs in order to
have better visibility in the darkness
(d) The modular switches shall have an integrated KNX interface

composed by a removable bus connection terminal for an easy,
fast and secure installation; they shall support 8 bit (1byte)
scene control programming.
16.3 Bedside Display Panel
A bedside panel shall be installed on both sides offering the following

functions:
(a) Lighting control
(b) Curtain and/or Blinds control
(c) Temperature control (set-point, display of temperature / relative

humidity and speed of fan coil)
(d) Scenarios control (for example: wake-up; reading)
(e) Room’s functions activation (for example: do not disturb)
TS/E/S67/22
The panel shall be flush mounted, it shall be modular with same

matching finishes plate and touch-screen technology. It shall be
integrated with wiring devices for a perfect aesthetical coordination. The
display shall not exceed 2.5” of diagonal.
The panel shall have an integrated KNX interface composed by a

removable bus connection terminal for an easy, fast and secure
installation.
16.4 Supervisor Panel
A supervisor panel shall be installed inside the room and it shall have
the following functions:
(c) Water heater control (on/off)
(d) Television (on/off)
(e) Temperature control (set-point and speed of fan coil)
(f) Scenarios control (for example: wake-up; reading)
(g) Room’s functions activation (for example: do not disturb)
The panel shall be flush or desk mounted, it shall be modular with

decorating plate and touch-screen technology. It shall be integrated
with wiring devices for a perfect aesthetical coordination. The display
shall not exceed 4.5” of diagonal and it shall be based on TFT
technology with coloured icons and free customizable texts.
The panel shall have an integrated KNX interface composed by a

removable bus connection terminal for an easy, fast and secure
installation.
16.5 Room Temperature Controller
(a) The room shall be equipped with LCD thermostats, conveniently

located for optimal visitor comfort. Thermostat commands shall
include:
(i) Temperature Control
(ii) Fan Speed
(iii) System ON / OFF

TS/E/S67/23
(b) This device shall be suitable to control and monitor room

temperature, the thermostat shall be equipped with an ON/OFF
input that can be used for applications such as detecting an
open window or for other general uses. In addition, it shall have
a relay output that can be used to control 2-way modulating
solenoid valve and speed control for a fan-coil. The device shall
be equipped with a display and buttons to control the
temperature set-point and the speed of the fan-coil.
(c) It shall also have an analogue input for connecting of an

external NTC sensor in order to control the temperature of a
second zone. Where required, the external temperature sensor
could be used to calculate the set-point in combination with the
internal sensor of the thermostat to control the room
temperatre. External NTC sensor must be flush mounted and
(d) The thermostat shall be able to directly control the 2-way

modulating solenoid valve for the air-conditioning system
besides turning it off if there is an open window using a
magnetic contact connected to the thermostat input.
(e) The thermostat shall be fully controllable by the supervision

software.
(f) Electronic thermostats shall be flush mounted, they shall be

(g) The thermostat shall have an integrated KNX interface

composed by a removable bus connection terminal for an easy,
fast and secure installation.
16.6 Blinds and Curtains Controller
(a) The room shall be equipped with multiple motorized

Blinds/Curtains with related control switches or touch panels,
conveniently located for optimal visitor comfort
(b) Opening and closing of blind/curtains shall be activated by:
(i) Supervisor panels
(ii) Electronic switches
TS/E/S67/24
(iii) Scenarios (manually activated with pushbutton or

automatically activated by card insertion into the card-
holder)
(iv) Supervision software
16.7 Presence/Absence detectors
(a) The primary role of the presence detectors is to save energy in

the common areas like corridors or toilets: they shall be able to
turn on/off the lights or the climate control when a presence is
detected.
(b) These devices, whenever motion is detected, shall send a

message on the KNX Bus turning on the indicator LED
according to the set brightness threshold (lights on/off according
to the brightness in the room). The detector shall be also able to
manage movement signals coming from any other KNX device
in MASTER/SLAVE mode.
(c) Electronic detectors shall be flush mounted., they shall be

integrated with wiring devices for aesthetical coordination with
same matching finishes plates and surface finishing of wiring
devices.
(d) The detector shall have an integrated KNX interface composed

by a removable bus connection terminal for an easy, fast and
secure installation.
16.8 Lighting sensors
The lighting sensor shall be ceiling mounted and able to detect the
brightness in the room and keep the level of brightness in the rooms
constant, combining the natural light and the artificial light, thus
obtaining the greatest savings and optimizing energy consumptions.
It shall be able to detect the degree of brightness and switch lights on
and off in a differentiated manner according to the set threshold
value.
16.9 Lift interfacing
The system shall be able to monitor and send contact to lift call button and
lift floor button. The system shall be able to accept third party interfacing
such as BMS, mobile application and database. System shall call the lift
and by using the mobile application or other third party software.
TS/E/S67/25
17. Voice Controlled Room Management System
The voice command system shall be able to provide a SMART room management
system through voice command.
17.1. The lighting management system or wireless mesh network lighting

management system shall integrate and controlled through voice devices.
.The room management system shall be through simple voice words
command and respond, it shall control door opening, on/off/dimming of the
room lighting, on/off fan coil unit, thermostat temperature setting, reading
out, bring up/down of curtain, room service, on/off television, selection of
channels and any other Internet of Things (IoT) etc.
17.2. The system shall integrate into the BAS /IBMS system for the control of
thermostat temperature setpoint, fan speed and any other HVAC
equipments inside the rooms.
17.3. Sub-contractor shall provide all the necessary IP gateways, interfacing

gateway, necessary accessories and programming for a complete SMART
voice controlled system.
17.4. The voice control system shall consists of main Server console, data
network, voice device, voice control devices which receive voice command
and transmitted to the equipment, devices and system to operate it
automatically through voice command.
17.5. Sub-contractor shall provide all the necessary firewall set up and the
system shall not have any internet security vulnerability.
17.6. Voice control system shall allowing user to easily adjust the room
temperature and lighting levels, or utilise entertainment devices, all through
speech.
17.7. The voice devices shall be activated by the smart phone or the pocket card
reader. Where any of the above is being detected, the voice control system
and room management system shall immediately activate through greeting
enable the room as occupied mode. Where any of the status is unable to
be detected, voice control system and room management system shall off
all the lighting, television and off the fan coil unit and return to original set
up for unoccupied mode.
17.8. Voice control system should shortening response times, streamlining

booking processes and allowing user to make requests for room service
without needing to leave their room.
TS/E/S67/26
17.9. The voice control system shall be connected up to the booking processes,
enabling user to easily reserve a meeting room through a few simple voice
commands, or obtain an electronic key card to access the room.
Meanwhile, tourist information or weather forecasts can be provided
immediately, at any time of the day or night. This information shall be up-to-
date.
17.10. The Voice device shall be CE certified and operate using the 230V/50Hz
power supply and have a 7 inch touch screen, LED indication, dual
speaker, microphones, 5 megapixel cameras for video call. The voice
control shall be operated in wireless using dual-band Wi-Fi supports 802.11
a/b/g/n (2.4 and 5 GHz) networks, Bluetooth support for streaming audio
from a device to the Echo and for voice control of mobile devices. The
voice device shall have buttons to on/off of the device, control the volume
of speaker and mute the microphone. The system shall be able to use the
standard software through web portal, mobile application for all setup
requirements.
17.11. The system can be easily provides of multiple voice devices at the same
time, and automatically connect them through a centralized console. The
console must be able to manage hundreds of voice devices. The console
shall allow specifying device settings like volume, check device state, and
remotely reset devices to prepare for the next user. Voice device shall be
easy to active for any usage.
17.12. The voice command console system shall be able to delete and de-
registered any user account and registered a new user account through
local software at the console for all the voice devices.
17.13. The voice commands shall automatically delete every day and can also
perform a remote clearance through console as an additional precaution.
TS/E/S67/27
18. KNX/EIB IP Gateway
18.1. The KNX/EIB IP gateway shall be a universal IP Interface and IP Gateway

for the KNX/EIB Installation Bus. The KNX /EIB IP shall be designed for
installation on DIN rail with a width of 2 units (36 mm).
18.2. The gateway shall be "Bus Access and Object Server" and provides an
interface to KNX/EIB installations both on the telegram level (KNXnet/IP
Tunneling) as well as on data point level .KNX/EIB Group Objects /
KNX/EIB Application Layer, with semantic meta-data for rooms and
functions.
18.3. It shall have the following controls and displays feature as a minimum:
(a) Power Connector 12-30 V DC
(b) KNX/EIB Bus Connector
(c) Ethernet Connector with PoE
(d) OLED Display b/w
(e) LED for Programming Mode
(f) Up Button
(g) Down Button
(h) Escape Button
(i) Enter Button
18.4. The settings of the device can be accessed via
(a) Direct setting on the device
(b) Internet browser and web interface
(c) Latest Engineering Tool Software
18.5. The KNX/EIB IP gateway can be integrated and operated with intelligent
personal assistants such as voice control devices. The KNX/EIB installation
and the devices connected to voice control can be controlled using the
interface of all the human voice.
TS/E/S67/28
18.6. The KNX/EIB IP gateway shall has an integrated web server that allows
access to the device settings in a web browser on a PC or a mobile device
such as a smart phone or a tablet.
18.7. The device shall allows the visualization of buildings, rooms and functions
in a standard web browser on a PC or mobile device with its integrated web
server
18.8. The device shall provides the following to access an installation:
(a) As Programming Interface On telegram level (KNXnet/IP Tunneling)

and can be used as bus interface for Engineering Tool Software
(b) As a residential gateway via KNX/EIB IP Binary Protocol, KNX IP

Web Services, KNX IP RESTful Web Services and Web Application
using a standard web browser
18.9. The KNX/EIB IP gateway can be used as interface to the KNX/EIB Bus on
the telegram level. It must be compatible with the KNXnet/IP specification
and can be used as bus interface for Engineering Tool Software or other
programs that support the KNXnet/IP Tunnelling. It shall supports up to 8
simultaneous connections. The settings for the interface (e.g. IP
configuration) can be done with all the for Engineering Tool Software
product entries that are available for this device.
18.10. The KNX/EIB IP gateway system shall be able to interface based on a

specific protocol to implement for non-KNX/EIB devices. The KNX/EIB IP
gateway maps KNX/EIB data to an IT-friendly API (Application
Programming Interface). This shall reduces the effort to connect e.g.
control or visualization tools to KNX/EIB. It shall store all data point values
even if the device is not connected.
18.11. The KNX/EIB IP gateway architecture shall not only allows access to the
runtime data, but also to the structure of the KNX/EIB installation. All
information about rooms in a building and the available functions can be
read as metadata from a client. With the Engineering Tool Software, the
rooms and the functions are defined, which should be available to the user.
TS/E/S67/29
The Interface gateway with BMS/IBMS shall be located at FCC room’s control
panel. Each gateway can serve up to 15 lines per 1 Area. The transfer of the data
points is in 2-way communications via data exchange of EIS data RS232 format or
BACNET, the group addresses at each point are swiftly appeared at BMS system
panels and it allowed BMS/IBMS to control and monitoring freely at the Lighting
Control system data points.
20. Monitoring & Control at FCC room
20.1 The central control station at FCC room shall have a Lighting Management
software in which embedded used for controlling and monitoring all lighting.

Microsoft Server OS, in Intel’s Pentium 4 processor running at minimum
Optical mouse, keyboard, CDRW drive, 2 nos. RS232 Serial Port, 3 nos
Ethernet card, 4 nos. of USB, 24’’ LCD flat screen monitor in super VGA
graphics card and with adaptor for Ethernet networking with TCP/IP
network protocols. The system shall have 1hour UPS back up

20.4 The software shall be easily configurable and installable, it shall use the
database created with latest Engineering Tool Software by importing the
project directly. It shall be equipped with an intuitive user interface,
graphically appealing and fully customizable.
functions :

level shall dictate the Display Menu options only to the functions
available for that account or areas of expertise in a specific
professional.
(b) Active Status & Control – Visualization of status feedback on all

active status of lighting in the form of graphical layout floor plan and
possible for switching On/Off and performing dimming on dedicated
icons / symbols;
TS/E/S67/30
(c) Remote Access and Remote Web Access – Allows up to 20 users

with different user ID and password to access the graphical
software concurrently via the LAN or Campus intranet Infrastructure
with specific settings created by the Network Administrator. The
Remote Computer will connect and interact with the System by
Microsoft Windows Internet Explorer environment without the needs
to download any program or database; Remote desktop type of
access will not be accepted;

graphical screen; - a digitalized layout displayed symbolically and


needed to.

(j) Graphics showing the line status of EIB and Power meter loops
TS/E/S67/31
(k) Monitoring of all power meter functions and history- The energy

day light harvesting, HVAC saving, Occupancy saving. The artificial
light management come with mobile Apps and/or wireless room
control handset to activate scenes of the lights
(o) Facility Booking System – Booking through third party interfacing

(p) Complementing HVAC System – Real time HVAC data (room

conditioning.
(q) Car Park Management – Basement / indoor car park lighting energy
saving and monitoring system base on microwave sensor with
integrated Smart driver for control and data collection.
20.6 The software shall able to provide with interfacing to mobile phone
application control and monitoring to the following additional function:
(a) Supervise temperatures (set-point/speed of fan coil) , I/O, alarms

(with acoustic pop-up massage), security, lights (on/off and
dimming), Television (on/off), Water heater (on/off) and curtains
(open/close) or blinds (up/down)
(b) Manage Visitors Room Check-in\Check-out with the possibility of

integration with “Property Management System” or similar
(c) Display length of stay, day of departure and other information about
Visitors
(d) Manage Services and Privileges (creation of cards with services

enabling)
TS/E/S67/32
(e) Display the room status (reserved, booked, occupied with

identification of guest presence)
(f) Stop access to single rooms
(g) Check and manage transit through common areas
(h) Search and export entry report
(i) Display service requests
(j) Manage the records of the staff and Visitors
(k) Create and manage scenes and commands of virtual devices

down time resilience with redundancy and secured to cater to the growth of
storing of overall data for up to 10 years.
data analytics aims to immediately extract knowledgeable information using
data mining techniques that help in making predictions, identifying recent
trends, finding hidden information, and making decisions.
in a convenient manner. It must provide data redundancy by having at least
3 time replications for its raw data storage and able to scale for further
storage space without powering down the system.
TS/E/S67/33
21.1 The complete Lighting Control System shall be fully tested and
commissioned by a Specialist to ensure that the desired performance is
met and that the configuration is as per this Technical Specifications,
Design Parameters and Tender.
21.2 The Sub-contractor shall be further required to liaise with the End Users
on the Lighting Control System controls and to assist and advise them on
the programming on the various required settings as well as train them to
use The System. This cost shall deem to be allowed for in the contract.
system.
(a) All the devices, controller, gateway, lighting fixture physical address
(MAC), IP address and device address for the entire system in
relationship.
(b) Floor plan showing the devices, controller, gateway, location with all
the necessary address indicated.
(c) Floor plan showing all the lighting fixture with sensor installed with
their physical address
22.3 Sub-Contractor shall submit all the system programming, and other
22.4 Sub-Contractor shall submit all the final as-built program (3 set) after all the
adjustment during Defect Liability Period.
TS/E/S67/34
SECTION 69 – WRELESS MESH NETWORK LIGHTING MANAGEMENT SYSTEM
1. General
1.1 The Sub-Contractor shall engage a Specialist for this part of the works
i.e. to design, supply, install, test and commission the complete
Wireless Mesh Network Lighting Control System, Power monitoring and
status monitoring of switchboards, distribution board, generator and
Handicap call bell as per but not limited to this Technical Specifications,
Design Parameters and Tender Drawings.

Supply, Delivery, Termination, Testing and Commissioning of the
Lighting Control System’s devices and Control Schedules necessary for
the proper installation and functioning of the Wireless Mesh Network
Lighting Control System in this part of the sub-contract.
1.3 The specialist shall have relevant experience in the design of wireless
mesh network in light control, monitoring, data analysis in large
commercial building, institutional and housing development.
1.4 The Contractor shall engage a Specialist for this part of the works and
1.5 The LV electrical system shall comply to the following standard:
(a) Code of Practices: SS 638,
(b) Fire Safety and Shelter Department (FSSD).
(c) SP Power Grid Limited (SPPG) on Service Cable Sample and

Product Specification
1.6 The wireless mesh network to meet to the following standard :
(a) BBF TR-069 CPE WAN Management Protocol, Broadband

Forum
(b) Core Version 4.0 Bluetooth Core Specification Version 4.0
(c) CISPR 11 - Industrial, scientific and medical equipment - Radio-

frequency disturbance characteristics - Limits and methods of
measurement.
(d) ECMA 404, Oct 2013 JSON Data Interchange Format
(e) IEEE 11073 IEEE 11073 Personal Health Data (PHD) Standards
TS/E/S69/1
(f) IEEE 802.11 Information technology – Telecommunications and

information exchange between systems – Local and
metropolitan area networks – Specific requirements, Part 11:
Wireless LAN Medium Access Control (MAC) and Physical
Layer (PHY) Specifications
(g) IEEE 802.15.4 Local and metropolitan area networks – Part

15.4: Low-Rate Wireless Personal Area Networks (LR-WPANs)
(h) IETF RFC 3411-3418 Simple Network Management Protocol

(SNMP) version 3
(i) IETF RFC 6120 Extensible Messaging and Presence Protocol

(XMPP): Core
(j) IETF RFC 7252 The Constrained Application Protocol (CoAP)
(k) IMDA TS IOT, Technical Specification for Internet of Thing-

Infocomm Media Development Authority, Singapore
(l) ISO/IEC 29182-1 Information technology – Sensor network :

Sensor network reference architecture (SNRA) – Part 1: General
overview and requirements
(m) ISO/IEC 29182-2 Information technology – Sensor network :

Sensor network reference architecture (SNRA) – Part 2:
Vocabulary and terminology
(n) ISO/IEC 29182-3 Information technology – Sensor network :

Reference architecture views
(o) ISO/IEC 29182-4 Information technology – Sensor network :

Sensor network reference architecture (SNRA) – Part 4: Entity
models
(p) Technical Reference 40 : Technical Reference for sensor

networks for Smart Nation (homes)- Enterprise Singapore.
(q) Telecommunication Cybersecurity Code of Practice- Infocomm

Media Development Authority, Singapore.
1.7 All the sensor shall be certified with Underwriters Laboratories (UL) , CE
Marking (CE) and Restriction of Hazardous Substances (RoHS), The
sensor shall be flexible for all wireless protocol and conform with IEEE
802.15.4 depends on Network design application
1.8 All the wireless sensor, controller, gateway, devices shall operate at a
frequency of 2.4GHz, transmit Power of 10dBm and receiver Sensitivity
of -96dBm
TS/E/S69/2
1.9 The system shall be of open protocol wireless mesh networking

standard using wireless personal area network (WPAN). The mesh
networking shall use machine to machine wireless technologies for
launching Artificial Intelligent and Internet of Things (IoT). It shall be
open and readiness for third party software such as simple network
management protocol, mobile application interfacing and application
programming interfacing (API)
1.10 The wireless mesh networking shall design to have low power
consumption rate while to carry small amounts of data over a short
distance.
1.11 The mesh network system shall not cause any interference to the
operation of campus WIFI and any other equipments operation such as
medical equipment and electronic devices.
1.12 The required and accepted Wireless Mesh Network Lighting Control
System shall be strictly configured as per but not limited to this
Technical Specifications, Design Parameters and Tender Drawings.
Any alternative proposed and offered is not acceptable unless
otherwise approved by the S.O.
1.13 The Building shall be equipped with a mesh network lighting

management system providing flexible and efficient control with
management of the whole lighting and environmental installation from a
centralized location. The system shall be scalable and expandable for
future add-on.
1.14 All devices connected to the system, such as switches, sensors,

actuators, displays, control units, dimmers etc. can exchange
information via this system. All devices shall be able to select freely and
are interactive between one another. These devices shall be able to be
programmed to perform its present specific tasks as required by the
project and with the flexibilities in changing its desired tasks to meet the
End Users’ requirement at any time in the future.
different loads and also provide flexibility in changing its tasks or loads
at any time.

intelligent or multi processor system with micro-processor on each
control device. If a device should fail, only the functions associated with
that device may be lost while other devices on the system are not
affected. The system protocol shall accept all brand of Internet of
Things (IoT) and Artificial Intelligent (AI).
1.17 The lighting and power circuits should be wired in a topology that meets
the wiring regulation for a mesh network and conventional
ON/OFF/Dimming switching control and also to be automation ready
using a non-proprietary protocol system.
TS/E/S69/3

compatible with Microsoft Windows OS to enable the lighting operations
to be centrally programmed and adapted, with local controls available
from local wall switches. The entire system shall be centrally controlled
and monitored in real time. Lighting layouts shall detail the active status
of each relay.
1.20 The system shall be of IP web base access that can be easily
interfaced with third party and shall have gateway/bridges interfaces
(SNMP, BACNET, OPC) for connectivity to other control LAN networks
such as Integrated Building Management/Automation System, Facility
Booking System, Internet or Intranet System. All BACnet devices shall
be BTL listed
1.21 The system shall compiled to SELV (Safety Extra Low Voltage) or LV (
Low Voltage) and should consist of a dedicated control cable shielded
from interference, with rated insulation voltage required to meet the
wiring regulation. Approved system should be mesh networking,
BACnet/IP or equivalent, which should be an open and non-proprietary
system having structure able to connect and operate compatible
communication bus devices.

intelligence in all communication bus devices. The system shall not
require a PC or any other special control unit after testing and
commissioning.
1.23 The backbone protocol of the system should be based on the mesh
network and BACnet system.
1.24 The system shall able improve for measuring, controlling, monitoring
and signaling all building services functions locally and remotely.
training from certified training personnel.
1.27 The system shall not have any subscription or any annually license or
subscription renewal required.
last setting. The light shall be 100% turned up during any power failure
to controller or sensor
TS/E/S69/4
1.29 Sub-Contractor to have pre-installation mock up and demonstration the

on the system installation. It shall also demonstrate every level of work
2.1 The data transmitted between the Gateway and the Server shall base
on Ethernet, 4G, 5G or VPN and to be approved by engineer.
2.2 The data transmission rate should be least 250 Kbps and testing and
compliant to IEEE802.15. 4 using area wireless couplers.
2.4 The transmission should be through a decentralized data access

CSMA/CA, where in an event of collision detection or resolution there
would be no loss of telegrams.
2.6 The data communication shall consist of devices controller, controller

gateway and system web base network controller.
2.7 The transmission to the devices shall not have any non programmable
time delay. All the time delay shall be programmable.
2.8 The data transmission from the sensor to the access point (AP) shall be
wireless with minimum AES 128-bit encryption of data.
2.9 The Data Server shall be designed with capability to customize and
handle any new application / function may or may not be related to the
IoT device.
3. Data Communications Cable
3.1 The insulation voltage of the data communication bus cable with the
system shall have adequate protection to meet overvoltage requirement
of the wiring requirement.
3.2 The size of the communication bus cable for parallel controller should
be 2X2X0.8 mm diameter with screen, J-Y(st)Y 2x2x0.8. each able to
withstand 2.5KV and 4KV insulation respectively of the type of Bus
Cable used. Mesh networking communication bus cable shall be of Cat-
6
TS/E/S69/5
3.3 Communication Bus Cable shall be run in dedicated conduit or as

specified. Sharing of conduit with LV electrical circuits is not allowed.
3.4 The mesh network communication bus should link all input devices
such as lighting gear, switches, touch panels, combine sensors
(Occupancy sensor, ambient light sensor, temperature sensor) motion
sensors, light sensor etc. and be connected to output devices such as
switch actuators, dimmer, brightness controllers, etc.
3.5 The communication bus cable should be able to handle information,

data exchange and supply power to all devices on the bus.
(a) Control Panels
(b) System components and accessories. E.g. Data rails, Data

connector, IP Router, Power Supply, Data rail cover and
Communicating Bus connecting blocks. Wireless controller,
Wireless web base network controller, devices gateway.
(c) Switch Actuators and dimmer actuator for all kinds of lighting
such LED lighting, fluorescent lighting, incandescent lighting and
halogen lighting.
(d) Programmable switches with positive on and off status

indicators by LED lights. The configuration of switches varies
from 1-gang, 2-gang, 4-gang and 8-gang. A maximum of 5
switches can be mounted into a single frame.
(e) Control cable (2x2x0.8 mm, with adequate insulation) and data
communication for signal transmission.
(f) Cat 6 cable for the wireless mesh network setup
(g) Scene/Mood Control programmable switch, shall be also

configure
TS/E/S69/6
4.1 Parameter lights along the glass façade shall be equipped with Daylight
photo sensor / occupancy presence sensor. These sensors should be
able to achieve dual functions of presence sensing and constant light
level control. The sensor can be used to measure the brightness level in
rooms to achieve constant lux level controls. They shall be switched off
or dimmed if sufficient natural light is enough to maintain the lux level or
when no presence is detected.
4.2 Every light fixture shall be paired with the sensor and generate a Mac
address. Each sensor shall be labelled with a unique code. The unique
code will be used for the identification of the light fixture.
4.3 Microwave Presence sensors & motion sensors for control of Lights at
all Toilets as specified.
4.4 Daylight photo sensors for dimming control of Lights at Building’s

Common Corridors, Staircases, areas close to windows and as
specified.
4.5 Office shall be equipped with multi function sensors with dimming
controls. The switches in the office shall be able to activate/ deactivate
the presence sensor. The switches shall be able to activate scenes or
on/off/dim the lights, The thermal sensor shall detect the radiant heat
map and adjust the HVAC to comfort level
4.6 Open Laboratories shall be equipped with multi function sensors with
dimming controls. Overriding switches in the laboratories shall be able
to activate/ deactivate the multi function sensor. When the brightness
detected by the sensors exceeds the predetermined Upper Threshold
level, “Off” or “Dim Down” Control Command shall be sent to the Switch
Actuators or Switch/-Dim Actuators respectively to manage the Lights in
these areas accordingly. Contrary, when the brightness detected falls
below the Lower Threshold, Lights are “On” or “Dim Up” accordingly.
During off-peak hours, the Presence/motion Sensors start functioning,
Lights shall be “On” throughout so long it continuously sense
movements and only switches “Off” upon continuously sensing no
movement for 30min. The thermal sensor will determine the heat map in
the laboratories and control the comfort level to pre-determine set point.
4.7 For Multi Purpose Rooms, the multi function sensor shall be able to use
to control individual partition of the room or all at once depending on the
partition condition as close or open between rooms. Dimming Controls
switch shall be provided for the multi Purpose Room. Thermal sensor
shall control the thermostat to the desire temperature.
TS/E/S69/7

shall be provided with multi function sensor with dimming controls
switch. The switches shall be able to activate scenes or on/off/dim the
lights. Wireless touch panels shall be integrated with the lighting
controls with the all the necessary controller to interface to AV systems,
Motorised Curtain/Blind systems, Motorized Projector Screens, Security
functions, Temperature/Thermal sensors and many more and not
limited to only Lighting Control, thus providing End Users with further
flexibilities and possibilities of adding this requirement and functions into
the existing Control System at any time in the future.
4.9 Timer Control and wireless Microwave sensor with IP65 rating for
control of lights at External Areas (eg. Landscape areas), outdoor street
light, pole light, wall light, building common areas, loading/unloading
Bay, meeting rooms, Lecture Theaters, Seminar rooms, Tutorial
Rooms, College Rooms, Landscapes and as specified used for. It shall
perform to meet the basic functions specified under this section.

4.11 The system should be able to incorporate energy saving features

through the use of timers, motion detectors, light sensors etc so that
unnecessary turning on of loads can be minimized.
4.12 The system devices should be able to communicate or control/monitor

via the Wireless Person Area Network (WPLAN), no need to install an
additional dedicated LAN.
4.13 The system should have rated actuators to facilitate the use of LED
light, energy saving bulbs or florescent tubes.
4.14 Time Schedules by the Lighting Management Station shall be set for
Lights at Building’s Common Areas, Landscapes and other areas as
determined by S.O. and End Users that requires “Time Control” to be
“On” and “Off” respectively as needed.

each Seminar room/ Lecture Theatre and other locations as determined
by the S.O. and End Users to control On/Off/Dim the Lights in these
areas and alternatively, Light Scenes or Preset.
4.16 Dimming can be programmed as needed for easier and convenient

control of lights.
4.17 Microwave sensor /Presence shall be provided for all Toilets and to be
only effectively sensing for moments after peak hours of the building
operation whereby, the Wire Mesh Network Lighting Management
Station shall sends a Time Schedule Control Command to enable and
disable these microwave / Presence sensors from functioning.
TS/E/S69/8
4.18 During peak hours, Lights in the Toilets shall always be “On” and when
the Microwave sensor / Presence Sensors start functioning, Lights shall
be “On” throughout so long it continuously sense movements and only
switches “Off” upon continuously sensing no movement for 30min.
4.19 Building’s Common Corridors with ample natural lights and other areas
as determined by the S.O. and End Users shall be provided with Photo
Daylight Sensor control. When the brightness detected by the sensors
exceeds the predetermined Upper Threshold level, “Off” or “Dim Down”
Control Command shall be sent to the Switch Actuators or Switch/-Dim
Actuators respectively to manage the Lights in these areas accordingly.
Contrary, when the brightness detected falls below the Lower
Threshold, Lights are “On” or “Dim Up” accordingly.
4.20 Smart Plug Load monitoring and control. Base on wireless Mesh
network to enable the communication between a Mobile application or
Laptop with the Plug Load for the control, setting, collect of data with
built in calendar, power meter and with cut out function to the power
supply.
4.22 Technology applications for Human or equipment tracking, Location

Way finding, public transport location, Car position tracing where
applicable.
4.23 The system shall be capable to integrate with other new application in
the future.
5. Modular Controller Devices
5.1 All controller devices should be made according to DIN EN 50022 and
suitable for mounting on 35-mm DIN-rail mounting rail.
5.2 Each controller device should have a built-in with programmable

Physical Address. The Physical Address should have the capability to
be re-programmable.
5.3 The communication bus lines should be able to incorporate up to 100

devices connected and these lines should be able to be grouped up to
12 lines together via gateway couplers to form an area.
5.4 The switch actuator for lighting control should have a rating of 16AX
and 16A AC3 or AC5a utilization category with individual mechanical
bypass switch built into the actuator for each channel. For each
individual fitting the on/off switch actuator shall size up according to the
inrush and operating current.
5.5 Switch actuator shall at each channel be able to feedback the status of
the contact and load.
TS/E/S69/9
5.6 The Switch Actuators shall have up to 400,000 times of switching

operation for each channel/output at rated current and up to 1,000,000
times without load. Verification Report and Certification from
manufacturer shall be provided upon request by the S.O. prior to
approval.
5.7 No special digital addressable electronic ballast or LED driver is needed

for all the light fittings. The switch actuator should be able to control the
conventional electro magnetic ballast or electronic ballast.
5.8 All terminal blocks shall be screwless, maintenance-free push-in cage

clamp connections for wires from 2.5mm2 up to 16mm2. Screwless
spring-type, No current carrying metal shall be exposed after cables or
terminal blocks’ accessories are connected. All terminal block shall be
non-combustible and self-extinguishing.
5.9 The terminal blocks shall be sized and rated in accordance to the size
and current carrying capacity of the wires. The terminal blocks shall
meet or exceed the requirements of International Electro technical
Commission, IEC 60947-7-1.

luminaries with electronic ballasts, dimmers, driver or transformers with
0 – 10 V / 1V to 10V control input. The dimming control per outputs
carried out with two control wires. Maximum control load per channel is
100 mA. The Switch/Dimming Actuator needs only controller bus
voltage for normal function. With eight potential free relays the supply
voltage of the ballasts , driver and consequently the luminaries can be
switched on and off over or manually without any auxiliary supply.
Contact position is displayed.
- different adjustable dimming speeds for dimming and setting

brightness
- recall and set of up to 18 light scenes per channel
TS/E/S69/10

- characteristic curve adjustment to adapt ballast and driver brightness

characteristic
5.11 When combined with the photo light sensor, the device shall be able to
perform constant light control for the parameter lighting
5.12 Photo Light sensor shall be able to perform constant light level control
with dimmer (ON/OFF/Dimming switching of lighting circuit and step
function control are not allow). Sensor shall be able to send brightness
value to all dimmer in the system for share sensor function.
5.13 The motion presence sensor shall control lighting as a function of the
brightness and/or movement. It is designed for ceiling installation and
can be both flush mounted and surface mounted. It should have high
sensitivity sensors/ lens system and depending on the application
chosen, different functions which can be varied via the software. There
shall be 4 sensors with lens in each photo presence sensor.
5.15 No additional power supply is needed for individual controller devices;

they should be powered by the power supply transmitting through the
controller line.

programmable at any time using mesh network. Any areas with more
than 2 lighting circuits shall have a switch to be able to program with a
spare rocker for central control such as ON/OFF or dimming etc.
TS/E/S69/11
6.3 Devices Controller
(a) The device controller shall be wireless mesh network standard

compatible and suitable for all types of light fixture . The
controller shall be surge protected by surge arrestor of not less
than 10KV. It should be of compact type with ON/OFF/Dimming
function. energy power meter of 0.1% precision , output
analogue voltage of 0V to 10V or 1V to 10V to drive the lighting
fixture DALI ballast and LED driver for dimming and pulse-width
modulation for dimming from 0% to 100% for dimming.
(b) Power supply to device controller shall be input voltage of

230VAC with low power consumption. The device controller
operation temperature shall between -35oC to +70oC and
humidity from 20% to 95% RH non-condensing. It shall operate
at a frequency of 2.4GHz, transmit power of 10dBm and receiver
sensitivity of -96dBm.
6.4 Dimming Actuators and Driver
(a) For dimming lighting shall be very flexible in planning for

changing the dimming actuator and driver to different loads such
as : LED light, Fluorescent lighting with 0V -10V / 1V-10V control
signal, LV Halogen (Electronic / Conventional transformer),
230VAC Halogen and 230VAC Incandescent.
(b) If higher wattage is required like >1KW… 5KW, additional

dimming amplifier can be extended from the existing dimming
actuator and driver, without any modification at the above
ceiling, only affected at the light fixture.

(d) The system shall also able to dim and control numerous/groups
of lighting without much changes to the initial configuration such
as without physical hacking of wall for re-wiring. The changes
will be very minimum only require some software programming.
(e) The system shall allow dimming control points and switching
points to be combined into scene function, and it can be easily
retrieve/recall and store at any programmable switches, touch
panel and any workstation.
(f) These Switch/Dimming Actuators and driver shall have built-in

manual overriding switch for each channel/output for manual
switching of the Lighting State in the event of device or
channel/output failure. If there is not manual override, the light
shall 100% turned up.
TS/E/S69/12

loads such as different ampere rating e.g. 5A, 6A, 10A, 16A etc.
and sized according to the inrush with operating current.

controls via the controller and switches electrical consumers by
means of its relay contacts which are independent of one
another. Each switching output has a separate bistable
switching relay so that the states of the switching contacts are
safely maintained even in case of bus voltage failure. The
switching contacts are especially designed for capacitive loads
and therefore suited for relatively high inrush currents.
panel, the relays can be switched on and off by hand parallel to
the controller even without voltage or in a non-programmed
state. This shall be able to permit fast checking of connected
consumers for proper functioning.
(d) There shall be incorporated with logic function individual for

each output, disabling function, timing functions (ON-delay,
OFF-delay, staircase lighting timer, also with early-warning
function) , timing functions (ON-delay, OFF-delay, staircase
lighting timer, also with early-warning function) and light-scenes:
up to 8 internal scenes parameterize as per output.

output.
independent communication objects (transmission in the event
of value changes or additionally in fixed cycles). A load
monitoring function (overload / under load) with predefined load
limits (teach-in or parameter setting) can be optionally activated
with separately parameterize message telegrams. Input
monitoring for cyclical updates with safety circuit.
(g) The specified Switch/Dimming Actuators and driver for dimming

a circuit shall strictly be de-rated by 40% for each
channel/output and then configures accordingly to suite each
respective load and
(h) The Switch circuit and not basing on the full capacity of the
dimmer rating, i.e. at all time each channel/output of a Switch/-
Dim Actuator shall strictly have 40% tolerance.
TS/E/S69/13
(i) The Switch Actuators for On/Off Lighting Control shall strictly be
AX rated type as shown in the Tender Drawings that supports
full load without having to de-rate when connected with light
fixtures with high peak in-rush switching current such as LED
light fitting, Fluorescent and PLC/Compact Fluorescent lamps
and according to EN 60669.

feedback the Load/Current Situation. Load Current threshold
can be set for detecting the MCB and/or RCCB/ELCB trip, no
load, partially lost of load or any fault on the circuitry.

Switch Actuators.


v. Preferred State for Lights on Bus Communication Failure

and Recovery.
The Dimming Actuators and driver for other lamps such as

230VAC LED Halogen Lamps, Low-Voltage LED Halogen
Lamps and etc. shall be universal and Modular Din-Rail
Component (MDRC) type that works on all kinds of transformers
or directly without transformer. It shall supports minimum load of
500W/VA in a single circuit connections and expandable by End
Users by only having to add Capacity Boosters gradually to the
existing dimmers and up to a maximum load of 3000W/VA for
the same dimming circuit.
(k) The specified Universal Dimmer for a dimming circuit shall

configures accordingly to suite each respective load and circuit
and not basing on the full capacity of the dimmer, i.e. at all time
each channel/output of a Universal Dimmer shall strictly have
40% tolerance.
TS/E/S69/14
6.6 Wireless Gateway
(a) The Wireless Gateway shall be of easy configuration and mesh

network stand communication Protocol with devices and
Lighting fixture. Wireless Gateway communication Protocol with
Internet shall be using Ethernet. The gateway shall be surged
protected with surge arrestor not less than 10kV.
(b) Wireless Gateway shall be input voltage of 230VAC and low

power consumption, operation temperature between 0oC to
+40oC and humidity from 0% to 80% RH non-condensing.
(c) The wireless Gateway shall be able to interface between a

controller installation and a digital DALI (Digital Addressable
Lighting Interface) lighting system. The Gateway through the
device controller allows the switching and dimming of a
maximum of 64 lamps including DALI device (e.g. electronic
ballast, LED driver). Each DALI lamp can be assigned up to 32
different lighting groups that are controlled via the Controller.
Laboratories and lecture theatres etc into the higher-level
Controller building management. In addition, the lighting groups
can be integrated into up to 16 scenes that make it possible to
recall pre-programmed light moods or to save new light scene.
(d) The wireless Gateway shall be able to separate feedback of

individual switching and brightness states of the DALI groups to
the Controller. In addition, the general DALI operating status can
be reported to the Controller (error status, short-circuit, status of
supply voltage).
(e) The controls at each programmable switches or touch panel /

PC shall permit to manually dim or switch the DALI light groups
on and off in parallel with the Controller even without bus
voltage or in an non-programmed state (broadcast of all
connected DALI lamps). This feature shall able to quickly test
the operability of connected consumers.
(f) The wireless Gateway is able to check the devices integrated

into the DALI system for integrity. The replacement of a defect
electronic ballast device by a new one, for example, can be
detected if the “Automatic device replacement” has been
activated. The decoding of the parameterized data into the new
electronic ballast device is carried out fully automatic by the
Gateway without any special commissioning. That makes the
corrective maintenance of a DALI system much easier.
(g) The device shall be able can be integrated into scene functions
with different brightness values and centralized switching of all
groups is also possible.
TS/E/S69/15
(h) The gateway shall be able to permits the error status feedback
from controller to the web base network controller of the
connected DALI devices. In case of failure, the DALI
components will send “lamp error” or “Error in device (e.g.
electronic ballast error)”status information to the Gateway where
it will be stored. Furthermore, feedback for DALI short-circuit
shall be also possible to be detected by the gateway.
(i) Wireless gateway shall be able to perform central function,

defining brightness value, time delays and scene functions can
be incorporated.
(j) The controller-DALI Gateway for managing any brand of DALI

Ballasts and Transformers shall have a ready-built Diagnosis
Program that can be installed immediately without any
customization into the Visualization Station for checking various
statuses on Lamp/s Failure, Ballast/s and Transformer/s Failure,
230VAC failure to Ballast/s and Transformer/s as well as
communication failure between the controller-DALI Gateway and
the DALI Ballast/s and Transformer/s.
7.1 The IP router shall be able to interconnect communication lines via data
BACnet/IP standard so that it cannot only be used for routing controller
telegrams between lines via an IP network, it shall also for accessing to
the bus from a Server or from other IP devices (visualization displays
and applications). The IP router can thus also be used as an IP data
interface for the programming software. By using a WPAN modem, the
installation can be remotely accessed even if there is no direct local
data network.
7.2 The use of the mesh data network for communication between
communication lines in the IP router shall be able to provide: fast
communication between web base network controller, extending a
controller system by means of mesh network and WPAN beyond a
building, direct routing of controller data to each network user and
controller remote configuration from each network access point.
7.3 In the design capacity as an area wireless coupler, the IP router shall
be able to interconnect two controller communication lines to form a
logical functional area ensuring at the same time the electrical
separation between these lines. Each communication line of a controller
installation is thus electrically independent of other communication
lines.
TS/E/S69/16
8. Wireless Web Base Network Controller
8.1 The wireless network controller shall be of easy configuration Secure

Web-based Interface for monitoring, manage collecting data from the
intelligent Sensor network and analyze energy savings.
8.2 The wireless network controller network communication protocol with

gateway shall be through Ethernet. The Central Processing Unit (CPU)
shall be fast for central processing of data received and transmission to
controller and devices.
8.3 Local Memory of the web base network controller shall be of minimum
not less than 8GB and local storage shall be 1TB.
8.4 The controller shall operate at 12VDC/24VDC low power, operation

temperature between 0oC to +40oC and humidity from 0% to 80% RH
non-condensing.
9.1 The Presence Sensors and Motion Sensors proposed shall be of

wireless and mesh network enabled and integrated type and able to
communicate within devices on its parameter settings that requires no
additional cables for power supply and with the same network set up. It
shall besides receiving the 24VDC SELV or 240VAC Voltage from the
fixture also transmit all control functions.
same frame for the switches and with built-in manual overriding switch
or ceiling mounted with adjustable angle and direction of detections.
side wings (left and right) each 6m and 180 deg. horizontal and
downwards angle of 45 deg. and frontier 16m and side wings (left and
right) each 10m and 220 deg. horizontal and downwards angle of 90
deg. for the long range, ceiling-mount and weatherproof type.
9.4 The Presence Sensors shall be ceiling-mount type and have

possibilities of controlling lights via sensing of brightness and/or
movements. It shall have high-sensitivity sensors and multi-lens that
detect 360 deg. and up to 5m diameter range at a 2.2m to 3m mounting
height.
set the Lux Intensity and Off Timer via the scheduled Program also
possible of setting by the built-in knobs on the devices. It shall also
allow for the adjustment of detection range to the desires of the End
Users.
TS/E/S69/17
perform as Lighting Management to achieve energy saving also
possible to act as Security Monitoring to meet the cost saving in
materials and installation as well as maintenance and replacement in
the future.
9.7 The Presence Sensors and Motion Sensors shall continues to detect
and send commands to the Graphic Visualization Station or BMS/IBMS
during its idle period when lights are not required but security
monitoring and protection is still in need.
BMS/IBMS.
9.9 The motion sensor and presence sensor shall be able to be enabled
and disable from the work station or any mobile application
10. Photo Daylight Sensor
flexibilities to be programmed as a Twilight Switch detecting 1 to 10 Lux
or a Light Level Switch detecting 100 to 20,000 Lux.
10.2 Upon detecting the brightness exceeds or falls below a specific

Threshold, the Daylight Sensor shall send Control Commands to the
Switch Actuators respectively to control the Lights and Other Loads that
are controlled and monitored by the Lighting Control System.
10.3 The desired Daylight Sensor shall be capable of detecting up to 3

different Threshold values by a single device.
10.4 Dependent of brightness and motion dependent or motion only

dependent are also possible in terms of software settings.
10.5 Measurement of brightness value can be integrated on the detector

device and enable to feedback to the device controller communication
bus lines.
10.6 The Daylight sensor level set point shall be able to be adjusted by the
user at the workstation through graphic or mobile application
TS/E/S69/18

operating at 12VDC or 24VDC, to detect the Ammonia Gas for urinal
cleanliness for toilet. It shall sense the level of ammonia gas from 0ppm to
100ppm at operation temperature between 0oC to +40oC and humidity from 5%
to 90% RH non-condensing. The sensor shall transmit to the controller and
server. The data shall be collected and analyzed for preventive and
maintenance alert.
The sensor shall use the Infra red LEL technology with IP65 enclosure,
operating at 12VDC or 24VDC, to detect the Methane Gas level for
Kitchen/Laboratory. It shall sense the level of methane gas from 0% to 100%
LEL at operation temperature between 0oC to +40oC and humidity from 5% to
90% RH non-condensing. The sensor shall transmit the environment condition
to controller and server The data shall be collected and analyzed for health
and safety alert.
Carbon Monoxide sensor shall be of electrochemical sensing with IP65

enclosure, operating at 12VDC or 24VDC, for the for the detection of Carbon
Monoxide for enclosed vehicle parking, generator room, gas heater, steam
plant room system. . It shall sense the level of methane gas from 0ppm to
2000ppm at operation temperature between 0oC to +40oC and humidity from
5% to 90% RH non-condensing. The data shall be collected and analyzed for
health and safety alert
14. Switches
14.1 The programmable wireless switches shall be of suitable for mesh

network and have its parameters programmed, each switches transmits
telegrams to devices controller. These can be, for instance, for
switching or momentary-contact control, for dimming or for motorized
blind control. It is also possible to program value transmitter functions
such as dimming value transmitters, light-scene extensions,
temperature value transmitters or brightness value transmitters.
display to visualize its room temperature value acting with thermo
stating functions.
TS/E/S69/19
14.3 The programmable switches shall have long-life LED indicators able to
be programmed to illuminate Red LED indicating lights ‘On’ and Green
LED indicating lights ‘Off’ or vice versa for each switch. The 2 colours
LEDs shall also serve as (Night Light) indicating the Switches locations
when required to facilitate convenient identification in constantly dark
environment.

shall be able to perform multi-functions i.e. On/Off control with Short
Push on either sides of the switch respectively and Dimming control
with Long Push. Performing of On/Off and On/Off/Dim with 1 button or 1
side of a switch is not acceptable.
14.5 The sensor shall at least come with two status LEDs per control
surface. These status LEDs can be program either be permanently on
or off, or otherwise act as an actuation or status indicator for a key or a
rocker. As an alternative, the LED can also be controlled via separate
communication objects. The status LEDS can then also signal the
operating states of room temperature controllers or indicate the results
of logic value comparisons. Another operation LED can also serve as
an orientation light (steady or also flashing) or be controlled via an
independent communication object.
14.6 The programmable switches shall be able inscribed with wordings for
easy identification of its functional purposes.
14.7 The programmable switches shall be of latest state-of-art design and

with Stain-Less coating and tamper and thief proof. The Contractor shall
11.1 The multi function sensor shall be of wireless network with Artificial
Intelligent and Internet of Things (IoT) technology. The sensor shall be
of smart integrated type comprises of occupancy sensor, photo sensor
and thermal sensor. Sensor is to be of compact size, all in one.
services.
11.3 Occupancy detection should be of passive infra-red motion sensor.

Photo sensor for Daylight or Ambient light detection and temperature
detection using thermal sensor. Multi function sensor shall be able to
interface via wireless. Sensor shall be of low power consumption.
TS/E/S69/20
consumption, operation temperature between -35oC to +70oC and
humidity from 20% to 95% RH non-condensing.
11.5 The multi function Sensors shall be ceiling mounted next to the light
fixture with adjustable angle and direction of detections and with manual
overriding switch.
11.6 The multi function sensor height of installation shall able to cater to
height range of 2.5m to 12.5m and the sensor sensing distance shall
cover at least 1m to 8m range.
11.7 The deployment of multi function sensor to the light fixture shall be
flexible in its configuration such that a single sensor can either connect
to a group or a single fixture. The coverage range of sensors shall be
arranged in overlapping manner to avoid functional lapse.
11.8 The multi function sensors shall be able to trigger the artificial light
dimming and mixing of daylight automatically to meet the pre-set lux
level in the space
11.9 The light fixture shall be addressable to the Data Server via the
11.10 The multi function sensors shall be able to be paired into different
fixture zones, thereby allowing for zonal control and for multiple fixtures
to share occupancy sensing data and respond simultaneously to
occupant motion patterns in the zones.
BMS/IBMS.
The Interface gateway with BMS/IBMS shall be located at FCC room’s

or other designated room control panel. Each gateway can serve up to
10 lines per area. The transfer of the data points is in 2-way
communications via data exchange of BACnet/IP, the group addresses
at each point are swiftly appeared at BMS/IBMS system panels and it
allowed BMS/IBMS to control and monitoring freely at the Wireless
Mesh Network Lighting Control system data points. The system shall be
able to interface to NUS virtual machine at cloud.
TS/E/S69/21
17. System Monitoring & Control
17.1 The central control station at FCC room or other designated room shall
have a Wireless Mesh Network Lighting Management software in which
embedded used for controlling, monitoring, data analysis all lighting,
energy and other's as specified.
17.2 The system shall be a centralized data platform capable of receiving &
analyzing of data, displaying, monitoring and controlling of the sensors
and lighting fixtures. All the sensors shall be able to be enabled and
disabled from this centralized control system. All the APPLICATIONS
as specified in this contract shall be fully integrated with this centralized
control data platform.

Microsoft Server OS, in Intel’s core processor running at minimum
3.6GHz, 16GB RAM, 1TB Hard disk, complete with accessories like
USB Optical mouse, keyboard, CDRW drive, 2 nos. RS232 Serial Port,
4 nos. of USB, 27’’ LCD flat screen monitor in super graphics card and
with minimum 3 adaptor for Ethernet networking with TCP/IP network
protocols. The system shall have 1 hour UPS back up

17.5 The system software shall also install at NUS virtual machine at cloud
for the control and monitoring, The Sub-contractor shall include the
necessary programming, accessories and software for the LMS to
install at the NUS virtual machines at cloud. No hyperlink to another
virtual system/ system is allowed.
functions :

(b) Active Status & Control – Graphic Visualization of status

feedback on all active status of lighting in the form of graphical
layout floor plan and possible for switching On/Off and
performing dimming on dedicated icons / symbols;
(c) Remote Web Access – Allows up to 20 users with different user

ID and password to access the graphical software concurrently
via the LAN or Campus intranet Infrastructure with specific
settings created by the Network Administrator. The Remote
Computer will connect and interact with the System by Microsoft
Windows Internet Explorer environment without the needs to
download any program or database; Remote desktop type of
access will not be accepted.
TS/E/S69/22

graphical screen- a digitalized layout displayed symbolically and
also in icon format with corresponding numerals/words, code,
the percentage of the lighting dimming value, the power
consumption (in Wattage), ambient brightness level, occupancy
status and temperature around the sensor. A customized
Dashboard shall be designed with user friendliness. With the
built-in useful artificial intelligent (AI) perimeter, the user shall be
able to set different profiles for the sensors including minimum
light level, maximum light level, ramp-up time, active motion
window, motion sensitivity, and ambient light sensitivity, trigger
points for the HVAC. The profiles can be set for different times
of the day, for weekdays, weekends and holidays.
(e) Time Schedules – The graphical software shall be able to set

time schedules for all zones of lights with daily and yearly time
(f) Logical functions for IF/Then functions for complex

programming;
(g) Generating Reports – The Management Software shall be

capable of generating 5 types of customized reports. The
contents of these reports shall reflect all Monitored lamps failure
status, Total hours run per zone of lights, Types of faults
detected and etc. or as per the End Users requirement.

needed to.

accumulative of run time of each Light Zone shall be recorded
and logged thus enabling the re-lamping schedules to be
displayed and printed for planning and carrying out the
replacement works. The System shall graphically highlight the
Light Zones that have exceeded the User-Defined percentage of
usage.
(j) Graphics showing the online status of all controllers, gateway

and Power meter loops
(k) Monitoring of all power meter functions and history - The energy
system down to each individual fixture/sensor level shall be
made available to the user. The savings in KWh, and cost shall
be available in terms of daily, weekly, monthly and yearly
savings, and all data shall be exportable in portable document
format (PDF) and CSV format for excel spreadsheet.
TS/E/S69/23
(m) Energy Management – Energy saving include artificial light

tuning, day light harvesting, HVAC saving, Occupancy saving.
The artificial light management come with mobile Apps and/or
wireless room control handset to activate scenes of the lights.
(n) Space Analysis – Space management include generate Heat

map, Motion path and Space utilization pattern
(o) Video Analytics – People Counting and crowd monitoring

camera deployed at various main entrances and public areas of
the buildings
(p) Facility Booking System – Booking through third party

interfacing with mobile Application for booking of facilities,
conference room, meeting room, break out room etc. with auto
notifying of booking to user after 10 minutes from booked time.
(q) Complementing HVAC System – Real time HVAC data (room

temperature with humidity) can be collected and transmit into
the BMS System to fine-tune the building for optimizing of air
conditioning.
(r) Car Park Management – Basement / indoor car park lighting

energy saving and monitoring system base on microwave
sensor with integrated Smart driver for control and data
collection.

down time resilience with redundancy and secured to cater to the
growth of storing of overall data for up to 10 years.
data analytics aims to immediately extract knowledgeable information
using data mining techniques that help in making predictions, identifying
recent trends, finding hidden information, and making decisions.
17.10 The Centralized Data Platform shall have data integration capabilities
that can help address issues on storage, processing, data analytics,
and visualization tools. It can also assist in improving collaboration and
17.11 The Centralized System shall enable information sharing across

platforms in a convenient manner. It must provide data redundancy by
having at least 3 time replications for its raw data storage and able to
scale for further storage space without powering down the system.
TS/E/S69/24
18. Labeling and Identification
18.1 All the devices, controller, gateway and lighting fixture shall label with
their physical address, IP address, the serving controller, Zoning etc,
18.2 Label shall be white background and black lettering for normal power
supply serving lighting fixture. For those served by emergency power
source, it shall be of red background and white lettering.
18.3 All the panel shall be properly labelled and frame up the single line,
schematic diagram, addresses of devices and zoning for that system
19.1 The complete Wireless Mesh Network Lighting Control System shall be
fully tested and commissioned by a Specialist to ensure that the desired
performance is met and that the configuration is as per this Technical
Specifications, Design Parameters and Tender.]
19.2 Sub-contractor to shall use Spectrum Analyzer to scan wireless signal

quality of the system according to the manufacturer’s Guidelines during
the course of the deployment
19.3 Sub-contractor to scan and test the signal quality in the DC hard wired
system using scanner and power line tester to test the quality of AC
system
19.4 The Contractor shall be further required to liaise with the End Users on
the Wireless Mesh Network Lighting Control System controls and to
assist and advise them on the programming on the various required
settings as well as train them to use The System. This cost shall deem
to be allowed for in the contract.
TS/E/S69/25
system.
(a) All the devices, controller, gateway, lighting fixture physical

address (MAC), IP address and device address for the entire
system in relationship.
(b) Floor plan showing the devices, controller, gateway, location

with all the necessary address indicated.
(c) Floor plan showing all the wireless mesh network lighting fixture
and IoT fixture installed with their physical address
20.3 Sub-contractor shall submit all the system programming, and other
TS/E/S69/26
Architectural of Wireless Mesh Network Layer
System Schematic of Wireless Mesh Network
TS/E/S69/27
SECTION 70 – WIRELESS MESH NETWORK LIGHTING AND ROOM

MANAGEMENT SYSTEM
1. General
1.1 The Sub-Contractor shall engage a Specialist for this part of the works i.e.
to design, supply, install, test and commission the complete Wireless
Mesh Network Lighting Control System, Voice Control System, Power
monitoring and status monitoring of switchboards, distribution board,
generator and Handicap call bell as per but not limited to this Technical
Specifications, Design Parameters and Tender Drawings.

installation and functioning of the Wireless Mesh Network Lighting Control
System in this part of the sub-contract.
1.3 The specialist shall have relevant experience in the design of wireless
mesh network in light and HVAC control, monitoring, data analysis in large
commercial building, institutional and housing development.
1.4 The Contractor shall engage a Specialist for this part of the works and
1.5 The LV electrical system shall comply to the following standard:
(a) Code of Practices: SS 638,
(b) Fire Safety and Shelter Department (FSSD).
(c) SP Power Grid Limited (SPPG) on Service Cable Sample and

Product Specification
1.6 The wireless mesh network to meet to the following standard :
(a) BBF TR-069 CPE WAN Management Protocol, Broadband Forum
(b) Core Version 4.0 Bluetooth Core Specification Version 4.0
(c) CISPR 11 - Industrial, scientific and medical equipment - Radio-

frequency disturbance characteristics - Limits and methods of
measurement.
(d) ECMA 404, Oct 2013 JSON Data Interchange Format
(e) IEEE 11073 IEEE 11073 Personal Health Data (PHD) Standards
TS/E/S70/1
(f) IEEE 802.11 Information technology – Telecommunications and

information exchange between systems – Local and metropolitan
area networks – Specific requirements, Part 11: Wireless LAN
Medium Access Control (MAC) and Physical Layer (PHY)
Specifications
(g) IEEE 802.15.4 Local and metropolitan area networks – Part 15.4:
Low-Rate Wireless Personal Area Networks (LR-WPANs)
(h) IETF RFC 3411-3418 Simple Network Management Protocol

(SNMP) version 3
(i) IETF RFC 6120 Extensible Messaging and Presence Protocol

(XMPP): Core
(j) IETF RFC 7252 The Constrained Application Protocol (CoAP)
(k) IMDA TS IOT, Technical Specification for Internet of Thing-

Infocomm Media Development Authority, Singapore
(l) ISO/IEC 29182-1 Information technology – Sensor network :

Sensor network reference architecture (SNRA) – Part 1: General
overview and requirements
(m) ISO/IEC 29182-2 Information technology – Sensor network :

Vocabulary and terminology
(n) ISO/IEC 29182-3 Information technology – Sensor network :

Sensor network reference architecture (SNRA) – Part 3: Reference
architecture views
(o) ISO/IEC 29182-4 Information technology – Sensor network :

Sensor network reference architecture (SNRA) – Part 4: Entity
models
(p) Technical Reference 40 : Technical Reference for sensor networks

for Smart Nation (homes)- Enterprise Singapore.
(q) Telecommunication Cybersecurity Code of Practice- Infocomm

Media Development Authority, Singapore.
1.7 All the sensor shall be certified with Underwriters Laboratories (UL) , CE
Marking (CE) and Restriction of Hazardous Substances (RoHS), The
sensor shall be flexible for all wireless protocol and conform with IEEE
802.15.4 depends on Network design application
1.8 All the wireless sensor, controller, gateway, devices shall operate at a
frequency of 2.4GHz, transmit Power of 10dBm and receiver Sensitivity of
-96dBm
TS/E/S70/2
1.9 The system shall be of open protocol wireless mesh networking standard
using wireless personal area network (WPAN). The mesh networking shall
use machine to machine wireless technologies for launching Artificial
Intelligent and Internet of Things (IoT). It shall be open and readiness for
third party software such as simple network management protocol, mobile
application interfacing and application programming interfacing (API)
1.10 The wireless mesh networking shall design to have low power
consumption rate while to carry small amounts of data over a short
distance.
1.11 The mesh network system shall not cause any interference to the
operation of campus WIFI and any other equipments operation such as
medical equipment and electronic devices.
1.12 The required and accepted Wireless Mesh Network Lighting Control
System shall be strictly configured as per but not limited to this Technical
Specifications, Design Parameters and Tender Drawings. Any alternative
proposed and offered is not acceptable unless otherwise approved by the
S.O.
1.13 The Building shall be equipped with a mesh network lighting management
system providing flexible and efficient control with management of the
whole lighting and environmental installation from a centralized location.
The system shall be scalable and expandable for future add-on.
1.14 All devices connected to the system, such as switches, sensors,

actuators, displays, control units, dimmers etc. can exchange information
via this system. All devices shall be able to select freely and are
interactive between one another. These devices shall be able to be
programmed to perform its present specific tasks as required by the
project and with the flexibilities in changing its desired tasks to meet the
End Users’ requirement at any time in the future.
1.15 The system shall separated into two (2) system, lighting management
system and room management system with different server, monitor,
control, mobile phone application and software.
any time.

device. If a device should fail, only the functions associated with that
device may be lost while other devices on the system are not affected.
The system protocol shall accept all brand of Internet of Things (IoT) and
Artificial Intelligent (AI).
TS/E/S70/3
1.18 The lighting and power circuits should be wired in a topology that meets
the wiring regulation for a mesh network and conventional
ON/OFF/Dimming switching control and also to be automation ready using
a non-proprietary protocol system.

monitored in real time. Lighting layouts shall detail the active status of
each relay.
with third party and shall have gateway/bridges interfaces (SNMP,
BACNET, OPC) for connectivity to other control LAN networks such as
Integrated Building Management/Automation System, Facility Booking
System, Internet or Intranet System. All BACnet devices shall be BTL
listed
1.22 The system shall compiled to SELV (Safety Extra Low Voltage) or LV (
Low Voltage) and should consist of a dedicated control cable shielded
from interference, with rated insulation voltage required to meet the wiring
regulation. Approved system should be mesh networking, BACnet/IP or
structure able to connect and operate compatible communication bus
devices.

intelligence in all communication bus devices. The system shall not
require a PC or any other special control unit after testing and
commissioning.
1.24 The backbone protocol of the system should be based on the mesh
network and BACnet system.
training from certified training personnel.
1.28 The system shall not have any subscription or any annually license or
subscription renewal required.
TS/E/S70/4

2.1 The data transmitted between the Gateway and the Server shall base on
Ethernet, 4G, 5G or VPN and to be approved by engineer.
2.2 The data transmission rate should be least 250 Kbps and testing and
compliant to IEEE802.15. 4 using area wireless couplers.
2.4 The transmission should be through a decentralized data access

CSMA/CA, where in an event of collision detection or resolution there
would be no loss of telegrams.
2.6 The data communication shall consist of devices controller, controller

gateway and system web base network controller.
2.7 The transmission to the devices shall not have any non programmable
time delay. All the time delay shall be programmable.
2.8 The data transmission from the sensor to the access point (AP) shall be
wireless with minimum AES 128-bit encryption of data.
2.9 The Data Server shall be designed with capability to customize and
handle any new application / function may or may not be related to the IoT
device.
TS/E/S70/5
3. Data Communications Cable
3.1 The insulation voltage of the data communication bus cable with the
system shall have adequate protection to meet overvoltage requirement of
the wiring requirement.
3.2 The size of the communication bus cable for parallel controller should be
2X2X0.8 mm diameter with screen, J-Y(st)Y 2x2x0.8. each able to
withstand 2.5KV and 4KV insulation respectively of the type of Bus Cable
used. Mesh networking communication bus cable shall be of Cat-6
3.3 Communication Bus Cable shall be run in dedicated conduit or as

specified. Sharing of conduit with LV electrical circuits is not allowed.
3.4 The mesh network communication bus should link all input devices such
as lighting gear, switches, touch panels, combine sensors (Occupancy
sensor, ambient light sensor, temperature sensor) motion sensors, light
sensor etc. and be connected to output devices such as switch actuators,
dimmer, brightness controllers, etc.
3.5 The communication bus cable should be able to handle information, data
exchange and supply power to all devices on the bus.
(a) Room Touch Screen Control Panels
(b) Supervisory Touch Screen Control Panels
(c) System components and accessories. E.g. Data rails, Data

connector, IP Router, Power Supply, Data rail cover and
Communicating Bus connecting blocks. Wireless controller,
Wireless web base network controller, devices gateway.
(d) Switch Actuators and dimmer actuator for all kinds of lighting such
LED lighting, fluorescent lighting, incandescent lighting and
halogen lighting.
(e) Programmable switches with positive on and off status indicators

by LED lights. The configuration of switches varies from 1-gang, 2-
gang, 4-gang and 8-gang. A maximum of 5 switches can be
mounted into a single frame.
(f) Control cable (2x2x0.8 mm, with adequate insulation) and data
communication for signal transmission.
(g) Cat 6 cable for the wireless mesh network setup
(h) Scene/Mood Control programmable switch, shall be also configure
TS/E/S70/6
4.1 Parameter lights along the glass façade shall be equipped with Daylight
photo sensor / occupancy presence sensor. These sensors should be
able to achieve dual functions of presence sensing and constant light level
control. The sensor can be used to measure the brightness level in rooms
to achieve constant lux level controls. They shall be switched off or
dimmed if sufficient natural light is enough to maintain the lux level or
when no presence is detected.
4.2 Every light fixture shall be paired with the sensor and generate a Mac
address. Each sensor shall be labelled with a unique code. The unique
code will be used for the identification of the light fixture.
4.4 Daylight photo sensors for dimming control of Lights at Building’s

Common Corridors, Staircases, areas close to windows and as specified.
4.5 Office shall be equipped with multi function sensors with dimming controls.
The switches in the office shall be able to activate/ deactivate the
presence sensor. The switches shall be able to activate scenes or
on/off/dim the lights, The thermal sensor shall detect the radiant heat map
and adjust the HVAC to comfort level
4.6 Open Laboratories shall be equipped with multi function sensors with
dimming controls. Overriding switches in the laboratories shall be able to
activate/ deactivate the multi function sensor. When the brightness
detected by the sensors exceeds the predetermined Upper Threshold
level, “Off” or “Dim Down” Control Command shall be sent to the Switch
Actuators or Switch/-Dim Actuators respectively to manage the Lights in
these areas accordingly. Contrary, when the brightness detected falls
below the Lower Threshold, Lights are “On” or “Dim Up” accordingly.
During off-peak hours, the Presence/motion Sensors start functioning,
Lights shall be “On” throughout so long it continuously sense movements
and only switches “Off” upon continuously sensing no movement for
30min. The thermal sensor will determine the heat map in the laboratories
and control the comfort level to pre-determine set point.
4.7 For Multi Purpose Rooms, the multi function sensor shall be able to use to
control individual partition of the room or all at once depending on the
partition condition as close or open between rooms. Dimming Controls
switch shall be provided for the multi Purpose Room. Thermal sensor shall
control the thermostat to the desire temperature.
TS/E/S70/7

shall be provided with multi function sensor with dimming controls switch.
The switches shall be able to activate scenes or on/off/dim the lights.
Wireless touch panels shall be integrated with the lighting controls with the
all the necessary controller to interface to AV systems, Motorised
Curtain/Blind systems, Motorized Projector Screens, Security functions,
Temperature/Thermal sensors and many more and not limited to only
Lighting Control, thus providing End Users with further flexibilities and
possibilities of adding this requirement and functions into the existing
Control System at any time in the future.
4.9 Timer Control and wireless Microwave sensor with IP65 rating for control
of lights at External Areas (eg. Landscape areas), outdoor street light,
pole light, wall light, building common areas, loading/unloading Bay,
meeting rooms, Lecture Theaters, Seminar rooms, Tutorial Rooms,
College Rooms, Landscapes and as specified used for. It shall perform to
meet the basic functions specified under this section.
4.10 Room control of lights, switches, fan coil units, thermostat controller,
power, television, water heater presence / motion sensor, scenario, roller
shutter, curtain, and other power saving equipments.


the Wireless Person Area Network (WPLAN), no need to install an
additional dedicated LAN.
4.14 The system should have rated actuators to facilitate the use of LED light,
energy saving bulbs or florescent tubes.
4.15 Time Schedules by the Lighting Management Station shall be set for
Lights at Building’s Common Areas, Landscapes and other areas as
determined by S.O. and End Users that requires “Time Control” to be “On”
and “Off” respectively as needed.

each Seminar room/ Lecture Theatre and other locations as determined
by the S.O. and End Users to control On/Off/Dim the Lights in these areas
and alternatively, Light Scenes or Preset.
of lights.
TS/E/S70/8
4.18 Microwave sensor /Presence shall be provided for all Toilets and to be
only effectively sensing for moments after peak hours of the building
operation whereby, the Wire Mesh Network Lighting Management Station
shall sends a Time Schedule Control Command to enable and disable
these microwave / Presence sensors from functioning.
4.19 During peak hours, Lights in the Toilets shall always be “On” and when
the Microwave sensor / Presence Sensors start functioning, Lights shall
be “On” throughout so long it continuously sense movements and only
switches “Off” upon continuously sensing no movement for 30min.
determined by the S.O. and End Users shall be provided with Photo
Daylight Sensor control. When the brightness detected by the sensors
exceeds the predetermined Upper Threshold level, “Off” or “Dim Down”
Control Command shall be sent to the Switch Actuators or Switch/-Dim
Actuators respectively to manage the Lights in these areas accordingly.
Contrary, when the brightness detected falls below the Lower Threshold,
Lights are “On” or “Dim Up” accordingly.

future.
5. Modular Controller Devices
5.1 All controller devices should be made according to DIN EN 50022 and
suitable for mounting on 35-mm DIN-rail mounting rail.
5.2 Each controller device should have a built-in with programmable Physical
Address. The Physical Address should have the capability to be re-
programmable.
5.3 The communication bus lines should be able to incorporate up to 100

devices connected and these lines should be able to be grouped up to 12
lines together via gateway couplers to form an area.
switch built into the actuator for each channel. For each individual fitting
the on/off switch actuator shall size up according to the inrush and
operating current.
TS/E/S70/9
contact and load.
5.6 The Switch Actuators shall have up to 400,000 times of switching

operation for each channel/output at rated current and up to 1,000,000
times without load. Verification Report and Certification from manufacturer
shall be provided upon request by the S.O. prior to approval.
5.7 No special digital addressable electronic ballast or LED driver is needed

for all the light fittings. The switch actuator should be able to control the
conventional electro magnetic ballast or electronic ballast.
5.8 All terminal blocks shall be screwless, maintenance-free push-in cage

clamp connections for wires from 2.5mm2 up to 16mm2. Screwless
spring-type, No current carrying metal shall be exposed after cables or
terminal blocks’ accessories are connected. All terminal block shall be
non-combustible and self-extinguishing.
5.9 The terminal blocks shall be sized and rated in accordance to the size and
current carrying capacity of the wires. The terminal blocks shall meet or
exceed the requirements of International Electro technical Commission,
IEC 60947-7-1.

luminaries with electronic ballasts, dimmers, driver or transformers with 0
– 10 V / 1V to 10V control input. The dimming control per outputs carried
out with two control wires. Maximum control load per channel is 100 mA.
The Switch/Dimming Actuator needs only controller bus voltage for normal
function. With eight potential free relays the supply voltage of the ballasts ,
driver and consequently the luminaries can be switched on and off over or
manually without any auxiliary supply. Contact position is displayed.
- recall and set of up to 18 light scenes per channel
TS/E/S70/10

- characteristic curve adjustment to adapt ballast and driver brightness

characteristic
5.11 When combined with the photo light sensor, the device shall be able to
perform constant light control for the parameter lighting
5.12 Photo Light sensor shall be able to perform constant light level control with
dimmer (ON/OFF/Dimming switching of lighting circuit and step function
control are not allow). Sensor shall be able to send brightness value to all
dimmer in the system for share sensor function.
5.13 The motion presence sensor shall control lighting as a function of the
brightness and/or movement. It is designed for ceiling installation and can
be both flush mounted and surface mounted. It should have high
sensitivity sensors/ lens system and depending on the application chosen,
different functions which can be varied via the software. There shall be 4
sensors with lens in each photo presence sensor.
5.15 No additional power supply is needed for individual controller devices;

they should be powered by the power supply transmitting through the
controller line.

programmable at any time using mesh network. Any areas with more than
2 lighting circuits shall have a switch to be able to program with a spare
rocker for central control such as ON/OFF or dimming etc.
TS/E/S70/11
6.3 Devices Controller
(a) The device controller shall be wireless mesh network standard

compatible and suitable for all types of light fixture . The controller
shall be surge protected by surge arrestor of not less than 10KV. It
should be of compact type with ON/OFF/Dimming function. energy
power meter of 0.1% precision , output analogue voltage of 0V to
10V or 1V to 10V to drive the lighting fixture DALI ballast and LED
driver for dimming and pulse-width modulation for dimming from
0% to 100% for dimming.
(b) Power supply to device controller shall be input voltage of 230VAC

with low power consumption. The device controller operation
temperature shall between -35oC to +70oC and humidity from 20%
to 95% RH non-condensing. It shall operate at a frequency of
2.4GHz, transmit power of 10dBm and receiver sensitivity of -
96dBm.
6.4 Dimming Actuators and Driver
the dimming actuator and driver to different loads such as : LED
light, Fluorescent lighting with 0V -10V / 1V-10V control signal, LV
Halogen (Electronic / Conventional transformer), 230VAC Halogen
and 230VAC Incandescent.

amplifier can be extended from the existing dimming actuator and
driver, without any modification at the above ceiling, only affected
at the light fixture.

retrieve/recall and store at any programmable switches, touch
panel and any workstation.
(f) These Switch/Dimming Actuators and driver shall have built-in

manual overriding switch for each channel/output for manual
switching of the Lighting State in the event of device or
channel/output failure. If there is not manual override, the light
shall 100% turned up.
TS/E/S70/12

loads such as different ampere rating e.g. 5A, 6A, 10A, 16A etc.
and sized according to the inrush with operating current.

controls via the controller and switches electrical consumers by
in case of bus voltage failure. The switching contacts are
especially designed for capacitive loads and therefore suited for
relatively high inrush currents.
controller even without voltage or in a non-programmed state. This
shall be able to permit fast checking of connected consumers for
proper functioning.

output.
function (overload / under load) with predefined load limits (teach-
in or parameter setting) can be optionally activated with separately
(g) The specified Switch/Dimming Actuators and driver for dimming a

circuit shall strictly be de-rated by 40% for each channel/output
and then configures accordingly to suite each respective load and
rating, i.e. at all time each channel/output of a Switch/-Dim
Actuator shall strictly have 40% tolerance.
TS/E/S70/13
(i) The Switch Actuators for On/Off Lighting Control shall strictly be
AX rated type as shown in the Tender Drawings that supports full
load without having to de-rate when connected with light fixtures
with high peak in-rush switching current such as LED light fitting,
Fluorescent and PLC/Compact Fluorescent lamps and according
to EN 60669.

feedback the Load/Current Situation. Load Current threshold can
be set for detecting the MCB and/or RCCB/ELCB trip, no load,
partially lost of load or any fault on the circuitry.

Switch Actuators.


v. Preferred State for Lights on Bus Communication Failure

and Recovery.
The Dimming Actuators and driver for other lamps such as

230VAC LED Halogen Lamps, Low-Voltage LED Halogen Lamps
and etc. shall be universal and Modular Din-Rail Component
(MDRC) type that works on all kinds of transformers or directly
without transformer. It shall supports minimum load of 500W/VA in
a single circuit connections and expandable by End Users by only
having to add Capacity Boosters gradually to the existing dimmers
and up to a maximum load of 3000W/VA for the same dimming
circuit.
tolerance.
TS/E/S70/14
6.6 Wireless Gateway
(a) The Wireless Gateway shall be of easy configuration and mesh

network stand communication Protocol with devices and Lighting
fixture. Wireless Gateway communication Protocol with Internet
shall be using Ethernet. The gateway shall be surged protected
with surge arrestor not less than 10kV.
(b) Wireless Gateway shall be input voltage of 230VAC and low power
consumption, operation temperature between 0oC to +40oC and
(c) The wireless Gateway shall be able to interface between a

controller installation and a digital DALI (Digital Addressable
Lighting Interface) lighting system. The Gateway through the
device controller allows the switching and dimming of a maximum
of 64 lamps including DALI device (e.g. electronic ballast, LED
driver). Each DALI lamp can be assigned up to 32 different lighting
groups that are controlled via the Controller. This permits the
integration of a room-specific light control of, for example, offices,
multi-purpose rooms, tutorial rooms and Laboratories and lecture
theatres etc into the higher-level Controller building management.
In addition, the lighting groups can be integrated into up to 16
scenes that make it possible to recall pre-programmed light moods
or to save new light scene.
(d) The wireless Gateway shall be able to separate feedback of

individual switching and brightness states of the DALI groups to
the Controller. In addition, the general DALI operating status can
be reported to the Controller (error status, short-circuit, status of
supply voltage).
(e) The controls at each programmable switches or touch panel / PC

off in parallel with the Controller even without bus voltage or in an
consumers.
(f) The wireless Gateway is able to check the devices integrated into
the DALI system for integrity. The replacement of a defect
electronic ballast device by a new one, for example, can be
detected if the “Automatic device replacement” has been activated.
The decoding of the parameterized data into the new electronic
ballast device is carried out fully automatic by the Gateway without
any special commissioning. That makes the corrective
maintenance of a DALI system much easier.
(g) The device shall be able can be integrated into scene functions
with different brightness values and centralized switching of all
groups is also possible.
TS/E/S70/15
(h) The gateway shall be able to permits the error status feedback
from controller to the web base network controller of the connected
DALI devices. In case of failure, the DALI components will send
“lamp error” or “Error in device (e.g. electronic ballast error)”status
information to the Gateway where it will be stored. Furthermore,
feedback for DALI short-circuit shall be also possible to be
detected by the gateway.
(i) Wireless gateway shall be able to perform central function, defining

incorporated.
(j) The controller-DALI Gateway for managing any brand of DALI

Ballasts and Transformers shall have a ready-built Diagnosis
Program that can be installed immediately without any
customization into the Visualization Station for checking various
statuses on Lamp/s Failure, Ballast/s and Transformer/s Failure,
230VAC failure to Ballast/s and Transformer/s as well as
communication failure between the controller-DALI Gateway and
the DALI Ballast/s and Transformer/s.
7.1 The IP router shall be able to interconnect communication lines via data
BACnet/IP standard so that it cannot only be used for routing controller
telegrams between lines via an IP network, it shall also for accessing to
the bus from a Server or from other IP devices (visualization displays and
for the programming software. By using a WPAN modem, the installation
can be remotely accessed even if there is no direct local data network.
7.2 The use of the mesh data network for communication between
communication lines in the IP router shall be able to provide: fast
communication between web base network controller, extending a
controller system by means of mesh network and WPAN beyond a
building, direct routing of controller data to each network user and
controller remote configuration from each network access point.
7.3 In the design capacity as an area wireless coupler, the IP router shall be
able to interconnect two controller communication lines to form a logical
functional area ensuring at the same time the electrical separation
between these lines. Each communication line of a controller installation is
thus electrically independent of other communication lines.
TS/E/S70/16
8. Wireless Web Base Network Controller
8.1 The wireless network controller shall be of easy configuration Secure

Web-based Interface for monitoring, manage collecting data from the
intelligent Sensor network and analyze energy savings.
8.2 The wireless network controller network communication protocol with

gateway shall be through Ethernet. The Central Processing Unit (CPU)
shall be fast for central processing of data received and transmission to
controller and devices.
8.3 Local Memory of the web base network controller shall be of minimum not
less than 8GB and local storage shall be 1TB.
8.4 The controller shall operate at 12VDC/24VDC low power, operation

condensing.
9.1 The Presence Sensors and Motion Sensors proposed shall be of wireless
and mesh network enabled and integrated type and able to communicate
within devices on its parameter settings that requires no additional cables
for power supply and with the same network set up. It shall besides
receiving the 24VDC SELV or 240VAC Voltage from the fixture also
transmit all control functions.
side wings (left and right) each 6m and 180 deg. horizontal and
downwards angle of 45 deg. and frontier 16m and side wings (left and
right) each 10m and 220 deg. horizontal and downwards angle of 90 deg.
for the long range, ceiling-mount and weatherproof type.
9.4 The Presence Sensors shall be ceiling-mount type and have possibilities
of controlling lights via sensing of brightness and/or movements. It shall
have high-sensitivity sensors and multi-lens that detect 360 deg. and up to
5m diameter range at a 2.2m to 3m mounting height.
set the Lux Intensity and Off Timer via the scheduled Program also
possible of setting by the built-in knobs on the devices. It shall also allow
for the adjustment of detection range to the desires of the End Users.
TS/E/S70/17
perform as Lighting Management to achieve energy saving also possible
to act as Security Monitoring to meet the cost saving in materials and
send commands to the Graphic Visualization Station or BMS/IBMS during
its idle period when lights are not required but security monitoring and
protection is still in need.
BMS/IBMS.
disable from the work station or any mobile application
10. Photo Daylight Sensor



and enable to feedback to the device controller communication bus lines.
10.6 The Daylight sensor level set point shall be able to be adjusted by the
user at the workstation through graphic or mobile application
TS/E/S70/18

Carbon Monoxide sensor shall be of electrochemical sensing with IP65

enclosure, operating at 12VDC or 24VDC, for the for the detection of Carbon
Monoxide for enclosed vehicle parking, generator room, gas heater, steam plant
room system. . It shall sense the level of methane gas from 0ppm to 2000ppm at
non-condensing. The data shall be collected and analyzed for health and safety
alert
14. Electronic Switches
14.1 The programmable wireless switches shall be of suitable for mesh network
and have its parameters programmed, each switches transmits telegrams
to devices controller. These can be, for instance, for switching or
momentary-contact control, for dimming or for motorized blind control. It is
also possible to program value transmitter functions such as dimming
value transmitters, light-scene extensions, temperature value transmitters
or brightness value transmitters.
functions.
TS/E/S70/19
environment.

objects. The status LEDS can then also signal the operating states of
room temperature controllers or indicate the results of logic value
comparisons. Another operation LED can also serve as an orientation light
(steady or also flashing) or be controlled via an independent
communication object.
Stain-Less coating and tamper and thief proof. The Contractor shall
15.1 The multi function sensor shall be of wireless network with Artificial
Intelligent and Internet of Things (IoT) technology. The sensor shall be of
smart integrated type comprises of occupancy sensor, photo sensor and
thermal sensor. Sensor is to be of compact size, all in one.
services.

TS/E/S70/20
consumption, operation temperature between -35oC to +70oC and
overriding switch.
15.8 The multi function sensors shall be able to trigger the artificial light
dimming and mixing of daylight automatically to meet the pre-set lux level
in the space
15.9 The light fixture shall be addressable to the Data Server via the
BMS/IBMS.
16. Access Control & Card Programming
All device shall have an integrated wireless mesh network interface composed by
a removable communication connection terminal for an easy, fast and secure
installation.
16.1 The system shall interface with the card access control system based on
single devices.
(a) The system shall allow to access the room and display the status of
the room via the indication of LEDs;
(b) Pocket reader (card holder) to activate the associated loads or

specific scenarios
(c) card programming with USB connection to configure access

permissions through the interfacing of wireless mesh network
system software
TS/E/S70/21
16.2 Access control system shall allow the functions of card recognition and
thereby using the interfacing for electro-mechanical lock opening, service
activation and scenario control. Card readers shall have freely
programmable inputs and outputs in order to make the system really
flexible: these inputs/outputs can be used to control sockets (courtesy
lights, etc.), room service calls, alarms, etc. and energy savings such as
turning off the air-conditioning, television after detecting an open window,
after the leaving of the room, etc.
16.3 Access control devices shall be modular and flush mounting; the devices
shall be aesthetically coordinated with wiring devices: same colours,
shapes, finishings, materials and decorating plates
16.4 Card access reader/ Face recognition reader
Card access or Face recognition reader, enables controlling entry to the

rooms where it is installed externally either through mobile phone
application. The reader shall have two onboard relays in order for the
interfacing to the wireless mesh network system to control the door lock, a
courtesy light, or for other uses; the device shall be equipped with two
inputs for connecting electrical equipment of the ON/OFF type (for instance
to control the door open or closed switch, a magnetic contact for signalling
an open or closed window, bathroom ceiling pull-cord alarm, etc.). On the
front of the touch screen panel there shall be LEDs each of which
associated with an icon for signalling the following states:
(a) Access control (entry allowed or entry denied);
(b) Room status (room occupied or do not disturb)
(c) Call status (emergency request with bathroom pull-cord, room

service call, etc.)
(d) Services status
16.5 Card holder
The card holder shall enable checking for the presence in the room of the
visitor or the staff by unambiguously identifying the transponder card
inserted. The pocket reader shall be equipped with two or more relays that
can be configured for managing door locking, controlling a courtesy light,
optimizing energy consumption or for even more uses; the device shall be
equipped with two inputs for connecting electrical equipment of the ON/OFF
type (for instance to control the door open or closed switch, a magnetic
contact for signalling an open or closed window, bathroom emergency pull-
cord alarm, Television and other equipment that have potential of energy
saving without affecting operation etc.).
TS/E/S70/22
16.6 Mobile Phone Global Positioning System (GPS) Tracker
The GPS tracker upon sensing the visitor mobile phone location and unique
number using the wireless mesh network shall enable checking for the
presence in the room of the visitor or the staff by unambiguously identifying
the unique number that being transmitted. The device controller shall be
equipped with two or more relays that can be configured for managing door
locking, controlling a courtesy light, optimizing energy consumption or for
even more uses; the device shall be equipped with two inputs for
connecting electrical equipment of the ON/OFF type (for instance to control
the door open or closed switch, a magnetic contact for signalling an open or
closed window, bathroom emergency pull-cord alarm, Television and other
equipment that have potential of energy saving without affecting operation
etc.).
16.7 Card programmer
(a) Transponder card reader/programmer shall be with vertical pocket

in table mounting box. The device shall enable programming and
coding the transponder cards to use with the external readers and
the card holder
(b) The reader/programmer must be connected to a personal computer

on which the BMS/LMS software must be installed for creating and
managing the necessary data for the configuration of the cards
according to the different requirements.
(c) The device shall be equipped with a cable for connecting the USB
port of the PC and a backlit pocket for signalling card
reading/writing. It shall be installable in table mounting box and it
shall not need any driver.
17. Room Control
17.1. Lighting Control
The ON, OFF or Dimming of lights shall be activated and controlled by:
(a) Supervisor panels
(b) Electronic switches
(c) Scenarios (manually activated with pushbutton or automatically

activated by card insertion into the card-holder)
(d) Supervision software
The Lighting control strategy shall be submitted to Engineer for approval
TS/E/S70/23
17.2. Electronic Switches
(a) The electronic switches shall be equipped with independent

buttons, depending on the circuit and scenarios, that can be used
for switching on/ off of general loads, controlling roller shutters or
curtains, adjusting lights (on-off or dimming), launching scenarios
or typical room functions (“do not disturb”)
(b) Electronic switches shall be flush mounted, they shall be integrated

with wiring devices for a perfect aesthetical coordination with same
matching finishes plates and surface finishing of wiring devices.
(c) The switches shall be completed with button caps that enable
identifying the function of single programmed push button. The
button caps shall be customizable with silk-screened or engraved
text descriptors or custom silk-screened icons that visually describe
the function assigned to the single button. Each single switch shall
work as 2, 4 or 6 independents buttons by simply replacing related
single/double caps and programming via Engineering Tool
Software functions. The switches shall have 2, 4 or 6 independent
LEDs in order to have better visibility in the darkness
(d) The modular switches shall have an integrated wireless mesh

network interface composed by a removable communication
connection terminal for an easy, fast and secure installation; they
shall support 8 bit (1byte) scene control programming.
17.3. Bedside Display Panel
A bedside panel shall be installed on both sides offering the following

functions:
(c) Temperature control (set-point, display of temperature / relative

humidity and speed of fan coil)
(d) Scenarios control (for example: wake-up; reading)
(e) Room’s functions activation (for example: do not disturb)
The panel shall be flush mounted, it shall be modular with same matching
finishes plate and touch-screen technology. It shall be integrated with
wiring devices for a perfect aesthetical coordination. The display shall not
exceed 2.5” of diagonal.
The panel shall have an integrated wireless mesh network interface

composed by a removable communication connection terminal for an
easy, fast and secure installation.
TS/E/S70/24
17.4. Supervisor Panel
A supervisor panel shall be installed inside the room and it shall have the
following functions:
(c) Water heater control (on/off)
(d) Television (on/off)
(e) Temperature control (set-point and speed of fan coil)
(f) Scenarios control (for example: wake-up; reading)
(g) Room’s functions activation (for example: do not disturb)
The panel shall be flush or desk mounted, it shall be modular with

decorating plate and touch-screen technology. It shall be integrated with
wiring devices for a perfect aesthetical coordination. The display shall not
exceed 4.5” of diagonal and it shall be based on TFT technology with
coloured icons and free customizable texts.
The panel shall have an integrated wireless mesh network interface

composed by a removable communication connection terminal for an
17.5. Room Temperature Controller
(a) The room shall be equipped with LCD thermostats, conveniently

located for optimal visitor comfort. Thermostat commands shall
include:
(i) Temperature Control
(ii) Fan Speed
(iii) System ON / OFF
(b) This device shall be suitable to control and monitor room

temperature, the thermostat shall be equipped with an ON/OFF
input that can be used for applications such as detecting an open
window or for other general uses. In addition, it shall have a relay
output that can be used to control 2-way modulating solenoid valve
and speed control for a fan-coil. The device shall be equipped with
a display and buttons to control the temperature set-point and the
speed of the fan-coil.
TS/E/S70/25
(c) It shall also have an analogue input for connecting of an external

NTC sensor in order to control the temperature of a second zone.
Where required, the external temperature sensor could be used to
calculate the set-point in combination with the internal sensor of the
thermostat to control the room temperatre. External NTC sensor
must be flush mounted and integrated with wiring devices for a
perfect aesthetical coordination with same matching finishes plates
and surface finishing of wiring devices.
(d) The thermostat shall be able to directly control the 2-way

modulating solenoid valve for the air-conditioning system besides
turning it off if there is an open window using a magnetic contact
connected to the thermostat input.
(e) The thermostat shall be fully controllable by the supervision

software.
(f) Electronic thermostats shall be flush mounted, they shall be

integrated with wiring devices for a perfect aesthetical coordination
with same matching finishes plates and surface finishing of wiring
devices.
(g) The thermostat shall have an integrated wireless mesh network

interface composed by a removable bus connection terminal for an
17.6. Blinds and Curtains Controller
(a) The room shall be equipped with multiple motorized Blinds/Curtains

with related control switches or touch panels, conveniently located
for optimal visitor comfort
(b) Opening and closing of blind/curtains shall be activated by:
(i) Supervisor panels
(ii) Electronic switches
(iii) Scenarios (manually activated with pushbutton or

automatically activated by wireless mesh network through
mobile phone application or card insertion into the card-
holder)
(iv) Supervision software
TS/E/S70/26
17.7. Presence/Absence detectors
(a) The primary role of the presence detectors is to save energy in the
common areas like corridors or toilets: they shall be able to turn
on/off the lights or the climate control when a presence is detected.
(b) These devices, whenever motion is detected, shall send a

message on the wireless mesh network turning on the indicator
LED according to the set brightness threshold (lights on/off
according to the brightness in the room). The detector shall be also
able to manage movement signals coming from any other wireless
mesh network device in MASTER/SLAVE mode.
(c) Electronic detectors shall be flush mounted (single-gang-size

plates for squared BS boxes); they shall be integrated with wiring
devices for aesthetical coordination with same matching finishes
plates and surface finishing of wiring devices.
(d) The detector shall have an integrated wireless mesh network

interface composed by a removable communication connection
terminal for an easy, fast and secure installation.
17.8. Lighting sensors
The lighting sensor shall be ceiling mounted and able to detect the
brightness in the room and keep the level of brightness in the rooms
constant, combining the natural light and the artificial light, thus obtaining
the greatest savings and optimizing energy consumptions. It shall be able
to detect the degree of brightness and switch lights on and off in a
differentiated manner according to the set threshold value.
17.9. Lift interfacing
The system shall be able to monitor and send contact to lift call button and
lift floor button. The system shall be able to accept third party interfacing
such as BMS, mobile application and database. System shall call the lift
and by using the mobile application or other third party software
18. Voice Controlled Room Management System
The voice command system shall be able to provide a SMART room

management system through voice command.
18.1. The lighting management system or wireless mesh network lighting

management system shall integrate and controlled through voice devices.
.The room management system shall be through simple voice words
command and respond, it shall control door opening, on/off/dimming of the
room lighting, on/off fan coil unit, thermostat temperature setting, reading
out, bring up/down of curtain, room service, on/off television, selection of
channels and any other Internet of Things (IoT) etc.
TS/E/S70/27
18.2. The system shall integrate into the BAS /IBMS system for the control of
thermostat temperature setpoint, fan speed and any other HVAC
equipments inside the rooms.
18.3. Sub-contractor shall provide all the necessary IP gateways, interfacing

gateway, necessary accessories and programming for a complete SMART
voice controlled system.
18.4. The voice control system shall consists of main Server console, data
network, voice device, voice control devices which receive voice
command and transmitted to the equipment, devices and system to
operate it automatically through voice command.
18.5. Sub-contractor shall provide all the necessary firewall set up and the
system shall not have any internet security vulnerability.
18.6. Voice control system shall allowing user to easily adjust the room
temperature and lighting levels, or utilise entertainment devices, all
through speech.
18.7. The voice devices shall be activated by the smart phone or the pocket
card reader. Where any of the above is being detected, the voice control
system and room management system shall immediately activate through
greeting enable the room as occupied mode. Where any of the status is
unable to be detected, voice control system and room management
system shall off all the lighting, television and off the fan coil unit and
return to original set up for unoccupied mode.
18.8. Voice control system should shortening response times, streamlining

booking processes and allowing user to make requests for room service
without needing to leave their room.
18.9. The voice control system shall be connected up to the booking processes,
enabling user to easily reserve a meeting room through a few simple voice
commands, or obtain an electronic key card to access the room.
Meanwhile, tourist information or weather forecasts can be provided
immediately, at any time of the day or night. This information shall be up-
to-date.
18.10. The Voice device shall be CE certified and operate using the 230V/50Hz
power supply and have a 7 inch touch screen, LED indication, dual
speaker, microphones, 5 megapixel cameras for video call. The voice
control shall be operated in wireless using dual-band Wi-Fi supports
802.11 a/b/g/n (2.4 and 5 GHz) networks, Bluetooth support for streaming
audio from a device to the Echo and for voice control of mobile devices.
The voice device shall have buttons to on/off of the device, control the
volume of speaker and mute the microphone. The system shall be able to
use the standard software through web portal, mobile application for all
setup requirements.
TS/E/S70/28
18.11. The system can be easily provides of multiple voice devices at the same
time, and automatically connect them through a centralized console. The
console must be able to manage hundreds of voice devices. The console
shall allow specifying device settings like volume, check device state, and
remotely reset devices to prepare for the next user. Voice device shall be
easy to active for any usage.
18.12. The voice command console system shall be able to delete and de-
registered any user account and registered a new user account through
local software at the console for all the voice devices.
18.13. The voice commands shall automatically delete every day and can also
perform a remote clearance through console as an additional precaution.
19. KNX/EIB IP Gateway
19.1. The KNX/EIB IP gateway shall be a universal IP Interface and IP Gateway

for the KNX/EIB Installation Bus. The KNX /EIB IP shall be designed for
installation on DIN rail with a width of 2 units (36 mm).
19.2. The gateway shall be "Bus Access and Object Server" and provides an
interface to KNX/EIB installations both on the telegram level (KNXnet/IP
Tunneling) as well as on data point level .KNX/EIB Group Objects /
KNX/EIB Application Layer, with semantic meta-data for rooms and
functions.
19.3. It shall have the following controls and displays feature as a minimum:
(a) Power Connector 12-30 V DC
(b) KNX/EIB Bus Connector
(c) Ethernet Connector with PoE
(d) OLED Display b/w
(e) LED for Programming Mode
(f) Up Button
(g) Down Button
(h) Escape Button
(i) Enter Button
TS/E/S70/29
19.4. The settings of the device can be accessed via
(a) Direct setting on the device
(b) Internet browser and web interface
(c) Latest Engineering Tool Software
19.5. The KNX/EIB IP gateway can be integrated and operated with intelligent
personal assistants such as voice control devices. The KNX/EIB
installation and the devices connected to voice control can be controlled
using the interface of all the human voice.
19.6. The KNX/EIB IP gateway shall has an integrated web server that allows
access to the device settings in a web browser on a PC or a mobile device
such as a smart phone or a tablet.
19.7. The device shall allows the visualization of buildings, rooms and functions
in a standard web browser on a PC or mobile device with its integrated
web server
19.8. The device shall provides the following to access an installation:
(a) As Programming Interface On telegram level (KNXnet/IP

Tunneling) and can be used as bus interface for Engineering Tool
Software
(b) As a residential gateway via KNX/EIB IP Binary Protocol, KNX IP

Web Services, KNX IP RESTful Web Services and Web
Application using a standard web browser
19.9. The KNX/EIB IP gateway can be used as interface to the KNX/EIB Bus on
the telegram level. It must be compatible with the KNXnet/IP specification
and can be used as bus interface for Engineering Tool Software or other
programs that support the KNXnet/IP Tunnelling. It shall supports up to 8
simultaneous connections. The settings for the interface (e.g. IP
configuration) can be done with all the for Engineering Tool Software
product entries that are available for this device.
19.10. The KNX/EIB IP gateway system shall be able to interface based on a

specific protocol to implement for non-KNX/EIB devices. The KNX/EIB IP
gateway maps KNX/EIB data to an IT-friendly API (Application
Programming Interface). This shall reduces the effort to connect e.g.
control or visualization tools to KNX/EIB. It shall store all data point values
even if the device is not connected.
TS/E/S70/30
19.11. The KNX/EIB IP gateway architecture shall not only allows access to the
runtime data, but also to the structure of the KNX/EIB installation. All
information about rooms in a building and the available functions can be
read as metadata from a client. With the Engineering Tool Software, the
rooms and the functions are defined, which should be available to the
user.
The Interface gateway with BMS/IBMS shall be located at FCC room’s or

other designated room control panel. Each gateway can serve up to 10
lines per area. The transfer of the data points is in 2-way communications
via data exchange of BACnet/IP, the group addresses at each point are
swiftly appeared at BMS/IBMS system panels and it allowed BMS/IBMS to
control and monitoring freely at the Wireless Mesh Network Lighting
Control system data points. The system shall be able to interface to NUS
virtual machine at cloud
21. System Monitoring & Control
21.1 The central control station at FCC room or other designated room shall
have a Wireless Mesh Network Lighting Management software in which
embedded used for controlling, monitoring, data analysis all lighting,
energy and other's as specified.
21.2 The system shall be a centralized data platform capable of receiving &
analyzing of data, displaying, monitoring and controlling of the sensors
and lighting fixtures. All the sensors shall be able to be enabled and
disabled from this centralized control system. All the APPLICATIONS as
specified in this contract shall be fully integrated with this centralized
control data platform.

Microsoft Server OS, in Intel’s core processor running at minimum
Optical mouse, keyboard, CDRW drive, 2 nos. RS232 Serial Port, 4 nos.
of USB, 24’’ LCD flat screen monitor in super graphics card and with
minimum 3 adaptor for Ethernet networking with TCP/IP network
protocols. The system shall have 1 hour UPS back up

21.5 The system software shall also install at NUS virtual machine at cloud for
the control and monitoring, The Sub-contractor shall include the
necessary programming, accessories and software for the LMS to install
at the NUS virtual machines at cloud. No hyperlink to another virtual
system/ system is allowed.
TS/E/S70/31
functions :

(b) Active Status & Control – Graphic Visualization of status feedback

on all active status of lighting in the form of graphical layout floor
plan and possible for switching On/Off and performing dimming on
dedicated icons / symbols;
(c) Remote Web Access – Allows up to 20 users with different user ID

and password to access the graphical software concurrently via
the LAN or Campus intranet Infrastructure with specific settings
created by the Network Administrator. The Remote Computer will
connect and interact with the System by Microsoft Windows
Internet Explorer environment without the needs to download any
program or database; Remote desktop type of access will not be
accepted.

graphical screen- a digitalized layout displayed symbolically and

TS/E/S70/32

needed to.

(j) Graphics showing the online status of all controllers, gateway and
Power meter loops
(k) Monitoring of all power meter functions and history - The energy

day light harvesting, HVAC saving, Occupancy saving. The
artificial light management come with mobile Apps and/or wireless
room control handset to activate scenes of the lights.

(o) Video Analytics – People Counting and crowd monitoring camera

deployed at various main entrances and public areas of the
buildings
(p) Facility Booking System – Booking through third party interfacing

(q) Complementing HVAC System – Real time HVAC data (room

conditioning.
(r) Car Park Management – Basement / indoor car park lighting

energy saving and monitoring system base on microwave sensor
with integrated Smart driver for control and data collection.
TS/E/S70/33
21.7 The software shall able to provide with interfacing to mobile phone
application control and monitoring to the following additional function:
(a) Supervise temperatures (set-point/speed of fan coil) , I/O, alarms

(with acoustic pop-up massage), security, lights (on/off and
dimming), Television (on/off), Water heater (on/off) and curtains
(open/close) or blinds (up/down)
(b) Manage Visitors Room Check-in\Check-out with the possibility of

integration with “Property Management System” or similar
(c) Display length of stay, day of departure and other information

about Visitors
(d) Manage Services and Privileges (creation of cards with services

enabling)
(e) Display the room status (reserved, booked, occupied with

identification of guest presence)
(f) Stop access to single rooms
(g) Check and manage transit through common areas
(h) Search and export entry report
(i) Display service requests
(j) Manage the records of the staff and Visitors
(k) Create and manage scenes and commands of virtual devices

down time resilience with redundancy and secured to cater to the growth
of storing of overall data for up to 10 years.
data analytics aims to immediately extract knowledgeable information
using data mining techniques that help in making predictions, identifying
recent trends, finding hidden information, and making decisions.
TS/E/S70/34
in a convenient manner. It must provide data redundancy by having at
least 3 time replications for its raw data storage and able to scale for
further storage space without powering down the system.
22. Labeling and Identification
22.1 All the devices, controller, gateway and lighting fixture shall label with their
physical address, IP address, the serving controller, Zoning etc,
22.2 Label shall be white background and black lettering for normal power
supply serving lighting fixture. For those served by emergency power
source, it shall be of red background and white lettering.
22.3 All the panel shall be properly labelled and frame up the single line,
schematic diagram, addresses of devices and zoning for that system
23.1 The complete Wireless Mesh Network Lighting Control System shall be
fully tested and commissioned by a Specialist to ensure that the desired
performance is met and that the configuration is as per this Technical
Specifications, Design Parameters and Tender.]
23.2 Sub-contractor to shall use Spectrum Analyzer to scan wireless signal

quality of the system according to the manufacturer’s Guidelines during
the course of the deployment
23.3 Sub-contractor to scan and test the signal quality in the DC hard wired
system using scanner and power line tester to test the quality of AC
system
23.4 The Contractor shall be further required to liaise with the End Users on the
Wireless Mesh Network Lighting Control System controls and to assist
and advise them on the programming on the various required settings as
well as train them to use The System. This cost shall deem to be allowed
for in the contract.
TS/E/S70/35
system.
(a) All the devices, controller, gateway, lighting fixture physical

address (MAC), IP address and device address for the entire
system in relationship.
(b) Floor plan showing the devices, controller, gateway, location with
all the necessary address indicated.
(c) Floor plan showing all the wireless mesh network lighting fixture
and IoT fixture installed with their physical address
24.3 Sub-contractor shall submit all the system programming, and other
TS/E/S70/36
Architectural of Wireless Mesh Network Layer
System Schematic of Wireless Mesh Network
TS/E/S70/37
1. General
delivered to the site in the maker's containers with seal, etc., unbroken
and are clearly marked with the maker's name or trademark and a
description of the contents and colour.
with an addition of anti-fungus nature.
finishing coats, shall be obtained from the same manufacturer and shall
be those recommended by the manufacturer as suitable for application


of his workmen.
1.6 The paint shall be kept stirred during use and when more than one coat
is specified, subsequent coats shall not be applied until preceding coats
have thoroughly hardened.
2. Metal Surface
TS/E/S74/1
c) All duct work
f) Suppliers items
g) Galvanised steel
4.2 Before any painting is carried out the Sub-Contractor shall ensure that
the surface to be painted is clean, free of grease and rust as
recommended by the paint manufacturer. If necessary, degreasing and
de-rusting shall be employed.
applied.

4.7 All floors, ceilings, walls, fittings etc shall be protected by proper painters'
sheet and all paint spots and splashes be removed.
TS/E/S74/2
a) All pipe work and associated hangers, brackets, supports,

sleeves, etc shall be painted as follows :

1 coat - undercoat

finishing coat.
The finishing coats for all metal surfaces exposed to weather

shall be epoxy paints.


chromate paint.
paint.


75 mm.

TS/E/S74/3
PIPE
other 150mm 150mm 150mm other

approved
approved
decorativ
A B C decorative
e
colour
colour
Pipe A B C

green and white

and Vent

TS/E/S74/4
6. Colour Scheme
Gas pipe Yellow

S.O..


Green (Supply line)

Blue (supply line)
BAS services White
Duct work Beige
over.
TS/E/S74/5
7. Directional Flow
300mm 150mm
50mm

8. Galvanising

commences.
TS/E/S74/6
SECTION 75- DOCUMENTS
1. General
The Sub-Contractor shall supply all the draft copies of design note, circuit
diagrams, application software source code listings and documentation during the
various stages of design and development work. The final documentation shall be
compiled and cared from all the previously submitted drafted copies.
Three sets of such final documentation shall be submitted within one month from
the date of satisfactory field of the related equipment. One set shall be kept at the
Master Station and updated by the Sub-Contractor as and when there are any
changes during the maintenance period.
The Sub-Contractor shall supply all the operational manuals, system

Programmer's manuals and technical manuals for all the hardware, software and
equipment. Such manuals documentation supplied by the Sub-Contractor shall
contain sufficient information for any system programmer to carry out the design of
this system, and for the maintenance engineer to carry out future system
maintenance and modification work. Such manuals shall be supplied at the first
stage of the system design work.
Any part of a proprietary software which is modified to suit this system shall be
treated as application software. The Employer shall have all the rights to all the
application software in this system.
The Sub-Contractor shall guarantee the support for any proprietary software for
unlimited period of time. The complete program source code in both hard copy and
magnetic tape of all the proprietary software shall be lodged with an appointed
party approved by the S.O.. Should the Sub-Contractor go into liquidation, or is
unable to provide further support to the system software, this copy of source code
shall become the property of the Employer.
The Sub-Contractor shall supply the following hardware and software

documentation:
1.1 Application Software Documentation shall include :
a) General system introduction to all programs including software

organisation with drawing if possible :
For each program:
General description of the program function, method of operation

and full accounts of the facilities provided;
Specification of performance with all its interfaces especially where

the program share data with other programs;
Block Diagram and flow charts;
TS/E/S75/1
b) A complete source listing of all the application software programs.

Comments in the listing shall describe the operational work the
instruction is performing. The Sub-Contractor shall also provide the
source programme in transportable format (e.g. CD/Harddisk,
Magnetic Tape).
Memory maps for the CPU's internal storage, and for the disks. The
maps shall show the numbered locations of core memory.
A programming guide showing how to run and operate the program

and described the way the data or code has been laid out for
modification, conversion or expansion in future.
1.2 Hardware Documentation shall include :
a) General system introduction to the hardware.
b) Detailed description of structure, information code formats,

message structure and message security.
c) General Assembly Drawings showing the layout of equipment in

cubicles together with details of modules.
d) Site installation manuals and drawings.
e) For each module :
- Introduction
- Specification
- Detailed description of module operation and circuit
- Detailed description of all the circuit options by jumpers
- Module functional block diagram
- Module circuit diagram
- Detailed component part list
TS/E/S75/2
SECTION 76 - MAINTENANCE DURING DEFECTS LIABILITY PERIOD (DLP)
1. General
1.1 This section of the Technical Specifications sets out the Sub-Contractor Works
on maintenance and responsibility of the Sub-Contractor during the Defects
Liability Period (DLP).
"Maintenance" shall mean the combination of all technical and associated

administrative actions intended to retain an item in, or restore it to, a state in
which it can perform its required function and within its designed operation limits
and tolerances in accordance with good Engineering practise, relevant
Standards/Codes of Practice and Manufacturer's Specifications. It shall include
the replacement of elements or parts to match its original material for works
where repairs are not practical.
1.2 This section covers the work involved in the regular servicing and
maintenance schedule and/or breakdown service of the systems and
equipment, etc., installed under other sections of the Specifications.
1.3 The Sub-Contractor shall provide free Comprehensive Maintenance for the
entire Sub-Contract Works during the Defects Liability Period (DLP).
1.4 The Sub-Contractor shall be responsible for all damages caused to the
installation or the Employer property through the act of negligence of their
workmen except where it can be proven that it is no fault of theirs.
1.5 The Tenderer shall submit letters of commitment by each of the equipment /
system specialists / suppliers who will undertake the post Defects Liability
Period servicing and maintenance. The letters of commitment shall commit
these specialists / suppliers to maintain the prices stated herein in accordance
with the terms and Conditions of the Sub-Contract and the Specifications of
the Sub-Contract.
1.6 At the completion of the Maintenance period the Sub-Contractor shall hand
over the entire Sub-Contract Works to the Employer or its appointed agent in
first class order.
TS/E/S76/1
2 Requirements
General
2.1 It is the responsibility of the Sub-Contractor to maintain the systems in first

class running condition.
2.2 The Maintenance period shall cover all parts and labour etc. The cost of any
repairs or replacement of parts shall be borne by the Sub-Contractor with the
exception of repair or replacement of parts made necessary as a result of an
act of vandalism or an act of God. The onus of proving the cause of any
repairs or replacement of parts lies with the Sub-Contractor. In the event of
dispute, the decision of the S.O. shall be final and binding.
2.3 Maintenance service shall include inspection, lubrication, running adjustments

and the keeping of the interior of the installation and equipment in a clean
condition. The service shall also include the immediate attention at any time to
any defects.
2.4 The schedule on the maintenance and other requirements of the following
systems shall also refer to the Maintenance Standard and Schedule in the
Appendix.
a) Security Card Access System.

b) Security Closed Circuit Television (CCTV) System.
c) High Tension Switchgear System.
d) Emergency Generator and underground fuel storage systems.
e) Un-interruptible Power Supply (UPS) Systems.
f) Emergency Voice Communication System
g) Main Switch Board and Emergency Main Switch Board
h) Lighting Management System
i) Power Monitoring System
2.5 The Sub-Contractor shall carry out regular maintenance to the systems and
equipment including cleaning, etc. at monthly intervals in accordance with the
maintenance responsibilities outlined hereinafter or as indicated within other
sections of the Specifications. Allowance shall be made in the Tender price for
any cost incurred by complying with this requirement.
2.6 The Sub-Contractor shall replace all faulty or damaged parts with new ones
during the warranty period at no expense to the Employer or its appointed
agent. This clause shall override any standard warranty conditions of the Sub-
Contractor or his supplier of equipment. Allowance shall be made here for any
cost incurred by complying with this requirement.
TS/E/S76/2
2.7 The Sub-Contractor shall submit to the Employer or its appointed agent a
monthly report in such form as may be approved by the Employer or its
appointed agent containing details of the periodic inspection and servicing
including all rectification work executed by him. The monthly report shall
include a log showing the time when a report of a fault is received and the
time when rectification work commences. The nature of a fault and the actual
time taken for the necessary adjustments or repairs shall be signed by the
User/Department and submitted to the Employer or its appointed agent within
the first week of the following month.
2.8 The Sub-Contractor shall also inform the Employer or its appointed agent
within the last week of every month, the date and time scheduled for the
servicing and maintenance of the system in the next month.
2.9 Routine servicing and maintenance to the system is to be carried out during
normal working hours unless it is otherwise specified elsewhere in the
Specifications.
2.10 During the Maintenance Period, the Sub-Contractor shall attend to any
complaint promptly at no expense to the Employer or its agent.
2.11 Where it is required for any system operating on 24 hour basis, the Sub-
Contractor shall ensure that his workshop can provide 24 hour service.
2.12 After the attendance of complaint and completion of the repair work, a copy of
the report or service chit duly signed by the Employer or its appointed agent
shall be forwarded to the S.O. for information and record.
2.13 The Sub-Contractor shall be responsible for the conduct and behaviour of his
workmen. Upon arrival at the premises for servicing or repair works, the
workmen are required to inform the officer-in-charge in the premises the
purpose of their visit. The Sub-Contractor shall ensure that minimal
inconvenience is caused to the Employer or its appointed agent.
2.14 The Sub-Contractor shall be required to replace or otherwise make good at

his own expense, any part or parts which may be of faulty design, construction
or material. This responsibility shall include provision of labour and all
incidental costs necessary for the removal of defective parts or components,
and of installing replacements.
2.15 All tests, observations, readings and rectification works shall be fully recorded
in a log book provided in the Maintenance Office and signed and
acknowledged by the Employer or its appointed agent.
2.16 Any replacement of any item or any repair work to breakdown in the Systems
shall only be carried out by the Sub-Contractor with the consent of the
Employer or its appointed agent.
TS/E/S76/3
2.17 The Sub-Contractor shall be deemed to have included in the Sub-Contract the
rates or charges or prices for all the necessary costs incurred in providing
temporary and similar systems to the Employer or its appointed agent’s use
during the period of repair or replacement, so as to enable the Employer or its
appointed agent to continue working/operations without any disruption or
stoppage.
2.18 The Sub-Contractor shall keep adequate spare parts for the systems under
his maintenance to ensure that the machine down-time in the event of
breakdowns will be minimised.
2.19 The Sub-Contractor shall warrant that any repair or replacement works shall
be free from any defect in workmanship and/or materials. The Sub-Contractor
shall further warrant that he has exercised all care and skill in carrying out the
repair and replacement works.
3. Workmanship and Materials
3.1 All work described herein shall be perform by workmen skilled in the service,
maintenance and repair of and the installation and shall be executed in
accordance with the best commercial practice.
3.2 All materials to be supplied in connection with works shall be new and unused
and shall generally be of the best quality as regards manufacture and
performance. Replacement of parts and accessories shall be of the original
manufacture, make and model. Any deviation shall be approved by the S.O.
4. Liquidated Damages
4.1 Response Time/Service
a) Response Time
The response time is the time period allowed within which the Sub-
Contractor's suitably qualified maintenance personnel are required to
arrive at the site and start maintenance work from the time the fault
condition has been reported to the Sub-Contractor by any means such
as pager, telephone, telex facsimile, mail, agent or other means of
communication.
b) Maintenance
The Sub-Contractor shall at no additional cost to the Employer or its

appointed agent in carrying out the necessary repairs, whether major
or minor, including adjustments of all Systems installed under this Sub-
TS/E/S76/4
Contract or such further extended time, as deemed necessary by the

Employer or its appointed agent.
Should the Sub-Contractor fail to attend within the response time, the
Employer or its appointed agent reserves the right to appoint other
party or parties to execute such works and all costs incurred plus
charges shall be recovered by the Employer or its appointed agent
from the Sub-Contractor by deduction(s) from any money due or that
shall become due to the Sub-Contractor, or payable direct from the
Sub-Contractor to the Employer or its appointed agent PROVIDED that
and without prejudice to any other remedies for breach contained in
the Maintenance during the Defects Liability Period the Employer or its
appointed agent shall in addition to recover under this paragraph
whatsoever that may result as a consequence of the Employer or its
appointed agent having to resort to the provisions of this paragraph.
The Sub-Contractor shall employ a supervisor who shall be equipped

with a mobile telephone with SMS. Should the supervisor fail to
respond within one hour after being paged it shall be deemed that the
Sub-Contractor has failed to make himself available in which case the
paragraph above shall apply.
In the event this clause becomes inoperable for any reason, then the
Employer or its appointed agent shall be at liberty to recover such
damages for breach of contract as the Employer or its appointed agent
can prove arising from the Sub-Contractor's failure to carry out the
maintenance.
c) Agreed Damages for Failure to Respond Within the Response Time
Response time for attending to breakdown of Systems shall not

exceed the time stated hereinafter. Agreed damages shall be imposed
should the response time be exceeded or in the event the Sub-
Contractor fails to rectify the breakdown within the specified hours or
such further extended time deemed necessary by the Employer or its
appointed agent.
Any Time during the 24 hours of the day
Response time allowed: less than 2 hours
Liquidated Damages for every late response: S$50.00 per hour
For any occasion where the response time is exceeded, the Sub-
Contractor shall be given an opportunity to explain. The Employer or
its appointed agent may waive the Liquidated Damages if the
explanation is acceptable.
TS/E/S76/5
5. Statutory Tests
The Sub-Contractor shall be responsible for ensuring that all the statutory tests
required, such as no-load tests, full-load tests, thermal scanning to comply with the
Authorities. The Sub-Contractor is deemed to have included the costs for all such
tests in his Tender Offer for the Maintenance during the Defects Liability Period.
TS/E/S76/6
PHASE CURRENT (DEMAND AND MAXIMUM DEMAND)

LOCAL AND REMOTE OPERATION MODE STATUS
POWER (kW) ( DEMAND AND MAXIMUM DEMAND)
POWER FACTOR (SYSTEM AND DISPLACEMENT)

DIMMMABLE BALLAST/DIMMMABLE DRIVER
KVAR ( DEMAND AND MAXIMUM DEMAND)

AC AND DC AUXILIARY SUPPLY FAILURE
THREE-PHASE CURRENT (AVERAGE)


PILOT CABLE PROTECTION TRIP
BREAKER ON/OFF/TRIP STATUS



GAS PRESSURE HIGH/LOW
BATTERY LOW VOLTAGE
START/STOP COMMAND
ENERGY TOTALISATION
FUEL LEAKAGE ALARM
COOLING FAN STATUS
ANALOG LIMIT ALARM

LOCAL SLIDE SWITCH
ENERGY EFFICIENCY
BATTERY VOLTAGE
DAYLIGHT SENSOR
EARTHING SWITCH
BATTERY ON LOAD
HIGH TEMP ALARM
GRAPHIC DISPLAY
ACMV INTERLOCK
LIGHTING ON/OFF
MOTION SENSOR
POWER LIMITING
ON/OFF STATUS
TIME PROGRAM
KWH (DEMAND)
FAULT ALARM
FREQUENCY
ATS STATUS
TRIP ALARM
LUX LEVEL
HEAT MAP
QUANTITY
REMARKS
VOLTAGE
NORMAL
ALARM
TIMER
HV SWITCHBOARD
a) 22 KV FEEDER CIRCUIT INCOMING PANE X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X
b) TRANSFORMER X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X
c) BUS-SECTION PANEL X X X X X
d) HV SWITCHGEAR COMMON ALARM X X X X
e) AC/DC SUPPLY UNIT X X X X
LV SWITCHBOARD
EMSB
b) ATS X X
c) OUTGOING FEEDER X X X X X X
a) MAIN INCOMING FEEDER X X X X X X X X X X X X
c) OUTGOING FEEDER X X X X X X X X X X X
GENERATOR SYSTEM
a) GENERATOR CONTROL PANEL X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X
b) FUEL PUMP X X X X X X X
c) DAY FUEL TANK X X X X X

DEVICES
DEVICES CONTROLLER X X X X X
GATEWAY X X X X X
WEB BASE NERWORK CONTROLLER X X X X X

a) Daylight/Motion/Thermal ON/OFF/Lighting DIMMING
X X X X X X X X X X
(LT,Seminar Rooms,Office,Classroom) X X X
b) Daylight ON/OFF and Photo Sensor
X X X X X X
(Daylit Common Areas, Staircases) X X X X
c) Motion/Timer ON/OFF (Non-Daylit Common Areas,
staircases) X X X X X X X
X X X X
d)
Motion ON/OFF (ALL Toilets) X X X X X X
X X X X
e) Daylight/Motion/Thermal ON/OFF/DIM (ALL Lounge
X X X X X X X X X X X X X X
Rooms, Meeting Room, Laboratories )

OFF - System OFF
Schedule 1 -MANUAL
MESH- System will be started
NETWORK, EIBby operator
and IBMS point sch for ELE 1 OF 1




START/STOP COMMAND
ENERGY TOTALISATION
FUEL LEAKAGE ALARM
COOLING FAN STATUS
DIMMMABLE BALLAST
ANALOG LIMIT ALARM

LOCAL SLIDE SWITCH
ENERGY EFFICIENCY
BATTERY VOLTAGE
DAYLIGHT SENSOR
EARTHING SWITCH
HIGH TEMP ALARM
GRAPHIC DISPLAY
HI LEVEL MODBUS
ACMV INTERLOCK
LIGHTING ON/OFF
MOTION SENSOR
POWER LIMITING
POWER FACTOR
ON/OFF STATUS
TIME PROGRAM
FREQUENCY
ATS STATUS
QUANTITY
REMARKS
CURRENT
VOLTAGE
NORMAL
ALARM
TIMER
KVAR
KWH
LV SWITCHBOARD
EMSB
b) ATS X X
c) OUTGOING FEEDER X X X X X X X
a) MAIN INCOMING FEEDER X X X X X X X X X X X X X
c) OUTGOING FEEDER X X X X X X X X X X X X
GENERATOR SYSTEM
a) GENERATOR CONTROL PANEL X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X
X X X
b) FUEL PUMP X X X X X
c) FUEL TANK X X X X X


a) Lighting DIMMING (Seminar Rooms) X X X X X X X X X X X
b) Daylight ON/OFF (Daylit Common Areas) X X X X X X X X X X
c) Timer ON/OFF (Non-Daylit Common Areas) X X X X X X X X X X
d) Motion ON/OFF (ALL Toilets, Lounge Rooms,
X X X X X X X X X X
Meeting Room @ L2 & L3)

OFF - System OFF
MANUAL - System will be started by operator
BAS- System will be start up by BAS command or System last command
Schedule 2 - BAS point sch for Electrical 1 OF 1

SCHEDULE OF LIGHTING FIXTURES
Light Fitting Type: - Legend Item No :7.319
Descriptions : 1x1W Wall Mounted Light Emitting Diode

(LED) Fitting c/w Diffuser and 2 Hrs Duration Battery Pack
Technical Specification
Technical Characteristics
The luminaire shall be designed to operate on 230V 50Hz single-phase main supply.
Internal wiring cables shall be at least 0.5sq mm and rated 105 degree Celsius.
1x1W non-maintained fluorescent lamp c/w 2 hours duration seal lead battery.
Fitting installation shall adhere strictly to manufacturer instruction/recommendation.
Luminaire Housing
Wall & ceiling mounted with recessing kit.
High efficiency optical diffuser and light grey finish polycarbonate body.
Stainless steel screws.
Lamps
1 x 1W Light Emitting Diode (LED)
Power Consumption: 2VA
Lamp Life rated 50,000 burning hours.
Ingress Protection
IP65
Labels
CE and certification label by Singapore Accreditation Council accredited testing laboratory approved.
The light fitting shall be batch test. Test certificate shall be produced upon request.
Monitoring/Testing
Green LED indicates healthy supply and charging is on. Microswitch.
Emergency
Operation shall be non-maintained mode.
Batteries shall be of maintenance free and High Temperature Nickel Cadmium
Emergency duration shall at 2 hours
Compliance with CP563; SS263 pt.2; IEC 60598-2-22, Certification label by Singapore third party
accredited test laboratory. Listed Label.
Standard Compliance
BS EN 60598/ENEC/CE
LF/ 1
Descriptions : 1x1W Recessed Light Emitting Diode (LED)

Emergency Light Fitting of 2 Hours Duration
Luminaire Housing
Electro-galvanized steel sheet
Epoxy powder coating
Lamps
1 x 1W Light Emitting Diode (LED)
Power Consumption: 2VA
Labels
CE and certification label by Singapore Accreditation Council accredited testing laboratory approved.
Test certificate shall be produced upon request.
Monitoring/Testing
Emergency
Operation shall be non-maintained mode.
Batteries shall be of maintenance free and High Temperature Nickel Cadmium
Compliance with CP563; SS263 pt.2; IEC 60598-2-22, Certification label by Singapore third party
accredited test laboratory. Listed Label.
Ingress Protection
IP65
Standard Compliance
BS EN 60598/ENEC/CE.
LF/ 2
Descriptions : 2x1W Wall Mounted Light Emitting Diode

(LED) Emergency Light Fitting of 2 Hours Duration
2 x 1W non-maintained emergency twin lamp c/w 2 x 1W LED & 2 hours duration seal lead battery.
Certification label by third party accredited test laboratory approved type & comply to latest SS
CP563, SS263: Part 2. ; IEC 60598-2-22.
Fitting installation shall adhere strictly to manufacturer instruction/recommendation.
Luminaire Housing
Wall & ceiling mounted Adjustable fire-retardant lamp-heads.
Transparent half cylinder polycarbonate lamp shield with fresnel pattern housing and electro galvanized
housing with epoxy powder coating c/w dual test switch & LED indicator.
Stainless steel screws.
Lamps and Gears

The lamp shall complete with a control gear and operate on 230V 50Hz.
Labels
Degree of ingress protection IP65.
Certification label by Singapore Accreditation Council accredited testing laboratory approved, Test
Certificate shall be produced upon request.
LF/ 3
Light Fitting Type: EXIT Legend Item No :7.322
Descriptions : EXIT Light c/w 2 Hours Battery Pack (Single

sided/Double sided directional arrow facing either left or
right)
Luminaire Housing
Electro-galvanized steel sheet
Epoxy powder coating
Wall, ceiling mounted and ceiling recessed mounted electro galvanised steel with epoxy powder
coating housing & fire retardant moulded acrylic diffuser with white “EXIT” lettering & directional arrow
where required against ISO safety green background
Lamps
1 watt self contained, maintained type internally illuminated exit light using 10 years life span LED
white output LED with IC controlled dual rate charger
Labels
CE Approved, Test Certificate shall be produced upon request.
Monitoring / Testing
Emergency
Operation shall be maintained mode
Batteries shall be of maintenance free high temperature nickel cadmium.
Compliance with SS563; SS263 pt.2; IEC 60598-2-22, certification label Singapore Accreditation
Council accredited testing laboratory, Listed Label.
LF/ 4
Light Fitting Type: EXIT Legend Item No :7.322A
Descriptions : Box EXIT Light c/w 2 Hours Battery Pack

(Single sided/Double sided directional arrow facing either
left or right)
Luminaire Housing
High impact polycarbonate housing
Injection moulded fire retardant
Wall, ceiling mounted and ceiling recessed mounted high impact polycarbonate housing & fire
retardant injection moulded diffuser with white “EXIT” lettering & directional arrow where required
against ISO safety green background
Lamps
1 watt self contained, maintained type internally illuminated exit light using LED white output LED with
IC controlled dual rate charger
Labels
CE Approved, Test Certificate shall be produced upon request.
Monitoring / Testing
Emergency
Operation shall be maintained mode
Batteries shall be of maintenance free high temperature nickel cadmium.
Compliance with SS563; SS263 pt.2; IEC 60598-2-22, certification label by Singapore Accreditation
Council accredited testing laboratory, Listed Label.
Protection
IP65
LF/ 4A
Light Fitting Type: F15A Legend Item No :

F15A
Descriptions: Addressable Dimming Ceiling Recess Flat
Panel Light
Super slim LED light fitting 595mm(L) x 595mm (W) x 11.5mm(H), with small height of the body,
easy mounting white epoxy powder coating aluminium frame body, PMMA super thin LED light bar
with Addressable Dimming Electronic driver
Compliance
Thermal Resistance test to JESD 51-51
IEC60598.1; IEC60598.2.1; IEEC60598.2.2;
Safety Performance - IEC 61347-2-13 and IEC61347-1
EMC Requirement - IEC62493, IEC61547, IEC6100-3-2, IEC6100-3-3 and CISPR 15
ROHS compliance
IP40 protection
The light fitting shall be batch test and Certification label by Singapore Accreditation Council
accredited testing laboratory.
Materials/Finishes
Aluminium frame white powder coated with white diffuser, light guide plate internal reflective film.
Suitable operating temperature of over 45 oC and RH>90%.
Lamp Source/Gears
1V - 10V Addressable Dimming , 24VElectronic LED Driver
Lamp Power = 38W LED light bar
Temperature colour - 4000K, Lumen: 3800lm, min lumen output 95lm/w, 50,000 burning hours, 5
years warranty Include driver
Electrical specification
Input voltage: AC230V +/-10%, 50/60Hz
LF/ 64
Light Fitting Type: F16A Legend Item No :

F16A
Descriptions: Ceiling Recess Addressable Dimming Flat
Panel Light
Super slim LED light fitting 295mm(L) x 1195mm (W) x 11.5mm(H), with small height of the body,
easy mounting white epoxy powder coating aluminium frame body, PMMA super thin LED light bar
with Addressable Dimming Electronic driver
Compliance
Thermal Resistance test to JESD 51-51
IEC60598.1; IEC60598.2.1; IEEC60598.2.2;
EMC Requirement - IEC62493, IEC61547, IEC6100-3-2, IEC6100-3-3 and CISPR 15
ROHS compliance
IP40 protection
The light fitting shall be batch test and Certification label by Singapore Accreditation Council
accredited testing laboratory.
Materials/Finishes
Aluminium frame white powder coated with white diffuser, light guide plate internal reflective film.
Suitable operating temperature of over 45 oC and RH>90%.
Lamp Source/Gears
1V - 10V Addressable Dimming , 24VElectronic LED Driver
Lamp Power = 38W LED light bar
Temperature colour - 4000K, Lumen: 3800lm, min lumen output 95lm/w, 50,000 burning hours, 5
years warranty Include driver
LF/ 66
Light Fitting Type: WP3 Legend Item No :
Descriptions: Surface Mounted LED Light
The luiminaire shall be of 1270mm(L) x 140mm (W) x 90mm(H) surface mounted type LED
outdoor weatherproof, dustproof, high impact resistance with IP 65 protection, Luminaire to be
made of UV stabilized polycarbonated body and a clear patterned diffuser, stainless steel clips,
complete with 35watt LED and LED driver. type, Cover of be opal polycarbonated.
Compliance
IEC60598.1; IEC60598.2.1; IEEC60598.2.2;
EMC Requirement - CISPR 15
LED Modules and Gear- IEC62031, IEC62384,
IP65 protection,
Materials/Finishes
Made Polycarbonate materials with stainless clip
Polycarbonated Body
Opal Polycarbonated Cover
Lamp Source/Gears
Electronic LED driver. 24V Electronic DC LED Driver housing within fixture
Lamp Power = 33W LED module.
Total System power = 38W
Temperature colour - 4000K, Lumen: 3100lm, colour rendering index(CRI) of 80, 50,000 burning
hours, 5 years warranty Include driver
LF/ 82
Contents Page
Fire Protection Schedule of Technical Data STD/Fire/1 - 20
Particular Specification for Fire Protection Works

Section 1 : Particular Specification TS/Fire/S1/1 – 21
Section 2 : Automatic Fire Alarm System TS/Fire/S2/1 – 40
Section 3 : Automatic Fire Sprinkler TS/Fire/S3/1 – 31
Section 4 : Emergency Voice Inter-Communication System TS/Fire/S4/1 – 10
Section 7 : Fire Extinguisher / Fire Hosereel System TS/Fire/S7/1 – 12
Section 11 Conventional fire alarm system TS/Fire/S11/1 – 21
Section 12 Fire Resistant System TS/Fire/S12/1 – 6
Section 13 : Fire Alarm Remote Management System TS/Fire/S13/1 – 20
Section 14 : Electrical Control TS/Fire/S14/1 – 25
Section 20 : Vibration Isolation and Noise Control TS/Fire/S20/1 – 10
Section 21 Painting TS/Fire/S21/1 – 6
Section 22 BMS Interface TS/Fire/S22/1 – 6
Section 23 Testing and commissioning TS/Fire/S23/1
Section 24 Service and Maintenance TS/Fire/S24/1 – 11
Appendix A NUS 2 Stage Alarm with Auto Trigger Function 1–9
Appendix B Single Stage and Two Stage Alarm 1–4
Schedule 1 BAS Point Schedule for Fire Protection Works 1
1
Schedule of Technical Data
1.0 SCHEDULE OF TECHNICAL DATA FOR FIRE PROTECTION
1. Tenderers shall complete the following schedule and submit any supplementary information
which may be considered necessary to convey a complete description of the equipment
offered.
2. Tenderers are reminded that notwithstanding whatever is submitted in this Schedule, all
equipment and installation must comply with the requirements of the Specification.
3. Unless written confirmation and approval is obtained from the S.O. to that effect, the
requirements of the Specification shall supersede all other qualifications herein.
4. Tenderers are requested not to repeat the details called for in any separate specification of
their own. The works "as specified" or "to suit" or "equal and to approval" will not be accepted
as a sufficient description of any item.
5. Failure to fill in completely the Schedule may render his Tender liable to disqualification and
consequent rejection.
STD/Fire/1
1. Automatic Fire Sprinkler System
a) Sprinkler Head
Conventional Ceiling Pattern
Make ____________ ____________
Country of Manufacture ____________ ____________
Local Agent ____________ ____________
Type/Model/Serial No. ____________ ____________
Material ____________ ____________
Finishes ____________ ____________
Connections ____________ ____________
Concealed Dry Pendant Flush
Make ____________ ____________
Country of Manufacture ____________ ____________
Local Agent ____________ ____________
Type/Model/Serial No. ____________ ____________
Material ____________ ____________
Finishes ____________ ____________
Connections ____________ ____________
b) Alarm Valve
Make _______________________________
Country of Manufacture _______________________________
Local Agent _______________________________
Type/Model _______________________________
Material of Body _______________________________
Body of Trim _______________________________
Pressure Loss Coefficient _______________________________
Connection _________inch ________flanges
STD/Fire/2
c) Pressure Gauge
Make _______________________________
Local Agent _______________________________
Type/Model _______________________________
Range _______________________________
Graduation _______________________________
d) Flow Switch
Make _______________________________
Local Agent _______________________________
Type/Model _______________________________
Material of Body _______________________________
Material of Paddle _______________________________
Pressure Drop Certificate _______________________________
e) Pipe
Make _______________________________
Local Agent _______________________________
Material _______________________________
Class _______________________________
Approval Authority _______________________________
Test Pressure _______________________________
Working Pressure _______________________________
f) Fittings
Make _______________________________
Local Agent _______________________________
Material _______________________________
Class _______________________________
STD/Fire/3
Test Pressure _______________________________
g) Mechanical Coupling
Make _______________________________
Local Agent _______________________________
Material _______________________________
Class _______________________________
Test Pressure _______________________________
STD/Fire/4
2. Fire Hose Reel System
a) Hose Reel
Make _______________________________
Local Agent _______________________________
Model/Serial No _______________________________
Length of Hose _______________________________
Bore of Hose _______________________________
b) Hose Reel Nozzles
Make _______________________________
Local Agent _______________________________
Model/Serial No _______________________________
Material _______________________________
Finishes _______________________________
Connection _______________________________
STD/Fire/5
c) Pipes
Make _______________________________
Local Agent _______________________________
Material _______________________________
Class _______________________________
Test Pressure _______________________________
d) Fitting
Make _______________________________
Local Agent _______________________________
Material _______________________________
Class _______________________________
Test Pressure _______________________________
STD/Fire/6
3. Fire Extinguishers
Dry Chemical
Make _______________________________
Class _______________________________
Carbon Dioxide
Make _______________________________
Class _______________________________
Halotron
Make _______________________________
Class _______________________________
STD/Fire/7
4. Automatic Fire Alarm System
a) Main Fire Alarm Panel (MAP)
Make _______________________________
Country of Origin _______________________________
Local Agent _______________________________
Type _______________________________
Model _______________________________
Type of Display _______________________________
LCD Capacity _______________________________
Nos. of Addressable Zone _______________________________
Operating Voltage _______________________________
Total Quiescent Current _______________________________
Capacity of Battery _______________________________
Type/Nos. of Addressable Loop _______________________________
On-site Programming Method _______________________________
Dimensions _______________________________
Weight _______________________________
Permissible Ambient Temperature __________________________
Permissible Relative Humidity __________________________
Protection Category _______________________________
Approval _______________________________
STD/Fire/8
b) Sub Fire Alarm Panel(SAP)
Make _______________________________
Local Agent _______________________________
Type _______________________________
Model _______________________________
Type of Display _______________________________
LCD Capacity _______________________________
Dimensions _______________________________
Weight _______________________________
Permissible Ambient Temperature ___________________________
Permissible Relative Humidity ___________________________
Protection Category ___________________________
Approval ___________________________
c) Floor Mimic Board
Make _______________________________
Local Agent _______________________________
Housing Material _______________________________
Mimic Board Material _______________________________
Type of Indications _______________________________
Dimensions _______________________________
Weight _______________________________
STD/Fire/9
d) Main Data Processing Unit
Make _______________________________
Local Agent _______________________________
Type _______________________________
Model _______________________________
Memory Size/Type _______________________________
Type of Communication _______________________________
Type of Communication Network __________________________
Nos. of End Interface Port _______________________________
Transmission Speed _______________________________
System Capacity Nos. of SIB
Spare Capacity Provided Nos. of SIB
Type/Size of VDU _______________________________
System Operation By _______________________________
Integrated DC Operated Printer: Yes / No
Type of Data Back-up _______________________________
Storage Capacity of Past Events _______________________________
Nos./Type of Printer Provided _______________________________
Speed of Printer _______________________________
Permissible Ambient Temperature ____________________________
Permissible Relative Humidity _______________________________
Battery Capacity for DPU _______________________________
Dimensions of DPU _______________________________
Weight _______________________________
Approval _______________________________
STD/Fire/10
e) Mimic Board and Decoder
Decoder Unit
Make ______________________________
Country of Origin ______________________________
Local Agent ______________________________
Type ______________________________
Model ______________________________
Nos. of Programmable Output ______________________________
Nos. of Spare Output Provided ______________________________
Capacity of Battery ______________________________
Total Quiescent Current ______________________________
Operation Depending on
Main DPU (Yes/No) ______________________________
Dimensions ______________________________
Weight ______________________________
Permissible Ambient Temperature ____________________________
Permissible Relative Humidity ______________________________
Approval ______________________________
Floor Mimic Board
Type _______________________________
Type of Indications _______________________________
Lamp Test Function _______________________________
Acknowledge and Reset Function _____________________________
Dimensions _______________________________
Weight _______________________________
STD/Fire/11
f) Coding and Decoding Unit
Make ______________________________
Country of Origin ______________________________
Local Agent ______________________________
Type ______________________________
Model ______________________________
Nos. of Programmable output ______________________________
Nos. of Input ______________________________
Nos. of Spare Output Provided ______________________________
Nos. of Spare Input Provided ______________________________
Capacity of Battery ______________________________
Total Quiescent Current ______________________________
Operation Depending on Main DPU Yes / No
Nos. of Push Button Provided ______________________________
Type/Size of Push Button ______________________________
Dimensions ______________________________
Weight ______________________________
Permissible Ambient Temperature ___________________________
Permissible Relative Humidity ______________________________
Approval: ______________________________
g) Heat Detector
Normal High
Temperature Temperature
Make ____________ _____________
Country of Manufacture ____________ _____________
Local Agent ____________ _____________
Type Model No. ____________ _____________
Operating Voltage ____________ _____________
Quiescent Current ____________ _____________
Alarm Current ____________ _____________
Permissible Operating
Temperature _____________
_____________
STD/Fire/12
Permissible Relative
Humidity _____________
_____________
Nominal Response Fixed

Temperature _____________
_____________
Rate-of-Rise Temperature _____________

_____________
Protection Category _____________

_____________
Approval _____________
_____________
h) Smoke Detector
Photo Electric Type Ionization Type
Make ______________ _____________
Country of Manufacture ______________ _____________
Local Agent ______________ _____________
Type Model No. ______________ _____________
Operating Voltage ______________ _____________
Quiescent Current ______________ _____________
Alarm Current ______________ _____________
Temperature ______________ _____________
Humidity ______________ _____________
Stages of Adjustable
Sensitivity _______________ _____________
Signal Integration Period _______________ _____________
Protection Category _______________ _____________
Approval _______________ _____________
STD/Fire/13
i) Detector Base
Make ______________________________
Country of Manufacture ______________________________
Local Agent ______________________________
Type/Model No. ______________________________
Response Indicator Built-in ___________Yes/No_____________
Mechanical Locking Device ___________Yes/No_____________
Usual Interference Protection ___________Yes/No______________
Approval _______________________________
STD/Fire/14
j) Manual Call Point

Indoor Type Outdoor Type
Make ______________ _____________
Country of Manufacture ______________ _____________
Local Agent ______________ _____________
Model No. ______________ _____________
Operating Voltage ______________ _____________
Operating Current ______________ _____________
Response Indicator
Built-in ______________ _____________
Temperature ______________ _____________
Humidity ______________ _____________
Colour ______________ _____________
Protection Category ______________ _____________
Approval ______________ ____________
k) Interfacing Unit
Make ______________________________
Local Agent _______________________________
Model No. _______________________________
Operating Current _______________________________
Response Indicator Built-in ___________ Yes/No______________
Permissible Operating Temperature _________________________
Permissible Relative Humidity _________________________
Approval _______________________________
STD/Fire/15
l) Alarm Bell
Indoor Type Outdoor Type
Make _____________
_____________
Country of Manufacture _____________

_____________
Local Agent _____________

_____________
Type/Model No. _____________

_____________
Rating at max. volume(Amp./V) _____________

____________
Material of Gong _____________

_____________
Colour ______________ _____________
Protection Category ______________ _____________
m) Signal Line
Make _______________________________
Local Agent _______________________________
Voltage Grade _______________________________
Test Certificate _______________________________
Testing Authority _______________________________
n) Addressable Control Module
Make _______________________________
Local Agent _______________________________
Model No _______________________________
Contact Rating _______________________________
Selectable for N/O or N/C ____________Yes/No_____________
Confirmation Signal Provided ____________Yes/No_____________
Response Indicator Built-in _______________________________
Quiescent Current _______________________________

STD/Fire/16
Addressable Control Module (cond’t)
Alarm Current _______________________________
Permissible Operating Temperature ________________________
Permissible Relative Temperature _________________________

Approval _______________________________
5. Emergency Voice Intercommunication System
a) Vestibule Equipment
Make _______________________________
Model _______________________________
Dimensions _______________________________
Total Weight _______________________________
b) Remote Firemen Handset
Make _______________________________
Model _______________________________
Housing Dimensions _______________________________
Approval _______________________________
c) Main Control Console
Make _______________________________
Local Agent _______________________________
Type _______________________________
Model _______________________________
Nos. of Zones _______________________________
Max. Expandable Capacity _______________________________
STD/Fire/17
Main Control Console (cond’t)
Dimensions _______________________________
Approval _______________________________
6. Electrical
a) Fire Rated Cable
Manufacturer ______________________________
Local Agent ______________________________
Voltage Grade ______________________________
Standard/Class ______________________________
Test Certificate ______________________________
Testing Authority ______________________________
b) PVC/SWA/PVC Cable
Manufacturer ______________________________
Local Agent ______________________________
Voltage Grade ______________________________
Standard/Class ______________________________
STD/Fire/18
c) PVC Cable
Manufacturer ______________________________
Local Agent ______________________________
Voltage Grade ______________________________
Standard/Class ______________________________
d) PVC/PVC Cable
Manufacturer ______________________________
Local Agent ______________________________
Voltage Grade ______________________________
Standard/Class ______________________________
e) Screened Cable
Manufacturer ______________________________
Local Agent ______________________________
Voltage Grade ______________________________
Standard/Class ______________________________
f) Cable Markers
Manufacturer ______________________________
Local Agent ______________________________
STD/Fire/19
g) Cable Tray
Manufacturer ________________________________
Country of Manufacture ________________________________
Local Agent ________________________________
h) Trunking
Manufacturer ________________________________
Local Agent ________________________________
i) Conduit
Manufacturer ________________________________
Local Agent ________________________________
j) Flexible Conduit
Manufacturer ________________________________
Local Agent ________________________________
k) Cable Ladder
Manufacturer ________________________________
Local Agent ________________________________
STD/Fire/20
MECHANICAL WORKS
SECTION 1 - GENERAL
1. Scope of Works
1.1 The works to be performed under this Contract consists of design,

supply, delivery, installation, painting, testing, commissioning and
twelve (12) months free Maintenance and Warranty of the installation
comprising of the following systems and equipment which are further
described in other sections of this Particular Specification:-
a) Fire Protection Systems (BCA L4)
1.2 The respective services shall be carried out by the respective

contractors with minimum five (5) years experience in the trade and
1.3 The Contractor shall get the manpower, equipments, material etc. to
ensure that the works are completed as scheduled. The Contractor shall
note that any shutdown to the existing services (ie water supply, air-
conditioning system, etc) can only be carried out after office hours and
over the weekends subjected to the S.O. approval. All costs to meet the
schedule shall be included in the tender price.
Works may be carried out after normal working hours holidays,
weekends etc. The Contractor must obtain written permission from the
S.O. prior to carrying out of the abovementioned works. All costs
incurred in respect of any of the above shall deem be included in order
to facilitate the completion of the works.
2.1 With full sun load and maximum shade temperature of 33.8oC DB
0.25 m/s.
TS/Fire/S1/1
MECHANICAL WORKS

Regulations.
d) The Ministry of Manpower, ie., The Workplace Safety &

Health Act
f) The installation shall comply to the following code of practice:
i) SS 638 : code of practice for electrical installations

iii) SS 553 : Code of practice for air-conditioning and

iv) SS 530 : Code of practice for energy efficiency standard

v) SS 575 : Code of practice for fire hydrant, rising mains

vi) SS 636: Code of practice for water services
vii) SS 608 : Code of practice for manufactured gas pipe

installation
viii) SS CP 52 : Code of Practice for Automatic Fire

Sprinkler System
ix) SS 546 : Code of practice for emergency voice

communication systems in buildings
x) SS 551: Code of practice for earthing
TS/Fire/S1/2
MECHANICAL WORKS

using chemicals

above Authorities as necessary and shall obtain all consents necessary
for the various works to be executed and shall pay all fees in
connection therewith.
materials supplied shall comply with Singapore Standard SS 638, Code
of Practice for Wiring of Electrical Equipment of Building and to be
approved by the PUB.
3.4 All Codes, Acts, Standards and regulations shall be the latest published
edition.

4.1 All installed plant are to be reasonably quiet in operation. Preference

4.2 Vibration isolators shall be installed where necessary so as to eliminate

the transmission of vibration.



practical minimum.
5. Permits and Fees
TS/Fire/S1/3
MECHANICAL WORKS
6.1 This Specification is intended to set out in general outline the

made in the successful Tender which are in excess of, or improved
upon the basic requirements of the Specification shall unless otherwise
determined by the S.O. become part of the requirements of the
Specification whether or not they are subsequently incorporated in
addenda to the Specification.

Standards (S.S.) or British Standards (B.S.) Specifications approved by
the S.O..


TS/Fire/S1/4
MECHANICAL WORKS



corrosion and erosion shall not be greater than with similar plant of
first class design and workmanship operating under similar conditions.
practice by experience tradesmen of appropriate grades to the approval
of the S.O..
7.11 Where disagreement occur between the Drawings and the Specification
or within either document itself, the item or arrangement of better
quality, greater quantities, or higher cost shall be deemed to be
included in this Contract.
All equipment and works installed shall be capable of operating effectively

and efficiently under the following site conditions:

28oC wet bulb

26.5oC wet bulb
9. Shop Drawings
TS/Fire/S1/5
MECHANICAL WORKS
limited to:

accessories.


and servicing.

g) Foundations
h) Chases, drains, openings in walls, floors, roof slabs and beams.
9.3 These layout drawings shall be based generally on the S.O.'s drawings,
modified only as required to suit the specified materials and equipment
to be provided, to fit in with the latest available information on
building construction details and the requirements of other services and
equipment and also to incorporate any improvements proposed by the
Contractor.

TS/Fire/S1/6
MECHANICAL WORKS
9.7 Three (3) copies of each drawing shall be submitted for approval not
later than four weeks after award of the Contract. Drawings with
inadequate details and not conforming to the requirements as stated
above will not be considered.
the requirements of the Specification and that they are approved by the
S.O. early.


10. Programme
approval by the S.O.. The Contractor shall allow a period of not less
TS/Fire/S1/7
MECHANICAL WORKS
11.1 Prior to the completion of the works, and not later than the date of
Substantial Completion, the Contractor shall submit to the satisfaction
of the S.O. five (5) hard cover bound sets of Comprehensive Operation
and Maintenance Manuals and Data Sheets published by the equipment
manufacturers, five (5) hard cover bound sets of "As-Installed"
drawings and five (5) set of "As-Installed" drawings softcopy AutoCad
(latest release), Building information modeling, Potable Document
Format USB Flash Drive or DVD/CD-R disks subject to S.O.'s
approval.
covers.
shall be endorsed and signed by the Contractor's Professional Engineer.


makes, models, serial number with technical catalogues (at least
one set to be original and others in legible print).

used.

shooting.
TS/Fire/S1/8
MECHANICAL WORKS

related materials

maintenance.



information:
TS/Fire/S1/9
MECHANICAL WORKS




required operating and maintenance manuals by other means and shall
deduct all cost incurred thereof from monies due to the Contractor. In
addition the S.O. shall forfeit the rights of the Contractor in relation to
further payment and the issue of the Certificate of Substantial
Completion will also be withheld until he has so complied accordingly.
S.O..
13. Metrification
14. Tropicalised
TS/Fire/S1/10
MECHANICAL WORKS
15. Samples

but not limited to:
Ductwork
Duct Insulation
Diffusers and Grilles
Pipe/Flange Joints
Hangers
Adhesive/Sealant
Pipe Insulation

approved make.

especially in plant rooms, service ducts and adjacent to fixtures so as to
facilitate removal of the pipe and equipment for inspection or repair.
TS/Fire/S1/11
MECHANICAL WORKS
17. Fixing of Pipes
17.2 In general, hangers shall be of individual type with provision for

vertical adjustment.

secured to the structure by means of anchor bolts or power driven bolts
at locations where the prestressed tensions are not affected.

approval.


the S.O..
TS/Fire/S1/12
MECHANICAL WORKS
18. Mock-Ups

these mock-ups.

modify such mock-up and sample at his own cost, if deemed necessary
by the S.O. whose decision shall be final and conclusive. The
approved mock-up and sample shall be used as the basis of
18.6 The Contractors shall remove at his own cost all mock-up and samples
when no longer required as directed by the S.O..

thick.
TS/Fire/S1/13
MECHANICAL WORKS
20.2 The Contractor shall be responsible for the proper and accurate setting
out of his work. He shall furnish all necessary information on the
installation to the S.O. for work co-ordination purposes.

Contractor shall bear the full cost of rectification if the failure to
comply with the above clause leads to a malfunction of the system.

exact position of ceiling suspended equipment has to be verified on site
and adjusted, if necessary, without additional cost to the Contract.

terminated and to be incorporated in the shop drawings. The Contractor
is particularly requested to ensure that there is no damages to existing
and other services as any damages shall be rectified immediately within
the same day by the Contractor at their own cost.

TS/Fire/S1/14
MECHANICAL WORKS
22. Testing
acceptance tests required as hereinafter specified or as required by the
authorities having jurisdiction over the installation.
readiness to carry out acceptance test and shall submit for his approval
a complete and detailed schedule of his tests to be carried out.


TS/Fire/S1/15
MECHANICAL WORKS

extension of the time will be granted by reasons of any extension of the
testing period to permit rectification, modification, adjustment or
retesting has been necessitated by circumstances beyond the control of
the Contractor.
Authorities, in addition to all those tests as specifically called for in
this Specification.
Period.

Contractor shall also be required to certify in writing to the S.O. that
the installation is in full compliance with the requirements of the
23.2 The Contractor shall engage his own Professional Engineer to endorse
and submit four (4) sets of the original `Certificate of Supervision' and
drawings for the respective installation works one month before system
handing over date. All tests and inspections required by the relevant
authorities for his installation works for obtaining of TFP/TOP/CSC of
the building shall be carried out by the Contractor. The Contractor's
PE/LEW shall be present during the TFP/TOP/CSC inspection.

S.O..
TS/Fire/S1/16
MECHANICAL WORKS

from workmanship or materials and fully maintain the whole
installation for a period of twelve (12) months after the commencement
of the Defects Liability Period.
the Contractor.
26. Star Rates
or executed under similar conditions as priced in the Schedule of Rates
he shall give to the S.O. a written notice within seven days from the
time of receipt of the instruction from the S.O. with regard to such
S.O..
TS/Fire/S1/17
MECHANICAL WORKS
variation.
26.3 The S.O. may request for documentary evidence of the amount paid by
the Contractor to his suppliers and/or Contractors.
27.1 The Contractor shall establish, document and maintain a quality system
to demonstrate his commitment to quality in construction. As far as
possible, the quality system shall be formulated in accordance with the
requirements of SS 308 : Part 2 : 1988 - Specification for Quality
Assurance in Production and Installation.

maintain a project quality plan setting out, as a minimum, the
following :




TS/Fire/S1/18
MECHANICAL WORKS
S.O. shall not, in any way, alter or diminish the Contractor's
obligations under the Contract for the quality of the Work.
Preliminaries.

essential provision


emergency


TS/Fire/S1/19
MECHANICAL WORKS

on evacuation






evacuation




evacuation

TS/Fire/S1/20
MECHANICAL WORKS
the training.
TS/Fire/S1/21
MECHANICAL WORKS
SECTION 2 - AUTOMATIC FIRE ALARM SYSTEM
1. GENERAL

of the complete Automatic Analogue Addressable Based Fire Alarm
System.
1.2 The fire alarm system shall be designed and installed in accordance
with the latest edition of Singapore Standard SS 645 and in full
compliances with the rules and regulation of the Building and
Construction Authority, Fire Safety and Shelter Department and other
relevant authorities. It shall be type tested by a recognised testing
laboratory to meet BS 5839 Part 4 and SS 645 and shall be inspected
under recognized third party accredited laboratory in Singapore Batch
Inspection Scheme.
1.3 All equipment proposed to be used for this system shall have obtained
approval from the international recognised testing laboratories such as
UL, FM or LPC, i.e. equipment shall be listed. Two copies of the
relevant approval certificates shall be submitted with the Tender.
1.4 All main equipment and devices shall be produced by the same
manufacturer. This applies also to the detectors, control units and peer
to peer network equipment. System formed by equipment from
different manufacturers will not be accepted.
1.5 The S.O. shall be entitled when required to conduct quality audit of the
Contractor and/or Manufacturer's premises to assess the quality
standard. Where manufacturers quality assurance/quality control
procedures are in accordance with the ISO 9000 series, this shall be
clearly stated as preference will be given to equipment supplied by
such manufacturers.
1.6 The installation shall include all necessary hardware and software for a
complete operable system in accordance with the requirements of this
specification.
1.7 Tenderers shall note that the Tender submitted must be based on the
requirements of the Tender Drawings and Specification. Alternative
offer will only be considered provided that the basic tender offer is in
full compliance with the requirements of the tender drawings and
specification. Any alternative offer submitted must be supported by
detailed description with clause to clause comparison on
compliance/non-compliance with the requirements of the Tender
Specification and the cost implication for each deviated item. Any
non-compliance to the requirements of this clause may result in
disqualifying of the tender submitted.
TS/Fire/S2/1
MECHANICAL WORKS
1.8 The entire system shall be microprocessor based for complete

individual addressing with peer to peer network capabilities. System
applying any form of master and slave central processing arrangement
and not capable to provide address to every point will not be accepted.
1.9 The entire fire alarm and detection system shall be designed as a peer
to peer network communication and processing system which allows
the monitoring and controlling of the entire network at the Fire
Command Centre.
1.10 The system shall provide a peer-to-peer Backbone Communication

Network of distributed intelligence that all devices such as Main Fire
Alarm Panel (MAP), Sub Fire Alarm Panel (SAP), etc., which are
connected on the network must be able to operate autonomously (stand
alone) and failure of any one of the device shall not affect the proper
operation of the others.
1.11 The SAP and MAP shall have BacNet communication for the IBMS
and NUS virtual machine at cloud interfacing
1.12 The system software shall also install at NUS virtual machine at cloud
for the system monitoring at the existing Fire Monitoring System, The
Sub-contractor shall include the necessary programming, accessories
and software for the Fire Monitoring System to install at the NUS
virtual machines at cloud. No hyperlink to another virtual system/
system is allowed.
1.13 The Main Alarm Panel shall be able to receive signal contact and video
image from the video image fire detection system camera.
1.14 The Contractor shall engage a fire contractor registered with BCA
under the ME06 Category.
1.15 Scope of Works
The works involved are defined in this Specification and indicated on

the accompanying tender drawing. It shall include but not limited to the
following :
a) Supply, install and relocate one lot of new and existing

manual call points, bells, visual alarm, detectors, etc
complete with new wiring, conduits, etc.
b) To link item (a) to the SAPs/MAP as shown in the tender

drawings
c) Supply and install new colour silk-screen mimic boards and

replace the affected existing mimic boards (i.e. mimic boards
at Sub-Alarm Panel in the main FCCs at Block E3A-01,
Block E5, Block Com2 or Block S16 as indicated in drawing
TS/Fire/S2/2
MECHANICAL WORKS
d) Supply and install one lot of new manual call points, bells,
visual alarm, detectors, etc complete with new wiring,
conduits, etc as shown in the tender drawings.
e) Supply and install one lot of SAPs/MAP as shown in the

tender drawings. SAPs/MAP shall be of BacNet to web
based communication for remotely interfacing to fire alarm
server PC and building automation. The contractor shall
provide server PC with software, licensing and programming
graphic at Campus Asset Management for remotely
communicate to the installed MAP of the building
f) Supply and install 1 lot of new PC server systems and colour

silk-screen mimic boards.
g) Interfacing of new Fire Alarm System to Existing Fire Alarm

System through TCP/IP open protocol.
h) Interfacing of new Fire Alarm System to Building

Management System
2. Heat Detector
2.1 Heat detectors shall be listed and of electronic type for combined
rate-of-rise and fixed temperature response. It shall consist of two
independent thermistors, designed to automatically compensate
changes in ambient condition.
2.2 All electronic circuits must be solid state and hermetically sealed to
prevent the operation being impaired by dirt, dust or humidity.
2.3 The detector shall be protected against damage by reverse of polarity or

faulty wirings.
2.4 The response sensitivity of the heat detector shall be with response
temperature at 58 degree C or 10 degree C per minute rise for normal
application and 82 degree C or 10 degree C per minute rise for high
temperature application.
2.5 All heat detectors shall be suitable for direct connecting to the class A
four wires individual addressable loop.
2.6 All heat detectors shall be common and interchangeable to a common

type of base. Heat detector address setting shall be by decimal
address setting or software setting. Any use of dip switch or bar
coding will not be accepted.
TS/Fire/S2/3
MECHANICAL WORKS
2.7 The installation of heat detectors shall include all necessary conduit,
wirings, detector with individual addressable electronic module. All
detectors shall be mounted such that the sensing element is not less
than 25 mm and not more than 600 mm below the ceiling or floor slab.
2.8 The software shall be able to generate supervisory trouble condition at

any temperature value.
2.9 The detector shall operate reliably within the following specification:
Operating temperature range: 0 to +38o C
Relative humidity: Above 90%
Operating voltage: 24 V DC nominal
Approval: UL/FM/LPC
2.10 For detectors concealed within the false ceiling space, each detector
shall be provided with an auxiliary response (activation) indication
light (LED) mounted in a location where it is clearly visible.
3. Heat Detectors In Cold Room
3.1 Addressable heat Detectors for cold rooms shall be of high

performance rate-of-rise with combined fixed temperature type.
Detectors in cold rooms shall be capable of operation at –40°C to
+40°C and at 100% RH.
3.2 A standard detector heating unit shall be install at each detector base to
prevent icing and condensation on the detector. The detector heating
unit shall be from the same manufacturer of the detector. Operating
temperature of the detector heating unit shall be between –30 to +40
deg. C.
3.3 It shall be part of the manufacturer’s standard product range.

Modification of heating unit to suit the detector or custom make
devices are not acceptable. Battery capacity of the fire alarm system
shall take into consideration the power requirements of the heating
unit.
3.4 Detectors shall be protected against ingress of water from the ceiling
when cold room is shut down during maintenance. it shall be protected
to IP44.
TS/Fire/S2/4
MECHANICAL WORKS
4. Smoke Detectors
4.1 All smoke detectors shall be of photo-electric type as indicated in the

Drawings. All smoke detectors shall be listed.
4.2 All smoke detectors shall have the intelligence to process the analog
signal in the detector itself for automatic compensation of signal
deviation caused by contamination and aging means that the detector
shall maintain its response behaviour over a long period of time.
4.3 Any detector reaching the `DRIFT' threshold shall automatically

transmit a signal to the control unit where the corresponding data is
stored. Detector in drift condition shall function normally and
identifiable from the control unit upon request.
4.4 A fault signal shall only be automatically indicated at the control unit
when the upper drift limit is reached at the detector.
4.5 The installation of smoke detectors shall include all necessary conduit,
wiring, detector with individual addressable module.
4.6 All detectors shall be mounted such that the sensing element is not less
than 25 mm and not more than 600 mm below ceiling or floor slab.
4.7 Specially designed probe unit provided by others used for monitoring
of air conditioning and ventilation return ductwork in the AHU room,
shall be connected to the fire alarm system for monitoring. Addressable
Zone Modules shall be used to provide an address to the probe unit.
4.8 For detectors concealed within the false ceiling space, each detector
shall be provided with an auxiliary response (activation) indication
light (LED) mounted in a location where it is clearly visible.
4.9 Each smoke detector may be independently selected and be able to be

alarm verified. The alarm verification shall be programmable from 5
to 60 seconds and the numbers of times that each detector has entered
the verification cycle can be made available.
4.10 Smoke detector sensitivity adjustment shall be provided in the system

from the keyboard of the terminal or system keyboard. The range shall
be within the allowed UL window.
4.11 A maintenance alert verification procedure shall be provided to analyse

detector responses over a period of time. Any smoke detector in the
system responses with a reading that is below or above normal limits,
then the system will enter the Trouble Mode and the particular detector
will be annunciated on the system display with the following message
"Maintenance Required".
4.12 Smoke detector shall not cause nuisance triggering due to dust.
TS/Fire/S2/5
MECHANICAL WORKS
5. Photoelectric Smoke Detector
5.1 The photoelectric smoke detector must exhibit uniform response

behavior in course of time. The light source intensity shall
automatically adjust to compensate for possible effects of dirt and dust
accumulation.
5.2 All electronic components shall be of Surface Mounted Device

Technology (SMD) and the entire circuitry must be hermetically sealed
to prevent the operation being impaired by dirt, dust or humidity.
5.3 The detector shall be protected against damage by reverse of polarity or

faulty wirings.
5.4 The detector shall consist of a built-in barrier to prevent access of

insects into the sensor.
5.5 The activation of a detector shall be indicated by a flashing LED at the

detector base with sufficient brightness.
5.6 The detector shall consist of built-in protection against usual electrical
transients and electromagnetic interference.
5.7 The detectors shall be suitable for direct connecting to the class A four
wires individual addressable loop.
5.8 All detectors shall be common and interchangeable to a common type

of base. Smoke detector address setting shall be by decimal address
setting or software setting. Any use of dip switch or bar coding will
not be accepted.
5.9 The detector shall operate reliably within the following specification:
Operating temperature range: -25 to +75o C
Relative humidity: Up to 95%
Operating voltage: 24 V DC nominal(16 to 26)
Operating current: 130 uA
Alarm current: 100 mA
Protection category IEC: IP-43
TS/Fire/S2/6
MECHANICAL WORKS
6. Detector Base
6.1 All detectors shall fit into a common standard type base. Every base
shall have a built-in option allowing mechanical locking of the detector
head to prevent unauthorised removal or tampering. The detector base
shall be of IP 44 construction and shall not cause condensation.
6.2 Detector insertion and removal shall be by simple push-twist

movement through the use of an extended tool by one person at the
floor level with the detector mounting height up to 7 metre even with
the mechanical locking device activated.
6.3 The base shall be equipped with screwless terminals capable of

securely retaining wires up to 1.5 sq.mm. The base shall be suitable for
use in both Class A and Class B wiring.
6.4 The base shall consist of an electronic module suitable for individual
addressable operation.
6.5 The electronic module shall be solid state and hermetically

encapsulated to protect it against exposure to dust, dirt, humidity, etc.
6.6 The electronic module shall have a built-in red LED which shall
activate when the detector is activated (Alarm). It shall allow
connection of one additional remote LED to indicate the activation of
the detector installed in concealed space or normally locked room at
the remote easily accessible area.
6.7 The standard base shall consist of a sealing plate serve to prevent dirt,
dust, condensation or water from the conduit reaching the terminals or
detector contact points.
6.8 The standard base shall be supplied with a removable base cover to
protect the contact area during installation stage and to allow checking
and commissioning of the individual addressable loops before insertion
of the detectors. The dust cover shall be removable by the extended
tool up to 7 metres from the floor level.
6.9 Special base assemblies from the same manufacturer shall be available
for special area or applications.
6.10 All individual addressable electronic modules shall be identical which

allows interchange between bases. System which requires setting of
the detector address using dip switch or bar coding will not be
accepted.
6.11 All electronic circuitry contain in the base must be protected against
usual electrical transients and electromagnetic interference. Reverse in
polarity or faulty wiring shall not cause damage to the base electronic
or the detector.
TS/Fire/S2/7
MECHANICAL WORKS
6.12 All detector's base mounted on false ceiling shall be provided with a
hot dipped galvanised iron 'knock-out' metal box complete with copper
coupling and bush for proper securing of flexible conduit.
6.13 The base could be of a electronic module but must be interchangeable

with all type of detectors.
7. Addressable Control Module
7.1 Addressable Control Module shall be used for AHU shut-down, Fan
control and lift homing functions.
7.2 It shall be able to connect directly along the Class "A" individual
addressable loop without separate power line and the activation of
the unit shall be programmable from the System Terminals or SAP.
7.3 The output contact of the addressable control module shall be

selectable for normally open or normally close and rated at least 0.5 A
and 230 V AC.
7.4 It shall have an input for connection of an external contact to provide

confirmation signal to confirm the intended control function is carried
out. The output and input cabling shall be installed on conduits and
shall be provided in this contract.
8. Manual Call Points
8.1 Manual call point shall be provided at the positions as indicated in the
Drawings. All call point boxes shall be of conceal type with affecting
the test key operation.
8.2 All manual call points shall be of individual addressable type suitable
for direct connection to the Class "A" individual addressable loop.
8.3 The manual call point shall be red in color and consists of a built-in
red LED which flashes in case of activation.
8.4 It shall be able to test for alarm at the manual call point without
opening the call point cover or breaking the glass.
8.5 The alarm shall be activated by breaking the glass without the need of
an additional instrument (e.g. hammer). The glass plate shall be
designed in a way to prevent injuries when struck by the user.
8.6 Manual call points to be installed at positions which are exposed to

outdoor climate shall be of weatherproof type and comply with the
requirements of IP 66.
TS/Fire/S2/8
MECHANICAL WORKS
8.7 All manual call points shall have a protective flipper cover to prevent
false breaking of the break glass. Signage shall be affixed with a
operating instruction “ In Case of Fire, Lift to Break Glass”
8.8 All manual call points shall be affixed with a operating

instructions/diagrams and notices on perspex material. The notice
shall be "IN CASE OF FIRE, CALL 995".
9. Alarm Bells and Visual Alarms
9.1 All alarm bells shall be completed with visual alarms of strobe/beacon
light below of the bell cover. The visual shall be of wall mounted and
circular ceiling mounted type. Mounting type shall be approved by S.O.
and Engineer.
9.2 Colour of bells and visual alarms shall be in red, white or other
approved colour by authority and engineer,
9.3 Alarm bells shall be suitable for 24 V DC operation with steel gong of
minimum 150 mm dia. The operating part of the bell shall be covered
by aluminium die cast housing.
9.4 All bell and visual alarm circuits shall be monitored for open and short
circuit fault.
9.5 Independent alarm bell circuit and visual alarm circuit shall be
provided for each floor. The same alarm bell circuit shall not be used
for connecting alarm bells on the other floor.
9.6 The sounding of bell and activation of visual alarm shall be on general
alarm basis. However, provision shall be included for selective
automatic bell sounding and activation of visual alarm organisation.
(ie. Sounding of bells and activation of visual alarm at the affected
floor, two floors above and one floor below) In addition, manual push
button shall be provided for each bell circuit at the Fire Command
Centre for manual activation of bells and activation of visual alarm.
The silence of bell sounder shall remain the flashing of the visual
alarm.
9.7 The bell shall be capable of giving a minimum sound level of 90 dBA
within the range of 1 m continuously.
9.8 The visual alarms strobe/beacon light shall be attached with fire alarm
bell and mounted directly above it.
TS/Fire/S2/9
MECHANICAL WORKS
9.9 The visual alarms strobe/beacon light shall be of a high intensity

flashing strobe light with flash rate of 30 to 130 flashes per minute.
The lens cover of the light shall be red, amber or clear in cover. The
strobe/beacon light face cover shall bear the label of "FIRE" in white
lettering. The strobe/beacon light shall be suitable for operation on 24
volts DC. The power supply to the strobe/beacon light loop shall be
individual and separated from the bell loop.
9.10 Visual alarms Strobe/beacon light shall install at all toilets, Handicap
toilets, Pantry, car park, lift lobbies, offices, laboratory and other area
that specified in SCDF fire code. Location of the strobe/beacon light
will subject to SO/Engineer approval.
10. Line Isolators
Line isolators shall be provided along the detection loop line. Isolator shall be
provided between every zone and manual call point. Line isolators shall also
be provided for every five (5) devices within a particular zone. A single
open or short circuit loop cable fault shall not prevent the loss of more than
five (5) devices on the loop. System that do not have line isolators shall not be
accepted.
11. Alarm Signalling and Interlocking Control
11.1 Lifts Homing
The Contractor shall supply and install alarm signalling lines to the
various Lift Motor Rooms for emergency 'homing' of lifts in the event
of fire alarm as indicated in the tender drawings.
The signal lines shall be independent for each Lift Motor Room and
shall not be loop from one to the other.
The signal provided shall be generally in normally closed 'voltage

free' contact which shall be opened in case of alarm.
Each control circuit shall have the ability for manual isolation from the
Main Fire Alarm Panel (MAP) during system maintenance and testing.
Such isolation status of the control function shall be indicated by the
system LCD Terminal at FCC.
The Contractor shall liaise with the lift contractor for exact
requirements in order to fulfill this function. Where specified in the
tender drawing and there is a requirement to interface with the existing
lifts. The Contractor shall liaise with the existing lift maintenance
company for exact requirements in order to fulfill this function.
TS/Fire/S2/10
MECHANICAL WORKS
The Contractor shall provide all necessary conduits, trunkings and

wirings connecting from the MAP to the respective Lift Motor Rooms
and shall terminate the signal line adjacent to the Lift Control
Board in an approved type terminal box for final connection. The
Contractor shall engaged competent lift Contractor to perform all these
necessary connection.
11.2 Air-conditioning Equipment
All duct smoke detectors (i.e. probe units) shall be provided for
monitoring of the return air ducts as indicated in the drawings. In the
event of alarm from the probe unit, the related air conditioning
equipment (AHU) shall `shut down' automatically.
The Contractor shall provide a 24V D.C. relay in the AHU starter
Panel. This relay is to transmit signal via the 2 core fire resistant cable
to the Addressable Control Module. The installation and modification
work involved in the mounting of this relay in the AHU starter panel is
to be cost in the Tender Price.
The control function shall be performed via the Addressable Control

Module which connected along the individual addressable loop. The
addressable control module shall be mounted adjacent to the AHU
control board.
The Contractor shall also provide a feedback confirmation signal the

intended control function to be carried out and this signal shall be
provided at the System Terminal and BAS located in the FCC room in
plain text. The text shall describe type, designation and location of the
AHU.
The 'shut down' functions of the air conditioning equipment shall be

independent unless otherwise shown in the drawings or as directed by
the S.O.
The Contractor shall engage a competent A/C & M/V Contractor to

identify all requirements of the type of signals and perform all these
necessary connection to fulfill this function.
TS/Fire/S2/11
MECHANICAL WORKS
11.3 Interfacing with Smoke-Stop Lobby Fans, Staircase pressurization fan

and Smoke Free lobby Fans
In the event of alarm activation from the related area as indicated in the
Drawings, the corresponding fans shall be activated automatically.
The control function shall be performed via the related SAP. Isolation
buttons shall be provided at the SAPs, FCC and BAS Room for
isolation of the control function in case of system testing and
maintenance.
A positive confirmation signal to confirm the intended control function

is carried out shall be provided at the System LCD Terminal located in
FCC in plain text. The text shall describe type, designation and
location of the Fan.
The control function for each fan shall be independent unless otherwise
shown in the Drawings.

11.4 Interfacing with Jockey Pumps, Wet Riser Pumps, Sprinkler Pumps,
Fire Hosereel Pumps and Water Tanks
The fire alarm system shall monitor the status of each fire hosereel
pumps and hosereel storage tanks. The status to be monitored as
specified hereunder shall be indicated at the System LCD Terminal in
FCC room in text/graphic form. In addition, LED indications shall also
be provided at the Master Mimic Board at Block S16.
Status monitoring of each fire pump shall include :
- Mains Power Supply failure

- Pump Running/Stop
- Pump Tripped
The following status shall be monitored for each fire hosereel storage
tank:
- Water Tank High Level

- Water Tank Low Level
TS/Fire/S2/12
MECHANICAL WORKS
11.5 Interfacing with Fire shutter, Smoke Doors, Fire Doors and Automatic
Doors
The Fire Alaram System shall constantly supply 24 V DC power to

each Magnetic Door Holder which is provided by others. In case of
alarm activation, the 24 V DC supply shall cut-off to release the seing
doors to its close position. A local manual door release switch will be
provided by others for manual closing of the door.
The Auto Door control shall be achieved by independent supervised

circuit to each auto door. In case of alarm activation, a 24 V DC signal
shall be sent to the auto door control panel for either opening or closing
of the auto door as necessary.
All doors (such as the automatic doors, doors with magnetic catch
links, automatic doors with magnetic catch links and electric release
doors) as shown in the Drawings shall require 24 V DC power fire
alarm signal to operate the them. All final connection of wiring.
11.6 Interfacing with Smart Card Access Doors
All doors (i.e. the smart card access doors) as shown in the drawings
shall require 24 V DC power fire alarm signal to operate them. The
signal wiring shall be run in conduits separate from the electrical fire
alarm system and terminating with sufficient length of wiring at the
Card Access Reader Controller or interfacing module. All final
connection of wiring and all interfacing etc., shall be done by the
Contractor and to be priced in the Schedule of Rate.
Provision shall be included for selective activation at the affected

floor/s or block.
The Contractor shall engage competent Smart Card Access specialists

to carry out the part of work.
11.7 Interfacing with Gas Detection System
The Fire Alarm System shall interface with the Gas Detection Panels as
shown in the Drawings for emergency shut-off of the gas supply line.
The Fire Alarm System shall provide supervised signal circuits to each
Gas Detection Panel. In case of fire alarm activation from the related
zone(s), the signal shall be sent to the Gas Detection Panel
automatically for closing of the solenoid valve to shut off the gas
supply.
TS/Fire/S2/13
MECHANICAL WORKS
In addition to the above-mentioned, the Contractor is to assign a zone

to each gas detection panel. This gas detection panel shall be shown on
the SAP mimic board by means of a yellow LED. In the event of a gas
leakage, a signal shall be sent to the FCC as well as the Campus Asset
Management. This signal shall not trigger an alarm. It is to inform the
users of the location of the gas leakage. The Contractor is to price in all
necessary relays, equipment, wirings, etc required for this portion of
works in the Tender Price.
The Contractor shall engage competent Gas Detection System

Contractor to perform the interfacing between the 2 systems.
12. Central Fire Alarm Data Processing System
12.1 General
The entire fire alarm system shall be able to be monitored and

controlled from the Fire Command Centre (FCC), at Block E3A-01,
Faculty of Engineering and Block S16, Faculty of Science. This shall
be achieved by the computer based centralized data communication
and processing system which communicate with the System Terminals
and all MAP/SAPs via the serial data communication network.
The overall system architecture shall be based on the principle of

distributed processing that each SAP shall remain autonomous
(independent) in evaluation, annunciation and control in case of the
communication is interrupted between the MAP/SAPs and the central
data processing equipment.
All messages received by the central data processing unit from

individual SAP shall be automatically processed and presented to the
operator with adequate information in non-coded text or graphic form
which prevents misinterpretation of messages and false manipulation
of commands.
The system hardware and software shall be of modular design and shall
consists of standard hardware and software only to ensure long terms
system support and availability of system spares.
The central data processing equipment shall consists of reliable

hardware and software specially designed for use in Life Safety
System. System using normal commercial personal computer (PC) will
not be accepted.
All major equipment for the central data processing system shall be
designed and manufactured by one and the same manufacturer to
ensure system uniformity of standards, compatibility in operation,
spare parts availability, trained support and competent maintenance
services.
TS/Fire/S2/14
MECHANICAL WORKS
12.2 Data Transmission
a) General requirements
The communication network shall be a "free network" that

messages are transmitted in a spontaneous manner so that the
response time will not be affected by the size of the system and
nos. of MAP/SAPs connected.
The type of communication shall be of full duplex, digital serial

data transmission.
Communication network shall be of class "A" loop

transmission.
The individual system components shall be interfaced to the

transmission network via transformer-coupled modems type
RS485 and the network communication speed shall be a
minimum of 60, 000 baud.
b) Data transmission monitoring
Every path of the data transmission network must be monitored

for open or short circuit fault.
If regular data traffic in a path is not frequent, test telegram

shall be sent to verify proper operation.
In case of communication fault, fault signal shall be indicated at

the affected SAP, MAP and the Main System Terminal at the
Fire Command Centre as well as the Duplicate System
Terminal in BAS Room at the Campus Asset Management
(Ventus). Such a fault shall not deteriorate the autonomous
operation of the SAP concerned.
A single break along the data communication network shall

indicate fault signal as describe in the above but the entire data
transmission shall still be fully operational via the loop data
transmission network.
TS/Fire/S2/15
MECHANICAL WORKS
If the receiving unit detects a transmission error, it shall deny

acknowledgment of the message and request for re-sending of
the message from the sender. If a unit receives three
consecutive messages containing transmission error, it shall
notify the central control equipment and a transmission fault
message identifying the faulty system component or path shall
be displayed on the Main System Terminal in FCC as well as
the Duplicate System Terminal in BAS Room and logged on
the printers.
This monitoring requirements shall apply to all modems and

communication processors provided.
c) Data communication network
The data communication network shall be of RS485 class "A"

for loop communication.
All MAP/SAPs as well as other units such as mimic driver,

coding and decoding unit shall be connected along the loop data
line with the data processing unit. All devices connected along
the loop shall be able to operate autonomously, failure of any
device must not affect the proper operation of the others.
The network shall allow insertion of additional devices at any

point of the loop at any time. All existing devices shall not be
affected in case of network expansion.
In case of failure of a loop device, this device shall

automatically be by-passed and all other parts of the system
shall remain fully operational. When the failing device resumes
correct operation, it shall automatically be re-inserted into the
loop communication traffic.
Data transmission among devices in the loop shall not be

affected in case of single breaks or shorts in the data
transmission line. The data transmission network shall be
suitable for bi-directional, full duplex oriented data traffic
complying with class "A" line supervision.
Any communication trouble shall be automatically announced

at the affected devices and the System Terminals.
TS/Fire/S2/16
MECHANICAL WORKS
12.3 Computer System Unit
a) Hardware structure and performance
The computer system shall monitor and control the entire

system and shall allow control of all MAP/SAPs and other
devices connected along the loop communication network.
The system shall be of modular design in hardware and

software which allows easy stage-by-stage extension of the
system capacity. It shall be of OPC which allow for the IBMS
interfacing without using external devices.
The system shall contain of multi-processing structure which

different tasks shall be performed by individual processor.
The individual processor in the System shall be supervised by

means of a built-in watch-dog circuit. In case of failure of any
one of the processor unit, an audible alert signal and a
distinctive visual signal shall be presented at the Main System
Terminal and the Duplicate System Terminal.
The following program and data carriers shall be used for the
main data processing unit:
i) RAM
ii) Flash PROM
iii) DISK
The main operation program and the system configuration data

shall be located in the resident RAM area for on-line operation.
The floppy disk unit shall be served as a program back-up
device and shall not be used for on-line operation.
The system shall be SDRAM and with the following minimum

requirements:
i) A 2nd Generation Intel® Core™ i3-2120 Processor

i3 (3.3GHz, 3MB, 2C) or latest running at a
minimum of 3.3 GHz
ii) Minimum 4 GB of DDR3, SDRAM and shall be

expandable
iii) A Super VGA graphics card capable of 1024x768

pixel resolution and 65K colors, non-interlaced, 32”
LCD monitor (70 Hz or better vertical refresh rate).
TS/Fire/S2/17
MECHANICAL WORKS
iv) A 12 function-key keyboard

v) Mouse pointing device
vi) 2 nos 320 GB Hard disk drive
vii) One 1.44 MB Floppy disk drive
viii) A CD/DVD R/W drive
ix) A backup unit
x) An 8-line serial communications adapter
xi) An 2 Adapter for Ethernet Networking compatible
with TCP/IP network protocols
A UL Listed server computer platform shall be used when UL

compliant system is required
The RAM memory shall be permanently monitored and any

detected malfunction shall be automatically indicated on the
System Terminals before system operation is affected.
A floppy disk unit shall be provided as a program back-up

device for the entire RAM memory and it shall not be used for
on-line processing. The disk shall only be running during
system initialization and system re-start routines.
The System shall contain the power-up (restart) routines in the

EPROMs to assure automatic start-up and program loading
without any operator intervention. The operating and system
configuration program shall automatically be transferred from
the floppy disk into the RAM area.
A second floppy disk unit shall be provided as a data carrier for

the extended user texts assigned to each system events.
A history file of all system events such as alarm, fault, status,

operator activities etc. shall be stored on the disk.
A record of the last 2,000 events shall be maintained on disk

which can be printed out upon request from the Main System
Terminal.
TS/Fire/S2/18
MECHANICAL WORKS
The System architecture shall have the following serial

input-output interfacing capabilities:
i) Front interface for loop communication.
ii) Four nos. RS 232 for free arrangement for

PC/Printer/BAS interface.
iii) Shall be of OPC for the high level interfacing to IBMS
b) System software requirements
The system software packages which enable the complete

system operation in accordance with the requirements of the
Specification shall be of a proven system.
The system software shall be modular in design and the
software packages must be strictly standardized. Custom made
or project oriented software packages will not be accepted.
The following minimum software modules shall be provided:
i) Operating program
ii) System data base (process image)
iii) Network monitoring and control
iv) Display priority control
v) Command priority control
vi) Output message generator
vii) Peripheral drivers
viii) Text/Graphic editors
ix) "Help" facility
x) Service assistance
xi) Diagnostic
xii) Auxiliary programs
The system software packages shall be resident in the main data

processing unit and it shall be especially made for the
requirements of life safety and security system.
TS/Fire/S2/19
MECHANICAL WORKS
A comprehensive text and graphic editing program shall be

provided for easy editing of user text and graphics
A comprehensive parameter editing program shall be provided

for easy editing of automatic system command functions.
It shall be possible to assign different priority levels to the

various types of system incidents or criteria.
All system incidents shall be chronologically recorded in the

system history file with date and time for subsequent reports.
All logs in the system history file shall be retrievable according
to the operator selection. The following minimum parameters
shall be made available for the operator to select :
1) Types of system
Fire and Plant monitoring.
2) Types of events
Alarm, Fault, Active, zone Off, zone Test and for All.
3) Record on cause of alarm
To define cause of alarm actuation before reset of alarm

message for recording purpose :
* Genuine alarm
* Deceptive alarm
* Malfunction
* Operator error
* False response
* Nuisance alarm
* Not definable
TS/Fire/S2/20
MECHANICAL WORKS
4) Time of events
* Printout since mid-night

* Printout for the last 24 hours
* Printout for the whole buffer
* Printout since last change of shift
The software packages shall be able to perform pre-defined

control by events and time dependent functions.
The system operating functions shall be password protected.

The password shall consist of 6 to 8 characters which can be
freely defined by the user.
At least ten different authorization levels for system operation

shall be defined and shall be accessible via selected passwords.
The system editor functions shall only be accessible via

assigned password.
All system service functions shall be assigned to the highest

authorization level.
For each operator intervention, the identification number of the

initiating password shall be logged by the system printer and
recorded in the system history file.
The following indications shall be provided :
1) All system status signal shall be displayed in plain text.

The signals to be displayed include:
- Current day, month, year and time
- Current status summary for:
nos. of alarm remains in system
nos. of fault remains in system
nos. of zones isolated
nos. of zones in test mode
- Display of alarm signal with sufficient
characters space for description of zone location
and sufficient characters space for description of
point location
- Display of guided test for the system
programming functions.
TS/Fire/S2/21
MECHANICAL WORKS
The System Terminals shall be capable of performing the

following programming functions :
* To create logical group within each addressable loop.
* To form cross zoning arrangement between zones.
* To programme any zone for pulse memory operation.
* To define priority level of individual zone.
* To define access password.
* To define delay time for fault signal upon AC power
failure to prevent unnecessary fault message while the
emergency generator is being started.
* To assign activation of individual output contact to
perform specific control functions in relation to the
activation of alarm zones.
* To programme timing of alarm organization.
* To define type of addressable loops.
* To isolate floor by floor/block by block of addressable
points.
* To isolate individual addressable point.
The System Terminals shall also be able to process and

evaluate signals generated by the following services and others
which may be required :
1) Transfer Water Tanks - High/Low Alarms.
2) Transfer Pumps - On/Off Alarms.

3) Hosereel/Sprinkler Water Tank - High/Low Alarms.
4) Hosereel/ Sprinkler Pumps - On/Off Alarms.
5) Wet Riser Water Tank - High/Low Alarms.

6) Wet Riser Pumps - On/Off Alarms.
7) Power Supply to Pumps – KWH, Phase Voltage, Phase
Current, Frequency, Normal / Alarm of Control Panel
TS/Fire/S2/22
MECHANICAL WORKS
12.4 System Display and Operating Terminals
The new fire alarm Main System Terminals at the building Fire
Command Centre (FCC) shall be linked and able to be view,
monitor and control at Duplicate System Terminals through
TCP/IP and web access at Campus Asset Management Building
Control Room.
The Main and Duplicate System Terminals shall automatically

display any change-of-status messages received from the MAP
and SAPs. It shall allow complete supervision and control of
the entire system.
The System Terminals shall provide optimal conditions for

successful intervention by means of rapid and simple
processing and displaying of all necessary data in plain text or
graphics. The procedures in operation shall be automatically
guided and the information display shall not consist of any
coded messages.
The operation of the System Terminals shall be password
protected that only authorised persons can access for the
assigned operating functions.
b) Signal display of System Terminals
The self-contained basic operating unit shall be of desk-top type

which is to be installed next to the color LCD monitor unit. It
shall provide the following optical indicators :
i) ALARM
ii) FAULT
iii) STATUS
The dedicated optical indicator(s) shall be flashed initially and

shall become steady after signal has been acknowledged. In
addition, a visual alarm signal indicator (flasher) notice buzzer
shall be provided when the alarm signal is activated.
TS/Fire/S2/23
MECHANICAL WORKS
In addition to the indications specified in the above, the basic

operating unit shall also provide the following status
indications:
1) System Terminal in operation

2) System Terminal fault
3) System operation "enable"
4) System operation "disable"
The operation of the basic operating unit shall be passwords

protected. In addition, a key switch shall be provided to avoid
unauthorised access.
A tape printer which operate by 24 V DC shall form part of the
basic operating unit for logging purpose. It shall be fully
operational in case of AC power failure.
The display of the color LCD shall be divided into 3 fields :
1) System summary field

System user name, current time/date and current system
basic static function shall be indicated in this field.
2) Data display field

`
All system events and relevant instructions shall be

displayed in plain text or graphic in this field.
3) Dialogue field
The system operation shall mainly be derived from this
field. Depending on access authorization, only the
instructions presently valid for the various operating
steps shall be indicated here.
Operating commands shall be performed by the light-pen or

mouse.
All messages shall be displayed on the system terminal in
chronological order and the display shall fill up from top to
bottom.
An indication shall be displayed in the summary field when the
display field is full to advise the operator that more messages
are presented in the memory.
TS/Fire/S2/24
MECHANICAL WORKS
Various types of message shall be displayed with different

background color :
1) Alarm message - RED
2) Fault message - YELLOW
3) Status message - WHITE
Messages with higher priority shall automatically override

messages with lower priority.
Detectors and/or actuators as referred to in the operation

dialogue shall be indicated by their geographical location. No
technical code shall be used to identify system elements neither
on the system terminal nor on the printer(s).
Un-acknowledged messages shall distinctively indicated to

draw the attention of the operator. When an alarm message is
reset, the display of that alarm shall be automatically deleted
from the screen.
The alarm message per zone shall contain the following

information :
1) Time of day
2) Date
3) Type of alarm
4) Origin of alarm (geographical location of alarm
indicated by area /building /floor /room /point)
5) Description of affected alarm location
6) Counter-action to be taken
c) Operating functions of System Terminals
The System Terminals shall be able to supervise and operate all

SAPs connected within the network.
The following dedicated function buttons shall be available on

the system basic operating units:
1) Buzzer off For silencing of the System

Terminal buzzer.
2) Acknowledge To perform an acknowledgment
of messages appeared in the
system.
TS/Fire/S2/25
MECHANICAL WORKS
3) Reset To perform the alarm message

reset function on a particular SAP
or on system-wide basis.
4) Keyboard For password entry.
The system operating concept shall give the operator identical
sequences in processing and operation for events from various
sectors, for examples: Fire, Plant Monitoring.
The extended system operating procedures shall be based on
user-adaptive, screen-oriented dialogue in the manner of menus
and masks.
The operation of the System Terminals shall by means of touch
screen or mouse. By touching the screen or moving the mouse
onto the appropriate menu appearing on the screen, the
following valid steps under each command shall be
automatically displayed for the operator selection. The entire
operation shall be guided in such a way that operating error can
be avoided.
It shall be possible to display all events either in plain text or in

graphics form on the same screen depending on the operator
selection. Text or graphic selection shall be made in the
dialogue field via the touch screen or mouse.
All events related messages shall be displayed in plain text or

graphics. No technical code shall be used for message display
that the operator do not require technical knowledge for
interpretation of messages displayed and operation of the
system.
Keyboard shall be used for the following functions :
1) Entry of password for protected operating functions.

2) Setting of time and date.
3) Assignment of password and operator access level.
4) Edit and modify system basic data, configuration
parameters, program parameter etc.
5) Edit and modify the plain user text and messages:
* Descriptions of MAP and SAP locations
* Descriptions of alarm zone locations
* Counter actions to be taken
* Special operator advises
* etc
TS/Fire/S2/26
MECHANICAL WORKS
d) Color graphic display functions

The color graphic function shall allow the interactive (real
time) display of all alarm, fault and specific status events in the
entire system.
The events to be displayed shall provide clear identification of
their origin by :
1) Location of control units
2) Location of zones
3) Originating source
* Automatic detector
* Manual call point
* Extinguishing System
The graphics presentation shall have a minimum of four

hierarchical levels :
1) Area overview
2) Building overview
3) Floor overview
4) Room overview
The picture editing program shall easily allow addition of any
desired alphanumeric text and pre-defined graphic symbols to
each picture. It shall have a standard repertoire of at least 8
colors, 9 lines types, 15 area shade styles and 64 pre-defined
symbols for selection.
The Contractor is to update the University picture editing

program should there be any new release of the program within
the fifteen (15) months Defects Liability Period.
Picture generation shall be effected by means of a versatile

interactive picture editing program. No specific training shall
be required for picture generation.
The system shall have the capacity to store minimum of 500

pictures for processing and displaying.
Graphic pictures, zone allocation, text and symbols shall be

stored in a hard disk memory and backed-up by a floppy disk
memory.
TS/Fire/S2/27
MECHANICAL WORKS
It shall be possible to compose, modify or edit graphic pictures,

texts, symbols and zone locations on-site.
The Contractor shall provide training for the Campus Asset

Management personnel to compose, modify or edit graphic
pictures, texts, symbol and zone locations via the system.
12.5 System Printer Units

The system shall provide sufficient end interfaces for
connecting of line printers.
It shall be possible to initiate the desire printout via dialogue

command from the system terminal.
b) System logging printer
The printer shall log the following change-of-status signals with

time and date for individual events:
i) Alarm messages
ii) Fault messages
iii) Status messages (ie. zone isolated, zone test etc.)
iv) Entire operating sequence (operator activities)
Each message shall be printed in maximum two lines and shall

contain a reduced plain text related to the type and location of
the event and descriptions of operator activities.
c) System alarm printer
This printer shall print alarm messages only and each message
shall occupy one A4 page.
Each alarm message printout shall contain the following

information :
v) Time and date of event
vi) Type of alarm
vii) Origin of alarm
viii) Descriptions of related alarm location in area, building,

floor and room.
TS/Fire/S2/28
MECHANICAL WORKS
12.6 Master Mimic Board
Master mimic boards with LED indicators and control buttons

shall be provided at the MAP.
The master mimic board shall be mounted onto a supporting

frame with a metal housing suitable for wall mounting. The
facial of the master mimic board shall be of aesthetically
pleasant design with engraved silk screen printing with
minimum of 5 different colours (excluding white and black).
Different mode of indication shall be provided to identify new

incoming signal and acknowledged signal. The new incoming
signal shall cause the appropriate LED to flash and
acknowledged signal shall be indicated by steady LED.
The master mimic boards shall consist of emergency function

button for alarm acknowledge and reset. Any event displayed
on the mimic board shall also activate an acoustical alarm.
The master mimic boards shall be able to indicate the following

signals on building and/or floor basis by means of built-in LED
indicators :
i) Alarm from each floor and/or building
ii) Fault from each floor and/or building
iii) All fire hosereel pumps & hosereel water tank status.
The mimic board shall be able to provide the following

controls:
1) Acknowledge of Alarm and Fault signals
2) Reset of Alarm signals
3) Lamp Test
TS/Fire/S2/29
MECHANICAL WORKS
The following LED indications shall also be provided:
- 'System On' with green LED
- 'Fault' in yellow LED or amber LED
- 'Detector Test' in yellow LED or amber LED
The master mimic boards shall have above provision ready for
future extension.
The building master mimic board shall display all signals as

described in the above on a floor plan basis of the buildings.
The final facial arrangement of the building master mimic
board shall be submitted to the S.O. for approval before
fabrication. In addition to the building master mimic board, the
Contractor shall connect the system to the existing Campus
Master Mimic which are located at the Fire Command Centres
in Engineering Block E3A-01, E5, COM 2 and Faculty of
Science, Block S16. All wirings, material, equipment & etc are
to be provided by the Contractor to complete the operation of
the Campus Master Mimics.
b) Decoder unit for mimic board
The decoder unit shall be micro-processor based that sufficient

outputs with 30% spare capacity shall be provided to fulfill the
specified requirements.
The operation of the decoder unit shall be totally autonomous

and shall consist of its own hardware and software including
capability to communicate with all MAP/SAPs connected
within the loop data network. The decoder unit shall remain
fully operational in case of breakdown of the Computer System
at FCC.
All outputs of the decoder unit shall be freely programmable to

the assigned LED for the following criteria :
iv) fire alarm signals
v) extinguishing alarm signals
vi) plant monitoring signals
vii) fault signals
TS/Fire/S2/30
MECHANICAL WORKS
It shall be possible to program for individual zone to an output

or a combination of zones to an output.
The decoder unit shall be of modular design and consist of the

following elements :
1) Programmable micro-processor
2) LED driver output module
3) Lamp test device
4) Emergency operating button for alarm acknowledge and

resetting function
5) Power supply with stand-by batteries
c) Master Mimic board
The master mimic board shall be mounted onto a supporting

frame with a metal housing suitable for wall mounting. The
facial of the master mimic board shall be of atheistically
pleasant design with engraved silk screen printing with
minimum of 5 different colours (excluding white and black).
Different mode of indication shall be provide to identify new

incoming signal and acknowledged signal. The new incoming
signal shall cause the appropriate LED to flash and
acknowledged signal shall be indicated by steady LED.
The master mimic board shall consists of emergency function

button for alarm acknowledge and reset. Any event displayed
on the mimic board shall also activate an acoustical alarm.
12.7 Coding and Decoding Units
A micro-computer controlled coding and decoder unit with

sufficient input/output capacity shall be provided for interfacing
with Lift Homing, shut down of AHU etc. from the Two-Way
Emergency Voice Inter-Communication System and the Public
Address System. The Contractor shall ensure proper and
adequate interface.
The unit shall be micro-processor based and shall be able to

operate autonomously within the loop communication line.
TS/Fire/S2/31
MECHANICAL WORKS
b) Functional requirements
The coding and decoding unit shall consist of :
i) Programmable micro-processor
ii) RS 485 communication module
iii) Input and Output modules
iv) Power supply with stand-by batteries. The unit shall

consist of its own hardware and software which enable
the autonomous operation within the system. In case of
failure of the data processing unit or any devices within
the loop communication line, it shall remain fully
operational.
Each unit shall provide a spare capacity of 30%.
All outputs shall be freely programmable to provide appropriate

signals for BAS interface by "Voltage Free" normally open
contacts. The contact rating shall not be less than 40 mA/ 24 V
DC.
It shall be able to provide the following outputs:
1) Zone alarm
2) Floor in alarm
3) Zone fault
4) Floor in fault
13. Main Fire Alarm Panel / Sub Fire Alarm Panel
13.1 General
a) The MAP and SAP shall be micro-processor based and

controlled by programme contained in non-volatile memory. All
MAPs and SAPs shall be mounted onto a supporting frame with
a metal housing suitable for Wall mounting complete with
vision panel to prevent vandalism.
b) The alarm management shall be field configurable from the

control panel via a QWERTY keypad to enable the system to be
tailored to suit the protected building, and to permit future
changes. This configuration shall be maintained under power
failure conditions.
TS/Fire/S2/32
MECHANICAL WORKS
c) It shall be of modular design by means of plug-in cards to allow

ease of maintenance and future system expansion.
d) The MAP and SAP shall be complete with its own network
controller addressable loop module with power supply,
charger/batteries for its own floor/sector operation.
e) Each detection loop of the MAP and SAP shall have a 30%
spare capacity such that it is possible to install additional of
30% more detector points on each loop without additional
hardware in the control unit. In addition, a spare addressable
line module shall be install in each SAP and MAP such that it is
possible to install a new addressable line with minimum 50
new detector points.
f) The MAP and SAP shall be fully self-contained control unit

with integrated emergency supply and networking capability.
g) It shall complete with RS 485 peer to peer communication

module.
h) The MAP and SAP shall be suitable for use in individual

addressable system with possibilities to integrate minimum of 8
collective (conventional) zones which operate independently
with the individual addressable loops. The integration of
additional collective zones shall not involve changes in the
existing modules except adding the collective zone module.
i) All sensing devices such as detectors, manual call point etc,

shall be connected along the Class "A" addressable loop
irregardless of the no. of zones which shall be formed by
programming at the MAP and SAP. The number of devices
connected to an addressing loop shall not be more than 70%
of the loop capacity and the same addressable loop shall not
be used for more than one floor.
j) The MAP shall be equipped with a built-in alarm printer for

alarm, fault and status printing.
k) A floor mimic board shall be provided with each SAP. The

floor mimic board shall consists of perspex silk screen floor
plan with built-in red LEDs for zone alarm indications. A
minimum of five colours (excluding white and black) shall be
provided.
l) The MAP shall has the capability of transmitting signals over a

distance of minimum 1000 m.
TS/Fire/S2/33
MECHANICAL WORKS
m) A common fire alarm status be repeated, indicated and

displayed at other sub-fire alarm panels of the affected blocks.
n) The floor mimic board shall be either standalene or incorporated

into the Fire Alarm Panel.
13.2 Signal Display and Control Functions
The following indications shall be provided at each SAP. All system

shall be displayed by LCD in plain text. The signals to be displayed
includes:

nos. of zone isolated
nos. of zone in test mode
- Display of zone and point fault condition with 40 characters

space for description of zone location and 40 characters space
for description of point location.
- Display of alarm signal with 40 characters space for description

of zone location and 40 characters space for description of point
location.
- Display of guided text for system programming functions.
- The characters display on the LCD shall be in black with

background colour in YELLOW for all signals except for alarm
signal which shall have the background colour in RED.
The following control functions shall be provided for each SAP:
* Alarm acknowledge button
* Alarm reset button
* Function buttons for recall details of current status
* Key-pad for the following functions:
- To perform lamp test
- To isolate entire zone
- To isolate a point or points within zone
- To switch zone in test mode
TS/Fire/S2/34
MECHANICAL WORKS
The following master LED indications shall also be provided:
- 'System On' with green LED
- 'Fault' in yellow LED or amber LED
- 'Detector Test' in yellow LED or amber LED
13.3 Programming Possibilities
The following programming functions shall be able to be performed

on each MAP and SAP. Programming shall be performed off-line
and downloaded via a commercial IBM compatible PC to the MAP
and SAP.
* To create zones within each addressable loop.
* To select and download suitable algorithm (signal evaluation

program) to each individual detector based on the type of
environment which the detector is installed.
 To define delay time for fault signal upon AC power failure to

prevent unnecessary fault message while the emergency
generator is being started.
* To assign activation of individual output contact to perform

specific control functions in relation to the actuation of alarm
zones.
* To programme timing of alarm organisation.
* To isolate block by block, floor by floor and individual

addressable point via the MAP and SAP.
TS/Fire/S2/35
MECHANICAL WORKS
14. Power Supply

14.1 The System Terminals shall be able to operate on mains power supply
of 230 V AC, -15% to +10% with 48 to 62 Hz.
14.2 The power supply shall contain suitable over-voltage protection to
prevent any malfunction or damage due to power line surges.
14.3 The power supply for all MAPs/SAPs shall be equipped with stand-by
battery of nominal voltage of 24 V DC. The battery and battery
charger shall be sized for 24 hours with a one hour alarm load and
supplied strictly in accordance with the requirement of SS 645. The
Contractor shall submit detailed calculations to justify the capacity of
the batteries and the battery charger for the S.O.'s approval.
14.4 Upon loss of mains power, the power supply unit shall automatically
revert to battery power to maintain the operational condition of the
system.
14.5 When the battery voltage drops below 20 V DC, a fault signal shall be
generated and be indicated on the affected unit as well as the Main
System Terminal in the FCC and the duplicate system terminals in the
BAS Room.
14.6 When the AC power is restored, the power unit shall automatically
revert to normal operation without any manual restoring procedure.
14.7 The stand-by batteries shall automatically be maintained in charged
condition by a built-in short circuit proof charger.
14.8 The load shall automatically be switched off when the voltage drops
below 19 V DC to protect battery cells from being damaged by
complete discharge.
14.9 Gas-tight maintenance free lead-acid batteries shall be used for stand-
by power supply and shall have a minimum life cycle of four (4) years.
14.10 The power supply unit and charger circuit including all fuses shall be
supervised. Any malfunction or blown or missing fuse shall be
indicated on the affected unit as well as the Main System Terminal in
the FCC and the duplicate system terminals in the BAS Room.
14.11 All Central Processing equipment such as the CPUs, monitors,

computers, operating consoles, printers, etc in the FCC, BAS Room
shall be supplied and installed with standby power from a UPS
system for 4 hours minimum. Each location shall be provided with
one UPS system.
TS/Fire/S2/36
MECHANICAL WORKS
15. Floor Mimic Board
15.1 The Contractor shall supply and install new floor mimic board on each
floor next to the SAP as indicated in the Drawings. The floor mimic
board shall either be a standalone type or incorporated into the Fire
Alarm Panel subject to S.O.'s approval. The floor mimic board shall be
mounted onto a supporting frame with a metal housing suitable for
wall mounting complete with vision panel to prevent vandalism.
15.2 The floor mimic board shall indicate the floor layout in pictorial
manner and consist of red "LED" for each zone to indicate the alarm
status.
15.3 The signal transmission from System Terminals to the respective floor
mimic board shall be hardwired or multiplexed data line.
15.4 Upon alarm zone actuated, the corresponding "LED" on the floor
mimic board shall flash and the built-in buzzer shall sound. The "LED"
shall become steady and the buzzer shall be silenced after the alarm is
acknowledged.
15.5 The size of the floor mimic board shall be of reasonable size with 6
mm thick acrylic or perspex sheet with indication of the layout of the
floor, fire alarm zones with LED indicator, clearly engraved in silk
screen printing in black and a minimum of 5 other colours.
15.6 The design and construction of the floor mimic board shall be to the
approval of the S.O.
15.7 Lamp test function shall be provided for testing of all "LED"
incorporated in the floor mimic board.
15.8 All MAP, SAP and mimic board shall come complete with Type EP
Light Fitting (as per Technical Specification) inclusive of trunking,
conduit, FR cables and etc. Contractor shall tap the power supply from
the nearest DB.
16. Interfacing Unit
16.1 Interfacing unit shall be provided for monitoring of external contact

signal such as lift homing and etc.
16.2 The interfacing unit shall be of individual addressable type which can
be connected directly to the class "A" individual addressable loop.
16.3 The interfacing unit shall consist of a LED which shall flash upon
receiving the actuation signal from the external contact.
TS/Fire/S2/37
MECHANICAL WORKS
17. Cable Markers
Cable markers for the fire resistant cables (buried) shall be provided and
position at each change of direction and at 30 m interval subjected to S.O.'s
approval.
18. Interfacing of new Fire Alarm System to Existing Fire Alarm System
The new fire alarm system shall be monitored by the following equipment of
the existing Fire Alarm Systems at Engineering Faculty (Block E3A-01), E5,
COM 2 or Science Faculty (Block S16):
a) Existing Campus Main fire Indicator (MFIB) at the satellite FCCs

(Block E3A-01, E5, COM2 or Block S16) through fire rated fibre optic
cabling linking from the local building new Sub-main alarm pane.l
b) Existing Campus Master Mimic Boards at FCCs (Block E3A-01, E5,

COM 2 or Block S16)
c) Existing repeater system and fire alarm monitoring system at Campus

Asset Management
All cost required for both software and hardware expansion, interfacing,
modification, updating and reprogramming of the existing fire alarm system to
meet the above requirements shall be included in this tender.
The existing campus Main Fire Indicators (MFIB) and Campus Master Mimic
Boards shall be modified and program to provide a common alarm and a
common fault output for monitoring of the new fire alarm system installed.
The output of the new fire alarm system shall be of voltage free contacts and
also with high level interfacing. All cost required to modify the existing panels
including cabling from the respective MAPs/SMAP to the Fire Command
Centres panels shall be included in this tender.
19. Interfacing of new Fire Alarm System to the building automation system for
monitoring
The Fire Alarm Control console /system located at FCC shall have the
capability to link to the Building automation system through high-level
interface via PEER TO PEER bus and must be open protocol such as
BACNET , MOD BUS and etc. It shall also support Ethernet connectivity at
100 mbps as backbone.
TS/Fire/S2/38
MECHANICAL WORKS
20. Electromagnetic interference (EMI) filtering for EMI Sensitive Room
Contractor shall provide EMI filters for both power and control lines running
into the chamber & control room. These filters will preserve the “clean”
electrical environment of the chamber despite the routing of power and control
lines, whose source is deemed to be electrically noisy.
21 DECAM TAS Line
The Sub-Contractor shall provide the required facilities, such as fibre optic
converter, 24 hours battery backup power supply for fibre optic cable
converter, panel and all necessary accessories, at the MAP for connection to a
TELEPHONE direct "Private Wire" line so that in the event of the operation of
the Fire Alarm System, a signal will be automatically transmitted to the nearest
Fire Service fire console via a monitoring company. The decam system shall
comply to the latest SS 645 requirement with dual send out with one of the
page out to be a fixed wired line.
The Sub-Contractor shall make all necessary arrangement including

applications, paying all fees, etc., and commission the said building.
In addition, all telephone cabling using fibre optic cable for emergency
communication purposes, it shall comply to following standards:
a) Fire Resistance:
i) IEC 60331-25 (120) - Tests For Electric Cables Under Fire

Conditions - Circuit Integrity - Part 25: Procedures And
Requirements - Optical Fibre Cables
ii) EN 50200 PH 120, EN 50200 ANNEX E PH 30 - Method of

test for resistance to fire of unprotected small cables for use in
emergency circuits
iii) BS 8434-2 - Methods of test for assessment of the fire integrity

of electric cables. Test for unprotected small cables for use in
emergency circuits. BS EN 50200 with a 930° flame and with
water spray
b) Flame Retardant:
i) IEC 60332-1-2 - Tests on electric and optical fibre cables under

fire conditions - Part 1-2: Test for vertical flame propagation
for a single insulated wire or cable - Procedure for 1 kW pre-
mixed flame
ii) IEC 60332-3-24- Tests on electric and optical fibre cables

under fire conditions - Part 3-24: Test for vertical flame spread
of vertically-mounted bunched wires or cables - Category C
TS/Fire/S2/39
MECHANICAL WORKS
c) Halogen Emissions:
i) IEC 60754-1- Test on gases evolved during combustion of

materials from cables - Part 1: Determination of the halogen
acid gas content
ii) IEC 60754-2- Test on gases evolved during combustion of

materials from cables - Part 2: Determination of acidity (by pH
measurement) and conductivity
d) Smoke Emissions:
i) IEC 61034-2- Measurement of smoke density of cables burning

under defined conditions - Part 2: Test procedure and
requirements
Fire rated box up shall be provided for all trunking and conduits that carry
emergency and essential services fire resistance fibre optical cable.
22 Remote monitoring at Existing IBMS system
Contractor shall provide standalone BACNET IP or Modbus IP Protocol

controller using hard contact termination of the building SAP/MAP alarm and
fault status to existing IBMS system through interfacing to University Campus
Infrastructure, Campus Asset Management control room via NUSNET, All the
alarm and fault points shall map into the campus map with SMS send out.
23 NUS 2 Stage Alarm with Auto Trigger Function
Refer to Appendix A and Appendix B for the requirement and detail.
TS/Fire/S2/40
MECHANICAL WORKS
SECTION 3 - AUTOMATIC FIRE SPRINKLER SYSTEM
1. General

of the Automatic Fire Sprinkler System.
1.2 The system and equipment shall be designed and installed in full
compliance with the requirements of the FSSD, other relevant authority
and the current edition of CP 52 Code of Practice for Automatic Fire
Sprinkler System and its amendments.
2. Classification of Occupancy
The system is designed to the minimum of Ordinary Hazard Group III and
Ordinary Hazard Group III Special as shown in the drawings including the
ceiling space in accordance with the current edition of CP 52 and its
amendments.
3. Sprinkler Pumps
3.1 The sprinkler pumpsets shall be UL/FM/LPC listed fire pumps and
motors and shall comply with the requirements of CP 52 and relevant
local authorities' requirements. The pumps shall be of the centrifugal
constant speed, single-stage, double entry horizontal split casing be
completed with electric motors, mating flanges, air releases, volute
drain connections and base plates. The pumps shall be selected for
their particular applications in regard to water temperatures, ambient
air temperatures and conditions, suction head, static head and lift.
3.2 Only pumpsets manufactured in the country of origin of the original

manufacturer shall be provided.
3.3 Each pumpset shall be capable of circulating the required nominal rate
against the head of the system. Tenderers are required to carry out the
necessary calculations relating to the pressure drop of the equipment
selected by them, and of the system piping so that each pump is
capable of providing the necessary output at the designed head. The
performance characteristics of the sprinkler pumps shall meet the
requirements of CP 52. Pump performance curves with the predicted
operating points shown shall be submitted together with the Tender
offer and the performance curve shall be approved by S.O. before
placing order of sprinkler pumps. Detailed calculations shall be
submitted for approval prior to the placing of order. It shall be the sole
responsibility of the Sub-Contractor to ensure that the pump head
selected is adequate for the efficient functioning of the system.
TS/Fire/S3/1
MECHANICAL WORKS
3.4 The pumps are to be factory tested to meet the requirements as

specified in CP 52. The pumps sets are to be tested complete with the
offered motor coupled to the pump. Documentary evidence of this
testing shall be submitted for approval before the pump can be
accepted. The motor couplings shall be of the flexible pin and bush
type.
3.5 Pump casings shall be of close grained cast iron and designed to
provide smooth flow with gradual changes in velocity. The impellers
shall be of bronze and designed to give non over-loading
characteristics over large range of head variations. The impeller shall
be statically and dynamically balanced. The pump shaft shall be of
machine ground stainless steel or carbon steel mounted in renewable
bronze sleeve bearings. Pump seals and glands shall be of packing
type. The design speed of the pumps shall not exceed 2900 rpm.
3.6 Where required, the Sub-Contractor shall provide automatic priming

equipment for the pumps to comply with CP 52 and also to ensure that
the pumps will be fully primed with water at all times.
3.7 Each pumps shall be directly driven by a totally enclosed fan cooled
motor. Motor shall be equipped with sleeve bearings and speed shall
be compatible with the pump speed. The service factor of the motor
shall be 1.15.
3.8 The motor shall be of totally enclosed fan cooled (TEFC), squirrel cage
type with a synchronous speed of 1500 rpm and suitable for connection
to a 400V, 3-phase 50Hz A.C. supply and shall comply with BS 2613.
The insulation of the motor shall be of Class F. The torque/speed
characteristic shall be selected to match the pump operation. Motor
shall comply to IEC 60034-30, energy efficiency shall be class
premium IE3 and above with test standard comply to IEC 60034-2-1or
IEEE 112.
3.9 Each pump and motor combination shall be mounted on a fabricated

steel base plate and the complete unit mounted on inertia blocks
complete with approved anti-vibration mounting. Holes for foundation
bolts, or the bolt themselves shall be casted into the block. Foundation
bolts are to be planted with anti-rust primer before installation.
3.10 The pumps shall be equipped with automatic starting and to be

automatically started based on pressure reduction in the system. Means
should also be provided for automatic starting of the pumps by
manually reproducing the pressure reduction. The pumps must run
continuously once started until being stopped manually.
3.11 The pumps shall be equipped with the necessary relief valves and
measuring devices to test the pump as required under CP 52. A jockey
pump shall be installed to make up for any leakage and to maintain
system pressure.
TS/Fire/S3/2
MECHANICAL WORKS
3.12 Pumps & Motors
a) The pump starter panel shall be constructed with the following

minimum features:
i) Incoming power supply isolator
ii) Incoming supply 'AVAILABLE' indication
iii) Main isolator 'ON' indication
iv) Duty pump selector
v) Auto-manual starting selector
vi) Pump manual "ON-OF" push buttons
vii) Pump "Running" indication
viii) Kilowatt meter: only one such meter is

required per control panel
ix) Ammeter : direct reading and approved type
x) Anti-condensation heaters
xi) Provision for pump status monitoring at the Main Fire

Alarm Panel (MAP)
xii) Provision for pump power failure indication

and audible alarm at the MAP
b) In general, the pump design, construction and fittings shall be

compatible with the requirements for maximum reliability and
minimum requirements.
TS/Fire/S3/3
MECHANICAL WORKS
c) For each pump installation, the following fittings are required

as a minimum:
i) Gate valve at suction
ii) Globe valve at discharge
iii) Check valve at discharge
iv) Flexible connection at suction and discharge
v) Eccentric tapered reducer at suction
vi) Strainer at suction
vii) 100 mm dia. pressure gauge at suction and

discharge
4. Jockey Pumps
4.1 The jockey pumpsets shall comply with the requirements of CP 52 and
relevant local authorities' requirements. The pumps shall be of the
centrifugal back pull out end suction complete with electric motors,
mating flanges, air releases, drain connections and base plates. The
pumps shall be selected for their particular applications in regard to
water temperatures, ambient air temperatures and conditions, suction
head, static head and lift.
4.2 The pump casing and back-plate shall be constructed of cast iron and
fitted with bronze impeller, stainless steel shaft and approved type
mechanical seals.
4.3 Only pumpsets manufactured in the country of origin of the original

manufacturer shall be provided.
4.4 Each pumpset shall be capable of circulating the required nominal rate
against the head of the system. Tenderers are required to carry out the
necessary calculations relating to the pressure drop of the equipment
selected by them, and of the system piping so that each pump is
capable of providing the necessary output at the designed head.
Detailed calculations shall be submitted for approval prior to the
placing of order. It shall be the sole responsibility of the Sub-
Contractor to ensure that the pump head selected is adequate for the
efficient functioning of the system.
TS/Fire/S3/4
MECHANICAL WORKS
4.5 The pumps are to be factory tested to meet the requirements as

specified in CP 52. The pumps sets are to be tested complete with the
offered motor coupled to the pump. Documentary evidence of this
testing shall be submitted for approval before the pump can be
accepted.
4.6 The pump selection shall be such that the impeller diameter fitted for
the design duty is not greater than 90% of the maximum impeller
diameter which can be fitted and the duty point efficiency shall be
within 5% of the maximum efficiency.
4.7 The pump speed shall not exceed 1500 rpm. In the event that the
recourse has to be made to pumping equipment operating on speed
above 1500 rpm, approval of the S.O. shall be sought before hand.
4.8 Each pumps shall be directly driven by a totally enclosed fan cooled
motor. Motor shall be equipped with sleeve bearings and speed shall
be compatible with the pump speed. The service factor of the motor
shall be 1.15. Motor shall comply to IEC 60034-30, energy efficiency
shall be class premium IE3 and above with test standard comply to IEC
60034-2-1or IEEE 112.
4.9 The motor shall be of totally enclosed fan cooled (TEFC) (IP 55),
squirrel cage type with a synchronous speed of 1500 rpm and suitable
for connection to a 400V, 3-phase 50Hz A.C. supply and shall comply
with BS 2613. The insulation of the motor shall be of Class F with
Class B temperature rise. The torque/speed characteristic shall be
selected to match the pump operation.
4.10 For each pumping installation the system shall be complete and include
starter and controls, pressure gauges, float switches, level controls, etc.
for the proper functioning and control of the system.
4.11 Pumps and Motors
a) The pump starter panel shall be constructed with the following

minimum features:
ii) Incoming supply 'AVAILABLE' indication
iii) Main isolator 'ON' indication
iv) Duty pump selector
TS/Fire/S3/5
MECHANICAL WORKS
v) Auto-manual starting selector
vi) Pump manual "ON-OF" push buttons
vii) Pump "Running" indication
viii) Kilowatt meter: only one such meter is

required per control panel
ix) Ammeter : direct reading and approved type
x) Anti-condensation heaters
xi) Provision for pump status monitoring at the Main Fire

Alarm Panel (MAP)
xii) Provision for pump power failure indication

and audible alarm at the MAP
b) All pressure switches used shall be of approved type suitable

for Fire Protection Installation service.
c) In general, the pump design, construction and fittings shall be

d) For each pump installation, the following fittings are required

as a minimum:
ii) Globe valve at discharge
iii) Check valve at discharge
iv) Flexible connection at suction and discharge
v) Eccentric tapered reducer at suction
vii) 100 mm dia. pressure gauge at suction and

discharge
TS/Fire/S3/6
MECHANICAL WORKS
5. Operations of Sprinkler Pump and Jockey Pump
5.1 The two sprinkler pumps shall be designed and installed for automatic
operation so that any one pump shall operate when pressure in any of
the sprinkler mains has fallen to a predetermined value. The pump
shall be fully operational within 30 seconds after starting. Means shall
be provided for manual starting by reproducing the pressure reduction.
Once started, the pump shall run continuously until stopped manually.
Means shall be provided for the pumps to be set for lead-lag duty (with
changeover) and for the standby pump to operate should the duty pump
fail to function after a time lapse (adjustable) upon closing of the
starting circuit.
5.2 Jockey pump shall have the same pressure head as sprinkler pump and
shall be designed and installed for automatic operation, so that it shall
operate when the pressure in the system falls to a predetermined value
and stops operation when the pressure raised to a predetermined value.
The jockey pump shall cut off once the sprinkler pump cut in.
5.3 Means shall be provided to start and stop and the Sprinkler and the
Jockey pumps by push buttons.
5.4 Indicating lights shall be provided for start, stop and fault/trip for
sprinkler and jockey pumps. Audible alarm shall be provided for
fault/trip for sprinkler and jockey pumps.
6. Sprinkler Heads
6.1 General
The Sub-Contractor shall supply and install all sprinkler heads as

shown on the Drawings. Sprinklers shall be UL/FM/LPC approved
and listed makes and types. Sprinklers shall be of conventional pattern
designed to produce a spherical type of discharge with a proportion of
water being thrown upwards to the ceiling. Sprinklers shall be
designed with universal type deflector enabling the sprinkler to be
erected in either the upright or pendant position. All sprinkler heads
and components used shall conform to the requirements of the latest
edition of CP 52 and approval by PSB.
TS/Fire/S3/7
MECHANICAL WORKS
6.2 Standard Type Sprinklers
Exposed sprinklers for the cafe, offices, corridors, etc. shall be

designed for use with concealed pipe work and shall be installed
pendant complete with ceiling plate (rosette /escutcheon) flush to the
false ceiling. All laboratory areas, corridors, chemical storage, gas
cylinder storage etc shall be of quick respond sprinkler type.
Sprinklers shall be of standard chrome finish. Ceiling plates shall be
stainless steel. For outdoor exposed pendant sprinkler subject to
weather, the ceiling plate ( rosette / escutcheon), shall not oxidize and
cause rusty. Sprinklers shall be anti-oxidization.
6.3 Concealed sprinklers within the false ceiling shall be installed upright
without ceiling plate. The finish of sprinklers shall be as specified
above.
6.4 Concealed flush sprinklers shall be installed as shown in the Drawings.

The finish of sprinklers shall be as specified above. The finish of the
flush plate shall match that of the ceiling and to the satisfaction of the
S.O.
6.5 Dry pendent sprinklers shall be installed as shown in the Drawings.

The sprinklers shall be completed with ceiling plate (rosette) flush to
the false ceiling. Sprinklers shall be of standard chrome finish.
Ceiling plates shall be stainless steel.
6.6 Concealed sprinklers within the false ceiling shall be installed upright
without ceiling plate. The finish of sprinklers shall be as specified
above.
6.7 Where sprinklers are likely to be accidentally damaged or as shown on

the Drawings, the Sub-Contractor shall supply and install the protective
guards or cages of approved types.
6.8 The sizes of sprinkler orifices for various hazard class and the
temperature ratings for various areas shall meet the requirements of CP
52 and other relevant Authorities.
6.9 The spacing and location of sprinklers shall meet with the requirements
of CP 52 and should any part of the system shown on the Drawings
deviate from the requirements, the S.O. should be immediately
notified.
TS/Fire/S3/8
MECHANICAL WORKS
6.10 Temperature Ratings
Generally sprinkler temperature rating shall be 68oC and shall be

colour coded according to CP 52. Where sprinklers are exposed within
kitchen areas the sprinkler temperature rating shall be 79oC.
6.11 Special sprinkler heads of the type and finish as described below shall
be installed in the following areas :
a) Clean Room Concealed Flush Solder

Type Sprinkler
b) Cold Room and Freezer Dry Pendent Chrome

Plated Finish
c) Battery Room Corrosion Proof Type
d) MRI Room Stainless Steel Type
e) CT Room Stainless Steel Type
6.12 On completion of the sprinkler installation, the following number of

spare sprinkler heads shall be provided :
a) Special sprinklers 50 nos. each (concealed flush

type)
b) Ordinary Hazard 50 nos.

Sprinklers
c) Dry Pendent sprinklers 8 nos. (sizes to suit)
7. Pre-Action Sprinkler System
7.1 This section refers to the pre-action sprinkler system.
7.2 The areas to be covered are the following:
a) Library as shown in the drawings
b) Wire Centre/ LAN room
c) Other areas where indicated in the drawings
TS/Fire/S3/9
MECHANICAL WORKS
7.3 Classification of Occupancy
The system is designed to CP 52 Ordinary Hazard Group III and/or

Ordinary Hazard Group III Special including the ceiling space or as
shown in the drawings.
7.4 System Description
The system is coupled with a detection system and has a single

interlock pre-action system which affords maximum protection against
a false alarm and an accidental filling of system with water.
The system is similar to the wet sprinkler system with respect to the
pipe reticulation, diameters, sprinkler heads and spacing of sprinklers
except that the piping down stream of the Alarm Valve is not charged
with water.
Water from the pressurised pump manifold reticulation is prevented

from entering the sprinkler pipe work by a pre-action valve which is
held in the normally closed position by a connection from the
pressurised pump manifold reticulation through an orifice plate.
The system will only be activated by :
a) The electrical detector circuit (second alarm) must activate and

a sprinkler must fuse or
b) Manually actuated at the emergency trip valve or
c) Manually actuated remotely
7.5 Pre-action Valve
The pre-action valve and the complete accessories and attachments

shall be housed in a cabinet and shall be UL/FM listed and approved.
The system shall come complete with all the necessary control panels,
solenoid valves, non-tank mounted air compressor for maintaining on-
off system pressure etc. for each control valve.
All electrical enclosures and electrical wirings shall also be UL/FM

listed and approval.
TS/Fire/S3/10
MECHANICAL WORKS
7.6 Air Compressor
The air compressor is an electric motor-driven, air-cooled, single stage,

oil-less compressor complete with all the necessary wiring, filters,
pressure gauges, valves, check valves and air reservoir tank.
The air compressor shall be equipped with condensation drain points

and stainless steel mounting brackets.
The pressure tank and motor compressor units and accessories shall be
FM approved and the capacity shall be designed and sized for the
proper operation of the system. The time taken to fill up the
individual pre-action system pressure to 20 psi by the compressor
shall not be more than 30 mins.
A low pressure alarm system shall be incorporated in the pre-action

system to monitor the lowest design air pressure and above the
expected tripping point of the pre-action valve in order to provide
ample time for taking corrective action in the event of low pressure
alarm. A visual and audible alarm shall be given at the FCC and BAS
Room.
7.7 Emergency Instructions
The instruction shall be permanently displayed at the control valves.
7.8 System Drainage
As far as practicable, all pipes shall be arranged to have a slope of 4

mm in 1 meter for 50 mm and above pipes and 12 mm in 1 meter for
less than 50 mm pipes toward the installation valves, so that the entire
system can be thoroughly drained.
All trapped sections of pipe work must be drained through permanent

pipe work provided with drain valve(s) and brass plugs or cap(s)
situated at a level of not more than 3 m above floor level to facilitate
the total drainage.
8. Sprinkler Breeching Inlet/Control Valves Installation
8.1 A 150 mm diameter four-way breeching inlet shall be provided to

enable the Fire Service to pump water into the installation by the use of
their own equipment. The Fire Service inlets shall be to the approval
of the Local Authorities. The breeching head shall be PSB/FSSB
approved type to BS 5041:PT.1/PT.2, rated at 2070 kPa and shall
conform to the Specifications as stated below.
TS/Fire/S3/11
MECHANICAL WORKS
8.2 Each inlet shall consist of a 64 mm instantaneous male coupling and a

back pressure valve. The inlet shall be also protected by a cap secured
with a suitable length of chain. A 25 mm drain valve shall be fitted at
the lowest point of the riser.
8.3 All fittings shall be on the external wall of the building and enclosed in
a glass-fronted box complying with the requirement of BS 5041 : Part
5. The breeching inlets shall conform with the requirements of BS
5041 : Part 3.
8.4 The door of the box containing the inlets shall be :-
a) glazed with wired glass and indicated by the words `FIRE

SERVICE SPRINKLER INLET' painted on the inner face of
the glass in 50 mm block letters.
b) fastened only by means of a spring lock which can also be

operated from the inside without the aid of a key after the glass
has been broken; and
c) made large enough for hose to be connected to the inlets even if

the door cannot be opened and the only means of access is by
breaking the glass.
8.5 Where any part of the pipe work falls below inlet box level an
additional 25 mm drain valve shall be provided at the lowest point of
the pipe work, together with either fixed piping or an adequate length
of flexible tubing (fitted with a suitable coupling for connection to the
valve) to conduct water from the valve to a suitable drain. Where such
low level drain is fitted, a permanent notice shall be provided in 25 mm
(minimum) block letters of a suitable colour on a contrasting
background and placed in a position adjacent to the valve reading
`SPRINKLER - DRAIN VALVE' and a further permanent notice shall
be provided in the inlet box, similar in size to the indicator plates
mentioned in BS 5041 : Part 5, reading `LOW LEVEL DRAIN
VALVE IN (here stated location of the valve)'. The low level drain
valve shall be kept securely strapped and padlocked close except when
in use.
8.6 All stop valves must be "right handed" and the controlling wheels shall
be clearly marked showing in which direction the wheels are to be
turned to close the valves; there must be individual indicator which
shall show whether the respective valves are open or shut. All stop
valves controlling water supplies shall be secured open by individual
pad-locked straps.
TS/Fire/S3/12
MECHANICAL WORKS
8.7 Alarm valves shall be supplied and fixed on the main supply pipes
immediately above main stop valves. The alarm valves shall be of
approved type and shall have all necessary connections of the correct
sizes for connections to pressure gauges, water motor alarm, direct
brigade alarm, combined drain and test valve, etc.
8.8 Water motor alarms of approved type shall be supplied and fitted close
to the alarm valves. Each water motor alarm shall comprise a fire
alarm gong with a water turbine to operate when sprinklers are
operating. The water motor alarms shall be suitably mounted on the
wall above the alarm valves and all pipe connections shall not be less
than 20 mm diameter. Each water motor alarm shall be arranged to
drain through a non-ferrous fitting have in an orifice. Drain lines shall
be drained to a nearby suitable floor waste.
8.9 Pressure gauges shall be fitted immediately above such alarm valve
and immediately below the stop valve. Pressure gauges shall be of
minimum 150 mm diameter dial type. All pressure gauges shall be
fitted with approved stop cocks, calibrated in accordance with the CP
52. Means shall be provided to enable each pressure gauge to be
readily removed without interruption of water supplies. The body of
the pressure shall be brass with chrome finish or of stainless steel.
8.10 Pressure-sensor switches shall be supplied and fitted on the main

supply pipes above the alarm valves to initiate automatic starting of the
Sprinkler Pump and closing of alarm circuit. Pressure-sensor switches
shall be of approved type with provisions for adjustment of settings.
8.11 An approved equipment for proving of water supplied shall be installed

for all control valves. Assembly for "Proving of Water Supplies" (in
accordance with CP 52) shall comprise a length of 80 mm nominal
bore pipe fitted with a test control valve, an orifice plate assembly and
two test pressure gauges (with temporary flexible hose, gauge cocks
and gauge holder).
8.12 It shall be the Sub-Contractor's responsibility to determine the actual

number of sprinkler heads required and ensure that the number of
heads controlled by any set of control valves does not exceed that
allowed by CP 52.
9. Block Plan
A plan of the risk with the position of the mains top valve(s) clearly indicated
thereon shall be placed within the building where it can be readily seen by
firemen or others responding to the alarm.
TS/Fire/S3/13
MECHANICAL WORKS
10. Water Supply
The water connection shall be taken from the water tank as shown on the
Drawing. This tank will be solely utilized solely for fire protection system.
11. Piping, Valves and Fittings
11.1 General
a) Before delivery to site all pipes and fittings shall be thoroughly

cleaned, deburred and free from scale, rust, etc. Old and
damaged pipes shall be rejected, only new pipes shall be used.
No delay of work shall be allowed for any rejected pipes and
fittings. On site, all pipes and fittings shall be again checked
and thoroughly wire brushed and prime coated prior to
installation. Any open ended pipe or pipe connection left
overnight or for any considerable period shall be protected from
the entry of dirt, sand, etc. by the fixing of plastic or galvanised
iron sheet cap securely held. All pipes shall be installed with
the correct grading so that the entire system shall be self
venting and draining.
b) All exposed pipe works shall be installed so that clearance of

approximately 100 mm is left between the outside of the pipe
and the nearest wall, or equipment surface and approximately
100 mm from ceiling or slab. Pipes shall be run at a minimum
distance apart to enable them to be individually painted. Pipe
joints or fittings, will not be permitted within the thickness of
walls, floors, any partitions or below a beam. All pipes shall be
reamed out full bore after cutting.
c) All straight and vertical run of pipe more than 30 m in length

shall have dirt pockets formed from equal tees and plugs at the
low point of the risers. Before horizontal run outs are taken off
such vertical risers, air bottles shall be fitted using equal or
reducing tees at the high point of the risers. In all plant rooms
the pipe work shall be installed with flanges at intervals not
exceeding 30 m to facilitate repair or dismantling.
d) All pipe work shall be installed in accordance with CP 52 and

to the approval of the relevant Local Authorities. The Sub-
Contractor shall check and ensure that the design meets the
requirements of all authorities having jurisdiction without
additional cost to the Government.
TS/Fire/S3/14
MECHANICAL WORKS
e) When pipes pass through floors or walls which are required to

be fire resistant, the opening in the construction around the pipe
shall not exceed 25 mm average clearance and shall be fire
stopped by packing with approved fire rated material to prevent
the passage of flame or smoke. This requirement may be
disregarded where pipes pass through floors of building
requiring the protection of vertical openings which shall be
enclosed with approved non-combustible walls having fire-
resistance rating in accordance with the Building Regulations.
11.2 Anchors
a) All pipes shall be anchored as required to control the movement

of pipes. Anchors shall also be fitted in position to resist the
attempted movement due to expansion and the weight of pipe
and its contents.
b) The Sub-Contractor shall submit within four weeks from the

date of the Sub-Contract, detailed shop drawing of the pipe
anchors to the S.O. for approval.
c) The anchors shall be either welded or clamped securely to the

pipe to S.O.'s approval.
11.3 Pipe Sleeves
a) Pipes passing through walls, floors or any other partitions shall

be fitted with pipe sleeves. Sleeves for galvanised or black
steel pipes shall be of galvanised pipe off cuts. Pipe sleeves
fitted in walls or partitions shall be end flushed with the
finished plaster or other surface finishes. The space between
pipe and sleeve shall be fitted with asbestos mastic for the full
thickness of wall and floor. Pipe sleeves fitted in floors shall
generally end at 13 mm above the finished floor level, except in
Plant Rooms and other areas where 'wet floors' are expected. In
these cases the sleeves shall end at 50 mm above the finished
floor level, and tightly caulked with suitable diameter asbestos
rope.
b) Where pipes pass through fire break walls or other partitions

clearance between pipe and sleeve shall be tightly packed with
suitable fire rated compound to form a fire barrier.
c) Where necessary for poured concrete fabrications, the Sub-

Contractor shall supply the pipe sleeve and assist the Main
Contractor to locate the sleeve before the concrete is poured.
TS/Fire/S3/15
MECHANICAL WORKS
d) Generally, pipe sleeves shall be one nominal diameter larger

than the service pipe concerned except for sizes 100 mm bore
and above where they may be specially constructed for not less
than 3 mm galvanised sheet steel.
11.4 Pipe Fixings
a) Generally, hangers and supports shall be of steel of adequate

dimensions and approved design. All hangers and supports
shall be hot dipped galvanised, primed and finish coated with
approved fire resistant red paint.
b) All pipe work connected to pump sets shall be isolated from the
building structure by using flexible pipe hangers, anchors and
pipe guides. No direct connection between the building
structure and any part of the pipe work shall be allowed. Where
pipes pass through walls or floors a clearance of 25 mm around
the pipe shall be maintained. Where it is required to seal
around the pipe vibration isolating packing shall be used.
Stainless steel flexible joints shall be used for pipes installed
across a building joint.
c) Pipes shall be supported by approved means at interval not

exceeding the following :-
Pipe diameter Vertical run Horizontal run

(mm) (m) (m)
Up to 25 2.5 2.0
Up to 50 3.0 3.0
Up to 100 4.5 3.0
Above 100 6.0 3.0
d) Pipe hangers or brackets shall be properly isolated where

necessary to eliminate vibration transmissions. Pipe hangers
shall be placed not more than 60 mm from each change of
direction where possible.
e) Vertical runs of pipes shall be supported by clamps or collars

suitably supported from angles or channels in turn resting on
special spring supports fixed to the floor slab. These supports
shall be at least provided at each alternate floor slab. Where
vertical runs of pipes are turned at floor level to run
horizontally, purpose made collar and supports shall be
provided to S.O.'s approval.
f) Pipe work isolation shall be as per the section on "Vibration

Isolation and Noise Control"
TS/Fire/S3/16
MECHANICAL WORKS
g) All bolts, nuts and washers shall be hot dipped galvanized.

Lock nuts shall also be used for all hangers and bracket
supports.
11.5 Air Vents and Drains
a) Automatic air vents shall be provided at all high point of pipe

line and where necessary. It shall be completed with isolating
cock, and tail pipe arranged for visible discharge to the nearest
suitable floor drain.
b) All portions of equipment in which water may collect shall be

drained to the nearest floor waste/trap. Drains shall be
connected to equipment with unions to facilitate cleaning and
removal. The low points of pipe line shall be provided with
drain cocks. Pipe line shall be properly graded to ensure
draining of the whole system when required.
11.6 Type of Pipe work
a) The types and quality of the pipe work used shall comply with
the following schedule :-
i) Sprinkler Pipe work – Galvanized steel pipes,

BS 1387, Class B
BS EN 10255, Class B
ii) Pre-action Sprinkler - Galvanized steel pipes,

Pipe work API 5L, Class C
iii) Air Vent Pipe work - Copper, BS 659.
iv) Drain Pipe work - Galvanised steel pipes,

BS 1387, Class B
BS EN 10255, Class B
11.7 Pipe Joint
a) For black steel pipe work all joints up to 50 mm diameter shall

be made by means of screw connections. Only pipes of 50 mm
diameter or greater may be joined by welding. UL/FM/LPC
approved and listed grooved end mechanical coupling joints
may also be used.
TS/Fire/S3/17
MECHANICAL WORKS
b) For galvanised steel pipe work, all joints up to and including 60

mm diameter shall be made by means of screwed connections.
Pipe work of 65 mm diameter and above shall be joined by
means of flange connections or welding or UL/FM/LPC
approved and listed grooved end mechanical coupling joints.
Where welding is used, the weld area shall be treated and cold
galvanized.
c) In all cases where pipes are joined to flange equipment, the

appropriate mating flanges shall be used.
d) Flanges shall be of galvanized steel type. All flange joints shall

be flush and aligned, and shall be made with corrugated
jointing rings, coated on both sides with the recommended
jointing compound. All bolts shall be hexagonal-headed steel
in accordance with the provisions of BS 28 with washers and
nuts. All bolts, nuts and washers shall be hot dipped
galvanized.
11.8 Steel Pipe Fittings
a) In all cases galvanised pipe fittings shall be used on galvanised

pipe work and black pipe fittings on black steel pipe work. In
general, GI malleable iron screwed fittings shall be used for
diameter 65mm and smaller pipes. For diameter 65mm and
larger, GI wrought iron fittings shall be for welding joints and
cast iron fittings shall be for mechanical couplings. In all cases,
they shall be entirely suited to the working and test pressures of
the circuit concerned.
b) On all changes of direction, long radius elbows and sweep or

‘pitcher' tees shall be used. Bends and off-sets on black steel
pipe may be formed by pulling and/or fire setting, in these cases
the pipes shall be thoroughly de-scaled and cleaned before
fitting. Bends and off-sets formed by welding together
segmented pieces will be rejected. Reduction in the diameter
for thorough flow pipes shall be made by means of reducing
sockets. Eccentric reducing sockets shall be used on horizontal
pipes and concentric reducing sockets for vertical pipes only.
TS/Fire/S3/18
MECHANICAL WORKS
11.9 Welding
a) All welding shall be done only by skilled and experienced

welders. Any welder may be asked by the S.O. to carry out a
weld test. Should the weld not meet the required standard, the
S.O. shall have the authority demanding the removal of the
welder from the project. The Sub-Contractor shall submit a list
of names and identification or code of all welders whenever
required by the S.O. It shall be the Sub-Contractor's
responsibility to supervise the welding such that no unlisted
welders shall carry out any welding on the project. Should the
S.O. has evidence to believe that such is taking place, he
reserves the right to demand for the removal of the persons
concerned on the project.
b) All welds shall be thoroughly wire brushed after each welding.

Immediately after the S.O. is satisfied with the water testing of
the pipes, the pipe work shall be cleaned dry, thoroughly wire
brushed again and another layer of approved primer coating
applied.
11.10 Valves, Cocks, etc. General
a) All valves, cocks, etc. shall be suitable for the working and test
pressure of the system concerned and shall be UL/FM/LPC
approved and listed. Valve flanges shall be in accordance with
the BS Tables as specified for their respective service pipe
work.
Gate valves up to 50 mm BS 1010 : Part 2
Gate valves above 50 mm

Cast iron BS 5163
Steel BS EN 1984
Butterfly valves
Cast iron BS EN 593
Steel BS EN 593
Check valves
Cast iron BS EN 16767
Steel BS 1868
Copper alloy
(up to 75 mm) BS 5154 / BS EN 12288
Ball float valves BS 1212
TS/Fire/S3/19
MECHANICAL WORKS
b) Valves shall be fitted in accessible positions for operation and

repair. The connection between each valve and the adjacent
equipment shall be made either with an union or a flange for
ease of dismantling. Access openings shall be provided for
flow-switches and valves installed above ceilings.
c) Valve spindles shall be adequately lubricated with graphite, and

all glands shall be freshly packed before installation. Where
possible, all valves supplied and fitted shall be of the same
manufacture.
d) All valves, cocks, etc. shall also comply to the requirements of

the PUB.
e) All normally closed and normally open valves shall be locked

in such position with master locks so that one key may be used
to open all locks.
f) The Sub-Contractor shall provide and fix aluminium mounted

indicator plate clearly marked with a graduated scale "OPEN"
to "SHUT" for valves with non-rising stem. Each valve shall
be provided with an identification plate which indicated fit No,
sizes, service pressure rating, manufacturer's trade mark, trim
and body materials, etc.
g) All valves shall be closed by trimming the spindle in the

clockwise direction. Hand wheel shall have cast on directional
arrows.
11.11 Isolating Valves
a) Isolating valves shall be supplied and fitted generally as shown

on the Drawings. Valves up to and including 50 mm diameter
shall have bronze body with female screwed connections where
fitted to steel pipe. These valves shall be of the full-way, solid
wedge disc pattern with non-rising spindles of special brass or
cast bronze fitted with detachable aluminium alloy die casting
hand-wheels.
b) Valves 60 mm to 75 mm diameter where fitted to steel pipes

shall be of the flange cast bronze body type with non-rising
stem and similar to those as detailed above.
c) For valves of 100 mm diameter and above, the valve body shall
be of the flange cast iron body type and similar to those detailed
for valves below 75 mm diameter except that detachable hand
wheels shall be cast iron.
TS/Fire/S3/20
MECHANICAL WORKS
d) All valves shall be "right-handed" i.e. they shall be so

constructed that in order to shut the valve, the spindle must turn
clockwise. The hand wheels shall be clearly marked showing
the direction the wheel is to be turned to close the valve.
11.12 Globe Valves
a) Globe valves shall be supplied and fitted where shown on the

Drawings and where regarded essential for proper balancing
and water flow control. They shall be of the globe pattern,
screwed cast bronze body for sizes up to and including 50 mm
diameter.
b) Valves 60 mm to 75 mm diameter shall be of the flange cast

bronze body type. Valves 75 mm diameter and below,
detachable aluminium alloy die casting handwheel shall be
used.
c) Valves 100 mm diameter and above shall be of the flange cast

bronze body type with detachable cast iron handwheel.
11.13 Drain Valves/Cocks
a) Drain valves/cocks with screw connections shall be supplied

and fitted as necessary to ensure that all sections of the pipe
work and plant can be effectively drained. The sizes of drain
valves/cocks shall be as follows :-
i) Pipes up to 60 mm - 12 mm diameter
ii) Pipes 75 mm to 125 mm - 20 mm diameter
iii) Pipes 150 mm and above,

tanks, plants - not less than 25
mm diameter
iv) Drain cocks of 12 mm diameter shall be completed with

hose unions for draining down.
11.14 Check Valves
a) Spring loaded non-slam check valves shall be supplied and

fitted. They shall be of cast bronze body with female screwed
connection for size up to and including 50 mm diameter. For
sizes 60 mm to 75 mm diameter, they shall be of the flange cast
bronze body type. Valve sizes 100 mm diameter and above
shall be of the flange cast iron body type.
TS/Fire/S3/21
MECHANICAL WORKS
b) The Sub-Contractor is required to select these valves in relation

to the velocity of the water in the pipe. In all cases the valves
are required to operate silently on reversal of water flow and
shall be resilent and of non-hammering type.
11.15 Relief Valves
Relief and safety valves where fitted to pipe work shall be of the
'Enclosed Spring Loaded' type with outlet pipes terminating 150 mm
above floor level.
11.16 Ball Valves
All ball valves shall be supplied and fitted complete with back nuts,
ball float and arm. Ball floats may be of soldered copper or brass or
alternatively polytene PVC. They shall be of the low pressure type
generally and comply with BS 1212 : 1957.
11.17 Strainers
a) Strainers shall be provided where necessary and shown on the

Drawings and shall be of the in-line Y type. They shall be of
the screwed cast bronze body type up to and including 50 mm
diameter. Sizes 60 mm to 75 mm diameter shall be of the
flange cast bronze body type. For sizes 100 mm diameter and
above shall be of the cast iron type and flange. Strainer screen
shall be removable and shall be of stainless steel material.
b) All strainers shall have a ball valve incorporated and shall be

installed in such an approved manner for draining down the
strainer without disconnecting or draining down the pipe.
11.18 Pressure Gauges
150 mm diameter brass cased or stainless steel pressure gauges shall be

supplied and fitted. They shall be designed for pipe mounting and be
calibrated in metric units. All pressure gauges shall be completed with
a red pre-setting indicator. All pressure gauges shall be provided with
suitable gauge cocks.
11.19 Anti-Vibration Couplings
Piping connections to all pumps and other equipment shall be by

means of wire or fabric reinforced moulded with high pressure
convoluted rubber connectors. The fitting shall have integral flanges
and be bolted onto the pipe lines using flanges for 50 mm diameter and
larger; for smaller than 50 mm diameter, connections shall be of high
pressure hose clips and sealed with rubber plastic.
TS/Fire/S3/22
MECHANICAL WORKS
11.20 Orifice Plates
Orifice plates shall be fitted as necessary in order to assist in

hydraulically balancing the system and to provide the specified
pressure/flow condition at the sprinkler. The orifice plates shall be of
approved type and installed in accordance to CP 52 and other relevant
Authorities.
11.21 Flow Rate Measuring Equipment
Flow meters with direct readings shall be provided for each control
valve and sprinkler pump.
12. Sprinkler/Wet Riser Storage Tank
12.1 Sprinkler/Wet Riser Storage Tank
The sprinkler/wet riser transfer tank (Basement) and storage tank on

roof level serves the entire building shall be according to the tender
drawing.
Each tank compartment shall be provided with valved inlet, outlet and
drain connections; float valve, overflow connections, water level
control electrodes, compartment by-pass and water level indicators.
12.2 Level Indicators
Each water tank shall be fitted with a level indicator, located at the
front of the tank. It shall be constructed of durable, corrosion resistant
materials. The scale shall be fixed to the front of the tank and shall be
direct reading.
12.3 Floatless Switch -High & Low Level Alarm System
The water tank shall be provided with electro-tube for indication of

water levels. The following levels shall be provided:
a) For High Level Water Tank, where the water is topped up by

transfer pumping system:
i) HL 1 – Low Water Level Indication. The water in the tank

is at such a level that vortex has formed at the suction pipe.
ii) HL 2 – Water Top-up Level Indication. The water in the

tank is at one-third the capacity of the tank.
TS/Fire/S3/23
MECHANICAL WORKS
iii) HL 3 – High Water Level Indication. The water in the tank

is at 50 mm below the invert of the warning pipe.
iv) HL 4 – Water Overflow Indication. The water in the tank is

at the invert of the overflow pipe. Where the warning pipe
and the overflow pipe is common (for small water tank),
this level shall be at the top level of the warning pipe.
b) For tanks where the water is topped up directly by main incoming:
i) TL 1 – Low Water Level Indication. The water in the tank

is at such a level that vortex has formed at the suction
pipe.
ii) TL 2 – High Water Level Indication. The water in the

tank is at 50 mm below the invert of the warning pipe.
iii) TL 3 – Water Overflow Indication. The water in the tank

is at the invert of the overflow pipe. Where the warning
pipe and the overflow pipe is common (for small water
tank), this level shall be at the top level of the warning
pipe.
All the level shall be indicated in the pump Local Control Panel for the
tank as indication lamp.
A klaxon or siren shall be provided above the door of each pump room
for audible alarm indication when the water in the tank has reach Water
Overflow Level (HL 4 or HL 3).
13. Hot Dipped Galvanised Press Steel Tanks
13.1. The tanks shall comprised of sectional panels and completed with
cover, stays, cleats, nuts and washers and jointing compound
complying with S.S. 22 or B.S. 1564. The tanks shall be
compartmented with capacities not less than that indicated in the
Drawings.
13.2. The tank shall be installed above floor slab and located in the positions
shown in the drawings and shall be mounted on galvanised R.S.J. The
design of the R.S.J. support shall be submitted to the S.O. for approval,
with the Contractor’s P.E. endorsement. The R.S. J. shall be included
in this Contract and supplied by the tank supplier.
13.3. All tank plates shall be 5 mm thick and shall be hot dipped galvanised
to BS729 before delivery to site. Tank shall be erected in accordance
with manufacturer's instructions and all joints made with approved
jointing compound.
TS/Fire/S3/24
MECHANICAL WORKS
13.4. The tank covers shall not be less than 3 mm thick supported on angle
nearer cleated on the tank plate flanges. A 600 mm manhole with
hinged lid shall be provided to each compartment of all tanks.
13.5. Aluminium ladders of approved type shall be provided inside and

outside of water tanks to facilitate access into the compartment.
13.6. Each tank compartment shall be provided with valved inlet, outlet and
drain connections; float valve, overflow connections, water level
control electrodes, compartment by-pass and water level indicators as
described under the various sub-headings in the Section on "GRP Panel
Water Storage Tanks".
13.7. The tanks shall be installed in accordance with the manufacturer's

recommendations. The Contractor shall submit the catalogue and
detailed installation manual.
13.8. The Contractor shall provide a competent technical representative from

the Supplier of tank to supervise the installation of water storage tanks.
13.9. The water tank shall be electrically earthed in accordance with the
latest edition S.S. CP5.
14.1. Materials

Panel : Grade 316 stainless steel of at

least gauge 10.
nuts to be rated at least of grade
8.8.
Base frame : Galvanised structural steel

sections.

TS/Fire/S3/25
MECHANICAL WORKS
14.2. Construction
Base frame: Constructed from galvanized steel sections, welded and

grind flat. Blast clean to BS 4232 Second Quality and primed with
zinc-rich antic-corrosion primer before applying 2 coats of epoxy paint.
Anchored the base frame to the concrete plinth.
Water tight penetration: Provide factory made penetrations on panels,

by opening a hole in the panel, and welding a nipple (a short length of
pipe) of the required size and same material to panels. Provide BS PN
10 flanges to the end of the nipples for pipe connections. Where
necessary, provide nipples and flanges on both sides of the opening for
connections. Locate penetrations not more than 2.0 m way from an
access manhole.
14.3. Accessories
ladder for water tanks higher than 2.0 m, securely bolted to the side of
the tank. Locate the cat ladder below the access manhole.

Provide Handles for lifting of the manholes. Provide at least one
access manhole per tank or partition. Provide additional manhole
access such that every point in the water tank is not more than 4.0 m,
and any penetration not more than 2.0 m measured horizontally, away
from a manhole.
Air vents: Provide minimum 2 units of diameter 50mm air vents per
tank or compartment, complete with rain cowl and insect screen.

protected by a rod cage level indicators installed outside each water
tank or compartment. Provide isolation valves immediately at the
penetration to the water tank panel.
Warning pipes: Provide 1 uPVC warning pipe per tank or

compartment, terminated at a minimum horizontal distance of 100 mm
from the water tank or to an auspicious location. Provide insect screen
at the discharge end of the pipes.
TS/Fire/S3/26
MECHANICAL WORKS
Overflow pipes: Provide 1 uPVC overflow pipe per tank or

compartment, run the pipe vertically down from the overflow
penetration to ground level before terminating to the nearest internal
drain. Overflow pipes from the same tank but different compartment
may be joined at ground level before routing to the drain. Provide
insect screen at the discharge end of the pipes.

reaches a level not less than 50mm below the invert of the overflow
pipe.

15. Control and Interlocking
15.1 The Sub-Contractor shall carefully arrange for electric wiring

providing electrical interlocks as stated below. The control circuit shall
be submitted for approval before fabrication.
a) In the event of sprinkler pump activating, both visual (at control

and main alarm panel, etc.) and audible alarms shall be
energised.
b) Alarm bells shall be cancelled by means of a push button and

holding coil whilst the alarm indicating lamps shall only cut-out
after the fault has been corrected.
c) Water flow/pressure switches shall be installed for various

zones (minimum 2 zones shall be provided for each floor). In
the event of a flow of water in the pipes, the flow switch for the
respective zone shall be activated and both visual and audible
alarm for the respective zone at sub-alarm panel and main
alarm panel shall be energised.
d) If the water level in the sprinkler storage tank rises above

predetermined high level or falls below predetermined low
level, an alarm system consisting of alarm bells and indicating
(flashing) lamp shall be automatically energised.
e) The alarm bell and lamp shall be located same way around the
sprinkler tank room and maintenance room.
f) An automatic warning of failure of any one phase of the supply

to any of the sprinkler motor starting switches shall be given
visually and audibly.
TS/Fire/S3/27
MECHANICAL WORKS
g) The Sub-Contractor shall supply and install the control and

control wiring to interlock the sprinkler pumps with the
domestic water transfer pumps. This is to ensure that the
domestic water transfer pumps will not operate when the
sprinkler pump is in operation.
16. Painting and Labelling
16.1 All sprinkler, pipe work, metal work, equipment, valves, etc. supplied
and installed shall be painted to colours approved by the S.O. and in
accordance with the section on "Painting".
16.2 All items subject to corrosive air or other hazardous condition shall be
16.3 Where necessary main stop valves shall be labelled with white painted
words of minimum 50 mm high letters.
16.4 All plants shall be supplied with appropriate labels for the indicating of
the purpose of the various components. "On" and "Off" position of all
switches, "service", "test" and "isolated" positions of withdrawal circuit
breakers, phase markings of motors, circuit breakers, bus bars, relay
and instruction function etc. shall be clearly labelled in a manner
16.5 Labels shall be of an approved material to ensure that the letterings are
permanent. The sizes of labels and letterings on them shall be
adequate to ensure clarity and the lettering shall be of a contrasting
colour to the label background colours.
16.6 Locating plates shall be supplied and fixed on the outside of an

external wall as directed by the FSSB, BCA, local fire authorities, or
S.O., bearing the following words "SPRINKLER STOP VALVE
INSIDE" in raised letters or other approved type of letters.
TS/Fire/S3/28
MECHANICAL WORKS
17. Balancing, Testing and Commissioning
17.1 General
a) The Sub-Contractor shall provide a complete set of testing

equipment for the proper and complete testing of the sprinkler
installation.
b) The instruments, equipment and labour required for conducting

these tests and demonstrations shall be provided by the Sub-
Contractor.
c) The Sub-Contractor shall supply all material and labour and

provide all notices and pay all fees in connection with all
necessary tests to be carried out to the approval of the relevant
authorities, PUB, FSSB, BCA and the S.O.
d) The installation shall be under the charge of the Sub-Contractor

during the commissioning period, at which time the Sub-
Contractor shall advise the Employer in all matters regarding
the commissioning, operation, maintenance, servicing and
trouble shooting of the system.
17.2 Pumps
All pumps shall be checked for flow rates, pressures and RPM.
17.3 Pipe work
All water pipe work shall be hydro-statically tested to 200 psi or 1.5
times the working pressure whichever is greater and this test pressure
shall be maintained for 24 hours. During this test all welded joints
shall be hammered.
17.4 Flow Switches
All flow switches shall be tested after installation. Areas defined by

indicating lamps and/or alarm bells shall be checked for correct
operation. All switches shall be correctly set to the satisfaction of the
S.O.
TS/Fire/S3/29
MECHANICAL WORKS
17.5 Proving of Water Supplies
a) The Sub-Contractor shall carry out proving tests of the water

supplies at the commissioning of the sprinkler installation and
subsequently as required by the Local Authorities, such as
FSSB, BCA, etc. or the S.O.
b) During the proving tests, the test control valve shall be

manipulated to control the rate of flow which shall be precisely
measured by ascertaining the pressure loss across the `standard
test orifice' inserted in the drain pipe. The test pressure gauges
shall be fitted to the tapping on either side of the orifice plate.
The test pressure gauges shall be of the diaphragm type and
shall have a degree of accuracy within 1.5 per cent of full scale
reading of 1 bar. All testing procedures including periodic
check tests shall be in accordance with CP 52.
17.6 Test Records
At the completion of the installation, the Sub-Contractor shall submit

four (4) copies of the Records of Test.
17.7 Reliability Tests
a) When the preparatory tests have been concluded successfully

and the Sub-Contractor has notified the S.O. that the
installation is ready to work, each section of the installation will
be required to operate either continuously or intermittently as
may be required without failure of any kind for a period of one
calendar month.
b) Should any failure occur due to, or arising from, faulty fittings,
materials or workmanship, the reliability test period of one
calendar month shall be recommenced after the Sub-Contractor
has remedied the cause of failure to the satisfaction of the S.O.
17.8 Certification of Completion
On completion of the sprinkler system, it is the Sub-Contractor's

responsibility to submit a Professional Engineer's Certification on the
sprinkler pumps including motors, starters, panels and wirings
indicating compliance to CP 52. The Sub-Contractor's Professional
Engineer's submission shall include certified pump performance
curves. The Sub-Contractor shall also undertake to submit his
Professional Engineer's Certificate on supervision in accordance with
the authorities submission requirements.
TS/Fire/S3/30
MECHANICAL WORKS
18. Maintenance Equipment
18.1 In addition to the items of spares specified elsewhere the following

items or equipment shall be provided and clearly marked for their
specific usage :-
1- spare ball float for each different type of ball valve used.
1- spare pressure gauge for each different type of pressure

gauge used.
3- keys for each different padlock used. Each key shall be

provided with a brass tag with identification clearly
engraved.
1- hand wheel for each different size of valve used.
2- grease gun equipment for each type of nipple provided.
1- spares box complete with the numbers of sprinkler

heads as specified previously and two suitable sprinkler
spanners. Packing shall be suitable for storage over a
long period of time.
8- straps together with copper padlocks.
18.2 Two sets of spanners, gland keys and other special tools required for
testing or dismantling such items of equipment as pumps, valves, etc.
shall be provided by the Sub-Contractor, together with a suitable
holding rack arranged for wall fixing for one set, and padlocked box
for the other.
18.3 Three keys shall be provided for each size of air cock, automatic air
valve or other valve requiring special tools to operate, together with
duplicate keys for any clockwise mechanism or locks on instrument,
safety valves, etc. supplied under this Sub-Contract.
18.4 The costs for these equipment, tools and spares shall be included in the
main body of Tender. All of these equipment, tools and spares shall be
supplied to the Employer at the written instruction of the S.O.
19. Maintenance Certificate
The Sub-Contractor shall include in his tender free maintenance and

subsequent maintenance agreement for the issue of maintenance certificate
endorsed by a Professional Engineer as requested by FSSB/BCA.
TS/Fire/S3/31
MECHANICAL WORKS
SECTION 4 – EMERGENCY VOICE INTER-COMMUNICATION

SYSTEM
1. General

of the Emergency Voice Inter-communication System.
1.2. The Emergency Voice Inter-communication System shall comply with

SS 546 "Code of Practice for Emergency Voice Communication
System in Buildings" and latest version of "Code of Practice for Fire
Precautions in Buildings".
1.3. The Fireman Intercom and Person With Disabilities Emergency Voice
Inter-communication System shall link to the respective satellite fire
command centre at S16, E3A, COM2 or other designated fire
command centre in class A loop.
2. System Components
2.1 Vestibule Equipment
This consists of an addressable master control console made of heavy

sheet metal housing vertically mounted panels that make up the master
control.
The master control shall consist the following units as required:
a) A Master Handset Panel including Handset.

b) Handset Selector/Annunciator Panel/s.
c) Common Trouble Indicator Panel.
d) Handset Supervisory Modules.
e) Recording Unit
2.2 Remote Equipment
Remote equipment shall consist of the following items:
a) Portable Handset (stored in vestibule panel).

b) Handset Jack.
TS/Fire/S4/1
MECHANICAL WORKS
3. Specification
The Emergency Voice Inter-communication System shall provide handset

communication in accordance with the following Specification and shall
comply with SS 546. Supervision, audible warning devices and auxiliary
power provision shall also be in accordance with the following Specification.
3.1. Vestibule Equipment
a) Master Handset Panel
The Master Handset Panel shall provide a handset shall be

moulded of high-impact ABS plastic in signal red and equipped
with retractable cord. It shall be housed in a vertical-style all
metal module which occupies one panel space in the vestibule
console. The electronic circuit board which is mounted behind
the handset shall contain
i) Call Generator Circuit.

ii) Communication Circuits.
iii) Busy Tone Generator.
iv) Supervisory Circuits.
b) Handset Selector/Annunciator
Each selector/annunciator unit shall accommodate remote

handset zones and shall be equipped with push on/push off
selector switches and LED "CALL" annunciators and LED
fault indicators in accordance with the number of handset as
Each selector/annunciator unit shall also provide plug-in

facilities in accordance with the number of handsets as
shown in the Drawing for the supervisory module.
Incoming calls shall be indicated at the master control panel by

an audible signal and a flashing of the appropriate annunciator
LED.
Depressing the corresponding selector switch shall illuminate

the annunciator LED continuously. Lifting the master handset
shall silence the audible call signal. Additional handset zones
calling shall hear a busy tone. A shorted, open and grounded
handset line shall be indicated by the corresponding fault
indicator LED. A shorted line shall be automatically excluded
from selection. Handset line troubles shall also be from
selection. Handset line troubles shall also be summed and
indicated by an LED designated "HANDSETS" on the trouble
indicator panel.
TS/Fire/S4/2
MECHANICAL WORKS
c) Line Supervisory
The handset line supervisory shall operate in conjunction with

the handset selector and master handset. Its function shall
monitor the handset lines connected to terminals and shall issue
signals according to line state, further to enable handset zone
selection.
d) Trouble Indicator Panel
The trouble indicator panel shall contain all the LED trouble
indicator lamps (amber), an incandescent general "TROUBLE"
indicator, a "SYSTEM READY" LED indicator (green), an
audible device, a lamp-test push-button and a "SILENCE"
pushbutton.
Any individual trouble LED activation shall be summed to

activate the "TROUBLE" light and audible device.
All trouble indication lamps and LED's of the entire system

shall be activated by depression of the lamp-test button and
extinguished by releasing the button.
All audible device throughout the systems shall be silenced by

momentary depression of the "SILENCE" button.
The panel shall be of heavy metal sheet which occupies a

vertical panel on the vestibule console.
3.2. Remotely Located Equipment
a) Remote Handset
The remote handset shall be moulded of high-impact ABS

plastic in SIGNAL red, and equipped with a retractable cord.
The remote handset enclosure shall be constructed of heavy-

gauge steel, finished in red enamel with conduit knock-out at
top and bottom.
The enclosure faceplate shall be of red enamelled steel with a

combination break glass/key operated door. Handset that used
for Person With Disabilities shall be red with handicap signage
and with slash lock. For Fireman intercom that used in
conjunction with Person With Disability, the enclosure shall be
red with slash lock and label with hard tagging as “For Fireman
and PWD”. Mounting height for handset shall be 1200mm
measure from finishing floor level to top panel.
TS/Fire/S4/3
MECHANICAL WORKS
The end-of-line resistor shall be 10 kilo ohm per watt, mounted

on the terminal block on top of the handset base plate. Screw
terminals shall be provided for ease of installation.
b) Portable Handset
The portable handset shall be moulded of high impact ABS

plastic in red and equipped with a retractable cord and phone
plug.
Five (5) sets of portable handset shall be provided.
c) Remote Handset Jack
The remote handset jack shall consist of a phone jack on a

stainless steel plate for mounting on a standard single
gang electrical box.
3.3. Recording Unit
A cassette tape recorder/player shall be provided at the Fire Command

Centre with 120 minutes tape duration to record simultaneously all
alarm signals and voice traffic over the two-way fireman intercoms on
the track. An one hours uninterrupted power supply (UPS) shall be
installed for the power supply back up.
3.4. Remote Controller Unit
For the combined Fireman and Person with Disability emergency

voice intercom, the communication shall be separated between each
other using remote controller unit. The remote controller unit shall
comprise of:
a) Controller board
b) Power indicator
c) RCU ID selector switches
d) Power supply terminals
e) Remote handsets (not less than 10 nos.) terminals
f) Zone Call/Fault indicators
g) Data communication indicators
h) Data/Audio terminals
The remote controller units shall link to the fire command centre
emergency voice inter-communication System panel and separated as
Fireman Intercom and Person with Disabilities (PWD) intercom.
TS/Fire/S4/4
MECHANICAL WORKS
4. Touch Screen Emergency Voice Inter-Communication System
4.1. The linking of the master touch screen emergency voice inter-
communication system, which consist of master fireman and person
with disabilities intercom, to the remote building fireman intercom
panels shall be through single mode 12 core fibre optic. Convertor and
all necessary accessories shall be provided for a complete system.
4.2. The Master Emergency Voice Inter-communication system provide for

both fireman and person with disabilities, system shall be of digital
touch screen panel and tested by third party accredited laboratory. The
system provides control and transmission of signals and line
monitoring that complies with SS 546 and in accordance with the
following: -
a) Two ways selective communication between Master Control

Panel and a specified number of Remote Handsets located at
designated points on each floor of the building and link to the
local 2-way emergency voice communication system
b) Selective handset CALL enunciators at the Master Control

Panel.
c) Supervision of complete system, including wiring to all

Remote Handsets, with audible and visual warning of any
system malfunction and their locations.
d) Provision of an automatic standby power supply for backup

purposes.
4.3. The system’s equipment shall be divided into the following: -
a) Equipment located inside the Fire Command Centre of the

building.
b) Remote equipment at various points throughout the building.
c) System shall be able to communicate in 3-way communication,

such as local building handset, local building FCC panel
handset and satellite touch screen panel handset.
4.4. It shall able to link to all remote fireman intercom panels through
communication module, either digital or analogue. The system shall be
able to expand in future through adding communication module
4.5. The communication module shall support up to 16 no. fireman

intercom panel and each module communication line shall support 150
fireman intercoms. The maximum supported fireman intercom zoning
shall not be less than 2250 per communication module.
TS/Fire/S4/5
MECHANICAL WORKS
4.6. The system shall consist of battery charger module, fault module
indicator, master handset, zone selector module in touch screen,
Central Processing Unit, LCD touch screen, graphic user interface,
voice recorder, printer etc. The CPU shall be of window base operating
system. The touch screen module shall operate at 5VDC, 500mA
maximum.
a) Battery charger module
The Battery Charger Module comprises of the rectification

circuit and charging circuit. It is a highly efficiency switching
power supply with charger which provide DC power supply to
the system and at the same time it will tickle charge the
batteries. During AC power failure, it will provide backup
power supply to the system.
i. Digital Volt/Ampere Meter

ii. Volt/Ampere select LED/push button
iii. Charger fault LED
iv. Battery fault LED
v. Battery high fault LED
vi. Battery low fault LED
vii. Boost charge LED/push button
viii. AC power LED
ix. DC power LED
b) Fault Indicator Module
The common Trouble Indicator Module comprises of LED

indicators for fault monitoring on Battery, Charger, Master,
Remote, and Privacy.... etc. It has 3 other push buttons for
testing of system, silencing of buzzer and toggling of private
on-line / off-line. It also has a general fault lamp to indicate
any fault present.
i. Fault buzzer
ii. Fault LED
iii. Battery fault LED
iv. Charger fault LED
v. Master fault LED
vi. Remote fault LED
vii. Private line ON LED
viii. Privacy mode push button
ix. Buzzer silence push button
x. Lamp test push button
TS/Fire/S4/6
MECHANICAL WORKS
c) Master Handset Module
The Master Handset Module comprises of the Master Handset,

which is used to communicate with the Remote Handsets
d) Handset selector Module
The remote handset selector module is a touch screen module.

Incoming and outgoing call can be made by using graphic user
interface (GUI). The display shall consist of the following
i. Selected selector (Max. 60 Zone per page) window tab

ii. Unselected selector(s) window tab
iii. Handset zone name, push buttons and CALL/FAULT
indicators
1. Red flashing: Remote call or Remote on hold

(Privacy mode ON)
2. Red steady: Master & Remote communication
established
3. Yellow steady: Remote fault
iv. System date/time

v. Current selector configuration tab
vi. System status icon
vii. Add/Remove selector tab
viii. Current selector log
ix. System log history
x. System software info
TS/Fire/S4/7
MECHANICAL WORKS
e) Recorder Module
The EVC Digital recorder records all the voice traffic when the
EVC system is in use.
i. LCD Display
ii. Power indicating LED
iii. Hard Disk Drive Activity LED
iv. Power ON/OFF button
v. Input 1 status LED for paging
vi. Input 2 status LED for handset
vii. Input 3 status LED for paging and handset
viii. Navigation & Control buttons
ix. USB port
x. Speaker
xi. Alarm LED
xii. Record LED
f) Touch Screen Panel
The touch screen panel shall be of 15 inch thin-film transistor

(TFT) LCD screen, high-resolution, dimmable wide-screen
display with window embedded operating system. System is to
operate at 5VDC with maximum of 500mA and with 260mA at
standby mode. The system shall have a memory of 10MB with
storage space of 2GB, it shall operate at temperature between
0oC to 50oC with a maximum relative humidity of 90%
The panel shall provide with USB port, Ethernet port, RS485
port, receiver port, voice input and output. The system shall
have the data logging function for the recording of the events,
alarm, history and printing. Software shall be able to export all
the events, alarm and history to external drive. The touch
screen panel shall comply to EN55011 for the Emission of
Radio Interference.
g) Printer unit
The printer unit shall print out all the events , fault and history.
Printer shall integrate with the touch screen panel.
TS/Fire/S4/8
MECHANICAL WORKS
5. Operation
4.1. The Supervised Emergency Voice Inter-communication System

provides firemen with two-way communication between remote
points in the building and the master control panel. Lifting of any
remote handset, or the plugging in of any remote portable handset,
initiate an audible signal and flashes an annunciator light on the master
control panel. When the master handset is lifted the audible panel is
silenced and depression of the appropriate selector button switches off
the adjacent flashing light.
4.2. Depression of the selector button(s) also established communication

with the remote telephone(s) selected. As intercepted tone (or busy
signal) will be heard at remote phones not selected by the master
control panel.
4.3. Communication by telephone handset may be between the control

location and any one or more remote telephones, or between any
number of remote telephones, thus providing a telephone 'Conference'
Communication network.
4.4. The entire system is under constant surveillance by electronic

supervision.
System faults are indicated immediately at the control location. The
control panel signals indicated the type of fault and its location within
the system, providing rapid recognition of faults in the handset lines
and emergency power charging circuits.
6. Wiring
All wiring shall be fire rated conforming to the requirement of SS546 and
shall be installed in conduit/trunking.
7. Power Supply
The Emergency Voice Inter-communication System shall be supplied and

installed with emergency power supply/stand by power supply as per the
requirements of the relevant regulations.
TS/Fire/S4/9
MECHANICAL WORKS
6. Signage
Signage shall be installed for all Emergency Voice Inter-communication

System that used for person with disabilities. The signage shall be 250mm by
100mm engraved tag with white wording and red background as per the
requirements of the relevant regulations.
Use handset for help
Operation Instruction
1) Slide down to open as indicated

2) Lift Handset to talk for assistance
3) Pick up handset when there is a tone (i.e. incoming call)
TS/Fire/S4/10
MECHANICAL WORKS
SECTION 7 – FIRE EXTINGUISHERS / FIRE HOSEREEL SYSTEM
I FIRE EXTINGUISHERS
1. General
1.1 This section covers the supply, delivery, installation and twelve (12)
months free maintenance and warranty of the various types of fire
extinguisher.
1.2 The location, type and capacities of all fire extinguisher are as indicated in
the Drawings.
1.3 All mounting brackets shall be of approved type suitable for the location
where they installed. The performance of all extinguishers shall be to the
approval of the applicable local authorities.
1.4 All fire extinguisher shall be provided with Singapore recognized third
party accredited laboratory approved labels and to the approved ratings
and to SS 578: 2012.
1.5 All fire extinguishers installed in common areas, e.g. corridor shall be
provided with a stainless steel cabinet complete with a thumbturn lock in
a front glass panel enclosure. The cabinet shall be manufactured from
minimum (16 SWG) 1.6 mm gauge stainless steel sheet using folded
sections.
2. Construction
2.1 The construction of each extinguisher shall be such that it can be handled
easily and is simple to operate by any untrained personnel for
extinguishing isolated fires.
2.2 Each extinguisher shall consists of a sealed pressure charge with solid
drawn alloy steel body, a head assembly and discharge nozzle and safety
devices to prevent accidental discharge.
2.3 The external of each extinguisher shall be painted `red' in accordance with
BS 381C.
2.4 The necessary operating, maintenance and reloading instruction and date
of last service shall be clearly displayed permanently on the body.
3. CO2 Extinguishers
CO2 Extinguishers shall be manufactured to comply with BS 3326.
TS/Fire/S7/1
MECHANICAL WORKS
4. Dry Chemical Extinguisher
Dry powder chemical extinguishers shall be manufactured to comply with BS

3465.
II FIRE HOSE REEL SYSTEM
1. General

the Fire Hose Reel System. The water connection shall be from the
supply pipe as indicated in the Drawings and is to be provided with outlet
connections, valves, etc.
1.2 All fire hosereel installed in common areas, e.g. corridor shall be provided
with a steel cabinet complete with a thumbturn lock in a front glass panel
enclosure. The cabinet shall be manufactured from minimum (16 SWG)
1.6 mm gauge galvanised iron steel sheet using folded sections. It shall be
spray painted with a coat of anti-rust primer and two coats of enamel paint
of colour to S.O.'s approval. Where fire hosereel that expose to weather,
whether indicated or not in the drawing, it shall be of stainless 304 type
with red wording indicated “Fire hosereel”.
1.3 The whole of the works covered by this section of the Specification shall
be carried out strictly in compliance with the latest edition of the
following :
a) Singapore Standard CP 575 Code of Practice for Fire Hydrant

Systems and Hose Reels
b) Rules and Regulations of the Building and Construction Authority

and the Fire Safety and Shelter Bureau
c) Singapore Standard CP 48 Code of Practice for Water Services
d) All other authorities having jurisdiction over the installation and

the carrying out of this contract works in the locality
TS/Fire/S7/2
MECHANICAL WORKS
Materials for Installation
1.4 The complete system pipe work shall be carried out in Type ‘Y’ copper
pipes conforming to EN1057: 1996.
1.5 All fixings, hangers, brackets, etc. shall be of hot dipped galvanised steel.
Details of all pipe fixings shall be shown in the Drawings. Spacing of
fixings shall not exceed the following:
__________________________________________________________
Size of Interval for Horizontal Interval for Vertical
Pipe (mm) run in metre run in metre
__________________________________________________________
Up to 40 1.2 m 1.2 m
50 1.8 m 1.8 m
75 2.0 m 2.0 m
__________________________________________________________
1.6 All fittings supplied and installed for the hose reel system shall conform
to the following:
a) Hose reels for fixed installation : BS 5274
b) Hoses for fire-fighting purposes : BS 3169
c) Ball Valve : BS 1212
d) Stop valves up to 50 mm : BS 1010
e) Gate valves above 50 mm : BS 5163
f) Check Valves : BS 5153 (M)
g) Pressure gauges : BS 1780
TS/Fire/S7/3
MECHANICAL WORKS
2. Hose Reels
2.1 The hose reel shall be of swing, exposed or recessed type as indicated in
the Drawings. Each hose reel shall have a length of 30 m and a bore of 25
mm unless indicated otherwise, and shall be made of non-kinking
reinforced rubber hose complying to BS 3169 terminating with "shut off"
type nozzle and fitted with 25 mm screw down stop valve at the inlet
conforming to BS 1010. Hose reels should be suitable for operation at a
working pressure up to 6 bars.
2.2 The hose reel shall be type tested by a recognised testing laboratory to
meet EN671-1 and shall be inspected under authority approved batch
inspection scheme.
2.3 Particular care should be exercised when fixing and positioning recessed
swing type hose reels so that they can swing in and out freely and easily
from their normal position to operating position.
2.4 The nozzle shall be capable of giving a cone shaped spray pattern and a jet
type pattern.
3. Flow Rate and Pressure Requirement
As a minimum, the water supply to hose reels shall be such that the most
hydraulically remote hose reel will provide a jet of at least 10 m in length at a
flow rate of at least 0.4 l/s and a minimum static pressure of 2.0 bar shall be
required at the entry to each hose reel with the use of a 6 mm nozzle.
4. Water Supply
The water supply shall be taken from the appropriate storage tank or direct from
the mains as indicated in the Drawings. For supply from storage tank, the tanks
shall be provided with all associated alarm and level controls, valves, pipe work
etc.
5. Hose Reel Pumping System
5.1 General
The Contractor shall supply and install:
a) pumps complete with motors and inertia blocks. Each pump shall
be able to provide the required full flow for the system. Each set
shall consist of two (2) pumps complete with motors, one (1)
pump shall be on duty standby.
b) pressure gas filled tanks (if shown in the Tender Drawings).
TS/Fire/S7/4
MECHANICAL WORKS
c) valves, pressure switches, gauges and other accessories that would

enable the system to operate efficiently.
d) one (1) main control panel for operating the system.
e) water tank low level alarm and interlock system with pumps.
5.2 Performance
a) Each pump shall be able to supply a minimum flow at required

pump head as indicated in drawings.
b) The pump rated efficiency when operating at full capacity shall not
be less than 65%.
c) All pumps shall be manufactured in the country of origin of the

d) The pump selection shall be such that the impeller diameter fitted
for the design duty is not greater than 90% of the maximum
impeller diameter which can be fitted and the duty point efficiency
shall be within 5% of the maximum efficiency.
5.3 Pumps and Motors
a) Each pump shall be able to supply the minimum flow at the

required head specified. It shall be the sole responsibility of the
Contractor to ensure that the pump head selected is adequate for
the efficient functioning of the system. Detailed calculation of
pump heads shall be submitted to the S.O. for approval prior to
purchase of pumps.
b) The pumps shall be of the centrifugal end-suction type with

performance characteristics as indicated in the Drawings. Pump
shall be of stainless steel with approved mechanical seal. Motor
couplings shall be of the flexible pin bush type. Pump and motor
shall be mounted on a common base frame which shall be treated
to resist corrosion and the whole assembly elevated on a concrete
plinth.
c) The pump motors shall be of the drip proof (IP 55), totally
enclosed fan cooled squirrel cage with a synchronous speed of
1500 rpm type and shall be suitable for connection to a 400 volts
3-phase 50 Hz A.C. supply. The torque/speed characteristics shall
be selected to match the pump operation.
TS/Fire/S7/5
MECHANICAL WORKS
d) The pump must start automatically and the starting device must be
of an approved pattern, set to operate when the pressure in the
outlet mains falls below 95% of the operating pressure. Pump
shall automatically stop when the pressure in the outlet mains
reaches maximum operating pressure. Duty and standby pumps
must be automatically primed at all times.
e) The standby pump shall be so arranged that it will operate

automatically on a failure for any reason of the duty pump.
f) All pumps shall be capable of being individually started and

stopped manually.
g) An auto-changeover switch shall be installed in the control panel.

This switch will change the status of duty pump to the standby
status and the other standby pump to the duty status after each
pumping operation.
5.4 Installation
a) In general, the pump design, construction and fittings shall be

b) For each pump installation, the following fittings are required as a

minimum :
ii) Check valve at discharge
iii) Flexible connections at suction and discharge
iv) Eccentric tapered reducer at suction
v) Concentric tapered reducer at discharge
vii) 100 mm dia. pressure gauge complete with stop cock at

suction and discharge
TS/Fire/S7/6
MECHANICAL WORKS
5.5 Pump Starter Panel
a) The pump starter panel shall be of approved construction with the

following minimum features:
ii) Incoming supply, ‘Available’ indication
iii) Main isolator ‘ON’ indication
iv) Auto-manual starting selector (each pump)
v) Pump manual “ON-OFF” push buttons (each pump)
vi) Pump “STOP”, “RUNNING”, “FAULT” indications (each

pump)
vii) Hose reel pump status monitoring at the Main Alarm Panel
(MAP) as per Drawings
viii) Lamp test push button
ix) Alarm Silence Switch
x) Hose reel pump power failure indication and audible alarm

at MAP as per Drawings
xi) Tank low level indication
xii) Contacts for BAS interfacing
xiii) Ammeter with selector switch
xiv) Voltmeter with selector switch
b) The Contractor shall submit details of the pump starter panel

complete with the control circuit and wiring connection drawing
for the S.O.'s approval prior to construction.
c) All pressure switches used shall be of approved type suitable for

Fire Protection Installation service.
d) A framed up control circuit diagram shall be mounted besides the

starter panel.
TS/Fire/S7/7
MECHANICAL WORKS
5.6 Electrical Installation
a) The electrical installation associated with power supply to motors

shall be in accordance with SS : CP 5 and PUB requirements. All
equipment supplied and installed shall operate effectively and
efficiently under local climatic conditions and shall comply with
the requirements of the Section "Electrical".
b) The Contractor shall ensure that the pumps are supplied by the
normal source of electrical supply as well as by the emergency
source. The electrical supply shall terminate his electrical line to
an isolator.
c) All cabling from isolator to main control panel and to pump motor
shall be MICS/PVC insulated installed in cable tray.
5.7 Pressure Gauges
Pressure gauges where required shall have a range and calibration suitable
for the duty required with normal operating pressure at the mid-point of
the range of the gauge with percentage error of not more than 1% of mid
range. All tapping for pressure gauges shall be provided with a gauge
cock and syphon tubes. The body shall be of brass finished with chrome
or of stainless steel.
5.8 Pressure Tank

b) The tank shall be provided with heavy duty butyl diaphragm to SS

375.

air.
d) The tank shall provide an effective draw-off capacity within cut-in

and cut-off pressure as indicated in Drawings.
e) All pressure tank shall come with CFI's approval.
5.9 Pressure Switch
Pressure switch shall be heavy duty with stepless adjustable cut-in/out

pressure adjustments. The pressure range shall be selected to suit the
system design (15 p.s.i. - 50 p.s.i.). It shall be of corrosion-resistant and
weatherproof construction.
TS/Fire/S7/8
MECHANICAL WORKS
5.10 Booster Pump Operation
The control circuit shall enable automatic and manual operations of the
group.
a) Automatic Operation


(P2), when the duty pump is activated, the standby pump
shall be activated. Both duty and standby pumps shall be
de-activated when the required pressure is attained. Start
and stop indicating lights shall be provided for each pump.
activated.



activated when the following occurs:-
Overload trip of pump.
Failure operation of duty pump.
The bell shall be canceled when acknowledged. However, the indicating red light
shall continue until the fault is corrected.
b) Manual Operation
i) Either one or both pumps shall be capable of being started

and stopped by their respective push buttons.
ii) The control panel and circuit proposal shall be submitted

by the Contractor to the S.O. for approval before
construction.
TS/Fire/S7/9
MECHANICAL WORKS
6. Floatless Switch Low Level Alarm System
6.1 The electrodes shall be installed at the roof water storage tank. The relay
control panel shall be installed at the water pump rooms or as shown on
the Drawings.
6.2 The low level control and alarm system shall have the following features:
a) The electrodes at the storage tanks shall stop the duty pump at
pre-determined level.
b) The low level alarm shall be activated when water in tank falls to
the pre-determined low level and pumps shall be cut-off (whether
automatic or manual).
c) The low level alarm shall be activated when the water level falls to
the pre-determined ‘danger’ low level in the storage tank.
d) A klaxon or siren and lamp shall be provided above the door of

each pump room for audible alarm indication.
e) The audible alarm shall be canceled upon reset, whereas the light
shall persist until the fault is corrected.
f) The control panel shall have but not limited to the following:
i) low level indicating light for storage tanks

ii) audible alarm muting push button
iii) alarm reset push button
g) The electrodes shall be of the water contact low voltage type of

stainless steel construction.
7. Testing
7.1 Before any water is introduced into the hose reel, the supply to it should
be thoroughly flushed out to ensure that no harmful matter is passed into
the reel. This is particularly important for automatic hose reels. After
flushing out, the tubing should be run out and the water turned on to
establish that the assembly is fully operational.
7.2 On completion of installation, all new systems including external piping

should be tested hydrostatically for 24 hours at not less than 150 psi or 1.5
time of the working pressure, whichever is greater.
TS/Fire/S7/10
MECHANICAL WORKS
7.3 The two topmost and remote hose reels should be discharged
simultaneously and the discharge rate and horizontal throw of each jet
shall be ascertained.
7.4 The test shall be repeated. This time a simulated mechanical or electrical
failure of the duty pump shall be arranged, and the ability of the standby
pump to come into service automatically and to maintain the required
outputs shall be tested.
7.5 A permanent record of all initial inspections and acceptance tests should
be prepared by the Contractor and submitted to the S.O.
7.6 This should record:
a) Date and time for inspection or test.
b) Person carrying out the test.
c) Test results noted.
d) Any external factors significantly affecting the results.
e) Follow-up action required.
f) Work carried out as a result of (e) with date and result of retest.
8. Hose Reel Notices
8.1 Operating instructions shall be affixed to the wall in a prominent position

adjacent to the reel.
8.2 Hose reels located in recesses or cabinets shall bear the words ‘Fire Hose
Reel’ on the door in red letters at least 50 mm high on a white
background.
8.3 All notices shall be prominently displayed and they shall not be
unreasonably affected by weathering or by corrosion caused by industrial
processes in the vicinity. The Contractor is to submit details of the
notices for the approval of the S.O. prior to installation.
9. Painting
All pipe work shall be painted as per the section on ‘Painting’.
TS/Fire/S7/11
MECHANICAL WORKS
10. Underground Pipe work
All underground pipes and fittings shall be wrapped with 4 mm thick glass woven
fabric reinforced coat for pipes. All underground pipes shall be tested for leaks
before being wrapped with protective coating and covered with backfill.
11. Maintenance
11.1 Hose reels shall be subjected to regular inspection to ensure that the inlet
valve, the automatic on/off valve (if any), glands, tubing and shut-off
nozzle are sound and free from leaks, and also to ensure that the outlet of
the nozzle is not choked.
11.2 Some nozzles, in addition to giving a jet stream, are also capable of
producing a cone spray. In these cases, the correct functioning of each
role shall be checked.
11.3 The booster pumps and their associated mechanical and electrical
equipment shall be checked monthly for their proper functioning as
required in the Specification.
11.4 Once a year the hose shall be completely run out and subject to
operational water pressure to ensure that the hose is in good condition and
that all couplings are water-tight. A flow test shall be carried out to
ensure that a water discharge of at least 0.4 l/s can be achieved.
11.5 All defects shall be rectified in the shortest possible time to ensure that the
installed equipment is restored to a satisfactory condition in as short a
time as possible.
TS/Fire/S7/12
MECHANICAL WORKS
SECTION 11 – CONVENTIONAL FIRE ALARM SYSTEM
1. GENERAL

warranty of the complete electrical fire alarm system installation as
1.2. The fire alarm system shall be designed and installed in accordance
with the latest edition of Singapore Standard SS 645, BS EN54 : Part
2 & 4. It shall be type tested by a recognised testing laboratory to meet
BS5839 Part 4 and the requirements of the local authorities shall be
inspected under recognized third party accredited laboratory in Singapore
Batch Inspection Scheme.
a) All fire alarm panels shall be approved by FSSD.
b) All fire alarm accessories shall be type tested.
c) Compliances with the rules and regulation of the Building and

Construction Authority
1.3. All equipment proposed to be used for this system shall have obtained
approval from the international recognised testing laboratories such as
UL, FM or LPC, i.e. equipment shall be listed. Two copies of the
relevant approval certificates shall be submitted with the Tender.
1.4. All main equipment and devices shall be produced by the same
manufacturer. This applies also to the detectors, control units and any
peer to peer network equipment. System formed by equipment from
different manufacturers will not be accepted.
1.5. Tenderers shall note that the Tender submitted must be based on the
requirements of the Tender Drawings and Specification. Alternative
offer will only be considered provided that the basic tender offer is in
full compliance with the requirements of the tender drawings and
specification. Any alternative offer submitted must be supported by
detailed description with clause to clause comparison on
compliance/non-compliance with the requirements of the Tender
Specification and the cost implication for each deviated item. Any
non-compliance to the requirements of this clause may result in
disqualifying of the tender submitted.
1.6. Where any apparatus forming part of the installation is situated outdoor
or subjected to damp condition, such apparatus shall be of
weatherproof design.
TS/Fire/S11/1
MECHANICAL WORKS
1.7. The Contractor shall be responsible for the necessary completion,

supervision, testing and commissioning of the fire alarm installation
under the Contract. The Contractor shall submit the certificates and
reports including the testing and commissioning certificates to the S.O.
or Engineer.
1.8. The Contractor shall submit two sets of the following documents
within two (2) week from the date of award to the S.O. or Engineer
for approval:
a) Layout and construction of main alarm panel and sub-alarm

panel including the battery compartment.
b) Technical specifications and samples (if required) of all Plant

and equipment employed in the installation.
c) Other information of the system as specified in the

Specifications or required by the S.O. or Engineer.
Work shall only commence upon approval of the Contractor's

proposal by the S.O. or Engineer. Notwithstanding the approval
given by the S.O. or Engineer, the Contractor shall remain
liable for providing the panel and other Plant and equipment
fitting on the Site that meet the operating requirements under
the said Code of Practice and the relevant Authorities.
2. SYSTEM OF OPERATIONS
2.1 General
The fire alarm system shall be a closed circuit continuously monitored

installation, comprising essentially of a main alarm panel, triggering
devices and alarm bells, fed from a continuously charged DC power
supply source.
2.2 Alarm Operation
a) The operation of one or more trigger devices shall result in an

immediate fire alarm given by :
i) an audible visual alarm from all the alarm bells/strobe

lights situated in the entire building;
ii) a visible indication for each zone in which a trigger

device operates.
TS/Fire/S11/2
MECHANICAL WORKS
b) Where a number of alarm signals are received in quick

succession, or simultaneously, the Plant and equipment shall be
designed so that a general audible alarm continues or resounds
as each visible indication commences.
c) The alarm state shall be maintained by the main alarm panel

without a continued signal from the trigger device so that even
destruction of a connection after the trigger device operates
shall not discontinue the sounding of the alarm.
2.3 Alarm Silencing Switch
a) The audible and visual alarms shall continue until silenced by

the manual operation of a silencing switch; they shall not be
automatically silenced. The design of the silencing switch shall
be such that the audible alarm can only be silenced after 3
minutes of sounding. The principle of design shall be such that
no other control is able to override the silencing switch during
the 3 minutes of sounding.
b) The operation of a silencing switch while an alarm condition

exists shall not cancel the visual indication of the fire alarm nor
shall the operation of the silencing switch prevent the proper
receipt of alarms from any zone(s) not yet providing an alarm
signal. Further, its operation shall not prevent the transmission
of the alarm signal to the monitoring station.
c) There shall be only one switch for the silencing of the audible
and visual fire alarm. In addition, the operation of the audible
and visual fire alarm re-sounding system shall not require the
activation of any other manual switches and devices.
d) The restoration of the silencing switch to its normal position

whilst an alarm condition exists shall transfer the alarm to the
fire alarm bells.
2.4 Fault Warning
a) The fire alarm system shall be capable of detecting fault

automatically whenever it develops in any of the circuits and a
fault warning shall be given by both an audible warning from a
buzzer and a visible indication in the main alarm panel. This
buzzer in the main alarm panel shall be distinctive and of a
different character from fire alarm bells.
TS/Fire/S11/3
MECHANICAL WORKS
b) The buzzer warning shall be cancelled by a single silencing

switch solely designed for this purpose and unless the fault is
rectified, the visual indication shall persist. The removal of a
fault shall automatically reset the audible fault warning circuit.
The occurrence of another further fault while the buzzer is
silenced shall cause the buzzer to sound again. Similarly, the
restoration of the silencing switch to its normal position whilst
a fault exists shall transfer the fault back to the audible fault
warning of the system.
c) Any fault warning shall not prevent a fire alarm being given at
the same time. At any time, an alarm of fire shall take priority
over any other indication such as fault warning.
d) A distinct visible and audible fault signal shall be given on the

main alarm panel in the event of any of the following situations:
i) failure or disconnection of the normal power supply to

the main alarm panels;
ii) failure such as low/high voltage or disconnection of the

standby battery;
iii) failure such as low/high voltage or disconnection of the

battery charger;
iv) triggering circuit faults such as open circuit, short circuit,

earth fault of the +ve or -ve line in the wiring between
trigger devices and the main alarm panel including the
removal of any trigger devices;
v) bell circuit faults such as open circuit, short circuit, earth

fault of the +ve or -ve line in the wiring between alarm
bells and the main alarm panel including the removal of
any bells;
vi) open circuit in any of the looping circuits that control the
networking of general alarm, silencing and reset function;
vii) rupture or disconnection of any fuse or the operation of

any protective devices that would prevent a fire alarm
being given.
Should any of the above situations from (i) to (vii) (inclusive)

occur in the respective sub-alarm panels a distinct visible signal
shall also be given on the main alarm panel.
TS/Fire/S11/4
MECHANICAL WORKS
3. MAIN ALARM PANEL
3.1. General
a) The main alarm panel (MAP) shall be of the solid state

electronic type. Other equivalent types may be proposed,
subject always to the approval of the S.O. or Engineer. It shall
be approved by the FSSD under the Product Listing Scheme
Class 1.The MAP shall contain the following Plant and
equipment :
i) Switches and indicating facilities for zones
ii) "System On" indicator
iii) "Mains Fault", "Earth Fault", "Charger Fault", "Battery

Fault" and "Sounder Fault" indicators
iv) A voltmeter to indicate battery voltage
v) Fire alarm buzzer
vi) Silencing switch for fire alarm complete with indicator
vii) Audible fault warning buzzer
viii) Silencing switch for fault warning buzzer complete with

indicator
ix) Indicator for bell circuit fault
x) Evacuation switch to energise all alarm bells complete

with indicator
xi) Light indicator test facility
xii) System reset switch
xiii) Auxiliary contacts complete with isolation switch and

indicator
xiv) A separate indicator for each sub-alarm panel to indicate

that its isolation switch is activated.
TS/Fire/S11/5
MECHANICAL WORKS
b) The main alarm panel shall be accommodated in a well-

finished self-sustained sheet cabinet constructed from at least
1.5mm thick hot dipped galvanised sheet steel. The cabinet
housing shall be coloured bright red and shall be fitted with a
hinged, glazed door which shall be locked. All alarm zone
indicators and associated switches shall be visible behind the
locked door. The manufacturer's name shall be clearly and
permanently marked on the front of the cabinet.
c) Two spare zones or 10% of the total zone, whichever is the

higher, shell be provided for the alarm panels. Facilities shall
be provided in the main alarm panel so that easy connection to
extension unit can be made when future expansion of the main
alarm panel becomes necessary.
d) A manual call point and an alarm bell/strobe light shall be

provided adjacent to the main alarm panel.
e) All main alarm panel shall incorporate the automatic facilities

to receive, interpret and operate the signals from their fire
fighting systems installed in the building blocks.
f) Letterings using reversed silk screen designating the alarm zone,

the functions of the various indicators, apparatus and switches
shall be provided for every main alarm panel. All manual
controls shall be clearly labelled to indicate their functions. An
information chart listing the system operating instruction shall
be fixed inside each board. Other type of labelling may also be
used subject to the approval of the S.O. or Engineer.
g) Approved silk screen white perspex sheet with reduced scale

coloured drawings of approved sizes showing the boundaries
and locations of the alarm zone shall be provided by the
Contractor and located next to each main alarm panel, sub-
alarm and repeater board.
h) Locations of fire protection Plant and equipment such as main

alarm panel, sub-alarm panel, portable fire extinguishers, fire
hose reels, dry riser, etc shall also be indicated on the white
perspex coloured drawings in the form of clear and distinctive
symbols. Escape routes including corridor, staircase, etc shall
be clearly indicated.
i) The main alarm panels and sub-alarm panels of the automatic

alarm system shall be provided with an alarm verification
TS/Fire/S11/6
MECHANICAL WORKS
feature complying with SS 645 and approved by the relevant

Authority.
3.2. Alarm Zone - Zone Switches And Indicating Facilities
The following switches and indicating facilities shall be provided for

each alarm zone or group :
a) Fire alarm indicator

b) Fault indicator
c) Isolation indicator
d) Isolation position switch
3.3. Fire, Fault And Isolation Indicators
a) The fire alarm indicator shall be twin light emitting diodes

(hereinafter referred to as "LED" for the purposes of this clause
including all sub-clauses under it). The fault indicator and
isolation indicator can each be a separate single LED or a single
LED incorporating both the fault indicator and isolation
indicator. The LED shall light up upon actuation and remain lit
until manually reset.
b) The fire alarm indicator shall be coloured red and clearly

labelled with the word "FIRE". The fault warning indicator and
the isolation indicator shall be coloured yellow and clearly
labelled with the words "FAULT" and "ISOLATED"
respectively.
3.4. Isolation Switch
A switch shall be provided for the deliberate isolation of each

individual alarm group from the main alarm panel common circuitry.
Operation of the isolation switch shall prevent the alarm group from
initiating either alarm or fault signals and shall not impair the normal
functioning of any other alarm groups. Unless normal conditions have
been restored, operation of the isolation switches shall not cause the
associated alarm groups to be isolated if the switches are operated after
on alarm activation of the respective zones.
3.5. Indicators
a) Lamp indicators shall be the light emitting diode (LED) type.

TS/Fire/S11/7
MECHANICAL WORKS
b) The arrangement of indicator circuits and the design of the

apparatus shall be such that the operation of one indicator does
not prevent the proper and separate operation of other
indicators.
c) The operation of any alarm bell or the transmission of fire

alarm signal to approved monitoring station shall not be
prevented by any faulty indicator and shall not depend on the
operation of any indicator.
3.6. Connection Of Ancillary Services
a) Ancillary services shall not affect the functioning of the Plant

and equipment.
b) A 24V DC supply may be provided from the fire alarm control

panel to operate a relay or similar operating device controlling
the ancillary Plant and equipment. The mechanism shall be
such that it does not impose a continuous load on the battery
under non-alarm conditions.
c) Provision for the interface between the main alarm panel and
auxiliary Plant, control Plant and equipment or external devices
which require to be operated or disconnected in the event of an
alarm shall also be made by the use of at least two separate and
uncommitted relays. Each relay shall provide 2 sets of voltage
free changeover contacts having minimum rating of 5A 30V dc.
d) Outputs to any ancillary services shall be fused or similarly

protected to ensure the safety of the control Plant and
equipment.
3.7. Sub-Alarm Panel
a) The construction and requirements of the sub-alarm panel shall

be similar to the main alarm panel. Sub-alarm panel shall
contain indicators together with associated switches and
indicating facilities for zones. The sub-alarm panel shall have
additional facilities for transmitting a sector signal to the main
alarm panel.
b) Where sub-alarm panel is provided in a sector of a premise, the

sector in which an alarm originates shall be shown on the main
alarm panel, and the zone of origin of the alarm shall be shown
on the sub-alarm panel. Where both sector and zone indication
TS/Fire/S11/8
MECHANICAL WORKS
are provided on one main alarm panel, clear differentiation

shall be made between the two functions.
3.8. Power Supply
a) The fire alarm system shall be operated on a DC power supply

of 24 volts provided by sealed type maintenance-free lead-acid
batteries which are maintained in an adequately charged
condition by a 230 volts AC/24 volts DC rectifier/charger.
b) A double-pole 230 volts rated switch with neon indicator shall

be provided for the direct termination of the incoming mains
supply. This supply shall be exclusive to the fire alarm system
and connected to a separate circuit from the main switchboard
and the controlling circuit breaker shall be clearly labelled
"FIRE ALARM : DO NOT SWITCH OFF".
c) The batteries shall be suitable for standing on open circuit or

floating across a constant voltage supply and discharging at
infrequent intervals.
d) The capacity of the battery used to energise the alarm system

shall be such that in the event of mains failure, the battery is
capable of maintaining the system in normal working condition
for at least 24 hours. Thereafter it shall be capable of supplying
an additional load resulting from an alarm originating in two
separate alarm zones or groups for a period of half an hour and,
if utilised to supply emergency evacuation alarms, it shall in
addition, be capable of supplying the full emergency
evacuation alarm load for a period of at least 10 minutes.
e) Calculations for ascertaining the capacity of the batteries and

the design of the battery charging the Plant and equipment to
meet the above requirements shall be submitted to the S.O. or
Engineer.
f) The battery terminal pillars and inter-cell connectors, bolts,

nuts and washers used for fastening of inter-cell and terminal
connectors shall be made of highly conductive and corrosion-
free materials.
TS/Fire/S11/9
MECHANICAL WORKS
g) The cell container of the battery shall be enclosed and made of

rugged and self-extinguishing type plastic.
h) The battery shall be arranged in the compartment in such a way

as to allow easy maintenance so that the inspection of batteries
shall not require removal of the cells and connections from the
battery assembly.
i) A label containing the following information shall be securely

fixed within the battery enclosure :
i) Type of cell
ii) Number of cells
iii) Ampere hour capacity
iv) Nominal voltage
v) Final voltage
vi) Float voltage of battery charger
vii) Output current and limit of battery charger
viii) Date supplied and recommended date of replacement
3.9. Battery Charger
a) The battery charger shall be of constant voltage current limiting

type with automatic boost charge by voltage level sensing and
capable of functioning under the following environmental
conditions :
i) Temperature 10°C to 40°C

ii) Relative humidity 20% to 95%
iii) Abnormal foreign potential : Power line surge
The charger circuit shall be designed to suit the local climate.
b) The charger shall be capable of supplying any possible load of

the system while maintaining the battery in a fully charged
condition and recharging the battery as prescribed below. The
charging system shall be the current limiting constant voltage
type.
The rating of the battery charger shall be such that :
i) after the battery has been discharged from the fully

charged state by supplying the load as specified in the
aforementioned requirements, and
TS/Fire/S11/10
MECHANICAL WORKS
ii) after recharging for a period of not more than 24 hours,

the battery shall have recovered to the extent that it shall
be capable of sustaining a further discharge of
supplying the same load as specified in the
aforementioned requirements.
c) The output voltage provided by the battery charger shall be

maintained within 0.1% of the preset value whilst operating
within any combination of the conditions described below and
whilst delivering a current within the range of values required
for float charging :
i) Voltage : 230 rms +10%

ii) Frequency : 50 Hz +5% single phase
d) The battery charger shall keep the battery under constant

voltage charge. It shall incorporate automatic control features
with output designed to charge and maintain the cells of the
battery within the limits specified by the battery manufacturer,
taking into account any quiescent load imposed by the
associated system.
e) The voltage output of the charger shall be adjustable to ±20%

of the nominal voltage. The battery maximum allowable
charging current shall be designed to suit the selected battery
size at fixed current limitation. The trimmers shall be arranged
so that adjustment can be done without removing any circuit
boards or obstacles.
f) All electronic parts including rectifiers, power transistors and

resistor shall be designed to function at the case temperature
below 75°C unless otherwise approved by the SO Rep.
g) Printed circuit beards, fuses, relays and other electrical parts

employed in the battery charger shall be mounted and
connected in such a way that facilitate inspection of them
without any need to dismantle them from their operating
positions.
h) An approved self-resetting low voltage cut-off device with

adjustable low voltage setting shall be installed in the circuit
TS/Fire/S11/11
MECHANICAL WORKS
between the battery and the system if the system is not self-
resetting.
i) This under-voltage protection device shall disconnect the

battery from supplying the system if the pre-set low voltage
limit as recommended by the battery manufacturer is reached.
4. MANUAL CALL POINTS
4.1. Manual call points shall be of the "break-glass" type complying with
the requirements of BS 5839:Part 2 and notwithstanding this, be of a
type approved by the relevant statutory authorities.
4.2. The casing of the call point shall be of shatterproof corrosion resistant
plastic, finished in red. The front glass fitted shall be replaceable and
shall be such that the possibility of accidental breaking is reduced to a
minimum.
4.3. Manual call point installed outdoors shall be of approved weatherproof

to at least IP65 and watertight steel box construction complete with
screwed conduit entry hole. The word "FIRE" shall be embossed on
the front surface.
4.4. All fire alarm systems which are provide a "IN CASE OF FIRE, CALL
995" signage at every manual call point.
4.5. All manual call points shall have a protective flipper cover to prevent false
breaking of the break glass. Signage shall be affixed with a operating
instruction “ In Case of Fire, Lift to Break Glass”.
5. FIRE ALARM DETECTORS
5.1. Fire alarm detectors shall be of the types approved by the relevant
statutory authorities. The detectors shall preferably be flushed mounted
where possible and installed in a manner that each can be readily
removed for servicing without affecting the effectiveness of the
remaining detectors and the system operation.
5.2. In addition, all heat detectors shall comply with the SS : Code of
Practice for the Installation and Servicing of Electrical Fire Alarm
Systems and the technical specification EN 54:Part 5:2001 "Fire
TS/Fire/S11/12
MECHANICAL WORKS
Detection and Fire Alarm Systems-Part 5: Heat Detectors-Point

Detectors" or AS 1603-1:1997 "Automatic Fire Detection And Alarm
Systems:Heat Detectors" & relevant parts of AS 2362 "Fire Detection,
Warning, Control & Intercom Systems" or UL Standard 521 "Heat
Detectors For Fire Protective Signaling Systems" or other approved
equivalent.
6. ALARM BELLS AND STROBE LIGHT
6.1 Alarm bells shall be of the cast or pressed steel under dome type,
finished in red. It shall be complete with a strobe light on top of the
bell cover. The bell shall be the trembling type with a gong diameter of
150mm, and shall be capable of giving a minimum sound level of 90
dBA within a range of l m continuously.
6.2 The strobe light shall be attached with the alarm bell or mounted
directly above it.
6.3 The strobe light shall be of a high intensity flashing strobe light with
flash rate of 50 to 80 flashes per minute. The lens cover of the light
shall be red or amber in colour.
6.4 The bells and light shall be suitable for operation on 24 volts DC.
6.5 Alarm bells shall be mounted on conduit boxes above the manual call
points.
6.6 Alarm bells installed outdoors shall be of approved weatherproof and

watertight construction to at least IP65.
6.7 The strobe/beacon light shall be of a high intensity flashing strobe lightwith
flash rate of 30 to 130 flashes per minute. The lens cover of the light shall be
red, amber or clear in cover. The strobe/beacon light face cover shall bear the
label of "FIRE" in white lettering. The strobe/beacon light shall be suitable
for operation on 24 volts DC. The power supply to the strobe/beacon light
loop shall be individual and separated from the bell loop.
6.8 Strobe/beacon light shall install at all toilets, Handicap toilets, Pantry, car
park, lift lobbies, offices, laboratory and other area that specified in SCDF
fire code. Location of the strobe/beacon light will subject to S.O. or
Engineer approval.
TS/Fire/S11/13
MECHANICAL WORKS
7. INSTALLATION WIRING
7.1. Wiring of the fire alarm system shall be installed in accordance with
the appropriate provisions of SS 638 except as modified by the
relevant clauses in SS 645.
7.2. The wiring of the fire alarm system including the incoming supply
mains shall be exclusive to the fire alarm installation and shall be
segregated from the wiring of any other circuit. Fire alarm wiring shall
be spaced at least 50mm away from any other service. The mains feed
to the power supply Plant and equipment of the fire alarm system shall
be segregated from the wiring of all other services and also from all
other circuits of the fire alarm system.
7.3. Each alarm zone or group shall be separately wired and indicated on
the main or sub-alarm panel. Manual call points shall be connected in
an "open" circuit and an "end-of-line" resistor shall be provided to
enable line monitoring.
7.4. All wiring, except the low voltage mains feed to the power supply
Plant and equipment of the fire alarm system shall be of fire resistant
cables. Fire resistant cables shall be single or multi--core unarmoured
cables rated at 300/500V, comprising plain copper stranded circular
conductors, fire barrier tape and insulated with extruded polythene, or
ethylene propylene rubber (EPR), or other approved fire resistant
compound, and an extruded oversheath of PVC. Such fire resistant
cables shall be shall pass type test conducted by third party
accredited laboratories in Singapore and be listed under Class 1 as
required by FSSD.
7.5. All wiring shall be run in steel metal conduits or metal trunking
exclusive to the fire alarm system. The Contractor shall ensure that the
furthest point of the system shall have sufficient supply to facilitate the
proper functioning of the system.
TS/Fire/S11/14
MECHANICAL WORKS
7.6. No joint between terminal points shall be permitted, except in long

runs, in which case the joints shall only be made in a suitable enclosed
terminal box employing screwed terminations. The box shall be
labeled "Fire Alarm Link Box".
7.7. The wiring diagram shall be submitted to the S.O. or Engineer for
approval before installation commences.
8. SENSING CIRCUIT
A pair of voltage-free normally closed fire-resistant signal cables for sensing

the activation of the fire alarm system shall be provided from the main alarm
panel to the lift machine room.
9. MONITORING FOR AUTOMATIC FIRE ALARM SYSTEM
9.1. Where the automatic fire alarm system is required to be connected to

monitoring stations as shown in the Drawings, the connection shall be
done in accordance with the requirements of SS 645 and as approved
by the S.O. or Engineer.
9.2. The Contractor shall allow in the Contract Sum for all costs and
expenses for the one-time rental charge and installation of the fire
alarm transmitter, installation of the fixed leased-line and back-up
dialed-up telephone line from the transmitter to the nearest telephone
distribution point and interconnection between the transmitter and the
main alarm panel leading to the commissioning of the complete system.
The transmitter shall be complete with the leased-line transmitter,
digital communicator and all associated power supply units.
9.3. The Contractor shall also include in the Contract Sum the rental
charges for the leased-line and the back-up telephone line from a Telco
and the first year 24 hour monitoring charge by the monitoring station
during the DLP, all commencing from the Date of Substantial
Completion for the Works or phase or sub-phase of the Works as
certified by the Superintending Officer.
9.4. If other means of DECAM transmission, approved by the Singapore

Civil Defence Force, are proposed by the Contractor, the Contractor
shall still be required to install the fixed leased-line and back-up
TS/Fire/S11/15
MECHANICAL WORKS
dialed-up telephone line from the telephone terminal block to the

transmitter. In addition, the rental charges during the DLP for such
other means of transmission shall be deemed to be included in the
Contract Sum. Such alternative shall be approved by the S.O. or
Engineer.
10. Alarm Signalling and Interlocking Control
10.1. Lifts Homing
The Contractor shall supply and install alarm signalling lines to the
various Lift Motor Rooms for emergency 'homing' of lifts in the event
of fire alarm as indicated in the tender drawings.
The signal lines shall be independent for each Lift Motor Room and
shall not be loop from one to the other.
The signal provided shall be generally in normally closed 'voltage

free' contact which shall be opened in case of alarm.
Each control circuit shall have the ability for manual isolation from the
Main Fire Alarm Panel (MAP) during system maintenance and testing.
Such isolation status of the control function shall be indicated by the
system LCD Terminal at FCC.
The Contractor shall liaise with the lift contractor for exact
requirements in order to fulfill this function. Where specified in the
tender drawing and there is a requirement to interface with the existing
lifts. The Contractor shall liaise with the existing lift maintenance
company for exact requirements in order to fulfill this function.
The Contractor shall provide all necessary conduits, trunkings and

wirings connecting from the MAP to the respective Lift Motor Rooms
and shall terminate the signal line adjacent to the Lift Control
Board in an approved type terminal box for final connection. The
Contractor shall engaged competent lift Contractor to perform all these
necessary connection.
TS/Fire/S11/16
MECHANICAL WORKS
10.2. Air-conditioning Equipment
All duct smoke detectors (i.e. probe units) shall be provided for
monitoring of the return air ducts as indicated in the drawings. In the
event of alarm from the probe unit, the related air conditioning
equipment (AHU) shall `shut down' automatically.
The Contractor shall provide a 24V D.C. relay in the AHU starter
Panel. This relay is to transmit signal via the 2 core fire resistant cable
to the Control Module. The installation and modification work
involved in the mounting of this relay in the AHU starter panel is to be
cost in the Tender Price.
The control function shall be performed via the Control Module which
connected along the individual loop. The control module shall be
mounted adjacent to the AHU control board.
The Contractor shall also provide a feedback confirmation signal the

intended control function to be carried out and this signal shall be
provided at the System Terminal and BAS located in the FCC room in
plain text. The text shall describe type, designation and location of the
AHU.
The 'shut down' functions of the air conditioning equipment shall be

independent unless otherwise shown in the drawings or as directed by
the S.O.

10.3. Interfacing with Smoke-Stop Lobby Fans, Staircase pressurization fan

and Smoke Free lobby Fans
In the event of alarm activation from the related area as indicated in the
Drawings, the corresponding fans shall be activated automatically.
The control function shall be performed via the related SAP. Isolation
buttons shall be provided at the SAPs, FCC and BAS Room for
isolation of the control function in case of system testing and
maintenance.
A positive confirmation signal to confirm the intended control function

is carried out shall be provided at the System LCD Terminal located in
TS/Fire/S11/17
MECHANICAL WORKS
FCC in plain text. The text shall describe type, designation and
location of the Fan.
The control function for each fan shall be independent unless otherwise

10.4. Interfacing with Jockey Pumps, Wet Riser Pumps, Sprinkler Pumps,
Fire Hosereel Pumps and Water Tanks
The fire alarm system shall monitor the status of each fire hosereel
pumps and hosereel storage tanks. The status to be monitored as
specified hereunder shall be indicated at the System LCD Terminal in
FCC room in text/graphic form. In addition, LED indications shall also
be provided at the Master Mimic Board at Block S16.
Status monitoring of each fire pump shall include :
- Mains Power Supply failure

- Pump Running/Stop
- Pump Tripped
The following status shall be monitored for each fire hosereel storage
tank:
- Water Tank High Level

- Water Tank Low Level
10.5. Interfacing with Fire shutter, Smoke Doors, Fire Doors and Automatic
Doors
The Fire Alaram System shall constantly supply 24 V DC power to

each Magnetic Door Holder which is provided by others. In case of
alarm activation, the 24 V DC supply shall cut-off to release the seing
doors to its close position. A local manual door release switch will be
provided by others for manual closing of the door.
TS/Fire/S11/18
MECHANICAL WORKS
The Auto Door control shall be achieved by independent supervised

circuit to each auto door. In case of alarm activation, a 24 V DC signal
shall be sent to the auto door control panel for either opening or
closing of the auto door as necessary.
All doors (such as the automatic doors, doors with magnetic catch links,
automatic doors with magnetic catch links and electric release doors)
as shown in the Drawings shall require 24 V DC power fire alarm
signal to operate the them. All final connection of wiring.
10.6. Interfacing with Smart Card Access Doors
All doors (i.e. the smart card access doors) as shown in the drawings
shall require 24 V DC power fire alarm signal to operate them. The
signal wiring shall be run in conduits separate from the electrical fire
alarm system and terminating with sufficient length of wiring at the
Card Access Reader Controller or interfacing module. All final
connection of wiring and all interfacing etc., shall be done by the
Contractor and to be priced in the Schedule of Rate.
Provision shall be included for selective activation at the affected

floor/s or block.
The Contractor shall engage competent Smart Card Access specialists

to carry out the part of work.
10.7. Interfacing with Gas Detection System
The Fire Alarm System shall interface with the Gas Detection Panels
as shown in the Drawings for emergency shut-off of the gas supply line.
The Fire Alarm System shall provide supervised signal circuits to each
Gas Detection Panel. In case of fire alarm activation from the related
zone(s), the signal shall be sent to the Gas Detection Panel
automatically for closing of the solenoid valve to shut off the gas
supply.
In addition to the above-mentioned, the Contractor is to assign a zone

to each gas detection panel. This gas detection panel shall be shown on
the SAP mimic board by means of a yellow LED. In the event of a gas
leakage, a signal shall be sent to the FCC as well as the Office of
TS/Fire/S11/19
MECHANICAL WORKS
Estate Development. This signal shall not trigger an alarm. It is to

inform the users of the location of the gas leakage. The Contractor is to
price in all necessary relays, equipment, wirings, etc required for this
portion of works in the Tender Price.
The Contractor shall engage competent Gas Detection System Contractor to

perform the interfacing between the 2 systems.
11. AS INSTALLED DRAWINGS
On completion of the installation and before the final inspection and testing,
the Contractor shall supply to the S.O. or Engineer three sets of suitably scaled
"As-Installed" drawings of the complete fire alarm installation. The drawings
shall comprise the following :
a) positions and boundaries of various alarm zones;
b) position of main alarm panel, sub-alarm panels, battery charger,

transmitter, manual call points, detectors and bells;
c) circuitry diagram of the alarm panels and battery charger;
d) legend showing clearly all the symbols and abbreviations used;
e) technical specifications of all Plant and equipment used in the system

including the manufacturer's recommended testing requirements for
detectors in-situ.
12. INSPECTION, TESTING AND COMMISSIONING
11.1. The Contractor shall submit an application to the S.O. or Engineer to

witness the inspection and commissioning test of the complete
installation. The application shall include information on the testing
appointment date and statement of completion of the whole Works by
the Contractor.
TS/Fire/S11/20
MECHANICAL WORKS
11.2. The commissioning test shall be carried out by the Contractor and to be
witnessed by the S.O. or Engineer. The format of the test report shall
be in accordance with the Specifications. The entire system shall be
tested to ensure that it operates satisfactorily and that :
a) all manual call points, detectors and bells function correctly;

b) all fault monitoring circuits function correctly;
c) the battery and battery charger comply with the requirements of
the Specifications;
d) all ancillary Plant and equipment function correctly;
e) all control features and indicators in the alarm panels function
correctly; cable insulation resistance of all circuits are
satisfactory in accordance with SS 638.
The Contractor shall submit 3 copies of the test report, duly completed
and signed, to the S.O. or Engineer not later than 7 days after the test.
13. MAINTENANCE SERVICE
The Contractor shall allow in the Contract Sum for all costs and expenses for
providing servicing and maintenance of the Fire Alarm System and an
efficient call-back service as specified for a period of twelve (12) months one
year commencing from the Date of Substantial Completion for the Works or
phase or sub-phase of the Works as certified by the Superintending Officer
(hereinafter referred to as the "Maintenance Period" for the purposes of this
clause including all sub-clauses under it).
The maintenance during the twelve (12) months defects liability Maintenance
Period shall include all items listed in the Servicing and Maintenance
specification specified.
TS/Fire/S11/21
MECHANICAL WORKS
1. General

warranty for fire resistant system for fire protection system.

Scheme (PLS).

standard:
a) BS 476: Part 20 Fire tests on building materials and

b) BS 476: Part 24 Fire tests on building materials and

ventilation ducts


and use of buildings. Access and facilities for fire-fighting,
BS 9999: Code of practice for fire safety in the design,
e) EN 13501-1 EN 13501-1+A1 Fire classification of

construction products and building elements - Part 1:
Classification using test data from reaction to fire tests
f) BS EN 1366-3 : Fire Resistance Tests for Services

Installation - Penetration Seal.
g) BS EN 1336-4 : Fire Resistance Tests for Services

h) ISO 834: Fire resistance tests - Elements of Building

Construction.
TS/Fire/S12/1
MECHANICAL WORKS
i) ISO 6944: Fire resistance tests -- Ventilation ducts
j) ISO TR 1896 Products in fibre-reinforced cement -- Non-

k) ASTM D5116-90: Standard Guide for Small-Scale

Environmental Chamber Determinations of Organic
Emissions from Indoor Materials/Products.
l) ASTM E119 : Standard Test Methods for Fire Tests of

Building Construction and Materials. The Standard will not
be acceptable for load-bearing elements.

offered.
1.6. The original material supplier shall submit proof of relationship

with the manufacturing entity, and the manufacturer’s
internationally recognized Production Quality and Environmental
Control Certifications. Where the material is produced under a
contract manufacturer, documentation on the original material
supplier’s quality control shall be submitted for verification. Where
required, an on-site factory audit shall be arranged.

24, sample prototype verifiable to laboratory test setup, shop
drawing with installation details, and mock up.
2. Materials
2.1. System

the steel duct. The system shall comprise fire rated
board fixed to galvanised steel framing consisting of
collar galvanised steel channel and continuous corner
angles minimum L-50x50x0.6mm, transverse board joints
shall be coincided with steel channel collar, all secured in
place encompassing the steel duct with M4 self-tapping
screws at 200mm centres and the cavity between board and
TS/Fire/S12/2
MECHANICAL WORKS


approved cover strip 100mm wide x 9mm thick. The
board unsupported area between steel supports shall not
exceed 1.5m2.

collar150mm wide by thickness of fire resistant boards shall
be installed at penetration junction of the wall/floor.


manufacturer’s specifications to achieve performance
criteria of stability, integrity and insulation for internal and
external fire exposure in accordance with BS 476: Part 24.


and board shall be duly sealed with approved acrylic fire
rated sealant.
i) Where required the boards’ joints may be concealed with

joint compound and joint finishing tapes to create the desire
flush seamless finish to receive architectural finishes.
Otherwise joints and screw heads may be left unfinished.
TS/Fire/S12/3
MECHANICAL WORKS

strength.

comply with the dry construction requirements for
substituting masonry construction as stipulated in the Fire
Code.
c) The technical properties of the boards shall be the following

as minimum:
Alkalinity pH 12
310: 1993) 4.94N/mm2 (transverse)
(40oC) C518:1991)
Nominal moisture
6%
movement at EMC
(Clause 5.4, 5.4.1 & 5.4.2)

TS/Fire/S12/4
MECHANICAL WORKS
a) All electrical, telecoms and services duct openings,

including cable/pipe penetrations in floors and walls shall be
sealed with approved type firestop sealing compounds /
systems, applied in accordance with manufacturer's
instructions.

applied over the mineral wool, trowelled smooth at the top
to flush with the finished floor level, thus achieving a
minimum fire resistance of 2 hours.

stated, tested and certified to BS 476 Part 20 and approved
by the Local Authorities.

structure, forming an effective and tight seal against both
fire and smoke/fume.

only skilled and experienced workmen for installation of
fire stop materials.
3. Installation
TS/Fire/S12/5
MECHANICAL WORKS
sealed with approved fire stopping systems, including and not
a) General non-combustible buildings services – approved

PLS listed fire stopping systems



Compliance (DoC) document certifying that the construction has
been installed according to the system prototype and allowable
Engineer in the mechanical discipline in addition to the
manufacturer’s endorsement.
TS/Fire/S12/6
MECHANICAL WORKS
SECTION 13 – FIRE ALARM REMOTE MANAGEMENT SYSTEM
1. General
1.1 The purpose of this section is to provide information on the type of

provisions to be included for the various equipment and systems so
that these can be interfaced, controlled or monitored by the Building
Management System and Integrated Building Management System
(IBMS).
1.2 It is intended for the various equipment and systems to be networked

to a computerized IBMS which would be user-friendly.
1.3 The Sub-Contractor shall provide the IBMS Sub-Contractor with the
appropriate protocols for transferring data from the sub-system
database to the IBMS server's database directly or into an Excel
spreadsheet residing in the Terminal Server. The system shall link to
IBMS over the Fast Ethernet TCP/IP LAN
1.4 The Sub-Contractor shall provide with OPC server for the interfacing
between the fire system and Integrated Building Management System
(IBMS)
1.5 The Sub-Contractor shall provide system software and install at NUS
virtual machine at cloud for the system monitoring at existing Fire
Monitoring System, The Sub-contractor shall include the necessary
programming, accessories and software for the Fire Monitoring System to
install at the NUS virtual machines at cloud. No hyperlink to another virtual
system/ system is allowed.
1.6 The system shall be able to receive signal contact and video image
from the video image fire detection system camera.
TS/Fire/S13/1
MECHANICAL WORKS
2. Central Fire Alarm Data Processing System
2.1 General
The entire fire alarm system shall be able to be monitored and controlled from
the Central Fire Command Centre (FCC), at Block E3A-01, Faculty of
Engineering and Block S16, Faculty of Science. This shall be achieved by the
computer based centralized data communication and processing system which
communicate with the System Terminals and all MAP/SAPs via the serial data
communication network.
The overall system architecture shall be based on the principle of distributed

processing that each SAP shall remain autonomous (independent) in
evaluation, annunciation and control in case of the communication is
interrupted between the MAP/SAPs and the central data processing
equipment.
All messages received by the central data processing unit from individual SAP
shall be automatically processed and presented to the operator with adequate
information in non-coded text or graphic form which prevents mis-
interpretation of messages and false manipulation of commands.
The system hardware and software shall be of modular design and shall
consist of standard hardware and software only to ensure long terms system
support and availability of system spares.
The central data processing equipment shall consists of reliable hardware and
software specially designed for use in Life Safety System. System using
normal commercial personal computer (PC) will not be accepted.
All major equipment for the central data processing system shall be designed
and manufactured by one and the same manufacturer to ensure system
uniformity of standards, compatibility in operation, spare parts availability,
trained support and competent maintenance services.
TS/Fire/S13/2
MECHANICAL WORKS
2.2 Data Transmission
The communication network shall be a "free network" that messages

are transmitted in a spontaneous manner so that the response time will
not be affected by the size of the system and nos. of MAP/SAPs
connected.
The type of communication shall be of full duplex, digital serial data
transmission.
Communication network shall be of class "A" loop transmission.
The individual system components shall be interfaced to the
transmission network via transformer-coupled modems type RS485
and the network communication speed shall be a minimum of 60, 000
baud.
b) Data transmission monitoring
Every path of the data transmission network must be monitored for

open or short circuit fault.
If regular data traffic in a path is not frequent, test telegram shall be

sent to verify proper operation.
In case of communication fault, fault signal shall be indicated at the

affected SAP, MAP and the Main System Terminal at the Fire
Command Centre as well as the Duplicate System Terminal in PFM
BAS Room at level 1, University Campus Infrastructure, Ventus. Such
a fault shall not deteriorate the autonomous operation of the SAP
concerned.
A single break along the data communication network shall indicate

fault signal as describe in the above but the entire data transmission
shall still be fully operational via the loop data transmission network.
If the receiving unit detects a transmission error, it shall deny

acknowledgment of the message and request for re-sending of the
message from the sender. If a unit receives three consecutive messages
containing transmission error, it shall notify the central control
equipment and a transmission fault message identifying the faulty
system component or path shall be displayed on the Main System
Terminal in FCC as well as the Duplicate System Terminal in BAS
Room and logged on the printers.
This monitoring requirements shall apply to all modems and

communication processors provided.
TS/Fire/S13/3
MECHANICAL WORKS
c) Data communication network
The data communication network shall be of RS485 class "A" for loop
communication.
All MAP/SAPs as well as other units such as mimic driver, coding and
decoding unit shall be connected along the loop data line with the data
processing unit. All devices connected along the loop shall be able to
operate autonomously, failure of any device must not affect the proper
operation of the others.
The network shall allow insertion of additional devices at any point of

the loop at any time. All existing devices shall not be affected in case
of network expansion.
In case of failure of a loop device, this device shall automatically be

by-passed and all other parts of the system shall remain fully
operational. When the failing device resumes correct operation, it shall
automatically be re-inserted into the loop communication traffic.
Data transmission among devices in the loop shall not be affected in

case of single breaks or shorts in the data transmission line. The data
transmission network shall be suitable for bi-directional, full duplex
oriented data traffic complying with class "A" line supervision.
Any communication trouble shall be automatically announced at the

affected devices and the System Terminals
3. Computer System Unit for Fire System
3.1 Hardware structure and performance
i.) The computer system shall monitor and control the entire
system and shall allow control of all MAP/SAPs and other
devices connected along the loop communication network.
ii.) The system shall be of modular design in hardware and

software which allows easy stage-by-stage extension of the
system capacity. It shall be of OPC which allow for the IBMS
interfacing without using external devices. The fire alarm
system shall be able to view from IE web browse through
connect via TCP/IP Ethernet
iii.) The system shall contain of multi-processing structure which

different tasks shall be performed by individual processor.
TS/Fire/S13/4
MECHANICAL WORKS
iv.) The individual processor in the System shall be supervised by

means of a built-in watch-dog circuit. In case of failure of any
one of the processor unit, an audible alert signal and a
distinctive visual signal shall be presented at the Main System
Terminal and the Duplicate System Terminal.
v.) The following program and data carriers shall be used for the
main data processing unit:
a) RAM
b) Flash PROM
c) DISK
vi.) The main operation program and the system configuration data
shall be located in the resident RAM area for on-line operation.
The floppy disk unit shall be served as a program back-up
device and shall not be used for on-line operation.
vii.) The system shall be SDRAM and with the following minimum
requirements:
a) A Intel Core i7-2600 Processor, 3.4GHz 4 Cores 8

Enhanced Intel Speed step® Technology EIST, Intel®
EM64T, Execute Disable Bit, up to 16 GB DDR3
memory
b) Minimum 16 GB of RAM and shall be expandable
c) A Super VGA graphics card capable of 1024x768 pixel

resolution and 65K colors, non-interlaced, 32” LCD
monitor (70 Hz or better vertical refresh rate).
d) A 12 function-key keyboard
e) Mouse pointing device
f) A 2 TB Hard disk drive and expandable
g) Minimum 4 USB drive
h) A CD/DVD R/W drive
i) With latest Window server operating system and

Microsoft office
j) An 8-line serial communications adapter

TS/Fire/S13/5
MECHANICAL WORKS
k) An 2 Adapter for Ethernet Networking compatible with

TCP/IP network protocols
A UL Listed server computer platform shall be used when UL

compliant system is required
viii.) The RAM memory shall be permanently monitored and any

detected malfunction shall be automatically indicated on the
System Terminals before system operation is affected.
ix.) A hard disk unit shall be provided as a program back-up device

for the entire RAM memory and it shall not be used for on-line
processing. The disk shall only be running during system
initialization and system re-start routines.
x.) The System shall contain the power-up (restart) routines in the
EPROMs to assure automatic start-up and program loading
without any operator intervention. The operating and system
configuration program shall automatically be transferred from
the floppy disk into the RAM area.
xi.) A second hard disk unit shall be provided as a data carrier for
the extended user texts assigned to each system events.
xii.) A history file of all system events such as alarm, fault, status,
operator activities etc. shall be stored on the disk.
xiii.) A record of the last 2,000 events shall be maintained on disk

which can be printed out upon request from the Main System
Terminal.
xiv.) The System architecture shall have the following serial

input-output interfacing capabilities:
a) Front interface for loop communication.
b) Four nos. RS 232 for free arrangement for PC/Printer
c) Provide OPC server for the high level interfacing to BAS /

IBMS
TS/Fire/S13/6
MECHANICAL WORKS
3.2 System software requirements
The system software packages which enable the complete system

operation in accordance with the requirements of the Specification
shall be of a proven system.
The system software shall be modular in design and the software

packages must be strictly standardized. Custom made or project
oriented software packages will not be accepted.
The following minimum software modules shall be provided:
Operating program
System data base (process image) and OPC
Network monitoring and control
Display priority control
Command priority control
Output message generator
Peripheral drivers
Text/Graphic editors
"Help" facility
Service assistance
Diagnostic
Auxiliary programs
The system software packages shall be resident in the main data

processing unit and it shall be especially made for the requirements of
life safety and security system.
A comprehensive text and graphic editing program shall be provided

for easy editing of user text and graphics
TS/Fire/S13/7
MECHANICAL WORKS
A comprehensive parameter editing program shall be provided for easy

editing of automatic system command functions.
It shall be possible to assign different priority levels to the various

types of system incidents or criteria.
All system incidents shall be chronologically recorded in the system

history file with date and time for subsequent reports.
All logs in the system history file shall be retrievable according to the
operator selection. The following minimum parameters shall be made
available for the operator to select :
1) Types of system
Fire and Plant monitoring.
2) Types of events
Alarm, Fault, Active, zone Off, zone Test and for All.
3) Record on cause of alarm
To define cause of alarm actuation before reset of alarm

message for recording purpose :
* Genuine alarm
* Deceptive alarm
* Malfunction
* Operator error
* False response
* Nuisance alarm
* Not definable
TS/Fire/S13/8
MECHANICAL WORKS
4) Time of events
* Printout since mid-night
* Printout for the whole buffer
* Printout since last change of shift
The software packages shall be able to perform pre-defined control by

events and time dependent functions.
The system operating functions shall be password protected. The

password shall consist of 6 to 8 characters which can be freely defined
by the user.
At least ten different authorization levels for system operation shall be

defined and shall be accessible via selected passwords.
The system editor functions shall only be accessible via assigned

password.
All system service functions shall be assigned to the highest

authorization level.
For each operator intervention, the identification number of the

initiating password shall be logged by the system printer and recorded
in the system history file.
TS/Fire/S13/9
MECHANICAL WORKS
The following indications shall be provided :
1) All system status signal shall be displayed in plain text. The

signals to be displayed include:

nos. of zones isolated
nos. of zones in test mode
- Display of alarm signal with sufficient characters space

for description of zone location and sufficient characters
space for description of point location
- Display of guided test for the system programming

functions.
The System Terminals shall be capable of performing the following

programming functions :
* To create logical group within each addressable loop.
* To programme any zone for pulse memory operation.
* To define delay time for fault signal upon AC power failure to

prevent unnecessary fault message while the emergency
generator is being started.
* To assign activation of individual output contact to perform

specific control functions in relation to the activation of alarm
zones.
* To programme timing of alarm organization.
TS/Fire/S13/10
MECHANICAL WORKS
* To isolate floor by floor/block by block of addressable points.
* To isolate individual addressable point.
The System Terminals shall also be able to process and evaluate

signals generated by the following services and others which may be
required :
1) Transfer Water Tanks - High/Low Alarms.
2) Transfer Pumps - On/Off Alarms.
3) Hosereel/Sprinkler Water Tank - High/Low Alarms.
4) Hosereel/ Sprinkler Pumps - On/Off Alarms.
5) Wet Riser Water Tank - High/Low Alarms.
6) Wet Riser Pumps - On/Off Alarms.
7) Power Supply to Pumps – KWH, Phase Voltage, Phase

Current, Frequency, Normal / Alarm of Control Panel
3.3 System Display and Operating Terminals
(a) General requirements
The existing Main System Terminals at the Fire Command Centre and
Duplicate System Terminals at the BAS Room shall be modified and
upgraded to monitor and control the new fire alarm system.
The Main and Duplicate System Terminals shall automatically display
any change-of-status messages received from the MAP and SAPs. It
shall allow complete supervision and control of the entire system.
The System Terminals shall provide optimal conditions for successful
intervention by means of rapid and simple processing and displaying
of all necessary data in plain text or graphics. The procedures in
operation shall be automatically guided and the information display
shall not consist of any coded messages.
The operation of the System Terminals shall be password protected
that only authorised persons can access for the assigned operating
functions.
TS/Fire/S13/11
MECHANICAL WORKS
(b) Signal display of System Terminals
The self-contained basic operating unit shall be of desk-top type which

is to be installed next to the color LCD monitor unit. It shall provide
the following optical indicators :
(i) ALARM
(ii) FAULT
(iii) STATUS
The dedicated optical indicator(s) shall be flashed initially and shall

become steady after signal has been acknowledged. In addition, a
visual alarm signal indicator (flasher) noice bazzer shall be provided
when the alarm signal is activated.
In addition to the indications specified in the above, the basic operating

unit shall also provide the following status indications:
1) System Terminal in operation
2) System Terminal fault
3) System operation "enable"
4) System operation "disable"
The operation of the basic operating unit shall be passwords protected.

In addition, a key switch shall be provided to avoid unauthorised
access.
A tape printer which operate by 24 V DC shall form part of the basic

operating unit for logging purpose. It shall be fully operational in case
of AC power failure.
The display of the color LCD shall be divided into 3 fields :
1) System summary field
System user name, current time/date and current system basic

static function shall be indicated in this field.
TS/Fire/S13/12
MECHANICAL WORKS
2) Data display field`
All system events and relevant instructions shall be displayed

in plain text or graphic in this field.
3) Dialogue field
The system operation shall mainly be derived from this field.
Depending on access authorization, only the instructions
presently valid for the various operating steps shall be indicated
here.
Operating commands shall be performed by the light-pen or mouse.
All messages shall be displayed on the system terminal in

chronological order and the display shall fill up from top to bottom.
An indication shall be displayed in the summary field when the display

field is full to advise the operator that more messages are presented in
the memory.
Various types of message shall be displayed with different background

color :
1) Alarm message - RED
2) Fault message - YELLOW
3) Status message - WHITE
Messages with higher priority shall automatically override messages

with lower priority.
Detectors and/or actuators as referred to in the operation dialogue shall

be indicated by their geographical location. No technical code shall be
used to identify system elements neither on the system terminal nor on
the printer(s).
Un-acknowledged messages shall distinctively indicated to draw the

attention of the operator. When an alarm message is reset, the display
of that alarm shall be automatically deleted from the screen.
TS/Fire/S13/13
MECHANICAL WORKS
The alarm message per zone shall contain the following information :
1) Time of day
2) Date
3) Type of alarm
4) Origin of alarm (geographical location of alarm indicated by

area /building /floor /room /point)
5) Description of affected alarm location
6) Counter-action to be taken
(c) Operating functions of System Terminals
The System Terminals shall be able to supervise and operate all SAPs
connected within the network.
The following dedicated function buttons shall be available on the

system basic operating units:
1) Buzzer off For silencing of the System Terminal

buzzer.
2) Acknowledge To perform an acknowledgment of

messages appeared in the system.
3) Reset To perform the alarm message reset

function on a particular SAP or on system-wide
basis.
4) Keyboard For password entry.
The system operating concept shall give the operator identical

sequences in processing and operation for events from various sectors,
for examples: Fire, Plant Monitoring.
The extended system operating procedures shall be based on

user-adaptive, screen-oriented dialogue in the manner of menus and
masks.
TS/Fire/S13/14
MECHANICAL WORKS
The operation of the System Terminals shall by means of touch screen

or mouse. By touching the screen or moving the mouse onto the
appropriate menu appearing on the screen, the following valid steps
under each command shall be automatically displayed for the operator
selection. The entire operation shall be guided in such a way that
operating error can be avoided.
It shall be possible to display all events either in plain text or in

graphics form on the same screen depending on the operator selection.
Text or graphic selection shall be made in the dialogue field via the
touch screen or mouse.
All events related messages shall be displayed in plain text or graphics.

No technical code shall be used for message display that the operator
do not require technical knowledge for interpretation of messages
displayed and operation of the system.
Keyboard shall be used for the following functions :
1) Entry of password for protected operating functions.
2) Setting of time and date.
3) Assignment of password and operator access level.
4) Edit and modify system basic data, configuration parameters,

program parameter etc.
5) Edit and modify the plain user text and messages:

* Descriptions of MAP and SAP locations
* Descriptions of alarm zone locations
* Counter actions to be taken
* Special operator advises
* etc
TS/Fire/S13/15
MECHANICAL WORKS
(d) Color graphic display functions
The color graphic function shall allow the interactive (real time) display of all
alarm, fault and specific status events in the entire system.
The events to be displayed shall provide clear identification of their origin by :
1) Location of control units
2) Location of zones
3) Originating source
* Automatic detector
* Manual call point
* Extinguishing System
The graphics presentation shall have a minimum of four hierarchical levels :
1) Area overview
2) Building overview
3) Floor overview
4) Room overview
5) Video Image from the Fire Detection Camera
The picture editing program shall easily allow addition of any desired
alphanumeric text and pre-defined graphic symbols to each picture. It shall
have a standard repertoire of at least 8 colors, 9 lines types, 15 area shade
styles and 64 pre-defined symbols for selection.
The Contractor is to update the University picture editing program should

there be any new release of the program within the fifteen (15) months Defects
Liability Period.
Picture generation shall be effected by means of a versatile interactive picture

editing program. No specific training shall be required for picture generation.
The system shall have the capacity to store minimum of 500 pictures for
processing and displaying.
Graphic pictures, zone allocation, text and symbols shall be stored in a hard
disk memory and backed-up by a floppy disk memory.
It shall be possible to compose, modify or edit graphic pictures, texts, symbols
and zone locations on-site.
TS/Fire/S13/16
MECHANICAL WORKS
The Contractor shall provide training for the OED personnel to compose,
modify or edit graphic pictures, texts, symbol and zone locations via the
system.
3.4 System Printer Units
The system shall provide sufficient end interfaces for connecting of

line printers.
It shall be possible to initiate the desire printout via dialogue
command from the system terminal.
b) System logging printer
The printer shall log the following change-of-status signals with time
and date for individual events:
(i) Alarm messages
(ii) Fault messages
(iii) Status messages (ie. zone isolated, zone test etc.)
(iv) Entire operating sequence (operator activities)
Each message shall be printed in maximum two lines and shall

contain a reduced plain text related to the type and location of the
event and descriptions of operator activities.
c) System alarm printer
This printer shall print alarm messages only and each message shall
occupy one A4 page.
Each alarm message printout shall contain the following information :
(i) Time and date of event
(ii) Type of alarm
(iii) Origin of alarm
(iv) Descriptions of related alarm location in area, building, floor

and room.
TS/Fire/S13/17
MECHANICAL WORKS
4 Fire Protection Installation Sub-Contractor.
The Fire Protection Sub-Contractor shall liaise and work closely with
the Main Contractor and the ACMV Sub- Contractor to ensure that
the system requirements for interfacing, controlling or monitoring as
indicated in the BMS Points Schedule are achieved.
The Fire Protection Sub-Contractor shall supply, deliver, install, test,

commission, service and maintain the following for their control
panels of the equipment as shown in Drawings and BMS Point
Schedules
- 24 Volt auxiliary relay and potential free auxiliary contacts

shall be provided for each control signal and status indication
signal respectively as indicated for IBMS Points .
- All Power meter and water flow sensor shall be with meter bus
or mod bus.
- Separate interfacing compartment in each local control

board/panel panels complete with labelled terminal strips
including all cablings and connections.
4.1 All IBMS wired points shall be marked and indicated in the shop
drawings as "To IBMS" by the respective Sub-Contractors.
4.2 The Piped Services Sub-Contractor shall provide installation

points to suit the type of sensors and instrumentations that would be
supplied and installed by the ELV Sub- Contractor.
5. IBMS Points Schedule for Interfacing
5.1 The point schedule enclosed is for the purpose of guidance of

minimum requirements. The Sub-Contractor shall allow cost in his
Tender for any further points/sensors/instruments to enable the system
to operate in its intended purpose of a complete optimum operating
system.

TS/Fire/S13/18
MECHANICAL WORKS
5.3 In general, the following are to be provided in the Fire Protection PC

for :
a) Fire Alarm Panels
Fire Point Address and Status

Fire Point Fault Alarm
Fire Point Fire Alarm
Smoke Detector Maintenance Alarm
Panel Tampered Alarm
Bells, Horns and Sirens Control and Reset
Fireman’s Intercom Control
Public Address Speakers Zone Control
Public Address Speakers Zone Fault Alarm
b) Sprinkle and Jockey Pumps
ON/OFF Status
Electrical TRIP
ALARM
Local/Remote Mode
Run-Time Totalisation
Flow Switch
c) Horseel Pumps
ON/OFF Status
Electrical TRIP
ALARM
Local/Remote Mode
b) Wet Riser Pumps
ON/OFF Status
Electrical TRIP
ALARM
Local/Remote Mode
c) Water Tanks
LOW Water LEVEL

TS/Fire/S13/19
MECHANICAL WORKS
ALARM HIGH Water
LEVEL ALARM
d) Transfer Pumps
ON/OFF Status
TRIP ALARM
Local/Remote Mode
e) Sump/Ejector Pumps
ON/OFF Status
Electrical TRIP
ALARM Run-Time
Totalisation
Local/Remote Mode
f) All Starter Panels
3-phase Current Ampere

Voltages
Kilo-watt-hour Indication
Frequency
Power Factor
5.4 The Fire Protection Installation Sub-Contractor shall read the

Specifications and Drawings conjunction for the actual quantities.
TS/Fire/S13/20
MECHANICAL WORKS
1. General
1.1 This section covers the electrical equipment and services necessary for
a) All motors, starters, isolating switches and fuse switches for

this Contract.
b) Local Control Boards (LCPs) complete with remote push

buttons, selector switches, LED indicating lights, relays,
MCCBs etc.

works.

otherwise stated.
e) Cables between electrical isolators or electrical control boards

and equipment or control elements.
f) The sprinkler Local Control Boards shall be UL/FM/LPC listed

and shall comply with the requirements of CP 52 and relevant
local authorities' requirements.
2.1 All electrical works, material and equipment shall comply with the
following:
a) Singapore Standard: SS 638

Wiring of Electrical Equipment of Building (Latest Revision)
b) Singapore Standard: CP 551

Code of Practice on Earthing (Latest Revision)


e) The Electricity Act (Cap. 89A), (Electrical Worker)

Regulations
TS/Fire/S14/1
MECHANICAL WORKS
2.2 All electrical installation shall be certified by the Sub-Contractor's

Licensed Electrical Worker/Engineer (LEW/LEE) and the power
3. Power Supply
3.1 The power supply shall be 400 V/3 phase/50 Hz 4 wire system or 230
V/1 phase/50 Hz and shall be supplied with a suitable isolator by
others (unless specified otherwise) as shown on the Drawings. The
Sub-Contractor shall provide all subsequent power and control wiring
as well as the main control panel and sub-panels for each system.
Layout drawings shall be submitted for approval before fabrication.
3.2 Generally, cabling shall be Fire rated insulated cables, unless otherwise
specified, run in galvanised steel electrical conduits or trunking.
3.3 The wiring for all safety cut-out controls shall be incorporated with the
controls shall be energised via which relays operate when the
respective fan or other motor starts. The circuit indicator lights shall be
taken from the out going side of the respective starters.
3.4 The Sub-Contractor shall ensure that the power factor for all motors
shall not be less than 0.85 for under 20 hp and 0.9 for above 20 hp
motors. All selected motor shall have the best energy efficiency.
4. Drawings

switchboards and power supply layout for the approval of the S.O.
before construction commences.
4.2 Such drawings shall show construction details and shall incorporate a
full list of proposed materials, equipment, meters and accessories to be
used, and the method of supporting equipment and busbars.
TS/Fire/S14/2
MECHANICAL WORKS
5. Standards
International Electrotechnical Commission (I.E.C.) or National
Electrical Manufacturers Association (NEMA) standard.

copper - B.S. 158, 159, 1433 and 1977.
c) Heavy duty air circuit breakers for A.C. system - B.S. 4752 /
IEC 60947
d) Moulded case circuit breakers - B.S. 3871 Part 2 / IEC 60947-2

or NEMA Standard AB1.
i) Fuses - B.S. 88 / IEC 60269


TS/Fire/S14/3
MECHANICAL WORKS

and accessories
installations


5.4. All metal conduits and fitting shall comply to following standard:




and components


TS/Fire/S14/4
MECHANICAL WORKS
All electrical works, installations and materials supplied shall comply strictly
to the requirements and standard of the following local Authorities:
(a) The Electricity Act, The Electricity (Electrical Installations) Regulation

, Singapore
(e) The latest edition of CP 551 - Code of Practice on earthing
7.1 General
a) The metal parts of all switch gears, metal conductors and all
metal work liable to become alive in the event of failure of
insulation and the earth connection of all electrical fittings and
appliances shall be effectively earthed by means of earth
continuity conductor of adequate size. The entire earthing
installation shall fully comply with all relevant clauses of the
latest edition of Singapore Standard SS 638 and Singapore
Standard C.P. 551.

clamps.
7.2 Earth Connections



TS/Fire/S14/5
MECHANICAL WORKS


all trunkings, pipes, ducts, etc. Earth links of minimum size of
6 mm² , in the form of flexible cables, shall be used to ensure
continuity.
c) The end of earthing lead shall be labelled with 4.75 mm

lettering "SAFETY ELECTRICAL EARTH DO NOT
REMOVE" stamped onto an aluminium plate.
7.3 Size and Type of Copper Earth Conductor
a) The size of copper earth conductor shall be conformed to

Singapore Standard SS 638. But, the minimum size of 6 mm²
green/yellow PVC insulated copper cable shall be used.
8.1 The Sub-Contractor shall supply, deliver, install, test and commission,
Local Control Boards (LCB) of a type specified hereafter complete
with suitable doors that allow easy access to all components installed
therein.
8.2 All components shall be so arranged as to facilitate inspection and

maintenance.
8.3 Surface mounted circuit breaker shall be supplied to control all

components together with associated starter contactor etc. mounted on
the panel inside the cubicle. Associated components shall be grouped.
Flush mounted push button and neon pilot light shall be fitted on the
front fascia of the cubicle.
8.4 Appropriate relays shall be incorporated to protect all 3-phase motors

connection.
8.5 All single phase motors shall be protected by thermal overload of a

type with a tripping current adjustable in steps of 0.1 amperes.
8.6 All LCBs shall be provided with a separate interfacing compartment

containing the terminal strips for connections to the Building
Automation System.
TS/Fire/S14/6
MECHANICAL WORKS
8.7 All LCBs shall be provided with voltage free contacts and all necessary
the BAS.
9.1 The LCB shall be suitable for 400 volt, 3-phase 4 wire 50 Hz indoor
maximum continuous rating without exceeding the maximum
temperature permitted by the relevant British Standard or Singapore
Standard.
9.2 All cabinets of the control/starter panels shall be of metal clad front
type and manufactured from minimum 2.0 mm (14 SWG) gauge hot
dipped galvanised sheet steel using folded sections or angle iron
bracing for rigidity of construction. Floor mounted control panel shall
be of metal clad flush fronted, totally enclosed cubicle type of similar
construction as wall mounted type.
9.3 The LCB with main incoming circuit protectors rated below 100 Amp
9.4 The cabinet shall be adequately ventilated and be dust, drip and vermin
enclosure shall be IP 44 in accordance with IEC Publication 144.
9.5 The construction shall be such that it allows for ready access to the
9.6 Where they are installed exposed to weather and at areas of high
the S.O..
9.7 All cubicles and panels shall wherever practicable be of standard

pattern and dimensions.
9.8 All steel work for the cubicles and panels shall be new and free from
rust and scale. The finish shall be baked enamel of colour to S.O.
approval.
9.9 All fixings, screw, bolts and nuts, latches and locks shall be cadmium-
plated and chromed.
9.10 All cubicles and panels shall have hinged doors (concealed hinge type).
Rubber gaskets shall be provided between all doors, covers and
cubicles.
TS/Fire/S14/7
MECHANICAL WORKS
9.11 Switches and isolators supplied shall be of the totally enclosed, heavy
duty, air break and quick action type with a short circuit capacity
suitable for the rating of the equipment to be connected. Positive
indication of switch position shall be given by a mechanical "on" or
"off" device.
9.12 Interface barrier shall be provided for the fuse cartridges compartment
to safeguard flashover.
9.13 All fuses shall be HRC Cartridge type, having fusing factor of less than
9.14 Instruments, indicating lights, rotary switches, etc. shall be mounted

9.15 The LCB shall be provided with all wiring and accessories for the
9.16 The LCB centres shall comprise of but not limited to the following

metering devices.


complete with protective and safety devices, instrumentation
and control accessories.

9.17 No-volt release shall be of the manual reset type such that on
restoration of the supply, the motor cannot restart automatically.
9.18 Overload relays shall be factory calibrated and sealed with integral
heaters. They shall be incorporated with stop switch/manual reset
control. The range for setting of overload shall be suitably selected for
the equipment to be connected. They shall be of approved type and
manufacture.
TS/Fire/S14/8
MECHANICAL WORKS
9.19 Indicating lights shall be provided for all starter and control panel to
indicate power incoming mains available, mains turned on, motor run
and stop status, motor overload trip, alarm, etc. Indicating lamps used
shall be of heavy duty type and shall be submitted for approval prior to
order. Lamp provided shall be of long life type with a minimum
guaranteed lift of 10,000 hours continuous operation.
9.20 Push buttons shall be provided for manual starting and stopping on all
starter panels. All push buttons shall be designed for switching of
control circuits up to 500 V AC and shall be of heavy duty type and
approved manufacture.
9.21 Contactors shall be double break non-stick and chatter-free and of

9.22 Small wirings shall comply with BS 6346 of 600/1000 V grade and
PVC insulated. They shall be neatly cleated and bunched accordingly
to their function that easy identification can be maintained.
9.23 The branch circuit protectors and the main circuit protectors shall be
9.24 Moulded Case Circuit Breakers shall comply with BS 871 : Part 2. The
9.25 All moulded case current breakers shall have interrupting capacities in
Motor Control is lower, the breaker interrupting capacity shall
correspond to the short circuit rating of the LCB.
9.26 All relays and timers supplied shall be of make and type to the S.O.'s
approval.
9.27 Ammeter shall be suitable for flush mounting and shall be square or
9.28 All terminal blocks shall be of adequate rating and shall be of approved
make. Sufficient terminals shall be made available for easy
terminations and in no case shall more than 2 cores be allowed to be
terminated at any terminal.
TS/Fire/S14/9
MECHANICAL WORKS
9.29 All wiring shall be properly labelled and identified with approved type
feruled numbers which shall correspond exactly to the numbering
system as shown in the wiring and connection drawings for the
switchboards or starter panels. All terminals blocks shall also be
similarly labelled for identification. All wire termination shall be done
with approved type lugs.
9.30 Name-plates shall be provided for each circuit, equipment and

instrument for identification and designation in accordance with its
function. Name-plates shall be of black plastic material with engraved
white lettering and shall be fixed to the panel by brass screws.
9.31 All power cables shall be of copper conductors and phase conductors
shall follow the acceptable colour code.
9.32 RCCB shall be provided in all control/starter panels below 100 Amps
and earth leakage relay (with time delay) and overcurrent relay shall be
provided in panel/board 100 Amps and above. Earth fault protection of
IDMTL type (earth leakage) and DTL type (overcurrent) shall be
provided for multiple equipment panel/board.
9.33 Where earth fault protection is specified for motor branch circuits,
earth fault relays shall be incorporated into the motor starters. The fault
level setting of these earth fault relays shall be field adjustable.
9.34 The following indicating, measuring, controlling and alarming devices

mm) dial with selector switches for the indication of current
and voltage between phases, and between each phase and
neutral for the mains incoming power supply, together with
indicating pilot lights.
b) One (1) rotary selector switch "REMOTE-OFF-LOCAL"

c) One (1) Power meter measuring of line voltage, phase current.

kW, kWh, Frequency, power factor etc on each starter panel.
Power meter shall interface to BAS/IBMS for monitoring of the
consumption.
d) One (1) set start/stop push buttons colour coded for each motor
on each starter panel.
e) One (1) set pilot lights for the indication of "RUN-STOP-

TRIP" condition of each motor on each starter panel.
TS/Fire/S14/10
MECHANICAL WORKS
g) All necessary MCBs complete with outgoing cabling for

auxiliary and associated equipment power supplies.
9.35 The "REMOTE-OFF-LOCAL" operations at the LCB shall be

a) "REMOTE" means the starting of motor or equipment can be

started by the pressure switch cut-in where this is fire situation
and loss of pressure.

started at Local Control Board.
10.1 Unless otherwise stated in the Drawings or Specification, all power

cables between starters and motors shall be in copper of 600/1000 V
voltage grade fire resistance cable manufactured in accordance with
Singapore Standard SS299. Cable shall be tested in accordance to
Category C, W & Z of SS299 Part 1 for fire resistant, water and
mechanical shock respectively. All fire resistant cable shall be Halogen
free and conform to IEC 60754 Part 1. Armoured FR cables shall be
tested in accordance to BS6724. The fire resistant cable shall suitable
for surface wiring and wiring in conduit or duct. The cable shall be
both fire resistant and flame retardant to IEC 60331 and IEC 60332
respectively. It shall be approved by the local authority for use as fire
resistant cables in emergency circuits applications. Test Certificates
for the compliance to IEC standards shall be submitted with the
tender. The conductor shall be made of stranded, soft anneal copper
wires to BS 6360. The outer jacket shall be made of fire retardant low
chlorine PVC. Core identification of the cable shall be by colour of the
insulation according to SS 638 with amendments. The maximum
resistance of the conductors at 20oC shall not exceed that specified in
BS 6360. The cable and accessories shall be designed for operation up
to a conductor temperature of 105oC. The cable shall be suitable for
installation by conventional methods without requiring expensive
special tools, seals or terminations. They shall be non-hygroscopic,
maintenance free and insensitive to vibrations
TS/Fire/S14/11
MECHANICAL WORKS
10.2 The cables shall be installed on galvanised cable tray, or in galvanised
steel trunking. Where the cables on trays are installed less than 1.2m
above floor level they shall be protected with galvanised steel cover.
10.3 Where PVC/SWA/PVC cables are indicated in the drawings, they shall
be of copper and comply with BS 6346 (600/1000 V grade). All
underground cables shall be PVC/SWA/PVC cables and terminated
with BICC gland.
10.4 Where mineral insulated copper sheather (MICS) cables are indicated
in the drawings they shall comply with BS 6207: Part 1. MICS cables
shall be installed in accordance with the manufacturer's instruction
using proprietary fittings and accessories.
10.5 All power cabling sizes shall unless other wise indicated in the
drawings be adequately sized to cater for the normal current rating and
starting current of the equipment without undue overheating and stress.
10.6 Termination of power cable into motors or panel shall be through

cable sockets.
10.7 All power cables shall be fixed on cable tray with approved pvc or
10.8 All fire resistance type multi-core cables used shall conform to IEC
60331 and BS 4066.
10.9 All underground cables shall be PVC/SWA/PVC cables and terminated

with BICC gland.
10.10 All cabling for pumps, and other equipments shall be PVC/PVC
supply shall be MICS/PVC insulated cables.
10.11 All cables shall be properly labelled by means of cable markers and
cable ties shall be used to identify each set of cables.
TS/Fire/S14/12
MECHANICAL WORKS
10.12 All trunkings and cable trays shall be electro-galvanised and the
50 x 50 mm 1.219 mm (18 SWG)
50 x 75 mm 1.219 mm (18 SWG)
50 x 100 mm 1.219 mm (18 SWG)
50 x 125 mm 1.422 mm (17 SWG)
50 x 150 mm 1.422 mm (17 SWG)
50 mm 1.219 mm (18 SWG)
100 mm 1.219 mm (18 SWG)
150 mm 1.219 mm (18 SWG)
200 mm 1.219 mm (18 SWG)
250 mm 1.219 mm (18 SWG)
300 mm 1.219 mm (18 SWG)
10.13 All metal parts, piping, etc, should be bonded to the earthing point by
means of minimum 6 mm2 PVC insulated earth cable.
TS/Fire/S14/13
MECHANICAL WORKS
10.14 All metal conduits shall be galvanised steel class 4, BS 4568

manufactured and tested in accordance with SS 100:1974. Minimum
size of conduit shall be 20 mm diameter. Space factor for cable in
conduits shall not exceed 0.4 (40%). All metal conduits shall be of
heavy-gauge type. All conduits shall be run neatly, concealed where
possible, with runs truly horizontal or vertical or parallel to walls
where conduits run in floors. Conduits shall be securely fixed with
saddles and round head screws. Powered type of fittings will not be
permitted. From outlet to outlet there shall be not more than four (4)
normal bends or their equivalent. Inspection type conduit accessories
shall be used throughout. Conduits shall be fixed in position before
cables are drawn into them. The entire length of all cables shall be
enclosed in conduit. Junction boxes shall be used at bends and "t"
10.15 Flexible conduits which are exposed to weather or dampness shall be

of water-proof type with proper seals at connections to GI conduit and
motor terminal box. Ordinary flexible conduit wrapped with PVC tape
10.16 All circular junctions boxes, pull boxes, inspection elbows, solid
elbows shall be of malleable iron type and of standard pattern with
spout to BS 4568. All access covers for these accessories shall be
provided with gaskets and lids.
10.17 Connections to all equipment subject to movement shall be in flexible

10.18 Connections to the water tank's electrodes shall be of extruded pvc

10.19 All conduit and trunking shall be provided with saddles and bracket at
not more than 1 m interval.
10.20 All conduit and trunking shall be finally painted to approval.
10.21 Whenever the steel trunking passing through a full height fire wall or
floor, approved fire stop putty or approved equal material shall be used
to seal the cavity inside of the trunking and approved fire stop
compound or approved equal material to seal the air-gaps between wall
or floor and trunking.
TS/Fire/S14/14
MECHANICAL WORKS
11.1 All outdoor equipment shall be provided with suitable weatherproof

local start/stop control panel which shall be mounted in close
proximity to the equipment for servicing purposes and marked
accordingly. Exact location of the local control panel shall be decided
on site if not indicated.
11.2 All trunking to these equipment shall be of hot dip-galvanized. Any

non-Fire resistance cable used shall be of PVC/PVC insulated and
sheathed cables run in conduit/hot dip-galvanized trunking. NO cable
tray is allowed for cable to fire fighting equipment.
12.1 All motor and starters shall be suitably tropicalised and the starters
shall be incorporated with over current release in each phase and a
device to prevent single phasing as well as under voltage release.
12.2 All motors and starters shall comply with the current regulations of the
Electricity Act.
12.3 All motors and starts shall be of approved make, and designed for
operation in 400 V/3 Phase/50 Hz supply. Pumps shall be run with
variable speed drive and standby soft starter.
12.4 All starters shall be of uniform make irrespective of method of starting

12.5 Unless otherwise stated elsewhere in the specification and in the

a) They shall be selected suitably for 3-phase, 50 Hz operation

with speed not more than 1500 rpm unless otherwise approved.
b) They shall be of squirrel cage induction type with totally-

enclosed fan cooled enclosure.

highest standard possible power factor (min. 0.85) and
efficiency under all conditions of loading.
TS/Fire/S14/15
MECHANICAL WORKS
temperature rise.
e) They shall be equipped with cast iron made frames and

brackets.
f) They shall be equipped with enclosed cast iron terminal to

allow drilling and tapping to accept cables.
g) They shall be fitted with roller or deep groove ball bearings at

the driving end and deep groove ball bearing at the non-driving
end.Motor driving equipment giving rise to end thrust shall be
thrust.

recommendations and shall have a minimum life of 20,000
hours.
h) Motors shall be tested in accordance with the requirements of

BS 2613: 1970 and BS 4999:1972.
i) Where they are installed outdoor or exposed to the weather,

they shall be of minimum IP 55.
13.1 All incoming and outgoing and control circuits shall be wired to an
approved centralized terminal strip, and the equipment at the inside of
the cubicle shall be run via wiring channels and wiring outside the
channels shall be run neatly and taped to the approval of the S.O.. All
wires shall be terminated with approved cable lugs, and separate cable
lugs shall be used for each individual wire.
13.2 All wires shall be colour coded and shall have numbered ferrules at
both ends. The ferrules shall be of white insulating materials having a
glossy finished with the characters indelibly marked in black.
Additional red ferrules marked "Trip" shall be fitted to the wires inter-
connecting the relay trip contacts and the shunt release coils.
13.3 All fuses and links shall be of the bakelite HRC type category 440/AC
4 class Q to B.S. 88:1952.
13.4 All wiring shall be arranged in a regular manner with bends set at 90C
shall be installed in the uprights and/or backstays, insulating bushes
being used where necessary. They shall be formed in a neat and
systematic manner.
TS/Fire/S14/16
MECHANICAL WORKS
13.5 Meter wiring of the switchboard shall be carried out in PVC insulated
made.
13.6 All terminals shall be fitted with brass washers and securely fixed with
13.8 Power cable and control cable shall be installed in separate

conduit/trunking.
14.1 General

Standard BS 3871 part 2 or NEMA Standard AB1 and U/L
listed.
b) All MCCB shall have minimum interrupting capacities of

R.M.S. symmetrical amperes at 400 Volts A.C. for 3 sec.
c) All MCCBs in switchboard or distribution panel board shall be

of the same make.

operating handles.

14.2 Operation

mechanically trip free from the handle so that the contacts cannot be
held-closed against short circuits and abnormal currents. Tripping due
to overload or short circuit shall be clearly indicated by the handle
automatically assuming a position midway between the manual "ON"
and "OFF" positions. All latch surfaces shall be as constructed that they
open, closed and trip simultaneously.
TS/Fire/S14/17
MECHANICAL WORKS
14.3 Construction

current between 25C and 50C with tripping characteristics
that are approximately the same throughout this temperature
range.

interchangeable trip breaker shall have their cover sealed;
whereas interchangeable trip breaker shall have the trip unit
sealed to prevent tampering. Contacts for circuit breaker shall
be of non-welding silver or silver alloy.
c) Manual trip button and front-adjustable magnetic trip device
shall be incorporated in the moulded case circuit breaker.

e) Terminals shall be constructed to assure electrical efficiency

and reliability, with minimised possibility of localised heating.
f) Trip indication shall be by handle position mid-way between

'ON' and 'OFF'. To reset the trip mechanism, the handle shall be

current limiting breakers shall be fuseless type and shall have
the same operation as specified above. They shall meet the IEC
opened simultaneously under fault conditions. The breakers
shall have interrupting ratings as low as 10KA rms, sym. on
systems capable of delivering fault currents as high as 200KA,
rms, sym. The contact opening and are extinguishing shall be
less than  cycle to reduce and limit peak let-through current
and let-through energy.
TS/Fire/S14/18
MECHANICAL WORKS
code:
Colour Function
White 5A fuse
Blue 15A fuse
Yellow 20 fuse
Red link
Contractor.
15.4 The interior of each piece of equipment shall be clearly marked to

show the phases and to this end either coloured plastic discs screwed to
fixed components or identification by means of colour plastic sleeving
shall be employed. Plastic tape will not be permitted.
16. Labels
16.1 All equipment shall be clearly labelled in accordance with regulations,

labels (Block in white lettering for normal supply, Red in white
16.2 Each circuit breaker, switch, switch-fuse, fuse, selector switch,

indicating light, push button, instrument, etc. shall be labelled
indicating its rating, function, designation. In addition warning signs
marked "400 volts Danger" manufactured to standard design and
colour shall be suitably mounted and fixed on the back of the incoming
cubicles on the front of each switchboard and on the door of the
switchroom. The marking shall be in accordance with BS 171 clause
79.
TS/Fire/S14/19
MECHANICAL WORKS

class 'C' for measuring, class 'CM' for metering and class 'S' for
protection as per SS 638

summation of all V.A. burdens of connected loads, and shall be
capable of carrying currents of the corresponding circuit breakers and
fuses. They shall be capable of operation, without damage, with open
circuited secondary and full load current flowing in the primary. They
shall comply with the latest EMA requirements.

18.1 Instruments and meters for external panel mounting shall be flush
18.2 Reading scales in kilo-watt hour meters shall be in multiple of ten (10).
18.3 All instruments shall be to B.S. 89 1st grade, moving iron spring
adjustment. Integrating meters shall be to B.S. 37 part 1 and 2 : 1952
and part 4 : 1954 with cyclometer registers and shall be calibrated for
use with their respective current transformers. They shall be fully
tropicalised.
18.4 Voltmeters shall incorporate selector switches to enable phase to phase

TS/Fire/S14/20
MECHANICAL WORKS
19.1 The over current relays shall be IDMTL adjustable current setting
between 50% to 200% of rated values and adjustable time lag settings
of 0 to 3.0 seconds; instantaneous high set elements shall be provided
for each main circuit breaker.
19.2 The relays shall be of the surface mounted and housed in a totally
necessary load. Operation indicator and reset facilities shall be
provided.
19.4 The relays shall be heavy pattern, unaffected by external vibration,

fully tropicalised and capable of operation in any position.
20.1 The earth fault relays shall incorporate adjustable current setting
between 5% to 40% in steps of 5% and adjustable time lag 0 to 1 sec.
20.2 The relays shall be of the flush pattern and housed in removable dust-
provided to show a fault condition.

Indicating lamps shall be LED 24 volts type. The lamp shall be easily removed
or replaced from the front of the panel without using extractors and shall be
adequately ventilated.
TS/Fire/S14/21
MECHANICAL WORKS
23.1 General
Unless otherwise stated, miniature circuit breakers and distribution

boards shall have minimum short-circuit capacities of R.M.S.
symmetrical amperes of 10 KA for power circuit distribution boards at
230/400 Volt A.C.

type "3" curve.
Irrespective to the mounting positions, the miniature circuit breakers

shall be operated in accordance with the factory calibrated
characteristic.
All miniature circuit breakers shall be of positive plug-on or bolted-on,

no error connection type.
Miniature circuit breaker must have positive contact position

indicator.
23.2 Operation
Miniature circuit breakers shall be operated by a toggle-type handle

and shall have a quick-made, positive quick-break over centre
switching mechanism that is mechanically trip free from the handle so
that the contacts cannot be held close against short circuits and over
current conditions. When the circuit breaks and over current
conditions. When the circuit breakers automatically trip, the operating
handle shall be assured a position between "ON" and "OFF" positions.
The contacts shall also be of positive quick-make and quick-break on
manual and automatic operation.
Contact position indicator (coloured) linking physically to the contacts

for the positive indication of isolation shall be provided.
TS/Fire/S14/22
MECHANICAL WORKS
23.3 Construction
bi-metal overcurrent element with inverse time delay characteristic and
a factory calibrated instantaneous magnetic tripping device for short
circuit condition. Ambient temperature compensation shall be
accomplished by a secondary bi-metal that shall allow the circuit
breaker to carry rated current between 25C to 50C with tripping
characteristics that are the same throughout this temperature range, and
that shall not cause nuisance tripping.
Circuit breakers shall be completely enclosed in a high dielectric

strength casing. The properties of the dielectric strength casing shall
not deteriorate with time.
The high pressure plug-on busbar connector shall assure a solid

positive contacts without screw to tighten and no chance of error.

straight in wiring.
Arcing shall be extinguished rapidly and effectively by arc chute

barrier, in normal switching as well as protective tripping, to minimize

"ON" and "OFF". To reset the trip mechanism, the handle shall be
moved to extreme "OFF" position.
24. Testing
24.1 All electrical installation works shall be tested in accordance with the
requirements of SS 638 and the local authorities. All test results shall
be submitted to the S.O. for approval before turn-on of power.
24.2 The Sub-Contractor shall be responsible for all Electrical tests at the
site and shall be represented by a capable during the whole of the
period required for the tests.
24.3 All materials and equipment supplied or erected under this Contract
Contractor without cost to the Employer and the tests shall be repeated.
TS/Fire/S14/23
MECHANICAL WORKS
24.4 All tests shall be conducted in the presence of and to the satisfaction of
apparatus, connections, skilled and unskilled labour required for the
tests to the satisfaction of the S.O. and the cost of doing so shall be
included in the Contract price.
24.5 The Sub-Contractor shall make accurate records of all tests and shall
furnish test certificates and a schedule of the results in an approved
form. Four copies of such schedules and of each test certificate will be
required.
24.6 Any circuit or section of the installation failing to reach the required
without cost to the Employer.
24.7 The minimum of site tests to be carried out on each completed section
of the electrical installation shall be as follows:
c) Tests to prove correct operation of interlocks, tripping and

closing circuits, indications, etc.
g) Polarity tests to verify that single pole switches are installed in

the phased or live conductor of each circuit and not in the
neutral conductor.

i) Insulation resistance tests to earth and between conductors

before and after fitting of lamps. The standard of acceptance for
Edition of the IEE Regulations for the Electrical Equipment of
the Building.

TS/Fire/S14/24
MECHANICAL WORKS
k) Earth continuity tests for each final sub-circuit and the

completed installation to ensure that the impedance of the earth
fault loop is such as to permit compliance with the
requirements of Section D and E of the latest Edition of the IEE
Regulations for the Electrical Equipment of Buildings.
Contractor shall certify in writing to the S.O. that his electrical installation is
in full compliance with the Electricity Act Regulations and that it is safe for
turn-on. The certificate shall be signed by a EMA licensed electrical worker,
employed by the Sub-Contractor and qualified to sign for the capacity of the
installation involved. Test results shall accompany this certification.
TS/Fire/S14/25
MECHANICAL WORKS
1. General
1.1 Unless otherwise specified, anti-vibration isolators shall be provided for all
equipment with rotating or reciprocating components to prevent the
transmission of vibration and structure borne transmission of sound to the
building structure. Vibration isolators shall be selected in accordance with
the weight distribution so as to produce reasonably uniform deflection.
minimum noise transmission. The selection of isolators shall be based on
the lowest shaft speed of any component equipment which may be mounted
(rigidly or otherwise) on the bases to which the vibration isolators shall be
attached to.

Specification or Tender Drawings be responsible for the following:-

properly selected anti-vibration mountings. Machines should be
individually mounted rather than on a common base.
b) Provide where applicable, floating inertia bases weighted suitably

in accordance with the equipment weights.
c) Select fans with low noise, low top-speeds and outlet velocities as
is practically possible for the specific application. The selection
shall be such that the air quantity or outlet velocity is within the
range 0.95 - 1.5 times the air quantity or outlet velocity supplied by
the fan at its peak efficiency for the design static pressure.
d) Select motors with low bearing noise and of adequate lubrication

and motor contactors free of vibration and rattling.
e) Install smooth bends and airfoil turning vanes in all ventilation duct
work.

g) Select all air handling system accessories with low radiated and
discharged sound power levels.
h) Provide internal acoustic linings to all AHUs' duct work, minimum

5 metres on supply and return air ducts or as shown in the
Drawings.
TS/Fire/S20/1
MECHANICAL WORKS
1.4 The noise level in all air conditioned and mechanical ventilated areas shall
not exceed the recommended level. The readings shall be taken with all air
conditioning equipment operational at full capacity. It shall be the Sub-
Contractor's responsibility to carry out all noise measurements and ensure
that all air-handling units and other equipments are selected and installed to
meet the design level. Where necessary, noise attenuators special
equipment covers and vibration isolators shall be provided.
1.5 The Sub-Contractor is required to ensure that the above criteria shall be
fully complied. He would be required to install noise attenuation material
and devices to ensure that the criteria is fully met. The cost for the above
compliance shall be included in the Tender price and any deviation from
this Section shall be made known to the S.O..
1.6 The Sub-Contractor shall supply and install isolation and support for the
following :
a) Acoustic seals for duct work, pipe work penetrating through wall.
b) Facilities to allow expansion and contraction for vertical pipe run.
2.1 The requirement of spring isolator for duct work shall be applicable only to
the first three rod hangers from the fan/AHU equipment.
neoprene cup manufactured with a grommet to prevent short circuiting of
the hanger rod. The cup shall contain a steel washer designed to properly
distribute the load on the neoprene and prevent its extrusion. Spring
diameters and hanger box lower hole sizes shall be large enough to permit
the hanger rod to swing through a 30 arc before contacting the hole and
short circuiting the spring. Springs shall have a minimum additional travel
to solid equal to 50% of the rated deflection. Spring deflection shall be a
minimum of 20 mm.
TS/Fire/S20/2
MECHANICAL WORKS
When a duct or pipe penetrate a building structure, the space in between shall be
completely sealed with one layer of 25 mm thick and 120 kg/m3 fibreglass in 22
SWG sheet metal sleeve and caulked from both sides with non-setting bitumen
compound.
4.1 Pipe spring in the main lines shall be pre-compressed to the rated deflection
so as to keep the piping at a fixed elevation during installation. The
hangers shall be designed with a release mechanism to force the spring after
the installation is completed and the hanger is subjected to its full load.
4.2 Pipe work connected to vibration generating equipment shall be supported

by vibration isolated hangers.
4.3 Inherently rigid plants connections, such as condenser piping between the
cooling tower and the chillers, shall be resiliently supported with the same
efficiency mechanical isolation as the major plant to which it is connected.
4.4 Chilled water piping within the plant room and the risers shall be provided
with vibration isolated supports.
4.5 For all other mechanical equipment, the first three hangers/supports from
the equipment shall be spring in series with neoprene types as specified.
4.6 All other supports/hangers beyond the first three pipe hangers specified in
the schedule shall incorporate an isolation medium of 8 mm thickness such
as waffle pattern neoprene, felt or high density fibreglass between pipe and
hanger/support or between hanger/support and wall. This shall apply to all
piping installed, whether in horizontal runs or vertical pipe risers, unless
otherwise allowed by the S.O..
5.1 Spring type isolators shall be free standing and laterally stable without any
housing and complete with 1/4" neoprene acoustical friction pads between
the baseplate and the support. All mountings shall have levelling bolts that
must be rigidly bolted to the equipment. Spring diameter shall be not less
than 0.8 of the compressed height of the spring at rated load. Springs shall
have a minimum additional travel to solid equal to 50% of the rated
deflection.
TS/Fire/S20/3
MECHANICAL WORKS
building structure through the use of steel coil spring/neoprene assemblies.
Ribbed neoprene pads shall be incorporated under the base plate of the
springs and shall be at least 10 mm thick.
6. Spring Hangers
Vibration hangers shall contain a steel spring and 0.3" deflection neoprene element
in series and encased in a welded bracket. Spring diameter and hanger box lower
hole sizes shall be large enough to permit the hanger rod to swing through a 30 arc
before contacting the hole and short circuiting the spring. Springs shall have a
minimum additional travel to solid equal to 50% of the rated deflection.
7.1 The Sub-Contractor shall install approved attenuators (silencers) where

shown in the Drawings, or as required if not shown, to achieve the
performance as specified.
Sub-Contractor and that the noise levels exceed the specified levels, the
Sub-Contractor shall be required to rectify the defect and to replace the
sound attenuators if necessary at his own costs, to achieve the specified
requirements.
7.3 The Sub-Contractor is to note that all equipment offered shall comply with
the N.C. levels recommended by the Authorities or as stated in the
Specification whichever is lower. The Sub-Contractor shall be required to
rectify without any additional cost to the University all equipment that does
not comply with the N.C. levels recommended.
7.4 Certified test data on dynamic insertion loss and self-generated noise with
an airflow of at least 7.5 m/sec face velocity, pressure drop and a complete
set of noise attenuators selected and offered shall be furnished at the time of
Tender. Attenuators without any verifiable selection data shall not be
accepted.
TS/Fire/S20/4
MECHANICAL WORKS
7.5 Attenuators supplied shall be designed, manufactured and supplied by a

proprietary manufacturer who has advertised and certifiable performance
data provided to allow verification and audit checking of the selection of
proposed silencers by the S.O.. The catalogue data shall include not less
than the following:
a) Insertion loss for at least 125, 250, 500, 1000, 2000, 4000 and 8000
Hz
7.6 The attenuator cases shall be constructed with 1.2 mm minimum hot dipped
galvanised steel duct sections with air channels. Splitters shall be
streamlined shape with respect to air flow and shall comprise an absorbent
pad of heavy density mineral wool of fibre glass covered in fibre glass
scrim and faced with perforated zincanneal, having a free area appropriate
to the application. Where applicable, this lining shall also cover the
internal areas of the casing between the splitters. Casing shall have steel
angles and flanges and reinforcing to the standards set out for the duct
work. Steel angles, and any areas of the casings where the galvanising has
been damaged, shall be cleaned and finished with cold galvanising
compound before leaving the manufacturer's premises.
7.7 Acoustic attenuation casing shall be designed and built to limit radiated
noise so that space noise criteria are not exceeded.
7.8 Attenuators installed in high pressure duct work shall be pressure tested
with the rest of the duct system. All leaks shall be repaired.
manufacturer's name, type number, direction of air flow and identification.
TS/Fire/S20/5
MECHANICAL WORKS

1. Chiller Set Vertically restrained Factory fabricated
spring isolator with noise structural steel base
stop pad
laterally stable steep intergral mounting of
spring with top and fan, motor and casing
bottom load plate and panel
levelling bolt
fans
4. Water - ditto - Inertia base constructed
pump of welded steel channel
to receive concrete pour
5. Cooling Towers Double ribbed neoprene -
pad
9.1 Unless specified otherwise, spring type isolator shall be unhoused, free
standing, laterally stable with levelling bolts rigidly bolted to inertia
compressed height and shall not be less than 0.8 of compressed height at
rated load, and horizontal spring stiffness shall be approximately equal to
vertical stiffness.
spring.
9.3 All springs shall be mounted with adequate clearance from brackets and
shall be clearly in view of critical inspection.
TS/Fire/S20/6
MECHANICAL WORKS
maintained around the restraining bolts and between the housing and spring
so as not to interfere with spring action. Limit stops shall be out of contact
during normal operations.
9.5 All spring type (whether free or restrained type) mounts used outdoors or
exposed to weather or wet conditions shall be hot dipped galvanised and
epoxy coated.
ribbed or waffle pattern pads (min. 8 mm thickness) as described below.
minimum spring deflections as specified without being compressed solid,
or bridged out, or exceeding the Manufacturer's maximum rated loads
under any operating condition. In the selection of the springs the Sub-
Contractor shall also take into account the weight distribution of the
equipment under normal operating conditions, weight of unsupported
pipes/ducts, and any large dynamic forces due to fluid movement, torque
reaction and starting/stopping. The Sub-Contractor shall show, on the shop
drawings submitted, the make and model number of the isolators selected
and their individual calculated loads.
10. Inertia Blocks
10.1 To be installed where specified. The mechanical equipment shall be bolted

directly on to the integral concrete inertia blocks. All concrete referred to
in this Specification should have a density of at least 140-150 lbs/cu. ft.
(2240-2400 kg/cu. m).
10.2 In general, the length and width of the inertia block should be at least 50%
greater than the length and width of the supported equipment, except where
10.3 The weight of the inertia block, generally determined by thickness, shall be
as specified.
10.4 The base shall consist of a concrete slab cast into a welded steel base frame
assembly. Frames shall be welded steel channels, of minimum (150 mm)
thickness or the same thickness as the inertia block and shall be reinforced
with welded-in (12 mm) steel reinforcing rods or angles at 6" (150 mm)
centres each way. Anchor bolts shall be fixed into position, and housed in
steel bolt sleeve to allow minor bolt location adjustments or alternatively,
pocket shall be cast into inertia block to permit the later insertion of anchor
bolts.
TS/Fire/S20/7
MECHANICAL WORKS

welded directly to channel frames, and suitably located to accommodate the
height of the deflected springs and inertia block clearance with plinth.
10.6 There shall be adequate clearance (min. 20 mm) all round the springs to
assure that there is no contact between any spring and any part of the
mounted assembly for any possible alignment or position of the installed
inertia block. The clearance between inertia block and floor/plinth shall be
at least 75 mm.
reinforcement and concrete required for the inertia blocks and shall co-
ordinate his installation with the Sub-Contractor. All installation work
concerning these items are included in this Contract.
11.1 Minimum 40 mm thick neoprene pads shall be installed where specified.

11.3 Where two or more layers of neoprene pads are used, individual layers shall
be separated by 20 SWG thick steel shims.
12.1 Resilient hangers are to be used for resilient suspension of pumping mains
pipes.
neoprene type, and for deflections less than 12 mm used neoprene in shear
type hangers.
12.3 During installation, inspection shall be made to ensure that no hangers are
compressed solid or bridged out, and that the stipulated minimum
deflection are achieved.
TS/Fire/S20/8
MECHANICAL WORKS
13. NR Curve Level
The Table below shows the noise level criteria for the various areas. These levels
shall be measured with the room equipped with equipment and be ready to be used.
The equipment in the room shall be in the non-operating mode.
For the auditorium, conference rooms, lecture theatres and other noise sensitive
rooms the volume control dampers for each diffuser shall be located along the run-
out ducts and not at the diffuser plenums.


NR Curve App. DB(A)
Auditorium 30 35
Car parks - 65
Laboratories 45 50
13.1 All noise levels must be measured with a Type 1 sound level meter set at
slow response and placed at 1.5m from the finished floor/ground level. The
measured NC shall be read as NC+5 if the perceived background noise is
tonal, rumbling or groaning.
13.2 The measurements shall be conducted by the Contractor’s

Acoustic/Vibration Consultant and witnessed by the S.O..
14. Contractor’s Acoustic/Vibration Consultant
14.1 The Contractor is required to engage the services of a qualified

Acoustic/Vibration Consultant to assist him in the acoustic design and
noise and vibration control of his installations and final vibration
measurements. The Contractor must submit the qualifications and
experience of the Acoustic/Vibration Consultant in his tender submission.
The proposed Acoustic/Vibration Consultant must have considerable
relevant experience in micro-vibration design environments, including
Clean Room acoustic designs and requirements. A list of such projects
which the Acoustic/Vibration Consultant has undertaken must be
submitted.
TS/Fire/S20/9
MECHANICAL WORKS
14.2 The duty of the Acoustic/Vibration Consultant is to assist the Contractor

and to ensure all his M&E installation will not affect the vibration-
controlled floor as specified.
14.3 The S.O. reserves the right not to accept the proposed Acoustic/Vibration
Consultant should the submission shows the proposed does not possess
sufficient knowledge or work experience on vibration-controlled and
micro-vibration floor for clean room designs. In such a situation, the
Contractor shall re-propose a Acoustic/Vibration Consultant as instructed.
14.4 The tender submission shall also include:
i. The Acoustic/Vibration Consultant’s qualification

ii. The Acoustic/Vibration Consultant’s experience in mechanical and
electrical noise and vibration control design
iii. The Acoustic/Vibration Consultant’s experience in vibration-
controlled and micro-vibration floor designs. A project list on such
a design must be furnished
iv. The instrumentation the Acoustic/Vibration Consultant will use for
the micro-vibration measurements
14.5 Upon the award and prior to all works, the Acoustic/Vibration Consultant
is required to assist the Contractor to prepare for submission his work
schedule on acoustic designs and vibration measurements, including: -
i. Method statements on design and programs of noise and vibration

measurements
ii. Proposal of all measurement locations for approval
14.6 The Contractor is required to submit reports on the acoustic and vibration
work and measurements.
14.7 The reports shall compare the measurement results with the specified
criteria and shall propose any necessary rectification work to the
installation if compliance has not been achieved. Any further work
including rectification and additional testing required shall be conducted at
the Contractor’s own expense.
14.8 The reports should compare:
i. The measured noise levels in NC against criteria

ii. The measured vibrations in the Clean Room against criteria in
graphical format.
TS/Fire/S20/10
MECHANICAL WORKS
1. General


of his workmen.
2. Metal Surface
TS/Fire/S21/1
MECHANICAL WORKS
c) All duct work
f) Suppliers items
g) Galvanised steel
employed.
applied.

TS/Fire/S21/2
MECHANICAL WORKS


1 coat - undercoat

finishing coat.
be epoxy paints.


chromate paint.
paint.
TS/Fire/S21/3
MECHANICAL WORKS


75 mm.

PIPE
other other
150mm 150mm 150mm
approved approved
A B C
colour colour
Pipe A B C

green and white

and Vent

TS/Fire/S21/4
MECHANICAL WORKS
6. Colour Scheme
Gas pipe Yellow

S.O..


Green (Supply line)

Blue (supply line)
BAS services White
Duct work Beige
over.
TS/Fire/S21/5
MECHANICAL WORKS
7. Directional Flow
300mm 150mm
50mm

8. Galvanising

commences.
TS/Fire/S21/6
MECHANICAL WORKS
SECTION 22 – BUILDING MANAGEMENT SYSTEM PROVISIONS
1. General

Management System (BMS).
1.2 It is intended for the various equipment and systems to be networked to

a computerised BMS which would be user-friendly.
2. Scope of Work by the Various Contractors
2.1 Main Contractor
The Main Contractor shall be responsible for co-ordinating all services

that are required to be interfaced, controlled or monitored by the BMS.
2.2 ACMV Sub-Contractor
The ACMV Sub-Contractor shall be responsible to supply, deliver,

install, test, commission, service and maintain a fully operative and
efficient BMS. He shall liaise and co-ordinate with the Main
Contractor and other Sub-Contractors to ensure that the system
requirements for interfacing, controlling or monitoring of all services
as indicated in the BMS Points Schedule are achieved.
The ACMV Sub-Contractor shall supply, deliver, install, test

commission, service and maintain all the sensors and instrumentations
required to achieve the interfacing, controlling or monitoring as
specified. He shall liaise and work closely with the other Sub-
Contractors to ensure that the sensors and instrumentations supplied by
him are properly installed in the various systems.
The ACMV Sub-Contractor shall supply, deliver, install, test,

commission, service and maintain the screened signal cables in
conduits/trunkings that are required to interface, control or monitor the
various systems. He shall be responsible to connect these cables into
the sensors and instrumentations supplied by him. For control panels
of the various systems, the ACMV Sub-Contractor shall liaise and
work closely with the other Sub-Contractors to ensure that the relays
and contacts provided by them are of the correct type and suitable for
use in the BMS. Final connections of these cables into the interfacing
panels containing terminals strips connecting to the relays and contacts
shall be carried out by the ACMV Sub-Contractor.
TS/Fire/22/1
MECHANICAL WORKS
All digital output shall be provided by the ACMV Sub-Contractor and

they shall be voltage-free.
2.3 Plumbing and Sanitary Contractor (Domestic)
The Plumbing and Sanitary Contractor shall liaise and work closely
with the Main Contractor and the ACMV Sub-Contractor to ensure that
The Plumbing and Sanitary Contractor shall supply, deliver, install,

test, commission, service and maintain the following for their control
Schedules

shall be provided for each START/STOP control signal and
each status indication signal (ON/OFF, TRIPPED, flow switch,
alarm point, Hi-low level etc.) respectively as indicated in the
Drawings and BMS Points Schedule.
- Current/voltage transformers and power transducer to provide

0-10 vdc/4-20 mA for kw/current monitoring.
- KWH meter complete with pulse output (voltage free) for

KWH.

TS/Fire/22/2
MECHANICAL WORKS
2.4 All BMS wired points shall be marked and indicated in the shop
drawings as "To BMS" by the respective Sub-Contractors.
2.5 The Plumbing and Sanitary Contractor shall provide installation points
to suit the type of sensors and instrumentations that would be supplied
and installed by the ACMV Sub-Contractor.
2.6 Fire Protection Services Contractor (Domestic)
The Fire Protection Services Contractor shall liaise and work closely
The Fire Protection Services Contractor shall supply, deliver, install,

Schedules



KWH.

2.8 The Fire Protection Services Contractor shall provide installation

supplied and installed by the ACMV Sub-Contractor.
TS/Fire/22/3
MECHANICAL WORKS
3. BMS Points Schedule

requirements. The Contractor shall allow cost in his Tender for any

3.3 In general, the following are to be provided for :
a) Domestic Water Pumps/Irrigation Pumps/Water Pumps/Sump

Pumps/Drainage Pumps/Ejector Pumps
i) ON/OFF Control
ii) Programmed ON/OFF Control
iii) ON/OFF Status
iv) Electrical TRIP ALARM
v) Run-Time Totalization
vi) Local/Remote Mode
b) Water Tanks
i) LOW Water LEVEL ALARM

ii) HIGH Water LEVEL ALARM
c) PH Sensors
i) ON/OFF Status
ii) PH level
d) Digital Water Meters
i) ON/OFF Status
ii) Water Consumption
e) Gas Detectors
i) Gas Detectors Address and Status

ii) Gas Detectors Fault Alarm
iii) Gas Detectors HIGH ALARM
iv) Bells, Horns and Sirens Control and Reset
TS/Fire/22/4
MECHANICAL WORKS
f) Main Switchboard
i) 3-phase Current Ampere

ii) 3-phase LV Voltage Indication
iii) Kilo-watt-hour Indication
iv) Trip Alarm
v) ON/OFF STATUS
g) Starter Panels

ii) Kilo-watt-hour Indication
iii) Power Meter
h) Solenoid Valves
i) ON/OFF Control
ii) TRIP ALARM
iii) ON/OFF Status
i) Fire Alarm Panels
i) Fire Point Address and Status

ii) Fire Point Fault Alarm
iii) Fire Point Fire Alarm
iv) Smoke Detector Maintenance Alarm
v) Panel Tampered Alarm
vi) Bells, Horns and Sirens Control and Reset
vii) Fireman's Intercom Control
viii) Public Address Speakers Zone Control
ix) Public Address Speakers Zone Fault Alarm
j) Sprinkler/Wet Riser Pumps
i) ON/OFF Status
ii) Electrical TRIP ALARM
iii) Run-Time Totalisation
k) Sprinkler/Wet Riser/Suction Water Tanks

TS/Fire/22/5
MECHANICAL WORKS
l) Sprinkler/Wet Riser Transfer Pumps
i) ON/OFF Status
ii) TRIP ALARM
iv) Local/Remote Mode
m) Hosereel Pumps
i) ON/OFF Status
n) Hosereel Water Tanks

o) FM 200/ VESDA
i) ON/OFF Status
ii) Activate building fire ALARM
iii) Electrical TRIP ALARM
iv) General Fault ALARM
v) FM200 1st STAGE ALARM
vi) FM200 2ND STAGE ALARM/ GAS Discharge
ALARM
vii) VESDA 1ST STAGE ALARM
viii) VESDA 2ND STAGE ALARM
p) Pre-Action Valve
i) ON/OFF Status
iii) Smoke Detector ALARM
q) Sprinkler Water Supply Stop Valve/ Mains Stop Valve/

Subsidiary Stop Valves
i) ON/OFF Status
ii) TRIP ALARM
3.4 The Contractors shall read the Specifications and Drawings

TS/Fire/22/6
MECHANICAL WORKS
SECTION 23 - TESTING AND COMMISSIONING OF FIRE PROTECTION

SYSTEM
1. General
The Contractor shall carry out tests of the various systems and equipment
supplied and installed in this Contract. The test programme shall be arranged
as specified in the supplementary conditions of Contract. Prior to the
Contractor's test being carried out he shall arrange for an inspection of the
various items by the relevant authorities and obtain approval from such
authorities that the items inspected comply with the rules, regulations and by-
laws of the authorities and where required, Authorities shall also witness the
tests.
2. System Testing
2.1 The following tests shall be carried out on the installed works, and all
defects corrected prior to final acceptance and commissioning. (These
tests shall be in addition to those required under LPC & NFPA).
a) Simulated fire tests on all detection system components.
b) All other tests as and when required by the S.O. to ensure that
the installation is in satisfactory and acceptable condition
3. Materials & Labour
The Contractor shall include in the tender price of all materials and labour
required for all tests carried out for commissioning as required by the S.O. and
the Authorities.
4. Cleaning Up After Testing
The cost of all labour, equipment, etc. required to be cleaned up after each and
every test shall be included in the tender price.
TS/Fire/S23/1
MECHANICAL WORKS
SECTION 24- SERVICE AND MAINTENANCE
1. General
1.1. This section covers the work involved in the regular maintenance
and/or breakdown service of the systems and equipment, etc., installed
as follows:-
Fire Protection System
1.2. The work shall be carried out in accordance with the schedule stated in
this section or other section of the specification during the defects and
liability period.
2. Scope
2.1. The 12 months warranty period shall commence after the successful
handover of the entire installation to the Employer.
2.2. It is the responsibility of the Contractor to maintain the systems in first

2.3. During the warranty period the Contractor shall carry out twelve
months free servicing (unless other stated) to the systems and
equipment including cleaning etc at approximately monthly intervals in
accordance with the maintenance responsibilities outlined hereinafter
or as indicated within other sections of this specification. Allowance
shall be made in the Tender price for any cost incurred by complying
with this requirement.
2.4. The Contractor shall replace all faulty or damaged parts with new ones
during the warranty period at no expense to the Employer. This clause
shall override any standard warranty conditions of the Contractor or his
supplier of equipment. Allowance shall be made here for any cost
incurred by complying with this requirement.
TS/Fire/S24/1
MECHANICAL WORKS
2.5. The Contractor shall prepare a detailed inspection and service report
form showing functions to be carried out and the intervals between
each functions to enable records of servicing to be maintained. The
functions shall include all the maintenance responsibilities outlined
hereinafter for each specific protection devices plus any other special
maintenance requirements recommended by the manufacturers. The
inspection and service report duly signed by the Employer shall be
submitted to the S.O. within the first week of every month.
2.6. The Contractor shall also inform the Employer within the last week of
every month, the date and time scheduled for the maintenance and
servicing of the system in the next month.
2.7. Routine maintenance and servicing to the system is to be carried out

during normal working hours unless it is otherwise specified elsewhere
2.8. During the warranty period, the Contractor shall attend to any
complaint promptly at no expense to the Employer.
2.9. As the systems are operating on 24 hour basis, the Contractor shall
ensure that his workshop can provide 24 hour service.
2.10. After the attendance of complaint and completion of the repair work, a
copy of the report or service chit duly signed by the Employer shall be
forwarded to the S.O. for information and record.
2.11. The Contractor shall be responsible for the conduct and behaviour of
his workmen. Upon arrival at the premises for servicing or repair
works, the workmen are required to inform the officer-in-charge in the
premises the purpose of their visit. The Contractor shall ensure that
minimal inconvenience is caused to the Employer.
2.12. Final payment of retention monies to the Contractor will be certified

only after evidence of regular and satisfactory maintenance during the
warranty period and had been shown.
2.13. The Contractor shall keep adequate spare parts for the systems under
installation or the Employer’s property through the act of negligence of
their workmen except where it can be proven that it is no fault of
theirs.
2.15. All tests, observations, readings and rectification works shall be fully
recorded in a log book provided in the Maintenance Office and signed
and acknowledged by the Employer.
TS/Fire/S24/2
MECHANICAL WORKS
3.1. All work described herein shall be perform by workmen skilled in the
service, maintenance and repair of and the installation and shall be
executed in accordance with the best commercial practice.
3.2. All materials to be supplied in connection with works shall be new and
unused and shall generally be of the best quality as regards
manufacture and performance. Replacement of parts and accessories
shall be of the original manufacture, make and model. Any deviation
shall be approved by the S.O..
4. Schedule of Servicing And Maintenance
Servicing and maintenance of the systems shall be carried out as stated below
(but not limited to) on a periodic basis as specified. All works not covered by
the following list but recommended and required by the manufacturers shall
also be performed.
Schedule of Maintenance
5. Control System
The control system shall be maintained by suitable and qualified maintenance

team. The following shall be performed and carried out once every 3 months
unless otherwise stated. The others which are recommended by manufacturer
and are not stated herewith shall be performed and carried out as well.
5.1 Electrical Systems
Inspect all electrical equipment and test operation of control and all
alarm elements monthly.
a) Check all motor contacts and clean or replace as necessary.
b) Check all protective devices such as one single phasing

protection and adjust or replace as necessary.
c) Check all alarm systems and adjust/replace as necessary.
d) Check condition of battery and battery charger unit in good

operational order.
e) Check all indicator and warning lights for proper functioning by

simulation of fault.
f) Check and visually inspect condition of all electrical

components in the control panel, including resistors, capacitors
cable and wire connections. Check proper functioning of
TS/Fire/S24/3
MECHANICAL WORKS
supervisory circuits including fault display indication for fault

in the external circuit.
g) Check operation and effectiveness of power supply failure

facility by disconnecting the main supply from the battery
charger. Check the effectiveness and sufficiency of the battery
stand-by supply to perform its intended function.
5.2 Automatic Fire Alarm System
a) Simulate fire conditions by actual simulation of detector groups

using the detector tester and resetting the installation to normal
and confirming with the fire services that the alarm signal is
transmitted to the fire station. Similarly, actuate manual break
glass pull-station for correct functional test to set off an alarm.
b) Check battery voltage and charging current in accordance with

manufacturer's instruction and handbook.
c) Check batteries including terminals for cleanliness and correct

level of electrolyte in each cell to ensure that they are in good
serviceable condition.
d) Conduct lamp test at the control unit to ensure all indicating

lights are operating correctly and replace if faulty.
e) Check operation of all alarm sounders.
f) Check power supply failure facility by disconnecting the mains

and battery supply.
g) Check initiating facilities to operate control function such as

pressurization fans, homing of lifts, AHU etc., to ensure proper
operation in the event of fire situation.
h) Arrange for random test and servicing to check the operation of

approximately 20% of the fire detectors at site. The selection
of detectors shall be made in such a way that all detectors in the
installation are checked and serviced at least once a year.
i) Visual inspection of electronic components/modules to ensure

clean and operative condition at all times.
j) Check the tightness of all screwed connections in the panel.
k) Carry out any other tests and checks as required by the Code of
Practice or recommendations by the manufacturer.
TS/Fire/S24/4
MECHANICAL WORKS
l) On completion of tests, check and ensure all blocking buttons

are returned to their normal operating position.
m) Service report to be submitted at the end of service.
n) Notify the Fire Service of the before and after the testing.
o) Check the light indicators and repeater panels for correct

indication of alarm.
5.3 Pumping System (Automatic Fire Sprinkler / Wet Riser System)
Inspect all pumping system equipment and test operation of controls

monthly
i) Pump sets:
a) Check all seals, glands and pipe lines for leaks, and
rectify as necessary.
b) Check all pumps bearings and lubricate with oil or

grease as necessary.
c) Check the alignment and condition of all rubber

couplings between pumps and drive motors and rectify
as necessary.
d) Check all bolts and nuts for tightness and tighten as

necessary.
e) Operation of pumps and flow test shall be carried out to

ensure a discharge of pump is achieved. Check operation
of flow switch. Check leakage (seals and glands) of
control value and rectify as necessary.
ii) Electrical Installation
a) Check all motor bearings and lubricate with grease as

necessary.
b) Check safety devices fitted to all motors, and clean,

adjust and lubricate as necessary.
c) Inspect and check the routine operation of all electrical

starters, electrical control gears and ancillary electrical
apparatus
TS/Fire/S24/5
MECHANICAL WORKS
d) Clean, adjust and lubricate all bearings, pivots and other

moving parts as necessary.
e) Clean or renew electric contactors as necessary
f) Renew electric fuses as necessary.
g) Test all electrical wiring with Megger
iii) System Control
a) Check all sensors and clean, adjust and calibrate as

necessary
b) Check and run program for system
iv) Pipe work and Accessories
a) Check for leakages in the pipes and fittings
b) Check all bolts and nuts for tightness and tighten
c) Perform function test on all fittings and rectify as

necessary
5.4 Pipe work and Water Installation
Inspect all pipe work monthly.
a) Check all pipe lines for leaks and rectify as necessary
b) Check all water level and adjust all fill up as necessary
c) Check the operation of all safety devices, and clean, adjust and
lubricate as necessary
d) Check all bolts and nuts for tightness, and tighten as necessary
e) Tank shall be checked and rectified for leakage
TS/Fire/S24/6
MECHANICAL WORKS
5.5 Hose Reel System
a) Check, service and rectify any defects in the water supply

system, including water tank, pipe work, valves, fittings, hose
reels, etc. as specified in clause 5.3 and 5.4
b) Check, service and rectify any defects in the water pumping

system, including pumps, motor starters and switchboards,
control, etc. as previously specified.
c) Check, service and rectify any defects in the pressure switches,

gauges, etc.
d) Check the control interlocking system
5.6 Gas Suppression System
a) Simulate fire conditions by actual simulation of detector groups

using the detector tester and resetting the installation to normal.
Similarly, actuate manual break glass pull-station for correct
functional test to set off audio visual alarm.
b) Check cylinder gas pressure status in accordance with

manufacturer's instruction and handbook.
c) Check contacts and terminals for cleanliness to ensure that they

are in good serviceable condition.
d) Conduct lamp test at the control unit to ensure all indicating

lights are operating correctly and replace if faulty.
e) Check operation of all alarm sounders.
f) Check power supply failure facility by disconnecting the mains

and battery supply.
g) Visual inspection of electronic components/modules to ensure

clean and operative condition at all times.
h) Check the tightness of all screwed connections in the panel.
i) Service report to be submitted at the end of service.
TS/Fire/S24/7
MECHANICAL WORKS
5.7 Emergency Voice Communication System
a) Check, service and rectify any defects in the Voice

Communication Panel, including all controls, visual indicators,
alarm sounding device, amplifiers, tone generators, etc.
b) Check, service and rectify any defects in the Recording System

including all controls, etc.
c) Check, service, test and rectify any defects in the Battery and
Charger as per Singapore Standard Code SS 563.
d) Check, service, test and rectify any defects in the speakers,

telephone handsets, controls, relays, etc.
5.8 Fire Extinguisher
a) Check, service, test and rectify any defect and leakage as per
Singapore Standard, Code of Practice 55 requirement
b) Yearly re-certification of the extinguisher
5. "Check" shall include for all visual inspection, recording of all necessary site
measurement and fixed instruments readings, testing to ensure and confirm
that the whole system is in an efficient and serviceable condition and
performance.
6. "Service" shall include for all adjustments, re-calibration, greading, cleaning,

changing of lubricant or coolant, tightening of all hold down bolts and
mountings, draining and purging of air or water, sequence testing and
verification of alarm and fail-safe safety device and to ensure that the system is
maintained in an efficient and serviceable condition and performance.
7. "Rectify" shall include for dismantling, replacement, re-installation,

adjustment, testing, touching up all paintwork, etc. to ensure that the system is
put back into efficient and serviceable condition and performance.
8. The service provided in this Contract shall include also for response to 24 hour
emergency breakdown calls. The breakdown of equipment and installation
shall be deemed to have occurred when such equipment or installation will not
perform the designed function.
9. The service provided in this Contract shall include for attendance and
provision of all labour, equipment and instruments as required during normal
testing of the Piped Services Installation as called for by the Authorities.
10. All tests, observations, readings, rectification works shall be fully recorded. A
log book shall be provided in the Building Maintenance Office and all reports
TS/Fire/S24/8
MECHANICAL WORKS
and recordings shall be entered into the book and to be signed and
acknowledged by the Building Maintenance Engineer.
11. All consumable materials required, for the carrying out the works, as listed
below shall be included in the cost quoted:
a) All coolant, oil, grease and lubricant
b) All fuses and indication lamps
c) All carbon brushes in motors
d) All electrical contact points
e) All solvents, detergent and cleaning fluids for equipment
f) All paints and anti-corrosion primer required for touching up

equipment, pipework, etc.
g) All cotton waste and rags.
12. Prior to the end of the free maintenance and warranty period, during the last
free servicing, all filters shall be replaced.
13. The following regular maintenance and servicing interval shall be carried out:
a) Automatic Fire Sprinkler System Once a month
b) Fire Hose Reel System Once a month
c) Automatic Fire Alarm System Once a month
d) Gas Suppression System Once a month
e) Emergency Voice Communication Weekly/monthly

System
f) Electrical Once a month
g) Fire Extinguisher Once yearly Renewal
TS/Fire/S24/9
MECHANICAL WORKS
14. Service And Maintenance Contract
14.1. The Contractor shall state clearly in his Tender, the maintenance and
servicing charge per annum for a period of three (3) years after the
warranty and free maintenance period. This price shall stay firm for at
least 12 calendar months after the aforesaid period and shall be based
on the maintenance responsibilities specified for the warranty period
except the items that are otherwise stated. In addition, it shall cover all
trips by the Contractor to attend to any complaint calls in between
routine servicings.
14.2. The Employer does not bind itself to award the Maintenance and
Servicing Contract after the warranty period to the successful Tenderer.
14.3. After the warranty period and with the sufficient number of free
maintenance servicing provided by the Contractor, a maintenance
agreement may be signed between the Employer and the Contractor
based on the accepted servicing charge at the time of Tender.
14.4. Any work outside the scope of this maintenance agreement and
materials and spare parts supplied shall be additionally charged. The
Contractor shall submit a report together with an itemised quotation for
the consideration and approval of the University at the earliest instance.
14.5. Upon completion of routine servicing under the maintenance

agreement and any repair works as stated in the accepted quotations,
the Contractor shall submit an invoice for payment.
14.6. Either party of the Maintenance Agreement is required to give 30 days

notice for the termination of the same.
14.7. The Contractor shall keep adequate spare parts for the systems under
installation or the Employer's property through the act of negligence of
their workmen except where it can be proven that it is at no fault of
theirs.
TS/Fire/S24/10
MECHANICAL WORKS
14.9. Service and Maintenance Contract
After the expiry of the fifteen (12) months Maintenance and Warranty
Period of the installation, we offer our service and maintenance for a
period of three (3) years in accordance with the section on "Service and
Maintenance" in the Specification for the sum per annum as stated
below.
System Cost Per

Annum (S$)
1st 2nd 3rd 4th 5th

Yr. Yr. Yr. Yr. Yr.
a) Automatic Fire Alarm

System
b) Automatic Fire Sprinkler

System
c) Other Systems
............................................................................................................
..........................................................................…...............................
............................................................................................................
........................…………………. ...…………………….................
of CONTRACTOR
..................………………........... ..……………………..................
of WITNESS
TS/Fire/S24/11
APPENDIX A
NUS 2 STAGE ALARM WITH
AUTO TRIGGER FUNCTION
NUS 2 Stage Alarm with
Auto Trigger Function
Office of Safety, Health

and Environment
2 Stage Alarm with Auto Trigger
Introduction
Standard industry practice in commercial & industrial buildings adopting a 2

stage alarm is to deploy at least one qualified personnel to man the Fire
Command Centre (FCC), where the main fire alarm panel and emergency
voice command system resides, 24/7.
In NUS, it is not possible to set up manned satellite FCCs in every building as

the cost is prohibitive. Therefore, 3 designated FCCs have been identified to
manage the different clusters in NUS namely Faculty of Science (S16), Faculty
of Engineering (E3A) and the Faculty of Arts & Social Sciences (COM2).
OSHE had also secure SCDF’s approval to introduce an auto trigger system for
our 2 stage fire alarm systems to meet the operational requirements unique
to NUS. The 2 stage alarm with auto trigger is the first of its kind in
Singapore.
How it works
1. Upon activation, fire alarm sounder should sound for 10 seconds and
ceased. Only first caution message will be broadcasted repeatedly after the
cessation of the alarm sounder.
2. When the second alarm is activated for actual full evacuation (via call point
from a different zone), the repeated caution message must stop and the
evacuation message must start automatically and immediately.
3. The feature of auto-triggering of the second alarm to initiate full evacuation

at a set time when there's no human intervention to acknowledge the 1st
alarm. Since the auto trigger timing cannot be adjusted by user manually,
set the default timer to 5 minutes. Upon activation of the 1st alarm, the
pressing of an acknowledgement button, within the stipulated 5 minutes,
will disable the timer automatically.
Assuming there
is no human
intervention after
5 minutes, the
fire alarm will
auto trigger for
full evacuation of
the building.
Assuming either
OCS, OFM or Fire
Safety
Committee of the
building had
responded to the
first alarm before
the 5 minutes
timer is up, the
appropriate
action can be
taken.
2 Stage Alarm with Auto Triggerr
2-stage response by building occupants & OCS
Building’s fire safety committee (fire coordinator & fire wardens) to response
and manage the voice communication system (VCS) in their building. OCS will
continue existing response protocols to fire alarm activation.
Advantages

 Minimise response time
 Inculcate sense of ownership to safety in building
 Save cost (security guard)
Disadvantages


 Availability of appointment holders at anytime in buildings

 After office hour procedures to be addressed

 Trainings/ drills will be required to address competency of to manage VCS
 Auto trigger may disrupt the purpose of 2 –stage alarm system
(5 minutes reaction time only due to safety reasons)
 People working after office hours may be inconvenienced when
false alarms occur
Implementation Phase
For all buildings that are installed with the 2 stage alarm system with
auto trigger, the settings will have to be reverted to a single stage first
until:
1) Fire Safety Committee of the building are trained on new procedure

2) OCS & OFM are informed
3) A Fire drill is carried out with the 2 stage alarm system
This will help to ensure all parties are trained and informed of the
procedures before going live with the 2 stage system. Only with
approval of Emergency Management of OSHE will the 2 stage
system commence.
Other Recommended Hardware
To counter possibilities of unnecessary evacuations caused by

accidental breakages of fire manual call points, its highly recommended
that all new buildings install a secondary protective plastic cover for
the building’s manual call points.
APPENDIX B
1
Single Stage and Two Stage Alarm
All the MAP shall have selector switch for the selection of single stage or 2 stage alarm.
Single Stage Alarm
Upon activation of any device eg. heat detector, smoke detector or manual break glass
point (MCP), MAP will be under "FIRE" mode and shall send signal to the satellite FCC,
activate Decam, activate all the essential equipment, sound the sounder, activate visual
alarm device and send signal to activate the one way emergency communication (PA) to
broadcast "EVACUATION" message over the speakers continuously to evacuate the
building occupant. Sounder will auto silence after 10 second of alarm activation.
Two Stage Alarm
Scenario 1
Upon activation of smoke detector, heat detector, the MAP MAP will be under "FIRE"
mode and shall send signal to the satellite FCC, activate Decam, activate all the essential
equipment, sound the sounder, activate visual alarm device and send signal to activate the
one way emergency communication (PA) to broadcast "ALERT" message over the
speakers continuously to evacuate the building occupant. Sounder and visual alarm
device will auto silence after 10 second of alarm activation. If no acknowledged of the
"alarm activation" after 5 minutes, the PA system will cut-off the "ALERT" message and
will broadcast "Evacuation" message and activate visual alarm device continuously to
evacuate the building occupant.
Scenario 2
Upon activation of manual call point, flow switch, pre action solenoid valve, NN100 &
VESDA, MAP will be under "FIRE" mode and shall send signal to the satellite FCC,
activate Decam, activate all the essential equipment, sound the sounder, activate visual
alarm device and send signal to activate the one way emergency communication (PA) to
broadcast "EVACUATION" message over the speakers continuously to evacuate the
building occupant. Sounder will auto silence after 10 second of alarm activation.
2
2 way Selector switch : Single stage and Two stage
1.) No Selection; no red "led" indication on the MAP
a.) Any fire alarm detection devices; smoke detector, flow switch, pre action
solenoid valve,NN100 & VESDA and manual break glass point (MCP),
the MAP will activates the followings:-
- Activation Signal to FCC, Satellite FCC and Decam
- All Building Bells, auto silence after 10 seconds
- All Essential equipments will be activated to "firemode" conditions
- PA system will broadcast "Alert" message over the speakers

continuously
2.) 2 stage Selection; red "led" indication on the MAP
a.) Any fire alarm detection devices; smoke detector, flow switch, pre action
solenoid valve, NN100 & VESDA, the MAP will activates the
followings:-
- Activation Signal to FCC, Satellite FCC and Decam
- PA system will broadcast "Alert" message over the speakers

continuously
IF no acknowledged of the "alarm activation" after 5 minutes, the PA system will

cut-off the "Alert" message and will broadcast "Evacuation" message
continuously
b.) Activation of only any manual break glass point (MCP), the MAP will
activates the followings:-
- Activation Signal to Satellite FCC
3
- PA system will broadcast "Evacuation" message over the speakers
continuously
4
Sheet1
SUB_ALARM PANEL
MAIN ALARM PANEL
FIRE JOCKEY PUMPS
PRE-ACTION SYSTEM
FIRE TRANSFER PUMPS
FIRE SPRINKLER PUMPS
11 - BAS Point Sch FPS

FIRE WATER TRANSFER TANKS
FIRE ALARM & SPRINKLER SYSTEM
PRE-ACTION SYSTEM COMPRESSOR

SPRINKLER WATER STORAGE TANKS
SYSTEM APPARATUS OR
QUANTITY
START/STOP COMMAND
D/O
ON/OFF COMMAND
DDC CONTROL
A/O
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
ON/OFF STATUS
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X TRIP/FAULT
X
X
ALARM/NORMAL
X
DETECTOR NORMAL/ALARM
X
DETECTOR FAULT
X
X
X
X
FLOW SWITCH
DIGITAL INPUT
X
X
HIGH LEVEL ALARM

X
X
LOW LEVEL ALARM

X
X
X
TEMPERATURE
RELATIVE HUMIDITY
X
PRESSURE
X
FLOW
POWER FACTOR
X
X
X
CURRENT
BAS POINT SCHEDULE
VOLTAGE
X
X
X
KILOWATT
ANALOG INDICATION
X
X
X
KILOWATT-HOUR
BTU-HEAT LOAD

X
X
X
X
TREND LOGGING
X
X
X
X
X
X
ENERGY TOTALISATION
TIME PROGRAM
X
X
X

X
X
X
DUTY CYCLING
ANALOG LIMIT ALARM
X
X
X
X
X
X
X

X
X
X
X
X
X
X
GRAPHICS
SOFTWARE PROGRAM
WATER CONSUMPTION
4
Contents Page
Plumbing & Sanitary Schedule of Technical Data STD/PS/1 - 8
Particular Specification for Plumbing & Sanitary Works

Section 1 : Particular Specification TS/PS/S1/1 - 24
Section 2 : Cold Water TS/PS/S2/1 - 31
Section 5 : Sanitary Plumbing TS/PS/S5/1 - 17
Section 6 Installation of Sanitary Fitting TS/PS/S6/1
Section 7 : Secondary Drainage TS/PS/S7/1 - 14
Section 12 : Water Meter TS/PS/S12/1 – 4
Section 13 : Electrical TS/PS/S13/1 – 25
Section 16 Painting TS/PS/S16/1 – 6
Section 17 Building Management System Provisions TS/PS/S17/1 – 6
Section 18 : Service and Maintenance TS/PS/S18/1 - 7
Section 19 : Fire Resistant System TS/PS/S19/1 - 6
Schedule 1 BAS Point Schedule for Plumbing & Sanitary Works 1
1A
SCHEDULE OF TECHNICAL DATA FOR PLUMBING AND SANITARY
Notes :
1.1 Tenderers shall complete the following Schedule and submit any supplementary
information which may be considered necessary to convey a complete description of
1.2 Tenderers are reminded that notwithstanding whatever is submitted in this Schedule,
all equipment and installation must comply with the requirements of the specification.
1.3 Unless written confirmation and approval is obtained from the Superintending Officer
to that effect, the requirements of the specification shall supersede all other
qualifications herein.
1.4 Tenderers are requested not to repeat the details called for in any separate
1.5 Failure to complete filling in the Schedule may render the Tenderer liable to
STD/PS/1
1. Pipes and Fittings
a) uPVC Pipes (B5 4514/SS213)
Make ____________________________
Country of Manufacture ____________________________
Standard/Class ____________________________
b) Heavy Duty Ductile Iron Cement lined (BS 4772 Class K9)
Make ____________________________
Standard/Class ____________________________
c) Ductile Iron Polyurethane Lined (Pipe Class K9, ISO 2531)
Make ____________________________
Standard/Class ____________________________
d) Copper Pipe (BS EN 1057/BS 2871 Part 1 Table ‘X’)
Make ____________________________
Standard/Class ____________________________
e) Copper Pipe (BS EN 1057/BS 2871 Part 1 Table ‘Y’)
Make ____________________________
Standard/Class ____________________________
f) Stainless Steel (BS 4127 Part 2)
Make ____________________________
Standard/Class ____________________________
g) C.I. Pipe (Hubless Type)
Make ____________________________
Standard/Class ____________________________
STD/PS/2
C.I. Pipe (Hubless Type - Laboratory Grade)
Make ____________________________
Standard/Class ____________________________
h) uPVC Pipe (Soil and Waste BS 4515)
Make ____________________________
Standard/Class ____________________________
i) uPVC Pipe (Vent) (BS 4514)
Make ____________________________
Standard/Class ____________________________
j) ABS Pipe (ISO 727)
Make ____________________________
Standard/Class ____________________________
k) Vitrified Clay Pipes
Make ____________________________
Standard/Class ____________________________
l) Polypropylene Pipes (Laboratory Grade)
Make ____________________________
Standard/Class ____________________________
m) Floor Waste
Make ____________________________
Standard/Class ____________________________
STD/PS/3
n) Floor Trap
Make ____________________________
Standard/Class ____________________________
o) Gully Trap
Make ____________________________
Standard/Class ____________________________
p) Inspection Chamber Cover
Make ____________________________
Standard/Class : ____________________________
2. Valves, Etc.
a) Gate Valve (Up to 50mm)
Make ____________________________
Standard/Class ____________________________
b) Gate Valve (Above 50 mm)
Make ____________________________
Standard/Class ____________________________
c) Sluice Valve
Make ____________________________
Standard/Class ____________________________
d) Check Valve (Non slam-type up to 50mm)
Make ____________________________
Standard/Class ____________________________
STD/PS/4
e) Check Valve (Non-slam type above 50mm)
Make ____________________________
Standard/Class ____________________________
f) Globe Valve
Make ____________________________
Standard/Class ____________________________
g) Mini Ball Valves
Make ____________________________
Standard/Class ____________________________
h) Ball Float Valve
Make ____________________________
Standard/Class ____________________________
i) Pressure Reducing Valves
Make ____________________________
Standard/Class ____________________________
j) Strainer (Up to 50mm)
Make ____________________________
Standard/Class ____________________________
k) Strain (above 50mm)
Make ____________________________
Standard/Class ____________________________
STD/PS/5
l) Flexible Connection
Make ____________________________
Standard/Class ____________________________
m) Constant Flow Regulator
Make ____________________________
Standard/Class ____________________________
n) Dilution Tank
Make ____________________________
Standard/Class ____________________________
o) Pilot Operated Ball Float Valve
Make ____________________________
Standard/Class ____________________________
Pressure Drop ____________________________
3. Equipments
a) Water Tank
G.R.P Hot Dipped
Galvanised
Pressed Steel
Make _____________ _______________
Country of Manufacture ______________ ______________
Material ______________ ______________
Plate Thickness _____________ _______________
Standard ______________ ______________
Lining Thickness _____________ _______________
STD/PS/6
b) Level Control System
Make ____________________________
Model No. ____________________________
Type & Make of Electrode ____________________________
Type & Make of Klaxon/Siren ______________________
c) Pressure Switch
Make ____________________________
Standard/Class ____________________________
Model ____________________________
Size ____________________________
Material ____________________________
d) Pressure Gauge
Make ____________________________
Standard/Class ____________________________
Model ____________________________
Size ____________________________
Material ____________________________
e) Vibration Isolation
Pump Pipe work
Make ____________________________
Agent ____________________________
Type/Model No. ____________________________
STD/PS/7
f) Electrical Hot Water Storage Dispensers/Urns (Instantaneous Type)
Make ____________________________
Standard/Class ____________________________
Heater Tank Material ____________________________
Heating Element ____________________________
Model ____________________________
Delivery Rating _______________________ litres
Recovery Rating _______________________ litres

o
at _____________________ C
Storage Capacity ________________________litres
g) Flow Meter
Make ____________________________
Standard/Class ____________________________
Calibration Range ____________________________
STD/PS/8
MECHANICAL WORKS
SECTION 1 - GENERAL
1. Scope of Works
1.1 The works to be performed under this Contract consists of design,

supply, delivery, installation, painting, testing, commissioning and
fifteen (15) months free Maintenance and Warranty of the installation
from the Date of Substantial Completion the Contract comprising of
the systems and equipment which are further described in other
sections of this Particular Specification.
1.2 The scope of works for mechanical services shall include but not
a) Sanitary drainage
b) Installation of sanitary fittings
c) Drainage pumping system
d) Cold water reticulation system
e) High purity water system
f) Testing and commissioning
1.3 The respective services shall be carried out by the respective

contractors with minimum five (5) years experience in the trade and
1.4 The Contractor shall get the manpower, equipments, material etc. to
ensure that the works are completed as scheduled. The Contractor shall
note that any shutdown to the existing services (ie water supply, air-
conditioning system, etc) can only be carried out after office hours and
over the weekends subjected to the S.O. approval. All costs to meet the
schedule shall be included in the tender price.
Works may be carried out after normal working hours holidays,
weekends etc. The Contractor must obtain written permission from the
S.O. prior to carrying out of the abovementioned works. All costs
incurred in respect of any of the above shall deem be included in order
to facilitate the completion of the works.
1.6 The Contractor shall carry out and complete all the works as shown on
the Drawings and as specified herein or inferred in whatsoever manner
there from.
TS/PS/S1/1
MECHANICAL WORKS
1.7 The general description of the Contract Works mentioned above is only
for the guidance for the Contractor and any error or omission shall not
constitute a ground for claim by the Contractor. The onus for
investigating and ensuring the actual extent and nature of the works
comprised in this Contract prior to the submission of the Tender Offer
is solely with the Contractor. Any doubts should be clarified with the
Superintending Officer (S.O.) before the Tender Offer is submitted.
No claim arising out of lack of clarity or availability of information
will be entertained. Allowance for any or all these provisions shall be
made in the Tender Offer.
1.8 Tenders are also required to price the optional items as specified in the
tender drawings and specification. The S.O. reserves the right to award
the contract with or without the optional item. Should the S.O. decided
not to carry out the optional item, the entire sum as entered in the cost
breakdown shall be omitted, If the optional item is to be exercised, the
Contractor shall execute the entire works within the contract period
specified. No extension of time is allowed
2. Specialist Works to be Executed by Approved BCA Registered Contractor
2.1 The following works shall be executed by specialist contractors

registered with BCA in the appropriate workhead and Financial Grade
as follows:
Plumbing and Sanitary ME12 L4 and above
2.2 The following works which do not fall within any BCA workhead shall
be executed by specialist sub-contractors whom had completed projects
of similar nature, size and complexity:
a) High Purity Water System
2.3 The Contractor shall submit in his Tender Offer a list of specialist sub-
contractors he intends to engage for each of the above items of work in
clause 2.1 and 2.2 for approval of the S.O. If the Contractor used a
specialist sub-contractor not registered with BCA in the appropriate
workhead and Financial Grade, the S.O. shall have the right to reject
the work done by such a specialist sub-contractor. Any delay or
additional cost arising from his failure to comply with this requirement
shall be the responsibility of the Contractor.
2.4 The proposed specialist contractors shall have completed projects of

similar size and complexity to the works as shown in the Tender
Documents within the last five years.
TS/PS/S1/2
MECHANICAL WORKS
2.5 The Contractor shall not be allowed to change the proposed specialist
contractors except under the following circumstances:
a) Company/firm under liquidation/judicial management

b) Company/firm in the process of winding-up; and
c) Any other valid reasons acceptable by the Employer.
3.1 With full sun load and maximum shade temperature of 33.8oC DB
0.25 m/s.

Regulations.
d) The Ministry of Manpower, ie., The Workplace Safety &

Health Act
f) The installation shall comply to following code of practice:
i) SS 638: code of practice for electrical installations

TS/PS/S1/3
MECHANICAL WORKS

iv) SS 530 : Code of practice for energy efficiency standard



installation

Sprinkler System
ix) SS 551: Code of practice for earthing
x) SS 245 : Specification for glass reinforced polyester

sectional water tanks

using chemicals

above Authorities as necessary and shall obtain all consents necessary
for the various works to be executed and shall pay all fees in
connection therewith.
materials supplied shall comply with Singapore Standard CP 5, Code
of Practice for Wiring of Electrical Equipment of Building and to be
approved by the EMA.
4.4 All Codes, Acts, Standards and regulations shall be the latest published
edition.

TS/PS/S1/4
MECHANICAL WORKS

5.2 Vibration isolators shall be installed where necessary so as to eliminate

the transmission of vibration.



practical minimum.
6. Permits and Fees

upon the basic requirements of the Specification shall unless otherwise
determined by the S.O. become part of the requirements of the
Specification whether or not they are subsequently incorporated in

TS/PS/S1/5
MECHANICAL WORKS
Standards (S.S.) or British Standards (B.S.) Specifications approved by
the S.O..





practice by experience tradesmen of appropriate grades to the approval
of the S.O..
TS/PS/S1/6
MECHANICAL WORKS
8.11 Where disagreement occur between the Drawings and the Specification
or within either document itself, the item or arrangement of better
quality, greater quantities, or higher cost shall be deemed to be
included in this Contract.


28oC wet bulb

26.5oC wet bulb
10. Shop Drawings
limited to:

accessories.


and servicing.

TS/PS/S1/7
MECHANICAL WORKS
g) Foundations
h) Chases, drains, openings in walls, floors, roof slabs and beams.
10.3 These layout drawings shall be based generally on the S.O.'s drawings,
modified only as required to suit the specified materials and equipment
to be provided, to fit in with the latest available information on
building construction details and the requirements of other services and
equipment and also to incorporate any improvements proposed by the
Contractor.

10.7 Four (4) copies and 1 softcopy of each drawing shall be submitted for
approval not later than four weeks after award of the Contract.
Drawings with inadequate details and not conforming to the
requirements as stated above will not be considered.
the requirements of the Specification and that they are approved by the
S.O. early.
TS/PS/S1/8
MECHANICAL WORKS


11. Programme
approval by the S.O.. The Contractor shall allow a period of not less
The Contractor shall complete the following schedules (completed in full)

 Schedule of Rates
 Schedule of Technical Data (with full catalogues)
 Schedule of Deviation from Specifications
 Schedule of Proposed Comprehensive Maintenance
 Schedule of Tenderer’s Particulars
TS/PS/S1/9
MECHANICAL WORKS
are to be submitted (4 sets) before the award of tender.
Substantial Completion, the Contractor shall submit to the satisfaction
of the S.O. five (5) hard cover bound sets of Comprehensive Operation
and Maintenance Manuals and Data Sheets published by the equipment
manufacturers, five (5) hard cover bound sets of "As-Installed"
drawings and five (5) set of "As-Installed" drawings softcopy AutoCad
(latest release), Building information modeling, Potable Document
Format USB Flash Drive or DVD/CD-R disks subject to S.O.'s
approval.
covers.
shall be endorsed and signed by the Contractor's Professional Engineer.


makes, models, serial number with technical catalogues (at least
one set to be original and others in legible print).

used.
TS/PS/S1/10
MECHANICAL WORKS

shooting.

related materials

maintenance.


TS/PS/S1/11
MECHANICAL WORKS

information:




required operating and maintenance manuals by other means and shall
deduct all cost incurred thereof from monies due to the Contractor. In
addition the S.O. shall forfeit the rights of the Contractor in relation to
further payment and the issue of the Certificate of Substantial
Completion will also be withheld until he has so complied accordingly.
S.O..
TS/PS/S1/12
MECHANICAL WORKS
15. Metrification
16. Tropicalised
17. Samples

but not limited to:
Grating/mosquito trap
PPE pipe
Pipe/Flange Joints
Hangers
Adhesive/Sealant
Pipe Insulation

approved make.

especially in plant rooms, service ducts and adjacent to fixtures so as to
facilitate removal of the pipe and equipment for inspection or repair.
TS/PS/S1/13
MECHANICAL WORKS
19. Fixing of Pipes


secured to the structure by means of anchor bolts or power driven bolts
at locations where the prestressed tensions are not affected.

approval.

TS/PS/S1/14
MECHANICAL WORKS

the S.O..
20. Mock-Ups

these mock-ups.

modify such mock-up and sample at his own cost, if deemed necessary
by the S.O. whose decision shall be final and conclusive. The
approved mock-up and sample shall be used as the basis of
20.6 The Contractors shall remove at his own cost all mock-up and samples
when no longer required as directed by the S.O..
TS/PS/S1/15
MECHANICAL WORKS

thick.
22.2 The Contractor shall be responsible for the proper and accurate setting
out of his work. He shall furnish all necessary information on the
installation to the S.O. for work co-ordination purposes.

Contractor shall bear the full cost of rectification if the failure to

exact position of ceiling suspended equipment has to be verified on site
and adjusted, if necessary, without additional cost to the Contract.
TS/PS/S1/16
MECHANICAL WORKS

terminated and to be incorporated in the shop drawings. The Contractor
is particularly requested to ensure that there is no damages to existing
and other services as any damages shall be rectified immediately within
the same day by the Contractor at their own cost.

TS/PS/S1/17
MECHANICAL WORKS
24. Testing
acceptance tests required as hereinafter specified or as required by the
authorities having jurisdiction over the installation.
readiness to carry out acceptance test and shall submit for his approval
a complete and detailed schedule of his tests to be carried out.



extension of the time will be granted by reasons of any extension of the
testing period to permit rectification, modification, adjustment or
retesting has been necessitated by circumstances beyond the control of
the Contractor.
Authorities, in addition to all those tests as specifically called for in
this Specification.
TS/PS/S1/18
MECHANICAL WORKS
Period.

Contractor shall also be required to certify in writing to the S.O. that
the installation is in full compliance with the requirements of the
25.2 The Contractor shall engage his own Professional Engineer to endorse
and submit four (4) sets of the original `Certificate of Supervision' and
drawings for the respective installation works one month before system
handing over date. All tests and inspections required by the relevant
authorities for his installation works for obtaining of TFP/TOP/CSC of
the building shall be carried out by the Contractor. The Contractor's
PE/LEW shall be present during the TFP/TOP/CSC inspection.

S.O..
TS/PS/S1/19
MECHANICAL WORKS

from workmanship or materials and fully maintain the whole
installation for a period of fifteen (15) months after the commencement
of the Defects Liability Period.
the Contractor.
28. Star Rates
or executed under similar conditions as priced in the Schedule of Rates
he shall give to the S.O. a written notice within seven days from the
time of receipt of the instruction from the S.O. with regard to such
S.O..
variation.
28.3 The S.O. may request for documentary evidence of the amount paid by
the Contractor to his suppliers and/or Contractors.
TS/PS/S1/20
MECHANICAL WORKS
29.1 The Contractor shall establish, document and maintain a quality system
to demonstrate his commitment to quality in construction. As far as
possible, the quality system shall be formulated in accordance with the
requirements of SS 308 : Part 2 : 1988 - Specification for Quality
Assurance in Production and Installation.

following :




S.O. shall not, in any way, alter or diminish the Contractor's
obligations under the Contract for the quality of the Work.
Preliminaries.
TS/PS/S1/21
MECHANICAL WORKS
30. Asset Management
The Contractor shall submit Asset/Inventory List in the format approved by

the S.O. at least six months before the Contract completion date

essential provision


emergency


TS/PS/S1/22
MECHANICAL WORKS

on evacuation






evacuation




evacuation
TS/PS/S1/23
MECHANICAL WORKS

the training.
TS/PS/S1/24
MECHANICAL WORKS
SECTION 2 - COLD WATER SERVICE INSTALLATION
1. General
1.1. This section of the specification covers the supply, delivery, installation,
testing, commissioning and maintenance of the cold water supply system
and shall generally consist of the complete water reticulation system for
the building inclusive of all pipework, fittings, final connections to all
sanitary fitments, etc.
1.2. The Water Service Installation shall be executed in accordance with the
1.3. Only PUB approved fittings, appliances and pipes shall be used for the
water service installation.
1.4. All the water fitting, water storage tank or any materials used shall be
1.5. All the water fitting, water storage tank or any materials used shall
1.6. The test report that issued by a testing laboratory shall be accredited by
rejected.
1.7. All water fitting used shall be of water efficient comply to Water
Efficiency Labelling Scheme. The water fitting shall have minimum of 3
tick or more of the water efficiency rating under the WELS certification.
Test report shall be submitted to SO, Engineer and Employer.
1.8. On delivery of each batch of water fittings and pipes to the Site, the
Contractor shall hand over to the Superintending Officer a copy of each
document showing its origin, proof of manufacturer and approval from
PUB for its use.
1.9. A licensed water service plumber shall be employed to carry out the
installation.
TS/PS/S2/1
MECHANICAL WORKS
2. Material for Piping
2.1 Unless otherwise stated in the Drawings or elsewhere in the specification,

all piping shall comply with the following:
a) Incoming water mains, distribution mains and pumping mains

shall be in ductile iron cement lined to BS EN545:2010, C100
b) Underground piping below 75 shall be copper tubes to EN 1057

Type “Y”, Stainless Steel tubes comply to BS EN 10132-2.
2.2 All distribution piping shall be as follows:
Nominal Internal Diameter Material
a) Below 75 mm Copper tubes , to BS EN 1057 Type 'X'

SS316, Stainless Steel tubes, to BS EN
10132-2
b) 75 mm and Above Heavy duty ductile iron cement lined

to latest BS EN 545 C100
2.3 All services pipes concealed in wall and slab must be in copper tubes
Type 'Y' or heavy duty type for stainless steel pipe
2.4 Final hook-up length to all fitments and all exposed piping shall be in
copper tubes to BS EN 1057 Type “Y”, heavily nickel-plated and then
bright chromed. Where stainless pipe is used, all final hook up shall be of
stainless steel
2.5 Where stainless steel pipes are shown in the Drawings, they shall be to
BS EN 10312-2
2.6 The Contractor shall supply the Superintending Officer with test
certificate or manufacturer's certificates showing that the piping
complying in all respects with the provision of the relevant
British/Singapore Standards.
TS/PS/S2/2
MECHANICAL WORKS
3. Joints and Fittings for Ductile Iron Pipes
Flanged joints shall be made with jointing rings of compressed fibre board or
rubber (not less than 1.5 mm thickness) and of such width as to fit inside circle of
bolts. The rings shall be smeared thinly with graphite paste if necessary. The
nuts shall be carefully tightened, in opposite parts, until the jointing ring is
sufficiently compressed between the flanges to ensure water-tightness of the joint
under the desired water pressure. All the ductile iron pipe and fitting compliance
to BS EN545 shall be tested to BS EN 598, clause 5.3, Diametral Stiffness of
pipe test and Clause 5.9, Abrasion Resistance test
4. Joints and Fittings
4.1 Copper Pipes
4.1.1. Copper piping shall be jointed with capillary joints, in each case
using copper or copper alloy fittings to BS EN 1254-1, BS EN
1254-2 and AS 3688 for pipe sizes below 50mm.
4.1.2. Jointing may also be made by welding. All filler rod shall be lead
free.
4.1.3. Joints for piping chased in walls shall be made with capillary
fittings or by welding.
4.1.4. In making a capillary joint, the pipe end and the interior of the
socket of the fittings shall be thoroughly cleaned with steel wool
fluxed, and fitted together and the joint then heated to just above
the melting point of the solder which is either provided in the
fitting or the molten solder is then fed into the annual space
between pipe and fitting and is drawn into it by capillary. If the
pipe section is not of a standard pipe length, the pipe ends shall be
reamed truly round before jointing.
4.1.5. Capillary fittings shall be supplied with internal soldered sockets

into which plain pipe end are fitted.
4.1.6. Where welding is to be employed the pipes shall be bronzed

welded or silver welded. The piping may be jointed or directly or
by the use of welded copper to copper alloy fittings.
4.1.7. The welding shall be done by an oxyacetylene blow pipe, using

filler rod of copper or bronze and a suitable flux. Welding shall
be done by skilled craftsmen only.
4.1.8. Copper piping shall be jointed to steel piping by the use of copper
alloy, screwed unions or brass ferrules.
TS/PS/S2/3
MECHANICAL WORKS
4.1.9. Connections to tanks shall be by screwed and flanged ends.
4.1.10. All exposed pipe connections, flanges and fixings to sanitary

fitments shall be chromed plated and complete with chrome plated
brass screws and brackets.
4.1.11. Connection to equipment or fitments shall be compression joints.
4.1.12. All joint shall withstand pressure up to 150 Psi
4.2 Stainless Steel Pipes
4.2.2. Stainless steel piping shall be jointed with capillary fitting joints
and compression fittings joints, in each case using stainless steel
press fitting joints to BS EN 1254-1 ,BS EN 1254-2 and AS 3688
for pipe sizes below 50mm.
4.2.3. Stainless steel press fitting jointing shall conform with Japanese
Waterworks Association (JWWA) G116 "Stainless Steel Pipe
Fittings For Water Works" .
4.2.4. Joints for piping chased in walls shall be made with capillary
fittings or by welding.
4.2.5. In making a capillary joint, the pipe end and the interior of the
socket of the fittings shall be thoroughly cleaned with steel wool
fluxed, and fitted together and the joint then heated to just above
the melting point of the solder which is either provided in the
fitting or the molten solder is then fed into the annual space
between pipe and fitting and is drawn into it by capillary. If the
pipe section is not of a standard pipe length, the pipe ends shall be
reamed truly round before jointing.
4.2.6. Capillary fittings shall be supplied with internal soldered sockets

into which plain pipe end are fitted.
4.2.7. Where welding is to be employed the pipes shall be stainless steel

welded. The piping may be jointed or directly or by the use of
suitable alloy fittings.
4.2.8. The welding shall be done by Tungsten Inert Gas (TIG) or Metal
Inert Gas (MIG) suitable for water services as per PUB
requirement, using filler rod and a suitable flux. Welding shall
be done by skilled craftsmen only.
4.2.9. Stainless steel piping shall be jointed to steel piping by the use of
stainless steel alloy, screwed unions or brass ferrules.
TS/PS/S2/4
MECHANICAL WORKS
4.2.10. Connections to tanks shall be by screwed and flanged ends.
4.2.11. All exposed pipe connections, flanges and fixings to sanitary

fitments shall be chromed plated and complete with chrome plated
brass screws and brackets.
4.2.12. Connection to equipment or fitments shall be compression joints.
4.2.13. All joint shall withstand pressure up to 150 Psi
5. Joints Between Dissimilar Materials
For joints between dissimilar pipe, copper-alloy unions or union ferrules shall be
used.
6. Installation of Flush Valves
7.1. Only water closets and urinals may be fitted with flush valves. Flush
valves for water closets shall incorporate approved check valves that
comply with BS EN 12288 and approved vacuum breakers that comply
with American Society of Sanitary Engineering Standard No l. 1001.
Alternatively, the flush valves for water closets shall derive water from a
separate storage tank which is not connected in any way with all other
fittings supply basins, sinks, heaters, apparatus, etc. in the building.
7.2. Every flush valve shall be controlled by an approved stop valve to SS 75:
Part 2.
7.3. All flush valves must be so adjusted to give a flush of not more than 2
litres of water per stall, not more than 0.5 litres for bowl urinal, more than
3.5 litres of water for water closets for full flush and 2.5 litres for half
flush. Sink/Bib taps and mixers of not more than 4 litres.
7.4. Every flush valve shall be compatible with the toilet bowl or urinal it
serves.
7.5. The minimum internal diameter of the flush pipe shall be 32 mm.
7.6. All exposed surfaces shall be bright chrome plated. The flush valve shall
be able to operate without sticking, whistling or causing water hammer.
7.7. Automatic sensor type of flush valves shall be installed where indicated
on drawings. Installation shall be carried out in accordance to local
authorities requirement i.e. NEA, PUB and etc.
TS/PS/S2/5
MECHANICAL WORKS
7.8. For low capacity WC flushing cisterns, the flush must be adjusted to give
2.5 litres to 3.5 litres per flush. All the flush valve shall be minimum of
WELS 3 ticks.
7.9. The Piped Services Contractor shall do all final connection from the
piping to the fittings.
7. Valves
7.1. General
All valves shall be of PUB approved manufacture and shall be installed

in positions where they are easily accessible for maintenance and
operating purposes.
All valves shall be constructed in accordance with the appropriate

Standards.
All water valves shall be selected for operating pressure of not less than
two times the expected pressure in the system and shall have been tested
to at least twice the operating pressures.
For working pressure up to and including 1000 kPa, all valves larger than
50 mm nominal bore shall be flanged. For working pressure above 1000
kPa, all valves shall be flanged.
7.2. Construction
All valves shall have bronze valve faces and seats and manganese bronze
spindle with instill screws.
Valves installed in ferrous piping above 75 mm nominal bore shall have

cast iron bodies.
7.3. Sluice Valve
Sluice valve shall be provided on pipes 75 mm diameter and over and

shall conform to BS 5163 rated at 16 bar.
TS/PS/S2/6
MECHANICAL WORKS
7.4. Check Valve
Check valve shall be of non-slam type and shall conform to BS 5154.
7.5. Pressure Reducing Valve
The valve shall be a hydraulically operated, diaphragm-actuated globe or

angle pattern valve. It shall be pilot-controlled by a direct-acting,
adjustable, spring loaded, nominally open diaphragm valve which closes
when downstream pressure exceeds the spring setting. The valves shall
have a cast iron body with bronze valve faces and seats. It shall have a
maximum pressure rating of 20 bar.
The valve pressure reducing range and flow rate shall be in accordance
with the table shown on the drawings.
7.6. Ball Valve
Ball valve shall be either piston type conforming to BS 1212: Part 1 or

diaphragm type conforming to BS 1212: Part 2. The valve shall be the
same size as the inlet pipe.
Floats for ball valve shall be copper.
7.7. All valves supplied and installed for cold water services shall be of PUB
approved manufacturer and conform to appropriate standards as follows:
a) Stop valve up to 50 mm BS 1010
b) Gate valve above 50 mm BS 5163
c) Check valve up to 50 mm BS 1953 Class 125 or BS 5154 (M)
d) Check valve above 50 mm BS 4090 Class 125 or BS 5163 (M)
e) Ball valve BS 1212
f) Sluice valve BS 5163
g) Floats for ball valves BS 1968

copper
7.8. All hose cocks or tap shall be of brass and chromium plated.
7.9. All valves supplied and installed shall be PUB approved.
7.10. Cast iron check valves shall be of duo-check wafer type. All other check
valves shall be of non-slam type.
TS/PS/S2/7
MECHANICAL WORKS
7.11. Strainers up to 50 mm diameter shall be of copper alloy type with

stainless steel baskets.
7.12. Strainers above 50 mm diameter shall be of cast iron type with stainless
steel baskets.
7.13. Mini ball valves or Stop valves shall be provided at water supply branch
pipes to every toilet fitments e.g. wash-basin, flush valve for both urinal
& w.c., sink, shower, sluice unit etc.
8. Flow Control Devices
8.1. The Contractor shall supply and install flow control devices to the
following:
a) Wash-hand basins - 2.0 litres/min.
b) Flushing cisterns - 3.5 litres/flush (full flush)

- 2.5 litres/flush (low flush)
c) Flush valves - 0.5 litres/flush
d) Sinks/Shower - 5.0 litres/min
e) Bib Taps - 4.0 litres/min
f) Water troughs - 4.0 litres/min.
8.2. Flow control devices shall be installed in an accessible position and as

near to the fitments as possible.
8.3. The joint between the flow control device and the pipework shall be made
by means of a brass screwed adaptor. Brazings shall not be permitted.
9. Pipework Installation
9.1. The pipework shall be located and installed so that the piping is accessible
for inspection, replacement and repair.
9.2. All stop valves shall be placed in positions which allow for convenient
operation and repair.
9.3. The pipework shall be installed so that each distribution line isolated by a
stop valve is capable of complete drainage to facilitate repairs.
TS/PS/S2/8
MECHANICAL WORKS
9.4. All pipework shall be concealed unless otherwise approved.
10. External Water Services Installation
10.1. Excavation
a) All excavation shall be carried out to the required lengths, breaths,

depths, inclination sand curvature as may be necessary for the
construction of the works or as shown in the
specification/Drawings.
b) Pockets shall be formed for sockets, flanges, valves, etc. so as to

give the barrel of each pipe a full support throughout its entire
length.
c) Sufficient timber support shall be provided to prevent the trenches

from collapsing.
d) The Contractor is required to provide good dewatering system for

keeping the excavation clear of water at all times.
e) The bottom of all trenches shall be free from mud and water,
trimmed clean and thoroughly consolidated by iron shot rammers
or other methods. All sort of defective portions shall be cut out
and filled in with selected excavated material well consolidated in
layers as instructed by the Superintending Officer.
f) Notwithstanding the above, the Contractor shall also ensure that

the requirements under "Excavator" of this Specification be
strictly adhered to when carrying out works.
10.2. Existing Services
a) The Contractor should liaise with all Service Department or

relevant parties, etc. for the location of all pipes, cables, mains,
ducts, posts manholes, boxes, etc. beneath road reserves or in any
other part of the work in order to ensure that all service
requirements are met before commencement of the Work.
b) The Contractor shall apply to the LTA and Police Department

where necessary to procure all permits before proceeding with the
works.
c) The Contractor shall obtain up-to-date information or drawings

from the respective Authorities with regard to the existence of
other services along or beneath the road.
TS/PS/S2/9
MECHANICAL WORKS
d) The Contractor shall be held responsible for any damage done

during the progress of works and shall meet all costs and repairs
and reinstatement due to such damage.
e) The Contractor shall notify the Superintending Officer

immediately of any existing services which will be affected by the
works and shall immediately provide adequate supports and
protection of same to the satisfaction of the Superintending
Officer at his own expense.
f) Any road excavation required for laying of underground piping

shall only be carried out after office hours subject to S.O.’s
approval. All road openings shall be covered up with steel plate
during the daytime in order not to disrupt traffic flow. The
Contractor shall provide proper traffic control planning, automatic
traffic control devices, trained personnel conversant in traffic
control, temporary safety barriers and proper lighting for night
work where necessary.
10.3. Interference with Traffic and Adjoining Properties
a) All operations necessary for the execution of the works shall so

far as compliance with the requirements of the Contract permit be
carried on so as not to interfere unnecessarily or improperly with
public convenience or the access to use and occupation of public
or private roads and footpath. and shall save harmless the
Employer from all indemnity charges and expenses whatsoever
arising out of or in relation to any such matter.
b) The Contractor shall when required by the Superintending Officer

or by the Authority apply and operate suitable methods of traffic
control at his own expenses.
c) If so required, flashing warning lights and notice shall be

displayed at the Contractor's expense.
10.4. Laying of Underground Pipes
a) Pipes shall be laid to line and level as indicated in the

Specification/Drawings or as instructed by the Superintending
Officer. The minimum depth shall not be less than 1.5 m from the
ground level.
b) All pipes and fittings shall be cleaned internally before laying.
c) Temporary pipe plug shall be used to cover each open end of the
pipes, whenever work is stopped, so as to prevent foreign matter
from entering the pipes after laying.
TS/PS/S2/10
MECHANICAL WORKS
d) Thrust Blocks
Thrust blocks are required under the following situations:
i) Change of pipeline direction
ii) Change of pipe size
iii) Dead end of pipeline
iv) Thrust is expected to be developed at the valve
e) The thrust blocks formed shall be strong enough to prevent the

movement of the pipeline and fittings when test pressure is
applied.
10.5. Hydrostatic and Leakage Testing of Buried Water Pipes
a) The mains shall be tested in sections as the work of the laying

proceeds and, except with the approval of the Superintending
Officer, the section to be tested shall not exceed 200 metres.
b) All joints shall be left exposed for inspection during testing.
c) The main shall be allowed to stand full of water for at least 24

hours before proceeding with the test.
d) The test pressure shall be at least 125 metres head (180 psi) or the
maximum working pressure plus 50 percent, whichever is greater.
The pressure shall be maintained for twenty four (24) hours
without excessive leakage.
e) The leakage shall not exceed 0.20 litres per millimetre of pipe
diameter per kilometre of pipeline per 100 m head per 24 hours
duration. Any visible individual leak shall be repaired.
10.6. Backfilling
Backfilling shall commence only after the pipeline has been tested and
approved by the Superintending Officer. It shall be done in stages as
follows:
a) Fine and dry material selected from the excavated earth shall be
packed and well rammed underneath and at the sides of the
pipeline up to half pipe height.
TS/PS/S2/11
MECHANICAL WORKS
b) The filling shall then be carried up to 300 mm above the socket of

the pipes with selected material and well rammed.
c) The remainder of the excavation shall be filled in with the most

suitable portions of the excavation material in layers of not more
than 300 mm deep. Each layer shall be well rammed before the
next layer is placed.
d) The top of trenches shall be filled with material originally taken

from the surface and set aside for subsequent reinstatement or as
instructed by the Superintending Officer.
11. Internal Water Services Installation
Installation of Above Ground Pipes
11.1. Pipe Supports
Unless otherwise specified, piping shall be supported by approved clips,

hangers or rollers at intervals not exceeding those given in Table 1 below:
TABLE 1: PIPE SUPPORTS

------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Nominal Copper Pipe uPVC Pipe *Ductile Iron Pipe to
Size Pipe EN 545 Class C100
------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Horizontal Vertical Horizontal Vertical Horizontal Vertical
Run (m) Run (m) Run (m) Run (m) Run (m) Run (m)
------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
15 1.25 1.75 0.6 1.2 - -
------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
20 1.75 2.5 0.9 1.8 - -
------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
25 1.75 2.5 0.9 1.8 - -
------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
32 1.75 2.5 0.9 1.8 - -
------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
40 2.5 3.0 0.9 1.8 - -
------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
50 2.5 3.5 1.2 2.1 - -
------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
65 2.75 3.5 1.2 2.1 3.0 3.0
------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
75 3.0 4.0 1.2 2.1 2.7 2.7
------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
100 3.0 4.0 1.5 2.4 2.7 2.7
------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
125 3.0 4.0 1.5 2.4 3.0 3.0
------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
150 3.0 4.0 1.8 3.0 3.0 3.0
------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
* At least one fixing must be provided for each unit length.
TS/PS/S2/12
MECHANICAL WORKS
11.2. The supports shall permit appropriate movement for expansion and
contraction in the desired direction and prevent transmission of vibration.
11.3. Corrosion may result from galvanic action where there is contact of
dissimilar metals in the presence of some waters, such as copper in
contact with iron or steel or with zinc galvanised coating. When such
corrosion is known to occur, the support and pipe shall be kept apart by
approved electrically non-conducting materials.
11.4. Clips, rollers, hangers and supports shall be fabricated from hot-dripped
galvanised steel and have sufficient strength to support the pipes and its
contents, and shall conform to BS 3974 and as approved by the
11.5. Pipework shall be installed with a minimum 80 mm clearance from all

electrical conduits, trays and troughs and from finished floor, and 38mm
clearance from other parts of the building structure and any adjacent
pipework.
11.6. Piping passing through foundation of bearing walls shall be protected

against breakage by means of sleeves or arches. Space between sleeves or
arches and the pipe shall be filled with coal tar, lead or other materials.
The space shall be made watertight where it is essential to prevent surface
water from entering the building.
12. Testing of Above Ground Pipes
12.1. Water service and distribution pipes that are exposed shall be subjected to
a hydrostatic pressure test of 105 metres head (150 psi) or the maximum
working pressure plus 50 percent, whichever is greater. The test period
shall be twenty four (24) hours during which no leakage is allowed. The
total length of the section to be tested shall not exceed 200 m.
12.2. Others above ground pipes shall be subjected to similar test as deemed
necessary by the Superintending Officer.
TS/PS/S2/13
MECHANICAL WORKS
13. Pumps and Motors
13.1. The Contractor shall supply and install water pump sets of capacities and
types as shown in the drawings and in accordance with the following
specification.
13.2. For each pumping installation the system shall be complete and include
starter and controls, pressure gauges, float switches, level controls, etc. for
the proper functioning and control of the system.
13.3. All pumps shall be approved manufacture of the centrifugal, single stage
volute type and shall be manufactured in the country of origin of the
13.4. Each pump shall be capable of delivering not less than the quantity of
water indicated on drawings and against the design head.
13.5. All pumps shall be capable of handling water in the range of 3o to 50o
continuous operation.
13.6. The pumps shall be complete non-overloading for any point on its head
flow characteristic curve.
13.7. The pump selection shall be such that the impeller diameter fitted for the
design duty is not greater than 90% of the maximum impeller diameter
which can be fitted and the duty point efficiency shall be within 5% of the
maximum efficiency.
13.8. The System Head required shall be determined by the Contractor based on
the pipe sizes as shown in the drawing and the numbers of types of
fittings to be supplied and installed. It shall be the sole responsibility of
the Contractor to ensure the pump head selected is adequate for the
efficient function of the system. Detailed calculations of pump heads
shall be submitted to the Superintending Officer for approval prior to the
purchase of the pumps.
13.9. The pump speed shall not exceed 1500 rpm. In the event that the recourse
has to be made to pumping equipment operating on speed above 1500
rpm, approval of the Superintending Officer shall be sought before hand.
13.10. The pump casing, back-plate, impeller and shaft shall be constructed of
stainless steel and fitted with approved type mechanical seals.
13.11. Casing construction shall be of horizontal split design; however, if of a

vertical split construction, pump's suction and back covers shall be
removable, allowing for complete removal of the rotating element without
disturbing the suction and delivering piping of the pump.
TS/PS/S2/14
MECHANICAL WORKS
13.12. The pumps shall be coupled directly to an approved Class 'F' insulation,
drip proof (IP54), TEFC motor, suitable for 400 volt, 3- phase, 50 Hz
power supply.
13.13. Each pump shall be bolted to a steel base and 100mm thick reinforced
concrete inertia block. Spring and ribbed neoprene vibration isolation
mounting shall support the inertia block onto a concrete plinth. The
springs shall have a maximum deflection of 25 mm.
13.14. Pump flow-head characteristic curves shall be submitted for approval

before ordering.
13.15. For each pump installation, the following fittings are required as a
minimum:

h) 100 mm diameter flow meters complete with stop cock, at

discharge.
13.16. The pump starter/control panel shall be with the following minimum
features:
TS/PS/S2/15
MECHANICAL WORKS
g) Pump "Stop" "Running" "Fault" indication light (each pump),

Light bulb shall be of 24V LED type easily replacable.
h) Power meter: only one such meter is required per control panel
and interface to BAS
i) Ammeter : direct reading and approved type (each pump)
j) Voltmeter
l) Provision for BAS monitoring of the pumps status and water tank
Hi-Lo level
m) Start / Stop Command overrided by BAS
14. Pneumatic Booster System
14.1. General
a) The Contractor shall supply and install package booster unit for
the cold water supply, of capacity and requirements as shown in
the drawings.
b) The package booster unit shall be complete with a pressure gas

filled tank, pressure gauge, suction and discharge piping
assembly, complete with test pipes to nearest drain with necessary
valves pressure switches, check valves, isolating valves, flow
switch, strainers, pumps, control panel and mounting channels.
The booster unit shall be designed for parallel/alternate operation.
c) Any low water level in the water tank shall stop the pump
operation. The control wring shall be provided to indicate the
failure of the booster unit and activate the alarm at BAS Room.
d) Pressure Gauges where required shall have a range and calibration

suitable for the duty required with normal operating pressure at
the mid-point of the range of the gauge with percentage error of
not more than 1% of mid range. All tappings for pressure gauges
shall be provided with a gauge cock and syphon tubes.
TS/PS/S2/16
MECHANICAL WORKS
14.2. Pressure Tank

b) The tank shall be provided with heavy duty butyl diaphragm to SS

375.

air.
d) The tank shall provide an effective draw-of capacity within cut-in

and cut-off pressure as indicated in drawing.
14.3. Pressure Switch
Pressure switch shall be heavy duty with stepless adjustable cut-in/out

pressure adjustments. The pressure range shall be selected to suit the
system design (15 p.s.i. - 50 p.s.i.). It shall be corrosion resistant and of
weatherproof construction.
14.4. Compliance with PUB(Water Supply) Regulation
All materials provided and used by the Contractor shall comply with PUB
(Water Supply) regulations and requirements, and approved by PSB.
Certificate of approval by PSB for material shall be submitted to the S.O.
for approval.
14.5. Booster Pump Operation
The control circuit shall enable automatic and manual operations of the
group.
a) Automatic Operation


(P2), then when the duty pump is activated, the standby
pump shall be activated. Both duty and standby pumps
shall be de-activated when the require pressure is attained.
Start and stop indicating lights shall be provided for each
pump.
TS/PS/S2/17
MECHANICAL WORKS
activated.



activated when the following occurs :-
Overload trip of pump.
Failure operation of duty pump.
The bell shall be cancelled when acknowledged.

However, the indicating red light shall continue
until the fault is corrected.
14.6. Manual Operation
i) Either one or both pumps shall be capable of being started and

stopped by their respective push buttons.
ii) The control panel and circuit proposal shall be submitted by the
Contractor to the S.O. for approval before construction.
14.7. Control/Starter Panel
The pump control/starter panel shall be as specified in the section on

"Pumps and Motors".
TS/PS/S2/18
MECHANICAL WORKS
15. GRP Panel Water Storage Tanks
15.1. General
a) The Contractor shall supply, deliver and install water storage

tanks to latest SS 245 : Specification for glass reinforced polyester
sectional water tanks with the capacities and dimensions as
indicated in the drawings, complete with appropriate size of R.S.J.
support frame with the Contractor's PE endorsement and to S.O.'s
approval.
b) Where applicable, each tank shall be installed above floor slab

and located in the positions shown in the drawings and shall be
mounted on R.S.J.
c) The materials for the construction of panels shall be based on an

unsaturated polyester resin. The resin selected shall be of suitable
grade to meet the requirements in BS 3532:1962 or JIS K6919.
The glass fibre used shall be non-alkali type conforming to J.I.S.
R3411-3417 or BS 3396 and BS 3749. The tanks shall be
designed to have sufficient strength to withstand the expected
loads.
d) The tanks shall have structure not to grow algae and also to be
grey in colour with Munsell's value N-70. The allowable ratio of
light transmittance to inside the tank should be less than 0.001%
(1/100,000).
e) The tanks shall be provided with at least one manhole of not less
than 600 m inside diameter having an easily opened cover with a
lock to prevent rain water from entering the tanks. The manhole
hatch shall be made of GRP or other synthetic resins and its hinge
shall be of stainless steel.
f) The bolts and nuts used shall be stainless steel and the diameter of
a bolt shall not be less than 12 mm.
g) The interior supports for panels shall be completely resistant to

the quality of water stored. They shall be made of GRP. The
exterior supports shall be made of hot-dipped galvanised mild
steel.
h) The materials used for sealing shall be synthetic rubber sealants

which shall be excellent in water-tightness and chemically
resistant to the quality of water stored. It shall also be able to
withstand to the temperature variation during service. Supplier
shall submit test reports conducted by SISIR to proof that the
sealants are non-toxic.
TS/PS/S2/19
MECHANICAL WORKS
i) The tanks of 1.5 metres depth or more shall be provided with a

UPVC internal ladder.
j) Each tank compartment shall be provided with valved inlet, outlet

and drain connections; float valve, overflow connections, water
level control electrodes, compartment by-pass and water level
indicators.
k) Cat ladders shall be fitted onto the water tanks and made of
marine aluminium alloy.
15.2. Water Tank Guarantee
In addition to the twelve (15) months warranty given to all the equipment
and installation under this Contract, the manufacturer and the Contractor
shall furnish a five (5) years written warranty against any defective
workmanship and defective materials in association with the installation
of GRP tank.
15.3. Tanks Supports
a) All water tanks shall be mounted firmly onto a cross girder type of
hot dipped galvanised steel foundation by fastening each base
panel at the periphery.
b) Primary beams of the cross girder shall be anchored firmly onto

plinth supports made to elevate the water tanks.
c) The maximum deflection permissible for steel supports shall not

be more than 5 mm between supports.
d) The tank shall be installed in accordance with the manufacturer's

recommendations. The Contractor shall submit the catalogue and
detailed installation manual or assessment.
e) The Contractor shall submit detail design calculations and

drawings of the water tank RSJ supporting steel frame to the S.O.
for approval. All calculations and drawings shall be duly
endorsed by a registered professional structural Engineer.
f) The Contractor shall provide a competent technical representative

from the Supplier of tank to supervise the installation of the water
storage tanks.
TS/PS/S2/20
MECHANICAL WORKS
15.4. Level Indicators
a) Each water tank compartment shall be fitted with a level indicator,

located at the front of the tank. It shall be constructed of durable,
corrosion resistant materials. The scale shall be fixed to the front
of the tank and shall be direct reading.
15.5. Floatless Switch -High & Low Level Alarm System
a) The water supply transfer pumps shall be automatically controlled

by stainless steel electrode and floatless switch relays operating on
low voltage.
b) The electrodes shall be installed at the roof water storage tank and
at the suction tanks. The relay control panel shall be installed at
the water pump rooms or as shown on the drawings.
c) The high and low level control and alarm system shall have the
following features:
i) The electrodes at the storage tanks shall start and stop the
duty pump at pre-determined level i.e. 'start pump' and
'stop pump' levels at the storage tanks and 'stop pump' at
the suction tanks.
ii) Auto change over relay shall be provided to alternate the

iii) The low level alarm shall be activated when water in

suction tank falls to the pre-determined low level and
pumps shall be cut-off (whether automatic or manual).
iv) The low level alarm shall be activated when the water
level falls to the pre-determined 'danger' low level.
v) The high level alarm shall be activated when the water

level rises to the pre-determined 'danger' high level, pump
shall stop operation.
vi) A klaxon or siren and lamp shall be provided above the

door of each pump room for audible alarm indication.
vii) The audible alarm shall be cancelled upon reset, whereas

the light shall persist until the fault is corrected.
TS/PS/S2/21
MECHANICAL WORKS
viii) The relay control panel shall have no limited to the

following:
a) high and low level lamp indication for suction and

storage tank
b) audible alarm muting push button
c) alarm reset push button
d) control system "ON-OFF" switch
e) Auto-manual selector switch
f) Start/stop push button
g) Lamp test push button
h) 1 NO 1 NC spare free voltage contacts for both high

and low alarm relays to enable future connections for
remote alarm indication.
i) free voltage relays for Building Automation System

Interface.
d) The electrodes shall be of the water contact low voltage type of

stainless steel construction.
16. Hot Dipped Galvanised Press Steel Tanks
16.1. The tanks shall comprised of sectional panels and completed with cover,
stays, cleats, nuts and washers and jointing compound complying with
S.S. 22 or B.S. 1564. The tanks shall be compartmented with capacities
not less than that indicated in the Drawings.
16.2. The tank shall be installed above floor slab and located in the positions
shown in the drawings and shall be mounted on galvanised R.S.J. The
design of the R.S.J. support shall be submitted to the S.O. for approval,
with the Contractor’s P.E. endorsement. The R.S. J. shall be included in
this Contract and supplied by the tank supplier.
16.3. All tank plates shall be 5 mm thick and shall be hot dipped galvanised to
BS729 before delivery to site. Tank shall be erected in accordance with
manufacturer's instructions and all joints made with approved jointing
compound.
TS/PS/S2/22
MECHANICAL WORKS
16.4. The tank covers shall not be less than 3 mm thick supported on angle
nearer cleated on the tank plate flanges. A 600 mm manhole with hinged
lid shall be provided to each compartment of all tanks.
16.5. Aluminium ladders of approved type shall be provided inside and outside
of water tanks to facilitate access into the compartment.
16.6. Each tank compartment shall be provided with valved inlet, outlet and
drain connections; float valve, overflow connections, water level control
electrodes, compartment by-pass and water level indicators as described
under the various sub-headings in the Section on "GRP Panel Water
Storage Tanks".
16.7. The tanks shall be installed in accordance with the manufacturer's

recommendations. The Contractor shall submit the catalogue and detailed
installation manual.
16.8. The Contractor shall provide a competent technical representative from

the Supplier of tank to supervise the installation of water storage tanks.
16.9. The water tank shall be electrically earthed in accordance with the latest
edition S.S 638.
17.1. Materials

Panel : Grade 316 stainless steel of at least

gauge 10.
nuts to be rated at least of grade
8.8.
Base frame : Galvanised structural steel

sections.

TS/PS/S2/23
MECHANICAL WORKS
17.2. Construction
Base frame: Constructed from galvanized steel sections, welded and grind
flat. Blast clean to BS 4232 Second Quality and primed with zinc-rich
antic-corrosion primer before applying 2 coats of epoxy paint. Anchored
the base frame to the concrete plinth.
Water tight penetration: Provide factory made penetrations on panels, by

opening a hole in the panel, and welding a nipple (a short length of pipe)
of the required size and same material to panels. Provide BS PN 10
flanges to the end of the nipples for pipe connections. Where necessary,
provide nipples and flanges on both sides of the opening for connections.
Locate penetrations not more than 2.0 m way from an access manhole.
17.3. Accessories
ladder for water tanks higher than 2.0 m, securely bolted to the side of the
tank. Locate the cat ladder below the access manhole.

Provide Handles for lifting of the manholes. Provide at least one access
manhole per tank or partition. Provide additional manhole access such
that every point in the water tank is not more than 4.0 m, and any
penetration not more than 2.0 m measured horizontally, away from a
manhole.
Air vents: Provide minimum 2 units of diameter 50mm air vents per tank
or compartment, complete with rain cowl and insect screen.

protected by a rod cage level indicators installed outside each water tank
or compartment. Provide isolation valves immediately at the penetration
to the water tank panel.
Warning pipes: Provide 1 uPVC warning pipe per tank or compartment,

terminated at a minimum horizontal distance of 100 mm from the water
tank or to an auspicious location. Provide insect screen at the discharge
end of the pipes.
TS/PS/S2/24
MECHANICAL WORKS
Overflow pipes: Provide 1 uPVC overflow pipe per tank or compartment,

run the pipe vertically down from the overflow penetration to ground
level before terminating to the nearest internal drain. Overflow pipes
from the same tank but different compartment may be joined at ground
level before routing to the drain. Provide insect screen at the discharge
end of the pipes.

reaches a level not less than 50mm below the invert of the overflow pipe.

18. Cleaning Out of Pipework
18.1 After installation and before hydrostatic tests are carried out, the piping
shall be cleaned out thoroughly.
18.2 Piping shall be disconnected from tanks, control valves and equipment
before washed out.
19. Sterilization of Installation
19.1 All mains, service pipes, water tanks and distribution pipes to be used for
domestic water purposes shall be thoroughly sterilized in accordance with
the procedures spelt out in CP 636, Code of Practice on Water Services.
a) The water tank shall be scrubbed down and flushed out with water
containing a solution chloride lime.
b) The tank and pipes shall then be filled with water and a sterilizing
chemical containing chlorine added gradually while the tank is
filling to ensure thorough mixing. Sufficient chemical shall be
used to give the water a dose of 50 parts of chlorine to one million
parts of water. If ordinary 'bleaching powder' is used. The
proportions shall be 150 gm of powder to 1000 litres of water, the
powder shall be mixed with water to a creamy consistency before
being added to the water.
c) When the tanks are full the supply shall be shut off, all the taps on
the distributing pipe shall then be opened successively, working
progressively away from the tanks.
TS/PS/S2/25
MECHANICAL WORKS
d) Each tap shall be closed when the water discharge beings to smell
of chloride. The tanks shall then be topped up and the whole
system shall remain charged for at least three hours, where upon a
test shall be made for residual chlorine; if non is found, the
sterilization must be carried out again.
e) Finally the tanks and pipes shall be thoroughly flushed out before
any water is used for domestic purposes.
20. Water Analysis
20.1 The Contractor shall submit samples of water from the tanks for chemical
and bacteriological analysis to confirm that the water is fit for human
consumption.
20.2 This water analysis shall be carried out if so directed by the

Superintending Officer and the PUB Department during the 15-month
Defects Liability Period. Any sample which fails the test shall have the
system re-sterilize and further samples be submitted for testing.
20.3 The Contractor shall submit to the Superintending Officer and the PUB a
copy of the Water Test Certificate from the Department of Scientific
Services or other approved SAC-SINGLAS laboratories. All cost
incurred shall be borne by the Contractor.
21. Screening of Openings
21.1 Vent pipe ends, drain pipe ends and overflow pipe ends shall be provided
with suitable provision for preventing the entry of vermin and insects to
the requirements of the Environmental Public Health Division.
22. Flow Meters
22.1 Flow meters where indicated in the drawings shall be of type comprising
"diamond-shape" sensor and "Eagle Eye" Flow meter.
22.2 The accuracy of the flow meter shall be +/- 1% of actual value with
repeatability of +/- 0.1% of actual value. The flow meter shall be of
approved standard.
22.3 All supplied water meter shall comply with section 4 of the specification
for the interfacing of the BAS system.
TS/PS/S2/26
MECHANICAL WORKS
23. PUB Water Department
23.1 The Contractor is to make all applications, liaise and arrange with the
PUB Water Department for the inspection and clearance, installation of
incoming mains, the new water meter, diversion, etc. for the complete
project. The Contractor is to provide transport and assistance to PUB
where required for the installation of same.
23.2 The Contractor is to take note that his Contract price is deemed to have
allowed for this provision as no extra claim whatsoever will be
entertained.
24. Special Requirements
24.1 All pipe penetrations shall be sealed by Abesco fire-rated material. The
Abesco fire-rated material shall ensure no leakage across the wall.
24.2 High efficiency motor shall be provided for the water pumps, The motor
efficiency shall be 95% ± 1% and the pump impeller efficiency shall be
85% ± 1%.
24.3 Pre-insulated GRP Panel Water Storage Tanks
The panel insulation core material shall be rigid polyurethane foam of

minimum thickness 25mm. Thermal conductivity of the polyurethane
shall be of 0.022 Kcal/m2 hr °C or equivalent.
Pre-insulated GRP water tanks installed shall be capable of operating

effectively and efficiently under the following site conditions:

28oC wet bulb

26.5oC wet bulb
Water temperature (AC make-up) : 13 to 16 oC
Water temperature (Equipment) : 24 to 26 oC
External finish panel shall be weather proof and have a fire resistance of 2
hours and to PSB approval.
TS/PS/S2/27
MECHANICAL WORKS
24.4 Pre-insulated Water Service Pipe
Pre-insulated pipes shall have the following features:

insulated. It shall consist of the following three (3) basic
components:
A service pipe
polyurethane foam which is machine injected into the annular
space between the jacket and the service pipe.

materials as the factory produced items. The procedures for on-
site insulation recommended by the manufacturer shall be strictly
adhered to.

injected into annulus between service pipe and casing shall have
the following physical properties:
Density : 80 kg/m3
Thermal
Conductivity of
Polyurethane : 0.022 Kcal/m2 hr °C
Service
Temperature : +5 °C (ambient temperature 35°C)
Compressive
Strength : 2.4 kgf/cm2 min
Water Vapour
Permeability : 3.7 perm. cm.

casing having a fire resistance of 2
hours and to PSB/FSB's approval
TS/PS/S2/28
MECHANICAL WORKS
Closed Cell
Content : 90% min.
Minimum Insulation
Thickness : 40 mm for pipe up to 40 mm dia
50 mm for pipe up to 65 mm dia
e) Casing shall be spirally formed locked the service pipe having the
spiral folded joints at 135 mm centers and the following
thickness:
Casing size up to 210 mm

diameter 0.5 mm thick (26 gauge)
Casing size 225 mm diameter

and above 0.6 mm thick (24 gauge)
24.5 Insulation for Flanges, Unions, Valves, Anchors and Fittings
Unless otherwise indicated, all flanges, unions, valves, anchors and

fittings shall be insulated with factory premoulded or prefabricated or
field fabricated cements of insulation of the same material and thickness
as the adjoining pipe insulation.
25. Security Padlock
Contractor shall provide PUB approved security padlock and installation for the
water tank access panel. Keys shall handover to employer directly.
TS/PS/S2/29
MECHANICAL WORKS
Upon completion of the underground pipe laying, there shall be a concrete slab
embossed with " Dia.xxx POTABLE WATER PIPE " for domestic water pipe
or " Dia.xxx NEWATER PIPE " for Newater pipe immediate above the laid
pipes before back filling and proper identification tag with engraved words
mounted on RC block of diameter 150mm for the particular underground
services that being installed. All the engraved tag, location shall submit for
Engineer approval prior to delivery. Marker shall install at every 20m interval
straight length, turning and Tee-off
POTABLE POTABLE
WATER PIPE WATER PIPE
POTABLE
WATER PIPE
1200 mm Depth
Sample of the Identification Tag for Domestic Water Pipe
TS/PS/S2/30
MECHANICAL WORKS
NEWATER
NEWATER PIPE PIPE
NEWATER PIPE
1200 mm Depth
Sample of the Identification Tag for Newater Pipe
TS/PS/S2/31
MECHANICAL WORKS
SECTION 5 - SANITARY PLUMBING
1. General
1.1 This section of the Specification covers the supply, delivery, installation,
testing, commissioning and maintenance of the Sanitary Plumbing
Installation of all soil, waste and vent pipe as well as the installation and
connection of all sanitary fitments to the plumbing system.
1.2 The Contractor shall engage a Sanitary/Plumbing Contractor registered

with BCA under the ME12 category with financial grade of L4 and above.
2.1 The sanitary plumbing and drainage work shall be executed by a licensed
plumber and in accordance with the Code of Practice on Sewerage and
Sanitary Works, latest Edition and requirements of the Ministry of
Environment Sewerage and Trade Effluent Departments.
2.2 The Contractor shall arrange with and pay all fees to the Authorities for
all clearances for commencement of the works and for the connection of
the Sanitary System to the Public Sewers.
2.3 The Contractor is required to make all application, liaise and arrange with
the Sewerage Department, PUB for inspection and clearance of the
Plumbing, Sanitary and Drainage System for the whole building. All
certificates of clearance from the PUB are to be submitted to the S.O.
2.4 All materials supplied and installed shall be selected from the latest
edition of the List of "Approved Products for Sanitary and Sewerage
Works" published by PUB/PSB.
3. Materials for Piping
3.1 Unless otherwise stated in the Drawings or elsewhere in the Specification,

all sanitary piping shall comply with the following:
a) Soil and/or Waste Pipes
i) Cast iron pipe with internal epoxy lining (minimum 80

microns thick) complete with hubless joints to DIN EN
877.
ii) uPVC pipe to SS 213.
TS/PS/S5/1
MECHANICAL WORKS
iii) uPVC pipe to SS 213 for connection from basins, sinks,

etc. to floor traps.
iv) Polypropylene pipe (Class 'O'. - classification from UK

Building Regulations 1991.
b) Vent Stacks, Piped Anti-Siphon Pipes
i) uPVC to SS 213.
i) Cast iron pipe with internal epoxy lining (minimum 80

microns thick) complete with hubless joint to DIN EN
877.
c) Soil Stacks, Drainlines
i) Cast iron pipe with internal epoxy lining complete with

hubless joint.
ii) Heavy duty cement lined ductile iron pipe to BS EN 598

Class K9.
iii) Vitrified clay pipe (for inspection chamber channels).
d) Laboratory Soil / Waste Pipes and Stacks
i) Polypropylene pipe (Class 'O') – classification from UK

Building Regulations 1991.
3.2 The Contractor shall supply the S.O. with test certificates or
manufacturer's certificates showing that the piping comply in all respect
with the provisions of the relevant Standards as stated above.
4. Joints and Fittings for Cast Iron Pipes
4.1 Cast iron pipe with hubless joints shall be jointed with stainless steel
couplings with hot dipped galvanised steel bolts and elastomatic gasket.
The coupling shall be tightened to a torque as recommended by the
manufacturer to withstand a pressure of at least 5 bars. Care shall be
taken to see that the pipes are perfectly dry before joints are made. Every
joint shall be made air-tight and water-tight.
4.2 Joints between cast iron and uPVC pipe shall be made with joints
provided by the manufacturer.
TS/PS/S5/2
MECHANICAL WORKS
5. Joints and Fittings for Ductile Iron Pipes
5.1 Flexible joint shall be used for joining ductile iron pipe buried
underground.
5.2 The flexible joint shall be effected by entering the spigot through the
gasket into the socket. The gasket shall be elastomeric gasket to BS 2494
and be located in the socket.
5.3 Where polyurethane lined ductile iron pipes are used, the fittings shall be
similarly lined with polyurethane and PUB approved (verified by a
conformance assessment body or a certification body accredited by the
Singapore Accreditation Council or under its Mutual Recognition
Agreements).
6. Joints and Fittings for uPVC Pipes
6.1 Unplasticised pvc pipes shall be closed fittings spigot and socket jointed
by solvent cement in accordance with the manufacturer's instructions.
The length of insertion shall not be less than one and half time the outside
diameter of the pipe.
6.2 All joints shall be made using manufacturer's standard fittings.
6.3 For jointing uPVC pipes to pipes of other material, only adaptor coupling,
caulking bush and jointing material as recommended by the manufacturer
shall be used.
6.4 Every joint shall be made air-tight and water-tight.
7. Polypropylene Waste Pipes and Fittings
7.1 Generally
a) Polypropylene waste pipes to the laboratories shall be fabricated

in strict accordance with the manufacturer's printed instructions.
b) Polypropylene pipe used shall be of PUB approved type and shall

be Class 'O' fire rating.
c) All joints shall be of mechanical joint.
TS/PS/S5/3
MECHANICAL WORKS
7.2 Installation
a) The polypropylene piping system is essentially a "cold" system

and all working - pressure tables shall be calculated at 20oC.
Temperatures rising above 20oC will cause progressive loss of
strength through reasonable and intermittent heat. Hot water
emptying from sinks shall have no effect on the pipes and fittings
other than slight expansion. The pipes shall not be subjected to
prolonged heat pressure or stress and shall not be brought in
contact with naked flame. The installation of the polypropylene
pipes and fittings shall be efficiently effected by using both pipes
and fittings of the same high standard correctly calibrated sizes,
and true shapes.
b) Pipe
Waste drainage pipes to receive the chemical corrosive waste

shall be available in 32 mm to 152 mm diameters. The jointing of
the pipes shall be accomplished only by using the approved
Mechanical tools and socketted, threaded or flanged. No hot work
shall be allowed.
c) Waste Pipe Falls
Horizontal waste runs shall be installed to provide a natural fall of

between 2o to 3o and shall in any case be not less than 1 (i.e. the
fall shall be 51 mm per 3000 mm).
d) Joining Polypropylene Waste Pipe or Cast Iron Pipes
This is achieved by installing a flange joint onto the

polypropylene pipe and then firmly secured to another flange on
the cast iron pipe. No hot work shall be allowed.
7.3 Supporting the Pipes
The polypropylene pipes shall be supported on proprietary recommended

clips approved by the S.O. The Contractor shall ensure that the pipes are
supported with the clips at centres stated below.
Horizontal Runs: 32 mm to 152 mm diameter pipes shall be

supported with approved clips spaced 8 times the
outside diameter of the pipe.
Vertical Runs: All size of diameter pipes shall be supported with

approved clips spaced 24 times the outside
diameter of the pipe.
TS/PS/S5/4
MECHANICAL WORKS
8. Polypropylene Fittings
8.1 The following polypropylene fittings shall be made available in the

chemical waste plumbing in sizes, dimensions and shapes as required and
indicated on the Drawings.
a) Bends
All sizes available from the manufacturer to include 90 short

bends, 92 1/2 sweep bends, 135 slow bends.
b) Tees
tees, 92 1/2 sweep, branch tees, 'Y' branches sweep and branch
crosses.
c) Couplers
All sizes available from the manufacturer to include equal

couplers, reducing couplers, threaded inserts, half couplers, loose
nut coupler and couplers to connect to metal pipes.
d) Access
All sizes available from the manufacturer for access fitting for
pipe inspection and fitting complete with cover plate and bolts.
e) Floor Gulleys
All sizes available from the manufacturer for floor gulley traps.
These floor gulley traps shall be installed only on cold applied
floor finishes and cast into the reinforced concrete slab. The floor
gulley traps shall come complete with lift off grating and an
access screw down plug to give access for rodding.
f) Blank-Off Caps
All sizes available from the manufacturer for blank off caps to be
provided for rodding facilities or future connection.
g) Pipe Clips
i) All sizes available from the manufacturer and shall be the

"snap-on" type and with either one or two holes type for
fixing depending on the method of fixing adopted. The
clips shall hold the pipes firmly but with tolerances for
thermal movement of the pipes.
TS/PS/S5/5
MECHANICAL WORKS
ii) Pipe clips shall be fixed as specified previously in

"Supporting the Pipes".
h) Flanges
i) All sizes available from the manufacturer and shall suit

pipes from 32 mm to 152 mm nominal bore. The flanges
shall be bolted.
ii) When connecting to metal or where pressure is involved

metal backing plates and neoprene gaskets shall be used.
i) Wastes
i) Wastes shall come in sizes of 32 mm, 38 mm, 51 mm and

shall be made to suit all patterns of sinks and basins of
pottery metal or plastic. The flanged edge sections shall
either be square or chamfered and waste tails either plain
or slotted depending on the type of sinks and basins to
which the wastes are fitted.
ii) The Contractor is deemed to have checked the type of

wastes required to be fitted to the various types of sinks
and basins.
iii) Flat faced back nut to waste shall be used on pottery sinks
or similar heavy section vessels.
iv) Back nut with recessed face shall be used with thin section
vessels and plastic sinks of various types.
v) Where wastes are connected to black polypropylene sinks,

polythene or polypropylene butyl rubber gasket shall be
used.
vi) The Contractor shall be deemed to include in his cost for

the wastes that each waste fitting shall come complete
with the manufacturer's proprietary plug and strainer to fit
the waste outlet.
j) Bottle Traps
The bottle traps shall come in 51 mm diameter sizes only. The

bottle trap shall be accessible by unscrewing together with the
retaining flanges as one assembly. The loose nut inlet shall have a
51 mm diameter thread and shall only be suitable to fit a 51 mm
diameter waste.
TS/PS/S5/6
MECHANICAL WORKS
9. Access Opening
9.1 Sufficient access shall be provided to enable all pipework to be cleared

and tested. Access openings of adequate size shall generally be provided
on the vertical stack directly opposite a branch line, at the junction of a
subsidiary branch and at bends.
9.2 Oval access openings shall have an area of not less than the cross
sectional area of the pipe to which they are fitted.
9.3 All bends and junctions of the soil and waste fittings shall be provided
with access doors, fitted with washers and gun metal set screws, provided
on the heel or the front of the fitting.
9.4 The internal face of the cover shall be shaped to form a true completion of
the bore of the pipe. The openings shall be made gas-tight and water-tight
with good quality rubber washers, and the covers firmly secured with gun
metal or other suitable screws or studs.
10. Testing Gates
Testing gates shall be located on the vertical stacks between floors to enable each
floor to be tested independently as specified hereafter.
11. Fixture Trap
11.1 Plumbing fixtures, except those having integral traps, shall be separately
trapped by a water-seal trap, placed as close as possible.
11.2 Trap seals, if not provided with union connections at each end to permit
removal of rodding, shall have an accessible brass trap screw of ample
size.
12. Floor Waste
12.1 The Contractor shall supply and install all floor drain (FD), floor traps
(FT), outlet gratings (OG) or waste outlet (WO) and gully traps (GT) as
12.2 All floor traps, outlets gratings and gully traps shall be suitably protected
from the ingress of cement grout and foreign objects during construction
stage which will choke up the traps. All traps must be cleaned before
fixing or grating covers.
12.3 Gully traps shall be of heavy duty type and shall be embedded in concrete
to a thickness of at least 100 mm all round.
TS/PS/S5/7
MECHANICAL WORKS
12.4 All wastes or floor trap shall have a minimum of 75 mm water-seal.
12.5 Grating covers shall be of stainless steel type (with perforated holes) as
indicated in drawings. Sample shall be submitted for approval.
12.6 Grating cover shall be of heavy-duty stainless steel type (without

perforated holes) for all laboratories floor trap and floor waste. Grating
cover shall have screw for easy remove.
12.7 All wastes, floor traps and gulley traps shall come complete with anti-
mosquito/insect trap.
12.8 Where pipe is serving freezer, cold room, ice flaking machine or
conveying or condensate water, it shall be insulated with 50mm thick
polyurethane foam with galvanized jacketing
13. Dilution Tanks
13.1 Dilution tanks of sizes as specified in the Drawings shall be supplied and
installed.
13.2 They shall be PUB approved. The internal wall of the tank shall be made
of a material that is resistant to corrosive chemicals used in laboratory.
14. Pipework
14.1 All piping generally shall be installed parallel to the axes of the building,
arranging to conform to the building requirements and to suit the
necessities of clearance for cleaning and inspection, for other mechanical
ducts, flues, conduits and work of other trades.
14.2 Run all horizontal sanitary plumbing at uniform grade and as indicated in
the following schedule (unless otherwise stated):
-------------------------------------------------------------------------
Pipe Size Gradient
-------------------------------------------------------------------------
Up to and including 1 in 40 to 1 in 60
100 mm diameter
150 mm diameter 1 in 60 to 1 in 80
225 mm diameter 1 in 90 to 1 in 120

-------------------------------------------------------------------------
TS/PS/S5/8
MECHANICAL WORKS
14.3 All vent pipes shall have a minimum grade of 1:40 unless otherwise
directed by the S.O.
14.4 Horizontal lines shall be arranged to have the maximum grade with
cleaning eyes and inspection openings in accessible locations.
14.5 The pipework in branch connections shall always be arranged to allow

free drainage of the system.
14.6 Connection of the branch pipes to main or other branch pipes shall be so
arranged as to prevent cross flow from one appliance to another.
14.7 Connections shall be made with an easy sweep in the direction of the
flow.
14.8 Bends shall be of a long radius of at least 200 mm where practicable or

alternatively two 45o short radius bends may be used provided that these
shall be separated by a 300 mm straight length of pipe.
14.9 Use reducers or increasers when changing pipe sizes.
14.10 All soil, waste and vent pipes shall normally be placed in ducts or brick
encasement with means of access at each floor level for branch
connections.
14.11 Duck-foot bend or special deflector bend shall be used at the base of all
soil and waste stack pipe.
14.12 All 50 mm diameter vent pipe shall be concealed in floor and wall chase
unless otherwise stated in the Drawings.
14.13 Trap vent pipes shall be connected to the top of the BSP or BWP between
75 mm and 200 mm from the crown of the trap and rises vertically or at
an angle not more than 45o from the vertical to a point at least 150 mm
above the flood-level rim of the fixture it is venting before connecting to
the BVP.
14.14 The BVP shall be fixed at least 150 mm above the flood level rim of the
highest fixture served and shall be sloped to allow for free drainage.
14.15 The main vent stacks shall be extended through the roof to the required
height, with the open end protected by means of a wire domical grating
for cast iron vent stacks and uPVC vent cowl for uPVC vent stacks.
14.16 Where the pipes pass through the roof, a 150 mm high sleeve shall be
provided. The Contractor shall over-flash this upstand to the respective
pipe.
TS/PS/S5/9
MECHANICAL WORKS
14.17 Open ends of all piping shall be covered with wood or metal plugs or caps
during construction, to prevent foreign matter falling in.
14.18 The top of every discharge stack shall be at the same height as the parapet
on the roof.
14.19 The top of every discharge stack shall be provided with a guard. Wire ball
guards shall be supplied and installed for cast iron stack and uPVC cowl
for uPVC stack. The guards shall be installed at the height above the
parapet on the roof.
14.20 Every discharge stack shall have a uniform diameter and be made of the
same material throughout its entire length.
TS/PS/S5/10
MECHANICAL WORKS
14.21 Pipework shall be securely fixed in position with hot dipped galvanised
steel fittings as shown in the table below:
TABLE A: PIPE SUPPORTS

---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
uPVC Pipe *Ductile Iron Pipe to BS 4772 Class K9
---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Horizontal Vertical Horizontal Vertical
Run (m) Run (m) Run (m) Run (m)
---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
15 0.6 1.2 - -
---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
20 0.9 1.8 - -
---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
25 0.9 1.8 - -
---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
32 0.9 1.8 - -
---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
40 0.9 1.8 - -
---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
50 1.2 2.1 - -
---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
65 1.2 2.1 3.0 3.0
---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
75 1.2 2.1 3.0 3.0
---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
100 1.5 2.4 3.0 3.0
---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
125 1.5 2.4 3.0 3.0
---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
150 1.8 3.0 3.0 3.0
---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
* At least one fixing must be provided for each unit length.
The supports shall permit appropriate movement for expansion and

contraction in the desired direction and prevent transmission of vibration.
14.22 Every discharge stack shall be connected directly to the inspection

chamber.
TS/PS/S5/11
MECHANICAL WORKS
15. Car Park Waste Water Drainage
15.1 Construct concrete sumps and lay drainlines where shown for receiving
waste water discharge from floor waste outlet.
15.2 Main drainline between inspection chambers shall be 150 mm diameter

heavy duty ductile iron pipe and the gradient shall be 1 in 80 maximum.
15.3 Branch lines from sump to sump and floor waste outlets shall be 150 mm
diameter, heavy duty ductile iron pipe complete with heavy duty cast iron
floor waste grating.
15.4 Concrete sump shall be constructed similar to inspection chambers

complete with heavy duty sealed covers. All concrete sumps shall be
adequately sized to suit the numbers of waste inlet pipes and shall be
accessible for cleaning.
16. Garage Gulley/Grease Interceptors
16.1 Garage Gully/Grease Interceptors provided shall be of type as approved

by the Sewerage Department. Grease Interceptors shall be of cast iron
with separate trap and hopper top and clearing arm. A perforated
aluminium alloy strainer shall be provided with handle or handles of
sufficient length to reach over the water level so that the congealed grease
maybe removed as required by lifting out the strainer.
16.2 An inspection chamber shall be constructed over the Grease

Interceptor/Garage Gully.
17. Sump and Ejector Pumps
17.1 The Contractor shall design the sump and ejector systems and submit all
drawings and calculation including control circuit to Water Reclamation
(Network) for approval. All submissions to Water Reclamation (Network)
shall be endorsed by the Contractor's PE. Any requirement from Water
Reclamation (Network) or other relevant authority shall be complied with.
All cost related to the said submission shall be deemed included in the
tender price.
17.2 Sump and ejector pumps shall be of the submersible type and free
standing stationary installation on legs or dry type as indicated in
Drawings. Pumps with spiral casing shall be of cast iron with stainless
steel spiral and shall be complete with inlet strainer, cable grand,
replaceable bronze wear ring. Impeller shall be of the adjustable type.
Pumps shall be of PUB's approved type.
TS/PS/S5/12
MECHANICAL WORKS
17.3 The motor shall be housed within the pump casing and shall be sealed
from the pump chamber by a double mechanical seal shall be of tungsten
carbide. The motor starter shall be insulated against moisture and heat to a
minimum of Class 'F'. The shaft shall be of stainless steel and shall be
integral with the pump impeller.
17.4 Pumps above 2 kw shall be provided with over temperature protection in

the starter windings. Sumps pumps above 0.5 kw shall be of 3-phase,
400V, 50 Hz.
17.5 Each pump shall be capable of delivering not less than the quantity of
fluid against the design head as indicated in the Drawings.
17.6 Each pump shall be capable of handling dry suction condition for a
reasonable period without harm.
17.7 The Contractor is to submit for approval the characteristic curve of all
pumps offered. Any curve indicating excessive shut off head will be
rejected.
17.8 Among others, the following fittings shall be required for the pump
installation :
a) Globe valve at discharge

b) Check valve at discharge (non-slam type)
c) Flexible connection at discharge
d) Float or level electrode control
e) Guide holders, guide bar & chain to raise and lower the pumps.
17.9 Where single pump installations are shown in the drawings, they shall be
automatically controlled, started and stopped independently by means of
float switches or electrodes.
17.10 Where multi-pump installations are shown in the Drawings, they shall be
automatically and sequentially controlled, started and stopped. (The
automatic sequential operation system shall be activated by means of
multi float switches or electrode sensors. In addition, there shall be
provided a klaxon or siren alarm when the last (or standby) pump is
activated or failed to activate. They shall be provided with duty selector
for alternating the duty pump selection.
17.11 Arrangement shall be made for the pumps to operate automatically in

alternative manner.
17.12 Alarm complete with indicating light shall be provided for extra high or
low level.
TS/PS/S5/13
MECHANICAL WORKS
17.13 All starter and control panels shall be constructed to conform to the
requirements as specified in the section "Electrical Installation". All
starter panels shall be provided with spare contacts for monitoring of
stopped-running-tripped condition, and alarm condition for remote
monitoring or Building automation usage. Circuit shall be submitted for
approval.
17.14 The control and starter panel shall have :
a) On-load isolator for the incoming main

b) MCCB for each pump
c) Starters and contactors for each pump
d) Overload relays for each pump
e) Automatic changeover switch
f) Manual and automatic selector switch for each pump
g) Start and stop switch for each pump
h) Level controller relays
i) Alarm muting and reset push button
j) Control system "ON-OFF" switch
k) Indicating lamps for main on, overload trip, motor run and stop,
high and low level
l) HRC fuses as required

m) Others as required by PUB
17.15 Connections to the sump pumps shall be in flexible butyl rubber or EPR
insulated cables of sufficient rating. Where the cables are exposed, they
shall be suitably protected in steel conduit.
17.16 All joints shall be sealed water-tight and corrosion-proof.
17.17 All electrical works shall comply with the Specification set out in the
section "Electrical Installation" and PUB's requirement.
17.18 The Contractor shall make all necessary arrangements to submit the
drawings/calculation as described above within 4 weeks upon contract
commence date.
TS/PS/S5/14
MECHANICAL WORKS
18. Testing
18.1 Testing of Pipes
a) Water test shall be applied before the appliances are connected

and carried out in sections so as to limit the static head to 4.5 m.
All openings affected by the test shall be sealed and the system
filled with water. Some time shall be allowed for absorption by
the pipes and joints to take place after which the level shall be
tapped up. The pipes and joints shall be inspected for leakage. If
no appreciable fall in water level occurs during a period of 10
minutes the system shall be deemed to have passed the test.
b) Air Test
i) Air test may be applied by inserting expanding rubber

plugs in the lower and upper ends of the MSWP and MVP
and sealing the plugs with water.
ii) The testing plug at the upper end of the ventilating pipe
shall be fitted with a tee-piece with a cock on each branch,
one branch being connected by a flexible tube to a
manometer. Air pressure is then introduced into the
system through the other branch of the tee-piece until a
pressure of 65 mm water gauge is shown on the
manometer seals.
iii) Alternatively, the air pressure may be applied by passing a

flexible tube from a tee-piece attached to a manometer
through the water seal of the trap of the sanitary appliance,
the test then being carried out as described above.
iv) The system shall be deemed to have passed the test if the
pressure remains constant for a period of three minutes.
c) Flood Test
Flood test shall be employed to locate faults indicated by the air

test. Water is pumped into the system via a pump.
d) Hydraulic Performance
i) Hydraulic performance discharge test shall be made from

all appliances, single and collectively.
ii) Obstruction in any of the pipe lines shall be traced and the
whole system examined for proper hydraulic performance,
including the retention of an adequate water seal in trap.
TS/PS/S5/15
MECHANICAL WORKS
iii) Any defect revealed by the test shall be made good and the
tests repeated until a satisfactory result in obtained.
e) Testing of Drain-Lines and Inspection chambers
Water Test
i) Every drain-line shall be subjected to a water test under a

static head of 4.5 m of water at the upstream of the line.
The test shall be carried out after laying but before placing
concrete for haunching or encasing.
ii) Every inspection chamber shall be subjected to the same

water test.
iii) Any defect revealed by the tests shall be made good and
the tests repeated until a satisfactory result is obtained.
19. Special Requirements
19.1 The Contractor shall conduct CCTV investigation to the existing sewer
line 50m from site boundary. Three (3) copies of approved investigation
reports and video recording in DVD format shall be submitted to the S.O..
The investigation reports shall detail the condition of the internal surface
of the underground pipes with illustrated photographs.
19.2 All M&E (duct, pipe, trunking etc) penetration openings shall be sealed
by non outgassing silicon comply with UL standards.
19.3 Pre-insulated Condensate Pipe/ Waste Pipe
Pre-insulated pipes shall have the following features:

insulated. It shall consist of the following three (3) basic
components:

A service pipe
polyurethane foam which is machine injected into the annular
space between the jacket and the service pipe.

materials as the factory produced items. The procedures for on-
site insulation recommended by the manufacturer shall be strictly
adhered to.
TS/PS/S5/16
MECHANICAL WORKS

injected into annulus between service pipe and casing shall have
the following physical properties:
Density : 80 kg/m3
Thermal
Conductivity of
Polyurethane : 0.022 Kcal/mhr°C
Service
Temperature : +5°C (ambient temperature 35°C)
Compressive
Strength : 2.4 kgf/cm2 min
Water Vapour
Permeability : 3.7 perm. cm.

casing having a fire resistance of 2
hours and to PSB/FSB's approval
Closed Cell
Content : 90% min.
Minimum Insulation
Thickness : 40 mm for pipe up to 40 mm dia
e) Casing shall be spirally formed locked the service pipe having the
spiral folded joints at 135 mm centers and the following
thickness:
Casing size up to 210 mm

diameter 0.5 mm thick (26 gauge)
Casing size 225 mm diameter

and above 0.6 mm thick (24 gauge)
19.4 Insulation for Flanges, Unions, Valves, Anchors and Fittings
Unless otherwise indicated, all flanges, unions, valves, anchors and

fittings shall be insulated with factory premoulded or prefabricated or
field fabricated cements of insulation of the same material and thickness
as the adjoining pipe insulation.
TS/PS/S5/17
MECHANICAL WORKS
SECTION 6 – INSTALLATION OF SANITARY FITTINGS
1. General
1.1 The Contractor shall connect and commission all sanitary fittings and
accessories including but not necessarily limited to the following:
a) Assembling and jointing components parts, making all

connections to services and waste inclusive of any electrical or
control works.
b) Protect sanitary fittings and accessories after installation, clean

and disinfect prior to handing over.
1.2 All fittings and accessories supplied by Building Contractor shall

include all taps, (except bib taps for AHU rooms, plant rooms, toilets
and planter beds) flush valves, urinal, WC, wash basins, sinks, etc..
The Plumbing and Sanitary Contractor (Domestic) shall supply all
jointing and fitting materials and necessary supporting brackets to
make the installation complete in all respects.
1.3 The Contractor shall allow for building into walls, wall anchors for
wall hung w.c. and other fittings.
1.4 All items not specifically mentioned in these Specification or shown in

the Drawings but which are necessary to make a complete working
installation shall be included.
2. Exposed Hook Up Piping, Brackets, Bolts, Screws, Nuts, etc.
2.1 All exposed hooked up piping for sanitary fixtures shall be in copper to
EN 1057 (Type ‘X’) and bright chromed type. They shall be run in the
neatest and most inconspicuous manner. The Contractor is advised to
consult the S.O. prior to the installation to ensure that this requirement
is complied with.
2.2 All fixing brackets, bolts, screws and nuts, etc. used in the installation
of sanitary fittings that are exposed to view or corrosion shall be of
stainless steel or brass and chromed type, unless otherwise approved
by the S.O..
2.3 All piping protruding out of any wall/partition shall be provided with
chrome capping/cover flange. These cappings/flanges shall be of brass
material and chrome plated and the openings shall match the outer
diameter of the piping on which the cappings/flanges are mounted.
TS/PS/S6/1
MECHANICAL WORKS
SECTION 7 - SECONDARY DRAINAGE
1. General
1.1 The work to be done under this section of the Contract consists of the
supply, delivery, installation and testing of all sanitary plumbing and
drainage piping connecting the vertical and horizontal stacks to the
drainage lines. Provide all piping fittings, excavation and backfilling
necessary to complete the works.
1.2 This section of the works shall be executed by a licensed plumber and
carried out strictly in accordance with the standard drawings, specification
and Code of Practice of the Sewerage and Drainage, PUB and as further
specified hereunder and as shown in the drawings.
1.3 The Contractor shall arrange with and pay all fees to the Authorities for
all clearances for commencement of the works and for the connection of
the Sanitary System to the Public Sewers.
1.4 The Contractor is required to make all application, liaise and arrange with
the Sewerage Department, PUB for inspection and clearance of the
Plumbing, Sanitary and Drainage System for the whole building. All
certificates of clearance from the PUB are to be submitted to the S.O.
1.5 All position of floor traps, gully traps, inspection chambers and concrete
sumps shown on plans are only approximate position. The Contractor
shall allow in his tender sum all adjustment made on site which is within
an approximate distance of 5 m from the position as indicated on plan.
2. Pipe and Fittings
Unless otherwise stated in the Drawings, all soil and waste stacks and drainlines,
for connections to sump drain, manholes and the public sewer shall be carried out
in heavy duty ductile iron pipe to BS EN598 Class K9.
3. Joint for Piping
3.1 Flexible joint shall be used for jointing HD ductile iron pipe buried
underground or in the basement slab.
3.2 The flexible joint shall be effected by entering the spigot through the
gasket into the socket. The gasket shall be elastomeric gasket to BS 2494
and be located in the socket.
TS/PS/S7/1
MECHANICAL WORKS
4. Alignment and Grade
4.1 All pipes shall be laid and maintained in accordance with the sizes,
locations, dimensions, grades and other particulars as indicated in the
drawings.
4.2 The line of the trench shall be accurately set by means of suitable pegs
and reference points for the approval of the Superintending Officer.
4.3 The Contractor shall provide suitable instruments and set up and maintain
all sight rails, boning rods and bench marks, etc necessary for the purpose.
5. Excavation
5.1 The Contractor shall carry out all excavation for the works specified
hereafter. Excavation for drainage trenches shall be to straight lines and
gradient required for the pipes and concrete beds as specified hereafter.
5.2 Excavated material shall be stacked at least 500 mm from the edge of the
trench.
5.3 The minimum width at the bottom of the trench shall be not less than the
external diameter of the pipe plus 300mm with due allowance for
alignment and grade.
5.4 In the event of excavation being made deeper than the proper gradient
level the intervening space shall be brought to the proper level with lean
mix concrete as directed by the S.O. at the Contractor's expense.
5.5 The Contractor shall be required at all times to keep the trenches dry and
free from water by pumping, bailing and temporary drainage.
5.6 Where in the opinion of the S.O. the sub-grade is found to be unstable or
unsatisfactory the Contractor shall excavate and remove such material to
the depth required by the Superintending Officer.
5.7 The sub-grade shall be restored by backfilling with concrete as specified

hereinafter. All pipes, ducts, cables, mains and other services exposed by
the excavation must be effectively supported by timbers or other means.
TS/PS/S7/2
MECHANICAL WORKS
6. Timbering of Excavation
6.1 The Contractor is to include in his excavation rates for any necessary
planking, strutting and shoring for safe and efficient completion of the
work.
6.2 The Contractor shall be completely responsible for the safety of all
excavation, trenches, pits, etc. from collapse, and for the safety of any
surrounding structures which may become endangered by the works and
they shall ensure that all safety measures necessary shall be applied to any
works before and during any excavation.
6.3 The Superintending Officer shall have the power to order whatever type
of support he may deem necessary to ensure safety and/or stability of such
excavation if the precaution taken by the Contractor are considered
inadequate by the Superintending Officer. The price for excavation must
include for timbering and shoring where this is likely to be required.
6.4 The Superintending Officer shall have the right to order excavation and
construction work to be carried out in such lengths and in such sections of
the works as will, in his opinion, minimize the danger of such open
excavation and the Contractor shall have no claim for any extra payment
on this amount.
7. Existing Services
7.1 The Contractor should liaise with all Service Department, etc. for the
location of all pipes, cables, mains, ducts, posts manholes, boxes, etc.
beneath road reserves or in any other part of the work in order to ensure
that all service requirements are met before commencement of the Work.
7.2 The Contractor shall apply to the Land Transport Authority and Police
Department where necessary to procure all permits before proceeding
with the works.
7.3 The Contractor shall obtain up-to-date information or drawings from the
respective Authorities with regard to the existence of other services along
or beneath the road.
7.4 The Contractor shall be held responsible for any damage done during the
progress of works and shall meet all costs and repairs and reinstatement
due to such damage.
7.5 The Contractor shall notify the Superintending Officer immediately of any
existing services which will be affected by the works and shall
immediately provide adequate supports and protection of same to the
satisfaction of the Superintending Officer at his own expense.
TS/PS/S7/3
MECHANICAL WORKS
8. Interference with Traffic and Adjoining Properties
8.1 All operations necessary for the execution of the works shall so far as
compliance with the requirements of the Contract permit be carried on so
as not to interfere unnecessarily or improperly with public convenience or
the access to use and occupation of public or private roads and footpath.
and shall save harmless the Employer from all indemnity charges and
expenses whatsoever arising out of or in relation to any such matter.
8.2 The Contractor shall when required by the Superintending Officer or by

the Authority apply and operate suitable methods of traffic control at his
own expenses.
8.3 If so required, flashing warning lights and notice shall be displayed at the
Contractor's expense.
9. Pipelaying
9.1 Each pipe shall be carefully examined on arrival at site. Sound pipes shall
be carefully stored. Defective pipes shall be marked and removed from
site.
9.2 Drainline shall be laid as shown on the Drawings.
9.3 Every drainline shall be bedded on concrete (1:3:6) at least 150 mm thick.
9.4 Piping shall be haunched with concrete, the concrete to be carried up to

the full width of the bed to the level of the horizontal diameter of the pipe,
and shall be splayed from this level and carried upwards to meet the pipe
barrel tangentially.
9.5 The pipelaying in the finished trench shall start at the lowest point and
laid up-grade.
9.6 All piping at the lowest basement shall be laid in the reinforced concrete
slab at uniform grade to ensure proper gradient of the pipeline. Standard
heavy duty fitting shall be provided at all joints. The Contractor shall lay
all piping before the casting of floor slab.
9.7 Pipes shall be laid with sockets leading uphill and shall restore solid and
even foundations for the full length of the barrel.
9.8 The alignment and level of each pipe laid shall be tested before covering.
TS/PS/S7/4
MECHANICAL WORKS
10. Connections
10.1 Each gully shall be of the inlet type, and shall be set level on a concrete
base with riser to finish 50 mm above the surrounding surface level,
complete with concrete surround rendered on all sides and HD galvanised
iron grating.
10.2 Bends turned up to receive the various stacks shall be set on concrete
bases as specified for gullies. All bends at the foot of vertical stacks shall
be of long radius type complete with duckfoot and concrete.
11. Connection to Public Sewer
11.1 All pipe connections to public sewer are as shown on drawings. Where
the invert of the drain is significantly above the invert of the sewer, a
backdrop to the manhole may be provided. The backdrop shall be
encased in concrete outside the manhole wall.
12. Backfilling
12.1 After the pipes have been tested and approved, the trench shall be
backfilled with approved filling.
12.2 Backfilling shall be carried out as shown on the drawings and under the
direction and full time supervision of the Superintending Officer.
12.3 Special care shall be taken to place and compact the fill material under
haunches of the pipe.
12.4 Backfill material shall be selected material approved by the

Superintending Officer. Backfill material shall preferable be granular to
provide good structural performance. It shall be free of vegetable matter,
lumps, cinders, boulders or rocks.
12.5 The backfill material shall be deposited evenly on both sides of the pipe
in layers not exceeding 150 mm in depth (loose measure) and thoroughly
compacted to a minimum of 90% of modified AASHTO optimum dry
density. Each layer shall be moistured or dried, if necessary, to the
optimum moisture content and thoroughly compacted. This method of fill
placement shall be continued to at least 300 mm over the top of the pipe.
12.6 Compaction may be done by hand or with mechanical equipment tamping

rollers or vibrating compactors depending upon field conditions and as
specified by the Superintending Officer.
TS/PS/S7/5
MECHANICAL WORKS
12.7 Material used to complete the fill over the pipe shall be essentially the
same as that used for the backfill and shall be compacted to the same
standard.
12.8 The Contractor shall provide a compacted earth cover of at least 600 mm
over the pipe before equipment is allowed to be driven over it.
13. Restoration of Surface
13.1 The Contractor shall be responsible and liable for the restoration of any
apron or road paving bitumen surfacing etc. or any turf removed or
damaged as a result of this Contract. The contractor shall re-surface the
affected road lane to the SO satisfactory.
13.2 Any aprons, roads, paths, etc. so affected shall be restored with materials
of the same nature and of equal quality as those contained in the original
pavement and to the same standards of construction and the same depth so
as to produce at the end of the Maintenance period, a finished surface at
least equal in all respects to that existing before the commencement of the
works comprising this Contract.
13.3 Should the Contractor fail to properly restore and maintain surfaces
affected by his operations, the Superintending Officer has full power to
employ others to make good the surfaces affected and the cost of such
labour, transport and materials employed shall be paid for by the
Contractor.
14. Rendering
Concrete surfaces shown to be rendered on the Drawings or as directed by the

Superintending Officer shall be rendered with cement.
15. Removal of Surplus Soil
On completion of all the drainage work, all surplus soil shall be spread and
levelled off, or removed from the site as directed by the Superintending Officer.
TS/PS/S7/6
MECHANICAL WORKS
16. Testing of Sewer Pipe and Manhole
16.1 The Contractor shall carry out tests to the sewer installation in accordance
with the method and requirement as described hereinafter. The
Contractor shall give reasonable notice in writing to the Superintending
Officer before such tests are carried out.
16.2 Every drainline and pipework shall be water tight and subjected to a water
test.
a) Mirror Test
i) When a reasonable length of pipe has been laid, the

accuracy of the pipe joints may be checked by means of
drain mirror.
ii) A mirror or stainless steel reflector is placed in the

channel of each of the chambers so that light is reflected
along the drain. The mirror or stainless steel reflector to
be adjusted or set up at any convenient angle by means of
the metal stand attached, to enable the Inspector to view
the inside of the pipes in the mirror or reflector. If the
drain is sound and has been truly laid the effect will be
similar to looking through a long tube, the joints
appearing as a series of concentric circles.
iii) Any defect should be readily discernible and the position

arrived at by counting the number of the defective joint
from either end of the length of drain.
b) Water Test
i) Pipelines shall be hydrostatically tested by applying not

more than 3.0 m head at the downstream end and not less
than 1.2 m at the upstream end of the section of the line
being tested for a period of at least 15 minutes. If the
difference in level between the extremities of the line
under test exceeds 1.8 m. The maximum head may be
increased to not more than 4.5 m.
ii) The water test is applied by plugging the lower end of the
drain by means of an expanding drain plug, or stopper,
filling with water until say 0.6 m stands in the top
manhole.
TS/PS/S7/7
MECHANICAL WORKS
iii) The water level should then be carefully recorded and

watched for subsidence. At least half-an-hour should be
allowed to elapse between observations, with fifteen
minutes before the first observation to allow for
absorption by cement rendering of manholes etc. Each
branch drain or a reasonable length shall be tested
separately and the main drain dealt with in sections from
manhole to manhole starting at the top of the system and
working downwards towards the sewer. After the drain
has been almost completely filled, it shall be brought up to
its final level from a graduated container, set at the
required height above ground level, and connected to the
drain plug by a length of rubber tubing.
iv) All tests should be carried out after the drain is laid but
before it is haunched or covered and after any haunching
or covering with concrete and backfilling of trench.
v) Any leakage or defect in the drainline and manhole must

be rectified to the satisfaction of the Superintending
Officer.
vi) The Contractor shall provide all labour, drain testing

equipment, etc. for conducting the tests.
17. Gradient and Water Tightness of Sanitary Drainlines and Sewers
17.1 The Contractor shall check the drainline gradients and the gradient of the
drainline serving water closet is critical to ensure proper waste
transportation. The Code of Practice on Sewerage and Sanitary Works
(CPSW) stipulates drainline gradients to ensure adequate flow conditions.
17.2 To ensure that drainline are able to function well in the long run and area
constructed as designed, the designed and as-built gradients of the
sanitary drainlines and top/invert level of the inspection chambers should
be henceforth be clearly shown in as-built plans.
17.3 The inspection and hydrostatic test for sewers and drainlines are currently
already stipulated in CPSW to ensure that they do not leak beyond
acceptable rates when in use. There tests are necessary during
construction stage prior to covering up the sewers and drainlines as any
defects of the pipes or joints can still be located and remedied to ensure
water tightness.
17.4 To ensure that such tests are carried out properly, the Contractor shall
arrange QPs to witness and endorse results of the hydrostatic test carried
out.
TS/PS/S7/8
MECHANICAL WORKS
17.5 Contractor shall strictly fulfill the technical requirements on pipe

gradients and hydrostatic tests are stipulated in the CPSW and relevant
sections are listed below:
a) Hydrostatic Test Requirement:
i) All sanitary drainline and sewers of 600mm and below in

diameter, before being surrounded and covered, shall be
tested by filling with water.
ii) The pressure shall be measured from the highest point of

the pipeline under test and shall be 1.5 metre head of
water. Pipelines are not accepted until they have withstood
the required pressure for 30 minutes without a loss in
excess of 1.5 litres for 100m for each 300mm in diameter.
iii) The acceptable rate of water loss for 30 minutes for the
following standard pipe diameters area as follow:
Diameter of Pipe Acceptable Rate of Water Loss

100mm 0.005 litres/metre run
b) Gradients of Sanitary Drainlines
i) The branch drainline shall have a minimum diameter of

100mm. The length shall preferably not exceed 10 metres.
ii) The main drainline shall have a minimum diameter of

150mm and distance between inspection chambers shall
not exceed 50 metres.
iii) The branch/main drainline shall have a constant gradient.

The size and gradient of the drainline shall be chosen to
provide adequate carrying capacity and also allow for
adequate ventilation.
TS/PS/S7/9
MECHANICAL WORKS
iv) The choice of gradient for the branch/main drainline shall

be such as to maintain self-cleansing velocity (0.9m/sec)
and not to exceed scouring velocity (2.4m/sec) under
normal discharge condition. The recommended gradients
for drainlines are as follow:
Diameter Maximum Minimum Maximum

Gradient Gradient Gradient at
upstream of
backdrop
tumbling bay
connection
100mm 1:20 1:60 N.A.
(branch drainline)
150mm 1:30 1:90 1:70
(main drainline)
200m 1:30 1:90 1:70
(sewer connection
line)
17.6 The Contractor shall submit “Clearance Certificate” and “Certificate of

Completion and Inspection for Sanitary/ Sewerage Works” (Form C/QP)
to include as additional endorsement by QPs to:
a) Check and witness the water tests during pipe laying stage; and
b) Certify compliance with the gradients and hydrostatic test

requirements when applying for the Compliance Certificate.
17.7 PUB will check compliance on water tightness for all the newly
completed sanitary drainlines and sewers. From 1st of February 2007,
PUB will carry out its own hydrostatic tests for randomly selected projects
before the issuance of the Sewerage Clearance for Compliance Certificate
(TOP/CSC) for the sanitary/ sewerage works.
Authorities as necessary and shall obtain all consents necessary for the
various works to be executed and shall pay all fees in connection
herewith.
TS/PS/S7/10
MECHANICAL WORKS
18. Inspection Chamber or Manholes & Grease Interceptors
18.1 Where indicated in the Drawings, the construction of all manholes or

inspection chamber and Grease Interceptors shall be to Sewerage
Department's Standard details and approval.
18.2 Every inspection chamber shall have a minimum internal dimensions of

900 mm length and 700 mm width. The length and width shall be
increased accordingly depending on the number of branch drainlines
connected.
18.3 Workmanship and material shall generally be in accordance with the

following:
a) Brick
i) The chamber shall be built in English bond not less than

one brick thick (225 mm), constructed on a concrete
foundation of minimum 150 mm thickness. Brick shall be
the best obtainable from an approved manufacturer and of
minimum crushing strength 20.68 N/mm2, hard sound,
well burnt.
ii) Water absorption by weight shall not be more than 3%

greater than that of the approved samples.
b) Cement Mortar
i) Cement shall be Ordinary Portland Cement complying

with BS 12. Fine aggregate shall be lean and well graded
and may be either naturally occurring sand or crushed
stone complying with BS 1200.
ii) Bricks shall be laid on a full and perfect bed of 1:3 cement
mortar of an average thickness.
c) Channels and Benchings
i) The open channel in the bottom of the manhole or

inspection chamber shall be formed in half section glazed
channel and be extended for the whole length of the
chamber. For precast concrete manholes, the base shall
incorporate the necessary channels.
TS/PS/S7/11
MECHANICAL WORKS
ii) Side branches of 100 mm and 150 mm nominal bore shall

be brought in to the main channel by the use of branch
bends to standard angles and dimensions. The bends
should be bedded in cement mortar, and connected to the
main channel so that the discharge from the branch drain
is in the direction of flow in the main channel.
iii) Benching shall rise vertically from the top edge of the
channel pipe to a height not less than that of the soffit of
the outlet, and shall slope upwards to meet the wall of the
manhole at a gradient of 1:6 to 1:10. It shall be floated to
a smooth hard surface with a coat of 1:2 cement mortar,
laid monolithic with the benching.
iv) The soffit of the main pipes entering and leaving a

manhole shall conform to a general level of inclination.
The inverts of branch drains entering a manhole shall be
above the horizontal diameter of the main channel.
d) Chamber Roof
By means of a concrete slab to be suitably reinforced to carry the

weight of the ground above and all probable superimposed and
impact loads. The slab shall not be less than 150 mm thick.
e) Brickwork
The standard of workmanship shall be in strict accordance with

the requirements of British Standards Code of Practice 121:101.
f) Rendering
Manholes or inspection chambers shall be rendered internally and

externally with cement mortar and finish trowel smooth.
19. Backdrop
Backdrops shall be provided as necessary due to differences in invert levels

between the drainlines and inspection chambers.
20. Rendering
Concrete or brick surface shall be rendered with 3 coats of cement and sand
mortar not more than 20 mm thick. The mix should consist of 1 part by volume of
cement and 3 parts by volume of sand.
TS/PS/S7/12
MECHANICAL WORKS
21. Bakau Piling
21.1 For external sanitary drain line and drain line under driveway the whole of
the pipework sections and manholes shall be supported by bakau piles at
300 mm centre.
21.2 Bakau piles shall be supplied and driven vertically with approved pile
driving equipment.
21.3 All bakau piles shall be of a minimum length of 6 m and minimum

diameter of 100 mm at mid-length of reasonable uniform diameter
throughout. No piles shall be used on these works until approved by the
21.4 Where necessary, piles shall be joined together to form lengths longer
than those naturally available. Such joints shall be designed to firmly
secure the two sections and to bring the pile ends into close contact for
driving.
21.5 The heads of all pile shall be protected with a simple steel or cast iron
ring during driving, and after completion of such driving, the heads shall
be properly squared and cut off to the required levels.
21.6 Misaligned piles or piles damaged during driving shall be duplicated as

directed at the Contractor's expense.
21.7 Unit rates shall be used to add or deduct final quantities of pile depth
upon completion.
22. Inspection of Sewers and Checking of Levels by the Sewerage Department
22.1 For the Sewerage Department's inspection and surveys of the sewers that
have been constructed the Contractor shall after completion of the works
provide the following facilities:
a) Aluminium ladders for fuse at manholes and in particular, ladders

of adequate lengths for deep manholes.
b) Barricades and warnings signs at all openings along roads during

the inspection and survey.
c) Safety helmets.
d) Air-blowers for proper ventilation of the sewerage to be inspected,

opening of manhole covers for ventilation and also for entry of the
Department's staff for inspection.
e) An adequate number of ranging poles for use of the surveyor.

TS/PS/S7/13
MECHANICAL WORKS
f) A levelling staff (the Department will provide the levelling

instrument).
g) Any assistance that may be requested by the Department's staff to

carry out the inspection in a safe manner.
The Contractor is to take note that his Tender price is deemed to

have allowed for these provisions as no extra claim whatsoever
will be entertained.
TS/PS/S7/14
MECHANICAL WORKS
SECTION 12 – WATER METER
1. General
1.1 This section of the specification covers the supply, delivery, installation,
testing, commissioning and maintenance of the water meter system and shall
generally consist of the complete water reticulation system for the building
inclusive of all pipework, fittings, final connections, maintenance and
commissioning etc.
1.2 The Water Service Installation shall be executed in accordance with the Public
Utilities Board (Water Supply) Regulations of the Public Utilities Act as well
as the SS 636 : Code of Practice for Water Services.
1.3 Only PUB approved fittings, appliances and pipes shall be used for the water
service installation.
1.4 On delivery of each batch of water meter, fittings and pipes to the Site, the
Contractor shall hand over to the Superintending Officer a copy of each
document showing its origin, proof of manufacturer and approval from PUB
for its use.
1.5 A licensed water service plumber shall be employed to carry out the
installation.
2. Cold and Hot Water Meter
The installation of water meter shall include all potable water, non-potable water and
Newater services etc that indicated in the tender drawing.
2.1 For DN 15 to 40:
a. For these sizes, meter shall be of Multijet velocity type, direct

magnetic transmission to register, hydrodynamic balance turbine,
hinges.
b. The water meter shall be made up of Bronze or Brass body, flanged,

high relief backflow indication arrow, epoxy painting.
c. Meters must be provided with plastic filter at the body inlet.
d. The flowmeter must handle horizontal and vertical applications.
e. No up and downstream lengths are required.
f. Maximum water temperature: 40°C
TS/PS/S12/1
MECHANICAL WORKS
g. Maximum working pressure: 10 bar
h. The meter casing shall be under vacuum and protected by a shock-

resistant cover.
i. The adjuster for calibrating the instrument shall be located inside the
meter that no accidental or unauthorised manipulation is possible.
j. The minimum ingress protection shall be IP66.
k. The flowmeter must be prepared for the installation of an integrated

M-Bus/pulse module.
l. The meter should be provided with calibration certificate.
m. Meter must be approved to ISO 4064 specification.
n. Manufacturer registered to ISO 9001 or ISO 9002 international quality

certificate.
o. The accuracy shall be Class B horizontal position. (+ 2 %).
2.2 For DN 65 to 250:
a. Meter should be of horizontal Woltman type, cast iron body.

Hydrodynamic balance horizontal axis propeller. Magnetic coupling to
register.
b. The meters shall be made of cast iron, body must be protected against
corrosion by epoxy powder coating.
c. Detection of leaks must be possible.
d. No up and downstream lengths are required.
e. The flowmeter must handle horizontal and vertical applications.
f. The flowmeter must have a dry register and overall IP68 ingress
protection.
g. The flowmeter must be prepared for the installation of an integrated

M-Bus/pulse module.
h. The meter should be provided with calibration certificate.
i. Meter must be approved to ISO 4064 specification.
TS/PS/S12/2
MECHANICAL WORKS
j. Manufacturer registered to ISO 9001 or ISO 9002 international quality
certificate.
k. Maximum working pressure: 20 bar
l. Maximum water temperature: 50o C
m. Register must be of dry type hermetically sealed IP68, orientable with

stop. Copper can/mineral envelopes should be preferred to plastic
envelopes to minimize risks of internal condensation.
n. The accuracy shall be Class B horizontal position. (+ 2 %)
3. Meter Communication
3.1 Integrated M-Bus/pulse module for tap water meters :
a. The M-Bus/pulse module shall be powered by M-Bus with 15VAC

(means no power supply cable is required). It shall also be a smart
meter and interface as Internet of Thing through connection in wireless
mesh network and mobile application.
b. Direct use of module after installation without any adjustment.
c. Counter value must be overwritable.
d. The module shall keep an internal backup battery with a minimum 10

years life-time.
e. The module shall be used for cold and hot water.
f. The module shall be equipped with reverse flow monitoring.
g. The ingress protection shall be IP68.
h. Ambient temperature from -10 o C to 60oC.
i. The module must have additional pulse output with freely selectable
pulse value from 1 to 1000 liters per pulse.
j. M-Bus interface shall be in accordance to EN 13757 (EN 1434-3).
k. The module shall be insensitive to magnets.
l. The module shall be able to be installed on site without breaking any

metrological seal.
TS/PS/S12/3
MECHANICAL WORKS
m. The module shall be absolutely trustable in the long term ( the water
meter register and the remote indicator must always indicate the same
amount of forward volume, hence backflow must not be computing as
forward volume.)
n. The module shall have alarm tampering detection and low battery.
o. The meter should be provided with calibration certificate.
p. All meter shall provide necessary contact and communication to BAS

system. Junction box for interfacing to BAS shall be provided by the
plumbing contractor.
q. The meter shall be able to interface with third party software through
mobile application and mesh wireless network application for
monitoring and alerting.
TS/PS/S12/4
MECHANICAL WORKS
1. General
1.1 This section covers the electrical equipment and services necessary for

this Contract.
b) Local Control Boards (LCBs) complete with remote push

buttons, selector switches, indicator lights, relays, MCCBs etc.

works.

otherwise stated.

f) The Pumps Local Control Boards shall comply with the

requirements of CP 636 and relevant local authorities'
requirements.
g) All cable colour code shall comply with the latest EMA
requirement.
h) All motors and pumps selected shall be of high efficiency and

energy efficient.
following:
a) Singapore Standard: SS 638

Wiring of Electrical Equipment of Building (Latest Revision)
b) Singapore Standard: CP 551

Code of Practice on Earthing (Latest Revision)


TS/PS/S13/1
MECHANICAL WORKS

Regulations

Licensed Electrical Worker/Engineer (LEW/LEE) and the power
3. Power Supply
3.2 Generally, cabling shall be PVC insulated cables run in galvanised

steel electrical conduits or trunking.
motors.
4. Drawings

full list of proposed materials, equipment, meters and accessories to be
used, and the method of supporting equipment and busbars.
TS/PS/S13/2
MECHANICAL WORKS
5. Standards

copper - B.S. 158, 159, 1433 and 1977.
IEC 60947

i) Fuses - B.S. 88 / IEC 60269


TS/PS/S13/3
MECHANICAL WORKS

and accessories
installations






and components


TS/PS/S13/4
MECHANICAL WORKS

, Singapore.
(e) The latest edition of SS551 - Code of Practice on earthing

, Singapore
(e) The latest edition of CP 551 - Code of Practice on earthing
(f) Singapore Standard 636 - Code of Practice for Water Service
TS/PS/S13/5
MECHANICAL WORKS
8.1 General
latest edition of Singapore Standard SS 638 and Singapore
Standard C.P. 551.

clamps.





all trunkings, pipes, ducts, etc. Earth links of minimum size of
6 mm², in the form of flexible cables, shall be used to ensure
continuity.

lettering "SAFETY ELECTRICAL EARTH DO NOT
REMOVE" stamped onto an aluminium plate.
TS/PS/S13/6
MECHANICAL WORKS

Singapore Standard SS 638. But, the minimum size of 6 mm
green/yellow PVC insulated copper cable shall be used.
therein. All external panel shall be of IP65.

maintenance.

components together with associated starter contactor etc. mounted on
the panel inside the cubicle. Associated components shall be grouped.
Flush mounted push button and 24 volts LED indicating light shall be
fitted on the front fascia of the cubicle.

connection.


Automation System.
9.7 All LCBs shall be provided with voltage free contacts and all necessary
the BAS.
TS/PS/S13/7
MECHANICAL WORKS
Standard.
10.4 The cabinet shall be adequately ventilated and be dust, drip and vermin
enclosure shall be IP 55 and IP65 in accordance with IEC Publication
144.
the S.O..

approval.
plated and chromed.
10.10 All cubicles and panels shall have hinged doors (concealed hinge type).
Rubber gaskets shall be provided between all doors, covers and
cubicles.
TS/PS/S13/8
MECHANICAL WORKS
"off" device.


metering devices.



e) All interlocking relays for pumps change over control.
manufacture.
TS/PS/S13/9
MECHANICAL WORKS
guaranteed lift of 10,000 hours continuous operation. Indicating light
shall be of LED 24V type and be easily replaced without off the
supply.

approval.
10.28 All terminal blocks shall be of adequate rating and shall be of approved
make. Sufficient terminals shall be made available for easy
TS/PS/S13/10
MECHANICAL WORKS

10.32 ELR shall be provided in all control/starter panels below 100 Amps
and earth leakage relay (with time delay) and overcurrent relay shall be
provided in panel/board 100 Amps and above. Earth fault protection of
IDMTL type (earth leakage) and DTL type (overcurrent) shall be
provided for multiple equipment panel/board.
earth fault relays shall be incorporated into the motor starters. The fault
level setting of these earth fault relays shall be field adjustable.

mm) dial with selector switches for the indication of current
and voltage between phases, and between each phase and
neutral for the mains incoming power supply, together with
indicating pilot lights.

c) One (1) Power meter measuring of line voltage, phase current

consumption.
d) One (1) set start/stop push buttons colour coded for each motor
on each starter panel.
e) One (1) set pilot lights for the indication of "RUN-STOP-

TRIP" condition of each motor on each starter panel.
f) One (1) 20 ampere spare MCCB circuit breaker and (1) 13A
TS/PS/S13/11
MECHANICAL WORKS
switch socket outlet.
g) All necessary ELR and MCBs complete with outgoing cabling

for auxiliary and associated equipment power supplies.
h) Alarm bell for water tank high and low level.
10.35 The LCB shall be provide the following for BAS/IBMS:
a) "LOCAL/OFF/REMOTE" selector switch status
b) "ON/OFF/TRIP" of motors.
c) Ampere, voltage (three phase and single phase), Kwh, Power

factor and Frequency of panel.
d) Tanks Hi-Lo level indication
e) Start/Stop of motors

voltage grade, PVC insulated pvc sheathed cables to BS 6004 or SS
358. They shall be installed on galvanised cable tray, or in galvanised
steel conduit. Where the cables on trays are installed less than 1.2m
All cabling for water services equipments shall be of Fire Resistant
cables.
with BICC gland.
drawings be adequately sized to cater for the normal current rating and
starting current of the equipment without undue overheating and stress.

cable sockets.
TS/PS/S13/12
MECHANICAL WORKS
60331 and BS 4066.
11.8 All underground cables shall be PVC/SWA/PVC cables and terminated

with BICC gland.
50 x 50 mm 1.219 mm (18 SWG)
50 x 75 mm 1.219 mm (18 SWG)
50 x 100 mm 1.219 mm (18 SWG)
50 x 125 mm 1.422 mm (17 SWG)
50 x 150 mm 1.422 mm (17 SWG)
50 mm 1.219 mm (18 SWG)
100 mm 1.219 mm (18 SWG)
150 mm 1.219 mm (18 SWG)
200 mm 1.219 mm (18 SWG)
250 mm 1.219 mm (18 SWG)
300 mm 1.219 mm (18 SWG)
TS/PS/S13/13
MECHANICAL WORKS
11.13 All metal conduits shall be galvanised steel class 4 manufactured and
tested in accordance with SS 100:1974 comply to BS 4568. Minimum
possible, with runs truly horizontal or vertical or parallel to walls
where conduits run in floors. Conduits shall be securely fixed with
saddles and round head screws. Powered type of fittings will not be
permitted. From outlet to outlet there shall be not more than four (4)
normal bends or their equivalent. Inspection type conduit accessories
shall be used throughout. Conduits shall be fixed in position before
cables are drawn into them. The entire length of all cables shall be
enclosed in conduit. Junction boxes shall be used at bends and "t"



11.20 All trunking exposed to weather shall be of hot-dip galvanized .
floor, approved fire stop putty or approved equal material shall be used
to seal the cavity inside of the trunking and approved fire stop
compound or approved equal material to seal the air-gaps between wall
TS/PS/S13/14
MECHANICAL WORKS
or floor and trunking.

local start/stop control panel which shall be mounted in close
proximity to the equipment for servicing purposes and marked
accordingly. Exact location of the local control panel shall be decided
on site if not indicated.
12.2 All wiring to these equipment shall be PVC/PVC insulated and

sheathed cables run in conduit/trunking.
EMA.
operation in 400 V/3 Phase/50 Hz supply. Water pumps shall be run
with variable speed drive and standby soft starter.



with speed not more than 1500 rpm unless otherwise approved.


highest standard possible power factor (min. 0.85) and

temperature rise.

brackets.
TS/PS/S13/15
MECHANICAL WORKS


end.Motor driving equipment giving rise to end thrust shall be
thrust.

hours.
h) Motors shall be tested in accordance with the requirements of

BS 2613: 1970 and BS 4999:1972.
i) Where they are installed outdoor or exposed to the weather,

wires shall be terminated with approved cable lugs, and separate cable
lugs shall be used for each individual wire.
4 class Q to B.S. 88:1952.
14.4 All wiring shall be arranged in a regular manner with bends set at 90C
shall be installed in the uprights and/or backstays, insulating bushes
being used where necessary. They shall be formed in a neat and
systematic manner.
TS/PS/S13/16
MECHANICAL WORKS
made.

conduit/trunking.
15.1 General

Standard BS 3871 part 2 or NEMA Standard AB1 and U/L
listed.
b) All MCCB shall have minimum interrupting capacities of

R.M.S. symmetrical amperes at 400 Volts A.C. for 3 sec.

of the same make.

operating handles.

15.2 Operation

mechanically trip free from the handle so that the contacts cannot be
held-closed against short circuits and abnormal currents. Tripping due
to overload or short circuit shall be clearly indicated by the handle
automatically assuming a position midway between the manual "ON"
and "OFF" positions. All latch surfaces shall be as constructed that they
open, closed and trip simultaneously.
TS/PS/S13/17
MECHANICAL WORKS
15.3 Construction

current between 25C and 50C with tripping characteristics
range.

interchangeable trip breaker shall have their cover sealed;




'ON' and 'OFF'. To reset the trip mechanism, the handle shall be

the same operation as specified above. They shall meet the IEC
opened simultaneously under fault conditions. The breakers
less than  cycle to reduce and limit peak let-through current
TS/PS/S13/18
MECHANICAL WORKS
code:
Colour Function
White 5A fuse
Blue 15A fuse
Yellow 20 fuse
Red link
Contractor.

show the phases and to this end either coloured plastic discs screwed to
fixed components or identification by means of colour plastic sleeving
shall be employed. Plastic tape will not be permitted.
17. Labels

labels (Block in white lettering for normal supply, Red in white

79.
TS/PS/S13/19
MECHANICAL WORKS

protection as per SS 638.


tropicalised.
19.4 Voltmeters shall incorporate selector switches to enable phase to phase

TS/PS/S13/20
MECHANICAL WORKS
provided.


Indicating lamps shall be the 24 volts LED type. The lamp shall be easily
removed or replaced from the front of the panel without using extractors and
shall be adequately ventilated.
TS/PS/S13/21
MECHANICAL WORKS
24.1 General

230/400 Volt A.C.

type "3" curve.

characteristic.


indicator.
24.2 Operation


TS/PS/S13/22
MECHANICAL WORKS
24.3 Construction
bi-metal overcurrent element with inverse time delay characteristic and
a factory calibrated instantaneous magnetic tripping device for short
circuit condition. Ambient temperature compensation shall be
accomplished by a secondary bi-metal that shall allow the circuit
breaker to carry rated current between 25C to 50C with tripping
characteristics that are the same throughout this temperature range, and
that shall not cause nuisance tripping.



straight in wiring.


25. Testing
25.3 All materials and equipment supplied or erected under this Contract
Contractor without cost to the Employer and the tests shall be repeated.
TS/PS/S13/23
MECHANICAL WORKS
25.4 All tests shall be conducted in the presence of and to the satisfaction of
included in the Contract price.
required.


neutral conductor.


before and after fitting of lamps. The standard of acceptance for
Edition of the IEE Regulations for the Electrical Equipment of
the Building.
TS/PS/S13/24
MECHANICAL WORKS

completed installation to ensure that the impedance of the earth
fault loop is such as to permit compliance with the
Contractor shall certify in writing to the S.O. that his electrical installation is
in full compliance with the Electricity Act Regulations and that it is safe for
turn-on. The certificate shall be signed by a EMA licensed electrical worker,
TS/PS/S13/25
MECHANICAL WORKS
1. General


of his workmen.
2. Metal Surface
TS/PS/S16/1
MECHANICAL WORKS
c) All duct work
f) Suppliers items
g) Galvanised steel
employed.
applied.

TS/PS/S16/2
MECHANICAL WORKS


1 coat - undercoat

finishing coat.
be epoxy paints.


chromate paint.
paint.
TS/PS/S16/3
MECHANICAL WORKS


75 mm.

PIPE
other other
150mm 150mm 150mm
approved approved
A B C
colour colour
Pipe A B C

green and white

and Vent

TS/PS/S16/4
MECHANICAL WORKS
6. Colour Scheme
Gas pipe Yellow

S.O..


Green (Supply line)

Blue (supply line)
BAS services White
Duct work Beige
over.
TS/PS/S16/5
MECHANICAL WORKS
7. Directional Flow
300mm 150mm
50mm

8. Galvanising

commences.
TS/PS/S16/6
MECHANICAL WORKS
SECTION 17 – BUILDING MANAGEMENT SYSTEM PROVISIONS
1. General

Management System (BMS).
1.2 It is intended for the various equipment and systems to be networked to

a computerised BMS which would be user-friendly.
2. Scope of Work by the Various Contractors
2.1 Main Contractor
The Main Contractor shall be responsible for co-ordinating all services

that are required to be interfaced, controlled or monitored by the BMS.
2.2 ACMV Sub-Contractor
The ACMV Sub-Contractor shall be responsible to supply, deliver,

install, test, commission, service and maintain a fully operative and
efficient BMS. He shall liaise and co-ordinate with the Main
Contractor and other Sub-Contractors to ensure that the system
requirements for interfacing, controlling or monitoring of all services
as indicated in the BMS Points Schedule are achieved.
The ACMV Sub-Contractor shall supply, deliver, install, test

commission, service and maintain all the sensors and instrumentations
required to achieve the interfacing, controlling or monitoring as
specified. He shall liaise and work closely with the other Sub-
Contractors to ensure that the sensors and instrumentations supplied by
him are properly installed in the various systems.
The ACMV Sub-Contractor shall supply, deliver, install, test,

commission, service and maintain the screened signal cables in
conduits/trunkings that are required to interface, control or monitor the
various systems. He shall be responsible to connect these cables into
the sensors and instrumentations supplied by him. For control panels
of the various systems, the ACMV Sub-Contractor shall liaise and
work closely with the other Sub-Contractors to ensure that the relays
and contacts provided by them are of the correct type and suitable for
use in the BMS. Final connections of these cables into the interfacing
panels containing terminals strips connecting to the relays and contacts
shall be carried out by the ACMV Contractor.
TS/PS/S17/1
MECHANICAL WORKS
All digital output shall be provided by the ACMV Sub-Contractor and

they shall be voltage-free.
2.3 Plumbing and Sanitary Contractor (Domestic)
The Plumbing and Sanitary Contractor shall liaise and work closely
The Plumbing and Sanitary Contractor shall supply, deliver, install,

Schedules



KWH.

2.5 The Plumbing and Sanitary Contractor shall provide installation points
to suit the type of sensors and instrumentations that would be supplied
and installed by the ACMV Sub-Contractor.
TS/PS/S17/2
MECHANICAL WORKS
2.6 Fire Protection Services Contractor (Domestic)
The Fire Protection Services Contractor shall liaise and work closely
The Fire Protection Services Contractor shall supply, deliver, install,

Schedules



KWH.

2.8 The Fire Protection Services Contractor shall provide installation

supplied and installed by the ACMV Sub-Contractor.
TS/PS/S17/3
MECHANICAL WORKS
3. BMS Points Schedule

requirements. The Contractor shall allow cost in his Tender for any

3.3 In general, the following are to be provided for :
a) Domestic Water Pumps/Irrigation Pumps/Water Pumps/Sump

Pumps/Drainage Pumps/Ejector Pumps
i) ON/OFF Control
ii) Programmed ON/OFF Control
iii) ON/OFF Status
iv) Electrical TRIP ALARM
v) Run-Time Totalization
vi) Local/Remote Mode
b) Water Tanks

c) PH Sensors
i) ON/OFF Status
ii) PH level
d) Digital Water Meters
i) ON/OFF Status
ii) Water Consumption
e) Gas Detectors
i) Gas Detectors Address and Status

ii) Gas Detectors Fault Alarm
iii) Gas Detectors HIGH ALARM
iv) Bells, Horns and Sirens Control and Reset
TS/PS/S17/4
MECHANICAL WORKS
f) Main Switchboard

ii) 3-phase LV Voltage Indication
iii) Kilo-watt-hour Indication
iv) Trip Alarm
v) ON/OFF STATUS
g) Starter Panels

ii) Kilo-watt-hour Indication
iii) Power Meter
h) Solenoid Valves
i) ON/OFF Control
ii) TRIP ALARM
iii) ON/OFF Status
i) Fire Alarm Panels
i) Fire Point Address and Status

ii) Fire Point Fault Alarm
iii) Fire Point Fire Alarm
iv) Smoke Detector Maintenance Alarm
v) Panel Tampered Alarm
vi) Bells, Horns and Sirens Control and Reset
vii) Fireman's Intercom Control
viii) Public Address Speakers Zone Control
ix) Public Address Speakers Zone Fault Alarm
j) Sprinkler/Wet Riser Pumps
i) ON/OFF Status
k) Sprinkler/Wet Riser/Suction Water Tanks

TS/PS/S17/5
MECHANICAL WORKS
l) Sprinkler/Wet Riser Transfer Pumps
i) ON/OFF Status
ii) TRIP ALARM
iv) Local/Remote Mode
m) Hosereel Pumps
i) ON/OFF Status
n) Hosereel Water Tanks

o) FM 200/ VESDA
i) ON/OFF Status
ii) Activate building fire ALARM
iii) Electrical TRIP ALARM
iv) General Fault ALARM
v) FM200 1st STAGE ALARM
vi) FM200 2ND STAGE ALARM/ GAS Discharge
ALARM
vii) VESDA 1ST STAGE ALARM
viii) VESDA 2ND STAGE ALARM
p) Pre-Action Valve
i) ON/OFF Status
iii) Smoke Detector ALARM
q) Sprinkler Water Supply Stop Valve/ Mains Stop Valve/

Subsidiary Stop Valves
i) ON/OFF Status
ii) TRIP ALARM
3.4 The Contractors shall read the Specifications and Drawings

TS/PS/S17/6
MECHANICAL WORKS
SECTION 18 - SERVICE AND MAINTENANCE
1. General
1.1 This section covers the work involved in the regular maintenance
and/or breakdown service of the systems and equipment, etc., installed
as follows:-
a) Sanitary/Plumbing
b) Gas
1.2 The work shall be carried out in accordance with the schedule stated in
this section or other section of the specification during the defects and
liability period.
2. Scope
2.1 The 12 months warranty period shall commence after the successful
handover of the entire installation to the Employer.
2.2 It is the responsibility of the Contractor to maintain the systems in first

2.3 During the warranty period the Contractor shall carry out twelve
months free servicing (unless other stated) to the systems and
equipment including cleaning etc at approximately monthly intervals in
accordance with the maintenance responsibilities outlined hereinafter
or as indicated within other sections of this specification. Allowance
shall be made in the Tender price for any cost incurred by complying
with this requirement.
2.4 The Contractor shall replace all faulty or damaged parts with new ones
during the warranty period at no expense to the Employer. This clause
shall override any standard warranty conditions of the Contractor or his
supplier of equipment. Allowance shall be made here for any cost
incurred by complying with this requirement.
TS/PS/S18/1
MECHANICAL WORKS
2.5 The Contractor shall prepare a detailed inspection and service report
form showing functions to be carried out and the intervals between
each functions to enable records of servicing to be maintained. The
functions shall include all the maintenance responsibilities outlined
hereinafter for each specific protection devices plus any other special
maintenance requirements recommended by the manufacturers. The
inspection and service report duly signed by the Employer shall be
submitted to the S.O. within the first week of every month.
2.6 The Contractor shall also inform the Employer within the last week of
every month, the date and time scheduled for the maintenance and
servicing of the system in the next month.
2.7 Routine maintenance and servicing to the system is to be carried out

during normal working hours unless it is otherwise specified elsewhere
2.8 During the warranty period, the Contractor shall attend to any
complaint promptly at no expense to the Employer.
2.9 As the systems are operating on 24 hour basis, the Contractor shall
ensure that his workshop can provide 24 hour service.
2.10 After the attendance of complaint and completion of the repair work, a
copy of the report or service chit duly signed by the Employer shall be
forwarded to the S.O. for information and record.
2.11 The Contractor shall be responsible for the conduct and behaviour of
his workmen. Upon arrival at the premises for servicing or repair
works, the workmen are required to inform the officer-in-charge in the
premises the purpose of their visit. The Contractor shall ensure that
minimal inconvenience is caused to the Employer.
2.12 Final payment of retention monies to the Contractor will be certified

only after evidence of regular and satisfactory maintenance during the
warranty period and had been shown.
2.13 The Contractor shall keep adequate spare parts for the systems under
2.14 The Contractor shall be responsible for all damages caused to the
installation or the Employer’s property through the act of negligence of
their workmen except where it can be proven that it is no fault of
theirs.
2.15 All tests, observations, readings and rectification works shall be fully
recorded in a log book provided in the Maintenance Office and signed
and acknowledged by the Employer.
TS/PS/S18/2
MECHANICAL WORKS
3.1 All work described herein shall be perform by workmen skilled in the
service, maintenance and repair of and the installation and shall be
executed in accordance with the best commercial practice.
3.2 All materials to be supplied in connection with works shall be new and
unused and shall generally be of the best quality as regards
manufacture and performance. Replacement of parts and accessories
shall be of the original manufacture, make and model. Any deviation
shall be approved by the S.O..
4. Schedule of Servicing And Maintenance
Servicing and maintenance of the systems shall be carried out as stated below
(but not limited to) on a periodic basis as specified. All works not covered by
the following list but recommended and required by the manufacturers shall
also be performed.
4.1 Schedule of Maintenance
a) Control System
The control system shall be maintained by suitable and qualified maintenance

team. The following shall be performed and carried out once every 3 months
unless otherwise stated. The others which are recommended by manufacturer
and are not stated herewith shall be performed and carried out as well.
b) Electrical Systems
Inspect all electrical equipment and test operation of control and all
alarm elements monthly.
i) Check all motor contacts and clean or replace as necessary.
ii) Check all protective devices such as one single phasing

protection and adjust or replace as necessary.
iii) Check all alarm systems and adjust/replace as necessary.
iv) Check condition of battery and battery charger unit in good

operational order.
v) Check all indicator and warning lights for proper functioning by

simulation of fault.
TS/PS/S18/3
MECHANICAL WORKS
vi) Check and visually inspect condition of all electrical

components in the control panel, including resistors, capacitors
cable and wire connections. Check proper functioning of
supervisory circuits including fault display indication for fault
in the external circuit.
vii) Check operation and effectiveness of power supply failure

facility by disconnecting the main supply from the battery
charger. Check the effectiveness and sufficiency of the battery
stand-by supply to perform its intended function.
4.2 Sanitary/Plumbing
(To be performed once in 3 months)
a) Check and service all Cold water supply pipeworks and

equipment.
b) Check and service all sanitary and waste pipeworks and

equipment.
4.3 Town Gas System
a) Regular maintenance and servicing during the defects liability

period shall be carried out on the following items :
i) town gas mains, risers, piping and valves (monthly)
ii) solenoid valves and associated controls (monthly)
iii) gas detectors and associated controls including functional

tests of randomly selected detectors (monthly)
iv) recalibration of gas detectors (half yearly)
b) Regular maintenance of servicing shall include checking,

servicing and rectifying of any defects, painting works and any
other procedures as recommended by the manufacturers of the
equipment supplied.
5. "Check" shall include for all visual inspection, recording of all necessary site
measurement and fixed instruments readings, testing to ensure and confirm
that the whole system is in an efficient and serviceable condition and
performance.
TS/PS/S18/4
MECHANICAL WORKS
6. "Service" shall include for all adjustments, re-calibration, greading, cleaning,

changing of lubricant or coolant, tightening of all hold down bolts and
mountings, draining and purging of air or water, sequence testing and
verification of alarm and fail-safe safety device and to ensure that the system is
maintained in an efficient and serviceable condition and performance.
7. "Rectify" shall include for dismantling, replacement, re-installation,

adjustment, testing, touching up all paintwork, etc. to ensure that the system is
put back into efficient and serviceable condition and performance.
8. The service provided in this Contract shall include also for response to 24 hour
emergency breakdown calls. The breakdown of equipment and installation
shall be deemed to have occurred when such equipment or installation will not
perform the designed function.
9. The service provided in this Contract shall include for attendance and
provision of all labour, equipment and instruments as required during normal
testing of the Piped Services Installation as called for by the Authorities.
10. All tests, observations, readings, rectification works shall be fully recorded. A
log book shall be provided in the Building Maintenance Office and all reports
and recordings shall be entered into the book and to be signed and
acknowledged by the Building Maintenance Engineer.
11. All consumable materials required, for the carrying out the works, as listed
below shall be included in the cost quoted:
11.1 All coolant, oil, grease and lubricant
11.2 All fuses and indication lamps
11.3 All carbon brushes in motors
11.4 All electrical contact points
11.5 All solvents, detergent and cleaning fluids for equipment
11.6 All paints and anti-corrosion primer required for touching up

equipment, pipework, etc.
11.7 All cotton waste and rags.
12. Prior to the end of the free maintenance and warranty period, during the last
free servicing, all filters shall be replaced.
TS/PS/S18/5
MECHANICAL WORKS
13. Service And Maintenance Contract
13.1 The Contractor shall state clearly in his Tender, the maintenance and
servicing charge per annum for a period of three (3) years after the
warranty and free maintenance period. This price shall stay firm for at
least 15 calendar months after the aforesaid period and shall be based
on the maintenance responsibilities specified for the warranty period
except the items that are otherwise stated. In addition, it shall cover all
trips by the Contractor to attend to any complaint calls in between
routine servicings.
13.2 The Employer does not bind itself to award the Maintenance and
Servicing Contract after the warranty period to the successful Tenderer.
13.3 After the warranty period and with the sufficient number of free
maintenance servicing provided by the Contractor, a maintenance
agreement may be signed between the Employer and the Contractor
based on the accepted servicing charge at the time of Tender.
13.4 Any work outside the scope of this maintenance agreement and
materials and spare parts supplied shall be additionally charged. The
Contractor shall submit a report together with an itemised quotation for
the consideration and approval of the University at the earliest instance.
13.5 Upon completion of routine servicing under the maintenance

agreement and any repair works as stated in the accepted quotations,
the Contractor shall submit an invoice for payment.
13.6 Either party of the Maintenance Agreement is required to give 30 days

notice for the termination of the same.
13.7 The Contractor shall keep adequate spare parts for the systems under
13.8 The Contractor shall be responsible for all damages caused to the
installation or the Employer's property through the act of negligence of
their workmen except where it can be proven that it is at no fault of
theirs.
TS/PS/S18/6
MECHANICAL WORKS
13.9 Service and Maintenance Contract
After the expiry of the fifteen (15) months Maintenance and Warranty
Period of the installation, we offer our service and maintenance for a
period of three (3) years in accordance with the section on "Service and
Maintenance" in the Specification for the sum per annum as stated
below.
System Cost Per

Annum (S$)
1st 2nd 3rd 4th 5th

Yr. Yr. Yr. Yr. Yr.
a) Air-Conditioning &
Mechanical Ventilation
System
b) Automatic Fire Alram

System
c) Automatic Fire Sprinkler

System
d) Other Systems
............................................................................................................
..........................................................................…...............................
............................................................................................................
........................…………………. ...…………………….................
of CONTRACTOR
..................………………........... ..……………………..................
of WITNESS
TS/PS/S18/7
MECHANICAL WORKS
1. General

warranty for fire resistant system for piped services as specified in
the drawing

Scheme (PLS).

standard:
a) BS 476: Part 20 1987 Fire tests on building materials and

b) BS 476: Part 24 1987 Fire tests on building materials and

ventilation ducts



f) EN 13501-1 EN 13501-1+A1 Fire classification of



TS/PS/S19/1
MECHANICAL WORKS

Construction.




offered.


2. Materials
2.1. System

TS/PS/S19/2
MECHANICAL WORKS



exceed 1.5m2.





rated sealant.

TS/PS/S19/3
MECHANICAL WORKS

strength.

Code.

as minimum:
Alkalinity pH 12
310: 1993) 4.94N/mm2 (transverse)
(40oC) C518:1991)
Nominal moisture
6%
movement at EMC
(Clause 5.4, 5.4.1 & 5.4.2)

TS/PS/S19/4
MECHANICAL WORKS

instructions.




TS/PS/S19/5
MECHANICAL WORKS
3. Installation




TS/PS/S19/6
HOT WATER PUMPS
16-BAS Point Sch PS 2

WATER SUCTION TANKS
WATER STORAGE TANKS
WATER BOOSTER PUMPS
WATER TRANSFER PUMPS
WATER SUB-METER (CAFÉ)
HOT WATER STORAGE TANK

HOT WATER TRANSFER TANK
PLUMBING & SANITARY SYSTEM
WATER SUB-METER (EXPANSION TANK)

SYSTEM APPARATUS OR
1
1
1
1
1
2
2
QUANTITY
START/STOP COMMAND
D/O
ON/OFF COMMAND
DDC CONTROL
A/O
X
X
X
ON/OFF STATUS
X
X
X
TRIP/FAULT
X FILTER ALARM
X
X
FLOW
X
X
X
HIGH LEVEL ALARM

DIGITAL INPUT
X
X
X
LOW LEVEL ALARM

X
X
X
TEMPERATURE
RELATIVE HUMIDITY
PRESSURE
X
X
FLOW
POWER FACTOR
X
X
X
CURRENT
X
X
X
VOLTAGE
X
X
X
KILOWATT
X
X
X
KILOWATT-HOUR
ANALOG INDICATION
X
X
X
X
WATER CONSUMPTION
BTU-HEAT LOAD
X

BAS POINT SCHEDULE FOR PLUMBING & SANITARY SERVICES

X
X
X
X
X
X
TREND LOGGING
X
X
X
X
X
X
ENERGY TOTALISATION
TIME PROGRAM
X
X
X

X
X
X
DUTY CYCLING
ANALOG LIMIT ALARM
X
X
X
X
X
X

SOFTWARE PROGRAM
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
GRAPHICS
1 OF 1
Contents Page
Medical Gas Schedule of Technical Data STD/Gas/1 - 11
Particular Specification for Medical Gas Works

Section 1 : Particular Specification TS/Gas/S1/1 - 26
Section 4 : Automatic Changeover Manifold TS/Gas/S4/1 – 4
Section 5 : Outlet and Terminal Units TS/Gas/S5/1 - 3
Section 6 : Lab Gas Alarm Panel TS/Gas/S6/1 - 8
Section 7 : PipeWork Installation (O2, V, CA, AGSS) TS/Gas/S7/1 - 8
Section 8 : PipeWork Installation (CO2, N2, MG, AR , HE) TS/Gas/S8/1 - 4
Section 9 : Safety Gas Leak Detection Monitoring & Shut Off TS/Gas/S9/1 - 4
Section 10 : Painting & Identification TS/Gas/S10/1 - 4
Section 11 : Electrical TS/Gas/S11/1 - 26
Section 12 : Vibration isolation and Noise Control TS/Gas/S12/1 - 11
Section 13 : Interface for BAS TS/Gas/S13/1 - 3
Section 14 : Testing & Commissioning for Piped Services TS/Gas/S14/1 - 9
Section 15 : Fire Resistant System TS/M/S52/1 - 6
Schedule 1 BAS Point Schedule for Medical Gas 1
1A
SCHEDULE OF TECHNICAL DATA FOR SPECIALIST GAS SYSTEM
Notes :
1.1 Tenderers shall complete the following Schedule and submit any supplementary
information which may be considered necessary to convey a complete description of
1.2 Tenderers are reminded that notwithstanding whatever is submitted in this Schedule,
all equipment and installation must comply with the requirements of the specification.
1.3 Unless written confirmation and approval is obtained from the Superintending Officer
to that effect, the requirements of the specification shall supersede all other
qualifications herein.
1.4 Tenderers are requested not to repeat the details called for in any separate
1.5 Failure to complete filling in the Schedule may render the Tenderer liable to
STD/Gas/1
1. Gas Detection System
a) Gas regulator
Make ____________________________
Materials ____________________________
Standard/Compliance ____________________________
b) Outlets
Make ____________________________
Materials ____________________________
c) Gas manifold
Make ____________________________
Materials ____________________________
d) Detector
Make ____________________________
Materials ____________________________
e) Gas Alarm Panel
Make ____________________________
Materials ____________________________
f) Siren
Make ____________________________
Materials ____________________________
STD/Gas/2
g) Strobe Light
Make ____________________________
Materials ____________________________
h) Signage
Make ____________________________
Materials ____________________________
i) 316 Stainless Steel Pipe
Manufacturer / Supplier ____________________________
Standard/Class ____________________________
j) Degreased Copper Pipe
Make ____________________________
Standard/Class ____________________________
STD/Gas/3
2. Vaccum System
a) Pressure Gauge (Vaccum)
Make ____________________________
Standard/Class ____________________________
Model ____________________________
Size ____________________________
Material ____________________________
b) Pressure Gauge (Pressure)
Make ____________________________
Standard/Class ____________________________
Model ____________________________
Size ____________________________
Material ____________________________
c) Drainage Trap
Make ____________________________
Material ____________________________
Type/Model No. ____________________________
d) Separator Bacterial Filter
Make ____________________________
Material ____________________________
Type/Model No. ____________________________
e) Vacuum/Flow Regulating Valve
Make ____________________________
Model ____________________________
Operating pressure range (Bars) ____________________________
STD/Gas/4
Working pressure (Bars) ____________________________
Standard Compliance ____________________________
3. AGSS Exhaust Unit
Brand ____________________________
Manufacturer ____________________________
Country of Origin ____________________________
Standard ____________________________
Model ____________________________
Free air delivery (lit/min) ____________________________
Minimum working pressure (Bars) ____________________________
Maximum working pressure (Bars) ____________________________
Air cooled/water cooled ____________________________
No of stages ____________________________
Lubricant ____________________________
Noise Level (dBA) ____________________________
Electrical Characteristics (Volt/Phase/Hz)____________________________
(KW) ____________________________
(Amperes) ____________________________
Associated Accessories ____________________________
Operation Method ____________________________
4. Medical Air Compressed Air System
a) Filter
Brand ____________________________
Manufacturer ____________________________
Model ____________________________
Efficiency (%) ____________________________
Standard tested ____________________________
Material ____________________________
STD/Gas/5
5. Medical Oxygen Terminal Unit
Brand ____________________________
Manufacturer ____________________________
Standard ____________________________
Model ____________________________
Material ____________________________
Safe working pressure (Bars) ____________________________
Test pressure (Bars) ____________________________
Wall/Recessed type ____________________________
Dimensions (mm) ____________________________
6. Medical Vacuum Terminal Unit
Brand ____________________________
Manufacturer ____________________________
Standard ____________________________
Model ____________________________
Material ____________________________
Dimensions (mm) ____________________________
7. Medical Compressor Air Terminal Unit
STD/Gas/6
Brand ____________________________
Manufacturer ____________________________
Standard ____________________________
Model ____________________________
Material ____________________________
Dimensions (mm) ____________________________
8. Pressure Relief Valve
Brand ____________________________
Manufacturer ____________________________
Standard ____________________________
Model ____________________________
Material ____________________________
9. Gas Regulator
Brand ____________________________
Manufacturer ____________________________
Standard ____________________________
Model ____________________________
Set pressure (Bars) ____________________________
Material ____________________________
10. Isolation Valve
Brand ____________________________
STD/Gas/7
Manufacturer ____________________________
Standard ____________________________
Model ____________________________
Safe pressure (Bars) ____________________________
Material ____________________________
11. Non-return Valve
Brand ____________________________
Manufacturer ____________________________
Standard ____________________________
Model ____________________________
Material ____________________________
12. Pressure Reducing Valve
Brand ____________________________
Manufacturer ____________________________
Standard ____________________________
Model ____________________________
Material ____________________________
13. Alarm Panels
Brand ____________________________
Manufacturer ____________________________
STD/Gas/8
Standard ____________________________
Model ____________________________
Material ____________________________
Dimension (mm) ____________________________
14. Valve Boxes
Brand ____________________________
Manufacturer ____________________________
Standard ____________________________
Model ____________________________
Material ____________________________
Dimension (mm) ____________________________
15. Manifold System
a) CO2 Manifold
Brand ____________________________
Manufacturer ____________________________
Standard ____________________________
Automatic change over ____________YES/NO_________
Noise Level (dBA) ____________________________
(KW) ____________________________
(Amperes) ____________________________
Associated Accessories _____________________________
Operation Method _____________________________
STD/Gas/9
b) Ar Manifold
Brand ____________________________
Manufacturer ____________________________
Standard ____________________________
Noise Level (dBA) ____________________________
(KW) ____________________________
(Amperes) ____________________________
c) N2 Manifold
Brand ____________________________
Manufacturer ____________________________
Standard ____________________________
Noise Level (dBA) ____________________________
(KW) ____________________________
(Amperes) ____________________________
STD/Gas/10
STD/Gas/11
MECHANICAL WORKS
SECTION 1 – GENERAL
1. Scope of Works
1.1 The Contract comprises the design, supply, installation, testing,

commissioning and maintenance of the following laboratory gaseous
services as shown on, described or inferred from the Drawings and
Specifications. The maintenance shall be for a period of twelve (12)
months from the Date of Substantial Completion the Contract.
1.2 The scope of works for laboratory gaseous services shall include but
not limited to the following:
a) Piped Laboratory Gases System

b) Piped Laboratory Compressed Air System
c) Piped Vacuum System
d) Safety Gas Leak Detection, Monitoring and Shut Off System
1.3 The Sub-Contractor shall have to price for Option items as specified in
the Specifications and Drawings. The validity of the pricing for the
Option shall remain valid throughout the duration of the Contract
Period plus up to six (6) months of the Defects Liability Period. The
Employer reserves the right to exercise the Option in part or in whole,
and the Contractor shall not be entitled to claim for loss of profit, etc
should the Employer decide not to proceed with Option whether in part
or in whole.
1.4 The above works shall be executed by specialist contractors

registered with BCA in the appropriate workhead and Financial Grade
as follows:
Mechanical Engineering ME11 L3 and above

Or
Gases SY07 L3 and above
1.5 The works involved are defined in this Particular Specification,

Design, supply, install, testing, commissioning and maintenance of

new laboratory gas systems including the gas lines for the Building.
TS/Gas/S1/1
MECHANICAL WORKS
1.6 Design, supply, install, testing, commissioning and maintenance of

one lot of gas manifold panels and piping systems from the new gas
yard area to the laboratories in the building. System shall be complete
with isolation valves, line regulators, gas outlets and manifold flash
back arrestor for flammable gases, thermal monitoring safety shut off
system.
1.7 Gas outlets provided in the laboratories must be able to disconnect or

blank off in the future when not in use or vice versa. The
disconnection or reconnection of the gas outlets must be easily done
with simple tools and without any possible leak. It must also comply
with relevant safety and any Authority regulations or guidelines.
1.8 Design, construction and installation works according to Authority and

regulations requirements and standard. The construction and
installation methods, materials used must be suitable for this purpose.
1.9 Provide necessary building, M&E, gas lines works, gas detection
system, testing and commissioning, engaging consultants & PE
submission to relevant authority, documentation, etc.
1.10 The gas yard shall be constructed to store minimum number of

cylinders as specified in Drawings at any time with proper securing,
other services working space and escape route, etc. A concrete
constructed ramp shall also be provided.
1.11 Provision of flammable material cabinet. Safety Cabinets feature

sturdy, galvanized steel SpillSlope™ shelves that safely direct
incidental spills to a 2" leak-proof sump. Flush-mounted U-Loc™
paddle handle comes with two keys and accepts padlock (not
included) for added security. Haz-Alert™ reflective hazardous warning
labels burst with high visibility when illuminated by a flashlight during
power outages or fire conditions.
Specifications: 30-gal. Cabinet has one shelf. 45-gal. Cabinet has

two shelves. Choose Manual of Self-Closing door style. Type I 5-gal.
Safety Can with swing-type handle is terne plate steel with free-
flowing metal flame arrestor and spring-mounted relief vent-measures
16-3/8"H x 11-1/2" O.D.
Compliance: Cabinets: FM approved. Meet OSHA and NFPA Code

30 specifications. Self-Closing Cabinets also meet UFC standards.
Cans: FM approved. UL listed.
TS/Gas/S1/2
MECHANICAL WORKS
1.12 Installation of gas lines shall include all materials, brackets, supports
gas detector system, regulators, flexible hose with bull nose, line
regulator, gas outlets, isolation valves, tubing connectors, gas
manifold panels, manifold flash back arrestor for flammable gases,
cylinder brackets, other accessories, for the gas lines / piping /
system.
1.13 Provide and install gas detectors (to indicate in the tender submission)
suitable for the respective gases, with monitoring panel in the new gas
yard and the Fire Command Centre room. The panel shall provide
indication of the gas detected, alarm with buzzer, revolving siren lights
and button to silent or acknowledge the alarm etc. Linking to the
Building Automation System with the equivalent functions or features
added in are acceptable.
1.14 Provide gas system auto shut-off for the individual gas line when gas
leakage is detected in the laboratory or gas yard.
1.15 Provide proper (material suitable to weather, environment and

chemical resistant) accessible risers / ducting for the pipelines running
along the building and in the laboratories.
1.16 Provide and install first supply of all gas cylinders with full capacity
(total quantities of gas cylinders per gas type are specified in
drawings) before the handover. The gas cylinders shall be from the
approved Employer’s gas supply vendor. Installation of the gas
cylinders shall only be after the testing and commissioning of the gas
manifold systems has been satisfactorily completed to S.O.’s
approval. The Sub-Contractor shall notify the Employer and S.O. in
writing a month’s advance notice before he confirms the order with the
approved gas supply vendor.
1.17 The Sub-Contractor shall engage a professional engineer (PE), who

has designed systems of similar size, nature, and complexity as the
proposed development. He shall be responsible for the design,
submission, PE endorsement and obtaining approval from FSSD,
supervision, testing, and commissioning of the Laboratory Gas
systems
1.18 Tenders are also required to price for the optional items as specified in
the tender drawings and specification. The S.O. reserves the right to
award the Sub-Contract with or without the optional item. Should the
S.O. decide not to carry out the optional item, the entire sum as
entered in the cost breakdown shall be omitted. If the optional item is
to be exercised, the Sub-Contractor shall execute the entire works
within the Sub-Contract period specified. No extension of time is
allowed.
1.19 The respective services shall be carried out by the respective Sub-
Contractors with minimum five (5) years experience in the trade and
TS/Gas/S1/3
MECHANICAL WORKS
1.20 The Sub-Contractor shall get the manpower, equipments, material etc.
to ensure that the works are completed as scheduled. The Sub-
Contractor shall note that any shutdown to the existing services (ie
water supply, air-conditioning system, etc) can only be carried out
after office hours and over the weekends subjected to the S.O.
approval. All costs to meet the schedule shall be included in the
tender price.
Works may be carried out after normal working hours, holidays,
weekends etc. The Sub-Contractor must obtain written permission
from the S.O. prior to carrying out of the abovementioned works. All
costs incurred in respect of any of the above shall deem be included in
order to facilitate the completion of the works.
1.22 The Sub-Contractor shall provide the interfacing point in the PLCs
through protocols for the BAS/IBMS Sub-Contractor to monitor and
control functions such as remote programmed start / stop, run status,
trip alarm, high / low level alarm, run-time totalisation, etc. for the
following item:
Pumps shall be operated automatically from its own control circuit.

Run-time shall be tracked to provide maintenance staff with a
maintenance alarm, after a pre-determined run-time, to perform
preventive maintenance.
The Sub-Contractor shall provide interfacing for the BAS/IBMS Sub-

Contractor to monitor high and low level alarm in storage water tanks.
The BAS/IBMS Sub-Contractor shall be able to pick up the signals
from NO / NC contacts.
Where the level probes are linked to a PLC, interfacing with the PLC
by BAS/IBMS Sub-Contractor shall be done via the open protocols.
TS/Gas/S1/4
MECHANICAL WORKS
2. Prohibited Areas for Gas Piping
2.1 The Sub-Contractor shall ensure that gas pipes are not laid through
the following areas for safety reasons:
a) Air handling unit rooms
b) Under load bearing foundations and walls
c) Under concrete flooring within the building
d) Dry or wet riser ducts and/or near to breeching inlets
e) Within fire fighting lobbies/enclosed smoke free lobbies
f) In enclosed lift lobby areas
g) In protected areas
h) In protected staircases
i) Sprinkler / Hose reel riser shafts
j) Shaft space containing mechanical ventilation or air-

conditioning ducts for essential services
Sub-Contract shall comply in all respect with any relevant Statutory

Regulations.
d) The Ministry of Manpower, ie., The Workplace Safety & Health

Act
e) Fire Safety and Shelter Bureau
f) The installation shall comply to following code of practice:
i) SS 638 : code of practice for electrical installations
TS/Gas/S1/5
MECHANICAL WORKS


iv) SS 530 : Code of practice for energy efficiency

standard for building services and equipment


installation

Sprinkler System
ix) SS 551: code of practice for earthing
x) SS 641: Code of practice for fire safety for laboratories

using chemicals

equipment and carrying out this Sub-Contract works in the
locality.
3.2 The Sub-Contractor shall obtain and complete all notices required by
the above Authorities as necessary and shall obtain all consents
Standard acceptable to the S.O. All electrical installations and
materials supplied shall comply with Singapore Standard SS 638,
Code of Practice for Wiring of Electrical Equipment of Building and to
be approved by the PUB.
published edition.



TS/Gas/S1/6
MECHANICAL WORKS
4.3 During initial testing operation of the installation, the Sub-Contractor is

to correct for any undue noise and to make any adjustment and


practical minimum.
5. Permits and Fees
The Sub-Contractor shall procure all permits and pay all fees and charges
incurred in connection with this Sub-Contract.

upon the basic requirements of the Specification shall unless
otherwise determined by the S.O. become part of the requirements of
the Specification whether or not they are subsequently incorporated in

7.1 Unless expressedly stated to the contrary, all materials, and

equipment supplied by the Sub-Contractor shall comply with the
applicable Singapore Standards (S.S.) or British Standards (B.S.)
Specifications approved by the S.O.
7.3 All materials and equipment supplied shall be new and of the best
type for each particular purpose and of the first quality with regard to
TS/Gas/S1/7
MECHANICAL WORKS



reasonably convenient removal, replacement and repair. All such
parts shall be of suitable material for keeping maintenance to a
minimum.


practice by experience tradesmen of appropriate grades to the
approval of the S.O.

Specification or within either document itself, the item or arrangement
be included in this Sub-Contract.


28oC wet bulb

26.5oC wet bulb
TS/Gas/S1/8
MECHANICAL WORKS
9. Shop Drawings
Contract prepare and submit to the S.O. for approval all plant and
equipment layout drawings showing full details within four weeks.
Detailed calculations shall be submitted where applicable. All
equipment and materials proposed shall be submitted for approval.
limited to:

accessories.


and servicing.

g) Foundations

beams.

drawings, modified only as required to suit the specified materials and
and equipment and also to incorporate any improvements proposed
by the Sub-Contractor.
TS/Gas/S1/9
MECHANICAL WORKS

9.5 The drawings shall be drawn in the same scale as the S.O.'s
drawings. Details shall be drawn in larger scales. Where applicable,
symbols the same as those in the S.O.'s drawings shall be used and
all other symbols shall conform with the acceptable local drafting
practice.
9.7 Four (4) copies and 1 softcopy of each drawing shall be submitted for
approval not later than four weeks after award of the Sub-Contract.
Drawings with inadequate details and not conforming to the
requirements as stated above will not be considered.
9.8 Upon approval of the drawings, the Sub-Contractor shall deliver seven
(7) copies and 1 softcopy of each approved drawing to the S.O. for the
purpose of Sub-Contract administration.
9.9 The drawings shall be submitted in ample time for review and
approval by the S.O. and no work shall be carried out until such
drawings are approved. The Sub-Contractor shall allow a period of
not less than three (3) weeks for the S.O. to study the drawings for
approval.
9.10 It is the onus of the Sub-Contractor to ensure that his drawings

conform to the requirements of the Specification and that they are
approved by the S.O. early.

are inspected and approved by the S.O. such approval does not in
any way relieve the Sub-Contractor from his responsibility nor from the

approval not later than 2 weeks after award of the Sub-Contract.
TS/Gas/S1/10
MECHANICAL WORKS
The Sub-Contractor shall complete the following schedules (completed in full)

• Schedule of Rates
• Schedule of Technical Data (with full catalogues)
• Schedule of Asset Capitalisation
• Schedule of Deviation from Specifications
• Schedule of Tenderer’s Particulars
are to be submitted (4 sets) before the award of tender.
11. Programme
Contract prepare and submit to the S.O. for approval the detailed time
schedule for the progress of the work within 2 weeks.
approval by the S.O. The Sub-Contractor shall allow a period of not
less than 2 weeks for the S.O. to study the schedule for approval.
TS/Gas/S1/11
MECHANICAL WORKS
Substantial Completion, the Sub-Contractor shall submit to the
satisfaction of the S.O. five (5) hard cover bound sets of
Comprehensive Operation and Maintenance Manuals and Data
Sheets published by the equipment manufacturers, five (5) hard cover
bound sets of "As-Installed" drawings and five (5) sets of "As-
Installed" drawings in AutoCad (latest release), Building information
modeling and PDF USB Flash Drive or DVD/CD-R disks subject to
S.O.'s approval.
covers.
shall be endorsed and signed by the Sub-Contractor's Professional
Engineer.


least one set to be original and others in legible print).

used.
TS/Gas/S1/12
MECHANICAL WORKS

shooting.
Include Manufacturer's technical literature on all components

of the installation, particularly as applying to operation and
related materials
Include manufacturer's technical literature on all components

of the installation, particularly as applying to operation and
maintenance.

Sub-Contractors and Suppliers of equipment (local and
overseas) incorporated in the installation.

TS/Gas/S1/13
MECHANICAL WORKS
The Sub-Contractor shall mount in glazed frames permanently fixed in

information:
b) Start-up sequence of operation



12.7 In the event of the Sub-Contractor failing to fulfill the aforesaid

shall deduct all cost incurred thereof from monies due to the Sub-
Contractor. In addition the S.O. shall forfeit the rights of the Sub-
Contractor in relation to further payment and the issue of the
Certificate of Substantial Completion will also be withheld until he has
so complied accordingly.
S.O.
14. Metrification
TS/Gas/S1/14
MECHANICAL WORKS
15. Tropicalised
16. Samples
16.1 Samples to be submitted by the Sub-Contractor shall be for the

following but not limited to:
Pipe
Filters
Gauges
Solder
Cables
Pipe/Flange Joints
Hangers
Adhesive/Sealant
16.2 In addition, the Sub-Contractor shall also submit any other samples as
may be required by the S.O.

system or where excessive expansion and contraction may take
place, flexible connections shall be used, irrespective of whether they
are shown in the Drawings or not.
approved make.
TS/Gas/S1/15
MECHANICAL WORKS

especially in plant rooms, service ducts and adjacent to fixtures so as
to facilitate removal of the pipe and equipment for inspection or repair.
17.5 Where pipes cannot be jointed by standard fittings they shall be

jointed using mechanical coupling system.
18. Fixing of Pipes
18.1 All piping installed under this Sub-Contract shall be sufficiently

supported with hangers, supports, beams clamps, slips, inserts and
mounting devices suitable for the type of pipework. Provision for
expansion of piping shall be allowed when locating pipe hangers.


bolts at locations where the prestressed tensions are not affected.

approval.
TS/Gas/S1/16
MECHANICAL WORKS


the S.O.
19. Mock-Ups
19.1 The Sub-Contractor shall be required to construct mock-ups of typical

19.2 The Sub-Contractor shall be deemed to have allowed in his tender

price for these mock-ups.
Sub-Contractor shall where required submit samples where specified
to S.O. for review and approval before commencement of construction

ordination of all services on site. The Sub-Contractor shall replace
and modify such mock-up and sample at his own cost, if deemed
The approved mock-up and sample shall be used as the basis of
19.5 Any approval granted by the S.O. shall not relieve the Sub-Contractor
of his responsibility in ensuring that all works executed conform to the
Sub-Contract terms and conditions. The Sub-Contractor shall bear all
cost arising out of errors/omissions in samples and mock-ups.
19.6 The Sub-Contractors shall remove at his own cost all mock-up and
samples when no longer required as directed by the S.O.
TS/Gas/S1/17
MECHANICAL WORKS
other relevant Authority's requirements and to the approval of the S.O.

thick.
21.1 The Sub-Contractor shall check and ensure that all equipment
provided are suitable for the space allowed. The Sub-Contractor
shall, if necessary, locate these equipment before the erection of the
walls and doors. All abortive work arising from failure to comply with
the above shall be paid for by the Sub-Contractor.
21.2 The Sub-Contractor shall be responsible for the proper and accurate
the installation to the S.O. for work co-ordination purposes.
21.3 The Sub-Contractor shall be held solely responsible for making

necessary arrangements and/or co-ordinating with all relevant
authorities, specialists, other Sub-Contractors, etc, to ensure
satisfactory completion of this Sub-Contract such as TFP, CSC, etc.

Sub-Contractor shall bear the full cost of rectification if the failure to

exact position of ceiling suspended equipment has to be verified on
site and adjusted, if necessary, without additional cost to the Sub-
Contract.
TS/Gas/S1/18
MECHANICAL WORKS
22.1 The Sub-Contractor is to confirm the existing services to be

dismantled and terminated and to be incorporated in the shop
drawings. The Sub-Contractor is particularly requested to ensure that
there is no damages to existing and other services as any damages
shall be rectified immediately within the same day by the Sub-
Contractor at their own cost.

22.3 The Sub-Contractor shall be deemed to have inspected and examined

the site and its surroundings and acquaint himself as to the nature of
the existing works, buildings and the site, the extent and nature of the
completion of the Sub-Contract Works, the means of communication
and access to the Site, and in general obtain for himself all necessary
22.4 The Sub-Contractor shall ensure that while carrying out works at the
shall be functional at all times. The Sub-Contractor shall deem to have
22.7 The Sub-Contractor shall give minimum 2-week notice to the S.O. for
any shutdown of existing M&E Services if required.
23. Testing
23.1 The Sub-Contractor shall allow in his Tender price for the cost of all
acceptance tests required as hereinafter specified or as required by
the authorities having jurisdiction over the installation.
TS/Gas/S1/19
MECHANICAL WORKS
the systems in this Sub-Contract shall be borne by the Sub-Contractor
including the supply, installation and dismantling of necessary
pipework meters and associated works.
23.4 The Sub-Contractor shall give the S.O. seven (7) days notice of his
out.
23.5 Before the commencement of acceptance tests, the Sub-Contractor

shall have brought the installation to a state of substantial completion
and shall have completed all of his preliminary testing and adjusted
the equipment to its proper running order.

S.O. Should there be any contravention of this requirement, the

23.9 The testing period shall form part of the Sub-Contract period and no
of the Sub-Contractor.
23.10 The Sub-Contractor shall make all arrangements and supply all
labour, equipment, instruments and tools for necessary tests to be
carried out as required by the BCD, the Fire Safety Bureau and other
relevant Authorities, in addition to all those tests as specifically called
for in this Specification.
23.11 The Sub-Contractor shall also be required to conduct all tests as and
when requested by the Authorities during the Maintenance and
Guarantee Period.

Specification, the Sub-Contractor shall be required to submit all test
reports to the S.O. for approval prior to acceptance of the installation.
TS/Gas/S1/20
MECHANICAL WORKS
The Sub-Contractor shall also be required to certify in writing to the

S.O. that the installation is in full compliance with the requirements of
the Specification and the Codes to which they are designed by a
24.2 The Sub-Contractor shall engage his own Professional Engineer to

endorse and submit four (4) sets of the original `Certificate of
Supervision' and drawings for the respective installation works one
month before system handing over date. All tests and inspections
required by the relevant authorities for his installation works for
obtaining of TFP/TOP/CSC of the building shall be carried out by the
Sub-Contractor. The Sub-Contractor's PE/LEW shall be present
during the TFP/TOP/CSC inspection.
24.3 The Sub-Contractor is to note that his Tender price shall deem to
include for all testing requirement.

the clauses as stated above are complied with to the satisfaction of
the S.O.
25.1 The Sub-Contractor shall train the Employer's operating personnel in

the operation and maintenance of the plants.
instruction representing the Sub-Contractor/Manufacturer shall be
required full time on site during the said period.
26.1 The whole of the work to be performed under the Sub-Contract shall
be completed and left in running order to the satisfaction of the S.O.
TS/Gas/S1/21
MECHANICAL WORKS

conform with the requirements of this Specification. The Sub-
Contractor shall, without additional charge replace any works which
prove faulty from workmanship or materials and fully maintain the
whole installation for a period of fifteen (15) months after the
commencement of the Defects Liability Period.
26.4 During the Defects Liability Period the Sub-Contractor shall be

responsible for all costs involved in balancing, setting and adjustment
of controls, and supplying, during the period stipulated, all test
equipment and instruments deemed necessary by the S.O.. During
the Defects Liability Period, the Sub-Contractor shall also carry out the
maintenance work as shown in the Schedules.
the Sub-Contractor.
27. Star Rates
27.1 Where the Sub-Contractor contends that work is not of a similar

character or executed under similar conditions as priced in the
Schedule of Rates he shall give to the S.O. a written notice within
seven days from the time of receipt of the instruction from the S.O.
with regard to such work for the S.O. consideration. Unit rates for
such items shall be termed "Star Rates" and will be indicated thus, if
so decided by the S.O.
27.2 The Sub-Contractor shall declare that the prices quoted in the
supporting vouchers/invoices are nett of trade discounts when
calculating variation.
27.3 The S.O. may request for documentary evidence of the amount paid
by the Sub-Contractor to his suppliers and/or Sub-Contractors.
28.1 The Sub-Contractor shall establish, document and maintain a quality

system to demonstrate his commitment to quality in construction. As
with the requirements of SS 308 : Part 2 : 1988 - Specification for
Quality Assurance in Production and Installation.
TS/Gas/S1/22
MECHANICAL WORKS
28.2 Specifically, the Sub-Contractor shall plan, establish, implement and

following:


d) suitable testing, inspection, examination and audit

programmes at the appropriate stages;

28.3 The Sub-Contractor's project quality plan shall be documented in the

form of a project quality manual and project operating procedures
which shall be submitted to the S.O. within 30 days from the date of
letter of acceptance of tender. The quality control procedures shall be
procedures shall be submitted to the S.O. A further copy shall be
S.O. shall not, in any way, alter or diminish the Sub-Contractor's
obligations under the Sub-Contract for the quality of the Work.
28.6 The Sub-Contractor shall adequately price for the above provision in
the Preliminaries.
TS/Gas/S1/23
MECHANICAL WORKS

essential provision


emergency


TS/Gas/S1/24
MECHANICAL WORKS

on evacuation


e) Fire alarm system - Stage of Alarm, Location, emergency respond

and the recommended procedure on evacuation



evacuation

j) Lab ACMV, Exhaust, equipment exhaust and Purging system - Type

of system, Type of Alarm, Location, emergency respond and the

m) One way EVC - The setup, type of messages, emergency respond

and recommended procedure during emergency

evacuation
TS/Gas/S1/25
MECHANICAL WORKS

combine of the instruction manual into a copy. 5 set of softcopy (including
editable copy) and hardcopy shall be submitted during the handing over of
building or after the training.
TS/Gas/S1/26
MECHANICAL WORKS
SECTION 4 – AUTOMATIC CHANGEOVER MANIFOLD
1. General
1.1 This section sets out the requirements for the automatic changeover
manifold.
1.2 The equipment and system shall be designed and installed in full
compliance with the relevant requirements of the Health Technical
Memorandum (HTM) 02-01 (UK) C11, British Standard and EN.
2. System Design and Capacity
2.1 Manifold shall be connected by the control panel to two equal banks of
gas cylinder. The changeover from the “duty” to the “standby” banks of
cylinder should be automatic. All manifold shall be capable of passing
the full pipeline flow. The temperature of the gas may fall as low as -
30ºC as the gas passes through the regulator at maximum capacity
and the equipment should be designed accordingly.
2.2 An automatic manifold changeover from “duty” to standby shall occur

at a cylinder pressure which will ensure the greatest possible
utilization of the contents of the cylinders in the “duty” bank. A nominal
changeover at gauge pressure of 8 bar is usually satisfactory for a
distribution pressure of 4 bar. If the normal operation of the
changeover control depends on an electricity supply, the design shall
be such that failure of the electricity supply does not disrupt the flow of
gas to the distribution system.
2.3 Manifolds and control panels shall be designed and certified for usage
with 200 bar cylinders. The manifold headers shall incorporate a
renewable non-return valve to allow removal and replacement of any
cylinder and to prevent the discharge of a bank of cylinders in the
event of tail-pipe rupture. The tail-pipe manifold connector should be
gas-specific.
2.4 The tail-pipe cylinder connector must be a pin-index yolk connector in

accordance with BS EN ISO 407 for oxygen, nitrous oxide/ oxygen
mixture (50%v/v) and air. The connector for nitrous oxide should be
side outlet valve connector in accordance with BS341-3.
2.5 Pressure indicators shall be provided to indicate pressure in each

cylinder bank and in the pipeline distribution system.
TS/Gas/S4/1
MECHANICAL WORKS
3. Pressure Control
3.1 The pressure control shall maintain the nominal pipeline pressure with
the set limits.
3.2 There shall be separate pressure regulating valves for each cylinder
bank, and the control system shall be designed so that the cylinders of
one bank can be changed or the pressure regulator for one bank can
be overhauled without the loss of continuity of the gas supply.
3.3 Pressure safety valves shall be of the self-closing type, and be

installed on each distribution pipeline downstream of the manifold of
the manifold line pressure regulator and upstream of the main
isolation valve. A pressure safety valve shall also be installed between
the emergency/ reserve manifold and the pipeline distribution system.
It shall have a flow capacity at least equal to the of the pressure
regulator immediately upstream of it. The discharge pipe shall be at
least one size larger than the main pipeline.
3.4 This discharge pipeline shall be vented to atmosphere, outside the

building, in an area where the discharge of oxygen will not contribute
to fire risk, where no hazard will arise from the discharge of nitrous
oxide and where it is not liable to injure personnel when discharging.
3.5 It shall be well clear of any openable window or air intake. The
exhaust of the discharge pipelines shall be turned downwards to
prevent the ingress of dirt and moisture and be placed and protected
so that frost cannot form or be collected upon them. Similar valve
arrangements are required for installations supplied from liquid
oxygen.
TS/Gas/S4/2
MECHANICAL WORKS
4. Manifold Monitoring and Indicating System
4.1 The monitoring and indication system shall perform the following
functions:
a) overall manifold monitoring;
b) manifold condition indication;
c) overall supply plant indication
4.2 All functions shall be appropriately identified. Indications should have

a design life of at least one year. The system should be capable of
automatic re-instatement after restoration of the power supply.
5. Manifold Control Unit
5.1 The control unit shall include a green “mains supply on” indication.
5.2 On completion, the Sub-Contractor shall make good all painting

works, which have been damaged during the progress of works for the
handing over.
6. Manifold Monitoring
Each manifold system shall be provided with monitoring to detect:
a) duty bank operating;
b) duty bank empty and stand-by bank operating;
c) stand-by bank below 10% capacity when the duty bank is empty;
d) reserve bank below nominal 14 bar (for N2O) and below 68 bar
pressure for other gases;
e) pipeline faults
TS/Gas/S4/3
MECHANICAL WORKS
7. Manifold Indication Unit
There shall be indications of the following conditions:
a) a green “running” indicator for each bank. This shall display when the
bank is supplying gas, irrespective of the pressure;
i) a yellow “empty” indictor when the running bank is empty and

changeover has occurred;
ii) a yellow “low pressure” indictor to be illuminated after

changeover when the pressure in the bank now running falls to
the low pressure setting;
b) for each emergency/reserve bank a yellow indicator to be illuminated

when the pressure in the bank falls below 14 bar for N2O or 68 bar for
other gases;
c) for the pipeline distribution system a red “low pressure” and a red “
high pressure” indicator to be illuminated when the respective
conditions occur.
8. Manifold Alarm Status
8.1 The following indication of manifold conditions shall be provided:
a) a green “normal” indictor;

b) a yellow “duty bank empty, standby running” condition;
c) a yellow “duty bank empty, standby low” condition;
d) a yellow “emergency/ reserve banks low” indicator;
e) a red “pipeline pressure fault” indicator
8.2 The conditions shall be transmitted to the central alarm system. When
relays are used, they should be normally energized relays which de-
energise under fault conditions, with contacts having a minimum rating
of 50Vdc 50mA.
8.3 Alternatively volt-free, normally closed contacts rated at 50Vdc, 50mA

should be provided for transmission of the conditions to the alarm
system.
8.4 The alarm status shall also be monitored thru buildings’ BAS system.
TS/Gas/S4/4
MECHANICAL WORKS
SECTION 5 – OUTLETS AND TERMINAL UNITS
1. General
1.1 This section sets out the requirements for outlets and terminal units.
Memorandum (HTM) 02-01 (UK) C11, British Standard and EN.
1.3 All terminal outlets shall conform to BS EN 737-1. Pressure losses

across terminal units should be in accordance with BS EN 737-1.
1.4 When installed in pendants, terminal units should be of a type suitable

for mounting within the specified fitting.
1.5 All fixed pendant fittings shall be provided with appropriate NIST
connections.
1.6 The features required in the standard outlet are:
a) The outlet shall accept, retain and release the probe by means of
a quick-release mechanism designed for single-handed
operation.
b) An independent valve shall be incorporated in the assembly, to

permit maintenance on the outlet without the need for isolating
the pipe line.
c) The outlet shall have a check valve which is self-sealing when

the probe is removed.
d) The outlet/probe connection shall be of the non-swivel type, so

that secondary equipment, such as a flowmeter, is not tilted by
the probe hose.
e) A secondary locking mechanism may be incorporated, in order

to prevent damage to auxiliary equipment by the accidental
ejection of the probe.
f) The connecting probe, socket and check valve assembly for

each laboratory gas shall be designed to prevent
interchangeability with equipment used for other laboratory gas
supply systems.
TS/Gas/S5/1
MECHANICAL WORKS
g) The outlet shall be identified by labelling with the appropriate

recognised name, abbreviation or symbol, and by colour coding
as follows:
Oxygen - White
Nitrous Oxide - French Blue, British Standard

Colour 20D 45*
Compressed Air - White/Black quartering
Vacuum - Primrose, British Standard

Colour 10E 53
The name and the colour shall be permanent, and it should be

impossible to transfer either to a terminal unit for a different gas.
By "permanent" it is meant that the name should be etched,
indented, raised or otherwise made comparatively indestructible,
and that the coloured part should be made of coloured plastic,
vitreous enamel or similar material and NOT painted.
2. Location of Outlets
2.1 Outlets shall be mounted in position which will give short routes for the
flexible pipes connecting them to apparatus. These routes shall not
obstruct the movement of staff or equipment around the patient. The
outlets shall also be accessible for maintenance without disturbance to
patients and without interfering with other services or equipment.
2.2 The recommended mounting height for flush mounted outlets in new
installations is 1.3m to the centre of the socket. If surface mounted
outlets are used because of the risk of damage when beds or lockers
are moved, the mounting height shall be 1.5m.
2.3 Where more than one service is provided at one location the outlets
should be arranged in the following order from left to right as seen when
facing the outlets: oxygen, nitrous oxide, compressed air (4 bar),
compressed air (7 bar), vacuum, AGSS.
TS/Gas/S5/2
MECHANICAL WORKS
3. Flow rates required at outlet
3.1 The flow rates at outlets for all installations are stated in terms of flow at
standard temperature and pressure (STP). The rates of flow actually
occurring in the pipe lines serving the terminal units will therefore be
lower than the stated figures in the case of pressure gases and higher in
the case of vacuum, and will depend upon the pipe line operating
pressure.
3.2 The flow rates required at terminal units are given in the table below:
Flow Rates Required at Outlets
FLOW RATE, NOMINAL

SERVICE LITRES/MINUTE SUPPLY GAUGE
AT STP PRESSURE AT
TERMINAL UNIT
(bar)
Oxygen 40 4
Nitrous Oxide 15 4
Compressed air in other areas 50 4
Vacuum 40 minus 400mm Hg

below standard
atmospheric
pressure of 760mm
Hg
4. Pressure Control Regulator
The pressure control shall be designed for recessed wall mounting with
flushed stainless steel access plate. It shall consist of two line pressure
gauges for monitoring supply and outlet lines pressure and a line pressure
control regulator. The assembly shall be capable of operating with line
pressure of 1378 kPA (200 psi). The gauges shall be calibrated from 0 to
2067 kPA (300 psi) in increments of 68.9 kPA (10 psi). There shall be a
manual adjusting knob for the control of outlet pressure. The operating
theatres and minor operating theatre shall require 1 regulator each for each
type of the compressed gas terminal units.
TS/Gas/S5/3
MECHANICAL WORKS
SECTION 6 – LABORATORY GAS ALARM PANELS
1. General
1.1 This section sets out the requirements for medical gas alarm panels.
compliance with the relevant requirements of the British Standard and
EN.
1.3 The alarm panels shall be microprocessor based type and shall
provide visual indication of the status of the plant and gas supply. Any
'alarm' or 'fault' status shall also be accompanied by an audio alarm
signal. A Central Laboratory Gas Alarm Panel shall be located in the
Fire Command Centre complete with a PC based system as described
below and capable of high level interface to building BAS.
2. Alarm Panel
2.1 The master alarm panel shall indicate in detail condition of the medical
gases, Vacuum and Compressed Air plant and lab gases supply. The
panel shall include the following indicator lights and pushbuttons:
a) Power 'ON' light

b) System 'alarm' light
c) Silence 'alarm' pushbutton
d) Test light pushbutton
e) Test fault pushbutton
f) 'NORMAL' light
g) System pressure 'failure' light
h) Duty plant 'fault' light (for vacuum and compressed air)
i) Standby plant 'fault' light (for vacuum and compressed air)
j) 'Low liquid oxygen' fault light
k) 'Change cylinder' light
l) Duty cylinder bank 'low pressure light'
m) Standby cylinder bank 'low pressure' light
n) Reserve cylinder bank "low pressure' light
2.2 All electrical wiring between the alarm panels to the sensors, pressure
switches, transmitters etc shall be screened cables to prevent outside
interference of the signals.
TS/Gas/S6/1
MECHANICAL WORKS
3. Scope Of Work for PC based Monitoring System
The system requirements shall include but not be limited to the following:
i) Local Area Network (LAN)
ii) 1 set of Industrial Computer complete with Monitor.
iii) Specified and required cable transits and insert blocks
iv) Termination kits, cable glands, lugs and cable tag numbers.
v) The PC based Monitoring System (PCMS) shall be capable of

performing all data acquisition, data monitoring, annunciation, logging
long-term data storage, trending and displaying graphic information
pertaining to the process graphics.
vi) The broad guideline regarding the control strategy is given as part of
this Tender Specification. However, the contractor is responsible to
derive the control philosophy for the PCMS to be supplied, installed,
tested and commissioned.
vii) The PCMS contractor shall interface and co-ordinate his works
(including development of all necessary drivers, etc) with all other
contractors that will be involved.
viii) The Contractor shall obtain power for the PCMS equipment from the
nearest Power DB (backup by UPS).
ix) All supporting structures provided by the Contractor shall be earthed to

one of the local earth bars. All necessary cables, supports, etc to
achieve this earthing in accordance with the local code, shall be by the
Contractor.
x) Any boxes, supports, brackets, fittings, or making

insertions/openings/holes etc. in panels or ducts necessary for
installation shall be deemed to be included in the scope of this contract.
xi) Preventive maintenance and protection of equipment from time of start-

up until Final Acceptance shall remain under the scope of this tender.
Small quantities of consumable spares are to be maintained at site
during the above period. Contractor shall also supply spare parts
required to ensure uninterrupted operation after system acceptance
during DLP.
xii) The Contractor shall be responsible for the supplying all accessories
needed to facilitate the installation.
xiii) The system shall be web access enabled through internet explorer
TS/Gas/S6/2
MECHANICAL WORKS
3. Concept And Philosophy
a) General
The PCMS should be able to handle the monitoring of medical gases

related devices. Its function shall ensure an optimum environment for all
facility systems that remain within the acceptable tolerances of the
medical equipment. This PCMS shall be located in the control room. No
information shall be lost in the running in the case of failure of any
PCMS workstation.
The system shall be designed for smooth addition of 20% I/Os and/or
sensors required for expansion without shutting down the existing
system.
The system shall be designed based on a distributed control and data

acquisition system comprising of industrial server workstations.
In the event of any failure of connection with the PCMS, the Systems
shall continue to operate as independent units, using the last
information.
4. Equipment Descriptions
a) PC based Monitoring System (PCMS)
There shall be one PCMS workstation located in the FCC. This shall be
linked onto a network via Fiber Optic cable or 485 cable, facilitating the
monitoring of the system together with all associated equipment, and
shall be capable of performing all operations, including equipment
monitoring, status alarm, etc.
The PCMS system power source shall be derived from the nearest
Power Distribution Board which is backup by UPS of 15 mins.
The Contractor shall provide Human-Machine-Interface (HMI) software

capable of providing fully functional user-friendly interface to the needs
of the Facility staff for data acquisition, supervisory control and
information management..
The server shall be configured Window XP. All system and operator
actions shall be documented on the servers and printer, including the
following:
 Medical Gas Delivery Data

 All Equipment Status
 All Alarm signals
 All operator actions: alarm acknowledgement, etc.
The HMI/server station shall be the latest model and configuration
The PCMS shall be equipped with one number line printer for event
recording, alarms and text printing at each of the locations.
TS/Gas/S6/3
MECHANICAL WORKS
System and equipment communication shall be via Modbus or BACNET

MSTP to Ethernet protocol.
The alarm display shall provide the operator with an overview of the
alarm status with the time of initiation.
All alarms shall produce audible and visual indication. Provision shall be
included for silencing the audible warning. Alarm silencing shall be
possible from any HMI on the system, without the need for an alarm to
be individually silenced on every HMI.
The operator shall have the ability to acknowledge each individual

alarm. When the alarm is acknowledged, the flashing display shall
become steady and the horn will be silenced.
The system shall indicate on the alarm lists the difference

between acknowledged and non-acknowledged alarms.
The MGMS system shall be configured so that medical equipments

shutdown, control actions and status monitoring always take
precedence over measurement monitoring activities.
The system shall be designed to execute various data evaluations and

storage of historical data using standard reporting and trend functions.
Computer graphics shall show good illustrations of oxygen tank,

medical air plant, gas manifolds, etc, along side with readings such as
tank level.
5. Graphic Display and Monitoring
The PC shall monitor the following:
 Compressed Air Plant

 Vacuum Plant
 Cylinder Gas Manifolds
a) Cylinder Gas Manifolds
The following parameters (readings and alarms) shall be monitored for

Alford Gas, Carbon Dioxide Manifolds and Triple Gas Cylinders
 Left Bank Pressure
 Right Bank Pressure
 Delivery Pressure
Once pressure or level is out of the acceptable working range, alarm

shall turn flashing red and audible shall be activated.
At the same time, a common fault alarm shall be send to the BMS thru
Ethernet OPC.
TS/Gas/S6/4
MECHANICAL WORKS
b) Compressed Air Plant
The following parameters (readings and alarms) shall be monitored by

Monitoring Gas Monitoring System.
 Compressors status; ie running, standby or fault

 Desiccant/refrigerant dryers status; ie regenerating, standby or fault
 Dew point temperature
 Delivery pressure
 Flow rate
Once pressure or status is out of the acceptable working range, alarm

Ethernet OPC
c) Vacuum Plant
The following monitoring and alarm parameters shall be monitored by

Medical Gas Monitoring System.
 Vacuum Pump status, ie running, standby or fault

 Vacuum level
Once pressure or Status is out of the acceptable working range, alarm

Ethernet OPC
6. Cables
All cables shall be in accordance with the application requirements.
The Contractor shall submit a full and complete cable schedules for approval.
The cable schedule shall be produced using the supplied format and
numbering system.
Cables shall be manufactured in accordance with local country Standards and

IEC Standard IEC 60502. The most stringent requirements shall be adopted.
The maximum volt drop between the distribution board and the consumer
terminals shall be 2.5%.
The Contractor shall incorporate all applicable de-rating factors i.e.

temperature, grouping et cetera within their cable calculations.
All cabling shall be carefully supported, routed and fixed into place to avoid
cable sag, stress on cable terminations and mechanical damage.
TS/Gas/S6/5
MECHANICAL WORKS
7. Documentation And Deliverables
a) General Requirements
The Contractor shall submit three (3) sets CD-ROM for the final
drawings and documents.
The Contractor shall submit three (3) hard-copy sets of the final as built
drawings, manuals and reports.
All documents and data shall be submitted in a timely manner.
b) Documentation with Tender
As a minimum, the Contractor shall submit with their tender, the

following drawings and information:
 General arrangement drawings and system architecture.

 A manufacturer catalogues.
 Contents sheets for the Contractors proposed OIM manuals.
 Contractors proposed Project Organization chart.
 Reference List for Projects completed in Singapore.
 Outline details for the Contractors on site training programmed
proposed for all equipment.
 Deviation List.
c) Documentation for Review / Approval
The Contractor shall submit Two (2) sets of documents and shop
drawings for approval as detailed in the deliverables list.
All Contractors’ drawings and documents shall be specific to the project.

Typical drawings and descriptions shall be rejected. This shall be issued
to the successful Contractor.
One set of all documents and drawings shall be submitted on software

media with each submittal.
The Contractor shall submit the deliverables in accordance with the

attached “Deliverables List” schedule of dates.
d) Manuals
The Contractor shall supply manuals and reports in accordance with

Client Conditions of Contract. As a minimum, the following specific
information shall be included in the manuals:
 Overall system description

 Sequence of Operation
 A hard copy printout and an electronic copy of the system’s software
program, message files and response files.
 Bill of materials
 Product catalogue cut sheets
 Input & Output list & the cause & effect matrix
TS/Gas/S6/6
MECHANICAL WORKS
 All software licenses and third party software operating and

programming manuals
 Operational details & details of periodic maintenance.
 All project drawings
 The Hotline contact details
8. Testing Programme
Site acceptance tests deemed necessary to meet the requirements of this

specification shall be offered for witnessing by the Client representative.
The contractor shall provide on site testing of all involved gas monitoring
equipment prior to final handover of the system.
Test Certificates and Reports shall be provided.
The manufacturer shall provide certificates for all tests. The test certificates
shall include values of the test results.
9. Training
a) Training of Operation and Maintenance Staff
The Contractor shall include in his tender a proposed training program

with number of days, number of hours per day and maximum number of
attendees. The training course shall be tailored for different categories
of personnel, namely, the operation, the technical and the maintenance.
It shall be conducted during the installation and commissioning of the
project and within the maintenance period. The Contractor shall provide
at least 60 hours of training courses for system operation. Courses to
be conducted shall be mutually discussed and determined later.
The Contractor shall submit as part of their submission, an outline of the

training plan and procedures that shall be used to instruct the Client’s
Operations and Maintenance Personnel.
10. Maintenance Service
The contractor shall provide half yearly maintenance service on the complete
medical gas monitoring system during defects warranty period. The contractor
shall provide a 24 hours, 7 days a week contact number.
The Contractor shall also quote for an optional maintenance support for a
period of 5 years as described below. Contractor must quote a fixed annual
price.
11. Warranty
To provide a warranty that the equipment furnished by the Contractor

hereunder is free from any defeats in material and workmanship and will be of
the kind and quality designated or described on the quotation.
Provide warranty that software purchased in conjunction with the equipment

confirms to the specification.
TS/Gas/S6/7
MECHANICAL WORKS
During the time of project execution or the warranty period, any

hardware/software upgrade required trouble-shooting / overcoming any
problems / bugs that affect the functionality or aesthetics of the system in
any way shall be carried out by the Contractor without any additional cost. In
general the warranty shall provide the following: Replacement of defective
hardware with a new one by shipping the same model number within 1 day of
notification to the Contractor. Replacement of defective software by shipping
within 1 week of notification to the contractor, an upgraded version on disk or
firmware chipset. Diagnosis of hardware and software problems that is
covered by warranty by a factory authorized service representative.
System warranty starts upon the final acceptance of the system to the End of
DLP.
TS/Gas/S6/8
MECHANICAL WORKS
SECTION 7 – PIPEWORK INSTALLATION (OXYGEN, VACUUM AND

COMPRESSED AIR)
1. General
1.1 This section sets out the requirements for the piped laboratory gases
installation for oxygen, vacuum, compressed air and AGSS.
Memorandum (HTM) 02-01 (UK), British standard and EN.
1.3 An emergency inlet port shall be provided in the pipe distribution

system for Laboratory gas and 400 kPa.
2. Pipework
2.1 General
The work specified in this section includes the supply, installation and
testing of all piping and pipe fittings for the following:
a) Piped oxygen gas
b) Piped vacuum (non-chemical usage)
c) Piped compressed air
2.2 Pipe Material
All pipes used for all the above systems shall be copper pipes to BS EN
13348 or approved equivalent. The pipes shall be purchased medically
cleaned in a degreased condition, capped, sealed in plastic bags and
marked "DEGREASED FOR MEDICAL AND LABORATORY `GAS
SERVICE."
TS/Gas/S7/1
MECHANICAL WORKS
2.3 Pipe Supports
The pipeline should be adequately supported at sufficient intervals to

prevent sagging or distortion, in accordance with the table below.
Pipe Maximum intervals Maximum intervals

outside diameter for vertical runs for horizontal run
mm metres metres
12 1.2 1.0
15 1.8 1.2
22 2.4 1.8
28 2.4 1.8
35 3.0 2.4
42 3.0 2.4
54 3.0 2.7
76 3.6 3.0
Supports for surface mounted pipes should provide clearance to permit

painting of the surface. Where pipes pass through walls, partitions or
floors, they should be fitted with sleeves of copper pipes to BS EN 1057
(with fire stopping) or approved equivalent painted with appropriate wall
or ceiling plates.
Pipework supports shall comprise, except for vertical drops to terminal

units, secondary fixing brackets or supports of a suitable metallic, non-
ferrous material or a ferrous material suitably treated to prevent
corrosion and electrolytic action.
Pipework supports shall comprise, for vertical drops to terminal units,

secondary fixing brackets or supports of a suitable, metallic, non-ferrous
material or a non-metallic material.
TS/Gas/S7/2
MECHANICAL WORKS
2.4 Workmanship and Installation of Piping
All piping shall be set out and installed to secure a neat and workmanlike
appearance. All piping shall be arranged, supported, graded, vented
and drained to suit the duty and/or service conditions applicable and
shall be installed complete with all fittings and components connected up
ready for testing and service.
Cleanliness shall be maintained by capping incomplete sections of

erected pipework with plastic end caps or tape to prevent the ingress of
extraneous material.
Only tradesman and welders who are approved by the S.O. can work on
the pipework. Any sub-standard work, whether in respect of safety,
efficiency, durability or appearance, shall be replaced as directed to the
satisfaction of the S.O. The entire installation shall present neat and
clean appearance on completion.
a) Approved Workmen for Welding of Copper Pipework
For the fabrication of copper pipework, the contractor’s workmen

must have a welder's certificate from an approved relevant
authority.
b) Joints in Copper Piping
All joints in the copper piping systems, except those at valves or

equipment requiring other connection, shall be carried out with
silver solder to BS EN 1044 : 1999 or approved equivalent.
Suitable adaptors shall be used for the installation of valves and
other equipment provided with threaded connection. Copper
piping shall not be silver brazed direct to valves and equipment.
When brazing copper pipes, cleanliness in the pipes must be

maintained by blowing nitrogen through the pipework to maintain
an inert atmosphere on the inside of the pipes.
TS/Gas/S7/3
MECHANICAL WORKS
c) Silver Brazing Alloy and Flux
All silver brazing alloy (hard solder) used in the assembly of

copper pipes and fittings shall comply with BS EN 1044 : 1999 or
approved equivalent.
All copper to copper pipe joints shall be silver brazed with an

alloy containing not less than fifteen (15) per cent silver. All
copper and copper base alloy to copper base alloy joints shall be
silver brazed with an alloy containing not less than forty five (45)
per cent silver.
Flux coated silver brazing alloys shall not be used on the work.
All silver brazing flux used on the work shall be well formulated
and shall be of the fluoroborate type. Fluxes containing alcohol
or other materials, subject to combustion in oxygen, shall not be
used. The flux shall be capable of providing good fluxing action
and shall be easy to remove after brazing.
d) Pipe Vibration
All piping from pumping equipment shall be effectively isolated

from vibration. Spring isolator type of supports shall be installed
within 5 metres from the pumping equipment and neoprene
isolation pad insert shall be provided between the fixing clamp or
holder-bat and the type for the remaining pipeline.
The type of vibration isolators to be used shall be submitted

together with the shop drawings of the pumping equipment to the
S.O. for approval.
Where pipes pass through walls or floors pipe sleeves shall be

provided. These shall be extended through the full finished
thickness of the wall or floor and be secured against movement.
Gaps between the pipe sleeve and the pipe shall be filled up with
high density fibreglass and caulked with fire-rated compound and
finish slush to the face of the pipe sleeve.
Where differential movement may occur between two sections of

a system or where excessive expansion and contraction may
take place, flexible connections shall be used, irrespective of
whether they are shown in the Drawings or not.
TS/Gas/S7/4
MECHANICAL WORKS
2.5 Pipe Protection
All Laboratory gas pipe risers should be separated by a partition from

other services.
2.6 Symbol Convention
a) All upstream pipe shall be similar size or larger eg indicated in

connecting pipe downstream of it. ie downstream pipes shall
be smaller than its upstream pipe.
b) All pipe drop shall be at wall. For concrete wall, pipes are to
be chased into wall. For dry partition wall, pipe drop are to be
installed within the partition.
2.7 Flexible tube pendant shall be rolled up and kept in suitable container
for future use.
2.8 Pressure Sensors
Pressure sensors c/w line valves and gauge shall be provided at the
following points to assist in detection of any pipe leaks.
a) At all riser branch off at each floor.
2.9 Buried pipeline should be run in a trench not less 450 mm x 450 mm
with the pipe protected throughout its length in a duct with removal
covers.
TS/Gas/S7/5
MECHANICAL WORKS
3. Valve
3.1 All line valves shall come complete with the following:
 lock and key
 limit switch to indicate fully open.
Fittings and valves should be supplied already clean and degreased and
in sealed plastic bags identifying them as Laboratory gas fittings.
Fittings should be of the "high-duty" type suitable for steam services with
gauge pressures up to 17 bar (250 psi). Flanged joints with approved
gaskets may be permitted for vacuum valves in sizes of 42mm and
above.
Valves of the lever-operated ball type are to be preferred because a

clear indication of the "ON" and "OFF" position is given, but
diaphragm or bellows types may be used. If screw-down valves are
used they should preferably be of a type which gives a clear indication
of the extent to which the valve is open, or at least a clear indication of
the direction for closing it. Valves on the distribution system should be
of the non-lubricated type and constructed of non-ferrous materials.
They should preferably be designed for capillary joint connections to
the pipe lines by silver bracing. Where screwed connections are
provided for pipe line connection they should have ISO metric threads
in accordance with BS 3643 or pipe threads to valves having integral
union joints with other threads. Non-ferrous materials should be used
for plant room valves for those components which may come into
contact with the gases.
Valves should be readily accessible in an emergency from the area

served by the section of pipe work and they should be mounted at a
height of 1.22m from floor level in positions which are unlikely to be
obstructed by other equipment or apparatus. They should be clearly
marked to indicate their function, in simple language describing the
areas affected by the operation of the valve. It is recommended that
each valve outside the central plant area be mounted in a standard
box, irrespective of its function. Any valves larger than those for
28mm OD pipe which are not required to be operated in an
emergency may be accommodated in readily accessible parts of the
duct, or in ventilated cupboards, provided the valves are lockable in
the open and the closed positions. Every valve should be fitted with
an identity number plate for operational purposes.
TS/Gas/S7/6
MECHANICAL WORKS
Unless otherwise stated in the drawings or specified in other sections

of the specification hereinafter, all valves and fittings called for shall
conform to the following:
Stop valve up to 50mm BS 1010
Gate valve above 50mm BS 5163
Check valve up to 50mm BS 1953 Class 125

or BS 5154 (M)
Check valve above 50mm BS 4090 Class 125

or BS 5153 (M)
Ball valve BS 1212
Identification of valves shall comprise permanent indication on or

adjacent to each AVSU as follows:
a) In Red Lettering Typical Engraving Required
Service(s) "OXYGEN" etc as specified by SO
Emergency Instruction "IN

EMERGENCY BREAK PANEL
AND CLOSE VALVE"
b) In Black Lettering Typical Engraving Required
Valve(s) Code No(s) "O/EV/1.A" etc as specified by SO
Area Isolated "Theatre Suite 1"
in the case of multi-service valve boxes, have identification and

valve code on or adjacent to each valve within box.
TS/Gas/S7/7
MECHANICAL WORKS
3.2 Area Valve Service Units (AVSUs)
Each unit should be lockable and each emergency valve box shall be
fitted with a suitable breakable cover with an emergency instruction. In
emergency, break panel & close valve. The unit shall be provided with
vents at the top and bottom and be large enough to allow adequate
access for maintenance and identification of the areas/beds served. The
keys for the boxes shall be non-interchangeable in support of the
"Permit-to-Work" system. Where this would require an impossible range
of keys the non-interchangeability feature may be limited either to valve
units within one building or to those in adjacent departments within a
large building.
The cover must be non-interchangeable with other covers if it is marked

with the name of a gas.
Each gas pipe in each valve unit shall come with a pressure gauge,
pressure sensor and pressure regulator. The pressure gauge shall be
round face with easy readability and red bands showing danger zone.
The scale of the gauge shall cover the maximum and minimum. The
indicating needle shall be pointing to the mid-scale at working pressure.
Pressure sensors shall be connected to the alarm panel. The pressure
regulator shall be used to regulate the Laboratory compressed air to the
designated gauge pressure at the terminal units.
TS/Gas/S7/8
MECHANICAL WORKS
SECTION 8 – PIPEWORK INSTALLATION (CARBON DIOXIDE, NITROGEN,

MIXED GASES, HELIUM, ARGON, METHANE ,VACUUM AND
LPG)
1. General
1.1 This section sets out the requirements for the piped laboratory gases
installation for carbon dioxide, nitrogen, mixed gases, helium and
argon, methane and LPG.
1.2 All the gas lines materials used shall be stainless steel grade 316 L
(no carbon) grade and using orbital welding method. Carbon Dioxide
gas piping shall be copper and LPG shall be hot dip galvanised iron.
2. Pipe Materials and Fittings
2.1 The piping and fittings used for the following gases shall be of
stainless steel grade 316L:
a) Nitrogen gas (99.9995% purity)

b) Mixed gas (CO2 5 %, Nitrogen 90 % & Hydrogen 5 %)
c) Helium gas
d) Argon gas
e) Methane
f) Vacuum (chemical gas vacuum)
2.2 All the pipe, fittings and valves shall be degreased before installation.
2.3 For the stainless steel grade 316L pipe, joint shall be made using
orbital welding. During the welding, pure argon gas shall be used as
an arc gas and back-seal gas to prevent the hot welding spot from
oxidizing with ambient oxygen and moisture. After welding, the piping
should be purged continuously with nitrogen gas to get rid of the
absorbed moisture. Helium leak test are also applied to all the welding
spots to ensure that there will be no leakage due to defective welding.
2.4 For all gas outlets and point-of-use, the pressure of each gas has to
be independently and locally controlled by a series of valves, pressure
regulators, pressure sensors, and particle and gas filters located
inside a gas manifold box. For each process tool there shall be one or
more gas manifold boxes installed nearby for gas distribution and
control.
2.5 All valves used shall be direct acting type and explosion-proof to
safety standard EExd IIC T6 (Which T6 = Surface temperature ≤85C
when malfunction or faulty).
TS/Gas/S8/1
MECHANICAL WORKS
2.6 Filters and purifiers shall be installed at the headers to remove impurities
and particles before the gases enters the distribution piping system,
filters shall have filtering capacity of 0.01um and shall be membrane
type.
2.7 All pressure regulators c/w gauges shall be diaphragm type.
2.8 Pressure gauge shall be flow through pressure sensor type.
3. Pipe Works Supports

3.1 Pipe Supports
The pipeline should be adequately supported at sufficient intervals to

prevent sagging or distortion, in accordance with the table below.
Pipe Maximum intervals Maximum intervals

outside diameter for vertical runs for horizontal run
mm metres metres
12 1.2 1.0
15 1.8 1.2
22 2.4 1.8
28 2.4 1.8
35 3.0 2.4
42 3.0 2.4
54 3.0 2.7
76 3.6 3.0
Supports for surface mounted pipes should provide clearance to permit

painting of the surface. Where pipes pass through walls, partitions or
floors, they should be fitted with sleeves of copper pipes to BS EN 1057
or approved equivalent painted with appropriate wall or ceiling plates.
Pipework supports shall comprise, except for vertical drops to terminal

units, secondary fixing brackets or supports of a suitable metallic, non-
ferrous material or a ferrous material suitably treated to prevent
corrosion and electrolytic action.
Pipework supports shall comprise, for vertical drops to terminal units,

secondary fixing brackets or supports of a suitable, metallic, non-ferrous
material or a non-metallic material.
TS/Gas/S8/2
MECHANICAL WORKS
3.2 Workmanship and Installation of Piping
a) All piping shall be set out and installed to secure a neat and
workmanlike appearance. All piping shall be arranged,
supported, graded, vented and drained to suit the duty and/or
service conditions applicable and shall be installed complete with
all fittings and components connected up ready for testing and
service.
Cleanliness shall be maintained by capping incomplete sections

of erected pipework with plastic end caps or tape to prevent the
ingress of extraneous material.
Only tradesman and welders who are approved by the S.O. can
work on the pipework. Any sub-standard work, whether in
respect of safety, efficiency, durability or appearance, shall be
replaced as directed to the satisfaction of the S.O. The entire
installation shall present neat and clean appearance on
completion.
b) Valves for the system should be carefully located and positioned

such that any leakage from the valves cannot result in a build-up
of gas in an unventilated space, e.g. ceiling void, unventilated
roof space. Valves should not be inserted in the middle of main
run. A main shut-off valve should, however, be inserted in a
readily accessible position at the bottom of each rising main on
the distribution system. Valve boxes should, as far as is
practicable, be located so that the covers are flush with the
surface of the building structure.
c) All piping shall be laid square and true. Risers shall by truly
vertical and all piping shall be lined up parallel and at right angles
to buildings walls. Equipment shall be accurately set, plumbed
and leveled and hanger rods shall be in true vertical alignment.
d) Piping and supports may have to be offset, lowered or raised as

required for co-ordination with other trades or as directed at the
site by the S.O.
e) The layout of piping and accessories shown on the drawings is

diagrammatic and approximate only but is sufficient to show the
manner in which the various systems should be run. The Sub-
Contractor shall do their own co-ordination with the other
services and submit shop drawing for approval before any
installation.
TS/Gas/S8/3
MECHANICAL WORKS
f) All piping shall be arranged so as not to interfere with the

removal of other equipment or devices or to block access to
doors, windows, manholes or other access openings.
g) All piping shall be accurately cut to measurements determined at

the site and worked into place without spring or forcing.
h) All piping shall be kept safe, clear of areas where it may be

exposed to mechanical or chemical damage, excessive heat,
and contact with oil, grease or bituminous compounds or
electrical sparks and it shall be installed to avoid interference
with other trades.
i) Piping shall be made up longest possible length of piping in

order to minimize joints and shall be bent where possible to
minimize fittings. Particular care shall be taken to ensure that
piping is straight when installed.
j) All the components and tubing should be wrapped in a nitrogen-

filled plastic. Plastic package prior to shipment from the vendors.
The on-site sub-assembly of gas components should be
performed in a clean environment.
TS/Gas/S8/4
MECHANICAL WORKS
SECTION 9 – SAFETY GAS LEAK DETECTION, MONITORING AND SHUT-OFF

SYSTEMS
1. General
1.1 This section sets out requirements of the safety gas leak detection,
monitoring and shut-off system.
1.2 The Sub-Contractor shall be responsible for the coordination with the gas
vendor for the interface and interlocking purposes. Training should be
included as part of the scope.
1.3 The gas detection system shall be of a type suitable for the detection of
the various gases expected in these laboratories and shall be of a
standard traceable to CE & ATEX certificates likes EExd IICT6, INERIS 01
ATEX0004 and EN50270. It shall be able to constantly measure the air
surrounding the detection point/s and shall be able to determine the
amount of gas leaked through visual and audio alarms. The controller shall
be remotely located so that the operator does not need to enter the
affected site to investigate to take reading of the leak. The complete
operation of the detection system including the monitoring, controls, etc. of
the individual detectors, sensors, control valves, etc.
1.4 The gas detection system and monitoring system shall be designed to
meet the requirements by the Air pollution standard, safety emission level
& Fire Safety & Shelter Department (FSSD) requirements.
1.5 The numbers of detectors as shown on the drawings are only indication
and shall be deemed to be the minimum numbers of detectors to be
provided. Where the Sub-Contractor’s design required more detectors than
those indicated on the drawings, the Sub-Contractor shall be deemed to
have included in his price for this and no additional cost would be
claimable by the Sub-Contractor.
1.6 The gases to be detected by various gas detectors on the theory of

diffusion type & the accountability for realistic data on safety measurement
is:
 Carbon Dioxide (CO2)

 Nitrogen (N2)
 Hydrogen (H2)
 Oxygen (O2)
 Methane (CH4)
 LPG
TS/Gas/S9/1
MECHANICAL WORKS
1.7 The gas detection system shall be interlocked to an Alarm/Control Panel

for annunciation and central control purposes. The response time of the
gas detection system shall be less than 0.1 second.
1.8 The specifications for the gas detection system shall be preferably meeting
the following requirement or other internationally approved standards:
 Uses electrochemical type of N2 & O2 sensor

 Uses catalytic type of sensor for CH4 & H2 gas
 Uses infrared type of sensor for CO2 gas
 Certify on Immune to Radio Frequency Interference & Electromagnetic
 Interference for faulty alarm activation
 Fast recovery time, #10 seconds when exposed to high concentration
of the target gas
 Not cross sensitive to other commonly used gases in the facilities

 The controller is 4-channel continuous-measuring monitor and is ISA
design for safety monitoring & measurement
 It will automatically display the location of the gas leakage

 It will automatically display the concentration of gas leakage
 It will automatically activate outputs when alarm levels are exceeded
 Standard outputs include 4-20mA, contacts for fault, warn and 3 level
alarm contacts for Low/Mid/High alarms level
1.9 The measuring range (in % LEL, %O2 & %CO2 & setting of alarm level for
each gas shall be proposed by the Sub-Contractor based on recognized
industry practice for laboratory facilities, and submitted to S.O. for
approval.
1.10 The Sub-Contractor shall propose a complete proposal on the quantity of

detectors required, location & level installation of detectors, for a full
workable solution. The latest technology on gas leak detection shall be
employed in this Sub-Contract. The gas leak detector’s positions and
quantity used as shown in the Drawings serve only as a guide to the Sub-
Contractor, for his full complete design proposal for S.O.’s approval.
TS/Gas/S9/2
MECHANICAL WORKS
1.11 The gas detection and monitoring system shall operate in the following
manner:
a) Gas leak condition

In the event of a gas leak, the gas sensor upon sensing the leak
shall send a signal to the system control panel which in turn re-
energize the solenoid valve fitted on the supply gas line at every
floor, thus cutting off the gas supply. The gas detection system
shall show an LCD reading in %H2, %O2, %CH4 and % CO2 light
indication of the alarm of fault being activated. It shall incorporate a
sounder or buzzer in which in the event of fault, low/mid or high
alarms, the sounder or buzzer shall sound. The gas supply will only
be available upon manual resetting of the reset button on the gas
solenoid valve reset panel.
b) Fire alarm condition

In the event of a fire alarm condition, the main fire alarm shall send
a signal to shut-off the gas installation main solenoid valve so as to
cut off the gas supply to the entire installation. Upon the clearing of
the fire alarm condition, the solenoid valve shall have to manually
reset the local reset control panel. The 24VDC signal shall be
supplied by the Fire Protection Contractor.
c) Power Failure Condition

In the event of a power failure, the gas detection panel shall design
to such manner that the main solenoid valve de-energizes so that
the gas supply is cut off.
d) Fault condition
In the event of the system failure due to either malfunctioning of the
system control circuitry, faulty sensors or breakage of the wire
between the sensors and the gas detection control panel, the
sounder or buzzer and the fault indication lights shall be activated
automatically. Simultaneously, a signal shall be sent from the gas
detection control panel to de-energize the solenoid valve fitted on
the supply line thus cutting off the gas supply. The system cannot
be reset until the faulty is rectified.
TS/Gas/S9/3
MECHANICAL WORKS
1.12 The system shall be provided with auxiliaries contract (S) for the
configuration to the BAS system, if any.
1.13 The BAS system shall be able to monitor the following status:
a) Each gas leak detector – high alarm status.

b) Each solenoid valve – on/off status.
c) Each gas control panel – fault status.
2. Inspection, Testing and Commissioning
2.1 Upon completion of the gas detection and monitoring system, the Sub-
Contractor shall be responsible for the complete and thorough testing
calibration with certified gas and commissioning of the system with the
relevant authority to their requirements.
2.2 The gas detection system should be checked at least quarterly and
recalibrated with certified gas by certified engineer.
3.1 Proper care, manner and the requirements for the cleaning of all piping,
valves and fittings must have been taken during installation.
3.2 After installation, the following tests on the pipe work shall be given.
Disconnecting a few joints (not less than 3 joints per block) on any part of
the pipe work and purging the lines in the presence of S.O. with a piece of
dry clean white cloth enclosing the end of the joint. Any dirt or grit collected
after one minute of purging will deem that the cleaning of the piping, valves
and fittings are not adequately performed during the installation and the
Sub-Contractor shall be required to purge all pipes and the above test
repeated to the satisfaction of S.O.
Pressure testing of each section of the pipeline system to 1034 KN/M2

(150 psig) or 1.5 times the working pressure with dust free, dry air or
nitrogen. This test pressure shall be maintained until each joint has been
examined for leakage by means of soapy water.
TS/Gas/S9/4
MECHANICAL WORKS
SECTION 10 – PAINTING AND IDENTIFICATION
1. This section sets out the requirements for painting and identification for piped
services including but not limited to the following:
a) Painting of equipment and piping
b) Pipe markers
c) Equipment name plates and labels
d) Valve identification
Except where otherwise specified herein, the external surfaces of all

machinery, apparatus, equipment, fittings, vessels and services including
supports, hangers and brackets installed in the works shall be painted.
All sheet metal control cabinets and switchboards shall be painted internally
and externally. All surfaces to be painted shall be properly prepared, primer
coated and undercoated and then finished with one finishing coat. Each
coating (including priming, undercoating and the finishing coat) shall be
allowed to dry and shall be rubbed down and stopped before the next coat is
applied.
All paint and other preparations shall be best quality, non-poisonous,

lead-free prepared synthetic products of approved brand, conforming to the
relevant Standard, brought onto the site ready-mixed in the manufacturer’s
sealed containers and used to the manufacturer’s specification. The paint
shall be of low VOC.
Surfaces which shall operate at temperature in excess of 93°C shall be

primed, undercoated and finish coated with approved heat-resisting paint
suitable for the temperatures to be encountered.
Each finishing coat shall be of a different shade in selected colour and shall
be either gloss or matt finish as specified herein. The final coat shall be left
smooth, even and free from visible brush marks and other defects.
TS/Gas/S10/1
MECHANICAL WORKS
2. Labelling
Directional flow arrows shall be provided on all pipes. Arrows shall not be less
than 150mm in length and shall be spaced at not greater than 3 metre centres
in plantrooms and not greater than 6 metre centres elsewhere.
Arrows may either be painted onto the pipe or be of vinyl markers of the
pressure sensitive self-adhesive type. Directional flow arrows shall be
adjacent to, but shall NOT be superimposed on supplementary colour-bands.
The arrows shall have the name of the particular system printed on it. Valve
tags shall be furnished and installed on all valves including all isolating,
pressure reducing, throttling, non-return, pressure relief, automatic control
and solenoid valves. They shall be numbered in accordance with the
nomenclature as used throughout this contract.
Tags shall be 25mm diameter brass and secured to the valve with a brass
chain link. Valve tags for all valve functions shall clearly indicate the service
and valve number.
3. Colour Coding
Pipelines should be identified in accordance with BS 1710 and colour banding

for the pipelines should be used outside of the plant room. Colour band
identification should be applied near to valves, junctions, walls, etc. Each gas
should be identified in 6mm letters. Self-adhesive plastic or clip-on labels of
approved manufacture may be used for this purpose. A band 150mm wide is
adequate. Pipes are to be identified of not more than 6m interval. All colour-
coded tapes applied by the pipe manufacturers should be removed before the
systems are identified in accordance with this paragraph. Color codes shall
be based on BS 4800.
TS/Gas/S10/2
MECHANICAL WORKS
TS/Gas/S10/3
MECHANICAL WORKS
sections of the work in accordance with the requirements of BCA and
other relevant authority and to the approval of the S.O.
4.2 Additional requirements as requested by the FSSD to suit local

conditions shall also be complied with.
thick.
TS/Gas/S10/4
MECHANICAL WORKS
SECTION 11 – ELECTRICAL
1. General
1.1 This section covers the electrical equipment and services necessary
for the efficient, safe and satisfactory operation of the various systems

this Sub-Contract.
b) Local Control Boards (LCBs) complete with remote push

buttons, selector switches, indicator lights, relays, MCCBs etc.

works.

otherwise stated.

following:
a) Singapore Standard : SS 638

Wiring of Electrical Equipment of Building
b) Singapore Standard : SS 551

Code of Practice on Earthing



Regulations
TS/Gas/S11/1
MECHANICAL WORKS

Licensed Electrical Worker (LEW/LEE) and the power supply diagram
shall be endorsed by the Sub-Contractor's LEW/LEE.
3. Power Supply
3.2 Generally, cabling shall be PVC insulated cables run in galvanised

steel electrical conduits or trunking.
motors.
4. Drawings

full list of proposed materials, equipment, meters and accessories to
be used, and the method of supporting equipment and busbars.
5. Standards

copper - B.S. 158, 159, 1433 and 1977.
TS/Gas/S11/2
MECHANICAL WORKS
IEC 60947

i) Fuses - B.S. 88 / IEC 60269



and accessories
installations

TS/Gas/S11/3
MECHANICAL WORKS


c) IEC 61386-21: Conduit systems for cable management. Part

21: Particular requirements - Rigid conduit systems


and components


TS/Gas/S11/4
MECHANICAL WORKS
All electrical works, installations and materials supplied shall comply strictly to
the requirements and standard of the following local Authorities:

,Singapore
(e) The latest edition of SS 551 - Code of Practice on earthing
7.1 General
latest edition of Singapore Standard SS 638 and SS 551.

clamps.

equipment required to be earthed including earth connections
to plug sockets shall be connected by one of the following



TS/Gas/S11/5
MECHANICAL WORKS
b) The Sub-Contractor shall ensure that there is earth continuity

in all trunkings, pipes, ducts, etc. Earth links of minimum size
of 6 mm2, in the form of flexible cables, shall be used to ensure
continuity.

lettering "SAFETY ELECTRICAL EARTH DO NOT REMOVE"
stamped onto an aluminium plate.

Singapore Standard Latest SS 638. But, the minimum size of 6
mm2 green/yellow PVC insulated copper cable shall be used.
therein.

maintenance.

components together with associated starter contactor etc. mounted
on the panel inside the cubicle. Associated components shall be
grouped. Flush mounted push button and neon pilot light shall be fitted
on the front fascia of the cubicle.

connection.


Automation System.
8.7 All LCBs shall be provided with voltage free contacts and all
necessary relays (including 4 spare contacts) for remote indication
and control by the BAS.
TS/Gas/S11/6
MECHANICAL WORKS
service in an ambient temperature of up to 40oC with 100% R.H. at
Standard.
9.4 The cabinet shall be adequately ventilated and be dust, drip and
vermin proof. Unless specified otherwise, the degree of protection of
the enclosure shall be IP 44 in accordance with IEC Publication 144.
the S.O..

approval.
plated and chromed.
9.10 All cubicles and panels shall have hinged doors (concealed hinge
type). Rubber gaskets shall be provided between all doors, covers and
cubicles.
TS/Gas/S11/7
MECHANICAL WORKS
"off" device.


metering devices.


d) A separate compartment to housed the DDC sub-station and

all interfacing cabling connectors.
TS/Gas/S11/8
MECHANICAL WORKS
manufacture.
guaranteed lift of 10,000 hours continuous operation.

approved manufacture. Thermal protection and no-volt release shall
be provided for each contactors. Contactors shall satisfactorily close
at a minimum of 80% nominal volts.
approval.
TS/Gas/S11/9
MECHANICAL WORKS
rectangular type with moulded plastic escutcheons. Range of
Ammeter shall be suitable for the service intended.
9.28 All terminal blocks shall be of adequate rating and shall be of

approved make. Sufficient terminals shall be made available for easy

9.32 RCCB shall be provided in all control/starter panels below 100 Amps
and earth leakage relay (with time delay) and overcurrent relay shall
be provided in panel/board 100 Amps and above. Earth fault
protection of IDMTL type (earth leakage) and DTL type (overcurrent)
shall be provided for multiple equipment panel/board.
earth fault relays shall be incorporated into the motor starters. The
fault level setting of these earth fault relays shall be field adjustable.
TS/Gas/S11/10
MECHANICAL WORKS

a) One (1) ammeter 42" (113 mm) and one (1) voltmeter 42" (113
mm) dial with selector switches for the indication of current and
voltage between phases, and between each phase and neutral
for the mains incoming power supply, together with indicating
pilot lights.

c) One (1) Power meter measuring of line voltage, phase current.

consumption.
d) One (1) set start/stop push buttons colour coded for each
motor on each starter panel.
e) One (1) set pilot lights for the indication of "RUN-STOP-TRIP"

condition of each motor on each starter panel.
g) All necessary MCBs complete with outgoing cabling for

auxiliary and associated equipment power supplies.
9.35 The "REMOTE-OFF-LOCAL" operations at the LCB shall be

a) "REMOTE" means the starting of motor or equipment can be

started at the remote console or at the supervisory control
panel.

started at Local Control Board and it can overwrite and started
at the remote console or the supervisory control panel.
TS/Gas/S11/11
MECHANICAL WORKS

voltage grade, PVC insulated pvc sheathed cables to BS 6004 or SS
358. They shall be installed on galvanised cable tray, or in galvanised
steel conduit. Where the cables on trays are installed less than 1.2m
All cabling inside Chiller Plant Rooms for pumps, fans and other
equipments shall be PVC/PVC insulated cables except for chillers, it
shall be XLPE/PVC insulated cables. All cabling for equipments with
emergency power supply shall be Fire Resistant cables.
with BICC gland.
drawings be adequately sized to cater for the normal current rating
and starting current of the equipment without undue overheating and
stress.

approved type of cast metal boxes with pvc or brass glands and
proper cable sockets.
60331 and BS 4066.
10.8 All underground cables shall be PVC/SWA/PVC cables and

TS/Gas/S11/12
MECHANICAL WORKS
50 x 50 mm 1.219 mm (18 SWG)

50 x 75 mm 1.219 mm (18 SWG)
50 x 100 mm 1.219 mm (18 SWG)
50 x 125 mm 1.422 mm (17 SWG)
50 x 150 mm 1.422 mm (17 SWG)
50 mm 0.914 mm (20 SWG)

100 mm 0.914 mm (20 SWG)
150 mm 0.914 mm (20 SWG)
200 mm 1.219 mm (18 SWG)
250 mm 1.219 mm (18 SWG)
300 mm 1.219 mm (18 SWG)
10.13 All metal conduits shall be galvanised steel class 4, BS 4568

manufactured and tested in accordance with SS 100:1974. Minimum
possible, with runs truly horizontal or vertical or parallel to walls where
conduits run in floors. Conduits shall be securely fixed with saddles
and round head screws. Powered type of fittings will not be permitted.
From outlet to outlet there shall be not more than four (4) normal
bends or their equivalent. Inspection type conduit accessories shall be
used throughout. Conduits shall be fixed in position before cables are
drawn into them. The entire length of all cables shall be enclosed in
conduit. Junction boxes shall be used at bends and "t" junctions.
Elbows and tees will not be accepted.
TS/Gas/S11/13
MECHANICAL WORKS



floor, approved fire stop putty or approved equal material shall be
used to seal the cavity inside of the trunking and approved fire stop
compound or approved equal material to seal the air-gaps between
wall or floor and trunking.

local start/stop control panel which shall be mounted in close proximity
to the equipment for servicing purposes and marked accordingly.
Exact location of the local control panel shall be decided on site if not
indicated.
11.2 All wiring to these equipment shall be PVC/PVC insulated and

sheathed cables run in conduit/trunking. All trunking shall be of hot
dip-galvanized.
TS/Gas/S11/14
MECHANICAL WORKS
PUB.
operation in 400 V/3 Phase/50 Hz supply.
The following types shall be used (unless otherwise specified) :
Rating V/P/Hz Chiller All motors Chilled Water &

Condenser Water
Pumps
Below 0.7 kW 230/1/50 - - -
0.7 - 2.25 kW 230/1/50 - D.O.L. VSD c/w D.O.L.
2.26 - 11.0 kW 400/3/50 - VSD c/w VSD c/w solid state

solid state soft starter
soft starter
11.1 - 29.9 kW 400/3/50 - VSD c/w VSD c/w solid state

solid state soft starter
soft starter
30.0 kW &
Above 400/3/50 solid state VSD c/w VSD c/w solid state
soft state solid state soft starter
soft starter

TS/Gas/S11/15
MECHANICAL WORKS


with speed not more than 1500 rpm unless otherwise
approved.

c) They shall be continuously rated and designed to operate at

the highest standard possible power factor (min. 0.85) and

temperature rise.

brackets.


end.
h) Motor driving equipment giving rise to end thrust shall be

thrust.

hours.
i) Motors shall be tested in accordance with the requirements of

BS 2613: 1970 and BS 4999:1972.
j) Where they are installed outdoor or exposed to the weather,

TS/Gas/S11/16
MECHANICAL WORKS
wires shall be terminated with approved cable lugs, and separate
cable lugs shall be used for each individual wire.
4 class Q to B.S. 88:1952.
13.4 All wiring shall be arranged in a regular manner with bends set at
convenient shall be installed in the uprights and/or backstays,

insulating bushes being used where necessary. They shall be formed
in a neat and systematic manner.
colours to those of the respective busbars etc., to which connections
are made.

conduit/trunking.
TS/Gas/S11/17
MECHANICAL WORKS
14.1 General
a) Moulded case circuit breakers shall conform to the latest

British Standard BS 3871 part 2 or NEMA Standard AB1 and
U/L listed.


of the same make.

operating handles.

14.2 Operation
Moulded case circuit breakers shall be operated by a toggle type

handle and shall have a quick-make over-centre switching mechanism
that is mechanically trip free from the handle so that the contacts
cannot be held-closed against short circuits and abnormal currents.
Tripping due to overload or short circuit shall be clearly indicated by
the handle automatically assuming a position midway between the
manual "ON" and "OFF" positions. All latch surfaces shall be as
constructed that they open, closed and trip simultaneously.
TS/Gas/S11/18
MECHANICAL WORKS
14.3 Construction

current between 25oC and 50oC with tripping characteristics
range.
b) Breakers shall be completely enclosed in a moulded case.

Non-interchangeable trip breaker shall have their cover sealed;




'ON' and 'OFF'. To reset the trip mechanism, the handle shall
be moved to extreme 'OFF' and 'ON' position.

the same operation as specified above. They shall meet the
IEC requirements and shall be UL listed. All three phases shall
be opened simultaneously under fault conditions. The breakers
less than 3 cycle to reduce and limit peak let-through current
TS/Gas/S11/19
MECHANICAL WORKS
code:
Colour Function
White 5A fuse
Blue 15A fuse
Yellow 20 fuse
Red link
15.3 The terminal strip shall be numbered and schedule so as to identify

the particular circuits without difficulty. The same numbers and
reference letters identifying circuits and/or components of the
equipment shall be shown on the wiring diagram which is to be
supplied by the Sub-Contractor.

show the phases and to this end either coloured plastic discs screwed
to fixed components or identification by means of colour plastic
sleeving shall be employed. Plastic tape will not be permitted.
16. Labels


79.
TS/Gas/S11/20
MECHANICAL WORKS

protection as per latest SS 638.


permit easy access and to be readily replaceable, if necessary,
without dismantling of adjacent equipment.
mounting, square or rectangular type with moulded plastic
escutcheons and shall conform to the requirements.
controlled with 100 mm diameter dials (240o scale) with external zero
tropicalised.
18.4 Voltmeters shall incorporate selector switches to enable phase to

phase and phase to neutral voltage to be read. Ammeters shall have
selector switches to read all the line currents. Selector switches shall
be of approved rotary type.
TS/Gas/S11/21
MECHANICAL WORKS
provided.


Indicating lamps shall be the LED type. The lamp shall be easily removed or
replaced from the front of the panel without using extractors and shall be
adequately ventilated.
applicable and necessary shall be provided to comply with the relevant
clauses specified elsewhere in the Specification.
TS/Gas/S11/22
MECHANICAL WORKS
23.1 General

230/400 Volt A.C.

type "3" curve.

characteristic.


indicator.
23.2 Operation


TS/Gas/S11/23
MECHANICAL WORKS
23.3 Construction
Each pole of the circuit breakers shall have a factory calibrated

thermal bi-metal overcurrent element with inverse time delay
characteristic and a factory calibrated instantaneous magnetic tripping
device for short circuit condition. Ambient temperature compensation
shall be accomplished by a secondary bi-metal that shall allow the
circuit breaker to carry rated current between 25oC to 50oC with
tripping characteristics that are the same throughout this temperature
range, and that shall not cause nuisance tripping.



straight in wiring.


TS/Gas/S11/24
MECHANICAL WORKS
24. Testing
24.3 All materials and equipment supplied or erected under this Sub-
Contract which fail the tests shall be replaced or rectified at once by
the Sub-Contractor without cost to the Employer and the tests shall be
repeated.
24.4 All tests shall be conducted in the presence of and to the satisfaction
of the S.O. The Sub-Contractor shall supply all necessary instruments,
included in the Tender price.
required.


neutral conductor.

circuit, correct connections to terminals or all socket outlets
and effective bending to earth of each terminal and socket.
TS/Gas/S11/25
MECHANICAL WORKS

before and after fitting of lamps. The standard of acceptance
for electrical insulation tests shall be as recommended in the
latest Edition of the IEE Regulations for the Electrical
Equipment of the Building.

and/or erected under this Sub-contracts before and after
connecting such apparatus to the supply.

completed installation to ensure that the impedance of the
earth fault loop is such as to permit compliance with the
Contractor shall certify in writing to the S.O. that his electrical installation is in
full compliance with the Electricity Act Regulations and that it is safe for turn-
on. The certificate shall be signed by a EMA licensed electrical worker,
TS/Gas/S11/26
MECHANICAL WORKS
1. General
1.1 Unless otherwise specified, anti-vibration isolators shall be provided

for all equipment with rotating or reciprocating components to prevent
the transmission of vibration and structure borne transmission of
sound to the building structure. Vibration isolators shall be selected in
accordance with the weight distribution so as to produce reasonably
uniform deflection.
minimum noise transmission. The selection of isolators shall be
based on the lowest shaft speed of any component equipment which
may be mounted (rigidly or otherwise) on the bases to which the
vibration isolators shall be attached to.

Specification or Tender Drawings be responsible for the following :-

properly selected anti-vibration mountings. Machines should
be individually mounted rather than on a common base.
b) Provide where applicable, floating inertia bases weighted

suitably in accordance with the equipment weights.
c) Select fans with low noise, low top-speeds and outlet velocities
as is practically possible for the specific application. The
selection shall be such that the air quantity or outlet velocity is
within the range 0.95 - 1.5 times the air quantity or outlet
velocity supplied by the fan at its peak efficiency for the design
static pressure.
d) Select motors with low bearing noise and of adequate

lubrication and motor contactors free of vibration and rattling.
e) Install smooth bends and airfoil turning vanes in all ventilation

duct work.
TS/Gas/S12/1
MECHANICAL WORKS

g) Select all air handling system accessories with low radiated

and discharged sound power levels.
1.4 The noise level in all air conditioned and mechanical ventilated areas
shall not exceed the recommended level. The readings shall be taken
with all air conditioning equipment operational at full capacity. It shall
be the Sub-Contractor's responsibility to carry out all noise
measurements and ensure that all air-handling units and other
equipments are selected and installed to meet the design level.
Where necessary, noise attenuators special equipment covers and
vibration isolators shall be provided.
1.5 The Sub-Contractor is required to ensure that the above criteria shall
be fully complied. He would be required to install noise attenuation
material and devices to ensure that the criteria is fully met. The cost
for the above compliance shall be included in the Tender price and
any deviation from this Section shall be made known to the S.O.
1.6 The Sub-Contractor shall supply and install isolation and support for
the following :
a) Acoustic seals for duct work, pipe work penetrating through

wall.
b) Facilities to allow expansion and contraction for vertical pipe

run.
TS/Gas/S12/2
MECHANICAL WORKS
2.1 The requirement of spring isolator for duct work shall be applicable
only to the first three rod hangers from the fan/AHU equipment.
neoprene cup manufactured with a grommet to prevent short circuiting
of the hanger rod. The cup shall contain a steel washer designed to
properly distribute the load on the neoprene and prevent its extrusion.
Spring diameters and hanger box lower hole sizes shall be large
enough to permit the hanger rod to swing through a 30 arc before
contacting the hole and short circuiting the spring. Springs shall have
a minimum additional travel to solid equal to 50% of the rated
deflection. Spring deflection shall be a minimum of 20 mm.
When a duct or pipe penetrate a building structure, the space in between

shall be completely sealed with one layer of 25 mm thick and 120 kg/m 3
fibreglass in 22 SWG sheet metal sleeve and caulked from both sides with
non-setting bitumen compound.
4.1 Pipe spring in the main lines shall be pre-compressed to the rated
deflection so as to keep the piping at a fixed elevation during
installation. The hangers shall be designed with a release mechanism
to force the spring after the installation is completed and the hanger is
subjected to its full load.
4.2 Pipe work connected to vibration generating equipment shall be

supported by vibration isolated hangers.
4.3 Inherently rigid plants connections, such as condenser piping between

the cooling tower and the chillers, shall be resiliently supported with
the same efficiency mechanical isolation as the major plant to which it
is connected.
4.4 Chilled water piping within the plant room and the risers shall be
provided with vibration isolated supports.
TS/Gas/S12/3
MECHANICAL WORKS
4.5 For all other mechanical equipment, the first three hangers/supports
from the equipment shall be spring in series with neoprene types as
specified.
4.6 All other supports/hangers beyond the first three pipe hangers
specified in the schedule shall incorporate an isolation medium of 8
mm thickness such as waffle pattern neoprene, felt or high density
fibreglass between pipe and hanger/support or between
hanger/support and wall. This shall apply to all piping installed,
whether in horizontal runs or vertical pipe risers, unless otherwise
allowed by the S.O.
5.1 Spring type isolators shall be free standing and laterally stable without
any housing and complete with 1/4" neoprene acoustical friction pads
between the baseplate and the support. All mountings shall have
levelling bolts that must be rigidly bolted to the equipment. Spring
diameter shall be not less than 0.8 of the compressed height of the
spring at rated load. Springs shall have a minimum additional travel to
solid equal to 50% of the rated deflection.
building structure through the use of steel coil spring/neoprene
assemblies. Ribbed neoprene pads shall be incorporated under the
base plate of the springs and shall be at least 10 mm thick.
6. Spring Hangers
Vibration hangers shall contain a steel spring and 0.3" deflection neoprene
element in series and encased in a welded bracket. Spring diameter and
hanger box lower hole sizes shall be large enough to permit the hanger rod to
sw
spring. Springs shall have a minimum additional travel to solid equal to 50%
of the rated deflection.
TS/Gas/S12/4
MECHANICAL WORKS
7.1 The Sub-Contractor shall install approved attenuators (silencers)

where shown in the Drawings, or as required if not shown, to achieve
the performance as specified.
Sub-Contractor and that the noise levels exceed the specified levels,
the Sub-Contractor shall be required to rectify the defect and to
replace the sound attenuators if necessary at his own costs, to
achieve the specified requirements.
7.3 The Sub-Contractor is to note that all equipment offered shall comply
with the N.C. levels recommended by the Authorities or as stated in
the Specification whichever is lower. The Sub-Contractor shall be
required to rectify without any additional cost to the University all
equipment that does not comply with the N.C. levels recommended.
7.4 Certified test data on dynamic insertion loss and self-generated noise
with an airflow of at least 7.5 m/sec face velocity, pressure drop and a
complete set of noise attenuators selected and offered shall be
furnished at the time of Tender. Attenuators without any verifiable
selection data shall not be accepted.
7.5 Attenuators supplied shall be designed, manufactured and supplied by

a proprietary manufacturer who has advertised and certifiable
performance data provided to allow verification and audit checking of
the selection of proposed silencers by the S.O.. The catalogue data
shall include not less than the following :
a) Insertion loss for at least 125, 250, 500, 1000, 2000, 4000 and
8000 Hz
TS/Gas/S12/5
MECHANICAL WORKS
7.6 The attenuator cases shall be constructed with 1.2 mm minimum hot
dipped galvanised steel duct sections with air channels. Splitters shall
be streamlined shape with respect to air flow and shall comprise an
absorbent pad of heavy density mineral wool of fibre glass covered in
fibre glass scrim and faced with perforated zincanneal, having a free
area appropriate to the application. Where applicable, this lining shall
also cover the internal areas of the casing between the splitters.
Casing shall have steel angles and flanges and reinforcing to the
standards set out for the duct work. Steel angles, and any areas of
the casings where the galvanising has been damaged, shall be
cleaned and finished with cold galvanising compound before leaving
the manufacturer's premises.
7.7 Acoustic attenuation casing shall be designed and built to limit

radiated noise so that space noise criteria are not exceeded.
7.8 Attenuators installed in high pressure duct work shall be pressure

tested with the rest of the duct system. All leaks shall be repaired.
manufacturer's name, type number, direction of air flow and
identification.
TS/Gas/S12/6
MECHANICAL WORKS
1. Chiller Set Vertically restrained spring Factory fabricated

isolator with noise stop pad structural steel base
laterally stable steep spring integral mounting of fan,
with top and bottom load motor and casing panel
plate and levelling bolt

Fans
4. Centrifugal water - ditto - Inertia base constructed of

Pump welded steel channel to
receive concrete pour
5. Cooling Towers Double ribbed neoprene pad -
6 Sprinkler / wet Riser Free standing, un-housed Inertia base constructed of

Pump laterally stable steep spring welded steel channel to
with top and bottom load receive concrete pour
plate and levelling bolt
TS/Gas/S12/7
MECHANICAL WORKS
9.1 Unless specified otherwise, spring type isolator shall be unhoused,

free standing, laterally stable with levelling bolts rigidly bolted to inertia
compressed height and shall not be less than 0.8 of compressed
height at rated load, and horizontal spring stiffness shall be
approximately equal to vertical stiffness.
spring.
9.3 All springs shall be mounted with adequate clearance from brackets
and shall be clearly in view of critical inspection.
maintained around the restraining bolts and between the housing and
spring so as not to interfere with spring action. Limit stops shall be out
of contact during normal operations.
9.5 All spring type (whether free or restrained type) mounts used outdoors
or exposed to weather or wet conditions shall be hot dipped
galvanised and epoxy coated.
ribbed or waffle pattern pads (min. 8 mm thickness) as described
below.
minimum spring deflections as specified without being compressed
solid, or bridged out, or exceeding the Manufacturer's maximum rated
loads under any operating condition. In the selection of the springs
the Sub-Contractor shall also take into account the weight distribution
of the equipment under normal operating conditions, weight of
unsupported pipes/ducts, and any large dynamic forces due to fluid
movement, torque reaction and starting/stopping. The Sub-Contractor
shall show, on the shop drawings submitted, the make and model
number of the isolators selected and their individual calculated loads.
TS/Gas/S12/8
MECHANICAL WORKS
10. Inertia Blocks
10.1 To be installed where specified. The mechanical equipment shall be

bolted directly on to the integral concrete inertia blocks. All concrete
referred to in this Specification should have a density of at least 140-
150 lbs/cu. ft. (2240-2400 kg/cu. m).
10.2 In general, the length and width of the inertia block should be at least
50% greater than the length and width of the supported equipment,
except where otherwise specified.
10.3 The weight of the inertia block, generally determined by thickness,

shall be as specified.
10.4 The base shall consist of a concrete slab cast into a welded steel base
frame assembly. Frames shall be welded steel channels, of minimum
(150 mm) thickness or the same thickness as the inertia block and
shall be reinforced with welded-in (12 mm) steel reinforcing rods or
angles at 6" (150 mm) centres each way. Anchor bolts shall be fixed
into position, and housed in steel bolt sleeve to allow minor bolt
location adjustments or alternatively, pocket shall be cast into inertia
block to permit the later insertion of anchor bolts.

welded directly to channel frames, and suitably located to
accommodate the height of the deflected springs and inertia block
clearance with plinth.
10.6 There shall be adequate clearance (min. 20 mm) all round the springs
to assure that there is no contact between any spring and any part of
the mounted assembly for any possible alignment or position of the
installed inertia block. The clearance between inertia block and
floor/plinth shall be at least 75 mm.
reinforcement and concrete required for the inertia blocks and shall
co-ordinate his installation with the Sub-Contractor. All installation
work concerning these items are included in this Sub-Contract.
TS/Gas/S12/9
MECHANICAL WORKS
11.1 Minimum 40 mm thick neoprene pads shall be installed where

specified.

11.3 Where two or more layers of neoprene pads are used, individual
layers shall be separated by 20 SWG thick steel shims.
12.1 Resilient hangers are to be used for resilient suspension of pumping

mains pipes.
neoprene type, and for deflections less than 12 mm used neoprene in
shear type hangers.
12.3 During installation, inspection shall be made to ensure that no hangers

are compressed solid or bridged out, and that the stipulated minimum
deflections are achieved.
13. NR Curve Level
The Table below shows the noise level criteria for the various areas. These
levels shall be measured with the room equipped with equipment and be
ready to be used. The equipment in the room shall be in the non-operating
mode.
For the auditorium, conference rooms, lecture theatres and other noise
sensitive rooms the volume control dampers for each diffuser shall be located
along the run-out ducts and not at the diffuser plenums.
TS/Gas/S12/10
MECHANICAL WORKS

NR Curve App. DB(A)
Auditorium 30 35
Car parks - 65
Laboratories 45 50
TS/Gas/S12/11
MECHANICAL WORKS
SECTION 13 – INTERFACE FOR BUILDING AUTOMATION SYSTEM
1. General
1.1 This section sets out the requirements for remote control and monitoring
of all mechanical systems by the Building Automation System (BAS).
1.2 The provisions specified herein to be made by the Sub-Contractor shall

be in addition to any provisions for localised control and monitoring
devices and systems specified elsewhere in the Specification. The
intention is to achieve comprehensive control and monitoring of all
mechanical and electrical systems by integrating all localised control and
monitoring systems with the BAS. Towards this end, the Sub-Contractor
shall cooperate and co-ordinate with the BAS contractor in such matters
as the installation of auxiliary devices, wiring identification and testing,
uniformity in control circuitry and the provision of all necessary data for
programming.
1.3 The Sub-Contractor shall be responsible for all works and materials
necessary for the provisions of auxiliary devices as specified herein,
including the provisions of terminal blocks at each starter panel, switch-
board section and elsewhere as specified, the installation of sensors,
and wiring from such auxiliary devices and sensors to the terminal
blocks.
1.4 The Sub-Contractor shall provide a separate section or compartment in

each starter panel or switchboard to house the terminal blocks
mentioned in the above paragraph. The compartment should be front
access and located at the bottom of the panel. For floor-standing
panels, the compartment shall be no less than 300mm above the floor,
with the section below it reserved for keeping of spares and tools. A
separate vertical cable-way shall be allowed for at one end of the entire
panel for cabling. A minimum of 25% spare terminal block shall be
allowed for additional interfacing requirements. The Sub-Contractor
shall also connect the designated BAS monitoring and control points to
the terminal blocks using approved control cables. All terminations shall
be clearly labelled. The BAS connecting panel shall be located at the
pump room.
1.5 The Sub-Contractor shall ensure that all BAS control and monitoring
devices installed by them are correctly terminated in the terminal blocks.
TS/Gas/S13/1
MECHANICAL WORKS
1.6 The Sub-Contractor shall be responsible for and shall connect all
temporary connections across the terminal blocks mentioned above and
elsewhere if these connection are necessary for testing, commissioning
and temporary operation of any of the equipment installed by them. The
Sub-Contractor shall liaise with the BAS contractor to phase in the
functions of the BAS progressively.
2. Auxiliary Devices
Auxiliary devices shall be provided by the Sub-Contractor in the control circuitry

or elsewhere for the purpose of remote control and monitoring of the equipment
by BAS. The auxiliary devices shall be of the following:
2.1 Digital Input (DI)
Digital input in the form of voltage free, normally open contacts and
switches shall be provided by the Sub-Contractor for monitoring of
equipment by BAS. Where the contact cannot return to its normal
position after the alarm state has been restored to normal, the contractor
shall provide for a manual reset facility to manually reset the contact to
its normal position. Also, if transducers are required to drive these
contacts and switches, the Sub-Contractor shall be responsible for the
provision of these transducers. All DIs must be electrically isolated from
power circuits.
2.2 Start/Stop Circuit
The Sub-Contractor shall provide start/stop circuits in the control circuitry

of equipment for remote start/stop by BAS.
2.3 Analog Input (AI)
Analog Input (AI) in the form of transducers and sensors shall be

provided and installed by the Sub-Contractor. The Sub-Contractor shall
be responsible for all work and material involved in the installation of
these AI devices, including the installation of wells in pipes and wiring up
to the BAS interfacing panels.
2.4 Current Transformer and Potential Transformer
Current and potential transformer of rating 0-5A and 230V:1V

respectively shall be provided by the Sub-Contractor for monitoring the
analogue value of current, voltage and power consumption. The
transducers (including wiring and conduits) to convert output of current
and potential transformer to BAS compatible signals shall be provided
and be installed by the Sub-Contractor up to the BAS interfacing panels.
TS/Gas/S13/2
MECHANICAL WORKS
3. Wiring
3.1 All wiring for BAS interfacing shall conform to the specification herein:
Digital Input (DI) : 0.6mm diameter, single twisted

Analogue Input (AI) : 0.9mm diameter, duo-twisted pair,

screen telephone cable.
Digital Output (DO) : 1mm sq PVC cables.
Electrical Input (EI) : 0.9mm diameter, single twisted

pair, screen telephone cable
3.2 All cable screens for DI, AI & EI shall be left floating at the equipment
(auxiliary contacts, sensors etc) and shall be terminated in a common
screen terminal on the terminal block. The screens shall not be earthed.
3.3 All line valves shall come with limit switch, to connected to BAS.
4. BAS Points Schedule

requirements. The Sub-Contractor shall allow cost in his Tender for
any further points/sensors/instruments to enable the system to
operate in its intended purpose of a complete optimum operating
system.

4.3 The Sub-contractor shall read the Specifications and Drawings

TS/Gas/S13/3
MECHANICAL WORKS
SECTION 14 – TESTING AND COMMISSIONING FOR PIPED SERVICES

INSTALLATION
1. General
1.1 This section sets out the requirements for testing and commissioning for
piped services installation.
1.2 The activities during construction shall include but not limited to:
a) Pressure-test, for leakage in pipelines only
b) Check valve tightness and correct valve zoning
c) Test relief valve operation
d) Pressure-test, for leakage in complete installation
e) Check for satisfactory mechanical operation and non-

interchangeability of each terminal unit by means of test probes.
f) Check for cross connections (sometimes referred to as

'anti-confusion test' or 'continuity test.")
g) Check flow rate and pressure at each terminal unit
h) Check total flow rate and delivery pressure
i) Check satisfactory operation of manifold changeover valves
j) Check satisfactory operation of laboratory gases and vacuum

pumps and all manifolds (including emergency supply panels).
k) Check performance of alarm signalling system
l) Purge the completed installation with compressed air and check

the internal cleanliness of the system.
m) Purge the completed installation with the working gas.
TS/Gas/S14/1
MECHANICAL WORKS
1.3 All tests and checks shall be witnessed by the S.O.
1.4 Procedures (a), (b) and (c) above will normally be completed in
sequence for one gas at a time. After completion of procedure (d)
(separately for each gas) and (e), arrangements shall be made for tests
of (f) and (g) to be completed for the whole installation at one session.
The remainder of the procedures shall then be completed, in the order
given, for each gas.
1.5 Activities after completion of Sub-Contractor's works:
a) Check the identity of the gas supplied at each terminal unit
b) Check the quality and purity of gas at each terminal unit
1.6 All tests after completion of the installation will be carried out by the Sub-
Contractor in the presence of the S.O. In addition to any certificates
required from the Sub-Contractor, a certificate in the prescribed form
(attached) should be completed before the system is taken into use.
TS/Gas/S14/2
MECHANICAL WORKS
SCHEDULE ........................... OF ......................... SCHEDULES
CERTIFICATE OF TEST OF IDENTITY AND SUITABILITY OF GAS AT EACH

TERMINAL UNIT OF PIPED LABORATORY GASES AND VACUUM SYSTEM
PIPED .................................................. SUPPLY SYSTEM
NAME OF CONTRACTOR'S REPRESENTATIVE .......................................
NAME OF S.O.’s REPRESENTATIVE ..............................................
NAME OF WITNESS (IF ANY) .......................................................................
Room Designation Signature of Signature of Date

Drawing and/or Contractor's S.O.’s
Number Room No Representative Representative
Test
________ _____________ _____________ ____________ ________
________ _____________ _____________ ____________ ________
________ _____________ _____________ ____________ ________
---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Pressure testing for leakage is carried out in two stages for the laboratory gas system
and in three stages for the vacuum system. The first pressure tests cover the complete
pipe lines and isolating valves only. The other pressure tests cover the whole
installation, including terminal and theatre fittings.
Vacuum installations should be thoroughly dried out, usually by the operation of the
vacuum pumps, before final vacuum testing is undertaken.
Each valve tightness test shall be held for not less than 15 minutes.
During pressure tests the pressure in the systems will vary with the temperature
according to the gas law. It should be noted that assessment temperatures are to be
based on the mean temperature of the gas the time observations are made. The
pressure will rise or fall by 1/273 per °C change in temperature.
If the relief valves cannot be set to protect the installation during the pressure test they
shall either be temporarily replaced by others which can withstand the test pressure or
be blanked off.
TS/Gas/S14/3
MECHANICAL WORKS
2. Pressure test for leakage in pipe lines
The completed pipe lines with all ends sealed (but terminal units not fitted), all
valves on the distribution system open, and with control panel and fittings
disconnected, shall be tested to twice the working pressure or a gauge pressure
of 10.5 bar whichever is the greater. This pressure shall be held for 24 hours
and no leak shall occur during this period.
3. Test for leakage on vacuum system
The completed pipe lines with all ends sealed (but terminal units not fitted), all
valves on the distribution system open, and control panels and theatre fittings
disconnected shall be tested at a gauge pressure of 6.9 bar. This pressure
should be held for 24 hours and no leak shall occur during this period.
4. Valve Tightness Tests
On completion of the pressure test on the pipe line all isolating valve shall be
tested for 15 mins at a gauge pressure of 6.9 bar for tightness by closing them
in sequence and releasing the pressure on the downstream side. No leak shall
occur during these valve tests.
5. Relief Valve Test
On completion of the isolating valve tightness tests the pressure on the

laboratory gas and vacuum systems shall be reduced for the purpose of testing
the safety valves. The service safety valve shall be fitted and this shall be
tested to ensure that it discharges safely at 125% of the working pressure.
6. Test for leakage on Completed Installation - Laboratory Gases
With all terminal units and laboratory fittings connected the completed
installations shall be tested at the working pressure which shall be held for 24
hours. No leak shall occur during this period but a loss of up to 0.15 bar could
be accepted on a pipeline having more than 50 terminal units.
TS/Gas/S14/4
MECHANICAL WORKS
7. Test for leakage on Completed Installation - Vacuum System
With all terminal units and laboratory fittings connected the whole installation
should be tested at a gauge pressure of 0.7 bar and shall be held for 24 hours.
No leak shall occur during this period but a loss of up to 0.15 bar could be
accepted on a pipeline having more than 50 terminal units.
After the initial drying out of the pipeline by the operating of the vacuum plant,
the completed vacuum system shall then be tested. The system shall be
exhausted to a vacuum of 210mm Hg absolute and, after the initial drying-out of
the pipeline, the pressure shall not increase by more than 100mm Hg in one
hour. This test pressure shall be held for 24 hours. A pressure rise in excess of
10mm Hg per hour normally indicates the need for remedial work and further
tests.
The test pressure during the vacuum test may vary from its original setting as a
result of the variation in the ambient temperature. It should be noted that
assessments must be based on the mean temperature of the pipeline at the
time the observations are made. The pressure will rise or fall by 1/273 pet °C
change in temperature.
8. Test for Leakage on Completed Installation - AGSS
The complete pipe lines with all ends sealed (but outlets not fitted), all valve on
the distribution system open and control panels disconnected should be tested
at a gauge pressure of 6.9 bar. This pressure should be held for 24 hours and
no leak should occur during this period.
9. Tests for proving correct connections to all the systems
Each system (oxygen and vacuum) shall be tested in turn, preferably at the
same session. The tests shall not ordinarily be embarked upon until all works
on all the installations are completed.
Laboratory gases shall not normally be used for these tests because of the risks
arising from their discharge. A compressed air plant may be used to supply the
test gas but air from ordinary industrial lubricated compressors should not be
used. If no compressed air plant are available the air supply shall be obtained
from test cylinders of laboratory quality provided by the Sub-Contractor at his
own cost.
The system under test shall be connected at the normal working pressure. The
other systems shall be isolated at their sources of supply but all other isolating
valves on all systems shall be OPEN.
TS/Gas/S14/5
MECHANICAL WORKS
The S.O. shall check in every room to ensure that the test gas is delivered from
every terminal unit bearing the name of the 'gas' and is not delivered from any
other terminal unit.
The tests can be made with bobbin type flow-meters or plug-in type flow
metering equipment designed to pass the quantities specified in paragraph 34 to
48 of HTM 02-01(UK) or approved equivalent standard with diversity as
indicated therein. Calibrated jets conforming to BS720 or approved equivalent
standard shall form the basis of the test equipment for gas installations. The jet
metering devices shall be stamped to show:
a) jet size
b) air equivalent of 'laboratory gas' for which it is calibrated
c) rate of flow and pressure for which it is calibrated
The total flow tests on oxygen and vacuum mixture installations shall not be
conducted with these gases but with laboratory quality compressed air at a
gauge pressure of 4.1 bar. The metering devices for these tests shall be
marked 'air equivalent of laboratory gases.' Test jet units for general laboratory
gases, shall be calibrated to pass 40 litres, 20 litres and 15 litres per minute at a
supply gauge pressure of 6.9 bar. Units for compressed air shall be calibrated
to pass 250 bar, 50 litres/ minute for general terminal units and 65 litres/minute
for dental department terminal units, the last two at gauge pressure of 3.9 bar.
Units for vacuum shall have flowmeters suitable for passing up to 40
litres/minute of free air. The minimum acceptable pressure on the test
instrument gauge during these tests is given below.
TS/Gas/S14/6
MECHANICAL WORKS
10. Acceptable pressure on flowrate/delivery pressure tests for laboratory gases

and vacuum.
The minimum acceptable pressure on the test instrument gauge during these
tests is as follows:
Oxygen
a) Flow rate litres/minutes at STP : 40/20/15

b) Minimum pressure at back of terminal unit : 3.9 bar
c) Minimum acceptable pressure on gauge of test unit : 3.8 bar
Vacuum
a) Flow rate litres/minutes at STP : 40/20

b) Minimum pressure at back of terminal unit : 400mm Hg
c) Minimum acceptable pressure on gauge of test unit : 300mm Hg
11. Test of manifold change over valve
The action of the manifold change-over valve can be tested by connecting a

smaller cylinder of the work gas or of laboratory quality compressed air on each
side of the manifold and discharging it to a carefully sited leak whilst the
operation of the pressure gauges and change-over valve is checked. Each half
of the manifold shall be tested in this manner. This test could be carried out on
every automatic manifold during the period when the flow rate tests are in
progress. Pressure regulating valves effect the change-over of the manifold
supply in these cases and will be checked as below.
TS/Gas/S14/7
MECHANICAL WORKS
12. Plant Operation Tests
The following checks shall be carried out before the alarm system is tested.
a) For manifold installations check operation of all magnetic valves. Check

operation of heater where fitted. Check effectiveness of change-over to
reserve manifold.
b) Check that each item of plant is capable of operating continuously at its

maximum continuous rating.
c) Check accuracy of all pressure gauges and thermometers.
d) Check insulation resistance and effectiveness of earthing of all electrical

items.
13. Signalling System Test
This test shall be carried out simultaneously with the test of the manifold
change-over valve.
14. Purging Laboratory Gas Installations
Each system shall be purged with the working gas on completion of other tests
on the installations.
TS/Gas/S14/8
MECHANICAL WORKS
15. Gas Identification, Quality And Purity Check
A rough indication of gas identity can be obtained by the use of an oxygen

analyser. Thus readings of about 0%, 100% imply respectively nitrous oxide
and oxygen. It must be realised however that these are not absolute
identifications, as other gases involved are not identified nor are contaminants.
Such instruments shall be kept in good working condition and be regularly
checked by the makers or by a reputable laboratory.
When any compressed air supply is first commissioned, the quality and freedom
from contamination shall be demonstrated to the satisfaction of the S.O. by the
Sub-Contractor.
If the S.O. has satisfied himself that the air intake is in a suitable position to take
in uncontaminated air and that the final air filter in the plantroom complies with
the requirements of paragraph 152 of HTM 02-01(UK) or approved equivalent
and is properly installed it may be assumed that the air will continue to be
sufficiently free from oil and particulate matter after the initial tests. The
concentration of CO and CO2, shall not exceed the limits laid down in paragraph
12 of HTM 02-01(UK) or approved equivalent.
It will normally be satisfactory to obtain assurance of the quality and purity of the
gas supplied at each terminal unit by the result of tests for contaminants
obtained from a terminal unit, or terminal units, the location of which will assure
that the gas sample(s) has traversed the maximum length of the pipework being
tested and/or, when necessary, comparing the sample with the quality and
purity of the gas supply at the source on the premises. The purity standards
applicable to laboratory gases include:
a) The British Pharmacopoeie or approved equivalent standard.
b) British Standard 4275 - Recommendations for the Selection Use and

Maintenance of Respiratory Equipment or approved equivalent
standard.
The identity of the gas shall be tested at every terminal unit.
TS/Gas/S14/9
MECHANICAL WORKS
1. General

warranty for fire resistant system as specified in the drawing

Scheme (PLS).

standard:
a) BS 476: Part 20 1987 Fire tests on building materials and

b) BS 476: Part 24 1987 Fire tests on building materials and

ventilation ducts



f) EN 13501-1 EN 13501-1+A1 Fire classification of



TS/M/S52/1
MECHANICAL WORKS

Construction.




offered.


2. Materials
2.1. System

TS/M/S52/2
MECHANICAL WORKS



exceed 1.5m2.





rated sealant.

TS/M/S52/3
MECHANICAL WORKS

strength.

Code.

as minimum:
Alkalinity pH 12
310: 1993) 4.94N/mm2 (transverse)
(40oC) C518:1991)
Nominal moisture
6%
movement at EMC
(Clause 5.4, 5.4.1 & 5.4.2)

TS/M/S52/4
MECHANICAL WORKS

instructions.




TS/M/S52/5
MECHANICAL WORKS
3. Installation




TS/M/S52/6
VALVE BOX
RECEIVER TANK
RECEIVER TANK
VACUUM PUMPS
AIR COMPRESSORS
GAS SOLENOID VALVES

VACUUM PUMP SYSTEM
GAS DETECTOR PANELS
GAS MONIOTRING PANEL

COMPRESSED AIR SYSTEM
GAS CYLINDER MANIFOLDS
GAS LEAKAGE DETECTORS

LABORATORY GAS SYSTEM
LABORATORY GAS SUPPLY & DETECTION SYSTEM

SYSTEM APPARATUS OR
To refer to tender drawings QUANTITY
NOTE: ALL "ON/OFF", "LOCAL/ REMOTE" ARE 2 HARDWARE POINTS

X
X START/STOP COMMAND
D/O
X
X
ON/OFF COMMAND
X
X
DDC CONTROL
A/O

INDICATION-STATUS
INDICATION-FAULT/TRIP
MIMIC
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
ON/OFF STATUS
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
TRIP/FAULT
X
X
FILTER ALARM
X
SYSTEM COMMON ALARM
CHANGE FILTER CARTRIDGE
FLOW
DIGITAL INPUT
X
X
X
HIGH LEVEL ALARM

X
X
X
X
X
LOW LEVEL ALARM

X
X

TEMPERATURE
RELATIVE HUMIDITY
X
X
X
X
X
X
PRESSURE SUPPLY
X
LOW PRESSURE (DUTY BANK)

BAS POINT SCHEDULE
LOW PRESSURE (STANDBY BANK)

X
X
X
X
FLOW
X
POWER FACTOR
X
CURRENT
X
VOLTAGE
X
KILOWATT
ANALOG INDICATION
KILOWATT-HOUR
BTU-HEAT LOAD
TREND LOGGING
X
X
X
X
ENERGY TOTALISATION
TIME PROGRAM
X
X
X

X
X
X
DUTY CYCLING
ANALOG LIMIT ALARM
X
X
X
X

SOFTWARE PROGRAM
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
GRAPHICS
WATER CONSUMPTION
X
MECHANICAL WORKS
Contents Page
AV Schedule of Technical Data STD/AV/1 - 6
Particular Specification for Audio and Visual Works

Section 1 : Particular Specification PS/AV/S1/1- 19
Section 2 : Audio System PS/AV/S2/1- 3
Section 3 : Visual System PS/AV/S3/1- 3
Section 4 : Video Conference System PS/AV/S4/1- 3
Section 5 : Digital Signage System PS/AV/S5/1- 2
Section 6 : Audio Equipment PS/AV/S6/1- 14
Section 7 : Video Equipment PS/AV/S7/1- 34
Section 8 : Other Equipment PS/AV/S8/1- 12
Section 9 : Digital Signage Equipment PS/AV/S9/1- 5
Section 10 : Not In Used -
Section 11 : UPS PS/AV/S11/1- 4
Section 12 : Surge Protection Device PS/AV/S12/1- 3
Section 13 : Time Switches PS/AV/S13/1

3 - S9North&S12 - Technical Specification

Uploaded by

Document Information

Original Description:

Original Title

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

3 - S9North&S12 - Technical Specification

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

Contents Page

ACMV Schedule of Technical Data STD/ACMV/1-36

Particular Specification for Air-Conditioning and Mechanical Ventilation Works

Section 42 : Air-Cooled Multi-Split VRV Units TS/M/S42/1 – 11

Section 54 : Water Storage Tanks TS/M/S54/1 – 12

BAS and IBMS Point Schedule

SCHEDULE OF TECHNICAL DATA FOR AIR-CONDITIONING AND MECHANICAL

2. Tenderers are reminded that notwithstanding whatever is submitted in this Schedule,

1. Air Handling Units

B. Cooling Coil Detail

Air On-Coil Temp, DB/WB (C) DB WB DB WB DB WB

Fan Motor and Starter Detail

2. Fan Coil Units (FCUs)

Type (wall / floor / ceiling mounted)

Manufacturer & Country of Origin

Width x Depth x Height (mm x mm x mm)

Operating Weight (kg)

Total Supply Air (CMH)

Fresh Air (CMH)

Grand Total Heat (KW)

Total Sensible Heat (KW)

Total Static Pressure (Pa)

Fan Motor, KW/RPM KW rpm KW rpm KW rpm

Chilled Water Temp, IN/OUT ( C) IN OUT IN OUT IN OUT

Chilled Water Flow (l/sec)

COOLING COIL Tube O.D. (mm or in)

Face Area (m2)

Face Velocity (m/sec)

No. of fins (per 10 mm)

AIR FILTER Make

3-Speed Controller (Yes or No)

Room Thermostat (Yes or No)

Type (axial etc.)

Size (mm DIA or mm x mm)

Fan Weight (kg)

Air Flow (CMH)

Total Static Pressure (Pa)

Fan Motor (KW)

Fan Speed (Rpm)

Fan Efficiency (%)

4. Air-Cooled Split Units

5. Variable Refrigerant Volume Units

6. Automatic Control System

Description Brand/Model Material Accuracy

Static Pressure Sensor

Differential Pressure Switch

Off Coil Averaging Temperature

Electro-Mech Valve Actuator

Room Thermostat (Electric /

Differential Pressure Sensor for Air

Level Control System

b) AC Variable Speed Drive

Country of Origin ..............................................................

Name of Local Agent ..............................................................

Power Requirement (kW) ..............................................................

Speed Control Range ..............................................................

Efficiency at 75% Load (%) ..............................................................

Efficiency at 100% Load (%) ..............................................................

Control Principle ..............................................................

Rated Voltage (V) ..............................................................

Speed Input Signal ..............................................................

Speed Output Signal ..............................................................